AI Tipiṭaka Translations

Hide English Translation

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Vinayapiṭake

Vinayapiṭaka

Sāratthadīpanī-ṭīkā (tatiyo bhāgo)

Sāratthadīpanī-ṭīkā (Third Volume)

5. Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ

5. Pācittiya Section

1. Musāvādavaggo

1. Musāvāda Vagga

1. Musāvādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Musāvāda Sikkhāpada Description

1.Musāvādavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpadekhuddakānanti ettha‘‘khuddaka-saddo bahu-saddapariyāyo. Bahubhāvato imāni khuddakāni nāma jātānī’’ti vadanti.Tatthāti tesu navasu vaggesu, tesu vā khuddakesu. Kāraṇena kāraṇantarapaṭicchādanameva vibhāvetuṃ‘‘rūpaṃ anicca’’ntiādimāha. Rūpaṃ aniccanti paṭijānitvā tattha kāraṇaṃ vadanto‘‘jānitabbato’’ti āha. ‘‘Yadi evaṃ nibbānassapi aniccatā āpajjatī’’ti parena vutto taṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicchādetuṃ puna‘‘jātidhammato’’ti aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ vadati.

1. In the first sikkhāpada of the Musāvāda Vagga, khuddakānanti, here the word "khuddaka" is a synonym for many. They say, "Because of being many, these became known as khuddaka." Tatthati, in those nine vaggas, or in those khuddakas. To clarify the covering of one cause with another, he said ‘‘rūpaṃ anicca’’nti, beginning with this. Having affirmed that form (rūpa) is impermanent (anicca), he says ‘‘jānitabbato’’ti, stating the reason there. When the other person says, "If so, impermanence would also apply to nibbāna," he again states another reason, ‘‘jātidhammato’’ti, to reject that reason.

sampajāna musā bhāsatīti anunāsikalopena niddesoti āha‘‘jānanto musā bhāsatī’’ti.

sampajāna musā bhāsatīti, he says, "Knowing, he speaks falsely," indicating that it is a designation with the elision of the nasal consonant.

2.Jānitvā jānantassa ca musā bhaṇaneti pubbabhāgepi jānitvā vacanakkhaṇepi jānantassa musā bhaṇane. Bhaṇanañca nāma idha abhūtassa vā bhūtataṃ bhūtassa vā abhūtataṃ katvā kāyena vā vācāya vā viññāpanapayogo.Sampajānamusāvādeti ca nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ, tasmā yo sampajāna musā vadati, tassa taṃnimittaṃ taṃhetu tappaccayā pācittiyaṃ hotīti evamettha aññesu ca īdisesu attho veditabbo.

2.Jānitvā jānantassa ca musā bhaṇaneti, in the prior part, having known, and in the moment of speaking, speaking falsely knowing. And speaking here means making what is untrue seem true, or what is true seem untrue, through bodily or verbal expression. Sampajānamusāvādeti is a locative absolute in the sense of a cause. Therefore, one who knowingly speaks falsely incurs a pācittiya due to that cause, that reason, that condition; thus, the meaning should be understood here and in other similar instances.

3.Visaṃvādenti etenātivisaṃvādanaṃ,vañcanādhippāyavasappavattaṃ cittaṃ. Tenāha‘‘visaṃvādanacittaṃ purato katvā vadantassā’’ti. Vadati etāyātivācā,vacanasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā. Tenāha‘‘micchāvācā…pe… cetanā’’ti.Pabhedagatā vācāti anekabhedabhinnā.Evaṃ paṭhamapadena suddhacetanā…pe… kathitāti veditabbāti iminā imaṃ dīpeti – suddhacetanā vā suddhasaddo vā suddhaviññatti vā musāvādo nāma na hoti, viññattiyā saddena ca sahitā taṃsamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādoti.Cakkhuvasena aggahitārammaṇanti cakkhusannissitena viññāṇena aggahitamārammaṇaṃ. Ghānādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ indriyānaṃ sampattavisayaggāhakattā vuttaṃ‘‘tīhi indriyehi ekābaddhaṃ viya katvā’’ti. ‘‘Dhanunā vijjhatī’’tiādīsu viya ‘‘cakkhunā diṭṭha’’nti ayaṃ vohāro loke pākaṭoti āha‘‘oḷārikeneva nayenā’’ti.

3.That by which one deceives is visaṃvādanaṃ, the mind that proceeds due to the intention to deceive. Therefore, he said ‘‘visaṃvādanacittaṃ purato katvā vadantassā’’ti, "for one who speaks having put the deceiving mind in front." That by which one speaks is vācā, the volition (cetanā) that arises from speech. Therefore, he said ‘‘micchāvācā…pe… cetanā’’ti, "false speech…pe… volition." Pabhedagatā vācāti, speech that is divided into various divisions. Evaṃ paṭhamapadena suddhacetanā…pe… kathitāti veditabbāti, with this he indicates this: mere volition, mere sound, or mere expression is not called false speech; false speech is the volition that arises together with the expression and the sound. Cakkhuvasena aggahitārammaṇanti, an object not grasped by the consciousness based on the eye. Because of the ability of the nose and the other two sense faculties to grasp objects within their respective ranges, it is said ‘‘tīhi indriyehi ekābaddhaṃ viya katvā’’ti, "having made it as if bound together by the three sense faculties." The usage "seen with the eye" is well-known in the world, like in "piercing with an arrow," therefore he says ‘‘oḷārikeneva nayenā’’ti, "in a gross manner only."

11.Avīmaṃsitvāti anupaparikkhitvā.Anupadhāretvāti avinicchinitvā.Jaḷattāti aññāṇatāya.Dārusakaṭaṃ yojetvā gatoti dārusakaṭaṃ yojetvā tattha nisīditvā gatoti adhippāyo.Gato bhavissatīti tatheva sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā vuttattā musāvādo jāto. Keci pana ‘‘keḷiṃ kurumānoti vuttattā evaṃ vadanto dubbhāsitaṃ āpajjatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Jātiādīhiyeva hi dasahi akkosavatthūhi davakamyatāya vadantassa dubbhāsitaṃ vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –

11.Avīmaṃsitvāti, without examining. Anupadhāretvāti, without deciding. Jaḷattāti, due to ignorance. Dārusakaṭaṃ yojetvā gatoti, the meaning is having harnessed the wooden cart, having sat there, he went. Gato bhavissatīti, because it was said having made a determination in that way, a falsehood arose. But some say, "Because it was said 'making fun,' one who speaks thus incurs a dubbhāsita," that should not be accepted. Indeed, dubbhāsita is stated for one who speaks desiring harm with the ten grounds for accusation, such as birth. For it was said:

‘‘Hīnukkaṭṭhehi ukkaṭṭhaṃ, hīnaṃ vā jātiādihi;

"Insulting the superior with the inferior, or the inferior with the superior, by birth etc.;
Or speaking directly with insinuation, incurs dubbhāsita desiring harm."

Cāresunti upanesuṃ. Visaṃvādanapurekkhāratā, visaṃvādanacittena yamatthaṃ vattukāmo, tassa puggalassa viññāpanapayogo cāti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Uttarimanussadhammārocanatthaṃ musā bhaṇantassa pārājikaṃ, amūlakena pārājikena anuddhaṃsanatthaṃ saṅghādiseso, saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃsanatthaṃ pācittiyaṃ, ācāravipattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, ‘‘yo te vihāre vasatī’’tiādipariyāyena uttarimanussadhammārocanatthaṃ paṭivijānantassa musā bhaṇite thullaccayaṃ, appaṭivijānantassa dukkaṭaṃ, kevalaṃ musā bhaṇantassa idha pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ.

Cāresunti, they brought up. Two factors are present here: having the intention to deceive, and the act of communicating by the person who intends to speak falsely. A pārājika for speaking falsely to proclaim superior human qualities; a saṅghādisesa for not denigrating with an unfounded pārājika; a pācittiya for not denigrating with a saṅghādisesa; a dukkaṭa for improper conduct; a thullaccaya for speaking falsely when aware of it to proclaim superior human qualities by way of "who dwells in your monastery" etc.; a dukkaṭa for not being aware of it; and here a pācittiya is stated for merely speaking falsely.

Musāvādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Description of the Musāvāda Sikkhāpada is Finished.

2. Omasavādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Omasavāda Sikkhāpada Description

12.Dutiye kaṇṇakaṭukatāya amanāpaṃ vadantā kaṇṇesu vijjhantā viya hontīti āha‘‘omasantīti ovijjhantī’’ti.Padhaṃsentīti abhibhavanti.

12.In the second, speaking what is unpleasant due to being harsh to the ear, they are as if piercing the ears, therefore he says ‘‘omasantīti ovijjhantī’’ti.Padhaṃsentīti, they overcome.

13.Bodhisatto tena samayena hotīti tena samayena bodhisatto nandivisālo nāma ahosīti attho. Atītatthe vattamānavacanaṃ, kiriyākālavacanicchāya vā vattamānappayogo saddantarasannidhānena bhūtatāvagamo siyāti.Paccesīti ‘‘amanāpaṃ ida’’nti aññāsi.Heṭṭhārukkhe datvāti upatthambhake datvā.Pubbe patiṭṭhitārappadesaṃ puna are patteti pubbe ujukaṃ heṭṭhāmukhaṃ patiṭṭhitaarassa bhūmippadesaṃ puna tasmiṃyeva are parivattetvā heṭṭhāmukhabhāvena sampatte, paṭhamaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitanemippadese parivattetvā puna bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhiteti vuttaṃ hoti.Sithilakaraṇanti sithilakiriyā.

13.Bodhisatto tena samayena hotīti, at that time, the bodhisatta was named Nandivisāla, this is the meaning. The present tense is used in the past sense, or the present tense is used according to the desire to speak of time, the understanding of the past occurs due to the presence of another word. Paccesīti, he understood, "this is unpleasant." Heṭṭhārukkhe datvāti, having placed it on the support. Pubbe patiṭṭhitārappadesaṃ puna are patteti, the area of the ara that was previously placed straight with its lower face, when that ara has again arrived in the same place having been turned around with its lower face, it is said that the part of the nemi that was first placed on the ground was turned around and again placed on the ground. Sithilakaraṇanti, the act of loosening.

15.Pubbeti aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ.Tacchakakammanti vaḍḍhakīkammaṃ.Koṭṭakakammanti vā pāsāṇakoṭṭakakammaṃ.Hatthamuddāgaṇanāti aṅgulisaṅkoceneva gaṇanā. Pādasikamilakkhakādayo viya navantavasena gaṇanāacchiddakagaṇanā. Ādi-saddena saṅkalanapaṭuppādanavoklanabhāgahārādivasena pavattā piṇḍagaṇanā gahitā. Yassa sā paguṇā hoti, so rukkhampi disvā ‘‘ettakāni ettha paṇṇānī’’ti jānāti. Yabha methuneti vacanatoya-kārabha-kāre ekato yojite asaddhammavacanaṃ hoti.

15.Pubbeti, in the eighth origination. Tacchakakammanti, carpentry work. Koṭṭakakammanti, or stonemasonry work. Hatthamuddāgaṇanāti, counting only by contracting the fingers. Counting in a novel way, like the pādasikā and milakkhakā etc., is acchiddakagaṇanā. The addition, generation, subtraction, division, etc. that occur are included by the word Ādi. One who is skilled in that knows, even seeing a tree, "there are this many leaves here." From the statement yabha methuneti, when the letters ya and bha are joined together, it is a statement of false Dhamma.

16-26.Āpattiyākāretabboti pācittiyena kāretabbo upasaggādimattavisiṭṭhānaṃ aticaṇḍālādipadānaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatesuyeva saṅgahitattā.Corosītiādīnaṃ pana kenaci pariyāyena pāḷiyaṃ anāgatattā dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.Hasādhippāyatāti purimapadassa atthavivaraṇaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ avuttepi ‘‘jātiādīhi akkosavatthūhi parammukhā akkosantassa vatthūnaṃ anaññabhāvato yathā dukkaṭaṃ, tathā davakamyatāya parammukhā vadantassapi dubbhāsitamevā’’ti ācariyā vadanti.Sabbasattāti ettha vacanatthavijānanapakatikā tiracchānagatāpi gahetabbā.

16-26.Āpattiyā kāretabboti, he must be made to atone with a pācittiya, because terms distinguished merely by prefixes etc., such as aticaṇḍāla etc., are included in what is present in the Pāḷi. However, because corosī etc. are not present in the Pāḷi in any way, a dukkaṭa is stated. Hasādhippāyatāti, explanation of the meaning of the previous term. Even though not stated in the Pāḷi, the teachers say "just as a dukkaṭa arises for one who insults while disregarding the grounds for insult such as birth etc., because the things are not different, so too dubbhāsita arises for one who speaks while disregarding desiring harm." Sabbasattāti, here, animals must also be included as those who are by nature capable of understanding the meaning of words.

35.Anusāsanipurekkhāratāya ṭhatvā vadantassa cittassa lahuparivattibhāvato antarā kope uppannepi anāpatti. Yaṃ akkosati, tassa upasampannatā, anaññāpadesena jātiādīhi akkosanaṃ, ‘‘maṃ akkosatī’’ti jānanā, atthapurekkhāratādīnaṃ abhāvatāti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni.

35.Even if anger arises in between, there is no offense because the mind of one who stands intending to instruct changes quickly. These four factors are present here: the one who is being insulted is ordained, the insulting with grounds such as birth etc. without insinuation, the knowledge that "he is insulting me," and the absence of intending harm etc.

Omasavādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Description of the Omasavāda Sikkhāpada is Finished.

3. Pesuññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Pesuñña Sikkhāpada Description

36.Tatiye bhaṇḍanaṃ jātaṃ etesantibhaṇḍanajātā.Sammantananti raho saṃsandanaṃ. Hatthaparāmāsādivasena matthakaṃ patto kalaho jāto etesantikalahajātā. Anāpattigāmikaṃ viruddhavādabhūtaṃ vivādaṃ āpannātivivādāpannā. Viggahasaṃvattanikā kathāviggāhikakathā. Pisatīti pisuṇā, vācā, samagge satte avayavabhūte vagge bhinne karotīti attho. Pisuṇā evapesuññaṃ. Tāya vācāya vā samannāgato pisuṇo, tassa kammaṃpesuññaṃ. Piyabhāvassa suññakaraṇavācanti iminā pana ‘‘piyasuññakaraṇato pisuṇā’’ti niruttinayena atthaṃ vadati.

36.In the third, bhaṇḍanaṃ jātaṃ etesanti means those in whom quarrel has arisen, bhaṇḍanajātā. Sammantananti means secret consultation. Hatthaparāmāsādivasena matthakaṃ patto kalaho jāto etesanti means those in whom strife has arisen, which has reached its peak by way of touching hands etc. Vivādāpannā means those who have entered into a dispute that is the basis of contradictory speech that does not lead to an offense. Viggahasaṃvattanikā kathā means talk that leads to conflict. Pisa means one who destroys, speech, the meaning is that it makes those beings who are united into a partial group become divided. Pisuṇā itself is pesuññaṃ. Or, endowed with that speech, pisuṇo, his action is pesuññaṃ. Piyabhāvassa suññakaraṇavācanti, with this, however, he speaks of the meaning by way of the etymological method, "because it makes love empty, therefore it is pisuṇā."

Idhāpi ‘‘dasahākārehi pesuññaṃ upasaṃharatī’’ti vacanato dasavidhaakkosavatthuvaseneva pesuññaṃ upasaṃharantassa pācittiyaṃ. Pāḷimuttakānaṃ corotiādīnaṃ vasena pana dukkaṭamevāti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Anakkosavatthubhūtaṃ pana pesuññakaraṃ tassa kiriyaṃ vacanaṃ vā piyakamyatāya upasaṃharantassa kiñcāpi iminā sikkhāpadena āpatti na dissati, tathāpi dukkaṭenettha bhavitabba’’nti vadanti. Jātiādīhi anaññāpadesena akkosantassa bhikkhuno sutvā bhikkhussa upasaṃharaṇaṃ, piyakamyatābhedādhippāyesu aññataratā, tassa vijānanāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

Here too, because it is stated, "he brings together pesuñña in ten ways," a pācittiya arises for one who brings together pesuñña only by way of the ten grounds for accusation. However, it should be understood that a dukkaṭa only arises by way of coroti etc. that are outside of the Pāḷi. "Even if he brings together the action or speech that causes pesuñña, which is not a ground for accusation, intending affection, although an offense is not seen in this sikkhāpada, still there must be a dukkaṭa here," they say. These three factors are present here: hearing the bhikkhu who is insulting with grounds such as birth etc. without insinuation, conveying it to a bhikkhu, and being one of the intentions of dividing out of affection, and his knowing.

Pesuññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Description of the Pesuñña Sikkhāpada is Finished.

4. Padasodhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Padasodhamma Sikkhāpada Description

45.Catuttheekatoti anupasampannena saddhiṃ.Purimabyañjanena sadisaṃ pacchābyañjananti ‘‘rūpaṃ anicca’’nti ettha anicca-saddena sadisaṃ ‘‘vedanā aniccā’’ti ettha anicca-saddaṃ vadati.Akkharasamūhoti avibhattiko akkharasamūho.Akkharānubyañjanasamūho padanti vibhattiantaṃ padamāha. Vibhattiantameva padaṃ gahetvā‘‘paṭhamapadaṃ padameva, dutiyaṃ anupada’’nti vuttaṃ.

45.In the fourth, ekatoti means together with one who is not ordained. Purimabyañjanena sadisaṃ pacchābyañjananti, in "rūpaṃ anicca," he speaks the word anicca in "vedanā anicca" which is similar to the word anicca. Akkharasamūhoti, a group of letters without inflection. Akkharānubyañjanasamūho padanti, he means a word ending in inflection. Having taken only a word ending in inflection, it is said ‘‘paṭhamapadaṃ padameva, dutiyaṃ anupada’’nti.

Ekaṃ padanti gāthāpadaṃ sandhāya vadati.Padagaṇanāyāti gāthāpadagaṇanāya.Apāpuṇitvāti saddhiṃ akathetvā.Runti opātetīti ettha anunāsiko āgamavasena vutto, saṃyogapubbassa rassattaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha‘‘rū-kāramattamevā’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘rūpaṃ aniccanti bhaṇa sāmaṇerā’’ti vuccamāno sace rū-kāraṃ avatvā ru-iti rassaṃ katvā vadati, aññaṃ bhaṇitaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā anāpatti. Evañca katvā ‘‘vedanā aniccā’’ti etthāpi anicca-saddamatteneva āpatti hotīti veditabbaṃ.Esa nayoti ekamevakkharaṃ vatvā ṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti vuccamāno hi ma-kāramattameva vatvā tiṭṭhati. ‘‘Evaṃ me suta’’ntiādisuttaṃ bhaṇāpiyamāno e-kāraṃ vatvā tiṭṭhati ce, anvakkharena pācittiyaṃ, aparipuṇṇapadaṃ vatvā ṭhite anubyañjanena. Padesu ekaṃ paṭhamapadaṃ virajjhati, dutiyena anupadena pācittiyaṃ.

Ekaṃ padanti, he speaks referring to a verse. Padagaṇanāyāti, for the counting of verses. Apāpuṇitvāti, without speaking together. Runti opātetīti, here the nasal consonant is stated by way of being an augment, it should be understood that the shortening of a consonant cluster has been done. Therefore, he said ‘‘rū-kāramattamevā’’ti. And here, if when being told "sāmaṇeras, recite 'rūpaṃ anicca'," if he does not say the -sound, but having shortened it, he says ru-iti, it is called another recitation, therefore there is no offense. And having done so, it should be understood that an offense arises with just the word anicca alone in "vedanā anicca." Esa nayoti, the situation of reciting just one letter. For one who is being told "Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā," recites and stops at just the ma-sound. If, when being told to recite a sutta beginning with "Evaṃ me sutaṃ," he recites and stops at the e-sound, a pācittiya arises with the subsequent consonant, with the subsequent consonant when stopping having recited an incomplete word. In words, the first word becomes detached, a pācittiya arises with the second subsequent word.

Anaṅgaṇasuttaṃ(ma. ni. 1.57 ādayo)sammādiṭṭhisuttaṃ(ma. ni. 1.89 ādayo)mahāvedallañca(ma. ni. 1.449 ādayo) dhammasenāpatinā bhāsitaṃ,anumānasuttaṃ(ma. ni. 1.181 ādayo) mahāmoggallānattherena,cūḷavedallasuttaṃ(ma. ni. 1.460 ādayo) dhammadinnāya theriyā bhāsitaṃ. Paccekabuddhabhāsitampi buddhabhāsiteyeva saṅgahaṃ gacchati.Aṭṭhakathānissitoti pubbe magadhabhāsāya vuttaṃ dhammasaṅgahāruḷhaṃ aṭṭhakathaṃ sandhāya vadati. Idānipi ‘‘yathāpi dīpiko nāma, nilīyitvā gaṇhate mige’’ti (mi. pa. 6.1.5) evamādikaṃ saṅgahāruḷhaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ gahetabbanti vadanti.Pāḷinissitoti ‘‘makkaṭī vajjiputtā cā’’tievamādinā (pārā. 66) pāḷiyaṃyeva āgato.Vivaṭṭūpanissitanti nibbānupanissitaṃ. Vivaṭṭanissitaṃ pana sāmaññato gahetabbanti āha‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi.Therassāti nāgasenattherassa.Maggakathādīni pakaraṇāni. ‘‘Akkharena vāceti, akkharakkhare āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti vattabbe‘‘akkharāya vāceti, akkharakkharāya āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ.

The Anaṅgaṇasutta(M.i,57ff), the Sammādiṭṭhisutta(M.i,89ff), and the Mahāvedalla(M.i,292ff) were spoken by the Dhammasenāpati, the Anumānasutta(M.i,111ff) by the Mahāmoggallānatthera, and the Cūḷavedallasutta(M.i,299ff) by the Dhammadinnā therī. What is spoken by a Paccekabuddha also goes into the collection of what is spoken by a Buddha. Aṭṭhakathānissitoti, he speaks referring to the aṭṭhakathā that was previously stated in the Magadhā language and established in the collection of the Dhamma. Even now, they say that the aṭṭhakathā statement that is established in the collection should be taken, such as "just as a trapper, hiding, catches deer" (mi.pa.6.1.5). Pāḷinissitoti, what has come in the Pāḷi itself, such as "makkaṭī vajjiputtā cā" (pārā.66). Vivaṭṭūpanissitanti, leading to nibbāna. He says ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi, that leading to liberation should be taken in general. Therassāti, of the Nāgasenatthera. Maggakathā etc. are treatises. In the statement "he causes to recite letter by letter, an offense arises for each letter," it is stated in the Pāḷi ‘‘akkharāya vāceti, akkharakkharāya āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti.

48.Anupasampannena saddhiṃ gaṇhantassa anāpattīti anupasampannena saha nisīditvā uddesaṃ gaṇhantassa anāpatti vuttā.Daharabhikkhu nisinno…pe… bhaṇato anāpattīti ettha dvīsupi ṭhitesu nisinnesu vā upasampannassa bhaṇāmīti bhaṇantassa anāpattiyeva.Upacāraṃ muñcitvāti parisapariyantato dvādasahatthaṃ muñcitvā. ‘‘Nisinne vācemī’’ti bhaṇantassapi upacāraṃ muñcitvā nisinnattā anāpatti. Sace pana dūre nisinnampi vācemīti visuṃ sallakkhetvā bhaṇati, āpattiyeva.Eko pādo na āgacchatīti pubbe paguṇoyeva pacchā asarantassa na āgacchati, taṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhaṇāhī’’ti ekato bhaṇantassa anāpatti.Opātetīti saddhiṃ katheti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Anupasampannatā, vuttalakkhaṇadhammaṃ padaso vācanatā, ekato bhaṇanañcāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

48.Anupasampannena saddhiṃ gaṇhantassa anāpattīti, it is stated that there is no offense for one who sits together with one who is not ordained and takes up a lesson. Daharabhikkhu nisinno…pe… bhaṇato anāpattīti, in both of these situations, whether standing or sitting, there is no offense for the ordained one who says "I will recite." Upacāraṃ muñcitvāti, having released twelve cubits from the boundary of the assembly. Even for one who says "I will cause the one who is sitting to recite," there is no offense because he is sitting having released the vicinity. However, if he recites thinking distinctly "I will cause even one who is sitting far away to recite," there is an offense. Eko pādo na āgacchatīti, one who was previously proficient, but is no longer able to remember, it does not come to him, there is no offense for reciting together "recite like this." Opātetīti, he speaks together. The rest here is self-explanatory. These three factors are present here: not being ordained, causing to recite the Dhamma characterized as stated word by word, and reciting together.

Padasodhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Description of the Padasodhamma Sikkhāpada is Finished.

5. Sahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Sahaseyya Sikkhāpada

49-50.Pañcamevikūjamānāti nitthunantā.Kākacchamānāti rodantā. Tatridaṃ vatthunidassanaṃ vā.Tena nu kho pātitanti pucchāvasena kathitattā natthi musāvādo. Keci pana ‘‘sandehavasena vacanaṃ musā nāma na hoti, tasmā evaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti.Santikaṃ agantvāti ‘‘yaṃ etesaṃ na kappati, taṃ tesampi na kappatī’’ti adhippāyena agantvā.

49-50. In the fifth, vikūjamānā means wailing. Kākacchamānā means crying. Here, this is an illustration of the matter or that. Tena nu kho pātita since it was spoken in the manner of a question, there is no falsehood. Some, however, say, "A statement made with doubt is not called a lie; therefore, it was said thus." Santikaṃ agantvā means not going with the intention that "what is not suitable for them is not suitable for us."

51.Dirattatirattanti ettha vacanasiliṭṭhatāmattenadiratta-ggahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tirattañhi sahavāse labbhamāne diratte vattabbameva natthīti dirattaggahaṇaṃ visuṃ na yojeti. Tenevāha‘‘uttaridirattatirattanti bhagavā sāmaṇerānaṃ saṅgahakaraṇatthāya tirattaparihāraṃ adāsī’’ti. Nirantaraṃ tirattadassanatthaṃ vā dirattaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Kevalañhi tirattanti vutte aññattha vāsena antarikampi tirattaṃ gaṇheyya, dirattavisiṭṭhaṃ pana tirattaṃ vuccamānaṃ tena anantarikameva tirattaṃ dīpeti. Sayanaṃseyyā,sayanti etthātipiseyyāti āha‘‘kāyappasāraṇasaṅkhāta’’ntiādi.Tasmāti yasmā ubhayampi pariggahitaṃ, tasmā.Pañcahi chadanehīti iṭṭhakasilāsudhātiṇapaṇṇasaṅkhaātehi pañcahi chadanehi.Vācuggatavasenāti paguṇavasena.Diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhovaḍḍhakīhatthena gahetabbo.Ekūpacāroti vaḷañjanadvārassa ekattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Satagabbhaṃ vā catussālaṃ ekūpacāraṃ hotīti sambandho.

51.Dirattatiratta here, it should be understood that the mention of diratta (two nights) is merely due to linguistic convention. Indeed, when a three-night stay is permissible, there is no need to mention two nights at all; therefore, the mention of two nights is not separately applied. Hence, he said, "Uttaridirattatirattanti bhagavā sāmaṇerānaṃ saṅgahakaraṇatthāya tirattaparihāraṃ adāsī" - "The Blessed One granted the three-night dispensation for the sake of assisting the novices, extending beyond two or three nights." Or, the mention of two nights was made to indicate continuous three-night stays. For if only "three nights" were mentioned, one might include an interval in the three nights by staying elsewhere; however, when "three nights" is specified with "two nights," it indicates only uninterrupted three nights. Sayanaṃ seyyā, sayanti etthātipi seyyā he said, ‘‘kāyappasāraṇasaṅkhāta’’tiādi- "meaning the act of stretching out the body," etc. Tasmā therefore, since both are included, therefore. Pañcahi chadanehī with the five coverings, namely, those made of brick, stone, mortar, grass, and leaves. Vācuggatavasenā according to the fluent manner. Diyaḍḍhahatthubbedho should be measured with a carpenter's cubit. Ekūpacāro is said with reference to the unity of the window or doorway. Or, the connection is that a multi-chambered or four-sided building has a single approach.

Uparimatalena saddhiṃ asambaddhabhittikassāti idaṃ tulāya abbhantare sayitvā puna teneva susirena nikkhamitvā bhittiantarena heṭṭhimatalaṃ pavisituṃ yoggepi uparimatalena asambaddhabhittike senāsane anāpattiyā vuttāya tathā pavisituṃ asakkuṇeyye sambaddhabhittike vattabbameva natthīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana sambaddhabhittike āpattīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.Heṭṭhāpāsāde sayitabhikkhussa anāpattīti idampi tādise senāsane heṭṭhimatale sayitasseva āpattippasaṅkā siyāti taṃnivāraṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana uparimatale sayitassa āpattīti dassanatthaṃ.Nānūpacāreti yattha bahi nisseṇiṃ katvā uparimatalaṃ ārohanti, tādisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Uparimatalepi ākāsaṅgaṇe nipajjantassa āpattiyā abhāvato‘‘chadanabbhantare’’ti vuttaṃ.

Uparimatalena saddhiṃ asambaddhabhittikassā this was said to show that there is certainly no need to speak of a dwelling with interconnected walls where one cannot enter the lower level through a wall partition after lying down in the upper level through the opening, even in a dwelling with unconnected walls with the upper level where it is possible to sleep inside the attic and then exit through the same hole and enter the lower level through a wall partition, since non-offense has been stated. However, it was not said to show that there is an offense in a dwelling with interconnected walls. Heṭṭhāpāsāde sayitabhikkhussa anāpattī this was also said to prevent the possibility of an offense only for a monk sleeping on the lower level of such a dwelling, and not to indicate that there is no offense for one sleeping on the upper level. Nānūpacāre this refers to a place where one ascends to the upper level by making a ladder outside. Because there is no offense for one lying down in an open space on the upper level, it was said ‘‘chadanabbhantare’’- "inside the roof".

Sabhāsaṅkhepenāti sabhākārena.Aḍḍhakuṭṭake senāsaneti ettha ‘‘aḍḍhakuṭṭakaṃ nāma yattha ekaṃ passaṃ muñcitvā tīsu passesu bhittiyo baddhā honti, yattha vā ekasmiṃ passe bhittiṃ uṭṭhāpetvā ubhosu passesu upaḍḍhaṃ upaḍḍhaṃ katvā bhittiyo uṭṭhāpenti, tādisaṃ senāsana’’nti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Gaṇṭhipadepana ‘‘aḍḍhakuṭṭaketi chadanaṃ aḍḍhena asampattakuṭṭake’’ti vuttaṃ, tampi no na yuttaṃ.‘‘Vāḷasaṅghāṭonāma thambhānaṃ upari vāḷarūpehi katasaṅghāṭo vuccatī’’ti vadanti.Parikkhepassa bahigateti ettha yasmiṃ passe parikkhepo natthi, tatthāpi parikkhepārahappadesato bahigate anāpattiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Aparicchinnagabbhūpacāreti ettha majjhe vivaṭaṅgaṇavantāsu pamukhamahācatussālāsu yathā ākāsaṅgaṇaṃ anotaritvā pamukheneva gantvā sabbagabbhe pavisituṃ na sakkā hoti, evaṃ ekekagabbhassa dvīsu passesu kuṭṭaṃ nīharitvā kataṃparicchinnagabbhūpacāraṃnāma, idaṃ pana tādisaṃ na hotīti ‘‘aparicchinnagabbhūpacāre’’ti vuttaṃ.Sabbagabbhe pavisantīti gabbhūpacārassa aparicchinnattā ākāsaṅgaṇaṃ anotaritvā pamukheneva gantvā taṃ taṃ gabbhaṃ pavisanti. Atha kuto tassa parikkhepoyeva sabbaparicchannattāti vuttanti āha‘‘gabbhaparikkhepoyeva hissa parikkhepo’’ti. Idañca samantā gabbhabhittiyo sandhāya vuttaṃ. Catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhepi senāsane gabbhapamukhaṃ visuṃ aparikkhittampi samantā ṭhitagabbhabhittīnaṃ vasena parikkhittaṃ nāma hoti.

Sabhāsaṅkhepenā in the manner of an assembly hall. Aḍḍhakuṭṭake senāsane here, it is said in all three gaṇṭhipadesu, "aḍḍhakuṭṭakaṃ nāma yattha ekaṃ passaṃ muñcitvā tīsu passesu bhittiyo baddhā honti, yattha vā ekasmiṃ passe bhittiṃ uṭṭhāpetvā ubhosu passesu upaḍḍhaṃ upaḍḍhaṃ katvā bhittiyo uṭṭhāpenti, tādisaṃ senāsana" - "An ‘aḍḍhakuṭṭaka’ is a lodging where, leaving one side open, walls are built on three sides, or where, erecting a wall on one side, half-walls are built on both sides." In the Gaṇṭhipade, however, it is said, "aḍḍhakuṭṭaketi chadanaṃ aḍḍhena asampattakuṭṭake" - "‘Aḍḍhakuṭṭaka’ means a wall that does not reach the roof by half," but that is not right for us either. ‘‘Vāḷasaṅghāṭo nāma thambhānaṃ upari vāḷarūpehi katasaṅghāṭo vuccatī’’ti vadanti - "‘Vāḷasaṅghāṭa’ is said to be a lattice made in the form of reeds above pillars," they say. Parikkhepassa bahigate here, it should be understood that even on the side where there is no enclosure, there is no offense if it is beyond the area suitable for an enclosure. Aparicchinnagabbhūpacāre here, in large, prominent four-sided halls with an open courtyard in the middle, just as one cannot enter all the chambers by going directly through the main entrance without entering the open courtyard, similarly, paricchinnagabbhūpacāraṃ is made by extending a wall on two sides of each chamber, this however, is not like that, therefore, it is said, "aparicchinnagabbhūpacāre". Sabbagabbhe pavisantī because the chamber approach is not enclosed, they enter each chamber by going directly through the main entrance without entering the open courtyard. Then, how is it said that its enclosure is entirely enclosed? He says, ‘‘gabbhaparikkhepoyeva hissa parikkhepo’’- "the enclosure of the chamber itself is its enclosure." And this is said with reference to the walls of the chambers all around. Even in a dwelling arranged as a four-sided hall, a chamber entrance that is not separately enclosed is considered enclosed by virtue of the surrounding chamber walls.

‘‘yaṃ pana…pe… pāṭekkasannivesā ekacchadanā gabbhapāḷiyo sandhāya vutta’’nti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattīti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ na catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhā gabbhapāḷiyo sandhāya vuttaṃ, kiñcarahi visuṃ sanniviṭṭhaṃ ekameva gabbhapāḷiṃ sandhāya. Tādisāya hi gabbhapāḷiyā aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpatti, na catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhāyā’’ti. Ekāya ca gabbhapāḷiyā tassa tassa gabbhassa upacāraṃ paricchinditvā antamaso ubhosu passesu khuddakabhittīnaṃ uṭṭhāpanamattenapi pamukhaṃ parikkhittaṃ nāma hoti, catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhāsu pana gabbhapāḷīsu ubhosu passesu gabbhabhittīnaṃ vasenapi pamukhaṃ parikkhittaṃ nāma hoti. Tasmā yaṃ iminā lakkhaṇena parikkhittaṃ pamukhaṃ, tattha āpatti, itarattha anāpattīti idamettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ.

‘‘yaṃ pana…pe… pāṭekkasannivesā ekacchadanā gabbhapāḷiyo sandhāya vutta’’nti. This is what is said: "yaṃ pamukhe aparikkhette anāpattīti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ na catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhā gabbhapāḷiyo sandhāya vuttaṃ, kiñcarahi visuṃ sanniviṭṭhaṃ ekameva gabbhapāḷiṃ sandhāya. Tādisāya hi gabbhapāḷiyā aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpatti, na catussālavasena sanniviṭṭhāyā" – "What was said about non-offense at the unenclosed front was not said referring to rows of chambers arranged as a four-sided hall, but rather referring to a single row of chambers arranged separately. Indeed, for such a row of chambers, there is no offense at the unenclosed front, but not for those arranged as a four-sided hall." And for a single row of chambers, the front is considered enclosed even by merely erecting small walls on both sides, thereby enclosing the approach to each chamber; however, in rows of chambers arranged as a four-sided hall, the front is considered enclosed by virtue of the chamber walls on both sides. Therefore, in that which is enclosed by this characteristic, there is an offense; in the other, there is no offense—this is the conclusion here.

‘‘yañca tatthā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.Bhūmiyaṃ vinā jagatiyā pamukhaṃ sandhāya kathitanti hi imassa vacanassa ayamadhippāyo – ‘‘aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattī’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ vinā vatthuṃ bhūmiyaṃ katagehassa pamukhaṃ sandhāya kathitaṃ. Sace pana uccavatthukaṃ pamukhaṃ hoti, parikkhittasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatīti. Tenevāha‘‘dasahatthubbedhāpi hi jagati parikkhepasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatī’’ti. Heṭṭhāpi idameva manasi sannidhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘uccavatthukaṃ cepi hoti, pamukhe sayito gabbhe sayitānaṃ āpattiṃ na karotī’’ti.Tatthāti andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ.Jagatiyā pamāṇaṃ vatvāti ‘‘sace jagatiyā otaritvā bhūmiyaṃ sayito, jagatiyā upari sayitaṃ na passatī’’ti evaṃ jagatiyā ubbedhena pamāṇaṃ vatvā. Ekasālādīsu ujukameva dīghaṃ katvā sannivesito pāsādoekasālasanniveso. Dvisālasannivesādayopi vuttānusārato veditabbā. Sālappabhedadīpanameva cettha heṭṭhā vuttato viseso.

‘‘yañca tatthā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Bhūmiyaṃ vinā jagatiyā pamukhaṃ sandhāya kathitanti hi imassa vacanassa ayamadhippāyo – "aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattī"ti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ vinā vatthuṃ bhūmiyaṃ katagehassa pamukhaṃ sandhāya kathitaṃ. Sace pana uccavatthukaṃ pamukhaṃ hoti, parikkhittasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatīti. The meaning of this statement is: "What was said about non-offense at the unenclosed front was said referring to the front of a house built on the ground without a raised platform. But if the front is on a high foundation, it does not count as enclosed." Tenevāha ‘‘dasahatthubbedhāpi hi jagati parikkhepasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatī’’ti. Therefore, he said, "Indeed, even a platform ten cubits high does not count as an enclosure." Heṭṭhāpi idameva manasi sannidhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘uccavatthukaṃ cepi hoti, pamukhe sayito gabbhe sayitānaṃ āpattiṃ na karotī’’ti. This same idea was kept in mind and said below: "Even if it is on a high foundation, one lying at the front does not cause an offense to those lying in the chamber." Tatthā in the Andhaka commentary. Jagatiyā pamāṇaṃ vatvā by stating the measurement of the platform, "sace jagatiyā otaritvā bhūmiyaṃ sayito, jagatiyā upari sayitaṃ na passatī"ti evaṃ jagatiyā ubbedhena pamāṇaṃ vatvā- "if one lies down on the ground after descending from the platform, one does not see one lying on top of the platform" thus stating the measurement by the height of the platform. Ekasālādīsu ujukameva dīghaṃ katvā sannivesito pāsādo ekasālasanniveso. A building arranged by making it straight and long in one hall, etc., is an ekasālasanniveso - "one hall arrangement". Dvisālasannivesādayopi vuttānusārato veditabbā. The dvisālasannivesādayo (two hall arrangement) should be understood according to what has been said. Sālappabhedadīpanameva cettha heṭṭhā vuttato viseso. The only difference here from what was said below is the explanation of the types of halls.

Majjhepākāraṃ karontīti etthāpi parikkhepassa heṭṭhimaparicchedena diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhattā diyaḍḍhahatthaṃ cepi majjhe pākāraṃ karonti, nānūpacārameva hotīti veditabbaṃ.Na hi chiddena gehaṃ ekūpacāraṃ nāma hotīti ettha sace ubbedhena diyaḍḍhahatthabbhantare manussānaṃ sañcārappahonakaṃ chiddaṃ hoti, tampi dvāramevāti ekūpacāraṃ hoti.Kiṃ parikkhepoviddhastoti pamukhassa parikkhepaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sabbattha pañcannaṃyeva chadanānaṃ āgatattā vadati‘‘pañcannaṃ aññatarena chadanena channā’’ti.

Majjhepākāraṃ karontīti etthāpi parikkhepassa heṭṭhimaparicchedena diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhattā diyaḍḍhahatthaṃ cepi majjhe pākāraṃ karonti, nānūpacārameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Na hi chiddena gehaṃ ekūpacāraṃ nāma hotīti ettha sace ubbedhena diyaḍḍhahatthabbhantare manussānaṃ sañcārappahonakaṃ chiddaṃ hoti, tampi dvāramevāti ekūpacāraṃ hoti. Kiṃ parikkhepoviddhastoti pamukhassa parikkhepaṃ sandhāya vadati. Kiṃ parikkhepoviddhastoti pamukhassa parikkhepaṃ sandhāya vadati.Sabbattha pañcannaṃyeva chadanānaṃ āgatattā vadati ‘‘pañcannaṃ aññatarena chadanena channā’’ti. Since the five coverings have come up everywhere, he says, "covered with any one of the five coverings."

53.Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘seyyā nāma sabbacchannā sabbaparicchannā yebhuyyenacchannā yebhuyyenaparicchannā’’ti vadantena yebhuyyenacchannayebhuyyenaparicchannasenāsanaṃ pācittiyassa avasānaṃ viya katvā dassitaṃ, ‘‘upaḍḍhacchanne upaḍḍhaparicchanne āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vadantena ca upaḍḍhacchannaupaḍḍhaparicchannasenāsanaṃ dukkaṭassa ādiṃ katvā dassitaṃ, ubhinnamantarā kena bhavitabbaṃ pācittiyena, udāhu dukkaṭenāti? Lokavajjasikkhāpadasseva anavasesaṃ katvā paññāpanato imassa ca paṇṇattivajjattā yebhuyyenacchannayebhuyyenaparicchannassa upaḍḍhacchannaupaḍḍhaparicchannassa ca antarā pācittiyaṃ anivāritameva, tasmā vinayavinicchaye ca garukeyeva ṭhātabbattā aṭṭhakathāyampi pācittiyameva dassitaṃ.Satta pācittiyānīti pāḷiyaṃ vuttapācittiyaṃ sāmaññato ekattena gahetvā vuttaṃ. Visuṃ pana gayhamāne ‘‘sabbacchanne sabbaparicchanne pācittiyaṃ, yebhuyyenacchanne yebhuyyenaparicchanne pācittiya’’nti aṭṭheva pācittiyāni honti.

53. In the Pāḷi, by saying "seyyā nāma sabbacchannā sabbaparicchannā yebhuyyenacchannā yebhuyyenaparicchannā" - "seyyā means entirely covered, entirely enclosed, mostly covered, mostly enclosed," he showed the mostly covered and mostly enclosed lodging as if it were the end of a pācittiya. By saying "upaḍḍhacchanne upaḍḍhaparicchanne āpatti dukkaṭassā"ti vadantena ca upaḍḍhacchannaupaḍḍhaparicchannasenāsanaṃ dukkaṭassa ādiṃ katvā dassitaṃ, ubhinnamantarā kena bhavitabbaṃ pācittiyena, udāhu dukkaṭenāti? - and by saying "in a half-covered and half-enclosed dwelling, the offense is a dukkaṭa," he showed the half-covered and half-enclosed lodging as the beginning of a dukkaṭa. What should be in between the two, a pācittiya, or a dukkaṭa? Lokavajjasikkhāpadasseva anavasesaṃ katvā paññāpanato imassa ca paṇṇattivajjattā yebhuyyenacchannayebhuyyenaparicchannassa upaḍḍhacchannaupaḍḍhaparicchannassa ca antarā pācittiyaṃ anivāritameva, tasmā vinayavinicchaye ca garukeyeva ṭhātabbattā aṭṭhakathāyampi pācittiyameva dassitaṃ. Because the lokavajja training rule was enacted without leaving anything out, and because this is a rule by enactment, the pācittiya between the mostly covered and mostly enclosed and the half-covered and half-enclosed is certainly unavoidable; therefore, because it should stand as heavy in the decision of the Vinaya, the pācittiya itself was shown in the commentary. Satta pācittiyānī the pācittiya mentioned in the Pāḷi was said by taking it generally as a single offense. Visuṃ pana gayhamāne ‘‘sabbacchanne sabbaparicchanne pācittiyaṃ, yebhuyyenacchanne yebhuyyenaparicchanne pācittiya’’nti aṭṭheva pācittiyāni honti. But when taken separately, there are indeed eight pācittiyas: "pācittiya for entirely covered and entirely enclosed, pācittiya for mostly covered and mostly enclosed."

Senambamaṇḍapavaṇṇaṃ hotīti sīhaḷadīpe kira uccavatthuko sabbacchanno sabbaaparicchanno evaṃnāmako sannipātamaṇḍapo atthi, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yadi jagatiparikkhepasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, uccavatthukattā maṇḍapassa sabbaaparicchannatā na yujjatīti āha‘‘imināpetaṃ veditabba’’ntiādi.Cūḷakacchannādīni cettha evaṃ veditabbāni – yassa catūsu bhāgesu eko channo, sesā acchannā, idaṃcūḷakacchannaṃ. Yassa tīsu bhāgesu dve channā, eko acchanno, idaṃyebhuyyenacchannaṃ. Yassa dvīsu bhāgesu eko channo, eko acchanno, idaṃupaḍḍhacchannaṃnāma senāsanaṃ.Cūḷakaparicchannādīnipi imināva nayena veditabbāni. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Pācittiyavatthukasenāsanaṃ, tattha tattha anupasampannena saha nipajjanaṃ, catutthadivase sūriyatthaṅgamananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

Senambamaṇḍapavaṇṇaṃ hotīti sīhaḷadīpe kira uccavatthuko sabbacchanno sabbaaparicchanno evaṃnāmako sannipātamaṇḍapo atthi, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. It is said that in Sri Lanka, there is a meeting hall named Senamba, which is on a high foundation, entirely covered, and entirely enclosed; this was said with reference to that. Yadi jagatiparikkhepasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, uccavatthukattā maṇḍapassa sabbaaparicchannatā na yujjatīti āha ‘‘imināpetaṃ veditabba’’ntiādi. If the platform counts as an enclosure, the hall's complete enclosure does not make sense because of the high foundation, therefore he says ‘‘imināpetaṃ veditabba’’ntiādi-"this should be understood in this way," etc. Cūḷakacchannādīni cettha evaṃ veditabbāni – yassa catūsu bhāgesu eko channo, sesā acchannā, idaṃ cūḷakacchannaṃ. Cūḷakaparicchannādīni cettha evaṃ veditabbāni – yassa catūsu bhāgesu eko channo, sesā acchannā, idaṃ cūḷakacchannaṃ. Here, cūḷakaparicchannā etc., should be understood thus: that of which one part of the four parts is covered, the rest uncovered, this is cūḷakacchannaṃ (slightly covered). Yassa tīsu bhāgesu dve channā, eko acchanno, idaṃ yebhuyyenacchannaṃ. That of which two parts of the three parts are covered, one uncovered, this is yebhuyyenacchannaṃ (mostly covered). Yassa dvīsu bhāgesu eko channo, eko acchanno, idaṃ upaḍḍhacchannaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ. That of which one part of the two parts is covered, one uncovered, this lodging is called upaḍḍhacchannaṃ (half-covered). Cūḷakaparicchannā dīnipi imināva nayena veditabbāni. The cūḷakaparicchannā (slightly enclosed), etc., should be understood in the same way. Sesaṃ uttānameva. The rest is straightforward. Pācittiya vatthukasenāsanaṃ, tattha tattha anupasampannena saha nipajjanaṃ, catutthadivase sūriyatthaṅgamananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Here, there are these three factors: a lodging that is the object of a pācittiya, lying down there with one who is not fully ordained, and the setting of the sun on the fourth day.

Sahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Sahaseyya Training Rule is finished.

6. Dutiyasahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Second Sahaseyya Training Rule

55.Chaṭṭhe ‘‘paṭhamasikkhāpade ‘bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā avaseso anupasampanno nāmā’ti vuttattā ‘mātugāmopi anupasampannaggahaṇena gahitoyevā’ti catutthadivase mātugāmena saddhiṃ sayantassa dvīhi sikkhāpadehi dve pācittiyāni hontī’’ti vadanti.Gaṇṭhipadesupana tīsupi ‘‘imasmiṃ sikkhāpade mātugāmassa visuṃ vuccamānattā paṭhamasikkhāpade ‘bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā avaseso anupasampanno nāmā’ti purisasseva gahaṇaṃ anucchavika’’nti vuttaṃ, tadeva ca yuttataraṃ.

55. In the sixth, "because in the first training rule, it was said that 'except for a bhikkhu, the remainder are called not fully ordained,' even a 'woman is included by the designation not fully ordained'," some say, "on the fourth day, one lying down with a woman incurs two pācittiyas by two training rules." In the Gaṇṭhipadesu, however, in all three, "imasmiṃ sikkhāpade mātugāmassa visuṃ vuccamānattā paṭhamasikkhāpade 'bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā avaseso anupasampanno nāmā'ti purisasseva gahaṇaṃ anucchavika"nti vuttaṃ, tadeva ca yuttataraṃ- "because a woman is mentioned separately in this training rule, the inclusion of only a man in the first training rule, saying 'except for a bhikkhu, the remainder are called not fully ordained,' is inappropriate," it is said, and that is more reasonable.

‘‘paṭhamadivasepītipi-saddena catutthadivasepīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti, tampi akāraṇaṃpi-saddo sampiṇḍanatthoyevāti niyamābhāvato avadhāraṇatthassa ca sambhavato. Sambhāvane vāpi-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Tena idha paṭhamadivasepi tāva āpatti, dutiyādidivase kimeva vattabbanti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Sampiṇḍanatthepipi-sadde gayhamāne imināva sikkhāpadena āpajjitabbāpattiyā aññasmimpi divase āpajjanaṃ dīpeti, na paṭhamasikkhāpadena āpajjitabbāpattiyāti akāraṇameva tanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Matitthī pārājikavatthubhūtāpi anupādinnapakkhe ṭhitattā sahaseyyāpattiṃ na janetī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Atthaṅgate sūriye mātugāme nipanne bhikkhu nipajjatī’’ti vacanato divā sayantassa sahaseyyāpatti na hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pācittiyavatthukasenāsanaṃ, tattha mātugāmena saha nipajjanaṃ, sūriyatthaṅgamananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

‘‘paṭhamadivasepīti pi-saddena catutthadivasepīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti, tampi akāraṇaṃ pi-saddo sampiṇḍanatthoyevāti niyamābhāvato avadhāraṇatthassa ca sambhavato. They give the reason that "paṭhamadivasepī" - "even on the first day," the pi particle implies even on the fourth day, but that is unreasonable, because the pi particle is only for the meaning of combining, since there is no restriction, and because the meaning of specifying is possible. Sambhāvane vā pi-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Or the pi particle should be seen in the sense of possibility. Tena idha paṭhamadivasepi tāva āpatti, dutiyādidivase kimeva vattabbanti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Therefore, here it indicates the meaning that even on the first day there is an offense, what need to say about the second day, etc.? Sampiṇḍanatthepi pi-sadde gayhamāne imināva sikkhāpadena āpajjitabbāpattiyā aññasmimpi divase āpajjanaṃ dīpeti, na paṭhamasikkhāpadena āpajjitabbāpattiyāti akāraṇameva tanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Even when the pi particle is taken in the sense of combining, it indicates incurring an offense on another day by the offense to be incurred by this training rule, not the offense to be incurred by the first training rule, so that should be seen as an unreasonable system. "Matitthī pārājikavatthubhūtāpi anupādinnapakkhe ṭhitattā sahaseyyāpattiṃ na janetī"ti vadanti. It is said that "even a dead woman who is the subject of a pārājika does not cause an offense of shared sleeping because she remains in the unappropriated state." ‘‘Atthaṅgate sūriye mātugāme nipanne bhikkhu nipajjatī’’ti vacanato divā sayantassa sahaseyyāpatti na hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Because of the saying, "when the sun has set, when the woman has lain down, the bhikkhu lies down," it should be seen that there is no offense of shared sleeping for one lying down during the day. Pācittiyavatthukasenāsanaṃ, tattha mātugāmena saha nipajjanaṃ, sūriyatthaṅgamananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Here, there are these three factors: a lodging that is the object of a pācittiya, lying down there with a woman, and the setting of the sun.

Dutiyasahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Second Sahaseyya Training Rule is finished.

7. Dhammadesanāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Dhamma Teaching Training Rule

60-64.Sattame gharaṃ nayatītigharaṇī,gharanāyikā. Tenāha‘‘gharasāminī’’ti.Suṇhāti suṇisā.Na yakkhenātiādīnaṃ ‘‘aññatrā’’ti iminā sambandho. Purisaviggahaṃ gahetvā ṭhitena yakkhena vā petena vā tiracchānena vā saddhiṃ ṭhitāyapi desetuṃ na vaṭṭati.Akkharāya desetīti ettha ‘‘chappañcavācato uttari ‘imaṃ padaṃ bhāsissāmī’ti ekampi akkharaṃ vatvā tiṭṭhati, āpattiyevā’’ti vadanti.

60-64. In the seventh, gharaṃ nayatīti gharaṇī, gharanāyikā. gharaṃ nayatīti gharaṇī, gharanāyikā. Therefore, he said, ‘‘gharasāminī’’ti- "mistress of the house." Suṇhā means daughter-in-law. Na yakkhenā tiādīnaṃ ‘‘aññatrā’’ti iminā sambandho. Na yakkhenā tiādīnaṃ ‘‘aññatrā’’ti iminā sambandho. "Not by a yakka," etc., is connected to "except." Purisaviggahaṃ gahetvā ṭhitena yakkhena vā petena vā tiracchānena vā saddhiṃ ṭhitāyapi desetuṃ na vaṭṭati. It is not proper to teach even to one standing with a yakka, peta, or animal standing having taken a male form. Akkharāya desetīti ettha ‘‘chappañcavācato uttari ‘imaṃ padaṃ bhāsissāmī’ti ekampi akkharaṃ vatvā tiṭṭhati, āpattiyevā’’ti vadanti. Akkharāya desetīti ettha ‘‘chappañcavācato uttari ‘imaṃ padaṃ bhāsissāmī’ti ekampi akkharaṃ vatvā tiṭṭhati, āpattiyevā’’ti vadanti. Regarding "he teaches with (more than) five or six words," here, it is said that "if, after five or six utterances, he says even one syllable intending to speak this word and remains silent, there is an offense."

66.‘‘Eko gāthāpādoti idaṃ gāthābandhameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, aññattha pana vibhattiantapadameva gahetabba’’nti vadanti.‘‘Aṭṭhakathaṃ dhammapadaṃ jātakādivatthuṃ vāti imināpi porāṇaṃ saṅgītiāruḷhameva aṭṭhakathādi vutta’’nti vadanti. Aṭṭhakathādipāṭhaṃ ṭhapetvā damiḷādibhāsantarena yathāruci kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.Padasodhamme vuttappabhedoti iminā aññattha anāpattīti dīpeti.Uṭṭhahitvā puna nisīditvāti iriyāpathaparivattananayena nānāiriyāpathenapi anāpattīti dīpeti.Sabbaṃ cepi dīghanikāyaṃ kathetīti yāva na niṭṭhāti, tāva punadivasepi katheti.

66.‘‘Eko gāthāpādoti idaṃ gāthābandhameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, aññattha pana vibhattiantapadameva gahetabba’’nti vadanti. It is said that ""Eko gāthāpādo"" – this refers to the gāthā meter itself, but elsewhere only a word ending in a case inflection should be taken." ‘‘Aṭṭhakathaṃ dhammapadaṃ jātakādivatthuṃ vāti imināpi porāṇaṃ saṅgītiāruḷhameva aṭṭhakathādi vutta’’nti vadanti. It is said that "by ""Aṭṭhakathaṃ dhammapadaṃ jātakādivatthuṃ vā""- commentary, Dhammapada, Jātaka stories, etc.," also, only the old commentary, etc., that has ascended into the council is said. Aṭṭhakathādipāṭhaṃ ṭhapetvā damiḷādibhāsantarena yathāruci kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. One is allowed to speak as one likes in another language such as Tamil, setting aside the text of the commentary etc. Padasodhamme vuttappabhedoti iminā aññattha anāpattīti dīpeti. By this, "the distinction stated in the Padasodhamma," he indicates that there is no offense elsewhere. Uṭṭhahitvā puna nisīditvāti iriyāpathaparivattananayena nānāiriyāpathenapi anāpattīti dīpeti. By "having stood up, having sat down again," he indicates that there is no offense even by various postures, by means of changing postures. Sabbaṃ cepi dīghanikāyaṃ kathetīti yāva na niṭṭhāti, tāva punadivasepi katheti. Sabbaṃ cepi dīghanikāyaṃ kathetīti yāva na niṭṭhāti, tāva punadivasepi katheti. "Even if he recites the entire Dīgha Nikāya," he recites it again the next day until it is finished.

akiriyā. Mātugāmena saddhiṃ ṭhitassa ca viññūpurisassa ca upacāro aniyatesu vuttanayeneva gahetabbo. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Vuttalakkhaṇassa dhammassa channaṃ vācānaṃ upari desanā, vuttalakkhaṇo mātugāmo, iriyāpathapaavattanābhāvo, viññūpurisābhāvo, apañhavissajjanāti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.

akiriyā. there is no action Mātugāmena saddhiṃ ṭhitassa ca viññūpurisassa ca upacāro aniyatesu vuttanayeneva принятия. Mātugāmena saddhiṃ ṭhitassa ca viññūpurisassa ca upacāro aniyatesu vuttanayeneva принятия. The approach to a man of understanding standing with a woman should be taken in the same way as stated in the indefinite cases. Sesaṃ uttānameva. The rest is straightforward. Vuttalakkhaṇassa dhammassa channaṃ vācānaṃ upari desanā, vuttalakkhaṇo mātugāmo, iriyāpathapaavattanābhāvo, viññūpurisābhāvo, apañhavissajjanāti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni. Vuttalakkhaṇassa dhammassa channaṃ vācānaṃ upari desanā, vuttalakkhaṇo mātugāmo, iriyāpathapaavattanābhāvo, viññūpurisābhāvo, apañhavissajjanāti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni. Here, there are indeed these five factors: teaching the Dhamma with the stated characteristics beyond five or six words, a woman with the stated characteristics, no change of posture, no man of understanding present, and no answering of questions.

Dhammadesanāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Delivering Dhamma Talks is finished.

8. Bhūtārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Making Untrue Claims

77.Aṭṭhameantarāti parinibbānasamayato aññasmiṃ kāle.Atikaḍḍhiyamānenāti ‘‘vadatha, bhante, kiṃ tumhehi adhigata’’nti evaṃ nippīḷiyamānena. Anatikaḍḍhiyamānenapi pucchite vā apucchite vā tathārūpe kāraṇe sati ārocetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Teneva aññatarena daharabhikkhunā upavadito aññataro thero ‘‘āvuso, uparimaggatthāya vāyāmaṃ mā akāsi, khīṇāsavo tayā upavadito’’ti āha. Therena ca ‘‘atthi te, āvuso, imasmiṃ sāsane patiṭṭhā’’ti vutto daharabhikkhu ‘‘āma, bhante, sotāpanno aha’’nti avoca. ‘‘Kārako aya’’nti ñatvāpi paṭipattiyā amoghabhāvadassanena samuttejanāya sampahaṃsanāya ca ariyā attānaṃ pakāsentiyeva.Sutapariyattisīlaguṇanti sutaguṇaṃ pariyattiguṇaṃ sīlaguṇañca. Ummattakassa idha avacane kāraṇaṃ vadantena khittacittavedanaṭṭānampi avacane kāraṇaṃ vuttamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Iti-saddena vā ādiatthena khittacittavedanaṭṭe saṅgaṇhāti. Teneva vadati‘‘cittakkhepassa vā abhāvā’’ti.Diṭṭhisampannānanti maggaphaladiṭṭhiyā samannāgatānaṃ. Ariyānameva hi ummattakādibhāvo natthi. Jhānalābhino pana tasmiṃ sati jhānā parihāyanti, tasmā tesaṃ abhūtārocanapaccayā anāpatti vattabbā, na bhūtārocanapaccayā. Tenevāha‘‘bhūtārocanapaccayā anāpatti na vattabbā’’ti.

77.In the eighth, antarā means at a time other than the time of final passing away (parinibbāna). Atikaḍḍhiyamānena means being pressed hard, "Venerable, what have you attained?" Even when not pressed, it is permissible to declare when there is such a reason, whether asked or unasked. Therefore, when one elder was criticised by a certain young monk, the elder said, "Friend, do not strive for the higher paths, you have criticised a khīṇāsava." When the young monk was asked by the elder, "Friend, do you have a foundation in this Dispensation?" he replied, "Yes, venerable, I am a sotāpanna." Even knowing that he is a "doer (kārako)," the noble ones reveal themselves for the sake of stimulating effort through showing the unfailing nature of practice and for rejoicing. Sutapariyattisīlaguṇa means the quality of learning (sutaguṇa), the quality of scriptural study (pariyattiguṇa), and the quality of virtue (sīlaguṇa). It should be understood that by stating the reason for not speaking in the case of the insane, the reason for not speaking in the case of those afflicted by a disturbed mind or pain has also been stated. The word iti includes those afflicted by a disturbed mind or pain by way of indication. Therefore, he says, "or due to the absence of mental derangement." Diṭṭhisampannāna means those endowed with the view of the paths and fruits. Indeed, only noble ones do not experience insanity, etc. Those who have attained jhāna, however, fall away from jhāna when that occurs; therefore, it must be stated that there is no offense for them due to the condition of making untrue claims, not due to the condition of making true claims. Therefore, he says, "it should not be stated that there is no offense due to the condition of making true claims."

Pubbe avuttehīti catutthapārājike avuttehi. Idañca sikkhāpadaṃ paṇṇattiajānanavasena acittakasamuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Ariyā cettha paṇṇattiṃ jānantā vītikkamaṃ na karonti, puthujjanā pana paṇṇattiṃ jānitvāpi vītikkamaṃ karonti, te ca satthuno āṇāvītikkamacetanāya balavaakusalabhāvato jhānā parihāyantīti daṭṭhabbaṃ, ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena ariyapuggale eva sandhāya‘‘kusalābyākatacittehi dvicitta’’nti vuttaṃ. Paṇṇattiṃ ajānantā pana jhānalābhī puthujjanā vatthumhi lobhavasena akusalacittenapi na ārocentīti natthi. Idha dukkhavedanāya abhāvato ‘‘dvivedana’’nti imassa anurūpaṃ katvādvicittanti idaṃ vuttanti evaṃ vā ettha adhippāyo gahetabbo. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Uttarimanussadhammassa bhūtatā, anupasampannassa ārocanaṃ, taṅkhaṇavijānanā, anaññappadesoti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

Pubbe avuttehī means with what was not said in the fourth pārājika. And this training rule is of an unintentional origin due to not knowing the rule (paṇṇatti). Here, noble ones, knowing the rule, do not commit transgressions, but ordinary people, even knowing the rule, commit transgressions, and it should be understood that they fall away from jhāna due to the powerful unwholesome nature of the intention to transgress the Teacher's command, and "two minds with wholesome or undetermined thoughts" is stated referring only to the noble individual by way of the highest determination. But ordinary people who have attained jhāna, not knowing the rule, do not declare even with an unwholesome mind due to greed in the object, so there is not that. Here, since there is no feeling of pain, making it consistent with "two feelings," it should be understood that this "two minds" is said, or that is the meaning here. The rest is clear. Being true about the higher human state, declaring to one who is not fully ordained, immediate knowledge, and not another place: these are the four factors in this case.

Bhūtārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Making Untrue Claims is finished.

9. Duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Declaring Serious Offenses

78.Navameduṭṭhullasaddatthadassanatthanti duṭṭhullasaddassa atthadassanatthaṃ. Atthe hi dassite saddopi ‘‘ayaṃ etesu atthesu vattatī’’ti dassitoyeva hoti. ‘‘Yaṃ yaṃ duṭṭhullasaddena abhidhīyati, taṃ sabbaṃ dassetuṃ pārājikāni vuttānī’’ti ayañhettha adhippāyo.Tatrāyaṃ vicāraṇāti tatra pāḷiyaṃ ayaṃ vicāraṇā, tatra pāḷiaṭṭhakathāsu vā ayaṃ vicāraṇā.Tattha bhaveyyāti tattha kassaci vimati evaṃ bhaveyya. Anupasampannassa duṭṭhullārocane viya dukkaṭena bhavitabbanti āha‘‘dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatī’’ti.Akkosantopi dukkaṭaṃ āpajjeyyāti omasavādena dukkaṭaṃ āpajjeyya. Adhippāyaṃ ajānantenapi aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ vacaneyeva ṭhātabbanti dīpanatthaṃ‘‘aṭṭhakathācariyāva ettha pamāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Punapi aṭṭhakathāvacanameva upapattito daḷhaṃ katvā patiṭṭhapento‘‘imināpi ceta’’ntiādimāha.

78.In the ninth, duṭṭhullasaddatthadassanatthaṃ means for the purpose of showing the meaning of the word duṭṭhulla. For when the meaning is shown, the word, too, is shown to "apply to these meanings." The idea here is that "the pārājikas have been stated to show all that is designated by the word duṭṭhulla." Tatrāyaṃ vicāraṇā means this is the inquiry in that passage, or this is the inquiry in the commentaries on that passage. Tattha bhaveyyā means there might be doubt in someone thus. He says "he incurs a dukkaṭa," fearing that it would be a dukkaṭa as in the declaration of a duṭṭhulla to one not fully ordained. Akkosantopi dukkaṭaṃ āpajjeyya means he would incur a dukkaṭa by offensive language. To show that one should rely only on the words of the commentary masters even when not understanding the intention, "the commentary masters are the authority here" is stated. Again, establishing the commentary's statement firmly from the point of view of reason, he says, "also by this," etc.

80.‘‘Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā’’ti vuttattā sammuti atthīti gahetabbāti āha‘‘idha vuttattāyevā’’tiādi.

80.He says "just because it is stated here," etc., because it should be taken that there is consent, since it is stated "except by consent of the monks."

82.Ādito pañca sikkhāpadānīti pāṇātipātādīni pañca sikkhāpadāni.‘‘Sesānīti vikālabhojanādīni pañcā’’ti vadanti. Keci pana ‘‘ādito paṭṭhāya pañca sikkhāpadānīti sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni pañcā’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Pāṇātipātādīni hi daseva sikkhāpadāni sāmaṇerānaṃ paññattāni. Vuttañhetaṃ –

82.Ādito pañca sikkhāpadānī means the five training rules beginning with abstaining from killing living beings. "Sesānī means the remaining five beginning with eating at the wrong time," some say. But some say, "The five training rules beginning from the beginning are the five beginning with the emission of semen," that should not be taken. For the ten training rules beginning with abstaining from killing living beings are indeed prescribed for novices. For it was stated:

‘‘Atha kho sāmaṇerānaṃ etadahosi ‘kati nu kho amhākaṃ sikkhāpadāni, kattha ca amhehi sikkhitabba’nti? Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāmaṇerānaṃ dasa sikkhāpadāni, tesu ca sāmaṇerehi sikkhituṃ, pāṇātipātā veramaṇī adinnādānā veramaṇī’’tiādi (mahāva. 106).

"Then the novices had this thought: 'How many training rules do we have, and in what should we train ourselves?' They reported this matter to the Blessed One. I allow, monks, ten training rules for novices, and in them novices should train themselves, abstaining from killing living beings, abstaining from taking what is not given," etc. (mahāva. 106).

‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhi…pe… ajjhācāro nāmāti vutta’’nti. Imināpi cetaṃ siddhaṃ ‘‘anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhiādi duṭṭhullaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti. Ajjhācāro nāmāti hi vadanto anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhiādi kevalaṃ ajjhācāro nāma hoti, na pana duṭṭhullo nāma ajjhācāroti dīpeti. ‘‘Ajjhācāro nāmāti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā akattabbarūpattā ca anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhiādīni daṇḍakammavatthupakkhaṃ bhajanti, tāni ca aññassa anupasampannassa avaṇṇakāmatāya ārocento bhikkhu dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatī’’ti vadanti. Idha panaanupasampannaggahaṇena sāmaṇerasāmaṇerīsikkhamānānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Antimavatthuṃ anajjhāpannassa bhikkhuno savatthuko saṅghādiseso, anupasampannassa ārocanaṃ, bhikkhusammutiyā abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

"sukkavissaṭṭhi…pe… is called transgression," it is said. By this too it is established that "for one not fully ordained, the emission of semen, etc., is not called a duṭṭhulla." For in saying that it is called transgression, it indicates that for one not fully ordained, the emission of semen, etc., is only called transgression, but not a transgression called duṭṭhulla. "Because it is stated in the commentary that it is called transgression and because of the nature of being unfit to be done, the emission of semen, etc., for one not fully ordained, fall under the category of objects for punishment, and a monk incurs a dukkaṭa by declaring them to another who is not fully ordained with the desire to speak ill of him," some say. Here, by the anupasampanna (not fully ordained) is meant the inclusion of novices, female novices, and probationers. The rest here is clear. The monk's being not free of the last object and having possession, declaring to one not fully ordained, and the absence of consent of the monks: these are the three factors in this case.

Duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Declaring Serious Offenses is finished.

10. Pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Digging the Earth

84-86.Dasameekindriyanti ‘‘kāyindriyaṃ atthī’’ti maññamānā vadanti.Muṭṭhippamāṇāti muṭṭhinā saṅgahetabbappamāṇā. Ettha kiñcāpi yebhuyyapaṃsuṃ appapaṃsuñca pathaviṃ vatvā upaḍḍhapaṃsukā pathavī na vuttā, tathāpi paṇṇattivajjasikkhāpadesu sāvasesapaññattiyāpi sambhavato upaḍḍhapaṃsukāyapi pathaviyā pācittiyamevāti gahetabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘sabbacchannādīsu upaḍḍhe dukkaṭassa vuttattā idhāpi dukkaṭaṃ yutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ pācittiyavatthukañca anāpattivatthukañca duvidhaṃ pathaviṃ ṭhapetvā aññissā dukkaṭavatthukāya tatiyāya pathaviyā abhāvato. Dveyeva hi pathaviyo vuttā ‘‘jātā ca pathavī ajātā ca pathavī’’ti. Tasmā dvīsu aññatarāya pathaviyā bhavitabbaṃ, vinayavinicchaye ca sampatte garukeyeva ṭhātabbattā na sakkā ettha anāpattiyā bhavituṃ. Sabbacchannādīsu pana upaḍḍhe dukkaṭaṃ yuttaṃ tattha tādisassa dukkaṭavatthuno sabbhāvā.

84-86.In the tenth, ekindriya means "there is the body sense," some assume. Muṭṭhippamāṇā means an amount that can be gathered with the fist. Here, although mostly soil and little soil are mentioned as earth, and half soil earth is not mentioned, still, since incomplete declarations are also possible in training rules that are offenses against regulations, it should be taken that there is only a pācittiya for even half soil earth. But some say, "Since a dukkaṭa is stated for half in all-covered, etc., a dukkaṭa is also fitting here," that is not fitting because, having set aside earth that is the object of a pācittiya and earth that is the object of no offense, there is no third kind of earth that is the object of a dukkaṭa. For only two kinds of earth are mentioned: "earth that has life and earth that has no life." Therefore, it must be one or the other of the two kinds of earth, and since one must rely on the serious case when a decision in the Vinaya is reached, it is not possible here for there to be no offense. But in all-covered, etc., a dukkaṭa is fitting, since there is such a thing there that is the object of a dukkaṭa.

‘‘Pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇā’’ti vadati, vaṭṭatīti ‘‘imasmiṃ okāse’’ti aniyametvā vuttattā vaṭṭati.‘‘Imaṃ valliṃ khaṇā’’ti vuttepi pathavīkhaṇanaṃ sandhāya pavattavohārattā imināva sikkhāpadena āpatti, na bhūtagāmapātabyatāya.Kuṭehīti ghaṭehi.Tanukakaddamoti udakamissakakaddamo. So ca udakagatikattā vaṭṭati.Omakacātumāsanti ūnacātumāsaṃ.Ovaṭṭhanti devena ovaṭṭhaṃ.Akatapabbhāreti avaḷañjanaṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tādise hi vammikassa sabbhāvoti.Mūsikukkuraṃnāma mūsikāhi khaṇitvā bahi katapaṃsurāsi.Eseva nayoti omakacātumāsaovaṭṭhoyeva vaṭṭatīti attho.

"He says, 'Dig a pond,' it is permissible," it is permissible because it is said without specifying "in this place." "Dig this creeper" also, since the expression occurs referring to digging the earth, there is an offense by this training rule itself, not due to destroying vegetable life. Kuṭehī means with pots. Tanukakaddamo means mud mixed with water. And that is permissible because it is the nature of water. Omakacātumāsa means less than four months. Ovaṭṭhaṃ means covered by rain (deva). Akatapabbhāre means stated to show the place of descending. For there is the presence of an ant-hill in such a place. Mūsikukkuraṃ means a heap of soil thrown out by mice after digging. Eseva nayo means the meaning is that less than four months and covered by rain is permissible.

Ekadivasampi na vaṭṭatīti ovaṭṭhaekadivasātikkantopi vikopetuṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Heṭṭhābhūmisambandhepi ca gokaṇṭake bhūmito chinditvā uddhaṃ ṭhitattā accuggatamatthakato chinditvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Sakaṭṭhāne atiṭṭhamānaṃ katvā pādehi madditvā chinditvā āloḷitakaddamampi gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.Tatoti tato purāṇasenāsanato.Iṭṭhakaṃ gaṇhāmītiādi suddhacittaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Udakenāti ujukaṃ ākāsatoyeva patanakaudakena. ‘‘Sace pana aññattha paharitvā patitena udakena temitaṃ hoti, vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.Uccāletvāti ukkhipitvā.Tena apadesenāti tena lesena.

Ekadivasampi na vaṭṭatī means it is not permissible to disturb even if one day has passed since being covered by rain. "Even in connection with the lower ground, it is permissible to cut off and take the gokaṇṭaka after cutting it off from the ground and it stands upwards from the very high top," some say. It is permissible to make it not stand in its own place, and after crushing it with the feet and cutting it off, to take even the stirred mud. Tato means from that old dwelling. Iṭṭhakaṃ gaṇhāmī etc., is stated referring to a pure mind. Udakenā means with water falling directly from the sky itself. "But if it is wetted with water that has struck elsewhere and fallen, it is permissible," some say. Uccāletvā means after lifting it up. Tena apadesenā means with that pretext.

87-88.Avisayattāanāpattīti ettha sacepi nibbāpetuṃ sakkā hoti, paṭhamaṃ suddhacittena dinnattā ‘‘dahatū’’ti sallakkhetvāpi tiṭṭhati, anāpatti.Ovaṭṭhaṃ channanti paṭhamaṃ ovaṭṭhaṃ pacchā channaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Jātapathavī, pathavīsaññitā, khaṇanakhaṇāpanānaṃ aññataranti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

87-88.Avisayattā anāpattī Here, even if it is possible to extinguish, since it was given first with a pure mind, even if he thinks "let it burn," it stands, there is no offense. Ovaṭṭhaṃ channaṃ means first covered by rain, later thatched. The rest is clear. Earth that has life, being aware of earth, one or the other of digging and causing to dig: these are the three factors in this case.

Pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Digging the Earth is finished.

Niṭṭhito musāvādavaggo paṭhamo.

The First Chapter, the Musāvāda (False Speech) Chapter, is finished.

2. Bhūtagāmavaggo

2. The Bhūtagāma (Vegetable Life) Chapter

1. Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Vegetable Life

89.Senāsanavaggassa paṭhameniggahetuṃ asakkontoti sandhāretuṃ asakkonto. Iminā pana vacanena dārakassa tattha upanītabhāvo tena ca diṭṭhabhāvo vuttoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena hi bhikkhunā taṃ rukkhaṃ chindituṃ āraddhe tattha nibbattā ekā taruṇaputtā devadhītā puttaṃ aṅkenādāya ṭhitā taṃ yāci ‘‘mā me sāmi vimānaṃ chindi, na sakkhissāmi puttakaṃ ādāya anāvāsā vicaritu’’nti. So ‘‘ahaṃ aññattha īdisaṃ rukkhaṃ na labhissāmī’’ti tassā vacanaṃ nādiyi. Sā ‘‘imampi tāva dārakaṃ oloketvā oramissatī’’ti puttaṃ rukkhasākhāya ṭhapesi. So bhikkhu ukkhittaṃ pharasuṃ sandhāretuṃ asakkonto dārakassa bāhaṃ chindi. Evañca sayito vimāne sayito nāma hotīti katvā vuttaṃ‘‘rukkhaṭṭhakadibbavimāne nipannassā’’ti.

89.In the first of the Senāsana Chapter, niggahetuṃ asakkonto means being unable to restrain. By this statement it should be understood that the child was brought there and seen by him. For when that monk began to cut that tree, a young daughter of a tree deity born there, holding her son in her lap, begged him, "Do not cut my mansion, lord, I will not be able to wander without a dwelling, taking my son." He did not heed her words, saying, "I will not get such a tree elsewhere." She placed her son on a branch of the tree, thinking, "He will stop, having looked at this child for a moment." The monk, unable to restrain the raised axe, cut off the child's arm. And it was stated "of one lying down in a divine mansion in a tree" because it is considered lying down in a mansion when sleeping.

Rukkhaṭṭhakadibbavimāneti ca sākhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Rukkhassa upari nibbattañhi vimānaṃ rukkhapaṭibaddhattā‘‘rukkhaṭṭhakavimāna’’nti vuccati. Sākhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ pana sabbasākhāsannissitaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Tattha yaṃ rukkhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ hoti, taṃ yāva rukkhassa mūlamattampi tiṭṭhati, tāva na nassati. Sākhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ pana sākhāsu bhijjamānāsu tattha tattheva bhijjitvā sabbasākhāsu bhinnāsu sabbaṃ bhijjati, idampi ca vimānaṃ sākhaṭṭhakaṃ, tasmā rukkhe chinne taṃ vimānaṃ sabbaso vinaṭṭhaṃ, teneva sā devatā bhagavato santikā laddhe aññasmiṃ vimāne vasi.Bāhuṃ thanamūleyeva chindīti aṃsena saddhiṃ bāhaṃ chindi. Iminā ca rukkhadevatānaṃ gattāni chijjanti, na cātumahārājikādīnaṃ viya acchejjānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Rukkhadhammeti rukkhapakatiyaṃ, rukkhasabhāveti attho. Rukkhānaṃ viya chedanādīsu akuppanañhi rukkhadhammo nāma.

And rukkhaṭṭhakadibbavimāne is stated referring to a branch-based mansion. For a mansion that is born on top of a tree is called "rukkhaṭṭhakavimāna" because of being connected to the tree. But a branch-based mansion stands relying on all the branches. There, the tree-based mansion does not perish as long as even the root of the tree stands. But the branch-based mansion breaks in each place when the branches are broken, and when all the branches are broken, all of it is broken, and this mansion too was branch-based; therefore, when the tree was cut, that mansion was completely destroyed, therefore that deity lived in another mansion obtained from the Blessed One. Bāhuṃ thanamūleyeva chindī means he cut off the arm together with the shoulder. And by this it should be understood that the bodies of tree deities are cut, not like those of the Four Great Kings, etc., which are uncuttable. Rukkhadhamme means in the nature of trees, the nature of trees is the meaning. For the unchangingness in cuttings, etc., like trees is called the nature of trees.

Uppatitanti uppannaṃ.Bhantanti dhāvantaṃ.Vārayeti niggaṇheyya. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā nāma cheko sārathi ativegena dhāvantaṃ rathaṃ niggahetvā yathicchakaṃ peseti, evaṃ yo puggalo uppannaṃ kodhaṃ vāraye niggaṇhituṃ sakkoti, tamahaṃ sārathiṃ brūmi. Itaro pana rājauparājādīnaṃ rathasārathijano rasmiggāho nāma hoti, na uttamasārathīti.

Uppatitaṃ means arisen. Bhantaṃ means running. Vāraye means should restrain. This is said: just as a skilled charioteer restrains a chariot running with excessive speed and drives it as he pleases, so I call that person who is able to restrain arisen anger a charioteer. But the other chariot drivers of kings, viceroys, etc., are called rein-holders, not excellent charioteers.

yoti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1) yo yādiso khattiyakulā vā pabbajito brāhmaṇakulā vā pabbajito navo vā majjhimo vā thero vā.Uppatitanti uddhamuddhaṃ patitaṃ, gataṃ pavattanti attho, uppannanti vuttaṃ hoti.Kodhanti ‘‘anatthaṃ me caratīti āghāto jāyatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.340; a. ni. 9.29) nayena sutte vuttānaṃ navannaṃ, ‘‘atthaṃ me na caratī’’tiādīnañca tappaṭipakkhato siddhānaṃ navannamevāti aṭṭhārasannaṃ khāṇukaṇṭakādinā aṭṭhānena saddhiṃ ekūnavīsatiyā āghātavatthūnaṃ aññatarāghātavatthusambhavaṃ āghātaṃ.Visaṭanti vitthataṃ.Sappavisanti sappassa visaṃ.Ivāti opammavacanaṃ.I-kāralopaṃ katvā va-icceva vuttaṃ.Osadhehīti agadehi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā visatikicchako vejjo sappena daṭṭho sabbaṃ kāyaṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ visaṭaṃ sappavisaṃ mūlakhandhatacapattapupphādīnaṃ aññatarehi, nānābhesajjehi payojetvā katehi vā osadhehi khippameva vineyya, evameva yo yathāvuttena āghātavatthunā uppatitaṃ cittasantānaṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ kodhaṃ vinayanupāyesu tadaṅgavinayādīsu yena kenaci upāyena vineti nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti byantiṃ karoti, so bhikkhu jahāti orapāraṃ. So evaṃ kodhaṃ vinento bhikkhu yasmā kodho tatiyamaggena sabbaso pahīyati, tasmā orapārasaññitāni pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni jahātīti. Avisesena hipāranti tīrassa nāmaṃ, tasmā orāni ca tāni saṃsārasāgarassa pārabhūtāni cāti katvā ‘‘orapāra’’nti vuccati.

Yoti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1): Yo means anyone, of whatever kind, whether he has gone forth from a noble clan or gone forth from a brahmin clan, whether he is new, of middle standing, or an elder. Uppatitanti: Uppatita means arisen, gone, spread upwards; it means produced, arisen. Kodhanti: Kodha, anger, is the resentment arising from any of the eighteen grounds for resentment mentioned in the Suttas in the manner beginning with "He is working for my harm, therefore hate arises" (dī. ni. 3.340; a. ni. 9.29), namely the nine mentioned in the Suttas and the nine that are established as the opposite of "He is not working for my benefit," etc., together with an inappropriate stimulus such as a stake or thorn, making nineteen grounds for resentment. Visaṭanti: Visaṭa means widespread. Sappavisanti: Sappavisa means the poison of a snake. Ivāti: Ivā is a word of comparison. The i-sound having been dropped, only va is stated. Osadhehīti: Osadhehi means with antidotes. This is what is said: Just as a physician skilled in treating poison quickly eliminates the widespread snake poison that has spread throughout the entire body of someone bitten by a snake with medicines made by applying roots, stems, bark, leaves, flowers, or various remedies, in the same way, that bhikkhu abandons the near and far shore who, by some means among the methods for subduing anger, such as temporary suppression, subdues, does not tolerate, abandons, and eliminates the anger that has arisen and stands overwhelming the continuum of consciousness due to a ground for resentment that has been described as before. Because a bhikkhu, thus subduing anger, utterly abandons anger with the third path, therefore he abandons the five lower fetters known as the near and far shore. For without distinction, pāranti, pāra is a name for a shore; therefore, since they are near and they are the far shore of the ocean of saṃsāra, it is called "near and far shore."

oranti sakattabhāvo.Pāranti parattabhāvo. Oraṃ vā cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni, pāraṃ cha bāhirāyatanāni. Tathā oraṃ manussaloko, pāraṃ devaloko. Oraṃ kāmadhātu, pāraṃ rūpārūpadhātu. Oraṃ kāmarūpabhavo, pāraṃ arūpabhavo. Oraṃ attabhāvo, pāraṃ attabhāvasukhupakaraṇāni. Evametasmiṃ orapāre catutthamaggena chandarāgaṃ pajahanto ‘‘jahāti orapāra’’nti vuccati. Ettha ca kiñcāpi anāgāmino kāmarāgassa pahīnattā idhattabhāvādīsu chandarāgo eva natthi, apica kho panassa vaṇṇappakāsanatthaṃ sabbametaṃ orapārabhedaṃ saṅgahetvā tattha chandarāgappahānena ‘‘jahāti orapāra’’nti vuttaṃ.

Oranti: Ora means one's own state. Pāranti: Pāra means the state of another. Or, ora means the six internal sense bases, pāra means the six external sense bases. Similarly, ora means the human world, pāra means the deva world. Ora means the kāmadhātu, pāra means the rūpadhātu and arūpadhātu. Ora means existence in the kāma and rūpa realms, pāra means existence in the arūpa realm. Ora means one's own being, pāra means the requisites for happiness in one's own being. Thus, while abandoning sensual lust in this near and far shore with the fourth path, it is said, "he abandons the near and far shore." And here, although the anāgāmin has abandoned sensual lust, so there is no sensual lust in the state of being here, nevertheless, including all this distinction of near and far shore in order to express its quality, it is said, "he abandons the near and far shore" by the abandonment of sensual lust therein.

‘‘urago jiṇṇamivattacaṃ purāṇa’’nti. Tattha urena gacchatītiurago,sappassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. So duvidho kāmarūpī ca akāmarūpī ca. Kāmarūpīpi duvidho jalajo thalajo ca. Jalajo jale eva kāmarūpaṃ labhati, na thalesaṅkhapālajātake(jā. 2.17.143 ādayo) saṅkhapālanāgarājā viya. Thalajo thale eva, na jale. So jajjarabhāvena jiṇṇaṃ, cirakālatāya purāṇañcāti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ tacaṃ jahanto catubbidhena jahati sajātiyaṃ ṭhito jigucchanto nissāya thāmenāti. Sajāti nāma sappajāti dīghattabhāvo. Uragā hi pañcasu ṭhānesu sajātiṃ nātivattanti upapattiyaṃ cutiyaṃ vissaṭṭhaniddokkamane sajātiyā methunapaṭisevane jiṇṇatacāpanayane cāti. Tasmā yadā tacaṃ jahati, tadā sajātiyaṃyeva ṭhatvā jahati. Sajātiyaṃ ṭhitopi ca jigucchanto jahati. Jigucchanto nāma yadā upaḍḍhaṭṭhāne mutto hoti, upaḍḍhaṭṭhāne amutto olambati, tadā naṃ aṭṭīyanto jahati, evaṃ jigucchantopi ca daṇḍantaraṃ vā mūlantaraṃ vā pāsāṇantaraṃ vā nissāya jahati. Nissāya jahantopi ca thāmaṃ janetvā ussāhaṃ karitvā vīriyena vaṅkaṃ naṅguṭṭhaṃ katvā passasantova phaṇaṃ karitvā jahati. Evaṃ jahitvā yenakāmaṃ pakkamati.

‘‘urago jiṇṇamivattacaṃ purāṇa’’nti: ‘‘urago jiṇṇamivattacaṃ purāṇa’’nti: There, because it goes with the breast, urago is a designation for a snake. And it is of two kinds: having form in the kāma realm and formless. The one having form in the kāma realm is also of two kinds: living in water and living on land. The one living in water obtains form in the kāma realm only in water, not on land, like the Nāga king Saṅkhapāla in the Saṅkhapāla Jātaka (jā. 2.17.143 ff.). The one living on land does so only on land, not in water. Abandoning the skin that has become old due to being worn out and ancient due to long time, he abandons it in four ways: standing in his own species, loathing, relying, and with strength. One's own species (sajāti) means the snake species, the state of being long. For snakes do not transgress their own species in five instances: in rebirth, in death, in emitting venom, in going out, in mating within their own species, and in shedding old skin. Therefore, when it abandons its skin, it abandons it while standing in its own species. And even standing in its own species, it abandons it loathing. Loathing means when it is half-freed in one place and hangs half-unfreed in another, then it abandons it feeling disgusted; thus, even loathing, it abandons it relying on a stick, a root, or a stone. And even abandoning it relying, it abandons it generating strength, making an effort, contracting its tail with energy, breathing out, and raising its hood. Having abandoned it thus, it departs wherever it pleases.

Evameva ayampi bhikkhu orapāraṃ jahitukāmo catubbidhena jahati sajātiyaṃ ṭhito jigucchanto nissāya thāmenāti. Sajāti nāma bhikkhuno ‘‘ariyāya jātiyā jāto’’ti (ma. ni. 2.351) vacanato sīlaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192). Evametissaṃ sajātiyaṃ ṭhito bhikkhu taṃ sakattabhāvādibhedaṃ orapāraṃ jiṇṇapurāṇattacamiva taṃ dukkhaṃ janentaṃ tattha tattha ādīnavadassanena jigucchanto kalyāṇamitte nissāya adhimattasammāvāyāmasaṅkhātaṃ thāmaṃ janetvā ‘‘divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṃ parisodhetī’’ti (a. ni. 3.16; 4.37) vuttanayena rattindivaṃ chadhā vibhajitvā ghaṭento vāyamanto urago viya vaṅkaṃ naṅguṭṭhaṃ pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā urago viya passasanto ayampi asithilaparakkamatāya vāyamanto uragova phaṇaṃ karitvā ayampi ñāṇavipphāraṃ janetvā uragova tacaṃ orapāraṃ jahati, jahitvā ca urago viya ohitataco yenakāmaṃ pakkamati, ayampi ohitabhāro anupādisesanibbānadhātudisaṃ pakkamatīti.

In the very same way, this bhikkhu also, wishing to abandon the near and far shore, abandons it in four ways: standing in his own species, loathing, relying, and with strength. One's own species means virtue, because of the bhikkhu's "born in the noble lineage" (ma. ni. 2.351). Therefore, he said, "A wise man, establishing himself in virtue..." (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192). Thus, this bhikkhu, standing in his own species, loathing that near and far shore with its distinction of one's own being, etc., which generates suffering, like old, ancient skin, by seeing the danger in it here and there, relying on a good friend, generating strength consisting of exceedingly right effort, "purifies his mind during the day by walking and sitting from obstructive qualities" (a. ni. 3.16; 4.37) dividing the night and day into six parts in the manner stated, striving and making effort, contracting his tail like a snake, folding his legs cross-legged, breathing out like a snake, he also, striving with unflagging exertion, generating a burst of knowledge like a snake raising its hood, he also abandons the near and far shore, like a snake shedding its skin, and having abandoned it, like a snake that has shed its skin, he departs wherever he pleases, and he also, having laid down his burden, departs towards the element of Nibbāna with no residue of clinging.

90.Bhavantīti iminā viruḷhamūle nīlabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā vaḍḍhamānake taruṇagacche dasseti.Ahuvunti iminā pana vaḍḍhitvā ṭhite mahante rukkhagacchādike dasseti.Bhavantīti imassa vivaraṇaṃ‘‘jāyanti vaḍḍhantī’’ti,ahuvunti imassa‘‘jātā vaḍḍhitā’’ti.Rāsīti suddhaṭṭhakadhammasamūho.Bhūtānanti tathāladdhasamaññānaṃ aṭṭhadhammānaṃ. ‘‘Bhūtānaṃ gāmo’’ti vuttepi avayavavinimuttassa samudāyassa abhāvato bhūtasaññitā teyeva tiṇarukkhalatādayo gayhanti. ‘‘Bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā haritabhāvamāpannā rukkhagacchādayo devatāhi pariggayhanti, tasmā bhūtānaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānatāya bhūtānaṃ gāmo’’tipi vadanti.Rukkhādīnantiādi-saddena osadhigacchalatādayo veditabbā.

90.Bhavantīti: By this, he shows young plants that have taken on a blue color, having reached a firmly established root, and are growing. Ahuvunti: By this, however, he shows large tree clumps, etc., that have grown up and are standing. Bhavantīti: The explanation of bhavantī is ‘‘jāyanti vaḍḍhantī’’ti, "they are born, they grow." Ahuvunti: The explanation of ahuvu is ‘‘jātā vaḍḍhitā’’ti, "they are born, they have grown." Rāsīti: Rāsī means a heap of the pure eight things. Bhūtānanti: Bhūtāna means of the eight things that have obtained that designation. Even when it is said, "a village of beings," because of the absence of a community free from parts, just those grasses, trees, vines, etc., designated as beings, are taken. "Having stood on the earth, tree clumps, etc., that have taken on a green color are accepted by deities, therefore, it is called a village of beings because it is a dwelling place of beings," so they also say. Rukkhādīnanti: By the ādi-sound, medicinal herbs, clumps, vines, etc., should be understood.

‘‘jīvasaññino hi moghapurisā manussā rukkhasmi’’ntiādi.

‘‘jīvasaññino hi moghapurisā manussā rukkhasmi’’ntiādi: ‘‘jīvasaññino hi moghapurisā manussā rukkhasmi’’ntiādi: "For foolish men, humans, perceive life in trees," etc.

91.‘‘Mūle jāyantī’’tiādīsu attho upari attanā vuccamānappakārena sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttoti āha‘‘evaṃ santepi…pe… na samentī’’ti.Vijāta-saddo idhavi-saddalopaṃ katvā niddiṭṭhoti āha‘‘vijātānī’’ti.Vijāta-saddo ca ‘‘vijātā itthī’’tiādīsu viya pasūtavacanoti āha‘‘pasūtānī’’ti. Pasūti ca nāmettha nibbattapaṇṇamūlatāti āha‘‘nibbattapaṇṇamūlānī’’ti. Iminā imaṃ dīpeti ‘‘nibbattapaṇṇamūlāni bījāni bhūtagāmasaṅkhameva gacchanti, tesu ca vattamāno bījajāta-saddo ruḷhīvasena rukkhādīsupi vattatī’’ti. Purimasmiṃ atthavikappe pana bījehi jātānaṃ rukkhalatādīnaṃyeva bhūtagāmatā vuttā.

91.‘‘Mūle jāyantī’’tiādīsu: He said, ‘‘evaṃ santepi…pe… na samentī’’ti, "Even so...they do not agree," because the meaning in "‘‘Mūle jāyantī’’tiādi" has been stated in the Sinhala commentary in the manner that will be stated by myself above. Vijāta-saddo: He said, ‘‘vijātānī’’ti, "vijāta" because the word vi has been dropped here. Vijāta-saddo: And he said ‘‘pasūtānī’’ti, "pasūtānī" because the word vijāta is a word for giving birth, as in "a woman who has given birth," etc. Pasūti ca: And giving birth here means the shoots and roots that have sprung up, therefore he said ‘‘nibbattapaṇṇamūlānī’’ti, "shoots and roots that have sprung up." By this he shows this: "Shoots and roots that have sprung up go only to the count of the community of seeds, and the word bījajāta referring to them is used of trees, etc., by way of common usage." In the previous interpretation of meaning, however, only trees, vines, etc., born from seeds were stated to be the community of seeds.

Tāni dassentoti tāni bījāni dassento.Mūlabījantiādīsu mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Phaḷubījanti pabbabījaṃ. Paccayantarasamavāye sadisaphaluppattiyā visesakāraṇabhāvato viruhanasamatthe sāraphale niruḷhobīja-saddo. Tadatthasaṃsiddhiyā mūlādīsupi kesuci pavattatīti mūlādito nivattanatthaṃ ekena bījasaddena visesetvā vuttaṃ‘‘bījabīja’’nti ‘‘rūparūpaṃ, dukkhadukkha’’nti ca yathā.Bījato nibbattena bījaṃ dassitanti kāriyopacārena kāraṇaṃ dassitanti dīpeti.

Tāni dassentoti: Tāni dassentoti, showing those seeds. Mūlabījantiādīsu: In mūlabījantiādi, the root itself is the seed, mūlabīja, root-seed. The same method applies in the remaining cases. Phaḷubījanti: Phaḷubīja means stem-seed. Because it is a special cause for the arising of similar fruits when other conditions are favorable, the word bīja, seed, is established in ripe fruits capable of sprouting. In order to accomplish that meaning, it also applies to roots, etc., in some cases, therefore, in order to exclude it from roots, etc., it is stated specifying it with one word bīja, seed, ‘‘bījabīja’’nti, "seed-seed," just as "form-form, suffering-suffering." Bījato nibbattena bījaṃ dassitanti: Bījato nibbattena bījaṃ dassitanti, he shows the cause by treating the effect, he shows the cause by treating the effect.

92.Bīje bījasaññīti ettha kāraṇūpacārena kāriyaṃ vuttanti dassento‘‘tattha yathā’’tiādimāha.Bhūtagāmaparimocanaṃ katvāti bhūtagāmato mocetvā, viyojetvāti attho.Yaṃ bījaṃ bhūtagāmo nāma hotīti bījāni ca tāni jātāni cāti vuttamatthaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tatthayaṃ bījanti yaṃ nibbattapaṇṇamūlaṃ bījaṃ.Tasmiṃ bījeti tasmiṃ bhūtagāmasaññite bīje. Ettha ca bījajāta-saddassa viya ruḷhīvasena rukkhādīsu bīja-saddassapi pavatti veditabbā.Yathārutanti yathāpāḷi.

92.Bīje bījasaññīti: Showing that in bīje bījasaññī, the effect is stated by treating the cause, he said ‘‘tattha yathā’’tiādi, "there, just as," etc. Bhūtagāmaparimocanaṃ katvāti: Bhūtagāmaparimocanaṃ katvāti, having freed from the community of seeds, meaning having separated. Yaṃ bījaṃ bhūtagāmo nāma hotīti: Yaṃ bījaṃ bhūtagāmo nāma hotīti, he speaks referring to the meaning that has been stated, "Those seeds are what is called born." There, yaṃ bījanti, yaṃ bīja means the shoot and root that has sprung up. Tasmiṃ bījeti: Tasmiṃ bījeti, in that seed designated as the community of seeds. And here it should be understood that, like the word bījajāta, the word bīja, seed, also applies to trees, etc., by way of common usage. Yathārutanti: Yathāruta means according to the text.

Yattha katthacīti mūle agge majjhe vā.Sañcicca ukkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatīti ettha sacepi sarīre laggabhāvaṃ jānantova udakato uṭṭhahati, ‘‘taṃ uddharissāmī’’ti saññāya abhāvato vaṭṭati.Uppāṭitānīti uddhaṭāni.Bījagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti bhūtagāmato parimocitattā vuttaṃ.Anantaka-ggahaṇena sāsapamattikā gahitā. Nāmañhetaṃ tassā sevālajātiyā. Mūlapaṇṇānaṃ asampuṇṇattā‘‘asampuṇṇabhūtagāmo nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ.Abhūtagāmamūlattāti ettha bhūtagāmo mūlaṃ kāraṇaṃ etassāti bhūtagāmamūlo, bhūtagāmassa vā mūlaṃ kāraṇanti bhūtagāmamūlaṃ. Bījagāmo hi nāma bhūtagāmato sambhavati, bhūtagāmassa ca kāraṇaṃ hoti, ayaṃ pana tādiso na hotīti ‘‘abhūtagāmamūlattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatraṭṭhakattā vuttaṃ‘‘so bījagāmena saṅgahito’’ti. Idañca ‘‘abhūtagāmamūlattā’’ti ettha paṭhamaṃ vuttaatthasambhavato vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi tālanāḷikerādīnaṃ khāṇu uddhaṃ avaḍḍhanato bhūtagāmassa kāraṇaṃ na hoti, tathāpi bhūtagāmasaṅkhyupagatanibbattapaṇṇamūlabījato sambhūtattā bhūtagāmato uppanno nāma hotīti bījagāmena saṅgahaṃ gacchati.

Yattha katthacīti: Yattha katthacīti, whether at the root, tip, or middle. Sañcicca ukkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatīti: Sañcicca ukkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatīti, here, even if he gets up from the water knowing that it is clinging to his body, it is allowable because of the absence of the perception, "I will lift it up." Uppāṭitānīti: Uppāṭitānī means pulled up. Bījagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti: Bījagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti, it is said because it has been freed from the community of seeds. Anantaka-ggahaṇena: By the taking of anantaka, mustard seeds are taken. This is a name for that kind of moss. Because the roots and leaves are incomplete, it is said, ‘‘asampuṇṇabhūtagāmo nāmā’’ti, "it is called an incomplete community of seeds." Abhūtagāmamūlattāti: Abhūtagāmamūlattāti, here, bhūtagāmamūlo means that the community of seeds is the root, the cause of it, or bhūtagāmamūlaṃ means that it is the root, the cause of the community of seeds. For the seed community arises from the community of seeds and is the cause of the community of seeds, but this is not of that kind, therefore it is said, "because it does not have the community of seeds as its root." Because it is the meaning of the text there, it is said, ‘‘so bījagāmena saṅgahito’’ti, "it is included in the seed community." And this is said because of the possibility of the meaning stated first in "because it does not have the community of seeds as its root." For although the stem of the palmyra palm, coconut palm, etc., does not grow upwards and is not the cause of the community of seeds, nevertheless, because it arises from shoots and roots that have sprung up and are included in the count of the community of seeds, it is called arising from the community of seeds and is therefore included in the seed community.

‘‘Aṅkure harite’’ti vatvā tameva vibhāveti‘‘nīlapaṇṇavaṇṇe jāte’’ti, nīlapaṇṇassa vaṇṇasadise vaṇṇe jāteti attho. ‘‘Nīlavaṇṇe jāte’’ti vā pāṭho gahetabbo.Amūlakabhūtagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti nāḷikerassa āveṇikaṃ katvā vadati. ‘‘Pānīyaghaṭādīnaṃ bahi sevālo udake aṭṭhitattā bījagāmānulomattā ca dukkaṭavatthū’’ti vadanti.Kaṇṇakampi abbohārikamevāti nīlavaṇṇampi abbohārikameva.Seleyyakaṃnāma silāya sambhūtā ekā sugandhajāti.‘‘Rukkhattacaṃ vikopetīti vuttattā rukkhe jātaṃ yaṃ kiñci chattakaṃ rukkhattacaṃ avikopetvā matthakato chinditvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.Rukkhato muccitvā tiṭṭhatīti ettha ‘‘yadipi kiñcimattaṃ rukkhe allīnā hutvā tiṭṭhati, rukkhato gayhamāno pana rukkhacchaviṃ na vikopeti, vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.Allarukkhato na vaṭṭatīti etthāpi rukkhattacaṃ avikopetvā matthakato tacchetvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.Hatthakukkuccenāti hatthānaṃ asaṃyatabhāvena, hatthacāpallenāti vuttaṃ hoti.Pānīyaṃ na vāsetabbanti idaṃ attano atthāya nāmitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kevalaṃ anupasampannassa atthāya nāmite pana pacchā tato labhitvā na vāsetabbanti natthi.‘‘Yesaṃ rukkhānaṃ sākhā ruhatīti vuttattā yesaṃ sākhā na ruhati, tattha kappiyakaraṇakiccaṃ natthī’’ti vadanti.

‘‘Aṅkure harite’’ti: Having said, ‘‘Aṅkure harite’’ti, "in the green sprout," he explains that very thing, ‘‘nīlapaṇṇavaṇṇe jāte’’ti, "when it has arisen in a color similar to the color of a blue leaf," meaning when it has arisen in a color similar to the color of a blue leaf. Or, the reading should be taken as "Nīlavaṇṇe jāte." Amūlakabhūtagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti: Amūlakabhūtagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti, he speaks making an exception for the coconut palm. "Moss on the outside of water pots, etc., is an offense of wrong conduct because it is not fixed in the water and is in accordance with the seed community," so they say. Kaṇṇakampi abbohārikamevāti: Kaṇṇakampi abbohārikamevāti, even blue color is not in common use. Seleyyakaṃ is a kind of fragrant substance that arises from rocks. ‘‘Rukkhattacaṃ vikopetīti: Since it is said ‘‘Rukkhattacaṃ vikopetī’’ti, "he damages the bark of a tree," they say that any fungus that grows on a tree may be taken by cutting it off from the top without damaging the bark of the tree. Rukkhato muccitvā tiṭṭhatīti: Rukkhato muccitvā tiṭṭhatīti, here, they say, "Even if a little bit remains attached to the tree, it is allowable if it does not damage the bark of the tree when it is taken from the tree." Allarukkhato na vaṭṭatīti: Allarukkhato na vaṭṭatīti, here also, it should be understood that it is allowable to take it by scraping it from the top without damaging the bark of the tree. Hatthakukkuccenāti: Hatthakukkuccenāti, by the unrestrained nature of the hands, meaning by the unsteadiness of the hands. Pānīyaṃ na vāsetabbanti: Pānīyaṃ na vāsetabbanti, this is said referring to having it strained for one's own sake. But there is no offense in having it strained for the sake of one who is not fully ordained and later obtaining it from him and not having it strained.

93.Pañcahisamaṇakappehīti pañcahi samaṇavohārehi. Kiñcāpi hi bījānaṃ agginā phuṭṭhamattena nakhādīhi vilikhanamattena ca aviruḷhīdhammatā na hoti, tathāpi evaṃ kateyeva samaṇānaṃ kappatīti aggiparijitādayo samaṇavohārā nāma jātā, tasmā tehi samaṇavohārehi karaṇabhūtehi phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ anujānāmīti adhippāyo. Abījanibbaṭṭabījānipi samaṇānaṃ kappantīti paññattapaṇṇattibhāvato samaṇavohārāicceva saṅkhaṃ gatāni. Atha vā aggiparijitādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ kappiyabhāvatoyeva pañcahi samaṇakappiyabhāvasaṅkhātehi kāraṇehi phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ anujānāmīti evamettha adhippāyo veditabbo.Aggiparijitantiādīsu ‘‘paricita’’ntipi paṭhanti.Abījaṃnāma taruṇambaphalādi.Nibbaṭṭabījaṃnāma ambapanasādi, yaṃ bījaṃ nibbaṭṭetvā visuṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ sakkā hoti.‘‘Kappiya’’nti vatvāva kātabbanti yo kappiyaṃ karoti, tena kattabbākārasseva vuttattā bhikkhunā avuttepi kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti na gahetabbaṃ. Puna ‘‘kappiyaṃ kāretabba’’nti kārāpanassa paṭhamameva kathitattā bhikkhunā ‘‘kappiyaṃ karohī’’ti vutteyeva anupasampannena ‘‘kappiya’’nti vatvā aggiparijitādi kātabbanti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Kappiyanti vacanaṃ pana yāya kāyaci bhāsāya vattuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Kappiyanti vatvāva kātabba’’nti vacanato paṭhamaṃ ‘‘kappiya’’nti vatvā pacchā aggiādinā phusanādi kātabbanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ aggiṃ nikkhipitvā nakhādinā vā vijjhitvā taṃ anuddharitvāva ‘kappiya’nti vattumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.

93.Pañcahi samaṇakappehīti: with five modes of monastic usage. Although the state of non-growth of seeds is not lost by merely scorching them with fire or scratching them with nails, etc., nevertheless, because it is only when done in this way that it is suitable for monks, therefore, the usages of monks such as aggiparijita etc., have come to be, thus the meaning is, I allow the fruit to be consumed by means of these usages of monks that serve as instruments. Seeds derived from non-seeds are also suitable for monks and have gone to the extent of being considered monastic usages due to their being prescribed. Alternatively, the meaning here should be understood thus: I allow the fruit to be consumed by means of five causes known as suitable monastic conditions, namely, the very fact of aggiparijita etc. being suitable. In aggiparijita etc., some read "paricita." Abījaṃ means young mango fruit, etc. Nibbaṭṭabījaṃ means mango, jackfruit, etc., the seeds of which can be removed, separated, and consumed. ‘‘Kappiya’’nti vatvāva kātabbanti: it should not be assumed that, since the manner of acting has been stated by saying "one who makes it allowable," it is proper to do it even if not said by the monk. Since the causing to be made allowable has been stated first, it should be understood that only when the monk says "make it allowable" should a non-ordained person make it allowable by means of scorching with fire, etc., after saying "kappiya". They say, "However, the utterance 'kappiya' can be spoken in any language." It should be understood that from the saying "‘kappiya’nti vatvāva kātabba," one should first say "kappiya" and then do the touching with fire, etc. They say, "It is also proper to put the fire on first, or pierce it with a nail, etc., and say ‘kappiya’ without removing it."

Ekasmiṃ bīje vātiādīsu ‘‘ekaṃyeva kāremīti adhippāye satipi ekābaddhattā sabbaṃ katameva hotī’’ti vadanti.Dāruṃ vijjhatīti ettha ‘‘jānitvāpi vijjhati vā vijjhāpeti vā, vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti vadanti.Bhattasitthe vijjhatīti etthāpi eseva nayo.‘‘Taṃ vijjhati, na vaṭṭatīti rajjuādīnaṃ bhājanagatikattā’’ti vadanti.Maricapakkādīhi missetvāti ettha bhattasitthasambandhavasena ekābaddhatā veditabbā, na phalānaṃyeva aññamaññaṃ sambandhavasena.Bhindāpetvā kappiyaṃ kārāpetabbanti bījato muttassa kaṭāhassa bhājanagatikattā vuttaṃ.

Ekasmiṃ bīje vātiādīsu: In regard to "in one seed," etc., they say, "Even though the intention is to do only one, since they are interconnected, all are considered done." Dāruṃ vijjhatīti: Regarding "he pierces the wood," they say, "It is proper whether he knowingly pierces it or has it pierced." Bhattasitthe vijjhatīti: The same method applies here as well. ‘‘Taṃ vijjhati, na vaṭṭatīti rajjuādīnaṃ bhājanagatikattā’’ti: "He pierces that, it is not proper, because ropes etc. are considered as part of the receptacle." Maricapakkādīhi missetvāti: Regarding "mixing with ripe peppers, etc.," interconnectedness should be understood in relation to the rice gruel, not in relation to the fruits themselves with each other. Bhindāpetvā kappiyaṃ kārāpetabbanti: Regarding "having it broken and having it made allowable," it is said because the husk that is separated from the seed is considered part of the receptacle.

Nikkhāmetunti taṃ bhikkhuṃ nikkhāmetuṃ. ‘‘Sace etassa anuloma’’nti senāsanarakkhaṇatthāya anuññātampi paṭaggidānādiṃ attanāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti ettakeneva idampi etassa anulomanti evamadhippāyo siyā. Paṭaggidānaṃ parittakaraṇañca attano parassa vā senāsanarakkhaṇatthāya vaṭṭatiyeva. Tasmā sace tassa suttassa etaṃ anulomaṃ siyā, attano na vaṭṭati, aññassa vaṭṭatīti ayaṃ viseso kuto labbhatīti āha‘‘attano na vaṭṭati…pe… na sakkā laddhu’’nti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Bhūtagāmo, bhūtagāmasaññitā, vikopanaṃ vā vikopāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

Nikkhāmetunti: let him expel that monk. "Sace etassa anuloma"nti: it is possible that the meaning is thus: even for the protection of the dwelling place, it is proper to do oneself things that are allowed, such as giving the first fire, so this too is in accordance with him to this extent. Giving the first fire and making a protective paritta are proper for oneself or for another for the protection of the dwelling place. Therefore, he says, ‘‘attano na vaṭṭati…pe… na sakkā laddhu’’nti: if this is in accordance with that sutta, how can this distinction be obtained, that it is not proper for oneself but proper for another? The rest here is obvious. Bhūtagāmo, bhūtagāmasaññitā, vikopanaṃ or vikopāpanaṃ: these are the three factors involved here.

Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Bhūtagāma Training Rule is finished.

2. Aññavādakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Aññavādaka Training Rule

94-98.Dutiyeaññaṃ vacananti yaṃ codakena cuditakassa dosavibhāvanavacanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ tato aññeneva vacanena paṭicarati. Atha vāaññenaññaṃ paṭicaratīti aññena kāraṇena aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicaratīti evamettha attho veditabbo, yaṃ codakena cuditakassa dosavibhāvanakāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, tato aññena codanāya amūlakabhāvadīpakena kāraṇena paṭicaratīti vuttaṃ hoti.Paṭicaratīti ca paṭicchādanavasena carati, pavattatīti attho. Paṭicchādanattho eva vācarati-saddo anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ. Tenāha‘‘paṭicchādetī’’ti.Ko āpannotiādinā pāḷiyaṃ codanaṃ avissajjetvā vikkhepāpajjanavasena aññena aññaṃ paṭicaraṇaṃ dassitaṃ. Aparampi pana codanaṃ vissajjetvā bahiddhā kathāapanāmavasena pavattaṃ pāḷimuttakaṃ aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti puṭṭho ‘‘pāṭaliputtaṃ gatomhī’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘na tava pāṭaliputtagamanaṃ pucchāma, āpattiṃ pucchāmā’’ti vutte ‘‘tato rājagahaṃ gatomhī’’ti vatvā ‘‘rājagahaṃ vā yāhi brāhmaṇagahaṃ vā, āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti vutte ‘‘tattha me sūkaramaṃsaṃ laddha’’ntiādīni vatvāva kathaṃ bahiddhā vikkhipantopi hi ‘‘aññenaññaṃ paṭicarati’’cceva saṅkhaṃ gacchati.

94-98.In the second, aññaṃ vacananti: he replies with a different statement than the statement that was made by the accuser as an expression of the fault of the accused. Alternatively, aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratīti: one deals with one cause with another cause, thus the meaning here should be understood: he deals with a different cause than the cause stated by the accuser as an expression of the fault of the accused, by means of a cause that indicates the groundlessness of the accusation, that is what is meant by that. Paṭicaratīti ca: and paṭicarati means he acts or proceeds by way of concealment. Or, carati-sound has the meaning of concealing, because roots have many meanings. Therefore, he says ‘‘paṭicchādetī’’ti. In the Pāḷi, from Ko āpannoti onward, dealing with one thing by means of another is shown in the manner of avoiding digression without answering the accusation. However, another instance of dealing with one thing by means of another should be understood as proceeding outside of the Pāḷi in the manner of evading the matter even after answering the accusation. If, when asked, "You have committed such and such an offense," he says, "I went to Pāṭaliputta," and then, when told again, "We are not asking about your going to Pāṭaliputta, we are asking about the offense," he says, "Then I went to Rājagaha," and then, when told, "Whether you go to Rājagaha or a Brahmin's house, have you committed an offense?" he says, "There I got some pork," etc., even while scattering the talk outside in this way, he still goes to the extent of being called "deals with one thing by means of another."

aññavādakanti āha‘‘aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇassetaṃ nāma’’nti.Tuṇhībhūtassetaṃ nāmanti tuṇhībhāvassetaṃ nāmaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho.Aññavādakaṃ āropetūti aññavādakakammaṃ āropetu, aññavādakattaṃ vā idāni kariyamānena kammena āropetūti attho.Vihesakaṃ āropetūti etthāpi vihesakakammaṃ vihesakabhāvaṃ vā āropetūti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.

aññavādakanti āha ‘‘aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇassetaṃ nāma’’nti: he says "‘Aññavādaka’ is the name for dealing with one thing by means of another." Tuṇhībhūtassetaṃ nāmanti: "‘Aññavādaka’ is the name for being silent," or this is the reading. Aññavādakaṃ āropetūti: To impose the aññavādaka act, or the meaning is to impose the state of being an aññavādaka by means of the act now being done. Vihesakaṃ āropetūti: Here too, the meaning should be seen as imposing the vihesaka act or the state of being a vihesaka.

Anāropite aññavādake vuttadukkaṭaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgataaññenaññaṃpaṭicaraṇavasena yujjati. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatena pana pāḷimuttakaaññenaññaṃpaṭicaraṇavasena anāropite aññavādake musāvādena pācittiyaṃ, āropite imināva pācittiyanti veditabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘āropite aññavādake musāvādena iminā ca pācittiyadvayaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti, taṃ vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. Yā sā ādikammikassa anāpatti vuttā, sāpi pāḷiyaṃ āgataaññenaññaṃpaṭicaraṇavasena vuttāti daṭṭhabbā, iminā sikkhāpadena anāpattidassanatthaṃ vā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Dhammakammena āropitatā, āpattiyā vā vatthunā vā anuyuñjiyamānatā, chādetukāmatāya aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇaṃ vā tuṇhībhāvo vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

The stated dukkata for an aññavādaka that is not imposed is consistent with the case of dealing with one thing by means of another that occurs in the Pāḷi. However, in the case of dealing with one thing by means of another outside of the Pāḷi that occurs in the Commentary, it should be understood that for an aññavādaka that is not imposed, there is a pācittiya for false speech, and when it is imposed, there is a pācittiya by this very training rule. However, some say, "When the aññavādaka is imposed, there are two pācittiyas, one by false speech and one by this training rule," that should be accepted after examining it. The non-offense that was stated for the first offender should also be seen as stated in relation to dealing with one thing by means of another that occurs in the Pāḷi, or for the purpose of showing non-offense by this training rule. The rest here is obvious. Being imposed by a formal act of the Sangha, or being interrogated regarding an offense or regarding a matter, or dealing with one thing by means of another in order to conceal, or being silent, these are the three factors involved here.

Aññavādakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Aññavādaka Training Rule is finished.

3. Ujjhāpanakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Ujjhāpanaka Training Rule

103.Tatiye dhātupāṭhejhe-saddo cintāyaṃ paṭhitoti āha‘‘lāmakato vā cintāpentī’’tiādi. Ayameva ca anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ olokanatthopi hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Akkharāya vācetī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 46) viya ‘‘chandāyā’’ti liṅgavipallāsavasena vuttanti āha‘‘chandenā’’ti.

103.In the third, in the dhātupāṭha, the sound jhe is read as "in thought," therefore, he says ‘‘lāmakato vā cintāpentī’’tiādi: "or causing to think with contempt," etc. And this very word should be seen as also having the meaning of looking at, because roots have many meanings. He says ‘‘chandenā’’ti: Regarding "he causes to read by means of desire," etc. (pāci. 46), it is stated in terms of gender inversion like "chandāyā."

105.Yena vacanenāti yena ‘‘chandāya itthannāmo idaṃ nāma karotī’’tiādivacanena.Yena ca khiyyantīti yena ‘‘chandāya itthannāmo’’tiādivacanena tattha tattha bhikkhūnaṃ savanūpacāre ṭhatvā avaṇṇaṃ pakāsenti.

105.Yena vacanenāti: by which statement, that is, by the statement "with desire, so-and-so is doing such-and-such." Yena ca khiyyantīti: and by which, that is, by the statement "with desire, so-and-so," while standing in various places in the vicinity of the monks, they reveal disparagement.

106.Aññaṃ anupasampannaṃ ujjhāpetīti aññena anupasampannena ujjhāpeti.Tassa vā taṃ santike khiyyatīti tassa anupasampannassa santike taṃ saṅghena sammataṃ upasampannaṃ khiyyati, avaṇṇaṃ vadanto vā pakāseti.Anupasampannaṃ saṅghena sammatanti ettha sammatapubbo sammatoti vutto. Tenāha‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Yasmā ujjhāpanaṃ khiyyanañca musāvādavaseneva pavattaṃ, tasmā ādikammikassa anāpattīti pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭaṭṭhāne ca imināva anāpattidassanatthaṃ vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Evañca katvā ujjhāpentassa khiyyantassa ca ekakkhaṇe dve dve āpattiyo hontīti āpannaṃ. Atha vā īdisaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ musāvādato paṭhamaṃ paññattanti gahetabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Dhammakammena sammatatā, upasampannatā, agatigamanābhāvo, tassa avaṇṇakāmatā, yassa santike vadati, tassa upasampannatā, ujjhāpanaṃ vā khiyyanaṃ vāti imāni panettha cha aṅgāni.

106.Aññaṃ anupasampannaṃ ujjhāpetīti: he causes another non-ordained person to be displeased. Tassa vā taṃ santike khiyyatīti: or in the presence of that non-ordained person, he disparages that ordained person who is approved by the Sangha, or he reveals while speaking disparagement. Anupasampannaṃ saṅghena sammatanti: Regarding "a non-ordained person approved by the Sangha," one who was formerly approved is called approved. Therefore, he says ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Since displeasure and disparagement proceed only by way of false speech, therefore, it should be understood that the non-offense for the first offender is stated in the place of a pācittiya and in the place of a dukkata for the purpose of showing non-offense by this very training rule. And by doing so, two offenses each occur at one moment for one who causes displeasure and one who disparages, so it is an offense. Or, it should be understood that such a training rule was established before the training rule on false speech. The rest here is obvious. Being approved by a formal act of the Sangha, being ordained, absence of going to wrong destinations, desire for disparagement of that person, the ordained state of the one in whose presence he speaks, displeasure or disparagement: these are the six factors involved here.

Ujjhāpanakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Ujjhāpanaka Training Rule is finished.

4. Paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the First Senāsana Training Rule

108-110.Catutthehimavassenāti himameva vuttaṃ.Apaññāteti appatīte, appasiddheti attho. ‘‘Maṇḍape vā rukkhamūle vāti vacanato vivaṭaṅgaṇepi nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Gocarappasutāti gocaraṭṭhānaṃ paṭipannā. ‘‘Aṭṭha māse’’ti iminā vassānaṃ cātumāsaṃ cepi devo na vassati, paṭikkhittamevāti āha‘‘aṭṭha māseti vacanato…pe… nikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti. Tatthacattāro māseti vassānassa cattāro māse.Avassikasaṅketeti iminā anuññātepi aṭṭha māse yattha hemante devo vassati, tattha aparepi cattāro māsā paṭikkhittāti āha‘‘avassikasaṅketeti vacanato’’tiādi. Iminā imaṃ dīpeti ‘‘yasmiṃ dese hemante devo vassati, tattha aṭṭha māse paṭikkhipitvā cattāro māsā anuññātā. Yattha pana vassāneyeva vassati, tattha cattāro māse paṭikkhipitvā aṭṭha māsā anuññātā’’ti.

108-110.In the fourth, himavassenāti: only snow is meant. Apaññāteti: unknown, meaning not covered. It is stated in all three gaṇṭhipadas that "from the statement 'in a pavilion or at the foot of a tree,' it is proper to place it even in an open courtyard." Gocarappasutāti: having set out to a pasture area. He says ‘‘aṭṭha māseti vacanato…pe… nikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti: "from the statement 'eight months,' even if the god does not rain for the four months of the rainy season, it is prohibited." There, cattāro māseti: "four months" means the four months of the rainy season. He says ‘‘avassikasaṅketeti vacanato’’tiādi: By this, even in the eight months that are allowed, the other four months are prohibited in places where the god rains in the cold season. By this, he indicates this: "In whatever region the god rains in the cold season, there, having prohibited eight months, four months are allowed. However, where it rains only in the rainy season, there, having prohibited four months, eight months are allowed."

Imināva nayena majjhimapadese yattha hemante himavassaṃ vassati, tatthāpi aṭṭheva māsā paṭikkhittāti veditabbā. Tasmā vassānakāle pakatiajjhokāse ovassakamaṇḍape rukkhamūle ca santharituṃ na vaṭṭati, hemantakāle pakatiajjhokāse ovassakamaṇḍapādīsupi vaṭṭati. Tañca kho yattha himavassena senāsanaṃ na temati, gimhakālepi pakatiajjhokāsādīsu vaṭṭatiyeva, tañca kho akālameghādassane, kākādīnaṃ nibaddhavāsarukkhamūle pana kadācipi na vaṭṭatīti evamettha vinicchayo veditabbo.

In this very way, in the Middle Country, where snow falls in the cold season, there too, it should be understood that only eight months are prohibited. Therefore, it is not proper to spread out in a naturally open place, in a rain-sheltered pavilion, or at the foot of a tree during the rainy season, but it is proper in naturally open places, in rain-sheltered pavilions, etc., during the cold season. And that is proper only in places where the dwelling is not soaked by snow, and it is proper in naturally open places, etc., even during the hot season, and that is proper only when there is no appearance of untimely clouds. However, it is never proper under trees where crows etc. habitually roost. Thus the decision here should be understood.

mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘iti yattha ca yadā ca santharituṃ na vaṭṭati, taṃ sabbamidha ajjhokāsasaṅkhameva gata’’nti. Atha vā avisesena ajjhokāse santharaṇasantharāpanāni paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘īdise kāle īdise ca padese ṭhapethā’’ti anujānanamatteneva alanti na sikkhāpade visuṃ anupaññatti uddhaṭāti veditabbā.Parivāre(pari. 65-67) pana imasseva sikkhāpadassa anurūpavasena paññattattā ‘‘ekā anupaññattī’’ti vuttaṃ.

It is stated in the mātikāṭṭhakathā(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) that "Thus, wherever and whenever it is not proper to spread out, all of that goes only to the classification of open air." Alternatively, it should be understood that because the prohibition of spreading out or having spread out in open air in a non-specific way and the allowance of "place it in such a place at such a time" are sufficient, a separate re-establishment is not extracted in the training rule. However, because it is established in accordance with this very training rule in the Parivāra(pari. 65-67), it is said to be "one re-establishment."

‘‘navavāyimo vā’’ti.Onaddhakoti cammena onaddho.Ukkaṭṭhaabbhokāsikoti idaṃ tassa parivitakkadassanamattaṃ, ukkaṭṭhaabbhokāsikassa pana cīvarakuṭi na vaṭṭatīti natthi.Kāyānugatikattāti bhikkhuno tattheva sannihitabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Iminā ca tasmiṃyeva kāle anāpatti vuttā, cīvarakuṭito nikkhamitvā pana aññattha gacchantassa piṇḍāya pavisantassapi āpattiyeva. ‘‘Yasmā pana dāyakehi dānakāleyeva sahassagghanakampi kambalaṃ ‘pādapuñchaniṃ katvā paribhuñjathā’ti dinnaṃ tatheva paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā ‘imaṃ mañcapīṭhādisenāsanaṃ abbhokāsepi yathāsukhaṃ paribhuñjathā’ti dāyakehi dinnaṃ ce, sabbasmimpi kāle abbhokāse nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.Pesetvā gantabbanti ettha ‘‘yo bhikkhu imaṃ ṭhānaṃ āgantvā vasati, tassa dethā’’ti vatvā pesetabbaṃ.

‘‘navavāyimo vā’’ti.Onaddhakoti: covered with leather. Ukkaṭṭhaabbhokāsikoti: this is only a showing of his deliberation; it is not the case that a cīvarakuṭi is not proper for one who is strictly an open-air dweller. Kāyānugatikattāti: it is said in reference to the monk's being present right there. And by this, non-offense is stated only at that time; however, there is an offense for one who leaves the cīvarakuṭi and goes elsewhere, even for one who enters for alms. They say, "Since even a blanket worth a thousand, given by donors at the time of giving with the words 'make it a foot wiper and use it,' is proper to use just as it is, if a couch, chair, etc., dwelling place like this is given by donors with the words 'use this comfortably in the open air,' it is proper to place it in the open air at all times." Pesetvā gantabbanti: regarding "having sent, it should be gone," it should be sent after saying "give it to whatever monk comes and stays in this place."

Valāhakānaṃ anuṭṭhitabhāvaṃ sallakkhetvāti iminā ca gimhānepi meghe uṭṭhite mañcapīṭhādiṃ yaṃkiñci senāsanaṃ ajjhokāse nikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dīpitanti veditabbaṃ.‘‘Pādaṭṭhānābhimukhāti nisīdantānaṃ pādapatanaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti keci. ‘‘Sammajjantassa pādaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti apare. ‘‘Bahi vālukāya agamananimittaṃ pādaṭṭhānābhimukhā vālikā haritabbāti vutta’’nti eke.Kacavaraṃ hatthehi gahetvā bahi chaṭṭetabbanti iminā kacavaraṃ chaḍḍessāmīti vālikā na chaḍḍetabbāti dīpeti.

Valāhakānaṃ anuṭṭhitabhāvaṃ sallakkhetvāti: and by this, it should be understood that it is shown that it is not proper to place any dwelling place whatsoever, such as a couch or chair, in the open air even in the hot season when a cloud has arisen. ‘‘Pādaṭṭhānābhimukhā"ti: "facing the place where the feet fall for those who are sitting" some say. "Facing the place where the feet stand for one who is sweeping," others say. "It is said that sand should be removed facing the place where the feet stand so that it does not go outside," some say. Kacavaraṃ hatthehi gahetvā bahi chaṭṭetabbanti: By this, he shows that sand should not be thrown out with the thought that he will throw out the rubbish.

111.Anto saṃveṭhetvā baddhanti erakapattādīhi veṇiṃ katvā tāya veṇiyā ubhosu passesu vitthataṭṭhānesu bahuṃ veṭhetvā tato paṭṭhāya yāva majjhaṭṭhānaṃ, tāva anto ākaḍḍhanavasena veṭhetvā majjhe saṅkhipitvā tiriyaṃ tattha tattha bandhitvā kataṃ.Kappaṃ labhitvāti gacchāti vuttavacanena kappaṃ labhitvā. Therassa hi āṇattiyā gacchantassa anāpatti.Purimanayenevāti ‘‘nisīditvā sayaṃ gacchanto’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayeneva.Aññattha gacchatīti taṃ maggaṃ atikkamitvā aññattha gacchati. Leḍḍupātupacārato bahi ṭhitattā‘‘pāduddhārena kāretabbo’’ti vuttaṃ, aññattha gacchantassa paṭhamapāduddhāre dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapāduddhāre pācittiyanti attho.Pākatikaṃ akatvāti appaṭisāmetvā.Antarasannipāteti antarantarā sannipāte.

111. Anto saṃveṭhetvā baddha means having made a braid with eraka leaves, etc., and having wrapped it extensively on both sides in wide areas, then from there up to the middle area, having wrapped it inwards by pulling, and having compressed it in the middle, tying it crosswise here and there. Kappaṃ labhitvā means having obtained permission by the statement "he may go." For a Thera going by order, there is no offense. Purimanayenevā means just as previously stated, beginning with "having sat down, while going on one’s own." Aññattha gacchatī means going elsewhere, crossing that path. Because of standing outside the range of a stone's throw, it was said, ‘‘pāduddhārena kāretabbo’’, meaning that for one going elsewhere, at the first lifting of the foot, there is a dukkaṭa, and at the second lifting of the foot, there is a pācittiya. Pākatikaṃ akatvā means without restoring it. Antarasannipāte means at intermittent gatherings.

Āvāsikānaṃyeva palibodhoti ettha āgantukehi āgantvā kiñci avatvā tattha nisinnepi āvāsikānaṃyeva palibodhoti adhippāyo.Mahāpaccarivādepana ‘‘aññesu āgantvā nisinnesū’’ti idaṃ amhākanti vatvā vā avatvā vā nisinnesūti adhippāyo.Mahāaṭṭhakathāvāde‘‘āpattī’’ti pācittiyameva vuttaṃ.Mahāpaccariyaṃpana santharaṇasantharāpane sati pācittiyena bhavitabbanti anāṇattiyā paññattattā dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ ussārakassa, idaṃ dhammakathikassā’’ti visuṃ paññattattā anāṇattiyā paññattepi pācittiyeneva bhavitabbanti adhippāyena ‘‘tasmiṃ āgantvā nisinne tassa palibodho’’ti vuttaṃ. Keci pana vadanti ‘‘anāṇattiyā paññattepi dhammakathikassa anuṭṭhāpanīyattā pācittiyena bhavitabbaṃ, āgantukassa pana pacchā āgatehi vuḍḍhatarehi uṭṭhāpetabbattā dukkaṭaṃ vutta’’nti.

Āvāsikānaṃyeva palibodho here means that even if visitors come and sit there without saying anything, the encumbrance is only for the resident monks. However, in the Mahāpaccarivāde, "aññesu āgantvā nisinnesū" means whether they say, "this is ours," or sit down without saying anything. In the Mahāaṭṭhakathāvāde, only a pācittiya was stated as the "offense." However, in the Mahāpaccariyaṃ, because it is established without authorization that there would be a pācittiya in the case of spreading or having a spread spread, a dukkaṭa was stated. Because it is separately established, "this is for the remover, this is for the Dhamma speaker," even if it is established without authorization, it would only be a pācittiya, with the intention that it was said, "tasmiṃ āgantvā nisinne tassa palibodho." Some, however, say, "even if established without authorization, because the Dhamma speaker is not to be removed, there must be a pācittiya, but because a visitor should be removed by the elders who come later, a dukkaṭa was stated."

112.Bhūmiyaṃ attharitabbāti cimilikāya sati tassā upari, asati suddhabhūmiyaṃ attharitabbā.Sīhacammādīnaṃ pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabboti iminā –

112. Bhūmiyaṃ attharitabbā means it should be spread on top of a rush mat, if there is one, or on bare ground if there isn't. Sīhacammādīnaṃ pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabbo means that with this, he elucidates the intent of the –

‘‘Na, bhikkhave, mahācammāni dhāretabbāni sīhacammaṃ byagghacammaṃ dīpicammaṃ, yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 255) –

‘‘Na, bhikkhave, mahācammāni dhāretabbāni sīhacammaṃ byagghacammaṃ dīpicammaṃ, yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 255) –

khandhakapāḷiyāadhippāyaṃ vibhāveti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘antopi mañce paññattāni honti, bahipi mañce paññattāni hontī’’ti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ sikkhāpadassa paññattattā mañcapīṭhesu attharitvā paribhogoyeva paṭikkhitto, bhūmattharaṇavasena paribhogo pana appaṭikkhittoti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttanti? Yathā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoga’’nti (cūḷava. 320) vacanato puggalikepi senāsane senāsanaparibhogavasena niyamitaṃ suvaṇṇaghaṭādikaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭamānampi kevalaṃ attano santakaṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati, evamidaṃ bhūmattharaṇavasena paribhuñjiyamānampi attano santakaṃ katvā taṃ taṃ vihāraṃ haritvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ.Dārumayapīṭhanti phalakamayameva pīṭhaṃ vuttaṃ.Pādakathalikanti adhotapādaṭṭhapanakaṃ.Ajjhokāse rajanaṃ pacitvā…pe… paṭisāmetabbanti ettha theve asati rajanakamme niṭṭhite paṭisāmetabbaṃ.

khandhakapāḷiyā. This is what was said: "antopi mañce paññattāni honti, bahipi mañce paññattāni hontī" - because the training rule was established in this case, use by spreading on beds and chairs alone is prohibited, but use as a ground covering is not prohibited. If so, why was it said that "pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo"? Just as, because of the statement "anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbaṃ pāsādaparibhoga" (cūḷava. 320), even though it is allowable to use personal lodgings and the items fixed for use in lodgings such as a golden pot, it is not allowable to use it by making it one's own property, similarly, even though this can be used as a ground covering, it is not allowable to use it by making it one's own property and carrying it off to that particular monastery, and to show this, it was said that "pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabbo." Dārumayapīṭha means a seat made of planks. Pādakathalika means a footstool placed underneath. Ajjhokāse rajanaṃ pacitvā…pe… paṭisāmetabba here means that when the dye work is finished, it should be restored if the theva is missing.

113.‘‘Bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hotīti vuttattā alajjiṃ āpucchitvā gantuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.Otāpento gacchatīti ettha ‘‘kiñcāpi ‘ettakaṃ dūraṃ gantabba’nti paricchedo natthi, tathāpi leḍḍupātaṃ atikkamma nātidūraṃ gantabba’’nti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Mañcādīnaṃ saṅghikatā, vuttalakkhaṇe dese santharaṇaṃ vā santharāpanaṃ vā, apalibuddhatā, āpadāya abhāvo, leḍḍupātātikkamoti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.

113. ‘‘Bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hotīti vuttattā alajjiṃ āpucchitvā gantuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Otāpento gacchatīti here, some say, "although there is no limit such as 'this much distance must be gone,' nevertheless, one should not go too far beyond a stone's throw." The rest here is straightforward. These five factors are involved here: the beds, etc., being the property of the Sangha, the spreading or having it spread in a place with the stated characteristics, the absence of encumbrance, the absence of danger, and going beyond a stone's throw.

Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) panaanāpucchaṃ vā gaccheyyāti ettha ‘‘yo bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hoti, attano palibodhaṃ viya maññati, tathārūpaṃ anāpucchitvā taṃ senāsanaṃ tassa aniyyātetvā nirapekkho gacchati, thāmamajjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupātaṃ atikkameyya, ekena pādena leḍḍupātātikkame dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapādātikkame pācittiya’’nti vatvā aṅgesupi nirapekkhatāya saddhiṃ cha aṅgāni vuttāni. Pāḷiyaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘nirapekkho gacchatī’’ti ayaṃ viseso na dissati. ‘‘Otāpento gacchatī’’ti ca otāpanavisaye eva sāpekkhagamane anāpatti vuttā. Yadi aññatthāpi sāpekkhagamane anāpatti siyā, ‘‘anāpatti sāpekkho gacchatī’’ti avisesena vattabbaṃ bhaveyya, tasmā vīmaṃsitvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbanti.

However, in the Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), regarding anāpucchaṃ vā gaccheyyā, it states, "yo bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hoti, attano palibodhaṃ viya maññati, tathārūpaṃ anāpucchitvā taṃ senāsanaṃ tassa aniyyātetvā nirapekkho gacchati, thāmamajjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupātaṃ atikkameyya, ekena pādena leḍḍupātātikkame dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapādātikkame pācittiya" and having said this, six factors were stated, along with indifference to the factors. However, in the Pali and the commentary, this distinction "nirapekkho gacchatī" is not seen. And regarding "otāpento gacchatī," non-offense was stated only for going dependently in the matter of exposure. If there were a non-offense for going dependently elsewhere, it should have been said generally, "anāpatti sāpekkho gacchatī," therefore, having investigated, what is more fitting should be taken.

Paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the First Lodging Training Rule is Finished.

5. Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. The Commentary on the Second Lodging Training Rule

116.Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadeettakameva vuttanti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idañca aṭṭhakathāsu tathāvuttabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, aññampi tādisaṃ mañcapīṭhesu attharitaṃ paccattharaṇamevā’’ti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃpana ‘‘paccattharaṇaṃ nāma pāvāro kojavoti ettakamevā’’ti niyametvā vuttaṃ, tasmā gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ iminā na sameti, vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ.Senāsanatoti sabbapacchimasenāsanato.Yo kocīti tassa ñātako vā aññātako vā yo koci.

116. In the Second Lodging Training Rule, ettakameva vutta it is said in the commentaries. ‘‘Idañca aṭṭhakathāsu tathāvuttabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, aññampi tādisaṃ mañcapīṭhesu attharitaṃ paccattharaṇameva’’ti it is said in all three gaṇṭhipadesu. However, in the Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), it is stated restrictively, "paccattharaṇaṃ nāma pāvāro kojavoti ettakameva," therefore, what is stated in the gaṇṭhipadesu does not agree with this; it should be investigated and taken. Senāsanato means from the very last lodging. Yo kocī means anyone, whether a relative or a stranger.

117.Pariveṇanti ekekassa vihārassa parikkhepabbhantaraṃ.Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttamevatthaṃ savisesaṃ katvā dassetuṃ‘‘kiñcāpi vutto’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. ‘‘Aparicchanne maṇḍape’’ti visuṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tenevamātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘aparicchannamaṇḍape vā paricchanne vāpi bahūnaṃ sannipātabhūte’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhojanasālāyampi ayaṃ viseso labbhatiyeva.Vattabbaṃ natthīti visesetvā kiñci vattabbaṃ natthi.Palujjatīti vinassati.Nasseyyāti corādīhi vinasseyya.

117. Pariveṇa means the area within the enclosure of each monastery. Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, in order to show what was said with special features, ‘‘kiñcāpi vutto’’ etc., was begun. "Aparicchanne maṇḍape" should be connected separately. Therefore, in the mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) it says, "aparicchannamaṇḍape vā paricchanne vāpi bahūnaṃ sannipātabhūte." This distinction can be obtained even in the dining hall. Vattabbaṃ natthī means there is nothing more to be said distinctively. Palujjatī means it perishes. Nasseyyā means it might perish due to thieves, etc.

118.Yena mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā vinanti, taṃmañcapīṭhakavānaṃ. Siluccayaleṇanti siluccaye leṇaṃ, pabbataguhāti attho. ‘‘Senāsanaṃ upacikāhi khāyita’’nti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ paññattattā vatthuanurūpavasena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ upacikāsaṅkāya abhāve anāpatti vuttā.Vattakkhandhakegamikavattaṃ paññapentena ‘‘senāsanaṃ āpucchitabba’’nti vuttattā kevalaṃ itikattabbākāramattadassanatthaṃ‘‘āpucchanaṃ pana vatta’’nti vuttaṃ, na pana vattabhedena dukkaṭanti dassanatthaṃ. Tenevaandhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘senāsanaṃ āpucchitabba’’nti ettha ‘‘yaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ vā pāsāṇatthambhesu vā katasenāsanaṃ yattha upacikā nārohanti, taṃ anāpucchantassapi anāpattī’’ti vakkhati, tasmā yaṃ vuttaṃgaṇṭhipade‘‘tādise senāsane anāpucchā gacchantassa pācittiyaṃ natthi, gamikavattavasena pana anāpucchā gacchato vattabhedo hoti, tasmā dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatī’’ti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.

118. That by which a bed or chair is ruined is mañcapīṭhakavānaṃ. Siluccayaleṇa means a cave on a rock pile, a mountain cave. Because it was established in the case of "senāsanaṃ upacikāhi khāyita," in accordance with the case, the commentary states that there is no offense in the absence of the presumption of white ants. Because in the Vattakkhandhake, when establishing the duties of a village monk, it was said that "senāsanaṃ āpucchitabba," ‘‘āpucchanaṃ pana vatta’’ was stated only to show the mere pattern of the proper course of action, not to show that it is a dukkaṭa by way of a difference in duties. Therefore, in the Andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, regarding "senāsanaṃ āpucchitabba," it will say, "yaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ vā pāsāṇatthambhesu vā katasenāsanaṃ yattha upacikā nārohanti, taṃ anāpucchantassapi anāpattī," therefore, what was said in the gaṇṭhipade, "in such a lodging there is no pācittiya for one who goes without asking leave, but due to the duty of a travelling monk, there is a difference in duty for one who goes without asking leave, therefore, he incurs a dukkaṭa," should not be taken.

Pacchimassa ābhogena mutti natthīti tassa pacchato gacchantassa aññassa abhāvato vuttaṃ.Ekaṃ vā pesetvā āpucchitabbanti ettha gamanacittassa uppannaṭṭhānato anāpucchitvā gacchato dutiyapāduddhāre pācittiyaṃ. Kiñcāpi mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā ajjhokāse nikkhipitvā gacchantassa idha visuṃ āpatti na vuttā, tathāpi akāle ajjhokāse mañcapīṭhāni paññapetvā gacchantassa leḍḍupātātikkame purimasikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ, parikkhepātikkame iminā dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Maṇḍape vā rukkhamūle vā’’ti iminā ajjhokāsopi saṅgahitoyevāti tatthāpi dukkaṭaṃ idha vuttamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Seyyaṃ pana ajjhokāse santharitvā gacchantassa ubhayenapi dukkaṭameva. ‘‘Saṅghike vihāre saṅghikaṃyeva seyyaṃ santharitvā pakkamantassa pācittiyaṃ vuttanti ubhosu ekekasmiṃ saṅghike dukkaṭa’’nti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Vuttalakkhaṇaseyyā, tassā saṅghikatā, vuttalakkhaṇe vihāre santharaṇaṃ vā santharāpanaṃ vā, apalibuddhatā, āpadāya abhāvo, anapekkhassa disāpakkamanaṃ, upacārasīmātikkamoti imāni panettha satta aṅgāni.

Pacchimassa ābhogena mutti natthī was said because there is no other going behind him. Ekaṃ vā pesetvā āpucchitabba here means that on the second lifting of the foot there is a pācittiya for one who goes without asking leave from the place where the thought of going arose. Although a separate offense is not stated here for one who leaves a bed or chair in the open, it should be understood that for one who has beds and chairs arranged in the open at the wrong time and goes beyond a stone's throw, there is a pācittiya by the previous training rule, and a dukkaṭa by this one for going beyond the boundary. With "Maṇḍape vā rukkhamūle vā," even the open is included, therefore, it should be seen that even there, a dukkaṭa is stated here. However, there is only a dukkaṭa by both for one who spreads out bedding in the open and leaves. Some say, "when a Sangha bedding is spread out in a Sangha monastery and one departs, a pācittiya was stated, so there is a dukkaṭa for each Sangha (bedding and monastery)." The rest here is straightforward. These seven factors are involved here: the bedding having the stated characteristics, it being the property of the Sangha, spreading or having it spread in a monastery with the stated characteristics, the absence of encumbrance, the absence of danger, departing indifferently, and transgressing the boundary.

Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Second Lodging Training Rule is Finished.

6. Anupakhajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. The Training Rule on Not Crowding

119-121.Chaṭṭheanupavisitvāti samīpaṃ pavisitvā.Bahūpakārataṃ guṇavisiṭṭhatañca sallakkhentoti bhaṇḍāgārikassa bahūpakārataṃ dhammakathikādīnaṃ guṇavisiṭṭhatañca sallakkhento.Samantā diyaḍḍho hatthoti majjhe paññattamañcapīṭhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

119-121. In the sixth, anupavisitvā means having entered nearby. Bahūpakārataṃ guṇavisiṭṭhatañca sallakkhento means considering the great helpfulness of the storekeeper and the distinguished qualities of the Dhamma speaker, etc. Samantā diyaḍḍho hattho was stated in reference to a bed or chair established in the middle.

122.Upacāraṃṭhapetvāti vuttalakkhaṇaṃ upacāraṃ ṭhapetvā.Ekavihāreti ekasmiṃ senāsane.Ekapariveṇeti tassa vihārassa parikkhepabbhantare. ‘‘Gilāno pavisatītiādīsu anāpattikāraṇasabbhāvato gilānāditāya pavisissāmīti upacāraṃ pavisantassa satipi sambādhetukāmatāya anāpatti vuttāyevā’’ti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Evañca sati agilānādibhāvopi visuṃ aṅgesu vattabbo siyā,mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. anupakhajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) pana ‘‘saṅghikavihāratā, anuṭṭhāpanīyabhāvajānanaṃ, sambādhetukāmatā, upacāre nisīdanaṃ vā nipajjanaṃ vāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgānī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ, tasmā vīmaṃsitabbaṃ.

122. Upacāraṃ ṭhapetvā means having maintained the boundary with the stated characteristics. Ekavihāre means in one lodging. Ekapariveṇe means within the enclosure of that monastery. ‘‘Gilāno pavisatītiādīsu anāpattikāraṇasabbhāvato gilānāditāya pavisissāmīti upacāraṃ pavisantassa satipi sambādhetukāmatāya anāpatti vuttāyevā’’ti it is said in all three gaṇṭhipadesu. If this is the case, the state of not being sick, etc., should also be stated separately among the factors, but in the mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. anupakhajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), it states only, "saṅghikavihāratā, anuṭṭhāpanīyabhāvajānanaṃ, sambādhetukāmatā, upacāre nisīdanaṃ vā nipajjanaṃ vāti imāni混凝土 cattāri aṅgānī," therefore, it should be investigated.

Anupakhajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Not Crowding is Finished.

7. Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. The Training Rule on Dragging Out

126.Sattamekoṭṭhakānīti dvārakoṭṭhakāni. ‘‘Nikkhamāti vacanaṃ sutvāpi attano ruciyā nikkhamati, anāpattī’’ti vadanti.

126. In the seventh, koṭṭhakānī means door frames. Some say, "even having heard the word 'get out,' if he gets out on his own accord, there is no offense."

128.Alajjiṃ nikkaḍḍhatītiādīsu paṭhamaṃ alajjīādibhāvena nikkaḍḍhissāmīti cintetvā nikkaḍḍhantassa cittassa lahuparivattitāya kope uppannepi anāpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Saṅghikavihāro, upasampannassa bhaṇḍanakārakabhāvādivinimuttatā, kopena nikkaḍḍhanaṃ vā nikkaḍḍhāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

128. In Alajjiṃ nikkaḍḍhatī etc., even if anger arises due to the quick change of mind for one who first thinks, "I will drag him out because he is shameless, etc.," while dragging him out, there is no offense. The rest here is straightforward. These three factors are involved here: the monastery being the property of the Sangha, the absence of the state of an ordained monk being a quarrel-maker, etc., and dragging out or having dragged out in anger.

Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Dragging Out is Finished.

8. Vehāsakuṭisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. The Training Rule on a Storied Building

129-131.Aṭṭhame uparimatale padarānaṃ asantharitattā‘‘upariacchannatalāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.Pubbe vuttanayenevāti anupakhajjasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Saṅghiko vihāro, asīsaghaṭṭā vehāsakuṭi, heṭṭhā saparibhogatā, apaṭāṇidinne āhaccapādake nisīdanaṃ vā nipajjanaṃ vāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

129-131. In the eighth, because the upper floor lacks a covering of plaster, ‘‘upariacchannatalāyā’’ was said. Pubbe vuttanayenevā means just as stated in the Training Rule on Not Crowding. The rest is very easy to understand. These four factors are involved here: the monastery being the property of the Sangha, the storied building being high enough not to hit one's head, the lower floor being available for use, and sitting or lying down with legs dangling without being offered.

Vehāsakuṭisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on a Storied Building is Finished.

9. Mahallakavihārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. The Training Rule on a Large Monastery

135.Navame ‘‘mahallako nāma vihāro sasāmiko’’ti vuttattā saññācikāya kuṭiyā anāpatti. ‘‘Aḍḍhateyyahatthampī’’ti ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena vuttavacanaṃ pāḷiyā sametīti āha‘‘taṃ suvutta’’nti. ‘‘Pāḷiyaṃ aṭṭhakathāyañca ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇassa okāsassa dassitattā kavāṭaṃ aḍḍhateyyahatthavitthārato ūnakaṃ vā hotu adhikaṃ vā, aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇaṃyeva okāso’’ti vadanti.

135. In the ninth, because it was said that "mahallako nāma vihāro sasāmiko," there is no offense for a small hut made by oneself. ‘‘Aḍḍhateyyahatthampī’’ - he says, ‘‘taṃ suvutta’’ that the statement stated by way of the highest limit agrees with the Pali. Some say, "because an opening of a measure of one and a half hatthas was shown in the Pali and the commentary by way of the highest limit, whether the door is less than or more than one and a half hatthas in width, the opening is only of a measure of one and a half hatthas."

Yassa vemajjheti yassa vihārassa vemajjhe.Sā aparipūraupacārāpi hotīti vivariyamānaṃ kavāṭaṃ yaṃ bhittiṃ āhanati, sā samantā kavāṭavitthārappamāṇaupacārarahitāpi hotīti attho. Ālokaṃ sandheti pidhetītiālokasandhi. ‘‘Punappunaṃ chādāpesi, punappunaṃ limpāpesīti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ uppannadosena sikkhāpadassa paññattattā lepaṃ anujānantena ca dvārabandhassa samantā aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇeyeva padese punappunaṃ lepassa anuññātattā tato aññattha punappunaṃ limpentassa vā limpāpentassa vā bhittiyaṃ mattikāya kattabbakiccaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā puna catutthalepe dinne pācittiyena bhavitabba’’nti vadanti.Gaṇṭhipadesupana tīsupi ‘‘punappunaṃ lepadānassa vuttappamāṇato aññattha paṭikkhittamattaṃ ṭhapetvā pācittiyassa avuttattā dukkaṭaṃ anurūpa’’nti vuttaṃ.

Yassa vemajjhe means in the middle of which monastery. Sā aparipūraupacārāpi hotī means that the door, when being opened, strikes against a wall, and that wall lacks sufficient space around it equivalent to the width of the door; that is the meaning. Ālokaṃ sandheti pidhetīti ālokasandhi means a window. "Because the training rule was established due to the offense arising from the incident of repeatedly having it plastered and repeatedly having it painted, and because permission was granted for plastering and because repeated plastering was allowed only on a space of one and a half hand-spans around the doorframe, it is said that if one repeatedly plasters or has plastered elsewhere, after finishing the work to be done with clay on the wall, and gives a fourth coat, a pācittiya offense should be incurred." In the Gaṇṭhipada, however, regarding all three, it is stated, "Leaving aside the fact that repeated plastering is prohibited elsewhere from the specified amount, since a pācittiya offense is not mentioned, a dukkaṭa offense is appropriate."

Adhiṭṭhātabbanti saṃvidhātabbaṃ.Appahariteti etthaappa-saddo ‘‘appiccho’’tiādīsu viya abhāvatthoti āha‘‘aharite’’ti.Patanokāsoti patanokāsattā tatra ṭhitassa bhikkhuno upari pateyyāti adhippāyo.Sace harite ṭhito adhiṭṭheti, āpatti dukkaṭassāti vacanena imamatthaṃ dīpeti – sace vihārassa samantā vuttappamāṇe paricchede pubbaṇṇādīni na santi, tattha vihāro kāretabbo. Yattha pana santi, tattha kārāpentassa dukkaṭanti.

Adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ means it should be arranged. Appaharite here, the word appa is in the sense of absence, as in "appiccho (desireless)," thus he says "aharite" (not green). Patanokāso means because it is a place of falling, it might fall on a bhikkhu standing there; this is the intention. The statement Sace harite ṭhito adhiṭṭheti, āpatti dukkaṭassā (If one stands on green [grass or plants] and designates, there is an offense of dukkaṭa) clarifies this meaning: If there are no crops, etc., within the specified boundary around the monastery, a monastery should be built there. But where they exist, there is a dukkaṭa offense for having it built.

136.Ekekaṃ maggaṃ ujukameva uṭṭhapetvā chādanaṃ maggena chādanaṃ nāma hotīti dassetuṃ‘‘maggena chādentassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Iminā pana nayena sabbasmiṃ vihāre ekavāraṃ chādite taṃ chadanaṃ ekamagganti gahetvā‘‘dve magge’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pariyāyena chādanepi imināva nayena yojetabba’’nti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘punappunaṃ chādāpesī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā ‘‘sabbampi cetaṃ chadanaṃ chadanūpari veditabba’’nti iminā aṭṭhakathāvacanena ca sameti, tasmādve magge adhiṭṭhahitvā tatiyāya maggaṃ āṇāpetvā pakkamitabbanti ettha dve chadanāni adhiṭṭhahitvā tatiyaṃ chadanaṃ ‘‘evaṃ chādehī’’ti āṇāpetvā pakkamitabbanti evamattho gahetabbo.

136.To show that covering with a roof by raising each rafter straight up is called covering with rafters, ‘‘maggena chādentassā’’ (for one who covers with rafters) is stated. By this method, however, having taken that covering as one rafter when the entire monastery is covered once, ‘‘dve magge’’ (two rafters) etc., is stated. "Even in covering in sequence, it should be connected in this same way," is stated in all three Gaṇṭhipadas, and it agrees with this statement, "punappunaṃ chādāpesi (repeatedly had it covered)," in this passage and with this commentary statement, "sabbampi cetaṃ chadanaṃ chadanūpari veditabbaṃ (all this covering should be understood as covering upon covering)," therefore, dve magge adhiṭṭhahitvā tatiyāya maggaṃ āṇāpetvā pakkamitabbaṃti (having designated two rafters, having ordered the third rafter, one should depart) here means having designated two coverings, having ordered the third covering, "Cover it thus," one should depart; this is how the meaning should be taken.

Tatiyāya magganti etthatatiyāyāti upayogatthe sampadānavacanaṃ, tatiyaṃ magganti attho.Tiṇṇaṃ maggānanti maggavasena chāditānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ chadanānaṃ.Tiṇṇaṃ pariyāyānanti etthāpi eseva nayo.Catutthe magge vā pariyāye vāti ca tathā chādentānaṃ catutthaṃ chādanameva vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Mahallakavihāratā, attano vāsāgāratā, uttari adhiṭṭhānanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

Tatiyāya magganti in this, tatiyāyā is a dative case in the sense of use, meaning the third rafter. Tiṇṇaṃ maggānanti of three coverings covered in terms of rafters. Tiṇṇaṃ pariyāyānanti here too, this is the same method. Catutthe magge vā pariyāye vāti and thus, only the fourth covering is stated for those who are covering. The rest is straightforward. Being a large monastery, being one's own dwelling, and further designation, these are the three factors here.

Mahallakavihārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the training rule concerning large monasteries is complete.

10. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. The Training Rule on Living Beings

140.Dasame imassa sikkhāpadassa ‘‘siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā’’ti bāhiraparibhogavasena paṭhamaṃ paññattattā ‘‘sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjeyyā’’ti sikkhāpadaṃ attano nahānapānādiparibhogavasena paññattanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ vā paṭhamaṃ paññattepi attano paribhogavaseneva paññattattā puna imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ bāhiraparibhogavaseneva paññattanti gahetabbaṃ.

140.In the tenth training rule, because the first establishment, "siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā (one should water or have watered)," is in terms of external use, the training rule, "sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjeyyā (one should use water with living beings)," should be understood as established in terms of one's own use, such as bathing and drinking. Even in that first establishment, it was established in terms of one's own use, thus, this training rule should be taken as established only in terms of external use.

‘‘paṇṇattivajja’’nti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Udakassa sappāṇakatā, ‘‘siñcanena pāṇakā marissantī’’ti jānanaṃ, tādisameva ca udakaṃ, vinā vadhakacetanāya kenacideva karaṇīyena tiṇādīnaṃ siñcananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

‘‘paṇṇattivajja’’nti. (an offense against the enactment) The rest is straightforward in meaning. The water being with living beings, knowing that "living beings will die by watering," and it being such water, watering grass, etc., due to some necessary action without the intention to kill, these are the four factors here.

Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the training rule concerning living beings is complete.

Niṭṭhito senāsanavaggo dutiyo.

The second Senāsana Vagga is complete.

Bhūtagāmavaggotipi imasseva nāmaṃ.

This is also called the Bhūtagāma Vagga.

3. Ovādavaggo

3. The Ovāda Vagga

1. Ovādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. The Commentary on the Ovāda Training Rule

144.Bhikkhunivaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpadekathānusārenāti ‘‘so thero kiṃsīlo kiṃsamācāro katarakulā pabbajito’’tiādinā pucchantānaṃ pucchākathānusārena.Kathetuṃ vaṭṭantīti nirāmiseneva cittena kathetuṃ vaṭṭanti. Aniyyānikattā saggamokkhamaggānaṃ tiracchānabhūtā kathātiracchānakathāti āha‘‘saggamaggagamanepī’’tiādi.Api-saddena pageva mokkhamaggagamaneti dīpeti.Tiracchānabhūtanti tirokaraṇabhūtaṃ, bādhikanti vuttaṃ hoti. Laddhāsevanā hi tiracchānakathā saggamokkhānaṃ bādhikāva hoti.Samiddhoti paripuṇṇo.Sahitatthoti yuttattho. Atthagambhīratādiyogatogambhīro. Bahurasoti attharasādibahuraso.Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhasaṃyuttoti aniccādilakkhaṇapaṭivedharasaāvahanato lakkhaṇapaṭivedhasaṃyutto.

144.In the first training rule of the Bhikkhunī Vagga, kathānusārenā means according to the line of questioning, such as, "What is the virtue, conduct, and family from which that elder has gone forth?" Kathetuṃ vaṭṭantī means they are fit to speak with a selfless mind. Talks that are an obstacle to the paths to heaven and liberation, being base talk, he says ‘‘tiracchānakathā’’ and states ‘‘saggamaggagamanepī’’ (even for going to the heavenly path). By the word Api (even), it indicates all the more for going to the path of liberation. Tiracchānabhūtanti means being an obstruction, an impediment. For base talk, when frequently engaged in, is indeed an impediment to heaven and liberation. Samiddhoti means complete. Sahitatthoti means having a fitting meaning. Gambhīro because of the depth of meaning, etc. Bahurasoti having many flavors such as the flavor of meaning. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhasaṃyuttoti connected with the penetration of characteristics, because of conveying the flavor of penetrating the characteristics of impermanence, etc.

145-147.Paratoti parattha, uttarinti attho.Karontovāti paribāhire karontoyeva.Pātimokkhoti cārittavārittappabhedaṃ sikkhāpadasīlaṃ. Tañhi yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehi, tasmā ‘‘pātimokkha’’nti vuccati. Saṃvaraṇaṃsaṃvaro,kāyavacīdvārānaṃ pidahanaṃ. Yena hi te saṃvutā pihitā honti, so saṃvaro, kāyikavācasikassa avītikkamassetaṃ nāmaṃ.Pātimokkhasaṃvarena saṃvutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarena pihitakāyavacīdvāro. Tathābhūto ca yasmā tena samaṅgī nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ‘‘samannāgato’’ti.Vattatīti attabhāvaṃ pavatteti.Viharatīti iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle ṭhitassa bhikkhuno iriyāpathavihāro dassito.

145-147.Paratoti means elsewhere, further. Karontovāti even while doing in the outer area. Pātimokkhoti means the training rule precepts that are divided into rules of conduct and rules of restraint. For that protects one who protects it and liberates from suffering such as that of the realms of loss, therefore, it is called "Pātimokkha." Saṃvaraṇaṃ is saṃvaro, the closing of the doors of body and speech. Because by which they are closed and covered, that is saṃvara, this is a name for the non-transgression of bodily and verbal actions. Pātimokkhasaṃvarena saṃvutoti means one whose bodily and verbal doors are closed by the restraint of the Pātimokkha. And because one of such a nature is said to be endowed with it, therefore it is said ‘‘samannāgato’’ (endowed). Vattatīti means maintains his existence. Viharatīti by this, the deportment of a bhikkhu established in the virtue of the restraint of the Pātimokkha is shown.

‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthavibhaṅgeti jhānavibhaṅge.Sīlaṃ patiṭṭhātiādīni pātimokkhasseva vevacanāni. Tattha (vibha. aṭṭha. 511) sīlanti kāmañcetaṃ saha kammavācāpariyosānena ijjhanakassa pātimokkhasseva vevacanaṃ, evaṃ santepi dhammato etaṃ sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīhi vā viramantassa vattapaṭipattiṃ vā pūrentassa cetanādayo dhammā veditabbā. Yasmā pana pātimokkhasīlena bhikkhu sāsane patiṭṭhāti nāma, tasmā taṃ ‘‘patiṭṭhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Patiṭṭhahati vā ettha bhikkhu, kusaladhammā eva vā ettha patiṭṭhahantītipatiṭṭhā. Ayamattho ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192) ca ‘‘patiṭṭhā, mahārāja, sīlaṃ sabbesaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammāna’’nti (mi. pa. 2.1.9) ca ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhitassa kho, mahārāja, sabbe kusalā dhammā na parihāyantī’’ti ca ādisuttavasena veditabbo.

‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi (this was said) is begun. There, vibhaṅgeti in the Jhāna Vibhaṅga. Sīlaṃ patiṭṭhātiādīni (virtue is the foundation) etc., are synonyms for the Pātimokkha itself. There (vibha. aṭṭha. 511), sīlaṃ (virtue) is indeed a synonym for the Pātimokkha itself, which is accomplished along with the completion of the Kammavācā. Even so, in terms of Dhamma, this "virtue" is to be understood as the mental factors of one who abstains from killing, etc., or of one who fulfills the duties of conduct. Since a bhikkhu is established in the Sāsana by means of the virtue of the Pātimokkha, therefore it is called "patiṭṭhā" (foundation). Or a bhikkhu is established here, or wholesome qualities themselves are established here, thus patiṭṭhā (foundation). This meaning should be understood in terms of the suttas beginning with "sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño" (established in virtue, a wise person) (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192) and "patiṭṭhā, mahārāja, sīlaṃ sabbesaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammāna" (virtue, great king, is the foundation of all wholesome qualities) (mi. pa. 2.1.9) and "sīle patiṭṭhitassa kho, mahārāja, sabbe kusalā dhammā na parihāyantī" (for one established in virtue, great king, all wholesome qualities do not decline).

ādi. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

ādi. (beginning) And it was said –

‘‘Tasmātiha tvaṃ, uttiya, ādimeva visodhehi kusalesu dhammesu. Ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ? Sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ diṭṭhi ca ujukā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.382).

‘‘Tasmātiha tvaṃ, uttiya, ādimeva visodhehi kusalesu dhammesu. Ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ? Sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ diṭṭhi ca ujukā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.382).

Yathā hi nagaravaḍḍhakī nagaraṃ māpetukāmo paṭhamaṃ nagaraṭṭhānaṃ sodheti, tato aparabhāge vīthicatukkasiṅghāṭakādiparicchedena vibhajitvā nagaraṃ māpeti, evameva yogāvacaro ādimhi sīlaṃ sodheti, tato aparabhāge samādhivipassanāmaggaphalanibbānāni sacchikaroti. Yathā vā pana rajako paṭhamaṃ tīhi khārehi vatthaṃ dhovitvā parisuddhe vatthe yadicchakaṃ raṅgajātaṃ upaneti, yathā vā pana cheko cittakāro rūpaṃ likhitukāmo ādito bhittiparikammaṃ karoti, tato aparabhāge rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, evameva yogāvacaro āditova sīlaṃ visodhetvā aparabhāge samathavipassanādayo dhamme sacchikaroti. Tasmā sīlaṃ ‘‘ādī’’ti vuttaṃ.

(Therefore, Uttiya, first purify what is the beginning in wholesome qualities. And what is the beginning of wholesome qualities? Virtue that is very pure, and a straight view.) Just as a city planner, wanting to build a city, first cleans the city site, then divides the remaining area with the arrangement of streets, squares, and crossroads, and then builds the city, so too, the yogi first purifies virtue at the beginning, and then realizes Samādhi, Vipassanā, the path, fruit, and Nibbāna in the remaining area. Or just as a dyer, after first washing a cloth with three alkaline solutions, applies any desired color to the purified cloth, or just as a skilled painter, wanting to draw a form, first prepares the wall, and then creates the form in the remaining area, so too, the yogi, having purified virtue from the very beginning, realizes the qualities of Samatha, Vipassanā, etc., in the remaining area. Therefore, virtue is called "ādī" (beginning).

caraṇaṃ. ‘‘Caraṇā’’ti pādā vuccanti. Yathā hi chinnacaraṇassa purisassa disaṃgamanābhisaṅkhāro na jāyati, paripuṇṇapādasseva jāyati, evameva yassa sīlaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti khaṇḍaṃ aparipuṇṇaṃ, tassa nibbānagamanāya ñāṇagamanaṃ na sampajjati. Yassa pana taṃ abhinnaṃ hoti akhaṇḍaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, tassa nibbānagamanāya ñāṇagamanaṃ sampajjati. Tasmā sīlaṃ ‘‘caraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.

caraṇaṃ. ("Caraṇā" means feet.) Just as the aspiration to go to a direction does not arise for a person with severed feet, but arises only for one with complete feet, so too, for one whose virtue is broken, cracked, or incomplete, the going of knowledge for the sake of going to Nibbāna does not succeed. But for one whose virtue is unbroken, uncracked, and complete, the going of knowledge for the sake of going to Nibbāna succeeds. Therefore, virtue is called "caraṇa" (feet).

saṃyamo,saṃvaraṇavasenasaṃvaroti ubhayenapi sīlasaṃyamo ceva sīlasaṃvaro ca kathito. Vacanattho panettha saṃyameti vītikkamavipphandanaṃ, puggalaṃ vā saṃyameti vītikkamavasena tassa vipphandituṃ na detītisaṃyamo,vītikkamassa pavesanadvāraṃ saṃvarati pidahatītisaṃvaro. Mokkhanti uttamaṃ mukhabhūtaṃ vā. Yathā hi sattānaṃ catubbidho āhāro mukhena pavisitvā aṅgamaṅgāni pharati, evaṃ yoginopi catubhūmakakusalaṃ sīlamukhena pavisitvā atthasiddhiṃ sampādeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mokkha’’nti. Pamukhe sādhūtipamokkhaṃ,pubbaṅgamaṃ seṭṭhaṃ padhānanti attho.Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyāti catubhūmakakusalānaṃ paṭilābhatthāya pamokkhaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ seṭṭhaṃ padhānanti veditabbaṃ.

saṃyamo, (restraint) In terms of restraining, saṃvaro (restraint), thus both virtue as restraint and virtue as control are stated. Here, the meaning of the words is saṃyameti (restrains) the agitation of transgression, or saṃyameti (restrains) the person, not allowing him to be agitated by transgression; thus saṃyamo (restraint), saṃvarati (restrains) and closes the door of entry for transgression; thus saṃvaro (restraint). Mokkhanti (liberation) means supreme or being the chief. Just as the four kinds of food enter through the mouth and permeate the limbs of beings, so too, the virtue that is wholesome in the four planes of existence enters through the mouth of the yogi and accomplishes the attainment of benefits. Therefore, it is said "mokkha" (liberation). Pamukhe sādhūti pamokkhaṃ, (foremost) means being foremost, excellent, and principal. Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyāti (for the attainment of wholesome qualities) should be understood as being foremost, excellent, and principal for the sake of attaining wholesome qualities in the four planes of existence.

Kāyiko avītikkamoti tividhaṃ kāyasucaritaṃ.Vācasikoti catubbidhaṃ vacīsucaritaṃ.Kāyikavācasikoti tadubhayaṃ. Iminā ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ pariyādāya dasseti.Saṃvutoti pihito, saṃvutindriyo pihitindriyoti attho. Yathā hi saṃvutadvāraṃ gehaṃ ‘‘saṃvutagehaṃ pihitageha’’nti vuccati, evamidha saṃvutindriyo ‘‘saṃvuto’’ti vutto.Pātimokkhasaṃvarenāti pātimokkhasaṅkhātena saṃvarena.Upetotiādīni sabbāni aññamaññavevacanāni.

Kāyiko avītikkamoti (bodily non-transgression) means the threefold bodily good conduct. Vācasikoti (verbal) means the fourfold verbal good conduct. Kāyikavācasikoti (bodily and verbal) means both of those. By this, he shows encompassing the Aājīvaṭṭhamaka Sīla (the eightfold virtue of livelihood). Saṃvutoti (restrained) means closed, saṃvutindriyo (restrained in the senses) means with closed senses. Just as a house with a closed door is called "saṃvutagehaṃ (closed house)" and "pihitageha (covered house)," so here, one restrained in the senses is called "saṃvuto" (restrained). Pātimokkhasaṃvarenāti (with the restraint of the Pātimokkha) means with the restraint called Pātimokkha. Upetotiādīni (endowed) etc., all are synonyms for each other.

Iriyatītiādīhi sattahipi padehi pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle ṭhitassa bhikkhuno iriyāpathavihāro kathito. Tatthairiyatīti catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ aññatarasamaṅgibhāvato iriyati. Tehi iriyāpathacatukkehi kāyasakaṭavattanenavattati. Ekaṃ iriyāpathadukkhaṃ aparena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā ciraṭṭhitibhāvena sarīrarakkhaṇatopāleti. Ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe asaṇṭhahitvā sabbairiyāpathe vattanatoyapeti. Tena tena iriyāpathena tathā tathā kāyassa yāpanatoyāpeti. Cirakālavattāpanatocarati. Iriyāpathena iriyāpathaṃ vicchinditvā jīvitaharaṇatoviharati.

Iriyatītiādīhi (he walks) etc., with all seven terms, the deportment of a bhikkhu established in the virtue of the restraint of the Pātimokkha is stated. There, iriyatīti (he walks) means he walks because he is endowed with one of the four deportments. By those four deportments, by the turning of the bodily chariot, he vattati (maintains). By interrupting one suffering of deportment with another deportment, he pāleti (protects) because of the long-lasting protection of the body. Because he conducts himself in all deportments, not being fixed in one deportment, he yapeti (maintains). Because of maintaining the body in that way with that deportment, he yāpeti (sustains). Because of continuing for a long time, he carati (conducts). By interrupting one deportment with another, he viharati (dwells), removing the weariness.

Micchājīvapaṭisedhakenāti –

Micchājīvapaṭisedhakenāti (by the rejection of wrong livelihood) –

‘‘Idhekacco veḷudānena vā pattadānena vā puppha phala sinānadantakaṭṭhadānena vā cāṭukamyatāya vā muggasūpyatāya vā pāribhaṭayatāya vā jaṅghapesanikena vā aññataraññatarena vā buddhapaṭikuṭṭhena micchāājīvena jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ vuccati anācāro’’ti (vibha. 513) –

‘‘Idhekacco veḷudānena vā pattadānena vā puppha phala sinānadantakaṭṭhadānena vā cāṭukamyatāya vā muggasūpyatāya vā pāribhaṭayatāya vā jaṅghapesanikena vā aññataraññatarena vā buddhapaṭikuṭṭhena micchāājīvena jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ vuccati anācāro’’ti (vibha. 513) –

Evaṃ vuttaanācārasaṅkhātamicchājīvapaṭipakkhena.

(Here, someone makes a living by wrong livelihood that is condemned by the Buddha, by offering bamboo sticks, offering bowls, flowers, fruits, bathing powders, tooth sticks, flattery, offering mung bean soup, acting as a messenger, or by various other means; this is called misconduct) – By the opposition to wrong livelihood, which is called misconduct.

Na veḷudānādinā ācārenāti –

Na veḷudānādinā ācārenāti (not by the conduct of offering bamboo sticks, etc.) –

‘‘Idhekacco na veḷudānena na patta na puppha na phala na sināna na dantakaṭṭha na cāṭukamyatāya na muggasūpyatāya na pāribhaṭayatāya na jaṅghapesanikena na aññataraññatarena buddhapaṭikuṭṭhena micchāājīvena jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ vuccati ācāro’’ti (vibha. 513) –

‘‘Idhekacco na veḷudānena na patta na puppha na phala na sināna na dantakaṭṭha na cāṭukamyatāya na muggasūpyatāya na pāribhaṭayatāya na jaṅghapesanikena na aññataraññatarena buddhapaṭikuṭṭhena micchāājīvena jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ vuccati ācāro’’ti (vibha. 513) –

Evaṃ vuttena na veḷudānādinā ācārena.

(Here, someone does not make a living by wrong livelihood that is condemned by the Buddha, by offering bamboo sticks, bowls, flowers, fruits, bathing powders, tooth sticks, flattery, offering mung bean soup, acting as a messenger, or by various other means; this is called conduct) – By the conduct of not offering bamboo sticks, etc., as was stated.

Vesiyādiagocaraṃ pahāyāti –

Vesiyādiagocaraṃ pahāyāti (having abandoned the sphere of prostitutes, etc.) –

‘‘Idhekacco vesiyagocaro vā hoti vidhava thullakumāri paṇḍaka bhikkhuni pānāgāragocaro vā, saṃsaṭṭho viharati rājūhi rājamahāmattehi titthiyehi titthiyasāvakehi ananulomikena saṃsaggena, yāni pana tāni kulāni assaddhāni appasannāni anopānabhūtāni akkosakaparibhāsakāni anatthakāmāni ahitakāmāni aphāsukakāmāni ayogakkhemakāmāni bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ upāsakānaṃ upāsikānaṃ, tathārūpāni kulāni sevati bhajati payirupāsati, ayaṃ vuccati agocaro’’ti (vibha. 514) –

‘‘Idhekacco vesiyagocaro vā hoti vidhava thullakumāri paṇḍaka bhikkhuni pānāgāragocaro vā, saṃsaṭṭho viharati rājūhi rājamahāmattehi titthiyehi titthiyasāvakehi ananulomikena saṃsaggena, yāni pana tāni kulāni assaddhāni appasannāni anopānabhūtāni akkosakaparibhāsakāni anatthakāmāni ahitakāmāni aphāsukakāmāni ayogakkhemakāmāni bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ upāsakānaṃ upāsikānaṃ, tathārūpāni kulāni sevati bhajati payirupāsati, ayaṃ vuccati agocaro’’ti (vibha. 514) –

Evamāgataṃ vesiyādiagocaraṃ pahāya.

(Here, someone associates with prostitutes, widows, older unmarried women, eunuchs, bhikkhunīs, or frequents drinking houses, dwells in association with kings, royal ministers, sectarians, or disciples of sectarians with improper association; and those families that are faithless, displeased, without generosity, abusive, wishing harm, wishing discomfort, wishing insecurity to bhikkhus, bhikkhunīs, male lay followers, and female lay followers, he associates with, cultivates, and attends upon such families; this is called an improper sphere) – Having abandoned the sphere of prostitutes, etc., as has been stated.

Saddhāsampannakulādināti etthaādi-saddena upanissayagocarādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tividho hi gocaro upanissayagocaro ārakkhagocaro upanibandhagocaroti. Katamo upanissayagocaro? Dasakathāvatthuguṇasamannāgato kalyāṇamitto, yaṃ nissāya asutaṃ suṇāti, sutaṃ pariyodapeti, kaṅkhaṃ vitarati, diṭṭhiṃ ujuṃ karoti, cittaṃ pasādeti. Yassa vā pana anusikkhamāno saddhāya vaḍḍhati, sīlena sutena cāgena paññāya vaḍḍhati, ayaṃupanissayagocaro. Katamo ārakkhagocaro? Idha bhikkhu antaragharaṃ paviṭṭho vīthiṃ paṭipanno okkhittacakkhu yugamattadassāvī saṃvuto gacchati, na hatthiṃ olokento, na assaṃ, na rathaṃ, na pattiṃ, na itthiṃ, na purisaṃ olokento, na uddhaṃ olokento, na adho olokento, na disāvidisaṃ vipekkhamāno gacchati, ayaṃārakkhagocaro. Katamo upanibandhagocaro? Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, yattha cittaṃ upanibandhati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘ko ca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno gocaro sako pettiko visayo? Yadidaṃ cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.372), ayaṃupanibandhagocaro. Iti ayaṃ tividho gocaro idhaādi-saddena saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo.

Saddhāsampannakulādināti: Here, the word ādi (etc.) includes the support (upanissaya) and range (gocara), etc. For range (gocara) is of three kinds: support range (upanissayagocara), protection range (ārakkhagocara), and attachment range (upanibandhagocara). What is the support range? A good friend endowed with the ten topics of discussion, relying on whom one hears what has not been heard, clarifies what has been heard, dispels doubt, straightens views, and gladdens the mind. Or, following whom one grows in faith, grows in virtue, learning, generosity, and wisdom—this is the support range (upanissayagocara). What is the protection range? Here, a bhikkhu, having entered a village, walking along the street with downcast eyes, seeing only a yoke’s distance, goes restrained, not looking at elephants, horses, carts, infantry, women, or men; not looking up, not looking down, not glancing at the directions or intermediate directions—this is the protection range (ārakkhagocara). What is the attachment range? The four foundations of mindfulness, where the mind is attached. For it was said by the Blessed One, “And what, bhikkhus, is a bhikkhu's own ancestral range? It is these four foundations of mindfulness” (saṃ. ni. 5.372)—this is the attachment range (upanibandhagocara). Thus, this threefold range should be understood as included here by the word ādi.

Appamattakesu vajjesūti asañcicca āpannasekhiyaakusalacittuppādādibhedesu vajjesu.Bhayato dassanasīloti paramāṇumattaṃ vajjaṃ aṭṭhasaṭṭhiyojanasatasahassubbedhasinerupabbatasadisaṃ katvā dassanasabhāvo, sabbalahukaṃ vā dubbhāsitamattaṃ pārājikasadisaṃ katvā dassanasabhāvo.Sammā ādāyāti sammadeva sakkaccaṃ sabbaso vā ādiyitvā.

Appamattakesu vajjesūti: In faults that are slight, such as unintentional offenses, the arising of unwholesome thoughts pertaining to the Sekhiya rules, etc. Bhayato dassanasīloti: One who sees faults, even the size of a speck of dust, as being like Mount Sineru, which is 8,680,000 yojanas high; one whose nature it is to see even the slightest harsh word as like a Pārājika offense. Sammā ādāyāti: Having properly, respectfully, or completely undertaken.

sutaṃ,pariyattidhammo. Taṃ dhāretītisutadharo,sutassa ādhārabhūto. Yassa hi ito gahitaṃ etto palāyati, chiddaghaṭe udakaṃ viya na tiṭṭhati, parisamajjhe ekaṃ suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathetuṃ vā vācetuṃ vā na sakkoti, ayaṃ na sutadharo nāma. Yassa pana uggahitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahitakālasadisameva hoti, dasapi vīsatipi vassāni sajjhāyaṃ akarontassa na nassati, ayaṃ sutadharo nāma. Tenevāha‘‘yadassa ta’’ntiādi. Ekapadampi ekakkharampi avinaṭṭhaṃ hutvā sanniciyatīti sannicayo, sutaṃ sannicayo etasmintisutasannicayoti āha‘‘sutaṃ sannicitaṃ asminti sutasannicayo’’ti. Yassa hi sutaṃ hadayamañjusāyaṃ sannicitaṃ silāya lekhā viya suvaṇṇaghaṭe pakkhittā sīhavasā viya ca sādhu tiṭṭhati, ayaṃ sutasannicayo nāma. Tenāha‘‘etena…pe… avināsaṃ dassetī’’ti.

Sutaṃ, the Teaching that is learned (pariyattidhamma). One who retains that is a sutadharo, a holder of what is learned. For if what is taken in here vanishes from there, like water in a leaky pot, it does not stay; one is not able to recite or narrate a single sutta or Jātaka in the middle of an assembly; such a one is not called a sutadharo. But for one whose learned Buddha-word remains just as it was learned, and does not perish even after ten or twenty years without recitation, such a one is called a sutadharo. Therefore, he said, "yadassa taṃ" etc. Even a single word, a single syllable, not being lost, is accumulated; therefore, sutasannicayo means one in whom what is learned is accumulated; he said, "sutaṃ sannicitaṃ asminti sutasannicayo". For one in whom what is learned is accumulated in the heart-jewel-box, like a writing on stone, like lion's fat placed in a golden vessel, it stays well; such a one is called sutasannicayo. Therefore, he said, "etena…pe… avināsaṃ dassetī"ti.

Dhātāti paguṇā vācuggatā. Ekassa hi uggahitabuddhavacanaṃ niccakālikaṃ na hoti, ‘‘asukasuttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathehī’’ti vutte ‘‘sajjhāyitvā aññehi saṃsanditvā paripucchāvasena atthaṃ ogāhitvā jānissāmī’’ti vadati. Ekassa paguṇaṃ pabandhavicchedābhāvato gaṅgāsotasadisaṃ bhavaṅgasotasadisañca akittimaṃ sukhappavatti hoti, ‘‘asukasuttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathehī’’ti vutte uddharitvā tameva katheti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ‘‘dhātā’’ti.Vācāya paguṇā katāti suttadasakavaggadasakapaṇṇāsadasakavasena vācāya sajjhāyitā, dasa suttāni gatāni, dasa vaggāni gatānītiādinā sallakkhetvā vācāya sajjhāyitāti attho. Suttekadesassa hi suttamattassa ca vacasā paricayo idha nādhippeto, atha kho vaggādivaseneva.Manasā anupekkhitāti manasā anu anu pekkhitā, bhāgaso nijjhāyitā cintitāti attho.Āvajjantassāti vācāya sajjhāyituṃ buddhavacanaṃ manasā cintentassa.Suṭṭhu paṭividdhāti nijjaṭaṃ niggumbaṃ katvā suṭṭhu yāthāvato paṭividdhā.

Dhātāti: Fluent, well-recited. For one who has learned the Buddha-word, it is not always readily available; when asked to recite a certain sutta or Jātaka, he says, "Having recited it, consulted with others, inquired thoroughly, and understood the meaning, I will know." But for one, because of the fluency and absence of breaks in the continuity, there is effortless and pleasant flow like a river current or like the flow of bhavanga; when asked to recite a certain sutta or Jātaka, he brings it forth and recites it. With reference to that, it was said, "dhātā". Vācāya paguṇā katāti: Made fluent by recitation with the voice, contemplating by way of the decades of suttas, decades of vaggas, decades of paṇṇāsas, reciting with the voice, thinking, "Ten suttas have passed, ten vaggas have passed," and so on. For here, familiarity with a portion of a sutta or just a sutta by way of speech is not intended; but rather, it is by way of vaggas and so on. Manasā anupekkhitāti: Repeatedly contemplated with the mind, reflected upon part by part, pondered, is the meaning. Āvajjantassāti: For one who is directing his mind towards the Buddha-word in order to recite it with the voice. Suṭṭhu paṭividdhāti: Having made it clear, without obscurity, well understood in accordance with reality.

Dve mātikāti bhikkhumātikā bhikkhunīmātikā ca.Vācuggatāti purimasseva vevacanaṃ.Tisso anumodanāti saṅghabhatte dānānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttaanumodanā, vihārādimaṅgale maṅgalasuttādianumodanā, matakabhattādiavamaṅgale tirokuṭṭādianumodanāti imā tisso anumodanā.Kammākammavinicchayoti parivārāvasāne kammavagge vuttavinicchayo. ‘‘Vipassanāvasena uggaṇhantena catudhātuvavatthānamukhena uggahetabba’’nti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Catūsu disāsu appaṭihatattā catasso disā etassāti catuddiso, catuddisoyevacātuddiso,catasso vā disā arahati, catūsu vā disāsu sādhūticātuddiso.

Dve mātikāti: The Bhikkhu-mātikā and the Bhikkhunī-mātikā. Vācuggatāti: A synonym for the preceding. Tisso anumodanāti: The anumodanā connected with the benefits of giving at a Sangha meal; the anumodanā with auspicious suttas at the inauguration of a monastery, etc.; and the anumodanā with Tirokuṭṭa etc. at an inauspicious event like a funeral meal; these are the three anumodanās. Kammākammavinicchayoti: The judgment stated in the Kamma-vagga at the end of the Parivāra. In all three Gaṇṭhipadas, it is stated that "One learning in terms of vipassanā should learn with the four-element analysis as the starting point." Because it is unimpeded in the four directions, the four directions are its: catuddiso. Catuddiso indeed is cātuddiso, or it is fit for the four directions, or it is good in the four directions: cātuddiso.

Abhivinayeti sakale vinayapiṭake.Vinetunti sikkhāpetuṃ.‘‘Dve vibhaṅgā paguṇā vācuggatā kātabbāti idaṃ paripucchāvasena uggahaṇampi sandhāya vutta’’nti vadanti. Ekassa pamuṭṭhaṃ, itarassa paguṇaṃ hotīti āha‘‘tīhi janehi saddhiṃ parivattanakkhamā kātabbā’’ti.Abhidhammeti nāmarūpaparicchede.Heṭṭhimā vā tayo vaggāti mahāvaggato heṭṭhā sagāthakavaggo nidānavaggo khandhakavaggoti ime tayo vaggā. ‘‘Dhammapadampi saha vatthunā uggahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’timahāpaccariyaṃvuttattā jātakabhāṇakena sāṭṭhakathaṃ jātakaṃ uggahetvāpi dhammapadampi saha vatthunā uggahetabbameva.

Abhivinayeti: In the entire Vinaya Piṭaka. Vinetuṃti: To train. "Dve vibhaṅgā paguṇā vācuggatā kātabbā"ti: This is said with reference to learning by way of questioning, it is said. Because what is forgotten by one is fluent for the other, he says, "tīhi janehi saddhiṃ parivattanakkhamā kātabbā". Abhidhammeti: In the analysis of name and form. Heṭṭhimā vā tayo vaggāti: The three vaggas below the Mahāvagga: the Sagāthakavagga, the Nidānavagga, and the Khandhakavagga. Because it is said in the Mahāpaccariyaṃ that "It is fitting to learn the Dhammapada along with its stories," a Jātaka reciter, having learned the Jātaka along with its commentary, should certainly learn the Dhammapada along with its stories.

kalyāṇavāco. Tenāha‘‘sithiladhanitādīnaṃ…pe… vācāya samannāgato’’ti. Tatthaparimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāyāti ṭhānakaraṇasampattiyā sikkhāsampattiyā ca katthacipi anūnatāya parimaṇḍalapadāni byañjanāni akkharāni etissāti parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā, padameva vā atthassa byañjanatopadabyañjanaṃ,taṃ akkharapāripūriṃ katvā sithiladhanitādidasavidhaṃ byañjanabuddhiṃ aparihāpetvā vuttaṃparimaṇḍalaṃnāma hoti. Akkharapāripūriyā hi padabyañjanassa parimaṇḍalatā. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘sithiladhanitādīnaṃyathāvidhānavacanenā’’ti, parimaṇḍalaṃ padabyañjanaṃ etissātiparimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā. Atha vā pajjati ñāyati attho etenāti padaṃ, nāmādi. Yathādhippetamatthaṃ byañjetīti byañjanaṃ, vākyaṃ. Tesaṃ paripuṇṇatāyaparimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā.

kalyāṇavāco. Therefore, he said, "sithiladhanitādīnaṃ…pe… vācāya samannāgato". There, parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāyāti: The words (pada) and letters (byañjana) are rounded (parimaṇḍala) because of the perfection of place and instrument (ṭhānakaraṇasampatti) and the perfection of training (sikkhāsampatti), being deficient nowhere; such is one who has rounded words and letters; or the word (pada) itself reveals (byañjanato) the meaning, hence padabyañjanaṃ, having made that a complete syllable, without losing the tenfold skill in letters beginning with sithila and dhanita, what is said is called parimaṇḍala. For the completeness of the word and letter is the roundness. Therefore, it was said, "sithiladhanitādīnaṃyathāvidhānavacanenā", one who has rounded words and letters is parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā. Or alternatively, that by which the meaning is known (ñāyati) is pada, such as a name, etc. That which reveals (byañjeti) the intended meaning is byañjana, a sentence. Because of the completeness of these, parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā.

‘‘parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.

"parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāyā"ti was said.

porī,tassa bhikkhuno tenetaṃ bhāsitabbaṃ atthassa guṇaparipuṇṇabhāvena pure puṇṇabhāve bhavāti attho. Pure vā bhavattā poriyā nāgarikitthiyā sukhumālattanena sadisātiporī,pure saṃvaḍḍhanārī viya sukumārāti attho. Purassa esātipiporī, purassa esāti nagaravāsīnaṃ kathāti attho. Nagaravāsino hi yuttakathā honti pitimattaṃ ‘‘pitā’’ti, bhātimattaṃ ‘‘bhātā’’ti vadanti. Evarūpī hi kathā bahuno janassa kantā hoti manāpā, tāya poriyā.

porī, it should be spoken by that bhikkhu in that way, because it becomes fully complete (pure puṇṇabhāve bhavati) due to the quality of the meaning being fully complete. Or because it is foremost (pure) in becoming, porī is similar to the tenderness of a woman of the city, porī, like a young woman raised in a city is delicate, is the meaning. Belonging to the city is also porī, purassa esāti: It is the speech of the city dwellers, is the meaning. For city dwellers have appropriate speech, they call a father "father," they call a brother "brother." Such speech is pleasing and agreeable to many people; with that porī.

Vissaṭṭhāyāti pittasemhādīhi apalibuddhāya sandiṭṭhavilambitādidosarahitāya. Atha vā nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇikaṃ nirantaraṃ ekarasañca katvā parisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ dhammaṃ kathentassa vācā vissaṭṭhā nāma. Yo hi bhikkhu dhammaṃ kathento suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā ārabhitvā āraddhakālato paṭṭhāya turitaturito araṇiṃ manthento viya uṇhakhādanīyaṃ khādanto viya pāḷiyā anusandhipubbāparesu gahitaṃ gahitameva, aggahitaṃ aggahitameva katvā purāṇapaṇṇantaresu caramānaṃ godhaṃ uṭṭhāpento viya tattha tattha paharanto osāpetvā uṭṭhāya gacchati. Purāṇapaṇṇantaresu hi paripātiyamānā godhā kadāci dissati kadāci na dissati, evamekaccassa atthavaṇṇanā katthaci dissati katthaci na dissati. Yopi dhammaṃ kathento kālena sīghaṃ, kālena saṇikaṃ, kālena mandaṃ, kālena mahāsaddaṃ, kālena khuddakasaddaṃ karoti, yathā nijjhāmataṇhikapetassa mukhato niccharaṇakaaggi kālena jalati kālena nibbāyati, evaṃ petadhammakathiko nāma hoti, parisāya uṭṭhātukāmāya puna ārabhati. Yopi kathento tattha tattha vitthāyati, appaṭibhānatāya āpajjati, kenaci rogena nitthunanto viya kandanto viya katheti, imesaṃ sabbesampi kathā vissaṭṭhā nāma na hoti sukhena appavattabhāvato. Yo pana suttaṃ āharitvā ācariyehi dinnanaye ṭhito ācariyuggahaṃ amuñcanto yathā ca ācariyā taṃ taṃ suttaṃ saṃvaṇṇesuṃ, teneva nayena saṃvaṇṇento nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇikantiādinā vuttanayena kathāpabandhaṃ avicchinnaṃ katvā nadīsoto viya pavatteti, ākāsagaṅgāto bhassamānaudakaṃ viya nirantarakathaṃ pavatteti, tassa kathā vissaṭṭhā nāma hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘vissaṭṭhāyā’’ti.

Vissaṭṭhāyāti: Unobstructed by phlegm, bile, etc., devoid of faults such as indistinctness or slowness. Or alternatively, the speech of one who, neither too fast nor too slow, making it continuous and uniform, teaches the Dhamma according to the inclination of the assembly, is called vissaṭṭhā. For a bhikkhu, when teaching the Dhamma, having begun a sutta or Jātaka, from the time of starting, does it quickly and hurriedly, like one churning a fire-stick, like one eating hot food, what has been grasped in the Pali according to the connection of what precedes and follows is grasped, what has not been grasped is not grasped, like one rousing a monitor lizard wandering among old leaves, striking here and there, he finishes and gets up and leaves. For a monitor lizard wandering among old leaves is sometimes seen, sometimes not seen; likewise, the explanation of the meaning of some is sometimes seen, sometimes not seen. And one who, when teaching the Dhamma, sometimes does it quickly, sometimes slowly, sometimes softly, sometimes loudly, sometimes quietly, like the fire emerging from the mouth of a hungry ghost that sometimes burns and sometimes goes out, is called a ghost-Dhamma-speaker; for the assembly wanting to get up, he begins again. And one who, when teaching, elaborates here and there, is confused due to a lack of eloquence, like one moaning or crying from some disease, the speech of all of these is not called vissaṭṭhā, because it does not flow easily. But one who, having brought forth a sutta, standing on the method given by the teachers, not abandoning the teacher's learning, and just as the teachers explained that sutta, explaining it in that same way, neither too quickly nor too slowly, making the continuity of speech unbroken in the manner stated, lets it flow like a river current, lets a continuous speech flow like water pouring from the celestial Ganges, his speech is called vissaṭṭhā. With reference to that, it was said "vissaṭṭhāyā"ti.

Anelagaḷāyāti elagaḷavirahitāya. Kassaci hi kathentassa elaṃ gaḷati, lālā paggharati, kheḷaphusitāni vā nikkhamanti, tassa vācā elagaḷā nāma hoti, tabbiparītāyāti attho.Atthassa viññāpaniyāti ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā bhāsitatthassa viññāpanasamatthatāya atthañāpane sādhanāya.

Anelagaḷāyāti: Devoid of ela and gala. For when someone is speaking, ela drips, saliva flows, or phlegm-droplets come out, his speech is called elagaḷā; the opposite of that is the meaning. Atthassa viññāpaniyāti: Because of the ability to make the meaning known, making the beginning, middle, and end clear, capable of making the meaning understood, instrumental in the understanding of the meaning.

kalyāṇavākkaraṇo. Tenevāha‘‘madhurassaro’’ti.Hīḷetīti avajānāti. Mātugāmoti sambandho. Manaṃ apāyati vaḍḍhetītimanāpo. Tenāha‘‘manavaḍḍhanako’’ti.Vaṭṭabhayena tajjetvāti yobbanamadādimattā bhikkhuniyo saṃsārabhayena tāsetvā.Gihikāleti attano gihikāle. Bhikkhuniyā methunena bhikkhunīdūsako hotīti bhikkhuniyā kāyasaṃsaggameva vadati. Sikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu pana methunenapi bhikkhunīdūsako na hotīti āha‘‘sikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu methunadhamma’’nti. ‘‘Kāsāyavatthavasanāyā’’ti vacanato dussīlāsu bhikkhunīsikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu garudhammaṃ ajjhāpannapubbo paṭikkhittoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tassā bhikkhuniyā abhāvepi yā yā tassā vacanaṃ assosuṃ, tā tā tatheva maññantīti āha‘‘mātugāmo hī’’tiādi.

kalyāṇavākkaraṇo. Therefore, he said "madhurassaro". Hīḷetīti: Disparages. The connection is to womankind. That which pleases and increases the mind is manāpo. Therefore, he said "manavaḍḍhanako". Vaṭṭabhayena tajjetvāti: Having threatened the bhikkhunis who are intoxicated with the pride of youth etc. with the fear of saṃsāra. Gihikāleti: In his lay life. Because a bhikkhu is a defiler of bhikkhunis by sexual intercourse with a bhikkhuni, he only speaks of bodily contact with a bhikkhuni. But he is not a defiler of bhikkhunis even by sexual intercourse with sikkhamānās or sāmaṇerīs, therefore he says, "sikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu methunadhamma". From the statement "Kāsāyavatthavasanāyā", it should be understood that one who has previously committed a grave offense against immoral bhikkhunīs, sikkhamānās, or sāmaṇerīs is already rejected. Even in the absence of that bhikkhuni, those who heard her words think of it in that same way, therefore he says, "mātugāmo hī"tiādi.

‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Imehi pana aṭṭhahaṅgehi asamannāgataṃ ñatticatutthena kammena sammannento dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati, bhikkhu pana sammatoyeva hoti.

"ettha cā"tiādi is begun. But one who sanctions with a Ñatticatuttha Kamma that is not endowed with these eight factors incurs a Dukkaṭa offense, but the bhikkhu is only considered (sammata).

148.Garukehīti garukātabbehi.Ekatoupasampannāyāti upayogatthe bhummavacanaṃ. ‘‘Ovadatī’’ti vā imassa ‘‘vadatī’’ti atthe sati sampadānavacanampi yujjati. Bhikkhūnaṃ santike upasampannā nāma parivattaliṅgā vā pañcasatasākiyāniyo vā.

148.Garukehīti: By those who are to be greatly respected. Ekatoupasampannāyāti: The plural is used in the sense of instrumentality. Or, if "ovadatī" is taken in the sense of "vadatī," then the dative case is also appropriate. Those who are ordained in the presence of bhikkhus are either those who had their gender changed or the five hundred Sākiyan women.

149.Āsanaṃ paññapetvāti ettha ‘‘sace bhūmi manāpā hoti, āsanaṃ apaññāpetumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Mātugāmaggahaṇena bhikkhunīpi saṅgahitāti āha‘‘dhammadesanāpattimocanattha’’nti. Sammatassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ pāṭipade ovādatthāya sabbāhi bhikkhunīhi āgantabbato ‘‘samaggāttha bhaginiyo’’ti iminā sabbāsaṃ āgamanaṃ pucchatīti āha‘‘sabbā āgatātthā’’ti. Gilānāsu anāgatāsupi gilānānaṃ anāgamanassa anuññātattā āgantuṃ samatthāhi ca sabbāhi āgatattā ‘‘samaggāmhayyā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.Antogāme vātiādīsu yattha pañca aṅgāni bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā vandituṃ na sakkā hoti, tattha ṭhitāya eva kāyaṃ purato nāmetvā ‘‘vandāmi ayyā’’ti añjaliṃ paggayha gantumpi vaṭṭati.Antaragharanti katthaci nagaradvārassa bahiindakhīlato paṭṭhāya antogāmo vuccati, katthaci gharummārato paṭṭhāya antogehaṃ. Idha pana ‘‘antogāme vā’’ti visuṃ vuttattā ‘‘antaraghare vā’’ti antogehaṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Yattha katthacīti antogāmādīsu yattha katthaci.

149.Āsanaṃ paññapetvāti: Here, it is stated in all three Gaṇṭhipadas that "If the ground is pleasant, it is permissible not to set out a seat." By the term mātugāma, bhikkhunis are also included, therefore he says "dhammadesanāpattimocanattha". Because all the bhikkhunis should come on the Observance Day to the bhikkhu who has been designated, for the purpose of receiving instruction, with "samaggāttha bhaginiyo," he asks about the arrival of all of them, therefore he says "sabbā āgatātthā". Even for those who are sick and have not come, because it is permitted for the sick not to come, and because all those who are able to come have come, it is fitting to say "samaggāmhayyā." Antogāme vātiādīsu: In those places beginning with "in a village," where it is not possible to prostrate oneself with five limbs on the ground, it is also fitting to bow the body forward while standing and, raising the joined palms, to say "vandāmi ayyā" and leave. Antaragharaṃti: In some places, "antogāmo" is said to be from the outer pillar of the city gate, and in some places, "antogehaṃ" is said to be from the threshold of the house. But here, because "antogāme vā" is stated separately, it should be understood that "antaraghare vā" is said with reference to "antogehaṃ." Yattha katthacīti: In any place among those beginning with "in a village."

Vaṭṭatīti ‘‘vasatha ayye, mayaṃ bhikkhū ānessāmā’’ti vuttavacanaṃ saddahantīhi vasituṃ vaṭṭati.Na nimantitā hutvā gantukāmāti manussehi nimantitā hutvā gantukāmā na hontīti attho, tattheva vassaṃ upagantukāmā hontīti adhippāyo.Yatoti bhikkhunupassayato.Yācitvāti ‘‘tumhehi ānītaovādeneva mayampi vasissāmā’’ti yācitvā.Tatthāti tasmiṃ bhikkhunupassaye.Āgatānaṃ santike ovādena vasitabbanti pacchimikāya vassaṃ vasitabbaṃ.Abhikkhukāvāse vasantiyā āpattīti codanāmukhena sāmaññato āpattippasaṅgaṃ vadati, na pana tassā āpatti.Vassacchedaṃ katvā gacchantiyāpi āpattīti vassānupagamamūlaṃ āpattiṃ vadati. Itarāya āpattiyā anāpattikāraṇasabbhāvato‘‘sā rakkhitabbā’’ti vuttaṃ, sā vassānupagamamūlā āpatti rakkhitabbāti attho, abhikkhukepi āvāse īdisāsu āpadāsu vassaṃ upagantabbanti adhippāyo. Tenāha‘‘āpadāsu hi…pe… anāpatti vuttā’’ti. Itarāya pana āpattiyā anāpatti, kāraṇe asati pacchimikāyapi vassaṃ na upagantabbaṃ. Santesu hi bhikkhūsu vassaṃ anupagacchantiyā āpatti.Tattha gantvā pavāretabbanti ettha apavārentīnaṃ āpattisambhavato. Sace dūrepi bhikkhūnaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sakkā ca hoti navamiyaṃ gantvā pavāretuṃ, tattha gantvā pavāretabbaṃ. Sace pana navamiyaṃ nikkhamitvā sampāpuṇituṃ na sakkā hoti, agacchantīnaṃ anāpatti.

Vaṭṭatīti, it is suitable to dwell for those who, believing the words "Venerable, stay here, we will bring the bhikkhus," have spoken.Na nimantitā hutvā gantukāmāti means they are not willing to go having been invited by people, the intention is that they are willing to approach to spend the rains right there. Yatoti, from which place the bhikkhuni approaches. Yācitvāti, having requested, "We also will stay only by the advice brought by you." Tatthāti, in that bhikkhuni residence. Āgatānaṃ santike ovādena vasitabbanti, one should spend the final rains with instruction from those who have come. Abhikkhukāvāse vasantiyā āpattīti, she speaks of the occasion of an offense in general by way of accusation, but there is no offense for her. Vassacchedaṃ katvā gacchantiyāpi āpattīti, she speaks of an offense rooted in not undertaking the rains. For the other offense, because of the existence of a reason for non-offense, it was said "sā rakkhitabbāti," that offense rooted in not undertaking the rains should be prevented, the intention is that even in a non-bhikkhu residence, one should undertake the rains in such dangers. Therefore, he said, "āpadāsu hi…pe… anāpatti vuttāti." But there is no offense for the other offense, in the absence of a reason, one should not undertake the rains in the final one either. For when there are bhikkhus present, there is an offense for one not undertaking the rains. Tattha gantvā pavāretabbanti, here, because the possibility of offense for those who do not invite. If the dwelling place of the bhikkhus is far away, and it is possible to go on the ninth day and invite, one should go there and invite. But if it is not possible to leave on the ninth day and arrive, there is no offense for those who do not go.

ka-ppaccayaṃ rassattañca katvāuposathapucchakanti vuttāti āha‘‘uposathapucchana’’nti.Uposatho pucchitabboti ‘‘kadā, ayya, uposatho’’ti pucchitabbo. Bhikkhunāpi ‘‘sve, bhagini, uposatho’’ti vattabbaṃ. Bhikkhū kadāci kenaci kāraṇena pannarasikaṃ vā cātuddasīuposathaṃ, cātuddasikaṃ vā pannarasīuposathaṃ karonti, yasmiñca divase bhikkhūhi uposatho kato, tasmiṃyeva bhikkhunīhipi uposatho kātabboti adhippāyena‘‘pakkhassa terasiyaṃyeva gantvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pucchitena bhikkhunā sace cātuddasiyaṃ uposathaṃ karonti, ‘‘cātuddasiko bhaginī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace pana pannarasiyaṃ karonti, ‘‘pannarasiko bhaginī’’ti ācikkhitabbaṃ.Ovādatthāyāti ovādayācanatthāya.Pāṭipadadivasato pana paṭṭhāya dhammasavanatthāya gantabbanti pāṭipadadivase ovādaggahaṇatthāya dutiyadivasato paṭṭhāya antarantarā dhammasavanatthāya gantabbaṃ. Ovādaggahaṇampi hi ‘‘dhammasavanamevā’’ti abhedena vuttaṃ.Nirantaraṃ vihāraṃ upasaṅkamiṃsūti yebhuyyena upasaṅkamanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Vuttañhetantiādinā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjissāmāti sabbāsaṃyeva bhikkhunīnaṃ upasaṅkamanadīpanatthaṃ pāḷi nidassitā.Ovādaṃ gacchatīti ovādaṃ yācituṃ gacchati.Dve tissoti dvīhi tīhi. Karaṇatthe cetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ.

Having made the ka-suffix and shortening, he said uposathapucchakanti, therefore he said "uposathapucchananti." Uposatho pucchitabboti, one should ask, "Venerable, when is the Uposatha?" The bhikkhu also should say, "Tomorrow, sister, is the Uposatha." Bhikkhus sometimes, for some reason, perform the fifteenth Uposatha or the fourteenth Uposatha, or the fourteenth Uposatha or the fifteenth Uposatha, and on whatever day the Uposatha is done by the bhikkhus, on that very day the Uposatha should be done by the bhikkhunis too, with this intention, "pakkhassa terasiyaṃyeva gantvāti," etc., was said. Thus, if the bhikkhu who has been asked in this way performs the Uposatha on the fourteenth, he should say, "It is the fourteenth, sister." But if they perform it on the fifteenth, he should announce, "It is the fifteenth, sister." Ovādatthāyāti, for the sake of requesting instruction. Pāṭipadadivasato pana paṭṭhāya dhammasavanatthāya gantabbanti, on the first day, one should go for the sake of receiving instruction, from the second day onwards, one should go from time to time for the sake of hearing the Dhamma. For receiving instruction is also called "hearing the Dhamma" without distinction. Nirantaraṃ vihāraṃ upasaṅkamiṃsūti, this was said with reference to frequent approaching. Vuttañhetanti, by this and other statements, a Pali passage was shown to indicate the approaching of all the bhikkhunis, thinking, "We will practice according to the instruction." Ovādaṃ gacchatīti, she goes to request instruction. Dve tissoti, by two or three. This instrumental case is in the sense of cause.

Pāsādikenāti pasādajanakena niddosena kāyakammādinā.Sampādetūti tividhaṃ sikkhaṃ sampādetu. Sace pātimokkhuddesakaṃyeva disvā tāhi bhikkhunīhi ovādo yācito bhaveyya, tena kiṃ kātabbanti? Uposathagge sannipatite bhikkhusaṅghe pubbakiccavasena ‘‘atthi kāci bhikkhuniyo ovādaṃ yācamānā’’ti pucchiyamāne ‘‘evaṃ vadehī’’ti ovādapaṭiggāhakena vattabbavacanaṃ aññena bhikkhunā kathāpetvā pātimokkhuddesakena vattabbavacanaṃ attanā vatvā puna sayameva gantvā bhikkhunīnaṃ ārocetabbaṃ, aññena vā bhikkhunā tasmiṃ divase pātimokkhaṃ uddisāpetabbaṃ.Etaṃ vuttanti ‘‘tāhī’’ti etaṃ bahuvacanaṃ vuttaṃ.

Pāsādikenāti, by an act of body, etc., that generates confidence, that is faultless. Sampādetūti, to accomplish the threefold training. If, having seen only the one who recites the Pāṭimokkha, instruction should be requested by those bhikkhunis, what should be done by him? When, in the bhikkhu Saṅgha assembled for the Uposatha, it is asked as a preliminary duty, "Are there any bhikkhunis requesting instruction?" The words to be spoken by the bhikkhu who receives the instruction, saying "Speak thus," should be caused to be spoken by another bhikkhu, and the words to be spoken by the one who recites the Pāṭimokkha should be spoken by himself, and then he himself should go and announce it to the bhikkhunis, or another bhikkhu should cause the Pāṭimokkha to be recited on that day. Etaṃ vuttanti, this plural form "tāhī" was said.

Ekā bhikkhunī vāti idaṃ bahūhi bhikkhunupassayehi ekāya eva bhikkhuniyā sāsanapaṭiggahaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pana dutiyikāya abhāvaṃ sandhāya.Bahūhi bhikkhunupassayehīti antarāmagge vā tasmiṃyeva vā gāme bahūhi bhikkhunupassayehi. ‘‘Bhikkhunisaṅgho ca ayya bhikkhuniyo ca bhikkhunī cā’’ti iminā nānāupassayehi sāsanaṃ gahetvā āgatabhikkhuniyā vattabbavacanaṃ dasseti. Idañca ekena pakārena mukhamattanidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pana bhikkhunupassaye bhikkhunīnaṃ pamāṇaṃ sallakkhetvā tadanurūpena nayena vattabbaṃ.Bhikkhusaṅghassa ayyānaṃ ayyassāti idaṃ saṅkhipitvā vuttaṃ.

Ekā bhikkhunī vāti, this was said with reference to a single bhikkhuni accepting the teaching from many bhikkhuni residences, but not with reference to the absence of a second one. Bahūhi bhikkhunupassayehīti, by many bhikkhuni residences on the road or in that very village. "Bhikkhunisaṅgho ca ayya bhikkhuniyo ca bhikkhunī cā"ti, by this, he shows the words to be spoken by a bhikkhuni who has taken the teaching and come from various residences. And this was said to show just the opening in one way; however, in that particular bhikkhuni residence, having considered the number of bhikkhunis, it should be spoken in a manner appropriate to that. Bhikkhusaṅghassa ayyānaṃ ayyassāti, this was said concisely.

Pātimokkhuddesakenapīti idaṃ saṅghuposathavaseneva dassitaṃ. Yattha pana tiṇṇaṃ dvinnaṃ vā vasanaṭṭhāne pātimokkhuddeso natthi, tatthāpi ñattiṭhapanakena itarena vā bhikkhunā imināva nayena vattabbaṃ. Ekapuggalenapi uposathadivase ovādayācanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā pāṭipade āgatānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ ‘‘natthi kocī’’tiādi vattabbameva. Sace sayameva, ‘‘sammato aha’’nti vattabbaṃ. Imaṃ vidhiṃ ajānanto idha bāloti adhippeto.

Pātimokkhuddesakenapīti, this was shown only in the context of the Saṅgha Uposatha. But where there is no recitation of the Pāṭimokkha in a place where three or two dwell, even there, the bhikkhu who makes the motion and announcement or another bhikkhu should speak in this very manner. Even a single individual, having accepted the request for instruction on the Uposatha day, to the bhikkhunis who have come on the day after the new moon, the words "natthi kocī" should be spoken. If it is himself, he should say, "I am appointed." One who does not know this procedure is considered foolish here.

150.Adhammakamme adhammakammasaññī vaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassātiādīsu vijjamānesupi vaggādibhāvanimittesu dukkaṭesu adhammakammamūlakaṃ pācittiyameva pāḷiyaṃ sabbattha vuttanti āha‘‘adhammakamme dvinnaṃ navakānaṃ vasena aṭṭhārasa pācittiyānī’’ti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Asammatatā, bhikkhuniyā paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, ovādavasena aṭṭhagarudhammabhaṇananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

150. He said, "adhammakamme dvinnaṃ navakānaṃ vasena aṭṭhārasa pācittiyānīti," because even when the divisions, etc., that are present in "Adhammakamme adhammakammasaññī vaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī ovadati, āpatti pācittiyassā" etc., are grounds for dukkata offenses, the pācittiya offense rooted in unlawful acts alone is stated everywhere in the Pali. The rest here is clear in meaning. Being unappointed, the bhikkhuni being fully ordained, speaking the eight Garudhamma as instruction - these three are the factors in this case.

Ovādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Instruction Training Rule is Finished.

2. Atthaṅgatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. The Explanation of the Training Rule on (Instructing) After Sunset

153.Dutiyekusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ sātaccakiriyāyāti pubbabhāgappaṭipattivasena vuttaṃ.Munātīti jānāti.Tena ñāṇenāti tena arahattaphalapaññāsaṅkhātena ñāṇena.Pathesūti upāyamaggesu. Arahato pariniṭṭhitasikkhattā āha‘‘idañca…pe… vutta’’nti. Atha vā ‘‘appamajjato sikkhato’’ti imesaṃ padānaṃ hetuatthatā daṭṭhabbā, tasmā appamajjanahetu sikkhanahetu ca adhicetasoti attho.Sokāti cittasantāpā. Ettha caadhicetasoti iminā adhicittasikkhā,appamajjatoti iminā adhisīlasikkhā,munino monapathesu sikkhatoti etehi adhipaññāsikkhā,muninoti vā etena adhipaññāsikkhā,monapathesu sikkhatoti etena tāsaṃ lokuttarasikkhānaṃ pubbabhāgappaṭipadā,sokā na bhavantītiādīhi sikkhāpāripūriyā ānisaṃsā pakāsitāti veditabbaṃ.

153. In the second, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ sātaccakiriyāyāti was said as a preliminary practice. Munātīti, knows. Tena ñāṇenāti, by that knowledge consisting of the wisdom of the fruit of Arahatship. Pathesūti, in the means, the paths. Because the Arahat has completed the training, he said, "idañca…pe… vuttanti." Or else, the words "appamajjato sikkhato" should be seen as having the meaning of cause, therefore the meaning is, on account of non-negligence and on account of training, he has higher mind. Sokāti, mental anguish. And here, by adhicetasoti, the higher mind training; by appamajjatoti, the higher morality training; by munino monapathesu sikkhatoti, these, the higher wisdom training; or by muninoti, this, the higher wisdom training; by monapathesu sikkhatoti, this, the preliminary practice of those supramundane trainings; by sokā na bhavantīti, etc., the benefits of the completeness of the training are revealed, this should be understood.

Kokanudanti padumavisesanaṃ yathā ‘‘kokāsaya’’nti, taṃ kira bahupattaṃ vaṇṇasampannaṃ ativiya sugandhañca hoti. ‘‘Kokanudaṃ nāma setapaduma’’ntipi vadanti.Pātoti pageva. Ayañhettha attho – yathā kokanudasaṅkhātaṃ padumaṃ pāto sūriyuggamanavelāyaṃ phullaṃ vikasitaṃ avītagandhaṃ siyā virocamānaṃ, evaṃ sarīragandhena guṇagandhena ca sugandhaṃ saradakāle antalikkhe ādiccamiva attano tejasā tapantaṃ aṅgehi niccharaṇajutitāya aṅgīrasaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ passāti.

Kokanudanti, is a special kind of lotus, just as in "kokāsaya"; it is said to have many petals, be complete in color, and exceedingly fragrant. Some say, "Kokanudaṃ nāma setapadumaṃ," Kokanuda is a white lotus. Pātoti, early in the morning. The meaning here is this: just as a lotus called Kokanuda, being full-blown and blooming at sunrise in the morning, being without departed fragrance, shining forth, so he sees the Sammāsambuddha, fragrant with the fragrance of his body and the fragrance of his virtues, like the sun in the sky in the autumn season, burning with his own splendor, with his limbs radiating light, like Aṅgīrasa.

Abhabboti paṭipattisāramidaṃ sāsanaṃ, paṭipatti ca pariyattimūlikā, tvañca pariyattiṃ uggahetuṃ asamattho, tasmā abhabboti adhippāyo.Suddhaṃ pilotikakhaṇḍanti iddhiyā abhisaṅkhataṃ parisuddhaṃ coḷakhaṇḍaṃ. Tadā kira bhagavā ‘‘na sajjhāyaṃ kātuṃ asakkonto mama sāsane abhabbo nāma hoti, mā soci bhikkhū’’ti taṃ bāhāyaṃ gahetvā vihāraṃ pavisitvā iddhiyā pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ abhinimminitvā ‘‘handa, bhikkhu, imaṃ parimajjanto ‘rajoharaṇaṃ rajoharaṇa’nti punappunaṃ sajjhāyaṃ karohī’’ti vatvā adāsi tattha pubbekatādhikārattā.

Abhabboti, this teaching is the essence of practice, and practice is rooted in learning; and you are unable to learn, therefore, it is implied, you are incapable. Suddhaṃ pilotikakhaṇḍanti, a pure rag, made by psychic power. It is said that then the Blessed One, thinking, "He who is unable to recite is called incapable in my teaching; do not grieve, bhikkhus," having taken that in his arm and entered the monastery, having created a rag by psychic power, said, "Come, bhikkhu, while wiping with this, repeatedly recite 'rajoharaṇaṃ rajoharaṇa'," and gave it to him, because of his past merit.

rajoharaṇaṃ. Saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvāti asubhasaññaṃ aniccasaññañca upaṭṭhapento saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvā. So hi yoniso ummajjanto ‘‘parisuddhaṃ vatthaṃ, natthettha doso, attabhāvassa panāyaṃ doso’’ti asubhasaññaṃ aniccasaññañca paṭilabhitvā nāmarūpapariggahādinā pañcasu khandhesu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā kalāpasammasanādikkamena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā udayabbayañāṇādipaapāṭiyā vipassanaṃ anulomagotrabhusamīpaṃ pāpesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ‘‘vipassanaṃ ārabhī’’ti.Obhāsagāthaṃ abhāsīti obhāsavissajjanapubbakabhāsitagāthā obhāsagāthā, taṃ abhāsīti attho.

rajoharaṇaṃ. Saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvāti, regaining a sense of urgency, establishing the perception of unattractiveness and the perception of impermanence. For he, wisely considering, thinking, "The cloth is pure; there is no fault in it; but this is a fault of the self," regaining the perception of unattractiveness and the perception of impermanence, having directed his knowledge to the five aggregates by way of grasping name and form, etc., having developed insight by way of the sequence of touching the aggregates, etc., he brought insight near to the conformity knowledge of the lineage. With reference to that, it was said, "vipassanaṃ ārabhīti." Obhāsagāthaṃ abhāsīti, the obhāsagāthā is a verse spoken preceded by the sending forth of light; the meaning is that he spoke that.

Visuddhimagge(visuddhi. 2.386) panadhammapadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.cūḷapanthakattheravatthu)theragāthāsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca(theragā. aṭṭha. 2.566) –

In the Visuddhimagga(visuddhi. 2.386), in the Dhammapada Commentary(dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.cūḷapanthakattheravatthu), and in the Theragāthā Commentary(theragā. aṭṭha. 2.566) –

‘‘Rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati;

‘‘Rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati;
Rāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ rajoti;
Etaṃ rajaṃ vippajahitvā paṇḍitā;
Viharanti te vigatarajassa sāsane.

‘‘Doso…pe… sāsane.

‘‘Doso…pe… sāsane.

‘‘Moho rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati;

‘‘Moho rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati;
Mohassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ rajoti;
Etaṃ rajaṃ vippajahitvā paṇḍitā;
Viharanti te vigatarajassa sāsaneti. –

Adhicetasoti ca ayaṃ cūḷapanthakattherassa udānagāthāti imissāyeva pāḷiyā āgataṃ. Theragāthāyaṃ pana cūḷapanthakattherassa udānagāthāsu ayaṃ anāruḷhā, ‘‘ekudāniyattherassa pana ayaṃ udānagāthā’’ti (theragā. aṭṭha. 1.ekudāniyattheragāthāvaṇṇanā) tattha vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi imissā pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca evamāgatattā cūḷapanthakattherassapi ayaṃ udānagāthā obhāsagāthāvasena ca bhagavatā bhāsitāti gahetabbaṃ.Arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti abhiññāpaṭisambhidāparivāraṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.Abhabbo tvantiādivacanato anukampāvasena saddhivihārikādiṃ saṅghikavihārā nikkaḍḍhāpentassa anāpatti viya dissati. Abhabbo hi thero sañcicca taṃ kātuṃ, nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpade vā apaññatte therena evaṃ katanti gahetabbaṃ.

Adhicetasoti ca, this is the verse of joyful utterance of Cūḷapanthaka Thera; it comes in this very Pali passage. But in the Theragāthā, this is not included in the verses of joyful utterance of Cūḷapanthaka Thera; "But this is the verse of joyful utterance of Ekudāniya Thera" (theragā. aṭṭha. 1.ekudāniyattheragāthāvaṇṇanā) is said there. Even so, because it has come thus in this Pali passage and its commentary, it should be taken that this verse of joyful utterance was spoken by the Blessed One in the way of a light-emitting verse even for Cūḷapanthaka Thera. Arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti, he attained Arahatship along with the retinue of the superknowledges and discriminations. From the words Abhabbo tvantiādi, it appears that there is no offense for one who, out of compassion, drives a co-resident, etc., out of a monastery belonging to the Saṅgha. For the incapable Thera intended to do that, or it should be taken that the Thera did this when the training rule on driving out had not been established.

156.Ovadantassa pācittiyanti atthaṅgate sūriye garudhammehi vā aññena vā dhammeneva ovadantassa sammatassapi pācittiyaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Atthaṅgatasūriyatā, paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, ovadananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

156. Ovadantassa pācittiyanti, for one instructing after sunset with the Garudhamma or any other Dhamma, even if appointed, there is a pācittiya. The rest here is clear in meaning. The sun being set, being fully ordained, instructing - these three are the factors in this case.

Atthaṅgatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on (Instructing) After Sunset is Finished.

3. Bhikkhunupassayasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. The Explanation of the Training Rule on (Instructing in) a Bhikkhuni Residence

162.Tatiyaṃ uttānatthameva. Upassayūpagamanaṃ, paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, samayābhāvo, garudhammehi ovadananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

162. The third is clear in meaning. Going to a residence, being fully ordained, absence of an agreement, instructing with the Garudhamma - these four are the factors in this case.

Bhikkhunupassayasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on (Instructing in) a Bhikkhuni Residence is Finished.

4. Āmisasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Material Gain

164.Catutthe ‘‘upasampannaṃ…pe… bhikkhunovādaka’’nti imesaṃ ‘‘maṅkukattukāmo’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Avaṇṇaṃ kattukāmo ayasaṃ kattukāmo’’ti imesaṃ pana vasena ‘‘upasampanna’’ntiādīsu ‘‘upasampannassā’’ti vibhattivipariṇāmo kātabboti imamatthaṃ sandhāya‘‘ujjhāpanake vuttanayenevattho veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cīvarahetu ovadatī’’tiādinā bhaṇantassa ekekasmiṃ vacane niṭṭhite pācittiyaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Upasampannaṃ saṅghena asammata’’nti pāḷivacanato ‘‘sammatena vā saṅghena vā bhāraṃ katvā ṭhapito’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanato ca aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgato sammatena vā vippavasitukāmena ‘‘yāvāhaṃ āgamissāmi, tāva te bhāro hotū’’ti yācitvā ṭhapito tassābhāvato saṅghena vā tatheva bhāraṃ katvā ṭhapito aṭṭhahi garudhammehi aññena vā dhammena ovadituṃ labhatīti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘yo pana, bhikkhu, asammato bhikkhuniyo ovadeyya, pācittiya’’nti idaṃ pageva bhāraṃ katvā aṭṭhapitaṃ sandhāya vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.

164. In the fourth, the connection of "upasampannaṃ…pe… bhikkhunovādaka" with "maṅkukattukāmo." But with regard to "avaṇṇaṃ kattukāmo ayasaṃ kattukāmo," the change of विभक्ति (inflectional ending) to "upasampannassā" in "upasampanna," etc., should be done; with this meaning in mind, it was said "ujjhāpanake vuttanayenevattho veditabboti." When one speaking with "cīvarahetu ovadatī" etc., each time a statement is finished, a pācittiya should be understood. From the Pali statement "Upasampannaṃ saṅghena asammata" and from the commentary statement "sammatena vā saṅghena vā bhāraṃ katvā ṭhapito," one appointed consisting of eight factors or one placed in charge by the Saṅgha or by an appointed one who wants to live separately, saying, "Until I return, let the responsibility be yours," having requested and placed him in charge, in the absence of that one, or one placed in charge by the Saṅgha in the same way, is allowed to instruct with the eight Garudhamma or another Dhamma, this should be understood. Therefore, "yo pana, bhikkhu, asammato bhikkhuniyo ovadeyya, pācittiya"nti, this should be taken as referring to one who has been placed in charge beforehand.

168.Anāpatti pakatiyā cīvarahetu…pe… ovadantaṃ bhaṇatīti ettha āmisahetu ovadantaṃ ‘‘āmisahetu ovadatī’’ti saññāya evaṃ bhaṇantassa anāpatti, ‘‘na āmisahetu ovadatī’’ti saññino pana dukkaṭaṃ, na āmisahetu ovadantaṃ pana ‘‘āmisahetu ovadatī’’ti saññāya bhaṇantassapi anāpatti sacittakattā sikkhāpadassa. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannatā, dhammena laddhasammutitā, anāmisantaratā, avaṇṇakāmatāya evaṃ bhaṇananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

168.Anāpatti pakatiyā cīvarahetu…pe… ovadantaṃ bhaṇatīti, in this case, when rebuking due to material gain, there is no offense for saying with the perception that "he/she rebukes due to material gain." However, if one perceives that "he/she does not rebuke due to material gain," it is a dukkaṭa. But even if one says "he/she rebukes due to material gain" about someone who is not rebuking due to material gain, there is no offense, because the training rule involves one's own intention. The rest here is straightforward. Being ordained, having the formal agreement obtained through lawful means, absence of material incentive, speaking thus due to a desire not to disparage—these are the four factors involved here.

Āmisasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Material Gain is Concluded.

169.Pañcamaṃ uttānatthameva.

169.The fifth is straightforward in meaning.

6. Cīvarasibbāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on Sewing Robes

175.Chaṭṭhe sace sā bhikkhunī taṃ cīvaraṃ āditova pārupeyya, aññā bhikkhuniyo disvā ujjhāpeyyuṃ, tato mahājano passituṃ na labhatīti maññamāno‘‘yathāsaṃhaṭaṃ haritvā nikkhipitvā’’tiādimāha.

175.In the sixth case, if that bhikkhuni were to wear that robe from the beginning, and other bhikkhunis, seeing it, were to criticize, then, thinking that the general public would not get a chance to see it, she said, "having taken it away and put it down as it was assembled," and so on.

176.Nīharatīti sakiṃ nīharati. Yepi tesaṃ nissitakāti sambandho.Kathinavattanti ‘‘sabrahmacārīnaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti itikattabbatāvasena sūcikammakaraṇaṃ.Ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ dukkaṭanti akappiyasamādānavasena dukkaṭaṃ.Vañcetvāti ‘‘tava ñātikāyā’’ti avatvā ‘‘ekissā bhikkhuniyā’’ti ettakameva vatvā. ‘‘Ekissā bhikkhuniyā’’ti sutvā te aññātikasaññino bhaveyyunti āha‘‘akappiye niyojitattā’’ti. ‘‘Idaṃ te mātu cīvara’’ntiādīni avatvāpi ‘‘idaṃ cīvaraṃ sibbehī’’ti suddhacittena sibbāpentassapi anāpatti.

176.Nīharatīti, she takes it out once. "Those dependent on them also" is the connection. Kathinavattanti, sewing work is permissible for co-religious practitioners in terms of duty. Dukkaṭa for preceptors and teachers means a dukkaṭa due to accepting something non-allowable. Deceiving means saying only "for a certain bhikkhuni" without saying "for your relative." She said, "because of assigning to something non-allowable," thinking that having heard "for a certain bhikkhuni," they might have the perception of it not being a relative. Even if one has robes sewn with a pure heart, without saying "this is your mother's robe," etc., there is no offense.

179.Upāhanatthavikādintiādi-saddena yaṃ cīvaraṃ nivāsetuṃ vā pārupituṃ vā na sakkā hoti, tampi saṅgaṇhāti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā santakatā, nivāsanapārupanūpagatā, vuttanayena sibbanaṃ vā sibbāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

179.Upāhanatthavikādinti, with the word ādi (etc.), it also includes any robe that cannot be used for wearing or putting on. The rest here is straightforward. Being possessed by a non-relative bhikkhuni, not being suitable for wearing or putting on, sewing or having sewn in the manner stated—these are the three factors involved here.

Cīvarasibbāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Sewing Robes is Concluded.

7. Saṃvidahanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on Conspiracy

181.Sattame ‘‘pacchā gacchantīnaṃ corā acchindiṃsū’’ti ettha ‘‘pattacīvara’’nti pāṭhasesoti āha‘‘pacchā gacchantīnaṃ pattacīvara’’nti.Tā bhikkhuniyoti pacchā gacchantiyo bhikkhuniyo. ‘‘Pacchā gacchantīna’’nti ca vibhattivipariṇāmenettha sambandho veditabbo. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘gacchāma bhagini, gacchāma ayyā’’ti bhikkhupubbakaṃ saṃvidhānaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘gacchāma ayya, gacchāma bhaginī’’ti bhikkhunīpubbakaṃ.Ekaddhānamagganti ekaṃ addhānasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ, ekato vā addhānamaggaṃ.Hiyyoti suve.Pareti tatiyadivase.

181.In the seventh, regarding "thieves stole the bowl and robe from those who went later," he says, "the bowl and robe from those who went later," implying that the text should read "pattacīvara." Those bhikkhunis means the bhikkhunis who went later. The connection to "those who went later" should be understood as a transformation of the vibhatti (case ending) here. In the Pali, the conspiracy preceded by bhikkhus is stated as "let us go, sisters; let us go, ayyās," and the conspiracy preceded by bhikkhunis is "let us go, ayya; let us go, sisters." Ekaddhānamagganti, a path equal to one addhāna, or a path to one side. Hiyyoti, tomorrow. Pareti, on the third day.

182-183.Dvidhā vuttappakāroti pādagamanavasena pakkhagamanavasena vāti dvidhā vuttappabhedo. Catunnaṃ maggānaṃ sambandhaṭṭhānaṃcatukkaṃ,tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ sambandhaṭṭhānaṃsiṅghāṭakaṃ. ‘‘Gāmantare gāmantare’’ti ettha añño gāmo gāmantaranti āha‘‘nikkhamane anāpatti…pe… bhikkhuno pācittiya’’nti. ‘‘Saṃvidhāyā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ avisesena vuttattā‘‘neva pāḷiyā sametī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘etthantare saṃvidahitepi bhikkhuno dukkaṭa’’nti vuttattā‘‘na sesaaṭṭhakathāya sametī’’ti vuttaṃ.Addhayojanaṃ atikkamantassāti asati gāme addhayojanaṃ atikkamantassa. Yattha hi addhayojanabbhantare añño gāmo na hoti, taṃ idha agāmakaṃ araññanti adhippetaṃ, addhayojanabbhantare pana gāme sati gāmantaragaṇanāya eva āpatti.

182-183.Dvidhā vuttappakāroti, the kind stated in two ways, either by going on foot or by going by cart. The place of connection of four paths is a catukka (quadruple junction), and the place of connection of three paths is a siṅghāṭaka (triple junction). Regarding "from village to village," he says, "no offense upon exiting…pe…pācittiya for the bhikkhu," meaning another village is a village in between. Because it is stated without distinction in the Pali as "saṃvidhāyā," he said, "it does not agree with the Pali." Because it is stated that "even if they conspire in between, it is a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhu," he said, "it does not agree with the rest of the commentary." Addhayojanaṃ atikkamantassāti, for one who exceeds half a yojana when there is no village. For here, a forest where there is no other village within half a yojana is intended as a non-village area; however, if there is a village within half a yojana, the offense is incurred by counting it as an intervening village.

185.Raṭṭhabhedeti raṭṭhavilope.Cakkasamāruḷhāti iriyāpathacakkaṃ sakaṭacakkaṃ vā samāruḷhā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Dvinnampi saṃvidahitvā maggappaṭipatti, avisaṅketaṃ, samayābhāvo, anāpadā, gāmantarokkamanaṃ vā addhayojanātikkamo vāti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni. Ekatoupasampannādīhi saddhiṃ gacchantassa pana mātugāmasikkhāpadena āpatti.

185.Raṭṭhabhedeti, in the destruction of the kingdom. Cakkasamāruḷhāti, having ascended a cartwheel or the wheel of posture. The rest is straightforward. Practicing the path after conspiring by two or more, absence of doubt, absence of a specific time, absence of danger, entering a village in between, or exceeding half a yojana—these are the five factors involved here. However, when going together with one ordained or more, the offense is incurred by the training rule regarding women.

Saṃvidahanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Conspiracy is Concluded.

8. Nāvābhiruhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Training Rule on Embarking in a Boat

188.Aṭṭhamelokassādamittasanthavavasena kīḷāpurekkhārā saṃvidahitvāti ayaṃ viseso ‘‘evamime…pe… bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ nāvāya kīḷantī’’ti iminā ‘‘uddhaṃgāminiṃ vā adhogāminiṃ vā’’ti iminā ca siddho.

188.In the eighth, having conspired with play as the main purpose due to worldly taste, friendship, and intimacy—this distinction is established by "thus these…pe…playing on a boat with bhikkhunis" and by "going upstream or going downstream."

189.Nadiyā kuto gāmantaranti āha‘‘yassā nadiyā’’tiādi.‘‘Tassā sagāmakatīrapassena…pe… addhayojanagaṇanāyāti ekekapasseneva gamanaṃ sandhāya vuttattā tādisikāya nadiyā majjhena gacchantassa gāmantaragaṇanāya addhayojanagaṇanāya ca āpattī’’ti vadanti.Sabbaaṭṭhakathāsūtiādinā attanā vuttamevatthaṃ samattheti. ‘‘Kīḷāpurekkhāratāya bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya nāvaṃ abhiruhantassa nadiyaṃyeva pācittiyassa vuttattā vāpisamuddādīsu kīḷāpurekkhāratāya dukkaṭameva, na pācittiya’’nti vadanti. ‘‘Lokassādamittasanthavavasena kīḷāpurekkhārā saṃvidahitvā’’ti vacanato keci ‘‘imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ akusalacittaṃ lokavajja’’nti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Kīḷāpurekkhāratāya hi abhiruhitvāpi gāmantarokkamane addhayojanātikkame vā kusalābyākatacittasamaṅgīpi hutvā āpattiṃ āpajjati. Yadi hi so saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvā arahattaṃ vā sacchikareyya, niddaṃ vā okkameyya, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasi karonto gaccheyya, kuto tassa akusalacittasamaṅgitā, yenidaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ akusalacittaṃ lokavajjanti vuccati, tasmā paṇṇattivajjaṃ ticittanti siddhaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.

189.From where is there an intervening village in a river? He says, "of that river," and so on. "By going along the bank of that river with villages…pe…in the calculation of half a yojana," because it is stated in reference to going along only one bank, some say that "for one going in the middle of such a river, the offense is incurred by the calculation of an intervening village and the calculation of half a yojana." He supports the meaning he himself stated with "in all the commentaries," and so on. Some say that "because the pācittiya offense is stated only for embarking on a boat in a river after conspiring with play as the main purpose with a bhikkhuni, it is only a dukkaṭa in ponds, oceans, etc., with play as the main purpose, not a pācittiya offense." Because of the statement "having conspired with play as the main purpose due to worldly taste, friendship, and intimacy," some say that "this training rule is an unwholesome thought, a worldly offense," but that should not be accepted. For even having embarked with play as the main purpose, one incurs an offense by being associated with a wholesome or indeterminate thought when entering a village in between or exceeding half a yojana. For if he were to regain saṃvega (spiritual urgency) and realize arahantship, or fall asleep, or go while focusing on the meditation subject, how could he be associated with an unwholesome thought, such that it is said that this training rule is an unwholesome thought, a worldly offense? Therefore, it is established that it is an offense by prescription and is tri-citta (of three mental qualities). The rest here is straightforward.

Nāvābhiruhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Embarking in a Boat is Concluded.

9. Paripācitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Training Rule on Food Prepared for Oneself

194.Navamepaṭiyāditanti bhikkhūnaṃ atthāya sampāditaṃ.Ñātakā vā honti pavāritā vāti ettha sacepi bhikkhuno aññātakā appavāritā ca siyuṃ, bhikkhuniyā ñātakā pavāritā ce, vaṭṭati.

194.In the ninth, paṭiyāditanti means prepared for the sake of bhikkhus. Whether they are relatives or have been invited means that even if they are non-relatives and uninvited to the bhikkhu, it is allowable if they are relatives and invited to the bhikkhuni.

197.Pāpabhikkhūnaṃ pakkhupacchedāya idaṃ paññattaṃ, tasmā pañcabhojaneyeva āpatti vuttā.Pañca bhojanāni ṭhapetvā sabbattha anāpattīti idaṃ pana iminā sikkhāpadena anāpattidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Viññattiyā uppannaṃ paribhuñjantassa hi aññattha vuttanayena dukkaṭaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Bhikkhuniparipācitabhāvo, jānanaṃ, gihisamārambhābhāvo, odanādīnaṃ aññataratā, tassa ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.

197.This was prescribed for the sake of preventing the rise of evil bhikkhus; therefore, the offense is stated only for the five kinds of food. However, no offense everywhere, except for the five kinds of food is stated to show the non-offense with this training rule. For one who consumes what has arisen from a request incurs a dukkaṭa in the manner stated elsewhere. The rest is straightforward. Being prepared by a bhikkhuni, knowing, absence of instigation by a householder, being one of rice etc., and consuming it—these are the five factors involved here.

Paripācitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Food Prepared for Oneself is Concluded.

10. Rahonisajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Seclusion

198.Dasameupanandassa catutthasikkhāpadenāti appaṭicchanne mātugāmena saddhiṃ rahonisajjasikkhāpadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi taṃ acelakavagge pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ hoti, upanandattheraṃ ārabbha paññattesu pana catutthabhāvato ‘‘upanandassa catutthasikkhāpadenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Catutthasikkhāpadassa vatthuto imassa sikkhāpadassa vatthuno paṭhamaṃ uppannattā idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ paññattaṃ. Iminā ca sikkhāpadena kevalaṃ bhikkhuniyā eva rahonisajjāya āpatti paññattā, upari mātugāmena saddhiṃ rahonisajjāya āpatti visuṃ paññattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

198.In the tenth, with the fourth training rule of Upananda means it is stated in reference to the training rule on sitting in seclusion with a woman in an unshielded place. Although that is the fifth training rule in the acelaka group, it is called "the fourth training rule of Upananda" because it is the fourth among those prescribed concerning Upananda Thera. Because the subject matter of this training rule arose before the subject matter of the fourth training rule, this training rule was prescribed first. It should be seen that with this training rule, an offense is prescribed only for a bhikkhuni sitting in seclusion, and an offense for sitting in seclusion with a woman above that is prescribed separately.

Rahonisajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Seclusion is Concluded.

Niṭṭhito bhikkhunivaggo tatiyo.

The Third Bhikkhuni Chapter is Concluded.

4. Bhojanavaggo

4. The Food Chapter

1. Āvasathapiṇḍasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Training Rule on Alms Food from a Rest House

206.Bhojanavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpadeaddhayojanaṃ vā yojanaṃ vā gantuṃ sakkotīti ettha tattakaṃ gantuṃ sakkontassapi tāvatakaṃ gantvā aladdhabhikkhassa ito bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.Imesaṃyevāti imesaṃ pāsaṇḍānaṃyeva.Ettakānanti imasmiṃ pāsaṇḍe ettakānaṃ.Ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitabbanti ekadivasaṃ sakiṃyeva bhuñjitabbaṃ. ‘‘Ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitabba’’nti vacanato pana ekasmiṃ divase punappunaṃ bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti na gahetabbaṃ.Puna ādito paṭṭhāya bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti iminā paṭhamaṃ bhuttaṭṭhānesu puna ekasmimpi ṭhāne bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dasseti.

206.In the first training rule of the Food Chapter, able to go half a yojana or a yojana means it is allowable to eat from here for one who is able to go that far but has not obtained alms after going that far. Imesaṃyevāti, only of these heretics. Ettakānanti, of so many in this heresy. Ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitabbanti, should be eaten once in one day. However, from the statement "should be eaten once in one day," it should not be taken that it is allowable to eat repeatedly in one day. Puna ādito paṭṭhāya bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti, with this, he shows that it is not allowable to eat again in even one place among the places where one has eaten before.

208.‘‘Gacchanto vā āgacchanto vāti idaṃ addhayojanavasena gahetabba’’nti vadanti.Antarāmagge gataṭṭhāneti ekasseva santakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.‘‘Āgacchantepi eseva nayo’’ti saṅkhepena vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvento‘‘gantvā paccāgacchanto’’tiādimāha. Āpattiṭṭhāneyeva puna bhuñjantassa anāpatti vattabbāti gamane āgamane ca paṭhamaṃ bhojanaṃ avatvā antarāmagge ekadivasaṃ gataṭṭhāne ca ekadivasanti punappunaṃ bhojanameva dassitaṃ, gamanadivase pana āgamanadivase ca ‘‘gamissāmi āgamissāmī’’ti bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Suddhacittena punappunaṃ bhuñjantassapi punappunaṃ bhojane anāpatti. Aññassatthāya uddisitvā paññattaṃ bhikkhuno gahetumeva na vaṭṭatīti āha‘‘bhikkhūnaṃyeva atthāyā’’ti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Āvasathapiṇḍatā, agilānatā, anuvasitvā bhojananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

208."Whether going or coming, this should be taken in terms of half a yojana," some say. Antarāmagge gataṭṭhāneti, this is stated in reference to something belonging to one person only. ‘‘Āgacchantepi eseva nayo’’ti, clarifying the meaning that was stated concisely, he said "one who goes and returns," and so on. It should be stated that there is no offense for eating again only in the place of offense; thus, in going and coming, only repeated eating has been shown in the place gone to one day in between without stating the first meal, but it is indeed allowable to eat on the day of going and the day of coming, thinking "I will go, I will come." There is no offense for eating repeatedly with a pure heart, and he says "only for the sake of bhikkhus," because it is not allowable for a bhikkhu to take something that has been designated and prescribed for someone else. The rest here is straightforward. Being alms food from a rest house, being not ill, eating without staying overnight—these are the three factors involved here.

Āvasathapiṇḍasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Alms Food from a Rest House is Concluded.

2. Gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Training Rule on Group Meals

209.Dutiyeabhimāreti abhigantvā bhagavato māraṇatthāya niyojite dhanuddhare.Guḷhapaṭicchannoti apākaṭo.Pavijjhīti vissajjesi. Nanurājānampi mārāpesīti vacanato idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ ajātasattuno kāle paññattanti siddhaṃ, evañca sati parato anupaññattiyaṃ –

209.In the second, abhimāreti, a bowman assigned to kill the Blessed One by approaching him. Guḷhapaṭicchannoti, not obvious. Pavijjhīti, he released (the arrow). Since it is said that he even had the king killed, it is established that this training rule was prescribed in the time of Ajātasattu. And in that case, in the subsequent re-prescription—

‘‘Tena kho pana samayena rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa ñātisālohito ājīvakesu pabbajito hoti. Atha kho so ājīvako yena rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṃ māgadhaṃ seniyaṃ bimbisāraṃ etadavoca…pe… kukkuccāyantā nādhivāsentī’’ti –

"Now at that time, a relative and blood-relation of King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha had gone forth among the Ājīvakas. Then that Ājīvaka approached King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha, and having approached, said this to King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha…pe…they did not accept out of scrupulousness"—

Idaṃ kasmā vuttanti? So kira ājīvako taṃ dānaṃ dento bimbisārakālato paṭṭhāya adāsi, pacchā ajātasattukāle sikkhāpadapaññattito paṭṭhāya bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā taṃ dānaṃ na paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tasmā ādito paṭṭhāya taṃ vatthu dassitanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Atha kho so ājīvako bhikkhūnaṃ santike dūtaṃ pāhesī’’ti idañca tato pabhuti so ājīvako antarantarā bhikkhū nimantetvā dānaṃ dento ajātasattukāle sikkhāpade paññatte yaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ santike dūtaṃ pāhesi, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

Why is this stated? It should be understood that that Ājīvaka had been giving that alms-gift from the time of Bimbisāra, but after the prescription of the training rule in the time of Ajātasattu, the bhikkhus did not accept that alms-gift out of scrupulousness; therefore, that matter was shown from the beginning. "Then that Ājīvaka sent a messenger to the bhikkhus" is stated in reference to the messenger whom that Ājīvaka sent to the bhikkhus when the training rule was prescribed in the time of Ajātasattu, giving alms-gifts by inviting bhikkhus from time to time since then.

215.Aññamaññavisiṭṭhattā visadisaṃ rajjaṃ virajjaṃ, tato āgatā, tattha vā jātā, bhavāti vā verajjā, te evaverajjakā. Te pana yasmā gottacaraṇādivibhāgena nānappakārā, tasmā vuttaṃ‘‘nānāverajjake’’ti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pananānāvidhehi aññarajjehi āgateti rajjānaṃyeva vasena nānappakāratā vuttā.

215.Because of being distinct from each other, a kingdom dissimilar (visadisaṃ) to the kingdom (rajjaṃ) is virajjaṃ (foreign); those who have come from there, or are born or originate there, are verajjā (foreigners). Since they are of various kinds due to differences in lineage, conduct, etc., therefore it is said "nānāverajjake" (various foreigners). However, in the commentary, "having come from other kingdoms of various kinds" means that the variety is stated only in terms of kingdoms.

217-218.Imassa sikkhāpadassa viññattiṃ katvā bhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattattā viññattito gaṇabhojanaṃ vatthuvaseneva pākaṭanti taṃ avatvā ‘‘gaṇabhojanaṃ nāma yattha…pe… nimantitā bhuñjantī’’ti nimantanavaseneva padabhājane gaṇabhojanaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kiñci pana sikkhāpadaṃ vatthuananurūpampi siyāti padabhājane vuttanayena nimantanavaseneva gaṇabhojanaṃ hotīti kesañci āsaṅkā bhaveyyā’’ti taṃnivattanatthaṃ‘‘taṃ panetaṃ gaṇabhojanaṃ dvīhākārehi pasavatī’’ti vuttaṃ.Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvāti ettha ‘‘bhojanaṃ gaṇhathāti vuttepi gaṇabhojanaṃ hotiyevā’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Heṭṭhā addhānagamanavatthusmiṃ nāvābhiruhanavatthusmiñca ‘idheva, bhante, bhuñjathā’ti vutte yasmā kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tasmā ‘bhuñjathā’ti vuttepi gaṇabhojanaṃ na hotiyevā’’ti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. ‘‘Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā nimantetī’’ti vuttattā pana ‘‘odanaṃ bhuñjathā’’ti vā ‘‘bhattaṃ bhuñjathā’’ti vā bhojananāmaṃ gahetvāva vutte gaṇabhojanaṃ hoti, na aññathā. ‘‘Idheva, bhante, bhuñjathā’’ti etthāpi ‘‘odana’’nti vā ‘‘bhatta’’nti vā vatvāva te evaṃ nimantesunti gahetabbaṃ. Gaṇavasena vā nimantitattā te bhikkhū apakataññutāya kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhiṃsūti ayaṃ amhākaṃ khanti, vīmaṃsitvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbaṃ.

217-218. Because the enactment of this training rule (sikkhāpada) concerning group meals (gaṇabhojana) was made in relation to the object of eating, the group meal is obvious from the object itself rather than from the invitation. Therefore, without mentioning that, the definition of group meal is given based on the invitation alone, saying, "A group meal is where…pe…invited people eat." To dispel the doubt that "Perhaps some training rule might not conform to the object, and a group meal might occur only based on invitation, as stated in the word analysis," it is said, "But that group meal arises in two ways." "Having taken the names of the five foods": here, they say, "Even if it is said, 'Take food,' it still becomes a group meal." In all three commentaries, it is said, "Because those who were scrupulous did not accept when it was said, 'Please eat here, Venerable Sirs,' in the instances of traveling on a journey and boarding a boat, even when it is said 'Eat,' it does not become a group meal." However, because it is said, "Invites, having taken the names of the five foods," it becomes a group meal only when a name of food is mentioned, such as, "Eat rice" or "Eat meal," and not otherwise. Even in "Please eat here, Venerable Sirs," it should be understood that they invite in this way only after saying "rice" or "meal." Because those monks were invited as a group, being scrupulous due to their lack of gratitude, they did not accept. This is our opinion, and after investigation, the more reasonable should be taken.

Ekato gaṇhantīti ettha aññamaññassa dvādasahatthaṃ amuñcitvā ṭhitā ekato gaṇhanti nāmāti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Amhākaṃ catunnampi bhattaṃ dehīti vā viññāpeyyu’’nti vacanato heṭṭhā ‘‘tvaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno bhattaṃ dehi, tvaṃ dvinnanti evaṃ viññāpetvā’’ti vacanato ca attano atthāya aññehi viññattampi sādiyantassa gaṇabhojanaṃ hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Evaṃ viññattito pasavatīti ettha viññattiyā sati gaṇhantassa ekato hutvā gahaṇe iminā sikkhāpadena āpatti, visuṃ gahaṇe paṇītabhojanasūpodanaviññattīhi āpatti veditabbā.

"They take together": here, it should be understood that "they take together" means standing without releasing the twelve-cubit space from each other. From the statement, "They might request, 'Give a meal to even our four,'" and from the statement below, "Having requested, 'You give a meal to one monk, you to two monks,' etc.," it should be seen that it becomes a group meal even for one who approves of a request made by others for his own sake. "Thus it arises from request": here, if one takes together upon a request being made, an offense is incurred by this training rule due to taking together; if one takes separately, an offense is incurred by requesting fine foods, soups, and rice, it should be understood.

Vicāretīti pañcakhaṇḍādivasena saṃvidahati.Ghaṭṭetīti anuvātaṃ chinditvā hatthena daṇḍakena vā ghaṭṭeti.Suttaṃ karotīti suttaṃ vaṭṭeti.Valetīti daṇḍake vā hatthe vā āvaṭṭeti. ‘‘Abhinavasseva cīvarassa karaṇaṃ idha cīvarakammaṃ nāma, purāṇacīvare sūcikammaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Catutthe āgate na yāpentīti vacanato sace añño koci āgacchanto natthi, cattāroyeva ca tattha nisinnā yāpetuṃ na sakkonti, na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.

"Discusses": arranges in terms of five constituents, etc. "Strikes": strikes by cutting off the air with a hand or a stick. "Makes a thread": twists a thread. "Turns": turns on a stick or in the hand. They say, "Here, 'doing robe work' (cīvarakammaṃ) means making a new robe, not needlework on an old robe." They say, "Since it is stated, 'They do not keep waiting when the fourth arrives,' if there is no one else coming and only four are sitting there and they cannot complete it, it is not allowable."

220.Gaṇabhojanāpattijanakanimantanabhāvato‘‘akappiyanimantana’’nti vuttaṃ.Sampavesetvāti nisīdāpetvā.Gaṇo bhijjatīti gaṇo āpattiṃ na āpajjatīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Yattha cattāro bhikkhū…pe… bhuñjantī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā saṃsandanato‘‘itaresaṃ pana gaṇapūrako hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.Avisesenāti ‘‘gilāno vā cīvarakārako vā’’ti avisesetvā sabbasādhāraṇavacanena.Tasmāti avisesitattā.Bhutvā gatesūti ettha agatesupi bhojanakicce niṭṭhite gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati.Tāni ca tehi ekato na gahitānīti yehi bhojanehi visaṅketo natthi, tāni bhojanāni tehi bhikkhūhi ekato na gahitāni ekena pacchā gahitattā.Mahāthereti bhikkhū sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dūtassa puna paṭipathaṃ āgantvā ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vacanabhayena‘‘gāmadvāre aṭṭhatvāvā’’ti vuttaṃ.Tattha tattha gantvāti antaravīthiādīsu tattha tattha ṭhitānaṃ santikaṃ gantvā. Bhikkhūnaṃ atthāya gharadvāre ṭhapetvā diyyamānepi eseva nayo.Nivattathāti vuttapade nivattituṃ vaṭṭatīti ‘‘nivattathā’’ti vicchinditvā pacchā ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttattā vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Gaṇabhojanatā, samayābhāvo, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

220. Because of the nature of the invitation causing an offense of group meal, it is called "an unsuitable invitation" (akappiyanimantana)." "Having had them seated": having made them sit down. "The group is not broken": the group does not incur an offense is the meaning. "But he fulfills the group for the others" is said based on comparison with this passage, "Where four monks…pe…are eating." "Without distinction": with a general statement without specifying "sick or doing robe work." "Therefore": because it is not specified. "Having eaten and gone": here, even if they have not arrived, it is permissible to take when the eating duties are finished. "And those were not taken together by them": those foods with which there is no restriction, those foods were not taken together by those monks because one took them later. "Elder": said referring to the monks. Again, for fear of saying "Take the meal" after the messenger has come back on the return path, it is said "Having stood at the village gate." "Having gone there and there": having gone to the vicinity of those standing there and there in the intermediate lanes, etc. The same method applies even when something is placed at the door of the house and given for the sake of the monks. "It is permissible to return when it is said 'turn back'": because after interrupting with "turn back," it is said "Take the meal," it is permissible. The rest here is straightforward. Being a group meal, absence of agreement, and consumption: these three factors are involved here.

Gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Commentary on the Group Meal Training Rule is Concluded.

3. Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Serially Received Food Training Rule

221.Tatiye kulapaṭipāṭiyā abbocchinnaṃ katvā nirantaraṃ diyyamānattā ‘‘bhattapaṭipāṭi aṭṭhitā hotī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ, antarā aṭṭhatvā nirantaraṃ pavattāti vuttaṃ hoti.Upacāravasenāti vohāravasena. Na hi so badaramattameva deti, upacāravasena pana evaṃ vadati. Badaracuṇṇasakkharādīhi payojitaṃ ‘‘badarasāḷava’’nti vuccati.

221. In the third, because it is given continuously, making it uninterrupted in the line of families, it is said in the passage, "A line of meal is established," which means it flows continuously without stopping in between. "In terms of courtesy": in terms of convention. He does not give just a jujube-fruit-sized amount, but he speaks thus in terms of courtesy. That which is prepared with jujube powder, sugar, etc., is called "jujube relish."

226.Vikappanāvaseneva taṃ bhattaṃ asantaṃ nāma hotīti anupaññattivasena vikappanaṃ aṭṭhapetvā yathāpaññattaṃ sikkhāpadameva ṭhapitaṃ.Parivārepana vikappanāya anujānanampi anupaññattisamānanti katvā ‘‘catasso anupaññattiyo’’ti vuttaṃ.Mahāpaccariādīsuvuttanayaṃ pacchā vadanto pāḷiyā saṃsandanato parammukhāvikappanameva patiṭṭhāpesi. Keci pana ‘‘tadā attano santike ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṃ aññassa abhāvato thero sammukhāvikappanaṃ nākāsi, bhagavatā ca visuṃ sammukhāvikappanā na vuttā, tathāpi sammukhāvikappanāpi vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Tenevamātikāaṭṭhakathāyampi (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paramparabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘yo bhikkhu pañcasu sahadhammikesu aññatarassa ‘mayhaṃ bhattapaccāsaṃ tuyhaṃ dammī’ti vā ‘vikappemī’ti vā evaṃ sammukhā vā ‘itthannāmassa dammī’ti vā ‘vikappemī’ti vā evaṃ parammukhā vā paṭhamanimantanaṃ avikappetvā pacchā nimantitakule laddhabhikkhato ekasitthampi ajjhoharati, pācittiya’’nti vuttaṃ.

226. Because that meal is considered non-existent through the act of relinquishment (vikappanā), the training rule as originally enacted (paññatta) itself was established, setting aside the modification (anupaññatti) that relinquishment is needed. In the Parivāra, however, making the permission of relinquishment similar to a modification, it is said, "Four modifications." Speaking of the method stated in the Mahāpaccari, etc., later, he established only relinquishment out of sight (parammukhāvikappanā) by comparing it with the text. Some, however, say, "Then, having kept it in his possession because the Buddha was not there for another, the Elder did not do relinquishment in the presence of the Buddha (sammukhāvikappanaṃ); and relinquishment in the presence of the Buddha was not mentioned separately by the Buddha; even so, relinquishment in the presence of the Buddha is also permissible." Therefore, even in the Mātikā commentary (Kaṅkhā. Aṭṭha. Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), it is said, "Whatever bhikkhu, among the five co-religionists, says, 'I will give you the expectation of my meal' or 'I relinquish it to you,' thus relinquishing in his presence (sammukhā), or 'I will give it to so-and-so' or 'I relinquish it,' thus relinquishing out of sight (parammukhā), and afterwards consumes even a single mouthful from a donation obtained in an invited family without relinquishing the original invitation, (commits) a pācittiya."

229.Pañcahi bhojanehi nimantitassa yena yena paṭhamaṃ nimantito, tassa tassa bhojanato uppaṭipāṭiyā avikappetvā vā parassa parassa bhojanaṃparamparabhojananti āha‘‘sace pana mūlanimantanaṃ heṭṭhā hoti, pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ upari, taṃ uparito paṭṭhāya bhuñjantassa āpattī’’ti. Hatthaṃ anto pavesetvā sabbaheṭṭhimaṃ gaṇhantassa majjhe ṭhitampi antohatthagataṃ hotīti āha‘‘hatthaṃ pana…pe… yathā tathā vā bhuñjantassa anāpattī’’ti. Khīrassa rasassa ca bhattena amissaṃ hutvā upari ṭhitattā‘‘khīraṃ vā rasaṃ vā pivato anāpattī’’ti vuttaṃ.

229. For one invited with the five foods, the food from which he was first invited, without relinquishing in reverse order to each subsequent person, is called "serially received food" (paramparabhojana). "If, however, the original invitation is at the bottom, and the later ones are on top, an offense is incurred for one eating starting from the top." As for one putting his hand inside and taking the very bottom one, it is said "But for one…pe…eating as it may be without putting hand… there is no offense" as whatever lies in the middle goes into the hand that is inside. Since the milk or juice remains on top without being mixed with the meal, it is said, "There is no offense for one drinking milk or juice."

Mahāupāsakoti gehasāmiko.‘‘Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘āpattī’ti vacanenakurundiyaṃ‘vaṭṭatī’ti vacanaṃ viruddhaṃ viya dissati, dvinnampi adhippāyomahāpaccariyaṃvibhāvito’’timahāgaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Sabbe nimantentīti akappiyanimantanena nimantenti. ‘‘Paramparabhojanaṃ nāma pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena bhojanena nimantito, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjati, etaṃ paramparabhojanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttattā satipi bhikkhācariyāya paṭhamaṃ laddhabhāve ‘‘piṇḍāya caritvā laddhabhattaṃ bhuñjati, āpattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Avikappavasena‘‘vacīkamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Paramparabhojanatā, samayābhāvo, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

"Great lay follower": householder. In the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā, the statement "an offense" and in the Kurundī, the statement "is permissible" seem contradictory. The intention of both is explained in the Mahāpaccari, so it is said in the Mahāgaṇṭhipadesu. "They all invite": they invite with an unsuitable invitation. Because it is said, "Serially received food is when one is invited with one of the five foods, and setting that aside, eats another of the five foods, this is called serially received food," even with the existence of seeking alms, it is said, "If he eats meal obtained by going on alms round, (commits) an offense." "Verbal action": is said in terms of not relinquishing. The rest here is straightforward. Being serially received food, absence of agreement, and consumption: these three factors are involved here.

Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Commentary on the Serially Received Food Training Rule is Concluded.

4. Kāṇamātāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Blind-Mother Training Rule

230-231.Catutthekāṇāya mātāti kāṇāti laddhanāmāya dārikāya mātā. Kasmā panesā kāṇā nāma jātāti āha‘‘sā kirassā’’tiādi. Imissā daharakāle mātāpitaro sinehavasena ‘‘amma kāṇe, amma kāṇe’’ti vohariṃsu, sā tadupādāya kāṇā nāma jātā, tassā ca mātā ‘‘kāṇamātā’’ti pākaṭā ahosīti evamettha kāraṇaṃ vadanti.Paṭiyālokanti pacchimaṃ disaṃ, paccādiccanti vuttaṃ hoti.

230-231. In the fourth, "mother of the blind one" (kāṇāya mātā): the mother of a girl who has the name 'blind one' (kāṇā). Why was she named 'blind one' from birth, he says "She, it seems…" In her early childhood, her parents affectionately addressed her as "Amma Kāṇe, Amma Kāṇe," and from that cause, she became known as 'blind one,' and her mother became known as "mother of the blind one." Thus, they say, this is the reason here. "Looking back" (paṭiyāloka): the western direction, it is said 'facing the sun' (paccādiccanti).

233.Pūvagaṇanāya pācittiyanti mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimalekhato upariṭṭhitapūvagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ. ‘‘Dvattipattapūrā paṭiggahetabbā’’ti hi vacanato mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimalekhaṃ anatikkante dve vā tayo vā pattapūre gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.

233. "Pācittiya for counting cakes": pācittiya for counting the cakes above the bottom row in the bowl. Because of the statement, "Two or three bowlfuls should be accepted," it is allowable to take two or three bowlfuls not exceeding the bottom row of the bowl.

235.Aṭṭhakathāsu pana…pe… vuttanti idaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu tathā āgatabhāvamattadīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana tassa vādassa patiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsu vuttañhi pāḷiyā na sameti. Tatuttarigahaṇe anāpattidassanatthañhi ‘‘ñātakānaṃ pavāritāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Aññathā ‘‘anāpatti dvattipattapūre paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti imināva pamāṇayuttaggahaṇe anāpattisiddhito ‘‘ñātakānaṃ pavāritāna’’nti visuṃ na vattabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘taṃ pāḷiyā na sametī’’ti kasmā na vuttanti? Heṭṭhā tatuttarisikkhāpade vuttanayeneva sakkā viññātunti na vuttaṃ. Vuttañhi tattha (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.526) ‘‘aṭṭhakathāsu pana ñātakapavāritaṭṭhāne pakatiyāva bahumpi vaṭṭati, acchinnakāraṇā pamāṇameva vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ, taṃ pāḷiyā na sametī’’ti. ‘‘Apātheyyādiatthāya paṭiyādita’’nti saññāya gaṇhantassapi āpattiyeva acittakattā sikkhāpadassa. Attanoyeva gahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘imassa hatthe dehī’’ti vacanenapi āpajjanato‘‘vacīkamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Vuttalakkhaṇapūvamanthatā, asesakatā, apaṭippassaddhagamanatā, na ñātakāditā, atirekapaṭiggahaṇanti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.

235. "But it is said…pe…in the commentaries": this is said to show merely that it has come thus in the commentaries, not to establish that view. What is said in the commentaries does not agree with the text. For the purpose of showing no offense in taking more than that, it is said, "to relatives, to those who have invited." Otherwise, since the absence of offense in taking a suitable amount would be established by "there is no offense in accepting two or three bowlfuls," it would not be necessary to state separately "to relatives, to those who have invited." If so, why was it not said, "That does not agree with the text"? It was not said because it can be known in the same way as stated below in the training rule about taking more than that. For there it is said (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.526), "But in the commentaries, in the place of relatives who have invited, even much is naturally allowable, only the measure is allowable without a break in the giving, this is said, that does not agree with the text." An offense is incurred even for one taking with the intention, "Prepared for the sake of provisions," because the training rule is unintentional. "Verbal action": is said because an offense is incurred even by saying, "Give it to this one's hand," for the purpose of his own taking. The rest is straightforward. The cake being of the stated nature, being completely full, not going without looking back, not being a relative, etc., and accepting an excess: these five factors are involved here.

Kāṇamātāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Commentary on the Blind-Mother Training Rule is Concluded.

5. Paṭhamapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the First Invitation Training Rule

236.Pañcamebhuttāvīti bhuttāvino bhuttavanto, katabhattakiccāti vuttaṃ hoti.Pavāritāti ettha catūsu pavāraṇāsu yāvadatthapavāraṇā paṭikkhepapavāraṇā ca labbhatīti āha‘‘brāhmaṇena…pe… paṭikkhepapavāraṇāya pavāritā’’ti. Catubbidhā hi pavāraṇā vassaṃvutthapavāraṇā, paccayapavāraṇā, paṭikkhepapavāraṇā, yāvadatthapavāraṇāti. Tattha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassaṃvutthānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ tīhi ṭhānehi pavāretu’’nti (mahāva. 209) ayaṃvassaṃvutthapavāraṇā. Pakārehi diṭṭhādīhi vāreti saṅghādike bhajāpeti bhatte karoti etāyāti pavāraṇā, āpattivisodhanāya attavossaggokāsadānaṃ. Sā pana yasmā yebhuyyena vassaṃvutthehi kātabbā vuttā, tasmā ‘‘vassaṃvutthapavāraṇā’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Icchāmahaṃ, bhante, saṅghaṃ cātumāsaṃ bhesajjena pavāretu’’nti (pāci. 303) ca, ‘‘aññatra puna pavāraṇāya aññatra niccapavāraṇāyā’’ti (pāci. 306) ca ayaṃpaccayapavāraṇāpavāreti paccaye icchāpeti etāyāti katvā, cīvarādīhi upanimantanāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. ‘‘Pavārito nāma asanaṃ paññāyati, bhojanaṃ paññāyati, hatthapāse ṭhito abhiharati, paṭikkhepo paññāyati, eso pavārito nāmā’’ti (pāci. 239) ayaṃpaṭikkhepapavāraṇā. Vippakatabhojanatādipañcaṅgasahito bhojanapaṭikkhepoyeva hettha pakārayuttā vāraṇāti pavāraṇā. ‘‘Paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.363) ayaṃyāvadatthapavāraṇā. Yāvadatthaṃ bhojanassa pavāraṇā yāvadatthapavāraṇā.

236. In the fifth, "Having eaten" (bhuttāvī): one who has eaten, one who has finished the meal duty, it is said. "Invited" (pavāritā): here, among the four kinds of invitation, both invitation for as long as one wishes (yāvadatthapavāraṇā) and invitation with refusal (paṭikkhepapavāraṇā) are possible, he says "Invited by a brahmin…pe…with an invitation with refusal." For there are four kinds of invitation: invitation after the rains residence (vassaṃvutthapavāraṇā), invitation for requisites (paccayapavāraṇā), invitation with refusal (paṭikkhepapavāraṇā), and invitation for as long as one wishes (yāvadatthapavāraṇā). Among these, invitation after the rains residence is this: "I allow you, monks, who have dwelt in the rains, to invite in three ways" (Mahāva. 209). 'Pavāraṇā' is that by which one prevents (vāreti) through means such as seeing, etc., one causes to partake (bhajāpeti) in the Saṅgha, one makes (karoti) a meal. Giving permission to relinquish oneself for the purification of offenses. Since that is said to be done mostly by those who have resided during the rains, therefore it is called "invitation after the rains residence." Invitation for requisites is this: "Venerable sir, I desire to invite the Saṅgha with medicine for four months" (Pāci. 303), and "except for repeated invitations, except for constant invitation" (Pāci. 306), having made this "invitation for requisites" that by which one desires the requisites (paccaye), this is a term for inviting with robes, etc. Invitation with refusal is this: "One who is invited is one for whom food is made known, meal is made known, one who stands within arm's reach offers it, refusal is made known, this is called one who is invited" (Pāci. 239). Here, invitation for refusing meal, together with the five factors beginning with having prepared the food, is the means of preventing (vāraṇā) with reasons, so it is 'pavāraṇā'. Invitation for as long as one wishes is this: "He satisfied and delighted with his own hand with fine edibles and foods" (Ma. Ni. 1.363). Invitation of meal for as long as one wishes is invitation for as long as one wishes.

237.Ti-kāraṃ avatvā…pe… vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti idaṃ vattabbākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ti-kāre pana vuttepi akataṃ nāma na hotī’’ti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.

237. "Without saying the three times…pe…it is permissible to say": this is said to show the way to say it. In all three commentaries, it is said, "Even if said three times, it is not considered undone."

238-239.Pavāritoti paṭikkhepito. Yo hi bhuñjanto parivesakena upanītaṃ bhojanaṃ anicchanto paṭikkhipati, so tena pavārito paṭikkhepito nāma hoti. Byañjanaṃ pana anādiyitvā atthamattameva dassetuṃ‘‘katapavāraṇo katapaṭikkhepo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā ‘‘asana’’nti imināva padena ‘‘bhuttāvī’’ti imassa attho vutto, tasmā na tassa kiñci payojanaṃ visuṃ upalabbhati. Yadi hi upalabbheyya, pavāraṇā chaḷaṅgasamannāgatā āpajjeyyāti manasi katvā pañcasamannāgatattaṃyeva dassetuṃ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādinā pāḷiṃ āharati. Keci pana ‘‘hatthapāse ṭhito abhiharatī’’ti ekameva aṅgaṃ katvā ‘‘caturaṅgasamannāgatā pavāraṇā’’tipi vadanti.

238-239. Pavārito means rejected. For when someone is eating and, not wanting the food brought by the server, rejects it, he is said to be pavārito, rejected. But to show only the meaning without considering the relish (byañjana), it is said, "katapavāraṇo katapaṭikkhepo" (one who has rejected, one who has refused). Since the meaning of "bhuttāvī" (one who has eaten) is already conveyed by the word "asana" (eating), no separate purpose is found for it. If it were found, it would incur a pārājika offense due to having six components of invitation; keeping this in mind, to show that it has only five components, he brings in the Pali text with "vuttampi ceta" (moreover, it was said), etc. Some, however, considering "standing within arm's reach, he offers" as a single component, say, "the invitation has four components."

Ambilapāyāsādīsūtiādi-saddena khīrapāyāsādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha ambilapāyāsaggahaṇena takkādiambilasaṃyuttā ghanayāgu vuttā. Khīrapāyāsaggahaṇena khīrasaṃyuttā yāgu saṅgayhati.Pavāraṇaṃ na janetīti anatirittabhojanāpattinibandhanaṃ paṭikkhepaṃ na sādheti. Katopi paṭikkhepo anatirittabhojanāpattinibandhano na hotīti akataṭṭhāneyeva tiṭṭhatīti āha‘‘pavāraṇaṃ na janetī’’ti.‘‘Yāgu-saddassa pavāraṇajanakayāguyāpi sādhāraṇattā ‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’ti vuttepi pavāraṇā hotīti pavāraṇaṃ janetiyevāti vutta’’nti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ, taṃ parato tattheva ‘‘bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā’’ti ettha vuttakāraṇena na sameti. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘heṭṭhā ayāguke nimantane udakakañjikakhīrādīhi saddhiṃ madditaṃ bhattameva sandhāya ‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’ti vuttattā pavāraṇā hoti, ‘bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā’ti ettha pana visuṃ yāguyā vijjamānattā pavāraṇā na hotī’’ti. Tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva khīrādīhi saṃmadditaṃ bhattameva sandhāya ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttattā yāguyā ca tattha abhāvato pavāraṇā hotīti evamettha kāraṇaṃ vattabbaṃ. Evañhi sati parato ‘‘yenāpucchito, tassa atthitāyā’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttakāraṇenapi saṃsandati, aññathā gaṇṭhipadesuyeva pubbāparavirodho āpajjati. Aṭṭhakathāvacanena ca na sameti.Sace…pe… paññāyatīti iminā vuttappamāṇassa macchamaṃsakhaṇḍassa nahāruno vā sabbhāvamattaṃ dasseti.Tāhīti puthukāhi.

Ambilapāyāsādīsū (in sour milk-rice porridge, etc.): the ādi (etc.) includes milk-rice porridge, etc. Here, by including sour milk-rice porridge, thick rice gruel mixed with sour flavors like buttermilk is indicated. By including milk-rice porridge, rice gruel mixed with milk is included. Pavāraṇaṃ na janeti (does not create an invitation): it does not accomplish the rejection (paṭikkhepa) that is the cause for the offense of eating excess food. Even if rejection is done, it does not cause the offense of eating excess food, thus it remains in the state of not being done, he says, "pavāraṇaṃ na janeti" (does not create an invitation). "Because the word 'yāgu' (rice gruel) is common to rice gruel that creates an invitation, even when saying 'take the rice gruel,' an invitation occurs, thus it is said that it definitely creates an invitation," is said in all three gaṇṭhipadas (difficult points), but it does not agree with the reason stated later in "having brought rice gruel mixed with cooked rice." For it is said there: "In the lower invitation of rice gruel, because 'take the rice gruel' is said referring only to cooked rice kneaded with sour rice gruel, milk, etc., an invitation occurs, but in 'having brought rice gruel mixed with cooked rice,' since there is separate rice gruel, an invitation does not occur." Therefore, in the manner stated there, one should state the reason here as: because "take the rice gruel" is said referring only to cooked rice mixed with milk, etc., and because of the absence of rice gruel there, an invitation occurs. Only when it is like this, does it align with the reason stated in the commentary, "by whom he was asked, because of its existence"; otherwise, a contradiction arises between the earlier and later statements in the gaṇṭhipadas. And it does not agree with the commentary's statement. Sace…pe… paññāyatī (if…pe… it is perceived): by this, he shows the mere existence of the piece of fish or meat or tendon of the aforementioned size. Tāhī (by those): by separate ones.

Sālivīhiyavehi katasattūti yebhuyyanayena vuttaṃ, satta dhaññāni pana bhajjitvā katopi sattuyeva. Tenevāha‘‘kaṅguvaraka…pe… sattusaṅgahameva gacchatī’’ti.Sattumodakoti sattuyo piṇḍetvā kato apakko sattuguḷo. Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataravasena vippakatabhojanabhāvassa upacchinnattā‘‘mukhe sāsapamattampi…pe… na pavāretī’’ti vuttaṃ.‘‘Akappiyamaṃsaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāretī’’ti vacanato sace saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ attano apāpuṇantaṃ jānitvā vā ajānitvā vā paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti paṭikkhipitabbasseva paṭikkhittattā. Alajjisantakaṃ paṭikkhipantopi na pavāreti.Avatthutāyāti anatirittāpattisādhikāya pavāraṇāya avatthubhāvato. Etena paṭikkhipitabbasseva paṭikkhittabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Yañhi paṭikkhipitabbaṃ hoti, tassa paṭikkhepo āpattiaṅgaṃ na hotīti taṃ ‘‘pavāraṇāya avatthū’’ti vuccati.

Sālivīhiyavehi katasattū (barley groats made with rice, paddy, and barley): this is said in a way of generality; however, even groats made by frying the seven grains are still groats. Therefore, he says, "kaṅguvaraka…pe… sattusaṅgahameva gacchati" (it goes into the category of groats). Sattumodako (groats-ball): a ball of raw groats made by shaping groats into a lump. Because the state of prepared food has ceased due to being other than one of the five foods, it is said, "mukhe sāsapamattampi…pe… na pavāreti" (even mustard-seed sized in the mouth, he does not invite). From the statement "He rejects improper meat, he does not invite": if he rejects a communal gain, knowing or not knowing that it is not reaching him, he does not invite, because it is rejected as something that should be rejected. One who rejects something belonging to a shameless person also does not invite. Avatthutāyā (because of being insubstantial): because the invitation, which is the cause for the offense of excess, is insubstantial. By this, he indicates that it is rejected only as something that should be rejected. For the rejection of what should be rejected is not a cause of offense; thus, it is called "the invitation's insubstantiality."

Upanāmetīti iminā kāyābhihāraṃ dasseti. Hatthapāsato bahi ṭhitassa satipi dātukāmābhihāre paṭikkhipantassa dūrabhāveneva pavāraṇāya abhāvato therassapi dūrabhāvamattaṃ gahetvā pavāraṇāya abhāvaṃ dassento‘‘therassa dūrabhāvato’’ti āha, na pana therassa abhihārasabbhāvato. Sacepi gahetvā gato hatthapāse ṭhito hoti, kiñci pana avatvā ādhārakaṭṭhāne ṭhitattā abhihāro nāma na hotīti‘‘dūtassa ca anabhiharaṇato’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Gahetvā gatena ‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’ti vutte abhihāro nāma hotīti‘sace pana gahetvā āgato bhikkhu…pe… pavāraṇā hotī’ti vutta’’nti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘pattaṃ kiñci upanāmetvā ‘imaṃ bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’ti vuttanti gahetabba’’nti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ viya dissati vācābhihārassa idha anadhippetattā.

Upanāmeti (he offers): by this, he shows the bodily offering. Even if one standing outside arm's reach intends to give, when one rejects him, since the invitation is absent merely due to the distance, the Elder, also taking only the distance, shows the absence of the invitation by saying "therassa dūrabhāvato" (because of the Elder's distance), not because of the Elder's offering being completely present. Even if the one who took it has gone and is standing within arm's reach, since he is standing in the position of a receptacle without saying anything, it is not called an offering; therefore, it is said "dūtassa ca anabhiharaṇato" (and because the messenger is not offering). "When the one who has taken and gone says, 'take the food,' it is called an offering; therefore, it is said 'sace pana gahetvā āgato bhikkhu…pe… pavāraṇā hotī' (but if a monk, having taken it, comes…pe… an invitation occurs)" is said in all three gaṇṭhipadas. Some, however, say, "It should be understood as having slightly offered the bowl, saying, 'take this food.'" That seems reasonable because verbal offering is not intended here.

Parivesanāyāti bhattagge.Abhihaṭāva hotīti parivesakeneva abhihaṭā hoti.Tato dātukāmatāya gaṇhantaṃ paṭikkhipantassa pavāraṇā hotīti ettha agaṇhantampi paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hotiyeva. Kasmā? Dātukāmatāya abhihaṭattā. ‘‘Tasmā sā abhihaṭāva hotī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Teneva tīsupigaṇṭhipadesu‘‘dātukāmābhihāre sati kevalaṃ ‘dassāmī’ti gahaṇameva abhihāro nāma na hoti, ‘dassāmī’ti gaṇhantepi agaṇhantepi dātukāmābhihārova abhihāro nāma hoti, tasmā gahaṇasamaye vā aggahaṇasamaye vā taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni asati tassa dātukāmābhihāre gahaṇasamayepi paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā na hotīti dassetuṃ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.

Parivesanāyā (at the distribution): at the refectory. Abhihaṭāva hotī (it has already been offered): it has been offered by the server himself. Tato dātukāmatāya gaṇhantaṃ paṭikkhipantassa pavāraṇā hotī (therefore, when one rejects one who is taking with the intention to give, an invitation occurs): here, even if one is not taking, an invitation still occurs when one rejects. Why? Because it is offered with the intention to give. For it is said, "Tasmā sā abhihaṭāva hotī" (therefore, it has already been offered). Therefore, in all three gaṇṭhipadas, it is said, "When there is an offering with the intention to give, merely taking with 'I will give' is not called an offering; even if one is taking or not taking with 'I will give,' it is still called an offering with the intention to give; therefore, an invitation occurs when one rejects it at the time of taking or at the time of not taking." Now, to show that when there is no offering with the intention to give, an invitation does not occur even when rejecting at the time of taking, "sace panā" (but if), etc., is said.

‘‘Rasaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti apavāraṇajanakassa nāmaṃ gahetvā vuttattā‘‘taṃ sutvā paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā natthī’’ti vuttaṃ.Maccharasaṃ maṃsarasanti ettha pana na kevalaṃ macchassa rasaṃ maccharasamicceva viññāyati, atha kho maccho ca maccharasañca maccharasanti evaṃ pavāraṇajanakasādhāraṇanāmavasenapi viññāyamānattā taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇāva hoti. Paratomacchasūpanti etthāpi eseva nayo.‘‘Idaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttepīti ettha evaṃ avatvāpi pavāraṇapahonakaṃ yaṃkiñci abhihaṭaṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Karambakoti missakādhivacanametaṃ. Yañhi aññenaññena missetvā karonti, so ‘‘karambako’’ti vuccati. So sacepi maṃsena missetvā katova hoti, ‘‘karambakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti apavāraṇārahassa nāmena vuttattā paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā na hoti. ‘‘Maṃsakarambakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte pana maṃsamissakaṃ gaṇhathāti vuttaṃ hoti, tasmā pavāraṇāva hoti.

"Rasaṃ gaṇhathā" (take the sauce): because it is said taking the name of what does not cause an invitation, it is said "taṃ sutvā paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā natthī" (having heard that, for one who rejects, there is no invitation). In Maccharasaṃ maṃsarasa (fish sauce, meat sauce), it is not understood that it is only the sauce of fish that is called fish sauce, but rather, the fish and fish sauce are perceived together as fish sauce in terms of a name common to what causes an invitation; therefore, when one rejects that, an invitation definitely occurs. The same method applies later to macchasūpa (fish soup). "Idaṃ gaṇhathā"ti vuttepī (even when "take this" is said): here, even without saying this, it should be understood that an invitation definitely occurs when one rejects anything offered that is capable of causing an invitation. Karambako (mixed): this is a term for mixture. For what they make by mixing one thing with another is called "karambako" (mixed). Even if it is made by mixing with meat, when "take the mixed" is said with a name that is not worthy of invitation, an invitation does not occur when one rejects it. But when "take meat-mixed" is said, it is said that "take something mixed with meat"; therefore, an invitation definitely occurs.

‘‘Uddissakata’’nti maññamānoti ettha ‘‘vatthuno kappiyattā akappiyasaññāya paṭikkhipatopi acittakattā imassa sikkhāpadassa pavāraṇā hotī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Heṭṭhā ayāguke nimantane udakakañjikakhīrādīhi saddhiṃ madditaṃ bhattameva sandhāya ‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’ti vuttattā pavāraṇā hoti, ‘bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā’ti ettha pana visuṃ yāguyā vijjamānattā pavāraṇā na hotī’’ti vadanti.Ayamettha adhippāyoti ‘‘yenāpucchito’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ sandhāya vadati.Kāraṇaṃ panettha duddasanti ettha eke tāva vadanti ‘‘yasmā yāgumissakaṃ nāma bhattameva na hoti, khīrādikampi hotiyeva, tasmā karambake viya pavāraṇāya na bhavitabbaṃ. Evañca sati yāgu bahutarā vā hoti samasamā vā, na pavāreti. ‘Yāgu mandā, bhattaṃ bahutaraṃ, pavāretī’ti ettha kāraṇaṃ duddasa’’nti. Keci pana vadanti ‘‘yāgumissakaṃ nāma bhattaṃ, tasmā taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇāya eva bhavitabbaṃ. Evañca sati ‘idha pavāraṇā hoti na hotī’ti ettha kāraṇaṃ duddasa’’nti.

"Uddissakata"nti maññamāno (thinking "made for a particular person"): here, they say, "Even if one rejects thinking it is improper due to the thing being proper, because of the absence of intention, an invitation to this training rule occurs." "In the lower invitation of rice gruel, because 'take the rice gruel' is said referring only to cooked rice kneaded with sour rice gruel, milk, etc., an invitation occurs, but in 'having brought rice gruel mixed with cooked rice,' since there is separate rice gruel, an invitation does not occur," they say. Ayamettha adhippāyo (this is the meaning here): he speaks referring to the meaning stated by "yenāpucchito" (by whom he was asked), etc. Kāraṇaṃ panettha duddasa (the reason here is difficult to see): here, some say, "Since what is mixed with rice gruel is not merely cooked rice, it can also be milk, etc.; therefore, there should be no invitation, like with a mixed dish. In this case, if the rice gruel is more or equal, he does not invite. The reason is difficult to see in 'the rice gruel is little, the cooked rice is more, he invites.'" Some, however, say, "What is mixed with rice gruel is cooked rice; therefore, an invitation should definitely occur when one rejects that. In this case, the reason is difficult to see in 'here an invitation occurs, it does not occur.'"

missakanti bhattamissakeyeva ruḷhattā. Tathā hi ‘‘missakanti bhattamissakeyeva ruḷhavohārattā idaṃ pana ‘bhattamissakamevā’ti vutta’’nti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Atha ‘‘missaka’’nti bhattamissake ruḷhaṃ na hoti, missakabhattaṃ pana sandhāya ‘‘missakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttanti. Evampi yathā ayāguke nimantane khīrādīhi saddhiṃ madditaṃ bhattameva sandhāya ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte pavāraṇā hoti, evamidhāpi missakabhattameva sandhāya ‘‘missakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte bhattaṃ appaṃ vā hotu bahu vā, pavāraṇā eva siyā. Tasmā ‘‘missaka’’nti bhattamissake ruḷhaṃ vā hotu sandhāyabhāsitaṃ vā, ubhayatthāpi pubbenāparaṃ na sametīti kimettha kāraṇacintāya, īdisesu pana ṭhānesu aṭṭhakathāpamāṇeneva gantabbanti ayaṃ amhākaṃ khanti.

missaka (mixed): because it is only conventionally used for what is mixed with cooked rice. For thus it is said in all three gaṇṭhipadas: "Because 'mixed' is only conventionally used for what is mixed with cooked rice, this is said, 'it is definitely mixed with cooked rice.'" Or, "'mixed' is not conventionally used for what is mixed with cooked rice, but 'take mixed' is said referring to cooked rice mixed." Even so, just as in the lower invitation of rice gruel, when "take the rice gruel" is said referring only to cooked rice kneaded with milk, etc., an invitation occurs; similarly here also, when "take mixed" is said referring only to mixed cooked rice, whether the cooked rice is little or much, an invitation would definitely occur. Therefore, whether "mixed" is conventionally used for what is mixed with cooked rice or spoken referring to it, in both cases, the later does not agree with the earlier; why think about the reason here? But in such places, one should proceed only by the commentary as the authority; this is our opinion.

‘‘Visuṃkatvā detīti bhattassa upari ṭhitaṃ rasādiṃ visuṃ gahetvā detī’’ti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Kenacipana ‘‘yathā bhattasitthaṃ na patati, tathā gāḷhaṃ hatthena pīḷetvā parissāvetvā detī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathāpi kāraṇaṃ na dissati. Yathā hi bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vatvā yāgumissakaṃ bhattampi dentaṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā na hoti, evamidhāpi bahukhīrarasādīsu bhattesu ‘‘khīraṃ gaṇhathā’’tiādīni vatvā khīrādīni vā detu khīrādimissakabhattaṃ vā, ubhayathāpi pavāraṇāya na bhavitabbaṃ, tasmā ‘‘visuṃ katvā detī’’ti tenākārena dentaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pana bhattamissakaṃ katvā diyyamānaṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hotīti dassanatthanti gahetabbaṃ. Yadi pana bhattamissakaṃ katvā diyyamāne pavāraṇā hotīti adhippāyena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘visuṃ katvā detī’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati aṭṭhakathāyevettha pamāṇanti gahetabbaṃ, na pana kāraṇantaraṃ gavesitabbaṃ.

"Visuṃ katvā detī" (having separated, he gives): "having taken separately the sauce, etc., that is on top of the cooked rice, he gives," is said in all three gaṇṭhipadas. Kenaci (by someone), however, it is said, "Just as the cooked rice water does not fall, so having squeezed firmly with the hand, having strained, he gives." Even so, the reason is not seen. Just as when, having brought rice gruel mixed with cooked rice, he says, "take the rice gruel" and also gives cooked rice mixed with rice gruel, an invitation does not occur when one rejects him, similarly here also, among cooked rice with much milk, sauce, etc., whether he says "take the milk," etc., and gives the milk, etc., or the cooked rice mixed with milk, etc., in both cases, there should be no invitation. Therefore, it should be taken as said referring to one who gives in that manner, "having separated, he gives," not to show that an invitation occurs when one rejects what is given having made it mixed with cooked rice. But if it is said in the commentary "having separated, he gives" with the intention that an invitation occurs when giving it having made it mixed with cooked rice, in such a case, it should be taken that the commentary itself is the authority here; no other reason should be sought.

‘‘tassa pana heṭṭhā…pe… nisīdanakaṃ dātabba’’nti vuttaṃ.‘‘Āsanaṃ acāletvāti pīṭhe phuṭṭhokāsato ānisadamaṃsaṃ amocetvā, anuṭṭhahitvāti vuttaṃ hoti, adinnādāne viya ṭhānācāvanaṃ na gahetabba’’nti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.

"tassa pana heṭṭhā…pe… nisīdanakaṃ dātabba" (but for him, below…pe… a sitting cloth should be given) is said. "Āsanaṃ acāletvā" (without moving the seat): "without detaching the lower part of the body from the seat from where it touches, without getting up, is said; the moving from the place should not be taken like in not-giving what is not given," is said in all three gaṇṭhipadas.

Akappiyakatanti ettha akappiyakatasseva anatirittabhāvato kappiyaṃ akārāpetvā tasmiṃ patte pakkhittamūlaphalādiyeva atirittaṃ na hoti, sesaṃ pana pattapariyāpannaṃ atirittameva hoti, paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Taṃ pana mūlaphalādiṃ paribhuñjitukāmena tato nīharitvā kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā aññasmiṃ bhājane ṭhapetvā atirittaṃ kārāpetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ.

Akappiyakata (made non-allowable): here, since only what is made non-allowable is not in excess, the root, fruit, etc., placed in that bowl without making it allowable is not in excess; the rest, however, contained in the bowl is definitely in excess, it is allowable to consume. But one who wishes to consume that root, fruit, etc., should take it out from there, have it made allowable, place it in another container, make it non-excess, and consume it.

So puna kātuṃ na labhatīti tasmiṃyeva bhājane kariyamānaṃ paṭhamaṃ katena saddhiṃ kataṃ hotīti puna soyeva kātuṃ na labhati, añño labhati. Aññasmiṃ pana bhājane tena vā aññena vā kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Tenāha‘‘yena akataṃ, tena kātabbaṃ. Yañca akataṃ, taṃ kātabba’’nti.Tenapīti etthapi-saddo na kevalaṃ aññena vāti imamatthaṃ dīpeti.Evaṃ katanti aññasmiṃ bhājane kataṃ.Pesetvāti anupasampannassa hatthe pesetvā. Imassa vinayakammabhāvato‘‘anupasampannassa hatthe ṭhitaṃ na kāretabba’’nti vuttaṃ.

So puna kātuṃ na labhatī (he is not allowed to make it again): being made in that same container, it becomes made together with what was made first; therefore, he is not allowed to make it again, another is allowed. But it is proper to make it in another container by him or by another. Therefore, he says "yena akataṃ, tena kātabbaṃ. Yañca akataṃ, taṃ kātabbaṃ" (by whom it was not made, by him it should be made. And what was not made, that should be made). Tenapī (by him also): here, the word pi (also) indicates the meaning of not only by another. Evaṃ kata (thus made): made in another container. Pesetvā (having sent): having sent in the hand of one who is not fully ordained. Because of this being an act of Vinaya, it is said "anupasampannassa hatthe ṭhitaṃ na kāretabba" (what is standing in the hand of one who is not fully ordained should not be made allowable).

Sace pana āmisasaṃsaṭṭhānīti ettha sace mukhagatenapi anatirittena āmisena saṃsaṭṭhāni honti, pācittiyamevāti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā pavāritena bhojanaṃ atirittaṃ kārāpetvā bhuñjantenapi yathā akatena missaṃ na hoti, evaṃ mukhañca hatthañca suddhaṃ katvā bhuñjitabbaṃ. Kiñcāpi appavāritassa purebhattaṃ yāmakālikādīni āhāratthāya paribhuñjatopi anāpatti, pavāritassa pana pavāraṇamūlakaṃ dukkaṭaṃ hotiyevāti ‘‘yāmakālikaṃ…pe… ajjhohāre āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ.

Sace pana āmisasaṃsaṭṭhānī (but if they are mixed with non-allowable): here, if they are mixed even with non-allowable that has gone into the mouth, it should be known that it is only a pācittiya offense. Therefore, when one who has invited consumes having made the food non-excess, one should consume having purified the mouth and the hand, just as it does not become mixed with what is unmade. Although there is no offense even for one who has not invited, when consuming pre-meal, yāmakālika, etc., for the purpose of food, for one who has invited, a dukkata offense rooted in invitation definitely occurs; thus, it is said in the Pali passage, "yāmakālikaṃ…pe… ajjhohāre āpatti dukkaṭassā" (for consuming yāmakālika…pe… there is an offense of dukkata).

241.Kāyena bhuñjanato vācāya āṇāpetvā atirittaṃ akārāpanato ca āpajjatīti‘‘kāyavācato’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pavāritabhāvo, āmisassa anatirittatā, kāle ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

241. Because one incurs an offense by eating with the body, by ordering with speech, and by not making the excess allowable, it is said "kāyavācato" (by body and speech). The rest here is obvious. The state of being invited, the non-excess of the non-allowable, consuming at the proper time—these are the three components here.

Paṭhamapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Invitation Training Rule is Finished.

6. Dutiyapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. The Explanation of the Second Invitation Training Rule

243.Chaṭṭhesādhāraṇamevāti ‘‘handa bhikkhu khāda vā’’tiādinā vuttapavāraṇāya sādhāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Bhuttasmiṃ pācittiya’’nti mātikāyaṃ vuttattā bhojanapariyosāne āpatti, na ajjhohāre ajjhohāre.Abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreti, āpatti pācittiyassāti idañca bhojanapariyosānaṃyeva sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pavāritatā, pavāritasaññitā, āsādanāpekkhatā, anatirittena abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāraṇā, bhojanapariyosānanti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.

243. In the sixth, sādhāraṇaṃ eva: the invitation is common because the pavāraṇā is stated as, "Come, bhikkhu, eat." Since it is stated in the mātikā as "Bhuttasmiṃ pācittiyaṃ," the offense occurs at the end of the meal, not with each mouthful. And this statement, Abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreti, āpatti pācittiyassa, should be understood as referring to the end of the meal. The rest here is straightforward. Being invited, perceiving oneself as invited, needing to be requested, inviting without excess, and the end of the meal—these are the five factors involved here.

Dutiyapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Second Pavāraṇā Training Rule is Finished.

7. Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Training Rule on Untimely Eating

247.Sattameaggasamajjoti uttamaṃ naccaṃ. Taṃ kira pabbatamatthake ṭhatvā ekaṃ devataṃ uddissa karonti. Naṭānaṃ nāṭakāninaṭanāṭakāni,sītāharaṇādīni.Apaññatte sikkhāpadeti ūnavīsativassasikkhāpade apaññatte.Adaṃsūti ‘‘vihāraṃ netvā khādissathā’’ti adaṃsu.

247. In the seventh, aggasamajjo means the finest dance. Apparently, they do it standing on a mountaintop, dedicating it to a certain deity. Naṭānaṃ nāṭakāni means the plays of actors, such as the story of Sītā's abduction. Apaññatte sikkhāpade means in a training rule not yet established for those under twenty years of age. Adaṃsū means they gave, saying, "Take it to the monastery and eat it."

248-249.Mūlakamūlādīni upadesatoyeva veditabbāni. Na hi tāni pariyāyantarena vuccamānānipi sakkā viññātuṃ. Pariyāyantarepi hi vuccamāne taṃ taṃ nāmaṃ ajānantānaṃ sammohoyeva siyā, tasmā tattha na kiñci vakkhāma.Khādanīyatthanti khādanīyena kattabbakiccaṃ.Neva pharantīti na nipphādenti.Tesu tesu janapadesūti ettha ‘‘ekasmiṃ janapade āhārakiccaṃ sādhentaṃ sesajanapadesupi na kappatī’’ti vadanti.Rukkhavalliādīnanti heṭṭhā vuttameva sampiṇḍetvā vuttaṃ.Antopathavīgatoti sālakalyāṇīkhandhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Sabbakappiyānīti mūlakhandhatacapattādivasena sabbaso kappiyāni. Tesampi nāmavasena na sakkā pariyantaṃ dassetunti sambandho. Acchivādīnaṃ aparipakkāneva phalāni yāvajīvikānīti dassetuṃ‘‘aparipakkānī’’ti vuttaṃ.

248-249. Mūlaka, mūla, etc., should be understood only through instruction, as they cannot be understood even if described in different terms. For even if described in different terms, those who do not know the respective names would only be confused; therefore, we will not say anything about that. Khādanīyatthaṃ means the task to be done with the khādanīya. Neva pharantī means they do not produce. Tesu tesu janapadesū means, regarding this, some say, "It is not allowed even in other regions if it serves the purpose of food in one region." Rukkhavalliādīnaṃ is a summarized restatement of what was said earlier. Antopathavīgato refers to the trunk of a sāla tree of good quality. Sabbakappiyānī means they are all allowable in terms of root, trunk, bark, leaf, etc. The connection is that it is not possible to show the limit of even these by name. To show that the unripe fruits of the acchivā trees, etc., are allowable for life, aparipakkānī is said.

Harītakādīnaṃ aṭṭhīnīti ettha miñjaṃ paṭicchādetvā ṭhitakapālāni yāvajīvikānīti ācariyā. Miñjampi yāvajīvikanti eke.Hiṅgūti hiṅgurukkhato paggharitaniyyāso. Hiṅgujatuādayopi hiṅguvikatiyo eva. Tatthahiṅgujatunāma hiṅgurukkhassa daṇḍapattāni pacitvā kataniyyāso,hiṅgusipāṭikaṃnāma hiṅgupattāni pacitvā kataniyyāso. ‘‘Aññena missetvā kato’’tipi vadanti.Takanti aggakoṭiyā nikkhantasileso.Takapattinti pattato nikkhantasileso.Takapaṇṇinti palāse bhajjitvā katasileso. ‘‘Daṇḍato nikkhantasileso tipi vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Vikālatā, yāvakālikatā, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

Harītakādīnaṃ aṭṭhīnī: here, the teachers say that the shells covering the marrow are allowable for life. Some say even the marrow is allowable for life. Hiṅgū means the sap that flows from the hiṅgu tree. Hiṅgujatu, etc., are also transformations of hiṅgu. Here, hiṅgujatu is the sap made by cooking the stalks and leaves of the hiṅgu tree; hiṅgusipāṭikaṃ is the sap made by cooking the hiṅgu leaves. Some also say, "Made by mixing with something else." Taka means the fiber that comes out at the tip. Takapatti means the fiber that comes out from the leaf. Takapaṇṇi means the fiber made by frying in palāsa leaves. Some say, "The fiber that comes out from the stalk." The rest here is straightforward. Being untimely, being yāvakālika, and swallowing—these are the three factors involved here.

Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Untimely Eating is Finished.

8. Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Training Rule on Storing Up

252-3.Aṭṭhametādisanti asūpabyañjanaṃ.Yaṃkiñci yāvakālikaṃ vā yāmakālikaṃ vāti ettha ‘‘yāmakālika’’nti iminā na kevalaṃ yāvakālike eva sannidhipaccayā pācittiyaṃ, atha kho yāmakālikepīti dasseti. Nanu ca yāmakālikaṃ neva khādanīyesu antogadhaṃ, na bhojanīyesu. Teneva padabhājanīye ‘‘khādanīyaṃ nāma pañca bhojanāni yāmakālikaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ khādanīyaṃ nāma. Bhojanīyaṃ nāma pañca bhojanānī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu sannidhikārakaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā, pācittiya’’nti ca vuttaṃ, tasmā yāmakālike pācittiyena bhavitabbanti kathaṃ viññāyatīti? Vuccate – padabhājanekhādanīya-saddassa atthadassanatthaṃ ‘‘yāmakālikaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana sannidhipaccayā anāpattidassanatthaṃ. Khāditabbañhi yaṃkiñci khādanīyanti adhippetaṃ, na ca yāmakālikesu kiñci khāditabbaṃ atthi pātabyabhāvato. Tasmā kiñcāpi yāmakālikaṃ khādanīyabhojanīyehi na saṅgahitaṃ, tathāpi anāpattiṃ dassentena ‘‘anāpatti yāmakālikaṃ yāme nidahitvā bhuñjatī’’ti vacanato yāmātikkame sannidhipaccayā pācittiyena bhavitabbanti viññāyati. ‘‘Yāmakālikena, bhikkhave, sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ yāme kappati, yāmātikkante na kappatī’’ti (mahāva. 305) imināpi cāyamattho siddho. Teneva bhagavato adhippāyaññūhi aṭṭhakathācariyehi yāmakālike pācittiyameva vuttaṃ.

252-3. In the eighth, tādisaṃ means such relish. Yaṃkiñci yāvakālikaṃ vā yāmakālikaṃ vā: here, with "yāmakālikaṃ," it shows that the pācittiya offense arises not only from storing up yāvakālika, but also from storing up yāmakālika. But surely, yāmakālika is included neither in the khādanīya nor in the bhojanīya. Therefore, in the Padabhājanīya, it is said, " Khādanīya means the remainder, except for the five bhojana, the yāmakālika, the sattāhakālika, and the yāvajīvika. Bhojanīya means the five bhojana," and it is also said, "Whatever bhikkhu should eat or consume khādanīya or bhojanīya that has been stored up, there is an offense of pācittiya." Therefore, how is it to be understood that the pācittiya offense arises from yāmakālika? It is said: in the Padabhājana, "ṭhapetvā yāmakālikaṃ" is said for the purpose of showing the meaning of the word khādanīya, not for the purpose of showing that there is no offense due to storing up. For whatever is to be eaten is intended as khādanīya, and there is nothing among the yāmakālika that is to be eaten because it is to be drunk. Therefore, although yāmakālika is not included by khādanīya and bhojanīya, nevertheless, because it is said by one showing that there is no offense, "There is no offense if one eats the yāmakālika after storing it for a yāma," it is to be understood that the pācittiya offense arises due to storing up when the yāma has passed. And this meaning is also established by this: "For yāmakālika, bhikkhus, sattāhakālika, and yāvajīvika received on that day are allowable within the yāma; they are not allowable after the yāma has passed" (Mahāva. 305). Therefore, the Aṭṭhakathācariya, who know the intent of the Blessed One, have stated that only the pācittiya offense arises from yāmakālika.

Paṭiggahaṇeti gahaṇameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Paṭiggahitameva hi taṃ, puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Teneva‘‘ajjhoharitukāmatāya gaṇhantassa paṭiggahaṇe’’ti vuttaṃ.Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) pana ‘‘ajjhoharissāmīti gaṇhantassa paṭiggahaṇe’’icceva vuttaṃ.Yanti yaṃ pattaṃ.Sandissatīti yāguyā upari sandissati. Telavaṇṇe patte satipi nisnehabhāve aṅguliyā ghaṃsantassa vaṇṇavaseneva lekhā paññāyati, tasmā tattha anāpattīti dassanatthaṃ‘‘sā abbohārikā’’ti vuttaṃ.Sayaṃ paṭiggahetvā apariccattameva hi dutiyadivase na vaṭṭatīti ettha paṭiggahaṇe anapekkhavissajjanena anupasampannassa nirapekkhadānena vā vijahitapaṭiggahaṇaṃ pariccattameva hotīti ‘‘apariccatta’’nti iminā ubhayathāpi avijahitapaṭiggahaṇameva vuttaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ parassa pariccajitvā adinnampi sace paṭiggahaṇe nirapekkhavissajjanena vijahitapaṭiggahaṇaṃ hoti, tampi dutiyadivase vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.

Paṭiggahaṇe is said referring to the act of receiving itself. For it is only what has been received; there is no need for a further act of receiving. Therefore, it is said, "Ajjhoharitukāmatāya gaṇhantassa paṭiggahaṇe". However, in the Mātikāṭṭhakathā (Kaṅkhā. Aṭṭha. Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), it is only said, "Ajjhoharissāmīti gaṇhantassa paṭiggahaṇe". Yaṃ means whatever bowl. Sandissatīti means it appears on top of the gruel. Even when there is grease on the bowl, a line appears when one rubs it with a finger due to the characteristic of the grease; therefore, to show that there is no offense there, it is said, "Sā abbohārikā". Sayaṃ paṭiggahetvā apariccattameva hi dutiyadivase na vaṭṭatī: here, the receiving is relinquished by releasing without regard for the receiving or by giving without regard to an unordained person; thus, "apariccatta" means only the unabandoned receiving in both ways. Therefore, it should be understood that even what has been abandoned by another and not given is allowable on the second day if the receiving is relinquished by releasing without regard for the receiving.

gaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘sāmaṇerānaṃ pariccajantīti imasmiṃ adhikāre ṭhatvā ‘apariccattamevā’ti vuttattā anupasampannassa pariccattameva vaṭṭati, apariccattaṃ na vaṭṭatīti āpannaṃ, tasmā nirālayabhāvena paṭiggahaṇe vijahitepi anupasampannassa apariccattaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ viya na dissati. Yadaggena hi paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati, tadaggena sannidhimpi na karoti vijahitapaṭiggahaṇassa appaṭiggahitasadisattā. Paṭiggahetvā nidahiteyeva ca sannidhipaccayā āpatti vuttā. ‘‘Paṭiggahetvā ekarattaṃ vītināmitassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti hi vuttaṃ.

Gaṇṭhipadesu is stated. Some, however, say, "Because it is said, 'apariccattameva,' standing in this context where it is being relinquished to novices, it follows that what is relinquished to an unordained person is allowable, and what is not relinquished is not allowable; therefore, even if the receiving is relinquished with a feeling of non-attachment, what is not relinquished to an unordained person is not allowable," but that does not seem right. For the receiving is relinquished by whatever part, by that part, one does not store up, because what has had its receiving relinquished is like what has not been received. And it is said that the offense arises due to storing up only when it is received and put away. For it is said, "This is a designation for what has had one night pass after it was received."

‘‘āhāratthāya ajjhoharato dukkaṭena saddhiṃ pācittiya’’nti.Pakatiāmiseti odanādikappiyāmise.Yāmakālikaṃ sati paccaye sāmisena mukhena ajjhoharato dveti hiyyo paṭiggahitayāmakālikaṃ ajja purebhattaṃ sāmisena mukhena bhuñjato sannihitayāmakālikapaccayā ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ, sannihitena saṃsaṭṭhaāmisapaccayā ekanti dve pācittiyāni.Vikappadvayepīti sāmisena nirāmisenāti vuttavidhānadvaye.Dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhatīti āhāratthāya ajjhoharaṇapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhati.Thullaccayañca dukkaṭañca vaḍḍhatīti manussamaṃse thullaccayaṃ, sesaakappiyamaṃsesu dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhati.

"Āhāratthāya ajjhoharato dukkaṭena saddhiṃ pācittiya". Pakatiāmise means allowable relish such as rice. Yāmakālikaṃ sati paccaye sāmisena mukhena ajjhoharato dve: when one eats with a relish-tainted mouth yāmakālika received yesterday, before noon today, there is one pācittiya due to the stored-up yāmakālika, and one pācittiya due to the relish-tainted contact with what has been stored up; thus, there are two pācittiya offenses. Vikappadvayepī means in both of the methods stated, with relish and without relish. Dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhatī means the dukkaṭa increases due to swallowing for the purpose of nourishment. Thullaccayañca dukkaṭañca vaḍḍhatī means a thullaccaya offense increases for human flesh, and a dukkaṭa offense increases for the remaining unallowable flesh.

255.Paṭiggahaṇapaccayā tāva dukkaṭanti ettha sannihitattā purebhattampi dukkaṭameva. Sati paccaye pana sannihitampi sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ bhesajjatthāya gaṇhantassa paribhuñjantassa ca anāpattiyeva. Sesamettha uttānameva. Yāvakālikayāmakālikatā, sannidhibhāvo, tassa ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

255. Paṭiggahaṇapaccayā tāva dukkaṭaṃ: here, even before noon, there is a dukkaṭa offense because it has been stored up. However, if, due to a reason, one receives and consumes stored-up sattāhakālika and yāvajīvika for the purpose of medicine, there is no offense. The rest here is straightforward. Being yāvakālika and yāmakālika, the state of being stored up, and the swallowing of it—these are the three factors involved here.

Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Storing Up is Finished.

9. Paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Training Rule on Choice Food

257-259.Navame paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhāni bhojanānipaṇītabhojanāni. Yathā hi ājaññayutto ratho ‘‘ājaññaratho’’ti vuccati, evamidhāpi paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhāni sattadhaññanibbattāni bhojanāni ‘‘paṇītabhojanānī’’ti vuttāni. Yehi pana paṇītehi saṃsaṭṭhāni, tāni ‘‘paṇītabhojanānī’’ti vuccanti, tesaṃ pabhedadassanatthaṃ ‘‘seyyathidaṃ, sappi navanīta’’ntiādi pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappatī’’ti idañca pācittiyavatthuparicchedadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana kappiyavatthuparicchedadassanatthaṃ. Na hi akappiyamaṃsasattānaṃ sappiādīni na kappanti. Ekañhi manussavasātelaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbesaṃ khīrasappinavanītavasātelesu akappiyaṃ nāma natthi.Sappibhattanti ettha kiñcāpi sappisaṃsaṭṭhaṃ bhattaṃ sappibhattaṃ, sappi ca bhattañca sappibhattantipi viññāyati, aṭṭhakathāsu pana ‘‘sālibhattaṃ viya sappibhattaṃ nāma natthī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vatvā dukkaṭasseva daḷhataraṃ katvā vuttattā na sakkā aññaṃ vattuṃ. Aṭṭhakathācariyā eva hi īdisesu ṭhānesu pamāṇaṃ.

257-259. In the ninth, paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhāni bhojanāni means choice foods. Just as a chariot yoked with thoroughbreds is called an "ājaññaratho," so too, here, foods mixed with choice things and made from seven types of grains are called "paṇītabhojanānī." But those things with which they are mixed are called "paṇītabhojanānī," and for the purpose of showing their distinction, "seyyathidaṃ, sappi navanīta," etc., is said in the Pāḷi. And this, "Yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati," is said for the purpose of showing the limit of the occasion for a pācittiya offense, not for the purpose of showing the limit of allowable things. For the sappi, etc., of beings whose flesh is unallowable is not unallowable. For there is nothing unallowable among milk, sappi, butter, and fat except for human fat. Sappibhattaṃ: here, although sappibhattaṃ can be understood as rice mixed with sappi, or as sappi and rice, it is not possible to say anything else because it is stated in the commentaries, saying "There is no such thing as sappibhattaṃ like sālibhattaṃ," making the dukkaṭa offense even stronger. Indeed, the Aṭṭhakathācariya are the authority in such matters.

Mūlanti kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Anāpattīti visaṅketattā sabbāhiyeva āpattīhi anāpatti. Keci pana ‘‘pācittiyeneva anāpatti vuttā, sūpodanaviññattidukkaṭaṃ pana hotiyevā’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.Kappiyasappinā akappiyasappināti ca idaṃ kappiyākappiyamaṃsānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, tasmā kappiyamaṃsasappinā akappiyamaṃsasappināti evamettha attho gahetabbo.Nānāvatthukānīti sappinavanītādīnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ.

Mūlaṃ is said referring to allowable goods. Anāpattī: because of the lack of invitation, there is no offense from all offenses. Some, however, say, "No offense is stated only for the pācittiya offense, but the dukkaṭa offense still arises from asking for soup and rice," but that should not be accepted. Kappiyasappinā akappiyasappinā: this is said in terms of allowable and unallowable flesh; therefore, the meaning here should be understood as sappi from allowable flesh and sappi from unallowable flesh. Nānāvatthukānī is said in terms of sappi, butter, etc.

261.Mahānāmasikkhāpadena kāretabboti ettha –

261. Mahānāmasikkhāpadena kāretabbo: here –

‘‘Agilānena bhikkhunā catumāsapaccayapavāraṇā sāditabbā aññatra punapavāraṇāya aññatra niccapavāraṇāya, tato ce uttari sādiyeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 306) –

"A bhikkhu who is not ill should ask for a four-month invitation for requisites, except for a renewed invitation, except for a standing invitation; if he should ask for more than that, there is an offense of pācittiya." (pāci. 306) –

Etāni pāṭidesanīyavatthūnīti pāḷiyaṃ āgatasappiādīni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ anāgatāni pana akappiyasappiādīni bhikkhunīnampi dukkaṭavatthūnīti veditabbaṃ.Sūpodanaviññattiyanti bhikkhūnaṃ pācittiyavatthūni bhikkhunīnaṃ pāṭidesanīyavatthūni ca ṭhapetvā avasesaviññattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Paṇītabhojanatā, agilānatā, akataviññattiyā paṭilābho, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

Etāni pāṭidesanīyavatthūnī: this is said referring to the sappi, etc., that appear in the Pāḷi. But the unallowable sappi, etc., that do not appear in the Pāḷi should be understood as objects for a dukkaṭa offense even for nuns. Sūpodanaviññattiya means it is said referring to asking that remains, setting aside the objects for a pācittiya offense for bhikkhus and the objects for a pāṭidesanīya offense for nuns. The rest here is straightforward. Being choice food, being not ill, receiving without having made a request, and swallowing—these are the four factors involved here.

Paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Choice Food is Finished.

10. Dantaponasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Training Rule on Tooth-Cleaning

263.Dasameayyavosāṭitakānīti pitupiṇḍassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Ummāreti susāne katagehassa attano gehassa vā ummāre.Ghanabaddhoti ghanamaṃsena sambaddho, kathinasaṃhatasarīroti vuttaṃ hoti.

263. In the tenth, ayyavosāṭitakānī is a designation for food offered to spirits. Ummāre means on the threshold of a house made in a cemetery or of one's own house. Ghanabaddho means bound with dense flesh, which means having a solid, compact body.

264.Mukhadvāranti galanāḷikaṃ.Āhāranti ajjhoharitabbaṃ yaṃkiñci yāvakālikādiṃ.Āhareyyāti mukhadvāraṃ paveseyya. Mukhena vā paviṭṭhaṃ hotu nāsikāya vā, galena ajjhoharaṇīyattā sabbampi taṃ mukhadvāraṃ pavesitameva hoti. Yasmā pana te bhikkhū anāhārepi udake āhārasaññāya dantapone ca mukhadvāraṃ āhaṭaṃ idanti saññāya kukkuccāyiṃsu, tasmā vuttaṃ‘‘te bhikkhū adinnaṃ…pe… sammā atthaṃ asallakkhetvā kukkuccāyiṃsū’’ti. Udakañhi yathāsukhaṃ pātuṃ dantakaṭṭhañca dantaponaparibhogena paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, tassa pana rasaṃ gilituṃ na vaṭṭati. Sacepi dantakaṭṭharaso ajānantassa anto pavisati, pācittiyameva. Anajjhoharantena pana dantakaṭṭhaṃ vā hotu aññaṃ vā, kiñci mukhe pakkhipituṃ vaṭṭati.

264. Mukhadvāraṃ means the gullet. Āhāraṃ means whatever is to be swallowed, such as yāvakālika. Āhareyyā means he should bring it into the opening of the mouth. Whether it enters through the mouth or through the nose, since it is to be swallowed through the throat, all of it is only brought into the opening of the mouth. However, because those bhikkhus were scrupulous even about water in the absence of food, with the perception of food, and with the perception that tooth-cleaning had been brought into the opening of the mouth, therefore it is said "te bhikkhū adinnaṃ…pe… sammā atthaṃ asallakkhetvā kukkuccāyiṃsū". For it is allowable to drink water as one pleases and to use a toothpick with tooth-cleaning use, but it is not allowable to swallow the taste of it. Even if the taste of the toothpick enters unknowingly, there is only a pācittiya offense. But it is allowable to put something in the mouth, whether it is a toothpick or something else, by one who is not swallowing.

265.Akallakoti gilāno sahatthā paribhuñjituṃ asakkonto mukhena paṭiggaṇhāti.Uccāraṇamattanti ukkhipanamattaṃ.Ekadesenapīti aṅguliyāpi phuṭṭhamattena.Taṃ ce paṭiggaṇhāti, sabbaṃ paṭiggahitamevāti veṇukoṭiyā bandhitvā ṭhapitattā. Sacepi bhūmiyaṃ ṭhitameva ghaṭaṃ dāyakena hatthapāse ṭhatvā ghaṭaṃ dassāmīti dinnaveṇukoṭiggahaṇavasena paṭiggaṇhāti, ubhayakoṭibaddhaṃ sabbampi paṭiggahitameva hoti. Bhikkhussa atthāya apīḷetvā pakatiyā pīḷiyamānaucchurasaṃ sandhāya ‘‘gaṇhathā’’ti vuttattā‘‘abhihāro na paññāyatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Hatthapāse ṭhitassa pana bhikkhussa atthāya pīḷiyamānā ucchuto paggharantaṃ rasaṃ gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati, doṇikāya sayaṃ paggharantaṃ ucchurasaṃ majjhe āvaritvā āvaritvā vissajjitampi gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati.Katthaciaṭṭhakathāsu.

265. Akallako: "One who is infirm" means one who is sick and unable to partake with his own hand accepts it with his mouth. Uccāraṇamattaṃ: "Merely raising up" means merely lifting it up. Ekadesenapī: "Even with a part" means even with the mere touching by a finger. Taṃ ce paṭiggaṇhāti, sabbaṃ paṭiggahitamevā: "If he accepts that, all is accepted" because it is placed having been tied with a bamboo splinter. Even if a donor, standing near the pot which is on the ground, says, "I will give you the pot," he accepts it by grasping the bamboo splinter that is given, then all that is tied to both ends is considered accepted. Because it was said, "Take it," referring to sugarcane juice being squeezed naturally without pressing it for the sake of the bhikkhu, it was said, ‘‘abhihāro na paññāyatī’’ "the act of conveying is not evident". But it is permissible to take the juice dripping from sugarcane being squeezed for the sake of a bhikkhu standing nearby, and it is permissible to block and release sugarcane juice dripping by itself into a trough. Katthaci: In some commentaries.

Asaṃhārimeti thāmamajjhimena purisena asaṃhāriye.‘‘Tintiṇikādipaṇṇesū’’ti vacanato sākhāsu paṭiggahaṇaṃ ruhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Puñchitvā paṭiggahetvāti ettha ‘‘puñchite paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi, tasmā puñchitvā gahetvāti evamattho gahetabbo’’ti vadanti. Puñchitvā paṭiggahetvā vāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Patte patitarajanacuṇṇañhi abbhantaraparibhogatthāya aparihaṭabhāvato paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Pubbābhogassa anurūpena‘‘anupasampannassa datvā…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana taṃ ‘‘aññassa dassāmī’’ti cittuppādamattena parasantakaṃ nāma na hoti, tasmā tassa adatvāpi paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.

Asaṃhārime: "That cannot be moved" means that which cannot be moved by a man of moderate strength. From the statement ‘‘Tintiṇikādipaṇṇesū’’ "In leaves such as tamarind leaves," it should be understood that accepting on branches is allowable. Puñchitvā paṭiggahetvā: "Having wiped and accepted" regarding this, some say, "There is no need for acceptance after wiping, therefore 'having wiped and taken' is the meaning to be taken." Thus, the meaning should be understood here as "having wiped and accepted." Indeed, dust that has fallen on a bowl is not removed for the sake of internal use, it is permissible to accept and use it. In accordance with the previous dispensation, it was said, ‘‘anupasampannassa datvā…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ "...giving to one who is not fully ordained... is permissible." Since that does not become the property of another merely by the thought of "I will give it to another," therefore it is permissible to accept and use it even without giving it to him.

Bhikkhussa detīti aññassa bhikkhussa deti.Kañjikanti khīrarasādiṃ yaṃkiñci dravaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Hatthato mocetvā puna gaṇhāti, uggahitakaṃ hotīti āha‘‘hatthato amocentenevā’’ti.Ālulentānanti ālolentānaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho. Āharitvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitattā abhihāro natthīti āha‘‘patto paṭiggahetabbo’’ti.Paṭhamataraṃ uḷuṅkato thevā patte patantīti ettha ‘‘yathā paṭhamataraṃ patitatheve doso natthi, tathā ākiritvā apanentānaṃ pacchā patitathevepi abhihaṭattā nevatthi doso’’ti vadanti.Carukenāti khuddakabhājanena.Mukhavaṭṭiyāpi gahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti mukhavaṭṭiṃ ukkhipitvā hatthe phusāpite gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati.Kecīti abhayagirivāsino.Esa nayoti kāyapaṭibaddhapaṭibaddhampi kāyapaṭibaddhamevāti ayaṃ nayo. Tathā ca tattha kāyapaṭibaddhe taṃpaṭibaddhe ca thullaccayameva vuttaṃ.

Bhikkhussa detī: "He gives to a bhikkhu" means he gives to another bhikkhu. Kañjika: "Sour gruel" is said referring to any liquid such as milk or juice. He says, ‘‘hatthato amocentenevā’’ "without releasing it from the hand," meaning that if he takes it again after releasing it from his hand, it becomes something that has been taken up. Ālulentāna: "Stirring" means stirring it, or this itself is the reading. He says, ‘‘patto paṭiggahetabbo’’ "the bowl should be accepted" because there is no act of conveying since it was brought and placed on the ground. Regarding Paṭhamataraṃ uḷuṅkato thevā patte patantī: "First only, dripping from the trough into the bowl," some say, "Just as there is no fault if it drips only at first, so too, there is no fault in what drips afterward when removing the sprinkling, because it has not been conveyed." Carukenā: "With a small vessel." Mukhavaṭṭiyāpi gahetuṃ vaṭṭatī: "It is permissible to take it even with a mouth-cloth" means it is permissible to take it having raised up the mouth-cloth and touched it to the hand. Kecī: "Some" means the residents of Abhayagiri. Esa nayo: "This principle" means that even that which is attached to what is attached to the body is considered attached to the body. And so, there a thullaccaya offense is stated for that which is attached to the body and that which is attached to that.

Tenāti yassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ gataṃ, tena.Tasmāti yasmā mūlaṭṭhasseva paribhogo anuññāto, tasmā. Taṃ divasaṃ hatthena gahetvā dutiyadivase paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa uggahitakapaṭiggahitaṃ hotīti āha‘‘anāmasitvā’’ti. Appaṭiggahitattā‘‘sannidhipaccayā anāpattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa adinnamukhadvārāpatti hotīti āha‘‘paṭiggahetvā pana paribhuñjitabba’’nti.‘‘Taṃ divasaṃ…pe… na tato para’’nti vacanato taṃ divasaṃ hatthena gahetvā vā aggahetvā vā ṭhapitaṃ dutiyadivase appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa adinnamukhadvārāpatti hoti, hatthena gahetvā ṭhapitaṃ dutiyadivase paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa pana uggahitakapaṭiggahitaṃ hoti. Appaṭiggahitameva hi hatthena gahetvā ṭhapitaṃ.‘‘Sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjitu’’nti hi vacanato appaṭiggahitasseva tasmiṃ divase paribhogo anuññāto. Tasmā yaṃ vuttaṃgaṇṭhipade ‘‘taṃ diyyamānaṃ patatīti ettha yathā gaṇabhojanādīsu gilānādīnaṃ kukkuccāyantānaṃ gaṇabhojanaṃ anuññātaṃ, evamidhāpi bhagavatā paṭiggahitameva kukkuccavinodanatthaṃ anuññāta’’nti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ diyyamānaṃ patatī’’ti avisesena vuttattā catūsupi kālikesu ayaṃ nayo veditabbo.

Tenā: "By him" means by the bhikkhu to whom it has gone to the presence of. Tasmā: "Therefore" because the use of that which is in its original place is allowed, therefore he says, ‘‘anāmasitvā’’ "without touching," that there is both an offense of taking up and accepting for one who takes it with his hand on that day and accepts and uses it on the second day. ‘‘sannidhipaccayā anāpattī’’ "There is no offense because of being stored," because it has not been accepted. He says, ‘‘paṭiggahetvā pana paribhuñjitabba’’ "but it should be used having accepted," that there is an offense through the mouth-door of something not given for one who uses it without accepting it. Because of the statement ‘‘Taṃ divasaṃ…pe… na tato para’’ "On that day... not beyond that," there is an offense through the mouth-door of something not given for one who uses without accepting it on the second day what has been taken with the hand or not taken and kept on that day; but there is both an offense of taking up and accepting for one who accepts and uses on the second day what has been taken with the hand and kept. Indeed, what has been taken with the hand and kept is something unaccepted. Because of the statement ‘‘Sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjitu’’ "It is permissible to take and use oneself," the use of what has not been accepted is allowed on that day itself. Therefore, that which was said gaṇṭhipade "taṃ diyyamānaṃ patatīti ettha yathā gaṇabhojanādīsu gilānādīnaṃ kukkuccāyantānaṃ gaṇabhojanaṃ anuññātaṃ, evamidhāpi bhagavatā paṭiggahitameva kukkuccavinodanatthaṃ anuññāta’’nti, "Regarding 'that which falls while being given,' just as group meals are allowed to the sick and others who are scrupulous about them in group meals and the like, so too here, what has been accepted is allowed by the Blessed One for the purpose of removing scrupulousness," that should not be taken. Since it was said generally "taṃ diyyamānaṃ patatī" "that which falls while being given," this principle should be understood in all four times.

Satthakenāti paṭiggahitasatthakena. Kasmā panettha uggahitapaccayā sannidhipaccayā vā doso na siyāti āha‘‘na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantī’’ti. Imināva bāhiraparibhogatthaṃ sāmaṃ gahetvā anupasampannena dinnaṃ vā gahetvā pariharituṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Tasmā pattasammakkhanādiatthaṃ sāmaṃ gahetvā parihaṭatelādiṃ sace paribhuñjitukāmo hoti, paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa anāpatti. Abbhantaraparibhogatthaṃ pana sāmaṃ gahitaṃ paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa uggahitakapaṭiggahitaṃ hoti, appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa adinnamukhadvārāpatti hoti, abbhantaraparibhogatthameva anupasampannena dinnaṃ gahetvā pariharantassa siṅgīloṇakappo viya sannidhipaccayā āpatti hoti. Keci pana ‘‘thāmamajjhimassa purisassa uccāraṇamattaṃ hotītiādinā vuttapañcaṅgasampattiyā paṭiggahaṇassa ruhanato bāhiraparibhogatthampi sace anupasampannena dinnaṃ gaṇhāti, paṭiggahitamevā’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ sati idha bāhiraparibhogatthaṃ anupasampannena dinnaṃ gahetvā pariharantassa sannidhipaccayā āpatti vattabbā siyā, ‘‘na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantī’’ti ca na vattabbaṃ, tasmā bāhiraparibhogatthaṃ gahitaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ nāma na hotīti veditabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ pañcasu paṭiggahaṇaṅgesu ‘‘paribhogatthāyā’’ti visesanaṃ vattabbanti? Na vattabbaṃ. Paṭiggahaṇañhi paribhogatthameva hotīti ‘‘paribhogatthāyā’’ti visuṃ avatvā ‘‘tañce bhikkhu kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘satipi paṭiggahaṇe ‘na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantī’ti idha aparibhogatthāya pariharaṇe anāpatti vuttā’’ti vadanti.Udukkhalamusalāni khiyyantīti ettha udukkhalamusalānaṃ khayena pisitakoṭṭitabhesajjesu sace āgantukavaṇṇo paññāyati, na vaṭṭati.

Satthakenā: "With a knife" means with a knife that has been accepted. Why is there no fault here because of taking up or because of storing? He says ‘‘na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantī’’ "indeed, they are not carrying it for the purpose of use." By this, he shows that it is permissible to take and carry oneself, or to take what has been given by one who is not fully ordained, for the purpose of external use. Therefore, if one wants to use oneself oil, etc., that has been taken and carried oneself for the purpose of greasing a bowl, etc., there is no offense for one who accepts and uses it. But there is both an offense of taking up and accepting for one who accepts and uses what has been taken oneself for the purpose of internal use, and there is an offense through the mouth-door of something not given for one who uses without accepting it; for one who takes and carries what has been given by one who is not fully ordained for the purpose of internal use, there is an offense because of storing, like the case of horn-salt. But some say, "If one takes what has been given by one who is not fully ordained, even for the purpose of external use, acceptance is allowable due to the completion of the five factors stated by 'that which can be lifted by a man of moderate strength, etc.,' so it is considered accepted." If that is so, it should be said that there is an offense here because of storing for one who takes and carries what has been given by one who is not fully ordained for the purpose of external use, and ‘‘na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantī’’ "indeed, they are not carrying it for the purpose of use" should not be said; therefore, it should be understood that what has been taken for the purpose of external use is not called accepted. If so, should the qualification ‘‘paribhogatthāyā’’ "for the purpose of use" be stated among the five factors of acceptance? It should not be stated. Indeed, acceptance is for the purpose of use, therefore, without stating ‘‘paribhogatthāyā’’ "for the purpose of use" separately, only this much was said: ‘‘tañce bhikkhu kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā paṭiggaṇhātī’’ "if that bhikkhu accepts it with the body or with what is attached to the body." But others say, "Even with acceptance, no offense is stated here for carrying for the purpose of non-use because ‘na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantī’ 'indeed, they are not carrying it for the purpose of use.'" Udukkhalamusalāni khiyyantī: "Mortars and pestles wear out," regarding this, if an adventitious color appears in medicines that have been ground because of the wearing away of mortars and pestles, it is not permissible.

Suddhaṃ udakaṃ hotīti rukkhasākhādīhi gaḷitvā patanaudakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Patto vāssa paṭiggahetabboti etthāpi pattagataṃ chupitvā dentassa hatthalaggena āmisena dosābhāvatthaṃ pattapaṭiggahaṇanti abbhantaraparibhogatthameva paṭiggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.Yaṃ sāmaṇerassa patte patati…pe… paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahatīti ettha punappunaṃ gaṇhantassa attano patte pakkhittameva ‘‘attano santaka’’nti sanniṭṭhānakaraṇato hatthagataṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahati, paricchinditvā dinnaṃ pana gaṇhantassa gahaṇasamayeyeva ‘‘attano santaka’’nti sanniṭṭhānassa katattā hatthagataṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati.Kesañci atthāya odanaṃ pakkhipatīti ettha anupasampannassa atthāya pakkhipantepi ‘‘āgantvā gaṇhissatī’’ti sayameva pakkhipitvā ṭhapanato paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahati, anupasampannassa hatthe pakkhittaṃ pana anupasampanneneva ṭhapitaṃ nāma hotīti paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati pariccattabhāvato. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘sāmaṇera…pe… pariccattattā’’ti.

Suddhaṃ udakaṃ hotī: "The water is pure" is said referring to water that has fallen having been filtered by branches of trees, etc. Patto vāssa paṭiggahetabbo: "Or his bowl should be accepted," even here, the acceptance of the bowl is for the sake of internal use, with the intention that there is no fault due to the impurity clinging to the hand of one giving after spitting into the bowl; thus, acceptance should be understood. Yaṃ sāmaṇerassa patte patati…pe… paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahatī: "That which falls into the bowl of a novice... the acceptance does not cease," regarding this, the acceptance clinging to the hand does not cease because of the determination "it is mine" only to what is put in his own bowl for one who takes it repeatedly, but for one who takes what has been delimited and given, the acceptance clinging to the hand ceases because of the determination "it is mine" being made at the very moment of taking it. Kesañci atthāya odanaṃ pakkhipatī: "He puts rice for the sake of someone," regarding this, even when putting it for the sake of one who is not fully ordained, the acceptance does not cease because he himself puts it and keeps it with the thought "he will come and take it," but what is put in the hand of one who is not fully ordained is considered kept by one who is not fully ordained, so the acceptance ceases because of being relinquished. Therefore, it was said ‘‘sāmaṇera…pe… pariccattattā’’ "...the novice... because of being relinquished."

Paṭiggahaṇūpagaṃ bhāraṃnāma thāmamajjhimassa purisassa ukkhepārahaṃ. Kiñcāpi avissajjetvāva aññena hatthena pidahantassa doso natthi, tathāpi na pidahitabbanti aṭṭhakathāpamāṇeneva gahetabbaṃ.Macchikavāraṇatthanti ettha ‘‘sacepi sākhāya laggarajaṃ patte patati, sukhena paribhuñjituṃ sakkāti sākhāya paṭiggahitattā abbhantaraparibhogatthamevidha paṭiggahaṇanti mūlapaṭiggahaṇameva vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘macchikavāraṇatthanti ettha vacanamattaṃ gahetvā bāhiraparibhogatthaṃ gahita’’nti vadanti.Tasmimpi asatīti cāṭiyā vā kuṇḍake vā asati.Anupasampannaṃ gāhāpetvāti taṃyeva ajjhoharaṇīyabhaṇḍaṃ anupasampannena gāhāpetvā.Therassa pattaṃ anutherassāti therassa pattaṃ attanā gahetvā anutherassa deti.Tuyhaṃ yāguṃ mayhaṃ dehīti ettha evaṃ vatvā sāmaṇerassa pattaṃ gahetvā attanopi pattaṃ tassa deti.Ettha panāti paṇḍito sāmaṇerotiādipattaparivattanakathāya.Kāraṇaṃ upaparikkhitabbanti yathā mātuādīnaṃ telādīni haranto tathārūpe kicce anupasampannena aparivattetvāva paribhuñjituṃ labhati, evamidha pattaparivattanaṃ akatvā paribhuñjituṃ na labhatīti ettha kāraṇaṃ vīmaṃsitabbanti attho.

Paṭiggahaṇūpagaṃ bhāraṃ: "A load subject to acceptance" means that which is suitable to be lifted by a man of moderate strength. Although there is no fault for one who covers it with another hand without releasing it, still it should not be covered; this should be taken only by the authority of the commentary. Macchikavāraṇatthaṃ: "To prevent flies," regarding this, it was said, "If dust clinging to a branch falls into a bowl, it is possible to use it easily, so the original acceptance is allowable, since the acceptance on the branch is for the purpose of internal use here." But others say, "Taking merely the statement 'macchikavāraṇatthaṃ' 'to prevent flies,' it is taken for the purpose of external use." Tasmimpi asatī: "Even in the absence of that" means in the absence of a pot or container. Anupasampannaṃ gāhāpetvā: "Having had one who is not fully ordained take it" means having had one who is not fully ordained take that very article to be ingested. Therassa pattaṃ anutherassā: "The bowl of a thera to a non-thera" means he takes the bowl of a thera himself and gives it to a non-thera. Tuyhaṃ yāguṃ mayhaṃ dehī: "Give your rice-gruel to me," regarding this, having said this, he takes the bowl of a novice and gives his own bowl to him. Ettha panā: "But here," regarding the story of the exchange of bowls such as "a novice who is wise," etc. Kāraṇaṃ upaparikkhitabba: "The reason should be examined" means just as when carrying oil, etc., for mothers, etc., one can use without transferring it by one who is not fully ordained in such a task, so here, the meaning is that the reason should be investigated as to why it is not permissible to use without making the exchange of bowls.

ācariyabuddhadattattherenapi vuttaṃ –

ācariyabuddhadattattherenapi vuttaṃ –

‘‘Mātāpitūnamatthāya, telādiharatopi ca;

‘‘Mātāpitūnamatthāya, telādiharatopi ca;
Sākhaṃ chāyādiatthāya, imesaṃ na visesati.

‘‘Tasmā hissa visesassa, cintetabbaṃ tu kāraṇaṃ;

‘‘Tasmā hissa visesassa, cintetabbaṃ tu kāraṇaṃ;
Tassa sālayabhāvaṃ tu, visesaṃ takkayāma ta’’nti.

Idamevettha yuttataraṃ avassaṃ tathāvidhavitakkuppattiyā sambhavato. Na sakkā hi ettha vitakkaṃ sodhetunti. Mātādīnaṃ atthāya haraṇe pana nāvassaṃ tathāvidhavitakkuppattīti sakkā vitakkaṃ sodhetuṃ. Yattha hi vitakkaṃ sodhetuṃ sakkā, tattha nevatthi doso. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘sace pana sakkoti vitakkaṃ sodhetuṃ, tato laddhaṃ khāditumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti.

This itself is more fitting here because the arising of such a thought is possible. Indeed, it is not possible to purify the thought here. But in carrying for the sake of mothers, etc., the arising of such a thought is not necessary, so it is possible to purify the thought. Where it is possible to purify the thought, there is no fault. Therefore, he will say, "But if it is possible to purify the thought, it is permissible to eat what has been obtained."

Niccāletuṃ na sakkotīti niccāletvā sakkharā apanetuṃ na sakkoti.Ādhārake patto ṭhapitohotīti paṭiggahetabbapattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Cāletīti vinā kāraṇaṃ cāleti. Satipi kāraṇe bhikkhūnaṃ paribhogārahaṃ cāletuṃ na vaṭṭati. Kiñcāpi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, amanussikābādhe āmakamaṃsaṃ āmakalohita’’nti (mahāva. 264) tādise ābādhe attano atthāya āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇaṃ anuññātaṃ, ‘‘āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hotī’’ti ca sāmaññato paṭikkhittaṃ, tathāpi attano aññassa vā bhikkhuno atthāya aggahitattā‘‘sīhavighāsādiṃ…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ.Sakkoti vitakkaṃ sodhetunti mayhampi detīti vitakkassa anuppannabhāvaṃ sallakkhetuṃ sakkoti, sāmaṇerassa dassāmīti suddhacittena mayā gahitanti vā sallakkhetuṃ sakkoti.

Niccāletuṃ na sakkotī: "He is not able to constantly shake it" means he is not able to shake it constantly and remove the sugar. Ādhārake patto ṭhapito hotī: "The bowl is placed on a stand" is said referring to the bowl that should be accepted. Cāletī: "He shakes it" means he shakes it without a reason. Even with a reason, it is not permissible to shake it if it is fit for bhikkhus to use. Although the acceptance of raw meat is allowed for one's own sake in such a disease as a disease caused by non-humans, with the statement "I allow you, bhikkhus, raw meat, raw blood in a disease caused by non-humans" (mahāva. 264), and it is generally prohibited with "He is one who abstains from the acceptance of raw meat," still it was said ‘‘sīhavighāsādiṃ…pe… vaṭṭatī’’ "lion-scraps, etc.... are allowable" because it has not been taken for the sake of oneself or another bhikkhu. Sakkoti vitakkaṃ sodhetu: "He is able to purify the thought" means he is able to consider that the thought that "he will give it to me too" has not arisen, or he is able to consider that "I took it with a pure mind to give to the novice."

Sace pana mūlepi paṭiggahitaṃ hotīti ettha ‘‘gahetvā gate mayhampi dadeyyunti saññāya sace paṭiggahitaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti.Koṭṭhāse karotīti bhikkhusāmaṇerā ca attano attano abhirucitaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ gaṇhantūti sabbesaṃ samake koṭṭhāse karoti.Gahitāvasesanti sāmaṇerehi gahitakoṭṭhāsato avasesaṃ.Gaṇhitvāti ‘‘mayhaṃ idaṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti gahetvā. Idha gahitāvasesaṃ nāma tena gaṇhitvā puna ṭhapitaṃ.Paṭiggahetvāti tadahu paṭiggahetvā. Teneva‘‘yāvakālikena yāvajīvikasaṃsagge doso natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sace pana purimadivase paṭiggahetvā ṭhapitā hoti, sāmisena mukhena tassā vaṭṭiyā dhūmaṃ pivituṃ na vaṭṭati.Samuddodakenāti appaṭiggahitasamuddodakena. Yasmā katakaṭṭhi udakaṃ pasādetvā visuṃ tiṭṭhati, tasmā‘‘abbohārika’’nti vuttaṃ.Laggatīti mukhe hatthe ca udake sukkhe setavaṇṇaṃ dassentaṃ laggati.Pānīyaṃ gahetvāti attanoyeva atthāya gahetvā. Sace pana pītāvasesaṃ tattheva ākirissāmīti gaṇhāti, puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi.Vikkhambhetvāti viyūhitvā, apanetvāti attho.

Sace pana mūlepi paṭiggahitaṃ hotī: "But if it is accepted even at the source," regarding this, some say, "If it is accepted with the thought that 'he will give it to me too' after he has gone having taken it." Koṭṭhāse karotī: "He makes portions" means he makes equal portions for all, so that the bhikkhus and novices may take their own desired portion. Gahitāvasesaṃ: "Remaining after taking" means remaining from the portion taken by the novices. Gaṇhitvā: "Having taken" means having taken it with the thought "I will take this." Here, "remaining after taking" means that which has been taken by him and placed again. Paṭiggahetvā: "Having accepted" means having accepted it on that day. Therefore, it was said ‘‘yāvakālikena yāvajīvikasaṃsagge doso natthī’’ "there is no fault in association of something allowable for a limited time with something allowable for life." But if it has been accepted and kept on the previous day, it is not permissible to drink the smoke from that wick with a mouth contaminated with impurity. Samuddodakenā: "With sea water" means with sea water that has not been accepted. Because the kataka seed purifies the water and stands separately, therefore, it was said ‘‘abbohārika’’ "not allowable." Laggatī: "It sticks" means it sticks, showing a white color on the mouth and hands when the water is dry. Pānīyaṃ gahetvā: "Having taken drinking water" means having taken it for one's own sake. But if he takes it with the intention of sprinkling the remainder there itself, there is no need for acceptance again. Vikkhambhetvā: "Having propped up" means having spread out, it means having removed.

Mahābhūtesūti sarīranissitesu mahābhūtesu.Patatīti vicchinditvā patati. Vicchinditvā patitameva hi paṭiggahetabbaṃ, na itaraṃ.Alladāruṃ rukkhato chinditvāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti ettha mattikatthāya pathaviṃ khaṇitumpi vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.Sappadaṭṭhakkhaṇeyeva vaṭṭatīti asati kappiyakārake sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, aññadā paṭiggahāpetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Appaṭiggahitatā, ananuññātatā, dhūmādiabbohārikābhāvo, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

Mahābhūtesū: "In the great elements" means in the great elements that are produced from the body. Patatī: "It falls" means it falls having broken off. Indeed, only what has fallen having broken off should be accepted, not the other. Alladāruṃ rukkhato chinditvāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭatī: "It is permissible to make even fresh wood having cut it from a tree," regarding this, it should be understood that it is permissible to dig earth for the sake of clay. Sappadaṭṭhakkhaṇeyeva vaṭṭatī: "It is permissible only at the moment of a snake bite" means it is permissible to take and use oneself in the absence of an allowable agent; at other times, it should be used after having it accepted. The remainder here is clear in meaning. Non-acceptance, non-allowance, the absence of smoke, etc., and non-allowability, and ingestion; these four are the factors here.

Dantaponasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Tooth Cleaning Sticks is Finished.

Niṭṭhito bhojanavaggo catuttho.

The Fourth Chapter, the Food Chapter, is Finished.

5. Acelakavaggo

5. The Naked Ascetic Chapter

1. Acelakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Training Rule on Naked Ascetics

273.Acelakavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpadetesanti titthiyānaṃ.Tatthāti bhājane.Itoti pattato.Sace titthiyo vadatīti ‘‘paṭhamameva maṃ sandhāya abhiharitvā ṭhapitaṃ mayhaṃ santakaṃ hoti, imasmiṃ bhājane ākirathā’’ti vadati, vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aññatitthiyatā, ajjhoharaṇīyatā, ajjhoharaṇatthāya sahatthā anikkhittabhājane dānanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

273.In the first training rule of the Naked Ascetic Chapter, "tesaṃ" means of the sectarians. "Tattha" means in the bowl. "Ito" means from the bowl. "Sace titthiyo vadatī" (if a sectarian says): If he says, "Having first taken it up with reference to me and placed it, it belongs to me; put it into this bowl," it is allowable. The rest is straightforward in meaning. Being a sectarian, being suitable for consuming, and giving into a bowl not taken with one's own hand for the purpose of consuming—these are the three factors here.

Acelakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Naked Ascetics is Finished.

2. Uyyojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Training Rule on Inciting

274.Dutiyaṃ uttānatthameva. Anācāraṃ ācaritukāmatā, tadatthameva upasampannassa uyyojanā, evaṃ uyyojentassa upacārātikkamoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

274.The second is also straightforward in meaning. Desiring to engage in improper conduct, inciting a monk who has been ordained for that very purpose, and thus exceeding the bounds of proper behavior—these are the three factors here.

Uyyojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Inciting is Finished.

3. Sabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Training Rule on Eating Together

280.Tatiyepiṭṭhasaṅghāṭoti dvārabāhāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Khuddakaṃ nāma sayanigharaṃ vitthārato pañcahatthappamāṇaṃ hoti, tassa ca majjhimaṭṭhānaṃ piṭṭhasaṅghāṭato aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇameva hoti, tasmā tādise sayanighare piṭṭhasaṅghāṭato hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā nisinno piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ atikkamitvā nisinno nāma hoti. Evaṃ nisinno ca majjhaṃ atikkamitvā nisinno nāma hotīti āha‘‘iminā majjhātikkamaṃ dassetī’’ti.Yathā vā tathā vā katassāti piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ āropetvā vā anāropetvā vā katassa.Sacittakanti anupavisitvā nisīdanacittena sacittakaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pariyuṭṭhitarāgajāyampatikānaṃ sannihitatā, sayanigharatā, dutiyassa bhikkhuno abhāvo, anupakhajja nisīdananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

280.In the third, "piṭṭhasaṅghāṭo" is a designation for the doorjamb. A small sleeping chamber is about five hattha in breadth, and its central position is only about two and a half hattha from the piṭṭhasaṅghāṭa. Therefore, one sitting in such a sleeping chamber, having abandoned a hatthapāsa from the piṭṭhasaṅghāṭa, is said to be sitting having transgressed the back wall. Thus, one sitting like that is said to be sitting having transgressed the middle, thus he says, "iminā majjhātikkamaṃ dassetī" ("with this, he shows the transgression of the middle"). "Yathā vā tathā vā katassa" (however it is done): whether placing the back against it or not placing it. "Sacittakaṃ" (deliberately): deliberately with the intention of sitting down without first entering. The rest here is straightforward in meaning. The proximity of a couple who are overcome with lust, being a sleeping chamber, the absence of a second bhikkhu, and sitting down without entering—these are the four factors here.

Sabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Eating Together is Finished.

284-289.Catutthapañcamesu natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ.

284-289.In the fourth and fifth, there is nothing to be said.

6. Cārittasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on Wandering for Alms

298.Chaṭṭhepakativacanenāti ettha yaṃ dvādasahatthabbhantare ṭhitena sotuṃ sakkā bhaveyya, taṃ pakativacanaṃ nāma.Āpucchitabboti ‘‘ahaṃ itthannāmassa gharaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vā ‘‘cārittaṃ āpajjāmī’’ti vā īdisena vacanena āpucchitabbo. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena nimantanasādiyanaṃ, santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchanā, bhattiyagharato aññagharappavesanaṃ, majjhanhikānatikkamo, samayassa vā āpadānaṃ vā abhāvoti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.

298.In the sixth, "pakativacanenā" (with ordinary speech): here, that which can be heard by one standing within twelve hattha is called ordinary speech. "Āpucchitabbo" (should ask permission): he should ask permission with such words as, "I am going to such-and-such a house," or "I am going on the alms round." The rest here is straightforward in meaning. Agreeing to an invitation of one of the five foods, not asking permission from an existing bhikkhu, entering a house other than the benefactor's, not exceeding midday, and the absence of a reason or danger—these are the five factors here.

Cārittasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Wandering for Alms is Finished.

7. Mahānāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on Mahānāma

303.Sattamemahānāmo nāmāti anuruddhattherassa bhātā bhagavato cūḷapitu putto. Suddhodano sakkodano sukkodano dhotodano amitodanoti ime hi pañca janā bhātaro. Amitā nāma devī tesaṃ bhaginī, tissatthero tassā putto. Tathāgato ca nandatthero ca suddhodanassa puttā, mahānāmo ca anuruddhatthero ca sukkodanassa, ānandatthero amitodanassa. So bhagavato kaniṭṭho, mahānāmo mahallakataro sakadāgāmī ariyasāvako. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘mahānāmo nāma…pe… ariyasāvako’’ti.

303.In the seventh, "mahānāmo nāmā" (named Mahānāma) means the brother of Anuruddha Thera, the son of the Buddha's paternal uncle. Suddhodana, Sakkōdana, Sukkōdana, Dhōtōdana, and Amitōdana—these five were brothers. Amitā by name was their sister; Tissa Thera was her son. The Tathāgata and Nanda Thera were the sons of Suddhodana, Mahānāma and Anuruddha Thera of Sukkōdana, Ānanda Thera of Amitōdana. He was younger than the Blessed One; Mahānāma was older, a once-returner, a noble disciple. Therefore, it was said, "mahānāmo nāma…pe… ariyasāvako" ("named Mahānāma…pe…a noble disciple").

305-306.Pāḷiyaṃajjaṇhoti ajja ekadivasanti attho, ‘‘ajjano’’ti vā attho gahetabbo,noamhākaṃ.Kālaṃ āharissathāti sve harissatha.Tato ce uttari sādiyeyyāti sace tattha rattīhi vā bhesajjehi vā paricchedo kato hoti ‘‘ettakāyeva vā rattiyo ettakāni vā bhesajjāni viññāpetabbānī’’ti, tato rattipariyantato vā bhesajjapariyantato vā uttari viññāpento sādiyeyya. ‘‘Imehi tayā bhesajjehi pavāritamha, amhākañca imināva bhesajjena attho’’ti ācikkhitvā viññāpetumpi gilānova labhati.

305-306.In the Pali, "ajjaṇho" means today, one day; or it should be understood as "for today"; "no" means not for us. "Kālaṃ āharissathā" means you will bring it tomorrow. "Tato ce uttari sādiyeyyā" (if he were to accept anything beyond that): if a limit has been made there, either with nights or with medicines, saying "Only so many nights or so many medicines should be requested," if he requests or accepts anything beyond that limit of nights or the limit of medicines. Even if he is ill, he may ask after declaring, "We have been provided for by you with these medicines, and we need this very medicine."

310.Yasmā saṅghapavāraṇāyamevāyaṃ vidhi, tasmā‘‘ye attano puggalikāya pavāraṇāya pavāritā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Saṅghapavāraṇatā, bhesajjaviññatti, agilānatā, pariyantātikkamoti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

310.Since this rule is only for the Sangha's invitation, therefore it was said, "ye attano puggalikāya pavāraṇāya pavāritā" ("those who have been invited by their own individual invitation"). The rest is straightforward in meaning. Being a Sangha invitation, requesting medicine, not being ill, and exceeding the limit—these are the four factors here.

Mahānāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Mahānāma is Finished.

8. Uyyuttasenāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Training Rule on an Army Drawn Up

311.Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānatthameva. Uyyuttasenā, dassanatthāya gamanaṃ, anuññātokāsato aññatra dassanaṃ, tathārūpapaccayassa āpadāya vā abhāvoti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

311.The eighth is also straightforward in meaning. An army drawn up, going for the purpose of seeing, seeing elsewhere than in an approved place, and the absence of a suitable reason or danger—these are the four factors here.

Uyyuttasenāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on an Army Drawn Up is Finished.

9. Senāvāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Training Rule on an Army Encampment

317.Navamasikkhāpadampi uttānameva. Tirattātikkamo, senāya sūriyassa atthaṅgamo, gilānatādīnaṃ abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

317.The ninth training rule is also straightforward in meaning. Transgression of three nights, the setting of the sun for the army, and the absence of illness and so on—these are the three factors here.

Senāvāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on an Army Encampment is Finished.

10. Uyyodhikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Arrayed Troops

322.Dasamekati te lakkhāni laddhānīti tava sarappahārassa lakkhaṇabhūtā kittakā janā tayā laddhāti attho, kittakā tayā viddhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Uyyodhikādidassanatthāya gamanaṃ, anuññātokāsato aññatra dassanaṃ, tathārūpapaccayassa āpadāya vā abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

322.In the tenth, "kati te lakkhāni laddhānī" (how many targets have you obtained?) means how many people, who are the mark of your arrow strikes, have been obtained by you? It is said, how many have been pierced by you? The rest here is straightforward in meaning. Going for the purpose of seeing arrayed troops and so on, seeing elsewhere than in an approved place, and the absence of a suitable reason or danger—these are the three factors here.

Uyyodhikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Arrayed Troops is Finished.

Niṭṭhito acelakavaggo pañcamo.

The Fifth Chapter, the Naked Ascetic Chapter, is Finished.

6. Surāpānavaggo

6. The Liquor-Drinking Chapter

1. Surāpānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Training Rule on Drinking Liquor

326-328.Surāpānavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpadevatiyāti gāmaparikkhepavatiyā. Pāḷiyaṃ piṭṭhasurādīsu piṭṭhaṃ bhājane pakkhipitvā tajjaṃ udakaṃ datvā madditvā katāpiṭṭhasurā. Evaṃ pūve odane ca bhājane pakkhipitvā tajjaṃ udakaṃ datvā madditvā katāpūvasurā odanasurāti ca vuccati. ‘‘Kiṇṇā’’ti pana tassā surāya bījaṃ vuccati. Ye surāmodakātipi vuccanti, te pakkhipitvā katākiṇṇapakkhittā. Harītakīsāsapādinānāsambhārehi saṃyojitāsambhārasaṃyuttā.

326-328.In the first training rule of the Liquor-Drinking Chapter, "vatiyā" means in the enclosure around the village. In the Pali, among piṭṭhasurā and so on, "piṭṭhasurā" is made by putting flour into a bowl, adding water to it, and mixing it. In the same way, "pūvasurā" and "odanasurā" are said to be made by putting cakes and cooked rice into a bowl, adding water to it, and mixing it. "Kiṇṇā" (with yeast), however, is said to be the starter for that liquor. Those that are also called surāmodaka, they are called "kiṇṇapakkhittā" (mixed with yeast). "Sambhārasaṃyuttā" (mixed with ingredients) is combined with various ingredients such as harītakī, mustard, and so on.

pupphāsavo. Panasādiphalarasophalāsavo. Muddikārasomadhvāsavo. Ucchurasoguḷāsavo. Harītakāmalakakaṭukabhaṇḍādinānāsambhārānaṃ raso ciraparivāsitosambhārasaṃyutto. Bījato paṭṭhāyāti sambhāre paṭiyādetvā cāṭiyaṃ pakkhittakālato, tālanāḷikerādīnaṃ puppharasassa gahitaabhinavakālatoyeva ca paṭṭhāya.

"pupphāsavo" (flower liquor). "phalāsavo" (fruit liquor) is the juice of fruits such as jackfruit. "madhvāsavo" (honey liquor) is grape juice. "guḷāsavo" (molasses liquor) is sugarcane juice. "sambhārasaṃyutto" (mixed with ingredients) is the juice of various ingredients such as harītakā, āmalaka, pungent items, and so on, long preserved. "Bījato paṭṭhāya" (from the seed onwards): from the time of preparing the ingredients and placing them in a jar, and immediately from the time of taking fresh juice from the flowers of palm, coconut, and so on.

329.Loṇasovīrakaṃ suttañcaanekehi bhesajjehi abhisaṅkhato amajjabhūto āsavaviseso.Vāsaggāhāpanatthanti sugandhibhāvaggāhāpanatthaṃ.Acittakaṃ lokavajjanti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Majjabhāvo, tassa pānañcāti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

329."Loṇasovīrakaṃ suttañca" (salt-sour gruel and vinegar) is a special type of liquor, mixed with many medicines, not truly an intoxicant. "Vāsaggāhāpanatthaṃ" (for the sake of enhancing the aroma) means for the sake of enhancing the quality of the fragrance. "Acittakaṃ lokavajjaṃ" (non-deliberate, a fault against the world): here, what should be said about that should be understood in the manner stated in the explanation of the first pārājika. The rest here is straightforward in meaning. Being an intoxicant and drinking it—these are the two factors here.

Surāpānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Drinking Liquor is Finished.

2. Aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Training Rule on Touching with the Fingers

330.Dutiyebhikkhunīpi anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitāti ettha bhikkhupi bhikkhuniyā anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitoti veditabbo. Sesamettha uttānameva. Hasādhippāyatā, upasampannassa kāyena kāyāmasananti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

330.In the second, "bhikkhunīpi anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitā" (even if the bhikkhuni is standing in a place not suitable for ordination): here, a bhikkhu should also be understood as standing in a place not suitable for ordination for a bhikkhuni. The rest here is straightforward in meaning. Having the intention to cause laughter and touching the body of an ordained person with the body—these are the two factors here.

Aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Touching with the Fingers is Finished.

3. Hasadhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Training Rule on Jesting

335.Tatiyaṃ uttānatthameva. Uparigopphakatā, hasādhippāyena kīḷananti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

335.The third is also straightforward in meaning. Being above the ankles and playing with the intention to cause laughter—these are the two factors here.

Hasadhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Jesting is Finished.

4. Anādariyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Training Rule on Disrespect

344.Catutthegārayho ācariyuggaho na gahetabboti yasmā ucchuraso sattāhakāliko, tassa kasaṭo yāvajīviko, dvinnaṃyeva samavāyo ucchuyaṭṭhi, tasmā vikāle ucchuyaṭṭhiṃ khādituṃ vaṭṭati guḷaharītakaṃ viyāti evamādiko gārayhācariyavādo na gahetabbo.Lokavajje ācariyuggaho na vaṭṭatīti lokavajjasikkhāpade āpattiṭṭhāne yo ācariyavādo, so na gahetabbo, lokavajjaṃ atikkamitvā ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyuggaho’’ti vadantassa uggaho na vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.Suttānulomaṃnāma aṭṭhakathā.Paveṇiyā āgatasamodhānaṃ gacchatīti ‘‘paveṇiyā āgato ācariyuggahova gahetabbo’’ti evaṃ vutte mahāaṭṭhakathāvādeyeva saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti adhippāyo. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannassa paññattena vacanaṃ, anādariyakaraṇanti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

344.In the fourth, "gārayho ācariyuggaho na několhetabbo" (a blameworthy tradition of teachers should not be taken up): since sugarcane juice lasts for a week, and its residue lasts for a lifetime, the combination of the two is just sugarcane, therefore a blameworthy teaching tradition such as "It is allowable to eat sugarcane stalks at the wrong time, like guḷaharītaka" should not be taken up. "Lokavajje ācariyuggaho na vaṭṭatī" (a teaching tradition regarding a fault against the world is not allowable): in a training rule that is a fault against the world, the teaching tradition that concerns the place of an offense is not to be taken up; the meaning is that the tradition of one saying, "This is our teaching tradition," having transgressed a fault against the world, is not allowable. "Suttānulomaṃ" means commentary. "Paveṇiyā āgatasamodhānaṃ gacchatī" (it goes to an agreement that has come by tradition): the meaning is that if it is said that "Only the teaching tradition that has come by tradition should be taken up," then it goes to the compilation in the Great Commentary itself. The rest here is straightforward in meaning. Speaking a word ordained by an ordained person and acting disrespectfully—these are the two factors here.

Anādariyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Disrespect is Finished.

5. Bhiṃsāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Training Rule on Intimidation

345.Pañcamaṃ uttānatthameva. Upasampannatā, tassa dassanasavanavisaye bhiṃsāpetukāmatāya vāyamananti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

345.The fifth is also straightforward in meaning. Being ordained and attempting to intimidate him in a place visible or audible to him—these are the two factors here.

Bhiṃsāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Intimidation is Finished.

6. Jotisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on Fire

350.Chaṭṭhe bhaggā nāma janapadino rājakumārā, tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhīsaddena ‘‘bhaggā’’ti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘bhaggāti janapadassa nāma’’nti.Susumāragireti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tassa kira nagarassa māpanatthaṃ vatthuvijjācariyena nagaraṭṭhānassa pariggaṇhanadivase avidūre susumāro saddamakāsi giraṃ nicchāresi. Atha anantarāyena nagare māpite tameva susumāragiraṇaṃ subhanimittaṃ katvā susumāragiraṃtvevassa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Keci pana ‘‘susumārasaṇṭhānattā susumāro nāma eko giri, so tassa nagarassa samīpe, tasmā taṃ susumāragiri etassa atthīti ‘susumāragirī’ti vuccatī’’ti vadanti. Tathā vā hotu aññathā vā, nāmametaṃ tassa nagarassāti āha‘‘susumāragiranti nagarassa nāma’’nti.Bhesakaḷāti ghampaṇḍanāmako gacchaviseso. Keci ‘‘setarukkho’’tipi vadanti. Tesaṃ bahulatāya pana taṃ vanaṃ bhesakaḷāvanantveva paññāyittha. ‘‘Bhesagaḷāvane’’tipi pāṭho. ‘‘Bheso nāma eko yakkho ayuttakārī, tassa tato gaḷitaṭṭhānatāya taṃ vanaṃ bhesagaḷāvanaṃ nāma jāta’’nti hi keci.

350.In the sixth, "Bhaggā" means the princes of a district; their residence, even a single district, is called "Bhaggā" by a well-known term. Therefore, it was said, "bhaggāti janapadassa nāma" ("Bhaggā is the name of a district"). "Susumāragire" (at Susumāragiri) means in a city of that name. It is said that on the day the city site was being surveyed by the architect for the purpose of measuring that city, a susumāra made a sound not far away, uttering a cry. Then, when the city was built without interruption, they made that very susumāra cry a good omen, and they named it Susumāragiri. But some say, "Because of its shape like a susumāra, there is a mountain named Susumāra near that city; therefore, it is called 'Susumāragiri' because it has that Susumāragiri." Whether that is so or otherwise, this is the name of that city, thus he says, "susumāragiranti nagarassa nāma" ("Susumāragiri is the name of a city"). "Bhesakaḷā" is the name of a type of grass called ghampaṇḍa. Some also say "white tree." But because of their abundance, that forest was known as Bhesakaḷāvana. There is also the reading "Bhesagaḷāvana." For some say, "Bhesa is the name of a yakkha who acts improperly; because that forest was the place where he was ejected from, it became known as Bhesagaḷāvana."

352.Jotikaraṇeti aggikaraṇe. Sesamettha uttānameva. Agilānatā, anuññātakaraṇābhāvo, visibbetukāmatā, samādahananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

352."Jotikaraṇe" (in making a fire). The rest here is straightforward in meaning. Not being ill, the absence of an approved reason, desiring to warm oneself, and kindling—these are the four factors here.

Jotisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Fire is Finished.

7. Nahānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on Bathing

357.Sattamasikkhāpadassa pāḷiyaṃasambhinnenāti amakkhitena, anaṭṭhenāti attho.Orenaddhamāsaṃ nahāyeyyāti nahātadivasato paṭṭhāya addhamāse aparipuṇṇe nahāyeyya. Sesamettha uttānameva. Majjhimadeso, ūnakaddhamāse nahānaṃ, samayānaṃ vā nadīpāragamanassa vā āpadānaṃ vā abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

357.In the Pali of the seventh training rule, "asambhinnenā" (without rubbing) means without smearing, without oil. "Orenaddhamāsaṃ nahāyeyyā" (he should bathe before half a month has passed) means he should bathe before half a month has passed, counting from the day of bathing. The rest here is straightforward in meaning. The Middle Country, bathing in less than half a month, and the absence of a reason such as a time of year or crossing a river, or danger—these are the three factors here.

Nahānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Bathing is Finished.

8. Dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Training Rule on Discoloring

368.Aṭṭhame‘‘cammakāranīlaṃnāma pakatinīla’’nti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Gaṇṭhipadepana ‘‘cammakārā udake tipumalaṃ ayagūthañca pakkhipitvā cammaṃ kāḷaṃ karonti, taṃ cammakāranīla’’nti vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Vuttappakārassa cīvarassa akatakappatā, anaṭṭhacīvarāditā, nivāsanaṃ vā pārupanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

368.In the eighth, "cammakāranīlaṃ nāma pakatinīlaṃ" ("cammakāranīla" is the name of a natural blue dye) is said in all three "gaṇṭhipadesu" (connection points). In the "gaṇṭhipade" (connection point), however, it is said, "Tanners put sediment, urine, and iron filings into water and make the leather black; that is cammakāranīla." The rest here is straightforward in meaning. The robe being of the type described and not made allowable, not being a robe that has been treated with oil and so on, wearing it or wrapping oneself in it—these are the three factors here.

Dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Discoloring is Finished.

9. Vikappanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Training Rule on Exchanging

374.Navameapaccuddhāraṇanti ‘‘mayhaṃ santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā’’tiādinā akatapaccuddhāraṃ.Yena vinayakammaṃ katanti yena saddhiṃ vinayakammaṃ kataṃ.Tiṃsakavaṇṇanāyanti nissaggiyavaṇṇanāyaṃ. Paribhogenakāyakammaṃ,apaccuddhārāpanenavacīkammaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Sāmaṃ vikappitassa apaccuddhāro, vikappanupagacīvaratā, paribhogoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

374.In the ninth, apaccuddhāraṇa means without relinquishment, by saying, "Use what is mine, or give it away." Yena vinayakammaṃ kata means with whom the vinayakamma was done. Tiṃsakavaṇṇanāya means in the Nissaggiya description. Paribhogena is kāyakamma (bodily action), apaccuddhārāpanena is vacīkamma (verbal action). The rest is self-explanatory here. Relinquishment of what one has designated for oneself, the state of a robe not subject to designation, and use—these are the three factors involved here.

Vikappanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Designation Training Rule is Concluded.

10. Cīvaraapanidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Hiding Robes

377.Dasamaṃ uttānatthameva. Upasampannassa santakānaṃ pattādīnaṃ apanidhānaṃ, vihesetukāmatā vā hasādhippāyatā vāti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

377.The tenth is self-explanatory in meaning. Hiding the bowl and other belongings of one who is ordained, or the intention to harm, or the purpose of ridicule—these are the two factors involved here.

Cīvaraapanidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Hiding Robes is Concluded.

Niṭṭhito surāpānavaggo chaṭṭho.

The Sixth Chapter, the Chapter on Drinking Alcohol, is Concluded.

7. Sappāṇakavaggo

7. The Sappāṇaka Chapter

1. Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Deliberately

382.Sappāṇakavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade usuṃ saraṃ assati khipatītiissāso,dhanusippakusaloti āha‘‘dhanuggahācariyo’’ti. Paṭisattuvidhamanatthaṃ dhanuṃ gaṇhantīti dhanuggahā, tesaṃ ācariyodhanuggahācariyo.Appamattena vattaṃ kātabbanti yathā te pāṇā na maranti, evaṃ sūpaṭṭhitassatinā senāsane vattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aṅgānipi manussaviggahe vuttanayena veditabbānīti.

382.In the first training rule of the Sappāṇaka Chapter, issāso means one who shoots arrows or darts, throws them; "dhanuggahācariyo" means one skilled in the art of archery, a master of archery. Dhanuggahācariyo means archery masters, those who hold bows to ward off enemies. Appamattena vattaṃ kātabba means one should conduct oneself in the dwelling with mindfulness and well-established awareness, so that those beings do not die. The rest is self-explanatory here. The factors should be understood in the manner stated in the case of human beings.

Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Deliberately is Concluded.

2. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Living Beings

387.Dutiyeudakasaṇṭhānakappadeseti yattha bhūmibhāge udakaṃ nikkhittaṃ santiṭṭhati, na sahasā parikkhayaṃ gacchati, tādise padese. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aṅgāni siñcanasikkhāpade vuttanayāneva.

387.In the second, udakasaṇṭhānakappadese means in a place where water is deposited and remains without quickly disappearing, in such a place. The rest is self-explanatory here. The factors are the same as stated in the training rule on sprinkling.

Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Living Beings is Concluded.

3. Ukkoṭanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Overruling

392.Tatiyeyathāpatiṭṭhitabhāvena patiṭṭhātuṃ na dentīti tesaṃ pavattiākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana dhammena adhikaraṇaṃ nihataṃ, taṃ sunihatameva. Sace vippakate kamme paṭikkosati, taṃ saññāpetvāva kātabbaṃ. Itarathā kammañca kuppati, kārakānañca āpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Yathādhammaṃ nihatabhāvo, jānanā, ukkoṭanāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

392.In the third, yathāpatiṭṭhitabhāvena patiṭṭhātuṃ na denti is said to show their manner of acting. However, an issue that has been settled in accordance with the Dhamma is indeed well settled. If one objects after the act has been initiated, it should be done only after informing the Saṅgha. Otherwise, the act is invalidated, and those who perform it incur an offense. The rest is self-explanatory here. Being settled in accordance with the Dhamma, knowledge, overruling—these are the three factors involved here.

Ukkoṭanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Overruling is Concluded.

4. Duṭṭhullasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Serious Offenses

399.Catutthetassevāti yo āpanno, tasseva.Ārocetīti paṭicchādanatthameva mā kassaci ārocesīti vadati.Vatthupuggaloti āpannapuggalo.Yenassa ārocitanti yena dutiyena assa tatiyassa ārocitaṃ.Koṭi chinnā hotīti yasmā paṭicchādanapaccayā āpattiṃ āpajjitvāva dutiyena tatiyassa ārocitaṃ, tasmā tappaccayā puna tena āpajjitabbāpattiyā abhāvato āpattiyā koṭi chinnā nāma hoti.

399.In the fourth, tassevā means to the one who has committed the offense. Āroceti means he says, "Do not tell anyone," intending to conceal it. Vatthupuggalo means the person who has committed the offense. Yenassa ārocita means by the second person to whom the third person was informed. Koṭi chinnā hoti means, because the second person, after incurring an offense due to concealing it, informed the third person, therefore, the limit of the offense is said to be cut off due to the absence of an offense to be incurred again because of that cause.

400.‘‘Anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhi ca kāyasaṃsaggo cāti ayaṃ duṭṭhullaajjhācāro nāmā’’ti idaṃ duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāya na sameti. Vuttañhi tattha (pāci. aṭṭha. 82) ‘‘anupasampannassa duṭṭhullaṃ vā aduṭṭhullaṃ vā ajjhācāranti ettha ādito pañca sikkhāpadāni duṭṭhullo nāma ajjhācāro, sesāni aduṭṭhullo, sukkavissaṭṭhikāyasaṃsaggaduṭṭhullaattakāmā panassa ajjhācāro nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Ārocane anupasampannassa duṭṭhullaṃ aññathā adhippetaṃ, paṭicchādane aññathā’’ti etthāpi visesakāraṇaṃ na dissati, tasmā aṭṭhakathāya pubbenāparaṃ na sameti. Avirodhaṃ icchantena pana vīmaṃsitabbamettha kāraṇaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannassa duṭṭhullāpattijānanaṃ, paṭicchādetukāmatāya nārocessāmīti dhuranikkhepoti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

400."Anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhi ca kāyasaṃsaggo cāti ayaṃ duṭṭhullaajjhācāro nāmā" this does not agree with the commentary on the training rule on revealing serious offenses. For it is said there (pāci. aṭṭha. 82), "Among serious or non-serious offenses to a non-ordained person, the first five training rules are called serious offenses, the rest are non-serious, but emitting semen, physical contact, and desiring sexual gratification are called offenses." "In revealing, a serious offense to a non-ordained person is understood differently, and in concealing, it is different." Here too, no specific reason is seen; therefore, the earlier part of the commentary does not agree with the later part. However, one who desires non-contradiction should investigate the reason here. The rest is self-explanatory here. Knowing that an ordained person has committed a serious offense, the intention not to reveal it with the idea of taking on the responsibility—these are the two factors involved here.

Duṭṭhullasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Serious Offenses is Concluded.

5. Ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Under Twenty Years of Age

402.Pañcamerūpasuttanti heraññikānaṃ suttaṃ.Duruttānanti akkosavasena duruttānaṃ, duruttattāyevadurāgatānaṃ. Vacanapathānanti ettha vacanameva tadatthaṃ ñātukāmānaṃ ñāpetukāmānañca pathoti vacanapatho.Dukkhamānanti dukkhena khamitabbānaṃ.

402.In the fifth, rūpasutta means the goldsmith's thread. Duruttāna means difficult to say due to abuse, and precisely because it is difficult to say, durāgatānaṃ. Vacanapathāna here, the word itself is the path for those who wish to know and make known its meaning, hence the word path. Dukkhamāna means things that must be endured with difficulty.

404.Gabbhe sayitakālena saddhiṃ vīsatimaṃ vassaṃ assātigabbhavīso. Hāyanavaḍḍhananti gabbhamāsesu adhikesu uttarihāyanaṃ, ūnesu vaḍḍhananti veditabbaṃ.Ekūnavīsativassanti dvādasamāse mātukucchismiṃ vasitvā mahāpavāraṇāya jātakālato paṭṭhāya ekūnavīsativassaṃ.Pāṭipadadivaseti pacchimikāya vassūpagamanadivase. ‘‘Tiṃsarattidivo māso’’ti (a. ni. 3.71; 8.43; vibha. 1023) vacanato‘‘cattāro māsā parihāyantī’’ti vuttaṃ.Vassaṃ ukkaḍḍhantīti vassaṃ uddhaṃ kaḍḍhanti, tatiye saṃvacchare ekamāsaṃ adhikamāsavasena pariccajantā vassaṃ uddhaṃ kaḍḍhantīti attho, tasmā tatiyo saṃvaccharo terasamāsiko hoti, saṃvaccharassa pana dvādasamāsikattā aṭṭhārasasu vassesu adhikamāse visuṃ gahetvā‘‘cha māsā vaḍḍhantī’’ti vuttaṃ.Tatoti chamāsato.Nikkaṅkhā hutvāti adhikamāsehi saddhiṃ paripuṇṇavīsativassattā nibbematikā hutvā. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ tīsugaṇṭhipadesu‘‘aṭṭhārasannaṃyeva vassānaṃ adhikamāse gahetvā gaṇitattā sesavassadvayassapi adhikāni divasāni honteva, tāni adhikadivasāni sandhāya ‘nikkaṅkhā hutvā’ti vutta’’nti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Na hi dvīsu vassesu adhikadivasāni nāma visuṃ upalabbhanti tatiye vasse vassukkaḍḍhanavasena adhikamāse pariccatteyeva atirekamāsasambhavato. Tasmā dvīsu vassesu atirekadivasāni nāma visuṃ na sambhavanti.

404.gabbhavīso means the twentieth year coincides with the time spent in the womb. Hāyanavaḍḍhana means a decrease in the months spent in the womb if there are more than the usual nine months, and an increase if there are fewer. Ekūnavīsativassa means nineteen years from the date of birth, after residing in the mother's womb for twelve months until the Mahāpavāraṇā day. Pāṭipadadivase means on the day of the first of the waning moon, the last day of entering the rains. "Tiṃsarattidivo māso" because of the saying (a. ni. 3.71; 8.43; vibha. 1023), "cattāro māsā parihāyantī" is said. Vassaṃ ukkaḍḍhantī means they pull the year upwards, meaning that in the third year, they discard one month in the form of an intercalary month, thus pulling the year upwards; therefore, the third year consists of thirteen months, but since a year consists of twelve months, "cha māsā vaḍḍhantī" is said, taking the intercalary months separately in eighteen years. Tato means from six months. Nikkaṅkhā hutvā means being free from doubt because the twentieth year is complete with the intercalary months. However, the statement in the three gaṇṭhipadas that "because the intercalary months of only eighteen years have been taken and calculated, the additional days of the remaining two years will also exist, and 'nikkaṅkhā hutvā' is said referring to those additional days" should not be accepted. Indeed, the additional days in two years are not found separately, since the possibility of an additional month arises only when an intercalary month is discarded in the third year due to pulling the year upwards. Therefore, additional days do not separately exist in two years.

‘‘ettha pana…pe… vutta’’nti. Anekatthattā nipātānaṃpana-saddo hi-saddatthe, ettha hīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idañhi vuttassevatthassa samatthanavasena vuttaṃ. Iminā ca imaṃ dīpeti ‘‘yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘ekūnavīsativassaṃ sāmaṇeraṃ nikkhamanīyapuṇṇamāsiṃ atikkamma pāṭipadadivase upasampādentī’ti, tattha gabbhamāsepi aggahetvā dvīhi māsehi aparipuṇṇavīsativassaṃ sandhāya ‘ekūnavīsativassa’nti vuttaṃ, tasmā adhikamāsesu dvīsu gahitesu vīsativassāni paripuṇṇāni nāma hontī’’ti.Tasmāti yasmā gabbhamāsāpi gaṇanūpagā honti, tasmā.Ekavīsativasso hotīti jātadivasato paṭṭhāya vīsativasso samāno gabbhamāsehi saddhiṃ ekavīsativasso hoti.

"ettha pana…pe… vutta". Because of the multiple meanings of particles, the word pana is in the sense of the word hi, it is said here. This is said by way of supporting the meaning that was said. And by this, it indicates, "What was said, 'ordaining a novice who is nineteen years old, past the full moon of the Nikkhamanīya, on the first day of the waning moon,' there, 'ekūnavīsativassa' is said referring to one who is not fully twenty years old by two months, not even counting the months in the womb; therefore, when the two additional months are taken, twenty years are indeed complete." Tasmā because even the months in the womb are included in the calculation, therefore. Ekavīsativasso hoti means being twenty years old from the date of birth, he is twenty-one years old together with the months in the womb.

406.Aññaṃupasampādetīti upajjhāyo kammavācācariyo vā hutvā upasampādeti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Ūnavīsativassatā, ūnakasaññitā, upasampādananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

406.Aññaṃ upasampādetī means he ordains another as an preceptor or instructor in the Kammavācā. The rest is self-explanatory here. Being under twenty years of age, perceiving as underage, and ordination—these are the three factors involved here.

Ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Under Twenty Years of Age is Concluded.

6. Theyyasatthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Traveling with Thieves

407.Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ uttānatthameva. Theyyasatthakabhāvo, jānanaṃ, saṃvidhānaṃ, avisaṅketena gamananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

407.The sixth training rule is self-explanatory in meaning. Being a fellow thief, knowledge, agreement, and going without disclosure—these are the four factors involved here.

Theyyasatthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Traveling with Thieves is Concluded.

412.Sattame natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ.

412.In the seventh, there is nothing to be said.

8. Ariṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. The Explanation of the Ariṭṭha Training Rule

417.Aṭṭhamebādhayiṃsūti haniṃsu. Taṃtaṃsampattiyā vibandhanavasena sattasantānassa antare vemajjhe eti āgacchatīti antarāyo, diṭṭhadhammikādianattho. Anatikkamanaṭṭhena tasmiṃ antarāye niyuttā, antarāyaṃ vā phalaṃ arahanti, antarāyassa vā karaṇasīlātiantarāyikā. Tenāha‘‘antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā’’ti.Ānantariyadhammāti ānantarikasabhāvā cetanādhammā. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – cutianantaraphalaṃ anantaraṃ nāma, tasmiṃ anantare niyuttā, taṃnibbattanena anantarakaraṇasīlā, anantarappayojanāti vā ānantarikā, te evaānantariyāti vuttā. Kammāni eva antarāyikātikammantarāyikā. Mokkhasseva antarāyaṃ karoti, na saggassāti micchācāralakkhaṇābhāvato vuttaṃ. Na hi bhikkhuniyā dhammarakkhitabhāvo atthi. Pākatikabhikkhunīvasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ariyāya pana pavattaṃ apāyasaṃvattanikameva, nandamāṇavako cettha nidassanaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ samānacchandatāvasena vā na saggantarāyikatā, mokkhantarāyikatā pana mokkhatthāya paṭipattiyā vidūsanato. Abhibhavitvā pana pavattiyaṃ saggantarāyikatāpi na sakkā nivāretunti.

417.In the eighth, bādhayiṃsū means they harmed, killed. antarāyikā means that which comes in the middle, in between the continuity of beings, in the manner of obstructing the attainment of various kinds of fortune; it is another name for dangers, such as those related to this life, etc. Because they are engaged in that danger in the sense of not overcoming it, or they deserve danger as their fruit, or they are by nature the cause of danger. Therefore, he said, "antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā" ("because they cause danger, they are antarāyikā"). Ānantariyadhammā means mental states that are of immediate nature. Here, this is the meaning of the word: anantaraṃ means the immediate result after death; because they are engaged in that immediate result, being by nature the immediate cause of bringing it about, or having an immediate purpose, they are ānantarikā, and these same are said to be ānantariyā. Kammāni eva antarāyikāti kammantarāyikā. It only causes danger to liberation, not to heaven, it is said because of the absence of the characteristic of wrong conduct. Indeed, a nun does not have the quality of protecting the Dhamma. This is said with reference to an ordinary nun. But for an Ariya, what is practiced is certainly conducive to states of woe; Nandamāṇavaka is an example here. Or, due to the mutual agreement of both, it does not cause danger to heaven, but it does cause danger to liberation, since it harms the practice for the sake of liberation. However, if it is practiced by overpowering, it is not possible to prevent it from causing danger to heaven as well.

niyatamicchādiṭṭhidhammā. Paṭisandhidhammāti paṭisandhicittuppādamāha. Paṇḍakādiggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattaṃ sabbāyapi ahetukapaṭisandhiyā vipākantarāyikabhāvato. Yāhi ariye upavadati, tā cetanāariyūpavādājātā.Tato paranti khamāpanato upari. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ dibbacakkhukathāyaṃ vuttameva.Sañcicca āpannā āpattiyoti sañcicca vītikkantā satta āpattikkhandhā. Sañcicca vītikkantañhi antamaso dukkaṭadubbhāsitampi saggamaggaphalānaṃ antarāyaṃ karoti.Yāva bhikkhubhāvaṃ paṭijānātipārājikaṃ āpanno,na vuṭṭhātisesagarukāpattiṃ āpanno,na desetilahukāpattiṃ āpanno.

niyatamicchādiṭṭhidhammā. Paṭisandhidhammā means the rebirth-linking consciousness. The inclusion of eunuchs and the like here is merely illustrative, since all causeless rebirths have the nature of obstructing fruition. ariyūpavādājātā means those intentions by which one reviles an Ariya arise. Tato para means above forgiveness. What should be said here has already been said in the discussion of the divine eye. Sañcicca āpannā āpattiyo means the seven groups of offenses that have been deliberately transgressed. Indeed, even the slightest offense or misspoken word that has been deliberately transgressed causes an obstacle to the paths and fruits of heaven. Yāva bhikkhubhāvaṃ paṭijānāti means one who has committed a pārājika offense, na vuṭṭhāti means one who has committed a remaining serious offense, na deseti means one who has committed a minor offense.

Ayaṃ bhikkhūti ariṭṭho bhikkhu.Rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvāti anavajjena paccayaparibhuñjanarasena sāvajjakāmaguṇaparibhogarasaṃ samānetvā. Yoniso paccavekkhaṇena natthi ettha chandarāgotinicchandarāgo,paccayaparibhogo.Upanento viyāti bandhanaṃ upanento viya. ‘‘Ghaṭento viyā’’tipi pāṭho.Upasaṃharanto viyāti sadisataṃ upasaṃharanto viya ekantasāvajje anavajjabhāvapakkhepanato.Pāpakanti lāmakaṭṭhena duggatisampāpanaṭṭhena ca pāpakaṃ.Mahāsamuddaṃ bandhantena viyāti setukaraṇavasena mahāsāgaraṃ bandhantena viya.Sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ paṭivirujjhantoti sabbaññutaññāṇena ‘‘sāvajja’’nti diṭṭhaṃ ‘‘anavajja’’nti gahaṇena tena saha paṭivirujjhanto.Āṇācakketi paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadasaṅkhāte, ‘‘abrahmacariyaṃ pahāyā’’tiādidesanāsaṅkhāte ca āṇācakke.

Ayaṃ bhikkhū means this bhikkhu, Ariṭṭha. Rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvā means combining the licit taste of using requisites with the illicit taste of enjoying the qualities of sensual pleasure. nicchandarāgo means without desire or lust due to wise reflection, the use of requisites. Upanento viyā means as if bringing bondage. "Ghaṭento viyā" is also a reading. Upasaṃharanto viyā means as if bringing together similarity, due to placing the entirely blameworthy on the side of the blameless. Pāpaka means bad in the sense of being low and in the sense of leading to a bad destination. Mahāsamuddaṃ bandhantena viyā means like one who binds the great ocean by building a causeway. Sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ paṭivirujjhanto means conflicting with the omniscience by grasping as blameless what is seen as blameworthy by the omniscience. Āṇācakke means in the sphere of command, reckoned as the first pārājika training rule, and in the sphere of instruction, reckoned as the saying, "having abandoned celibacy," etc.

Aṭṭhikaṅkalaṃnāma uraṭṭhi vā piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ vā sīsaṭṭhi vā. Tañhi nimmaṃsattā ‘‘kaṅkala’’nti vuccati. Vigatamaṃsāya hi aṭṭhisaṅkhalikāya ekaṭṭhimhi vākaṅkala-saddo niruḷho.Anudahanaṭṭhenāti anupāyapaṭipattiyā sampati āyatiñca anudahanaṭṭhena.Mahābhitāpanaṭṭhenaanavaṭṭhitasabhāvatāya,ittarapaccupaṭṭhānaṭṭhenamuhuttakaraṇīyatāya,tāvakālikaṭṭhenaparehi abhibhavanatāya,sabbaṅgapaccaṅgapalibhañjanaṭṭhenabhedanādiadhikaraṇabhāvena, ugghāṭasadisatāyaadhikuṭṭanaṭṭhena,avaṇe vaṇaṃ uppādetvā anto anupavisanabhāvatāyavinivijjhanaṭṭhena,diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaanatthanimittatāyasāsaṅkasappaṭibhayaṭṭhena.

Aṭṭhikaṅkalaṃ means the breastbone or the spine or the skull. It is called "kaṅkala" because it is without flesh. For the word kaṅkala is established referring to a single bone or the skeletal structure devoid of flesh. Anudahanaṭṭhenā means, by practicing the wrong method, in the sense of not burning now and in the future. Mahābhitāpanaṭṭhena due to its unstable nature, ittarapaccupaṭṭhānaṭṭhena due to its momentary duty, tāvakālikaṭṭhena due to being overcome by others, sabbaṅgapaccaṅgapalibhañjanaṭṭhena due to being the cause of breaking and other disputes, adhikuṭṭanaṭṭhena due to being like an opening, vinivijjhanaṭṭhena due to creating a wound on a wound and entering inside, sāsaṅkasappaṭibhayaṭṭhena due to being the cause of disadvantage in this life and the next.

Thāmasāti diṭṭhithāmena, tassā diṭṭhiyā thāmagatabhāvenāti attho.Parāmāsāti diṭṭhiparāmāsena, diṭṭhisaṅkhātaparāmāsenāti attho. Diṭṭhiyeva hi dhammasabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasanena parāmāso.Abhinivissāti taṇhābhinivesapubbaṅgamena diṭṭhābhinivesena ‘‘idamettha sacca’’nti abhinivisitvā.Voharatīti katheti.Yato ca kho te bhikkhūti yadā te bhikkhū.Evaṃbyākho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatāti idaṃ esa attano laddhiṃ nigūhitukāmatāya natthīti vattukāmopi bhagavato ānubhāvena sampaṭicchati. Buddhānaṃ kira sammukhā dve kathā kathetuṃ samattho nāma natthi.Kassa nu kho nāma tvaṃ moghapurisāti tvaṃ moghapurisa kassa khattiyassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā vessassa vā suddassa vā gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā devassa vā manussassa vā mayā evaṃ dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāsi. Sesamettha uttānameva. Dhammakammatā, samanubhāsanā, appaṭinissajjananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

Thāmasā means by the force of (one's) view, by the state of being firm in that view. Parāmāsā means by adherence to a view, by an adherence that is the same as a view. For a view itself, having transgressed the nature of phenomena, is an adherence because of touching something external. Abhinivissā means having become firmly convinced, with a firm conviction based on craving, thinking "this is the truth here." Voharatī means speaks. Yato ca kho te bhikkhū means when those monks. Evaṃbyākho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā means even though he wants to conceal his own belief, wanting to say it is not, he accepts it by the Buddha's power. It seems that no one is capable of speaking two words in the presence of Buddhas. Kassa nu kho nāma tvaṃ moghapurisā means you, foolish man, from which Khattiya, or Brahmana, or Vessa, or Sudda, or householder, or renunciant, or deva, or human, did you learn that the Dhamma was taught thus by me? The rest here is self-explanatory. Being in accordance with the Dhamma, repeated admonition, and non-relinquishment—these are the three factors in this case.

Ariṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Ariṭṭha training rule is finished.

9. Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpada

424.Navamepayogagaṇanāyāti dānaggahaṇappayogagaṇanāya. Saṃvāse kammapariyosānavasena, sahaseyyāya ekasmiṃ nipanne itarassa nipajjanapayogavasena āpattiparicchedo veditabbo. Ettha ca padabhājane ‘‘ekacchanne’’ti avisesena vuttattā nānūpacārepi ekacchanne nipajjantassa āpatti. Tenevamātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘saha vā seyyaṃ kappeyyāti nānūpacārepi ekacchanne nipajjeyyā’’ti. Paṇṇattiṃ ajānantena arahatāpi kiriyābyākatacittena āpajjitabbattā‘‘ticitta’’nti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ panakenacivuttaṃ ‘‘ticittanti ettha vipākābyākatacittena saha vā seyyaṃ kappeyyāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo, aññathā sacittakattā sikkhāpadassa kiriyābyākataṃ sandhāya na yujjatī’’ti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Na hi sacittakasikkhāpadavītikkamo arahato na sambhavati. Teneva pathavīkhaṇanādīsu sacittakasikkhāpadesu ticittameva vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Akatānudhammatā, jānanā, sambhogādikaraṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

424.In the ninth, payogagaṇanāya means by the calculation of the effort of giving and receiving. The determination of the offense should be understood in relation to the conclusion of the act of association, and in relation to the effort of lying down, with one person lying down and the other making the effort to lie down in a shared dwelling. Here, in the word-analysis, because it is stated without distinction as "under one roof," there is an offense for one who lies down under one roof even in different areas. Therefore, it is stated in the mātikāṭṭhakathā(Kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. commentary on the ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpada): "Whether he arranges a shared sleeping arrangement, he lies down under one roof even in different areas." Because even an Arahant who does not know the regulation can incur (an offense) with mind of action, therefore ‘‘ticitta’’ is said. However, what someone said, "ticitta' here should be understood as meaning 'arranges a shared sleeping arrangement with a mind that is the result of karma and undetermined, otherwise, because the training rule concerns what is animate, it does not fit in relation to what is an action," that should not be accepted. For the transgression of a training rule concerning what is animate is not impossible for an Arahant. Therefore, in training rules concerning what is animate, such as digging the earth, only "ticitta" is stated. The rest here is self-explanatory. Not doing what accords with the Dhamma, knowing, and engaging in association etc. are the three factors in this case.

Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpada is finished.

10. Kaṇṭakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Kaṇṭakasikkhāpada

428.Dasamepireti nipātapadaṃ. Sambodhane vattamānaṃ para-saddena samānatthaṃ vadantīti āha‘‘para amāmakā’’ti, amhākaṃ anajjhattikabhūtāti attho.Pireti vā ‘‘parato’’ti iminā samānatthaṃ nipātapadaṃ, tasmācara pireti parato gaccha, mā idha tiṭṭhāti evampettha attho veditabbo. Sesamettha purimasikkhāpadadvaye vuttanayameva.

428.In the tenth, pire is a particle. Saying that it is synonymous with the word para, which is used in address, he says, ‘‘para amāmakā’’, meaning, not something belonging to us. Pire is a particle synonymous with "parato," therefore, cara pire should be understood to mean "go away, do not stand here." The rest here is in the same manner as stated in the previous two training rules.

Kaṇṭakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Kaṇṭakasikkhāpada is finished.

Niṭṭhito sappāṇakavaggo sattamo.

The seventh group, the Sappāṇakavagga, is finished.

8. Sahadhammikavaggo

8. Sahadhammikavaggo

1. Sahadhammikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Sahadhammikasikkhāpada

434.Sahadhammikavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpadevācāya vācāya āpattīti anādariyabhayā lesena evaṃ vadantassa āpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannassa paññattena vacanaṃ, asikkhitukāmatāya evaṃ vacananti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

434.In the first training rule of the Sahadhammikavagga, vācāya vācāya āpattī means there is an offense for one who speaks in this way with indifference and pretense. The rest here is self-explanatory. Speaking of what is prescribed to an ordained monk, and speaking thus with the intention of not training, these are the two factors in this case.

Sahadhammikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Sahadhammikasikkhāpada is finished.

2. Vilekhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Vilekhanasikkhāpada

438.Dutiye vinayassa pariyāpuṇanaṃvinayapariyattīti āha‘‘vinayaṃ pariyāpuṇantāna’’ntiādi.Suguttoti yathā karaṇḍake pakkhittamaṇikkhandho viya na nassati vipattiṃ na pāpuṇāti, evaṃ suṭṭhu gopito.Surakkhitoti tasseva pariyāyavacanaṃ. Yathā hi kilesacorehi avilumpanīyo hoti, evaṃ sabbadā sūpaṭṭhitassatitāya suṭṭhu rakkhito.Kukkuccapakatānanti kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya uppannakukkuccena abhibhūtānaṃ. Sārajjanaṃ sārado, byāmohabhayaṃ. Vigato sārado etassātivisārado. Sahadhammenāti sakāraṇena vacanena.Suniggahitaṃ niggaṇhātīti yathā na puna sīsaṃ ukkhipanti, atha kho appaṭibhānā maṅkubhūtāyeva honti, evaṃ suṭṭhu niggaṇhāti.

438.In the second, the learning of the Vinaya is vinayapariyattī, he says, ‘‘vinayaṃ pariyāpuṇantāna’’ etc. Sugutto means well-guarded, just as a jewel placed in a casket is not lost, does not meet with misfortune. Surakkhito is a synonym for that. Just as it cannot be plundered by the thieves of defilements, it is well-protected by always having well-established mindfulness. Kukkuccapakatāna means for those overcome by worry arising in dependence on what is allowable and not allowable. Sārajjanaṃ (doubtfulness) is sārado. Byāmohabhayaṃ (fear of delusion). Vigato sārado etassāti (one free from doubt) is visārado. Sahadhammenā means by speech with reason. Suniggahitaṃ niggaṇhātī means he thoroughly suppresses them, so that they do not raise their heads again, but are dumbfounded due to lack of wit.

Alajjitāti ya-kāralopena niddeso, alajjitāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Aññāṇatātiādīsupi eseva nayo.Mando momūhoti aññāṇabhāvenamando,avisayatomomūho,mahāmūḷhoti attho.

Alajjitā is an indication with the dropping of the ya-sound, it is said to be alajjitāya. This same method (should be applied) in Aññāṇatā etc. Mando momūho means mando because of ignorance, momūho because of lack of object, meaning greatly deluded.

Attapaccatthikāti attano paccatthikā.Vajjiputtakādasavatthudīpakā.Parūpahāraaññāṇakaṅkhāparavitāraṇādivādāti ettha ye arahattaṃ paṭijānantānaṃ appatte pattasaññīnaṃ adhimānikānaṃ kuhakānaṃ vā arahattaṃ paṭijānantānaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ disvā mārakāyikā devatā ‘‘arahato asuciṃ upasaṃharantī’’ti maññanti seyyathāpi pubbaseliyā aparaseliyā ca, teparūpahāravādā. Yesaṃ pana arahato itthipurisādīnaṃ nāmagottādīsu ñāṇappavattiyā abhāvena atthi arahatoaññāṇaṃ,tattheva sanniṭṭhānābhāvena atthi arahatokaṅkhā,yasmā cassa tāni vatthūni pare vitārenti pakāsenti ācikkhanti, tasmā atthi arahatoparavitāraṇāti imā tisso laddhiyo seyyathāpi etarahi pubbaseliyānaṃ, te aññāṇakaṅkhāparavitāraṇavādā. Niggaho pana nesaṃ kathāvatthuppakaraṇe vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

Attapaccatthikā means hostile to themselves. Vajjiputtakā are those who illuminate the ten items. Parūpahāraaññāṇakaṅkhāparavitāraṇādivādā—here, those who, seeing the emission of semen of those falsely claiming to be Arahants, thinking they have attained what they have not attained, the conceited ones, or the deceitful ones claiming to be Arahants, think that the Māra deities "bring impurity to the Arahants," just like the Pubbaseliyas and Aparaseliyas, these are the parūpahāravādā. But for those Arahants who, due to the absence of the arising of knowledge of the names and clans of women, men, etc., have aññāṇaṃ, and because there is an absence of determination in that, have kaṅkhā, and because they spread, reveal, and declare those things to others, therefore there is paravitāraṇā for the Arahant—these three views are like those of the Pubbaseliyas at this time, these are the aññāṇakaṅkhāparavitāraṇavādā. However, their suppression should be understood in the manner stated in the Kathāvatthuppakaraṇa.

Cattāro maggā ca phalāni cāti ukkaṭṭhaniddesavasena vuttaṃ, catasso paṭisambhidā tisso vijjā cha abhiññāti ayampi adhigamasaddhammoyeva.Ca-kāro vā avuttasampiṇḍanattho daṭṭhabbo.Keci therāti dhammakathikā.Āhaṃsūti paṃsukūlikattherā evaṃ āhaṃsu.

Cattāro maggā ca phalāni cā is said by way of an eminent indication, these four paṭisambhidā, three knowledges, six abhiññā are also the Dhamma of attainment. The ca-conjunction should be seen as implying what is unsaid. Keci therā means Dhamma-speakers. Āhaṃsū means the paṃsukūlika elders said thus.

Kadā panāyaṃ kathā udapādīti? Ayañhettha anupubbikathā (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.130) – imasmiṃ kira dīpe caṇḍālatissamahābhaye sakko devarājā mahāuḷumpaṃ māpetvā bhikkhūnaṃ ārocāpesi ‘‘mahantaṃ bhayaṃ bhavissati, na sammā devo vassissati, bhikkhū paccayehi kilamantā pariyattiṃ sandhāretuṃ na sakkhissanti, paratīraṃ gantvā ayyehi jīvitaṃ rakkhituṃ vaṭṭati. Imaṃ mahāuḷumpaṃ āruyha gacchatha bhante, yesaṃ ettha nisajjaṭṭhānaṃ nappahoti, te kaṭṭhakhaṇḍepi uraṃ ṭhapetvā gacchantu, sabbesaṃ bhayaṃ na bhavissatī’’ti. Tadā samuddatīraṃ patvā saṭṭhi bhikkhū katikaṃ katvā ‘‘amhākaṃ ettha gamanakiccaṃ natthi, mayaṃ idheva hutvā tepiṭakaṃ rakkhissāmā’’ti tato nivattitvā dakkhiṇamalayajanapadaṃ gantvā kandamūlapaṇṇehi jīvikaṃ kappentā vasiṃsu, kāye vahante nisīditvā sajjhāyaṃ karonti, avahante vālikaṃ ussāretvā parivāretvā sīsāni ekaṭṭhāne katvā pariyattiṃ sammasanti. Iminā niyāmena dvādasa saṃvaccharāni sāṭṭhakathaṃ tepiṭakaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā dhārayiṃsu.

When did this story arise? Here is the sequential story (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.130): It seems that in this island, during the time of Caṇḍālatissa Mahābhaya, Sakka, the king of the gods, had a great raft made and announced to the monks, "There will be great danger, the deva will not rain properly, the monks will be exhausted by the requisites and will not be able to maintain the teaching, it is fitting for the venerable ones to protect their lives by going to the other shore. Climb this great raft, bhikkhus, those whose seating space is not enough should place a piece of wood on their chest and go, there will be no danger for anyone." Then, having reached the seashore, sixty monks made an agreement, "We have no need to go there, we will stay here and protect the Tipitaka," and having turned back from there, they went to the southern Malaya region and lived, making their living with roots, tubers, and leaves, sitting down while carrying the body, they recited, and while not carrying it, they removed the sand, surrounded it, and put their heads in one place, consulting on the teaching. By this method, for twelve years, they fully completed and maintained the Tipitaka with its commentary.

Bhaye vūpasante sattasatā bhikkhū attano gataṭṭhāne sāṭṭhakathe tepiṭake ekakkharampi ekabyañjanampi avināsetvā imameva dīpamāgamma kallagāmajanapade maṇḍalārāmavihāraṃ pavisiṃsu. Therānaṃ āgatapavattiṃ sutvā imasmiṃ dīpe ohīnā saṭṭhi bhikkhū ‘‘there passissāmā’’ti gantvā therehi saddhiṃ tepiṭakaṃ sodhentā ekakkharampi ekabyañjanampi asamentaṃ nāma na passiṃsu. Tasmiṃ ṭhāne therānaṃ ayaṃ kathā udapādi ‘‘pariyatti nu kho sāsanassa mūlaṃ, udāhu paṭipattī’’ti. Paṃsukūlikattherā ‘‘paṭipatti mūla’’nti āhaṃsu, dhammakathikā ‘‘pariyattī’’ti. Atha ne therā ‘‘tumhākaṃ dvinnampi janānaṃ vacanamatteneva na sakkā viññātuṃ, jinabhāsitaṃ suttaṃ āharathā’’ti āhaṃsu. Suttaṃ āharituṃ na bhāroti –

When the danger subsided, seven hundred monks, without destroying even one letter or one syllable of the Tipitaka with its commentary in their former place, came to this very island and entered the Maṇḍalārāma Vihāra in the Kallagāma region. Having heard of the arrival of the elders, sixty monks who had been negligent on this island went to see the elders, and while checking the Tipitaka with the elders, they did not see even one letter or one syllable that was inconsistent. In that place, this discussion arose among the elders: "Is the teaching the root of the Dispensation, or is it the practice?" The paṃsukūlika elders said, "Practice is the root," the Dhamma-speakers said, "The teaching (is)." Then those elders said, "It is not possible to understand merely by the words of you both, bring a sutta spoken by the Conqueror." It is not difficult to bring a sutta—

‘‘Ime ca, subhadda, bhikkhū sammā vihareyyuṃ, asuñño loko arahantehi assā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214). ‘‘Paṭipattimūlakaṃ, mahārāja, satthusāsanaṃ, paṭipattisārakaṃ, mahārāja, satthusāsanaṃ, paṭipatti tiṭṭhantī tiṭṭhatī’’ti (mi. pa. 4.1.7) –

‘‘If these monks, Subhadda, were to live rightly, the world would not be empty of Arahants’’ (dī. ni. 2.214). "The Teacher's dispensation has practice as its root, O Great King, the Teacher's dispensation has practice as its essence, the Teacher's dispensation stands firm as long as practice stands firm" (mi. pa. 4.1.7) —

Suttaṃ āhariṃsu.

They brought a sutta.

Imaṃ suttaṃ sutvā dhammakathikā attano vādaṭṭhapanatthāya imaṃ suttaṃ āhariṃsu –

Having heard this sutta, the Dhamma-speakers, for the purpose of establishing their own doctrine, brought this sutta—

‘‘Yāva tiṭṭhanti suttantā, vinayo yāva dippati;

‘‘As long as the suttantas remain,
As long as the Vinaya shines,
So long will they see the light,
As when the sun has risen.

‘‘Suttantesu asantesu, pamuṭṭhe vinayamhi ca;

‘‘When the suttantas do not remain,
And the Vinaya is forgotten,
There will be darkness in the world,
As when the sun has set.

‘‘Suttante rakkhite sante, paṭipatti hoti rakkhitā;

‘‘When the suttantas are protected and remain,
Practice is protected;
The wise one established in practice,
Does not fall away from safety from bondage.’’

Tassādheyyoti tassāyatto.

Tassādheyyo means dependent on that.

439.Sopanāti so pātimokkho. Sesamettha uttānameva. Garahitukāmatā, upasampannassa santike sikkhāpadavivaṇṇanañcāti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

439.So panā means that Pātimokkha. The rest here is self-explanatory. Desiring to disparage, and describing a training rule in the presence of an ordained monk, these are the two factors in this case.

Vilekhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Vilekhanasikkhāpada is finished.

3. Mohanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Mohanasikkhāpada

443.Tatiyaṃ uttānameva. Mohāropanaṃ, mohetukāmatā, vuttanayena sutabhāvo, mohananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

443.The third is self-explanatory. Causing delusion, desiring to delude, having learned in the manner stated, and delusion are the four factors in this case.

Mohanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Mohanasikkhāpada is finished.

4. Pahārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Pahārasikkhāpada

452.Catuttherattacittoti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena rattacitto. Sace pana methunarāgena ratto pahāraṃ deti, dukkaṭameva. Sesamettha uttānameva. Kupitatā, na mokkhādhippāyatā, upasampannassa pahāradānanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

452.In the fourth, rattacitto means with a mind infatuated with the lust of bodily contact. But if he is infatuated with the lust of sexual intercourse and gives a blow, it is only a dukkaṭa. The rest here is self-explanatory. Being angry, not intending release, and giving a blow to an ordained monk are the three factors in this case.

Pahārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Pahārasikkhāpada is finished.

5. Talasattikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Talasattikasikkhāpada

457.Pañcamena paharitukāmatāya dinnattā dukkaṭanti ettha paharitukāmatāya pahaṭe purimasikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ, uccāretukāmatāya kevalaṃ uggiraṇamatte kate iminā pācittiyaṃ. Iminā pana virajjhitvā pahāro dinno, tasmā dukkaṭaṃ. Kimidaṃ dukkaṭaṃ pahārapaccayā, udāhu uggiraṇapaccayāti? Tattha keci tāva vadanti ‘‘pahārapaccayā eva dukkaṭaṃ, uggiraṇapaccayā pācittiyanti sadukkaṭaṃ pācittiyaṃ yujjati. Purimañhi uggiraṇaṃ, pacchā pahāro, na ca pacchā pahāraṃ nissāya purimaṃ uggiraṇaṃ anāpattivatthukaṃ bhavitumarahatī’’ti.

457.In the fifth, na paharitukāmatāya dinnattā dukkaṭa means here, if he strikes with the intention of hitting, there is a pācittiya by the previous training rule, if only spitting is done with the intention of uttering, there is a pācittiya by this one. But by this one, a blow is given without being disgusted, therefore, there is a dukkaṭa. Is this dukkaṭa due to the cause of striking, or due to the cause of spitting? There, some say, "Indeed, a dukkaṭa is due to the cause of striking, a pācittiya is due to the cause of spitting, thus a sadukkaṭa pācittiya is fitting. For first there is spitting, afterwards there is striking, and the former spitting is not fit to be a ground for non-offense due to the latter striking."

Mayaṃ panettha evaṃ takkayāma ‘‘uggiraṇassa attano sabhāveneva asaṇṭhitattā tappaccayā pācittiyena na bhavitabbaṃ, asuddhacittena katapayogattā pana na sakkā ettha anāpattiyā bhavitunti dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘Na paharitukāmatāya dinnattā’ti iminā ca pahārapaccayā purimasikkhāpadena pācittiyāsambhave kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana pahārapaccayā dukkaṭasambhave. Na hi apaharitukāmatāya pahāre dinne purimasikkhāpadena pahārapaccayā pācittiyena dukkaṭena vā bhavituṃ yutta’’nti. ‘‘Tiracchānādīnaṃ asucikaraṇādiṃ disvā kujjhitvāpi uggirantassa mokkhādhippāyo evā’’ti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Kupitatā, na mokkhādhippāyatā, upasampannassa talasattiuggiraṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

However, we reason thus in this matter: "Because the spitting is not firm by its own nature, there should be no pācittiya due to that cause, but because it is an effort done with an impure mind, it is not possible for there to be no offense here, therefore a dukkaṭa is stated. And by ‘Na paharitukāmatāya dinnattā’ the reason is stated for the impossibility of a pācittiya by the previous training rule due to the cause of striking, but not for the possibility of a dukkaṭa due to the cause of striking. For when a blow is given without the intention of striking, it is not fitting for there to be a pācittiya or a dukkaṭa by the previous training rule due to the cause of striking." "Even if one is angry after seeing the making of impurity on animals etc., his intention is only release," they say. The rest here is self-explanatory. Being angry, not intending release, and uttering talasatti to an ordained monk are the three factors in this case.

Talasattikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Talasattikasikkhāpada is finished.

6. Amūlakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Amūlakasikkhāpada

459.Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānatthameva. Upasampannatā, saṅghādisesassa amūlakatā, anuddhaṃsanā, taṅkhaṇavijānanāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

459.The sixth is just self-explanatory in meaning. Being an ordained monk, the groundlessness of a Saṅghādisesa offense, not defaming, and knowing at that moment are the four factors in this case.

Amūlakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Amūlakasikkhāpada is finished.

7. Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Sañciccasikkhāpada

464.Sattamampi uttānatthameva. Upasampannatā, aphāsukāmatā, kukkuccuppādananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

464.The seventh is also just self-explanatory in meaning. Being an ordained monk, desiring discomfort, and causing worry are the three factors in this case.

Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Sañciccasikkhāpada is finished.

8. Upassutisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Upassutisikkhāpada

471.Aṭṭhamesutisamīpanti saddasamīpaṃ. Suyyatīti hi suti, saddassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tassa samīpaṃupassuti,saddasamīpanti vuttaṃ hoti.Gaṇṭhipadesuca suyyatīti sutīti saddova vutto. Yattha pana ṭhitena sakkā hoti saddaṃ sotuṃ, tattha tiṭṭhanto saddasamīpe ṭhito nāma hotīti āha‘‘yattha ṭhatvā’’tiādi. Keci pana ‘‘suṇāti etthāti suti. Yattha ṭhito suṇāti, tassa ṭhānassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tassa samīpaṃ upassutī’’ti vadanti, evaṃ pana gayhamāne yasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhito suṇāti, tassa āsanne aññasmiṃ padese tiṭṭhatīti āpajjati. Aṭṭhakathāyañcaupassuti-saddasseva atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yattha ṭhatvā sakkā hoti, tesaṃ vacanaṃ sotu’’nti vuttaṃ, nasuti-saddassa. Tasmā pubbanayovettha pasatthataro. Atha vā upecca suyyati etthātiupassuti,ṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatena sakkā hoti kathentānaṃ saddaṃ sotuṃ, tatthāti evamattho gahetabbo.Mantentanti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha‘‘mantayamāne’’ti.

471. In the eighth, sutisamīpa means near a sound. Suti means that which is heard, and this is a designation for sound. Its vicinity, upassuti, means near a sound. In the Gaṇṭhipadas, suti is said to be sound, meaning that which is heard. But regarding the place where, by standing, one is able to hear a sound, he is said to be standing near a sound, hence he said, "yattha ṭhatvā" etc. Some, however, say, "suti is where one hears. This is the name for the place where one stands and hears. Its vicinity is upassuti." But if it is taken this way, it follows that one is standing in another place near where one stands and hears. And in the commentary, upassuti is said to show the meaning of sound, "yattha ṭhatvā sakkā hoti, tesaṃ vacanaṃ sotuṃ," not the meaning of suti. Therefore, the former method is more preferred here. Alternatively, upassuti is a place where one goes and hears. The meaning should be taken as: in that place which, when approached, one is able to hear the sound of those speaking. Mantenta means using in the sense of abundance, hence he said, "mantayamāne."

473.Ekaparicchedānīti ‘‘siyā kiriyaṃ, siyā akiriya’’nti iminā nayena ekaparicchedāni. Imāni hi tīṇi sikkhāpadāni kadāci kiriyato samuṭṭhahanti, kadāci akiriyato, na ekakkhaṇeyeva kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhahanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Upasampannatā, codanādhippāyo, savananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

473.Ekaparicchedānī means having one determination in the manner of "it may be an action, it may not be an action." These three training rules sometimes arise from action, sometimes from non-action; they do not arise from both action and non-action in one moment. The rest here is self-explanatory. Upasampannatā, codanādhippāyo, and savana are the three factors involved here.

Upassutisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Upassutisikkhāpada is finished.

9. Kammapaṭibāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Kammapaṭibāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

474.Navamaṃ uttānatthameva. Dhammakammatā, dhammakammanti saññā, chandaṃ datvā khiyyananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

474.The ninth is self-explanatory. Dhammakammatā, saññā regarding dhammakamma, and being displeased after giving consent are the three factors involved here.

Kammapaṭibāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Kammapaṭibāhanasikkhāpada is finished.

10. Chandaṃ adatvā gamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Chandaṃ adatvā gamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

479.Dasamaṃ uttānatthameva. Vinicchayakathāya pavattamānatā, dhammakammatā, dhammakammasaññitā, samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitatā, samānasaṃvāsakatā, kopetukāmatāya hatthapāsavijahananti imāni panettha cha aṅgāni.

479.The tenth is self-explanatory. The occurrence of a discussion for a decision, dhammakammatā, having the perception of dhammakamma, being situated within the same boundary, being of the same communion, and abandoning the reaching distance of the hand out of a desire to anger are the six factors involved here.

Chandaṃ adatvā gamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Chandaṃ adatvā gamanasikkhāpada is finished.

11. Dubbalasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
11. Dubbalasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

484.Ekādasamampi uttānatthameva. Upasampannatā, dhammena laddhasammutitā, saṅghena saddhiṃ vikappanupagacīvaradānaṃ, pacchā khīyitukāmatāya khiyyanāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

484.The eleventh is also self-explanatory. Upasampannatā, having received agreement through Dhamma, giving robes obtained by acceptance with the Sangha, and being displeased afterwards with the intention of causing displeasure are the four factors involved here.

Dubbalasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Dubbalasikkhāpada is finished.

489.Dvādasame natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ.

489.In the twelfth, there is nothing to be said.

Niṭṭhito sahadhammikavaggo aṭṭhamo.

The eighth Sahadhammikavagga is finished.

9. Rājavaggo

9. Rājavaggo

1. Antepurasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Antepurasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

497-499.Rājavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade aṭṭhakathāyaṃ sabbaṃ uttānatthameva. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ayamanuttānapadattho.Kataṃ vā karissanti vāti methunavītikkamanaṃ kataṃ vā karissanti vā.Imesanti padaṃ vibhattivipariṇāmaṃ katvā ubhayattha yojetabbaṃ ‘‘imehi kataṃ ime karissantī’’ti.Ratananti maṇiratanādīsu yaṃkiñci.Ubhatoti dvīhi pakkhehi. ‘‘Ubhato sujāto’’ti ettake vutte yehi kehici dvīhi bhāgehi sujātatā viññāyeyya,sujāta-saddo ca ‘‘sujāto cārudassano’’tiādīsu ārohasampattipariyāyoti jātivaseneva sujātataṃ vibhāvetuṃ‘‘mātito ca pitito cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Anorasaputtavasenapi loke mātupitusamaññā dissati, idha pana sā orasaputtavaseneva icchitāti dassetuṃ‘‘saṃsuddhagahaṇiko’’ti vuttaṃ. Gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti dhāretīti gahaṇī, gabbhāsayasaññito mātukucchippadeso. Saṃsuddhā gahaṇī assātisaṃsuddhagahaṇiko,saṃsuddhā tassa mātukucchīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā’’ti ettha pana yathābhuttassa āhārassa vipācanavasena gaṇhanato achaḍḍanato kammajatejodhātu ‘‘gahaṇī’’ti vuccati.

497-499.In the first training rule of the Rājavagga, everything is self-explanatory in the commentary. In the Pali, however, this is the meaning of the term that is not self-explanatory. Kataṃ vā karissanti vā means sexual transgression has been done or will be done. The word Imesa should be grammatically changed and connected to both places as "imehi kataṃ ime karissantī." Ratana means any of the jewels such as maṇiratana. Ubhato means by two sides. If it were said only "ubhato sujāto," it would be understood as well-born by any two parts, and since the word sujāta is a synonym for the attainment of excellence in "sujāto cārudassano," to distinguish well-born only by lineage, it is said "mātito ca pitito ca." The designation of mother and father is seen in the world even in the case of a non-biological son, but here it is desired only in the sense of a biological son, to show this, it is said "saṃsuddhagahaṇiko." Gahaṇī means that which receives and holds a womb, a region of the mother's womb understood as the womb. Saṃsuddhā gahaṇī assā ti saṃsuddhagahaṇiko, means her mother's womb is pure. But here, in "samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā," the kammaja-tejodhātu is called "gahaṇī" because of receiving in the sense of digesting and not discarding the food that has been eaten.

Yāvasattamā pitāmahayugāti ettha pitu pitā pitāmaho, pitāmahassa yugaṃ pitāmahayugaṃ. ‘‘Yuga’’nti āyuppamāṇaṃ vuccati. Abhilāpamattameva cetaṃ, atthato pana pitāmahoyeva pitāmahayugaṃ. Pitā ca mātā ca pitaro, pitūnaṃ pitaro pitāmahā, tesaṃ yugo pitāmahayugo, tasmā yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā, pitāmahadvandāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Evañhi pitāmahaggahaṇeneva mātāmahopi gahito hoti.Yuga-saddo cettha ekasesena daṭṭhabbo yugo ca yugo ca yugoti. Evañhi tattha tattha dvandaṃ gahitameva hoti, tasmā tato uddhaṃ sabbepi pubbapurisā pitāmahayugaggahaṇeneva gahitā. Evaṃ yāva sattamo pitāmahayugo, tāva saṃsuddhagahaṇiko.

Here, yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā, pitāmaho means the father of the father, pitāmahayugaṃ means the duration of the pitāmaha. Yuga means the measure of life. This is just a manner of speaking, but in reality, pitāmaha himself is pitāmahayugaṃ. Pitā ca mātā ca pitaro, pitūnaṃ pitaro pitāmahā, tesaṃ yugo pitāmahayugo, therefore, yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā, the meaning here should be understood as pitāmahadvanda. In this way, the maternal grandfather is also included by the mention of pitāmaha. The word yuga here should be seen as ekasesa, yugo ca yugo ca yugo ti. In this way, the dual is taken in each place, therefore, all ancestors above that are included by the mention of pitāmahayuga. Thus, up to the seventh pitāmahayuga, one has a pure womb.

Akkhittoti ‘‘apanetha etaṃ, kiṃ iminā’’ti evaṃ akkhitto anavakkhitto.Anupakuṭṭhoti na upakuṭṭho, na akkosaṃ vā nindaṃ vā pattapubbo. Kena kāraṇenāti āha‘‘jātivādenā’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘ubhato…pe… pitāmahayugā’’ti etena tassa yonidosābhāvo dassito saṃsuddhagahaṇikabhāvakittanato, ‘‘akkhitto’’ti iminā kiriyāparādhābhāvo. Kiriyāparādhena hi sattā khepaṃ pāpuṇanti. ‘‘Anupakuṭṭho’’ti iminā ayuttasaṃsaggābhāvo. Ayuttasaṃsaggañhi paṭicca sattā akkosaṃ labhanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Khattiyatā, abhisittatā, ubhinnampi sayanigharato anikkhantatā, appaṭisaṃviditatā, indakhīlātikkamoti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.

Akkhitto means not rejected, not dismissed, in the manner of "remove this, what is the use of this." Anupakuṭṭho means not reviled, never having been subjected to abuse or blame. He asks, "for what reason?" and replies, "jātivādenā." Here, by "ubhato…pe… pitāmahayugā," the absence of defects of birth is shown by describing the state of having a pure womb, and by "akkhitto," the absence of offenses of action. For beings attain rejection by offenses of action. By "anupakuṭṭho," the absence of improper association is shown. For beings obtain abuse relying on improper association. The rest here is self-explanatory. Khattiyatā, abhisittatā, not going out from the sleeping quarters of both, not being unacquainted, and transgression of the indakhīla are the five factors involved here.

Antepurasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Antepurasikkhāpada is finished.

2. Ratanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Ratanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

502.Dutiyemahālataṃ nāmāti patikulaṃ gacchantiyā kira tassā pitā mahālatāpiḷandhanaṃ nāma kārāpesi. Tasmiṃ piḷandhane catasso vajiranāḷiyo tattha tattha appetabbaṭṭhāne appanavasena viniyogaṃ agamaṃsu, muttānaṃ ekādasa nāḷiyo, pavāḷassa dvāvīsati nāḷiyo, maṇīnaṃ tettiṃsa nāḷiyo. Iti etehi ca aññehi ca veḷuriyalohitaṅkamasāragallādīhi sattavaṇṇehi ca ratanehi niṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi. Taṃ sīse paṭimukkaṃ yāva pādapiṭṭhiyā bhassati, pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhārayamānāva itthī naṃ dhāretuṃ sakkoti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.

502.In the second, mahālataṃ nāmā means that when she went to her husband's family, her father had a great ornament made called Mahālatāpiḷandhanaṃ. In that ornament, four diamond tubes were arranged in the places where they should be applied, eleven tubes of pearls, twenty-two tubes of coral, thirty-three tubes of jewels. Thus, it reached completion with these and other jewels of seven colors such as veḷuriya, lohitaṅka, masāragalla, etc. The woman was able to wear it only if she could bear the strength of five elephants, as the head ornament slipped down to the instep. This was said in reference to that.

506.Āvasathassa pana suppapāto vā musalapāto vā upacāro nāmāti yojetabbaṃ.Āvasathoti cettha antoārāme vā hotu aññattha vā, attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vuccati.Chandenapi bhayenapīti vaḍḍhakīādīsu chandena, rājavallabhesu bhayena.Tameva bhikkhuṃ āsaṅkantīti vissaritvā gamanakāle attano pacchato aññassābhāvā āsaṅkanti.Patirūpaṃnāma ratanasammate paṃsukūlaggahaṇaṃ vā ratane nirussukkagamanaṃ vā. Yadi hi taṃ ratanasammataṃ āmāsaṃ ce, ‘‘natthi etassa sāmī’’ti paṃsukūlaṃ gahessati. Anāmāsaṃ ce, ‘‘natthi etassa sāmī’’ti paṃsukūlachinnapalibodho nirapekkho gamissati.Samādapetvāti aññaṃ samādapetvā, ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhanti, esā ariyānayācanā’’ti (jā. 1.7.59) vuttanayena yācitvāti attho. Sesamettha uttānameva. Ananuññātakaraṇaṃ, parasantakatā, vissāsaggāhapaṃsukūlasaññānaṃ abhāvo, uggahaṇaṃ vā uggahāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

506.But the treatment of the monastery is called suppapāto or musalapāto. Here, Āvasatho means one's own dwelling place, whether it is inside the monastery or elsewhere. Chandenapi bhayenapī means by desire in the case of carpenters etc., by fear in the case of royal favorites. Tameva bhikkhuṃ āsaṅkantī means, because of the absence of another behind him when going out, he suspects. Patirūpaṃ means either taking discarded cloth considered a jewel or going to a jewel without concern. For if that discarded cloth considered a jewel is unclaimed, he will take the discarded cloth thinking, "there is no owner of this." If it is claimed, he will go without concern, detached from the impediment of discarded cloth, thinking, "there is no owner of this." Samādapetvā means having persuaded another, having requested in the manner said in "uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhanti, esā ariyānayācanā" (Jā. 1.7.59). The rest here is self-explanatory. Doing without permission, belonging to another, the absence of perception of discarded cloth due to trust, and either taking or causing to take are the four factors involved here.

Ratanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Ratanasikkhāpada is finished.

3. Vikālagāmappavisanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Vikālagāmappavisanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

508.Tatiyeariyamaggassāti ettha saggamaggopi saṅgahetabbo. Aniyyānikattā saggamokkhamaggānaṃ tiracchānabhūtā hi kathātiracchānakathā. Tiracchānabhūtanti tirokaraṇabhūtaṃ vibandhanabhūtaṃ.Rājapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ kathanti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.17; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.223; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.1080; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.69-70) rājānaṃ ārabbha ‘‘mahāsammato mandhātā dhammāsoko evaṃmahānubhāvo’’tiādinā nayena pavattakathaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘asuko rājā abhirūpo dassanīyo’’tiādinā nayena gehassitakathāva tiracchānakathā hoti. ‘‘Sopi nāma evaṃmahānubhāvo khayaṃ gato’’ti evaṃ pavattā pana aniccatāpaṭisaṃyuttā kammaṭṭhānabhāve tiṭṭhati.Coresupi‘‘mūladevo evaṃmahānubhāvo, meghamālo evaṃmahānubhāvo’’ti tesaṃ kammaṃ paṭicca ‘‘aho sūrā’’ti gehassitakathāva tiracchānakathā.Yuddhepibharatayuddhādīsu ‘‘asukena asuko evaṃ mārito evaṃ viddho’’ti kāmassādavaseneva kathā tiracchānakathā. ‘‘Tepi nāma khayaṃ gatā’’ti evaṃ pavattā pana sabbattha kammaṭṭhānameva hoti.

508.In the third, ariyamaggassā here should also include the path to heaven. Because stories that are an obstacle to the paths to heaven and liberation are called tiracchānakathā. Tiracchānabhūta means being an obstacle, being a hindrance. Rājapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ kathaṃ (D.A. 1.17; M.A. 2.223; S.A. 3.5.1080; A.A. 3.10.69-70) is a story that occurs with reference to a king, in the manner of "Mahāsammata, Mandhātā, Dhammāsoka were so greatly powerful." And here, a story connected with household life in the manner of "such and such a king is handsome and beautiful" is a tiracchānakathā. However, a story that occurs in the manner of "even he, being so greatly powerful, has gone to destruction" stands as a meditation subject, being connected with impermanence. Coresupi, the story of household life is tiracchānakathā because of "Mūladeva was so greatly powerful, Meghamāla was so greatly powerful" with reference to their actions and saying "how brave they are." Yuddhepi, in battles such as the Bharata war, a story is tiracchānakathā only with the taste for sensual pleasure when saying "such and such killed such and such in this way, pierced in this way." However, a story that occurs in the manner of "even they have gone to destruction" is a meditation subject in all cases.

annādīsu ‘‘evaṃ vaṇṇavantaṃ gandhavantaṃ rasavantaṃ phassasampannaṃ khādimha bhuñjimha pivimha paribhuñjimhā’’ti kāmassādavasena kathetuṃ na vaṭṭati, sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘pubbe evaṃ vaṇṇādisampannaṃ annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ sayanaṃ mālāgandhaṃ sīlavantānaṃ adamha, cetiyapūjaṃ akarimhā’’ti kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.Ñātikathādīsupi ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātakā sūrā samatthā’’ti vā ‘‘pubbe mayaṃ evaṃ vicitrehi yānehi vicarimhā’’ti vā assādavasena vattuṃ na vaṭṭati, sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘tepi no ñātakā khayaṃ gatā’’ti vā ‘‘pubbe mayaṃ evarūpā upāhanā saṅghassa adamhā’’ti vā kathetabbaṃ.Gāmakathāpisuniviṭṭhadunniviṭṭhasubhikkhadubbhikkhādivasena vā ‘‘asukagāmavāsino sūrā samatthā’’ti vā evaṃ assādavasena na vaṭṭati, sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’ti vā ‘‘khayavayaṃ gatā’’ti vā vattuṃ vaṭṭati.Nigamanagarajanapadakathāsupieseva nayo.

Among annā etc., it is not proper to speak with a taste for sensual pleasure, saying "we ate, enjoyed, drank, and consumed food that was so colorful, fragrant, tasty, and rich in nutritive essence," but it is proper to speak meaningfully, saying "previously, we gave food, drink, clothing, lodging, garlands, and perfumes with such color etc. to the virtuous, and we did cetiyapūja." Among ñātikathā etc. also, it is not proper to speak with a sense of enjoyment, saying "our relatives are brave and capable" or "previously we traveled in such various vehicles," but it should be spoken meaningfully, saying "even our relatives have gone to destruction" or "previously we gave such shoes to the Sangha." Gāmakathāpi is not proper with a sense of enjoyment because of well-established, poorly-established, good harvest, bad harvest, or "the inhabitants of such and such a village are brave and capable," but it is proper to say "faithful and serene" or "gone to decay and dissolution" with a purpose. Nigamanagarajanapadakathāsupi has the same method.

Itthikathāpivaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīni paṭicca assādavasena na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddhā pasannā, khayaṃ gatā’’ti evaṃ vattuṃ vaṭṭati.Sūrakathāpi‘‘nandimitto nāma yodho sūro ahosī’’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddho ahosi, khayaṃ gato’’ti evameva vaṭṭati.Visikhākathāpi‘‘asukā visikhā suniviṭṭhā dunniviṭṭhā sūrā samatthā’’ti assādavaseneva na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddhā pasannā, khayaṃ gatā’’icceva vaṭṭati.

Itthikathāpi is not proper with a sense of enjoyment with reference to color, form, etc., but it is proper to say "faithful and serene, gone to destruction" etc. Sūrakathāpi is not proper with a sense of enjoyment, saying "a warrior named Nandimitta was brave," but it is proper to say only "he was faithful, he has gone to destruction." Visikhākathāpi is not proper with a sense of enjoyment, saying "such and such a street is well-established, poorly-established, brave, capable," but it is proper to say only "faithful and serene, gone to destruction."

Kumbhaṭṭhānakathāti kuṭaṭṭhānakathā udakatitthakathā vuccati, kumbhadāsīkathā vā. Sāpi ‘‘pāsādikā naccituṃ gāyituṃ chekā’’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’tiādinā nayeneva vaṭṭati.Pubbapetakathāti atītañātikathā. Tattha vattamānañātikathāsadisova vinicchayo.

Kumbhaṭṭhānakathā means a story about a kuṭaṭṭhāna or a bathing place, or a story about a kumbhadāsī. That also is not proper with a sense of enjoyment, saying "charming, skilled at dancing and singing," but it is proper only in the manner of "faithful and serene" etc. Pubbapetakathā means a story about past relatives. The decision there is similar to a story about present relatives.

Nānattakathāti purimapacchimakathāvimuttā avasesā nānāsabhāvā niratthakakathā.Lokakkhāyikāti ‘‘ayaṃ loko kena nimmito, asukena pajāpatinā brahmunā issarena vā nimmito, kāko seto aṭṭhīnaṃ setattā, bakā rattā lohitassa rattattā’’ti evamādikā lokāyatavitaṇḍasallāpakathā. Uppattiṭhitisaṃhārādivasena lokaṃ akkhāyatītilokakkhāyikā.Samuddakkhāyikānāma kasmā samuddo sāgaro, sāgarassa rañño puttehi khatattā sāgaro. Khato amhehīti hatthamuddāya niveditattā samuddoti evamādikā niratthakā samuddakkhāyikakathā.

Nānattakathā means diverse pointless stories that are free from previous and subsequent stories. Lokakkhāyikā means discussions about Lokāyata sophistry, such as "who created this world, was it created by such and such a Pajāpati, Brahma, or Īsvara, the crow is white because the bones are white, the herons are red because the blood is red." Lokakkhāyikā means explaining the world in terms of origin, duration, destruction, etc. Samuddakkhāyikā means the pointless story of the ocean, such as why the ocean is called sāgara, because it was dug by the sons of King Sāgara. The ocean is called samuddoti because it was reported by hand gesture that "we have dug."

itibhavābhavakathā. Ettha cabhavoti sassataṃ,abhavoti ucchedaṃ.Bhavoti vuddhi,abhavoti hāni.Bhavoti kāmasukhaṃ,abhavoti attakilamatho. Iti imāya chabbidhāya itibhavābhavakathāya saddhiṃ bāttiṃsa tiracchānakathā nāma hoti. Atha vā pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato anāgatāpi araññapabbatanadīdīpakathāiti-saddena saṅgahetvā chattiṃsa tiracchānakathāti vuccati.Iti vāti hi etthaiti-saddo pakāratthe,-saddo vikappatthe. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘evaṃpakāraṃ ito aññaṃ vā tādisaṃ niratthakakathaṃ kathentī’’ti. Ādiatthe vāiti-saddo ‘‘iti vā iti evarūpā naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.10, 194) viya, evamādiṃ aññampi tādisaṃ kathaṃ kathentīti attho.

itibhavābhavakathā. Here, bhava means eternalism, abhava means annihilationism. Bhava means growth, abhava means decline. Bhava means sensual pleasure, abhava means self-mortification. Thus, along with these six kinds of itibhavābhava-kathā, there are thirty-two kinds of frivolous talk. Or, although conversations about forests, mountains, rivers, and islands are not explicitly mentioned in the Pali text, they are included with the word iti, and thus thirty-six kinds of frivolous talk are mentioned. Here, the word iti means 'of this kind', and the word means 'alternatively'. This means: "Or speaking in such a way, or other such meaningless talk." Or, the word iti is in the sense of 'beginning', as in "Being abstinent from such things as dancing, singing, music, and theatrical shows," (D.N. 1.10, 194) meaning speaking about this and other such things.

512.Aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāro adinnādāne vuttanayeneva veditabboti iminā dutiyaleḍḍupāto idha upacāroti dasseti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchanā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, vikāle gāmappavisananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

512.Aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāro adinnādāne vuttanayeneva veditabbo—the boundary of an unconfined village should be understood in the same way as described in the case of theft. The rest is straightforward here. Asking a present bhikkhu without being asked, the absence of a valid reason, and entering the village at an improper time—these are the three factors involved here.

Vikālagāmappavisanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Entering a Village at an Improper Time is Finished.

4. Sūcigharasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Training Rule on a Needle Case

517.Catutthetaṃ assa atthīti paṭhamaṃ bhinditvā pacchā desetabbattā taṃ bhedanakaṃ tassa pācittiyassa atthītibhedanakaṃ,pācittiyaṃ. Assatthiatthe a-kārapaccayo daṭṭhabbo.Vāsijaṭeti vāsidaṇḍake. Sesamettha uttānameva. Sūcigharatā, aṭṭhimayāditā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

517.In the fourth, because taṃ assa atthī should be broken down first and then stated, bhedanakaṃ means that which causes breaking, pācittiyaṃ means that the pācittiya [offense] exists in it. The a-sound suffix should be seen as indicating possession. Vāsijaṭe means a handle made with a chisel. The rest is straightforward here. Being a needle case, being made of bone, etc., and obtaining it by making it or having it made for oneself—these are the three factors involved here.

Sūcigharasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on a Needle Case is Finished.

5. Mañcapīṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Training Rule on Chairs and Couches

522.Pañcamechedanakaṃ vuttanayamevāti chedanameva chedanakaṃ, taṃ tassa atthītichedanakanti imamatthaṃ atidissati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Pamāṇātikkantamañcapīṭhatā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

522.In the fifth, chedanakaṃ vuttanayamevā means that chedana itself is chedanaka, and chedanaka means that one possesses that. The rest is straightforward here. Being a chair or couch that exceeds the prescribed measurement, and obtaining it by making it or having it made for oneself—these are the two factors involved here.

Mañcapīṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Chairs and Couches is Finished.

6. Tūlonaddhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on a Cotton-Filled Seat

526.Chaṭṭhetūlaṃ pakkhipitvāti heṭṭhā cimilikaṃ pattharitvā tassa upari tūlaṃ pakkhipitvāti attho.Poṭakitūlanti erakatūlādi yaṃkiñci tiṇajātīnaṃ tūlaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Tūlonaddhamañcapīṭhatā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni. Attanā kārāpitassa hi paṭilābhamatteneva pācittiyaṃ. Teneva padabhājane ‘‘paṭilābhena uddāletvā pācittiyaṃ desetabba’’nti vuttaṃ.Kenacipana ‘‘paṭilābhena uddāletvā pācittiyaṃ desetabbanti ettha kiñcāpi paṭilābhamatteneva pācittiyaṃ viya dissati, paribhogeyeva āpatti daṭṭhabbā. ‘Aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’ti vacanaṃ ettha sādhaka’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ tassa matimattaṃ. Na hi ‘‘aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti idaṃ attanā kārāpitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, karaṇakārāpanapaccayā ca iminā sikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, na paribhogapaccayā. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, tūlonaddhaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā paribhuñjitabbaṃ, yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti hi khandhake vuttattā attanā vā kataṃ hotu aññena vā, paribhuñjantassa paribhogapaccayā dukkaṭameva, na pācittiyaṃ.

526.In the sixth, tūlaṃ pakkhipitvā means spreading a cimilika cloth underneath and then putting cotton on top of it. Poṭakitūla means any kind of cotton made from grass, such as eraka cotton. The rest is straightforward here. Being a cotton-filled chair or couch, and obtaining it by making it or having it made for oneself—these are the two factors involved here. The pācittiya [offense] occurs merely upon obtaining something made by oneself. Therefore, in the padabhājana, it is said that "having it removed upon receiving it, the pācittiya [offense] should be confessed." However, someone said, "Although it seems that the pācittiya [offense] occurs merely upon obtaining it, the offense should be seen as occurring only upon use. The statement, 'Having obtained something made by another and using it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa,' supports this," but that is merely his opinion. This is because "Having obtained something made by another and using it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa" is not said in reference to something made by oneself; the pācittiya [offense] is stated in this training rule due to the action of making it or having it made, not due to the act of using it. Because it is said in the khandhaka, "Monks, a cotton-filled chair or couch should not be used; whoever uses it incurs an offense of dukkaṭa," whether it is made by oneself or by another, there is only an offense of dukkaṭa due to the act of using it, not a pācittiya [offense].

Tūlonaddhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on a Cotton-Filled Seat is Finished.

7. Nisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on a Sitting Cloth

531.Sattame yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ nisīdanasanthatasikkhāpade vuttameva. Nisīdanassa pamāṇātikkantatā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

531.In the seventh, what needs to be said has already been said in the training rule on a sitting cloth spread out. Being a sitting cloth that exceeds the prescribed measurement, and obtaining it by making it or having it made for oneself—these are the two factors involved here.

Nisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on a Sitting Cloth is Finished.

537-542.Aṭṭhamanavamadasamesu natthi vattabbaṃ, aṅgānipi sattameva vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.

537-542.In the eighth, ninth, and tenth, there is nothing to be said, and the factors involved, numbering seven, should be understood in the manner already described.

Niṭṭhito rājavaggo navamo.

The Ninth Chapter, the Rāja Vagga, is Finished.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ

Thus ends the Khuddaka Vaṇṇanā in the Sāratthadīpanī, a Commentary on the Vinaya Aṭṭhakathā, the Samantapāsādikā.

Khuddakavaṇṇanā samattā.

The Pācittiya Section is Finished.

Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Pācittiya Section is Finished.

6. Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍaṃ

6. Pāṭidesanīya Section

Pāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Pāṭidesanīya Training Rules

552.Pāṭidesanīyesu paṭhame‘‘gārayhaṃ āvusotiādi paṭidesetabbākāradassana’’nti vacanato pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayeneva āpatti desetabbā.Asappāyanti saggamokkhānaṃ ahitaṃ ananukūlaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, aññātikatā, antaraghare ṭhitāya hatthato sahatthā paṭiggahaṇaṃ, yāvakālikatā, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.

552.In the first of the pāṭidesanīya rules, "‘gārayhaṃ āvusotiādi paṭidesetabbākāradassana’"—because it shows the way to confess, beginning with "Reproachable, friend"—the offense should be confessed in the way it comes in the Pali text. Asappāyaṃ means unfavorable and unsuited to heavenly attainment and liberation. The rest is straightforward here. Being fully ordained, being unknown, receiving with one's own hand from the hand of a woman standing inside a house, being a limited provision, and consuming it—these are the five factors involved here.

557-562.Dutiyatatiyacatutthesu natthi vattabbaṃ, aṅgesu pana dutiye paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, pañcabhojanatā, antaraghare ṭhitāya anuññātappakārato aññathā vosāsanā, anivāraṇā, ajjhohāroti imāni pañca aṅgāni.

557-562.In the second, third, and fourth, there is nothing to be said. As for the factors involved, in the second, they are: being fully ordained, being a meal for five or more bhikkhus, requesting a meal from a woman standing inside a house in a way other than that allowed, not preventing her, and consuming it—these are the five factors involved.

Tatiye sekkhasammatatā, pubbe animantitatā, agilānatā, gharūpacārokkamanaṃ, ṭhapetvā niccabhattādīni aññaṃ āmisaṃ gahetvā bhuñjananti imāni pañca aṅgāni.

In the third, they are: being considered a learner, not having been previously invited, not being ill, entering a householder's residence, and taking and eating other food besides regular meals, etc.—these are the five factors involved.

Catutthe yathāvuttaāraññakasenāsanatā, yāvakālikassa atatthajātakatā, agilānatā, agilānāvasesakatā, appaṭisaṃviditatā, ajjhārāme paṭiggahaṇaṃ, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni satta aṅgāni.

In the fourth, they are: being a forest dwelling, as described; being an impermanent provision; not being ill; not being a remnant of what was for the sick; not being informed beforehand; receiving within the grounds of the monastery; and consuming it—these are the seven factors involved.

Pāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Pāṭidesanīya Training Rules is Finished.

Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Pāṭidesanīya Section is Finished.

7. Sekhiyakaṇḍaṃ

7. Sekhiya Section

1. Parimaṇḍalavaggavaṇṇanā
1. Parimaṇḍala Vagga Explanation

sikkhitasikkhenāti catūhi maggehi tisso sikkhā sikkhitvā ṭhitena, sabbaso pariniṭṭhitakiccenāti vuttaṃ hoti.Tādināti aṭṭhahi lokadhammehi akampiyaṭṭhena tādinā.

sikkhitasikkhenā means one who has trained in the three trainings through the four paths, meaning one whose task is completely finished. Tādinā means being imperturbable due to the eight worldly conditions.

576.Sikkhā karaṇīyāti ‘‘evaṃ nivāsessāmī’’ti ārāmepi antaragharepi sabbattha sikkhā kattabbā. Ettha ca yasmā vattakkhandhake vuttavattānipi sikkhitabbattā sekhiyāneva honti, tasmā pārājikādīsu viya paricchedo na kato, cārittanayadassanatthañca ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu olambento nivāseyya, dukkaṭa’’nti evaṃ āpattināmena avatvā ‘‘sikkhā karaṇīyā’’ti evaṃ sabbasikkhāpadesu pāḷi āropitā. Padabhājane pana ‘‘āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttattā sabbattha anādariyakaraṇe dukkaṭaṃ veditabbaṃ.Vuttanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā aṭṭhaṅgulamattaṃ otāretvā nivatthameva nisinnassa caturaṅgulamattaṃ hoti, tasmā ubhopete aṭṭhakathāvādā ekaparicchedā.Te sabbeti nivāsanadosā.

576.Sikkhā karaṇīyā—"Training should be done" means that the training should be done everywhere, both in the monastery and inside houses, in the manner described. Here, since the practices described in the Vatta Khandhaka are also things to be trained in and are therefore sekhiyas, no distinction has been made as in the case of the pārājikas, etc.; and to show the mode of proper conduct, the Pali has been applied to all the training rules with the statement "Training should be done," without stating the name of the offense, such as "Whoever wears the lower robe hanging down incurs a dukkaṭa offense." However, because it is said in the padabhājana that "there is an offense of dukkaṭa," it should be understood that a dukkaṭa offense occurs everywhere due to carelessness. Vutta means stated in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā. Because when one sits down, having worn the lower robe letting it hang down about eight finger-breadths, it becomes about four finger-breadths, therefore both of these statements in the commentary are within the same limit. Te sabbe means all those faults in wearing the lower robe.

Taṃ panāti taṃ anādariyaṃ. Kiñcāpi kurundivādaṃ pacchā vadantena ‘‘parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetuṃ ajānantassa anāpattī’’ti ayamattho patiṭṭhāpito, tathāpi nivāsanavattaṃ sādhukaṃ uggahetabbameva. Sañcicca anuggaṇhantassa anādariyaṃ siyā. Tenevamātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. parimaṇḍalasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘ajānantassāti parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetuṃ ajānantassa anāpatti, apica nivāsanavattaṃ uggahetabba’’nti.

Taṃ panā means that carelessness. Although the Kurundi tradition later establishes the meaning that "There is no offense for one who does not know how to wear the lower robe properly," the practice of wearing the lower robe should still be well learned. There may be carelessness in one who intentionally does not learn it. Therefore, it is said in the Mātikā Aṭṭhakathā (Kaṅkhā. Aṭṭha. Parimaṇḍala Sikkhāpada Vaṇṇanā) that " 'For one who does not know' means that there is no offense for one who does not know how to wear the lower robe properly, but the practice of wearing the lower robe should be learned."

Sacittakanti vatthuvijānanacittena paṇṇattivijānanacittena ca sacittakaṃ ‘‘anādariyaṃ paṭiccā’’ti vuttattā. ‘‘Pāṇātipātādi viya nivāsanadoso lokagarahito na hotīti paṇṇattivajja’’ntiphussadevattheroāha.Upatissattheropana ‘‘yasmā anādariyavaseneva āpajjitabbattā kevalaṃ akusalameva, tañca pakatiyā vajjaṃ, sañcicca vītikkamanañca domanassitasseva hoti, tasmā lokavajjaṃ akusalacittaṃ dukkhavedana’’nti āha. Anādariyaṃ, anāpattikāraṇābhāvo, aparimaṇḍalanivāsananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Yathā cettha, evaṃ sabbattha purimāni dve tattha tattha vuttapaṭipakkhakaraṇañcāti tīṇiyeva honti.

Sacittaka means intentional, with a mind that recognizes the object and a mind that recognizes the regulation, because it is said that "due to carelessness." Phussadeva Thera said, "Because the fault in wearing the lower robe, like killing, is not criticized by the world, it is an offense by regulation." Upatissa Thera, however, said, "Because it must be committed only due to carelessness, it is purely unwholesome, and that is an offense by nature; and intentionally transgressing it only leads to sadness, therefore it is a worldly offense, an unwholesome state of mind, and painful feeling." Carelessness, the absence of a reason for non-offense, and wearing the lower robe improperly—these are the three factors involved here. Just as here, so everywhere there are only three factors: the first two and doing the opposite of what is stated there.

577.Dutiyādīsuanekappakāraṃ gihipārutanti setapaṭapārutaṃ paribbājakapārutaṃ ekasāṭakapārutantiādi anekappabhedaṃ gihipārutaṃ. Tassattho khandhakeyeva āvi bhavissati.Vihārepīti buddhupaṭṭhānādikālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

577.In the second, etc., anekappakāraṃ gihipārutaṃ means various kinds of lay attire, such as being clothed in white cloth, being clothed like an ascetic, or being clothed in a single cloth. Its meaning will become clear in the Khandhaka. Vihārepi means with reference to the time of attending to the Buddha, etc.

578.‘‘Suppaṭicchanno’’ti vuttattā ‘‘sasīsaṃ pāruto sabbathā suppaṭicchannattā suppaṭicchanno nāma hotī’’ti yassa siyā, taṃ sandhāyāha‘‘na sasīsaṃ pārutenā’’tiādi.

578.Because "well-covered" is said, in reference to someone who might think that "one is called 'well-covered' because one is completely covered, with the head covered," he says, "na sasīsaṃ pārutenā", etc.

582.Ekasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvāti ettha ‘‘gacchantopi parissayābhāvaṃ oloketuṃ labhatiyeva, tathā gāme pūja’’nti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.

582.Regarding ekasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvā, it is said in all three Gaṇṭhipadas that "even while going, one can look to see if there is danger, and so too in a village, one can show respect."

Parimaṇḍalavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Parimaṇḍala Vagga Explanation is Finished.

2. Ujjagghikavaggavaṇṇanā
2. Ujjagghika Vagga Explanation

586.Dutiyavaggehasanīyasmiṃ vatthusminti hāsajanake kāraṇe.

586.In the second vagga, hasanīyasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ means a cause that produces laughter.

Ujjagghikavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Ujjagghika Vagga Explanation is Finished.

3. Khambhakatavaggavaṇṇanā
3. Khambhaka Vagga Explanation

603.Tatiyavagge patte saññā pattasaññā, sā assa atthītipattasaññī,attano bhājane upanibandhasaññī hutvāti attho. Byañjanaṃ pana anādiyitvā atthamattameva dassetuṃ‘‘patte saññaṃ katvā’’ti vuttaṃ.

603.In the third vagga, patte saññā means perception of the bowl; pattasaññī means one who has perception of the bowl, meaning having a perception of attachment to one's own bowl. To show only the meaning without paying attention to the specific words, it is said "patte saññaṃ katvā"—having made a perception of the bowl.

604.Oloṇīti ekā byañjanavikati. ‘‘Yo koci suddho kañjikatakkādirasao’’ti keci.Sākasūpeyya-ggahaṇena yā kāci sūpeyyasākehi katā byañjanavikati vuttā.Maṃsarasādīnītiādi-saddena avasesā sabbāpi byañjanavikati saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevamātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. samasūpakapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘ṭhapetvā pana sūpaṃ avasesā sabbāpi sūpeyyā byañjanavikati rasaraso nāma hotī’’ti.

604.Oloṇī is a variation of flavoring. Some say, "Whatever pure liquid seasoning there is, such as congee or buttermilk." The taking of sākasūpeyya indicates whatever variations of flavoring are made with herbs and soup. It should be seen that maṃsarasādīnī—with the word ādi—includes all the remaining variations of flavoring. Therefore, it is said in the Mātikā Aṭṭhakathā (Kaṅkhā. Aṭṭha. Samasūpakapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) that "except for soup, all the remaining variations of soup are called flavoring."

605.Samapuṇṇanti adhiṭṭhānupagassa pattassa antomukhavaṭṭilekhaṃ anatikkāmetvā racitaṃ.Samabharitanti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Phalāphalādītiādi-saddena odanādimpi saṅgaṇhāti.Heṭṭhā orohatīti samantā okāsasabbhāvato cāliyamānaṃ heṭṭhā bhassati. Matthake thūpīkataṃ pūvameva vaṭaṃsakasadisattā‘‘pūvavaṭaṃsaka’’nti vuttaṃ.Pupphavaṭaṃsakādīsupi eseva nayo.

605.Samapuṇṇa means filled without exceeding the inner circular line of a bowl that is not used for dedication. Samabharita is a synonym for that. Phalāphalādī—with the word ādi—includes rice, etc. Heṭṭhā orohatī means falling downwards when shaken due to the absence of space on all sides. Because only cake heaped at the top resembles a diadem, it is called "pūvavaṭaṃsaka." The same method applies to pupphavaṭaṃsakā, etc.

kenacivuttaṃ, taṃ na sārato paccetabbaṃ. ‘‘Na thūpīkataṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti vacanaṃ paṭhamaṃ thūpīkatasseva pacchā paṭiggaṇhanaṃ dīpeti. Na hi hatthagatepi patte diyyamānaṃ thūpīkataṃ gaṇhanto thūpīkataṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggaṇhanto nāma na hoti, na ca tena samatittiko piṇḍapāto paṭiggahitoti sakkā viññātuṃ. ‘‘Thūpīkata’’nti ca bhāvanapuṃsakaniddese gayhamāne ayamattho suṭṭhutaraṃ pākaṭoyevāti.

Kenaci said, but that should not be accepted as essential. The statement "He does not accept almsfood heaped up" indicates accepting what was first heaped up afterwards. One who takes heaped-up food given into the bowl in his hand is not said to be accepting heaped-up almsfood, and it is not possible to know that he has accepted almsfood in equal measure. When "heaped up" is understood as a neuter noun in the instrumental case, this meaning is even more clearly evident.

Khambhakatavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Khambhaka Vagga Explanation is Finished.

4. Sakkaccavaggavaṇṇanā
4. Sakkacca Vagga Explanation

608.Catutthavaggesapadānanti ettha dānaṃ vuccati avakhaṇḍanaṃ, apetaṃ dānato apadānaṃ, anavakhaṇḍananti attho. Saha apadānena sapadānaṃ, avakhaṇḍanavirahitaṃ, anupaṭipāṭiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha‘‘tattha tattha odhiṃ akatvā anupaṭipāṭiyā’’ti.

608.In the fourth vagga, sapadāna—here, dāna means cutting off, apadāna means that which is without cutting off from dāna, meaning without cutting off. Saha apadānena sapadānaṃ means together with not cutting off, without interruption, meaning without succession. Therefore, he says, "tattha tattha odhiṃ akatvā anupaṭipāṭiyā"—without making a boundary in each place, in an unbroken series.

611.Yasmiṃ samaye ‘‘pāṇo na hantabbo’’ti rājāno bheriṃ carāpenti, ayaṃmāghātasamayonāma. Idha anāpattiyaṃ gilāno na āgato, tasmā gilānassapi āpatti. Sūpodanaviññattisikkhāpadeasañcicca assatiyāti ettha ‘‘mukhe pakkhipitvā puna vippaṭisārī hutvā chaḍḍentassa aruciyā pavisante ‘asañciccā’ti vuccati, viññattimpi aviññattimpi etasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhitaṃ sahasā gahetvā bhuñjante ‘assatiyā’ti vuccatī’’ti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.

611. At the time when kings announce with drums, "No life is to be killed," this is called the māghāta-time. Here, there is no offense for one who is ill and has not come; therefore, even for the ill, there is an offense. In the Sūpodanaviññatti Sikkhāpada, regarding unintentionally due to inattentiveness, in the Gaṇṭhipada it is said in all three places, "When one puts it in the mouth and then, regretting it, spits it out, 'unintentionally' is said when it enters due to dislike. 'Due to inattentiveness' is said when one suddenly takes and eats what has been requested or not requested, standing in that place."

614-615.Ujjhāne saññā ujjhānasaññā, sā assa atthītiujjhānasaññī. ‘‘Mayūraṇḍaṃ atimahanta’’nti vacanato mayūraṇḍappamāṇo kabaḷo na vaṭṭati. Keci pana ‘‘mayūraṇḍato mahanto na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ, ‘‘nātimahanta’’nti ca atimahantasseva paṭikkhittattā khuddake āpatti na dissati. ‘‘Mayūraṇḍaṃ atimahantaṃ, kukkuṭaṇḍaṃ atikhuddakaṃ, tesaṃ vemajjhappamāṇo’’ti iminā pana sāruppavasena khuddakampi paṭikkhipitvā paricchedo na dassitoti veditabbaṃ.

614-615. Awareness of abundance is ujjhānasaññā. One who has that is ujjhānasaññī. Because it is said, "A peacock's egg is too large," a mouthful the size of a peacock's egg is not allowable. Some, however, say, "What is larger than a peacock's egg is not allowable." That should not be accepted, because only what is "too large" is prohibited, so no offense is seen in what is small. However, with this—"A peacock's egg is too large, a chicken's egg is too small; the average size of these"—it should be understood that even the small is rejected in terms of appropriateness, and no limit is shown.

Sakkaccavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Sakkaccavagga is finished.

5. Kabaḷavaggavaṇṇanā
5. Kabaḷavaggavaṇṇanā

618.Pañcamavaggesabbaṃ hatthanti etthahattha-saddo tadekadesesu aṅgulīsu daṭṭhabbo ‘‘hatthamuddā’’tiādīsu viya, samudāye pavattavohārassa avayavepi vattanato ekaṅgulimpi mukhe pakkhipituṃ na vaṭṭati.

618. In the fifth vagga, all the hand—here, the word hand should be seen applied to its parts, the fingers, as in "hand gesture," etc., because the usage prevalent for the whole also applies to a part; it is not allowable to put even one finger in the mouth.

Kabaḷavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Kabaḷavagga is finished.

6. Surusuruvaggavaṇṇanā
6. Surusuruvaggavaṇṇanā

627.Chaṭṭhavaggesītīkatoti sītaṭṭo, sītapīḷitoti vuttaṃ hoti.Silakabuddhoti parihāsavacanametaṃ. Silakañhi kañci disvā ‘‘buddho aya’’nti voharanti.

627. In the sixth vagga, cooled down means cold to the touch, meaning afflicted by cold. Silakabuddho is a term of ridicule. For they call anyone they see "Buddho" as a joke.

634.Vilīvacchattanti veṇuvilīvehi kataṃ chattaṃ.Tatthajātakadaṇḍakena katanti tālapaṇṇaṃ saha daṇḍakena chinditvā tameva chattadaṇḍaṃ karonti gopālakādayo viya, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Chattapādukāya vā ṭhitaṃ hotīti ettha chattapādukā vuccati chattādhāro. Yasmiṃ chattaṃ apatamānaṃ katvā ṭhapenti, tādisikāya chattapādukāya ṭhitaṃ chattaṃ ‘‘chatta’’nti ajjhāharitabbaṃ. ‘‘Chattaṃ chattapādukāya ṭhita’’ntipi paṭhanti, tatthāpi ayamevattho.

634. Vilīvacchatta means an umbrella made of bamboo strips. Tatthajātakadaṇḍakena kata means making the umbrella stick from the talipot palm by cutting the leaf together with a stick, just like cowherds and others do; this is said referring to that. Chattapādukāya vā ṭhitaṃ hotī—here, chattapādukā means an umbrella stand. "Umbrella" should be supplied to mean "an umbrella standing on such an umbrella stand in which the umbrella is placed so it does not fall." They also read "Chattaṃ chattapādukāya ṭhitaṃ," and the meaning is the same there as well.

637.Cāpoti majjhe vaṅkā kācadaṇḍasadisā dhanuvikati.Kodaṇḍoti vaṭṭaladaṇḍā dhanuvikati.Paṭimukkanti pavesitaṃ laggitaṃ.

637. Cāpo means a bow-like dhanuvikati curved in the middle like a crow's beak. Kodaṇḍo means a dhanuvikati with a round stick. Paṭimukka means entered, attached.

Surusuruvaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Surusuruvagga is finished.

7. Pādukavaggavaṇṇanā
7. Pādukavaggavaṇṇanā

647.Sattamavaggepaṭicchanno hutvāti so kira rattibhāge uyyānaṃ gantvā ambaṃ abhiruhitvā sākhāya sākhaṃ ambaṃ olokento vicari. Tassa tathā karontasseva ratti vibhāyi. So cintesi ‘‘sace idāni otaritvā gamissāmi, disvā maṃ coroti gahessanti, rattibhāge gamissāmī’’ti. Athekaṃ viṭapaṃ abhiruhitvā nilīno acchi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. So rukkhato otaranto ekaṃ olambinisākhaṃ gahetvā tesaṃ ubhinnampi antare patiṭṭhāsi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ‘‘tesaṃ dvinnampi antarā rukkhato patito’’ti.Pāḷiyā atthaṃ na jānantīti attano gahaṇassa atthaṃ na jānanti.

647. In the seventh vagga, having become concealed—it seems that at night he went to a park, climbed a mango tree, and wandered about looking at mangoes from branch to branch. While he was doing that, the night dawned. He thought, "If I climb down and go now, they will see me and seize me as a thief. I will go in the night." Then he climbed up a branch and stayed hidden. This is said referring to that. As he was descending from the tree, grasping an overhanging branch, he stood between the two of them. This is said referring to that: "fallen from the tree between the two of them." Pāḷiyā atthaṃ na jānantī means they do not know the meaning of his being caught.

Jātakapāḷiyaṃ(jā. 1.4.33) pana ayaṃ gāthā –

In the Jātaka Pāḷi (Jā. 1.4.33), however, this verse:

‘‘Sabbamidaṃ carimaṃ kataṃ, ubho dhammaṃ na passare;

"All this is a deed done basely, neither remembers the Dhamma;
Both have fallen from their nature, both he who causes to recite the mantra;
And he who learns the mantra."

sabbamidaṃ carimaṃ katanti yaṃ amhehi tīhi janehi kataṃ, sabbamidaṃ kiccaṃ lāmakaṃ nimmariyādaṃ adhammikaṃ. Evaṃ attano corabhāvaṃ tesañca mantesu agāravaṃ garahitvā puna itare dveyeva garahanto‘‘ubho dhammaṃ na passare’’tiādimāha. Tatthaubhoti ime dvepi janā garukārārahaṃ porāṇakadhammaṃ na passanti, tatova dhammapakatito cutā. Dhammo hi paṭhamuppattivasenapakatināma. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

sabbamidaṃ carimaṃ kata means all this deed that has been done by us three persons is base, without limits, and unrighteous. Thus, having criticized his own thievish behavior and their disrespect for the mantras, and again blaming the other two, he said "ubho dhammaṃ na passare," etc. There, ubho means these two people do not see the ancient Dhamma worthy of respect, and therefore have fallen from the nature of Dhamma. For Dhamma, by way of its original arising, is called pakati (nature). And this was said:

‘‘Dhammo have pāturahosi pubbe,

"Dhamma, indeed, arose first,
Afterward, unrighteousness arose in the world" (Jā. 1.11.28);

Yo cāyanti yo ca ayaṃ nīce nisīditvā mante ajjhāpeti, yo ca ucce nisīditvā adhīyatīti.

Yo cāyaṃ means and he who sits down low and causes to recite the mantras, and he who sits high and learns them.

Sālīnanti ayaṃ gāthāpi –

Sālīna This verse also:

‘‘Sālīnaṃ odanaṃ bhuñje, suciṃ maṃsūpasecanaṃ;

"I eat rice with rice grown in the fields, pure, with meat sauce;
Therefore, I do not pursue this, the Dhamma pursued by the sages" (Jā. 1.4.34) –

sucinti paṇḍaraṃ parisuddhaṃ.Maṃsūpasecananti nānappakārāya maṃsavikatiyā sittaṃ bhuñje, bhuñjāmīti attho. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.

suci means white, pure. Maṃsūpasecana means eating what is sprinkled with various kinds of meat preparations. The rest is evident.

Dhiratthūti dhi atthu, nindā bhavatūti attho, garahāma taṃ mayanti vuttaṃ hoti.Laddhalābhoti dhanalābhaṃ yasalābhañca sandhāya vadati.Vinipātanahetunāti vinipātanassa hetubhāvena.Vutti nāma hotīti yathāvutto duvidhopi lābho apāyasaṃvattanikatāya samparāye vinipātanahetubhāvena pavattanato sampati adhammacaraṇena pavattanato ca vutti nāma hotīti attho.Evarūpā yā vuttīti evarūpā dhanalābhayasalābhasaṅkhātā yā vutti.Adhammacaraṇena vāti-saddo sampiṇḍanattho.Tvanti upayogatthe paccattavacanaṃ, taṃ icceva vā pāṭho.Asmāti pāsāṇādhivacanametaṃ.

Dhiratthū means "fie on it," may there be blame, meaning we criticize that. Laddhalābho speaks referring to gain of wealth and gain of fame. Vinipātanahetunā means by way of being the cause of ruin. Vutti nāma hotī means the livelihood, as stated, both kinds of gain, is called vutti, because it leads to ruin in the next world by way of turning to states of loss, and in this life by way of proceeding through unrighteous conduct. Evarūpā yā vuttī means whatever kind of livelihood consisting of gain of wealth and fame. Adhammacaraṇena vā—the word has the meaning of conjunction. Tva is the singular form of "you" in the sense of usage; or the reading is taṃ icceva vā. Asmā is a term for stone.

Pādukavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Pādukavagga is finished.

Sesaṃ uttānameva.

The rest is evident.

Sekhiyakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Sekhiyakaṇḍa is finished.

Adhikaraṇasamathesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgataṭṭhāneyeva dassayissāma.

What should be said regarding Adhikaraṇasamatha, we will show only in the places where it appears in the Aṭṭhakathā.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ

Thus ends the Bhikkhuvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā in the Sāratthadīpanī, commentary on the Vinaya Aṭṭhakathā, the Samantapāsādikā.

Bhikkhuvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Mahāvibhaṅga is finished.

Mahāvibhaṅgo niṭṭhito.

The Mahāvibhaṅga is finished.

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

1. Pārājikakaṇḍaṃ (bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)

1. Pārājikakaṇḍaṃ (Bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)

1. Paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

656.Bhikkhunīvibhaṅgeyoti yo bhikkhunīnaṃ vibhaṅgo.Migāranattāti majjhapadalopenetaṃ vuttanti āha‘‘migāramātuyā pana nattā hotī’’ti.Migāramātāti visākhāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Navakammādhiṭṭhāyikanti navakammasaṃvidhāyikaṃ. Byañjanānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo ākāro nātigambhīro, yathāsutaṃ dhāraṇameva tattha karaṇīyanti satiyā byāpāro adhiko, paññā tattha guṇībhūtāti vuttaṃ‘‘satipubbaṅgamāya paññāyā’’ti. Sati pubbaṅgamā etissātisatipubbaṅgamā. Pubbaṅgamatā cettha padhānabhāvo ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā’’tiādīsu viya. Atthaggahaṇe pana paññāya byāpāro adhiko paṭivijjhitabbassa atthassa atigambhīrattāti āha‘‘paññāpubbaṅgamāya satiyā’’ti.Ālasiyavirahitāti kosajjarahitā. Yathā aññā kusītā nisinnaṭṭhāne nisinnāva honti, ṭhitaṭṭhāne ṭhitāva, evaṃ ahutvā vipphārikena cittena sabbakiccaṃ nipphādeti.

656. In the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga, yo means the Vibhaṅga of the Bhikkhunīs. Migāranattā—this is said with the middle term omitted, he says, "but she is the granddaughter of Migāramātā." Migāramātā is a designation for Visākhā. Navakammādhiṭṭhāyika means administering new construction. The way in which the nuances should be penetrated is not too profound; there, retaining what is heard is what should be done. Because the activity of mindfulness is greater, and wisdom there is subordinate, it is said "satipubbaṅgamāya paññāyā". Satipubbaṅgamā means that mindfulness is foremost in her. Foremost here means being predominant, as in "manopubbaṅgamā," etc. In grasping the meaning, however, the activity of wisdom is greater, because the meaning to be penetrated is very profound, so he says "paññāpubbaṅgamāya satiyā". Ālasiyavirahitā means devoid of sloth. Just as other slothful ones remain sitting in the place where they are sitting, or standing in the place where they are standing, she is not like that, but accomplishes all duties with a vigorous mind.

satthuladdhūpasampadānāma. Sesā sabbāpisaṅghato laddhūpasampadā. Tāpi ekatoupasampannā ubhatoupasampannāti duvidhā. Tattha yā tā mahāpajāpatigotamiyā saddhiṃ nikkhantā pañcasatā sākiyāniyo, tāekatoupasampannābhikkhusaṅghato eva laddhūpasampadattā, itarāubhatoupasampannāubhatosaṅghe upasampannattā. Ehibhikkhunībhāvena upasampannā pana bhikkhuniyo na santi tāsaṃ tathā upasampadāya abhāvato. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘ehi bhikkhunī’’ti idha kasmā vuttanti? Desanāya sotapatitabhāvato. Ayañhi sotapatitatā nāma katthaci labbhamānassapi aggahaṇena hoti, yathā abhidhamme manodhātuniddese (dha. sa. 160-161) labbhamānampi jhānaṅgaṃ pañcaviññāṇasote patitāya na uddhaṭaṃ katthaci desanāya asambhavato, yathā tattheva vatthuniddese (dha. sa. 984 ādayo) hadayavatthu. Katthaci alabbhamānassapi gahaṇavasena yathāṭhitakappīniddese. Yathāha –

satthuladdhūpasampadā by name. All the rest are saṅghato laddhūpasampadā. These, too, are of two kinds: those ordained in one Saṅgha and those ordained in both. Of these, those five hundred Sakyan women who went forth with Mahāpajāpatī Gotamī, they are ekatoupasampannā because they received ordination only from the Bhikkhu Saṅgha; the others are ubhatoupasampannā because they were ordained in both Saṅghas. But there are no Bhikkhunīs ordained by way of "Ehi Bhikkhunī" because there was no such ordination for them. If so, why is "Ehi Bhikkhunī" said here? Because of falling into the state of Sotāpatti by way of the teaching. For this Sotāpattita is by not taking what can be obtained somewhere, as in the Abhidhamma, in the section on the mind-element (Dhs. 160-161), the jhāna factor that can be obtained is not extracted for what has fallen into the stream of five-sense consciousness, because it is not possible anywhere by way of the teaching, as there in the section on the base (Dhs. 984 ff), the heart-base. And as by way of taking what cannot be obtained anywhere, as in the section on the state of remaining, as it is:

‘‘Katamo ca puggalo ṭhitakappī? Ayañca puggalo sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno assa, kappassa ca uḍḍayhanavelā assa, neva tāva kappo uḍḍayheyya, yāvāyaṃ puggalo na sotāpattiphalaṃ sacchikareyyā’’ti (pu. pa. 17).

"And what person is one who remains in the same state? Here, a person has entered upon the realization of the fruit of stream-entry, and it is the time for the world-cycle to disintegrate; but the world-cycle would not disintegrate until this person realizes the fruit of stream-entry" (Pug. 17).

Evamidhāpi alabbhamānagahaṇavasena veditabbaṃ. Parikappavacanañhetaṃ ‘‘sace bhagavā bhikkhunībhāvayogyaṃ kañci mātugāmaṃ ‘ehi bhikkhunī’ti vadeyya, evaṃ bhikkhunībhāvo siyā’’ti.

Likewise here, it should be understood as taking what cannot be obtained. This is a statement of supposition: "If the Blessed One were to say to some woman suitable for becoming a Bhikkhunī, 'Ehi Bhikkhunī,' then there would be such a thing as becoming a Bhikkhunī."

Kasmā pana bhagavā evaṃ na kathesīti? Tathā katādhikārānaṃ abhāvato. Ye pana ‘‘anāsannāsannihitabhāvato’’ti kāraṇaṃ vatvā ‘‘bhikkhū eva hi satthu āsannacārino sadā sannihitā ca honti, tasmā te eva ‘ehibhikkhū’ti vattabbataṃ arahanti, na bhikkhuniyo’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ satthu āsannadūrabhāvassa bhabbābhabbabhāvasiddhattā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –

Why, then, did the Blessed One not say so? Because there were none who had done the deeds for it. Those, however, who state the reason as "because of being near and not near" and say "for Bhikkhus are always the Blessed One's close attendants and always near, therefore they alone deserve to be told 'Ehi Bhikkhu,' not Bhikkhunīs," that is merely their own opinion, because the Blessed One's being near and far establishes the possibility and impossibility. For this was said by the Blessed One—

‘‘Saṅghāṭikaṇṇe cepi me, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gahetvā piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandho assa pāde pādaṃ nikkhipanto, so ca hoti abhijjhālu kāmesu tibbasārāgo byāpannacitto paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo muṭṭhassati asampajāno asamāhito vibbhantacitto pākatindriyo, atha kho so ārakāva mayhaṃ, ahañca tassa. Taṃ kissa hetu? Dhammañhi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na passati, dhammaṃ apassanto na maṃ passati. Yojanasate cepi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vihareyya, so ca hoti anabhijjhālu kāmesu na tibbasārāgo abyāpannacitto appaduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo upaṭṭhitassati sampajāno samāhito ekaggacitto saṃvutindriyo, atha kho so santikeva mayhaṃ, ahañca tassa. Taṃ kissa hetu? Dhammañhi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu passati, dhammaṃ passanto maṃ passatī’’ti (itivu. 92).

"Even if a Bhikkhu, monks, were to follow me step by step, holding on to the edge of my Saṅghāṭi, and he were covetous, intensely lustful in sensual pleasures, with a mind of ill will, with corrupt thoughts, unmindful, without clear comprehension, unconcentrated, with a distracted mind, and uncontrolled faculties, then he is far away from me, and I am far away from him. Why is that? Because that Bhikkhu does not see the Dhamma, and not seeing the Dhamma, he does not see me. Even if a Bhikkhu were to live a hundred leagues away, and he were uncovetous, not intensely lustful in sensual pleasures, without a mind of ill will, with pure thoughts, with mindfulness established, with clear comprehension, concentrated, with a one-pointed mind, and controlled faculties, then he is close to me, and I am close to him. Why is that? Because that Bhikkhu sees the Dhamma, and seeing the Dhamma, he sees me" (Itivuttaka 92).

Tasmā akāraṇaṃ desato satthu āsannānāsannatā. Akatādhikāratāya pana bhikkhunīnaṃ ehibhikkhunūpasampadāya ayogyatā veditabbā.

Therefore, the Blessed One's being near and not near is not the reason. However, the unsuitability of Bhikkhunīs for Ehibhikkhunūpasampadā should be understood as due to not having done the deeds for it.

Yadi evaṃ yaṃ taṃ therīgāthāsu bhaddāya kuṇḍalakesāya vuttaṃ –

If so, what was said to Bhaddā Kuṇḍalakesā in the Therīgāthā—

‘‘Nihacca jāṇuṃ vanditvā, sammukhā añjaliṃ akaṃ;

"Having knelt down, having bowed, I did reverence face to face;
'Come, Bhaddā,' he said to me; that was my ordination" (Therīgā. 109);

apadānepi

and in the Apadāna

‘‘Āyācito tadā āha, ehi bhaddeti nāyako;

"When asked, the Leader said then, 'Come, Bhaddā!';
Then I was ordained, I saw a little water" (Apa. Therī 2.3.44);

aṭṭhakathāyaṃ(therīgā. aṭṭha. 111) ‘‘ehi bhadde bhikkhunupassayaṃ gantvā bhikkhunīnaṃ santike pabbaja upasampajjassūti maṃ avaca āṇāpesi, sā satthu āṇā mayhaṃ upasampadāya kāraṇattā upasampadā āsi ahosī’’ti.Apadānagāthāyampi evameva attho gahetabbo. Tasmā bhikkhunīnaṃ ehibhikkhunūpasampadā natthiyevāti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Yathā cetaṃ sotapatitavasena ‘‘ehi bhikkhunī’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘tīhi saraṇagamanehi upasampannāti bhikkhunī’’ti idampi sotapatitavaseneva vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ saraṇagamanūpasampadāyapi bhikkhunīnaṃ asambhavato.

in the Aṭṭhakathā (Therīgā. Aṭṭha. 111) "'Go to the Bhikkhunī monastery and be ordained near the Bhikkhunīs,' he said to me, he ordered. That order of the Blessed One was my ordination because it was the cause of ordination." In the Apadānagāthā, too, the meaning should be taken in the same way. Therefore, it must be concluded here that there is no such thing as Ehibhikkhunūpasampadā for Bhikkhunīs. Just as "Ehi Bhikkhunī" is said by way of Sotāpatti, likewise, "ordained by three refuges" is also said here by way of Sotāpatti, because Saraṇagamanūpasampadā is also not possible for Bhikkhunīs.

659.Bhikkhuvibhaṅge ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggaṃ sādiyeyyā’’ti avatvā ‘‘samāpajjeyyā’’ti vuttattā‘‘bhikkhu āpattiyā na kāretabbo’’ti vuttaṃ.Tabbahulanayenāti kiriyāsamuṭṭhānasseva bahulabhāvato. Dissati hi tabbahulanayena tabbohāro yathā ‘‘brāhmaṇagāmo’’ti. Brāhmaṇagāmepi hi antamaso rajakādīni pañca kulāni santi.ti kiriyāsamuṭṭhānatā.

659. Because in the Bhikkhuvibhaṅga, instead of saying "should approve of bodily contact," it is said "should engage in," it is said "a Bhikkhu should not be made to commit an offense." Tabbahulanayena because of the preponderance of the arising of the action itself. For that designation is seen based on its preponderance, as in "Brāhmaṇa village." For even in a Brāhmaṇa village there are at least five families such as washermen. means the arising of the action.

662.Tathevāti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena avassutoyevāti attho. Sesamettha uttānameva.

662. Tathevā means exactly so, by lust for bodily contact. The rest here is evident.

Paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpada is finished.

2. Dutiyapārājikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Pārājika Training Rule

666.Dutiye ‘‘kissa pana tvaṃ ayye jānaṃ pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpanna’’nti vacanato ‘‘uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo aṭṭha pārājikā dhammā’’tiādivacanato ca bhikkhunīvibhaṅgaṃ patvā sādhāraṇāni sikkhāpadāni bhikkhūnaṃ uppannavatthusmiṃyeva ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī chandaso methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyya, antamaso tiracchānagatenapi, pārājikā hoti asaṃvāsā’’tiādinā nayena savisesampi avisesampi mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā anukkamena padabhājanaṃ āpattibhedaṃ tikacchedaṃ anāpattivārañca anavasesaṃ vatvā vitthāresi. Saṅgītikārakehi pana asādhāraṇapaññattiyoyeva idha vitthāritāti veditabbā.

666. In the second, from the statement "Why, venerable, knowing the pārājika Dhamma, did you engage in it?" and from the statement beginning with "Venerables, the eight pārājika Dhammas have been recited," having reached the Bhikkhunī Vibhanga, the training rules that are common and those that are uncommon, in the same originating event of the bhikkhus, establishing the matrix (mātika) with specific and non-specific details in the manner of, "Whatever bhikkhunī should intentionally engage in sexual intercourse, even with an animal, is defeated and no longer in communion," and then sequentially explaining the terms, distinctions of offenses, threefold analysis (tikaccheda), and the cases of non-offense, without leaving anything unsaid, she elaborated. However, it should be understood that only the uncommon stipulation (asādhāraṇapaññatti) has been elaborated here by those who compiled the Saṅgīti.

‘‘idañca pārājikaṃ pacchā paññatta’’ntiādi. Yadi evaṃ imasmiṃ okāse kasmā ṭhapitanti āha‘‘purimena pana saddhiṃ yugaḷattā’’tiādi, purimena saddhiṃ ekasambandhabhāvato idha vuttanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Aṭṭhannaṃ pārājikānaṃ aññatara’’nti vacanato ca vajjapaṭicchādikaṃ yā paṭicchādeti, sāpi vajjapaṭicchādikāyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kiñcāpi vajjapaṭicchādanaṃ pemavasena hoti, tathāpi sikkhāpadavītikkamacittaṃ domanassitameva hotīti katvā‘‘dukkhavedana’’nti vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.

"And this pārājika was stipulated later," etc. If so, why was it established at this opportunity? He says, "Because it is paired with the former," etc., the meaning is that it is stated here because of its single connection with the former. And from the statement, "One of the eight pārājikas," it should be understood that she who conceals a fault is also only a fault-concealer. Although concealing a fault occurs due to affection, still, considering that the state of mind that transgresses the training rule is only displeasure (domanassa), "painful feeling (dukkhavedana)" is said. The rest here is self-explanatory.

Dutiyapārājikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Pārājika Training Rule is Finished.

668.Tatiyaṃ uttānatthameva.

668. The third is self-explanatory.

4. Catutthapārājikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Pārājika Training Rule

675.Catutthelokassādamittasanthavavasenāti lokassādasaṅkhātassa mittasanthavassa vasena. Vuttamevatthaṃ pariyāyantarena vibhāvetuṃ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggarāgenā’’ti vuttaṃ.

675. In the fourth: lokassādamittasanthavavasenā: "By way of intimacy and familiarity, which is called taste of the world (lokassāda)." To elucidate the same meaning by another method, "with lustful bodily contact" is said.

Tissitthiyo methunaṃ taṃ na seveti (pari. aṭṭha. 481) yā tisso itthiyo vuttā, tāsupi yaṃ taṃ methunaṃ nāma, taṃ na sevati.Tayo puriseti tayo purisepi upagantvā methunaṃ na sevati.Tayo ca anariyapaṇḍaketi ubhatobyañjanasaṅkhāte tayo anariye, tayo ca paṇḍaketi imepi cha jane upagantvā methunaṃ na sevati.Na cācare methunaṃ byañjanasminti anulomapārājikavasenapi attano nimitte methunaṃ nācarati.Chejjaṃ siyā methunadhammapaccayāti siyā methunadhammapaccayā pārājikanti ayaṃ pañho aṭṭhavatthukaṃva sandhāya vutto. Tassā hi methunadhammassa pubbabhāgakāyasaṃsaggaṃ āpajjituṃ vāyamantiyā methunadhammapaccayā chejjaṃ hoti. Chedoyeva chejjaṃ.

Tissitthiyo methunaṃ taṃ na seve: "She should not engage in that sexual intercourse with the three women" (pari. aṭṭha. 481) Those three women that were mentioned, she does not engage in that which is called sexual intercourse. Tayo purise: "Three men", approaching three men, she does not engage in sexual intercourse. Tayo ca anariyapaṇḍake: "Three not-noble neuters," approaching three not-noble ones, designated as उभतोब्यञ्जन (ubhatobyañjana, those with both sets of sex organs), and three eunuchs (paṇḍaka), she does not engage in sexual intercourse approaching these six people. Na cācare methunaṃ byañjanasmiṃ: "And she does not practice sexual intercourse on her sex organ (byañjana)" even in the manner of anuloma-pārājika. Chejjaṃ siyā methunadhammapaccayā: "There would be severing (chejja) because of sexual activity," this question is said regarding the eight-based case (aṭṭhavatthukaṃ). For her, while striving to incur bodily contact, which is the preliminary action of sexual activity, there is severing because of sexual activity. Severing is only severing (chedoyeva chejjaṃ).

Methunadhammassa pubbabhāgattāti iminā methunadhammassa pubbabhāgabhūto kāyasaṃsaggoyeva tatthamethunadhamma-saddena vutto, na dvayaṃdvayasamāpattīti dīpeti.Vaṇṇāvaṇṇoti dvīhi sukkavissaṭṭhi vuttā.Gamanuppādananti sañcarittaṃ.Sabbapadesūti ‘‘saṅghāṭikaṇṇaggahaṇaṃ sādiyeyyā’’tiādīsu. Sesamettha uttānameva. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgo, saussāhatā, aṭṭhamassa vatthussa pūraṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

Methunadhammassa pubbabhāgattā: "Because of being preliminary to sexual activity," by this, it shows that only bodily contact, which is preliminary to sexual activity, is called "sexual activity (methunadhamma)" there, not dual-dual attainment (dvayaṃdvayasamāpattī). Vaṇṇāvaṇṇo: "Praise or dispraise" refers to the two kinds of emission of semen. Gamanuppādana: "Producing movement" refers to the roaming. Sabbapadesū: "In all the locations," such as, "she approves of the taking of the edge of the outer robe or the ear," etc. The rest here is self-explanatory. Lustful bodily contact, enthusiasm, and fulfillment of the eighth base - these three are its factors (aṅgāni) here.

Catutthapārājikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Fourth Pārājika Training Rule is Finished.

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅge pārājikakaṇḍavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Pārājika Section in the Bhikkhunī Vibhanga is Finished.

Pārājikakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Pārājika Section is Finished.

2. Saṅghādisesakaṇḍaṃ (bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)

2. Saṅghādisesa Section (Explanation of the Bhikkhunī Vibhanga)

1. Paṭhamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the First Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

679.Saṅghādisesakaṇḍassa paṭhamasikkhāpadedvīsu janesūti aḍḍakārakesu dvīsu janesu.Yo kocīti tesuyeva dvīsu yo koci, añño vā tehi āṇatto.Dutiyassa ārocetīti etthāpi dvīsu janesu yassa kassaci dutiyassa kathaṃ yo koci ārocetīti evamattho gahetabboti āha‘‘dutiyassa ārocetīti etthāpi eseva nayo’’ti.Gatigatanti cirakālapavattaṃ.

679. In the first training rule of the Saṅghādisesa Section: dvīsu janesū: "Among two people," among two people who are agents (aḍḍakāraka). Yo kocī: "Whoever," whoever among those two, or someone else instructed by them. Dutiyassa ārocetī: "Informs a second," here too, it should be understood that the meaning is that whoever informs a second, whomever of the two people, in this way. He says, "dutiyassa ārocetīti etthāpi eseva nayo": "The same method applies here as well in 'informs a second.'" Gatigata: "Gone, gone" means long-standing.

Āpattīti āpajjanaṃ.Saha vatthujjhācārāti vatthuvītikkamena saha. Sahayoge karaṇavacanappasaṅge idaṃ nissakkavacanaṃ.Yanti yaṃ dhammaṃ.Nissāretīti āpannaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghamhā nissāreti. Hetumhi cāyaṃ kattuvohāro. Nissāraṇahetubhūto hi dhammonissāraṇīyoti vutto. Gīvāyeva hoti, na pārājikaṃ anāṇattiyā gahitattā. Yathā dāsadāsīvāpīādīni sampaṭicchituṃ na vaṭṭati, evaṃ tesaṃ atthāya aḍḍakaraṇampi na vaṭṭatīti āha‘‘ayaṃ akappiyaaḍḍo nāma, na vaṭṭatī’’ti.

Āpattī: "Offense" means incurring the offense. Saha vatthujjhācārā: "Together with transgression of the case," this word is નિસ્સક્ક (nissakka, without doubt) due to the context of instrumentality along with combination. Yaṃ: "Which" refers to the Dhamma. Nissāretī: "Expels," expels the offending bhikkhunī from the Saṅgha. This is a subjective usage in the sense of cause. For the Dhamma that is the cause of expulsion is called nissāraṇīyo (nissāraṇīyo, worthy of expulsion). It is only a reprimand (gīvā), not a pārājika, because it was taken without instruction. Just as it is not proper to accept slaves, female slaves, ponds, etc., so it is not proper to act as an agent for their sake. He says, "ayaṃ akappiyaaḍḍo nāma, na vaṭṭatī": "This is called an unallowable agent; it is not proper."

Ettha ca sace adhikaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā ‘‘amhākaṃ eso dāso, dāsī, vāpī, khettaṃ, ārāmo, ārāmavatthu, gāvo, ajā, kukkuṭā’’tiādinā voharati, akappiyaṃ. ‘‘Ayaṃ amhākaṃ ārāmiko, ayaṃ vāpī itthannāmena saṅghassa bhaṇḍadhovanatthāya dinnā, ito khettato ārāmato uppajjanakacatupaccayā ito gāvito mahiṃsito ajāto uppajjanakagorasā itthannāmena saṅghassa dinnāti pucchite vā apucchite vā vattuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Anākaḍḍhitāya aḍḍakaraṇaṃ, aḍḍapariyosānanti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

And here, if, having gone to the place of the legal question, she says, "This is our slave, female slave, pond, field, garden, garden site, cows, goats, chickens," etc., it is unallowable. "This is our gardener; this pond was given by such-and-such a name to the Saṅgha for washing utensils; the four requisites arising from this field, from this garden, the dairy products arising from these cows, buffaloes, goats, were given to the Saṅgha by such-and-such a name for" - it is proper to say this when asked or unasked. The rest here is self-explanatory. Acting as an agent without being requested, and the completion of acting as an agent - these two are its factors (aṅgāni) here.

Paṭhamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Saṅghādisesa Training Rule is Finished.

2. Dutiyasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

683.Dutiyemallagaṇabhaṭiputtagaṇādikantiādīsumallagaṇonāma nārāyanabhattiko tattha tattha pānīyaṭṭhapanapokkharaṇīkhaṇanādipuññakammakārako gaṇo,bhaṭiputtagaṇonāma kumārabhattikagaṇo.Dhammagaṇoti sāsanabhattigaṇo anekappakārapuññakammakārakagaṇo vuccati.Gandhikaseṇīti anekappakārasugandhivikatikārako gaṇo.Dussikaseṇīti pesakārakagaṇo.Kappagatikanti kappiyabhāvaṃ gataṃ.

683. In the second: mallagaṇabhaṭiputtagaṇādika: In mallagaṇa etc. mallagaṇo means a group devoted to Narayana, doing meritorious deeds like establishing water-stations and digging ponds here and there. bhaṭiputtagaṇo means a group devoted to Kumara. Dhammagaṇo means a group devoted to the Teaching, a group doing various kinds of meritorious deeds is called. Gandhikaseṇī means a group making various kinds of fragrant products. Dussikaseṇī means a group of tailors. Kappagatika: Having gone to allowableness.

Vuṭṭhāpentiyāti upasampādentiyā. ‘‘Coriṃ vuttanayena anāpucchā pabbājentiyā dukkaṭa’’nti vadanti. Paṇṇattiṃ ajānantā ariyāpi vuṭṭhāpentīti vā kammavācāpariyosāne āpattikkhaṇe vipākābyākatasamaṅgitāvasena vā‘‘ticitta’’nti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Coritā, corisaññā, aññatra anuññātakāraṇā vuṭṭhāpananti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

Vuṭṭhāpentiyā: "Ordaining," ordaining. "If she ordains a stolen bhikkhunī without asking permission in the manner stated above, there is a dukkata offense," they say. Because even noble ones ordain without knowing the rule, or because, at the end of the kammavācā, at the moment of offense, due to the harmonious agreement of the resultantly indeterminate, "ticitta (ticitta, threefold mind)" is said, it should be understood. The rest here is self-explanatory. Stolen bhikkhunī, perception of stolen bhikkhunī, ordination apart from a permitted reason - these three are its factors (aṅgāni) here.

Dutiyasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Saṅghādisesa Training Rule is Finished.

3. Tatiyasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Third Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

692.Tatiyeparikkhepaṃ atikkāmentiyāti sakagāmato aññassa gāmassa parikkhepaṃ atikkāmentiyā. ‘‘Gāmantaraṃ gaccheyyā’’ti hi vacanato aññassa gāmassa parikkhepaṃ atikkāmentiyā eva āpatti, na sakagāmassa. Añño hi gāmo gāmantaraṃ.Aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāranti etthaupacāra-saddena gharūpacārato paṭhamaleḍḍupātasaṅkhātaṃ parikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ gahitaṃ, na tato dutiyaleḍḍupātasaṅkhāto upacāroti āha‘‘parikkhepārahaṭṭhāna’’nti. Teneva pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘upacāraṃ atikkāmentiyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aññathā yathā vikālagāmappavisanasikkhāpade ‘‘parikkhittassa gāmassa parikkhepaṃ atikkamantassa, aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāraṃ okkamantassā’’ti (pāci. 513) vuttaṃ, evamidhāpi ‘‘parikkhittassa gāmassa parikkhepaṃ atikkāmentiyā aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāraṃ okkamantiyā’’ti vadeyya. Saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vibhajitvā dassento‘‘apicetthā’’tiādimāha.Vihārassacatugāmasādhāraṇattāti iminā ‘‘vihārato ekaṃ gāmaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti ettha kāraṇamāha. Vihārassa catugāmasādhāraṇattāyeva hi catūsu gāmesu yaṃkiñci ekaṃ gāmaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati.

692. In the third: parikkhepaṃ atikkāmentiyā: "Crossing the boundary (parikkhepa)," crossing the boundary of another village from one's own village. For from the statement "she should go to another village (gāmantaraṃ gaccheyyā)," there is an offense only when crossing the boundary of another village, not of one's own village. For another village is another village (gāmantaraṃ). Aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāra: "The vicinity of a village without a boundary," here, by the word upacāra (upacāra, vicinity), the place fit for a boundary (parikkhepārahaṭṭhāna) is taken, counted as the first throw of a clod of earth from the house's vicinity, not the vicinity counted as the second throw of a clod of earth from there. He says, "parikkhepārahaṭṭhāna": "The place fit for a boundary." Therefore, in the Pāḷi, "crossing the vicinity (upacāraṃ atikkāmentiyā)" is said. Otherwise, just as in the training rule of entering a village at the wrong time, "for one crossing the boundary of a village with a boundary, for one trespassing on the vicinity of a village without a boundary" (pāci. 513) is said, so here too, it should say, "for one crossing the boundary of a village with a boundary, for one trespassing on the vicinity of a village without a boundary." While showing the meaning stated concisely by dividing it, he says, "apicetthā": "Moreover, here," etc. Vihārassa catugāmasādhāraṇattā: "Because the monastery is common to four villages," by this, he states the reason in "it is proper to go to one village from the monastery." For only because the monastery is common to four villages, is it proper to go to any one village among the four villages.

Yatthāti yassaṃ nadiyaṃ. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ uttārentiyā āpatti thullaccayassa, dutiyaṃ pādaṃ uttārentiyā āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti vacanato nadiṃ otaritvā padasā uttarantiyā eva āpattīti āha‘‘setunā gacchati, anāpattī’’tiādi.Paratīrameva akkamantiyā anāpattīti nadiṃ anotaritvā yānanāvādīsu aññatarena gantvā paratīrameva akkamantiyā anāpatti.Ubhayatīresu vicaranti, vaṭṭatīti idaṃ asatipi nadīpāragamane upari vakkhamānassa vinicchayassa phalamattadassanatthaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.Orimatīrameva āgacchati, āpattīti paratīraṃ gantukāmatāya otiṇṇattā vuttaṃ.Tameva tīranti tameva orimatīraṃ.Anāpattīti paratīraṃ gantukāmatāya abhāvato anāpatti.

Yatthā: "Where" means in which river. "There is an offense of thullaccaya when lifting the first foot, there is an offense of saṅghādisesa when lifting the second foot," from this statement, there is an offense only for one crossing the river and going to the other side on foot. He says, "setunā gacchati, anāpattī": "She goes by a bridge; there is no offense," etc. Paratīrameva akkamantiyā anāpattī: "There is no offense for one stepping only on the far bank," there is no offense for one going by something else like a boat, without crossing the river, and stepping only on the far bank. Ubhayatīresu vicaranti, vaṭṭatī: "It is proper to wander on both banks," it should be understood that this is said to show merely the result of the decision to be stated above, even in the absence of crossing the river. Orimatīrameva āgacchati, āpattī: "She comes only to this bank; there is an offense," is said because of having descended intending to go to the far bank. Tameva tīra: "That very bank," that very near bank. Anāpattī: "There is no offense" because of the absence of intention to go to the far bank.

Tādise araññeti ‘‘bahiindakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇe araññe. Atha tādisasseva araññassa gahitabhāvo kathaṃ viññāyatīti āha‘‘tenevā’’tiādi. Iminā hi aṭṭhakathāvacanena īdisepi gāmasamīpe dassanūpacāre vijahite satipi savanūpacāre āpatti hotīti viññāyati. Maggamūḷhā uccāsaddaṃ karontīti āha‘‘maggamūḷhasaddena viyā’’ti.Saddāyantiyāti saddaṃ karontiyā.Purimāyoti puretaraṃ gacchantiyo.Aññaṃ maggaṃ gaṇhātīti maggamūḷhattā, na ohātuṃ, tasmā dvinnampi anāpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Anantarāyena ekabhāvo, gāmantaragamanādīsu aññataratāpajjanaṃ, āpadāya abhāvoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

Tādise araññe: "In such a forest," in a forest with the characteristics stated as "everything beyond the outer post is forest" (vibha. 529). But how is it known that the forest is of that kind? He says, "tenevā": "Therefore," etc. By this statement of the commentary, it is known that even in such a place near the village, if the sight-range is abandoned, there is an offense if the sound-range is present. Those who are lost make a loud noise, he says, "maggamūḷhasaddena viyā": "Like the sound of being lost." Saddāyantiyā: "Making a sound." Purimāyo: "Those going ahead." Aññaṃ maggaṃ gaṇhātī: "She takes another path" because of being lost, not for abandoning; therefore, there is no offense for either. The rest here is self-explanatory. Uninterrupted singleness, incurring one of the going to another village, etc., absence of danger - these three are its factors (aṅgāni) here.

Tatiyasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Third Saṅghādisesa Training Rule is Finished.

4. Catutthasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

694.Catutthekārakagaṇassāti ukkhepanīyakammakārakagaṇassa. Tecattālīsappabhedaṃ vattaṃ khandhake āvi bhavissati.Netthāravatteti nittharaṇahetumhi vatte. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Dhammena kammena ukkhittatā, aññatra anuññātakāraṇā osāraṇanti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

694. In the fourth: kārakagaṇassā: "Of the group that does the deed," of the group that does the deed of suspension (ukkhepanīyakamma). The forty-three divisions of the duty will become clear in the Khandhaka. Netthāravatte: "In the duty for extrication," in the duty that is the cause of extrication. The rest is self-explanatory. Having been suspended by Dhamma, by the deed, lifting up apart from a permitted reason - these two are its factors (aṅgāni) here.

Catutthasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Fourth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule is Finished.

5. Pañcamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Fifth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

701.Pañcameetaṃ na vuttanti ‘‘bhikkhuniyā avassutabhāvo daṭṭhabbo’’ti etaṃ niyamanaṃ na vuttaṃ.Tanti taṃ niyametvā avacanaṃ.Pāḷiyā sametīti ‘‘ekato avassute’’ti avisesetvā vuttapāḷiyā ‘‘anavassutoti jānantī paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti imāya ca pāḷiyā sameti. Yadi hi puggalassa avassutabhāvo nappamāṇaṃ, kiṃ ‘‘anavassutoti jānantī’’ti iminā vacanena, ‘‘anāpatti ubhatoanavassutā honti, anavassutā paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti ettakameva vattabbaṃ siyā.‘‘Ubhatoanavassutā honti, anavassutoti jānantī paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti imassa ca anāpattivārassa ayamattho. Ubho ce anavassutā, sabbathāpi anāpatti. Atha bhikkhunī anavassutā samānā avassutampi ‘‘anavassuto’’ti saññāya tassa hatthato paṭiggaṇhāti, evampi anāpatti. Atha sayaṃ anavassutāpi aññaṃ anavassutaṃ vā avassutaṃ vā ‘‘avassuto’’ti jānāti, dukkaṭameva. Vuttañhetaṃ anantarasikkhāpade ‘‘kissa tvaṃ ayye na paṭiggaṇhāsīti. Avassutā ayyeti. Tvaṃ pana ayye avassutāti. Nāhaṃ ayye avassutā’’ti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Udakadantaponato aññaṃ ajjhoharaṇīyaṃ, ubhatoavassutatā, sahatthā gahaṇaṃ, ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

701. In the fifth: etaṃ na vutta: "This was not said," this regulation that "the state of being unwashed of the bhikkhunī should be seen" was not said. Taṃ: "That" means that non-saying after regulating. Pāḷiyā sametī: "It agrees with the Pāḷi," it agrees with the Pāḷi stated without distinction in "unwashed together," and with this Pāḷi in "knowing that she is unwashed, she accepts." For if the state of being unwashed of a person is not a measure, what is the use of this statement, "knowing that she is unwashed?" Only so much would have to be said: "If both are unwashed, there is no offense; she accepts knowing that she is unwashed." "Ubhatoanavassutā honti, anavassutoti jānantī paṭiggaṇhātī," "If both are unwashed, there is no offense; she accepts knowing that she is unwashed" this is the meaning of this case of non-offense. If both are unwashed, there is no offense in any way. But if a bhikkhunī, being unwashed, accepts even from one who is washed, with the perception "he is unwashed," even then there is no offense. But even if she herself is unwashed, she knows another who is unwashed or washed to be "washed," there is only a dukkata. For this was said in the immediately preceding training rule, "Why, venerable, do you not accept? She is washed, venerable. Are you, venerable, washed? I am not washed, venerable." The rest here is self-explanatory. Anything consumable other than water and a toothpick, both being unwashed, taking with one's own hand, consuming - these four are its factors (aṅgāni) here.

Pañcamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Fifth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule is Finished.

6. Chaṭṭhasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Sixth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

705.Chaṭṭhe parivāragāthāya ayamattho.Na deti na paṭiggaṇhātīti (pari. aṭṭha. 481) na uyyojikā deti, nāpi uyyojitā tassā hatthato gaṇhāti.Paṭiggaho tena na vijjatīti teneva kāraṇena uyyojikāya hatthato uyyojitāya paṭiggaho na vijjati.Āpajjati garukanti evaṃ santepi avassutassa hatthato piṇḍaggahaṇe uyyojentī saṅghādisesāpattiṃ āpajjati.Tañca paribhogapaccayāti tañca pana āpattiṃ āpajjamānā tassā uyyojitāya paribhogapaccayā āpajjati. Tassā hi bhojanapariyosāne uyyojikāya saṅghādiseso hoti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Manussapurisatā, aññatra anuññātakāraṇā khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ gahetvā bhuñjāti uyyojanā, tena vacanena gahetvā itarissā bhojanapariyosānanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

705. In the sixth Parivara verse, this is the meaning: "She neither gives nor receives" (pari. aṭṭha. 481) means the instigator does not give, nor does the instigated take from her hand. "Therefore, there is no acceptance" means that for this very reason, there is no acceptance by the instigated from the hand of the instigator. "She incurs a grave offense" means even in such a situation, if she takes alms from the hand of one who has not stopped, the instigator incurs a Saṅghādisesa offense. "And that through the means of use" means that in incurring that offense, she incurs it through the means of use by the one who is being instigated. For at the end of the meal of the one being instigated, the instigator incurs a Saṅghādisesa. The rest here is self-explanatory. Being a human being, being male, taking and consuming chewable or edible things apart from a permitted reason constitutes instigation; taking by that statement, and the end of the other's meal: these are the three factors involved here.

Chaṭṭhasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Sixth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule is complete.

7. Sattamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Seventh Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

709.Sattamekinnumāva samaṇiyoti kiṃ nu imā eva samaṇiyo.Tāsāhanti tāsaṃ ahaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva.

709. In the seventh, "Are these the only nuns?" means: "Are these the only nuns?" "I am of them" means: "I am of them." The rest is self-explanatory.

Sattamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Seventh Saṅghādisesa Training Rule is complete.

715.Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānatthameva.

715. The eighth is self-explanatory.

9. Navamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Ninth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule

721.Navamevajjappaṭicchādikāti khuddānukhuddakavajjassa paṭicchādikā. Samanubhāsanakammakāle cettha dve tisso ekato samanubhāsitabbā.

721. In the ninth, "Covering up faults" means covering up minor and insignificant faults. During the act of formal admonishment, two or three should be admonished together.

Navamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Ninth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule is complete.

727.Dasamaṃ uttānatthameva.

727. The tenth is self-explanatory.

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅge saṅghādisesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Saṅghādisesa offenses in the Bhikkhunī Vibhaṅga is complete.

Saṅghādisesakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Saṅghādisesa Section is complete.

3. Nissaggiyakaṇḍaṃ (bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)

3. The Nissaggiya Section (Explanation of the Bhikkhunī Vibhaṅga)

733.Nissaggiyesu paṭhamaṃ uttānameva.

733. In the Nissaggiya section, the first is self-explanatory.

740.Dutiye‘‘ayyāya dammīti evaṃ paṭiladdhanti nissaṭṭhapaṭiladdhaṃ. Tenevamātikāṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘nissaṭṭhaṃ paṭilabhitvāpi yathādāneyeva upanetabba’’nti vuttaṃ.Yathādāneyeva upanetabbanti yathā dāyakena dinnaṃ, tathā upanetabbaṃ, akālacīvarapakkheyeva ṭhapetabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha ca bhājāpitāya laddhacīvarameva nissaggiyaṃ hoti, taṃ vinayakammaṃ katvāpi attanā na labhati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Akālacīvaratā, tathāsaññitā, kālacīvaranti adhiṭṭhāya lesena bhājāpanaṃ, paṭilābhoti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

740. In the second, "Having received it back, saying, 'I give it to the Lady'" means having relinquished it and received it back. Therefore, in the Mātikā Aṭṭhakathā also, it is said, "Even having received back what was relinquished, it should be presented just as it was given." "It should be presented just as it was given" means it should be presented just as it was given by the donor, it should be kept only in the period for unseasonal robes. Here, only the robe received through allocation becomes Nissaggiya; even after performing the Vinaya act, one does not obtain it oneself. The rest here is self-explanatory. Being an unseasonal robe, perceiving it as such, designating a seasonal robe through deceitful means, and receiving it back: these are the four factors involved here.

743.Tatiyemetanti me etaṃ. Sakasaññāya gahitattā pācittiyaṃ dukkaṭañca vuttaṃ. Itarathā bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbaṃ. Upasampannatā, parivattitacīvarassa vikappanupagatā, sakasaññāya acchindanaṃ vā acchindāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

743. In the third, "This is mine" means this is mine. Because it was taken with personal recognition, a Pācittiya and a Dukkaṭa are stated. Otherwise, it should be made with the price of the goods. Being ordained, the converted robe not being subject to Vikalpa, intentionally taking or causing to take: these are the three factors involved here.

748-752.Catuttheāhaṭasappiṃ datvāti attano datvā.Yamakaṃ pacitabbanti sappiñca telañca ekato katvā pacitabbaṃ. Lesena gahetukāmatā, aññassa viññāpanaṃ, paṭilābhoti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

748-752. In the fourth, "Having given brought ghee" means having given her own. "Yamaka should be cooked" means ghee and oil should be mixed together and cooked. Intending to take through deceitful means, informing another, and receiving it: these are the three factors involved here.

753.Pañcameti thullanandā.Ayanti ayaṃ sikkhamānā.Cetāpetvāti jānāpetvā icceva atthoti idha vuttaṃ,mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. aññacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) pana ‘‘aññaṃ cetāpetvāti attano kappiyabhaṇḍena idaṃ nāma āharāti aññaṃ parivattāpetvā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā ‘‘cetāpetvā’’ti imassa parivattāpetvātipi attho daṭṭhabbo.Aññaṃ cetāpeyyāti ‘‘evaṃ me idaṃ datvā aññampi āharissatī’’ti maññamānā ‘‘na me iminā attho, idaṃ nāma me āharā’’ti tato aññaṃ cetāpeyya.

753. In the fifth, "She" means Thullanandā. "This one" means this Sikkhamānā. "Having it made known means just making it known is the meaning" is said here, but in the Mātikā Aṭṭhakathā (Kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. explanation of the Aññacetāpana Sikkhaāpada), it is said, "Having another make it known means having another exchange it, saying, 'Bring this with your allowable goods.'" Therefore, the meaning of "having it made known" should also be seen as "having it exchanged." "She should have another make it known" means thinking, "Having given this to me, she will also bring another," she should have another make it known, saying, "I have no need of this; bring me that."

758.Chaṭṭhedhammakiccanti puññakammaṃ.Pāvārikassāti dussavāṇijakassa. Yāya cetāpitaṃ, tassāyeva nissaggiyaṃ nissaṭṭhapaṭilābho ca, tasmā tāya bhikkhuniyā nissaṭṭhaṃ paṭilabhitvā yathādāne upanetabbaṃ, na attanā gahetabbaṃ.Aññassatthāyāti cīvarādīsu aññatarassatthāya.Aññuddisikenāti purimassevatthadīpanaṃ.Parikkhārenāti kappiyabhaṇḍena.

758. In the sixth, "Religious duty" means meritorious action. "To the Pāvārika" means to the cloth merchant. To whomever it was made known, for that one alone is there Nissaggiya and relinquishment and return; therefore, that Bhikkhunī, having relinquished it and received it back, should present it just as it was given, not take it herself. "For the sake of another" means for the sake of one of the robes, etc. "By one designated for another" means an explanation of the meaning for the former itself. "With requisites" means with allowable goods.

764.Sattamesayaṃ yācitakenāti sayaṃ yācitakenāpīti attho. Teneva pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘tena ca parikkhārena sayampi yācitvā’’ti vuttaṃ, tatoyevamātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘saññācikenāti sayaṃ yācitakenāpī’’ti attho vutto.

764. In the seventh, "Even by what is requested oneself" means even by what is requested oneself. Therefore, in the Pāḷi, it is said, "And with that requisite, even having requested it oneself," and therefore in the Mātikā Aṭṭhakathā, the meaning "by what is designated means even by what is requested oneself" is stated.

768-773.Aṭṭhamanavamadasamāni uttānatthāneva.

768-773. The eighth, ninth, and tenth are self-explanatory.

784.Ekādasame yasmā pavāritaṭṭhāne viññatti nāma na paṭisedhetabbā, tasmā bhagavā dhammanimantanavasena pavāritaṭṭhāne ‘‘vadeyyāsi yenattho’’ti vuttāya ‘‘catukkaṃsaparamaṃ viññāpetabba’’nti paricchedaṃ dassetīti veditabbaṃ. Tenevamātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. garupāvuraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘cetāpetabbanti ṭhapetvā sahadhammike ca ñātakapavārite ca aññena kismiñcideva guṇe parituṭṭhena vadeyyāsi yenatthoti vuttāya viññāpetabba’’nti vuttaṃ.

784. In the eleventh, since in a place where invitation has been given, a request should not be refused, therefore the Blessed One, in the place where invitation has been given in the context of a Dhamma invitation, shows the limit that "one may speak if there is a need," indicating that "at most, it should be requested up to four Kaṃsas." Therefore, in the Mātikā Aṭṭhakathā (Kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. explanation of the Garupāvuraṇa Sikkhaāpada), it is said, "Having it made known means, setting aside co-religionists and relatives who have invited, and being content with some other quality, one may speak if there is a need, and it should be requested."

788.Dvādasamaṃ uttānatthameva.

788. The twelfth is self-explanatory.

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅge nissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rules in the Bhikkhunī Vibhaṅga is complete.

Nissaggiyakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Nissaggiya Section is complete.

4. Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ (bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)

4. The Pācittiya Section (Explanation of the Bhikkhunī Vibhaṅga)

1. Lasuṇavaggavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Lasuṇa Vagga

793-797.Pācittiyesu lasuṇavaggassa paṭhame jātiṃ saratītijātissaro. Sabhāvenevāti sūpasampākādiṃ vināva.Badarasāḷavaṃnāma badaraphalāni sukkhāpetvā cuṇṇetvā kattabbā khādanīyavikati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Āmakalasuṇañceva ajjhoharaṇañcāti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

793-797. In the Pācittiya section, in the first of the Lasuṇa Vagga, remembering the birth means remembering the birth. By nature itself means even without Sūpasampākādi. Badarasāḷava is a chewable modification made by drying and powdering jujube fruits. The rest here is self-explanatory. And consuming raw garlic: these are the two factors involved here.

798-802.Dutiyatatiyacatutthāni uttānatthāneva.

798-802. The second, third, and fourth are self-explanatory.

812.Pañcamedvinnaṃ pabbānaṃ uparīti ettha dvinnaṃ aṅgulīnaṃ saha pavesane ekekāya aṅguliyā ekekaṃ pabbaṃ katvā dvinnaṃ pabbānaṃ upari. Ekaṅgulipavesane dvinnaṃ pabbānaṃ upari na vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.Mahāpaccariyampiayameva nayo dassito. Udakasuddhipaccayena pana satipi phassasādiyane yathāvuttaparicchede anāpatti.

812. In the fifth, "Above two joints" means, here, when inserting two fingers together, making one joint for each finger, it is above two joints. It should be understood that it is not proper above two joints if one finger is inserted. In the Mahāpaccari also, this same method is shown. However, with the reason of purifying water, even if there is enjoyment of contact, there is no offense within the stated limit.

815-817.Chaṭṭheāsumbhitvāti pātetvā.Dadhimatthūti dadhimaṇḍaṃ dadhimhi pasannodakaṃ. Bhuñjantassa bhikkhuno hatthapāse ṭhānaṃ, pānīyassa vā vidhūpanassa vā gahaṇanti imāni panettha dve aṅgāni.

815-817. In the sixth, "Having thrown it down" means having dropped it. "Dadhimatthu" means the cream of yogurt, the clear water in yogurt. The place near the hand of a Bhikkhu who is eating, or taking drinking water or a fan: these are the two factors involved here.

822.Sattame ‘‘paṭiggaṇhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti idaṃ pubbapayogadukkaṭassa nidassanamattanti āha‘‘na kevalaṃ paṭiggahaṇeyeva hotī’’tiādi.Pamāṇanti pācittiyāpattiyā pamāṇaṃ. Imehiyeva dvīhi pācittiyaṃ hoti, nāññehi bhajjanādīhīti attho. Vuttamevatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ‘‘tasmā’’tiādimāha.Taṃ pubbāparaviruddhanti punapi vuttanti vuttavādaṃ sandhāyāha. Aññāya viññattiyā laddhampi hi anāṇattiyā viññattiyā imissā aviññattiyā laddhapakkhaṃ bhajati, tasmā heṭṭhā aviññattiyā laddhe karaṇakārāpanesu visesaṃ avatvā idha visesavacanaṃ pubbāparaviruddhaṃ. Yadi cettha karaṇe pācittiyaṃ, kārāpanepi pācittiyeneva bhavitabbaṃ. Atha kārāpane dukkaṭaṃ, karaṇepi dukkaṭeneva bhavitabbaṃ. Na hi karaṇe vā kārāpane vā viseso atthi, tasmā aññāya viññattiyā laddhaṃ sayaṃ bhajjanādīni katvāpi kārāpetvāpi bhuñjantiyā dukkaṭamevāti idamettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ.Avisesena vuttanti karaṇakārāpanānaṃ sāmaññato vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ aññatarassa viññāpanaṃ vā viññāpāpanaṃ vā, paṭilābho, bhajjanādīni katvā vā kāretvā vā ajjhoharaṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

822. In the seventh, the statement "she accepts, there is an offense of Dukkaṭa" is the conclusion of the initial effort Dukkaṭa, therefore he says "It is not only in acceptance that it occurs," etc. "Measure" means the measure of the Pācittiya offense. It is with these two alone that there is a Pācittiya, not with other activities such as cooking, etc., is the meaning. To show the meaning that was stated in detail, he says "Therefore," etc. "That is contradictory to what was said earlier" means he says in reference to repeating what was said. For what is obtained by another request follows the side of what is obtained by this non-request in the absence of authorization, therefore, below, without stating a distinction in the actions of doing and having done in what is obtained by non-request, stating a distinction here is contradictory to what was said earlier. If here, there is a Pācittiya in doing, there should also be a Pācittiya in having done. If there is a Dukkaṭa in having done, there should also be a Dukkaṭa in doing. For there is no distinction in doing or having done, therefore the conclusion here is that even if one enjoys what is obtained by another request by doing or having done the cooking, etc., oneself, there is only a Dukkaṭa. "Stated without distinction" means stated generally in terms of doing and having done. The rest here is self-explanatory. Requesting or having requested one of the seven grains, receiving it, and consuming it after doing or having done the cooking, etc.: these are the three factors involved here.

824.Aṭṭhamenibbiṭṭhoti patiṭṭhāpito.Keṇīti rañño dātabbassa āyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Ṭhānantaranti gāmajanapadādiṭhānantaraṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Uccārādibhāvo, anavalokanaṃ, vaḷañjanaṭṭhānaṃ, tirokuṭṭapākāratā, chaḍḍanaṃ vā chaḍḍāpanaṃ vāti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.

824. In the eighth, "Nibbiṭṭho" means established. "Keṇī" is a term for the income that must be given to the king. "Another place" means another place such as a village or district. The rest here is self-explanatory. The state of defecation, not looking around, the place of throwing away, being behind a wall or fence, throwing away or having thrown away: these are the five factors involved here.

830.Navamesabbesanti bhikkhussa bhikkhuniyā ca. Idha khettapālakā ārāmādigopakā casāmikāeva.

830. In the ninth, "Of all" means of the Bhikkhu and the Bhikkhunī. Here, the field guards and the monastery caretakers are the owners themselves.

836.Dasameekapayogenāti ekadisāvalokanapayogena.Tesaṃyevāti yesaṃ naccaṃ passati. Kiñcāpi sayaṃ naccanādīsu pācittiyaṃ pāḷiyaṃ na vuttaṃ, tathāpi aṭṭhakathāpamāṇena gahetabbanti dassetuṃ‘‘sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu vutta’’nti āha.‘‘Ārāme ṭhatvāti na kevalaṃ ṭhatvā, tato tato gantvāpi sabbiriyāpathehi labhati, ‘ārāme ṭhitā’ti pana ārāmapariyāpannabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Itarathā nisinnāpi na labheyyā’’ti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Naccādīnaṃ aññataratā, aññatra anuññātakāraṇā gamanaṃ, dassanaṃ vā savanaṃ vāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

836. In the tenth, "With one effort" means with one effort of looking in one direction. "Of those same ones" means of those whose dancing she sees. Although a Pācittiya for dancing, etc., oneself is not stated in the Pāḷi, to show that it should be taken by the authority of the Aṭṭhakathā, he says "stated in all the Aṭṭhakathās." "Standing in the ārāma" means not only standing, but one obtains it by going here and there with all the postures; however, "standing in the ārāma" is said to show the state of being included in the ārāma. Otherwise, even sitting, one would not obtain it, is said in all three Gaṇṭhipadas. The rest here is self-explanatory. Being one of the dances, etc., going apart from a permitted reason, seeing or hearing: these are the three factors involved here.

Lasuṇavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Lasuṇa Vagga is complete.

2. Andhakāravaggavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Andhakāra Vagga

841.Andhakāravaggassa paṭhamedāne vā pūjāya vāti dānanimittaṃ vā pūjānimittaṃ vā.Mantetīti katheti. Rattandhakāratā, purisassa hatthapāse ṭhānaṃ vā sallapanaṃ vā, sahāyābhāvo, rahopekkhatāti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

841. In the first of the Andhakāra Vagga, "For giving or for worship" means for the cause of giving or for the cause of worship. "Manteti" means speaks. Being dark at night, the place near a man's hand or conversing, the absence of a companion, expecting in secret: these are the four factors involved here.

842-846.Dutiyatatiyacatutthāni uttānatthāneva.

842-846. The second, third, and fourth are self-explanatory.

856-857.Pañcameanovassakaṃ atikkāmentiyāti channassa anto nisīditvā pakkamantiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Upacāro dvādasahattho’’ti vadanti.Pallaṅkassa anokāseti ūrubaddhāsanassa anokāse appahonte. Purebhattatā, antaraghare nisajjā, āsanassa pallaṅkokāsatā, aññatra anuññātakāraṇā anāpucchanaṃ, vuttaparicchedātikkamoti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.

856-857. In the fifth, "For one going out without raining" is said in reference to one who, sitting inside being covered, goes away. "The boundary is twelve cubits," they say. "In a place not suitable for a Pallaṅka" means in a place not suitable or sufficient for a cross-legged seat. Having eaten beforehand, sitting inside the house, the seat not being suitable for a Pallaṅka, not asking permission apart from a permitted reason, exceeding the stated limit: these are the five factors involved here.

859-864.Chaṭṭhasattamādīni uttānatthāneva.

859-864. The sixth, seventh, etc., are self-explanatory.

Andhakāravaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Andhakāra Vagga is complete.

3. Naggavaggavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Nagga Vagga

883-887.Naggavaggassa paṭhamadutiyāni uttānatthāneva.

883-887. The first and second of the Nagga Vagga are self-explanatory.

893.Tatiyevisibbetvāti dussibbitaṃ puna sibbanatthāya visibbetvā vijaṭetvā.Aññatra catūhapañcāhāti visibbitadivasato pañca divase atikkamitvā. Nivāsanapāvuraṇūpagacīvaratā, upasampannāya santakatā, sibbanatthāya visibbanaṃ vā visibbāpanaṃ vā, aññatra anuññātakāraṇā pañcāhātikkamo, dhuranikkhepoti imāni panettha pañca aṅgāni.

893. In the third, "Having taken apart" means having taken apart a poorly sewn robe for the purpose of sewing it again, having unraveled it. "Apart from four or five days" means having exceeded five days from the day of unraveling. Being an undergarment, an outer robe, or a Sanghaṭi, being owned by an ordained one, unraveling or having unraveled for the purpose of sewing, exceeding five days apart from a permitted reason, abandoning the task: these are the five factors involved here.

898.Catutthepañcannaṃ cīvarānanti ticīvaraṃ udakasāṭikā saṅkaccikāti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ cīvarānaṃ. Pañcannaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataratā, pañcāhātikkamo, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, aparivattananti imāni panettha cattāri aṅgāni.

898. In the fourth, "Of the five robes" means of these five robes: the triple robe, the bathing cloth, and the Saṅkacchikā. Being one of the five robes, exceeding five days, the absence of a permitted reason, not converting: these are the four factors involved here.

902.Pañcamaṃ uttānatthameva.

902. The fifth is self-explanatory.

907.Chaṭṭhecīvaralābhanti labhitabbacīvaraṃ. Vikappanupagapacchimatā, saṅghassa pariṇatabhāvo, vinā ānisaṃsadassanena antarāyakaraṇanti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

907. In the sixth, "Robe gain" means a robe to be gained. Being the last of what is not subject to Vikalpa, the state of being allocated to the Saṅgha, creating an obstacle without showing the benefit: these are the three factors involved here.

911.Sattamaṃ uttānatthameva.

911. The seventh is self-explanatory.

916.Aṭṭhamekumbhathūṇaṃnāma kumbhasaddo, tena caranti kīḷanti, taṃ vā sippaṃ etesantikumbhathūṇikā. Tenāha‘‘ghaṭakena kīḷanakā’’ti.Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.13) pana ‘‘kumbhathūṇaṃ nāma caturassaambaṇakatāḷa’’nti vuttaṃ.Caturassaambaṇakatāḷaṃnāma rukkhasāradantādīsu yena kenaci caturassaambaṇaṃ katvā catūsu passesu cammena onandhitvā katavāditabhaṇḍaṃ.Bimbisakantipi tasseva vevacanaṃ, taṃ vādenti, taṃ vā sippaṃ etesantikumbhathūṇikā. Tenāha‘‘bimbisakavādakātipi vadantī’’ti. Samaṇacīvaratā, ṭhapetvā sahadhammike mātāpitaro ca aññesaṃ dānaṃ, atāvakālikatāti imāni panettha tīṇi aṅgāni.

916. In the eighth, kumbhathūṇaṃ means the sound of a pot (kumbha), and those who play and sport with it, or whose skill it is, are kumbhathūṇikā. Therefore, it is said, "playing with a pot." However, in the Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathā (Dī. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.13), it is said, "kumbhathūṇaṃ means a square sounding board." Caturassaambaṇakatāḷaṃ means a musical instrument made by creating a square sounding board from the heartwood of a tree, ivory, or anything else, and covering it with leather on four sides. Bimbisaka is another name for the same; those who play it, or whose skill it is, are kumbhathūṇikā. Therefore, it is said, "they also call them bimbisaka players." Regarding the robes of a samaṇa, giving to others besides one's co-religionists and parents, and its being not occasional are the three factors involved here.

920.Navamaṃ uttānatthameva.

920. The ninth is clear in meaning.

927.Dasamedhammikaṃ kathinuddhāranti sabbāsaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ akālacīvaraṃ dātukāmena upāsakena yattako atthāramūlako ānisaṃso, tato adhikaṃ vā samakaṃ vā datvā yācitakena samaggena bhikkhunisaṅghena yaṃ kathinaṃ ñattidutiyena kammena antarā uddharīyati, tassa so uddhāro dhammikoti vuccati, evarūpaṃ kathinuddhāranti attho. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.

927. In the tenth, dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāra means the dissolving of the kathina. When a lay follower, wishing to give non-seasonal robes to all the bhikkhunīs, gives an amount equal to or greater than the benefit based on the thread-frame and requests the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs, in concord, to dissolve the kathina by a formal act with a motion and one proclamation, that dissolution is called justifiable, and such a dissolving of the kathina is what is meant here. The rest is clear in meaning.

Naggavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Naggavagga is complete.

932.Tuvaṭṭavagge sabbaṃ uttānameva.

932. In the Tuvaṭṭavagga, everything is clear in meaning.

5. Cittāgāravaggavaṇṇanā
5. Cittāgāravaggavaṇṇanā

978.Cittāgāravaggassa paṭhamekīḷanaupavananti antonagare ṭhitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ,kīḷanuyyānanti bahinagare ṭhitaṃ sandhāya.Pāṭekkā āpattiyoti gīvāya parivaṭṭanappayogagaṇanāya āpattiyo, na ummīlanagaṇanāya.‘‘Ajjhārāme rājāgārādīni karonti,tāni passantiyā anāpattī’’ti vacanato ‘‘antoārāme tattha tattha gantvā naccādīni passituṃ labhatī’’tipi siddhaṃ.

978. In the first of the Cittāgāravagga, kīḷanaupavana is said with reference to one situated within the city, and kīḷanuyyāna is said with reference to one situated outside the city. Pāṭekkā āpattiyo means offenses counted by the number of times the neck is turned, not by the number of blinks. From the statement, "they build royal palaces, etc., in the vicinity of the monastery; there is no offense for looking at them," it is also established that "within the monastery, one is allowed to go here and there to watch dances, etc."

982.Dutiyādīni uttānatthāneva.

982. The second and following are clear in meaning.

1015.Navame hatthiādīsusippa-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo, tathā āthabbaṇādīsumanta-saddo. Tatthaāthabbaṇamantonāma āthabbaṇavedavihito parūpaghātakaro manto,khīlanamantonāma dārusārakhīlaṃ mantetvā pathaviyaṃ pavesetvā māraṇamanto,agadappayogovisayojanaṃ.Nāgamaṇḍalanti sappānaṃ pavesanivāraṇatthaṃ maṇḍalabaddhamanto.

1015. In the ninth, with regard to elephants, etc., the word sippa (skill) should be connected to each individually, and similarly, with regard to Athabbaṇa, etc., the word manta (spell) should be connected. There, āthabbaṇamanto means a spell prescribed by the Athabbaṇa Veda that causes harm to others; khīlanamanto means a death spell cast by consecrating a stake of hardwood and driving it into the ground; agadappayogo means neutralizing poison; nāgamaṇḍala means a spell-bound circle for the purpose of preventing snakes from entering.

1018.Dasamaṃ uttānatthameva.

1018. The tenth is clear in meaning.

Cittāgāravaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Cittāgāravagga is complete.

1021.Ārāmavagge sabbaṃ uttānatthameva.

1021. In the Ārāmavagga, everything is clear in meaning.

1067.Gabbhinivaggepi sabbaṃ suviññeyyameva.

1067. In the Gabbhinivagga as well, everything is very easy to understand.

8. Kumāribhūtavaggavaṇṇanā
8. Kumāribhūtavaggavaṇṇanā

1119.Kumāribhūtavaggassa paṭhamesabbapaṭhamā dve mahāsikkhamānāti gabbhinivagge sabbapaṭhamaṃ vuttā dve sikkhamānā.Sikkhamānā icceva vattabbāti sammutikammādīsu evaṃ vattabbā.Gihigatāti vā kumāribhūtāti vā na vattabbāti sace vadanti, kammaṃ kuppatīti adhippāyo. Ito paraṃ navamapariyosānaṃ uttānatthameva.

1119. In the first of the Kumāribhūtavagga, sabbapaṭhamā dve mahāsikkhamānā means the two sikkhamānās mentioned first in the Gabbhinivagga. Sikkhamānā icceva vattabbā means that they should be referred to as such in acts of conferral of consent, etc. Gihigatāti vā kumāribhūtāti vā na বক্তব্যা means that if they say "gone to the state of a laywoman" or "become a maiden," the act is invalidated. From here until the end of the ninth, the meaning is clear.

1163.Dasameapubbasamuṭṭhānasīsanti paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānādīsu terasasu samuṭṭhānesu ananuññātasamuṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tañhi ito pubbe tādisassa samuṭṭhānasīsassa anāgatattā ‘‘apubbasamuṭṭhānasīsa’’nti vuttaṃ.

1163. In the tenth, apubbasamuṭṭhānasīsa refers to a type of origin not sanctioned among the thirteen types of origin, beginning with the origin from the first pārājika offense. It is called "apubbasamuṭṭhānasīsa" because a type of origin like that has not occurred before.

1166.Ekādasamādīni uttānatthāneva.

1166. The eleventh and following are clear in meaning.

Kumāribhūtavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Kumāribhūtavagga is complete.

9. Chattupāhanavaggavaṇṇanā
9. Chattupāhanavaggavaṇṇanā

1214.Chattupāhanavaggassa ekādasameupacāraṃ sandhāyāti samantā dvādasahatthupacāraṃ sandhāya. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva.

1214. In the eleventh of the Chattupāhanavagga, upacāraṃ sandhāyā means with reference to the surrounding twelve-cubit vicinity. Everywhere else, the rest is clear in meaning.

Chattupāhanavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Chattupāhanavagga is complete.

acittakāni,naccanti vā vaṇṇakanti vā jānitvā passantiyā vā nahāyantiyā vā akusaleneva āpajjanatolokavajjānīti veditabbāni. Corīvuṭṭhāpanādīnicorītiādinā vatthuṃ jānitvā karaṇe eva āpattisambhavatosacittakāni,upasampadādīnaṃ ekantaakusalacitteneva akattabbattāpaṇṇattivajjāni. ‘‘Idha sacittakācittakatā paṇṇattijānanājānanatāya aggahetvā vatthujānanājānanatāya gahetabbā’’ti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.

acittakāni, since offenses are committed merely by seeing them, knowing whether they are dancing or displaying their beauty, or bathing, they should be understood as lokavajjānī (worldly blameworthy). Corīvuṭṭhāpanādīni (assisting a thief, etc.) are sacittakāni (involving intention), since the occurrence of an offense is possible only when the object is known in cases such as recognizing the thing with "corī" etc; upasampadādinam (ordination etc.) are paṇṇattivajjāni (blameworthy by rule), since they should not be done with an entirely unwholesome state of mind. It is stated in all three gaṇṭhipadesu that "Here, 'involving intention' and 'not involving intention' should be taken in terms of knowing or not knowing the object, not in terms of the imposition or knowledge/non-knowledge." The rest here is clear in meaning.

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅge khuddakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Khuddakavaṇṇanā on the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga is complete.

Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Pācittiyakaṇḍa is complete.

5. Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍaṃ (bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)

5. Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍaṃ (bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)

Pāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Pāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

1228.Pāṭidesanīyā nāma ye aṭṭha dhammā saṅkhepeneva saṅgahaṃ āruḷhāti sambandho.Pāḷivinimuttakesūti pāḷiyaṃ anāgatesu sappiādīsu.

1228. The connection is that the eight Pāṭidesanīya (Offenses to be Confessed) are included in the Saṅgaha briefly. Pāḷivinimuttakesū means in the case of ghee etc., not mentioned in the Pāḷi.

Pāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Pāṭidesanīyasikkhāpada is complete.

Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍa is complete.

tesanti tesaṃ sekhiyānaṃ.Sattādhikaraṇavhayāti sattādhikaraṇasamathasaṅkhātā. Taṃ atthavinicchayaṃ tādisaṃyeva yasmā vidū vadantīti attho.

tesanti of those Sekhiyas. Sattādhikaraṇavhayā means designated as the seven Adhikaraṇa-samathas (Rules for settling disputes). The meaning is that those who are wise call that decision of the matter just like that.

Sabbāsavapahaṃ magganti sabbāsavavighātakaṃ arahattamaggaṃpatvāsasantāne uppādetvā.Passantu nibbutinti maggañāṇalocanena nibbānaṃ sacchikarontu, pappontūti vā pāṭho. Tatthanibbutinti khandhaparinibbānaṃ gahetabbaṃ.

Sabbāsavapahaṃ magganti having attained the path of Arahatship, which destroys all āsavas, patvā having generated it in their own mental continuums. Passantu nibbutinti may they realize Nibbāna with the eye of the wisdom of the path, or the reading is, may they attain it. There, nibbuti should be taken to mean the khandha-parinibbāna.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ.

Thus ends the Sāratthadīpanī, a sub-commentary to the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya commentary.

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga is complete.

Ubhatovibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Ubhatovibhaṅgaṭṭhakathā is complete.

Pācittiyavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Pācittiyavaṇṇanā is complete.

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Mahāvagga-ṭīkā

Mahāvagga-ṭīkā

1. Mahākhandhakaṃ

1. Mahākhandhakaṃ

Bodhikathāvaṇṇanā
Bodhikathāvaṇṇanā

‘‘ubhinnaṃ pātimokkhāna’’ntiādimāha. Tatthaubhinnaṃ pātimokkhānanti ubhinnaṃ pātimokkhavibhaṅgānaṃ. Pātimokkhaggahaṇena hettha tesaṃ vibhaṅgo abhedena gahito. Yaṃ khandhakaṃ saṅgāyiṃsūti sambandho. Khandhānaṃ samūhokhandhako,khandhānaṃ vā pakāsanato dīpanatokhandhako. ‘‘Khandhā’’ti cettha pabbajjupasampadādivinayakammasaṅkhātā cārittavārittasikkhāpadasaṅkhātā ca paññattiyo adhippetā. Pabbajjādīni hi bhagavatā paññattattā ‘‘paññattiyo’’ti vuccanti. Paññattiyañca khandhasaddo dissati ‘‘dārukkhandho aggikkhandho’’tiādīsu viya. Apica bhāgarāsaṭṭhatāpettha yujjatiyeva tāsaṃ paññattīnaṃ bhāgato rāsito ca vibhattattā.Khandhakovidāti paññattibhāgarāsaṭṭhavasena khandhaṭṭhe kovidā.

He says, beginning with "ubhinnaṃ pātimokkhāna." There, ubhinnaṃ pātimokkhāna means of both Pātimokkha-vibhaṅgas. By mentioning the Pātimokkha, its Vibhaṅga is included here undifferentiatedly. The connection is, "Yaṃ khandhakaṃ saṅgāyiṃsūti" (they recited which Khandhaka). A collection of khandhas is khandhako, or khandhako because it reveals or elucidates the khandhas. Here, by "khandhā," are meant the precepts known as rules of conduct and prohibitions, numbered as the acts of Vinaya such as pabbajjā (going forth) and upasampadā (acceptance), and the rules of training. Since the pabbajjā, etc., are prescribed by the Blessed One, they are called "paññattiyo" (precepts). And the word khandha is seen in the context of paññatti (precept) as in "dārukkhandho aggikkhandho" (a mass of wood, a mass of fire), etc. Moreover, the sense of being arranged in portions is certainly fitting here, since those precepts are divided into portions and arranged in masses. Khandhakovidā means those skilled in the meaning of khandha in terms of portions and masses of precepts.

Te ce puna vadeyyāmāti te ce aṭṭhakathānaye punapi vadeyyāma. Atha vā padabhājanīye yesaṃ padānaṃ ye atthā heṭṭhā pakāsitā, te ce atthe puna vadeyyāmāti yojetabbaṃ. Imasmiṃ pakkhe hi-saddo padapūraṇe daṭṭhabbo.Pariyosānanti saṃvaṇṇanāpariyosānaṃ.Uttānā ceva ye atthāti ye atthā pubbe apakāsitāpi uttānā agambhīrā.

Te ce puna vadeyyāmā means, if we should again speak according to the method of the commentaries. Or, it should be construed as, if we should again speak of those meanings of the words that were explained below in the word analysis. In this case, the word hi should be regarded as merely filling the line. Pariyosānanti the conclusion of the commentary. Uttānā ceva ye atthā means those meanings that, though not previously explained, are clear and not profound.

1.Visesakāraṇaṃ natthīti ‘‘yena samayena āyasmato sāriputtattherassa sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanahetubhūto parivitakko udapādi, tena samayenā’’tiādinā vuttakāraṇaṃ viya idha visesakāraṇaṃ natthi.Ayamabhilāpoti ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti ayamabhilāpo.Kiṃ panetassa vacane payojananti yadi visesakāraṇaṃ natthi, etassa vacane kiṃ payojananti adhippāyo. Nidānadassanaṃ payojananti yojetabbaṃ. Tameva vibhāvetuṃ‘‘yā hi bhagavatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.

1. Visesakāraṇaṃ natthī means here there is no specific reason like the reason stated as, "at the time when a reflective thought arose in the Venerable Sāriputta Thera which was the cause for requesting the laying down of a training rule." Ayamabhilāpoti "tena samayena" (at that time) is this expression. Kiṃ panetassa vacane payojananti if there is no specific reason, what is the purpose of this statement? The intention is that showing the cause is the purpose. In order to elaborate on that very point, "yā hi bhagavatā" etc. was said.

mahāvelā,vipulavālukapuñjatāya mahanto velātaṭo viyāti attho. Tenāha‘‘mahante vālikarāsimhīti attho’’ti. Uru maru sikatā vālukā vaṇṇu vālikāti ime saddā samānatthā, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Tenāha‘‘urūti vālikā vuccatī’’ti.

mahāvelā, means like a great beach due to the large heap of sand. Therefore, he said, "it means on a large heap of sand." Uru, maru, sikatā, vālukā, vaṇṇu, vālikā—these words have the same meaning; only the expressions are different. Therefore, he said, "uru means sand."

Ito paṭṭhāya ca –

And from here onward –

Yasmā suttantapāḷīnaṃ, attho saṅkhepavaṇṇito;

Since the meaning of the Suttanta Pāḷis
Has been described concisely;

Najjāti (udā. aṭṭha. 1) nadati sandatīti nadī, tassā najjā, nadiyā ninnagāyāti attho.Nerañjarāyāti ‘‘nelañjalāyā’’ti vattabbe la-kārassa ra-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘nerañjarāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, kaddamasevālapaṇakādidosarahitasalilāyāti attho. Keci ‘‘nīlaṃjalāyāti vattabbe nerañjarāyāti vutta’’nti vadanti, nāmameva vā etaṃ tassā nadiyāti veditabbaṃ. Tassā nadiyā tīre yattha bhagavā vihāsi, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘bodhirukkhamūle’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’nti (cūḷava. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 121) ettha maggañāṇaṃ bodhīti vuttaṃ, ‘‘pappoti bodhiṃ varabhūrimedhaso’’ti (dī. ni. 3.217) ettha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Tadubhayampi bodhiṃ bhagavā ettha pattoti rukkhopi ‘‘bodhirukkho’’tveva nāmaṃ labhi. Atha vā satta bojjhaṅge bujjhatīti bhagavābodhi. Tena bujjhantena sannissitattā so rukkho ‘‘bodhirukkho’’ti nāmaṃ labhi. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ekadeseneva atthaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.Mūleti samīpe.Paṭhamābhisambuddhoti anunāsikalopenāyaṃ niddesoti āha‘‘paṭhamaṃ abhisambuddho’’ti.Paṭhamanti ca bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, tasmā abhisambuddho hutvā sabbapaṭhamaṃ bodhirukkhamūle viharatīti evamettha sambandho veditabbo.

Therefore, we shall undertake
The elucidation of their meaning.

Athakho bhagavāti etthaathāti tasmiṃ samayeti evamattho gahetabbo anekatthattā nipātānaṃ, yasmiṃ samaye abhisambuddho hutvā bodhirukkhamūle viharati, tasmiṃ samayeti attho. Tenevaudānapāḷiyaṃ(udā. 2) ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sattāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisinno hoti vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī’’ti vuttaṃ.Athāti vā pacchāti imasmiṃ atthe nipāto, tasmā abhisambodhito pacchāti evamattho gahetabbo.Khoti padapūraṇe nipāto. Satta ahānisattāhaṃ. Accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Yasmā bhagavā taṃ sattāhaṃ nirantaratāya accantameva phalasamāpattisukhena vihāsi, tasmā ‘‘sattāha’’nti accantasaṃyogavasena upayogavacanaṃ vuttaṃ.Ekapallaṅkenāti visākhapuṇṇamāya anatthaṅgateyeva sūriye aparājitapallaṅkavasena vajirāsane nisinnakālato paṭṭhāya sakimpi anuṭṭhahitvā yathābhujitena ekeneva pallaṅkena.

Najjāti (Udā. Aṭṭha. 1) nadati sandatīti nadī, tassā najjā, nadiyā ninnagāyāti (a river is so called because it flows and streams; of that river, of the river, the downward flowing one) is the meaning. Nerañjarāyāti "nerañjarāyā" is said by changing the letter la to ra of what should be "nelañjalāyā," meaning of the river whose water is free of mud, moss, scum, and other impurities. Some say, "nerañjarāyāti" is said by changing what should be "nīlaṃjalāyāti." Or it should be understood that this is simply the name of that river. To show that place on the bank of that river where the Blessed One dwelled, "bodhirukkhamūle" (at the foot of the Bodhi tree) was said. "Bodhi is said to be the knowledge in the four paths" (Cūḷava. Khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 121), here the path-knowledge is said to be bodhi. "Pappoti bodhiṃ varabhūrimedhaso" (Dī. Ni. 3.217) here the omniscient knowledge is said to be bodhi. The Blessed One attained both of those types of bodhi here, therefore even the tree received the name "bodhirukkho". Or the Blessed One is bodhi because He awakens to the seven factors of enlightenment. Because it was relied upon by that Awakened One, that tree received the name "bodhirukkho". However, in the commentary, to show the meaning by way of example, "bodhi is said to be the knowledge in the four paths" etc. was said. Mūleti nearby. Paṭhamābhisambuddhoti (first fully enlightened) this expression is without the nasalization, therefore he says "paṭhamaṃ abhisambuddho." And paṭhamanti (first) is a neuter instrumental case, therefore the connection here should be understood thus: abhisambuddho hutvā sabbapaṭhamaṃ bodhirukkhamūle viharatīti (having become fully enlightened, he dwelt at the foot of the Bodhi tree for the first time).

Vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti ettha tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttīsu pañcasu paṭippassaddhivimuttisaṅkhātā bhagavato phalavimutti adhippetāti āha‘‘vimuttisukhaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedayamāno’’ti.Vimuttīti ca upakkilesehi paṭippassaddhivasena cittassa vimuttabhāvo, cittameva vā tathā vimuttaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tāya vimuttiyā jātaṃ, sampayuttaṃ vā sukhaṃ vimuttisukhaṃ. ‘‘Yāyaṃ, bhante, upekkhā sante sukhe vuttā bhagavatā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.88) vacanato upekkhāpi cettha sukhamicceva veditabbā. Tathā hi vuttaṃsammohavinodaniyaṃ(vibha. aṭṭha. 232) ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti. Bhagavā hi catutthajjhānikaṃ arahattaphalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, na itaraṃ. Atha vā ‘‘tesaṃ vūpasamo sukho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.221, 272) yathā saṅkhāradukkhavūpasamo ‘‘sukho’’ti vuccati, evaṃ sakalakilesadukkhūpasamabhāvato aggaphale labbhamānā paṭippassaddhivimutti eva idha ‘‘sukha’’nti veditabbā.

Atha kho bhagavāti here, athāti should be taken to mean tasmiṃ samaye (at that time), since particles have diverse meanings, meaning at that time when, having become fully enlightened, he dwelt at the foot of the Bodhi tree. Therefore, in the Udānapāḷi (Udā. 2) it was said, "tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sattāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisinno hoti vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī" (at that time the Blessed One sat for seven days in one posture experiencing the bliss of emancipation). Athāti or a particle in the sense of pacchā (after), therefore the meaning here should be taken as abhisambodhito pacchāti (after the enlightenment). Khoti a particle filling the line. Satta ahāni sattāhaṃ (seven days). This is an accusative of continuous duration. Because the Blessed One spent those seven days continuously, experiencing only the bliss of fruition attainment, therefore "sattāha" is stated as an accusative of continuous duration. Ekapallaṅkenāti from the time of sitting in the adamantine seat in the posture of unconquered (aparājita) sitting on the Visākha full-moon day, just as the sun was setting, without even once rising up, in one and the same posture as before.

Athāti adhikāratthe nipāto,khoti padapūraṇe. Tesu adhikāratthena ‘‘athā’’ti iminā vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedanato aññaṃ adhikāraṃ dasseti. Ko panesoti? Paṭiccasamauppādamanasikāro.Rattiyāti avayavasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ.Paṭhamanti accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Bhagavā hi tassā rattiyā sakalampi paṭhamaṃ yāmaṃ teneva manasikārena yutto ahosīti.

Here, athā is a particle in the sense of commencement (adhikāra), and kho is merely a particle used to fill out the sentence. Among these, ‘athā’ indicates a different topic from the experience of the bliss of liberation (vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedana) by way of commencement. And what is it? Reflection on dependent origination (paṭiccasamuppādamanasikāra). Rattiyā is a possessive word (sāmivacanaṃ) in the sense of part (avayava). Paṭhamaṃ is a word used in the sense of absolute connection (accantasaṃyoga). For the Blessed One was engaged in that very reflection during the entire first watch of that night.

Paccayākāranti avijjādipaccayadhammaṃ.Paṭiccāti paṭimukhaṃ gantvā, kāraṇasāmaggiṃ apaṭikkhipitvāti attho. Paṭimukhagamanañca paccayassa kāraṇasāmaggiyā aṅgabhāvena phalassa uppādanameva.Apaṭikkhipitvāti pana vinā tāya kāraṇasāmaggiyā aṅgabhāvaṃ agantvā sayameva na uppādetīti attho. Etena kāraṇabahutā dassitā. Avijjādiekekahetusīsena hi hetusamūho niddiṭṭho.Sahiteti samudite, avinibbhutteti attho. Avijjādiko hi paccayadhammo sahiteyeva aññamaññaṃ avinibbhogavuttidhamme uppādeti. Iminā paccayuppannadhammabahutā dassitā. Ubhayenapi ‘‘ekaṃ na ekato’’tiādinayo (vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa; visuddhi. 2.617) dīpito hoti. Ekato hi kāraṇato na idha kiñci ekaṃ phalamatthi, na anekaṃ, nāpi anekehi kāraṇehi ekaṃ, anekehi pana kāraṇehi anekameva hoti. Tathā hi anekehi utupathavībījasalilasaṅkhātehi kāraṇehi anekameva rūpagandharasādiaṅkurasaṅkhātaṃ phalamuppajjamānaṃ dissati. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti ekekahetuphaladīpanaṃ kataṃ, tattha payojanaṃ na vijjati.

Paccayākāraṃ means the condition (paccaya) such as ignorance (avijjā). Paṭicca means having approached directly, without rejecting the concurrence of conditions. Approaching directly is precisely the arising of the result as an integral part of the concurrence of conditions for the cause. Apaṭikkhipitvā means not producing it by itself, without entering into the state of being an integral part of that concurrence of conditions. This shows the plurality of causes. For a multitude of causes is indicated, with each cause beginning with ignorance. Sahite means collected, inseparable. For the conditioned states (paccayadhamma) beginning with ignorance produce other states only when collected, states whose nature is inseparable. This shows the plurality of conditioned states. Both of these illustrate the principle "not one from one," etc. (vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa; visuddhi. 2.617). For here there is no single result from a single cause, nor many, nor one from many causes, but only many from many causes. For example, a sprout, which is a result consisting of form, smell, taste, etc., is seen arising from many causes consisting of season, earth, seed, and moisture. But there is no apparent purpose in the statement, "Conditioned by ignorance are volitional formations (saṅkhārā), conditioned by volitional formations is consciousness (viññāṇa)," which describes each cause and result individually.

Bhagavā hi katthaci padhānattā katthaci pākaṭattā katthaci asādhāraṇattā desanāvilāsassa ca veneyyānañca anurūpato ekameva hetuṃ vā phalaṃ vā dīpeti. ‘‘Phassapaccayā vedanā’’ti hi ekameva hetuṃ phalañcāha. Phasso hi vedanāya padhānahetu yathāphassaṃ vedanāvavatthānato. Vedanā ca phassassa padhānaphalaṃ yathāvedanaṃ phassavavatthānato. ‘‘Semhasamuṭṭhānā ābādhā’’ti (mahāni. 5) pākaṭattā ekaṃ hetuṃ āha. Pākaṭo hi ettha semho, na kammādayo. ‘‘Ye keci, bhikkhave, akusalā dhammā, sabbete ayonisomanasikāramūlakā’’ti asādhāraṇattā ekaṃ hetuṃ āha. Asādhāraṇo hi ayonisomanasikāro akusalānaṃ, sādhāraṇāni vatthārammaṇādīnīti. Tasmā avijjā tāvettha vijjamānesupi aññesu vatthārammaṇasahajātadhammādīsu saṅkhārakāraṇesu ‘‘assādānupassino taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.52) ca ‘‘avijjāsamudayā āsavasamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.104) ca vacanato aññesampi taṇhādīnaṃ saṅkhārahetūnaṃ hetūti padhānattā, ‘‘avidvā, bhikkhave, avijjāgato puññābhisaṅkhārampi abhisaṅkharotī’’ti pākaṭattā asādhāraṇattā ca saṅkhārānaṃ hetubhāvena dīpitāti veditabbā. Evaṃ sabbattha ekekahetuphaladīpane yathāsambhavaṃ nayo netabbo. Tenāhu porāṇā –

The Blessed One points out only one cause or result sometimes because it is predominant, sometimes because it is evident, sometimes because it is unique, and also in accordance with the inclination of the audience and the manner of teaching. For example, he spoke of only one cause and result when he said, "Conditioned by contact (phassa) is feeling (vedanā)," because contact is the main cause of feeling, as feeling is determined by contact. And feeling is the main result of contact, as contact is determined by feeling. He spoke of one cause because it was evident when he said, "Diseases arise from phlegm (semha)" (mahāni. 5). For here phlegm is evident, not actions (kamma) etc. He spoke of one cause because it was unique when he said, "Whatever unwholesome states there are, all are rooted in unwise attention (ayonisomanasikāra)." For unwise attention is unique to unwholesome states, while things like objects and sense-fields are common. Therefore, it should be understood that ignorance (avijjā) is pointed out as the cause of volitional formations (saṅkhārā) because it is predominant, since it is the cause of other causes of volitional formations such as craving (taṇhā), among the other existing causes such as objects, sense-fields, and co-arisen states, as it is said, "For one who dwells on the allure, craving increases" (saṃ. ni. 2.52), and "With the arising of ignorance comes the arising of taints (āsava)" (ma. ni. 1.104), and because it is evident and unique, as it is said, "Without knowledge, monks, one who is immersed in ignorance fabricates meritorious fabrications (puññābhisaṅkhāra)." In this way, the principle should be applied appropriately in every instance of describing individual causes and results. Therefore, the ancients said:

‘‘Ekaṃ na ekato idha, nānekamanekatopi no ekaṃ;

"Not one from one here, nor many from many is one;
There is a purpose in pointing out a single cause and effect."

paṭicco. Yo hi naṃ pacceti abhisameti, tassa accantameva dukkhavūpasamāya saṃvattati. Sammā saha ca uppādetītisamuppādo. Paccayadhammo hi attano phalaṃ uppādento sampuṇṇameva uppādeti, na vikalaṃ. Ye ca dhamme uppādeti, te sabbe saheva uppādeti, na ekekaṃ. Iti paṭicco ca so samuppādo cātipaṭiccasamuppādoti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo.Vitthāroti paṭiccasamuppādapadavaṇṇanāpapañco. Mayampi taṃ atipapañcabhayā idha na dassayissāma, evaṃ parato vakkhamānampi vitthāraṃ.Anulomapaṭilomanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya.Svevāti so eva paccayākāro.Purimanayena vā vuttoti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā nayena vutto paccayākāro.Pavattiyāti saṃsārappavattiyā.Manasi akāsīti yo yo paccayadhammo yassa yassa paccayuppannadhammassa yathā yathā hetupaccayādinā paccayabhāvena paccayo hoti, taṃ sabbaṃ aviparītaṃ aparihāpetvā anavasesato paccavekkhaṇavasena citte akāsīti attho.

Paṭicco: It conduces to the complete cessation of suffering for whoever understands and comprehends it. Samuppādo: It causes to arise together, in harmony. For the conditioned state, in producing its result, produces it completely, not deficiently. And all the states it produces, it produces together, not individually. Thus, the meaning here should be understood as, "Iti paṭicco ca so samuppādo cāti paṭiccasamuppādo." Vitthāro means the detailed explanation of the word "dependent origination." We will not show it here for fear of excessive elaboration, nor will we elaborate on what is to be said later. Anulomapaṭilomaṃ is a neuter noun, like in phrases such as "the sun and moon revolve unevenly" (a. ni. 4.70). Svevā means that very dependent origination. Purimanayena vā vutto means the dependent origination described in the manner of "Conditioned by ignorance are volitional formations," and so on. Pavattiyā means the continuation of saṃsāra. Manasi akāsī means he brought to mind, without omission, in the manner of reflecting, unimpaired and completely, in his mind, all the conditioned states that are conditions in whatever way—by way of cause, condition, etc.—for whichever conditioned states arose from them.

Avijjāpaccayātiādīsu (vibha. aṭṭha. 225; visuddhi. 2.586-587; udā. aṭṭha. 1) avindiyaṃ kāyaduccaritādiṃ vindatītiavijjā,vindiyaṃ kāyasucaritādiṃ na vindatīti avijjā, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvaṃ aviditaṃ karotīti avijjā, antavirahite saṃsāre bhavādīsu satte javāpetīti avijjā, avijjamānesu javati, vijjamānesu na javatīti avijjā, vijjāpaṭipakkhāti vā avijjā. Sā ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādinā catubbidhā veditabbā. Paṭicca naṃ na vinā phalaṃ eti uppajjati ceva pavattati cātipaccayo,upakāraṭṭho vā paccayo. Avijjā ca sā paccayo cāti avijjāpaccayo, tasmāavijjāpaccayā. Saṅkharontītisaṅkhārā,lokiyā kusalākusalacetanā. Te puññāpuññāneñcābhisaṅkhāravasena tividhā veditabbā. Vijānātītiviññāṇaṃ,taṃ lokiyavipākaviññāṇavasena bāttiṃsavidhaṃ. Namatītināmaṃ,vedanādikkhandhattayaṃ. Ruppatītirūpaṃ,bhūtarūpaṃ cakkhādiupādārūpañca. Āyatanti, āyatañca saṃsāradukkhaṃ nayatītiāyatanaṃ. Phusatītiphasso. Vedayatītivedanā. Idampi dvayaṃ dvāravasena chabbidhaṃ, vipākavasena gahaṇe bāttiṃsavidhaṃ. Tassati paritassatītitaṇhā,sā kāmataṇhādivasena saṅkhepato tividhā, vitthārato aṭṭhasatavidhā ca. Upādiyatītiupādānaṃ,taṃ kāmupādānādivasaena catubbidhaṃ.

In "Avijjāpaccayā," etc. (vibha. aṭṭha. 225; visuddhi. 2.586-587; udā. aṭṭha. 1), avijjā means one finds (vindati) undesirable bodily misconduct, or one does not find desirable bodily good conduct, or it obscures the true nature of things, or it propels beings into existences (bhava) etc. in the beginningless saṃsāra, or it rushes into what is non-existent and does not rush into what is existent, or ignorance is the opposite of knowledge. It should be understood as being fourfold, beginning with "ignorance of suffering." Paccayo means that a result inevitably arises from it, it arises, and it continues; or, a condition is that which is helpful. Avijjā ca sā paccayo cāti avijjāpaccayo, tasmā avijjāpaccayā. Saṅkhārā means those that fabricate; mundane wholesome and unwholesome intentions. They should be understood as threefold in terms of meritorious, demeritorious, and imperturbable fabrications. Viññāṇaṃ means that which cognizes; it is of thirty-two types as mundane resultant consciousness. Nāmaṃ means that which bends; the three aggregates beginning with feeling. Rūpaṃ means that which is subject to change; material phenomena and derived material phenomena such as the eye. Āyatanaṃ means that which extends, and also that which leads to suffering in saṃsāra. Phasso means that which contacts. Vedanā means that which feels. These two are also sixfold in terms of the doors, and thirty-twofold when taken in terms of results. Taṇhā means that which craves and intensely craves; it is of three types in brief—craving for sensual pleasures, etc.—and eight hundred types in detail. Upādānaṃ means that which clings; it is fourfold in terms of clinging to sensual pleasures, etc.

bhavo,so kammopapattibhedato duvidho. Jananaṃjāti. Jīraṇaṃjarā. Maranti tenātimaraṇaṃ. Socanaṃsoko. Paridevanaṃparidevo. Dukkhayatītidukkhaṃ. Uppādaṭṭhitivasena dvedhā khanatīti vādukkhaṃ. Dummanassa bhāvodomanassaṃ. Bhuso āyāsoupāyāso. Sambhavantīti nibbattanti. Na kevalañca sokādīheva, atha kho sabbapadehi ‘‘sambhavantī’’ti padassa yojanā kātabbā. Evañhi avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantīti paccayapaccayuppannavavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tenevāha‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantīti iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo’’ti.Evametassa…pe… samudayo hotīti ettha pana ayamattho.Evanti niddiṭṭhanayanidassanaṃ. Tena avijjādīheva kāraṇehi, na issaranimmānādīhīti dasseti.Etassāti yathāvuttassa.Kevalassāti asammissassa, sakalassa vā.Dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkhasamūhassa, na sattassa nāpi subhasukhādīnaṃ.Samudayo hotīti nibbatti sambhavati.

Bhavo is twofold in terms of kamma-bhava and rebirth-bhava. Jāti means birth. Jarā means aging. Maraṇaṃ means that by which one dies. Soko means sorrow. Paridevo means lamentation. Dukkhaṃ means that which causes suffering. Or, dukkhaṃ means that which excavates, in terms of arising and ceasing. Domanassaṃ means a state of sadness. Upāyāso means intense distress. Sambhavantī means they come into being. Not only with sorrow, etc., but the word "sambhavantī" should be connected with all terms. For in this way, the arrangement of condition and conditioned state is shown, that conditioned by ignorance, volitional formations come into being. Therefore, he said, "In this way, the meaning should be understood in all terms, that conditioned by ignorance, volitional formations come into being." Evametassa…pe… samudayo hotī; here, however, is the meaning. Evaṃ illustrates the stated method. It shows that it is by causes such as ignorance, not by the creation of a god, etc. Etassā means of the aforementioned. Kevalassā means unmixed, or entire. Dukkhakkhandhassā means of the mass of suffering, not of a being, nor of pleasant happiness, etc. Samudayo hotī means arising, coming into being.

virāgo,ariyamaggoti āha‘‘virāgasaṅkhātena maggenā’’ti. Asesaṃ nirodhāasesanirodhā,asesetvā nissesetvā nirodhā samucchindanā anusayappahānavasena aggamaggena avijjāya accantasamugghātatoti attho. Yadipi heṭṭhimamaggehipi pahīyamānā avijjā accantasamugghātavaseneva pahīyati, tathāpi na anavasesato pahīyati. Apāyagamanīyā hi avijjā paṭhamamaggena pahīyati, tathā sakideva imasmiṃ loke sabbattha ca anariyabhūmiyaṃ upapattiyā paccayabhūtā avijjā yathākkamaṃ dutiyatatiyamaggehi pahīyati, na itarāti, arahattamaggeneva pana sā anavasesaṃ pahīyatīti.Anuppādanirodho hotīti sabbesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ anavasesaṃ anuppādanirodho hoti. Heṭṭhimena hi maggattayena keci saṅkhārā nirujjhanti, keci na nirujjhanti avijjāya sāvasesanirodhā, aggamaggena panassā anavasesanirodhā na keci saṅkhārā na nirujjhantīti.Evaṃ niruddhānanti evaṃ anuppādanirodhena niruddhānaṃ.Kevala-saddo niravasesavācako ca hoti ‘‘kevalā aṅgamagadhā’’tiādīsu. Asammissavācako ca ‘‘kevalā sālayo’’tiādīsu. Tasmā ubhayathāpi atthaṃ vadati‘‘sakalassa, suddhassa vā’’ti. Tatthasakalassāti anavasesassa sabbabhavādigatassa.Sattavirahitassāti paraparikappitajīvarahitassa.

Virāgo means the noble path, as he said, "by the path called dispassion." Asesaṃ nirodhā means asesanirodhā, the utter cessation, complete and without remainder, the eradication by means of the supramundane path by way of abandoning latent tendencies, meaning the complete destruction of ignorance. Although ignorance is abandoned by the lower paths as well in the manner of complete destruction, it is not abandoned without remainder. For ignorance that leads to the woeful planes is abandoned by the first path, and ignorance that is the condition for rebirth in this world and everywhere in the non-noble plane is abandoned by the second and third paths respectively, not by the others, but it is abandoned completely only by the path of arahantship. Anuppādanirodho hotī means the complete cessation of all volitional formations occurs. For by the lower three paths some volitional formations cease and some do not cease, because of the residual cessation of ignorance; but by the highest path, because of its complete cessation, no volitional formations do not cease. Evaṃ niruddhānaṃ means of those ceased in this way, by way of cessation without arising. Kevala can mean "entire" as in "entirely Anga and Magadha," and can also mean "unmixed" as in "unmixed rice." Therefore, it speaks to both meanings: "entire or pure." There, sakalassā means of the entire, pertaining to all existences, etc. Sattavirahitassā means devoid of imagined beings.

Apicettha kiñcāpi ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho’’ti ettāvatāpi sakalassa dukkhakkhandhassa anavasesato nirodho vutto hoti, tathāpi yathā anulome yassa yassa paccayadhammassa atthitāya yo yo paccayuppannadhammo na nirujjhati pavattati evāti imassa atthassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ tappaṭipakkhato tassa tassa paccayassa abhāve so so paccayuppannadhammo nirujjhati na pavattatīti dassanatthaṃ idha ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho, viññāṇanirodhā nāmarūpanirodho…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana anulome viya kālattayapariyāpannassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodhadassanatthaṃ. Anāgatasseva hi ariyamaggabhāvanāya asati uppajjanārahassa dukkhakkhandhassa ariyamaggabhāvanāya nirodho icchitoti ayampi viseso veditabbo.

Moreover, although the complete cessation of the entire mass of suffering has been stated by "with the cessation of ignorance comes the cessation of volitional formations, with the cessation of volitional formations comes the cessation of consciousness," etc., still, just as in direct order it was said, "Conditioned by ignorance are volitional formations…arises the mass of suffering," in order to show the meaning that when a certain conditioned state exists, a certain state conditioned by it does not cease but continues, so here it is said, "With the cessation of ignorance comes the cessation of volitional formations, with the cessation of volitional formations comes the cessation of consciousness, with the cessation of consciousness comes the cessation of name-and-form… comes the cessation of the mass of suffering," in order to show that with the absence of that condition, that state conditioned by it ceases and does not continue, in the opposite way from that. It is not, however, for the purpose of showing the cessation of the mass of suffering that pervades the three times, as in direct order. For it should also be understood that the cessation, by means of the cultivation of the noble path, of the mass of suffering that is liable to arise in the future is what is desired by the cultivation of the noble path.

Yadā haveti etthahaveti byattanti imasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Keci pana ‘‘haveti āhave yuddhe’’ti atthaṃ vadanti, ‘‘yodhetha māraṃ paññāvudhenā’’ti (dha. pa. 40) hi vacanato kilesamārena yujjhanasamayeti tesaṃ adhippāyo.Ārammaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇenāti ārammaṇūpanijjhānasabhāvena.Lakkhaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇenāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tattha ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ nāma aṭṭha samāpattiyo kasiṇārammaṇassa upanijjhāyanato. Lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ nāma vipassanāmaggaphalāni. Vipassanā hi tīṇi lakkhaṇāni upanijjhāyatītilakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ,maggo vipassanāya āgatakiccaṃ sādhetītilakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ,phalaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ upanijjhāyatītilakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. No kallo pañhoti ayutto pañho, duppañho esoti attho.Ādisaddena –

Here, in yadā have, have is a particle in the sense of "manifest." Some, however, say that "have means in battle, in war," their idea being that it is the time of fighting against the Māra of defilements, from the saying, "Fight Māra with the weapon of wisdom" (dha. pa. 40). Ārammaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇena means by the nature of focusing on the object. The same applies to lakkhaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇena as well. There, focusing on the object means the eight attainments (samāpatti) because of focusing on the kasiṇa object. Focusing on the characteristics means the insight path and fruits. Lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ means because insight focuses on the three characteristics, lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ means because the path accomplishes the task that has come to insight, lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ means because the fruit focuses on the suchness-characteristic, the truth of cessation. No kallo pañho means an inappropriate question, it is a bad question. The word ādi

‘‘Phusatīti ahaṃ na vadāmi. Phusatīti cāhaṃ vadeyyaṃ, tatrassa kallo pañho ‘ko nu kho, bhante, phusatī’ti? Evañcāhaṃ na vadāmi, evaṃ maṃ avadantaṃ yo evaṃ puccheyya ‘kiṃpaccayā nu kho, bhante, phasso’ti, esa kallo pañho. Tatra kallaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ ‘saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā’ti. Ko nu kho, bhante, vedayatīti? No kallo pañhoti bhagavā avoca, vedayatīti ahaṃ na vadāmi, vedayatīti cāhaṃ vadeyyaṃ, tatrassa kallo pañho ‘ko nu kho, bhante, vedayatī’ti? Evañcāhaṃ na vadāmi. Evaṃ maṃ avadantaṃ yo evaṃ puccheyya ‘kiṃpaccayā nu kho, bhante, vedanā’ti, esa kallo pañho. Tatra kallaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ ‘phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.12) –

"I do not say 'one contacts.' And if I were to say 'one contacts,' the question would be appropriate there, 'who, indeed, venerable sir, contacts?' Since I do not say it like that, if one were to ask me, not saying it like that, 'conditioned by what, venerable sir, is contact?' this is an appropriate question. There the appropriate explanation is, 'conditioned by the six sense bases is contact, conditioned by contact is feeling.' 'Who, indeed, venerable sir, feels?' The Blessed One said, 'No kallo pañho,' I do not say 'one feels.' And if I were to say 'one feels,' the question would be appropriate there, 'who, indeed, venerable sir, feels?' Since I do not say it like that, if one were to ask me, not saying it like that, 'conditioned by what, venerable sir, is feeling?' this is an appropriate question. There the appropriate explanation is, 'conditioned by contact is feeling, conditioned by feeling is craving'" (saṃ. ni. 2.12)—

Evamādiṃ pāḷisesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.

Includes the rest of the passage, beginning in this way.

Ādinā ca nayenāti etthaādi-saddena pana ‘‘katamā nu kho, bhante, jāti, kassa ca panāyaṃ jātīti. ‘No kallo pañho’ti bhagavā avocā’’ti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Nanu cettha ‘‘katamaṃ nu kho, bhante, jarāmaraṇa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.35) idaṃ supucchitanti? Kiñcāpi supucchitaṃ, yathā pana satasahassagghanake suvaṇṇathālake vaḍḍhitassa subhojanassa matthake āmalakamatte gūthapiṇḍe ṭhapite sabbaṃ bhojanaṃ dubbhojanaṃ hoti chaḍḍetabbaṃ, evameva ‘‘kassa ca panidaṃ jarāmaraṇa’’nti iminā sattūpaladdhivādapadena gūthapiṇḍena taṃ bhojanaṃ dubbhojanaṃ viya ayampi sabbo duppañho jātoti.

Here, by the word ādinā, one should include things beginning with "What, indeed, venerable sir, is birth, and to whom does this birth belong? 'No kallo pañho,' said the Blessed One." But isn't "What, indeed, venerable sir, is aging and death?" a good question here? Although it is a good question, just as when a lump of feces the size of an emblic myrobalan fruit is placed on top of fine food served in a golden bowl worth a hundred thousand, all the food becomes bad food and must be discarded, so too this entire question has become a bad question, like that food, due to the lump of feces consisting of the doctrine of the existence of a being in the phrase "and to whom does this aging and death belong?"

Soḷasa kaṅkhāti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhānaṃ, na nu kho ahosiṃ, kiṃ nu kho ahosiṃ, kathaṃ nu kho ahosiṃ, kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhānaṃ, bhavissāmi nu kho ahaṃ anāgatamaddhānaṃ, na nu kho bhavissāmi, kiṃ nu kho bhavissāmi, kathaṃ nu kho bhavissāmi, kiṃ hutvā kiṃ bhavissāmi nu kho ahaṃ anāgatamaddhānaṃ, ahaṃ nu khosmi, no nu khosmi, kiṃ nu khosmi, kathaṃ nu khosmi, ayaṃ nu kho satto kuto āgato, so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.20; ma. ni. 1.18) evamāgatā atītānāgatapaccuppannavisayā soḷasavidhā kaṅkhā.

Soḷasa kaṅkhā means the sixteen kinds of doubt that have come in this way, concerning the past, future, and present: "Did I exist in the past? Did I not exist? What was I? How was I? Having been what, what did I become in the past? Will I exist in the future? Will I not exist? What will I be? How will I be? Having been what, what will I become in the future? Am I? Am I not? What am I? How am I? Where has this being come from? Where will he go in the future?" (saṃ. ni. 2.20; ma. ni. 1.18).

ahosiṃ nu kho, na nu khoti sassatākārañca adhiccasamuppattiākārañca nissāya atīte attano vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati, kiṃ kāraṇanti na vattabbaṃ. Ummattako viya hi bālaputhujjano yathā tathā vā pavattati. Apica ayonisomanasikāroyevettha kāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ ayonisomanasikārassa pana kiṃ kāraṇanti? Sveva puthujjanabhāvo ariyānaṃ adassanādīni vā. Nanu ca puthujjanopi yoniso manasi karotīti. Ko vā evamāha ‘‘na manasi karotī’’ti. Na pana tattha puthujjanabhāvo kāraṇaṃ, saddhammasavanakalyāṇamittādīni tattha kāraṇāni. Na hi macchamaṃsādīni attano pakatiyā sugandhāni, abhisaṅkhārapaccayā pana sugandhānipi honti.

"Ahosiṃ nu kho, na nu kho" (Was I then? Or was I not?) means, relying on the idea of eternalism and the idea of causeless origination, he is doubtful about his existence or non-existence in the past. Why is that? It cannot be said for certain. For a foolish ordinary person acts in any way, like a madman. Moreover, unwise attention (ayoniso manasikāra) is the cause here. What then is the cause of such unwise attention? It is simply the state of being an ordinary person (puthujjanabhāva) or not seeing the Noble Ones (ariyānaṃ adassanādīni). But surely, even an ordinary person attends wisely (yoniso manasi karoti)? Who says, "does not attend"? However, the state of being an ordinary person is not the cause there; hearing the Good Dhamma (saddhammasavana), good friends (kalyāṇamitta), and so on are the causes there. Indeed, fish, meat, and the like are not naturally fragrant; however, due to conditioning, they become fragrant.

Kiṃ nu kho ahosinti jātiliṅgupapattiyo nissāya ‘‘khattiyo nu kho ahosiṃ, brāhmaṇavessasuddagahaṭṭhapabbajitadevamanussānaṃ aññataro’’ti kaṅkhati.

"Kiṃ nu kho ahosiṃ" (What was I then?) means, relying on birth (jāti), gender (liṅga), and rebirth (upapatti), he is doubtful, "Was I a noble (khattiyo), a brahmin, a merchant (vessa), a worker (sudda), a householder, an ascetic, a deva, or a human, or something else?"

Kathaṃ nu khoti saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīgho nu kho ahosiṃ, rassaodātakaṇhappamāṇikaappamāṇikādīnaṃ aññataro’’ti kaṅkhati. Keci pana ‘‘issaranimmānādiṃ nissāya ‘kena nu kho kāraṇena ahosi’nti hetuto kaṅkhatī’’ti vadanti.

"Kathaṃ nu kho" (How was I then?) means, relying on form and appearance (saṇṭhānākāra), he is doubtful, "Was I tall, short, fair, dark, of moderate size, or of immeasurable size, or something else?" Some, however, say, "Relying on the creation of Īsvara, he doubts, 'By what cause was I?' thus doubting the cause."

Kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosinti jātiādīni nissāya ‘‘khattiyo hutvā nu kho brāhmaṇo ahosiṃ…pe… devo hutvā manusso’’ti attano paramparaṃ kaṅkhati. Sabbattheva pana addhānanti kālādhivacanametaṃ, tañca bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

"Kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosiṃ" (Having been what, what did I become?) means, relying on birth and so on, he doubts his lineage, "Having been a noble, did I become a brahmin?...or having been a deva, a human?" However, in all instances, "addhānaṃ" (the long time) is a designation for time (kālādhivacanaṃ), and it should be seen as a word used in the sense of abundance (bhummatthe).

Bhavissāmi nu kho, na nu khoti sassatākārañca ucchedākārañca nissāya anāgate attano vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.

"Bhavissāmi nu kho, na nu kho" (Shall I be? Or shall I not be?) means, relying on the idea of eternalism (sassatākāra) and the idea of annihilation (ucchedākāra), he is doubtful about his existence or non-existence in the future. The rest here is as has been said before.

Ahaṃnu khosmīti attano atthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Yuttaṃ panetanti? Yuttaṃ ayuttanti kā ettha cintā. Apicettha idaṃ vatthumpi udāharanti, cūḷamātāya kira putto muṇḍo, mahāmātāya putto amuṇḍo. Taṃ suttaṃ muṇḍesuṃ. So uṭṭhāya ‘‘ahaṃ nu kho cūḷamātāya putto’’ti cintesi. Evaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ nu khosmī’’ti kaṅkhā hoti.

"Ahaṃ nu khosmī" (Am I?) means he doubts his existence. Is this appropriate? What is the concern here whether it is appropriate or not? Moreover, here they cite this story: it seems that the son of Cūḷamātā was bald, and the son of Mahāmātā was not bald. They shaved the one who wasn't bald. He got up and thought, "Am I the son of Cūḷamātā?" Thus, there is doubt, "Am I?"

No nu khosmīti attano natthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Tatrāpi idaṃ vatthu – eko kira macche gaṇhanto udake ciraṭṭhānena sītibhūtaṃ attano ūruṃ ‘‘maccho’’ti cintetvā pahari. Aparo susānapasse khettaṃ rakkhanto bhīto saṅkuṭito sayi. So paṭibujjhitvā attano jaṇṇukāni ‘‘dve yakkhā’’ti cintetvā pahari, evaṃ ‘‘no nu khosmī’’ti kaṅkhati.

"No nu khosmī" (Am I not?) means he doubts his non-existence. There, too, is this story: it seems that a man catching fish, due to standing long in the water, thinking his thigh, which had become cold, was a "fish," struck it. Another, guarding a field near a cemetery, lay down frightened and huddled up. He woke up, and thinking his knees were "two yakkhas," struck them. Thus, there is doubt, "Am I not?"

Kiṃ nu khosmīti khattiyova samāno attano khattiyabhāvaṃ kaṅkhati kaṇṇo viya sūtaputtasaññī. Esa nayo sesesu. Devo pana samāno devabhāvaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi. Sopi pana ‘‘ahaṃ rūpī nu kho arūpī nu kho’’tiādinā nayena kaṅkhati. Khattiyādayo kasmā na jānantīti ce? Appaccakkhā tesaṃ tattha tattha kule uppatti. Gahaṭṭhāpi ca pātalikādayo pabbajitasaññino. Pabbajitāpi ‘‘kuppaṃ nu kho me kamma’’ntiādinā nayena gahaṭṭhasaññino. Manussāpi ca ekacce rājāno viya attani devasaññino honti.

"Kiṃ nu khosmī" (What am I?) means even if he is a noble, he doubts his status as a noble, like Kaṇṇa, who was thought to be the son of a charioteer (sūtaputtasaññī). This is the method for the rest. But there is no deva who, being a deva, does not know his state as a deva. However, even he doubts in the manner of "Am I with form or without form?" Why don't nobles and others know? Because their birth in that particular family is not directly apparent to them. And householders, like Pātalika and others, think themselves ascetics. Ascetics, too, in the manner of "Is my kamma corrupt?" and so on, think themselves householders. And some humans, like kings, regard themselves as devas.

Kathaṃ nu khosmīti vuttanayameva. Kevalañhettha abbhantare jīvo nāma atthīti gahetvā tassa saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīgho nu khosmi, rassacaturassachaḷaṃsaaṭṭhaṃsasoḷasaṃsādīnaṃ aññatarappakāro’’ti kaṅkhanto ‘‘kathaṃ nu khosmī’’ti kaṅkhatīti veditabbo. Sarīrasaṇṭhānaṃ pana paccuppannaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi.

"Kathaṃ nu khosmī" (How am I?) is as has been said before. Only here, taking it that there is a being (jīvo) inside, relying on its form and appearance, he is doubtful, "Am I long, short, square, hexagonal, octagonal, sixteen-sided, or some other kind?" Thus, it should be understood that he doubts, "How am I?" But there is no one who does not know the present form of the body.

Kuto āgato, so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatīti attabhāvassa āgatigatiṭṭhānaṃ kaṅkhati.

"Kuto āgato, so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatī" (From where did he come, and where will he go?) he is doubtful about the coming, going, and station of the self (attabhāvassa).

Vapayantīti viapayanti, ikāralopenāyaṃ niddeso. Byapayantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha‘‘vapayanti apagacchantī’’ti. Apagamanañca anuppattinirodhavasenāti āha‘‘nirujjhantī’’ti.

"Vapayantī" means viapayanti (destroying), this is an indication with the elision of the "i." It means byapayanti (frustrating). Therefore, he said, "vapayanti apagacchantī" (destroying, going away). And the going away is in the sense of ceasing without arising (anuppattinirodhavasena), thus he said, "nirujjhantī" (ceasing).

3.Kadā panassa bodhipakkhiyadhammā catusaccadhammā vā pātubhavanti uppajjanti pakāsantīti? Vipassanāmaggañāṇesu pavattamānesu. Tatthavipassanāñāṇetāva vipassanāñāṇasampayuttā satiādayo vipassanāñāṇañca yathārahaṃ attano attano visayesu tadaṅgappahānavasena subhasaññādike pajahantā kāyānupassanādivasena visuṃ visuṃ uppajjanti.Maggakkhaṇepana te nibbānamālambitvā samucchedavasena paṭipakkhe pajahantā catūsupi ariyasaccesu asammohapaṭivedhasādhanavasena sakideva uppajjanti. Evaṃ tāvettha bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ uppajjanaṭṭhena pātubhāvo veditabbo. Ariyasaccadhammānaṃ pana lokiyānaṃvipassanākkhaṇevipassanāya ārammaṇakaraṇavasena lokuttarānaṃ tadadhimuttatāvasenamaggakkhaṇenirodhasaccassa ārammaṇābhisamayavasena sabbesampi kiccābhisamayavasena pākaṭabhāvato pakāsanaṭṭhena pātubhāvo veditabbo.

3. When do the qualities conducive to enlightenment (bodhipakkhiyadhammā) or the Four Noble Truths (catusaccadhammā) become manifest, arise, and become evident to him? When insight knowledges (vipassanāmaggañāṇesu) are occurring. There, in the insight knowledge (vipassanāñāṇe) itself, mindfulness (sati) and other factors associated with insight knowledge, and insight knowledge itself, each according to its suitability, abandon the perception of beauty (subhasaññādike) and so on, in the manner of abandoning the opposite factors, and arise distinctly in the manner of contemplation of the body (kāyānupassanā) and so on. But at the moment of the path (maggakkhaṇe), having nibbāna as their object, they abandon the opposing factors by way of cutting off (samucchedavasena), and arise all at once in the Four Noble Truths, as the means of non-deluded penetration (asammohapaṭivedhasādhanavasena). Thus, the manifestation of the qualities conducive to enlightenment should be understood as arising in this way. But the manifestation of the Four Noble Truths should be understood as being evident in the sense of making them the object in the moment of insight (vipassanākkhaṇe) for the mundane, in the sense of inclining towards that for the supramundane, and in the moment of the path (maggakkhaṇe), in the sense of comprehension of cessation (nirodhasaccassa) as the object and in the sense of accomplishing all the functions (kiccābhisamayavasena).

Iti bhagavā satipi sabbākārena sabbadhammānaṃ attano ñāṇassa pākaṭabhāve paṭiccasamuppādamukhena vipassanābhinivesassa katattā nipuṇagambhīrasududdasatāya paccayākārassa taṃ paccavekkhitvā uppannabalavasomanasso paṭipakkhasamucchedavibhāvanena saddhiṃ attano tadabhisamayānubhāvadīpakamevettha udānaṃ udānesi.

Thus, the Blessed One, since mindfulness was practiced in every way and all phenomena were evident to his knowledge, having made an effort at insight (vipassanābhinivesassa katattā) by way of the arising of conditions (paṭiccasamuppādamukhena), having reviewed that subtle, profound, and very difficult-to-see conditioned nature (paccayākārassa), with the strong joy that arose, together with the realization of the cutting off of opposing factors (paṭipakkhasamucchedavibhāvanena), uttered here an utterance that reveals his experience of that realization (tadabhisamayānubhāvadīpakaṃ eva).

‘‘Kāmāte paṭhamā senā’’tiādinā nayena vuttappakāraṃ mārasenanti –

"Kāmā te paṭhamā senā" (Pleasures are your first army) and so on, the army of Māra (mārasenaṃ) of the kind that has been described –

‘‘Kāmā te paṭhamā senā, dutiyā arati vuccati;

"Pleasures are your first army, the second is called aversion (arati);
The third is hunger and thirst, the fourth is called craving (taṇhā).

‘‘Pañcamī thinamiddhaṃ te, chaṭṭhā bhīrū pavuccati;

"The fifth is sloth and torpor, the sixth is called fear (bhīrū);
The seventh is doubt (vicikicchā), the eighth are hypocrisy (makkha) and obstinacy (thambho).

‘‘Lābho siloko sakkāro, micchāladdho ca yo yaso;

"Gain, praise, honor, and the glory wrongly obtained;
And whoever exalts himself and disparages others.

‘‘Esā namuci te senā, kaṇhassābhippahārinī;

"This is the army of Namuci (Māra), the destroyer with the dark side;
A non-hero (asūro) does not conquer it, but having conquered it, one obtains happiness." (Sn. 438-441; Mnd. 28) –

Iminā nayena vuttappakāraṃ mārasenaṃ.

The army of Māra of the kind described in this way.

aratiuppajjati. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘pabbajitena kho, āvuso, abhirati dukkarā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.331). Tato te parapaṭibaddhajīvikattākhuppipāsābādhati, tāya bādhitānaṃ pariyesanataṇhācittaṃ kilamayati, atha nesaṃ kilantacittānaṃthinamiddhaṃokkamati, tato visesamanadhigacchantānaṃ durabhisambhavesu araññavanapatthesu senāsanesu viharataṃ utrāsasaññitābhīrujāyati, tesaṃ ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitānaṃ dīgharattaṃ vivekarasamanassādayamānānaṃ viharataṃ ‘‘na siyā nu kho esa maggo’’ti paṭipattiyaṃvicikicchāuppajjati, taṃ vinodetvā viharataṃ appamattakena visesādhigamenamānamakkhathambhājāyanti, tepi vinodetvā viharataṃ tato adhikataraṃ visesādhigamaṃ nissāyalābhasakkārasilokāuppajjanti, lābhādimucchitā dhammapatirūpakāni pakāsentāmicchāyasaṃadhigantvā tattha ṭhitā jātiādīhiattānaṃ ukkaṃsenti paraṃ vambhenti,tasmā kāmādīnaṃ paṭhamasenādibhāvo veditabbo.

Aversion (arati) arises. And this was said, "For a renunciate, friend, delight is difficult" (SN 4.331). Then, because their livelihood depends on others, hunger and thirst (khuppipāsā) afflicts them; afflicted by that, craving for seeking tires the mind; then sloth and torpor (thinamiddhaṃ) overcomes those whose minds are tired; then, not attaining anything special, living in forest groves and remote lodgings, fear (bhīru) arises, associated with trembling; for those who are suspicious and apprehensive, living for a long time without relishing the taste of seclusion, doubt (vicikicchā) arises in their practice, "Could this not be the path?"; when they dispel that and live, conceit (māna), hypocrisy (makkha), and obstinacy (thambho) arise with a small attainment of distinction; when they dispel even those and live, gain (lābha), honor (sakkāra), and praise (siloka) arise, relying on a greater attainment of distinction; infatuated with gain and so on, revealing semblances of the Dhamma, attaining wrongful fame (micchāyasaṃ), and standing there, they exalt themselves and disparage others (attānaṃ ukkaṃsenti paraṃ vambhenti) by birth and so on; therefore, the state of pleasure and so on being the first army should be understood.

abhippahārinīti samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ghātanī nippothanī, antarāyakarīti attho.Na naṃ asūro jināti, jetvā ca labhate sukhanti evaṃ tava senaṃ asūro kāye ca jīvite ca sāpekkho puriso na jināti, sūro pana jināti, jetvā ca maggasukhaṃ phalasukhañca adhigacchatīti attho.Sopi brāhmaṇoti sopi khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo.

"Abhippahārinī" (destroyer) means the killer and crusher of ascetics and brahmins, a cause of obstruction. "Na naṃ asūro jināti, jetvā ca labhate sukhaṃ" (A non-hero does not conquer it, but having conquered it, one obtains happiness) means a non-hero (asūro), a person who is attached to body and life, does not conquer your army in this way, but a hero conquers it, and having conquered it, obtains the happiness of the path (maggasukhaṃ) and the happiness of the fruit (phalasukhaṃ). "Sopi brāhmaṇo" (That brahmin too) means that arahant brahmin too.

‘‘udāne panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Etthatassa vasenāti tassa paccayākārapajānanassa paccayakkhayādhigamassa ca vasena.Ekekameva koṭṭhāsanti anulomapaṭilomesu ekekameva koṭṭhāsaṃ.Pāṭipadarattiyā evaṃ manasākāsīti rattiyā tīsupi yāmesu anulomapaṭilomaṃyeva manasākāsi. Bhagavā kira ṭhapetvā ratanagharasattāhaṃ sesesu chasu sattāhesu antarantarā dhammaṃ paccavekkhitvā yebhuyyena vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī vihāsi, ratanagharasattāhe pana abhidhammapavicayavaseneva vihāsi. Tasmā antarantarā dhammapaccavekkhaṇavasena uppāditamanasikāresu pāṭipadarattiyā uppāditaṃ manasikāraṃ sandhāya imissaṃ khandhakapāḷiyaṃ evaṃ vuttanti adhippāyo.

"Udāne panā" (Now in the utterance) and so on, has begun. Here, "tassa vasenā" (by means of that) means by means of that knowledge of the conditioned nature (paccayākārapajānanassa) and the attainment of the cessation of conditions (paccayakkhayādhigamassa). "Ekekameva koṭṭhāsaṃ" (each individual section) means each individual section in forward and reverse order. "Pāṭipadarattiyā evaṃ manasākāsi" (Thus he attended in the night of the full moon day) means he attended in forward and reverse order in all three watches of the night. It seems that the Blessed One, except for the seven days in the Jewel House (ratanagharasattāhaṃ), mostly remained experiencing the bliss of liberation (vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī) in the other six weeks, reviewing the Dhamma in between; but in the seven days in the Jewel House, he mostly remained in the application of investigating the Abhidhamma (abhidhammapavicayavaseneva). Therefore, the meaning is that in this section of the Khandhaka, it was said in this way referring to the attention produced on the night of the full moon, due to the attention generated in between by reviewing the Dhamma.

Bodhikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Bodhi Tree (Bodhikathāvaṇṇanā) is finished.

Ajapālakathāvaṇṇanā
The Commentary on the Ajapāla Tree (Ajapālakathāvaṇṇanā)

4.Tassa sattāhassa accayenāti pallaṅkasattāhassa apagamanena.Tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvāti tato arahattaphalasamāpattisamādhito yathākālaparicchedaṃ vuṭṭhahitvā.Aññepi buddhattakarāti visākhapuṇṇamito paṭṭhāya rattindivaṃ evaṃ niccasamāhitabhāvahetubhūtānaṃ buddhaguṇānaṃ upari aññepi buddhattasādhakā. ‘‘Ayaṃ buddho’’ti buddhabhāvassa paresaṃ vibhāvanā dhammā kiṃ nu kho santīti yojanā.Ekaccānaṃ devatānanti yā adhigatamaggā sacchikatanirodhā ekapadesena buddhaguṇe jānanti, tā ṭhapetvā tadaññāsaṃ devatānaṃ.Animisehīti dhammapītivipphāravasena pasādavibhāvaniccaladalatāya nimesarahitehi.Ratanacaṅkameti devatāhi māpite ratanamayacaṅkame. ‘‘Ratanabhūtānaṃ sattannaṃ pakaraṇānaṃ tattha ca anuttarassa dhammaratanassa sammasanena taṃ ṭhānaṃ ratanagharacetiyaṃ nāma jāta’’ntipi vadanti. Tenevaaṭṭhasāliniyaṃ(dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) ‘‘ratanagharaṃ nāma na ratanamayaṃ gehaṃ, sattannaṃ pana pakaraṇānaṃ sammasitaṭṭhānaṃ ratanagharanti veditabba’’nti vuttaṃ.

4. "Tassa sattāhassa accayena" (At the end of that week) means at the passing of the week of sitting cross-legged (pallaṅkasattāhassa apagamanena). "Tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvā" (Having arisen from that concentration) means having arisen from that concentration of attainment of the fruit of arahantship (arahattaphalasamāpattisamādito) after the due time had passed. "Aññepi buddhattakarā" (Other qualities that make one a Buddha) means from the full moon of Visākha onwards, what other qualities that accomplish Buddhahood (buddhattasādhakā) are there, in addition to the Buddha qualities that cause such a state of constant concentration, day and night? The application is whether there are qualities that reveal the state of a Buddha to others, "This is a Buddha". "Ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ" (To some devas) means excluding those devas who, having attained the path and realized cessation (sacchikatanirodhā), know the qualities of the Buddha all at once, to the other devas besides them. "Animisehī" (With unblinking [eyes]) means due to the diffusion of joy in the Dhamma, with a stable and unwavering clarity of delight, without blinking. "Ratanacaṅkame" (Jewel Promenade) means on the promenade made of jewels fashioned by the devas. Some also say, "Because of the reflection on the seven precious things and on the unsurpassed Jewel of the Dhamma there, that place became known as the Jewel House Shrine (ratanagharacetiyaṃ)". Therefore, in the Aṭṭhasālinī (DhsA, Nidānakathā) it was said, "The Jewel House is not a house made of jewels, but the place where the seven precious things were reflected upon should be understood as the Jewel House."

‘‘tassa kirā’’tiādi. Keci pana ‘‘yasmā tattha vede sajjhāyituṃ asamatthā mahallakabrāhmaṇā pākāraparikkhepayuttāni nivesanāni katvā sabbe vasiṃsu, tasmāssa ‘ajapālanigrodho’ti nāmaṃ jāta’’nti vadanti. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – na japantīti ajapā, mantānaṃ anajjhāyakāti attho. Ajapā lanti ādiyanti nivāsaṃ etthātiajapāloti. Apare pana vadanti ‘‘yasmā majjhanhike samaye anto paviṭṭhe aje attano chāyāya pāleti rakkhati, tasmā ‘ajapālo’tissa nāmaṃ ruḷha’’nti. Sabbathāpi nāmametaṃ tassa rukkhassa.

"Tassa kirā" (It seems that) and so on. Some, however, say, "Because old brahmins who were unable to recite the Vedas lived all together there, having built dwellings with surrounding walls, therefore it became known as the 'Ajapāla Banyan Tree.'" Here, this is the meaning of the word: "na japantīti ajapā" (those who do not recite are ajapā), meaning those who do not recite the mantras. "Ajapā lanti ādiyanti nivāsaṃ etthāti ajapālo" (ajapā, they take and accept residence here, therefore it is an ajapāla). Others, however, say, "Since at midday, when the goats enter, it protects them with its shade, therefore its name is established as 'Ajapāla.'" In any case, this is the name of that tree.

Vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedentoti dhammaṃ vicinantoyeva antarantarā vimuttisukhañca paṭisaṃvedento. ‘‘Dhammaṃ vicinanto vimuttisukhañca paṭisaṃvedento’’ti evaṃ vā ettha pāṭho gahetabbo. Udānaṭṭhakathāyampi (udā. aṭṭha. 4) hi ayameva pāṭho. Dhammaṃ vicinanto cettha evaṃ abhidhamme nayamaggaṃ sammasi paṭhamaṃ dhammasaṅgaṇīpakaraṇaṃ nāma, tato vibhaṅgappakaraṇaṃ, dhātukathāpakaraṇaṃ, puggalapaññattippakaraṇaṃ, kathāvatthuṃ nāma, yamakaṃ nāma, tato mahāpakaraṇaṃ paṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti. Tatthassa saṇhasukhumaṭṭhānamhi citte otiṇṇe pīti uppajji, pītiyā uppannāya lohitaṃ pasīdi, lohite pasanne chavi pasīdi, chaviyā pasannāya puratthimakāyato kūṭāgārādippamāṇā rasmiyo uṭṭhahitvā ākāse pakkhandaṃ chaddantanāgakulaṃ viya pācīnadisāya anantāni cakkavāḷāni pakkhandā. Pacchimakāyato uṭṭhahitvā pacchimadisāya, dakkhiṇaṃsakūṭato uṭṭhahitvā dakkhiṇadisāya, vāmaṃsakūṭato uṭṭhahitvā uttaradisāya anantāni cakkavāḷāni pakkhandā. Pādatalehi pavāḷaṅkuravaṇṇā rasmiyo nikkhamitvā mahāpathaviṃ vinibbijjha udakaṃ dvidhā bhinditvā vātakkhandhaṃ padāletvā ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandā. Sīsato saṃparivattiyamānaṃ maṇidāmaṃ viya nīlavaṇṇarasmivaṭṭi uṭṭhahitvā cha devaloke vinivijjhitvā nava brahmaloke atikkamma ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandā. Tasmiṃ divase aparimāṇesu cakkavāḷesu aparimāṇā sattā sabbe suvaṇṇavaṇṇāva ahesuṃ. Taṃ divasañca pana bhagavato sarīrā nikkhantā yāvajjadivasāpi kira tā rasmiyo anantalokadhātuyo gacchantiyeva. Na kevalañca imasmiṃyeva sattāhe dhammaṃ vicinantassa sarīrato rasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu, atha kho ratanagharasattāhepi paṭṭhānaṃ sammasantassa evameva sarīrato rasmiyo nikkhantā evāti veditabbaṃ.

"Vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedento" (Experiencing the bliss of liberation) means while investigating the Dhamma, in between, also experiencing the bliss of liberation. Or here, the reading should be taken as "Dhammaṃ vicinanto vimuttisukhañca paṭisaṃvedento" (investigating the Dhamma and experiencing the bliss of liberation). Indeed, in the Udāna Commentary (Udāna Aṭṭhakathā 4) this is the reading. Here, investigating the Dhamma means contemplating the method and way in the Abhidhamma: first the Dhammasaṅgaṇī treatise by name, then the Vibhaṅga treatise, the Dhātukathā treatise, the Puggalapaññatti treatise, the Kathāvatthu by name, the Yamaka by name, then the great treatise Paṭṭhāna by name. There, when the mind was immersed in the subtle and pleasant object, joy (pīti) arose. When joy arose, the blood became clear; when the blood was clear, the skin became clear; when the skin was clear, rays of light the size of a peaked house and so on, arose from the eastern side of the body and spread in the sky, illuminating infinite world-systems in the eastern direction, like the Chaddanta Nāga family. Rays arose from the western side of the body and spread in the western direction, rays arose from the right shoulder and spread in the southern direction, rays arose from the left shoulder and spread in the northern direction, illuminating infinite world-systems. Rays the color of coral sprouts issued from the soles of the feet, pierced the great earth, split the water in two, shattered the wind sphere, and spread to the open sky. A circle of blue light like a revolving jewel garland arose from the head, pierced the six deva-worlds, went beyond the nine Brahma-worlds, and spread to the open sky. On that day, countless beings in countless world-systems were all golden in color. It seems that those rays that issued from the Blessed One's body on that day still go to endless world-systems even today. And it was not only while investigating the Dhamma during this week that rays issued from his body, but also in the week in the Jewel House (ratanagharasattāhe), when contemplating the Paṭṭhāna, rays issued from his body in the same way, it should be understood.

aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ(dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) –

In the Aṭṭhasālinī (DhsA, Nidānakathā) –

‘‘Imesu ca ekavīsatiyā divasesu ekadivasepi satthu sarīrato rasmiyo na nikkhantā, catutthe pana sattāhe pacchimuttarāya disāya ratanaghare nisīdi. Tattha dhammasaṅgaṇiṃ sammasantassapi sarīrato rasmiyo na nikkhantā. Vibhaṅgappakaraṇaṃ, dhātukathaṃ, puggalapaññattiṃ, kathāvatthuppakaraṇaṃ, yamakappakaraṇaṃ sammasantassapi rasmiyo na nikkhantā. Yadā pana mahāpakaraṇaṃ oruyha ‘hetupaccayo ārammaṇapaccayo…pe… avigatapaccayo’ti sammasanaṃ ārabhi, athassa catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhānaṃ sammasantassa ekantato sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ mahāpakaraṇe okāsaṃ labhi. Yathā hi timirapiṅgalamahāmaccho caturāsītiyojanasahassagambhīre mahāsamuddeyeva okāsaṃ labhati, evameva sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ekantato mahāpakaraṇeyeva okāsaṃ labhi.

"During these twenty-one days, rays did not emanate from the Teacher's body even on a single day. However, in the fourth week, he sat in the Jewel House in the northwest direction. Even while contemplating the Dhammasaṅgaṇi, rays did not emanate from his body. Rays did not emanate even while contemplating the Vibhaṅga treatise, the Dhātukathā, the Puggalapaññatti, the Kathāvatthu treatise, or the Yamaka treatise. But when he descended to the great treatise (Mahāpakaraṇa) and began contemplating, 'Hetupaccayo ārammaṇapaccayo…pe… avigatapaccayo' (root condition, object condition...and so on...unseparated condition), then, as he contemplated the twenty-four universal relations (catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhāna), his omniscient knowledge (sabbaññutaññāṇa) found its opportunity entirely in the great treatise. Just as a large, dark-blue fish (timirapiṅgalamahāmaccho) finds its opportunity only in the great ocean, eighty-four thousand yojanas deep, so too, omniscient knowledge found its opportunity entirely in the great treatise.

nīlarasmiyonikkhamiṃsu, yāsaṃ vasena gaganatalaṃ añjanacuṇṇasamokiṇṇaṃ viya umāpupphanīluppaladalasañchannaṃ viya vītipatantamaṇitālavaṇṭaṃ viya sampasāritamecakapaṭaṃ viya ca ahosi. Chavito ceva akkhīnañca pītaṭṭhānehipītarasmiyonikkhamiṃsu, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā suvaṇṇarasanisiñcamānā viya suvaṇṇapaṭapasāritā viya kuṅkumacuṇṇakaṇikārapupphasamparikiṇṇā viya ca virociṃsu. Maṃsalohitehi ceva akkhīnañca rattaṭṭhānehilohitarasmiyonikkhamiṃsu, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā cīnapiṭṭhacuṇṇarañjitā viya supakkalākhārasanisiñcamānā viya rattakambalaparikkhittā viya jayasumanapāribaddhakabandhujīvakakusumasamparikiṇṇā viya ca virociṃsu. Aṭṭhīhi ceva dantehi ca akkhīnañca setaṭṭhānehiodātarasmiyonikkhamiṃsu, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā rajatakuṭehi āsiñcamānakhīradhārāsamparikiṇṇā viya pasāritarajatapaṭavitānā viya vītipatantarajatatālavaṇṭā viya kundakumudasindhuvārasumanamallikādikusumasañchannā viya ca virociṃsu.Mañjiṭṭhapabhassarāpana tamhā tamhā sarīrappadesā nikkhamiṃsu. Iti tā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo nikkhamitvā ghanamahāpathaviṃ gaṇhiṃsu.

Blue rays (nīlarasmiyo) emanated, so that the surface of the sky seemed strewn with collyrium powder, covered with blue lotus petals and umā flowers, like scattered jeweled ornaments, or like a spread-out dark-blue cloth. From the yellow parts of the skin and eyes, yellow rays (pītarasmiyo) emanated, so that the regions of the directions shone as if drenched with gold solution, as if golden cloths were spread out, and as if scattered with particles of saffron powder and karnikara flowers. From the red parts of the flesh and blood and eyes, red rays (lohitarasmiyo) emanated, so that the regions of the directions shone as if painted with Chinese flour, as if drenched with well-ripened lac solution, as if surrounded by red blankets, and as if scattered with jayasumana, pāribaddha, bandhujīvaka, and kusuma flowers. From the white parts of the bones and teeth and eyes, white rays (odātarasmiyo) emanated, so that the regions of the directions shone as if scattered with streams of milk poured from silver pitchers, as if canopies of spread-out silver cloth were stretched out, as if silver ornaments were scattered, and as if covered with kunda, kumuda, sindhuvāra, sumana, mallikā, and other flowers. Rays of mañjiṭṭha-color (mañjiṭṭhapabhassarā) emanated from each of those parts of the body. Thus, those six-colored rays, having emanated, reached the solid great earth.

‘‘Catunahutādhikadviyojanasatasahassabahalā mahāpathavī niddhantasuvaṇṇapiṇḍi viya ahosi. Pathaviṃ bhinditvā heṭṭhā udakaṃ gaṇhiṃsu. Pathavīsandhārakaṃ aṭṭhanahutādhikacatuyojanasatasahassabahalaṃ udakaṃ suvaṇṇakalasehi āsiñcamānavilīnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya ahosi. Udakaṃ vinivijjhitvā vātaṃ aggahesuṃ. Channavutādhikanavayojanasatasahassabahalo vāto samussitasuvaṇṇakkhandho viya ahosi. Vātaṃ vinivijjhitvā heṭṭhā ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandiṃsu. Uparibhāgena uggantvāpi catumahārājike gaṇhiṃsu. Te vinivijjhitvā tāvatiṃse, tato yāme, tato tusite, tato nimmānaratī, tato paranimmitavasavattī, tato nava brahmaloke, tato vehapphale, tato pañca suddhāvāse vinivijjhitvā cattāro āruppe gaṇhiṃsu. Cattāro ca āruppe vinivijjhitvā ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandiṃsu.

"The great earth, one hundred and twenty-four thousand leagues in thickness, was like a molten mass of refined gold. Splitting the earth, they reached the water below. The water that supports the earth, four hundred and eighty thousand leagues in thickness, was like molten gold being poured from golden pitchers. Piercing through the water, they took hold of the wind. The wind, nine hundred and ninety-six thousand leagues in thickness, was like a raised pillar of gold. Piercing through the wind, they descended to the unconfined space (ajaṭākāsa) below. Rising upwards, they reached the realm of the Four Great Kings (cātumahārājika). Piercing through them, they reached the Tāvatiṃsa realm, then the Yāma, then the Tusita, then the Nimmānarati, then the Paranimmitavasavatti, then the nine Brahma realms, then the Vehapphala, then the five Pure Abodes (suddhāvāsa), piercing through them, they reached the four immaterial realms (āruppa). Piercing through the four immaterial realms, they descended to the unconfined space.

‘‘Tiriyabhāgehi anantā lokadhātuyo pakkhandiṃsu, ettake ṭhāne candamhi candappabhā natthi, sūriye sūriyappabhā natthi, tārakarūpesu tārakarūpappabhā natthi, devatānaṃ uyyānavimānakapparukkhesu sarīre ābharaṇesūti sabbattha pabhā natthi. Tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātuyā ālokapharaṇasamattho mahābrahmāpi sūriyuggamane khajjopanako viya ahosi, candasūriyatārakarūpadevatuyyānavimānakapparukkhānaṃ paricchedamattakameva paññāyittha. Ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ buddharasmīhiyeva ajjhotthaṭaṃ ahosi. Ayañca neva buddhānaṃ adhiṭṭhāniddhi, na bhāvanāmayiddhi. Saṇhasukhumadhammaṃ pana sammasato lokanāthassa lohitaṃ pasīdi, vatthurūpaṃ pasīdi, chavivaṇṇo pasīdi. Cittasamuṭṭhānā vaṇṇadhātu samantā asītihatthamatte padese niccalā aṭṭhāsī’’ti.

"In the transverse directions, they reached countless world-systems (lokadhātuyo). In so much space, there was no light of the moon in the moon, no light of the sun in the sun, no light of the stars in the forms of stars, no light in the parks, mansions, or wish-fulfilling trees of the deities, nor in their bodies or ornaments—there was no light anywhere. Even Mahābrahmā, capable of illuminating a triple-thousand great world-system (tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātu), was like a firefly at sunrise; only the extent of the moon, sun, stars, deities' parks, mansions, and wish-fulfilling trees was discernible. So much space was entirely pervaded by the Buddha's rays. And this was neither theiddhi of the Buddha's determination (adhiṭṭhāniddhi) nor theiddhi born of meditation (bhāvanāmayiddhi). But as the world-protector contemplated the subtle and delicate Dhamma, his blood became clear, his physical form became clear, his skin color became clear. The color element (vaṇṇadhātu) born of the mind stood motionless in all directions, in an area of eighty cubits."

Evaṃ nisinneti tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvā nisinne.Eko brāhmaṇoti nāmagottavasena anabhiññāto apākaṭo eko brāhmaṇo.‘‘Huṃ hu’’nti karonto vicaratīti sabbaṃ acokkhajātikaṃ passitvā jigucchanto ‘‘huṃ hu’’nti karonto vicarati.Etadavocāti (udā. aṭṭha. 4) etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tatthakittāvatāti kittakena pamāṇena.Nu-ti saṃsayatthe nipāto,kho-ti padapūraṇe.Bho-ti brāhmaṇānaṃ jātisamudāgataṃ ālapanaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘bhovādi nāma so hoti, sace hoti sakiñcano’’ti (dha. pa. 396; su. ni. 625).Gotamāti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ brāhmaṇo sampati samāgato bhagavato gottaṃ jānātīti? Nāyaṃ sampati samāgato, chabbassāni padhānakaraṇakāle upaṭṭhahantehi pañcavaggiyehi saddhiṃ caramāno aparabhāge taṃ vataṃ chaḍḍetvā uruvelāyaṃ senanigame eko adutiyo hutvā piṇḍāya caramānopi tena brāhmaṇena diṭṭhapubbo ceva sallapitapubbo ca, tena so pubbe pañcavaggiyehi gayhamānaṃ bhagavato gottaṃ anussaranto ‘‘bho gotamā’’ti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati. Yato paṭṭhāya vā bhagavā mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhanto anomānadītīre pabbaji, tato pabhuti ‘‘samaṇo gotamo’’ti cando viya sūriyo viya pākaṭo paññāto hoti, na ca tassa gottajānane kāraṇaṃ gavesitabbaṃ.Brāhmaṇakaraṇāti brāhmaṇaṃ karontīti brāhmaṇakaraṇā, brāhmaṇabhāvakarāti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘kittāvatā’’ti etena yehi dhammehi brāhmaṇo hoti, tesaṃ dhammānaṃ parimāṇaṃ pucchati.‘‘Katame’’ti pana iminā tesaṃ sarūpaṃ pucchati.

Evaṃ nisinne, thus seated, meaning having arisen from that samādhi and being seated. Eko brāhmaṇo, a certain brahmin, unknown and unrenowned by name and clan. ‘‘Huṃ hu’’nti karonto vicaratī, wandering about making the sound "hum hum," disgusted by seeing everything that is not visible to the eye. Etadavocā, (Udā. Aṭṭha. 4) he said this statement that is now to be spoken, "Kittāvatā nu kho," and so on. There, kittāvatā, by what extent, by what measure. Nu is a particle used in the sense of doubt; kho is used to fill out the sentence. Bho is a form of address arising from the brahmin's caste. As it was said, "He is called a 'bhovādi' if he is affluent" (Dha. Pa. 396; Su. Ni. 625). Gotamā, he addresses the Blessed One by his clan name. How does this brahmin, having come now, know the Blessed One's clan name? He has not come now; during the six years of striving, while wandering with the group of five who attended upon him, later, having abandoned that practice, wandering alone and without a second in Senānigama in Uruvelā for alms, he was both seen and spoken to before by that brahmin. Therefore, recalling the Blessed One's clan name, which was used by the group of five earlier, he addresses the Blessed One by his clan name, "Bho Gotama." Or, from when the Blessed One went forth in the Great Renunciation and became a renunciate on the bank of the Anomā River, from then on, he was known and renowned as "the samaṇa Gotama," like the moon or the sun, and there is no need to search for a reason for knowing his clan name. Brāhmaṇakaraṇā, making a brahmin, meaning one who makes the state of being a brahmin. Here, with "kittāvatā," he asks the measure of those qualities by which one is a brahmin. With ‘‘Katame’’, however, he asks for the nature of those qualities.

Udānaṃ udānesīti ‘‘yo brāhmaṇo’’tiādikaṃ udānaṃ udānesi, na pana tassa brāhmaṇassa dhammaṃ desesi. Kasmā? Dhammadesanāya abhājanabhāvato. Tathā hi tassa brāhmaṇassa imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā na saccābhisamayo ahosi. Yathā ca imassa, evaṃ upakassa ājīvakassa buddhaguṇappakāsanaṃ sutvā. Dhammacakkappavattanato hi pubbabhāge bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ paresaṃ suṇantānampi tapussabhallikānaṃ saraṇadānaṃ viya vāsanābhāgiyameva jātaṃ, na asekkhabhāgiyaṃ vā nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ vā. Esā hi dhammatāti.Vedehi vā antanti etthaantaṃnāma sabbasaṅkhārapariyosānaṃ nibbānaṃ.Ime ussadā natthīti sabbaso ime pahīnattā na santi.

Udānaṃ udānesi, he uttered the utterance beginning with "yo brāhmaṇo," but he did not teach the Dhamma to that brahmin. Why? Because he was not a vessel for the teaching of the Dhamma. Thus, the realization of the Truth (saccābhisamayo) did not occur for that brahmin upon hearing this verse. Just as, upon hearing the proclamation of the Buddha's virtues by the Ājīvaka Upaka. For in the part before the turning of the Wheel of the Dhamma, what was spoken by the Blessed One, even for those who heard it, such as Tapussa and Bhallika, only became conducive to inclination (vāsanābhāgiya), not conducive to the state of a learner (asekkhabhāgiya) or conducive to penetration (nibbedhabhāgiya). This is the nature of the Dhamma (dhammatā). Vedehi vā anta, here, antaṃ means Nibbāna, the end of all conditioned things (saṅkhāra). Ime ussadā natthī, these are entirely non-existent because they have been abandoned.

Ajapālakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Ajapāla Story is Finished.

Mucalindakathāvaṇṇanā
The Mucalinda Story: Explanation

5.Mucalindamūleti (udā. aṭṭha. 11) etthamucalindovuccati nīparukkho, yo ‘‘niculo’’tipi vuccati, tassa samīpeti attho. Keci pana ‘‘mucaloti tassa rukkhassa nāmaṃ, vanajeṭṭhakatāya pana mucalindoti vutta’’nti vadanti.Udapādīti sakalacakkavāḷagabbhaṃ pūrento mahāmegho udapādi. Evarūpo kira megho dvīsuyeva kālesu vassati cakkavattimhi vā uppanne buddhe vā, idha buddhuppādakāle udapādi.Pokkharaṇiyā nibbattoti pokkharaṇiyā heṭṭhā nāgabhavanaṃ atthi, tattha nibbatto.Sakabhavanāti attano nāgabhavanato.Evaṃ bhogehi parikkhipitvāti satta vāre attano sarīrabhogehi bhagavato kāyaṃ parivāretvā.Uparimuddhani mahantaṃ phaṇaṃvihaccāti bhagavato muddhappadesassa upari attano mahantaṃ phaṇaṃ pasāretvā. ‘‘Phaṇaṃ karitvā’’tipi pāṭho, soyevattho.

5. Mucalindamūle (Udā. Aṭṭha. 11), here, mucalindo refers to the nīpa tree, which is also called "niculo"; the meaning is "near that." Some, however, say, "Muca is the name of that tree; however, because it is the chief of the forest, it is called Mucalinda." Udapādī, arose, meaning a great cloud arose filling the interior of the entire universe. It is said that a cloud of this sort rains only at two times: when a wheel-turning monarch (cakkavatti) arises or when a Buddha arises. Here, it arose at the time of the Buddha's arising. Pokkharaṇiyā nibbatto, born from the lotus pond. There is a Nāga-abode below the lotus pond, born there. Sakabhavanā, from his own Nāga-abode. Evaṃ bhogehi parikkhipitvā, having thus surrounded the Blessed One's body seven times with the coils of his body. Uparimuddhani mahantaṃ phaṇaṃ vihaccā, having spread his great hood over the Blessed One's head. "Phaṇaṃ karitvā" is also a reading, the meaning is the same.

Majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.284) pana –

In the Middle Length Discourses Commentary (Majjhimaṭṭhakathā) (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.284):

‘‘Parikkhepassa anto okāso heṭṭhā lohapāsādappamāṇo ahosi, ‘icchiticchitena iriyāpathena satthā viharissatī’ti nāgarājassa ajjhāsayo ahosi, tasmā evaṃ mahantaṃ okāsaṃ parikkhipi, majjhe ratanapallaṅko paññatto hoti, upari suvaṇṇatārakavicittaṃ samosaritagandhadāmakusumacelavitānaṃ ahosi, catūsu koṇesu gandhatelena dīpā jalitā, catūsu disāsu vivaritvā candanakaraṇḍakā ṭhapitā’’ti –

"The space inside the encirclement was about the size of the Lohapāsāda (Brazen Palace); the Nāga-king's intention was, 'The Teacher will live according to whatever posture (iriyāpatha) he wishes.' Therefore, he encircled such a large space. In the middle, a jeweled couch was arranged; above, there was a canopy adorned with golden stars, strung with fragrant garlands and cloths; lamps burning with fragrant oil were lit in the four corners; sandalwood caskets were placed open in the four directions"—

Icchiticchitena iriyāpathena viharissatīti ca nāgarājassa ajjhāsayamattametaṃ, bhagavā pana yathānisinnova sattāhaṃ vītināmesi.

Icchiticchitena iriyāpathena viharissatīti, "He will live according to whatever posture he wishes," is merely the intention of the Nāga-king; however, the Blessed One spent the entire week in the same seated posture.

Kiñcāpi…pe… cintetuṃ yuttanti ettha keci vadanti ‘‘uṇhaggahaṇaṃ bhogaparikkhepassa vipulabhāvakaraṇe kāraṇakittanaṃ. Khuddake hi tasmiṃ bhagavantaṃ nāgarājassa sarīrasambhūtā usmā bādheyya, vipulabhāvakaraṇena pana tādisaṃ mā uṇhaṃ bādhayitthā’’ti. Saupasaggapadassa attho upasaggena vināpi viññāyatīti āha‘‘viddhanti ubbiddha’’nti, sā cassa ubbiddhatā upakkilesavigamena dūrabhāvena upaṭṭhānanti āha‘‘meghavigamena dūrībhūta’’nti. Indanīlamaṇi viya dibbati jotatītidevo,ākāso.Viditvāti ‘‘idāni vigatavalāhako ākāso, natthi bhagavato sītādiupaddavo’’ti ñatvā.Viniveṭhetvāti apanetvā.Attanorūpanti attano nāgarūpaṃ.Paṭisaṃharitvāti antaradhāpetvā.Māṇavakavaṇṇanti kumārakarūpaṃ.

Kiñcāpi…pe… cintetuṃ yutta, here, some say, "The mentioning of heat is to show the abundance of the protection of the coils. For the heat arising from the Nāga-king's body would harm the Blessed One in a small space; however, by making it abundant, such heat did not harm him." He says that the meaning of the word with the prefix is understood even without the prefix: ‘‘viddhanti ubbiddha’’, "viddha means ubbiddha;" and he says that his being raised up is the standing near by being distant by the removal of defilements: ‘‘meghavigamena dūrībhūta’’, "having become distant by the removal of the clouds." Devo, the sky, shines and gleams like an indigo jewel. Viditvā, having known, "Now the sky is free from clouds; there is no affliction of cold, etc., for the Blessed One." Viniveṭhetvā, having removed, taken away. Attano rūpaṃ, his own Nāga-form. Paṭisaṃharitvā, having withdrawn, made disappear. Māṇavakavaṇṇaṃ, the form of a young man.

Etamatthaṃviditvāti ‘‘vivekasukhapaṭisaṃvedino yattha katthaci sukhameva hotī’’ti etaṃ atthaṃ sabbākārena jānitvā.Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ vivekasukhānubhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.Sutadhammassāti vissutadhammassa. Tenāha‘‘pakāsitadhammassā’’ti.Akuppanabhāvoti akuppanasabhāvo.

Etamatthaṃ viditvā, having known this meaning in every way, "Wherever those who experience the bliss of seclusion are, they are happy." Imaṃ udānaṃ, this utterance that illuminates the experience of the bliss of seclusion. Sutadhammassā, of one who has heard the Dhamma. Therefore, he says, ‘‘pakāsitadhammassā’’, "of one who has proclaimed the Dhamma." Akuppanabhāvo, the state of being unshakeable.

Mucalindakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Mucalinda Story is Finished.

Rājāyatanakathāvaṇṇanā
The Rājāyatana Story: Explanation

6.Osadhaharītakaṃ upanesīti na kevalaṃ osadhaharītakameva, dantakaṭṭhampi upanesi.Paccaggheti ettha purimaṃ atthavikappaṃ keci na icchanti, tenevaācariyadhammapālattherenavuttaṃ ‘‘paccaggheti abhinave. Paccekaṃ mahagghatāya paccaggheti keci, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Na hi buddhā bhagavanto mahagghaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti paribhuñjanti vā’’ti.

6. Osadhaharītakaṃ upanesī, he offered not only osadhaharītaka, but also a toothpick. Paccagghe, here, some do not approve of the earlier interpretation of the meaning; therefore, Ācariya Dhammapāla Thera said, "Paccagghe means new. Some say 'paccagghe' because it is individually very valuable; that is not fitting. For Buddhas, the Blessed Ones, do not accept or use what is very valuable."

Rājāyatanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Rājāyatana Story is Finished.

Brahmayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
The Brahma's Request Story: Explanation

7.Āciṇṇasamāciṇṇoti ācarito ceva ācarantehi ca sammadeva ācaritoti attho. Etena ayaṃ parivitakko sabbabuddhānaṃ paṭhamābhisambodhiyaṃ uppajjatevāti ayamettha dhammatāti dasseti. Gambhīropi dhammo paṭipakkhavidhamanena supākaṭo bhaveyya, paṭipakkhavidhamanaṃ pana sammāpaṭipattipaṭibaddhaṃ, sā saddhammasavanādhīnā, taṃ satthari dhamme ca pasādāyattaṃ. So visesato loke sambhāvanīyassa garukātabbassa abhipatthanāhetukoti paramparāya sattānaṃ dhammasampaṭipattiyā brahmuno yācanānimittanti taṃ dassento‘‘brahmunā yācite desetukāmatāyā’’tiādimāha.

7. Āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo, practiced and well-practiced by those who practice, meaning it is practiced by those who practice in the right way. By this, he shows that this reflection arises for all Buddhas at the first enlightenment; this is the nature of the Dhamma (dhammatā) here. Even a profound Dhamma would become very clear through the dispelling of opposition, but the dispelling of opposition is connected to right practice, and that depends on hearing the True Dhamma, and that depends on faith in the Teacher and the Dhamma. That is due to aspiring for one who is especially esteemed and worthy of respect in the world. Therefore, showing that the Brahma's request is the cause for beings' right practice of the Dhamma by way of succession, he says, ‘‘brahmunā yācite desetukāmatāyā’’ and so on.

Adhigatoti paṭividdho, sayambhūñāṇena ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā yathābhūtaṃ avabuddhoti attho.Dhammoti catusaccadhammo tabbinimuttassa paṭivijjhitabbadhammassa abhāvato.Gambhīroti mahāsamuddo viya makasatuṇḍasūciyā aññatra samupacitaparipakkañāṇasambhārehi aññesaṃ ñāṇena alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho. Gambhīrattāvaduddasodukkhena daṭṭhabbo, na sakkā sukhena daṭṭhuṃ. Yo hi alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho, so ogāhituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya sarūpato ca visesato ca sukhena passituṃ na sakkā, atha kho kicchena kenaci kadācideva daṭṭhabbo. Duddasattāvaduranubodhodukkhena avabujjhitabbo, na sakkā sukhena avabujjhituṃ. Yañhi daṭṭhumeva na sakkā, tassa ogāhetvā anubujjhane kathā eva natthi avabodhassa dukkarabhāvato. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, katamaṃ nu kho dukkarataraṃ vā durabhisambhavataraṃ vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1115)suttapadaṃvattabbaṃ.

Adhigato, penetrated, meaning thoroughly understood with self-born knowledge (sayambhūñāṇa), "This is suffering" and so on, understood according to reality. Dhammo, the four Noble Truths (catusaccadhammo), because there is no Dharma to be penetrated apart from that. Gambhīro, profound, like the great ocean, impossible to be obtained by the knowledge of others except with a mosquito-beak needle, with the accumulated and ripened stores of knowledge. Being profound, it is duddaso, difficult to see, not possible to see easily. For that which is impossible to obtain is not possible to see easily in its nature and in its particulars because it cannot be fathomed; rather, it is to be seen with difficulty by someone sometime. Being difficult to see, it is duranubodho, difficult to understand, not possible to understand easily. For that which is not even possible to see, there is no question of fathoming and understanding it, because understanding is difficult. In this place, the suttapadaṃ (passage from the Sutta), "What do you think, bhikkhus, which is more difficult or harder to fully comprehend?" (Saṃ. Ni. 5.1115) should be spoken.

Santoti anupasantasabhāvānaṃ kilesānaṃ saṅkhārānañca abhāvato vūpasantasabbapariḷāhatāya santo nibbuto, santārammaṇatāya vā santo. Ettha ca nirodhasaccaṃ santaṃ ārammaṇanti santārammaṇaṃ, maggasaccaṃ santaṃ santārammaṇañcāti santārammaṇaṃ. Padhānabhāvaṃ nītotipaṇīto. Atha vāpaṇītoti atittikaraṇaṭṭhena atappako sādurasabhojanaṃ viya. Santapaṇītabhāveneva cettha asecanakatāya atappakatā daṭṭhabbā. Idañhi dvayaṃ lokuttarameva sandhāya vuttaṃ.Atakkāvacaroti uttamañāṇavisayattā takkena avacaritabbo ogāhitabbo na hoti, ñāṇeneva avacaritabbo. Tato eva nipuṇañāṇagocaratāya saṇhasukhumasabhāvattā canipuṇo saṇho. Paṇḍitavedanīyoti bālānaṃ avisayattā sammāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipannehi paṇḍitehi eva veditabbo.

Santo means calmed and cooled because of the absence of defilements and volitional formations, and because all burning is extinguished; thus, it is nibbāna, calmed. Alternatively, it is called santo because it has peace as its object (santārammaṇatāya). Here, the truth of cessation (nirodhasacca) is peace, and what has peace as its object is santārammaṇa. The truth of the path (maggasacca) is both peace and has peace as its object, hence santārammaṇa. Paṇīto means brought to a state of excellence (padhānabhāvaṃ nīto). Or, paṇīto means not causing satiety (atittikaraṇaṭṭhena), like delicious food with excellent flavor that does not cause one to be content. It should be understood that because it is not irrigating (asecanakatāya), it does not cause contentment here due to its peaceful and excellent nature. This pair is stated in reference to the supramundane only. Atakkāvacaro means not to be investigated or fathomed by reasoning (takkena avacaritabbo ogāhitabbo na hoti) because it is the object of supreme knowledge; it is to be investigated only by knowledge. Therefore, because it is the sphere of subtle knowledge and because it has a refined and subtle nature, it is nipuṇo saṇho, meaning subtle and refined. Paṇḍitavedanīyo means, because it is not the sphere of the foolish, it is to be known only by the wise who have embarked on the right path (sammāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipannehi paṇḍitehi eva veditabbo).

ālayā,pañca kāmaguṇāti āha‘‘sattā pañcakāmaguṇe allīyanti, tasmā te ālayāti vuccantī’’ti. Tatthapañcakāmaguṇe allīyantīti pañcakāmaguṇe sevantīti attho.Teti pañca kāmaguṇā.Ramantīti ratiṃ vindanti kīḷanti laḷanti. Ālīyanti abhiramaṇavasena sevantīti ālayā, aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritāni, tehi ālayehi ramantītiālayarāmāti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ime hi sattā yathā kāmaguṇe, evaṃ rāgampi assādenti abhinandantiyeva. Yatheva hi susajjitapupphaphalabharitarukkhādisampannaṃ uyyānaṃ paviṭṭho rājā tāya tāya sampattiyā ramati, sammudito āmoditapamodito hoti, na ukkaṇṭhati, sāyampi nikkhamituṃ na icchati, evamimehi kāmālayataṇhālayehi sattā ramanti, saṃsāravaṭṭe sammoditā anukkaṇṭhitā vasanti. Tena nesaṃ bhagavā duvidhampi ālayaṃ uyyānabhūmiṃ viya dassento‘‘ālayarāmā’’tiādimāha.Ratāti niratā.Suṭṭhu muditāti ativiya muditā anukkaṇṭhanato.

Regarding ālayā, the five strands of sensual pleasure, he said, "Beings cling to the five strands of sensual pleasure; therefore, they are called 'ālayā'." Here, pañcakāmaguṇe allīyantī means they indulge in the five strands of sensual pleasure. Te refers to the five strands of sensual pleasure. Ramantī means they find delight, play, and sport. Ālīyanti means they indulge by way of delighting, therefore ālayā. The eight hundred cravings are their playground, and they delight in those abodes, thus ālayarāmā; the meaning should be understood in this way. These beings enjoy and delight in craving just as they do in the strands of sensual pleasure. Just as a king, having entered a garden abundant with well-arranged flowers, fruits, trees, and so on, delights in that very prosperity, is gladdened, rejoiced, and exhilarated, and does not become weary, nor does he wish to leave, so too, beings delight in these abodes of sensual pleasure and abodes of craving, dwelling in the round of existence, gladdened and unwearied. Therefore, the Blessed One, showing them both kinds of abodes as if they were garden grounds, said ‘‘ālayarāmā’’ and so on. Ratā means continuously delighting. Suṭṭhu muditā means exceedingly joyful, without weariness.

Ṭhānaṃ sandhāyāti ṭhānasaddaṃ sandhāya. Atthato panaṭhānanti ca paṭiccasamuppādo eva adhippeto. Tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyātiṭhānaṃ,saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayabhūtā avijjādayo. Imesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayāti idappaccayā, avijjādayova. Idappaccayā evaidappaccayatāyathā devo eva devatā. Idappaccayānaṃ vā avijjādīnaṃ attano phalaṃ paṭicca paccayabhāvo uppādanasamatthatāidappaccayatā. Tena samatthapaccayalakkhaṇo paṭiccasamuppādo dassito hoti. Paṭicca samuppajjati phalaṃ etasmātipaṭiccasamuppādo. Padadvayenapi dhammānaṃ paccayaṭṭho eva vibhāvito. Saṅkhārādipaccayānañhi avijjādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādoti.Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādi sabbaṃ atthato nibbānameva. Yasmā hi taṃ āgamma paṭicca ariyamaggassa ārammaṇapaccayabhāvahetu sabbasaṅkhāravipphanditāni sammanti vūpasammanti, tasmā ‘‘sabbasaṅkhārasamatho’’ti vuccati. Sabbasaṅkhatavisaṃyutte hi nibbāne saṅkhāravūpasamapariyāyo ñāyāgatoyevāti. Idaṃ panettha nibbacanaṃ – sabbe saṅkhārā sammanti etthātisabbasaṅkhārasamathoti.

Ṭhānaṃ sandhāyā means with reference to the word ṭhāna. However, in meaning, ṭhāna refers to dependent origination (paṭiccasamuppāda). The result stands (tiṭṭhati) here because its activity depends on it; therefore, it is ṭhāna, the ignorance and so on that are the conditions for volitional formations and so on. Imesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayāti idappaccayā, the conditions for these volitional formations and so on, are ignorance and so on themselves. Idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā, just as devo is to devatā. Or, the conditionality (paccayabhāvo) of the conditions, namely ignorance and so on, with regard to their own result, is their ability to produce (uppādanasamatthatā), thus idappaccayatā. Therefore, dependent origination, characterized by effective condition, is shown. Because a result arises dependently on this, it is paṭiccasamuppādo. By both terms, the meaning of conditionality (paccayaṭṭho) of phenomena is explained. For ignorance and so on, which are conditions for volitional formations and so on, this is a designation: idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādo. Sabbasaṅkhārasamatho and so on, in meaning, is simply nibbāna. Since, having approached and relied on it, all agitated volitional formations are calmed and pacified because of the path being a condition as object (ārammaṇapaccayabhāvahetu), therefore it is called "the stilling of all volitional formations" (sabbasaṅkhārasamatho). In nibbāna, which is entirely disjoined from all that is conditioned, the synonym "the subsiding of volitional formations" is logically understood. Here, this is the etymology: All volitional formations are stilled here, thus sabbasaṅkhārasamatho.

‘‘sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodho’’ti vuccati, yā panesā taṇhā tena tena bhavena bhavantaraṃ bhavanikantibhāvena vinati saṃsibbati, phalena vā saddhiṃ kammaṃ vinati saṃsibbatīti katvā vānanti vuccati, tato nikkhantaṃ vānatotinibbānaṃ. Kilamathoti kāyakilamatho. Vihesāpi kāyavihesāyeva, citte pana ubhayampetaṃ buddhānaṃ natthi bodhimūleyeva samucchinnattā. Ettha ca ciranisajjācirabhāsanehi piṭṭhiāgilāyanatālugalasosādivasena kāyakilamatho ceva kāyavihesā ca veditabbā, sā ca kho desanāya atthaṃ ajānantānañca appaṭipajjantānañca vasena. Jānantānaṃ pana paṭipajjantānañca desanāya kāyaparissamopi satthu aparissamova, tenāha bhagavā ‘‘na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vihesetī’’ti. Teneva vuttaṃ‘‘yā ajānantānaṃ desanā nāma, so mama kilamatho assā’’ti.

‘‘Sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodho’’ is said. Now, that craving (taṇhā) which, through this and that existence (bhavena bhavantaraṃ), weaves together (vinati saṃsibbati) with the tendency to delight in existence (bhavanikantibhāvena), or which weaves and stitches action (kammaṃ) together with its result, is therefore called vāna. That which is the going out (nikkhantaṃ) of that vāna is therefore nibbānaṃ. Kilamatho means physical fatigue. Vihesā also means physical exhaustion. However, both of these are not present in Buddhas because they are eradicated at the foot of the Bodhi tree. Here, physical fatigue and physical exhaustion should be understood as being due to prolonged sitting and prolonged speaking, resulting in back pain, dryness of the palate, throat, and so on; and that is in relation to those who do not understand the meaning of the teaching and do not practice it. For those who understand and practice the teaching, even physical exertion is not exertion for the Teacher. Therefore, the Blessed One said, "And the exposition of the Dhamma does not weary me." Therefore, it was said, ‘‘That which is a teaching for those who do not know, that would be fatigue for me.’’

Apissūti sampiṇḍanatthe nipāto. So na kevalaṃ etadahosi, imāpi gāthā paṭibhaṃsūti dīpeti.Bhagavantanti paṭisaddayogena sāmiatthe upayogavacananti āha‘‘bhagavato’’ti. Vuddhippattā acchariyā vāanacchariyā. Vuddhiatthopi hi a-kāro hoti yathā ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti. Kappānaṃ cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni satasahassañca sadevakassa lokassa dhammasaṃvibhāgakaraṇatthameva pāramiyo pūretvā idāni samadhigatadhammarajjassa tattha appossukkatāpattidīpanattā gāthātthassa anuacchariyatā tassa vuddhippatti ca veditabbā. Atthadvārena hi gāthānaṃ anacchariyatā.Gocarā ahesunti upaṭṭhahaṃsu, upaṭṭhānañca vitakkayitabbatāti āha‘‘parivitakkayitabbabhāvaṃ pāpuṇiṃsū’’ti.

Apissū is a particle in the sense of combining. It indicates that not only this occurred, but these verses also flashed to mind. Bhagavanta means it is used in the sense of ownership with the word paṭisadda, thus he says, ‘‘bhagavato’’. Things that are increased or wonderful are anacchariyā. The a- can also be a growth affix, as in ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’. The wonderfulness and attainment of growth of the meaning of the verse should be understood, because having completed the perfections for four incalculable ages and one hundred thousand with the aim of distributing the Dhamma to the world with its devas, now there is a declaration that he has attained the sovereignty of the Dhamma and that there is an absence of desire. The non-wonderfulness of the verses is through the meaning. Gocarā ahesuṃ means they approached; and the approaching is to be considered, thus he says, ‘‘parivitakkayitabbabhāvaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu’’, they attained a state of being considered.

Kicchenāti na dukkhappaṭipadāya. Buddhānañhi cattāropi maggā sukhappaṭipadāva honti. Pāramīpūraṇakāle pana sarāgasadosasamohasseva sato āgatāgatānaṃ yācakānaṃ alaṅkatappaṭiyattaṃ sīsaṃ kantitvā galalohitaṃ nīharitvā suañjitāni akkhīni uppāṭetvā kulavaṃsappadīpaṃ puttaṃ manāpacāriniṃ bhariyanti evamādīni dentassa aññāni ca khantivādisadisesu attabhāvesu chejjabhejjādīni pāpuṇantassa āgamanīyapaṭipadaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Ha-iti vā byattanti etasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Ekaṃsattheti keci.Habyattaṃ ekaṃsena vāalaṃnippayojanaṃ evaṃ kicchena adhigataṃ dhammaṃ desetunti yojanā.Halanti vā alanti iminā samānatthaṃ padaṃ ‘‘halanti vadāmī’’tiādīsu viya. ‘‘Pakāsita’’ntipi paṭhanti, desitanti attho. Evaṃ kicchena adhigatassa dhammassa alaṃ desitaṃ pariyattaṃ desitaṃ, ko attho desitenāti vuttaṃ hoti.Rāgadosaparetehīti rāgadosaphuṭṭhehi, phuṭṭhavisena viya sappena rāgena dosena ca samphuṭṭhehi abhibhūtehīti attho. Atha vārāgadosaparetehīti rāgadosānugatehi, rāgena ca dosena ca anubandhehīti attho.

Kicchenā means not with a painful practice. For Buddhas, all four paths are a pleasant practice. However, during the time of completing the perfections, for one who is full of lust, hatred, and delusion, when giving to the beggars who came, things such as cutting off a head adorned and prepared, drawing out blood from the throat, extracting well-adorned eyes, a son like a family lamp, and a wife who is pleasing to the mind; and for one who is attaining things such as cutting and breaking in other existences like Khantivādī, this was said with reference to a practice that is difficult to come by. Ha is a particle in the sense of clarity, some say it is in the sense of certainty. Ha is clear, or certainly alaṃ is useless; thus, the meaning is that the Dhamma attained with difficulty should be taught. Hala is a word with a similar meaning to alaṃ, as in "I say halanti." Some read it as "Pakāsitaṃ," meaning taught. Thus, having said that the Dhamma attained with difficulty is enough, completely taught, what is the point of teaching it? Rāgadosaparetehī means touched by lust and hatred; it means overwhelmed and overcome by those who are struck by lust and hatred, like one who is bitten by a snake with venom. Alternatively, rāgadosaparetehī means accompanied by lust and hatred; it means followed by lust and hatred.

Paṭisotagāminti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.65; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.281; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.172) niccagāhādīnaṃ paṭisotaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā asubhanti evaṃ gataṃ pavattaṃ catusaccadhammanti attho.Rāgarattāti kāmarāgena bhavarāgena diṭṭhirāgena ca rattā.Na dakkhantīti aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā asubhanti iminā sabhāvena na passissanti, te apassante ko sakkhissati aniccantiādinā sabhāvena yāthāvato dhammaṃ jānāpetunti adhippāyo. Rāgadosaparetatāpi nesaṃ sammuḷhabhāvenevāti āha‘‘tamokhandhena āvuṭā’’ti, avijjārāsinā ajjhotthaṭāti attho.

Paṭisotagāminti (Going against the stream) means the four noble truths (catusaccadhamma) that go and proceed against the stream of permanence and so on, namely impermanence, suffering, not-self, and unattractiveness. Rāgarattā means colored by sensual lust, lust for existence, and lust for views. Na dakkhantī means they will not see with the nature of impermanence, suffering, not-self, and unattractiveness; the intention is that since they do not see, who will be able to make the Dhamma known as it really is with the nature of impermanence and so on? Their being overcome by lust and hatred is also due to their deluded state, thus he says ‘‘tamokhandhena āvuṭā’’, it means covered by a mass of ignorance.

Appossukkatāya cittaṃ namatīti kasmā panassa evaṃ cittaṃ nami, nanu esa ‘‘muttohaṃ mocessāmi, tiṇṇohaṃ tāressāmi,

Appossukkatāya cittaṃ namatī, why did his mind incline in this way? Surely, he had the aspiration:

Kiṃ me aññātavesena, dhammaṃ sacchikatenidha;

"Freed, I will free others; crossed over, I will help others cross over.

Patthanaṃ katvā pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaṃ pattoti? Saccameva, tadeva paccavekkhaṇānubhāvena panassa evaṃ cittaṃ nami. Tassa hi sabbaññutaṃ patvā sattānaṃ kilesagahanataṃ dhammassa ca gambhīrataṃ paccavekkhantassa sattānaṃ kilesagahanatā ca dhammagambhīratā ca sabbākārena pākaṭā jātā. Athassa ‘‘ime sattā kañjiyapuṇṇalābu viya takkabharitacāṭi viya vasātelapītapilotikā viya añjanamakkhitahattho viya ca kilesabharitā atisaṃkiliṭṭhā rāgarattā dosaduṭṭhā mohamuḷhā, te kiṃ nāma paṭivijjhissantī’’ti cintayato kilesagahanapaccavekkhaṇānubhāvenapi evaṃ cittaṃ nami.

and having made the aspiration, he fulfilled the perfections and attained omniscience? It is true, but his mind inclined in this way due to the power of reviewing. For him, having attained omniscience and reflecting on the depth of defilements of beings and the profundity of the Dhamma, the depth of the defilements of beings and the profundity of the Dhamma became fully apparent. Then, thinking, "These beings, filled with defilements like a kañji filled lābu, like a pot filled with takka, like a rag stained with oil and grease, like a hand smeared with ointment, are exceedingly defiled, colored by lust, corrupted by hatred, deluded by delusion. How will they penetrate it?" his mind inclined in this way even due to the power of reflecting on the depth of defilements.

gambhīro,pabbatena paṭicchādetvā ṭhapito sāsapo viyaduddaso,satadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭi viyaaṇu. Mayā hi imaṃ dhammaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ vāyamantena adinnaṃ dānaṃ nāma natthi, arakkhitaṃ sīlaṃ nāma natthi, aparipūritā kāci pāramī nāma natthi, tassa me nirussāhaṃ viya mārabalaṃ vidhamantassapi pathavī na kampittha, paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantassapi na kampittha, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhentassapi na kampittha, pacchimayāme pana paṭiccasamuppādaṃ paṭivijjhantasseva me dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha. Iti mādisenapi tikkhañāṇena kicchenevāyaṃ dhammo paṭividdho, taṃ lokiyamahājanā kathaṃ paṭivijjhissantī’’ti dhammagambhīratāya paccavekkhaṇānubhāvenapi evaṃ cittaṃ namīti veditabbaṃ.

Gambhīro, deep, duddaso, hard to see, like mustard seed hidden by covering it with a mountain, aṇu, subtle, like the tip of a hair split into a hundred pieces. "For me, striving to penetrate this Dhamma, there was no gift that was not given, no morality that was not guarded, no perfection that was not fulfilled. For me, even while dispelling the army of Māra as if without effort, the earth did not quake; nor did it quake even while recollecting past lives in the first watch; nor did it quake even while purifying the divine eye in the middle watch; but only when I penetrated dependent origination in the last watch did the ten-thousand-world system quake. Thus, this Dhamma was penetrated with difficulty even by one like me with sharp knowledge. How will worldly people penetrate it?" It should be understood that his mind inclined in this way even due to the power of reflecting on the profundity of the Dhamma.

Apica brahmunā yācite desetukāmatāyapissa evaṃ cittaṃ nami. Jānāti hi bhagavā ‘‘mama appossukkatāya citte namamāne mahābrahmā dhammadesanaṃ yācissati, ime ca sattā brahmagarukā, te ‘satthā kira dhammaṃ na desetukāmo ahosi, atha naṃ mahābrahmā yācitvā desāpeti, santo vata bho dhammo paṇīto’ti maññamānā sussūsissantī’’ti. Idampissa kāraṇaṃ paṭicca appossukkatāya cittaṃ nami, no dhammadesanāyāti veditabbaṃ.

Moreover, his mind inclined in this way due to the desire to teach it, as requested by Brahmā. The Blessed One knows, "When my mind inclines towards disinclination, Mahābrahmā will request the teaching of the Dhamma, and these beings are respectful of Brahmā. Thinking, 'The Teacher was not inclined to teach the Dhamma, but Mahābrahmā requested him and made him teach it; the Dhamma is peaceful and excellent,' they will listen attentively." It should be understood that his mind inclined towards disinclination due to this reason, not to the teaching of the Dhamma.

8.Sahampatissāti so kira kassapassa bhagavato sāsane sahako nāma thero paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ kappāyukabrahmā hutvā nibbatto, tatra naṃ sahampati brahmāti sañjānanti. Taṃ sandhāyāha‘‘brahmuno sahampatissā’’ti.Nassati vatāti so kira imaṃ saddaṃ tathā nicchāreti, yathā dasasahassilokadhātubrahmāno sutvā sabbe sannipatiṃsu.Apparajakkhajātikāti paññāmaye akkhimhi appaṃ parittaṃ rāgadosamoharajaṃ etesaṃ evaṃsabhāvāti apparajakkhajātikā. Appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ yesaṃ te sabhāvā apparajakkhajātikāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.Assavanatāti ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā’’tiādīsu viya karaṇatthe paccattavacanaṃ, assavanatāyāti attho.Bhavissantīti purimabuddhesu dasapuññakiriyavasena katādhikārā paripākagatapadumāni viya sūriyarasmisamphassaṃ dhammadesanaṃyeva ākaṅkhamānā catuppadikagāthāvasāne ariyabhūmiṃ okkamanārahā na eko, na dve, anekasatasahassā dhammassa aññātāro bhavissantīti dasseti.

8. Sahampatissā, it is said that in the dispensation of the Blessed One Kassapa, there was a certain Elder named Sahaka, having generated the first jhāna, was reborn as a Brahmā of kappa-long life in the plane of the first jhāna. There, they recognized him as Sahampati Brahmā. Referring to that, he says ‘‘brahmuno sahampatissā’’. Nassati vatā, it is said that he uttered this sound in such a way that all the Brahmās in the ten-thousand-world system heard it and gathered together. Apparajakkhajātikā, those of such a nature who have little, limited dust of lust, hatred, and delusion in their eye of wisdom, are apparajakkhajātikā. Or, the meaning here should be understood as, those whose nature is such that they have little dust of lust and so on are apparajakkhajātikā. Assavanatā is a reflexive noun in the sense of instrument, as in "self-knowledge" etc.; the meaning is, because of not hearing. Bhavissantī means, like lotuses that are ready to bloom, those who have performed meritorious deeds in past Buddhas as a basis for merit and are waiting for only the touch of the rays of the sun, the teaching of the Dhamma, not one, not two, but many hundreds of thousands who are worthy to enter the noble planes at the end of the four-lined verse will be knowers of the Dhamma.

Pāturahosīti pātubhavi.Samalehi cintitoti samalehi pūraṇakassapādīhi chahi satthārehi cintito. Te hi puretaraṃ uppajjitvā sakalajambudīpe kaṇṭake pattharamānā viya visaṃ siñcamānā viya ca samalaṃ micchādiṭṭhidhammaṃ desayiṃsu. Te kira buddhakolāhalānussavena sañjātakutūhalā lokaṃ vañcetvā kohaññe ṭhatvā sabbaññutaṃ paṭijānantā yaṃ kiñci adhammaṃyeva dhammoti dīpesuṃ.Apāpuretanti vivara etaṃ.Amatassa dvāranti amatassa nibbānassa dvārabhūtaṃ ariyamaggaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – etaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānato pabhuti pihitaṃ nibbānanagarassa mahādvāraṃ ariyamaggaṃ saddhammadesanāhatthena apāpura vivara ugghāṭehīti.Suṇantu dhammaṃ vimalenānubuddhanti ime sattā rāgādimalānaṃ abhāvato vimalena sammāsambuddhena anubuddhaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ suṇantu tāva bhagavāti yācati.

Pāturahosīti appeared. Samalehi cintito means thought of by the six teachers, such as Pūraṇa Kassapa, who are defiled. Having arisen earlier, they taught the defiled Dhamma of wrong view, spreading thorns throughout all of Jambudīpa, as if sprinkling poison. It is said that, aroused by the news of the Buddha's advent, they pretended to be omniscient while standing in deceit, deceiving the world, declaring whatever is not-Dhamma to be Dhamma. Apāpuretanti open this. Amatassa dvāranti the noble path that is the door to amata, nibbāna. This is said: Open, uncover, unlock with the hand of the true Dhamma teaching, this great door to the city of nibbāna, the noble path that has been closed since the disappearance of the dispensation of the Blessed One Kassapa. Suṇantu dhammaṃ vimalenānubuddhanti the request is, "Let these beings hear the four noble truths awakened by the Stainless, Fully Awakened One, since there is an absence of lust and so on."

‘‘sele yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito’’ti. Tassattho ‘‘selamaye ekagghane pabbatamuddhani yathāṭhitova. Na hi tattha ṭhitassa dassanatthaṃ gīvukkhipanapasāraṇādikiccaṃ atthī’’ti.Tathūpamanti tappaṭibhāgaṃ selapabbatūpamaṃ.Dhammamayaṃ pāsādanti lokuttaradhammamāha. So hi sabbaso pasādāvaho sabbadhamme atikkamma abbhuggataṭṭhena pāsādasadiso ca, paññāpariyāyo vā idha dhamma-saddo. Paññā hi abbhuggataṭṭhena pāsādoti abhidhamme niddiṭṭhā. Tathā cāha –

‘‘sele yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito’’. Its meaning is, "Just as one stands on the peak of a mountain made of rock, a single mass. For one standing there, there is no need for actions such as craning the neck or stretching out in order to see." Tathūpamanti similar to that, comparable to a mountain of rock. Dhammamayaṃ pāsādanti refers to the supramundane Dhamma. Since it entirely brings about serenity and stands out surpassing all dhammas, it is similar to a palace (pāsāda). Or, here, dhamma is a synonym for wisdom (paññā). Wisdom, indeed, stands out, hence it is referred to as a palace in the Abhidhamma. Thus, it was said –

‘‘Paññāpāsādamāruyha, asoko sokiniṃ pajaṃ;

‘‘Having ascended the palace of wisdom, sorrowless, the wise one looks down upon the sorrowing creatures;
As one standing on a mountain beholds those on the plain, so does the wise man behold fools.’’ (dha. pa. 28);

Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – yathā selapabbatamuddhani yathāṭhitova cakkhumā puriso samantato janataṃ passeyya, tathā tvampi sumedha sundarapañña sabbaññutaññāṇena samantacakkhu bhagavā dhammamayaṃ paññāmayaṃ pāsādamāruyha sayaṃ apetasoko sokāvatiṇṇaṃ jātijarābhibhūtaṃ janataṃ avekkhassu upadhāraya upaparikkhāti. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – yathā hi pabbatapāde samantā mahantaṃ khettaṃ katvā tattha kedārapāḷīsu kuṭikāyo katvā rattiṃ aggiṃ jāleyyuṃ, caturaṅgasamannāgatañca andhakāraṃ assa, atha tassa pabbatassa matthake ṭhatvā cakkhumato purisassa bhūmiṃ olokayato neva khettaṃ, na kedārapāḷiyo, na kuṭiyo, na tattha sayitamanussā paññāyeyyuṃ anujjalabhāvato, kuṭikāsu pana aggijālāmattameva paññāyeyya ujjalabhāvato, evaṃ dhammapāsādaṃ āruyha sattanikāyaṃ olokayato tathāgatassa ye te akatakalyāṇā sattā, te ekavihāre dakkhiṇajāṇupasse nisinnāpi buddhacakkhussa āpāthaṃ nāgacchanti ñāṇagginā anujjalabhāvato anuḷārabhāvato ca, rattiṃ khittā sarā viya honti. Ye pana katakalyāṇā veneyyapuggalā, te evassa dūrepi ṭhitā āpāthamāgacchanti paripakkañāṇaggitāya samujjalabhāvato uḷārasantānatāya ca, so aggi viya himavantapabbato viya ca. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

Herein, this is the meaning in brief: Just as a man with eyes, standing atop a mountain of rock, might survey the people all around, so too, O Sumedha, with beautiful wisdom, may you, the Blessed One, with wisdom as your eye, possessing all-knowing knowledge, ascend the palace made of Dhamma, made of wisdom, and yourself being without sorrow, look upon the people plunged in sorrow, overcome by birth and old age; observe and examine them. Herein, this is the detailed meaning: Just as at the foot of a mountain, having made a large field all around, and having built huts on the ridges of the rice fields, they might light a fire at night, and there would be darkness complete with its four components, then for a man with eyes, standing on the summit of that mountain, as he looks down upon the ground, neither the field, nor the ridges of the rice fields, nor the huts, nor the people lying there would be visible, due to the absence of brightness; but only the flames of the fire in the huts would be visible, due to the brightness. In the same way, as the Tathāgata, having ascended the palace of the Dhamma, looks upon the multitude of beings, those beings who have not done wholesome deeds, even sitting in the same monastery, within range of the Buddha's eye, do not come into view, because of the absence of the brightness of wisdom's fire, and because of their lack of substance, they are like arrows shot at night. But those individuals worthy of guidance who have done wholesome deeds, even standing far away, come into view, because of the fully ripened fire of wisdom and because of the richness of their character; he is like the fire and like the Himalayan mountain. This was also said:

‘‘Dūre santo pakāsenti, himavantova pabbato;

"The good make themselves known from afar, like the Himalayan mountain; the wicked are not seen here, like arrows shot at night." (dha. pa. 304);

Uṭṭhehīti bhagavato dhammadesanatthaṃ cārikacaraṇaṃ yācanto bhaṇati.Uṭṭhehīti vā dhammadesanāya appossukkatāsaṅkhātasaṅkocāpattito kilāsubhāvato uṭṭhaha.Vīrātiādīsu bhagavā sātisayacatubbidhasammappadhānavīriyavantatāyavīro,devaputtamaccukilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ vijitattāvijitasaṅgāmo,jātikantārādito veneyyasatthaṃ vāhanasamatthatāya nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ khemappadesaṃ sampāpanasamatthatāyasatthavāho,kāmacchandaiṇassa abhāvatoaṇaṇoti veditabbo. Yo hi paresaṃ iṇaṃ gahetvā vināseti, so tehi ‘‘iṇaṃ dehī’’ti tajjamānopi pharusaṃ vuccamānopi vambhamānopi vadhiyamānopi kiñci paṭippaharituṃ na sakkoti, sabbaṃ titikkhati. Titikkhakāraṇañhissa taṃ iṇaṃ hoti, evameva yo yamhi kāmacchandena rajjati, taṇhāgahaṇena taṃ vatthuṃ gaṇhāti, so tena pharusaṃ vuccamānopi vambhamānopi vadhiyamānopi kiñci paṭippaharituṃ na sakkoti, sabbaṃ titikkhati. Titikkhakāraṇañhissa so kāmacchando hoti gharasāmikehi viheṭhiyamānānaṃ itthīnaṃ viya. Kasmā? Iṇasadisattā kāmacchandassa.

Uṭṭhehi: The Blessed One asks him to wander for the purpose of teaching the Dhamma. Uṭṭhehi: Or, rise up from the constricted state of mind due to lack of enthusiasm for teaching the Dhamma, from the state of being weary. Among vīrā and others, the Blessed One is called vīro because he possesses the extraordinary fourfold right exertion of effort; vijitasaṅgāmo because he has conquered the defilements, the god, Death, and the conditioned; satthavāho because he is capable of conveying the multitude of beings from the wilderness of birth to the secure place known as Nibbāna; aṇaṇo should be understood as being without the debt of sensual desire. For he who takes a debt from others and squanders it, even when pressed by them saying, "Pay the debt," and being spoken to harshly, reproached, and even beaten, is unable to offer any resistance; he endures everything. The reason for his endurance is that debt. In the same way, whoever is attached to something through sensual desire, takes that object through the grip of craving, even when spoken to harshly, reproached, and beaten by that thing, is unable to offer any resistance; he endures everything. The reason for his endurance is that sensual desire, like women being harassed by their householders. Why? Because sensual desire is similar to a debt.

9.Ajjhesananti garuṭṭhānīyaṃ payirupāsitvā garutaraṃ payojanaṃ uddissa abhipatthanā ajjhesanā, sāpi atthato yācanā eva.Buddhacakkhunāti indriyaparopariyattañāṇena ca āsayānusayañāṇena ca. Imesañhi dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃbuddhacakkhūti nāmaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇassasamantacakkhūti. Heṭṭhimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānaṃdhammacakkhūti.Apparajakkhetiādīsu yesaṃ vuttanayeneva paññācakkhumhi rāgādirajaṃ appaṃ, teapparajakkhā. Yesaṃ taṃ mahantaṃ, temahārajakkhā. Yesaṃ saddhādīni indriyāni tikkhāni, tetikkhindriyā. Yesaṃ tāni mudūni, temudindriyā. Yesaṃ teyeva saddhādayo ākārā sundarā, tesvākārā. Ye kathitakāraṇaṃ sallakkhenti, sukhena sakkā honti viññāpetuṃ, tesuviññāpayā. Ye paralokañceva vajjañca bhayato passanti, teparalokavajjabhayadassāvinonāma.

9. Ajjhesana: Approaching one worthy of respect and desiring a more important purpose, the request is ajjhesana, and that is also, in effect, a form of entreaty. Buddhacakkhunā: With the knowledge of the varying faculties of beings, and with the knowledge of inclinations and latent tendencies. For these two kinds of knowledge are called the buddhacakkhu, while the all-knowing knowledge is called samantacakkhu. The three lower path knowledges are called dhammacakkhu. Among apparajakkhe and others, those in whose eye of wisdom there is little dust of passion, etc., in the manner described, are apparajakkhā. Those in whom it is great are mahārajakkhā. Those whose faculties such as faith are sharp are tikkhindriyā. Those whose faculties are mild are mudindriyā. Those whose qualities, such as faith, are beautiful are svākārā. Those who discern the stated reason, who are easy and possible to instruct, are suviññāpayā. Those who see both the next world and fault as fearful are called paralokavajjabhayadassāvino.

uppaliniyanti uppalavaneti evamattho gahetabbo. Ito paresupi eseva nayo.Antonimuggaposīnīti yāni udakassa anto nimuggāneva hutvā pussanti vaḍḍhanti, tāni antonimuggaposīni.Udakaṃ accuggamma tiṭṭhantīti udakaṃ atikkamitvā tiṭṭhanti. Tattha yāni accuggamma ṭhitāni sūriyarasmisamphassaṃ āgamayamānāni, tāni ajja pupphanakāni. Yāni samodakaṃ ṭhitāni, tāni sve pupphanakāni. Yāni udakā anuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, tāni tatiyadivase pupphanakāni. Udakā pana anuggatāni aññānipi sarogauppalādīni nāma atthi, yāni neva pupphissanti macchakacchapabhakkhāneva bhavissanti, tāni pāḷiṃ nāruḷhāni, āharitvā pana dīpetabbānīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pakāsitāni. Yatheva hi tāni catubbidhāni pupphāni, evameva ugghaṭitaññū vipañcitaññū neyyo padaparamoti cattāro puggalā.

uppaliniya: Should be understood as "in a lotus pond". The same method should be understood hereafter as well. Antonimuggaposīnī: Those that thrive and grow only by being submerged inside the water are antonimuggaposīni. Udakaṃ accuggamma tiṭṭhantī: They stand having risen above the water. Among them, those standing having risen above, awaiting the touch of the sun's rays, are ready to bloom today. Those standing level with the water are ready to bloom tomorrow. Those that have not emerged from the water, the antonimuggaposīni, are ready to bloom on the third day. However, there are other lilies and lotuses that have not emerged from the water, which will never bloom but will only be food for fish and turtles; they are not included in the Pali, but should be brought forward and explained, as it is declared in the commentary. Just as those flowers are of four kinds, so too are the four types of individuals: ugghaṭitaññū, vipañcitaññū, neyya, and padaparama.

ugghaṭitaññūti vuccati. Yassa puggalassa saṅkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalovipañcitaññū. Yassa puggalassa uddesato paripucchato yoniso manasikaroto kalyāṇamitte sevato bhajato payirupāsato anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggaloneyyo. Yassa puggalassa bahumpi suṇato bahumpi bhaṇato bahumpi dhārayato bahumpi vācayato na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hoti, tena attabhāvena maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā antamaso jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalopadaparamo. Tattha bhagavā uppalavanādisadisaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ olokento ajja pupphanakāni viya ugghaṭitaññū, sve pupphanakāni viya vipañcitaññū, tatiyadivase pupphanakāni viya neyye, macchakacchapabhakkhapupphāni viya padaparame ca addasa, passanto ca ‘‘ettakā apparajakkhā, ettakā mahārajakkhā, tatrāpi ettakā ugghaṭitaññū’’ti evaṃ sabbākāratova addasa.

ugghaṭitaññū is said. That individual for whom, when the meaning of what was spoken in brief is explained in detail, there is an understanding of the Dhamma, this individual is called vipañcitaññū. That individual for whom, when questioning and inquiring from various angles, associating with, attending on, and serving good friends, there is a gradual understanding of the Dhamma, this individual is called neyyo. That individual for whom, even hearing much, speaking much, memorizing much, and reciting much, there is no understanding of the Dhamma in that lifetime, and who is unable to develop the path or the fruit, or even jhāna or insight, with that existence, this individual is called padaparamo. There, the Blessed One, looking over the ten thousand world-systems like a lotus pond, saw those like the flowers ready to bloom today (ugghaṭitaññū), those like the flowers ready to bloom tomorrow (vipañcitaññū), those like the flowers ready to bloom on the third day (neyye), and those like the flowers that are food for fish and turtles (padaparame), and seeing this, he saw in every way, "So many have little dust, so many have much dust, and among them, so many are ugghaṭitaññū," and so forth.

Tattha tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ imasmiññeva attabhāve bhagavato dhammadesanā atthaṃ sādheti. Padaparamānaṃ anāgatatthāya vāsanā hoti. Atha bhagavā imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ atthāvahaṃ dhammadesanaṃ viditvā desetukamyataṃ uppādetvā puna sabbepi tīsu bhavesu satte bhabbābhabbavasena dve koṭṭhāse akāsi. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ye te sattā kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā vipākāvaraṇena samannāgatā kilesāvaraṇena samannāgatā assaddhā acchandikā duppaññā abhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ, ime te sattā abhabbā. Katame te sattā bhabbā? Ye te sattā na kammāvaraṇena…pe… ime te sattā bhabbā’’ti (vibha. 826-827). Tattha sabbepi abhabbapuggale pahāya bhabbapuggaleyeva ñāṇena pariggahetvā ‘‘ettakā rāgacaritā, ettakā dosa, moha, vitakka, saddhā, buddhicaritā’’ti cha koṭṭhāse akāsi, evaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desessāmīti cintesi. Ettha ca apparajakkhādibhabbādivasena āvajjentassa bhagavato te sattā puñjapuñjāva hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, na ekekāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

There, for three types of individuals, the Blessed One's teaching of the Dhamma accomplishes the purpose in this very lifetime. For the padaparama, there is the potential for the future. Then, the Blessed One, knowing the teaching of the Dhamma that brings benefit to these four types of individuals, and a desire to teach arising, again made all beings in the three realms into two categories based on whether they were capable or incapable. With reference to this, it was said, "Those beings who are endowed with karmic obstructions, endowed with resultant obstructions, endowed with defilement obstructions, who are faithless, without desire, unwise, and incapable of entering the fixed course, rightness in wholesome qualities, these beings are incapable. Which beings are capable? Those beings who are not endowed with karmic obstructions… these beings are capable" (vibha. 826-827). There, having abandoned all incapable individuals, having comprehended only the capable individuals with knowledge, he made six categories: "So many are of lustful temperament, so many of hateful, deluded, speculative, faithful, and wise temperament," thus he thought, "Having done this, I will teach the Dhamma." Here, it should be seen that for the Blessed One, while considering based on those with little dust, those capable, etc., those beings appear as if in heaps, not individually.

Paccabhāsīti patiabhāsi.Apārutāti vivaṭā.Amatassa dvārāti ariyamaggo. So hi amatasaṅkhātassa nibbānassa dvāraṃ, so mayā vivaritvā ṭhapito mahākaruṇūpanissayena sayambhūñāṇena adhigatattāti dasseti. ‘‘Apārutaṃ tesaṃ amatassa dvāra’’nti keci paṭhanti.Pamuñcantu saddhanti sabbe attano saddhaṃ muñcantu vissajjentu pavedentu, mayā desite dhamme mayi ca attano saddahanākāraṃ uṭṭhāpentūti attho. Pacchimapadadvaye ayamattho – ahañhi attano paguṇaṃ suppavattitampi imaṃ paṇītaṃ uttamaṃ dhammaṃ kāyavācākilamathasaññī hutvā na bhāsiṃ, na bhāsissāmīti cintesiṃ, idāni pana sabbo jano saddhābhājanaṃ upanetu, pūressāmi nesaṃ saṅkappanti.Antaradhāyīti satthāraṃ gandhamālādīhi pūjetvā antarahito, sakaṭṭhānameva gatoti attho. Satthusantikañhi upagatānaṃ devānaṃ brahmānañca tassa purato antaradhānaṃ nāma sakaṭṭhānagamanameva.

Paccabhāsī: Replied. Apārutā: Opened. Amatassa dvārā: The Noble Path. For it is the door to Nibbāna, known as the Deathless; it shows that I have opened and established it, attained through self-awakened knowledge due to the support of great compassion. Some read, "Apārutaṃ tesaṃ amatassa dvāraṃ." Pamuñcantu saddha: Let all release, let go of, express their faith, let them establish their manner of believing in the Dhamma taught by me and in me, this is the meaning. In the latter two phrases, this is the meaning: For I thought, "Indeed, being weary of body and speech, I did not speak, I will not speak, this excellent, supreme Dhamma which is my own and well-established." But now, let all people approach the vessel of faith, I will fulfill their intention. Antaradhāyī: Having worshipped the Teacher with perfumes, garlands, etc., he disappeared, meaning he went to his own place. For the disappearance of gods and Brahmās who have approached the presence of the Teacher means only going to their own place.

Brahmayācanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Account of Brahma's Request is Finished.

Pañcavaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā
The Commentary on the Account of the Group of Five

10.Etadahosīti etaṃ ahosi, ‘‘kassa nu kho ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ deseyya’’nti ayaṃ dhammadesanāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko udapādīti attho.Āḷāroti tassa nāmaṃ. Dīghapiṅgalo kiresa. So hi tuṅgasarīratāya dīgho, piṅgalacakkhutāya piṅgalo, tenassa ‘‘āḷāro’’ti nāmaṃ ahosi.Kālāmoti gottaṃ.Paṇḍitoti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.284) paṇḍiccena samannāgato, samāpattipaṭilābhasaṃsiddhena adhigamabāhusaccasaṅkhātena paṇḍitabhāvena samannāgatoti attho.Byattoti veyyattiyena samannāgato, samāpattipaṭilābhapaccayena pārihārikapaññāsaṅkhātena byattabhāvena samannāgatoti attho.Medhāvīti ṭhānuppattiyā paññāya samannāgato. Atha vāmedhāvīti tihetukapaṭisandhipaññāsaṅkhātāya taṃtaṃitikattabbatāpaññāsaṅkhātāya ca medhāya samannāgatoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.Apparajakkhajātikoti samāpattiyā vikkhambhitattā nikkilesajātiko visuddhasatto.Ājānissatīti sallakkhessati paṭivijjhissati.

10. Etadahosī: This occurred, meaning this thought connected with teaching the Dhamma arose, "To whom should I first teach the Dhamma?" Āḷāro: This was his name. It seems he was Dīghapiṅgala. For he was tall because of his high stature, and piṅgala because of his yellowish eyes, therefore his name was "Āḷāro". Kālāmo: This was his clan. Paṇḍito: (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.284) Endowed with wisdom, meaning endowed with wisdom consisting of proficiency in the attainment of the meditative attainments, and vast learning. Byatto: Endowed with expertise, meaning endowed with expertise consisting of the analytical wisdom due to the attainment of the meditative attainments. Medhāvī: Endowed with wisdom through appropriateness. Or medhāvī: Here the meaning should be understood as endowed with the wisdom of a three-rooted rebirth, and the wisdom of being fit and proper for that which is to be done. Apparajakkhajātiko: Of a nature with little dust, meaning of an unblemished nature, a pure being, due to the suppression by the meditative attainments. Ājānissatī: Will discern, will penetrate.

Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādīti bhagavatopi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ uppajji. Bhagavā kira devatāya kathiteneva niṭṭhaṃ agantvā sayampi sabbaññutaññāṇena olokento ito sattamadivasamatthake kālaṃ katvā ākiñcaññāyatane nibbattoti addasa. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti.Mahājāniyoti sattadivasabbhantare pattabbamaggaphalato parihīnattā mahatī jāni parihāni assāti mahājāniyo. Akkhaṇe nibbattatthā idha dhammadesanaṭṭhānaṃ āgamanapādāpi natthi, athāhaṃ tattha gaccheyyaṃ, gantvā desiyamānaṃ dhammampissa sotuṃ sotapasādopi natthi, evaṃ mahājāniyo jātoti dasseti. Kiṃ pana bhagavatā taṃ attano buddhānubhāvena dhammaṃ ñāpetuṃ na sakkāti? Āma na sakkā, na hi paratoghosamantarena sāvakānaṃ dhammābhisamayo sambhavati, aññathā itarapaccayarahitassapi dhammābhisamayena bhavitabbaṃ, na ca taṃ atthi. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, paccayā sammādiṭṭhiyā uppādāya parato ca ghoso ajjhattañca yonisomanasikāro’’ti (a. ni. 2.127).

Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādī: Knowledge also arose in the Blessed One, meaning the all-knowing knowledge arose in the Blessed One. It seems the Blessed One, not coming to a conclusion merely by what was said by the deity, himself looking with all-knowing knowledge, saw that he had died seven days from then and was reborn in the realm of Nothingness. With reference to that, he said, "Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādī." Mahājāniyo: Because the path and fruit to be attained within seven days have been lost, a great loss is his, therefore he is mahājāniyo. Because he was reborn at an inauspicious time, there is no coming to the place of teaching the Dhamma here, even if I were to go there, there is no sensitivity of the ear to hear the Dhamma being taught, thus showing that a great loss has occurred. But is it not possible for the Blessed One to make him understand the Dhamma by his own Buddha-power? Yes, it is not possible, for an understanding of the Dhamma for disciples does not occur without external prompting; otherwise, there would have to be an understanding of the Dhamma even without other conditions, and that is not the case. This was said: "These, monks, are the two conditions for the arising of right view: external prompting and internal wise reflection" (a. ni. 2.127).

Udakoti tassa nāmaṃ, rāmassa pana puttatāyarāmaputto. Abhidosakālakatoti aḍḍharatte kālakato.Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādīti idhāpi kira bhagavā devatāya kathitavacanena sanniṭṭhānaṃ akatvā sabbaññutaññāṇena olokento ‘‘hiyyo aḍḍharatte kālaṃ katvā udako rāmaputto nevasaññānāsaññāyatane nibbatto’’ti addasa, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.

Udako: This was his name, and because he was the son of Rāma, rāmaputto. Abhidosakālakato: He died at midnight. Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādī: Here also, it seems the Blessed One, not making a conclusion from the words spoken by the deity, looking with all-knowing knowledge, saw, "Yesterday at midnight Udaka Rāmaputta was reborn in the realm of Neither-Perception-Nor-Non-Perception," therefore it was said thus. The rest is just like before.

Bahūpakārāti bahuupakārā.Padhānapahitattaṃ upaṭṭhahiṃsūti padhānatthāya pesitattabhāvaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne pariveṇasammajjanena pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā anubandhanena mukhodakadantakaṭṭhadānādinā ca upaṭṭhahiṃsu. Ke panete pañcavaggiyā nāma? Ye te –

Bahūpakārā: Very helpful. Padhānapahitattaṃ upaṭṭhahiṃsū: They attended to him in the state of being sent for the sake of striving, by sweeping the grounds in the dwelling place, by carrying his bowl and robes, by following him, and by giving him water for his face, tooth sticks, etc. Who were these five ascetics? They were those:

Rāmo dhajo lakkhaṇo cāpi mantī;

Rāma, Dhaja, Lakkhaṇa, and Mantī also;
Koṇḍañña, Bhoja, Suyāma, and Sudatta;
These were the eight brahmins then;
Possessing the six limbs, they expounded the mantras. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.284; jā. aṭṭha. 1.nidānakathā; apa. aṭṭha. 1.avidūrenidānakathā);

Bodhisattassa jātakāle supinapaṭiggāhakā ceva lakkhaṇapaṭiggāhakā ca aṭṭha brāhmaṇā. Tesu tayo dvedhā byākariṃsu ‘‘imehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato agāraṃ ajjhāvasamāno rājā hohiti cakkavattī, pabbajamāno buddho’’ti. Pañca brāhmaṇā ekaṃsabyākaraṇā ahesuṃ ‘‘imehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato agāre na tiṭṭhati, buddhova hotī’’ti. Tesu purimā tayo yathāmantapadaṃ gatā. Ete hi lakkhaṇamantasaṅkhātavedavacanānurūpaṃ paṭipannā dve gatiyo bhavanti anaññāti vuttaniyāmena nicchinituṃ asakkontā vuttameva paṭipajjiṃsu, na mahāpurisassa buddhabhāvappattiṃ paccāsīsiṃsu. Ime pana koṇḍaññādayo pañca ‘‘ekaṃsato buddho bhavissatī’’ti jātanicchayattā mantapadaṃ atikkantā. Te attanā laddhaṃ tuṭṭhidānaṃ ñātakānaṃ vissajjetvā ‘‘ayaṃ mahāpuriso agāre na ajjhāvasissati, ekantena buddho bhavissatī’’ti nibbematikā bodhisattaṃ uddissa samaṇapabbajjaṃ pabbajitā, tesaṃ puttātipi vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ. Ete kira daharakāleva bahū mante jāniṃsu, tasmā ne brāhmaṇā ācariyaṭṭhāne ṭhapayiṃsu. Te ‘‘pacchā amhehi puttadārajaṭaṃ chinditvā na sakkā bhavissati pabbajitu’’nti daharakāleyeva pabbajitvā ramaṇīyāni senāsanāni paribhuñjantā vicariṃsu. Kālena kālaṃ pana ‘‘kiṃ bho mahāpuriso mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhanto’’ti pucchanti. Manussā ‘‘kuhiṃ tumhe mahāpurisaṃ passissatha, tīsu pāsādesu vividhanāṭakamajjhe devo viya sampattiṃ anubhotī’’ti vadanti. Te sutvā ‘‘na tāva mahāpurisassa ñāṇaṃ paripākaṃ gacchatī’’ti appossukkā vihariṃsuyeva.

When the Bodhisatta was born, there were eight Brahmins who were interpreters of dreams and interpreters of marks. Among them, three interpreted in two ways: "Endowed with these marks, if he lives at home, he will become a king, a wheel-turning monarch; if he goes forth, he will become a Buddha." The five Brahmins made a definitive prediction: "Endowed with these marks, he will not remain at home; he will become a Buddha." Among them, the first three remained within the bounds of the mantra. Since they were following the Vedic declarations consisting of the mantra of marks, unable to determine with certainty according to the stated rule that there are only two destinies and no other, they adhered to what was stated and did not anticipate the attainment of Buddhahood by the Great Being. But these five, headed by Koṇḍañña, having definitively decided that "he will certainly become a Buddha," transcended the bounds of the mantra. After distributing the gifts of satisfaction they had received to their relatives, and being without doubt, declaring "this Great Being will not live at home; he will certainly become a Buddha," they renounced the world in the ascetic life, dedicating it to the Bodhisatta. Some say they were their sons, but that is rejected in the commentary. It is said that these young men knew many mantras even as children, therefore the Brahmins placed them in the position of teachers. They thought, "Later, we will not be able to renounce the world after cutting off the tangle of sons and wives," and having renounced the world while still young, they wandered about, enjoying pleasant monasteries. From time to time, they would ask, "Has the Great Being gone forth in the Great Renunciation?" People would say, "Where will you see the Great Being? He is experiencing prosperity like a god amidst various dances in the three palaces." Having heard that, they remained without much eagerness, thinking, "The Great Being's knowledge has not yet reached maturity."

Kasmā panettha bhagavā ‘‘bahukārā kho me pañcavaggiyā’’ti āha. Kiṃ upakārakānaṃyeva esa dhammaṃ deseti, anupakārakānaṃ na desetīti? No na deseti. Paricayavasena hesa āḷārañceva kālāmaṃ udakañca rāmaputtaṃ olokesi. Etasmiṃ pana buddhakkhette ṭhapetvā aññāsikoṇḍaññaṃ añño paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ sacchikātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Kasmā? Tathāvidhaupanissayattā. Pubbe kira puññakaraṇakāle dve bhātaro ahesuṃ. Te ca ekato sassaṃ akaṃsu. Tattha jeṭṭhassa ‘‘ekasmiṃ sasse nava vāre aggasassadānaṃ mayā dātabba’’nti ahosi. So vappakāle bījaggaṃ nāma datvā gabbhakāle kaniṭṭhena saddhiṃ mantesi ‘‘gabbhakāle gabbhaṃ phāletvā dassāmī’’ti. Kaniṭṭho ‘‘taruṇasassaṃ nāsetukāmosī’’ti āha. Jeṭṭho kaniṭṭhassa ananuvattanabhāvaṃ ñatvā khettaṃ vibhajitvā attano koṭṭhāsato gabbhaṃ phāletvā khīraṃ nīharitvā sappiphāṇitena yojetvā adāsi, puthukakāle puthukaṃ kāretvā adāsi, lāyane lāyanaggaṃ, veṇikaraṇe veṇaggaṃ, veṇiyo purisabhāravasena bandhitvā kalāpakaraṇe kalāpaggaṃ, khale kalāpānaṃ ṭhapanadivase khalaggaṃ, madditvā vīhīnaṃ rāsikaraṇadivase khalabhaṇḍaggaṃ, koṭṭhāgāre dhaññassa pakkhipanadivase koṭṭhagganti evaṃ ekasmiṃ sasse nava vāre aggadānaṃ adāsi. Kaniṭṭho pana khalato dhaññaṃ uddharitvā gahaṇadivase adāsi. Tesu jeṭṭho aññāsikoṇḍaññatthero jāto, kaniṭṭho subhaddaparibbājako. Iti ekasmiṃ sasse navannaṃ aggadānānaṃ dinnattā ṭhapetvā theraṃ añño paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ sacchikātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. ‘‘Navannaṃ aggadānānaṃ dinnattā’’ti idañca tassa rattaññūnaṃ aggabhāvatthāya katābhinīhārānurūpaṃ pavattitasāvakapāramiyā ciṇṇante pavattitattā vuttaṃ. Tiṇṇampi hi bodhisattānaṃ taṃtaṃpāramiyā sikhāppattakāle pavattitaṃ puññaṃ apuññaṃ vā garutaravipākameva hoti, dhammassa ca sabbapaṭhamaṃ sacchikiriyāya vinā kathaṃ rattaññūnaṃ aggabhāvasiddhīti? ‘‘Bahukārā kho me pañcavaggiyā’’ti idaṃ pana upakārānussaraṇamattakeneva vuttaṃ.

But why did the Blessed One say here, "The group of five are very helpful to me"? Does he only teach the Dhamma to those who are helpful, and not to those who are not helpful? No, he does not not teach. Due to familiarity, he considered Āḷāra Kālāma and Udaka Rāmaputta. However, in this Buddha-field, except for Aññāsikoṇḍañña, there is no one else capable of realizing the Dhamma first. Why? Because of such underlying conditions. It is said that in the past, during the time of making merit, there were two brothers. They cultivated a crop together. There, the elder thought, "I must give the first fruits nine times from one crop." At the time of sowing, he gave the first seeds, and during the growing season, he consulted with his younger brother, "During the growing season, I will split the embryo and give it." The younger brother said, "You intend to destroy the young crop." The elder brother, knowing that the younger brother did not agree, divided the field and, from his share, split the embryo, extracted the milk, and gave it mixed with ghee and molasses. At the time of the young shoots, he had young shoots made and gave them. At the time of reaping, he gave the first reaping. At the time of binding sheaves, he gave the first sheaves, binding the sheaves according to the burden of a man. At the time of making bundles, he gave the first bundles. At the threshing floor, on the day of placing the bundles, he gave the first of the threshing floor. Having threshed and made a heap of rice, on the day of making the heap, he gave the first of the heap. In the storehouse, on the day of putting the grain, he gave the first of the storehouse. Thus, from one crop, he gave the first offering nine times. But the younger brother gave on the day of taking the grain after removing the grain from the threshing floor. Among them, the elder brother was born as the Elder Aññāsikoṇḍañña, and the younger brother as Subhadda the wanderer. Thus, because of giving the first offerings of nine new crops, except for the Elder, there is no one else capable of realizing the Dhamma first. This statement, "because of giving the first offerings of nine new crops," was said in accordance with the aspiration made for the foremost state of the knowers of the Dhamma and because of the accumulation of the disciple perfections that have been practiced. For the merit or demerit performed by even the three Bodhisattas at the time of reaching the peak of each perfection has very great results. And how could the foremost status of the knowers of the Dhamma be established without the first realization of the Dhamma? However, this statement, "The group of five are very helpful to me," was said merely as a recollection of their help.

Isipatane migadāyeti tasmiṃ kira padese anuppanne buddhe paccekasambuddhā gandhamādanapabbate sattāhaṃ nirodhasamāpattiyā vītināmetvā nirodhā vuṭṭhāya nāgalatādantakaṭṭhaṃ khāditvā anotattadahe mukhaṃ dhovitvā pattacīvaramādāya ākāsena āgantvā nipatanti. Tattha cīvaraṃ pārupitvā nagare piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakiccā gamanakālepi tatoyeva uppatitvā gacchanti. Iti isayo ettha nipatanti uppatanti cāti taṃ ṭhānaṃ ‘‘isipatana’’nti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ, migānaṃ pana abhayatthāya dinnattā ‘‘migadāyo’’ti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘isipatane migadāye’’ti. Aññe buddhā paṭhamaṃ dhammadesanatthāya gacchantā ākāsena gantvā tattheva otaranti, amhākaṃ pana bhagavā upakassa ājīvakassa upanissayaṃ disvā ‘‘upako imaṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno, so maṃ disvā sallapitvā gamissati, atha puna nibbinno āgamma arahattaṃ sacchikarissatī’’ti ñatvā aṭṭhārasayojanaṃ maggaṃ padasāva agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yena bārāṇasī, tena cārikaṃ pakkāmī’’ti.

At Isipatana, in the Deer Park: It is said that in that place, before a Buddha arises, Paccekabuddhas spend seven days in cessation of perception on Gandhamādana Mountain, and having arisen from cessation, they chew nāgalatā tooth sticks, wash their faces in Anotatta Lake, and taking their bowl and robes, they come through the sky and land. There, having put on their robes and begged for alms in the city, having completed their meal duties, they fly up from the same place at the time of departure. Thus, because sages land and take off here, that place came to be known as "Isipatana," and because it was given for the safety of deer, it is called "Migadāya." Therefore, it was said, "At Isipatana, in the Deer Park." Other Buddhas, when going for the first teaching of the Dhamma, go through the sky and descend there. But our Blessed One, seeing the underlying condition of Upaka the ājīvaka, knowing that "Upaka has taken this path, he will see me, converse, and then, having become disillusioned, will come again and realize arahantship," went on foot the eighteen yojanas. Therefore, it was said, "He departed on a journey to Bārāṇasī."

11.Antarā ca gayaṃ antarā ca bodhinti gayāya ca bodhissa ca vivare tigāvutantare ṭhāne. Bodhimaṇḍato hi gayā tīṇi gāvutāni, bārāṇasī aṭṭhārasa yojanāni. Upako bodhimaṇḍassa ca gayāya ca antare bhagavantaṃ addasa. Antarā-saddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ‘‘antarā gāmañca nadiñca yātī’’ti evaṃ ekameva antarā-saddaṃ payujjanti, so dutiyapadenapi yojetabbo hoti, ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti sāmivacanassa pasaṅge antarā-saddayogena upayogavacanassa icchitattā. Idha pana yojetvā eva vutto.Addhānamagganti addhānasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ, dīghamagganti attho. Addhānagamanasamayassa vibhaṅge ‘‘addhayojanaṃ gacchissāmīti bhuñjitabba’’ntiādivacanato (pāci. 218) addhayojanampi addhānamaggo hoti. Bodhimaṇḍato pana gayā tigāvutaṃ.Vippasannānīti suṭṭhu pasannāni.Indriyānīti manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni.Parisuddhoti niddoso.Pariyodātoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Nirupakkilesatāyeva hi esa ‘‘pariyodāto’’ti vutto, na setabhāvena. Etassa pariyodātataṃ disvāva indriyānaṃ vippasannataṃ aññāsi, nayaggāhīpaññā kiresā tassa ājīvakassa.

11.Between Gayā and Bodhi: In the space between Gayā and the Bodhi tree, in a place three gāvutas apart. For Gayā is three gāvutas from the Bodhi tree, and Bārāṇasī is eighteen yojanas. Upaka saw the Blessed One between the Bodhi tree and Gayā. Because it is connected with the word "antarā," the usage is made as an accusative. In such places, those who reflect on syllables use only one "antarā" word, such as "antarā gāmañca nadiñca yātī," and that must be connected with the second word as well; if it is not connected, it does not obtain the usage of the accusative, because the usage of the accusative is desired by the connection of the word antarā in the context of ownership. But here, it is said having connected it. Addhānamagga: The path called addhāna, meaning a long path. From the division of the time of journeying on the addhāna, "one should eat having thought 'I will go half a yojana'," etc. (pāci. 218), even half a yojana is a journey on the addhāna. But Gayā is three gāvutas from the Bodhi tree. Vippasannānī: Very clear. Indriyāni: The faculties, with mind as the sixth. Parisuddho: Without fault. Pariyodāto: A synonym for that. For it is said to be "pariyodāto" because of being free from defilements, not because of being white. Having seen this purity, he knew the clarity of the faculties, it is said that the ājīvaka had wisdom that grasped the essence.

Sabbābhibhūti sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhito.Sabbavidūti sabbaṃ catubhūmakadhammaṃ avediṃ aññāsiṃ sabbaso ñeyyāvaraṇassa pahīnattā.Sabbesu dhammesu anūpalittoti sabbesu tebhūmakadhammesu rajjanadussanamuyhanādinā kilesalepena alitto.Sabbañjahoti sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ jahitvā ṭhito. Appahātabbampi hi kusalābyākataṃ tappaṭibaddhakilesappahānena pahīnattā na hotīti jahitameva hoti.Taṇhakkhaye vimuttoti taṇhakkhaye nibbāne ārammaṇakaraṇavasena vimutto.Sayaṃ abhiññāyāti sabbaṃ catubhūmakadhammaṃ attanāva jānitvā.Kamuddiseyyanti kaṃ aññaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ me ācariyo’’ti uddiseyyaṃ.

Sabbābhibhū: Having overcome all the three-plane Dhamma and standing firm. Sabbavidū: Knowing all the four-plane Dhamma, I knew, I understood, because the covering of all that should be known is abandoned. Sabbesu dhammesu anūpalitto: Unstained by the stain of defilements such as lust, aversion, delusion in all the three-plane Dhammas. Sabbañjaho: Having abandoned all the three-plane Dhamma and standing firm. For even what should not be abandoned, such as skillful and indeterminate [things], are abandoned due to the abandonment of the defilements connected to them, and thus it is abandoned. Taṇhakkhaye vimutto: Liberated by way of making Nibbāna, the destruction of craving, as the object. Sayaṃ abhiññāya: Having known all the four-plane Dhamma by myself. Kamuddiseyya: Whom else should I point out, saying "this is my teacher?"

Na me ācariyo atthīti lokuttaradhamme mayhaṃ ācariyo nāma natthi. Kiñcāpi hi lokiyadhammānampi yādiso lokanāthassa adhigamo, na tādiso adhigamo parūpadeso atthi, lokuttaradhamme panassa lesopi natthi.Natthi me paṭipuggaloti mayhaṃ sīlādīhi guṇehi paṭinidhibhūto puggalo nāma natthi.Sammāsambuddhoti hetunā nayena cattāri saccāni sayaṃ buddho.Sītibhūtoti sabbakilesagginibbāpanena sītibhūto, kilesānaṃ yeva nibbutattānibbuto.

Na me ācariyo atthī: In the supramundane Dhamma, there is no teacher for me. Although in mundane Dhammas also, there is no such attainment through the instruction of another as the attainment of the Lord of the World, in the supramundane Dhamma there is not even a trace of it. Natthi me paṭipuggalo: There is no person like me who is a substitute in qualities such as virtue. Sammāsambuddho: A Fully Enlightened One, having awakened to the four Noble Truths by myself through reason and method. Sītibhūto: Having become cool by extinguishing all the fires of defilements; nibbuto: extinguished, because the defilements themselves are extinguished.

Kāsinaṃpuranti kāsiraṭṭhe nagaraṃ.Āhañchanti āhanissāmi.Amatadundubhinti veneyyānaṃ amatādhigamāya ugghosanādiṃ katvā satthu dhammadesanā ‘‘amatadundubhī’’ti vuttā, dhammacakkapaṭilābhāya taṃ amatabheriṃ paharissāmīti gacchāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.

Kāsinaṃ pura: A city in the Kāsī country. Āhañcha: I will strike. Amatadundubhi: The Teacher's teaching of the Dhamma, after making an announcement for the attainment of immortality by those who are to be trained, is called the "drum of immortality." It means that I am going to strike that drum of immortality for the attainment of the Dhamma wheel.

Arahasi anantajinoti anantajinopi bhavituṃ yuttoti attho. Anantañāṇo jitakilesotianantajino. Hupeyyapāvusoti āvuso evampi nāma bhaveyya, evaṃvidhe nāma rūparatane īdisena ñāṇena bhavitabbanti adhippāyo. Ayañhissa pabbajjāya paccayo jāto. Katādhikāro hesa. Tathā hi bhagavā tena samāgamanatthaṃ padasāva taṃ maggaṃ paṭipajji.Pakkāmīti vaṅkahārajanapadaṃ nāma agamāsi.

Arahasi anantajino: It is fitting for you to be an Anantajina. Anantajina means having endless knowledge, having conquered the defilements. Hupeyyapāvuso: Āvuso, may it be so indeed. The idea is that there might be such a form-jewel with such knowledge. This became a reason for his going forth. For he had performed the necessary preparations. Thus, the Blessed One went on foot along that path for the sake of meeting him. Pakkāmī: He went to a region called Vaṅkahāra.

Tatthekaṃ migaluddakagāmakaṃ nissāya vāsaṃ kappesi, jeṭṭhakaluddako taṃ upaṭṭhāsi. Tasmiñca janapade caṇḍā makkhikā honti. Atha naṃ ekāya cāṭiyā vasāpesuṃ. Migaluddako dūraṃ migavaṃ gacchanto ‘‘amhākaṃ arahante mā pamajjī’’ti cāpaṃ nāma dhītaraṃ āṇāpetvā agamāsi saddhiṃ puttabhātukehi. Sā cassa dhītā dassanīyā hoti koṭṭhāsasampannā. Dutiyadivase upako gharaṃ āgato taṃ dārikaṃ sabbaṃ upacāraṃ katvā parivisituṃ upagataṃ disvā rāgena abhibhūto bhuñjitumpi asakkonto bhājanena bhattaṃ ādāya vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā bhattaṃ ekamantaṃ nikkhipitvā ‘‘sace cāpaṃ labhāmi, jīvāmi. No ce, marāmī’’ti nirāhāro sayi. Sattame divase māgaviko āgantvā dhītaraṃ upakassa pavattiṃ pucchi. Sā ‘‘ekadivasameva āgantvā puna nāgatapubbo’’ti āha.

There, he made his dwelling relying on a hunter's village. The elder hunter attended to him. And in that region, there were fierce flies. Then they protected him with a pot of fat. The hunter, going far for hunting, ordered his daughter named Cāpā, along with his sons and nephews, "Do not neglect our arahant." And that daughter of his was beautiful, possessing all the right proportions. On the second day, Upaka came to the house, saw that girl having done all the services and come to serve him, and being overwhelmed with passion, unable to even eat, he took the food in the bowl and went to his dwelling place, put the food aside, and lay down without food, thinking, "If I get Cāpā, I will live. If not, I will die." On the seventh day, the hunter came and asked his daughter about Upaka's behavior. She said, "Having come only once, he has not come again."

Māgaviko āgataveseneva naṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāmīti taṅkhaṇaṃyeva gantvā ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, aphāsuka’’nti pāde parāmasanto pucchi. Upako nitthunanto parivattatiyeva. So ‘‘vada bhante, yaṃ mayā sakkā kātuṃ, sabbaṃ karissāmī’’ti āha. Upako ‘‘sace cāpaṃ labhāmi, jīvāmi, no ce, mayhameva maraṇaṃ seyyo’’ti āha. Jānāsi kira, bhante, kiñci sippanti? Na jānāmīti. Na, bhante, kiñci sippaṃ ajānantena sakkā gharāvāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātunti. So āha ‘‘nāhaṃ kiñci sippaṃ jānāmi, apica tumhākaṃ maṃsahārako bhavissāmi, maṃsañca vikkiṇissāmī’’ti. Māgaviko ‘‘amhākampi etadeva ruccatī’’ti uttarasāṭakaṃ datvā gharaṃ ānetvā dhītaraṃ adāsi. Tesaṃ saṃvāsamanvāya putto vijāyi, ‘‘subhaddo’’tissa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Cāpā tassa rodanakāle ‘‘maṃsahārakassa putta migaluddakassa putta mā rodi mā rodī’’tiādīni vadamānā puttatosanagītena upakaṃ uppaṇḍesi. ‘‘Bhadde tvaṃ maṃ anāthoti maññasi, atthi me anantajino nāma sahāyo, tassāhaṃ santikaṃ gamissāmī’’ti āha. Cāpā ‘‘evamayaṃ aṭṭīyatī’’ti ñatvā punappunaṃ kathesi. So ekadivasaṃ anārocetvāva majjhimadesābhimukho pakkāmi.

The hunter, thinking, "I will approach him in the same attire and ask," immediately went and asked, touching his feet, "Are you unwell, Bhante?" Upaka was groaning and turning over. He said, "Tell me, Bhante, whatever I can do, I will do everything." Upaka said, "If I get Cāpā, I will live; if not, it is better for me to die." "Do you know any skill, Bhante?" "I do not know." "It is not possible to lead a household life without knowing any skill, Bhante." He said, "I do not know any skill, but I will be your meat-eater and sell the meat." The hunter, saying "We also like this," gave his upper garment, brought him home, and gave him his daughter. Following their cohabitation, a son was born, and they named him "Subhadda." Cāpā, while he was crying, teasing Upaka with songs of soothing the child, saying things like "son of the meat-eater, son of the hunter, do not cry, do not cry." He said, "Good woman, you think I am helpless, but I have a friend named Anantajina, I will go to his presence." Cāpā, knowing that he was being tormented, spoke repeatedly. One day, without informing anyone, he set out towards the middle country.

Bhagavā ca tena samayena sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane, atha kho bhagavā paṭikacceva bhikkhū āṇāpesi ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, anantajinoti pucchamāno āgacchati, tassa maṃ dasseyyāthā’’ti. Upakopi kho ‘‘kuhiṃ anantajino vasatī’’ti pucchanto anupubbena sāvatthiṃ āgantvā vihāramajjhe ṭhatvā ‘‘kuhiṃ anantajino’’ti pucchi. Taṃ bhikkhū bhagavato santikaṃ nayiṃsu. So ca bhagavantaṃ disvā ‘‘sañjānātha maṃ bhagavā’’ti āha. Āma upaka sañjānāmi, kuhiṃ pana tvaṃ vasitthāti. Vaṅkahārajanapade, bhanteti. Upaka mahallakosi jāto, pabbajituṃ sakkhissasīti. Pabbajissāmi, bhanteti. Bhagavā pabbājetvā tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ adāsi. So kammaṭṭhāne kammaṃ karonto anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāya kālaṃ katvā avihesu nibbatto, nibbattikkhaṇeyeva ca arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Avihe nibbattamattā hi satta janā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, tesaṃ so aññataro. Vuttañhetaṃ –

At that time, the Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthī, in Jeta's Grove. Then the Blessed One, early in the morning, instructed the monks, "Monks, whoever comes asking for Anantajina, you should show me to him." Upaka also, asking "Where does Anantajina live?", gradually came to Sāvatthī, stood in the middle of the monastery, and asked, "Where is Anantajina?" The monks led him to the presence of the Blessed One. And seeing the Blessed One, he said, "Do you recognize me, Blessed One?" "Yes, Upaka, I recognize you. But where do you live?" "In the Vaṅkahāra region, Bhante." "Upaka, you have become old, will you be able to go forth?" "I will go forth, Bhante." The Blessed One ordained him and gave him a meditation subject. Practicing the meditation subject, he was established in the fruit of non-returning, passed away, and was reborn in Aviha. And at the moment of rebirth, he attained arahantship. For seven beings attained arahantship as soon as they were reborn in Aviha, and he was one of them. This was said:

‘‘Avihaṃ upapannāse, vimuttā satta bhikkhavo;

‘‘Seven monks, reborn in Aviha, are liberated;
They have crossed over attachment in the world, with lust and hatred destroyed.

‘‘Upako palagaṇḍo ca, pukkusāti ca te tayo;

‘‘Upaka, Palagaṇḍa, and Pukkusāti are those three;
Bhaddiya, Khaṇḍadeva, Bāhuraggi, and Saṅgī;
Having abandoned the human body, they attained divine union.’’ (saṃ. ni. 1.50, 105);

12.Saṇṭhapesunti ‘‘neva abhivādetabbo’’tiādinā katikaṃ akaṃsu.Bāhullikoti cīvarabāhullādīnaṃ atthāya paṭipanno.Padhānavibbhantoti padhānato pubbe anuṭṭhitadukkaracaraṇato vibbhanto bhaṭṭho parihīno.Āvatto bāhullāyāti cīvarādibahubhāvatthāya āvatto.Apica kho āsanaṃ ṭhapetabbanti apica kho panassa uccakule nibbattassa āsanamattaṃ ṭhapetabbanti vadiṃsu.Asaṇṭhahantāti buddhānubhāvena buddhatejena abhibhūtā attano katikāya ṭhātuṃ asakkontā.Nāmena ca āvusovādena ca samudācarantīti ‘‘gotamā’’ti ca ‘‘āvuso’’ti ca vadanti, ‘‘āvuso gotama, mayaṃ uruvelāyaṃ padhānakāle tuyhaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vicarimha, mukhodakaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ adamha, vutthapariveṇaṃ sammajjimha, pacchā te ko vattapaṭipattiṃ akāsi, kacci amhesu pakkantesu na cintayitthā’’ti evarūpaṃ kathaṃ kathentīti attho.

12. Saṇṭhapesunti: "They made an agreement stating, 'He should not be greeted,' etc." Bāhullikoti: "One who has undertaken [ascetic practices] for the sake of abundance of robes, etc." Padhānavibbhantoti: "One who has deviated, fallen, and declined from the preliminary, previously unpracticed difficult practices." Āvatto bāhullāyāti: "Turned back for the sake of abundance of robes, etc." Apica kho āsanaṃ ṭhapetabbanti: "Moreover, they said that at least a seat should be prepared for him, being born in a high family." Asaṇṭhahantāti: "Unable to stand by their own agreement, being overwhelmed by the Buddha's power and the Buddha's glory." Nāmena ca āvusovādena ca samudācarantīti: "They addressed him as 'Gotama' and with the term 'āvuso', saying, 'Friend Gotama, we wandered in Uruvelā during your time of striving, carrying your bowl and robe, giving you mouthwash and tooth sticks, and sweeping the grounds around your dwelling. Afterwards, who attended to your duties? Surely, you must have thought of us after we left?' The meaning is that they spoke such words."

Na cirassevāti acireneva.Kulaputtāti duvidhā kulaputtā jātikulaputtā ācārakulaputtā ca, ete pana ubhayathāpi kulaputtāyeva.Agārasmāti gharā. Agārāya hitaṃ agāriyaṃ, kasigorakkhādi kuṭumbaposanakammaṃ vuccati. Natthi ettha agāriyantianagāriyaṃ. Pabbajjāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Pabbajantīti upagacchanti upasaṅkamanti.Tadanuttaranti taṃ anuttaraṃ.Brahmacariyapariyosānanti maggabrahmacariyassa pariyosānaṃ, arahattaphalanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa hi atthāya kulaputtā pabbajanti.Diṭṭheva dhammeti tasmiṃyeva attabhāve.Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti attanoyeva paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā, aparappaccayaṃ katvāti attho.Upasampajja viharissathāti pāpuṇitvā sampādetvā viharissatha.

Na cirassevāti: "Not long after." Kulaputtāti: "There are two kinds of sons of good families: sons of good families by birth and sons of good families by conduct. However, these were sons of good families in both ways." Agārasmāti: "From home." Agāriyaṃ means beneficial to a house; it refers to occupations such as farming and cattle-raising for supporting a family. Anagāriyaṃ: "Where there is no agāriyaṃ." This is another word for going forth. Pabbajantīti: "They go forth," approach, and draw near. Tadanuttaranti: "That unsurpassed." Brahmacariyapariyosānanti: "The culmination of the holy life," meaning the fruit of Arahatship. For the sake of that, sons of good families go forth. Diṭṭheva dhammeti: "In this very lifetime." Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti: "Having directly realized by their own wisdom," meaning having realized without reliance on others. Upasampajja viharissathāti: "Having attained and accomplished, they will dwell."

Iriyāyāti dukkarairiyāya.Paṭipadāyāti dukkarapaṭipattiyā.Dukkarakārikāyāti pasatapasatamuggayūsādiāharaṇādinā dukkarakaraṇena.Uttari manussadhammāti manussadhammato upari. Alaṃ ariyaṃ kātunti alamariyo, ariyabhāvāya samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti, ñāṇadassanameva ñāṇadassanaviseso, alamariyo ca so ñāṇadassanaviseso cātialamariyañāṇadassanaviseso. Ñāṇadassananti ca dibbacakkhupi vipassanāpi maggopi phalampi paccavekkhaṇañāṇampi sabbaññutaññāṇampi vuccati. ‘‘Appamatto samāno ñāṇadassanaṃ ārādhetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.311) hi ettha dibbacakkhu ñāṇadassanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharati abhininnāmetī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.235) ettha vipassanāñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Abhabbā te ñāṇadassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāyā’’ti (a. ni. 4.196) ettha maggo. ‘‘Ayamañño uttarimanussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.328) ettha phalaṃ. ‘‘Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi ‘akuppā me cetovimutti, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 16) ettha paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi ‘sattāhakālakato āḷāro kālāmo’’’ti (ma. ni. 1.284; 2.340; mahāva. 10) ettha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Idha pana sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhāno ariyamaggo sabbaññutaññāṇameva vā adhippetaṃ.

Iriyāyāti: "By difficult conduct." Paṭipadāyāti: "By difficult practice." Dukkarakārikāyāti: "By performing difficult deeds, such as taking only a handful of sesame seeds or green gram soup as food." Uttari manussadhammāti: "Beyond human qualities." Alaṃ ariyaṃ kātunti alamariyo, meaning "capable of making one noble," thus it is said to be fit for ariyas. Ñāṇadassanameva ñāṇadassanaviseso, "knowledge and vision itself is a special kind of knowledge and vision"; alamariyo ca so ñāṇadassanaviseso cāti alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso: "it is a noble power, it is a special kind of knowledge and vision." Ñāṇadassananti: "Knowledge and vision" is also used for the divine eye, insight, the path, the fruit, the knowledge of reviewing, and the knowledge of omniscience. For example, "Being heedful, he cultivates knowledge and vision (ñāṇadassanaṃ ārādheti)" (ma. ni. 1.311), where here the divine eye is called knowledge and vision. "He directs and inclines his mind towards knowledge and vision (ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti)" (dī. ni. 1.235), where here it refers to insight knowledge. "They are incapable of attaining knowledge and vision, unsurpassed enlightenment (ñāṇadassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāyā)" (a. ni. 4.196), where here it refers to the path. "This is another attainment, a superior human quality, a special noble knowledge and vision, a comfortable dwelling (uttarimanussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro)" (ma. ni. 1.328), where here it refers to the fruit. "And knowledge and vision arose in me: ‘Unshakeable is my liberation of mind; this is my last birth; now there is no more renewed existence (aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhāpesu’’’ti)" (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 16), where here it refers to the knowledge of reviewing. "And knowledge and vision arose in me: ‘Āḷāra Kālāma died seven days ago (sattāhakālakato āḷāro kālāmo’’’ti)" (ma. ni. 1.284; 2.340; mahāva. 10), where here it refers to the knowledge of omniscience. Here, however, the noble path, which is the foundation for the knowledge of omniscience, or the knowledge of omniscience itself is intended.

Abhijānātha me noti abhijānātha nu me.Evarūpaṃ pabhāvitametanti ettha evarūpaṃ vākyabhedanti attho, api nu ahaṃ uruvelāyaṃ padhāne tumhākaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ anukkaṇṭhanatthaṃ rattiṃ vā divā vā āgantvā ‘‘āvuso, mayaṃ yattha katthaci gamissāmāti mā vitakkayittha, mayhaṃ obhāso vā kammaṭṭhānanimittaṃ vā paññāyatī’’ti evarūpaṃ kañci vacanabhedaṃ akāsinti adhippāyo. Te ekapadeneva satiṃ labhitvā uppannagāravā ‘‘addhā esa buddho jāto’’ti saddahitvā ‘‘no hetaṃ bhante’’ti āhaṃsu.Asakkhi kho bhagavā pañcavaggiye bhikkhū saññāpetunti bhagavā pañcavaggiye bhikkhū ‘‘buddho aha’’nti jānāpetuṃ asakkhi.Aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhāpesunti aññāya arahattappattiyā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapesuṃ abhinīhariṃsu.

Abhijānātha me noti: "Do you recognize me or not?" Evarūpaṃ pabhāvitametanti: "Here, evarūpaṃ means a distinction in the sentence," the meaning is, "Did I, while striving in Uruvelā, come to you, either at night or during the day, for the sake of gathering you together and preventing you from being scattered, and say something like, 'Friends, do not think that we will go anywhere at all; an appearance or a meditation subject is appearing to me'?" Having gained mindfulness with just one word, and with reverence arising, believing that "Indeed, this one has become a Buddha," they said, "No, venerable sir." Asakkhi kho bhagavā pañcavaggiye bhikkhū saññāpetunti: "The Blessed One was able to make the group of five monks know that 'I am a Buddha.'" Aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhāpesunti: "They established their minds on the attainment of realization, of Arahatship."

Dhammacakkappavattanasuttavaṇṇanā
Dhammacakkappavattanasuttavaṇṇanā

13.Dveme, bhikkhave, antāti dve ime, bhikkhave, koṭṭhāsā, dve bhāgāti attho. Bhāgavacano hettha anta-saddo ‘‘pubbante ñāṇaṃ aparante ñāṇa’’ntiādīsu (dha. sa. 1063) viya. Imassa pana padassa uccāraṇasamakālaṃ pavattanigghoso buddhānubhāvena heṭṭhā avīciṃ upari bhavaggaṃ patvā dasasahassilokadhātuṃ pharitvā aṭṭhāsi. Tasmiṃyeva samaye paripakkakusalamūlā saccābhisambodhāya katādhikārā aṭṭhārasakoṭisaṅkhā brahmāno samāgacchiṃsu. Pacchimadisāya sūriyo atthameti, pācīnadisāya āsāḷhanakkhattena yutto puṇṇacando uggacchati. Tasmiṃ samaye bhagavā dhammacakkappavattanasuttaṃ ārabhanto ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, antā’’tiādimāha.

13. Dveme, bhikkhave, antāti: "These two, monks, are extremes," meaning two parts or two divisions. Here, the word "anta" (extreme) is used in the sense of a division, as in "knowledge of the past extreme, knowledge of the future extreme" (pubbante ñāṇaṃ aparante ñāṇa’’ntiādīsu) (dha. sa. 1063). At the moment this passage was uttered, the resounding proclamation, by the Buddha's power, reached Avīci hell below and the peak of existence (Bhavagga) above, filling the ten thousand world-systems. At that very moment, eighteen crores of Brahmās, whose roots of merit were ripe and who had made the aspiration for the realization of the Truths, assembled. The sun was setting in the western direction, and the full moon, associated with the Āsāḷha constellation, was rising in the eastern direction. At that time, the Blessed One, beginning the Dhammacakkappavattana Sutta, said "dveme, bhikkhave, antā" (these two extremes, monks) etc.

pabbajitenāti gihibandhanaṃ chetvā pabbajjupagatena.Na sevitabbāti na vaḷañjetabbā nānuyuñjitabbā.Yo cāyaṃ kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogoti yo ca ayaṃ vatthukāmesu kilesakāmasukhassa anuyogo, kilesakāmasaṃyuttassa sukhassa anugatoti attho.Hīnoti lāmako.Gammoti gāmavāsīnaṃ santako tehi sevitabbatāya.Pothujjanikoti puthujjanena andhabālajanena āciṇṇo.Anariyoti na ariyo na visuddho na uttamo, na vā ariyānaṃ santako.Anatthasaṃhitoti na atthasaṃhito, hitasukhāvahakāraṇaṃ anissitoti attho.Attakilamathānuyogoti attano kilamathassa anuyogo, dukkhakaraṇaṃ dukkhuppādananti attho.Dukkhoti kaṇṭakāpassayaseyyādīhi attabādhanehi dukkhāvaho.Majjhimā paṭipadāti ariyamaggaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Maggo hi kāmasukhallikānuyogo eko anto, attakilamathānuyogo eko anto, ete dve ante na upeti na upagacchati, vimutto etehi antehi, tasmā ‘‘majjhimā paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Etesaṃ majjhe bhavattāmajjhimā,vaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthikehi paṭipajjitabbato capaṭipadāti, tathā lobho eko anto, doso eko anto. Sassataṃ ekaṃ antaṃ, ucchedo eko antoti purimanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ.

pabbajitenāti: "By one who has gone forth," having cut off the bonds of household life and embraced the going forth. Na sevitabbāti: "Should not be cultivated," should not be pursued or associated with. Yo cāyaṃ kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogoti: "That addiction to sensual pleasure in regard to sense-objects and defilements," meaning following after pleasure connected with sensual defilements. Hīnoti: "Inferior." Gammoti: "Belonging to villagers," appropriate to be cultivated by them. Pothujjanikoti: "Practiced by ordinary people," by the blind and ignorant masses. Anariyoti: "Not noble," not pure, not excellent, or not belonging to the noble ones. Anatthasaṃhitoti: "Not connected with benefit," meaning not relying on causes that bring about welfare and happiness. Attakilamathānuyogoti: "Addiction to self-mortification," meaning causing suffering and producing pain. Dukkhoti: "Painful," bringing about suffering through self-torment, such as sleeping on beds of thorns. Majjhimā paṭipadāti: "The Middle Way," spoken in reference to the Noble Path. The Path does not approach or go near those two extremes, the addiction to sensual pleasures as one extreme, and the addiction to self-mortification as one extreme, it is liberated from these extremes, therefore it is called the "Middle Way." Majjhimā, because it exists in the middle of these, and paṭipadā, because it should be practiced by those who desire release from the suffering of the round of rebirths. Similarly, greed is one extreme, aversion is one extreme. Eternalism is one extreme, annihilationism is one extreme, and should be expanded in meaning according to the previous method.

Cakkhukaraṇītiādīhi tameva paṭipadaṃ thometi. Paññācakkhuṃ karotīti cakkhukaraṇī. Sā hi catunnaṃ saccānaṃ dassanāya saṃvattati pariññābhisamayādibhedassa dassanassa pavattanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘cakkhukaraṇī’’ti vuccati. Tayidaṃ satipi paṭipadāya anaññatte avayavavasena sijjhamāno attho samudāyena kato nāma hotīti upacāravasena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dutiyapadaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Upasamāyāti kilesupasamatthāya.Abhiññāyāti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ abhijānanatthāya.Sambodhāyāti tesaṃyeva sambujjhanatthāya.Nibbānāyāti nibbānasacchikiriyāya. Atha vānibbānāyāti anupādisesanibbānāya. ‘‘Upasamāyā’’ti hi iminā saupādisesanibbānaṃ gahitaṃ.

Cakkhukaraṇītiādīhi: "With cakkhukaraṇī (eye-opening)" etc., he praises that same path. Paññācakkhuṃ karotīti cakkhukaraṇī: "That which makes the eye of wisdom," because it leads to the seeing of the four truths, in the sense of initiating the vision of distinctions such as comprehension and realization, therefore it is called "cakkhukaraṇī." Although this is not different from the path, it should be seen as a statement made by way of treatment, where the meaning that is achieved based on its components is done by way of a collective whole. The second term is a synonym of that. Upasamāyāti: "For the appeasement of defilements." Abhiññāyāti: "For the direct knowledge of the four truths." Sambodhāyāti: "For the complete awakening to those same truths." Nibbānāyāti: "For the realization of Nibbāna." Or, alternatively, nibbānāyāti: "For Nibbāna without remainder." For with "Upasamāyā," Nibbāna with remainder is taken.

ayamevāti avadhāraṇavacanaṃ aññassa nibbānagāmimaggassa atthibhāvapaṭisedhanatthaṃ. Sattāpaṭikkhepo hi idha paṭisedhanaṃ alabbhamānattā aññassa maggassa.Ariyoti kilesānaṃ ārakattā ariyo niruttinayena. Aripahānāya saṃvattatītipiariyoarayo pāpadhammā yanti apagacchanti etenāti katvā. Ariyena bhagavatā desitattā ariyassa ayantipiariyo,ariyabhāvappaṭilābhāya saṃvattatītipiariyo. Ettha pana ariyakaro ariyotipi uttarapadalopena ariya-saddasiddhi veditabbā. Aṭṭhahi aṅgehi upetattāaṭṭhaṅgiko. Maggaṅgasamudāye hi maggavohāro, samudāyo ca samudāyīhi samannāgato nāma hoti. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – attano avayavabhūtāni aṭṭhaṅgāni etassa santīti aṭṭhaṅgikoti. Paramatthato pana aṅgāniyeva maggo pañcaṅgikatūriyādīni viya, na ca aṅgavinimutto chaḷaṅgo vedo viya. Kilese mārento gacchatītimaggoniruttinayena, nibbānaṃ maggati gavesatīti vāmaggo. Ariyamaggo hi nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karonto gavesanto viya hoti. Nibbānatthikehi maggīyatīti vāmaggovivaṭṭūpanissayapuññakaraṇato paṭṭhāya tadatthapaṭipattito. Gammati vā tehi paṭipajjīyatītimaggo. Ettha pana ādiantavipariyāyena saddasiddhi veditabbā.

ayamevāti: "This alone," a word of determination, for the purpose of negating the existence of any other path leading to Nibbāna. Here, the negation is a rejection because another path is not attainable. Ariyoti: "Noble," because it is far from defilements, according to the etymological meaning. Ari pahānāya saṃvattatītipi ariyo: "Also, because it leads to the abandonment of enemies," arayo pāpadhammā yanti apagacchanti etenāti katvā: "since evil qualities, the enemies, go away by it." Ariyena bhagavatā desitattā ariyassa ayantipi ariyo: "Because it is taught by the Noble Blessed One, and it comes from the Noble One," ariyabhāvappaṭilābhāya saṃvattatītipi ariyo: "also because it leads to the attainment of nobility." Here, the derivation of the word ariya should be understood as ariya-sadda-siddhi, with the elision of the latter part, as in ariyakaro ariyotipi. Aṭṭhahi aṅgehi upetattā aṭṭhaṅgiko: "Because it is endowed with eight factors, it is eightfold." For the designation of path is in the collection of path factors, and a collection is said to be complete with its constituents. Here, the meaning of the words is this: attano avayavabhūtāni aṭṭhaṅgāni etassa santīti aṭṭhaṅgikoti: "Because it possesses eight factors that are its components, it is eightfold." However, in the ultimate sense, the factors themselves are the path, like the five-piece orchestra, and not like the six-limbed Veda, where the limbs are distinct. Kilese mārento gacchatīti maggo niruttinayena: "Because it goes, destroying the defilements, it is called maggo (path) according to the etymological meaning," nibbānaṃ maggati gavesatīti vā maggo: "or because it seeks and searches for Nibbāna, it is called maggo." The Noble Path, aiming for Nibbāna, is like one who seeks and searches. Nibbānatthikehi maggīyatīti vā maggo: "Or because it is sought by those who desire Nibbāna," vivaṭṭūpanissayapuññakaraṇato paṭṭhāya tadatthapaṭipattito: "from the performance of meritorious deeds that are the support for the round of rebirths, and from the practice for that purpose." Gammati vā tehi paṭipajjīyatīti maggo: "Or because one goes and practices by it, it is called maggo." Here, the word formation should be understood with the reversal of the beginning and the end.

Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa katamo so iti ceti attho, katamāni vā tāni aṭṭhaṅgānīti. Sabbaliṅgavibhattivacanasādhāraṇo hi ayaṃ nipāto. Ekamekampi aṅgaṃ maggoyeva. Yathāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi maggo ceva hetu cā’’ti (dha. sa. 1039). Porāṇāpi bhaṇanti ‘‘dassanamaggo sammādiṭṭhi, abhiniropanamaggo sammāsaṅkappo…pe… avikkhepamaggo sammāsamādhī’’ti. Nanu ca aṅgāni samuditāni maggo antamaso sattaṅgavikalassa ariyamaggassa abhāvatoti? Saccametaṃ saccasampaṭivedhe, maggappaccayatāya pana yathāsakaṃ kiccakaraṇena paccekampi tāni maggoyeva, aññathā samuditānampi tesaṃ maggakiccaṃ na sambhaveyyāti. Sammādiṭṭhiādīsu sammā passatītisammādiṭṭhi,sammā saṅkappeti sampayuttadhamme nibbānasaṅkhāte ārammaṇe abhiniropetītisammāsaṅkappo,sammā vadati etāyātisammāvācā,sammā karoti etenāti sammākammaṃ, tadevasammākammanto,sammā ājīvati etenātisammāājīvo,sammā vāyamati ussahatītisammāvāyāmo,sammā sarati anussaratītisammāsati,sammā samādhiyati cittaṃ etenātisammāsamādhīti evaṃ nibbacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idāniayaṃ kho sā bhikkhaveti tameva paṭipadaṃ nigamento āha. Tassattho – yvāyaṃ cattāropi lokuttaramagge ekato katvā kathito aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, ayaṃ kho sā bhikkhave…pe… nibbānāya saṃvattatīti.

Seyyathidanti: "That is to say," is a particle, meaning "what is that?" or "what are those eight factors?" For this particle is common in all genders, inflections, and numbers. Each factor is itself the path. As it was said, "right view is the path and also the cause" (sammādiṭṭhi maggo ceva hetu cā’’ti) (dha. sa. 1039). The ancients also say, "The path of seeing is right view, the path of directing the mind is right thought…pe… the path of non-distraction is right concentration." But surely, the factors are collectively the path, since there is no Noble Path with even seven factors lacking? This is true in the realization of truth, but because each one fulfills its own function as a condition for the path, each one is itself the path; otherwise, even collectively, their function as the path would not be possible. Sammā passatīti sammādiṭṭhi: "Because one sees rightly, it is right view," sammā saṅkappeti sampayuttadhamme nibbānasaṅkhāte ārammaṇe abhiniropetīti sammāsaṅkappo: "because one rightly thinks and directs the associated mental states towards the object called Nibbāna, it is right thought," sammā vadati etāyāti sammāvācā: "because one speaks rightly by it, it is right speech," sammā karoti etenāti sammākammaṃ, tadeva sammākammanto: "because one acts rightly by it, it is right action, that itself is right action," sammā ājīvati etenāti sammāājīvo: "because one lives rightly by it, it is right livelihood," sammā vāyamati ussahatīti sammāvāyāmo: "because one rightly strives and endeavors, it is right effort," sammā sarati anussaratīti sammāsati: "because one rightly remembers and recollects, it is right mindfulness," sammā samādhiyati cittaṃ etenāti sammāsamādhī: "because the mind is rightly concentrated by it, it is right concentration," thus the explanations should be understood. Now, ayaṃ kho sā bhikkhave: "this, indeed, monks," he says, concluding about that same path. Its meaning is: "That eightfold path, which has been spoken of by collecting together the four supramundane paths, this, indeed, monks…pe… leads to Nibbāna."

14.Evaṃ majjhimapaṭipadaṃ sarūpato dassetvā idāni cattāri ariyasaccāni dassetuṃ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha (visuddhi. 2.530)dukkhanti etthadu-iti ayaṃ saddo kucchite dissati. Kucchitañhi puttaṃ ‘‘duputto’’ti vadanti,khaṃ-saddo pana tucche. Tucchañhi ākāsaṃ ‘‘kha’’nti vuccati. Idañca paṭhamasaccaṃ kucchitaṃ anekaupaddavādhiṭṭhānato, tucchaṃ bālajanaparikappitadhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahitato, tasmā kucchitattā tucchattā ca ‘‘dukkha’’nti vuccati. Yasmā panetaṃ buddhādayo ariyā paṭivijjhanti, tasmā‘‘ariyasacca’’nti vuccati. Ariyapaṭivijjhitabbañhi saccaṃ purimapade uttarapadalopena‘‘ariyasacca’’nti vuttaṃ. Ariyassa tathāgatassa saccantipi ariyasaccaṃ. Tathāgatena hi sayaṃ adhigatattā paveditattā tato eva ca aññehi adhigamanīyattā taṃ tassa hotīti. Atha vā etassa abhisambuddhattā ariyabhāvasiddhito ariyasādhakaṃ saccantipiariyasaccaṃpubbe viya uttarapadalopena. Avitathabhāvena vā araṇīyattā adhigantabbattā ariyaṃ saccantipiariyasaccaṃ. Saccatthaṃ pana catunnampi saccānaṃ parato ekajjhaṃ dassayissāma.

14. Having shown the Middle Way in its true form, now, to show the four Noble Truths, ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha: "he said, 'This, indeed, monks,' etc." There (visuddhi. 2.530), dukkhanti: "in dukkha," du-iti ayaṃ saddo kucchite dissati: "the word 'du' here is seen in what is blameworthy." Kucchitañhi puttaṃ ‘‘duputto’’ti vadanti: "For they call a blameworthy son a 'duputto' (bad son)," khaṃ-saddo pana tucche: "but the word 'khaṃ' is in what is empty." Tucchañhi ākāsaṃ ‘‘kha’’nti vuccati: "For they call empty space 'kha'." Idañca paṭhamasaccaṃ kucchitaṃ anekaupaddavādhiṭṭhānato: "And this first Truth is blameworthy, because it is the basis of many misfortunes," tucchaṃ bālajanaparikappitadhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahitato: "empty, because it is devoid of the state of permanence, beauty, and happiness imagined by foolish people," tasmā kucchitattā tucchattā ca ‘‘dukkha’’nti vuccati: "therefore, because of being blameworthy and because of being empty, it is called 'dukkha'." Yasmā panetaṃ buddhādayo ariyā paṭivijjhanti, tasmā ‘‘ariyasacca’’nti vuccati: "Since the noble ones, beginning with the Buddhas, penetrate it, therefore, it is called 'Noble Truth'." Ariyapaṭivijjhitabbañhi saccaṃ purimapade uttarapadalopena ‘‘ariyasacca’’nti vuttaṃ: "Indeed, the truth that should be penetrated by the noble ones is called 'Noble Truth' with the elision of the latter part of the first word." Ariyassa tathāgatassa saccantipi ariyasaccaṃ: "The truth of the Noble Tathāgata is also a Noble Truth." Tathāgatena hi sayaṃ adhigatattā paveditattā tato eva ca aññehi adhigamanīyattā taṃ tassa hotīti: "For because it is self-realized and proclaimed by the Tathāgata, and because it can be realized by others through that very reason, it belongs to him." Atha vā etassa abhisambuddhattā ariyabhāvasiddhito ariyasādhakaṃ saccantipi ariyasaccaṃ pubbe viya uttarapadalopena: "Or, because of his complete enlightenment and the accomplishment of nobility, it is a truth that makes one noble, thus it is called 'Noble Truth' with the elision of the latter part as before." Avitathabhāvena vā araṇīyattā adhigantabbattā ariyaṃ saccantipi ariyasaccaṃ: "Or because it is undeceiving, worthy, and attainable, it is a noble truth, thus it is called 'Noble Truth'." But we will show the true meaning of the four truths together later on.

‘‘jātipi dukkhā’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃjāti-saddo anekattho. Tathā hesa ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’ti (dī. ni. 1.31; ma. ni. 1.148) ettha bhave āgato. ‘‘Atthi, visākhe, nigaṇṭhā nāma samaṇajātī’’ti (a. ni. 3.71) ettha nikāye. ‘‘Jāti dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahitā’’ti (dhātu. 71) ettha saṅkhatalakkhaṇe. ‘‘Yaṃ mātukucchismiṃ paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ paṭhamaṃ viññāṇaṃ pātubhūtaṃ, tadupādāya sāvassa jātī’’ti (mahāva. 124) ettha paṭisandhiyaṃ. ‘‘Sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto’’ti (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207) ettha pasūtiyaṃ. ‘‘Akkhitto anupakuṭṭho jātivādenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.303) ettha kule. Svāyamidha gabbhaseyyakānaṃ paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya yāva mātukucchimhā nikkhamanaṃ, tāva pavattesu khandhesu, itaresaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇesvevāti daṭṭhabbo. Ayampi ca pariyāyakathāva, nippariyāyato pana tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ paṭhamapātubhāvo jāti nāma.

‘‘jātipi dukkhā’’tiādimāha: "He said, 'Birth is suffering,' etc." Tatrāyaṃ jāti-saddo anekattho: "Here, this word 'jāti' (birth) has many meanings." Tathā hesa ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’ti (dī. ni. 1.31; ma. ni. 1.148) ettha bhave āgato: "Thus, it occurs in the sense of existence in 'even one birth, even two births'." ‘‘Atthi, visākhe, nigaṇṭhā nāma samaṇajātī’’ti (a. ni. 3.71) ettha nikāye: "In 'there are, Visākha, ascetics called Nigaṇṭha by lineage,' it is in the sense of a sect." ‘‘Jāti dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahitā’’ti (dhātu. 71) ettha saṅkhatalakkhaṇe: "In 'birth is included by two aggregates,' it is in the sense of a conditioned characteristic." ‘‘Yaṃ mātukucchismiṃ paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ paṭhamaṃ viññāṇaṃ pātubhūtaṃ, tadupādāya sāvassa jātī’’ti (mahāva. 124) ettha paṭisandhiyaṃ: "In 'from the first mind that arises in the mother's womb, the first consciousness that appears, from that is their birth,' it is in the sense of rebirth." ‘‘Sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto’’ti (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207) ettha pasūtiyaṃ: "In 'the Bodhisatta is now born, Ānanda,' it is in the sense of being born." ‘‘Akkhitto anupakuṭṭho jātivādenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.303) ettha kule: "In 'uninsulted, unreviled by talk of birth,' it is in the sense of family." Svāyamidha gabbhaseyyakānaṃ paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya yāva mātukucchimhā nikkhamanaṃ, tāva pavattesu khandhesu, itaresaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇesvevāti daṭṭhabbo: "Here, it should be seen as referring to the aggregates that occur from the rebirth of those who lie in the womb, until the emergence from the mother's womb, and for others, only at the moment of rebirth." Ayampi ca pariyāyakathāva, nippariyāyato pana tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ paṭhamapātubhāvo jāti nāma: "And this is just a figurative expression, but in the non-figurative sense, the first appearance of the aggregates that arise for beings who are reborn in various places is called birth."

dukkhadukkhanti vuccati. Sukhā vedanā vipariṇāmadukkhuppattihetutovipariṇāmadukkhaṃ. Upekkhā vedanā ceva sesā ca tebhūmakā saṅkhārā udayabbayapīḷitattāsaṅkhāradukkhaṃ. Kaṇṇasūladantasūlarāgajapariḷāhadosajapariḷāhādikāyikacetasikā ābādhā pucchitvā jānitabbato upakkamassa ca apākaṭabhāvatopaṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Dvattiṃsakammakāraṇādisamuṭṭhāno ābādho apucchitvāva jānitabbato upakkamassa ca pākaṭabhāvatoappaṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Ṭhapetvā dukkhadukkhaṃ sesadukkhaṃ saccavibhaṅge āgataṃ jātiādi sabbampi tassa tassa dukkhassa vatthubhāvatopariyāyadukkhaṃ. Dukkhadukkhaṃ pananippariyāyadukkhanti vuccati. Tatrāyaṃ jāti yaṃ taṃbālapaṇḍitasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.246 ādayo) bhagavatāpi upamāvasena pakāsitaṃ āpāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yañca sugatiyampi manussaloke gabbhokkantimūlakādibhedaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, tassa vatthubhāvato dukkhā. Tenāhu porāṇā –

Dukkhadukkha is so called. Pleasant feeling is vipariṇāmadukkha because it is the cause for the arising of suffering due to change. Indifferent feeling and the remaining formations of the three realms are saṅkhāradukkha because they are afflicted by arising and passing away. Physical and mental ailments such as earache, toothache, burning sensations due to attachment, burning sensations due to aversion, etc., are paṭicchannadukkha (covered suffering) because they must be inquired about to be known and because their treatment is not obvious. Ailments arising from the thirty-two parts of the body, etc., are appaṭicchannadukkha (uncovered suffering) because they can be known without being asked about and because their treatment is obvious. Except for dukkhadukkha, the remaining suffering, including birth, etc., mentioned in the analysis of the truth, is pariyāyadukkha (suffering by way of explanation), as it is the basis for that particular suffering. But dukkhadukkha is called nippariyāyadukkha (suffering without explanation). Here, birth is suffering because it is the basis for the painful suffering in the nether world, which was revealed by the Blessed One in analogies in suttas such as the Bālapaṇḍitasutta (M.III, 246 ff), and for the suffering that arises in the world of humans in the realm of bliss, with various forms beginning with conception in the womb. Therefore, the ancients said:

‘‘Jāyetha no ce narakesu satto;

"If a being were not born in the hells,
Where unbearable suffering such as burning by fire exists,
He would not obtain suffering anywhere to stand;
Thus, the Sage calls birth suffering."

‘‘Dukkhaṃ tiracchesu kasāpatoda-

"Suffering among animals arises from whips, goads,
Beatings with sticks, and various other causes;
How could birth exist there,
Since without birth there, it is more suffering than that."

‘‘Petesu dukkhaṃ pana khuppipāsā-

"Suffering among the departed spirits is diverse,
Arising from hunger, thirst, wind, heat, etc.;
Since it does not exist there for one unborn,
Therefore, the Sage calls birth suffering."

‘‘Tibbandhakāre ca asayha sīte;

"The unbearable suffering in the world-interstices
Among the asuras, in the triple darkness and unbearable cold,
That would not exist there, nor would there be birth for him;
Since this birth is more suffering than that."

‘‘Yañcāpi gūthanarake viya mātu gabbhe;

"And also, like in a charnel ground, in the mother's womb,
The being dwells for a long time, and then emerges;
He attains exceedingly terrible suffering, and this does not exist
Without birth; thus, this birth is suffering."

‘‘Kiṃ bhāsitena bahunā nanu yaṃ kuhiñci;

"Why speak much? Indeed, whatever
Suffering exists anywhere,
Never exists without birth; therefore, the Great Sage
First called this birth suffering." (Vism. 2.541; VibhA. 191; M.A. 5; Patis.mA. 1.1.32-33)

Jarāpidukkhāti ettha pana duvidhā jarā saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca khaṇḍiccādisammato santatiyaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannakkhandhapurāṇabhāvo ca, sā idha adhippetā. Sā panesā jarā saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato ceva dukkhavatthuto ca dukkhā. Yañhi aṅgapaccaṅgasithilabhāvaindriyavikāravirūpatāyobbanavināsavīriyāvisādasatimativippavāsaparaparibhavādianekapaccayaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ dukkhamuppajjati, jarā tassa vatthu. Tenāhu porāṇā –

Here, old age also is suffering: old age is twofold: the characteristic of conditioned things, and the aging of the aggregates pertaining to one existence, consisting of decay, etc., and that is what is intended here. This old age is suffering because it is of the nature of saṅkhāradukkha and because it is a basis for suffering. For the physical and mental suffering that arises from many causes, such as the loosening of limbs, the impairment of the faculties, ugliness, the destruction of youth, the decline of vigor, the loss of mindfulness and intelligence, and disrespect from others, old age is the basis. Therefore, the ancients said:

‘‘Aṅgānaṃ sithilībhāvā, indriyānaṃ vikārato;

"From the loosening of limbs, from the impairment of the faculties,
From the destruction of youth, from the decline of strength,"

‘‘Vippavāsā satādīnaṃ, puttadārehi attano;

"From the loss of memory, etc., from oneself with children and spouse,
From being unappealing, and also from further falling into foolishness,"

‘‘Pappoti dukkhaṃ yaṃ macco, kāyikaṃ mānasaṃ tathā;

"Whatever physical and mental suffering a mortal attains,
All of this is due to old age; therefore, old age is suffering." (Vism. 2.542; VibhA. 192; M.A. 5; Patis.mA. 1.1.32-33)

Byādhipi dukkhoti idaṃ padaṃ vibhaṅge dukkhasaccaniddesapāḷiyaṃ na āgataṃ, tenevavisuddhimaggepidukkhasaccaniddese taṃ na uddhaṭaṃ,dhammacakkapavattanasuttantapāḷiyaṃyeva pana upalabbhati, tasmā tatthevimassa vacane aññattha ca avacane kāraṇaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ.

Sickness also is suffering: this term does not appear in the section on the analysis of the truth of suffering in the Vibhaṅga. Therefore, it was not extracted in the Visuddhimagga either in the section on the analysis of the truth of suffering, but it is found only in the Dhammacakkappavattana Sutta passage; therefore, the reason for its inclusion there and absence elsewhere should be investigated.

Maraṇampi dukkhanti etthāpi duvidhaṃ maraṇaṃ saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahita’’nti (dhātu. 71). Ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyappabandhavicchedo ca. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘niccaṃ maraṇato bhaya’’nti (su. ni. 581; jā. 1.11.88), taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Jātipaccayamaraṇaṃ upakkamamaraṇaṃ sarasamaraṇaṃ āyukkhayamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayamaraṇantipi tasseva nāmaṃ. Tayidaṃ dukkhassa vatthubhāvato dukkhanti veditabbaṃ. Tenāhu porāṇā –

Death also is suffering: here also, death is twofold: the characteristic of conditioned things, with reference to which it was said, "old age and death are included by two aggregates" (Dhatu. 71), and the cessation of the continuity of the life faculty pertaining to one existence, with reference to which it was said, "always fear from death" (Sn. 581; Ja. 1.11.88), and that is what is intended here. Death due to birth, death due to attack, death due to violence, death due to the exhaustion of lifespan, and death due to the exhaustion of merit are all names for the same thing. This should be understood as suffering because it is the basis for suffering. Therefore, the ancients said:

‘‘Pāpassa pāpakammādi-nimittamanupassato;

"The mental suffering of the evil-doer, not seeing
The consequences of evil deeds, and of the virtuous one, not enduring
Separation from beloved things, as he dies,"

‘‘Sabbesañcāpi yaṃ sandhi-bandhanacchedanādikaṃ;

"And also the physical suffering that is the cutting off
Of the joints and connections of all, and the piercing of the vital spots,"

‘‘Asayhamappaṭikāraṃ, dukkhassetassidaṃ yato;

"Since this suffering is unbearable and without remedy,
Death is its basis; therefore, it is spoken of as suffering." (Vism. 2.543; VibhA. 193; M.A. 5; Patis.mA. 1.1.32-33)

Imasmiñca ṭhāne ‘‘sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsāpi dukkhā’’ti vibhaṅge dukkhasaccaniddese āgataṃ, idha pana taṃ natthi, tatthāpi kāraṇaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ.

In this place, "sorrow, lamentation, pain, grief, and despair are suffering" appear in the analysis of the truth of suffering in the Vibhaṅga, but here they are not found; the reason for that should also be sought.

Appiyehi sampayogo dukkhoti ettha appiyasampayogo nāma amanāpehi sattasaṅkhārehi samodhānaṃ. Sopi dukkhavatthuto dukkho. Tenāhu porāṇā –

Association with the disliked is suffering: here, association with the disliked is the meeting with unpleasant beings and formations. That too is suffering because it is a basis for suffering. Therefore, the ancients said:

‘‘Disvāva appiye dukkhaṃ, paṭhamaṃ hoti cetasi;

"Seeing the disliked, suffering first occurs in the mind;
Then in the body from the arising of its treatment here."

‘‘Tato dukkhadvayassāpi, vatthuto so mahesinā;

"Therefore, the association with the disliked
Is said to be suffering by the Great Sage because it is the basis for both kinds of suffering."

Piyehi vippayogo dukkhoti ettha pana piyavippayogo nāma manāpehi sattasaṅkhārehi vinābhāvo. Sopi sokadukkhassa vatthuto dukkho. Tenāhu porāṇā –

Separation from the liked is suffering: here, separation from the liked is the absence of pleasant beings and formations. That too is suffering because it is the basis for the suffering of sorrow. Therefore, the ancients said:

‘‘Ñātidhanādiviyogā;

"Separation from relatives, wealth, etc.,
Pierces the foolish, afflicted by the darts of sorrow;
Therefore,
Separation from the liked is considered suffering."

Yampicchaṃ na labhatīti ettha ‘‘aho vata mayaṃ na jātidhammā assāmā’’tiādīsu alabbhaneyyavatthūsu icchāva ‘‘yampicchaṃ na labhati, tampi dukkha’’nti vuttā, sāpi dukkhavatthuto dukkhā. Tenāhu porāṇā –

Not getting what one wants: here, the desire for unattainable things, such as "Oh, that we were not subject to birth," etc., is said to be "not getting what one wants is suffering"; that too is suffering because it is a basis for suffering. Therefore, the ancients said:

‘‘Taṃ taṃ patthayamānānaṃ, tassa tassa alābhato;

"The frustration that arises here for beings
From not obtaining that which they desire,"

‘‘Alabbhaneyyavatthūnaṃ, patthanā tassa kāraṇaṃ;

"The desire for unattainable things is its cause;
Therefore, the Conqueror said that the non-obtaining of what is desired is suffering."

Saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhāti ettha pana yasmā indhanamiva pāvako, lakkhamiva paharaṇāni, gorūpaṃ viya ḍaṃsamakasādayo, khettamiva lāyakā, gāmaṃ viya gāmaghātakā, upādānakkhandhapañcakameva jātiādayo nānappakārehi vibādhentā tiṇalatādīni viya bhūmiyaṃ, pupphaphalapallavāni viya rukkhesu upādānakkhandhesuyeva nibbattanti, upādānakkhandhānañca ādidukkhaṃ jāti, majjhedukkhaṃ jarā, pariyosānadukkhaṃ maraṇaṃ, manorathavighātappattānañca icchāvighātadukkhaṃ icchitālābhoti evaṃ nānappakārato upaparikkhiyamānā upādānakkhandhāva dukkhāti yadetaṃ ekamekaṃ dassetvā vuccamānaṃ anekehipi kappehi na sakkā anavasesato vattuṃ, tasmā taṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ ekajalabindumhi sakalasamuddajalarasaṃ viya yesu kesuci pañcupādānakkhandhesu saṅkhipitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti bhagavā avoca. Tenāhu porāṇā –

In brief, the five aggregates subject to clinging are suffering: here, just as fire depends on fuel, blows depend on a target, gnats and mosquitoes depend on cattle, laborers depend on a field, and murderers depend on a village, so too, the five aggregates subject to clinging alone, tormenting in various ways beginning with birth, arise like grass and creepers on the ground, and like flowers, fruits, and leaves on trees, in the aggregates subject to clinging alone. And for the aggregates subject to clinging, birth is suffering at the beginning, old age is suffering in the middle, death is suffering at the end, and the suffering of frustrated wishes for those who have attained frustration, and the non-obtaining of what is desired. Thus, since the aggregates subject to clinging are oppressed in various ways, to show that those aggregates subject to clinging are suffering is something that cannot be completely described even in many eons by describing each one individually. Therefore, the Blessed One said, "In brief, the five aggregates subject to clinging are suffering," in order to condense all that suffering into a few aggregates subject to clinging, like the taste of all the water of the ocean in a single drop of seawater. Therefore, the ancients said:

‘‘Jātippabhutikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ vuttamidha tādinā;

"The suffering beginning with birth, which was said here by the Such One,
And all that which was not said, does not exist without these.

‘‘Yasmā tasmā upādāna-kkhandhā saṅkhepato ime;

Therefore, these aggregates subject to clinging,
In brief, are said to be suffering by the Great Sage, the teacher of the end of suffering."

‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhasamudaya’’ntiādimāha. Tatthasaṃ-iti ayaṃ saddo ‘‘samāgamo sameta’’ntiādīsu saṃyogaṃ dīpeti,u-iti ayaṃ ‘‘uppannaṃ udita’’ntiādīsu uppattiṃ.Aya-saddo pana kāraṇaṃ dīpeti. Idañcāpi dutiyasaccaṃ avasesapaccayasamāyoge sati dukkhassuppattikāraṇanti dukkhassa saṃyoge uppattikāraṇattā ‘‘dukkhasamudaya’’nti vuccati.Yāyaṃ taṇhāti yā ayaṃ taṇhā.Ponobbhavikāti punabbhavakaraṇaṃ punabbhavo uttarapadalopena, punabbhavo sīlametissāti ponobbhavikā. Nandīrāgena sahagatātinandīrāgasahagatā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘nandanato rajjanato ca nandīrāgabhāvaṃ sabbāsu avatthāsu appaccakkhāya vuttiyā nandīrāgasahagatā’’ti.Tatratatrābhinandinīti yatra yatra attabhāvo nibbattati, tatratatrābhinandinī.

"Now this, monks, is the origin of suffering," etc., was said. Here, the prefix saṃ in words like "samāgamo sameta" indicates conjunction; the prefix u in words like "uppannaṃ udita" indicates arising; and the word aya indicates cause. And this second truth is called dukkhasamudaya because it is the cause for the arising of suffering in the presence of the remaining conditions, and because it is the cause for the arising in conjunction with suffering. Yāyaṃ taṇhā: whatever this craving is. Ponobbhavikā: causing renewed existence; renewed existence, with the elision of the latter word; renewed existence is its characteristic; therefore, ponobbhavikā. Nandīrāgasahagatā: accompanied by delight and attachment. This means, "accompanied by delight and attachment because of delighting and being attached, and because of the unobvious persistence in all states." Tatratatrābhinandinī: delighting in each and every existence that is produced.

Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa sā katamāti ceti ayamattho. Rūpataṇhādibhedena chabbidhāyeva taṇhā pavattiākārabhedato kāmataṇhādivasena tividhā vuttā. Rūpataṇhāyeva hi yadā cakkhussa āpāthamāgataṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ kāmassādavasena assādayamānā pavattati, tadākāmataṇhānāma hoti. Yadā tadevārammaṇaṃ dhuvaṃ sassatanti pavattāya sassatadiṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ pavattati, tadābhavataṇhānāma hoti. Sassatadiṭṭhisahagato hi rāgo ‘‘bhavataṇhā’’ti vuccati. Yadā pana tadevārammaṇaṃ ucchijjati vinassatīti pavattāya ucchedadiṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ pavattati, tadāvibhavataṇhānāma hoti. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato hi rāgo ‘‘vibhavataṇhā’’ti vuccati. Esa nayo saddataṇhādīsupi.

Seyyathidaṃ is a particle; its meaning is "that is to say, which is it?" Craving, which is sixfold with the distinctions of craving for forms, etc., is said to be threefold, namely, craving for sensual pleasures, etc., according to the difference in the mode of its activity. For when craving for forms, delighting in the form object that has come into the range of the eye with the taste of sensual pleasure, is active, then it is called kāmataṇhā (craving for sensual pleasures). When that same object is active together with the eternalist view that it is permanent and eternal, then it is called bhavataṇhā (craving for existence). For the lust accompanied by the eternalist view is called "craving for existence." But when that same object is active together with the annihilationist view that it is annihilated and destroyed, then it is called vibhavataṇhā (craving for non-existence). For the lust accompanied by the annihilationist view is called "craving for non-existence." This method applies to craving for sounds, etc., as well.

Kasmā panettha taṇhāva samudayasaccaṃ vuttāti? Visesahetubhāvato. Avijjā hi bhavesu ādīnavaṃ paṭicchādentī diṭṭhiādiupādānañca tattha tattha abhinivisamānaṃ taṇhaṃ abhivaḍḍheti, dosādayopi kammassa kāraṇaṃ honti, taṇhā pana taṃtaṃbhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāāvāsasattanikāyakulabhogissariyādivicittataṃ abhipatthentī kammavicittatāya upanissayataṃ kammassa ca sahāyabhāvaṃ upagacchantī bhavādivicittataṃ niyameti, tasmā dukkhassa visesahetubhāvato aññesupi avijjāupādānakammādīsu sutte abhidhamme ca avasesakilesākusalamūlādīsu vuttesu dukkhahetūsu vijjamānesu taṇhāva ‘‘samudayasacca’’nti vuttāti veditabbaṃ.

But why is craving alone said to be the truth of origin here? Because it is the special cause. For ignorance, concealing the danger in existences and clinging to views, etc., in each and every existence, increases craving. Aversion and the other factors are also causes for action. But craving, desiring the diversity of the various destinies, wombs, courses, consciousness-stations, sentient beings, abodes of sentient beings, communities of sentient beings, families, possessions, lordships, etc., conditions the diversity of action by becoming a support for action and by undertaking the state of being a companion to action, thereby regulating the diversity of existence, etc. Therefore, it should be understood that craving alone is said to be the "truth of origin," although other causes of suffering, such as ignorance, clinging, action, etc., are mentioned in the suttas and Abhidhamma, and although the remaining defilements, unwholesome roots, etc., are present among the causes of suffering.

‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yasmāni-saddo abhāvaṃ,rodha-saddo ca cārakaṃ dīpeti, tasmā abhāvo ettha saṃsāracārakasaṅkhātassa dukkharodhassa sabbagatisuññattā, samadhigate vā tasmiṃ saṃsāracārakasaṅkhātassa dukkharodhassa abhāvo hoti tappaṭipakkhattātipi ‘‘dukkhanirodha’’nti vuccati. Dukkhassa vā anuppādanirodhapaccayattādukkhanirodhaṃ. Dukkhanirodhaṃ dassentena cettha‘‘yo tassāyeva taṇhāyā’’tiādinā nayena samudayanirodho vutto, so kasmā vuttoti ce? Samudayanirodhena dukkhanirodho. Byādhinimittavūpasamena byādhivūpasamo viya hi hetunirodhena phalanirodho, tasmā samudayanirodheneva dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, na aññathā. Tenāha –

"Now this, monks, is the cessation of suffering," etc., was said. Here, since the prefix ni indicates absence and the word rodha indicates roaming, therefore absence here is the cessation of suffering consisting of roaming in saṃsāra, because it is empty of all destinies, or when that is attained, the cessation of suffering consisting of roaming in saṃsāra is the absence because it is the opposite of that; therefore, it is called dukkhanirodha. Or, because it is the condition for the non-arising and cessation of suffering, it is dukkhanirodhaṃ. Here, the cessation of origin has been stated in the manner of "the remainderless fading away and cessation of that very craving," etc., by showing the cessation of suffering. Why is that stated? Suffering ceases with the cessation of origin. Just as the alleviation of disease occurs with the alleviation of the cause of the disease, so too, the cessation of the result occurs with the cessation of the cause. Therefore, suffering ceases only with the cessation of origin, not otherwise. Therefore, it was said:

‘‘Yathāpi mūle anupaddave daḷhe;

"Even though a tree is cut down, if its root remains undamaged and strong,
It grows again; likewise, if craving is not uprooted,
This suffering arises again and again." (Dhp. 338)

Iti yasmā samudayanirodheneva dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, tasmā bhagavā dukkhanirodhaṃ dassento samudayanirodhena desesi. Sīhasamānavuttino hi tathāgatā. Te dukkhaṃ nirodhentā dukkhanirodhañca desentā hetumhi paṭipajjanti, na phale. Yathā hi sīho yenattani saro khitto, tattheva attano balaṃ dasseti, na sare, tathā buddhānaṃ kāraṇe paṭipatti, na phale. Titthiyā pana suvānavuttino. Te dukkhaṃ nirodhentā dukkhanirodhañca desentā attakilamathānuyogadesanādīhi phale paṭipajjanti, na hetumhi. Yathā hi sunakhā kenaci leḍḍuppahāre dinne bhussantā leḍḍuṃ khādanti, na pahāradāyake uṭṭhahanti, evaṃ aññatitthiyā dukkhaṃ nirodhetukāmā kāyakhedamanuyujjanti, na kilesanirodhanaṃ, evaṃ tāva dukkhanirodhassa samudayanirodhavasena desanāya payojanaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Thus, since suffering ceases only with the cessation of origin, therefore the Blessed One, showing the cessation of suffering, taught by way of the cessation of origin. For the Tathāgatas are of lion-like behavior. They, when ceasing suffering and teaching the cessation of suffering, act on the cause, not on the result. Just as a lion shows its strength in the very place where a dart has been thrown at its body, not on the dart, so too, the Buddhas act on the cause, not on the result. But the sectarians are of jackal-like behavior. They, when ceasing suffering and teaching the cessation of suffering, act on the result, not on the cause, by means of teachings on self-mortification, etc. Just as dogs, when struck by someone throwing a clod of dirt, bark and bite the clod of dirt, but do not rise up against the thrower, so too, other sectarians, desiring to cease suffering, practice bodily mortification, not the cessation of defilements. Thus, the purpose of teaching the cessation of suffering by way of the cessation of origin should be understood.

Tassāyeva taṇhāyāti tassā ‘‘ponobbhavikā’’ti vatvā kāmataṇhādivasena vibhattataṇhāya. Virāgo vuccati maggo. ‘‘Virāgā vimuccatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.245; saṃ. ni. 3.12, 59) hi vuttaṃ. Virāgena nirodho virāganirodho, anusayasamugghātato aseso virāganirodhoasesavirāganirodho. Atha vā virāgoti pahānaṃ vuccati, tasmā anusayasamugghātato aseso virāgo aseso nirodhoti evampettha yojanā daṭṭhabbā, atthato pana sabbāneva etāni nibbānassa vevacanāni. Paramatthato hi dukkhanirodho ariyasaccanti nibbānaṃ vuccati. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma taṇhā virajjati ceva nirujjhati ca, tasmā ‘‘virāgo’’ti ca ‘‘nirodho’’ti ca vuccati. Yasmā ca tadeva āgamma tassā cāgādayo honti, kāmaguṇālayādīsu cettha ekopi ālayo natthi, tasmācāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayoti vuccati.

Tassāyeva taṇhāyā means that same craving, having said "leading to renewed existence," and the craving that is distinguished as craving for sensual pleasures, etc. Virāgo means the path. For it is said, "Through detachment, one is liberated" (M.N. 1.245; S.N. 3.12, 59). Virāga-nirodho is the cessation through detachment, and asesavirāganirodho is the complete cessation of detachment through the eradication of underlying tendencies. Or, virāga means abandonment; therefore, it should be understood that the complete detachment from the eradication of underlying tendencies is complete cessation in this context. However, in terms of meaning, all these are synonyms for Nibbāna. In the ultimate sense, Nibbāna is called the noble truth of the cessation of suffering. But since craving is both detached from and ceases by relying on it, therefore it is called "detachment" (virāga) and "cessation" (nirodho). And since abandonment, etc., occur by relying on that same thing, and there is not even one attachment here in objects of sensual pleasure, etc., therefore it is called abandonment (cāgo), relinquishment (paṭinissaggo), liberation (mutti), non-attachment (anālayo).

‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhagāminī’’tiādimāha. Yasmā panetaṃ ariyasaccaṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchati ārammaṇavasaena tadabhimukhabhūtattā, paṭipadā ca hoti dukkhanirodhappattiyā, tasmā ‘‘dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Sesamettha vuttanayameva. Ko pana nesaṃ dukkhādīnaṃ saccaṭṭhoti? Yo paññācakkhunā upaparikkhiyamānānaṃ māyāva viparīto, marīciva visaṃvādako, titthiyānaṃ attā viya anupalabbhasabhāvo ca na hoti, atha kho bādhanappabhavasantiniyyānappakārena tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvena ariyañāṇassa gocaro hotiyeva, esa aggilakkhaṇaṃ viya lokapakati viya ca tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvo saccaṭṭhoti veditabbo. Ettha ca aggilakkhaṇaṃ nāma uṇhattaṃ. Tañhi katthaci kaṭṭhādiupādānabhede visaṃvādakaṃ viparītaṃ abhūtaṃ vā kadācipi na hoti, ‘‘jātidhammā jarādhammā, atho maraṇadhammino’’ti (a. ni. 5.57) evaṃ vuttajātiādikā lokapakatīti veditabbā. ‘‘Ekaccānaṃ tiracchānānaṃ tiriyaṃ dīghatā, manussādīnaṃ uddhaṃ dīghatā, vuddhiniṭṭhappattānaṃ puna avaḍḍhananti evamādikā ca lokapakatī’’ti vadanti.

‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhagāminī’’tiādiṃ āha. Because this noble truth leads to the cessation of suffering, due to being directed towards it as an object, and because the path is for the attainment of the cessation of suffering, therefore it is called "the path leading to the cessation of suffering." The rest is as has already been said. But what is the meaning of truth (saccaṭṭho) regarding these sufferings, etc.? It is not like an illusion that is contrary when examined with the eye of wisdom, nor is it deceptive like a mirage, nor does it have an unperceivable nature like the self (attā) of the sectarians; but rather, it is indeed the object of noble knowledge in the manner of oppressing, originating, leading out, and being truly not contrary. This true, non-contrary nature should be understood as the characteristic of fire, like the nature of the world. Here, the characteristic of fire is heat. For that is never deceptive, contrary, or untrue in any difference of supporting materials such as wood, etc. The world nature should be understood as the birth, etc., that is said as "subject to birth, subject to aging, and subject to death" (A.N. 5.57). They say that the nature of the world is also such things as "some animals are long horizontally, humans and others are long vertically, and there is no further growth for those who have reached the completion of growth."

Apica –

Moreover—

Nābādhakaṃ yato dukkhaṃ, dukkhā aññaṃ na bādhakaṃ;

Because suffering does not harm, and nothing other than suffering harms;
Due to the fixed nature of harming, therefore this is considered truth.

Taṃ vinā nāññato dukkhaṃ, na hoti na ca taṃ tato;

Without that, suffering does not arise from anything else, nor is that from it;
Due to the fixed nature of the cause of suffering, thus the truth is distinct.

Nāññā nibbānato santi, santaṃ na ca na taṃ yato;

There is no peace other than Nibbāna, nor is there no peace from it;
Due to the fixed nature of peace, therefore this is considered truth.

Maggā aññaṃ na niyyānaṃ, aniyyāno na cāpi so;

There is no escape other than the path, nor is there no escape from it;
Because of the true nature of escape, thus it is regarded as truth.

Iti tacchāvipallāsa-bhūtabhāvaṃ catūsupi;

Thus, in all four,
Suffering, etc., without distinction, the wise say the meaning of truth is true, non-perverted reality.(Vibha. Aṭṭha. 189);

15.Pubbe ananussutesūti ito pubbe ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā na anussutesu assutapubbesu catusaccadhammesu.Cakkhuntiādīni ñāṇavevacanāneva. Ñāṇameva hettha paccakkhato dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu viyāticakkhu,ñāṇaṭṭhenañāṇaṃ,pakārato jānanaṭṭhenapaññā,paṭivijjhanaṭṭhenavijjā,saccappaṭicchādakassa mohandhakārassa vidhamanato obhāsanaṭṭhenaālokoti vuttaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ catūsu saccesu lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ niddiṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ.

15.Pubbe ananussutesū means in the four noble truths that have not been reflected upon before, that have not been heard previously, with "idaṃ dukkha," etc. before this. Cakkhu etc. are merely synonyms for knowledge (ñāṇa). Here, knowledge itself is called cakkhu (eye) because it is like an eye in the sense of directly seeing, ñāṇaṃ (knowledge) in the sense of knowing, paññā (wisdom) in the sense of knowing in a specific way, vijjā (clear knowledge) in the sense of penetrating, and āloko (light) in the sense of illuminating because it dispels the darkness of ignorance that conceals the truth. However, it should be understood that this is spoken of as a mixture of mundane and supramundane in the four truths.

16.Yāvakīvañcāti yattakaṃ kālaṃ.Tiparivaṭṭanti saccañāṇakiccañāṇakatañāṇasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ parivaṭṭānaṃ vasena tiparivaṭṭaṃ. Saccañāṇādivasena hi tayo parivaṭṭā etassāti tiparivaṭṭanti vuccati ñāṇadassanaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, idaṃ dukkhasamudaya’’nti evaṃ catūsu saccesu yathābhūtañāṇaṃsaccañāṇaṃnāma. Tesuyeva ‘‘pariññeyyaṃ pahātabbaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ bhāvetabba’’nti evaṃ kattabbakiccajānanañāṇaṃkiccañāṇaṃnāma. ‘‘Pariññātaṃ pahīnaṃ sacchikataṃ bhāvita’’nti evaṃ tassa katabhāvajānanañāṇaṃkatañāṇaṃnāma.Dvādasākāranti tesaṃyeva ekekasmiṃ sacce tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena dvādasākāraṃ.Ñāṇadassananti etesaṃ tiparivaṭṭānaṃ dvādasannaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena uppannañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ dassanaṃ.

16.Yāvakīvañcā means for as long as. Tiparivaṭṭa means three rounds (parivaṭṭa) based on the three rounds called knowledge of the truth (saccañāṇa), knowledge of the task (kiccañāṇa), and knowledge of having done (katañāṇa). For the knowledge-vision (ñāṇadassana) is called tiparivaṭṭa because it has three rounds in terms of knowledge of the truth, etc. Here, saccañāṇaṃ (knowledge of the truth) is the knowledge of things as they are in the four truths, such as "this is the noble truth of suffering, this is the origin of suffering." Kiccañāṇaṃ (knowledge of the task) is the knowledge of knowing what must be done in them, such as "it should be fully understood, it should be abandoned, it should be realized, it should be developed." Katañāṇaṃ (knowledge of having done) is the knowledge of knowing that it has been done, such as "it has been fully understood, it has been abandoned, it has been realized, it has been developed." Dvādasākāra means twelve aspects based on the three aspects in each of those truths. Ñāṇadassana means the vision consisting of knowledge that has arisen in terms of the three rounds and twelve aspects.

Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti uttaravirahitaṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ sammā sāmañca bodhiṃ. Atha vā pasatthaṃ sundarañca bodhiṃ.Bodhīti ca bhagavato arahattamaggo idhādhippeto. Sāvakānaṃ arahattamaggo anuttarā bodhi hoti, na hotīti? Na hoti. Kasmā? Asabbaguṇadāyakattā. Tesañhi kassaci arahattamaggo arahattaphalameva deti, kassaci tisso vijjā, kassaci cha abhiññā, kassaci catasso paṭisambhidā, kassaci sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ. Paccekabuddhānampi paccekabodhiñāṇameva deti, buddhānaṃ pana sabbaguṇasampattiṃ deti abhiseko viya rañño sabbalokissariyabhāvaṃ. Tasmā aññassa kassacipi anuttarā bodhi na hotīti.Abhisambuddhoti paccaññāsinti abhisambuddho ahaṃ patto paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitoti evaṃ paṭijāniṃ.Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādīti adhigataguṇānaṃ yāthāvato dassanasamatthaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇañca pana me udapādi.Akuppā me vimuttīti ayaṃ mayhaṃ arahattaphalavimutti akuppā paṭipakkhehi na kopetabbāti evaṃ ñāṇaṃ udapādi. Tattha dvīhākārehi akuppatā veditabbā maggasaṅkhātakāraṇato ca ārammaṇato ca. Sā hi catūhi maggehi samucchinnakilesānaṃ puna anivattanatāyakāraṇatopiakuppā, akuppadhammaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattatāyaārammaṇatopiakuppā anākuppārammaṇānaṃ lokiyasamāpattīnaṃ tadabhāvato.Antimāti pacchimā.Natthi dāni punabbhavoti idāni puna añño bhavo nāma natthīti.

Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhi means the unsurpassed, most excellent, complete and perfect enlightenment (bodhi). Or, it means praiseworthy and beautiful enlightenment. And here, bodhi is intended to mean the path of arahantship of the Buddha. Is the path of arahantship of the disciples unsurpassed enlightenment or not? It is not. Why? Because it does not bestow all qualities. For the path of arahantship of some only gives the fruit of arahantship, for some, the three knowledges (tisso vijjā), for some, the six higher knowledges (cha abhiññā), for some, the four discriminations (catasso paṭisambhidā), and for some, the knowledge of the disciple's perfections (sāvakapāramīñāṇa). For the Paccekabuddhas too, it only gives the knowledge of a Paccekabuddha, but for the Buddhas, it gives the accomplishment of all qualities, like an anointing that gives a king the state of sovereignty over the entire world. Therefore, the unsurpassed enlightenment does not occur for anyone else. Abhisambuddhoti paccaññāsi means I declared, "I am fully enlightened, attained, and established after penetrating." Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādī means reflective knowledge (paccavekkhaṇañāṇa) also arose in me, which is capable of seeing the qualities that have been attained as they actually are. Akuppā me vimuttī means this liberation of the fruit of arahantship of mine is unshakeable, not to be shaken by adversaries; thus knowledge arose. Here, unshakeability should be understood in two ways: from the cause consisting of the path, and from the object. For because the defilements are eradicated by the four paths and do not return again, it is unshakeable from the perspective of the cause, and because it occurs having Nibbāna, the unshakeable state, as its object, it is unshakeable from the perspective of the object, since the mundane attainments (lokiyasamāpatti) have no unshakeable object. Antimā means final. Natthi dāni punabbhavo means now there is no further existence.

Imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasminti imasmiṃ niggāthake sutte. Niggāthakañhi suttaṃ pucchāvissajjanasahitaṃ ‘‘veyyākaraṇa’’nti vuccati.Bhaññamāneti bhaṇiyamāne, desiyamāneti attho.Virajanti apāyagamanīyarāgarajādīnaṃ vigamena virajaṃ.Vītamalanti anavasesadiṭṭhivicikicchāmalāpagamena vītamalaṃ. Paṭhamamaggavajjhakilesarajābhāvena vāvirajaṃ,pañcavidhadussīlyamalāpagamenavītamalaṃ. Dhammacakkhuntibrahmāyusutte(ma. ni. 2.383 ādayo) heṭṭhimā tayo maggā vuttā,cūḷarāhulovāde(ma. ni. 3.416 ādayo) āsavakkhayo, idha pana sotāpattimaggo adhippeto. Catusaccasaṅkhātesu dhammesu tesaṃ dassanaṭṭhena cakkhūtidhammacakkhu,heṭṭhimesu vā tīsu maggadhammesu ekaṃ sotāpattimaggasaṅkhātaṃ cakkhūtidhammacakkhu,samathavipassanādhammanibbattatāya sīlāditividhadhammakkhandhabhūtatāya vā dhammamayaṃ cakkhūtipidhammacakkhu,tassa uppattiākāradassanatthaṃ‘‘yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti āha. Nanu ca maggañāṇaṃ asaṅkhatadhammārammaṇaṃ, na saṅkhatadhammārammaṇanti? Saccametaṃ, yasmā taṃ nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccavasena sabbasaṅkhataṃ asammohappaṭivedhavasena paṭivijjhantaṃ uppajjati, tasmā tathā vuttaṃ.

Imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasmi means in this statement, in this Sutta in prose and verse. For a Sutta in prose and verse, which includes questions and answers, is called "veyyākaraṇa" (exposition). Bhaññamāne means while being spoken, meaning while being taught. Viraja means without dust, due to the removal of the dust of passion, etc., that leads to the lower realms. Vītamala means without stain, due to the removal of the remaining stains of wrong view and doubt. Or, viraja because of the absence of the dust of defilements that are destroyed by the first path, vītamala because of the removal of the five kinds of immoral conduct. Dhammacakkhu (eye of the Dhamma): in the Brahmāyu Sutta (M.N. 2.383 ff.) the lower three paths are mentioned, in the Cūḷarāhulovāda Sutta (M.N. 3.416 ff.) the destruction of the āsavas is mentioned, but here, the Sotāpatti path is intended. Dhammacakkhu means the eye in the sense of seeing them, in the dhammas consisting of the four truths, or dhammacakkhu is the eye consisting of the Sotāpatti path, one of the lower three path-dhammas, or also dhammacakkhu because it is born from the Dhamma of serenity and insight, or because it is a collection of the threefold Dhamma of morality, etc. To show the way in which it arises, he said, ‘‘yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’ ("Whatever is of the nature to arise, all that is of the nature to cease"). But is not the knowledge of the path (maggañāṇa) that has the unconditioned Dhamma as its object, and not the conditioned Dhamma as its object? This is true, but because it arises penetrating all conditioned things in terms of its function, without confusion, having cessation as its object, therefore it is said thus.

17.Dhammacakketi paṭivedhañāṇañceva desanāñāṇañca pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ. Bodhipallaṅke nisinnassa hi catūsu saccesu uppannaṃ dvādasākāraṃ paṭivedhañāṇampi, isipatane nisinnassa dvādasākārāya saccadesanāya pavattakaṃ desanāñāṇampi dhammacakkaṃ nāma. Ubhayampi hetaṃ dasabalassa ure pavattañāṇameva. Tadubhayaṃ imāya desanāya pakāsentena bhagavatā dhammacakkaṃ pavattitaṃ nāma. Taṃ panetaṃ dhammacakkaṃ yāva aññāsikoṇḍaññatthero aṭṭhārasahi brahmakoṭīhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāti, tāva bhagavāpavattetināma pavattanakiccassa aniṭṭhitattā. Patiṭṭhitepavattitaṃnāma kassapasammāsambuddhassa sāsanantaradhānato paṭṭhāya yāva buddhuppādo, ettakaṃ kālaṃ appavattapubbassa pavattitattā. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘pavattite ca pana bhagavatā dhammacakke bhummā devā saddamanussāvesu’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthabhummāti bhūmaṭṭhakadevatā.Saddamanussāvesunti ekappahāreneva sādhukāraṃ datvā ‘‘etaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādīni vadantā anussāvayiṃsu.Obhāsoti sabbaññutaññāṇānubhāvena pavatto cittapaccayautusamuṭṭhāno obhāso. So hi tadā devānaṃ devānubhāvaṃ atikkamitvā virocittha.Aññāsi vata bho koṇḍaññoti imassapi udānassa udāharaṇaghoso dasasahassilokadhātuṃ pharitvā aṭṭhāsi. Bhagavato hi dhammacakkappavattanassa ārambhe viya parisamāpanepi ativiya uḷāratamaṃ pītisomanassaṃ udapādi.

17.Dhammacakke means the wheel of the Dhamma (dhammacakka), because both the knowledge of penetration and the knowledge of teaching cause it to roll on. For the knowledge of penetration with twelve aspects that arose in the four truths for the one seated on the Bodhi-platform, and the knowledge of teaching that causes the teaching of the truth with twelve aspects to roll on for the one seated at Isipatana, are both called the wheel of the Dhamma. Both of these are merely the knowledge that arose in the breast of the one with the ten powers. By the Blessed One revealing that both of these in this discourse, the wheel of the Dhamma is said to have been set in motion. But this wheel of the Dhamma, until the venerable Aññāsikoṇḍañña is established in the fruit of Sotāpatti along with eighteen crores of Brahmas, the Blessed One is said to be setting it in motion (pavatteti), because the function of setting it in motion is not yet completed. Once established, it is said to have been set in motion (pavattitaṃ), because it was set in motion after such a long time, from the disappearance of the dispensation of Kassapa, the Perfectly Enlightened One, until the arising of a Buddha, which had never been set in motion before. Referring to that, it was said, "When the wheel of the Dhamma was set in motion by the Blessed One, the earth deities made the sound heard," etc. Here, bhummā means deities abiding on the earth. Saddamanussāvesu means having given approval in one utterance, they made it known, saying "This is the Blessed One," etc. Obhāso means the radiance that arose due to the power of the knowledge of omniscience, which is born of mind-conditioning and climate. For at that time, it shone surpassing the divine power of the gods. Aññāsi vata bho koṇḍañño (Koṇḍañño has indeed understood!): the sound of this exclamation also filled the ten thousand world-systems. For at the beginning of the Blessed One's setting the wheel of the Dhamma in motion, as at the conclusion, an exceedingly great joy and gladness arose.

18.Diṭṭho ariyasaccadhammo etenātidiṭṭhadhammo. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Ettha ca dassanaṃ nāma ñāṇadassanato aññampi atthīti taṃnivattanatthaṃ‘‘pattadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Patti ca ñāṇasampattito aññāpi vijjatīti tato visesanatthaṃ‘‘viditadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā panesā viditadhammatā ekadesatopi hotīti nippadesato viditabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pariyogāḷhadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenassa saccābhisambodhiṃyeva dīpeti. Maggañāṇañhi ekābhisamayavasena pariññādikiccaṃ sādhentaṃ nippadesena catusaccadhammaṃ samantato ogāḷhaṃ nāma hoti. Sappaṭibhayakantārasadisā soḷasavatthukā aṭṭhavatthukā ca tiṇṇā vicikicchā anenātitiṇṇavicikiccho. Pavattiādīsu ‘‘evaṃ nukho na nukho’’ti evaṃ pavattikā vigatā samucchinnā kathaṃkathā assātivigatakathaṃkatho. Vesārajjappattoti sārajjakarānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ pahīnattā tappaṭipakkhesu ca sīlādīsu guṇesu suppatiṭṭhitattā visāradabhāvaṃ veyyattiyaṃ patto adhigato. Svāyaṃ vesārajjappattisuppatiṭṭhitabhāvo katthāti āha‘‘satthusāsane’’ti. Attanā paccakkhato adhigatattā na paraṃ pacceti, parassa saddhāya ettha nappavattati, na tassa paro paccetabbo atthītiaparappaccayo.

18.Diṭṭho ariyasaccadhammo etenāti diṭṭhadhammo means one who has seen the noble truth of the Dhamma through this. This is the method for the remaining terms as well. And here, to prevent the idea that there is seeing other than seeing with knowledge, it is said ‘‘pattadhammo’’ (one who has attained the Dhamma). And to distinguish from the attainment that exists apart from the attainment of knowledge, it is said ‘‘viditadhammo’’ (one who has known the Dhamma). And since that knowing of the Dhamma can also be partial, to show the state of knowing without remainder, it is said ‘‘pariyogāḷhadhammo’’ (one who has thoroughly penetrated the Dhamma). By that, it indicates his complete enlightenment to the truth. For the path-knowledge, while accomplishing the task of full understanding, etc., in terms of a single penetration, is said to have thoroughly penetrated the four truths from all sides without remainder. Tiṇṇavicikiccho means one who has crossed over the three kinds of doubt, which are sixteen-based and eight-based, similar to a terrifying wilderness. Vigatakathaṃkatho means one who has eliminated doubt, for whom questioning, which is "is it thus or not thus" in regard to arising, etc., is gone, eradicated. Vesārajjappatto means one who has attained confidence (vesārajja), having reached distinction due to the abandonment of evil dhammas that cause agitation (sārajja) and being well-established in the opposing qualities of morality, etc. He asks, "Where is this attainment of confidence and state of being well-established?" ‘‘satthusāsane’’ (in the teacher's teaching). Because he has directly attained it himself, he does not rely on another, he does not engage here based on another's faith, and there is no need for another to make him believe; therefore, he is aparappaccayo (not relying on others).

Labheyyāhanti labheyyaṃ ahaṃ, āyācanavacanametaṃ.Ehīti āyācitānaṃ pabbajjūpasampadānaṃ anumatabhāvappakāsanavacanaṃ, tasmā ehi sampaṭicchāhi yathāyācitaṃ pabbajjūpasampadavisesanti attho.Iti-saddo tassa ehibhikkhūpasampadāpaṭilābhanimittavacanapariyosānadassano. Tadavasāno hi tassa bhikkhubhāvo. Tenevāha‘‘ehi bhikkhūti bhagavato vacanena abhinipphannā sāva tassa āyasmato ehibhikkhūpasampadā ahosī’’ti.Cara brahmacariyanti uparimaggattayasaṅkhātaṃ brahmacariyaṃ samadhigaccha. Kimatthaṃ?Sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāya. Idhāpi ‘‘avocā’’ti sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Nava koṭisahassānī’’tiādinā (visuddhi. 1.20; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.37) vuttappabhedānaṃ anekasahassānaṃ saṃvaravinayānaṃ samādiyitvā vattanena uparibhūtā aggabhūtā sampadātiupasampadā.

Labheyyāha means "may I obtain," this is a word of request. Ehī (Come!) is a word expressing approval for the requested going forth (pabbajjā) and higher ordination (upasampadā); therefore, it means "come, accept the specific going forth and higher ordination as requested." The word Iti shows the end of the statement indicating the obtaining of the going forth as a bhikkhu in "Come, bhikkhu!" For his state of being a bhikkhu ends there. Therefore he said, ‘‘ehi bhikkhūti bhagavato vacanena abhinipphannā sāva tassa āyasmato ehibhikkhūpasampadā ahosī’’ (that going forth as a bhikkhu, born from the Blessed One's words, "Come, bhikkhu!" was the venerable one's ehibhikkhūpasampadā). Cara brahmacariya (Live the holy life) means attain the holy life consisting of the three higher paths. For what purpose? Sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāya (For the complete ending of suffering). Here too, "avocā" should be connected. Upasampadā means the superior, highest accomplishment due to living in accordance with the various thousands of restraints that have been described beginning with "nine crore thousands" (Visuddhi. 1.20; Paṭi. Ma. Aṭṭha. 1.1.37).

19.Nīhārabhattoti nīhaṭabhatto, gāmato bhikkhaṃ nīharitvā bhikkhūhi dinnabhattoti attho. Bhagavā hi daharakumārake viya te bhikkhū pariharanto pāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya piṇḍapātatthāyapi gāmaṃ apavisitvā antovihāreyeva vasi.

19.Nīhārabhatto means food that has been brought out, meaning food that has been brought out from the village as alms and given by the bhikkhus. For the Blessed One, caring for those bhikkhus like young boys, resided within the monastery from the first day onwards without even entering the village for alms.

Dhammacakkappavattanasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Dhammacakkappavattana Sutta is finished.

Anattalakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
The Commentary on the Anattalakkhaṇa Sutta

20.Āmantesīti āsāḷhīpuṇṇamadivase dhammacakkappavattanato paṭṭhāya anukkamena sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhite aññāsikoṇḍaññappamukhe pañcavaggiye ‘‘idāni tesaṃ āsavakkhayāya dhammaṃ desessāmī’’ti pañcamiyā pakkhassa āmantesi.Anattāti avasavattanaṭṭhena asāmikaṭṭhena suññataṭṭhena attapaṭikkhepaṭṭhenāti evaṃ catūhi kāraṇehi anattā. Tattha ‘‘uppannaṃ rūpaṃ ṭhitiṃ mā pāpuṇātu, ṭhānappattaṃ mā jīratu, jarappattaṃ mā bhijjatu, udayabbayehi mā kilamayatū’’ti na ettha kassaci vasībhāvo atthi, svāyamassaavasavattanaṭṭho. Sāmibhūtassa kassaci abhāvoasāmikaṭṭho. Nivāsīkārakavedakaadhiṭṭhāyakavirahena tato suññatāsuññataṭṭho. Paraparikappitaattasabhāvābhāvo evaattapaṭikkhepaṭṭho. Idāni anattataṃyeva vibhāvetuṃ‘‘rūpañca hidaṃ bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tatthaattā abhavissāti kārako vedako sayaṃvasīti evaṃbhūto attā abhavissāti adhippāyo. Evañhi sati rūpassa ābādhāya saṃvattanaṃ ayujjamānakaṃ siyā. Kāmañcettha ‘‘yasmā ca kho, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ anattā, tasmā rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvattatī’’ti rūpassa anattatāya dukkhatā vibhāvitā viya dissati, tathāpi ‘‘yasmā rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvattati, tasmā anattā’’ti pākaṭāya sābādhatāya rūpassa attasārābhāvo vibhāvito, tato eva ca ‘‘na ca labbhati rūpe ‘evaṃ me rūpaṃ hotu, evaṃ me rūpaṃ mā ahosī’ti’’ rūpe kassaci anissaratā tassa ca avasavattanākāro dassito.Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.

20. Āmantesīti: "He addressed." On the full-moon day of Āsāḷhi, starting from the turning of the Wheel of the Dhamma, he addressed the group of five monks, with Aññāsikoṇḍañña as the foremost, who had gradually become established in the fruit of stream-entry, on the fifth day of the fortnight, thinking, "Now I will teach the Dhamma for the destruction of their āsavas (cravings)." Anattā: "Not-self," is not-self because of the meaning of not being under one’s control (avasavattanaṭṭha), the meaning of not having an owner (asāmikaṭṭha), the meaning of emptiness (suññataṭṭha), and the meaning of rejecting a self (attapaṭikkhepaṭṭha).

21.Taṃ kiṃmaññatha bhikkhaveti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ? Ettakena ṭhānena anattalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ, na aniccadukkhalakkhaṇāni, idāni tāni dassetvā samodhānetvā tīṇipi lakkhaṇāni dassetuṃ idamāraddhanti veditabbaṃ.Aniccaṃ bhanteti bhante yasmā hutvā na hoti, tasmā aniccaṃ. Yasmā pubbe asantaṃ paccayasamavāyena hutvā uppajjitvā puna bhaṅgupagamanena na hoti, tasmā na niccanti aniccaṃ, addhuvanti adhippāyo. Atha vā uppādavayavantatāya tāvakālikatāya vipariṇāmakoṭiyā niccappaṭikkhepatoti imehipi kāraṇehianiccaṃ. Ettha khaṇe khaṇe uppajjanavasena nirujjhanavasena ca pavattanatouppādavayavantatā. Taṅkhaṇikatāyatāvakālikatā. Vipariṇāmavantatāyavipariṇāmakoṭi. Rūpañhi uppādādivikārāpajjanena vipariṇāmantaṃ vināsaṃ pāpuṇāti. Niccasabhāvābhāvo evaniccapaṭikkhepo. Aniccā hi dhammā, teneva attano aniccabhāvena atthato niccataṃ paṭikkhipanti nāma.

Herein, there is no one who has mastery over the arising form, that it does not attain duration, or having attained duration, that it does not decay, or having decayed, that it does not break up, or that it does not become weary with arising and passing away. Thus, this is the meaning of not being under one’s control. The absence of anyone as an owner is the meaning of not having an owner. Emptiness of it due to the lack of a maker, feeler, or controller, is the meaning of emptiness. The very absence of a self-nature imagined by others is the meaning of rejecting a self. Now, to explain the not-self nature itself, he said, "rūpañca hidaṃ bhikkhave" (And this form, monks), etc. Here, attā abhavissā: "If there were a self," means if there were a self that is a doer, a feeler, and self-governing. If this were so, it would be inconsistent for form to lead to affliction. Although here it appears that the painfulness (dukkhatā) of form is explained by its being not-self, "Because, monks, form is not-self, therefore form leads to affliction," nevertheless, the absence of a self-essence in form is explained by its obvious afflictiveness, so that "It is not to be gotten in form: ‘Let my form be thus, let my form not be thus,’" the lack of mastery over form and its nature of not being under one's control is shown. The same method applies to vedanā (feeling), etc.

Dukkhaṃ bhanteti bhante paṭipīḷanākārena dukkhaṃ. Uppādajarābhaṅgavasena hi rūpassa nirantaraṃ bādhati, paṭipīḷanākārenassa dukkhatā. Atha vā santāpaṭṭhena dukkhamaṭṭhena dukkhavatthukaṭṭhena sukhapaṭikkhepaṭṭhena cāti catūhi kāraṇehi dukkhaṃ. Ettha casantāponāma dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ. Tato evassa dussahatāyadukkhamatā. Tissannaṃ dukkhatānaṃ saṃsāradukkhassa ca adhiṭṭhānatāyadukkhavatthukatā. Sukhasabhāvābhāvo evasukhapaṭikkhepo. Vipariṇāmadhammanti jarāya maraṇena ca vipariṇāmasabhāvaṃ.Kallaṃ nūti yuttaṃ nu.Tanti evaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ rūpaṃ.Etaṃ mamāti taṇhāgāho mamaṅkārabhāvato.Esohamasmīti mānagāho ahaṅkārabhāvato.Eso me attāti diṭṭhigāho attabhāvavipallāsaggāhato.Taṇhāgāhocettha aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritavasena,mānagāhonavavidhamānavasena,diṭṭhigāhodvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhivasena veditabbo. Imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhigāhānaṃ vasena yuttaṃ nu taṃ samanupassitunti vuttaṃ hoti.

Dukkhaṃ bhante: "Suffering, venerable sir," venerable sir, it is suffering in the way of oppressing. For form constantly afflicts by way of arising, aging, and breaking up, and its nature is suffering in the way of oppressing. Or else, it is suffering by four reasons: by the meaning of torment (santāpaṭṭha), the meaning of painfulness (dukkhaṭṭha), the meaning of being a basis for suffering (dukkhavatthukaṭṭha), and the meaning of rejecting happiness (sukhapaṭikkhepaṭṭha). Here, torment is the tormenting and burning up in terms of painful suffering, etc. From that very torment, its state of being hard to bear is painfulness. Being the basis for the three kinds of suffering and for the suffering of saṃsāra is being a basis for suffering. The very absence of a happy nature is rejection of happiness. Vipariṇāmadhamma: "Subject to change," means having a nature of changing due to aging and death. Kallaṃ nū: "Is it fitting?" Taṃ: "That" form which is thus impermanent, suffering, and subject to change. Etaṃ mamā: "This is mine," is grasping with craving (taṇhāgāho) from the sense of "mineness" (mamaṅkārabhāvato). Esohamasmī: "This am I," is grasping with conceit (mānagāho) from the sense of "I-making" (ahaṅkārabhāvato). Eso me attā: "This is my self," is grasping with views (diṭṭhigāho) from the perverted grasping of a self (attabhāvavipallāsaggāhato). Here, grasping with craving should be understood as operating through the eight hundred cravings; grasping with conceit as operating through the nine kinds of conceit; grasping with views as operating through the sixty-two views. In terms of these three kinds of grasping—craving, conceit, and views—it is said, "Is it fitting to regard that thus?"

chachakkasutte(ma. ni. 3.422) aniccavasena anattataṃ dassesi. ‘‘Rūpañca hidaṃ, bhikkhave, attā abhavissa…pe… evaṃ me rūpaṃ mā ahosī’’ti imasmiṃyeva anattalakkhaṇasutte dukkhavasena anattataṃ dassesi. ‘‘Rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ, yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā, yadanattā, taṃ ‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na me so attā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabba’’nti imasmiṃarahantasutte(saṃ. ni. 3.76-77) ubhayavasena anattataṃ dassesi. Kasmā? Aniccaṃ dukkhañca pākaṭaṃ, anattā apākaṭaṃ. Paribhogabhājanādīsu hi bhinnesu ‘‘aho anicca’’nti vadanti, ‘‘aho anattā’’ti pana vattā nāma natthi. Sarīre gaṇḍapiḷakāsu vā uṭṭhitāsu kaṇṭakena vā viddhā ‘‘aho dukkha’’nti vadanti, ‘‘aho anattā’’ti pana vattā nāma natthi. Kasmā? Idañhi anattalakkhaṇaṃ nāma avibhūtaṃ duddasaṃ duppaññāpanaṃ. Tathā hi sarabhaṅgādayopi satthāro nāddasaṃsu, kuto paññāpanā, tena naṃ bhagavā aniccavasena vā dukkhavasena vā ubhayavasena vā dassesi. Tayidaṃ imasmimpi teparivaṭṭe aniccadukkhavaseneva dassitaṃ.Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.

In the Chachakkasutta (M.N. 3.422), he showed the not-self nature by way of impermanence. In this very Anattalakkhaṇa Sutta, "Rūpañca hidaṃ, bhikkhave, attā abhavissa…pe… evaṃ me rūpaṃ mā ahosī" (And this form, monks, if it were a self…pe… let my form not be thus), he showed the not-self nature by way of suffering. In this Arahanasutta (S.N. 3.76-77), "Rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ, yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā, yadanattā, taṃ ‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na me so attā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabba’’nti (Monks, form is impermanent, whatever is impermanent is suffering, whatever is suffering is not-self, whatever is not-self, that is to be seen with right wisdom as it actually is: ‘This is not mine, this am I not, this is not my self’)," he showed the not-self nature by way of both. Why? Impermanence and suffering are obvious, but not-self is not obvious. For when items of use, such as dishes, are broken, they say, "Alas, impermanent!" but there is no one who says, "Alas, not-self!" When boils or pimples arise on the body, or when pierced by a thorn, they say, "Alas, suffering!" but there is no one who says, "Alas, not-self!" Why? This characteristic of not-self is obscure, hard to see, and hard to explain. Thus, even teachers such as Sarabhaṅga did not see it, so how could they explain it? Therefore, the Blessed One showed it by way of impermanence, or by way of suffering, or by way of both. Therefore, this is shown in this three-round teaching (teparivaṭṭe) by way of impermanence and suffering. The same method applies to vedanā (feeling), etc.

22.Tasmātihāti tasmā icceva vuttaṃ.Ti-kāraha-kārā nipātā, yasmā ime pañcakkhandhā aniccā dukkhā anattā, tasmāti attho.Yaṃ kiñcīti anavasesapariyādānametaṃ.Yanti hi sāmaññena aniyamadassanaṃ,kiñcīti pakārato bhedaṃ āmasitvā aniyamadassanaṃ. Ubhayenapi atītaṃ vā…pe… santike vā appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā yādisaṃ vā tādisaṃ vā napuṃsakaniddesārahaṃ sabbaṃ byāpetvā saṅgaṇhāti, tasmā anavasesapariyādānametaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñcī’’ti. Evañca sati aññesupi napuṃsakaniddesārahesu pasaṅgaṃ disvā tattha adhippetatthaṃ adhicca pavattanato atippasaṅgassa niyamanatthaṃ‘‘rūpa’’nti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ padadvayenapi rūpassa asesapariggaho kato hoti. Athassa atītādivibhāgaṃ ārabhati‘‘atītānāgatapaccuppanna’’ntiādinā. Tañhi kiñci atītaṃ kiñci anāgatādibhedanti. Esa nayovedanādīsupi.

22. Tasmātihā: "Therefore, here," tasmā (therefore) is just what was said. The ti and ha are particles. Since these five aggregates are impermanent, suffering, and not-self, therefore, is the meaning. Yaṃ kiñcī: "Whatever," this is a complete enumeration. Yaṃ shows the non-determination in general, kiñcī shows the non-determination by touching on the distinction in kind. By both, whether past…pe… or near, whether little or much, whatever or suchlike, it includes and gathers all that is fit to be designated in the neuter gender. Therefore, "yaṃ kiñcī" is a complete enumeration. When this is so, seeing the possibility of being involved with other things that are fit to be designated in the neuter gender, "rūpa" (form) is said to restrict the excessive possibility, since it occurs intentionally to indicate the intended meaning there. Thus, with just two words, the complete inclusion of form is done. Then, he begins the division of it into past, etc., with "atītānāgatapaccuppanna" (past, future, and present), etc. That is, some is past, some is of the nature of future, etc. The same method applies to vedanā (feeling), etc.

addhāvasenatāva ekassa ekasmiṃ bhave paṭisandhito pubbe atītaṃ, cutito uddhamanāgataṃ, ubhinnamantare paccuppannaṃ.Santativasenasabhāgekautusamuṭṭhānaekāhārasamauṭṭhānañca pubbāpariyavasena vattamānampi paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe visabhāgautuāhārasamuṭṭhānaṃ atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ. Cittajaṃ ekavīthiekajavanaekasamāpattisamuṭṭhānaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ. Kammasamuṭṭhānassa pāṭiyekkaṃ santativasena atītādibhedo natthi. Tesaṃyeva pana utuāhāracittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ upatthambhakavasena tassa atītādibhāvo veditabbo.Samayavasenaekamuhuttapubbaṇhasāyanharattidivādīsu samayesu santānavasena pavattamānaṃ taṃtaṃsamayavantaṃ rūpaṃ paccuppannaṃ nāma, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ.Khaṇavasenauppādādikkhaṇattayapariyāpannaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ, idamevettha nippariyāyaṃ, sesā pariyāyakathā.

Addhāvasena: By way of a course, in one existence, what is conditioned in the past before the rebirth is past; what is uprising after death is future; what is between the two is present. Santativasena: By way of continuity, what is occurring with homogeneity, seasonal arising, single-food arising, and equanimity arising, in terms of before and after, is also present; what is before that, with heterogeneity, seasonal arising, food arising is past; what is after is future. What is mind-produced, arising from a single thought-moment, a single javana, or a single attainment, is present; what is before that is past; what is after is future. For karma-produced, there is no distinction of past, etc., by way of individual continuity. But the past, etc., of those seasonal, food, and mind-produced should be understood in terms of its being supportive. Samayavasena: By way of time, what is occurring in continuity in times such as a moment, forenoon, afternoon, evening, night, and day is called the present form, as it is connected with that time; what is before that is past; what is after is future. Khaṇavasena: By way of moment, what is included in the three moments of arising, etc., is present; what is before that is past; what is after is future. This alone is without alternative; the rest is description by way of alternative.

Ajjhattaṃvā bahiddhā vāti cakkhādipañcavidhaṃ rūpaṃ attabhāvaṃ adhikicca pavattattā ajjhattaṃ, sesaṃ tato bāhirattā bahiddhā. Apica niyakajjhattampi idha ajjhattaṃ, parapuggalikampi ca bahiddhāti veditabbaṃ.Oḷārikaṃ vā sukhumaṃ vāti cakkhādīni nava, āpodhātuvajjā tisso dhātuyo cāti dvādasavidhaṃ rūpaṃ ghaṭṭanavasena gahetabbato oḷārikaṃ, sesaṃ tato viparītattā sukhumaṃ.Hīnaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vāti ettha hīnapaṇītabhāvo pariyāyato nippariyāyato ca. Tattha akaniṭṭhānaṃ rūpato sudassīnaṃ rūpaṃ hīnaṃ, tadeva sudassānaṃ rūpato paṇītaṃ. Evaṃ yāva narakasattānaṃ rūpaṃ, tāva pariyāyato hīnapaṇītatā veditabbā. Nippariyāyato pana yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā akusalavipākaviññāṇaṃ uppajjati, taṃ hīnaṃ aniṭṭhabhāvato. Yaṃ pana ārammaṇaṃ katvā kusalavipākaviññāṇaṃ uppajjati, taṃ paṇītaṃ iṭṭhabhāvato. Yathā hi akusalavipāko sayaṃ aniṭṭho aniṭṭhe eva uppajjati, na iṭṭhe, evaṃ kusalavipākopi sayaṃ iṭṭho iṭṭheyeva uppajjati, na aniṭṭhe.Yaṃ dūre santike vāti yaṃ sukhumaṃ, tadeva duppaṭivijjhasabhāvattā dūre, itaraṃ suppaṭivijjhasabhāvattā santike. Apicettha okāsatopi upādāyupādāya dūrasantikatā veditabbā.Taṃ sabbanti taṃ atītādīhi padehi visuṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ sabbaṃ rūpaṃ.Sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbanti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā: "Internal or external," the five kinds of form beginning with the eye are internal because they occur depending on the individual existence; the rest are external because they are outside of that. Moreover, what is one's own internal is internal here, and what belongs to another person is external, it should be understood. Oḷārikaṃ vā sukhumaṃ vā: "Gross or subtle," the twelve kinds of form, namely, the nine beginning with the eye and the three elements excluding the water element, are gross because they are to be grasped by way of impact; the rest are subtle because they are the opposite of that. Hīnaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā: "Inferior or superior," here the state of being inferior or superior is by way of alternative and without alternative. Therein, the form of the Sudassī gods is inferior to the form of the Akaniṭṭha gods; that same is superior to the form of the Sudassana gods. Thus, as far as the form of the beings in hell, the state of being inferior or superior should be understood by way of alternative. But without alternative, what arises as the object for unwholesome resultant consciousness is inferior because of being undesirable. But what arises as the object for wholesome resultant consciousness is superior because of being desirable. For just as unwholesome result is itself undesirable and arises only in the undesirable, not in the desirable, so too, wholesome result is itself desirable and arises only in the desirable, not in the undesirable. Yaṃ dūre santike vā: "Far or near," what is subtle is far because of its nature of being hard to penetrate; the other is near because of its nature of being easy to penetrate. Moreover, the state of being far or near should be understood in terms of dependence on location. Taṃ sabbaṃ: "All that," all that form that is specified separately by the words past, etc. Sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṃ: "Is to be seen with right wisdom," is to be seen with the wisdom of the path together with insight.

kāci vedanātiādīsu pana santativasena ca khaṇavasena ca vedanāya atītānāgatapaccuppannabhāvo veditabbo. Tattha (visuddhi. 2.497 ādayo)santativasenaekavīthiekajavanaekasamāpattipariyāpannā ekavidhavisayasamāyogappavattā ca divasampi buddharūpaṃ passantassa dhammaṃ suṇantassa pavattasaddhādisahitavedanā paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā.Khaṇavasenakhaṇattayapariyāpannā paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Ajjhattabahiddhābhedo niyakajjhattavasena veditabbo. Oḷārikasukhumabhedo ‘‘akusalā vedanā oḷārikā, kusalābyākatā vedanā sukhumā’’tiādinā nayenavibhaṅge(vibha. 11) vuttena jātisabhāvapuggalalokiyalokuttaravasena veditabbo.Jātivasenatāva akusalavedanā sāvajjakiriyahetuto kilesasantāpasabhāvato ca avūpasantavuttīti kusalavedanāya oḷārikā, sabyāpārato saussāhato savipākato kilesasantāpasabhāvato sāvajjato ca vipākābyākatāya oḷārikā, savipākato kilesasantāpasabhāvato sabyāpajjato sāvajjato ca kiriyābyākatāya oḷārikā, kusalābyākatā pana vuttavipariyāyato akusalāya sukhumā. Dvepi kusalākusalavedanā sabyāpārato saussāhato savipākato ca yathāyogaṃ duvidhāyapi abyākatāya oḷārikā, vuttavipariyāyena duvidhāpi abyākatā tāhi sukhumā. Evaṃ tāva jātivasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.

In yā kāci vedanā (whatever feeling), etc., the past, future, and present nature of feeling should be understood by way of continuity and by way of moment. Therein, santativasena (by way of continuity) (Visuddhi. 2.497 ff.), the feeling accompanied by faith, etc., that occurs in connection with a single kind of object, involved in a single thought-moment, a single javana, and a single attainment, for one who sees the form of the Buddha or hears the Dhamma even for a day, is present; what is before that is past; what is after is future. Khaṇavasena (by way of moment), what is included in three moments is present; what is before that is past; what is after is future. The distinction of internal and external should be understood in terms of one's own internal. The distinction of gross and subtle should be understood by way of class, nature, person, mundane, and supramundane, as said in the Vibhaṅga (Vibha. 11), according to the method, "akusalā vedanā oḷārikā, kusalābyākatā vedanā sukhumā" (unwholesome feelings are gross, wholesome and indeterminate feelings are subtle). Jātivasena: By way of class, unwholesome feeling is gross compared to wholesome feeling, because of being the cause of blameworthy action and because of the nature of defilement and torment, and because of being unsettled in its activity; and it is gross compared to resultant-indeterminate feeling because of being active, enthusiastic, resultant, of the nature of defilement and torment, and blameworthy; and it is gross compared to action-indeterminate feeling because of being resultant, of the nature of defilement and torment, enthusiastic, blameworthy. But wholesome-indeterminate is subtle compared to unwholesome by the opposite of what was said. Both wholesome and unwholesome feeling are gross compared to the two kinds of indeterminate because of being active, enthusiastic, resultant; the two kinds of indeterminate are subtle compared to them by the opposite of what was said. Thus, the state of being gross or subtle should be understood by way of class.

Sabhāvavasenapana dukkhavedanā nirassādato savipphārato ubbejanīyato abhibhavanato ca itarāhi dvīhi oḷārikā, itarā pana dve sātato santato paṇītato manāpato majjhattato ca yathāyogaṃ dukkhāya sukhumā. Ubho pana sukhadukkhā savipphārato khobhakaraṇato pākaṭato ca adukkhamasukhāya oḷārikā, sā vuttavipariyāyena tadubhayato sukhumā. Evaṃ sabhāvavasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.Puggalavasenapana asamāpannassa vedanā nānārammaṇavikkhittabhāvato samāpannassa vedanāya oḷārikā, vipariyāyena itarā sukhumā. Evaṃ puggalavasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.Lokiyalokuttaravasenapana sāsavā vedanā lokiyā. Sā āsavuppattihetuto oghaniyato yoganiyato ganthaniyato nīvaraṇiyato upādāniyato saṃkilesikato puthujjanasādhāraṇato ca anāsavāya oḷārikā, sā vipariyāyena sāsavāya sukhumā. Evaṃ lokiyalokuttaravasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.

Sabhāvavasena: By way of nature, painful feeling is gross compared to the other two because of being without flavor, widespread, agitating, and overwhelming; the other two are subtle compared to painful feeling because of being tasteful, peaceful, superior, pleasing, and moderate. Both pleasant and painful are gross compared to neither-painful-nor-pleasant because of being widespread, causing disturbance, and obvious; that is subtle compared to both of those by the opposite of what was said. Thus, the state of being gross or subtle should be understood by way of nature. Puggalavasena: By way of person, the feeling of one who is not in jhāna is gross compared to the feeling of one who is in jhāna because of its diverse and distracted nature; the other is subtle by way of the opposite. Thus, the state of being gross or subtle should be understood by way of person. Lokiyalokuttaravasena: By way of mundane and supramundane, feeling with āsavas (cravings) is mundane. That is gross compared to feeling without āsavas because of being a cause for the arising of āsavas, being connected with the flood, connected with the yoke, connected with the bond, connected with the hindrance, connected with clinging, defiling, and common to worldlings; that is subtle compared to feeling with āsavas by way of the opposite. Thus, the state of being gross or subtle should be understood by way of mundane and supramundane.

Tattha jātiādivasena sambhedo pariharitabbo. Akusalavipākakāyaviññāṇasampayuttā hi vedanā jātivasena abyākatattā sukhumāpi samānā sabhāvādivasena oḷārikā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘abyākatā vedanā sukhumā, dukkhā vedanā oḷārikā. Asamāpannassa vedanā oḷārikā, sāsavā vedanā oḷārikā’’ti (vibha. 11). Yathā ca dukkhavedanā, evaṃ sukhādayopi jātivasena oḷārikā, sabhāvādivasena sukhumā honti. Tasmā yathā jātiādivasena sambhedo na hoti, tathā vedanānaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā. Seyyathidaṃ – abyākatā jātivasena kusalākusalāhi sukhumā. Na tattha ‘‘katamā abyākatā, kiṃ dukkhā, kiṃ sukhā, kiṃ samāpannassa, kiṃ asamāpannassa, kiṃ sāsavā, kiṃ anāsavā’’ti evaṃ sabhāvādibhedo parāmasitabbo. Esa nayo sabbattha.

Therein, the mixture by way of class, etc., should be avoided. For feeling associated with unwholesome-resultant body-consciousness, even though it is subtle because of being indeterminate by way of class, is gross by way of nature, etc. For this was said, "abyākatā vedanā sukhumā, dukkhā vedanā oḷārikā. Asamāpannassa vedanā oḷārikā, sāsavā vedanā oḷārikā" (Vibha. 11) (Indeterminate feeling is subtle, painful feeling is gross. The feeling of one who is not in jhāna is gross, feeling with āsavas is gross). And just as painful feeling is, so too, pleasant feelings, etc., are gross by way of class, but subtle by way of nature, etc. Therefore, the state of being gross or subtle of feelings should be understood so that there is no mixture by way of class, etc. Just as this—indeterminate is subtle compared to wholesome and unwholesome by way of class. There, "What is indeterminate? What is painful? What is pleasant? What is of one in jhāna? What is of one not in jhāna? What is with āsavas? What is without āsavas?"—the distinction by way of nature, etc., should not be considered. The same method applies everywhere.

Apica ‘‘taṃ taṃ vā pana vedanaṃ upādāyupādāya vedanā oḷārikā sukhumā daṭṭhabbā’’ti vacanato akusalādīsupi lobhasahagatāya dosasahagatavedanā aggi viya attano nissayadahanato oḷārikā, lobhasahagatā sukhumā. Dosasahagatāpi niyatā oḷārikā, aniyatā sukhumā. Niyatāpi kappaṭṭhitikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Kappaṭṭhitikāsupi asaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Lobhasahagatā pana diṭṭhisampayuttā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Sāpi niyatā kappaṭṭhitikā asaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā, avisesena akusalā bahuvipākā oḷārikā, appavipākā sukhumā. Kusalā pana appavipākā oḷārikā, bahuvipākā sukhumā.

Moreover, because it is said, "regarding each feeling, one should see feelings as gross or subtle," among unwholesome feelings, etc., a feeling accompanied by greed or a feeling accompanied by hatred is gross because it burns its support like fire; a feeling accompanied by greed is subtle. A feeling accompanied by hatred is invariably gross, while when it is not fixed, it is subtle. Even among the fixed ones, those that are persistent are gross, the others subtle. Among the persistent ones, those that are unprompted are gross, the others subtle. However, a feeling accompanied by greed that is associated with views is gross, the others subtle. Even that which is fixed, persistent and unprompted is gross, the others subtle; unwholesome feelings, without distinction, if with great results, are gross; if with little results, are subtle. However, wholesome feelings with little results are gross, while those with great results are subtle.

Apica kāmāvacarakusalā oḷārikā, rūpāvacarā sukhumā, tato arūpāvacarā, tato lokuttarā. Kāmāvacarā ca dānamayā oḷārikā, sīlamayā sukhumā, tato bhāvanāmayā. Bhāvanāmayāpi duhetukā oḷārikā, tihetukā sukhumā. Tihetukāpi sasaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, asaṅkhārikā sukhumā. Rūpāvacarā paṭhamajjhānikā oḷārikā…pe… pañcamajjhānikā sukhumāva. Arūpāvacarā ākāsānañcāyatanasampayuttā oḷārikā…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasampayuttā sukhumāva. Lokuttarā ca sotāpattimaggasampayuttā oḷārikā…pe… arahattamaggasampayuttā sukhumāva. Esa nayo taṃtaṃbhūmivipākakiriyavedanāsu dukkhādiasamāpannādisāsavādivasena vuttavedanāsu ca.

Moreover, wholesome feelings pertaining to the desire realm are gross, those pertaining to the form realm are subtle, then those pertaining to the formless realm, then those that are supramundane. Among those pertaining to the desire realm, those born of giving are gross, those born of morality are subtle, then those born of mental development. Even among those born of mental development, those that are two-rooted are gross, those that are three-rooted are subtle. Even among those that are three-rooted, those that are prompted are gross, those that are unprompted are subtle. Among those pertaining to the form realm, the first jhāna is gross...pe...the fifth jhāna is only subtle. Among those pertaining to the formless realm, those associated with the base of the infinity of space are gross...pe...those associated with the base of neither-perception-nor-non-perception are only subtle. And among the supramundane, those associated with the path of stream-entry are gross...pe...those associated with the path of arahantship are only subtle. This is the method for feelings that are results of each realm, or actions, and for feelings that are described in terms of painfulness etc., or attainment or non-attainment, or being with āsavas etc.

Okāsavasenacāpi niraye dukkhā oḷārikā, tiracchānayoniyaṃ sukhumā…pe… paranimmitavasavattī sukhumāva. Yathā ca dukkhā, evaṃ sukhāpi sabbattha yathānurūpaṃ yojetabbā.Vatthuvasenacāpi hīnavatthukā yā kāci vedanā oḷārikā, paṇītavatthukā sukhumā. Hīnappaṇītabhede yā oḷārikā, sā hīnā. Yā ca sukhumā, sā paṇītāti veditabbā. Dūrapadaṃ pana akusalā vedanā kusalābyākatāhi vedanāhi dūre, santikapadaṃ akusalā vedanā akusalāya vedanāya santiketiādinā nayena vibhattaṃ. Tasmā akusalā vedanā visabhāgato asaṃsaṭṭhato asarikkhato ca kusalābyākatāhi dūre, tathā kusalābyākatā akusalāya. Esa nayo sabbavāresu. Akusalā pana vedanā sabhāgato ca saṃsaṭṭhato ca sarikkhato ca akusalāya santiketi. Taṃtaṃvedanāsampayuttānaṃ pana saññādīnampi evameva veditabbaṃ.

In terms of location, painful feelings in hell are gross, in the animal realm they are subtle...pe...in the Paranimmitavasavattī realm they are subtle. Just as with painful feelings, so too with pleasant feelings, apply them appropriately everywhere. In terms of object, any feeling with a base object is gross, a feeling with a refined object is subtle. It should be understood that in the distinction between inferior and refined, that which is gross is inferior, and that which is subtle is refined. However, the term "distant" means that unwholesome feelings are distant from wholesome and indeterminate feelings, and the term "near" means that unwholesome feelings are near to unwholesome feelings, and so on, divided in this way. Therefore, unwholesome feelings, in terms of dissimilarity, non-association, and dissemblance, are distant from wholesome and indeterminate feelings, and likewise, wholesome and indeterminate feelings are distant from unwholesome ones. This method applies in all cases. However, unwholesome feelings, in terms of similarity, association, and resemblance, are near to unwholesome feelings. The same should be understood for perceptions and other mental factors associated with those respective feelings.

23.Sutavāti āgamādhigamasaṅkhātena bāhusaccena samannāgatattā sutavā.Nibbindatīti ukkaṇṭhati. Ettha canibbidāti vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanā adhippetā.Nibbindaṃ virajjatīti ettha virāgavasena cattāro maggā kathitā.Virāgā vimuccatīti virāgena maggeneva hetubhūtena paṭippassaddhivimuttivasena vimuccati. Iminā cattāri sāmaññaphalāni kathitāni.Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hotīti iminā pana paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ kathitaṃ.Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmi. Tena hi ñāṇena ariyasāvako paccavekkhanto ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādīni pajānāti. Katamā panassa jāti khīṇā, kathañca naṃ pajānātīti? Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā pubbeva khīṇattā, na anāgatā anāgate vāyāmābhāvato, na paccuppannā. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā, taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃ hotīti jānanto pajānāti.

23. Well-taught: Because he is endowed with great learning, which is counted as scriptural knowledge and realization. Becomes disgusted: Becomes repelled. Here, disgust is intended as the arising-and-passing-away insight. Becoming disgusted, he becomes dispassionate: Here, the four paths are spoken of in terms of dispassion. Through dispassion, he is liberated: Through dispassion, with the path itself as the causal condition, he is liberated in terms of cessation and relinquishment. By this, the four fruits of the ascetic life are spoken of. In the liberated one, there is knowledge that he is liberated: Here, the knowledge of reviewing is spoken of. Destroyed is birth, etc., is his ground. For by that knowledge, the noble disciple, reviewing, understands "destroyed is birth," etc. But which birth is destroyed for him, and how does he understand it? It is not his past birth that is destroyed, because it was already destroyed before; nor the future, because there is no effort in the future; nor the present. However, the birth that would arise, due to the path not being cultivated, the birth that is the variety of one, four, or five aggregates in one, four, or five-aggregate existences, that birth, due to the path being cultivated, having reached the state of non-arising, is destroyed; that, he, having reviewed the abandoned defilements by the cultivation of the path, knowing that even existing kamma, in the absence of defilements, becomes without future rebirth, understands it.

Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ, kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhitanti attho.Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ satta sekkhā maggabrahmacariyaṃ vasanti nāma, khīṇāsavo vutthavāso, tasmā ariyasāvako attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘vusitaṃ brahmacariya’’nti pajānāti.Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho. Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi taṃ kiccaṃ karonti, khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā ariyasāvako attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti pajānāti.Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti idāni puna itthabhāvāya evaṃsoḷasakiccabhāvāya, kilesakkhayāya vā maggabhāvanākiccaṃ me natthīti pajānāti. Atha vāitthattāyāti itthabhāvā imasmā evaṃpakārā idāni vattamānakkhandhasantānā aparaṃ khandhasantānaṃ mayhaṃ natthi, ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā rukkhā viya. Te carimakaviññāṇanirodhena anupādāno viya jātavedo nibbāyissantīti pajānāti.

Lived: Lived, fully lived, done, practiced, finished, is the meaning. The holy life: The holy life of the path. For along with the ordinary virtuous person, the seven trainees live the holy life of the path, but the arahant has lived the life; therefore, the noble disciple, reviewing his own living of the holy life, understands "lived is the holy life." Done is what was to be done: The sixteenfold task in the four truths has been completed by the four paths in terms of understanding, abandoning, realizing, and cultivating. For ordinary virtuous people and others do that task, but the arahant has done what was to be done. Therefore, the noble disciple, reviewing what was to be done, understands "done is what was to be done." There is no more for this state of being: Now, there is no more task of cultivating the path for this state of being, for this sixteenfold becoming, or for the destruction of defilements, thus he understands. Or alternatively, for this state of being: From this state of being, from this present continuum of aggregates, there is no other continuum of aggregates for me; however, these five aggregates are understood and remain like trees with their roots cut off. They, with the cessation of the final consciousness, will be extinguished without fuel like a fire, thus he understands.

24.Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti te bhikkhū sakamanā tuṭṭhamanā, pītisomanassehi vā samattamanā hutvā karavīkarutamañjunā kaṇṇasukhena paṇḍitajanahadayānaṃ amatābhisekasadisena brahmassarena bhāsato bhagavato vacanaṃ sukathitaṃ sulapitaṃ ‘‘evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’ti matthakena sampaṭicchantā anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu cāti attho. Ayañhiabhinanda-saddo ‘‘abhinandati abhivadatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.5; 4.114, 118) taṇhāyapi āgato. ‘‘Annamevābhinandanti, ubhaye devamānusā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.43) upagamanepi.

24. Glad, those monks rejoiced at the Blessed One's words: Those monks, with minds full of happiness, with contented minds, or with minds filled with joy and gladness, having become delighted, receiving on their heads the words of the Blessed One, which were well-spoken and well-uttered in a sweet, lovely voice, pleasing to the ear and like an anointing of immortality for the hearts of the wise, assented and accepted, meaning "so it is, Blessed One, so it is, O Sugata." For this word rejoice also appears in craving in "he rejoices, he greets," etc. (SN 3.5; 4.114, 118). And in "both gods and humans rejoice in food" (SN 1.43), it is in the sense of approaching.

‘‘Cirappavāsiṃ purisaṃ, dūrato sotthimāgataṃ;

"Kinsmen, friends, and companions, welcome back a man who has been long away and has returned safe from afar." (Dhp. 219; Vv. 861) –

Anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsūti anuppādanirodhena nirujjhamānehi āsavehi anupādāya aggahetvā kañci dhammaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti anādiyitvāva cittāni vimucciṃsu.Cha arahantoti bhagavatā saddhiṃ cha janā arahanto. Aññesaṃ pana devabrahmānampi arahattappattisambhavato idaṃ manussaarahanteyeva sandhāya vuttanti āha‘‘cha manussā arahanto hontī’’ti.

Their minds were liberated from the āsavas, without clinging: With the āsavas ceasing by way of cessation without arising, without clinging, without grasping any dhamma as "I" or "mine," their minds were liberated. Six arahants: Six people were arahants along with the Blessed One. However, since the attainment of arahantship is possible for other gods and brahmas, he said "six human beings became arahants," referring specifically to human arahants.

Anattalakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Anattalakkhaṇa Sutta is finished.

Pañcavaggiyakathā niṭṭhitā.

The story of the Group of Five is finished.

Yasassa pabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of Yasa's Going Forth

25.Idāni yasassa pabbajjaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā –hemantikotiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.42; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.39) yattha sukhaṃ hoti hemantakāle vasituṃ, ayaṃ hemantiko. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – hemante vāso hemantaṃ uttarapadalopena, hemantaṃ arahatītihemantiko. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Tattha vassiko pāsādo nātiucco hoti nātinīco, dvāravātapānānipissa nātibahūni nātitanūni, bhūmattharaṇapaccattharaṇakhajjabhojjānipettha missakāneva vaṭṭanti. Hemantike thambhāpi bhittiyopi nīcā honti, dvāravātapānāni tanukāni sukhumachiddāni, uṇhappavesanatthāya bhittiniyyūhāni hariyanti, bhūmattharaṇapaccattharaṇanivāsanapārupanāni panettha uṇhavikiriyāni kambalādīni vaṭṭanti, khajjabhojjaṃ siniddhaṃ kaṭukasannissitañca. Gimhike thambhāpi bhittiyopi uccā honti, dvāravātapānāni panettha bahūni vipulajātāni honti, bhūmattharaṇāni sītavikiriyāni dukūlamayāni vaṭṭanti, khajjabhojjāni madhurarasasītavikiriyāni, vātapānasamīpesu cettha navā cāṭiyo ṭhapetvā udakassa pūretvā nīluppalādīhi sañchādenti, tesu tesu padesesu udakayantāni karonti, yehi deve vassante viya udakadhārā nikkhamanti.

25. Now, to show Yasa's going forth, the passage beginning with "tena kho pana samayena" [Then at that time] is begun. Here is the explanation of the passage with obvious words: Among hemantiko [winter mansion], etc. (DA 2.42; AA 2.3.39), the hemantika is where it is pleasant to dwell in the winter time. The same method applies to the others. Here is the meaning of the words in this context: Dwelling in the winter is "hemanta," by elision of the last word, one who is worthy of winter is hemantiko. The same method applies to the others. There, the rainy season mansion is neither too high nor too low, its doors and windows are neither too many nor too few, and the foods and drinks that are spread on the floor are all mixed together. In the winter mansion, the pillars and walls are low, the doors and windows are thin with subtle openings, protrusions are made in the walls to let in warmth, and the coverings, spreads, and clothing used there are those that radiate warmth, such as blankets, and the food and drink are oily and mixed with pungent flavors. In the summer mansion, the pillars and walls are high, the doors and windows are many and of wide types, the floor coverings are cool, made of fine cloth, and the foods and drinks are of sweet taste and cooling effect, and new jars are placed near the windows, filled with water and covered with blue lotuses and other flowers, and water sprinklers are made in various places, from which streams of water issue as if the gods were raining.

Nippurisehīti purisavirahitehi. Na kevalañcettha tūriyāneva nippurisāni, sabbaṭṭhānānipi nippurisāneva. Dovārikāpi itthiyova, nahāpanādiparikammakarāpi itthiyova. Pitā kira ‘‘tathārūpaṃ issariyasukhasampattiṃ anubhavamānassa purisaṃ disvā parisaṅkā uppajjati, sā me puttassa mā ahosī’’ti sabbakiccesu itthiyova ṭhapāpesi.Pañcahi kāmaguṇehīti rūpasaddādīhi pañcahi kāmakoṭṭhāsehi.Samappitassāti sammā appitassa, upetassāti attho.Samaṅgībhūtassāti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Paricārayamānassāti parito cārayamānassa, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāmaguṇe indriyāni cārayamānassāti attho.Āḷambaranti paṇavaṃ.Vikesikanti muttakesaṃ, vippakiṇṇakesanti attho.Vikkheḷikanti vissandamānalālaṃ.Vippalapantiyoti viruddhaṃ palapantiyo vā rudantiyo vā.Susānaṃ maññeti āmakasusānaṃ viya addasa sakaṃ parijananti sambandho.Udānaṃ udānesīti saṃvegavasena udānaṃ udānesi, saṃvegavasappavattaṃ vācaṃ nicchāresīti attho.

Nippurisehī: Without men. Not only were the musical instruments without men there, but all the places were without men. The doorkeepers were only women, and the bathing and other attendants were only women. It seems that his father, thinking, "If I see a man enjoying such lordly happiness, doubt arises; may that not happen to my son," had only women installed in all duties. With the five strands of sense pleasure: With the five sections of sensual pleasure, namely sights, sounds, etc. Samappitassā: Well-provided for, endowed, is the meaning. Samaṅgībhūtassā: Is a synonym for that. Paricārayamānassā: Moving around, meaning moving the senses around in those various sense pleasures. Āḷambara: A type of drum. Vikesika: Disheveled hair, scattered hair, is the meaning. Vikkheḷika: Slobbering saliva. Vippalapantiyo: Speaking contradictory things, or crying. Susānaṃ maññe: "I think it's a charnel ground," he saw his retinue like a charnel ground filled with corpses, is the connection. Udānaṃ udānesī: He uttered an exclamation due to agitation, he spoke a word caused by agitation, is the meaning.

26.Idaṃ kho yasāti bhagavā nibbānaṃ sandhāyāha. Tañhi taṇhādīhi kilesehi anupaddutaṃ anupassaṭṭhañca.Anupubbiṃ kathanti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.75; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.69) dānānantaraṃ sīlaṃ, sīlānantaraṃ saggaṃ, saggānantaraṃ magganti evamanupaṭipāṭikathaṃ. Tatthadānakathānāma ‘‘idaṃ dānaṃ nāma sukhānaṃ nidānaṃ, sampattīnaṃ mūlaṃ, bhogānaṃ patiṭṭhā, visamagatassa tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ, idhalokaparalokesu dānasadiso avassayo patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ natthi. Idañhi avassayaṭṭhena ratanamayasīhāsanasadisaṃ, patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena mahāpathavīsadisaṃ, ārammaṇaṭṭhena ālambanarajjusadisaṃ, idañhi dukkhanittharaṇaṭṭhena nāvā, samassāsanaṭṭhena saṅgāmasūro, bhayaparittāṇaṭṭhena susaṅkhatanagaraṃ, maccheramalādīhi anupalittaṭṭhena padumaṃ, tesaṃ nidahanaṭṭhena aggi, durāsadaṭṭhena āsīviso, asantāsanaṭṭhena sīho, balavantaṭṭhena hatthī, abhimaṅgalasammataṭṭhena setausabho, khemantabhūmisampāpanaṭṭhena valāhako assarājā. Dānaṃ nāmetaṃ mayā gatamaggo, mayheveso vaṃso, mayā dasa pāramiyo pūrentena velāmamahāyaññā mahāgovindamahāyaññā mahāsudassanamahāyaññā vessantaramahāyaññāti aneke mahāyaññā pavattitā, sasabhūtena jalite aggikkhandhe attānaṃ niyyātentena sampattayācakānaṃ cittaṃ gahitaṃ. Dānañhi loke sakkasampattiṃ deti, mārasampattiṃ brahmasampattiṃ cakkavattisampattiṃ sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ abhisambodhiñāṇaṃ detī’’ti evamādinā dānaguṇappaṭisaṃyuttakathā.

26. Idaṃ kho yasā: The Blessed One spoke referring to Nibbāna. For that is undisturbed and unaffected by defilements such as craving. Anupubbiṃ katha: (DA 2.75; MA 2.69) Gradual talk, meaning talk in due order, giving, then morality, then heaven, then the path. There, talk on giving means, "This giving is the cause of happiness, the root of success, the basis of wealth, the refuge, shelter, destination, and final support for those going astray; there is no refuge, basis, support, shelter, destination, or final support like giving in this world and the next. This, in the sense of a support, is like a jewel-encrusted lion throne; in the sense of a basis, it is like the great earth; in the sense of an object of reliance, it is like a rope to hold on to; this, in the sense of escape from suffering, is a boat; in the sense of giving assurance, it is a battle hero; in the sense of protection from fear, it is a well-fortified city; in the sense of being unpolluted by the stain of stinginess, it is a lotus; in the sense of destroying those things, it is fire; in the sense of being difficult to approach, it is a venomous snake; in the sense of not causing terror, it is a lion; in the sense of being strong, it is an elephant; in the sense of being auspicious and respected, it is a white bull; in the sense of leading to a safe place, it is a rain cloud, a royal horse. Giving is the path I have gone, this is my lineage, by me, fulfilling the ten perfections, many great sacrifices have been started, such as the Velāma sacrifice, the Mahāgovinda sacrifice, the Mahāsudassana sacrifice, the Vessantara sacrifice, and by me, when I was a hare, throwing myself into a blazing fire, the minds of those begging for possessions were pleased. Giving gives heavenly success in the world, it gives Māra's success, Brahma's success, the success of a wheel-turning monarch, the knowledge of a disciple-Buddha, the knowledge of a Private Buddha, the knowledge of a Fully Enlightened Buddha," thus is the talk connected with the virtues of giving.

dānakathātāva pacurajanesupi pavattiyā sabbasādhāraṇattā sukarattā sīle patiṭṭhānassa upāyabhāvato ca ādito kathitā. Pariccāgasīlo hi puggalo pariggahavatthūsu nissaṅgabhāvato sukheneva sīlāni samādiyati, tattha ca suppatiṭṭhito hoti. Sīlena dāyakapaṭiggāhakavisuddhito parānuggahaṃ vatvā parapīḷānivattivacanato kiriyadhammaṃ vatvā akiriyadhammavacanato bhogayasasampattihetuṃ vatvā bhavasampattihetuvacanato ca dānakathānantaraṃ sīlakathā kathitā.

Talk on giving is spoken of first because of its commonness to all, as it is prevalent even among many people, because it is easy, and because it is the means of establishing oneself in morality. For a person with the morality of generosity easily undertakes the precepts because of his detachment from the objects of possession, and he is well-established in them. Talk on morality is spoken of after talk on giving because morality includes purity of giver and receiver, because it speaks of benefiting others by preventing harm to others, because it speaks of actions, not inactions, and because it speaks of the cause of wealth and fame, and because it speaks of the cause of future existences.

Sīlakathānāma ‘‘sīlaṃ nāmetaṃ avassayo patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ. Sīlaṃ nāmetaṃ mama vaṃso, ahaṃ saṅkhapālanāgarājakāle bhūridattanāgarājakāle campeyyanāgarājakāle sīlavarājakāle mātuposakahatthirājakāle chaddantahatthirājakāleti anantesu attabhāvesu sīlaṃ paripūresiṃ. Idhalokaparalokasampattīnañhi sīlasadiso avassayo sīlasadisā patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ natthi, sīlālaṅkārasadiso alaṅkāro natthi, sīlapupphasadisaṃ pupphaṃ natthi, sīlagandhasadiso gandho natthi. Sīlālaṅkārena hi alaṅkataṃ sīlakusumapiḷandhanaṃ sīlagandhānulittaṃ sadevakopi loko olokento tittiṃ na gacchatī’’ti evamādisīlaguṇappaṭisaṃyuttakathā.

Talk on morality means, "This morality is a refuge, a basis, an object of reliance, a shelter, a destination, a final support. This morality is my lineage; I, as Saṅkhapāla, Nāga king, as Bhūridatta, Nāga king, as Campeyya, Nāga king, as Sīlavara, king, as Mātuposaka, elephant king, as Chaddanta, elephant king, in countless existences I have fulfilled morality. For there is no refuge like morality for the successes of this world and the next, no basis like morality, no object of reliance, no shelter, no destination, no final support, no adornment like the adornment of morality, no flower like the flower of morality, no fragrance like the fragrance of morality. The world, even with the gods, does not get tired of looking at one adorned with the adornment of morality, wearing the garland of moral flowers, and anointed with the fragrance of morality," thus is the talk connected with the virtues of morality.

Saggakathānāma ‘‘ayaṃ saggo nāma iṭṭho kanto manāpo, niccamettha kīḷā, niccaṃ sampattiyo labbhanti, cātumahārājikā devā navutivassasatasahassāni dibbasukhaṃ dibbasampattiṃ paṭilabhanti, tāvatiṃsā tisso ca vassakoṭiyo saṭṭhi ca vassasatasahassānī’’ti evamādisaggaguṇapaṭisaṃyuttakathā. Saggasampattiṃ kathayantānañhi buddhānaṃ mukhaṃ nappahoti. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘anekapariyāyena kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, saggakathaṃ katheyya’’ntiādi.

The Saggakathā, or "discourse on heaven," refers to talk connected with the qualities of heaven, such as "this heaven is desirable, lovely, and pleasing; there is constant sport here, constant attainments are gained; the Cātumahārājika deities experience divine bliss and divine prosperity for ninety hundred thousand years; the Tāvatiṃsa deities for three koṭis and thirty-six hundred thousand years," and so forth. Indeed, the mouths of Buddhas are insufficient to describe heavenly prosperity. It was also said, "In many ways, monks, I might discourse on heaven," etc.

ādīnavoti doso, aniccatādinā appassādatādinā ca dūsitabhāvoti attho. Atha vā ādīnaṃ vāti pavattatītiādīnavo,paramakapaṇatā. Tathā ca kāmā yathābhūtaṃ paccavekkhantānaṃ paccupatiṭṭhanti.Okāroti lāmakabhāvo nihīnabhāvo aseṭṭhehi sevitabbatā seṭṭhehi na sevitabbatā ca.Saṃkilesoti tehi sattānaṃ saṃkilissanaṃ, vibādhetabbatā upatāpetabbatāti attho.

Ādīnava means drawback, the state of being marred by impermanence, unattractiveness, and so on. Or, ādīnava means that which goes towards (vāti) drawbacks (ādīnaṃ), meaning utter wretchedness. Thus, drawbacks become evident to those who contemplate sense pleasures as they really are. Okāra means inferiority, lowliness, the state of being frequented by the ignoble and not frequented by the noble. Saṃkilesa means the defilement of beings by these, the state of being vexed and tormented.

nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsesi. Yattakā ca kāmesu ādīnavā, paṭipakkhato tattakāva nekkhamme ānisaṃsā. Apica ‘‘nekkhammaṃ nāmetaṃ asambādhaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ, nikkhantaṃ kāmehi, nikkhantaṃ kāmasaññāya, nikkhantaṃ kāmavitakkehi, nikkhantaṃ kāmapariḷāhehi, nikkhantaṃ byāpārato’’tiādinā nayena nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsesi, pabbajjāya jhānādīsu ca guṇe vibhāvesi vaṇṇesi. Ettha ca saggaṃ kathetvā svāyaṃ saggo rāgādīhi upakkiliṭṭho, sabbathāpi anupakkiliṭṭho ariyamaggoti dassanatthaṃ saggānantaraṃ maggo kathetabbo. Maggañca kathentena tadadhigamupāyasandassanatthaṃ saggapariyāpannāpi pageva itare sabbepi kāmā nāma bahvādīnavā aniccā addhuvā vipariṇāmadhammāti kāmānaṃ ādīnavo, hīnā gammā pothujjanikā anariyā anatthasañhitāti tesaṃ okāro lāmakabhāvo, sabbepi bhavā kilesānaṃ vatthubhūtāti tattha saṃkileso, sabbasaṃkilesavippamuttaṃ nibbānanti nekkhamme ānisaṃso ca kathetabboti kāmesu ādīnavo okāro saṃkileso nekkhamme ca ānisaṃso pakāsitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

He revealed the benefit of renunciation (nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsesi). As many drawbacks as there are in sense pleasures, so many benefits are there in renunciation, conversely. Furthermore, he revealed the benefit in renunciation in the manner of "renunciation is unconfined and undefiled, going out from sense pleasures, going out from the perception of sense pleasures, going out from thoughts of sense pleasures, going out from the torments of sense pleasures, going out from evil courses," and he expounded and praised the qualities in renunciation, meditation, and so on. Here, having spoken of heaven, the path should be spoken of immediately after heaven, in order to show that this heaven is defiled by lust, etc., while the Noble Path is altogether undefiled. And when speaking of the path, to show the means of attaining it, one should speak of the drawbacks of sense pleasures, even those included in heaven, let alone others, as having many drawbacks, being impermanent, transient, and subject to change; the inferiority of them as being low, vulgar, pertaining to ordinary people, ignoble, and connected with harm; the defilement there, as all existences are the basis of defilements; and the benefit in renunciation, as Nibbāna is completely freed from all defilements. Thus, it should be understood that he revealed the drawbacks, inferiority, and defilement in sense pleasures, and the benefit in renunciation.

Kallacittanti kammaniyacittaṃ, heṭṭhā pavattitadesanāya assaddhiyādīnaṃ cittadosānaṃ vigatattā uparidesanāya bhājanabhāvūpagamanena kammakkhamacittanti attho. Assaddhiyādayo vā yasmā cittassa rogabhūtā tadā tassa vigatā, tasmā kallacittaṃ arogacittanti attho. Diṭṭhimānādikilesavigamenamuducittaṃ,kāmacchandādivigamenavinīvaraṇacittaṃ,sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ uḷārapītipāmojjayogenaudaggacittaṃ. Tattha saddhāsampattiyā pasannacittaṃ yadā bhagavā aññāsīti sambandho. Atha vākallacittanti kāmacchandavigamena arogacittaṃ.Muducittanti byāpādavigamena mettāvasena akaṭhinacittaṃ.Vinīvaraṇacittanti uddhaccakukkuccavigamena vikkhepassa vigatattā tena apihitacittaṃ.Udaggacittanti thinamiddhavigamena sampaggahavasena alīnacittaṃ.Pasannacittanti vicikicchāvigamena sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ adhimuttacittanti evampettha attho veditabbo.Sāmukkaṃsikāti sāmaṃ ukkaṃsikā, attanāyeva uddharitvā gahitā, sayambhūñāṇena diṭṭhā asādhāraṇā aññesanti attho. Kā ca pana sāti? Ariyasaccadesanā. Tenevāha ‘‘dukkhaṃ samudayaṃ nirodhaṃ magga’’nti.

Kallacittaṃ means workable mind, meaning a mind fit for work, due to the absence of mental faults such as lack of faith in the immediately preceding discourse, and the acceptance of being a vessel for the subsequent discourse. Or, since lack of faith and so on are like diseases of the mind, when these are gone, therefore kallacittaṃ means healthy mind. Mudu cittaṃ through the absence of defilements of views and pride, means a pliable mind; vinīvaraṇa cittaṃ, through the absence of sensual desire, etc., means a mind without hindrances; udagga cittaṃ, through the joy and delight in right practice, means an uplifted mind. Here, the connection is that the Blessed One knew that the mind was serene through the attainment of faith. Or, kallacittaṃ means a healthy mind through the absence of sensual desire. Mudu cittaṃ means a gentle mind due to the presence of loving-kindness through the absence of ill-will. Vinīvaraṇa cittaṃ means a mind without hindrances, as the mind is unburdened by the absence of distraction through the absence of restlessness and remorse. Udagga cittaṃ means an elated mind due to the absence of sloth and torpor through alertness. Pasannacittaṃ means a mind resolved on right practice through the absence of doubt. Thus, the meaning should be understood in this way here. Sāmukkaṃsikā means that which is raised up by oneself, grasped by oneself, seen by self-originated knowledge, extraordinary and not common to others. And what is that? The teaching of the Noble Truths. Therefore, he said, "suffering, origin, cessation, path."

Seyyathāpītiādinā upamāvasena tassa kilesappahānaṃ ariyamagguppādañca dasseti.Apagatakāḷakanti vigatakāḷakaṃ.Sammadevāti suṭṭhu eva.Rajananti nīlapītādiraṅgajātaṃ.Paṭiggaṇheyyāti gaṇheyya, pabhassaraṃ bhaveyya.Tasmiṃyeva āsaneti tassaṃyeva nisajjāyaṃ. Etenassa lahuvipassakatā tikkhapaññatā sukhapaṭipadakhippābhiññatā ca dassitā hoti.Virajantiādi vuttanayameva. Tatridaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ – vatthaṃ viya cittaṃ, vatthassa āgantukamalehi kiliṭṭhabhāvo viya cittassa rāgādimalehi saṃkiliṭṭhabhāvo, dhovanasilā viya anupubbikathā, udakaṃ viya saddhā, udakena temetvā temetvā ūsagomayachārikakhārakehi kāḷakapadese sammadditvā vatthassa dhovanapayogo viya saddhāsinehena temetvā temetvā satisamādhipaññāhi dose sithile katvā sīlasutādividhinā cittassa sodhane vīriyārambho, tena payogena vatthe kāḷakāpagamo viya vīriyārambhena kilesavikkhambhanaṃ, raṅgajātaṃ viya ariyamaggo, tena suddhassa vatthassa pabhassarabhāvo viya vikkhambhitakilesassa cittassa maggena pariyodapananti.

With Seyyathāpī, etc., he shows the abandoning of defilements and the arising of the Noble Path by way of simile. Apagatakāḷakaṃ means having the stain removed. Sammadeva means very well indeed. Rajanaṃ means a kind of dye, such as blue or yellow. Paṭiggaṇheyyā means would receive, would become radiant. Tasmiṃyeva āsane means in that very seat. This shows his quick insight, sharp wisdom, and easy and swift attainment of higher knowledge. Virajaṃ, etc., is in the manner already stated. Here, this is the connection of the simile: the mind is like a cloth; the defilement of the mind by stains of lust, etc., is like the state of being soiled by adventitious stains on the cloth; the gradual discourse is like a washing stone; faith is like water; the effort of purifying the mind by the method of morality, learning, etc., is like wetting the cloth again and again with water and rubbing it on the stained area with lye, cow dung, or ashes to loosen the stains; the hindering of defilements by effort is like the removal of the stain on the cloth by that effort; the Noble Path is like a kind of dye; the cleansing of the mind with the Path is like the radiance of the cleansed cloth.

27.Assadūteti āruḷhaasse dūte.Iddhābhisaṅkhāranti iddhikiriyaṃ.Abhisaṅkharesīti abhisaṅkhari, akāsīti attho. Kimatthanti ce? Ubhinnaṃ paṭilabhitabbavisesantarāyanisedhanatthaṃ. Yadi hi so puttaṃ passeyya, puttassapi arahattappatti seṭṭhissapi dhammacakkhupaṭilābho na siyā. Adiṭṭhasaccopi hi ‘‘dehi te mātuyā jīvita’’nti yācanto kathañhi nāma vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhitvā bhagavato dhammadesanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā dhammacakkhuṃ paṭilabheyya, yaso ca evaṃ tena yāciyamāno kathaṃ taṃ vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhitvā arahatte patiṭṭhaheyya.

27. Assadūte means a messenger riding a horse. Iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ means a psychic power act. Abhisaṅkharesī means he performed, he did, that is the meaning. For what purpose? To prevent an obstacle to the special attainment to be gained by both. For if he were to see his son, the son's attainment of Arahatship and the merchant's gaining of the Dhamma-eye would not occur. Even without seeing the truth, while begging, "give life to your mother," how could he reject distraction and, in accordance with the Blessed One's teaching, direct his knowledge and gain the Dhamma-eye? And how could Yasa, being begged in this way, reject that distraction and become established in Arahatship?

Etadavocāti bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ abbhanumodamāno etaṃ ‘‘abhikkantaṃ bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.Abhikkanta-saddo cāyamidha abbhanumodane, tasmā sādhu sādhu bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti.

Etadavocā means approving the Blessed One's teaching, he spoke this statement, "Excellent, venerable sir," etc. Here, the word abhikkanta is in the sense of approval; therefore, it is said, "Good, good, venerable sir."

‘‘Bhaye kodhe pasaṃsāyaṃ, turite kotūhalacchare;

"In fear, anger, praise,
In haste, curiosity, greed;
In laughter, sorrow, joy,
A wise man repeats (a word)."

Seyyathāpītiādinā catūhi upamāhi bhagavato desanaṃ thometi. Tatthanikkujjitanti adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ, heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ vā.Ukkujjeyyāti uparimukhaṃ kareyya.Paṭicchannanti tiṇapaṇṇādichāditaṃ.Vivareyyāti ugghāṭeyya.Mūḷhassāti disāmūḷhassa.Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti hatthe gahetvā ‘‘esa maggo’’ti vadeyya.Andhakāreti kāḷapakkhacātuddasī aḍḍharatti ghanavanasaṇḍameghapaṭalehi caturaṅgatame.

With Seyyathāpī, etc., he praises the Blessed One's teaching with four similes. Here, nikkujjitaṃ means placed face down, or having its face downward. Ukkujjeyyā means would turn upward. Paṭicchannaṃ means covered with grass, leaves, etc. Vivareyyā means would uncover. Mūḷhassa means to one lost in the directions. Maggaṃ ācikkheyyā means would take him by the hand and say, "this is the path." Andhakāre means in the pitch-black darkness of the fourteenth night of the waning moon, midnight, or a dense thicket of trees, or a mass of clouds, which is fourfold darkness.

‘‘esāha’’ntiādimāha. Tatthaesāhanti eso ahaṃ.Upāsakaṃ maṃ bhagavā dhāretūti maṃ bhagavā ‘‘upāsako aya’’nti evaṃ dhāretu, jānātūti attho.Ajjataggeti etthāyaṃagga-saddo ādiatthe, tasmāajjataggeti ajjataṃ ādiṃ katvāti evamattho veditabbo. Ajjatanti ajjabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Ajjadagge’’ti vā pāṭho,da-kāro padasandhikaro, ajja aggaṃ katvāti attho.Pāṇupetanti pāṇehi upetaṃ. Yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva upetaṃ, anaññasatthukaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi saraṇaṃ gataṃ upāsakaṃ kappiyakārakaṃ maṃ bhagavā dhāretu jānātu. Ahañhi sacepi me tikhiṇena asinā sīsaṃ chindeyya, neva buddhaṃ ‘‘na buddho’’ti vā, dhammaṃ ‘‘na dhammo’’ti vā, saṅghaṃ ‘‘na saṅgho’’ti vā vadeyyanti evaṃ attasanniyyātanena saraṇaṃ agamāsi. Evaṃ ‘‘abhikkanta’’ntiādīnaṃ anuttānapadattho veditabbo, vitthāro pana heṭṭhā verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ āgatoyevāti idha na dassito.

He said, ‘‘esāha’’, etc. Here, esāhaṃ means this I. Upāsakaṃ maṃ bhagavā dhāretu means may the Blessed One regard me thus, may he know that "this is a lay follower (upāsaka)." Here, the word agga in ajjatagge has the meaning of beginning; therefore, ajjatagge should be understood to mean beginning from today. Ajjataṃ means the state of today. Or, the reading is "ajjadagge"; the syllable da makes a connection between words, meaning having today as the beginning. Pāṇupetaṃ means endowed with life. As long as my life lasts, so long endowed, with no other teacher, gone for refuge with the three refuges, may the Blessed One regard me as a lay follower and attendant. For even if someone were to cut off my head with a sharp sword, I would never say that the Buddha is "not the Buddha," or that the Dhamma is "not the Dhamma," or that the Saṅgha is "not the Saṅgha." Thus, he went for refuge by entrusting himself. In this way, the meaning of the words beginning with "abhikkanta" should be understood, the full explanation of which has already come in the description of the Verañjaka section, so it is not shown here.

28.Bhūmiṃ paccavekkhantassāti attanā diṭṭhamatthaṃ paccavekkhantassa.Iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambhesīti yathā taṃ seṭṭhi gahapati tattha nisinnova yasaṃ kulaputtaṃ passati, tathā adhiṭṭhāsīti attho.Adhivāsetūti sampaṭicchatu.Ajjatanāyāti yaṃ me tumhesu sakkāraṃ karoto ajja bhavissati puññañca pītipāmojjañca, tadatthāya.Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvenāti bhagavā kāyaṅgaṃ vā vācaṅgaṃ vā acopetvā abbhantareyeva khantiṃ karonto tuṇhībhāvena adhivāsesi, seṭṭhissa anuggahatthaṃ manasāva sampaṭicchīti vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Ehi bhikkhū’’ti bhagavā avocāti tassa kira iddhimayapattacīvarassa upanissayaṃ olokento anekāsu jātīsu cīvarādiaṭṭhaparikkhāradānaṃ disvā ‘‘ehi bhikkhū’’ti avoca. So tāvadeva bhaṇḍu kāsāvavasano aṭṭhahi bhikkhuparikkhārehi sarīre paṭimukkeheva vassasaṭṭhikatthero viya bhagavantaṃ namassamānova nisīdi. Yo hi cīvarādike aṭṭha parikkhāre pattacīvarameva vā sotāpannādiariyassa puthujjanasseva vā sīlasampannassa datvā ‘‘idaṃ parikkhāradānaṃ anāgate ehibhikkhubhāvāya paccayo hotū’’ti patthanaṃ paṭṭhapeti, tassa taṃ sati adhikārasampattiyaṃ buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve iddhimayaparikkhāralābhāya saṃvattatīti veditabbaṃ.

28. Bhūmiṃ paccavekkhantassa means while reviewing the matter seen by himself. Iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambhesī means he determined that the merchant householder would see Yasa, the son of good family, just as he was sitting there. Adhivāsetu means may he accept. Ajjatanāya means for the sake of the merit and joy that will be mine today as I make an offering to you. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena means the Blessed One accepted with silence, showing forbearance only in his mind, without moving his body or speech, for the sake of favoring the merchant, that is, he mentally assented. ‘‘Ehi bhikkhū’’ti bhagavā avocā means the Blessed One said, "Come, monk," seeing the supporting condition for his robe and bowl acquired by psychic power, and having seen the giving of the eight requisites including robes in many past lives. As soon as he said this, he sat down, wearing tattered yellow robes, with the eight monk's requisites appearing as if attached to his body, venerating the Blessed One like a sixty-year-old elder. It should be understood that for one who gives the eight requisites including robes, or even just a robe and bowl, to a stream-enterer or other noble one, or even to an ordinary person accomplished in virtue, making the aspiration "may this gift of requisites be a condition for becoming a monk by 'Come, monk' in the future," this leads to the gaining of requisites acquired by psychic power in the presence of Buddhas when the authority is fully attained.

29.Paṇītenāti uttamena.Sahatthāti sahatthena.Santappetvāti suṭṭhu tappetvā, paripuṇṇaṃ suhitaṃ yāvadatthaṃ katvā.Sampavāretvāti suṭṭhu pavāretvā, alaṃ alanti hatthasaññāya paṭikkhipāpetvā.Bhuttāvinti bhuttavantaṃ.Onītapattapāṇinti pattato onītapāṇiṃ, apanītahatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Onittapattapāṇi’’ntipi pāṭho, tassattho – onittaṃ nānābhūtaṃ vinābhūtaṃ pattaṃ pāṇito assāti onittapattapāṇi, taṃonittapattapāṇiṃ,hatthe ca pattañca dhovitvā ekamantaṃ pattaṃ nikkhipitvā nisinnanti attho.Ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsūti bhagavantaṃ evaṃbhūtaṃ ñatvā ekasmiṃ okāse nisīdiṃsūti attho.Dhammiyā kathāyātiādīsu taṅkhaṇānurūpāya dhammiyā kathāya diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaatthaṃsandassetvākusale ca dhammesamādapetvātattha ca naṃsamuttejetvāsaussāhaṃ katvā tāya ca saussāhatāya aññehi ca vijjamānaguṇehisampahaṃsetvādhammaratanavassaṃ vassitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

29. Paṇītena means with excellent. Sahatthā means with his own hand. Santappetvā means having thoroughly satisfied, having made fully content, fulfilled as much as desired. Sampavāretvā means having thoroughly warded off, having caused to refuse with a gesture of the hand, saying "enough, enough." Bhuttāvi means having finished eating. Onītapattapāṇiṃ means having removed his hand from the bowl, having withdrawn his hand. There is also the reading "Onittapattapāṇi," the meaning of which is: onittaṃ means separate, distinct; pattaṃ pāṇito assāti onittapattapāṇi means he from whom the bowl is separate from the hand. Taṃ onittapattapāṇiṃ, means having washed his hands and bowl and set the bowl aside in one place, he sat down. Ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsū means knowing the Blessed One to be of such virtue, they sat down in a secluded place. In Dhammiyā kathāya, etc., having shown the immediately visible and future benefit with a talk on the Dhamma suitable for that moment, having encouraged (samādapetvā) them in skillful qualities, and having inspired (samuttejetvā) them there, having made them enthusiastic, and having delighted (sampahaṃsetvā) them with that enthusiasm and with other existing qualities, having rained down the rain of the jewel of the Dhamma, he rose from his seat and departed.

Yasassa pabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of Yasa's going forth is finished.

Catugihisahāyapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Going Forth of the Four Lay Friends

30.Idāni tassa sahāyānaṃ pabbajjaṃ dassento‘‘assosuṃ kho’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – seṭṭhino ca anuseṭṭhino ca yesaṃ kulānaṃ tāni seṭṭhānuseṭṭhīni kulāni, tesaṃseṭṭhānuseṭṭhīnaṃ kulānaṃ,paveṇivasena āgatehi seṭṭhīhi ca anuseṭṭhīhi ca samannāgatānaṃ kulānanti attho.Vimalotiādīni tesaṃ puttānaṃ nāmāni.Kesamassuṃ ohāretvāti kesañca massuñca oropetvā.Kāsāyāni vatthānīti kasāyarasapītāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni.Orakoti ūnako lāmako. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.

30. Now, showing the going forth of his friends, he said ‘‘assosuṃ kho’’, etc. Here, this is the explanation of the words whose meaning is obvious: seṭṭhānuseṭṭhīnaṃ kulānaṃ means the families of those foremost and secondary merchants, those families which were foremost and secondary, that is, families endowed with foremost and secondary merchants who had come by lineage. Vimalo, etc., are the names of their sons. Kesamassuṃ ohāretvā means having shaved off hair and beard. Kāsāyāni vatthāni means robes dyed with astringent flavor, suitable for those living the holy life. Orako means inferior, low. The rest is in the manner already stated.

Catugihisahāyapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the going forth of the four lay friends is finished.

Paññāsagihisahāyapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Going Forth of the Fifty Lay Friends

31.Paññāsamattānaṃ gihisahāyānaṃ pabbajjāyapi yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttameva. Imesaṃ pana sabbesaṃ pubbayogo vattabboti taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘yasaādīnaṃkulaputtānaṃ ayaṃ pubbayogo’’tiādimāha. Tatthavaggabandhanenāti gaṇabandhanena, ekībhūtāti vuttaṃ hoti.Anāthasarīrānīti anāthāni matakaḷevarāni.Paṭijaggantāti bahi nīharitvā jhāpentā.

31. What should be said about the going forth of the approximately fifty lay friends has already been said. But the prior connection of all these should be stated, so to show that, he said ‘‘yasaādīnaṃ kulaputtānaṃ ayaṃ pubbayogo’’, etc. Here, vaggabandhanena means by group association, that is, having become united. Anāthasarīrāni means unprotected corpses. Paṭijaggantā means carrying them out and cremating them.

Paññāsagihisahāyapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the going forth of the fifty lay friends is finished.

Mārakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Māra Discourse

32.Idāni saraṇagamanūpasampadaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘atha kho bhagavā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ anupubbapadavaṇṇanā (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.141) –muttāhanti mutto ahaṃ.Cārikanti anupubbagamanacārikaṃ, gāmanigamarājadhānīsu anukkamena gamanasaṅkhātaṃ cārikanti attho.Carathāti divasaṃ yojanaparamaṃ gacchantā caratha.Mā ekena dve agamitthāti ekena maggena dvīsu gatesu ekasmiṃ dhammaṃ desente ekena tuṇhībhūtena ṭhātabbaṃ hoti, tasmā evamāha.Ādikalyāṇanti ādimhi kalyāṇaṃ sundaraṃ bhaddakaṃ, tathāmajjhapariyosānesu. Ādimajjhapariyosānañca nāmetaṃ sāsanassa ca desanāya ca vasena dubbidhaṃ. Tattha sāsanassa sīlaṃ ādi, samathavipassanāmaggā majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Sīlasamādhayo vā ādi, vipassanāmaggā majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Sīlasamādhivipassanā vā ādi, maggo majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Desanāya pana catuppadikagāthāya tāva paṭhamapādo ādi, dutiyatatiyā majjhaṃ, catuttho pariyosānaṃ. Pañcapadachappadānaṃ paṭhamapādo ādi, avasānapādo pariyosānaṃ, sesā majjhaṃ. Ekānusandhikassa suttassa nidānaṃ ādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ, sesaṃ majjhaṃ. Anekānusandhikassa suttassa majjhe bahukampi anusandhi majjhameva, nidānaṃ ādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ.Sātthanti sātthakaṃ katvā desetha.Sabyañjananti byañjanehi ceva padehi ca paripūraṃ katvā desetha.Kevalaparipuṇṇanti sakalaparipuṇṇaṃ.Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ.Brahmacariyanti sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ.Pakāsethāti āvi karotha.

32. Now, to show the attainment of the going-for-refuge and the full acceptance, the passage beginning with ‘‘atha kho bhagavā’’ (Then, indeed, the Blessed One) was initiated. Herein, this is the word-by-word explanation in sequence (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.141): muttāhaṃ means I am freed. Cārikaṃ means a wandering tour in sequence, that is, wandering successively through villages, market towns, and capital cities. Caratha means wander, going a maximum of one yojana per day. Mā ekena dve agamitthā means when two have gone by one road, while one teaches the Dhamma, the other must remain silent, therefore he said this. Ādikalyāṇaṃ means beautiful, lovely, and auspicious in the beginning, similarly, majjhapariyosānesu (in the middle and at the end). And this beginning, middle, and end is twofold in terms of both the Dispensation and the teaching. Therein, for the Dispensation, morality is the beginning, concentration and insight paths are the middle, fruition and Nibbāna are the end. Or, morality and concentration are the beginning, insight paths are the middle, fruition and Nibbāna are the end. Or, morality, concentration, and insight are the beginning, the path is the middle, fruition and Nibbāna are the end. For the teaching, in a four-line verse, the first line is the beginning, the second and third are the middle, and the fourth is the end. For five- or six-line verses, the first line is the beginning, the last line is the end, and the rest are the middle. For a sutta with one connection, the introduction is the beginning, "idamavocā" (thus spoke he) is the end, and the rest is the middle. For a sutta with many connections, even many connections in the middle are the middle, the introduction is the beginning, and "idamavocā" is the end. Sātthaṃ means teach making it meaningful. Sabyañjanaṃ means teach making it complete with both expressions and words. Kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ means entirely complete. Parisuddhaṃ means free from defilements. Brahmacariyaṃ means the Dispensation's holy life, encompassing the three trainings. Pakāsetha means make manifest.

Apparajakkhajātikāti paññācakkhumhi appakilesarajasabhāvā, dukūlasāṇiyā paṭicchannā viya catuppadikagāthāpariyosāne arahattaṃ pattuṃ samatthā sattā santīti attho.Parihāyantīti alābhaparihāniyā dhammato parihāyanti. Tenevāha‘‘anadhigataṃ nādhigacchantā visesādhigamato parihāyantī’’ti.Senānigamoti senāya nigamo. Paṭhamakappikānaṃ kira tasmiṃ ṭhāne senāniveso ahosi, tasmā so padeso ‘‘senānigamo’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Senānigāmo’’tipi pāṭho, senāni nāma sujātāya pitā, tassa gāmoti attho.Tenupasaṅkamissāmīti nāhaṃ tumhe uyyojetvā pariveṇādīni kāretvā upaṭṭhākādīhi paricariyamāno viharissāmi, tiṇṇaṃ pana jaṭilānaṃ aḍḍhuḍḍhāni pāṭihāriyasahassāni dassetvā dhammameva desetuṃ upasaṅkamissāmi.

Apparajakkhajātikā means those beings who, in the eye of wisdom, have little defilement like dust, and are capable of attaining Arahatship at the end of a four-line verse, like those covered with fine linen or hemp cloth. Parihāyantī means they decline from the Dhamma due to the decline of gain. Therefore, he said ‘‘anadhigataṃ nādhigacchantā visesādhigamato parihāyantī’’ (not attaining the unattained, declining from the attainment of the special). Senānigamo means a settlement of the army. It is said that in that place, there was an army encampment in the early era, therefore that region is called "Senānigamo". There is also the reading "Senānigāmo", meaning the village of Senāni, who was the father of Sujātā. Tenupasaṅkamissāmī means I will not live being revered by attendants and others, having monasteries and such built after urging you, but I will approach to teach the Dhamma itself, showing half a thousand miracles to each of the three ascetics.

33.Māro pāpimāti attano visayaṃ atikkamituṃ paṭipanne satte māretītimāro,pare pāpe niyojeti, sayaṃ vā pāpe niyuttotipāpimā. Aññānipissa kaṇho adhipati vasavattī antako namuci pamattabandhūtiādīni bahūni nāmāni, idha pana nāmadvayameva gahitaṃ.Upasaṅkamīti ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo gotamo mahāyuddhaṃ vicārento viya ‘mā ekena dve agamittha, dhammaṃ desethā’ti saṭṭhi jane uyyojeti, imasmiṃ pana ekasmimpi dhammaṃ desente mayhaṃ cittassa sātaṃ natthi, evaṃ bahūsu desentesu kuto bhavissati, paṭibāhāmi na’’nti cintetvā upasaṅkami.

33. Māro pāpimā means Māra because he kills beings who are committed to transcending his domain, pāpimā because he induces others to evil or is himself engaged in evil. He has many other names such as Kaṇha, Adhipati, Vasavattī, Antaka, Namuci, Pamattabandhu, etc., but here only two names are taken. Upasaṅkamī (approached) means thinking, "This ascetic Gotama, as if contending in a great battle, urges sixty people, saying 'Do not go two by one road, teach the Dhamma.' But while teaching the Dhamma to even one of these, there is no satisfaction for my mind, so how will it be when teaching to many? I will repel him," he approached.

Sabbapāsehīti sabbehi kilesapāsehi.Ye dibbā ye ca mānusāti ye dibbakāmaguṇasaṅkhātā mānusakakāmaguṇasaṅkhātā ca kilesapāsā nāma atthi, sabbehi tehi tvaṃ baddhoti vadati.Mahābandhanabaddhoti mahatā kilesabandhanena baddho, mahati vā bandhane baddho, kilesabandhanassa ṭhānabhūte bhavacārake baddhoti attho.Na me samaṇa mokkhasīti samaṇa tvaṃ mama visayato na muccissasi. ‘‘Na me samaṇa mokkhasī’’ti ca idaṃ māro ‘‘muttāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbapāsehī’’ti bhagavato vacanaṃ asaddahanto vadati, saddahantopi vā ‘‘evamayaṃ paresaṃ sattānaṃ mokkhāya ussāhaṃ na kareyyā’’ti santajjento kohaññe ṭhatvā vadati.

Sabbapāsehī means with all the snares of defilements. Ye dibbā ye ca mānusā means he says, "You are bound by all those snares of defilements that are called heavenly sensual pleasures and human sensual pleasures." Mahābandhanabaddho means bound by a great bond of defilements, or bound in a great bondage, bound in the cycle of existence which is the place of the bondage of defilements. Na me samaṇa mokkhasī means ascetic, you will not be freed from my domain. And Māra says this, "Na me samaṇa mokkhasī" (You will not escape me, ascetic), disbelieving the Blessed One's statement, "Freed am I, monks, from all snares," or even believing, he speaks standing in obstinacy, threatening, "Thus he might not make an effort for the liberation of other beings."

Nihatoti tvaṃ mayā nihato, nibbisevanabhāvaṃ gamito parājitoti attho. Antalikkhe carante pañcābhiññepi bandhatītiantalikkhacaro. Rāgapāso hi antalikkhacaresupi kiccasādhanato ‘‘antalikkhacaro’’ti vuccati, teneva naṃ māropi antalikkhacaroti maññati. Manasi jātotimānaso,manasampayuttoti attho. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.

Nihato means you are struck down by me, reduced to a state of non-cultivation, defeated. Antalikkhacaro means one who binds even those with the five supernormal knowledges who wander in the sky. For the snare of lust, even for those who wander in the sky, is called "antalikkhacaro" because of the accomplishment of tasks, therefore Māra also considers him an "antalikkhacaro". Mānaso means born in the mind, that is, associated with the mind. The rest here is easy to understand.

Mārakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

End of the Explanation of the Discourse on Māra.

Pabbajjūpasampadākathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on Going Forth and Full Acceptance

34.‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave’’tiādikāya pana pāḷiyā yo pabbajjūpasampadāvinicchayo vattabbo, taṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ‘‘pabbajjāpekkhaṃ kulaputtaṃ pabbājentenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ye puggalā paṭikkhittāti sambandho.Sayaṃ pabbājetabboti kesacchedanādīni sayaṃ karontena pabbājetabbo. Kesacchedanaṃ kāsāyacchādanaṃ saraṇadānanti hi imāni tīṇi karonto‘‘pabbājetī’’ti vuccati. Etesu ekaṃ dve vāpi karonto tathā voharīyatiyeva, tasmāetaṃ pabbājehīti kesacchedanaṃ kāsāyacchādanañca sandhāya vuttaṃ.Upajjhāyaṃuddissa pabbājetīti etthāpi eseva nayo.Khaṇḍasīmaṃ netvāti bhaṇḍukammārocanapariharaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena sabhikkhuke vihāre aññampi ‘‘etassa kese chindā’’ti vattuṃ na vaṭṭati.Pabbājetvāti kesacchedanaṃ sandhāya vadati.Bhikkhuto añño pabbājetuṃ na labhatīti saraṇadānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenevāha‘‘sāmaṇero panā’’tiādi.Bhabbarūpoti bhabbasabhāvo. Tamevatthaṃ pariyāyantarena vibhāveti‘‘sahetuko’’ti.Ñātoti pākaṭo.Yasassīti parivārasampattiyā samannāgato.

34. Now, to show in detail the determination of going forth and full acceptance that should be spoken about in the passage beginning with ‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave’’ (I allow, monks), he said this beginning with ‘‘pabbajjāpekkhaṃ kulaputtaṃ pabbājentena’’ (a clansman desiring to go forth should be made to go forth). Therein, "ye puggalā paṭikkhittā" (those persons who are rejected) is the connection. Sayaṃ pabbājetabbo means he should be made to go forth by someone doing the cutting of the hair and so on himself. For, one is called ‘‘pabbājeti’’ (makes to go forth) when doing these three: cutting the hair, covering with the ochre robe, and giving the refuges. Even when doing one or two of these, one is indeed referred to thus, therefore ‘‘etaṃ pabbājehi’’ (make him go forth) is said referring to cutting the hair and covering with the ochre robe. Upajjhāyaṃ uddissa pabbājeti (making him go forth dedicating to the preceptor) also has the same method. Khaṇḍasīmaṃ netvā (having led him to a boundary) is said to avoid the disclosure of belongings. Therefore, in a monastery full of monks, it is not proper to say to another, "Cut his hair." Pabbājetvā (having made to go forth) he speaks referring to cutting the hair. Bhikkhuto añño pabbājetuṃ na labhatī (none other than a monk may make to go forth) is said referring to giving the refuges. Therefore, he said ‘‘sāmaṇero panā’’ (but a novice) and so on. Bhabbarūpo means having a capable nature. He elaborates on that meaning with another term: ‘‘sahetuko’’ (with a cause). Ñāto means well-known. Yasassī means endowed with the attainment of a retinue.

kesānāmete vaṇṇatopi paṭikūlā, saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi āsayatopi okāsatopi paṭikūlā. Manuññepi (visuddhi. 1.183; vibha. aṭṭha. 356; sārattha. ṭī. pārājikakaṇḍa 2.162) hi yāgupatte vā bhattapatte vā kesavaṇṇaṃ kiñci disvā ‘‘kesamissakamidaṃ, haratha na’’nti jigucchanti, evaṃ kesāvaṇṇatopaṭikūlā. Rattiṃ bhuñjantāpi kesasaṇṭhānaṃ akkavākaṃ vā makacivākaṃ vā chupitvā tatheva jigucchanti, evaṃsaṇṭhānatopaṭikūlā. Telamakkhanapupphadhūmādisaṅkhāravirahitānañca kesānaṃ gandho paramajeguccho hoti, tato jegucchataro aggimhi pakkhittānaṃ. Kesā hi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikūlāpi siyuṃ,gandhenapana paṭikūlāyeva. Yathā hi daharassa kumārakassa vaccaṃ vaṇṇato haliddivaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānatopi haliddipiṇḍisaṇṭhānaṃ. Saṅkāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍitañca uddhumātakakāḷasunakhasarīraṃ vaṇṇato tālapakkavaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānato vaṭṭetvā vissaṭṭhamudiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ, dāṭhāpissa sumanamakuḷasadisā, taṃ ubhayampi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato siyā appaṭikūlaṃ, gandhena pana paṭikūlameva, evaṃ kesāpi siyuṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikūlā, gandhena pana paṭikūlāyevāti. Yathā pana asuciṭṭhāne gāmanissandena jātāni sūpeyyapaṇṇāni nāgarikamanussānaṃ jegucchāni honti aparibhogāni, evaṃ kesāpi pubbalohitamuttakarīsapittasemhādinissandena jātattā paramajegucchāti evaṃāsayatopaṭikūlā. Ime ca kesā nāma gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇakaṃ viya ekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsarāsimhi jātā, te susānasaṅkāraṭṭhānādīsu jātasākaṃ viya parikhādīsu jātakamalakuvalayādipupphaṃ viya ca asuciṭṭhāne jātattā paramajegucchāti evaṃokāsatopaṭikūlātiādinā nayena tacapañcakassa vaṇṇādivasena paṭikūlabhāvaṃ pakāsentenāti attho.

kesā (hairs): these are repulsive in terms of color, shape, smell, location, and habitat. For even when pleasant, seeing some color of hair in a gruel bowl or rice bowl, they are disgusted, saying "This is mixed with hair, remove it." Thus, hairs are repulsive vaṇṇato (in terms of color). Even while eating at night, touching the shape of the hair, like akka creeper or caterpillar, they are disgusted in the same way. Thus, they are repulsive saṇṭhānato (in terms of shape). And the smell of hairs without the addition of oil, perfume, smoke, and so on is extremely disgusting, and even more disgusting when thrown into a fire. For hairs might be slightly repulsive in terms of color and shape, but they are definitely repulsive gandhena (in terms of smell). Just as the excrement of a young child is the color of turmeric and the shape of a turmeric lump, and a swollen, black dog carcass thrown in a refuse heap is the color of a ripe palmyra fruit and the shape of a round, burst-open mudiṅga drum, and its teeth are like jasmine buds; both of these might be slightly repulsive in terms of color and shape, but are definitely repulsive in terms of smell. Similarly, hairs might be slightly repulsive in terms of color and shape, but are definitely repulsive in terms of smell. Just as leafy vegetables grown in sewage due to the oozing of the village are disgusting and unfit for consumption to city dwellers, so too, hairs are extremely disgusting because they grow from the oozing of pus, blood, urine, feces, bile, phlegm, and so on. Thus, they are repulsive āsayato (in terms of habitat). And these hairs are born in the mass of thirty-one parts of the body, like a mushroom sprouting in a dung heap. They are extremely disgusting because they are born in an unclean place, like vegetables grown in a cemetery refuse heap or like lotus and water lily flowers grown in ditches. Thus, they are repulsive okāsato (in terms of location), meaning by one who makes manifest the repulsive nature of the five kinds of skin in terms of color and so on in this manner.

Nijjīvanissattabhāvaṃ vā pākaṭaṃ karontenāti ime kesā nāma sīsakaṭāhapaliveṭhanacamme jātā. Tattha yathā vammikamatthake jātesu kunthatiṇesu na vammikamatthako jānāti ‘‘mayi kunthatiṇāni jātānī’’ti, nāpi kunthatiṇāni jānanti ‘‘mayaṃ vammikamatthake jātānī’’ti, evameva na sīsakaṭāhapaliveṭhanacammaṃ jānāti ‘‘mayi kesā jātā’’ti, nāpi kesā jānanti ‘‘mayaṃ sīsakaṭāhapaliveṭhanacamme jātā’’ti. Aññamaññaṃ ābhogapaccavekkhaṇarahitā ete dhammā. Iti kesā nāma imasmiṃ sarīre pāṭiyekko koṭṭhāso acetano abyākato suñño nissatto thaddho pathavīdhātūtiādinā nayena nijjīvanissattabhāvaṃ pakāsentena.Pubbeti purimabuddhānaṃ santike.Madditasaṅkhāroti nāmarūpavavatthānena ceva paccayapariggahavasena ca ñāṇena parimadditasaṅkhāro.Bhāvitabhāvanoti kalāpasammasanādinā sabbaso kusalabhāvanāya pūraṇena bhāvitabhāvano.

Nijjīvanissattabhāvaṃ vā pākaṭaṃ karontena (or making manifest their lifeless and soulless nature): These hairs are born in the skin enveloping the skull. Therein, just as when kuntha grass grows on the top of an anthill, the top of the anthill does not know "kuntha grass has grown on me," nor does the kuntha grass know "we have grown on the top of the anthill," similarly, the skin enveloping the skull does not know "hairs have grown on me," nor do the hairs know "we have grown on the skin enveloping the skull." These phenomena are devoid of mutual reflection and inspection. Thus, hairs are a distinct part in this body, without consciousness, undeclared, empty, soulless, stiff, the earth element, meaning by one who makes manifest their lifeless and soulless nature in this manner. Pubbe means in the presence of the former Buddhas. Madditasaṅkhāro means one whose fabrications are crushed by knowledge through the determination of name and form and through the comprehension of conditions. Bhāvitabhāvano means one who has cultivated meditation by fulfilling the entire cultivation of wholesomeness through group-touching and so on.

Adinnaṃna vaṭṭatīti ettha pabbajjā na ruhatīti vadanti.Anuññātaupasampadāti ñatticatutthakammena anuññātaupasampadā.Ṭhānakaraṇasampadanti ettha urādīni ṭhānāni, saṃvutādīni karaṇānīti veditabbāni. Anunāsikantaṃ katvā dānakāle antarā vicchedaṃ akatvā dātabbānīti dassetuṃ‘‘ekasambandhānī’’ti vuttaṃ.Vicchinditvāti ma-kārantaṃ katvā dānasamaye vicchedaṃ katvā.Sabbamassa kappiyākappiyaṃ ācikkhitabbanti dasasikkhāpadavinimuttaṃ parāmāsāparāmāsādibhedaṃ kappiyākappiyaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ.Ābhisamācārikesu vinetabboti iminā sekhiyaupajjhāyavattādiābhisamācārikasīlamanena pūretabbaṃ, tattha ca kattabbassa akaraṇe akattabbassa ca karaṇe daṇḍakammāraho hotīti dīpeti.

Adinnaṃ na vaṭṭatī (what is not given is not proper): Here, they say that the going forth does not arise. Anuññātaupasampadā (acceptance with permission) means acceptance with permission by a motion and three announcements. Ṭhānakaraṇasampada (accomplishment of place and cause): Here, the places such as the chest, and the causes such as restraint, should be understood. ‘‘ekasambandhānī’’ (as one connection) is said to show that they should be given without interruption in between when giving, making it end in ma. Vicchinditvā (having interrupted) means having made it end in ma, having interrupted at the time of giving. Sabbamassa kappiyākappiyaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ (all that is allowable and unallowable to him should be explained): The allowable and unallowable, such as what can be touched and not touched, apart from the ten training precepts, should be explained. Ābhisamācārikesu vinetabbo (he should be trained in the customary practices): By this, it is indicated that he should fulfill the customary morality, such as the Sekhiya duties and the preceptor's duties, and that he is liable to punishment for doing what should not be done and not doing what should be done therein.

Pabbajjūpasampadākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

End of the Explanation of the Discourse on Going Forth and Full Acceptance.

Dutiyamārakathāvaṇṇanā
Second Discourse on Māra

35.Atha kho bhagavā vassaṃvuṭṭhotiādikāya pana pāḷiyā ayaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā.Yonisomanasikārāti upāyamanasikārena, aniccādīsu aniccādito manasikaraṇenāti attho.Yoniso sammappadhānāti upāyavīriyena, anuppannākusalānuppādanādividhinā pavattavīriyenāti attho.Vimuttīti ukkaṭṭhaniddesena arahattaphalavimutti vuttā.Ajjhabhāsīti ‘‘ayaṃ attanā vīriyaṃ katvā arahattaṃ patvāpi na tussati, idāni aññesampi ‘pāpuṇāthā’ti ussāhaṃ karoti, paṭibāhessāmi na’’nti cintetvā abhāsi.Mārapāsenāti kilesapāsena. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.

35. Now, in the passage beginning with ‘‘Atha kho bhagavā vassaṃvuṭṭho’’ (Then, indeed, the Blessed One, having emerged from the rains), this is the new word-by-word explanation. Yonisomanasikārā means by skillful attention, by attending from the perspective of impermanence in impermanence and so on. Yoniso sammappadhānā means by skillful effort, by effort initiated in the manner of non-arising of unarisen unwholesome states and so on. Vimuttī (liberation) means the liberation of the fruition of Arahatship is stated by way of the highest designation. Ajjhabhāsī (addressed) means thinking, "Even having attained Arahatship by exerting effort himself, he is not satisfied. Now he makes an effort for others too, saying 'Attain it!', I will repel him," he spoke. Mārapāsenā means with the snare of defilements. The rest here is in accordance with what has been said.

Dutiyamārakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

End of the Second Explanation of the Discourse on Māra.

Bhaddavaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on the Group of Fortunate Ones

36.Tiṃsabhaddavaggiyavatthumhiyathābhirantaṃ viharitvāti yathāajjhāsayaṃ viharitvā. Buddhānañhi ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vasantānaṃ chāyūdakādīnaṃ vipattiṃ vā aphāsukasenāsanaṃ vā manussānaṃ assaddhādibhāvaṃ vā āgamma anabhirati nāma natthi, tesaṃ sampattiyā ‘‘idha phāsuṃ viharāmā’’ti abhiramitvā ciravihāropi natthi. Yattha pana tathāgate viharante sattā saraṇesu vā tīsu patiṭṭhahanti, sīlāni vā samādiyanti, pabbajanti vā, sotāpattimaggādīnaṃ vā paresaṃ upanissayo hoti, tattha buddhā satte tāsu sampattīsu patiṭṭhāpanaajjhāsayena vasanti, tāsaṃ abhāve pakkamanti. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘yathāajjhāsayaṃ viharitvā’’ti.Ajjhogāhetvāti pavisitvā.Tiṃsamattāti tiṃsapamāṇā. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.

36. In the story of the thirty Bhaddavaggiyas, yathābhirantaṃ viharitvā means having lived as they pleased. For Buddhas, while dwelling in one place, there is no displeasure due to encountering a misfortune of shade, water, etc., or an uncomfortable lodging, or the lack of faith of people, etc. Nor is there a long stay delighting in their fortune, thinking, "Here we live comfortably." But where beings, while the Tathāgata dwells, become established in the refuges or undertake the three precepts, or go forth, or a condition arises for others for the path of stream-entry and so on, there the Buddhas dwell with the intention of establishing beings in those fortunes, and they depart in the absence of those. Therefore, it was said ‘‘yathāajjhāsayaṃ viharitvā’’ (having lived as they pleased). Ajjhogāhetvā means having entered. Tiṃsamattā means about thirty. The rest here is in accordance with what has been said.

Bhaddavaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

End of the Explanation of the Discourse on the Group of Fortunate Ones.

Uruvelapāṭihāriyakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on the Miracles at Uruvelā

37-38.Uruvelakassapavatthumhijaṭiloti jaṭādharo. Jaṭā assa atthīti hijaṭilo. Netītināyako,sāmaṃ vineti attano laddhiṃ sikkhāpetītivināyako. Sace te kassapa agarūti kassapa sace tuyhaṃ bhāriyaṃ aphāsukaṃ kiñci natthi.Agyāgāreti aggisālāyaṃ.Ubhinnaṃ sajotibhūtānanti ubhosu sajotibhūtesu pajjalitesu.Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma.

37-38. In the story of Uruvela Kassapa, jaṭilo means a matted-hair ascetic. For jaṭilo means one who has matted hair. Netītināyako means one who leads, vināyako means one who trains himself and teaches his doctrine. Sace te kassapa agarū means Kassapa, if there is nothing weighty or uncomfortable for you. Agyāgāre means in the fire hall. Ubhinnaṃ sajotibhūtāna means when both are ablaze with light. Yatra hi nāmā means where indeed.

39.Ajjaṇhoti ajja ekadivasaṃ.Aggisālamhīti agyāgāre.Sumanamanasoti sundaracittasaṅkhātamano.Tejodhātūsu kusaloti tejokasiṇasamāpattīsu kusalo.Udicchareti ullokesuṃ, parivāresunti vā attho.Pattamhi odahitvāti patte pakkhipitvā.Dhuvabhattenāti niccabhattena.

39. Ajjaṇho means today, one day. Aggisālamhī means in the fire hall. Sumanamanaso means a mind that is beautiful, known as citta. Tejodhātūsu kusalo means skilled in tejokasiṇa attainment. Udicchare means they looked up or surrounded. Pattamhi odahitvā means having placed it in the bowl. Dhuvabhattenā means with regular meal.

40.Abhikkantāya rattiyāti etthaabhikkanta-saddo khaye vattati, tena parikkhīṇāyarattiyāti attho. Ete hi cattāro mahārājāno majjhimayāmasamanantare āgatā. Niyāmo kiresa devatānaṃ, yadidaṃ buddhānaṃ vā buddhasāvakānaṃ vā upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchantā majjhimayāmasamanantare āgacchanti.Abhikkantavaṇṇāti abhirūpachavivaṇṇā, iṭṭhavaṇṇā manāpavaṇṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Devatā hi manussalokaṃ āgacchamānā pakativaṇṇaṃ pakatiiddhiṃ jahitvā oḷārikaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā atirekavaṇṇavatthālaṅkārakāyādīhi obhāsaṃ muñcamānādivasena ca dibbaṃ iddhānubhāvañca nimminitvā naṭasamajjādīni gacchantā manussā viya abhisaṅkhatena kāyena āgacchanti. Tattha kāmāvacarā anabhisaṅkhatenapi āgantuṃ sakkonti oḷārikarūpattā. Tathā hi te kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhā, rūpāvacarā pana anabhisaṅkhatena kāyena āgantuṃ na sakkonti sukhumatararūpattā. Tesañhi atisukhumova attabhāvo, na tena iriyāpathakappanaṃ hoti. Tasmā brahmalokepi brahmāno yebhuyyena nimmitarūpeneva pavattanti. Mūlapaṭisandhirūpañhi nesaṃ ativiya sukhumamahārūpaṃ, kevalaṃ taṃ cittuppādassa nissayādhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ saṇṭhānavantaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati.

40. Abhikkantāya rattiyā here, the word abhikkanta means waning, thus the meaning is the night having waned. These four Great Kings came near the middle watch of the night. It is said that it is a rule for the deities that when coming to attend upon the Buddhas or disciples of the Buddhas, they come near the middle watch of the night. Abhikkantavaṇṇā means having surpassing beautiful complexion and color, it is said to be a pleasing color and delightful color. When deities come to the human world, they abandon their natural color and natural power, and creating a coarse form, and emitting radiance with exceedingly beautiful garments, ornaments, bodies, etc., and creating divine power and influence, they come with a transformed body like humans going to a festival or gathering. Among them, those in the Sensuous Sphere (Kāmāvacara) are able to come even without transformation, due to their coarser form. For example, they consume solid food. However, those in the Form Sphere (Rūpāvacara) are not able to come with an untransformed body, due to their subtler form. Their existence is very subtle, and there is no arrangement of postures with it. Therefore, even in the Brahma world, the Brahmās mostly exist in created forms. Their original rebirth-form is a very subtle great form, only it exists as the foundation and support for the arising of consciousness, having shape.

Kevalakappanti etthakevala-saddassa anavasesattaṃ attho,kappa-saddassa samantabhāvo, tasmākevalakappaṃ vanasaṇḍanti anavasesaṃ samantato vanasaṇḍanti attho. Anavasesaṃ pharituṃ samatthassapi hi obhāsassa kenaci kāraṇena ekadesapharaṇampi siyā, ayaṃ pana sabbaso pharatīti dassetuṃ samantattho kappa-saddo gahito. Atha vā īsaṃ asamatthaṃ kevalakappaṃ. Bhagavato pabhāya anobhāsitameva hi padesaṃ devatā attano pabhāya obhāsenti. Na hi bhagavato pabhā kāyaci pabhāya abhibhūyati, sūriyādīnampi pana pabhaṃ sā abhibhuyya tiṭṭhatīti.Obhāsetvāti vatthālaṅkārasarīrasamuṭṭhitāya ābhāya pharitvā, cando viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekapajjotaṃ karitvāti attho. Devatānañhi sarīrābhā dasadvādasayojanamattaṭṭhānaṃ tato bhiyyopi pharitvā tiṭṭhati, tathā vatthābharaṇādīsu samuṭṭhitā pabhā.Catuddisāti catūsu disāsu.Yatra hi nāmāti yaṃ nāma.

Kevalakappanti here, the word kevala means without remainder, the word kappa means entirely, therefore kevalakappaṃ vanasaṇḍanti means entirely, completely the grove of trees. Even for a radiance capable of pervading without remainder, there might be a partial permeation due to some reason, but to show that this pervades completely, the word kappa with the meaning of entirety is taken. Or else, slightly incapable, kevalakappaṃ. Deities illuminate even the area not illuminated by the Blessed One's radiance with their own radiance. Indeed, the Blessed One's radiance is not overcome by anyone's radiance, but it overcomes the radiance of the sun and others and stands firm. Obhāsetvā means having pervaded with the aura arising from garments, ornaments, and body, having made it a single radiance and a single illumination like the moon and the sun. Indeed, the body aura of the deities pervades an area of ten or twelve yojanas, or even more than that, likewise the radiance arising from garments, ornaments, etc. Catuddisā means in the four directions. Yatra hi nāmā means where indeed.

43.Aṅgamagadhāti ubho aṅgamagadharaṭṭhavāsino.Iddhipāṭihāriyanti iddhibhūtaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ, na ādesanānusāsanīpāṭihāriyanti attho. Tividhañhi pāṭihāriyaṃ iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ anusāsanīpāṭihāriyanti. Tattha ‘‘idha bhikkhu ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti āvibhāvaṃ tirobhāva’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ (dī. ni. 1.238-239; ma. ni. 1.147; saṃ. ni. 2.70; 5.834) iddhividhamevaiddhipāṭihāriyaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ cittampi ādisati, cetasikampi ādisati, vitakkitampi ādisati, vicāritampi ādisati ‘evampi te mano, itthampi te mano’’’tiādinayappavattaṃ (paṭi. ma. 3.30) parassa cittaṃ ñatvā kathanaṃādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu evamanusāsati ‘evaṃ vitakketha, mā evaṃ vitakkayittha, evaṃ manasi karotha, mā evaṃ mānasā karittha, idaṃ pajahatha, idaṃ upasampajja viharathā’’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.30) evamādinayappavattā sāvakānaṃ buddhānañca sabbakālaṃ desetabbadhammadesanāanusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṃ.

43. Aṅgamagadhā means both the residents of the kingdoms of Aṅga and Magadha. Iddhipāṭihāriyanti means a miracle that is an accomplishment (iddhi), not a miracle of revelation (ādesanā) or instruction (anusāsanī). For indeed, the miracle is threefold: the miracle of psychic power (iddhipāṭihāriya), the miracle of revelation (ādesanāpāṭihāriya), and the miracle of instruction (anusāsanīpāṭihāriya). Therein, the psychic power itself, which proceeds in the manner of, "Here, a bhikkhu, being one, becomes many; being many, becomes one; appears; vanishes," etc. (dī. ni. 1.238-239; ma. ni. 1.147; saṃ. ni. 2.70; 5.834) is the miracle of psychic power. "Here, a bhikkhu reveals the minds of other beings and other individuals, reveals the mental states, reveals the thoughts, reveals the considerations, 'Thus is your mind, in this way is your mind,'" etc. (paṭi. ma. 3.30), the telling of another's mind by knowing it, is the miracle of revelation. "Here, a bhikkhu instructs thus: 'Think in this way, do not think in that way, attend in this way, do not attend in that way, abandon this, attain and abide in that,'" etc. (paṭi. ma. 3.30), the teaching of the Dhamma that is to be taught at all times by the disciples and Buddhas, which proceeds in this manner, is the miracle of instruction.

pāṭihāriyanti vadanti. Bhagavato pana paṭipakkhā rāgādayo na santi ye haritabbā, puthujjanānampi vigatūpakkilese aṭṭhaguṇasamannāgate citte hatapaṭipakkhe iddhividhaṃ vattati, tasmā tattha pavattavohārena ca na sakkā idha pāṭihāriyanti vattuṃ. Sace pana mahākāruṇikassa bhagavato veneyyagatā ca kilesā paṭipakkhā, tesaṃ haraṇatopāṭihāriyanti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati yuttametaṃ. Atha vā bhagavato ca sāsanassa ca paṭipakkhā titthiyā, tesaṃ haraṇatopāṭihāriyaṃ. Te hi diṭṭhiharaṇavasena diṭṭhippakāsane asamatthabhāvena ca iddhiādesanānusāsanīhi haritā apanītā hontīti.Paṭīti vā ayaṃ saddo pacchāti etassa atthaṃ bodheti ‘‘tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu (cūḷani. vatthugāthā 4) viya, tasmā samāhite citte vigatūpakkilesena katakiccena pacchā haritabbaṃ pavattetabbanti paṭihāriyaṃ, attano vā upakkilesesu catutthajjhānamaggehi haritesu pacchā haraṇaṃ paṭihāriyaṃ, iddhiādesanānusāsaniyo ca vigatūpakkilesena katakiccena sattahitatthaṃ puna pavattetabbā, haritesu ca attano upakkilesesu parasattānaṃ upakkilesaharaṇāni hontīti paṭihāriyāni bhavanti, paṭihāriyamevapāṭihāriyaṃ. Paṭihāriye vā iddhiādesanānusāsanīsamudāye bhavaṃ ekekaṃpāṭihāriyanti vuccati. Paṭihāriyaṃ vā catutthajjhānaṃ maggo ca paṭipakkhaharaṇato, tattha jātaṃ nimittabhūte, tato vā āgatantipāṭihāriyaṃ. Svātanāyāti sve dātabbassa atthāya.

pāṭihāriyanti they say. But for the Blessed One, there are no opposing factors such as lust, etc., that need to be removed. Even for ordinary people, when the mind is devoid of defilements and endowed with eight qualities, psychic power operates when opposing factors have been eliminated. Therefore, it is not possible to say "pāṭihāriya" here using the terminology that prevails there. But if the defilements inherent in those to be trained are opposing factors to the greatly compassionate Blessed One, and pāṭihāriya is said in the sense of removing them, then this is fitting. Or else, the sectarians are opposing factors to the Blessed One and the Dispensation, and pāṭihāriyaṃ is in the sense of removing them. For they are removed and eliminated by the miracle of psychic power, revelation, and instruction, due to being unable to express their views and in terms of the removal of views. Paṭī this word signifies the meaning of "after" as in "tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo"tiādīsu (cūḷani. vatthugāthā 4) thus, paṭihāriyaṃ is what should be activated and performed after the opposing factors have been removed by the completed act with a concentrated mind free from defilements, or the removal of one's own defilements through the fourth jhāna path is paṭihāriyaṃ. And the psychic power, revelation, and instruction are to be activated again for the benefit of beings by the completed act with defilements removed, and the removal of defilements of other beings occur in the removal of one's own defilements, thus they are paṭihāriyāni, paṭihāriyameva pāṭihāriyaṃ. Or, each one that exists in the collection of psychic power, revelation, and instruction which are paṭihāriye is called pāṭihāriya. Or, the fourth jhāna and the path are paṭihāriyaṃ because of removing opposing factors, born there, being the cause, or come from there is pāṭihāriya. Svātanāyā means for the purpose of what is to be given tomorrow.

44.Paṃsukūlaṃuppannaṃ hotīti pariyesamānassa paṭilābhavasena uppannaṃ hoti. Vicittapāṭihāriyadassanatthāva sā pariyesanā. Yasmā pāṇinā phuṭṭhamatte sā pokkharaṇī nimmitā ahosi, tasmā vuttaṃ‘‘pāṇinā pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇitvā’’ti.

44. Paṃsukūlaṃ uppannaṃ hotī means it arises in the manner of obtaining when one is seeking. That seeking was only for the purpose of seeing the wondrous miracle. Since that pond was created merely by the touch of the hand, therefore it was said "pāṇinā pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇitvā".

46-49.Jaṭilāti tāpasā. Te hi jaṭādhāritāya idha ‘‘jaṭilā’’ti vuttā.Antaraṭṭhakāsu himapātasamayeti hemantassa utuno abbhantarabhūte māghamāsassa avasāne catasso, phagguṇamāsassa ādimhi catassoti evaṃ ubhinnamantare aṭṭharattīsu himapatanakāle.Nerañjarāya ummujjantīti keci tasmiṃ titthasammate udake paṭhamaṃ nimuggasakalasarīrā tato ummujjantā vuṭṭhahanti uppilavanti.Nimujjantīti sasīsaṃ udake osīdanti.Ummujjananimujjanampi karontīti punappunaṃ ummujjananimujjanānipi karonti. Tattha hi keci ‘‘ekummujjaneneva pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, te ummujjanameva katvā gacchanti. Ummujjanaṃ pana nimujjanamantarena natthīti avinābhāvato nimujjanampi te karontiyeva. Yepi ‘‘ekanimujjaneneva pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, tepi ekavārameva nimujjitvā vuttanayeneva avinābhāvato ummujjanampi katvā pakkamanti. Apare ‘‘punappunaṃ ummujjananimujjanāni katvā nahāte pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, te kālena kālaṃ ummujjananimujjanāni karonti. Te sabbepi sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ummujjantipi nimujjantipi ummujjananimujjanampi karontī’’ti. Ettha ca kiñcāpi nimujjanapubbakaṃ ummujjanaṃ, nimujjanameva pana karontā katipayā, ummujjanaṃ tadubhayañca karontā bahūti tesaṃ yebhuyyabhāvadassanatthaṃ ummujjanaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ.

46-49. Jaṭilā means ascetics. Here they are called "jaṭilā" because of wearing matted hair. Antaraṭṭhakāsu himapātasamaye means during the eight nights in between the inner weeks of the cold season, four at the end of the month of Māgha, and four at the beginning of the month of Phagguna, at the time of snowfall. Nerañjarāya ummujjantī means some, with their whole bodies submerged first in that water regarded as a sacred bathing place, then emerging, rise up and float. Nimujjantī means they sink down into the water with their heads. Ummujjananimujjanampi karontī means they also do emerging and submerging again and again. Therein, some have the view that "purification from evil occurs with just one emerging," so they only do emerging and then leave. But emerging is not possible without submerging, thus they certainly do submerging as well due to inseparability. Those who have the view that "purification from evil occurs with just one submerging," they too, submerging just once, leave doing emerging as well in the manner already said due to inseparability. Others have the view that "purification from evil occurs having bathed doing emerging and submerging again and again," they do emerging and submerging from time to time. Having in mind all of them, it was said "ummujjantipi nimujjantipi ummujjananimujjanampi karontī". And here, although emerging comes after submerging, there are only a few who do only submerging, but many do emerging and both of them, thus to show their majority, emerging was said first.

50-51.Udakavāhakoti udakogho.Reṇuhatāyāti rajogatāya, rajokiṇṇāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Neva ca kho tvaṃ kassapa arahāti etena tadā kassapassa asekkhabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati,nāpi arahattamaggasamāpannoti etena sekkhabhāvaṃ. Ubhayenapissa anariyabhāvameva dīpeti.Sāpi te paṭipadā natthi, yāya tvaṃ arahā vā assasi arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannoti iminā panassa kalyāṇaputhujjanabhāvampi paṭikkhipati. Tatthapaṭipadāti sīlavisuddhiādayo cha visuddhiyo. Paṭipajjati etāya ariyamaggotipaṭipadā. Assasīti bhaveyyāsi.Cirapaṭikāti cirakālato paṭṭhāya, nāgadamanato paṭṭhāyāti attho.Khārikājamissanti etthakhārīti araṇīkamaṇḍalusūciādayo tāpasaparikkhārā, taṃ haraṇakājaṃkhārikājaṃ. Aggihutamissanti dabbiādiaggipūjopakaraṇaṃ.

50-51. Udakavāhako means a flood of water. Reṇuhatāyā means struck by dust, it is said to be covered with dust. Neva ca kho tvaṃ kassapa arahā with this, he denies Kassapa's state of non-training at that time, nāpi arahattamaggasamāpanno with this, the state of training. With both, he reveals his state of being non-noble. Sāpi te paṭipadā natthi, yāya tvaṃ arahā vā assasi arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpanno with this, he denies his state of being a virtuous worldling as well. Therein, paṭipadā means the six purifications beginning with purity of virtue. Paṭipajjati etāya ariyamaggoti paṭipadā. Assasī means you would be. Cirapaṭikā means from a long time, from the time of subduing the Nāga. Khārikājamissanti here, khārī means the requisites of ascetics such as the fire-drills, water pots, needles, etc., the work of carrying that is khārikājaṃ. Aggihutamissanti means the equipment for fire worship such as ladles etc.

52-53.Upasaggoti upaddavo. Idāni aḍḍhuḍḍhāni pāṭihāriyasahassāni ekato gaṇetvā dassetuṃ‘‘bhagavato adhiṭṭhānena pañca kaṭṭhasatāni na phāliyiṃsū’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Nāgadamanādīni pana soḷasa pāṭihāriyāni idha na gaṇitāni, tehi saddhiṃ soḷasātirekaaḍḍhuḍḍhapāṭihāriyasahassānīti veditabbaṃ.

52-53. Upasaggo means trouble. Now, to show the one and a half thousand miracles together by counting them one by one, the passage beginning with "bhagavato adhiṭṭhānena pañca kaṭṭhasatāni na phāliyiṃsū" etc., was begun. However, the sixteen miracles beginning with the subduing of the Nāga etc., were not counted here, it should be understood that with them there are one thousand five hundred and sixteen miracles.

Ādittapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
Ādittapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā

54.Idāni tassa bhikkhusahassassa ādittapariyāyadesanāya arahattappattiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘atha khobhagavā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthagayāyaṃ viharati gayāsīseti gayānāmikāya nadiyā avidūre bhavattā gāmo gayā nāma, tassaṃ gayāyaṃ viharati. Samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Gayāgāmassa hi avidūre gayāti ekā pokkharaṇīpi atthi nadīpi gayāsīsanāmako hatthikumbhasadiso piṭṭhipāsāṇopi. Yattha bhikkhusahassassa okāso pahoti, bhagavā tattha viharati. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘gayāsīse’’ti, gayāgāmassa āsanne gayāsīsanāmake piṭṭhipāsāṇe viharatīti vuttaṃ hoti.Bhikkhū āmantesīti tesaṃ sappāyadhammadesanaṃ vicinitvā taṃ desessāmīti āmantesi. Bhagavā hi taṃ iddhimayapattacīvaradharaṃ samaṇasahassaṃ ādāya gayāsīsaṃ gantvā tena parivārito nisīditvā ‘‘katarā nu kho etesaṃ dhammakathā sappāyā’’ti cintento ‘‘ime sāyaṃ pātaṃ aggiṃ paricaranti, imesaṃ dvādasāyatanāni ādittāni sampajjalitāni viya katvā dassessāmi, evaṃ ime arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ sakkhissantī’’ti sanniṭṭhānamakāsi. Atha nesaṃ tathā desetuṃ ‘‘sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, āditta’’ntiādinā imaṃ ādittapariyāyaṃ abhāsi.

54. Now, to show the attainment of Arahatship by that thousand bhikkhus through the discourse on the Adittapariyāya, the passage beginning with "atha kho bhagavā" etc., was begun. Therein, gayāyaṃ viharati gayāsīse means he dwells in Gayā, a village named Gayā because it is not far from the Gayā river. This is a locative of proximity. Indeed, near the village of Gayā there is also a pond called Gayā, a river, and a stone plateau resembling an elephant's head called Gayāsīsa. The Blessed One dwells there where there is space enough for the thousand bhikkhus. Therefore, it was said "gayāsīse", it is said that he dwells on the stone plateau named Gayāsīsa near the village of Gayā. Bhikkhū āmantesī means he addressed the bhikkhus, thinking "I will discern the teaching that is suitable for them and teach it." Indeed, the Blessed One, taking that thousand monks who were wearing robes and carrying bowls created by psychic power, went to Gayāsīsa, and sitting down surrounded by them, thinking "Which Dhamma talk is suitable for these?", he made the determination, "I will show them the twelve sense bases as if they were blazing and burning, in this way they will be able to attain Arahatship". Then, to teach them in that way, he spoke this Adittapariyāya, beginning with "sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, āditta" etc.

Tattha (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.23) sabbaṃ nāma catubbidhaṃ sabbasabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ padesasabbanti. Tattha –

Therein (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.23) sabbaṃ (all) is of four kinds: sabba-sabbaṃ (all of all), āyatana-sabbaṃ (all of the sense bases), sakkāya-sabbaṃ (all of the existing body), and padesa-sabbaṃ (all in a region). Therein –

‘‘Na tassa addiṭṭhamidhatthi kiñci;

"For him, there is nothing here unseen;
And nothing unknown, unknowable;
He has directly known all that is to be guided;
Therefore, the Tathāgata is all-seeing." (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. dhotakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 32; paṭi. ma. 1.121) –

sabbasabbaṃnāma. ‘‘Sabbaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi, taṃ suṇāthā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.23) idaṃāyatanasabbaṃnāma. ‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.1) idaṃsakkāyasabbaṃnāma. ‘‘Sabbadhammesu vā paṭhamasamannāhāro uppajjati cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ tajjā manoviññāṇadhātū’’ti idaṃpadesasabbaṃnāma. Iti pañcārammaṇamattaṃ padesasabbaṃ, tebhūmakā dhammā sakkāyasabbaṃ, catubhūmakā dhammā āyatanasabbaṃ, yaṃ kiñci neyyaṃ sabbasabbaṃ. Padesasabbaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti tassa tebhūmakadhammesupi ekadesassa asaṅgaṇhanato. Sakkāyasabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti lokuttaradhammānaṃ asaṅgaṇhanato. Āyatanasabbaṃ sabbasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Kasmā? Yasmā āyatanasabbena catubhūmakadhammāva pariggahitā, na lakkhaṇapaññattiyoti. Imasmiṃ pana sutte āyatanasabbaṃ adhippetaṃ, tatthāpi idha vipassanupagadhammāva gahetabbā.

is called sabba-sabbaṃ. "Sabbaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi, taṃ suṇāthā"ti (saṃ. ni. 4.23) this is called āyatana-sabbaṃ. "Sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī"ti (ma. ni. 1.1) this is called sakkāya-sabbaṃ. "Sabbadhammesu vā paṭhamasamannāhāro uppajjati cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ tajjā manoviññāṇadhātū"ti this is called padesa-sabbaṃ. Thus, padesa-sabbaṃ is only the five sense objects, sakkāya-sabbaṃ is the three planes of existence, āyatana-sabbaṃ is the four planes of existence, and sabbasabbaṃ is whatever is to be guided. Padesa-sabbaṃ does not reach sakkāya-sabbaṃ because it does not include even a part of the three-plane phenomena. Sakkāya-sabbaṃ does not reach āyatana-sabbaṃ because it does not include supramundane phenomena. Āyatana-sabbaṃ does not reach sabba-sabbaṃ. Why? Because only the four-plane phenomena are included by āyatana-sabbaṃ, not the characteristic-concepts. But in this sutta, āyatana-sabbaṃ is intended, even therein, only the phenomena related to insight should be taken.

Cakkhūti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 596; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.1) dve cakkhūni ñāṇacakkhu ceva maṃsacakkhu ca. Tattha ñāṇacakkhu pañcavidhaṃ buddhacakkhu dhammacakkhu samantacakkhu dibbacakkhu paññācakkhūti. Tesubuddhacakkhunāma āsayānusayañāṇañceva indriyaparopariyattañāṇañca, yaṃ ‘‘buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento’’ti (dī. ni. 2.69; ma. ni. 1.283) āgataṃ.Dhammacakkhunāma heṭṭhimā tayo maggā tīṇi ca phalāni, yaṃ ‘‘virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.355; saṃ. ni. 5.1081) āgataṃ.Samantacakkhunāma sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘pāsādamāruyha samantacakkhū’’ti (dī. ni. 2.70; ma. ni. 1.282) āgataṃ.Dibbacakkhunāma ālokavaḍḍhanena uppannañāṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.148, 284) āgataṃ.Paññācakkhunāma catusaccaparicchedakañāṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘cakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15) āgataṃ. Maṃsacakkhupi duvidhaṃ sasambhāracakkhu pasādacakkhūti. Tesu yvāyaṃ akkhikūpake akkhipaṭalehi parivārito maṃsapiṇḍo, yattha catasso dhātuyo vaṇṇagandharasojā sambhavo jīvitaṃ bhāvo cakkhuppasādo kāyappasādoti saṅkhepato terasa sambhārā honti, vitthārato pana catasso dhātuyo vaṇṇagandharasojā sambhavoti ime nava catusamuṭṭhānavasena chattiṃsa, jīvitaṃ bhāvo cakkhuppasādo kāyappasādoti ime kammasamuṭṭhānā tāva cattāroti cattālīsa sambhārā honti, idaṃsasambhāracakkhunāma. Yaṃ panettha setamaṇḍalaparicchinnena kaṇhamaṇḍalena parivārite diṭṭhimaṇḍale sanniviṭṭhaṃ rūpadassanasamatthaṃ pasādamattaṃ, idaṃpasādacakkhunāma. Tassa tato paresañca sotādīnaṃ vitthārakathāvisuddhimagge(visuddhi. 2.436) vuttāva.

Cakkhu (eye): (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 596; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.1) Two kinds of eyes: the wisdom-eye (ñāṇacakkhu) and the flesh-eye (maṃsacakkhu). Among these, the wisdom-eye is fivefold: Buddha-eye (buddhacakkhu), Dhamma-eye (dhammacakkhu), Samanta-eye (samantacakkhu), divine-eye (dibbacakkhu), and wisdom-eye (paññācakkhu). Among these, Buddha-eye is the knowledge of inclinations and underlying tendencies, and the knowledge of the superior or inferior nature of faculties, which comes as "beholding the world with the Buddha-eye" (dī. ni. 2.69; ma. ni. 1.283). Dhamma-eye is the lower three paths and the three fruits, which comes as "the stainless, immaculate Dhamma-eye arose" (dī. ni. 1.355; saṃ. ni. 5.1081). Samanta-eye is the knowledge of omniscience, which comes as "having ascended the palace, with the Samanta-eye" (dī. ni. 2.70; ma. ni. 1.282). Divine-eye is the knowledge arisen from the increase of light, which comes as "with the divine, purified eye" (ma. ni. 1.148, 284). Wisdom-eye is the knowledge that discerns the Four Noble Truths, which comes as "the eye arose" (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15). The flesh-eye is also twofold: the eye with its components (sasambhāracakkhu) and the sensitive eye (pasādacakkhu). Among these, this mass of flesh in the socket of the eye, surrounded by the layers of the eye, where the four elements, color, odor, taste, nutriment, origin, life, being, visual sensitivity, and bodily sensitivity—in brief, thirteen components—exist; in detail, these nine: the four elements, color, odor, taste, nutriment, and origin, are thirty-six due to arising from the four causes; and these four: life, being, visual sensitivity, and bodily sensitivity, are karma-originated, so there are forty-four components, this is called eye with its components. The mere sensitivity (pasādamattaṃ) situated in the visual field, surrounded by the black circle bounded by the white circle, capable of seeing forms, is called sensitive eye. The detailed account of that and the other senses beginning with hearing is already mentioned in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 2.436).

‘‘cakkhu āditta’’ntiādimāha. Tatthaādittanti padittaṃ, sampajjalitaṃ ekādasahi aggīhi ekajālībhūtanti attho. Cakkhusannissitaṃ viññāṇaṃcakkhuviññāṇaṃ,cakkhussa vā kāraṇabhūtassa viññāṇaṃcakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Kāmaṃ rūpālokamanasikārādayopi tassa viññāṇassa kāraṇaṃ, te pana sādhāraṇakāraṇaṃ, cakkhu asādhāraṇanti asādhāraṇakāraṇenāyaṃ niddeso yathā ‘‘yavaṅkuro’’ti.Sotaviññāṇādīsupi eseva nayo. Cakkhusannissito phassocakkhusamphasso,cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttaphassassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Sotasamphassādīsupi eseva nayo.Cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjativedayitanti cakkhusamphassaṃ mūlapaccayaṃ katvā uppannā sampaṭicchanasantīraṇavoṭṭhabbanajavanavedanā. Cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttāya pana vedanāya cakkhusamphassassa paccayabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Cakkhusamphasso hi sahajātāya vedanāya sahajātādivasena, asahajātāya upanissayādivasena paccayo hoti. Teneva ‘‘cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṃ sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā adukkhamasukhaṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ.Sotadvāravedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha panamanoti bhavaṅgacittaṃ manodvārassa adhippetattā.Dhammāti dhammārammaṇaṃ.Manoviññāṇanti sahāvajjanakaṃ javanaṃ.Manosamphassoti bhavaṅgasahajāto phasso.Vedayitanti āvajjanavedanāya saddhiṃ javanavedanā. Bhavaṅgasampayuttāya pana vedanāya gahaṇe vattabbameva natthi. Āvajjanaṃ vā bhavaṅgato amocetvāmanoti sāvajjanaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.Dhammāti dhammārammaṇameva.Manoviññāṇanti javanaviññāṇaṃ.Manosamphassoti bhavaṅgāvajjanasahajāto phasso.Vedayitanti javanasahajātā vedanā, bhavaṅgāvajjanasahajātāpi vaṭṭatiyeva.

He now says "The eye is burning," etc. There, burning means ignited, blazing, made into a single flame by the eleven fires. The consciousness dependent on the eye is eye-consciousness; or the consciousness that is the cause of the eye is eye-consciousness. Desire, form, light, attention, etc., are also causes of that consciousness, but those are common causes; the eye is the uncommon cause, therefore this designation is by way of the uncommon cause, just as "barley sprout." The same method applies to ear-consciousness etc. The contact dependent on the eye is eye-contact, this is a designation for the contact associated with eye-consciousness. The same method applies to ear-contact etc. What is felt arises conditioned by eye-contact: the feeling that arises having made eye-contact the root condition, namely, receiving, investigating, determining, and javana feelings. But there is no need to mention the conditionality of eye-contact for feeling associated with eye-consciousness. For eye-contact is a condition for co-arisen feeling by way of co-arisenness, etc., and for non-co-arisen feeling by way of dependence, etc. Therefore, it was said, "What is felt arises conditioned by eye-contact, be it pleasant, painful, or neither-painful-nor-pleasant." The same method applies to feeling at the ear-door etc. Here, however, mind means the subconscious (bhavaṅga) mind, because it is meant to be the door of the mind. Mental-objects means mental-object (dhammārammaṇa). Mind-consciousness means javana together with adverting (āvajjana). Mind-contact is the contact co-arisen with the subconscious. What is felt is javana feeling together with adverting feeling. But there is no need to mention the inclusion of feeling associated with the subconscious. Or, without releasing from the subconscious adverting, mind should be seen as subconscious with adverting. Mental-objects means just mental-object. Mind-consciousness means javana-consciousness. Mind-contact is the contact co-arisen with subconscious adverting. What is felt is the feeling co-arisen with javana, it also applies to the feeling co-arisen with subconscious adverting.

Rāgagginātiādīsu rāgova anudahanaṭṭhena aggītirāgaggi. Rāgo hi tikhiṇaṃ hutvā uppajjamāno satte anudahati jhāpeti, tasmā ‘‘aggī’’ti vuccati. Itaresupi dvīsu eseva nayo. Tatrimāni vatthūni (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305; vibha. aṭṭha. 924) – ekā daharabhikkhunī cittalapabbatavihāre uposathāgāraṃ gantvā dvārapālarūpaṃ olokayamānā ṭhitā. Athassā anto rāgo tikhiṇataro hutvā uppanno, tasmā taṃsamuṭṭhānā tejodhātu ativiya tikhiṇabhāvena saddhiṃ attanā sahajātadhammehi hadayapadesaṃ jhāpesi yathā taṃ bāhirā tejodhātu sannissayaṃ, tena sā bhikkhunī jhāyitvā kālamakāsi. Bhikkhuniyo gacchamānā ‘‘ayaṃ daharā ṭhitā, pakkosatha na’’nti āhaṃsu. Ekā gantvā ‘‘kasmā ṭhitāsī’’ti hatthe gaṇhi. Gahitamattā parivattitvā papatā. Idaṃ tāva rāgassa anudahanatāya vatthu.

In with the fire of lust etc., lust itself is fire because of its nature of burning, thus fire of lust. For lust, becoming sharp, burns and scorches beings as it arises, therefore it is called "fire." The same method applies to the other two. There are these instances (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305; vibha. aṭṭha. 924): A young bhikkhuni went to the uposatha hall in the Cittala Mountain Monastery and stood looking at the door-keeper statue. Then lust arose very sharply within her, therefore the heat element arising from that, together with its co-arisen phenomena, scorched the heart region with an exceedingly sharp intensity, just as external heat element would burn its support; so that bhikkhuni, having been burnt, passed away. The bhikkhunis, going, said, "This young one is standing, call her to perform uposatha." One went and took her hand, asking "Why are you standing?" As soon as she was touched, she fell down turning around. This is an instance of lust's burning nature.

Dosassa pana anudahanatāya manopadosikā devā daṭṭhabbā. Tesu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.47-48) kira eko devaputto ‘‘nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmī’’ti saparivāro rathena vīthiṃ paṭipajjati. Athañño nikkhamanto taṃ purato gacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘bho ayaṃ kapaṇo adiṭṭhapubbaṃ viya etaṃ disvā pītiyā uddhumāto viya bhijjamāno viya ca gacchatī’’ti kujjhati. Purato gacchantopi nivattitvā taṃ kuddhaṃ disvā kuddhā nāma suvijānā hontīti kuddhabhāvamassa ñatvā ‘‘tvaṃ kuddho mayhaṃ kiṃ karissasi, ayaṃ sampatti mayā dānasīlādīnaṃ vasena laddhā, na tuyhaṃ vasenā’’ti paṭikujjhati. Ekasmiñhi kuddhe itaro akuddho rakkhati. Kuddhassa hi so kodho itarasmiṃ akujjhante anupādāno ekavārameva uppattiyā anāsevano cāvetuṃ na sakkoti, udakaṃ patvā aggi viya nibbāyati, tasmā akuddho taṃ cavanato rakkhati. Ubhosu pana kuddhesu ekassa kodho itarassa paccayo hoti, tassapi kodho itarassa paccayo hotīti ubho kandantānaṃyeva orodhānaṃ cavanti. Ubhosu hi kuddhesu bhiyyo bhiyyo aññamaññamhi parivaḍḍhanavasena tikhiṇasamudācāro nissayadahanaraso kodho uppajjamāno hadayavatthuṃ niddahanto accantasukhumālaṃ karajakāyaṃ vināseti, tato sakalopi attabhāvo antaradhāyati. Idaṃ dosassa anudahanatāya vatthu.

For the burning nature of hatred, the Manopadosika devas should be seen. It is said that among them (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.47-48), a certain deva-son, with his retinue, was proceeding along the street in a chariot, thinking "I will play at the festival." Then another one, coming out, saw him going in front and became angry, saying, "This wretch is going as if he has never seen this before, as if he is bursting with joy and about to break." The one going in front, turning back, saw him angry and knew his angry state, because angry people are easily recognized; he retorted, "What will you do to me angry one? This attainment has been obtained by me through giving, morality, etc., not through your power." For when one is angry, the other who is not angry protects. For the anger of the angry one, in the other who is not angry, being without fuel, and unpracticed by arising only once, is not able to remove him, but subsides like fire meeting water; therefore, the one who is not angry protects him from passing away. But when both are angry, the anger of one becomes a condition for the other, and the anger of the latter becomes a condition for the former, so both pass away like women wailing in the inner chambers. For when both are angry, the sharp arising of anger, growing more and more in each other, destroys the extremely delicate body by burning the heart-base, then the entire existence disappears. This is an instance of hatred's burning nature.

Mohassa pana anudahanatāya khiḍḍāpadosikā devā daṭṭhabbā. Mohavasena hi tesaṃ satisammoso hoti, tasmā khiḍḍāvasena āhārakālaṃ ativattetvā kālaṃ karonti. Te (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.45-46) kira puññavisesādhigatena mahantena attano sirivibhavena nakkhattaṃ kīḷantā tāya sampattimahantatāya ‘‘āhāraṃ paribhuñjimha, na paribhuñjimhā’’tipi na jānanti. Atha ekāhārātikkamanato paṭṭhāya nirantaraṃ khādantāpi pivantāpi cavantiyeva na tiṭṭhanti. Kasmā? Kammajatejassa balavatāya. Manussānañhi kammajatejo mando, karajakāyo balavā. Tesaṃ tejassa mandatāya karajakāyassa balavatāya sattāhampi atikkamitvā uṇhodakaacchayāguādīhi sakkā vatthuṃ upatthambhetuṃ. Devānaṃ pana tejo balavā hoti uḷārapuññanibbattattā uḷāragarusiniddhasudhāhārajiraṇato ca, karajaṃ mandaṃ mudusukhumālabhāvato. Teneva hi bhagavā indasālaguhāyaṃ pakatipathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhātuṃ asakkontaṃ sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ ‘‘oḷārikakāyaṃ adhiṭṭhāhī’’ti āha, tasmā te ekaṃ āhāravelaṃ atikkamitvā saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Yathā nāma gimhānaṃ majjhanhike tattapāsāṇe ṭhapitaṃ padumaṃ vā uppalaṃ vā sāyanhasamaye ghaṭasatenapi siñciyamānaṃ pākatikaṃ na hoti vinassatiyeva, evameva pacchā nirantaraṃ khādantāpi pivantāpi cavantiyeva na tiṭṭhanti.

For the burning nature of delusion, the Khiddāpadosika devas should be seen. For due to delusion, they have loss of mindfulness, therefore they pass away having neglected the time for food due to playing. It is said that they (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.45-46), playing at the festival with the great glory and splendor they had attained through a special merit, do not even know, due to the greatness of that attainment, "Whether we have eaten or not." Then, continuously eating and drinking from the time of skipping one meal, they keep passing away and do not last. Why? Because the karma-heat is strong. For the karma-heat of humans is weak, and the physical body is strong. Because their heat is weak and the physical body is strong, it is possible to sustain the existence even after seven days have passed, with hot water, thin rice gruel, etc. But the heat of devas is strong because it is produced by great merit and because they digest abundant, rich, and smooth divine food, and the physical body is weak due to being soft and subtle. Therefore, the Blessed One said to Sakka, the king of devas, who was unable to stand on the natural earth in Indasāla cave, "Establish an coarse body;" therefore, they are unable to remain having skipped one meal. Just as a lotus or a water lily placed on a hot stone at noon in the summer, even if watered with a hundred pots in the evening, does not become natural but perishes; in the same way, even if they continuously eat and drink afterwards, they keep passing away and do not last.

Ko pana tesaṃ āhāro, kā āhāravelāti? Sabbesampi kāmāvacaradevānaṃ sudhā āhāro, so heṭṭhimehi heṭṭhimehi uparimānaṃ uparimānaṃ paṇītatamo hoti. Taṃ yathāsakaṃ divasavasena divase divase bhuñjanti. Keci pana ‘‘biḷārapadappamāṇaṃ sudhāhāraṃ bhuñjanti. So jivhāya ṭhapitamatto yāva kesagganakhaggā kāyaṃ pharati, tesaṃyeva divasavasena sattadivasaṃ yāpanasamatthova hotī’’ti vadanti.

What is their food, and when is the time for food? For all the devas in the realm of desire, nectar (sudhā) is the food, and it is more and more exquisite for the lower ones than for the upper ones. They eat it day by day according to their respective days. Some say, "They eat nectar-food the size of a cat's paw. Once placed on the tongue, it pervades the body up to the tips of the hairs and nails; it is enough to sustain them for seven days according to their respective days."

Ke pana te khiḍḍāpadosikā nāma devāti? Ime nāmāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vicāraṇā natthi, ‘‘kammajatejo balavā hoti, karajaṃ manda’’nti avisesena vuttattā pana ye keci kabaḷīkārāhārūpajīvino evaṃ karonti, te evaṃ cavantīti veditabbā. Keci panāhu ‘‘nimmānaratiparanimmitavasavattino te devā. Khiḍḍāya padussanamatteneva hete khiḍḍāpadosikāti vuttā’’ti. Manopadosikā pana cātumahārājikāti aṭṭhakathāyameva vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘khiḍḍāpadosikāpi cātumahārājikāyevā’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ tāva rāgādayo tayo anudahanaṭṭhena ‘‘aggī’’ti veditabbā. Jātiādittayaṃ pana nānappakāradukkhavatthubhāvena anudahanato aggi. Sokādīnaṃ anudahanatā pākaṭāyeva. Sesamettha vuttanayameva. Iti imasmiṃ sutte dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ ekādasahi aggīhi ādittabhāvena dukkhamatāya dukkhabhāvassa kathitattā.

Which devas are called Khiddāpadosika? There is no investigation in the commentary about what these names are, but it should be understood that any beings who live on material food and do this, pass away in this way, because it is said without distinction that "the karma-heat is strong, and the physical body is weak." Some, however, say, "Those devas are Nimmānaratī and Paranimmitavasavattī. These are called Khiddāpadosika merely because of corruption through play." But it is said in the commentary itself that Manopadosika are the Cātumahārājika. Some, however, say, "The Khiddāpadosika are also Cātumahārājika." In this way, the three, lust, etc., should be understood as "fires" because of their nature of burning. The three fires beginning with birth, however, are fire because of their nature of burning due to being objects of various kinds of suffering. The burning nature of sorrow, etc., is indeed evident. The remainder here is as stated in the previous method. Thus, in this sutta, the characteristic of suffering is described because the state of suffering is described by way of the eyes, etc., being burnt by the eleven fires.

Ādittapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Ādittapariyāya Sutta is finished.

Uruvelapāṭihāriyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Uruvelā Pāṭihāriya Story is finished.

Bimbisārasamāgamakathāvaṇṇanā
The Commentary on the Bimbisāra Samāgama Story

55.Idāni ‘‘atha kho bhagavā gayāsīse yathābhirantaṃ viharitvā’’tiādīsu yā sā anuttānapadavaṇṇanā, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘laṭṭhivaneti tāluyyāne’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthatāluyyāneti tālarukkhānaṃ bahubhāvato evaṃladdhanāme uyyāne.Appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṃ paṇāmetvātiādīsuañjaliṃ paṇāmetvāti ye ubhatopakkhikā, te sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Te kira evaṃ cintayiṃsu ‘‘sace no micchādiṭṭhikā codessanti ‘kasmā tumhe samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ vanditthā’ti, tesaṃ ‘kiṃ añjalimattakaraṇenapi vanditaṃ hotī’ti vakkhāma. Sace no sammādiṭṭhikā codessanti ‘kasmā bhagavantaṃ na vanditthā’ti, ‘kiṃ sīsena bhūmiṃ paharanteneva vanditaṃ hoti, nanu añjalikammampi vandanā evā’ti vakkhāmā’’ti.Nāmagottaṃ sāvetvāti ‘‘bho gotama, ahaṃ asukassa putto datto nāma mitto nāma idha āgato’’ti vadantā nāmaṃ sāventi nāma, ‘‘bho gotama, ahaṃ vāseṭṭho nāma kaccāno nāma idhāgato’’ti vadantā gottaṃ sāventi nāma. Ete kira daliddā jiṇṇakulaputtā parisamajjhe nāmagottavasena pākaṭā bhavissāmāti evaṃ akaṃsu. Ye pana tuṇhībhūtā nisīdiṃsu, te kerāṭikā ceva andhabālā ca. Tattha kerāṭikā ‘‘ekaṃ dve kathāsallāpe karonte vissāsiko hoti, atha vissāse sati ekaṃ dve bhikkhā adātuṃ na yutta’’nti tato attānaṃ mocentā tuṇhī nisīdanti. Andhabālā aññāṇatāyeva avakkhittā mattikāpiṇḍo viya yattha katthaci tuṇhībhūtā nisīdanti.

55. Now, beginning with "Then the Blessed One, having stayed at Gayāsīsa as long as he pleased," etc., to show that which is the commentary on the passages with easy meanings, "In Laṭṭhivana, in the Tālu Grove," etc., was begun. There, in the Tālu Grove means in the grove that got that name because of the abundance of tāla trees. In "Some, directing their joined palms towards where the Blessed One was," etc., directing their joined palms means this was said referring to those who were on both sides. It is said that they thought thus, "If those with wrong views will accuse us, 'Why did you salute the ascetic Gotama?', we will say to them, 'Is it only by doing just the joining of palms that one salutes?' If those with right views will accuse us, 'Why did you not salute the Blessed One?', 'Is it only by striking the ground with the head that one salutes? Is not the act of joining palms also a salutation?'" Announcing name and clan means announcing the name by saying, "Venerable Gotama, I am so-and-so, son of so-and-so, named Datta, named Mitta, I have come here;" announcing the clan by saying, "Venerable Gotama, I am named Vāseṭṭha, named Kaccāna, I have come here." It is said that these poor, elderly sons of good families did so thinking that they would become known in the assembly by name and clan. Those who sat silently were either deceitful or blindly foolish. Among them, the deceitful ones sit silently, freeing themselves from the thought that "one becomes trustworthy when making one or two conversational exchanges, then it is not proper to not give one or two alms when there is trust." The blindly foolish ones sit silently anywhere like a lump of clay thrown away, due to ignorance.

Kisakovadānoti ettha kisakānaṃ ovadānokisakovadānoti imaṃ tāva atthavikappaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘tāpasacariyāya kisasarīrattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.Aggihuttanti aggiparicaraṇaṃ. Rūpādayova idha kāmanīyaṭṭhena ‘‘kāmā’’ti vuttāti āha‘‘ete rūpādayo kāme’’ti.Yaññā abhivadantīti yāgahetu ijjhantīti vadanti.Upadhīsūti ettha cattāro upadhī kāmupadhi khandhupadhi kilesupadhi abhisaṅkhārupadhīti. Kāmāpi hi ‘‘yaṃ pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ kāmānaṃ assādo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.167) evaṃ vuttassa sukhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato upadhīyati ettha sukhanti iminā vacanatthena ‘‘upadhī’’ti vuccanti. Khandhāpi khandhamūlakassa dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, kilesāpi apāyadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, abhisaṅkhārāpi bhavadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato ‘‘upadhī’’ti vuccanti, tesu khandhupadhi idhādhippetoti āha‘‘khandhupadhīsu malanti ñatvā’’ti.Yaññā malameva vadantīti yāgahetu malameva ijjhatīti vadanti.Yiṭṭheti mahāyāge.Huteti divase divase kattabbaaggiparicaraṇe.Kāmabhave asattanti kāmabhave alaggaṃ, tabbinimuttanti vuttaṃ hoti.

Here, Kisakovadāna means the instruction for the emaciated ones. To show this alternative meaning, "Because of having an emaciated body due to ascetic practices," etc., was said. Fire sacrifice means tending the fire. He says that the forms, etc., themselves are called "desires" here in the sense of being desirable, "These forms, etc., are desires." They praise the sacrifice means they say that it prospers because of the sacrifice. In the attachments here, the four attachments are: attachment to sense-pleasures, attachment to aggregates, attachment to defilements, and attachment to karma formations. For sense-pleasures are also called "attachment" in the statement "the happiness and joy that arise dependent on the five sense-pleasures, this is the gratification in sense-pleasures" (ma. ni. 1.167), because of being the basis of happiness thus, they are called "attachment" by this meaning of "happiness is attached here." The aggregates are also called "attachment" because of being the basis of suffering rooted in the aggregates, the defilements because of being the basis of suffering in the lower realms, and the karma formations because of being the basis of suffering in existence. Among these, the attachment to aggregates is meant here, thus he says "Having known the attachment to aggregates to be impurity." They praise impurity as the sacrifice means they say that impurity itself prospers because of the sacrifice. In the great sacrifice. In the oblation means in the daily tending of the fire that should be done. Unattached to sensual existence means unattached to sensual existence, that is, freed from it.

57-58.Āsīsanāti patthanā. Dibbasuvaṇṇesupi siṅgīsuvaṇṇassa sabbaseṭṭhattā‘‘siṅgīnikkhasavaṇṇo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yatheva hi manussaparibhoge suvaṇṇe yuttikataṃ hīnaṃ, tato rasaviddhaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, rasaviddhato ākaruppannaṃ, tato yaṃ kiñci dibbaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, evaṃ dibbasuvaṇṇesupi cāmīkarato sātakumbhaṃ, sātakumbhato jambunadaṃ, jambunadato siṅgīsuvaṇṇaṃ, tasmā taṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ.Siṅgīnikkhanti ca nikkhaparimāṇena siṅgīsuvaṇṇena kataṃ suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ. Ūnakanikkhena katañhi ghaṭṭanamajjanakkhamaṃ na hoti, atirekena kataṃ ghaṭṭanamajjanaṃ khamati, vaṇṇavantaṃ pana na hoti, pharusadhātukaṃ khāyati, nikkhena kataṃ ghaṭṭanamajjanañceva khamati vaṇṇavantañca hoti. Nikkhaṃ pana vīsatisuvaṇṇanti keci. Pañcavīsatisuvaṇṇanti apare.Majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃpana ‘‘nikkhaṃ nāma pañcasuvaṇṇā’’ti vuttaṃ.Suvaṇṇonāma catudharaṇanti vadanti.

57-58. Āsīsanā means wishing. Among divine golds, Siṅgī gold is the best of all, hence it is said "siṅgīnikkhasavaṇṇo". Just as among golds used by humans, alloyed gold is inferior, refined gold is superior to that, gold from a mine is superior to refined gold, and any divine gold is superior to that; similarly, among divine golds, Sātakumbha is superior to Cāmīkara, Jambunada is superior to Sātakumbha, and Siṅgī gold is superior to Jambunada. Therefore, it is the best of all. Siṅgīnikkha means a gold plate made of Siṅgī gold to the measure of a nikkha. If made with less than a nikkha, it will not withstand rubbing and polishing; if made with more, it withstands rubbing and polishing but is not lustrous, and appears to be of a coarse substance. If made exactly to the measure of a nikkha, it withstands both rubbing and polishing and is lustrous. Some say a nikkha is twenty suvaṇṇas. Others say twenty-five suvaṇṇas. However, in the Majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathā, it is said that "a nikkha is five suvaṇṇas." They say suvaṇṇa is four dharaṇas.

Dasasu ariyavāsesu vutthavāsoti –

Dasasu ariyavāsesu vutthavāso means dwelling in the ten noble abodes, which are:

‘‘Idha, (dī. ni. 3.348; a. ni. 10.20) bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti chaḷaṅgasamannāgato ekārakkho caturāpasseno panuṇṇapaccekasacco samavayasaṭṭhesano anāvilasaṅkappo passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro suvimuttacitto suvimuttapañño.

"Here, monks, a monk has abandoned the five hindrances, possesses six qualities, is guarded by one thing, has four supports, has cast off individually held truths, has relinquished craving in regard to sense-pleasures, is of unwavering resolve, has tranquilized his bodily functions, is well-liberated in mind, and is well-liberated in wisdom.

‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno kāmacchando pahīno hoti, byāpādo pahīno hoti, thinamiddhaṃ pahīnaṃ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīnaṃ hoti, vicikicchā pahīnā hoti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti.

"And how, monks, has a monk abandoned the five hindrances? Here, monks, a monk has abandoned sensual desire, has abandoned ill-will, has abandoned sloth and torpor, has abandoned restlessness and remorse, and has abandoned doubt. Thus, monks, a monk has abandoned the five hindrances.

‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Sotena saddaṃ sutvā…pe… ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyitvā… jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā… manasā dhammaṃ viññāya neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti.

"And how, monks, does a monk possess six qualities? Here, monks, a monk, seeing a form with the eye, is neither glad nor sad, but dwells with equanimity, mindful and clearly comprehending. Hearing a sound with the ear… smelling an odor with the nose… tasting a flavor with the tongue… feeling a tactile object with the body… cognizing a mental object with the mind, he is neither glad nor sad, but dwells with equanimity, mindful and clearly comprehending. Thus, monks, a monk possesses six qualities.

‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satārakkhena cetasā samannāgato hoti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti.

"And how, monks, is a monk guarded by one thing? Here, monks, a monk is endowed with mindfulness as his guard. Thus, monks, a monk is guarded by one thing.

‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṃ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṃ vinodeti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti.

"And how, monks, does a monk have four supports? Here, monks, a monk wisely uses one thing, wisely endures one thing, wisely avoids one thing, and wisely eliminates one thing. Thus, monks, a monk has four supports.

‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu panuṇṇapaccekasacco hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yāni tāni puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ puthupaccekasaccāni, sabbāni tāni nuṇṇāni honti panuṇṇāni cattāni vantāni muttāni pahīnāni paṭinissaṭṭhāni. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu panuṇṇapaccekasacco hoti.

"And how, monks, has a monk cast off individually held truths? Here, monks, a monk has rejected, abandoned, renounced, relinquished, and given up all the diverse individually held truths of various ascetics and brahmins, so that they are rejected and given up. Thus, monks, a monk has cast off individually held truths.

‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samavayasaṭṭhesano hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno kāmesanā pahīnā hoti, bhavesanā pahīnā hoti, brahmacariyesanā paṭippassaddhā. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samavayasaṭṭhesano hoti.

"And how, monks, has a monk relinquished craving in regard to sense-pleasures? Here, monks, a monk has abandoned craving for sensual pleasures, has abandoned craving for existence, and has stilled the quest for the holy life. Thus, monks, a monk has relinquished craving in regard to sense-pleasures.

‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu anāvilasaṅkappo hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno kāmasaṅkappo pahīno hoti, byāpādasaṅkappo pahīno hoti, vihiṃsāsaṅkappo pahīno hoti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu anāvilasaṅkappo hoti.

"And how, monks, is a monk of unwavering resolve? Here, monks, a monk has abandoned thoughts of sensual desire, has abandoned thoughts of ill-will, and has abandoned thoughts of harming. Thus, monks, a monk is of unwavering resolve.

‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro hoti.

"And how, monks, has a monk tranquilized his bodily functions? Here, monks, a monk, with the abandoning of pleasure and pain, and with the previous disappearance of joy and sorrow, enters and dwells in the fourth jhāna, which is purity of mindfulness due to equanimity, neither-painful-nor-pleasant. Thus, monks, a monk has tranquilized his bodily functions.

‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu suvimuttacitto hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno rāgācittaṃ vimuttaṃ hoti, dosā cittaṃ vimuttaṃ hoti, mohā cittaṃ vimuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu suvimuttacitto hoti.

"And how, monks, is a monk well-liberated in mind? Here, monks, the mind of a monk is liberated from lust, the mind is liberated from hatred, and the mind is liberated from delusion. Thus, monks, a monk is well-liberated in mind.

‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu suvimuttapañño hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘rāgo me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṃkato āyatiṃ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti, ‘doso me pahīno…pe… moho me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṃkato āyatiṃ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu suvimuttapañño hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348; a. ni. 10.20) –

"And how, monks, is a monk well-liberated in wisdom? Here, monks, a monk understands, ‘Lust in me is abandoned, its root is cut off, it is made like a palm stump, obliterated, and incapable of arising again in the future’; ‘Hatred in me is abandoned… delusion in me is abandoned, its root is cut off, it is made like a palm stump, obliterated, and incapable of arising again in the future.’ Thus, monks, a monk is well-liberated in wisdom."

Evamāgatesu dasasu ariyavāsesu vutthavāso.

Living in these ten noble abodes as described above.

ariyavāsāanariyānaṃ tādisānaṃ vāsānaṃ asambhavato. Ariyāti cettha ukkaṭṭhaniddesena khīṇāsavā gahitā.Ekārakkhoti ekā satisaṅkhātā ārakkhā etassāti ekārakkho. Khīṇāsavassa (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.348; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.20) hi tīsu dvāresu sabbakāle sati ārakkhakiccaṃ sādheti. Tenevassa carato ca tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṃ samitaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ hotīti vuccati.

Ariyavāsā (noble abodes), because such abodes are not possible for the ignoble. Here, "Ariya" is taken to mean arahants, by way of indicating excellence. Ekārakkho means one who has a single guard, namely, mindfulness. For an arahant, mindfulness at all times in the three doors fulfills the function of guarding. Therefore, it is said that the knowledge and vision is constantly present to him whether he is walking, standing, sleeping, or awake.

Caturāpassenoti cattāri apassenāni apassayā etassāti caturāpasseno.Saṅkhāyāti ñāṇena (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.308).Paṭisevatīti ñāṇena ñatvā sevitabbayuttakameva sevati. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvaraṃ paribhuñjatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58) nayena veditabbo.Saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāsetīti ñāṇena ñatvā adhivāsetabbayuttakameva adhivāseti. Vitthāro panettha ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso khamo hoti sītassā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.24) nayena veditabbo.Parivajjetīti ñāṇena ñatvā parivajjetabbayuttakameva parivajjeti. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso caṇḍaṃ hatthiṃ parivajjetī’’tiādinā nayena veditabbo.Vinodetīti ñāṇena ñatvā vinodetabbameva vinodeti nudati nīharati anto vasituṃ na deti. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā nayena veditabbo.

Caturāpasseno means one who has four supports; that is, he has four grounds of reliance. Saṅkhāyā means with knowledge. Paṭisevatī means he wisely knows and makes use of only what is appropriate to make use of. Its expansion should be understood in the manner of "Wisely reflecting, he uses the robe," etc. Saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāsetī means he wisely knows and endures only what is appropriate to endure. Its expansion should be understood in the manner of "Wisely reflecting, he is patient with cold," etc. Parivajjetī means he wisely knows and avoids only what is appropriate to avoid. Its expansion should be understood in the manner of "Wisely reflecting, he avoids a fierce elephant," etc. Vinodetī means he wisely knows and eliminates only what is appropriate to eliminate; he dispels it, drives it out, and does not allow it to dwell within. Its expansion should be understood in the manner of "He does not allow an arisen thought of sensual desire to persist," etc.

Panuṇṇapaccekasaccoti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.38; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.348) ‘‘idameva dassanaṃ saccaṃ, idameva sacca’’nti evaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ gahitattā paccekasaṅkhātāni diṭṭhisaccāni panuṇṇāni nīhaṭāni pahīnāni assāti panuṇṇapaccekasacco.Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānanti bahūnaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ. Ettha casamaṇāti pabbajjupagatā.Brāhmaṇāti bhovādino.Puthupaccekasaccānīti bahūni pāṭekkasaccāni, ‘‘idameva dassanaṃ saccaṃ, idameva sacca’’nti pāṭiyekkaṃ gahitāni bahūni saccānīti attho.Nuṇṇānīti nīhaṭāni.Panuṇṇānīti suṭṭhu nīhatāni.Cattānīti vissaṭṭhāni.Vantānīti vamitāni.Muttānīti chinnabandhanāni katāni.Pahīnānīti pajahitāni.Paṭinissaṭṭhānīti yathā na puna cittaṃ ārohanti, evaṃ paṭivissajjitāni. Sabbāneva cetāni ariyamaggādhigamato pubbe gahitassa diṭṭhiggāhassa vissaṭṭhabhāvavevacanāni.

Panuṇṇapaccekasacco (he has cast off individually held truths): because they are grasped individually as "This alone is the true view, this alone is the truth," therefore, the truths of views that are reckoned individually are cast off, removed, abandoned. Thus, he is one who has cast off individually held truths. Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ means of many ascetics and brahmins. Here, samaṇā means those who have gone forth. Brāhmaṇā means those who speak of becoming. Puthupaccekasaccānī means many individually held truths, meaning many truths grasped individually as "This alone is the true view, this alone is the truth." Nuṇṇānī means removed. Panuṇṇānī means well-removed. Cattānī means relinquished. Vantānī means vomited out. Muttānī means made free from bonds. Pahīnānī means abandoned. Paṭinissaṭṭhānī means completely discarded so that they do not arise in the mind again. All these are synonymous expressions for the state of relinquishing the attachment to views that were held before the attainment of the Noble Path.

Samavayasaṭṭhesanoti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.348; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.20) etthaavayāti anūnā.Saṭṭhāti nissaṭṭhā. Sammā avayā saṭṭhā esanā assātisamavayasaṭṭhesano,sammā vissaṭṭhasabbaesanoti attho.‘‘Rāgā cittaṃ vimutta’’ntiādīhi maggassa kiccanipphatti kathitā rāgādīnaṃ pahīnabhāvadīpanato.‘‘Rāgo me pahīno’’tiādīhi paccavekkhaṇāmukhena ariyaphalaṃ kathitaṃ. Adhigate hi aggaphale sabbaso rāgādīnaṃ anuppādadhammataṃ pajānāti, tañca pajānanaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇanti. Tattha pañcaṅgavippahānapaccekasaccāpanodanaesanāsamavayasajjanāni ‘‘saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevati adhivāseti parivajjeti vinodetī’’ti vuttesu apassenesu vinodanā ca maggakiccāneva, itare ca maggeneva samijjhanti.

Samavayasaṭṭhesano Here, avayā means complete. Saṭṭhā means cast off. Samavayasaṭṭhesano means one whose craving is completely cast off; that is, one who has properly abandoned all craving. "Rāgā cittaṃ vimuttaṃ" etc., speak of the accomplishment of the Path's function, showing the abandonment of lust, etc. "Rāgo me pahīno" etc., speak of the Noble Fruit by way of reflection. For upon attaining the highest fruit, one knows the state of non-arising of lust, etc., in every way, and that knowing is the wisdom of reflection. Therein, the abandonment of the five hindrances, the rejection of individually held truths, and the relinquishing of craving, along with the elimination in the supports of reliance described as "he wisely uses, endures, avoids, and eliminates," are functions of the Path. The rest are accomplished by the Path itself.

Dasabaloti kāyabalasaṅkhātāni ñāṇabalasaṅkhātāni ca dasa balāni etassāti dasabalo. Duvidhañhi tathāgatassa balaṃ kāyabalaṃ ñāṇabalañca. Tesu kāyabalaṃ hatthikulānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –

Dasabalo means one who has ten powers, consisting of physical strength and powers of knowledge. For the Tathāgata has two kinds of power: physical strength and the power of knowledge. Among these, physical strength should be understood according to the tradition of the elephant clans. This has been stated by the ancients:

‘‘Kāḷāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ;

"Kāḷāvaka, Gaṅgeyya, Paṇḍara, Tambapiṅgala;
Gandhamaṅgalahema and Uposathachaddantime, these ten."

kāḷāvakanti pakatihatthikulaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kāḷāvakassa hatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ kāḷāvakānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gaṅgeyyassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gaṅgeyyānaṃ, taṃ ekassa paṇḍarassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ paṇḍarānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tambassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ tambānaṃ, taṃ ekassa piṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ piṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa gandhahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gandhahatthīnaṃ, taṃ ekassa maṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ maṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa hemavatassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ hemavatānaṃ, taṃ ekassa uposathassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ uposathānaṃ, taṃ ekassa chaddantassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ chaddantānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalantipi idameva vuccati. Tattha nārā vuccanti rasmiyo, tā bahū nānāvidhā tato uppajjantītinārāyanaṃ,vajiraṃ, tasmā vajirasaṅghātabalanti attho. Tadetaṃ pakatihatthigaṇanāya hatthīnaṃ koṭisahassānaṃ, purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti. Idaṃ tāva tathāgatassakāyabalaṃ.

Kāḷāvaka should be seen as the natural elephant clan. The physical strength of ten men is equal to that of one Kāḷāvaka elephant. The strength of ten Kāḷāvaka elephants is equal to that of one Gaṅgeyya. The strength of ten Gaṅgeyya elephants is equal to that of one Paṇḍara. The strength of ten Paṇḍara elephants is equal to that of one Tamba. The strength of ten Tamba elephants is equal to that of one Piṅgala. The strength of ten Piṅgala elephants is equal to that of one Gandhā elephant. The strength of ten Gandhā elephants is equal to that of one Maṅgala. The strength of ten Maṅgala elephants is equal to that of one Hemavata. The strength of ten Hemavata elephants is equal to that of one Uposatha. The strength of ten Uposatha elephants is equal to that of one Chaddanta. The strength of ten Chaddanta elephants is equal to the physical strength of one Tathāgata. This is also called Nārāyanasaṅghātabala. There, nārā means rays, as many different kinds arise from it; therefore, it is nārāyanaṃ, meaning vajira (diamond), thus meaning the power of a diamond-like mass. That is, according to the calculation of natural elephants, it is the strength of hundreds of thousands of elephants, and according to the calculation of men, it is the strength of ten hundreds of thousands of men. This is the Tathāgata's physical strength.

Ñāṇabalaṃpana pāḷiyaṃ āgatameva. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi (ma. ni. 1.148; a. ni. 10.21) –

The power of knowledge, however, has already been stated in the Pāḷi. Here is that Pāḷi:

‘‘Dasa kho panimāni, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalāni, yehi balehi samannāgato tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavatteti. Katamāni dasa? Idha, sāriputta, tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavatteti. (1)

"These, Sāriputta, are the ten powers of a Tathāgata, possessed of which the Tathāgata claims the foremost place, roars his lion's roar in the assemblies, and sets rolling the Wheel of Brahmā. Which ten? Here, Sāriputta, the Tathāgata understands as it actually is the possible as possible and the impossible as impossible. That the Tathāgata understands as it actually is the possible as possible and the impossible as impossible: this, Sāriputta, is a power of the Tathāgata by reason of which the Tathāgata claims the foremost place, roars his lion's roar in the assemblies, and sets rolling the Wheel of Brahmā. (1)

‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ kammasamādānānaṃ ṭhānaso hetuso vipākaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (2)

"Again, Sāriputta, the Tathāgata understands as it actually is the ripening of deeds undertaken in the past, future, and present, according to their possibilities and causes…(2)

‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato sabbatthagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (3)

"Again, Sāriputta, the Tathāgata understands as it actually is the path leading everywhere…(3)

‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato anekadhātuṃ nānādhātuṃ lokaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (4)

"Again, Sāriputta, the Tathāgata understands as it actually is the world with its diverse elements and different elements…(4)

‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikataṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (5)

"Again, Sāriputta, the Tathāgata understands as it actually is the inclinations of different beings…(5)

‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ indriyaparopariyattaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (6)

"Again, Sāriputta, the Tathāgata understands as it actually is the degree of development of the faculties of other beings and other individuals…(6)

‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnaṃ saṃkilesaṃ vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (7)

"Again, Sāriputta, the Tathāgata understands as it actually is the defilement, cleansing, and emergence in regard to jhāna, liberations, concentrations, and attainments…(7)

‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati. Seyyathidaṃ? Ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo…pe… iti sākāraṃ sauddesaṃ anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati…pe…. (8)

"Furthermore, Sāriputta, the Tathāgata recalls many past lives, that is, one birth, two births…pe… thus with details and descriptions he recalls many past lives…pe… (8)

‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti…pe…. (9)

"Furthermore, Sāriputta, with the divine eye, which is purified and surpasses the human, the Tathāgata sees beings passing away and being reborn, inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, fortunate and unfortunate, and understands beings according to their deeds…pe…. (9)

‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati…pe… idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavatteti. Imāni kho, sāriputta, dasa tathāgatassa tathāgatabalānī’’ti. (10)

"Furthermore, Sāriputta, the Tathāgata, through the destruction of the āsavas, having realized it himself with direct knowledge, enters and dwells in the āsava-free deliverance of mind, deliverance by wisdom, in this very life…pe… This too, Sāriputta, is a Tathāgata's power of a Tathāgata, by relying on which the Tathāgata claims the bull's place, roars his lion's roar in assemblies, and sets in motion the wheel of Brahmā. These, Sāriputta, are the ten powers of a Tathāgata." (10)

ṭhānañca ṭhānatoti kāraṇañca kāraṇato. ‘‘Ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ hetū paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ. Ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ na hetū na paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ aṭṭhāna’’nti pajānanto ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti.Yampīti yena ñāṇena.

Ṭhānañca ṭhānato: Cause as cause. "Whatever things are the causes and conditions for the arising of whatever things, that is the ṭhāna. Whatever things are not the causes and conditions for the arising of whatever things, that is aṭṭhāna." Understanding thus, he understands as they actually are, cause as cause and non-cause as non-cause. Yampī: By whatever knowledge.

Kammasamādānānanti samādiyitvā katānaṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ, kammameva vā kammasamādānaṃ.Ṭhānaso hetusoti paccayato ceva hetuto ca. Tattha gatiupadhikālapayogā vipākassa ṭhānaṃ, kammaṃ hetu.

Kammasamādānānaṃ: Of the wholesome and unwholesome karmas that have been undertaken and done, or kamma itself is kammasamādāna. Ṭhānaso hetuso: By way of condition and by way of cause. Here, destination, basis, time, and application are the ṭhāna for the result (vipāka), kamma is the cause.

Sabbatthagāmininti sabbagatigāminiñca agatigāminiñca.Paṭipadanti maggaṃ.Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti bahūsupi manussesu ekameva pāṇaṃ ghātentesu kāmaṃ sabbesampi cetanā tassevekassa jīvitindriyārammaṇā, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ nānākāraṃ. Tesu hi eko ādarena chandajāto karoti, eko ‘‘ehi tvampi karohī’’ti parehi nippīḷito karoti, eko samānacchando viya hutvā appaṭibāhiyamāno vicarati, tasmā tesu eko teneva kammena niraye nibbattati, eko tiracchānayoniyaṃ, eko pettivisaye. Taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva ‘‘iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa niraye nibbattissati, esa tiracchānayoniyaṃ, esa pettivisaye’’ti jānāti. Niraye nibbattamānampi ‘‘esa mahāniraye nibbattissati, esa ussadaniraye’’ti jānāti. Tiracchānayoniyaṃ nibbattamānampi ‘‘esa apādako bhavissati, esa dvipādako, esa catuppādo, esa bahuppādo’’ti jānāti. Pettivisaye nibbattamānampi ‘‘esa nijjhāmataṇhiko bhavissati, esa khuppipāsiko, esa paradattūpajīvī’’ti jānāti. Tesu ca kammesu ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhissati, etaṃ aññena dinnāya paṭisandhiyā upadhivepakkaṃ bhavissatī’’ti jānāti.

Sabbatthagāminiṃ: Leading to all destinations, and not leading to any destination. Paṭipadaṃ: The path. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti: Even when many people kill just one being, although the intention of all of them is focused on that one being's life faculty, that kamma is different for each of them. For example, one does it with respect and desire, one does it because he is pressured by others saying, "Come, you do it too," and one wanders around as if sharing the same desire, unopposed. Therefore, one of them is reborn in hell by that very kamma, one in the animal realm, and one in the realm of ghosts. The Tathāgata knows at the very moment of accumulating (āyūhana) that "because he has accumulated in this manner, he will be reborn in hell, he will be reborn in the animal realm, he will be reborn in the realm of ghosts." Even when being reborn in hell, he knows, "he will be reborn in the great hell, he will be reborn in the bordering hells." Even when being reborn in the animal realm, he knows, "he will be footless, he will be two-footed, he will be four-footed, he will be many-footed." Even when being reborn in the realm of ghosts, he knows, "he will be scorched by thirst, he will be afflicted by hunger, he will live on what is given by others." And among those kammas, he knows "this kamma will draw the rebirth, this will ripen supporting a rebirth given by another."

Tathā sakalagāmavāsikesu ekato piṇḍapātaṃ dadamānesu kāmaṃ sabbesampi cetanā piṇḍapātārammaṇāva, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ nānākāraṃ. Tesu hi eko ādarena karotīti sabbaṃ purimasadisaṃ. Tasmā tesu ca keci devaloke nibbattanti, keci manussaloke. Taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva jānāti. ‘‘Iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa manussaloke nibbattissati, esa devaloke, tatthāpi esa khattiyakule, esa brāhmaṇakule, esa vessakule, esa suddakule, esa paranimmitavasavattīsu, esa nimmānaratīsu, esa tusitesu, esa yāmesu, esa tāvatiṃsesu, esa cātumahārājikesu, esa bhummadevesū’’tiādinā tattha tattha hīnapaṇītasuvaṇṇadubbaṇṇaappaparivāramahāparivāratādibhedaṃ taṃ taṃ visesaṃ āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva jānāti.

Similarly, when all the villagers give alms together, although the intention of all of them is focused on the alms, that kamma is different for each of them. For example, one does it with respect, and so on, just like before. Therefore, some of them are reborn in the heaven world, and some in the human world. The Tathāgata knows at the very moment of accumulating. "Because he has accumulated in this manner, he will be reborn in the human world, he will be reborn in the heaven world; even there, he will be in a khattiya family, he will be in a brahmin family, he will be in a vessa family, he will be in a sudda family, he will be among the Paranimmita-vasavattis, he will be among the Nimmānaratis, he will be among the Tusitas, he will be among the Yāmas, he will be among the Tāvatiṃsas, he will be among the Cātumahārājikas, he will be among the earth-dwelling devas," and so on, he knows that particular difference at the moment of accumulating, with distinctions of inferior, superior, beautiful, ugly, with little retinue, great retinue, and so forth.

Tathā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapentesuyeva ‘‘iminā nīhārena esa kiñci sallakkhetuṃ na sakkhissati, esa mahābhūtamattameva vavatthapessati, esa rūpapariggahe eva ṭhassati, esa arūpapariggaheyeva, esa nāmarūpapariggaheyeva, esa paccayapariggaheyeva, esa lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāyameva, esa paṭhamaphaleyeva, esa dutiyaphale eva, esa tatiyaphale eva, esa arahattaṃ pāpuṇissatī’’ti jānāti. Kasiṇaparikammaṃ karontesupi ‘‘imassa parikammamattameva bhavissati, esa nimittaṃ uppādessati, esa appanaṃ eva pāpuṇissati, esa jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhissatī’’ti jānāti.

Similarly, even while establishing vipassanā, he knows "because of this approach, he will not be able to discern anything, he will only determine the great elements, he will only remain in the perception of form, he will only remain in the perception of the formless, he will only remain in the perception of name-and-form, he will only remain in the perception of conditions, he will only remain in vipassanā focused on the characteristics, he will only attain the first fruit, he will only attain the second fruit, he will only attain the third fruit, he will attain Arahantship." Even for those who are performing kasiṇa parikamma, he knows, "for this one, there will only be preliminary work, he will produce the sign (nimitta), he will only attain absorption (appanā), he will make jhāna a basis and, having established vipassanā, will attain Arahantship."

Anekadhātunti cakkhudhātuādīhi, kāmadhātuādīhi vā dhātūhi bahudhātuṃ.Nānādhātunti tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ vilakkhaṇattā nānappakāradhātuṃ.Lokanti khandhāyatanadhātulokaṃ.Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti tāsaṃ dhātūnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvaṃ paṭivijjhati.

Anekadhātuṃ: Many kinds of elements, by way of the eye-element, etc., or by way of the elements of the desire realm, etc. Nānādhātuṃ: Different kinds of elements, because of the distinctness of those very elements. Lokaṃ: The world of aggregates, sense bases, and elements. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti: He understands the true nature of those elements without distortion.

Nānādhimuttikatanti hīnādīhi adhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāvaṃ.Parasattānanti padhānasattānaṃ.Parapuggalānanti tato paresaṃ hīnasattānaṃ. Ekatthameva vā etaṃ padadvayaṃ, veneyyavasena pana dvedhā vuttaṃ.Indriyaparopariyattanti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ parabhāvañca aparabhāvañca, vuddhiñca hāniñcāti attho.

Nānādhimuttikataṃ: The state of having different intentions, by way of inferior intentions, etc. Parasattānaṃ: Of the prominent beings. Parapuggalānaṃ: Of beings who are inferior to those. Or these two terms are in the same meaning, but spoken in two ways to suit the trainable. Indriyaparopariyattaṃ: The superior and inferior state of the faculties such as faith, etc., meaning growth and decline.

Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ, ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ, savitakkasavicārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhīnaṃ, paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādīnañca navannaṃ anupubbasamāpattīnaṃ.Saṃkilesanti hānabhāgiyadhammaṃ.Vodānanti visesabhāgiyadhammaṃ.Vuṭṭhānanti ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhānaṃ, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti (vibha. 828) evaṃ vuttaṃ paguṇajjhānañceva bhavaṅgaphalasamāpattiyo ca. Heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimañhi paguṇajjhānaṃ uparimassa uparimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgena sabbajhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, phalasamāpattiyā nirodhasamāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Tametaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Sabbañāṇānañca vitthārakathāya vinicchayosammohavinodaniyaṃ vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(vibha. aṭṭha. 760) vutto. Pubbenivāsānussatidibbacakkhuāsavakkhayañāṇakathā panaverañjakaṇḍe(pārā. 12) vitthāritāyeva.

Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnaṃ: Of the four jhānas, beginning with the first, of the eight deliverances (vimokkha) beginning with "one possessing form sees forms," of the three concentrations (samādhi) beginning with thought-conception and discursive-thinking, and of the nine successive attainments (anupubbasamāpatti) beginning with the attainment of the first jhāna. Saṃkilesaṃ: The state of decline. Vodānaṃ: The state of distinction. Vuṭṭhānaṃ: "Vodāna is also vuṭṭhāna, vuṭṭhāna is also emerging from that concentration" (vibha. 828), thus it is said, the skillful jhāna and the fruition attainments of the life-continuum. For the lower skillful jhāna is the foundation for the higher, therefore it is said "vodāna is also vuṭṭhāna." Emerging from all jhānas is done through the life-continuum, and emerging from the cessation attainment is done through the fruition attainment. With this in mind, it is said "vuṭṭhāna is also emerging from that concentration." And the decision on the extensive explanation of all knowledges is stated in the Sammohavinodanī commentary on the Vibhaṅga (vibha. aṭṭha. 760). However, the explanation of the knowledge of the recollection of past lives, the divine eye, and the destruction of the āsavas is extensively explained in the Verañjaka section (pārā. 12).

Imāni kho sāriputtāti yāni pubbe ‘‘dasa kho panimāni, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalānī’’ti avocaṃ, imāni tānīti appanaṃ karoti. Tattha paravādikathā hoti ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma pāṭiyekkaṃ natthi, sabbaññutaññāṇassevāyaṃ pabhedo’’ti, taṃ na tathā daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññameva hi dasabalañāṇaṃ, aññaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Dasabalañāṇaṃ sakasakakiccameva jānāti, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ tampi tato avasesampi pajānāti. Dasabalañāṇesu hi paṭhamaṃ kāraṇākāraṇameva jānāti, dutiyaṃ kammantaravipākantarameva, tatiyaṃ kammaparicchedameva, catutthaṃ dhātunānattakāraṇameva, pañcamaṃ sattānaṃ ajjhāsayādhimuttimeva, chaṭṭhaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvameva, sattamaṃ jhānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ saṃkilesādimeva, aṭṭhamaṃ pubbenivutthakkhandhasantatimeva, navamaṃ sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhimeva, dasamaṃ saccaparicchedameva. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana etehi jānitabbañca tato uttariñca pajānāti, etesaṃ pana kiccaṃ na sabbaṃ karoti. Tañhi jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti, iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkoti, maggo hutvā kilese khepetuṃ na sakkoti. Iti yathāvuttakāyabalena ceva ñāṇabalena ca samannāgatattā bhagavā ‘‘dasabalo’’ti vuccati.

Imāni kho sāriputta: These are those which I said earlier, "These, Sāriputta, are the ten powers of a Tathāgata," he makes an appropriation. Here, there is a doctrine of opponents, "There is no separate knowledge called the ten powers, this is just a division of the knowledge of omniscience," but it should not be seen that way. For the knowledge of the ten powers is one thing, and the knowledge of omniscience is another. The knowledge of the ten powers knows only its own specific task, the knowledge of omniscience knows that and also what remains from it. For in the knowledge of the ten powers, the first knows only cause and non-cause, the second knows only the difference in the result of actions, the third knows only the limitation of actions, the fourth knows only the cause of the diversity of elements, the fifth knows only the inclinations and intentions of beings, the sixth knows only the sharpness and dullness of the faculties, the seventh knows only the defilement, etc., along with the jhānas, etc., the eighth knows only the continuum of past aggregates, the ninth knows only the passing away and rebirth of beings, the tenth knows only the delimitation of the truths. However, the knowledge of omniscience knows what is to be known by these and also more than that, but it does not do all of their tasks. For it cannot become jhāna and apply itself, it cannot become psychic power and transform, it cannot become the path and destroy the defilements. Thus, because the Blessed One is endowed with both the power of body and the power of knowledge as described, he is called "ten-powered."

Dasahi asekkhehi aṅgehi upetoti ‘‘asekkhā sammādiṭṭhi, asekkho sammāsaṅkappo, asekkhā sammāvācā, asekkho sammākammanto, asekkho sammāājīvo, asekkho sammāvāyāmo, asekkhā sammāsati, asekkho sammāsamādhi, asekkhaṃ sammāñāṇaṃ, asekkhā sammāvimuttī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348, 360) evaṃ vuttehi dasahi asekkhadhammehi samannāgato. Asekkhā sammādiṭṭhiādayo ca sabbe phalasampayuttadhammā eva. Ettha casammādiṭṭhi sammāñāṇanti dvīsu ṭhānesu paññāva kathitā ‘‘sammā dassanaṭṭhena sammādiṭṭhi, sammā pajānanaṭṭhena sammāñāṇa’’nti. Atthi hi dassanajānanānaṃ visaye pavattiākāraviseso.Sammāvimuttīti iminā pana padena vuttāvasesā phalasamāpattisahagatadhammā saṅgahitāti veditabbā. Ariyaphalasampayuttadhammāpi hi sabbaso paṭipakkhato vimuttataṃ upādāya vimuttīti vattabbataṃ labhanti.

Dasahi asekhehi aṅgehi upeto: Endowed with ten trainings of the noble ones: "Right view of the noble one, right thought of the noble one, right speech of the noble one, right action of the noble one, right livelihood of the noble one, right effort of the noble one, right mindfulness of the noble one, right concentration of the noble one, right knowledge of the noble one, right deliverance of the noble one" (dī. ni. 3.348, 360), endowed with the ten noble qualities thus spoken. And all the noble right view, etc., are only qualities associated with the fruition. And here, in the two places right view and right knowledge, wisdom is spoken of, "right view in the sense of seeing rightly, right knowledge in the sense of rightly knowing." For there is a special mode of operation in the scope of seeing and knowing. Sammāvimutti: By this term, the remaining qualities associated with the fruition attainment should be understood as included. For the qualities associated with the noble fruition also attain the state of being called vimutti due to being liberated from the opposing side in every way.

59.Vacanasaddena appasaddanti ārāmupacārena gacchato addhikajanassapi vacanasaddena appasaddaṃ.Nagaranigghosasaddenāti avibhāvitatthena nagare manussānaṃ nigghosasaddena. Manussehi samāgamma ekajjhaṃ pavattitasaddo hi nigghoso.Anusañcaraṇajanassāti antosañcārino janassa.Manussānaṃ rahassakiriyaṭṭhāniyanti manussānaṃ rahassakaraṇassa yuttaṃ anucchavikaṃ.Vivekānurūpanti ekībhāvassa anurūpaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.

59.Vacanasaddena appasaddaṃ: Less noisy with the sound of speech, even for a traveler going along the border of the monastery. Nagaranigghosasaddena: With the sound of the city's noise, due to being indistinct. For the sound made by people gathering together in the city is nigghosa. Anusañcaraṇajanassa: Of people wandering inside. Manussānaṃ rahassakiriyaṭṭhāniyaṃ: Suitable and appropriate for people to do in secret. Vivekānurūpaṃ: Suitable for solitude. The rest here is self-explanatory.

Bimbisārasamāgamakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Bimbisāra meeting story is finished.

Sāriputtamoggallānapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Sāriputta and Moggallāna Going Forth Story

60.Idāni ‘‘tena kho pana samayena sañcayo paribbājako’’tiādīsu apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ dassento‘‘sāriputtamoggallānā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sārībrāhmaṇiyā puttosāriputto,moggallībrāhmaṇiyā puttomoggallāno. Amhākaṃ kira (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.189-190; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.10 sāriputtattheravatthu) bhagavato nibbattito puretarameva sāriputto rājagahanagarassa avidūre upatissagāme sārībrāhmaṇiyā nāma kucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Taṃdivasamevassa sahāyopi rājagahasseva avidūre kolitagāme moggallībrāhmaṇiyā kucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Tāni kira dvepi kulāni yāva sattamā kulaparivaṭṭā ābaddhapaṭibaddhasahāyāneva. Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ ekadivasameva gabbhaparihāraṃ adaṃsu. Dasamāsaccayena jātānampi tesaṃ chasaṭṭhi dhātiyo upanayiṃsu. Nāmaggahaṇadivase sārībrāhmaṇiyā puttassa upatissagāme jeṭṭhakulassa puttattā ‘‘upatisso’’ti nāmaṃ akaṃsu, itarassa kolitagāme jeṭṭhakulassa puttattā ‘‘kolito’’ti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘gihikāle upatisso kolitoti evaṃ paññāyamānanāmā’’ti.

60.Now, showing the explanation of the uncommon words in "tena kho pana samayena sañcayo paribbājako," etc., he says "sāriputtamoggallānā" and so on. There, Sāriputta is the son of Sārī brahmin woman, Moggallāna is the son of Moggallī brahmin woman. It is said that Sāriputta took rebirth in the womb of a brahmin woman named Sārī in the village of Upatissa, not far from Rājagaha, even before our Blessed One was born (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.189-190; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.10 Sāriputtattheravatthu). On the same day, his friend also took rebirth in the womb of Moggallī brahmin woman in the village of Kolita, not far from Rājagaha. It is said that those two families were bound to each other as friends through seven family successions. They gave womb protection to the two of them on the same day. When they were born after ten months, sixty-six nurses attended them. On the day of naming, because he was the son of the eldest family in the village of Upatissa, the son of Sārī brahmin woman was named "Upatissa," and the other was named "Kolita" because he was the son of the eldest family in the village of Kolita. Therefore, it is said "in lay life, their names were known as Upatissa and Kolita."

Aḍḍhateyyasatamāṇavakaparivārāti ettha pañcapañcasatamāṇavakaparivārātipi vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃaṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.189-190) –

Aḍḍhateyyasatamāṇavakaparivārā: Here, some say that they had five hundred attendants. This was said in the Aṅguttara Nikāya Commentary (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.189-190) –

‘‘Upatissamāṇavakassa kīḷanatthāya nadiṃ vā uyyānaṃ vā gamanakāle pañca suvaṇṇasivikāsatāni parivārāni honti, kolitamāṇavakassa pañca ājaññarathasatāni. Dvepi janā pañcapañcamāṇavakasataparivārā hontī’’ti.

"When the youth Upatissa went to the river or the park for play, he had five hundred golden palanquins as attendants, and the youth Kolita had five hundred thoroughbred chariots. Both people had five hundred youths as attendants."

Rājagahe ca anusaṃvaccharaṃ giraggasamajjaṃ nāma hoti. Tesaṃ dvinnampi ekaṭṭhāneyeva mañcakaṃ bandhanti. Dvepi ekatova nisīditvā samajjaṃ passitvā hasitabbaṭṭhāne hasanti, saṃvegaṭṭhāne saṃvijjanti, dāyaṃ dātuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne dāyaṃ denti. Tesaṃ imināva niyāmena ekadivasaṃ samajjaṃ passantānaṃ paripākagatattā ñāṇassa purimadivasesu viya hasitabbaṭṭhāne hāso vā saṃvegaṭṭhāne saṃvijjanaṃ vā dāyaṃ dātuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne dāyadānaṃ vā nāhosi. Dvepi pana janā evaṃ cintayiṃsu ‘‘kiṃ ettha oloketabbaṃ atthi, sabbepime appatte vassasate apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gamissanti, amhehi pana ekaṃ mokkhadhammaṃ gavesituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti ārammaṇaṃ gahetvā nisīdiṃsu. Tato kolito upatissaṃ āha ‘‘samma upatissa, na tvaṃ aññadivasesu viya haṭṭhapahaṭṭho, anattamanadhātukosi, kiṃ te sallakkhita’’nti. ‘‘Samma kolita, etesaṃ olokane sāro natthi, niratthakametaṃ, attano mokkhadhammaṃ gavesituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ cintayanto nisinnomhīti. Tvaṃ pana kasmā anattamanoti. Sopi tatheva āha. Athassa attanā saddhiṃ ekajjhāsayataṃ ñatvā upatisso evamāha ‘‘amhākaṃ ubhinnaṃ sucintitaṃ, mokkhadhammaṃ pana gavesantehi ekā pabbajjā laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, kassa santike pabbajāmā’’ti.

And in Rājagaha, there was an annual festival called Giraggasamajja. They would set up a platform for both of them in the same place. Both would sit together, watch the festival, laugh where laughter was appropriate, feel moved where emotion was appropriate, and give donations where giving was appropriate. In this same manner, one day, while watching the festival, due to the maturation of their knowledge, unlike previous days, there was no laughter where it was appropriate to laugh, no emotional stirring where it was appropriate to feel moved, and no giving of donations where it was appropriate to give. Both people, however, thought, "What is there to see here? All of these people will be reduced to nothing in less than a hundred years. It is fitting for us to seek a path to liberation (Mokkhadhamma)." Taking this as their object of reflection (ārammaṇa), they sat down. Then Kolita said to Upatissa, "Friend Upatissa, you are not joyful and cheerful as you usually are, but seem to be in a state of mental unrest (anattamanadhātu). What have you noticed?" "Friend Kolita, there is no essence in watching these things; it is meaningless. I am sitting here thinking that it is fitting to seek my own path to liberation." "And why are you in a state of mental unrest?" He said the same thing. Then, Upatissa, realizing that they were of one mind, said, "We have both thought well. But in seeking a path to liberation, it is fitting to take ordination (pabbajjā). In whose presence shall we ordain?"

‘‘tatra nesaṃ mahājanaṃ disvā…pe… katikaṃ akaṃsū’’ti āha.

"Having seen a great crowd there…pe…they made an agreement" is what he said.

channaparibbājakassāti setapaṭadharassa paribbājakassa. Tena nāyaṃ naggaparibbājakoti dasseti.Pāsādikena abhikkantenātiādīsupāsādikenāti pasādāvahena sāruppena samaṇānucchavikena.Abhikkantenāti gamanena.Paṭikkantenāti nivattanena.Ālokitenāti purato dassanena.Vilokitenāti ito cito dassanena.Samiñjitenāti pabbasaṅkocanena.Pasāritenāti tesaṃyeva pasāraṇena. Sabbattha itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ, tasmā satisampajaññakehi vabhisaṅkhatattā pāsādikaabhikkantapaṭikkantaālokitavilokitasamiñjitapasārito hutvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Okkhittacakkhūti heṭṭhākhittacakkhu.Iriyāpathasampannoti tāya pāsādikaabhikkantāditāya sampannairiyāpatho.Atthikehi upaññātanti ‘‘maraṇe sati amatenapi bhavitabba’’nti evaṃ anumānañāṇena ‘‘atthī’’ti upagataṃ nibbānaṃ nāma, taṃ magganto pariyesanto yannūnāhaṃ imaṃ bhikkhuṃ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandheyyanti sambandho.Sudinnakaṇḍe vuttappakāranti ‘‘dānapatīnaṃ gharesu sālā honti, āsanāni cettha paññattāni honti, upaṭṭhāpitaṃ udakakañjiyaṃ, tattha pabbajitā piṇḍāya caritvā nisīditvā bhuñjanti. Sace icchanti, dānapatīnampi santakaṃ gaṇhanti, tasmā tampi aññatarassa kulassa īdisāya sālāya aññataraṃ kuṭṭamūlanti veditabba’’nti evaṃ vuttappakāraṃ.

"Of the wanderer (paribbājakassa) who was covered": he was a wanderer who wore white clothes. This shows that he was not a naked ascetic. "By his pleasing way of approaching" and so on, "Pleasing" means inducing confidence, appropriate, and befitting a renunciant. "Approaching" means by his gait. "Retreating" means by his turning back. "Looking ahead" means by looking in front. "Looking around" means by looking here and there. "Drawing in" means contracting the limbs. "Stretching out" means extending those same limbs. In all these cases, the instrumental case signifies the inherent characteristic; therefore, it means that having been fashioned by mindfulness and clear comprehension (satisampajañña), he was one whose approaching, retreating, looking ahead, looking around, drawing in, and stretching out were pleasing. "With downcast eyes" means with eyes cast downward. "Endowed with deportment (Iriyāpathasampanno)" means endowed with that deportment consisting of the pleasing way of approaching, etc. "Thought of by those who desire" means Nibbāna, which is approached with inferential knowledge (anumānañāṇa) as "If there is death, there must also be the deathless," and which is named as "it exists," and the connection is "While seeking and searching for that, I should follow this monk closely behind." "In the manner described in the Sudinna section" means in the manner described as "In the houses of the donors, there are halls, and seats are arranged there, and water and gruel are prepared. There, renunciants, having gone for alms, sit and eat. If they wish, they also take what belongs to the donors; therefore, that too should be understood as the corner of a wall in a hall of a certain family of such kind."

Appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā bhāsassūti paribbājako ‘‘ahaṃ upatisso nāma, tvaṃ yathāsattiyā appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā pāvada, etaṃ nayasatena nayasahassena paṭivijjhituṃ mayhaṃ bhāro’’ti cintetvā evamāha. Nirodho ca nirodhupāyo ca ekadesasarūpekasesanayena ‘‘nirodho’’ti vuttoti dassento‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha.Paṭipādentoti nigamento.Imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ sutvā virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādīti ettha paribbājako paṭhamapadadvayameva sutvā sahassanayasampanne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Itarapadadvayaṃ sotāpannakāle niṭṭhāsīti veditabbaṃ.

"Speak little or much": the wanderer thought, "I am named Upatissa. You speak according to your ability, little or much. It is my responsibility to penetrate that with a hundred or a thousand methods," and then he said this. Showing that cessation (nirodha) and the means to cessation (nirodhupāyo) are referred to as "cessation" by way of a partial similarity, according to a single aspect, he said, "Or else" and so on. "Expounding" means inferring. "Upon hearing this Dhamma discourse (dhammapariyāya), the stainless, immaculate Dhamma eye arose": here, the wanderer, having heard only the first two phrases, was established in the fruit of stream-entry (sotāpattiphala), which is endowed with a thousand methods. It should be understood that the other two phrases were completed at the time of stream-entry.

Bahukehi kappanahutehīti ettha dasa dasakāni sataṃ, dasa satāni sahassaṃ, sahassānaṃ sataṃ satasahassaṃ, satasahassānaṃ sataṃ koṭi, koṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ pakoṭi, pakoṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ koṭipakoṭi, koṭipakoṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ ekanahutanti veditabbaṃ.

"By many hundreds of thousands of eons": here, ten tens are a hundred, ten hundreds are a thousand, a hundred thousands are a hundred thousand, a hundred hundred thousands are a koṭi, a hundred koṭis is a pakoṭi, a hundred pakoṭis is a koṭipakoṭi, and a hundred koṭipakoṭis is an ekanahuta—this should be understood.

61.Athakho sāriputto paribbājako yena moggallāno paribbājako tenupasaṅkamīti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.189-190; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.10 sāriputtattheravatthu) sotāpanno hutvā uparivisese appavattante ‘‘bhavissati ettha kāraṇa’’nti sallakkhetvā theraṃ āha ‘‘bhante, mā upari dhammadesanaṃ vaḍḍhayittha, ettakameva hotu, kahaṃ amhākaṃ satthā vasatī’’ti. Veḷuvane paribbājakāti. ‘‘Bhante, tumhe purato yātha, mayhaṃ eko sahāyako atthi, amhehi ca aññamaññaṃ katikā katā ‘yo paṭhamaṃ amataṃ adhigacchati, so ārocetū’ti, ahaṃ taṃ paṭiññaṃ mocetvā sahāyakaṃ gahetvā tumhākaṃ gatamaggeneva satthu santikaṃ āgamissāmī’’ti pañcapatiṭṭhitena therassa pādesu nipatitvā tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā theraṃ uyyojetvā paribbājakārāmābhimukho agamāsi.

61.Then Sāriputta the wanderer approached Moggallāna the wanderer (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.189-190; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.10 sāriputtattheravatthu): having become a stream-enterer (sotāpanna) and seeing that further attainments were not arising, he considered, "There must be a reason for this," and said to the elder, "Venerable sir, do not extend the Dhamma talk further; let it be only this much. Where does our teacher reside?" "In the Bamboo Grove (Veḷuvana), wanderer." "Venerable sir, you go ahead. I have a companion, and we have made an agreement with each other that 'whoever first attains the Deathless (amata) should announce it.' Having freed him from that promise and taking my companion, I will come to the teacher along the same path you have taken." Having bowed at the elder's feet with the five-point prostration and circumambulating him three times, he sent the elder away and went toward the wanderers' monastery.

62.Sāriputtaṃ paribbājakaṃ etadavocāti ‘‘ajja mayhaṃ sahāyassa mukhavaṇṇo na aññadivasesu viya, addhā anena amataṃ adhigataṃ bhavissatī’’ti amatādhigamaṃ pucchanto etadavoca. Sopissa ‘‘āmāvuso, amataṃ adhigata’’nti paṭijānitvā sabbaṃ pavattiṃ ārocetvā tameva gāthaṃ abhāsi. Gāthāpariyosāne moggallāno paribbājako sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘atha kho moggallānassa paribbājakassa…pe… dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti.Gacchāma mayaṃ, āvuso, bhagavato santiketi ‘‘kahaṃ samma satthā vasatī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘veḷuvane kira samma, evaṃ no ācariyena assajittherena kathita’’nti vutte evamāha.

62.Said this to Sāriputta the wanderer: thinking, "Today, the complexion of my friend's face is not as it was on other days; surely he has attained the Deathless," he said this, inquiring about the attainment of the Deathless. He acknowledged to him, "Yes, friend, the Deathless has been attained," and having announced all that had occurred, he spoke that very verse. At the end of the verse, Moggallāna the wanderer was established in the fruit of stream-entry. Therefore, it is said, "Then for Moggallāna the wanderer…pe…the Dhamma eye arose." "Let us go, friend, to the Blessed One": having asked, "Where does the teacher reside, friend?" and being told, "It seems, friend, in the Bamboo Grove; so it was spoken by our teacher, the Elder Assaji," he said this.

‘‘atha kho sāriputtamoggallānā yena sañcayo paribbājako tenupasaṅkamiṃsū’’ti. Upasaṅkamitvā ca ‘‘ācariya, tvaṃ kiṃ karosi, loke buddho uppanno, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho, āyāma dasabalaṃ passissāmā’’ti. So ‘‘kiṃ vadatha tātā’’ti tepi vāretvā lābhaggayasaggappavattimeva nesaṃ dīpeti. Te ‘‘amhākaṃ evarūpo antevāsikavāso niccameva hotu, tumhākaṃ pana gamanaṃ vā agamanaṃ vā jānāthā’’ti āhaṃsu. Sañcayo ‘‘ime ettakaṃ jānantā mama vacanaṃ na karissantī’’ti ñatvā ‘‘gacchatha tumhe tātā, ahaṃ mahallakakāle antevāsikavāsaṃ vasituṃ na sakkomī’’ti āha. Te anekehipi kāraṇasatehi taṃ bodhetuṃ asakkontā attano ovāde vattamānaṃ janaṃ ādāya veḷuvanaṃ agamaṃsu. Pañcasu antevāsikasatesu aḍḍhateyyasatā nivattiṃsu, aḍḍhateyyasatā tehi saddhiṃ agamaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘atha kho sāriputtamoggallānā tāni aḍḍhateyyāni paribbājakasatāni ādāya yena veḷuvanaṃ tenupasaṅkamiṃsū’’ti.

"Then Sāriputta and Moggallāna approached Sañjaya the wanderer.": And having approached, they said, "Teacher, what are you doing? A Buddha has arisen in the world, the Dhamma is well-proclaimed, the Sangha is practicing well. Come, let us see the One with Ten Strengths (dasabala)." He, interjecting with "What are you saying, dear ones?", only showed them the gain, honor, and fame they could expect. They said, "Let such a life of discipleship be always ours; but do you know of your going or not going?" Sañjaya, knowing that "Knowing so much, they will not do my bidding," said, "Go, you dear ones, I am unable to live a life of discipleship in my old age." Unable to persuade him with many hundreds of reasons, taking the people who followed his teaching, they went to the Bamboo Grove (Veḷuvana). Out of five hundred disciples, two hundred and fifty turned back; two hundred and fifty went with them. Therefore, it is said, "Then Sāriputta and Moggallāna, taking those two hundred and fifty wanderers, approached the Bamboo Grove."

Vimutteti yathāvuttalakkhaṇe nibbāne tadārammaṇāya phalavimuttiyā adhimutte ne sāriputtamoggallāne byākāsīti sambandho.

"In the liberated": the connection is that Sāriputta and Moggallāna explained in the Nibbāna, which has the characteristics mentioned above, which is the object of their mind, and which is liberated by fruition (phalavimutti).

‘‘mahāmoggallānatthero sattahi divasehi arahatte patiṭṭhito, sāriputtatthero addhamāsenā’’ti.

"The Elder Mahāmoggallāna was established in Arahantship in seven days, and the Elder Sāriputta in half a month."

Yadipi mahāmoggallānatthero na cirasseva arahattaṃ patto, dhammasenāpati tato cirena, evaṃ santepi sāriputtattherova mahāpaññataro. Mahāmoggallānatthero hi sāvakānaṃ sammasanacāraṃ yaṭṭhikoṭiyā uppīḷento viya ekadesameva sammasanto satta divase vāyamitvā arahattaṃ patto. Sāriputtatthero ṭhapetvā buddhānaṃ paccekabuddhānañca sammasanacāraṃ sāvakānaṃ sammasanacāraṃ nippadesaṃ sammasi, evaṃ sammasanto addhamāsaṃ vāyami. Ukkaṃsagatassa sāvakānaṃ sammasanacārassa nippadesena pavattiyamānattā sāvakapāramīñāṇassa ca tathā paripācetabbattā. Yathā hi puriso ‘‘veṇuyaṭṭhiṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti mahājaṭaṃ veṇuṃ disvā ‘‘jaṭaṃ chindantassa papañco bhavissatī’’ti antarena hatthaṃ pavesetvā sampattameva yaṭṭhiṃ mūle ca agge ca chinditvā ādāya pakkameyya, so kiñcāpi paṭhamataraṃ gacchati, yaṭṭhiṃ pana sāraṃ vā ujuṃ vā na labhati. Aparo tathārūpameva veṇuṃ disvā sace sampattayaṭṭhiṃ gaṇhissāmi, sāraṃ vā ujuṃ vā na labhissāmīti kacchaṃ bandhitvā mahantena satthena veṇujaṭaṃ chinditvā sārā ceva ujū ca yaṭṭhiyo uccinitvā ādāya pakkameyya, ayaṃ kiñcāpi pacchā gacchati, yaṭṭhiyo pana sārā ceva ujū ca labhati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ imesaṃ dvinnaṃ therānaṃ padhānaṃ.

Although the Elder Mahāmoggallāna attained Arahantship not long after, and the General of the Dhamma (Dhammasenāpati) attained it later, even so, the Elder Sāriputta was the more wise. The Elder Mahāmoggallāna, as if stirring up the Saṃmasana range of the disciples with the tip of a stick, reflecting only on one aspect, attained Arahantship after striving for seven days. The Elder Sāriputta, setting aside the Saṃmasana range of the Buddhas and Paccekabuddhas, reflected on the entire Saṃmasana range of the disciples, without exception, and striving thus, he attained it after half a month. This is because the Saṃmasana range of the disciples, which has reached the highest point, must proceed without exception, and because the knowledge of a disciple's perfection (sāvakapāramīñāṇa) must be matured in that way. Just as a man, seeing a large clump of bamboo, thinking "I will take a bamboo stick," but realizing "If I cut the clump, there will be obstacles," inserts his hand in between and, having obtained the bamboo, cuts it at the root and the tip and goes away, although he goes sooner, he does not obtain a stick that is strong or straight. Another, seeing the same kind of bamboo, thinking "If I take a bamboo stick that is easily obtained, I will not obtain one that is strong or straight," girds up his loins and, with a large knife, cuts the bamboo clump and selects sticks that are strong and straight and goes away, although he goes later, he obtains sticks that are strong and straight. This principle is similar to the effort of these two elders.

Sammasanacāroca nāmettha vipassanābhūmi veditabbā sammasanaṃ carati etthāti sammasanacāroti katvā. Tattha buddhānaṃ sammasanacāro dasasahassalokadhātuyaṃ sattasantānagatā anindriyabaddhā ca saṅkhārāti vadanti. Koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesūti apare. Tathā hi attaniyavasena paṭiccasamuppādanayaṃ otaritvā chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena buddhānaṃ mahāvajirañāṇaṃ pavattaṃ. Paccekabuddhānaṃ sasantānagatehi saddhiṃ majjhimadesavāsīsattasantānagatā anindriyabaddhā ca saṅkhārā sammasanacāroti vadanti. Jambudīpavāsīsantānagatāti keci. Sasantānagate sabbadhamme parasantānagate ca santānavibhāgaṃ akatvā bahiddhābhāvasāmaññato sammasanaṃ, ayaṃ sāvakānaṃ sammasanacāro. Moggallānatthero pana bahiddhā dhammepi sasantānavibhāgena keci keci uddharitvā sammasi, tañca kho ñāṇena phuṭṭhamattaṃ katvā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṭṭhikoṭiyā uppīḷento viya ekadesameva sammasanto’’ti. Tattha ñāṇena nāma yāvatā neyyaṃ vattitabbaṃ, tāvatā avattanato ‘‘yaṭṭhikoṭiyā uppīḷento viyā’’ti vuttaṃ, anupadadhammavipassanāya abhāvato ‘‘ekadesameva sammasanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhammasenāpatinopi yathāvuttasāvakānaṃ vipassanāya bhūmiyeva sammasanacāro. Tattha pana thero sātisayaṃ niravasesaṃ anupadañca sammā vipassi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sāvakānaṃ sammasanacāraṃ nippadesaṃ sammasī’’ti.

And here, Saṃmasanacāro should be understood as the basis of insight (vipassanābhūmi), since it is called Saṃmasanacāro because one engages in reflection (sammasana) here. There, the Saṃmasana range of the Buddhas is said to be the conditioned phenomena (saṅkhārā) bound by non-sensory faculties (anindriyabaddhā) belonging to the continuum of beings (sattasantānagatā) in ten thousand world-systems. Others say it is in a hundred thousand koṭis of world-systems. Thus, having descended into the mode of dependent origination (paṭiccasamuppādanayaṃ) according to one's own will, the great diamond knowledge (mahāvajirañāṇa) of the Buddhas operates through thirty-six koṭis of a hundred thousand openings. The Saṃmasana range of the Paccekabuddhas is said to be the conditioned phenomena (saṅkhārā) bound by non-sensory faculties (anindriyabaddhā) belonging to the continuum of beings (sattasantānagatā) dwelling in the middle country (majjhimadesavāsī) together with their own continuum. Some say it is the continuum of beings dwelling in Jambudīpa. For the disciples, reflecting on all phenomena belonging to their own continuum and phenomena belonging to others' continuum without making a distinction between continua, generally in terms of external existence, this is the Saṃmasana range of the disciples. However, the Elder Moggallāna, even in external phenomena, having singled out some phenomena by making a distinction based on one's own continuum, reflected on them, and that too, having made only a superficial contact with knowledge (ñāṇena phuṭṭhamattaṃ katvā). Therefore, it is said, "As if stirring up only one aspect with the tip of a stick." There, since he did not apply knowledge to the extent that it should have been applied, it is said "As if stirring up with the tip of a stick," and due to the absence of insight into phenomena step by step (anupadadhammavipassanā), it is said, "Reflecting only on one aspect." For the General of the Dhamma (Dhammasenāpati) too, the Saṃmasana range was the very basis of insight (vipassanā) for the disciples as described above. There, however, the elder saw very clearly, completely, and step by step. Therefore, it is said, "He reflected on the Saṃmasana range of the disciples without exception."

Ettha ca sukkhavipassakā lokiyābhiññappattā pakatisāvakā mahāsāvakā aggasāvakā paccekabuddhā sammāsambuddhāti chasu janesu sukkhavipassakānaṃ jhānābhiññāhi anadhigatapaññānepuññattā andhānaṃ viya icchitapadesokkamanaṃ vipassanākāle icchiticchitadhammabhāvanā natthi, te yathāpariggahitadhammamatteyeva vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhenti. Lokiyābhiññappattā pana pakatisāvakā yena mukhena vipassanaṃ ārabhanti, tato aññenapi vipassanaṃ vitthārikaṃ kātuṃ sakkonti vipulañāṇattā. Mahāsāvakā abhinīhārasampannattā tato sātisayaṃ vipassanaṃ vitthārikaṃ kātuṃ sakkonti. Aggasāvakesu dutiyo abhinīhārasampattiyā samādhānassa sātisayattā vipassanaṃ tatopi vitthārikaṃ karoti. Paṭhamo pana tatopi mahāpaññatāya sāvakehi asādhāraṇaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ vitthārikaṃ karoti. Paccekabuddhā tehipi mahābhinīhāratāya attano abhinīhārānurūpaṃ tatopi vitthārikaṃ vipassanaṃ karonti. Buddhānaṃ sammadeva paripūritapaññāpāramīpabhāvitā sabbaññutaññāṇādhigamassa anurūpā yathā nāma katavālavedhaparicayena sarabhaṅgasadisena dhanuggahena khitto saro antarā rukkhalatādīsu asajjamāno lakkheyeva patati, na sajjati na virajjati, evaṃ antarā asajjamānā avirajjamānā vipassanā sammasanīyadhammesu yāthāvato nānānayehi pavattati, yaṃ ‘‘mahāvajirañāṇa’’nti vuccati.

And here, among the six types of individuals—the bare insight practitioners (sukkhavipassakā), those who have attained mundane supernormal powers (lokiyābhiññappattā), the ordinary disciples (pakatisāvakā), the great disciples (mahāsāvakā), the chief disciples (aggasāvakā), the Paccekabuddhas, and the Fully Enlightened Buddhas (sammāsambuddhā)—the bare insight practitioners, due to their lack of skill in knowledge that has not been attained by meditative absorptions (jhānā) and supernormal powers (abhiññā), do not have the imagination of going to the desired place, like the blind. During insight, they do not have the contemplation of the desired state. They only develop insight in accordance with the phenomena that have been grasped. However, the ordinary disciples who have attained mundane supernormal powers, due to their extensive knowledge, are able to extensively develop insight with another approach than the approach with which they begin insight. The great disciples, due to their accomplishment in resolution (abhinīhārasampannattā), are able to extensively develop insight even more than that. The second chief disciple (aggasāvakesu dutiyo) develops insight even more extensively than that due to the superiority of his concentration (samādhi) as a result of his accomplishment in resolution. However, the first (paṭhamo), due to his great wisdom, develops insight extensively, doing what is uncommon among the disciples. The Paccekabuddhas, due to their great resolution (mahābhinīhāratāya), develop insight even more extensively than that, in accordance with their own resolution (abhinīhārānurūpaṃ). For the Buddhas, insight, which is influenced by the fully perfected perfection of wisdom (paññāpāramī) and in accordance with the attainment of omniscience (sabbaññutaññāṇa), just as an arrow shot by someone skilled in archery like Sarabhaṅga, who is experienced in making targets, falls right on the target without getting caught in trees and creepers along the way—it does not get stuck, it does not become discolored—similarly, insight, without getting stuck or becoming discolored along the way, proceeds in various ways in the phenomena to be reflected on (sammasanīyadhammesu), as they actually are, which is called "great diamond knowledge" (mahāvajirañāṇa).

Etesu ca sukkhavipassakānaṃ vipassanācāro khajjotappabhāsadiso, abhiññappattapakatisāvakānaṃ dīpappabhāsadiso, mahāsāvakānaṃ ukkāppabhāsadiso, aggasāvakānaṃ osadhitārakappabhāsadiso, paccekabuddhānaṃ candappabhāsadiso, sammāsambuddhānaṃ rasmisahassapaṭimaṇḍitasaradasūriyamaṇḍalasadiso hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Tathā sukkhavipassakānaṃ vipassanācāro andhānaṃ yaṭṭhikoṭiyā gamanasadiso, lokiyābhiññappattapakatisāvakānaṃ daṇḍakasetugamanasadiso, mahāsāvakānaṃ jaṅghasetugamanasadiso, aggasāvakānaṃ sakaṭasetugamanasadiso, paccekabuddhānaṃ mahājaṅghamaggagamanasadiso, sammāsambuddhānaṃ mahāsakaṭamaggagamanasadiso. Tathā buddhānaṃ paccekabuddhānañca vipassanā cintāmayañāṇasaṃvaḍḍhitattā sayambhūñāṇabhūtā, itaresaṃ sutamayañāṇasaṃvaḍḍhitattā paropadesasambhūtāti veditabbā.

And among these, the practice of insight of the bare insight practitioners is like the light of a firefly, the practice of insight of the ordinary disciples who have attained supernormal powers is like the light of a lamp, the practice of insight of the great disciples is like the light of a torch, the practice of insight of the chief disciples is like the light of the Osadhi star, the practice of insight of the Paccekabuddhas is like the light of the moon, and the practice of insight of the Fully Enlightened Buddhas appears like the autumn sun's disc adorned with thousands of rays. Similarly, the practice of insight of the bare insight practitioners is like the going of the blind with the tip of a stick, the practice of insight of the ordinary disciples who have attained mundane supernormal powers is like the going on a stick-bridge, the practice of insight of the great disciples is like the going on a footbridge, the practice of insight of the chief disciples is like the going on a cart-bridge, the practice of insight of the Paccekabuddhas is like the going on a great foot-road, and the practice of insight of the Fully Enlightened Buddhas is like the going on a great cart-road. Thus, the insight of the Buddhas and Paccekabuddhas, being knowledge that arises spontaneously (sayambhūñāṇa) due to being developed by knowledge based on thought (cintāmayañāṇa), and that of the others, being born of another's instruction (paropadesasambhūta), due to being developed by knowledge based on learning (sutamayañāṇa), should be understood.

‘‘atīte kirā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ uttānatthameva.

"Atīte kirā" etc., he said. All that is obvious in meaning.

63.Giribbajanagaranti samantā pabbataparikkhittaṃ vajasadisaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhatīti giribbajanti evaṃladdhanāmaṃ rājagahanagaraṃ. Usūyanakiriyāya kammabhāvaṃ sandhāya‘‘upayogatthe vā’’ti vuttaṃ.

63.Giribbajanagara: The city of Rājagaha, named Giribbaja because it stands surrounded on all sides by mountains, resembling a pen (vaja). "Upayogatthe vā" is said in reference to the object of the act of begrudging.

Sāriputtamoggallānapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Going Forth of Sāriputta and Moggallāna is Finished.

Upajjhāyavattakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Observances Regarding the Preceptor

64.Vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyatīti upajjhāyo, natthi upajjhāyo etesantianupajjhāyakā. Tenāha‘‘vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyakena garunā virahitā’’ti. Tatthavajjāvajjanti khuddakaṃ mahantañca vajjaṃ. Vuddhiattho hi ayamakāro ‘‘phalāphala’’ntiādīsu viya.Uttiṭṭhapattanti ettha ucchiṭṭha-saddasamānatthouttiṭṭha-saddo. Tenevāha‘‘tasmiñhi manussā ucchiṭṭhasaññino, tasmā uttiṭṭhapattanti vutta’’nti.Piṇḍāya caraṇakapattanti iminā pana pattassa sarūpadassanamukhena ucchiṭṭhakappanāya kāraṇaṃ vibhāvitaṃ.Tasminti tasmiṃ piṇḍāya caraṇakapatte.

64.One who contemplates faults and non-faults is an upajjhāya (preceptor); those who have no preceptor are anupajjhāyakā. Therefore, he said, "Without a teacher who contemplates faults and non-faults." There, vajjāvajja means minor and major faults. This a is for the sake of increase, as in "phalāphala" etc. In uttiṭṭhapatta, the word uttiṭṭha has the same meaning as the word ucchiṭṭha. Therefore, he said, "For in that, people are mindful of leftovers; therefore, it is called uttiṭṭhapatta." With Piṇḍāya caraṇakapatta, however, the reason for the idea of leftovers is clarified through showing the nature of the bowl. Tasmi means in that alms bowl.

65.Sagāravā sappatissāti ettha garubhāvo gāravaṃ, pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukaraṇīyatā. Saha gāravenāti sagāravā. Garunā kismiñci vutte gāravavasena patissavanaṃ patisso, patissavabhūtaṃ taṃsabhāgañca yaṃkiñci gāravanti attho. Saha patissenāti sappatissā, ovādaṃ sampaṭicchantāti attho. Patissīyatīti vā patisso, garukātabbo. Tena saha patissenātisappatissā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana byañjanavicāraṃ akatvā atthamattameva dassetuṃ‘‘garukabhāvañceva jeṭṭhakabhāvañca upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti vuttaṃ.Sāhūti sādhu.Lahūti agaru, mama tuyhaṃ upajjhāyabhāve bhāriyaṃ nāma natthīti attho.Opāyikanti upāyapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ te upajjhāyaggahaṇaṃ iminā upāyena tvaṃ me ito paṭṭhāya bhāro jātosīti vuttaṃ hoti.Patirūpanti anurūpaṃ tava upajjhāyaggahaṇanti attho.Pāsādikenāti pasādāvahena kāyavacīpayogena.Sampādehīti tividhasikkhaṃ nipphādehīti attho.Kāyena vāti hatthamuddādiṃ dassento kāyena vā viññāpeti.Gahito tayā…pe… viññāpetīti ‘‘sāhū’’tiādīsu ekaṃ vadantoyeva imamatthaṃ viññāpetīti vuccati. Tenevāha‘‘idameva hī’’tiādi.Sādhūti sampaṭicchanaṃ sandhāyāti upajjhāyena ‘‘sāhū’’ti vutte saddhivihārikassa ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchanavacanaṃ sandhāya. Kasmā nappamāṇanti āha‘‘āyācanadānamattena hī’’tiādi, saddhivihārikassa ‘‘upajjhāyo me, bhante, hohī’’ti āyācanamattena, upajjhāyassa ca ‘‘sāhū’’tiādinā dānavacanamattenāti attho.Na ettha sampaṭicchanaṃ aṅganti saddhivihārikassa sampaṭicchanavacanaṃ ettha upajjhāyaggahaṇe aṅgaṃ na hoti.

65.In Sagāravā sappatissā, the state of being weighty is gārava, like a stone umbrella, the state of being worthy of respect. Saha gāravena: with respect. When something is said by the preceptor, the acceptance out of respect is patisso, and whatever related thing is respectful, that is the meaning. Saha patissenāti sappatissā: with acceptance, meaning one who accepts advice well. Or, that which is answered is patisso, something to be respected. Tena saha patissenāti sappatissā: with that which is to be answered. In the Commentary, however, without making a detailed analysis of the wording, to show only the meaning, "Having established both the state of being weighty and the state of being senior" is said. Sāhū: It is good. Lahū: not heavy, meaning there is no burden for me or you in the state of preceptorship. Opāyika: connected with means, that taking of a preceptor by you, with this means, you have become a burden to me from now on, is what is said. Patirūpa: suitable, your taking a preceptor is fitting, is the meaning. Pāsādikena: with engaging bodily and verbal actions. Sampādehī: accomplish the threefold training, is the meaning. Kāyena vā: showing a hand gesture etc., he makes it known by body. Gahito tayā…pe… viññāpetī: saying one of "sāhū" etc., he makes this meaning known, is what is called. Therefore, he said, "Indeed, this itself…" etc. Sādhūti sampaṭicchanaṃ sandhāyā: with reference to the word of acceptance "sādhu" of the disciple when the preceptor has said "sāhū". Why is it not a requirement? He said, "For by mere asking and giving…" etc., meaning by the mere asking of the disciple, "May the venerable one be my preceptor," and by the word of giving of the preceptor, such as "sāhū." Na ettha sampaṭicchanaṃ aṅga: here, the word of acceptance of the disciple is not a factor in taking a preceptor.

66.Sammāvattanāti sammāpavatti.Assāti saddhivihārikassa.Tādisameva mukhadhovanodakaṃ dātabbanti utumhi sarīrasabhāve ca ekākāre tādisameva dātabbaṃ.Dve cīvarānīti pārupanaṃ saṅghāṭiñca sandhāya vadati. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘saṅghāṭiyo’’ti kasmā vuttanti āha‘‘sabbañhi cīvaraṃ saṅghaṭitattā saṅghāṭīti vuccatī’’ti.Padavītihārehīti ettha padaṃ vītiharati etthātipadavītihāro,padavītiharaṇaṭṭhānaṃ dūtavilambitaṃ akatvā samagamane dvinnaṃ padānaṃ antare muṭṭhiratanamattaṃ. Padānaṃ vā vītiharaṇaṃ abhimukhaṃ haritvā nikkhepopadavītihāroti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.Ito paṭṭhāyāti ‘‘na upajjhāyassa bhaṇamānassā’’ti ettha vuttana-kārato paṭṭhāya.Sabbattha dukkaṭāpatti veditabbāti ‘‘īdisesu gilānopi na muccatī’’ti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Aññampi hi yathāvuttaṃ upajjhāyavattaṃ anādariyena akarontassa agilānassa vattabhede sabbattha dukkaṭameva. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘agilānena hi saddhivihārikena saṭṭhivassenapi sabbaṃ upajjhāyavattaṃ kātabbaṃ, anādarena akarontassa vattabhede dukkaṭaṃ. Na-kārapaṭisaṃyuttesu pana padesu gilānassapi paṭikkhittakiriyaṃ karontassa dukkaṭamevā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 64).Āpattiyā āsannavācanti āpattijanakameva vacanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Yāya hi vācāya āpattiṃ āpajjati, sā vācā tassā āpattiyā āsannāti vuccati.

66.Sammāvattanā: proper conduct. Assā: of the disciple. Tādisameva mukhadhovanodakaṃ dātabbaṃ: it should be given in the same way, according to the season and the condition of the body. Dve cīvarānī: he speaks with reference to the outer robe and the saṅghāṭi. If so, why is "saṅghāṭiyo" said? He said, "For all robes are called saṅghāṭī because they are assembled." In Padavītihārehī, padaṃ vītiharati etthāti padavītihāro: that in which the feet are placed is padavītihāro, the place of placing the feet. In coming together without delaying messengers, the space between the two feet is a fist and a jewel's breadth. Or, the placing of the feet, placing them facing each other, is padavītihāro: thus the meaning should be seen here. Ito paṭṭhāyā: starting from the na in "na upajjhāyassa bhaṇamānassā." Sabbattha dukkaṭāpatti veditabbā: it should be understood that everywhere there is an offense of wrong-doing, is said to show that "even the sick are not exempt in such cases." For even for a healthy disciple who disrespectfully does not perform the observances regarding the preceptor as stated, in each breach of observance, there is only wrong-doing. Therefore, he will say, "Indeed, a healthy disciple, even at sixty years, should perform all the observances regarding the preceptor; for one who disrespectfully does not do so, in each breach of observance, there is wrong-doing. However, in instances connected with 'na', even for the sick, in doing the prohibited action, there is only wrong-doing" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 64). Āpattiyā āsannavāca: he speaks with reference to the very word that causes an offense. For the word by which one incurs an offense is called proximate to that offense.

Cīvarena pattaṃ veṭhetvāti ettha ‘‘uttarāsaṅgassa ekena kaṇṇena veṭhetvā’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Gāmeti gāmapariyāpanne tādise kismiñci padese.Antaraghareti antogehe.Paṭikkamaneti āsanasālāyaṃ. Tikkhattuṃ pānīyena pucchitabboti sambandho, ādimhi majjhe anteti evaṃ tikkhattuṃ pucchitabboti attho.Upakaṭṭhoti āsanno.Dhotavālikāyāti nirajāya parisuddhavālikāya.Sace pahotīti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāveti‘‘na kenaci gelaññena abhibhūto hotī’’ti.Pariveṇaṃ gantvāti upajjhāyassa pariveṇaṃ gantvā.

Cīvarena pattaṃ veṭhetvā: Here, it is said in the gaṇṭhipadesu, "Having wrapped it with one corner of the upper robe." Gāme: in some such place included in the village area. Antaraghare: inside the house. Paṭikkamane: in the assembly hall. Tikkhattuṃ pānīyena pucchitabboti sambandho: The connection is that he should be asked three times about water, meaning he should be asked three times in this way: at the beginning, in the middle, and at the end. Upakaṭṭho: near. Dhotavālikāyā: with clean, pure sand. Sace pahotī: he clarifies the meaning that was said, "If he is not overcome by any illness." Pariveṇaṃ gantvā: having gone to the preceptor's enclosure.

Upajjhāyavattakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Observances Regarding the Preceptor is Finished.

67.Saddhivihārikavattakathā uttānatthāyeva.

67.The section on the duties towards the saddhivihārika is simple in meaning.

Nasammāvattanādikathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Discourse on Not Conducting Oneself Properly, etc.

68.Nasammāvattanādikathāyaṃgehassitapemanti ‘‘pitā me aya’’nti evaṃ uppannapemaṃ. Upajjhāyamhi pitucittupaṭṭhānameva hi idha gehassitapemaṃ nāma. Na hi idaṃ akusalapakkhiyaṃ gehassitapemaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ paṭividdhasaccānaṃ pahīnānugedhānaṃ tadasambhavato, na ca bhagavā bhikkhū saṃkilese niyojeti, gehassitapemasadisattā pana pemamukhena mettāsineho idha vuttoti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Tesu eko vattasampanno bhikkhu…pe… tesaṃ anāpattī’’ti vacanato sace eko vattasampanno bhikkhu ‘‘bhante, tumhe appossukkā hotha, ahaṃ tumhākaṃ saddhivihārikaṃ antevāsikaṃ vā gilānaṃ upaṭṭhahissāmi, ovaditabbaṃ ovadissāmi, iti karaṇīyesu ussukkaṃ āpajjissāmī’’ti vadati, te eva vā saddhivihārikādayo ‘‘bhante, tumhe kevalaṃ appossukkā hothā’’ti vadanti, vattaṃ vā na sādiyanti, tato paṭṭhāya ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ anāpattīti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva.

68.In the Discourse on Not Conducting Oneself Properly, etc., gehassitapema means affection arising in the form of "this is my father." For here, treating the preceptor with the attitude of a father is what is called gehassitapema. For this is not said with reference to gehassitapema on the side of unwholesome qualities, since it is impossible for those who have penetrated the Truths and have abandoned clinging; and the Blessed One does not direct monks to defilements. However, it should be understood that affection and love are mentioned here in terms of affection because of its similarity to gehassitapema. From the statement, "Among them, a monk who is accomplished in observances…to them there is no offense," if one monk who is accomplished in observances says, "Venerable Sir, may you be free from concern; I will attend to your saddhivihārika or antevāsika who is sick, I will advise (him) when he should be advised, I will take care of what should be done," or those very saddhivihārika and others say, "Venerable Sir, may you be entirely free from concern," or they do not approve of the observance, from then on, the teachers and preceptors have no offense, they say. The rest is obvious here.

Nasammāvattanādikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Discourse on Not Conducting Oneself Properly, etc., is Finished.

Rādhabrāhmaṇavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Story of Rādha the Brahmin

69.Rādhabrāhmaṇavatthumhikiso ahosīti khādituṃ vā bhuñjituṃ vā asakkonto tanuko ahosi appamaṃsalohito.Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātoti sañjātuppaṇḍuppaṇḍukabhāvo paṇḍupalāsappaṭibhāgo.Dhamanisanthatagattoti pariyādinnamaṃsalohitattā sirājāleneva santharitagatto.Adhikāranti adhikiriyaṃ, sakkāranti vuttaṃ hoti. Kataṃ jānantītikataññuno,kataṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā jānantītikatavedino. Kiṃ pana thero bhagavatā bārāṇasiyaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi anuññātaṃ pabbajjaṃ upasampadañca na jānātīti? No na jānāti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘kathāhaṃ, bhante, taṃ brāhmaṇaṃ pabbājemi upasampādemī’’ti kasmā āhāti imaṃ anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha‘‘kiñcāpi āyasmā sāriputto’’tiādi.Parimaṇḍalehīti paripuṇṇehi.Aññathā vā vattabbaṃ aññathā vadatīti ‘‘bhante’’ti vattabbaṃ ‘‘bandhe’’ti vadati.

69.In the story of Rādha the Brahmin, kiso ahosī means he became thin, unable to eat or enjoy food, with little flesh and blood. Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāto: one who has become jaundiced, resembling a yellow leaf. Dhamanisanthatagatto: his body covered as if spread with veins, due to the wasting away of flesh and blood. Adhikāra: respect, meaning honor is what is said. Kataṃ jānantīti kataññuno: knowing what has been done. Kataṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā jānantīti katavedino: knowing what has been done, having made it manifest. But does the Elder not know the going forth and higher ordination that were permitted by the Blessed One at Bārāṇasī with the three refuges? No, he does not not know. If so, why does he say, "How, venerable sir, shall I give the going forth and higher ordination to that Brahmin?" Regarding this question, he said, "Although venerable Sāriputta…" etc. Parimaṇḍalehī: with complete ones. Aññathā vā vattabbaṃ aññathā vadatī: he should say "bhante," but he says "bandhe."

71-73.Samanantarāti anantaraṃ.Paṇṇattivītikkamaṃ karotīti sikkhāpadavītikkamaṃ karoti. Attabhāvapariharaṇatthaṃ nissīyantītinissayā,piṇḍiyālopabhojanādikā cattāro paccayā. Tatthapiṇḍiyālopabhojananti jaṅghapiṇḍiyabalena caritvā ālopamattaṃ laddhabhojanaṃ.Atirekalābhoti ‘‘piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ nissāyā’’ti evaṃ vuttabhikkhāhāralābhato adhikalābho saṅghabhattādi. Tattha sakalassa saṅghassa dātabbabhattaṃsaṅghabhattaṃ. Katipaye bhikkhū uddisitvā dātabbabhattaṃuddesabhattaṃ. Nimantetvā dātabbabhattaṃnimantanaṃ. Salākaṃ gāhāpetvā dātabbabhattaṃsalākabhattaṃ. Ekasmiṃ pakkhe ekadivasaṃ dātabbabhattaṃpakkhikaṃ. Uposathe dātabbabhattaṃuposathikaṃ. Pāṭipadadivase dātabbabhattaṃpāṭipadikaṃ. Vitthārakathā nesaṃ senāsanakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ āvi bhavissati.

71-73.Samanantarā: immediately after. Paṇṇattivītikkamaṃ karotī: he transgresses a rule. Attabhāvapariharaṇatthaṃ nissīyantīti nissayā: the four requisites, such as eating almsfood, for the sake of maintaining the body. There, piṇḍiyālopabhojana: eating only morsels of food obtained by wandering about using the strength of one's calves. Atirekalābho: extra gain, meaning gain beyond that almsfood that was mentioned in "piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ nissāyā", such as a Sangha meal etc. There, saṅghabhattaṃ: a meal to be given to the entire Sangha. Uddesabhattaṃ: a meal to be given designating a certain number of monks. Nimantanaṃ: an invitation. Salākabhattaṃ: a meal to be given after drawing a ticket. Pakkhikaṃ: a meal to be given one day in a fortnight. Uposathikaṃ: a meal to be given on the Uposatha day. Pāṭipadikaṃ: a meal to be given on the first day of the lunar fortnight. A detailed discussion of these will become clear in the Senāsanakkhandhaka Commentary.

Vihāro*ti pākāraparicchinno sakalo āvāso.Aḍḍhayogo*ti

Vihāro*: the entire dwelling enclosed by a wall. Aḍḍhayogo*:

Pāsādoti caturassapāsādo.Hammiyanti muṇḍacchadanapāsādo. Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘vihāro nāma dīghamukhapāsādo, aḍḍhayogo ekapassacchadanakasenāsanaṃ, tassa kira ekapasse bhitti uccatarā hoti, itarapasse nīcā, tena taṃ ekapassacchadanakaṃ hoti, pāsādo āyatacaturassapāsādo, hammiyaṃ muṇḍacchadanaṃ candikaṅgaṇayutta’’nti.Guhāti pabbataguhā.Pūtimuttanti yaṃ kiñci muttaṃ. Yathā suvaṇṇavaṇṇopi kāyo ‘‘pūtikāyo’’ti vuccati, evaṃ abhinavampi muttaṃ pūtimuttameva. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.

Pāsādo: a square palace. Hammiyaṃ: a palace with a flat roof. Others, however, say, "Vihāra means a long-faced palace, aḍḍhayogo is a dwelling with a roof on one side; it seems that on one side the wall is higher, on the other side it is lower; therefore, it has a roof on one side; pāsādo is a long, square palace, hammiyaṃ is a flat roof with a courtyard with a terrace." Guhā: a mountain cave. Pūtimutta: any urine. Just as even a body with the color of gold is called "foul body," so too, even fresh urine is just foul urine. The rest here is obvious in meaning.

Rādhabrāhmaṇavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Story of Rādha the Brahmin is Finished.

Ācariyavattakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Observances Regarding the Teacher

75.Upasenavatthumhiāciṇṇanti caritaṃ vattaṃ anudhammatā.Kacci bhikkhu khamanīyanti bhikkhu kacci tuyhaṃ idaṃ catucakkaṃ navadvāraṃ sarīrayantaṃ khamanīyaṃ sakkā khamituṃ sahituṃ pariharituṃ, na kiñci dukkhaṃ uppādetīti.Kacci yāpanīyanti kacci sabbakiccesu yāpetuṃ sakkā, na kiñci antarāyaṃ dassetīti.Jānantāpi tathāgatātievamādi yaṃ parato ‘‘kati vassosi tvaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādinā pucchi, tassa parihāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – tathāgatā nāma jānantāpi sace tādisaṃ pucchākāraṇaṃ hoti, pucchanti. Sace pana tādisaṃ pucchākāraṇaṃ natthi, jānantāpi na pucchanti. Yasmā pana buddhānaṃ ajānanaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā ‘‘ajānantāpī’’ti na vuttaṃ.Kālaṃ viditvā pucchantīti sace tassā pucchāya so kālo hoti, evaṃ taṃ kālaṃ viditvā pucchanti. Sace na hoti, evampi kālaṃ viditvāva na pucchanti. Evaṃ pucchantāpi ca atthasaṃhitaṃ tathāgatā pucchanti, yaṃ atthanissitaṃ kāraṇanissitaṃ, tadeva pucchanti, no anatthasaṃhitaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmāanatthasaṃhite setughāto tathāgatānaṃ. Setuvuccati maggo, maggeneva tādisassa vacanassa ghāto samucchedoti vuttaṃ hoti.

75.In the story of Upasena, āciṇṇa: conduct, observance, conformity to the Dhamma. Kacci bhikkhu khamanīya: monk, is this four-wheeled, nine-doored body-machine of yours tolerable, able to be endured, tolerated, maintained, not producing any suffering? Kacci yāpanīya: is it able to maintain itself in all activities, not showing any hindrance? Jānantāpi tathāgatā etc., which he asked later with "kati vassosi tvaṃ bhikkhū" etc., is said to show the solution to that. There, this is the condensed meaning: the Tathāgatas, even though knowing, ask if there is such a reason for asking. But if there is no such reason for asking, even though knowing, they do not ask. However, since there is no non-knowing for Buddhas, therefore "ajānantāpī" is not said. Kālaṃ viditvā pucchantī: if there is a time for that question, then having known that time, they ask. If there is not, even so, having known the time, they do not ask. And even asking thus, the Tathāgatas ask what is connected with meaning, that which is based on meaning, based on a reason, that alone they ask, not what is unconnected with meaning. Why? Because anatthasaṃhite setughāto tathāgatānaṃ: in what is unconnected with meaning, there is a destruction of a bridge for the Tathāgatas. Setu is called a path, by the path itself, there is destruction, eradication of such words, is what is said.

atthasaṃhitanti ettha yaṃ atthanissitaṃ vacanaṃ tathāgatā pucchanti, taṃ dassento‘‘dvīhi ākārehī’’tiādimāha. Tatthaākārehīti kāraṇehi.Dhammaṃ vā desessāmāti aṭṭhuppattiyuttaṃ suttaṃ vā pubbacaritakāraṇayuttaṃ jātakaṃ vā kathayissāma.Sāvakānaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmāti sāvakānaṃ vā tāya pucchāya vītikkamaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā garukaṃ vā lahukaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāma āṇaṃ ṭhapessāma.Atilahunti atisīghaṃ.

In atthasaṃhita, showing that which is based on meaning that the Tathāgatas ask, he said "dvīhi ākārehī" etc. There, ākārehī: by reasons. Dhammaṃ vā desessāmā: we will teach a sutta endowed with origin or a Jātaka endowed with a past story. Sāvakānaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmā: or for the disciples, having made clear a transgression with that question, we will prescribe a heavy or light rule, we will establish a command. Atilahu: very quickly.

76.Aññatitthiyavatthumhiaññatitthiyapubboti pubbe aññatitthiyo bhūtoti aññatitthiyapubbo. Ettha (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.62) ca titthaṃ jānitabbaṃ, titthakaro jānitabbo, titthiyā jānitabbā, titthiyasāvakā jānitabbā. Tatthatitthaṃnāma dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo. Ettha hi sattā taranti uppilavanti ummujjanimujjaṃ karonti, tasmā ‘‘tittha’’nti vuccanti. Tāsaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ uppādetātitthakaronāma pūraṇakassapādiko. Tassa laddhiṃ gahetvā pabbajitātitthiyānāma. Te hi titthe jātāti titthiyā, yathāvuttaṃ vā diṭṭhigatasaṅkhātaṃ titthaṃ etesaṃ atthīti titthikā, titthikā eva titthiyā. Tesaṃ paccayadāyakātitthiyasāvakāti veditabbā.Sahadhammikaṃ vuccamānoti sahadhammikena vuccamāno, karaṇatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Pañcahi sahadhammikehi sikkhitabbattā, tesaṃ vā santakattā ‘‘sahadhammika’’nti laddhanāmena buddhapaññattena sikkhāpadena vuccamānoti attho.Pasūroti tassa nāmaṃ.Paribbājakoti gihibandhanaṃ pahāya pabbajjupagato.

76. In the section on those formerly of other sects, aññatitthiyapubbo means one who was formerly of another sect. Here (A.N. VIII.62) one should understand what is a tittha, what is a titthakara, what are titthiyas, and what are titthiyasāvakā. There, tittha means the sixty-two views. For in these, beings cross over, float, and make immersions and emergences; therefore they are called "tittha." The originator of those views is called titthakara, such as Pūraṇa Kassapa and others. Those who have gone forth having adopted his doctrine are called titthiyas. For they are titthiyas because they are born in a tittha, or, as stated, because they have a tittha consisting of a collection of views; titthikas, indeed, are titthiyas. Those who give support to them are to be understood as titthiyasāvakā. Sahadhammikaṃ vuccamāno means being addressed by one who is sahadhammika; the usage is in the sense of instrument. Because it should be learned by five sahadhammikas, or because it belongs to them, it means being addressed by a training rule established by the Buddha bearing the name "sahadhammika." Pasūro is his name. Paribbājako means one who has abandoned the bonds of a householder and has embraced the ascetic life.

Taṃyeva titthāyatananti ettha dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ titthameva āyatananti titthāyatanaṃ, titthaṃ vā etesaṃ atthīti titthino, titthiyā, tesaṃ āyatanantipititthāyatanaṃ. Āyatananti ca ‘‘assānaṃ kambojo āyatanaṃ, gunnaṃ dakkhiṇapatho āyatana’’nti ettha sañjātiṭṭhānaṃ āyatanaṃ nāma.

Taṃyeva titthāyatana means here the tittha, consisting of the collection of sixty-two views, is itself an āyatana; or the tittha belongs to these, they are titthiyas, and their āyatana is also titthāyatana. And āyatana is a term for a place of origin, as in "Kamboja is the āyatana for horses, the Southern Road is the āyatana for cattle."

‘‘Manorame āyatane, sevanti naṃ vihaṅgamā;

"In a delightful āyatana, birds resort to it;
Those seeking shade go to the shade, those seeking fruit eat the fruit." (A.N. 5.38)

Ettha samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Pañcimāni, bhikkhave, vimuttāyatanānī’’ti (a. ni. 5.26) ettha kāraṇaṃ, taṃ idha sabbampi labbhati. Sabbepi hi diṭṭhigatikā sañjāyamānā imāsuyeva dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīsu sañjāyanti, samosaramānāpi etāsuyeva samosaranti sannipatanti, diṭṭhigatikabhāve ca nesaṃ imāyeva dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo kāraṇaṃ, tasmā yathāvuttaṃ titthameva sañjātiādinā atthena āyatananti titthāyatanaṃ, tenevatthena titthīnaṃ āyatanantipi titthāyatanaṃ.

Here it means a place of assembly. "These, monks, are the five āyatanas of liberation" (A.N. 5.26) here means a cause; all that is obtained here. For all those who are of the nature of views, assembling, assemble and converge on these sixty-two views; and for them, these sixty-two views are the cause of being of the nature of views. Therefore, as stated, the tittha itself is the āyatana in the sense of origin and so on; and in that same sense, the āyatana of the titthiyas is also titthāyatana.

Āyasmato nissāya vacchāmīti etthaāyasmatoti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, āyasmantaṃ nissāya vasissāmīti attho.Byatto…pe… vuttalakkhaṇoyevāti parisupaṭṭhāpakabahussutaṃ sandhāya vadati.Pañcahupāli aṅgehītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āvi bhavissati.

Āyasmato nissāya vacchāmīti here, āyasmato is the possessive case in the sense of instrument; it means I will live depending on the venerable one. Byatto…pe… vuttalakkhaṇoyevāti he speaks referring to one who is skilled in attending to the assembly and very learned. What should be stated in Pañcahupāli aṅgehīti and so on, will become clear later.

Ācariyavattakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the section on duties to the teacher is finished.

Paṇāmanākhamāpanākathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on Respect and Apology

80.Yaṃ pubbe lakkhaṇaṃ vuttanti sambandho, ‘‘teneva lakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti veditabbā’’ti potthakesu pāṭho dissati, ‘‘na teneva lakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti veditabbā’’ti evaṃ panettha pāṭho veditabbo. Saddhivihārikassa vuttalakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti na veditabbāti evaṃ panettha atthopi veditabbo. Aññathā ‘‘nissayantevāsikena hi yāva ācariyaṃ nissāya vasati, tāva sabbaṃ ācariyavattaṃ kātabba’’nti idaṃ virujjheyya. Idañhi vacanaṃ nissayantevāsikassa amuttanissayasseva vattaṃ akarontassa āpattīti dīpeti. Tasmā saddhivihārikassa yathāvuttavattaṃ akarontassa nissayamuttakassa amuttakassapi āpatti, nissayantevāsikassa pana amuttanissayasseva āpattīti gahetabbaṃ. Tenevavisuddhimaggepi(visuddhi. 1.41)ñātipalibodhakathāyaṃ

80. The connection is, that which was formerly stated as the characteristic. In the books, a reading is seen: "by that same characteristic, an offense should be known for a nissayantevāsika"; however, here the reading should be understood as "an offense should not be known for a nissayantevāsika by that same characteristic." And here the meaning should also be understood thus: an offense should not be known for a saddhivihārika or a nissayantevāsika by the stated characteristic. Otherwise, this would be contradicted: "For as long as a nissayantevāsika lives in dependence on the teacher, all the duties to the teacher should be done." For this statement indicates that there is an offense for a nissayantevāsika who has not given up dependence, if he does not perform the duties. Therefore, it should be understood that there is an offense for a saddhivihārika who does not perform the duties as stated, whether he has given up dependence or not; but for a nissayantevāsika, there is an offense only if he has not given up dependence. Therefore, even in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.41) in the section on impediments of relatives

‘‘Ñātīti vihāre ācariyupajjhāyasaddhivihārikaantevāsikasamānupajjhāyakasamānācariyakā, ghare mātā pitā bhaginī bhātāti evamādikā. Te gilānā imassa palibodhā honti, tasmā so palibodho upaṭṭhahitvā tesaṃ pākatikakaraṇena upacchinditabbo. Tattha upajjhāyo tāva gilāno sace lahuṃ na vuṭṭhāti, yāvajīvaṃ paṭijaggitabbo. Tathā pabbajjācariyo upasampadācariyo saddhivihāriko upasampāditapabbājitaantevāsikasamānupajjhāyakā ca. Nissayācariya uddesācariya nissayantevāsika uddesantevāsikasamānācariyakā pana yāva nissayauddesā anupacchinnā, tāva paṭijaggitabbā’’ti –

"Relatives means in the monastery, the teacher, preceptor, saddhivihārika, antevāsika, co-preceptor, co-teacher; at home, mother, father, sister, brother, and so on. These, when sick, are impediments for him; therefore, that impediment should be cut off by attending to them in a natural way. There, the preceptor, if he does not quickly recover when sick, should be waited upon for as long as he lives. Likewise, the ordination teacher, the higher ordination teacher, the saddhivihārika, the antevāsika who was ordained and given the going forth, and the co-preceptor. But the dependence teacher, the instruction teacher, the nissayantevāsika, the instruction antevāsika, and the co-teacher should be waited upon as long as the dependence or instruction has not been terminated"—

Vibhāgena vuttaṃ. Ayañca vibhāgo ‘‘teneva lakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti veditabbā’’ti evaṃ pāṭhe sati na yujjeyya. Ayañhi pāṭho saddhivihārikassa viya nissayantevāsikassapi yathāvuttavattaṃ akarontassa nissayamuttakassa amuttakassapi āpattīti imamatthaṃ dīpeti, tasmā vuttanayenevettha pāṭho gahetabbo.

it is stated distinctly. And this distinction would not be appropriate if the reading were "an offense should be known for a nissayantevāsika by that same characteristic." For this reading indicates that there is an offense for a nissayantevāsika as for a saddhivihārika, if he does not perform the duties as stated, whether he has given up dependence or not; therefore, here the reading should be taken in the way stated.

Pabbajjaupasampadadhammantevāsikehi pana…pe… tāva vattaṃ kātabbanti pabbajjācariyaupasampadācariyadhammācariyānaṃ

But by those who have received the going forth, higher ordination, or Dhamma…pe… the duties should be done as long as…, for the teacher who gave the going forth, the teacher who gave higher ordination, and the Dhamma teacher.*

pabbajjācariyo. Yena upasampadakammavācā vuttā, ayaṃupasampadācariyo. Yo uddesaṃ paripucchaṃ vā deti, ayaṃdhammācariyoti veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.

Pabbajjācariyo is the teacher who gave the going forth. Upasampadācariyo is the one by whom the Kammavācā for higher ordination was spoken. Dhammācariyo is to be understood as the one who gives instruction or asks questions. The rest here is clear in meaning.

Paṇāmanākhamāpanākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the section on respect and apology is finished.

Nissayapaṭippassaddhikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on Abandoning Dependence

83.Nissayapaṭippassaddhikathāyaṃdisaṃ gatoti puna āgantukāmo anāgantukāmo vā hutvā vāsatthāya kañci disaṃ gato.Bhikkhuno sabhāgatanti pesalabhāvaṃ.Oloketvāti upaparikkhitvā.Vibbhante…pe… tattha gantabbanti ettha sace kenaci karaṇīyena tadaheva gantuṃ asakkonto katipāhena gamissāmīti gamane saussāho hoti, rakkhatīti vadanti.Mā idha paṭikkamīti mā idha pavisi.Tatreva vasitabbanti tattheva nissayaṃ gahetvā vasitabbaṃ.Taṃyeva vihāraṃ…pe… vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti ettha upajjhāyena pariccattattā upajjhāyasamodhānaparihāro natthi, tasmā upajjhāyena samodhānagatassapi ācariyassa santike gahitanissayo na paṭippassambhati.

83. In the section on abandoning dependence, disaṃ gato means having gone to some direction to reside, either intending to return or not intending to return. Bhikkhuno sabhāgata means a state of amiability. Oloketvā means having examined. Vibbhante…pe… tattha gantabba means here, if he is unable to go on that very day due to some task, but is enthusiastic to go in a few days, they say that he is protecting. Mā idha paṭikkamī means do not enter here. Tatreva vasitabba means one should live there having taken dependence. Taṃyeva vihāraṃ…pe… vasituṃ vaṭṭatī means here, because he has been abandoned by the preceptor, there is no avoidance of reconciliation with the preceptor; therefore, the dependence taken in the presence of the teacher, even if he has gone to reconciliation with the preceptor, is not abandoned.

Ācariyamhānissayapaṭippassaddhīsu ācariyo pakkanto vā hotīti ettha ‘‘pakkantoti disaṃ gato’’tiādinā upajjhāyassa pakkamane yo vinicchayo vutto, so tattha vuttanayeneva idhāpi sakkā viññātunti taṃ avatvā ‘‘koci ācariyo āpucchitvā pakkamatī’’tiādinā aññoyeva nayo āraddho, ayañca nayo upajjhāyapakkamanepi veditabboyeva. Īdisesu hi ṭhānesu ekattha vuttalakkhaṇaṃ aññatthāpi daṭṭhabbaṃ.Sace dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā nivattati, paṭippassaddho hotīti ettha ettāvatā disāpakkanto nāma hotīti antevāsike anikkhittadhurepi nissayo paṭippassambhati.Ācariyupajjhāyā dve leḍḍupāte atikkamma aññasmiṃ vihāre vasantīti bahiupacārasīmāyaṃ antevāsikasaddhivihārikānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānato dve leḍḍupāte atikkamma aññasmiṃ senāsane vasanti, antoupacārasīmāyaṃ pana dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvāpi vasato nissayo na paṭippassambhati. ‘‘Sacepi ācariyo muñcitukāmova hutvā nissayapaṇāmanāya paṇāmetī’’tiādi sabbaṃ upajjhāyassa āṇattiyampi veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.

Ācariyamhānissayapaṭippassaddhīsu ācariyo pakkanto vā hotīti here, regarding "pakkanto, having gone to another direction" and so on, the decision that was stated about the preceptor's departure, it is possible to understand it here also in the way stated there; therefore, without stating that, another way is begun with "if some teacher departs having taken leave" and so on; and this way should also be understood in the case of the preceptor's departure. For in such instances, what is stated in one place should be seen in another place as well. Sace dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā nivattati, paṭippassaddho hotīti here, by just that much, he is said to have gone to another direction; even if the antevāsika has not relinquished the burden, the dependence is abandoned. Ācariyupajjhāyā dve leḍḍupāte atikkamma aññasmiṃ vihāre vasantī means they live in another dwelling two leḍḍupātas beyond the boundary of the outer precinct from the place where the antevāsikas and saddhivihārikas live; but if they live two leḍḍupātas beyond the boundary of the inner precinct, the dependence is not abandoned. "Even if the teacher, wishing to release him, asks him to give up dependence" and so on, all of that should also be understood in the case of the preceptor's command. The rest here is clear in meaning.

Nissayapaṭippassaddhikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the section on abandoning dependence is finished.

Upasampādetabbapañcakakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on the Five Who Should Not Be Given Higher Ordination

84.Pañcahi,bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgatenātiādīsuna sāmaṇero upaṭṭhāpetabboti upajjhāyena hutvā sāmaṇero na gahetabbo. Ayamatthoaṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.251-253) vuttoyeva.

84. In Pañcahi,bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgatenāti and so on, na sāmaṇero upaṭṭhāpetabbo means a novice should not be accepted by becoming a preceptor. This meaning is stated in the commentary to the Anguttara Nikāya (A.N. VIII.251-253).

‘‘Attānameva paṭhamaṃ, patirūpe nivesaye;

"First one should establish oneself in what is proper;
Then one should instruct others; a wise person would not be defiled." (Dhp. 158)

‘‘na asekkhena sīlakkhandhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, na āpattiaṅgavasena. Tatthaasekkhena sīlakkhandhenāti asekkhassa sīlakkhandho asekkho sīlakkhandho nāma. Asekkhassa ayanti hi asekkho, sīlakkhandho. Evaṃ sabbattha. Evañca katvā vimuttiñāṇadassanasaṅkhātassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassapi asekkhatā upapannā.Asekkhasīlanti ca na maggaphalameva adhippetaṃ, atha kho yaṃkiñci asekkhasantāne pavattasīlaṃ lokiyalokuttaramissakassa sīlassa idhādhippetattā. Samādhikkhandhādīsupi vimuttikkhandhapariyosānesu ayameva nayo. Tasmā yathā sīlasamādhipaññakkhandhā missakā adhippetā, evaṃ vimuttikkhandhopīti tadaṅgavimuttiādayopi veditabbā, na paṭippassaddhivimutti eva. Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ pana lokiyameva. Tenevasaṃyuttanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.135) vuttaṃ ‘‘purimehi catūhi padehi lokiyalokuttarasīlasamādhipaññāvimuttiyo kathitā, vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ hoti, taṃ lokiyamevā’’ti.

‘‘na asekkhena sīlakkhandhenā’’ti and so on, is stated, not in terms of an offense. There, asekkhena sīlakkhandhenāti means the sīlakkhandha of a sekha is an asekkha sīlakkhandha. For what belongs to a sekha is asekkha, the sīlakkhandha. Thus, everywhere. And having done so, the asekkha nature of the knowledge of reviewing, which is counted as the knowledge and vision of liberation, is also established. And asekkhasīla does not only mean the path and fruition, but rather whatever sīla occurs in the asekkha continuum, because here sīla that is a mixture of mundane and supramundane is intended. This same method applies to the aggregates of concentration and so on, up to and including the aggregate of liberation. Therefore, just as the aggregates of sīla, samādhi, and paññā are intended as a mixture, so too is the aggregate of vimutti; thus, aspects of that, such as liberation, should also be understood, not just liberation through abandonment. But the knowledge and vision of liberation is only mundane. Therefore, in the commentary to the Saṃyutta Nikāya (S.N. I.135) it is stated, "by the first four terms, mundane and supramundane sīla, samādhi, paññā, and vimutti are spoken of; the knowledge and vision of liberation is the knowledge of reviewing, and that is only mundane."

Assaddhotiādīsu tīsu vatthūsu saddhā etassa natthītiassaddho. Sukkapakkhe saddahatītisaddho,saddhā vā etassa atthītipi saddho. Natthi etassa hirītiahiriko,akusalasamāpattiyā ajigucchamānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Hirī etassa atthītihirimā. Na ottappatītianottappī,akusalasamāpattiyā na bhāyatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tabbiparītoottappī. Kucchitaṃ sīdatītikusīto,hīnavīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Āraddhaṃ vīriyaṃ etassātiāraddhavīriyo,sammappadhānayuttassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Muṭṭhā sati etassātimuṭṭhassati,naṭṭhassatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Upaṭṭhitā sati etassātiupaṭṭhitassati,niccaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhappavattasatissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.

In Assaddho and so on, in the three cases, assaddho means faith is not present in him. Saddho means he has faith in the bright side, or faith is present in him. Ahiriko means shame is not present in him; this is a designation for one who is not disgusted by unwholesome attainments. Hirimā means shame is present in him. Anottappī means he does not fear; it is said that he does not fear unwholesome attainments. Ottappī is the opposite of that. Kusīto means he is accustomed to what is reprehensible; this is a designation for one with weak energy. Āraddhavīriyo means energy is aroused in him; this is a designation for one engaged in right effort. Muṭṭhassati means mindfulness is confused in him; it is said that mindfulness is destroyed. Upaṭṭhitassati means mindfulness is established in him; this is a designation for one whose mindfulness constantly inclines towards and is directed at the object.

Adhisīlesīlavipannocaajjhācāre ācāravipannoca āpajjitvā avuṭṭhito. Sassatucchedasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ gaṇhāti gāhayatīti vāantaggāhikā,micchādiṭṭhi.Purimāni dve padānīti ‘‘na paṭibalo hoti antevāsiṃ vā saddhivihāriṃ vā gilānaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ vā upaṭṭhāpetuṃ vā, anabhirataṃ vūpakāsetuṃ vā vūpakāsāpetuṃ vā’’ti imāni dve padāni.

Adhisīlesīlavipannoca ajjhācāre ācāravipannoca means he has fallen into an offense and not recovered. Antaggāhikā means taking or causing to take an extreme, counted as permanence or annihilation; this is wrong view. Purimāni dve padānī means "he is not capable of attending to or having attended to a sick antevāsī or saddhivihāri, or of appeasing or having appeased one who is not delighted."

ābhisamācārikā sikkhā,abhisamācāraṃ vā ārabbha paññattā sikkhāābhisamācārikā. Maggabrahmacariyassa ādibhūtātiādibrahmacariyakā,ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannasikkhāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Teneva ‘‘ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannaṃ ādibrahmacariyakaṃ, khandhakavattapariyāpannaṃ ābhisamācārika’’ntivisuddhimagge(visuddhi. 1.11) vuttaṃ. Tasmāsekkhapaṇṇattiyanti ettha sikkhitabbato sabbāpi ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannā paṇṇattīti gahetabbā. Tenevagaṇṭhipadepi vuttaṃ ‘‘sekkhapaṇṇattiyanti pārājikamādiṃ katvā sikkhitabbasikkhāpadapaññattiya’’nti. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.

ābhisamācārikā sikkhā, means a training that is established concerning proper conduct; ābhisamācārikā. Ādibrahmacariyakā means being the origin of the holy life; this is a designation for the training included in both Vibhangas. Therefore, in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.11) it is stated, "what is included in both Vibhangas is ādibrahmacariyaka, what is included in the Khandhaka duties is ābhisamācārika." Therefore, in sekkhapaṇṇattiya all the rules included in both Vibhangas should be taken as that which should be trained in. Therefore, in the Gaṇṭhipada also it is stated, "sekkhapaṇṇattiyanti means the rules of training that should be trained in, beginning with the Pārājika." The rest here is clear in meaning.

Upasampādetabbapañcakakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the section on the five who should not be given higher ordination is finished.

Aññatitthiyapubbavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on the Case of One Formerly of Another Sect

86.Aññatitthiyavatthumhi ājīvako acelakoti duvidho naggaparibbājakoti āha‘‘naggaparibbājakasseva ājīvakassa vā’’tiādi. Tatthaājīvakoupari ekameva vatthaṃ upakacchake pavesetvā paridahati, heṭṭhā naggo.Acelakosabbena sabbaṃ naggoyeva.

86. In the section on those formerly of other sects, he says that an ājīvaka and an acelaka are two kinds of naked ascetics: ‘‘naggaparibbājakasseva ājīvakassa vā’’ti and so on. There, ājīvako wears only one garment above, inserted in the armpit, and is naked below. Acelako is completely naked in every way.

87.Āmisakiñcikkhasampadānaṃnāma appamattakasseva deyyadhammassa anuppadānaṃ.Rūpūpajīvikāti attano rūpaṃyeva nissāya jīvantiyo. Vesiyā gocaro mittasanthavavasena upasaṅkamitabbaṭṭhānaṃ assātivesiyāgocaro. Esa nayo sabbattha.Yobbanappattā yobbanātītā vāti ubhayenapi mahallikā anividdhakumāriyova vadati.Bhikkhuniyonāma ussannabrahmacariyā, tathābhikkhūpi. Tesaṃ aññamaññavisabhāgavatthubhāvato santhavavasena upasaṅkamane katipāheneva brahmacariyantarāyo siyāti āha‘‘tāhi saddhiṃ khippameva vissāso hoti, tato sīlaṃ bhijjatī’’ti. Sesamettha uttānameva.

87. Āmisakiñcikkhasampadānaṃ means not giving even a small amount of alms. Rūpūpajīvikā means those who live depending only on their own beauty. Vesiyāgocaro means a place that should be approached through association with prostitutes by way of friendship and intimacy. This method applies everywhere. Yobbanappattā yobbanātītā vā means he speaks of an unmarried girl, whether she has reached youth or is past youth. Bhikkhuniyo means those whose holy life has declined, and likewise bhikkhūpi. Because they are objects of the opposite gender to each other, he says ‘‘tāhi saddhiṃ khippameva vissāso hoti, tato sīlaṃ bhijjatī’’ti that trust quickly arises with them, and then the sīla is broken, since the obstruction of the holy life would occur in a few days through approaching them by way of intimacy. The rest here is clear in meaning.

Aññatitthiyapubbavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the section on the case of one formerly of another sect is finished.

Pañcābādhavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on the Case of the Five Diseases

88.Pañcābādhavatthumhinakhapiṭṭhippamāṇanti ettha ‘‘kaniṭṭhaṅgulinakhapiṭṭhi adhippetā’’ti tīsupigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.‘‘Tañce nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇampi vaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃhoti, na pabbājetabbo’’ti iminā sāmaññato lakkhaṇaṃ dassitaṃ, tasmā yattha katthaci sarīrāvayavesu nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃ vaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitañce, na vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ. Evañca sati nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇampi avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitañce, sabbattha vaṭṭatīti āpannaṃ, tañca na sāmaññato adhippetanti padesaviseseyeva niyametvā dassento‘‘sace panā’’tiādimāha. Sace hi avisesena nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃ avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃ vaṭṭeyya, ‘‘nivāsanapārupanehi pakatipaacchanne ṭhāne’’ti padesaniyamaṃ na kareyya, tasmā nivāsanapārupanehi pakatipaṭicchannaṭṭhānato aññattha nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃ avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitampi na vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ, nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇato khuddakataraṃ pana avaḍḍhanakapakkhe vaḍḍhanakapakkhe vā ṭhitaṃ hotu, vaṭṭati nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇato khuddakatarassa vaḍḍhanakapakkhe avaḍḍhanakapakkhe vā ṭhitassa mukhādīsuyeva paṭikkhittattā.

88. In the fifth item concerning disabilities, nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇa (the size of the nail-bed) means, "the nail-bed of the little finger is intended," as stated in all three gaṇṭhipadas. The general characteristic is shown by this statement: "If it is situated on the growing side, even if it is the size of the nail-bed, he should not be ordained." Therefore, it is established that it is not allowable wherever the size of the nail-bed is situated on the growing side in the parts of the body. In this case, if something the size of the nail-bed is situated on the non-growing side, it would be allowable everywhere. But that is not generally intended, therefore, showing the restriction to a specific area, he said, "but if…" If, without exception, something the size of the nail-bed situated on the non-growing side were allowable, he would not make a restriction of area, saying, "in a place naturally covered by the lower and upper robes." Therefore, it is established that something the size of the nail-bed, even if situated on the non-growing side, is not allowable elsewhere than in a place naturally covered by the lower and upper robes. However, anything smaller than the size of the nail-bed, whether situated on the non-growing side or the growing side, is allowable because something smaller than the size of the nail-bed, situated on the growing or non-growing side, is prohibited only in places like the mouth.

Gaṇḍepiimināva nayena vinicchayo veditabbo. Tattha pana mukhādīsu kolaṭṭhimattato khuddakataropi gaṇḍo na vaṭṭatīti visuṃ na dassito. ‘‘Mukhādike appaṭicchannaṭṭhāne avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitopi na vaṭṭatī’’ti ettakameva hi tattha vuttaṃ, tathāpi kuṭṭhe vuttanayena mukhādīsu kolaṭṭhippamāṇato khuddakataropi gaṇḍo na vaṭṭatīti viññāyati, tasmāavaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitopīti etthapi-saddo avuttasampiṇḍanattho. Tena kolaṭṭhimattato khuddakataropi na vaṭṭatīti ayamattho dassitoyevāti ayamamhākaṃ khanti.Pakativaṇṇe jāteti rogahetukassa vikāravaṇṇassa abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Kolaṭṭhimattakoti badaraṭṭhippamāṇo.Suchaviṃ kāretvāti sañjātachaviṃ kāretvā. ‘‘Sañchaviṃ kāretvā’’tipi pāṭho, vijjamānachaviṃ kāretvāti attho.Padumapuṇḍarīkapattavaṇṇanti rattapadumasetapadumavasena padumapattavaṇṇaṃ.Sosabyādhīti khayarogo.

A boil should be decided in the same way. However, it is not specifically shown there that even a boil smaller than a kolaṭṭhi seed in places like the mouth is not allowable. Only this much is said there: "It is not allowable in a place like the mouth that is uncovered, even if it is situated on the non-growing side." Nevertheless, in accordance with the method stated regarding leprosy, it is understood that even a boil smaller than the size of a kolaṭṭhi seed in places like the mouth is not allowable. Therefore, in avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitopī (even if it is situated on the non-growing side), the pi (also) implies the inclusion of what was not said. Therefore, this meaning is shown: even something smaller than the size of a kolaṭṭhi seed is not allowable. This is our understanding. Pakativaṇṇe jāte (when the natural color has arisen) is said with reference to the absence of a disfigured color caused by disease. Kolaṭṭhimattako (the size of a kolaṭṭhi seed) means the size of a jujube seed. Suchaviṃ kāretvā (having made the skin smooth) means having the skin restored. There is also a reading "sañchaviṃ kāretvā" which means having the existing skin restored. Padumapuṇḍarīkapattavaṇṇa (the color of a lotus or white lotus petal) means the color of a lotus petal, in terms of a red lotus or white lotus. Sosabyādhī (a wasting disease) means consumption.

Pañcābādhavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Fifth Item Concerning Disabilities is Finished.

Rājabhaṭādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Story of the King's Soldiers, Etc.

90-96.Rājabhaṭādivatthūsuāhaṃsūti manussā vadiṃsu.Tasmā…pe… evamāhāti yasmā sayaṃ dhammassāmī, tasmā bhikkhūhi apabbājitabbaṃ coraṃ aṅgulimālaṃ pabbājetvā āyatiṃ akaraṇatthāya bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapento ‘‘na, bhikkhave, dhajabandho coro pabbājetabbo, yo pabbājeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti āha.Uparamantīti viramanti nivattanti.Bhinditvāti andubandhanaṃ bhinditvā.Chinditvāti saṅkhalikabandhanaṃ chinditvā.Muñcitvāti rajjubandhanaṃ muñcitvā.Vivaritvāti gāmabandhanādīsu gāmadvārādīni vivaritvā.Apassamānānaṃ vā palāyatīti purisaguttiyaṃ purisānaṃ apassamānānaṃ palāyati.Upaḍḍhupaḍḍhanti thokaṃ thokaṃ.

90-96. In the stories of the king’s soldiers, etc., āhaṃsū (they said) means people spoke. Tasmā…pe… evamāhā (Therefore…pe… thus he said) means because he himself is the master of the Dhamma, therefore, while establishing a training rule for the monks so that they would not ordain a thief like Aṅgulimāla whom he had ordained, in the future, he said, "Monks, a marked thief should not be ordained. Whoever should ordain one, there is an offense of wrong-doing." Uparamantī (ceasing) means refraining, turning back. Bhinditvā (having broken) means having broken the fastening with a pin. Chinditvā (having cut) means having cut the fastening with a chain. Muñcitvā (having released) means having released the fastening with a rope. Vivaritvā (having opened) means having opened the village gates, etc., in villages, etc., that are bound. Apassamānānaṃ vā palāyatī (or he flees without the guards seeing) means he flees without the guards seeing him in a place guarded by men. Upaḍḍhupaḍḍha (half by half) means little by little.

97.Abhisekādīsu bandhanāgārādīni sodhenti, taṃ sandhāyāha‘‘sabbasādhāraṇena vā nayenā’’ti.Sace sayameva paṇṇaṃ āropenti, na vaṭṭatīti tā bhujissitthiyo ‘‘mayampi dāsiyo homā’’ti sayameva dāsipaṇṇaṃ likhāpenti, na vaṭṭati.Takkaṃ sīse āsittakasadisāva hontīti yathā adāse karontā takkena sīsaṃ dhovitvā adāsaṃ karonti, evaṃ ārāmikavacanena dinnattā adāsāva teti adhippāyo. Takkāsiñcanaṃ pana sīhaḷadīpe cārittanti vadanti.Neva pabbājetabboti vuttanti kappiyavacanena dinnepi saṅghassa ārāmikadāsattā evaṃ vuttaṃ.Nissāmikadāsonāma yassa sāmikā saputtadārādayo matā honti, na koci tassa pariggāhako, sopi pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati, taṃ pana attanāpi bhujissaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Ye vā pana tasmiṃ raṭṭhe sāmino, tehipi kārāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Devadāsiputtaṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’titīsu gaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Dāsassa pabbajitvā attano sāmike disvā palāyantassa āpatti natthīti vadanti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva.

97. They purify prisons, etc., at consecrations, etc. With that in mind, he said, "sabbasādhāraṇena vā nayenā" (or by a method common to all). Sace stessa paṇṇaṃ āropenti, na vaṭṭatī (if they themselves draw up a document, it is not allowable) means those free women write a document of slavery themselves, saying, "Let us also be slaves," it is not allowable. Takkaṃ sīse āsittakasadisāva hontī (the buttermilk is just like having been poured on their heads) means just as they make someone a non-slave by washing the head with buttermilk, thus because they are given by the word of the ārāmika, they are like non-slaves, this is the intention. They say that buttermilk sprinkling is a custom in Sri Lanka. Neva pabbājetabboti vutta (it was said that they should not be ordained) means because they are slaves of the monastery, even when given by the word of a legitimate person, thus it was said. Nissāmikadāso (a slave without an owner) is one whose owners, along with their children and wives, etc., have died, and there is no one to take care of him. He also is not allowed to be ordained, but it is allowable to make him free oneself. Or it is allowable to have it done by those who are the owners in that country. "A devadāsī's son is allowed to be ordained," as it is said in the three gaṇṭhipadas. They say that there is no offense for a slave who has gone forth and flees upon seeing his master. The rest is clear everywhere.

Rājabhaṭādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Story of the King's Soldiers, Etc. is Finished.

Nissayamuccanakakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Story of Release from Dependence

103.Nissayamuccanakassa vattesu pañcakachakkesu panaubhayāni kho pana…pe… anubyañjanasoti ettha ‘‘sabbopi cāyaṃ pabhedo mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ ñātāyaṃ ñāto hotī’’titīsupi gaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Āpattiṃ jānātītiādīsu ca ‘‘pāṭhe avattamānepi ‘idaṃ nāma katvā idaṃ āpajjatī’ti jānāti ce, vaṭṭatī’’ti tattheva vuttaṃ. Tañca kho pubbe pāṭhe paguṇe kateti gahetabbanti ca ācariyupajjhāyānampi eseva nayoti ca keci vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva.

103. In the items of the release from dependence, in the five or six aggregates, ubhayāni kho pana…pe… anubyañjanaso (both…pe… in detail) means, "this entire division is known when the meaning of the Abhidhamma is known," as it is said in the three gaṇṭhipadas. And in Āpattiṃ jānātī (he knows the offense), it is said there, "Even if he does not speak the text, if he knows 'by doing this, he incurs this offense,' it is allowable." And some say that this should be understood as having previously mastered the text, and that this is also the method for teachers and preceptors. The rest here is clear.

Nissayamuccanakakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Story of Release from Dependence is Finished.

Rāhulavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Story of Rāhula

105.Rāhulavatthumhitattheva vihariṃsūti sabbepi te arahattaṃ pattakālato paṭṭhāya ariyā nāma majjhattāva hontīti rañño pahitasāsanaṃ dasabalassa anārocetvāva tattha vihariṃsu.Ekadivasaṃ jātaṃ kāḷudāyiṃ nāma amaccanti ayaṃ kira (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.225) padumuttarabuddhakāle haṃsavatīnagare kulagehe nibbatto satthu dhammadesanaṃ suṇanto satthāraṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ kulappasādakānaṃ aggaṭṭhāne ṭhapentaṃ disvā adhikārakammaṃ katvā taṃ ṭhānantaraṃ patthesi. So yāvajīvaṃ kusalaṃ katvā devamanussesu saṃsaranto amhākaṃ bodhisattassa mātukucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇadivase kapilavatthusmiṃyeva amaccagehe paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Jātadivase bodhisattena saddhiṃyeva jātoti taṃ divasaṃyeva dukūlacumbaṭake nipajjāpetvā bodhisattassa upaṭṭhānatthāya nayiṃsu. Bodhisattena hi saddhiṃ bodhirukkho rāhulamātā catasso nidhikumbhiyo ārohaniyahatthī kaṇḍako channo kāḷudāyīti ime satta ekadivase jātattā sahajātā nāma ahesuṃ. Athassa nāmaggahaṇadivase sakalanagarassa udaggacittadivase jātoti udāyītveva nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Thokaṃ kāḷadhātukattā pana kāḷudāyī nāma jāto. So bodhisattena saddhiṃ kumārakīḷaṃ kīḷanto vuddhiṃ agamāsi.

105. In the story of Rāhula, tattheva vihariṃsū (they stayed right there) means all those arahants, from the time they attained arahantship, were neutral, so without announcing the king's message to the Ten-Powered One, they stayed there. Ekadivasaṃ jātaṃ kāḷudāyiṃ nāma amacca (a courtier named Kāḷudāyī who was born on the same day) means it is said that this one (A. N. 8.1.1.225) was born in a wealthy family in the city of Haṃsavatī in the time of Padumuttara Buddha, and while listening to the Teacher's Dhamma talk, he aspired to that rank, having done a meritorious deed, seeing the Teacher placing a certain monk in the foremost position of those who bring delight to families. Having done meritorious deeds as long as he lived, wandering among gods and humans, on the day of conception in the womb of our Bodhisatta's mother, he took rebirth in a courtier's family in Kapilavatthu itself. Because he was born on the same day as the Bodhisatta, on that very day they laid him down on a fine cloth and took him to attend upon the Bodhisatta. For along with the Bodhisatta, the Bodhi tree, Rāhula's mother, the four treasure pots, the royal elephant, Kaṇḍaka, Channa, and Kāḷudāyī, these seven were born on the same day, therefore, they were called co-nascent. Then on his naming day, because he was born on the day the entire city was joyful, they named him Udāyī. However, because he was slightly dark in complexion, he became known as Kāḷudāyī. He grew up playing childhood games with the Bodhisatta.

Saṭṭhimattāhigāthāhīti –

Saṭṭhimattāhi gāthāhī (with about sixty verses) means –

‘‘Aṅgārino dāni dumā bhadante;

"Now the trees are glowing, O Blessed One,
bearing fruit, having shed their foliage;
they shine like flames;
it is the time for the Bhāgīrathī, O Great Hero." (Theragā. 527)

‘‘Nātisītaṃ nātiuṇhaṃ, nātidubbhikkhachātakaṃ;

"It is neither too cold nor too hot, nor too much famine and hunger;
the earth is verdant with grass, this is the time, O Great Sage."

‘‘Pokkharavassanti pokkharapattavaṇṇamudaka’’ntigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Pokkharapattappamāṇaṃ majjhe uṭṭhahitvā anukkamena satapaṭalaṃ sahassapaṭalaṃ hutvā vassanakavassantipi vadanti. Tasmiṃ kira vassante temetukāmāva tementi, na itare.Ekopi rājā vā…pe… gato natthīti dhammadesanaṃ sutvā pakkantesu ñātīsu ekopi rājā vā rājamahāmatto vā ‘‘sve amhākaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti nimantetvā gato natthi. Pitāpissa suddhodanamahārājā ‘‘mayhaṃ putto mama gehaṃ anāgantvā kahaṃ gamissatī’’ti animantetvāva agamāsi, gantvā pana gehe vīsatiyā bhikkhusahassānaṃ yāguādīni paṭiyādāpetvā āsanāni paññāpesi.

‘‘Pokkharavassanti pokkharapattavaṇṇamudaka’’nti (‘‘Pokkharavassa’’ means water the color of lotus petals) as it is said in the gaṇṭhipadas. They say that while rising up in the middle the size of a lotus petal, it gradually becomes a hundred layers, a thousand layers, and rains in that way. It is said that while that rain is falling, it wets only those who want to be wet, not others. Ekopi rājā vā…pe… gato natthī (not even one king…pe… went) means among the relatives who departed after hearing the Dhamma talk, not even one king or royal minister went, inviting, "Come accept alms from us tomorrow." Even his father, King Suddhodana, went without inviting him, thinking, "Where else would my son go without coming to my house?" But having gone, he had rice gruel and other things prepared for twenty thousand monks in his house, and had seats arranged.

Kulanagareti ñātikulassa nagare.Uṇhīsato paṭṭhāyāti sīsato paṭṭhāya.Uṇhīsanti hi uṇhīsasadisattā bhagavato paripuṇṇanalāṭassa paripuṇṇasīsassa ca etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bhagavato hi dakkhiṇakaṇṇacūḷikato paṭṭhāya maṃsapaṭalaṃ uṭṭhahitvā sakalanalāṭaṃ chādayamānaṃ pūrayamānaṃ gantvā vāmakaṇṇacūḷikāya patiṭṭhitaṃ saṇhatamatāya suvaṇṇavaṇṇatāya pabhassaratāya paripuṇṇatāya ca rañño baddhauṇhīsapaṭṭo viya virocati. Bhagavato kira imaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ disvā rājūnaṃ uṇhīsapaṭṭaṃ akaṃsu. Aññe pana janā aparipuṇṇasīsā honti, keci kappasīsā, keci phalasīsā, keci aṭṭhisīsā, keci tumbasīsā, keci kumbhasīsā, keci pabbhārasīsā, bhagavato pana āraggena vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitaṃ viya suparipuṇṇaṃ udakapubbuḷasadisampi hoti. Teneva uṇhīsaveṭhitasīsasadisattā uṇhīsaṃ viya sabbattha parimaṇḍalasīsattā ca uṇhīsasīsoti bhagavā vuccati.

Kulanagare (in the city of the clan) means in the city of the clan of relatives. Uṇhīsato paṭṭhāyā (starting from the crown of the head) means starting from the head. Uṇhīsa (crown of the head) is a designation for the Buddha's complete forehead and complete head because it is similar to a turban. For from the tip of the right ear of the Buddha, a layer of flesh rises, covering and filling the entire forehead, and settles at the tip of the left ear, shining like a tied turban of a king because of its smoothness, golden color, radiance, and completeness. It is said that seeing this mark of the Buddha, kings made turbans. Other people have incomplete heads, some have skull-like heads, some have fruit-like heads, some have bone-like heads, some have gourd-like heads, some have pot-like heads, some have rock-like heads, but the Buddha's is very complete, as if it were perfectly rounded and placed with a chisel, even like a water bubble. Therefore, the Buddha is called uṇhīsasīsoti (having a crowned head) because his head is everywhere round like a head wrapped in a turban.

Narasīhagāthāhināma aṭṭhahi gāthāhīti –

Narasīhagāthāhi nāma aṭṭhahi gāthāhī (with eight verses called Narasīha) means –

‘‘Siniddhanīlamudukuñcitakeso;

"His hair is smooth, dark blue, soft, and curly;
his forehead is radiant, like a polished mirror;
his nose is well-formed, high, soft, and large;
the Man-lion is radiant with a web of rays." (Jā. Aṭṭha. 1. Santikenidānakathā; Apa. Aṭṭha. 1. Santikenidānakathā)

Gaṇṭhipadesupana –

In the gaṇṭhipadas, however –

‘‘Cakkavaraṅkitarattasupādo;

"His auspicious feet are marked with wheels;
his ankles are long, adorned with marks;
his feet are adorned with yak-tail whisks and parasols;
this Man-lion is truly your father.

‘‘Sakyakumāravaro sukhumālo;

"He is the best of the Sakyan princes, refined;
his body is adorned with auspicious marks;
the Man-hero has gone for the welfare of the world;
this Man-lion is truly your father.

‘‘Puṇṇasasaṅkanibho mukhavaṇṇo;

"The color of his face is like that of a full moon;
the Man-chief is dear to gods and humans;
his gait is like the playful gait of a mighty elephant;
this Man-lion is truly your father.

‘‘Khattiyasambhavaaggakulīno;

"He is of noble birth, from the foremost clan of warriors;
his feet are honored by gods and humans;
his mind is established in virtue and concentration;
this Man-lion is truly your father.

‘‘Āyatayuttasusaṇṭhitanāso;

"His nose is long, well-formed, and shapely;
he has eyelashes like a cow, and dark blue eyes;
his eyebrows are dark blue like a rainbow;
this Man-lion is truly your father.

‘‘Vaṭṭasuvaṭṭasusaṇṭhitagīvo;

"His neck is round, well-formed, and shapely;
he has the jaws of a lion, the body of a king of beasts;
his skin is like polished gold, of the finest color;
this Man-lion is truly your father.

‘‘Siniddhasugambhiramañjusaghoso;

"His voice is smooth, deep, and melodious;
his tongue is red like a bandhuka flower;
he has forty white teeth, twenty and twenty;
this Man-lion is truly your father.

‘‘Añjanavaṇṇasunīlasukeso;

"His hair is dark blue like collyrium;
his forehead is pure like a golden plate;
his hair is pure and white like a medicinal powder;
this Man-lion is truly your father.

‘‘Gacchatinilapathe viya cando;

"He walks like the moon in the blue sky;
his form is surrounded by a host of stars;
the Master of Ascetics is in the midst of his disciples;
this Man-lion is truly your father." (Jā. Aṭṭha. 1. Santikenidānakathā)

bhikkhācāro.

bhikkhācāro (alms-faring).

Uttiṭṭheti uttiṭṭhitvā paresaṃ gharadvāre ṭhatvā gahetabbapiṇḍe.Nappamajjheyyāti piṇḍacārikavattaṃ hāpetvā paṇītabhojanāni pariyesanto uttiṭṭhe pamajjati nāma, sapadānaṃ piṇḍāya caranto pana nappamajjati nāma, evaṃ karonto uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyya.Dhammanti anesanaṃ pahāya sapadānaṃ caranto tameva bhikkhācariyadhammaṃ sucaritaṃ care.Sukhaṃ setīti desanāmattametaṃ, evaṃ panetaṃ bhikkhāya cariyadhammaṃ caranto dhammacārī idhaloke ca paraloke ca catūhipi iriyāpathehi sukhaṃ viharatīti attho.

Uttiṭṭhe (he should rise) means having risen and standing at the doors of others' houses, he should take the alms. Nappamajjheyyā (he should not neglect) means giving up the practice of alms-faring and seeking delicious foods, he rises, that is called neglecting. But going for alms in regular order is called not neglecting. Doing so, he should rise and not neglect. Dhamma (Dhamma) means abandoning wrong livelihood and going in regular order, he should practice that very Dhamma of alms-faring, a good practice. Sukhaṃ setī (he sleeps happily) this is merely a statement, but the meaning is that one who practices the Dhamma of alms-faring, a practitioner of Dhamma, lives happily in this world and the next, in all four postures.

na naṃ duccaritanti vesiyādibhede agocare caranto naṃ bhikkhācariyadhammaṃ duccaritaṃ carati nāma, evaṃ acaritvā taṃ dhammaṃ care sucaritaṃ, na naṃ duccaritaṃ care. Sesamettha vuttatthameva. Imaṃ pana dutiyagāthaṃ pitu nivesanaṃ gantvā abhāsīti veditabbaṃ. Tenevatheragāthāsaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ(theragā. aṭṭha. 1.156 nandattheragāthāvaṇṇanā)ācariyadhammapālattherenavuttaṃ ‘‘dutiyadivase piṇḍāya paviṭṭho ‘uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyyā’ti gāthāya pitaraṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpetvā nivesanaṃ gantvā ‘dhammaṃ care sucarita’nti gāthāya mahāpajāpatiṃ sotāpattiphale rājānañca sakadāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāpesī’’ti.Dhammapadaṭṭhakathāyampi(dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.12 nandattheravatthu) vuttaṃ ‘‘punadivase piṇḍāya paviṭṭho ‘uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyyā’ti gāthāya pitaraṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpetvā ‘dhammaṃ care’ti gāthāya mahāpajāpatiṃ sotāpattiphale rājānañca sakadāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāpesī’’ti.

Na naṃ duccaritaṃ means that by behaving in a manner that is inappropriate (agocara) in various ways, such as being a libertine (vesiya), one is said to be engaging in misconduct (duccaritaṃ) regarding the duties of a mendicant (bhikkhācariyadhammaṃ). By not behaving in this way, one practices that Dhamma well (sucaritaṃ), and does not engage in misconduct. The rest has the meaning already stated. However, it should be understood that he spoke this second verse after going to his father's residence. Therefore, in the Theragāthāsaṃvaṇṇanā (Theragā. aṭṭha. 1.156 Nandattheragāthāvaṇṇanā), Ācariyadhammapālatthera said, "On the second day, having entered for alms, he established his father in the fruit of stream-entry (sotāpattiphale) with the verse ‘Uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyya.’ After going to his residence, he established Mahāpajāpatī in the fruit of stream-entry and the king in the fruit of once-returning (sakadāgāmiphale) with the verse ‘Dhammaṃ care sucaritaṃ.’" In the Dhammapadaṭṭhakathā also (Dha. Pa. Aṭṭha. 1.12 Nandattheravatthu) it is said, "Again, on the next day, having entered for alms, he established his father in the fruit of stream-entry with the verse ‘Uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyya,’ and he established Mahāpajāpatī in the fruit of stream-entry and the king in the fruit of once-returning with the verse ‘Dhammaṃ care’."

Dhammapālajātakaṃ sutvā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāsīti punekadivasaṃ rājanivesane katapātarāso ekamantaṃ nisinnena raññā ‘‘bhante, tumhākaṃ dukkarakārikakāle ekā devatā maṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘putto te kālakato’ti āha. Ahaṃ tassā vacanaṃ asaddahanto ‘na mayhaṃ putto bodhiṃ appatvā kālaṃ karotī’ti paṭikkhipinti vutte idāni kathaṃ saddahissatha, pubbepi aṭṭhikāni dassetvā ‘putto te mato’ti vutte na saddahitthā’’ti imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā mahādhammapālajātakaṃ kathesi. Taṃ sutvā rājā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhahi.

Dhammapālajātakaṃ sutvā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāsī means that one day, after finishing the morning meal in the royal palace and sitting to one side, the king said, "Venerable sir, during the time of your difficult practices (dukkarakārikakāle), a deity approached me and said, 'Your son has passed away.' Disbelieving her words, I rejected them, saying, 'My son will not pass away without attaining enlightenment (bodhiṃ appatvā kālaṃ karotī).' Now, how will you believe? Even before, when showing bones and saying, 'Your son is dead,' you did not believe." Because of this origin, he narrated the Mahādhammapālajātaka. Having heard it, the king was established in the fruit of non-returning (anāgāmiphale).

Kesavissajjananti kulamariyādavasena kesoropanaṃ.Paṭṭabandhoti yuvarājapaṭṭabandho. Abhinavagharappavesanamahogharamaṅgalaṃ,vivāhakaraṇamahoāvāhamaṅgalaṃ. Chattamaṅgalanti yuvarājachattamaṅgalaṃ.Janapadakalyāṇīti (udā. aṭṭha. 22) janapadamhi kalyāṇī uttamā chasarīradosarahitā pañcakalyāṇasamannāgatā. Sā hi yasmā nātidīghā nātirassā nātikisā nātithūlā nātikāḷā nāccodātāti atikkantā mānusaṃ vaṇṇaṃ, appattā dibbaṃ vaṇṇaṃ, tasmā chasarīradosarahitā. Chavikalyāṇaṃ maṃsakalyāṇaṃ nahārukalyāṇaṃ aṭṭhikalyāṇaṃ vayakalyāṇanti imehi pana pañcahi kalyāṇehi samannāgatattā pañcakalyāṇasamannāgatā nāma. Tassā hi āgantukobhāsakiccaṃ natthi. Attano sarīrobhāseneva dvādasahatthaṭṭhāne ālokaṃ karoti, piyaṅgusāmā vā hoti suvaṇṇasāmā vā, ayamassāchavikalyāṇatā. Cattāro panassā hatthapādā mukhapariyosānañca lākhārasaparikammakataṃ viya rattapavāḷarattakambalasadisaṃ hoti, ayamassāmaṃsakalyāṇatā. Vīsati pana nakhapattāni maṃsato amuttaṭṭhāne lākhārasapūritāni viya muttaṭṭhāne khīradhārāsadisāni honti, ayamassānahārukalyāṇatā. Dvattiṃsa dantā suphusitā sudhotavajirapanti viya khāyanti, ayamassāaṭṭhikalyāṇatā. Vīsativassasatikāpi samānā soḷasavassuddesikā viya hoti nivalipalitā, ayamassāvayakalyāṇatā. Iti imehi pañcahi kalyāṇehi samannāgatattā janapadakalyāṇīti vuccati.

Kesavissajjana means the cutting of hair according to the family tradition. Paṭṭabandho means the ceremony of appointing the crown prince. The celebration of entering a new house is gharamaṅgalaṃ, the house-warming ceremony; the celebration of marriage is āvāhamaṅgalaṃ, the wedding ceremony. Chattamaṅgalaṃ is the crown prince's umbrella ceremony. Janapadakalyāṇī (Udā. Aṭṭha. 22) means a beautiful (kalyāṇī), excellent woman in the country (janapadamhi), free from six physical defects (chasarīradosarahitā), and possessing the five kinds of beauty (pañcakalyāṇasamannāgatā). Because she is neither too tall nor too short, neither too thin nor too fat, neither too dark nor too fair, she surpasses human beauty (mānusaṃ vaṇṇaṃ) and has not attained divine beauty (dibbaṃ vaṇṇaṃ); therefore, she is free from six physical defects. She is called possessing the five kinds of beauty (pañcakalyāṇasamannāgatā) because she is endowed with these five beauties: beauty of skin (chavikalyāṇaṃ), beauty of flesh (maṃsakalyāṇaṃ), beauty of tendons (nahārukalyāṇaṃ), beauty of bones (aṭṭhikalyāṇaṃ), and beauty of youth (vayakalyāṇaṃ). For her, there is no need for adventitious lighting; she illuminates an area of twelve cubits with the light of her own body. She is the color of piyaṅgu or the color of gold; this is her chavikalyāṇatā. Her four hands and feet, and the area around her mouth, are like those treated with lac dye, resembling red coral or red woolen cloth; this is her maṃsakalyāṇatā. Her twenty fingernails and toenails, where they are not emerging from the flesh, are like those filled with lac dye, and where they emerge, they are like streams of milk; this is her nahārukalyāṇatā. Her thirty-two teeth are very evenly spaced and shine like a row of polished diamonds; this is her aṭṭhikalyāṇatā. Even at the age of twenty, she appears as if she is sixteen years old, without wrinkles or gray hair; this is her vayakalyāṇatā. Thus, she is called janapadakalyāṇī because she is endowed with these five beauties.

Tuvaṭanti sīghaṃ. Sopi bhagavantaṃ ‘‘pattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vattuṃ avisahamāno vihāraṃyeva agamāsīti. So kira tathāgate gāravena ‘‘pattaṃ vo bhante gaṇhathā’’ti vattuṃ nāsakkhi. Evaṃ pana cintesi ‘‘sopānasīse pattaṃ gaṇhissatī’’ti. Satthā tasmimpi ṭhāne na gaṇhi. Itaro ‘‘sopānapādamūle gaṇhissatī’’ti cintesi. Satthā tatthāpi na gaṇhi. Itaro ‘‘rājaṅgaṇe gaṇhissatī’’ti cintesi. Satthā tatthāpi na gaṇhi. Kumāro nivattitukāmo aruciyā gacchanto satthu gāravena ‘‘pattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vattumpi asakkonto ‘‘idha gaṇhissati, ettha gaṇhissatī’’ti cintento gacchati. Janapadakalyāṇiyā ca vuttavacanaṃ tassa hadaye tiriyaṃ patitvā viya ṭhitaṃ. Nandakumārañhi abhisekamaṅgalaṃ na tathā pīḷesi, yathā janapadakalyāṇiyā vuttavacanaṃ, tenassa cittasantāpo balavā ahosi. Atha naṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne nivattissati, imasmiṃ ṭhāne nivattissatī’’ti cintentameva satthā vihāraṃ netvā ‘‘pabbajissasi nandā’’ti āha. So buddhagāravena ‘‘na pabbajissāmī’’ti avatvā ‘‘āma pabbajissāmī’’ti āha. Satthā ‘‘tena hi nandaṃ pabbājethā’’ti vatvā pabbājesi. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘anicchamānaṃyeva bhagavā pabbājesī’’ti. ‘‘Satthā kapilapuraṃ gantvā tatiyadivase nandaṃ pabbājesī’’tidhammapadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.12 nandattheravatthu) vuttaṃ,aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.230) pana –

Tuvaṭa means quickly. He, unable to say to the Blessed One, "Take the bowl (pattaṃ gaṇhathā)," went to the monastery. It seems that out of reverence for the Tathāgata, he could not say, "Take the bowl, venerable sir (pattaṃ vo bhante gaṇhathā)." He thought, "He will take the bowl at the top of the stairs (sopānasīse)." The Teacher did not take it even at that place. The other thought, "He will take it at the foot of the stairs (sopānapādamūle)." The Teacher did not take it there either. The other thought, "He will take it in the royal courtyard (rājaṅgaṇe)." The Teacher did not take it there either. The prince, wishing to turn back but going reluctantly, unable to say "Take the bowl" out of reverence for the Teacher, thought, "He will take it here, he will take it there," as he went. And the words spoken by the janapadakalyāṇī seemed to have struck and remained crosswise in his heart. Indeed, the consecration ceremony (abhisekamaṅgalaṃ) did not torment Nandakumāra as much as the words spoken by the janapadakalyāṇī; therefore, his mental distress was strong. Then, while he was thinking, "He will turn back at this place, he will turn back at that place," the Teacher led him to the monastery and said, "Will you go forth, Nanda (pabbajissasi nandā)?" Out of reverence for the Buddha, he did not say, "I will not go forth (na pabbajissāmī)," but said, "Yes, I will go forth (āma pabbajissāmī)." The Teacher, saying, "Then let Nanda be ordained (nandaṃ pabbājethā)," had him ordained. Therefore, it is said, "The Blessed One had him ordained against his will (anicchamānaṃyeva bhagavā pabbājesī)." "The Teacher went to Kapilapura and ordained Nanda on the third day," it is said in the Dhammapadaṭṭhakathā (Dha. Pa. Aṭṭha. 1.12 Nandattheravatthu). However, in the Aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathā (A. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.1.230) –

‘‘Mahāsattopi sabbaññutaṃ patvā pavattitavaradhammacakko lokānuggahaṃ karonto rājagahato kapilavatthuṃ gantvā paṭhamadassaneneva pitaraṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpesi, punadivase pitu nivesanaṃ gantvā rāhulamātāya ovādaṃ katvā sesajanassapi dhammaṃ kathesi, punadivase nandakumārassa abhisekagehappavesanaāvāhamaṅgalesu vattamānesu tassa nivesanaṃ gantvā kumāraṃ pattaṃ gāhāpetvā pabbājetuṃ vihārābhimukho pāyāsī’’ti –

"The Great Being, having attained omniscience and setting in motion the excellent Wheel of the Dhamma, while helping the world, went from Rājagaha to Kapilavatthu and, with the very first sight, established his father in the fruit of stream-entry. On the following day, having gone to his father's residence, he gave advice to Rāhula's mother and also spoke Dhamma to the remaining people. On the following day, while the consecration, house-entering, and wedding ceremonies of Nandakumāra were taking place, he went to his residence, had the prince take his bowl, and proceeded towards the monastery to have him ordained" –

Vuttaṃ, idha pana ‘‘bhagavā kapilapuraṃ āgantvā dutiyadivase nandaṃ pabbājesī’’ti vuttaṃ, sabbampetaṃ ācariyena taṃtaṃbhāṇakānaṃ tathā tathā anussavavasena pariharitvā āgatabhāvato tattha tattha tathā tathā vuttanti natthettha ācariyavacane pubbāparavirodho.

It is said. Here, however, it is said, "The Blessed One came to Kapilapura and ordained Nanda on the second day." All of this is said differently in different places because it has been preserved and passed down by the teachers according to the different reciters (bhāṇakānaṃ) in that way. Therefore, there is no contradiction in the words of the teachers in terms of sequence.

Brahmarūpavaṇṇanti brahmarūpasamānarūpaṃ.Tyassāti te assa.Vaṭṭānugatanti vaṭṭapariyāpannaṃ.Savighātanti dukkhasahitattā savighātaṃ, sadukkhanti attho.Sattavidhaṃ ariyadhananti –

Brahmarūpavaṇṇa means having a form similar to the form of Brahmā. Tyassā means to him, to that one. Vaṭṭānugata means included in the cycle. Savighāta means with suffering because it is accompanied by pain (dukkhasahitattā savighātaṃ), meaning with sorrow (sadukkhanti attho). Sattavidhaṃ ariyadhanaṃ means the seven kinds of noble wealth –

‘‘Saddhādhanaṃ sīladhanaṃ, hiriottappiyaṃ dhanaṃ;

"Wealth of faith, wealth of virtue,
Wealth of shame and fear of wrongdoing;
Wealth of learning, generosity, and wisdom,
These are the seven kinds of wealth." (A. Ni. 7.5-6) –

Uñchācariyāyāti bhikkhācariyāya. Puttasineho uppajjamāno sakalasarīraṃ khobhetvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhatīti āha‘‘puttapemaṃ bhante…pe… aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Puttasineho hi balavabhāvato sahajātapītivegassa savipphāratāya taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpadhammehi pharaṇavasena sakalasarīraṃ āloḷetvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhati.Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma. Sesamettha uttānameva.

Uñchācariyāyā means by the mendicant's way of life. He said, "Puttapemaṃ bhante…pe… aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhatī," because parental affection, when arising, agitates the entire body and strikes and remains in the marrow of the bones (aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhatīti āha). Indeed, because parental affection is strong, due to the force (savegassa) and intensity (savipphāratāya) of the innate joy (sahajātapītivegassa), it strikes and remains in the marrow of the bones, agitating the entire body through the permeation (pharaṇavasena) of the material phenomena arising from it (taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpadhammehi). Yatra hi nāmā means that which. The rest here is self-explanatory.

Rāhulavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Rāhulavatthukathā is finished.

Sikkhāpadadaṇḍakammavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sikkhāpadadaṇḍakammavatthukathā

106.Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāmaṇerānaṃ dasa sikkhāpadānītiādīsu sikkhitabbāni padānisikkhāpadāni,sikkhākoṭṭhāsāti attho. Sikkhāya vā padāni sikkhāpadāni, adhisīlaadhicittaadhipaññāsikkhāya adhigamupāyāti attho. Atthato pana kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttā viratiyo, taṃsampayuttadhammā panettha taggahaṇeneva gahetabbā. Saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atipātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho. Atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto, pāṇassa atipātopāṇātipāto,pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti.Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññatarappavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto, tatopāṇātipātā.

106. Among the phrases beginning with "Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāmaṇerānaṃ dasa sikkhāpadānī," the rules to be learned are sikkhāpadāni, meaning sections of training (sikkhākoṭṭhāsāti attho). Or, the rules for training are sikkhāpadāni, meaning the means to attain the training in higher virtue, higher mind, and higher wisdom (adhisīlaadhicittaadhipaññāsikkhāya adhigamupāyāti attho). In terms of meaning, however, they are the abstinences (viratiyo) associated with wholesome cittas in the sense sphere (kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttā), and the dhammas associated with them should be taken here by implication. Atipāta is the causing of something to fall even before its natural falling, which is by nature prone to falling (saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atipātanaṃ atipāto), meaning causing it to fall quickly without giving it time to fall gradually (saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho). Or atipāta is causing something to fall by overcoming or subduing it with weapons (satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto). Pāṇātipāto is the destruction of life (pāṇassa atipāto), which is said to be the killing of living beings (pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti). Here, pāṇo means a being in conventional usage, but in the ultimate sense (paramatthato) it is the life faculty (jīvitindriyaṃ). In that life, however, pāṇātipāto is the intention to kill (vadhakacetanā) arising from an effort to cut off the life faculty of a being who is perceived as having life (pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā), and which is expressed through either bodily or verbal action (kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññatarappavattā); therefore, pāṇātipātā.

Veramaṇīti verahetutāya verasaññitaṃ pāṇātipātādipāpadhammaṃ maṇati, ‘‘mayi idha ṭhitāya kathamāgacchasī’’ti vā tajjentī viya nīharatīti veramaṇī. Viramati etāyāti vā viramaṇīti vattabbe niruttinayena ‘‘veramaṇī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atthato panaveramaṇīti kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttā viratiyo. Sā ‘‘pāṇātipātādiṃ viramantassa yā tasmiṃ samaye pāṇātipātā ārati virati paṭivirati veramaṇī akiriyā akaraṇaṃ anajjhāpatti velānatikkamo setughāto’’ti evamādinā nayenavibhaṅge(vibha. 704) vuttā. Kāmañcesā veramaṇī nāma lokuttarāpi atthi, idha pana samādānavasappavattā virati adhippetāti lokuttarāya viratiyā samādānavasena pavattiasambhavato kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttā viratiyo gahetabbā.

Veramaṇī means that which avoids or abstains from (maṇati) evil dhammas such as killing (pāṇātipātādipāpadhammaṃ), which are considered to be the cause of enmity (verahetutāya verasaññitaṃ), as if threatening, "How dare you come near me while I am here!" (mayi idha ṭhitāya kathamāgacchasīti vā tajjentī viya nīharatīti veramaṇī). Or, it is called veramaṇī by way of definition (niruttinayena) when it should have been called viramaṇī because one abstains through it (viramati etāyāti vā viramaṇīti vattabbe). In terms of meaning, however, veramaṇī is the abstinence (viratiyo) associated with wholesome cittas in the sense sphere (kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttā). That veramaṇī is stated in the Vibhaṅga (Vibha. 704) in the manner beginning with "For one who abstains from killing, at that time, there is aversion to killing, abstaining, refraining, abstinence, non-action, non-doing, non-transgression, non-violation of the boundary, destruction of the dam (pāṇātipātādiṃ viramantassa yā tasmiṃ samaye pāṇātipātā ārati virati paṭivirati veramaṇī akiriyā akaraṇaṃ anajjhāpatti velānatikkamo setughāto)." Although this abstinence (veramaṇī) also exists as supramundane (lokuttarāpi atthi), here, the abstinence that arises from undertaking a vow (samādānavasappavattā virati adhippetā) is intended. Therefore, because it is impossible for supramundane abstinence to arise through the undertaking of a vow (samādānavasena pavattiasambhavato), the abstinence associated with wholesome cittas in the sense sphere should be taken (kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttā viratiyo gahetabbā).

Adinnādānā veramaṇītiādīsu adinnassa ādānaṃadinnādānaṃ,parassaharaṇaṃ, theyyaṃ corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatthaadinnanti parapariggahitaṃ. Yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti, tasmiṃ pana parapariggahite parapariggahitasaañano tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ.

Among the phrases beginning with "Adinnādānā veramaṇī," adinnādānaṃ is taking what is not given (adinnassa ādānaṃ), which is said to be taking what belongs to another, theft, or stealing (parassaharaṇaṃ, theyyaṃ corikāti vuttaṃ hoti). There, adinna means what is owned by another (parapariggahitaṃ). In that which is owned by another, where the other is not subject to punishment, is blameless, and may use it as he pleases (yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti), adinnādānaṃ is the intention to steal (theyyacetanā) arising from the effort to take it when one perceives it as belonging to another (parapariggahite parapariggahitasaañano tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā).

Abrahmacariyaṃnāma aseṭṭhacariyaṃ dvayaṃdvayasamāpatti. Sā hi ‘‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.177; 2.42) hīḷitattā aseṭṭhā appasatthā cariyāti vā aseṭṭhānaṃ nihīnānaṃ itthipurisānaṃ cariyāti vā aseṭṭhacariyaṃ, aseṭṭhacariyattā abrahmacariyanti ca vuccati, atthato pana asaddhammasevanādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā maggenamaggappaṭipattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā abrahmacariyaṃ.

Abrahmacariyaṃ means unchaste conduct (aseṭṭhacariyaṃ), the joining of two with two (dvayaṃdvayasamāpatti). Because it is condemned (hīḷitattā) with statements such as "Sensual pleasures are of little satisfaction, much suffering, and much despair; there is even more danger in this (appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo)" (Ma. Ni. 1.177; 2.42), it is called unchaste conduct (aseṭṭhā appasatthā cariyāti vā), or it is called the conduct of inferior men and women (aseṭṭhānaṃ nihīnānaṃ itthipurisānaṃ cariyāti vā aseṭṭhacariyaṃ). Because of being unchaste conduct, it is also called abrahmacariyaṃ. In terms of meaning, however, abrahmacariyaṃ is the intention arising from the bodily action motivated by the desire to engage in unrighteous practices (asaddhammasevanādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā maggenamaggappaṭipattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā).

Musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu,vādoti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanāmusāvādomusā vadīyati vuccati etāyāti katvā.

Musā means something untrue or false (abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu), and vādo means the declaration (viññāpanaṃ) of that as true or factual (tassa bhūtato tacchato). In terms of characteristic (lakkhaṇato), however, musāvādo is the intention (cetanā) that arises when one wishes to make another understand something untrue as true (atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā), because musā is said to be what is spoken falsely (musā vadīyati vuccati etāyāti katvā).

Surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānāti etthasurāti pūvasurā piṭṭhasurā odanasurā kiṇṇapakkhittā sambhārasaṃyuttāti pañca surā.Merayanti pupphāsavo phalāsavo madhvāsavo guḷāsavo sambhārasaṃyuttoti pañca āsavā. Tattha pūve bhājane pakkhipitvā tajjaṃ udakaṃ datvā madditvā katāpūvasurā. Evaṃ sesasurāpi.Kiṇṇāti pana tassā surāya bījaṃ vuccati, ye surāmodakāti vuccanti, te pakkhipitvā katākiṇṇapakkhittā. Harītakīsāsapādinānāsambhārehi saṃyojitāsambhārasaṃyuttā. Madhukatālanāḷikerādipuppharaso ciraparivāsitopupphāsavo. Panasādiphalarasophalāsavo. Muddikārasomadhvāsavo. Ucchurasoguḷāsavo. Harītakaāmalakakaṭukabhaṇḍādinānāsambhārānaṃ raso ciraparivāsitosambhārasaṃyutto. Taṃ sabbampi madakaraṇavasenamajjaṃpivantaṃ madayatīti katvā.Pamādaṭṭhānanti pamādakāraṇaṃ. Yāya cetanāya taṃ majjaṃ pivanti, tassā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Surāmerayamajje pamādaṭṭhānaṃ surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānaṃ, tasmāsurāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā.

Surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā here, surā means the five kinds of intoxicants: rice-flour liquor (pūvasurā), groats liquor (piṭṭhasurā), rice liquor (odanasurā), liquor made with yeast (kiṇṇapakkhittā), and mixed ingredient liquor (sambhārasaṃyuttā). Meraya means the five kinds of intoxicants: flower wine (pupphāsavo), fruit wine (phalāsavo), honey wine (madhvāsavo), molasses wine (guḷāsavo), and mixed ingredient wine (sambhārasaṃyutto). Among them, pūvasurā is made by putting rice flour into a container, adding water, and fermenting it. The remaining liquors are made similarly. Kiṇṇā means the yeast for that liquor, which is called surāmodaka; the liquor made by adding that is kiṇṇapakkhittā. Sambhārasaṃyuttā is made by combining various ingredients such as harītakī, kīsāsapa, etc. Pupphāsavo is the juice of flowers such as madhuka, palm, coconut, etc., which has been left for a long time. Phalāsavo is the juice of fruits such as jackfruit, etc. Madhvāsavo is the juice of grapes. Guḷāsavo is the juice of sugarcane. Sambhārasaṃyutto is the juice of various ingredients such as harītakī, āmalaka, pungent spices, etc., which has been left for a long time. Because all of that intoxicates (madakaraṇavasena), it is called majjaṃ because it intoxicates one who drinks it (pivantaṃ madayatīti katvā). Pamādaṭṭhāna means the cause of negligence. This is a designation for the intention with which one drinks that intoxicant (yāya cetanāya taṃ majjaṃ pivanti, tassā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ). Surāmerayamajje pamādaṭṭhānaṃ is the cause of negligence due to intoxicants and wines (surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānaṃ), therefore surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā.

Vikālabhojanāti aruṇuggamanato paṭṭhāya yāva majjhanhikā. Ayaṃ buddhādīnaṃ ariyānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo bhojanassa kālo nāma, tadañño vikālo. Bhuñjitabbaṭṭhena bhojanaṃ, yāgubhattādi sabbaṃ yāvakālikavatthu. Yathā ca ‘‘rattūparato’’ti (dī. 1.10, 194; ma. ni. 1.293; 3.14) ettha rattiyā bhojanaṃ rattīti uttarapadalopena vuccati, evamettha bhojanajjhoharaṇaṃ bhojananti. Vikāle bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ, tatovikālabhojanā,vikāle yāvakālikavatthussa ajjhoharaṇāti attho. Atha vā na ettha kammasādhano bhuñjitabbatthavācako bhojanasaddo, atha kho bhāvasādhano ajjhoharaṇatthavācako gahetabbo, tasmā vikāle bhojanaṃ ajjhoharaṇaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ. Kassa pana ajjhoharaṇanti? Yāmakālikādīnaṃ anuññātattā vikālabhojana-saddassa vā yāvakālikajjhoharaṇe niruḷhattā yāvakālikassāti viññāyati, atthato pana kāyadvārappavattā vikāle yāvakālikajjhoharaṇacetanā ‘‘vikālabhojana’’nti veditabbā.

Vikālabhojanā means from the rising of the dawn until noon. This is the time for meals that has been habitually practiced by the Buddhas and other Noble Ones; any time outside of that is vikāla. Bhojanaṃ means food, in the sense that it should be eaten; this refers to all yāvakālika items such as rice gruel and cooked rice. Just as in "rattūparato" (Dī. 1.10, 194; Ma. Ni. 1.293; 3.14), the word "ratti" (night) is used to mean the eating of food at night through the elision of the latter part of the compound, so too here, "bhojana" (food) means the taking of food. Vikāle bhojanaṃ, vikālabhojanaṃ, tatovikālabhojanā, hence it means refraining from consuming yāvakālika items at the wrong time. Alternatively, here the word "bhojana," which means "food," should not be understood as a kamma-sādhana (instrumental derivative) expressing something that should be eaten, but rather as a bhāva-sādhana (abstract noun) expressing the act of consuming. Therefore, vikāle bhojanaṃ, the act of consuming at the wrong time, is vikālabhojanaṃ. But whose consumption is referred to? Since yāmakālika etc. are allowed, and because the term vikālabhojana is established referring to the consumption of yāvakālika items, it is understood to refer to yāvakālika items. However, in essence, the volition of consuming yāvakālika items at the wrong time, which arises through the body-door, should be understood as "vikālabhojana."

Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanāti ettha sāsanassa ananulomattā visūkaṃ paṭāṇībhūtaṃ dassananti visūkadassanaṃ. Naccādīnañhi dassanaṃ sachandarāgappavattito saṅkhepato ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183) bhagavato sāsanaṃ na anulometi. Naccañca gītañca vāditañca visūkadassanañcanaccagītavāditavisūkadassanaṃ. Attanā payojiyamānaṃ parehi payojāpiyamānañcettha naccaṃ naccabhāvasāmaññato pāḷiyaṃ ekeneva nacca-saddena gahitaṃ, tathā gītavādita-saddehi gāyanagāyāpanavādanavādāpanāni, tasmā attanā naccananaccāpanādivasena naccā ca gītā ca vāditā ca antamaso mayūranaccādivasenapi pavattānaṃ naccādīnaṃ visūkabhūtā dassanā ca veramaṇīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Naccādīni attanā payojetuṃ vā parehi payojāpetuṃ vā payuttāni passituṃ vā neva bhikkhūnaṃ na bhikkhunīnaṃ vaṭṭati. Dassanena cettha savanampi saṅgahitaṃ virūpekasesanayena. Yathā sakaṃ visayaālocanasabhāvatāya vā pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ savanakiriyāyapi dassanasaṅkhepasambhavato ‘‘dassanā’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcahi viññāṇehi na kañci dhammaṃ paṭivijānāti aññatra abhinipātamattā’’ti. Dassanakamyatāya upasaṅkamitvā passato eva cettha vītikkamo hoti, ṭhitanisinnasayanokāse pana āgataṃ gacchantassa vā āpāthagataṃ passato siyā saṃkileso, na vītikkamo.

Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā means that because it is not in accordance with the Teaching, visūkaṃ means a blatant display; dassanaṃ means seeing, hence visūkadassanaṃ. For the seeing of dancing, etc., arises from desire and attachment, and does not accord with the Buddha’s Teaching, which concisely promotes the principle of "avoiding all evil" (Dī. Ni. 2.90; Dha. Pa. 183). Naccañca gītañca vāditañca visūkadassanañcanaccagītavāditavisūkadassanaṃ. Here, naccaṃ, whether performed by oneself or caused to be performed by others, is included under the single term nacca due to the common characteristic of "dancing"; similarly, gāyanagāyāpana and vādanavādāpana are included under the terms gīta and vādita. Therefore, the meaning here should be understood as abstaining from dancing (nacca), singing (gīta), and playing instruments (vādita), whether done by oneself or caused to be done by others, even if it is just something like a peacock dance, and from seeing (dassanā) such frivolous (visūka) things. It is not appropriate for monks or nuns to either perform or have others perform dancing, etc., or to watch them being performed. Here, "seeing" (dassanena) also includes "hearing" (savana) by way of implication. Because the five types of consciousness inherently consider their respective objects, the act of hearing is also included in "seeing," and therefore only "dassanā" is stated. Hence it was said, "One does not recognize any dhamma with the five consciousnesses, except for mere focusing." Here, transgression occurs only when one goes to see with the intention of seeing; but if one sees something that comes into view while standing, sitting, or lying down, or while going, there may be defilement, but there is no transgression.

Mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānāti etthamālāti yaṃ kiñci pupphaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi mālā-saddo loke baddhamālavācako, sāsane pana ruḷhiyā pupphesupi vutto, tasmā yaṃ kiñci pupphaṃ baddhamabaddhaṃ vā, taṃ sabbaṃ ‘‘mālā’’ti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Gandhanti vāsacuṇṇadhūmādikaṃ vilepanato aññaṃ yaṃ kiñci gandhajātaṃ.Vilepananti vilepanatthaṃ pisitvā paṭiyattaṃ yaṃ kiñci chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Piḷandhanaṃdhāraṇaṃ,ūnaṭṭhānapūraṇaṃmaṇḍanaṃ,gandhavasena chavirāgavasena ca sādiyanaṃvibhūsanaṃ. Tenevadīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.10)majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāyañca(ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.293) ‘‘piḷandhanto dhāreti nāma, ūnaṭṭhānaṃ pūrento maṇḍeti nāma, gandhavasena chavirāgavasena ca sādiyanto vibhūseti nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ.Paramatthajotikāyaṃpanakhuddakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(khu. pā. aṭṭha. 2.pacchimapañcasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘mālādīsu dhāraṇādīni yathāsaṅkhyaṃ yojetabbānī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ.Ṭhānaṃvuccati kāraṇaṃ, tasmā yāya dussīlyacetanāya tāni mālādhāraṇādīni mahājano karoti, sā dhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānaṃ.

Mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānā—here, mālā means any kind of flower. Although the word mālā in the world usually refers to a garland, in the Teaching it is conventionally used to refer to flowers as well. Therefore, any flower, whether arranged or not, should be regarded as "mālā." Gandha means any kind of scent other than ointment (vilepana), such as powdered perfume or incense. Vilepana means anything prepared by grinding for the purpose of anointing, which enhances the complexion. Dhāraṇaṃ means wearing; maṇḍanaṃ means adorning, or filling up deficiencies; and vibhūsanaṃ means beautifying, by way of scent and complexion. Therefore, in the Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathā (Dī. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.10) and the Majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathā (Ma. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.293) it is said, "Wearing is called dhāraṇa, filling up deficiencies is called maṇḍana, and beautifying by way of scent and complexion is called vibhūsana." In the Paramatthajotikā, the Khuddakaṭṭhakathā (Khu. Pā. Aṭṭha. 2.pacchimapañcasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), however, it is only said, "Dhāraṇa, etc., should be applied to mālā, etc., in the corresponding order." Ṭhānaṃ means cause or reason. Therefore, the immoral intention (dussīlyacetanā) with which the general populace engages in those practices of wearing garlands, etc., is the basis (ṭhānaṃ) for adorning and beautifying.

Uccāsayanamahāsayanāti etthauccāti ucca-saddena samānatthaṃ ekaṃ saddantaraṃ. Seti etthāti sayanaṃ, uccāsayanañca mahāsayanañcauccāsayanamahāsayanaṃ. Uccāsayanaṃvuccati pamāṇātikkantaṃ mañcādi.Mahāsayanaṃakappiyattharaṇehi atthataṃ āsandādi. Āsanañcettha sayaneneva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā pana ādhāre paṭikkhitte tadādhārā kiriyā paṭikkhittāva hoti, tasmā ‘‘uccāsayanamahāsayanā’’ icceva vuttaṃ, atthato pana tadupabhogabhūtanisajjānipajjanehi virati dassitāti daṭṭhabbā. Atha vā uccāsayanamahāsayanasayanāti etasmiṃ atthe ekasesanayena ayaṃ niddeso kato yathā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’nti, āsanakiriyāpubbakattā sayanakiriyāya sayanaggahaṇeneva āsanampi gahitanti veditabbaṃ.

Uccāsayanamahāsayanā—here, uccā is another word synonymous with ucca. Seti etthāti sayanaṃ, uccāsayanañca mahāsayanañcauccāsayanamahāsayanaṃ. Uccāsayanaṃ refers to beds and such that exceed the permissible measure. Mahāsayanaṃ refers to chairs and such covered with non-allowable coverings. Here, āsana (seat) should be understood as being included in sayana (bed). Since the action that depends on a base is prohibited when the base itself is prohibited, only "uccāsayanamahāsayanā" is stated, but it should be understood that what is shown is the abstinence from the acts of sitting and lying down that involve their use. Alternatively, this statement is made with ekasesanaya (the inclusion of multiple things by stating only one) in the sense of uccāsayanamahāsayanasayanaṃ, just as in "nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanaṃ." Because the action of sitting precedes the action of lying down, āsana is included by the mention of sayana.

Jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇāti etthajātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ.Rajatanti kahāpaṇo lohamāsako jatumāsako dārumāsakoti ye vohāraṃ gacchanti, tassa ubhayassapi paṭiggahaṇaṃ jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇaṃ. Tividhañcettha paṭiggahaṇaṃ kāyena vācāya manasāti. Tattha kāyena paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggaṇhanaṃ, vācāya paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggahāpanaṃ, manasā paṭiggahaṇaṃ sādiyanaṃ. Tividhampi paṭiggahaṇaṃ sāmaññaniddesena ekasesanayena vā gahetvā ‘‘paṭiggahaṇā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā neva uggahetuṃ na uggahāpetuṃ na upanikkhittaṃ vā sādituṃ vaṭṭati. Imāni pana dasa sikkhāpadāni gahaṭṭhānampi sādhāraṇāni. Vuttañhetaṃvisuddhimagge(visuddhi. 13) ‘‘upāsakaupāsikānaṃ niccasīlavasena pañca sikkhāpadāni, sati vā ussāhe dasa, uposathaṅgavasena aṭṭhāti idaṃ gahaṭṭhasīla’’nti. Ettha hidasāti sāmaṇerehi rakkhitabbasīlamāha ghaṭikārādīnaṃ viya.Paramatthajotikāyaṃpanakhuddakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(khu. pā. aṭṭha. 2.sādhāraṇavisesavavatthāna) ‘‘ādito dve catutthapañcamāni upāsakānaṃ sāmaṇerānañca sādhāraṇāni niccasīlavasena, uposathasīlavasena pana upāsakānaṃ sattamaṭṭhamaṃ cekaṃ aṅgaṃ katvā sabbapacchimavajjāni sabbānipi sāmaṇerehi sādhāraṇāni, pacchimaṃ pana sāmaṇerānameva visesabhūta’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘sati vā ussāhe dasā’’ti iminā na sameti.Nāsanavatthūti liṅganāsanāya vatthu, adhiṭṭhānaṃ kāraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.

Jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā—here, jātarūpa means gold. Rajata means silver, kahāpaṇa, lohamāsaka, jatumāsaka, dārumāsaka, which are in common usage. Accepting both of these is jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇaṃ. Here, there are three kinds of acceptance: by body, by speech, and by mind. Of these, acceptance by body is taking; acceptance by speech is causing to take; and acceptance by mind is approving. All three kinds of acceptance are included by way of general designation or by ekasesanaya (the inclusion of multiple things by stating only one) in the word "paṭiggahaṇā." Therefore, one should neither take, nor cause to take, nor approve of what is left nearby. These ten precepts are also common to laypeople. This was said in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 13): "For laymen and laywomen, there are five precepts as their constant sīla; or ten, if they are zealous; and eight as observance-day factors. This is laypeople's sīla." Here, dasā (ten) refers to the sīla that should be kept by sāmaṇeras, like Ghaṭikāra and others. In the Paramatthajotikā, the Khuddakaṭṭhakathā (Khu. Pā. Aṭṭha. 2.sādhāraṇavisesavavatthāna), however, it is said, "The first two and the fourth and fifth are common to upāsakas and sāmaṇeras as constant sīla; for upāsakas observing the uposatha sīla, the seventh and eighth can be made into one factor, and all but the last are common with sāmaṇeras, but the last is specific to sāmaṇeras." This does not agree with "sati vā ussāhe dasā." Nāsanavatthū means the basis for the destruction of the Order; it is said to mean the reason or the ground for expulsion.

107.Kintīti kena nu kho upāyena.‘‘Attano pariveṇanti idaṃ puggalikaṃ sandhāya vutta’’ntigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Ayamettha gaṇṭhipadakārānaṃ adhippāyo – ‘‘vassaggena pattasenāsana’’nti iminā tassa vassaggena pattaṃ saṅghikasenāsanaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘attano pariveṇa’’nti imināpi tasseva puggalikasenāsanaṃ vuttanti. Ayaṃ panettha amhākaṃ khanti – ‘‘yattha vā vasatī’’ti iminā saṅghikaṃ vā hotu puggalikaṃ vā, tassa nibaddhavasanakasenāsanaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yattha vā paṭikkamatī’’ti iminā pana yaṃ ācariyassa upajjhāyassa vā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ upaṭṭhānādinimittaṃ nibaddhaṃ pavisati, taṃ ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā tadubhayaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ubhayenapi attano pariveṇañca vassaggena pattasenāsanañca vutta’’nti āha. Tatthaattano pariveṇanti iminā ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ dassitaṃ,vassaggena pattasenāsananti iminā pana tassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ. Tadubhayampi saṅghikaṃ vā hotu puggalikaṃ vā, āvaraṇaṃ kātabbamevāti.Mukhadvārikanti mukhadvārena bhuñjitabbaṃ.Daṇḍakammaṃ katvāti daṇḍakammaṃ yojetvā. Daṇḍenti vinenti etenāti daṇḍo, soyeva kātabbattā kammantidaṇḍakammaṃ,āvaraṇādi.

107.Kintī—by what means indeed. It is said in the Gaṇṭhipadas that "‘Attano pariveṇa’ refers to the individual." Here, the intention of the authors of the Gaṇṭhipadas is this: By "vassaggena pattasenāsana," the saṅghika dwelling that he obtained by rains-residence is stated; by "attano pariveṇa," his individual dwelling is stated. But here is our opinion: By "yattha vā vasati," his regular dwelling, whether saṅghika or individual, is stated. By "yattha vā paṭikkamati," the dwelling place of his preceptor or teacher, where he regularly goes for the purpose of service, etc., is stated to be the dwelling place of the preceptor and teacher. Therefore, to show both of these, he said "‘ubhayenapi attano pariveṇañca vassaggena pattasenāsanañca vutta.’" There, attano pariveṇa shows the dwelling place of the preceptor and teacher, and vassaggena pattasenāsana shows his own dwelling place. Both of these, whether saṅghika or individual, should definitely be screened off. Mukhadvārika means that it should be eaten through the opening of the face. Daṇḍakammaṃ katvā means having performed daṇḍakammaṃ. Daṇḍenti vinenti etenāti daṇḍo, soyeva kātabbattā kammantidaṇḍakammaṃ, screening off, etc.

Sikkhāpadadaṇḍakammavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Sikkhāpada, Daṇḍakamma, and Vatthu is finished.

Anāpucchāvaraṇavatthuādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Anāpucchāvaraṇavatthu, etc.

108.Daṇḍakammamassa karothāti assa daṇḍakammaṃ yojetha āṇāpetha.Daṇḍakammanti vā niggahakammaṃ, tasmā niggahamassa karothāti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo sabbattha īdisesu ṭhānesu.Senāsanaggāho ca paṭippassambhatīti iminā ca chinnavasso ca hotīti dīpeti.Sace ākiṇṇadosova hoti, āyatiṃ saṃvare na tiṭṭhati, nikkaḍḍhitabboti ettha sace yāvatatiyaṃ vuccamāno na oramati, saṅghaṃ apaloketvā nāsetabbo. Puna pabbajjaṃ yācamānopi apaloketvā pabbājetabboti vadanti.Pacchimikāya vassāvāsikaṃ lacchatīti pacchimikāya puna vassaṃ upagatattā lacchati.Apaloketvā lābho dātabboti chinnavassatāya vuttaṃ.Itarāni pañca sikkhāpadānīti vikālabhojanādīni pañca.Accayaṃ desāpetabboti ‘‘accayo maṃ, bhante, accagamā’’tiādinā nayena desāpetabbo.

108.Daṇḍakammamassa karothā—order that daṇḍakamma be done for him; command it. Daṇḍakammaṃ means act of censure, therefore it is said that "niggahamassa karothā" (do censure for him). This method is the same everywhere in such instances. Senāsanaggāho ca paṭippassambhatī—by this it indicates that he is also cut off from the rains-residence. Sace ākiṇṇadosova hoti, āyatiṃ saṃvare na tiṭṭhati, nikkaḍḍhitabbo—here, if he does not desist even after being told up to three times, he should be expelled after informing the Saṅgha. Some say that even if he asks for ordination again, he should be ordained after informing the Saṅgha. Pacchimikāya vassāvāsikaṃ lacchatī—he obtains the rains-residence in the later period because he has undertaken the rains again. Apaloketvā lābho dātabbo—it is said because of being cut off from the rains-residence. Itarāni pañca sikkhāpadānī—the other five training rules, beginning with vikālabhojana. Accayaṃ desāpetabbo—he should be made to confess the transgression in the manner beginning with "accayo maṃ, bhante, accagamā."

Anāpucchāvaraṇavatthuādikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Anāpucchāvaraṇavatthu, etc., is finished.

Paṇḍakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Paṇḍakavatthu

109.Paṇḍakavatthumhi ‘‘yo kāḷapakkhe itthī hoti, juṇhapakkhe puriso, ayaṃpakkhapaṇḍako’’ti keci vadanti, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘kāḷapakkhe paṇḍako hoti, juṇhapakkhe panassa pariḷāho vūpasammatī’’ti apaṇḍakapakkhe pariḷāhavūpasamasseva vuttattā paṇḍakapakkhe ussannapariḷāhatā paṇḍakabhāvāpattīti viññāyati, tasmā idamevettha sārato paccetabbaṃ. Itthibhāvo pumbhāvo vā natthi etassātiabhāvako. Tasmiṃ yevassa pakkhe pabbajjā vāritāti ettha ‘‘apaṇḍakapakkhe pabbājetvā paṇḍakapakkhe nāsetabbo’’titīsupi gaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘apaṇḍakapakkhe pabbajito sace kilesakkhayaṃ pāpuṇāti, na nāsetabbo’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ paṇḍakassa kilesakkhayāsambhavato khīṇakilesassa ca paṇḍakabhāvānupapattito. Ahetukapaṭisandhikathāyañhi avisesena paṇḍakassa ahetukapaṭisandhitā vuttā. Āsittausūyapakkhapaṇḍakānañca paṭisandhito paṭṭhāyeva paṇḍakasabhāvo, na pavattiyaṃyevāti vadanti. Teneva ahetukapaṭisandhiniddese jaccandhabadhirādayo viya paṇḍako jātisaddena visesetvā na niddiṭṭho. Idhāpi catutthapārājikasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.233) ‘‘abhabbapuggale dassentena paṇḍakatiracchānagataubhatobyañjanakā tayo vatthuvipannā ahetukapaṭisandhikā, tesaṃ saggo avārito, maggo pana vārito’’ti avisesena vuttaṃ.

109.In the Paṇḍakavatthu, "one who is a woman in the dark fortnight and a man in the bright fortnight, this is a pakkhapaṇḍaka," some say. In the commentary, however, it is said, "he is a paṇḍaka in the dark fortnight, but his burning subsides in the bright fortnight." Because the subsiding of burning is mentioned only in the apaṇḍaka (non-paṇḍaka) fortnight, it is understood that in the paṇḍaka fortnight, there is heightened burning and the occurrence of paṇḍaka-nature. Therefore, this alone should be accepted as the essence here. Itthibhāvo pumbhāvo vā natthi etassātiabhāvako—he is devoid of either female or male characteristics. Tasmiṃ yevassa pakkhe pabbajjā vāritā—here, it is said in all three Gaṇṭhipadas that "having ordained him in the apaṇḍaka fortnight, he should be expelled in the paṇḍaka fortnight." Some say that "if one ordained in the apaṇḍaka fortnight attains the destruction of defilements, he should not be expelled." That is merely their opinion, because it is impossible for a paṇḍaka to attain the destruction of defilements, and it is inappropriate for one who has destroyed defilements to have paṇḍaka-nature. In the discussion of ahetukapaṭisandhi (rebirth without roots), it is said that a paṇḍaka invariably has ahetukapaṭisandhi. Āsittausūyapakkhapaṇḍakas have paṇḍaka-nature from the moment of rebirth, not just in their behavior, so they say. Therefore, in the description of ahetukapaṭisandhi, the paṇḍaka is not specified with the word jāti (birth), as are the jaccandhabadhiras (those born blind and deaf). Here also, in the explanation of the fourth pārājika (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.233), it is said indiscriminately that "the three kinds of individuals deficient in their basis—paṇḍakas, animals, and ubhatobyañjanakas (hermaphrodites)—are ahetukapaṭisandhikas, showing those incapable of attaining liberation. Heaven is not closed off to them, but the path is closed off."

Paṇḍakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Paṇḍakavatthu is finished.

Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthu

110.Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthumhikolaññāti mātuvaṃse pituvaṃse ca jātā mātāpituppabhutisabbañātayo. Theyyāya saṃvāso etassātitheyyasaṃvāsako. So ca na saṃvāsamattasseva thenako idhādhippeto, atha kho liṅgassa tadubhayassa ca thenakopīti āha‘‘tayo theyyasaṃvāsakā’’tiādi.Na yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyatīti yathāvuḍḍhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vā sāmaṇerānaṃ vā vandanaṃ na sādiyati.Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyatīti attanā musāvādaṃ katvā dassitavassānurūpaṃ yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyati.Bhikkhuvassagaṇanādikoti iminā na ekakammādikova idha saṃvāso nāmāti dasseti.

110.In the Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthu, kolaññā means all relatives on the mother's side and the father's side, beginning with the mother, father, and grandparents. Theyyāya saṃvāso etassātitheyyasaṃvāsako—one who dwells (saṃvāsa) by means of theft (theyya). Here, that refers not only to one who steals the act of dwelling, but also to one who steals the appearance and both of these things, hence he says "‘tayo theyyasaṃvāsakā’" etc. Na yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyatī—he does not approve of the respectful greetings according to seniority for monks or novices. Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyatī—he approves of the respectful greetings according to seniority, corresponding to the years he has falsely claimed. Bhikkhuvassagaṇanādiko—by this, he shows that saṃvāsa here is not just limited to ordination by a single procedure.

Rāja…pe… bhayenāti etthabhaya-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo ‘‘rājabhayena dubbhikkhabhayenā’’tiādinā.Saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, yāva so suddhamānasoti rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgatāya so suddhamānaso yāva saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāsetīti attho. Yo hi rājabhayādiṃ vinā kevalaṃ bhikkhū vañcetvā tehi saddhiṃ saṃvasitukāmatāya liṅgaṃ gaṇhāti, so asuddhacittatāya liṅgaggahaṇeneva theyyasaṃvāsako nāma hoti. Ayaṃ pana tādisena asuddhacittena bhikkhū vañcetukāmatāya abhāvato yāva saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, tāva theyyasaṃvāsako nāma na hoti. Teneva ‘‘rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgānaṃ ‘gihī maṃ samaṇoti jānantū’ti vañcanācitte satipi bhikkhūnaṃ vañcetukāmatāya abhāvā doso na jāto’’titīsupi gaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘vūpasantabhayatā idha suddhacittatā’’ti vadanti, evañca sati so vūpasantabhayo yāva saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, tāva theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti ayamattho viññāyati. Imasmiñca atthe viññāyamāne avūpasantabhayassa saṃvāsasādiyanepi theyyasaṃvāsakatā na hotīti āpajjeyya, na ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ avūpasantabhayassa saṃvāsasādiyanepi atheyyasaṃvāsakatā dassitā.Sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjantoti ca iminā avūpasantatayenapi saṃvāsaṃ asādiyanteneva vasitabbanti dīpeti. Tenevatīsupi gaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā vihāraṃ āgantvā saṅghikaṃ gaṇhantassa saṃvāsaṃ pariharituṃ dukkaraṃ, tasmā sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjantoti idaṃ vutta’’nti, tasmā rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgatāyevettha suddhacittatāti gahetabbaṃ.

Rāja…pe… bhayenā ti: Here, the word bhaya (fear) should be individually connected, as in "rājabhayena dubbhikkhabhayenā," etc. Saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, yāva so suddhamānaso: Because he has taken on the outward signs (liṅgaṃ) due to fear of a king, etc., he does not take up residence (saṃvāsaṃ) until he is of pure mind. For if someone takes on the outward signs merely to deceive the monks and live with them, without fear of a king, etc., he is called a theyyasaṃvāsaka (thief-in-residence) due to his impure intention the moment he assumes the signs. But this person is not called a theyyasaṃvāsaka as long as he does not take up residence, since he has no intention of deceiving the monks with an impure mind. Therefore, it is said in all three Gaṇṭhipadas: "Even though those who have taken the outward signs due to fear of a king, etc., have a deceptive intention ('May householders recognize me as a monk'), no offense arises because there is no intention to deceive the monks." Some, however, say that "the state of subsided fear here is purity of mind." In that case, the meaning is understood as: as long as he, being of subsided fear, does not take up residence, he is not a theyyasaṃvāsaka. But if this meaning is understood, it would follow that even if one who has not subsided fear enjoys residence, there would be no theyyasaṃvāsaka offense. And the commentary does not show non-theyyasaṃvāsaka status even when one who has not subsided fear enjoys residence. And by "Sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjanto" (eating food common to all ascetics), it indicates that he lives without enjoying residence even in an unsubsided state. Therefore, it is said in all three Gaṇṭhipadas: "Since it is difficult for one who comes to the monastery and takes what belongs to the Saṅgha to avoid residence, therefore this is said: 'sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjanto'." Therefore, it should be understood here that purity of mind comes from taking on the outward signs due to fear of a king, etc.

Sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattānīti sabbasāmayikānaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ katvā vīthicatukkādīsu ṭhapetvā dātabbabhattāni.Kāyaparihāriyānīti kāyena pariharitabbāni.Abbhuggacchantīti abhimukhaṃ gacchanti.Kammantānuṭṭhānenāti kasigorakkhādikammakaraṇena.Tadeva pattacīvaraṃ ādāya vihāraṃ gacchatīti cīvarāni nivāsanapārupanavasena ādāya pattañca aṃsakūṭe laggetvā vihāraṃ gacchati.Nāpi sayaṃ jānātīti ‘‘yo evaṃ pabbajati, so theyyasaṃvāsako nāma hotī’’ti vā ‘‘evaṃ kātuṃ na labhatī’’ti vā ‘‘evaṃ pabbajito samaṇo na hotī’’ti vā na jānāti.Yo evaṃ pabbajati, so theyyasaṃvāsako nāma hotīti idaṃ pana nidassanamattaṃ.Anupasampannakāleyevāti iminā upasampannakāle sutvā sacepi nāroceti, theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti dīpeti.

Sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattānī: Food that is given having been made common to all sāmayikas (religious adherents) and placed at intersections of roads, etc. Kāyaparihāriyānī: Things to be maintained by the body. Abbhuggacchantī: Going towards. Kammantānuṭṭhānenā: By not engaging in occupations such as agriculture and cattle-rearing. Tadeva pattacīvaraṃ ādāya vihāraṃ gacchatī: Taking those robes for the purpose of wearing and covering, and hanging the bowl on the shoulder-loop, he goes to the monastery. Nāpi sayaṃ jānātī: He does not know either that "one who goes forth in this way is called a theyyasaṃvāsaka," or that "it is not permissible to do this," or that "one who has gone forth in this way is not a samaṇa." Yo evaṃ pabbajati, so theyyasaṃvāsako nāma hotī: This is merely the introduction. Anupasampannakāleyevā: By this, it indicates that even if he hears it after the upasampadā (higher ordination) and does not declare it, he is not a theyyasaṃvāsaka.

Sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya…pe… theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti idaṃ bhikkhūhi dinnaliṅgassa apariccattattā na liṅgathenako hoti, liṅgānurūpassa saṃvāsassa sāditattā nāpi saṃvāsathenako hotīti vuttaṃ.Eko bhikkhu kāsāye saussāhova odātaṃ nivāsetvāti etthāpi idameva kāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paratosāmaṇero saliṅge ṭhitotiādinā sāmaṇerassa vuttavidhānesupi atheyyasaṃvāsakapakkhe ayameva nayo.Bhikkhuniyāpi eseva nayoti vuttamevatthaṃ‘‘sāpi hi gihibhāvaṃ patthayamānā’’tiādinā vibhāveti.Yo koci vuḍḍhapabbajitoti sāmaṇeraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Mahāpeḷādīsūti etena gihisantakaṃ dassitaṃ.Sayaṃ sāmaṇerova…pe… theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti ettha kiñcāpi theyyasaṃvāsako na hoti, pārājikaṃ pana āpajjatiyeva. Sesamettha uttānameva.

Sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya…pe… theyyasaṃvāsako na hotī: This is said because, since the outward signs given by the monks have not been relinquished, he is not a thief of the outward signs; and since he has enjoyed residence appropriate to the outward signs, he is not a thief of residence either. Eko bhikkhu kāsāye saussāhova odātaṃ nivāsetvā: Here too, the same reason should be seen. Further on, in the cases stated for a sāmaṇera (novice) beginning with sāmaṇero saliṅge ṭhito, the same method applies in the case of non-theyyasaṃvāsaka status. Bhikkhuniyāpi eseva nayo: He explains this very meaning that was stated with "sāpi hi gihibhāvaṃ patthayamānā" etc. Yo koci vuḍḍhapabbajito: This is said with reference to a sāmaṇera. Mahāpeḷādīsū: By this, he shows that it belongs to householders. Sayaṃ sāmaṇerova…pe… theyyasaṃvāsako na hotī: Here, although he is not a theyyasaṃvāsaka, he certainly incurs a pārājika. The rest here is self-explanatory.

Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Theyyasaṃvāsaka Story is Finished.

Titthiyapakkantakakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Titthiyapakkantaka Story

tesaṃ liṅge ādinnamatte titthiyapakkantako hotīti ‘‘titthiyo bhavissāmī’’ti gatassa liṅgaggahaṇeneva tesaṃ laddhipi gahitāyeva hotīti katvā vuttaṃ.Kenacipana ‘‘tesaṃ liṅge ādinnamatte laddhiyā gahitāyapi aggahitāyapi titthiyapakkantako hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Na hi ‘‘titthiyo bhavissāmī’’ti gatassa liṅgasampaṭicchanato aññaṃ laddhiggahaṇaṃ nāma atthi. Liṅgasampaṭicchaneneva hi so gahitaladdhiko hoti. Teneva‘‘vīmaṃsanatthaṃ kusacīrādīni…pe… yāva na sampaṭicchati, tāva taṃ laddhi rakkhati. Sampaṭicchitamatte titthiyapakkantako hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.Naggova ājīvakānaṃ upassayaṃ gacchati, padavāre padavāre dukkaṭanti ‘‘ājīvako bhavissa’’nti asuddhacittena gamanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Naggena hutvā gamanapaccayāpi dukkaṭā na muccatiyeva.Kūṭavassaṃ gaṇentoti kūṭavassaṃ gaṇetvā saṃvāsaṃ sādiyantoti adhippāyo.

tesaṃ liṅge ādinnamatte titthiyapakkantako hotī: It is said, having considered that, for one who has gone intending "I will become a titthiya (member of another sect)," merely by the acceptance of the outward signs, their doctrine has also been accepted. Kenaci pana: "Even with the acceptance of the outward signs, whether or not the doctrine has been accepted, he is a titthiyapakkantaka (one who has left to join another sect)." This should not be accepted. For there is no acceptance of doctrine other than the acceptance of the outward signs for one who has gone intending "I will become a titthiya." For by the acceptance of the outward signs, he is one who has accepted the doctrine. Therefore, it is said: "vīmaṃsanatthaṃ kusacīrādīni…pe… yāva na sampaṭicchati, tāva taṃ laddhi rakkhati. Sampaṭicchitamatte titthiyapakkantako hotī". Naggova ājīvakānaṃ upassayaṃ gacchati, padavāre padavāre dukkaṭaṃ: Because of the intention of going with an impure mind, thinking "I will become an ājīvaka," dukkaṭaṃ (wrongdoing) is stated. He is not freed from dukkaṭaṃ even by going while naked. Kūṭavassaṃ gaṇento: The meaning is, counting counterfeit rains and enjoying residence.

Titthiyapakkantakakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Titthiyapakkantaka Story is Finished.

111.Tiracchānagatavatthu uttānameva.

111.The Animal Story is self-explanatory.

Mātughātakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Mātughātakādi Story

112.Mātughātakādivatthūsuapavāhananti apagamanaṃ, patikaraṇanti attho. Yathā samānajātikassa vikopane kammaṃ garutaraṃ, na tathā vijātikassāti āha‘‘manussitthibhūtā’’ti. Puttasambandhena mātupitusamaññā, dattakittimādivasenapi puttavohāro loke dissati, so ca kho pariyāyatoti nippariyāyasiddhataṃ dassetuṃ‘‘janikā mātā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā manussattabhāve ṭhitasseva kusaladhammānaṃ tikkhavisadasūrabhāvāpatti yathā taṃ tiṇṇampi bodhisattānaṃ bodhittayanibbattiyaṃ, evaṃ manussattabhāve ṭhitasseva akusaladhammānampi tikkhavisadasūrabhāvāpattīti āha‘‘sayampi manussajātikenevā’’ti. Cutianantaraṃ phalaṃ anantaraṃ nāma, tasmiṃ anantare niyuttaṃ, taṃnibbattanena anantarakaraṇasīlaṃ, anantarapayojanaṃ vā ānantariyaṃ, tenaānantariyena mātughātakakammena. Pitughātakepi yena manussabhūto janako pitā sayampi manussajātikeneva satā sañcicca jīvitā voropito, ayaṃ ānantariyena pitughātakakammena pitughātakotiādinā sabbaṃ veditabbanti āha‘‘pitughātakepi eseva nayo’’ti.

112.In the Mātughātakādi (matricide, etc.) stories, apavāhana means departure, it is the same as patikaraṇaṃ (removal). As the deed is more serious when harming someone of the same kind, it is not so when harming someone of a different kind. He says "manussitthibhūtā". The designation of mother and father is through the connection of a child. The designation of a child is also seen in the world by way of adoption, etc., and that is a synonym. To show the state of being established without synonym, he says "janikā mātā". Just as for one established in the state of being a human, the acquisition of sharpness, clarity, and courage in wholesome qualities is just as it was in the production of the three bodhittayas (awakening knowledges) for the three bodhisattas (enlightenment beings), so too, for one established in the state of being a human, is the acquisition of sharpness, clarity, and courage in unwholesome qualities. He says "sayampi manussajātikenevā". The result immediately after death is called "anantaraṃ" (immediately following). Fixed in that "anantare", being by nature the immediate cause of that production, or having immediate purpose, is ānantariya (immediate result). By that ānantariyena mātughātakakammena (parricidal act of matricide). In the case of patricide too, if a father who is a human being is intentionally deprived of life by one who is also a human being, this is patricide by the ānantariya deed of patricide. He says, "Everything should be understood in this way," beginning with "pitughātakepi eseva nayo".

Parivattitaliṅgampi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.128; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.275; vibha. aṭṭha. 809) mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā jīvitā voropentassa ānantariyakammaṃ hotiyeva. Satipi hi liṅgaparivatte so eva ekakammanibbatto bhavaṅgappabandho jīvitindriyappabandho ca, nāññoti. Yo pana sayaṃ manusso tiracchānabhūtaṃ mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā, sayaṃ vā tiracchānabhūto manussabhūtaṃ, tiracchānabhūtoyeva vā tiracchānabhūtaṃ jīvitā voropeti, tassa kammaṃ ānantariyaṃ na hoti, bhāriyaṃ pana hoti, ānantariyaṃ āhacceva tiṭṭhati. Eḷakacatukkaṃ saṅgāmacatukkaṃ coracatukkañcettha kathetabbaṃ. ‘‘Eḷakaṃ māremī’’ti abhisandhināpi hi eḷakaṭṭhāne ṭhitaṃ manusso manussabhūtaṃ mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā mārento ānantariyaṃ phusati maraṇādhippāyeneva ānantariyavatthuno vikopitattā. Eḷakābhisandhinā pana mātāpitiaasandhinā vā eḷakaṃ mārento ānantariyaṃ na phusati ānantariyavatthuabhāvato. Mātāpitiabhisandhinā mātāpitaro mārento phusateva. Esa nayo itarasmimpi catukkadvaye. Yathā ca mātāpitūsu, evaṃ arahantepi etāni catukkāni veditabbāni. Sabbattha hi purimaṃ abhisandhicittaṃ appamāṇaṃ, vadhakacittaṃ pana tadārammaṇaṃ jīvitindriyañca ānantariyānānantarabhāve pamāṇaṃ. Katānantariyakammo ca ‘‘tassa kammassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhissāmī’’ti sakalacakkavāḷaṃ mahācetiyappamāṇehi kañcanathūpehi pūretvāpi sakalacakkavāḷaṃ pūretvā nisinnassa bhikkhusaṅghassa mahādānaṃ datvāpi buddhassa bhagavato saṅghāṭikaṇṇaṃ amuñcanto vicaritvāpi kāyassa bhedā nirayameva upapajjati, pabbajjañca na labhati.

Even for one who changes gender (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.128; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.275; vibha. aṭṭha. 809) but deprives a mother or father of life, it is still an ānantariya deed. For even with the change of gender, that same continuum of existence (bhavaṅgappabandho) and continuum of the life faculty (jīvitindriyappabandho) arises from a single deed, it is not different. But if a human being deprives a mother or father who is an animal of life, or an animal being deprives a human being, or an animal being deprives an animal being, that deed is not ānantariya, but it is weighty. Ānantariya remains ānantariya. Here, the fourfold sheep story, the fourfold battle story, and the fourfold thief story should be told. For even with the intention "I will kill a sheep," if a human being standing in the place of a sheep kills a mother or father who is a human being, he touches ānantariya, because the object of ānantariya has been harmed with the intention of killing. But with the intention of (killing) a sheep, or without the intention of (killing) a mother or father, if he kills a sheep, he does not touch ānantariya, because of the absence of an object of ānantariya. If he kills a mother or father with the intention of (killing) a mother or father, he certainly touches it. This method applies to the other two sets of four as well. Just as with mothers and fathers, so too should these sets of four be understood in the case of arahants. For in all cases, the initial intentional thought is immeasurable, but the murderous thought, its object at that time, and the life faculty are the measure of being ānantariya or not. And one who has committed an ānantariya deed, even if he fills the entire universe with golden stupas the size of the Great Cetiya, thinking "I will counteract the result of that deed," and even if he gives a great alms offering to the Saṅgha of monks seated filling the entire universe, and even if he wanders about not releasing the edge of the Buddha's robe, at the breaking up of the body, he will arise in hell itself, and he will not obtain ordination.

115.Icchamānanti odātavatthavasanaṃ icchamānaṃ. Tenevāha‘‘gihibhāve sampaṭicchitamatteyevā’’ti. Saṅghabhedakakathāvitthāro parato āvi bhavissati.Catunnaṃ kammānanti apalokanādīnaṃ catunnaṃ kammānaṃ.Duṭṭhacittenāti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāveti‘‘vadhakacittenā’’ti. Vadhakacetanāya hi dūsitacittaṃ idha duṭṭhacittaṃ nāma.Lohitaṃ uppādetīti ettha tathāgatassa abhejjakāyatāya parūpakkamena cammacchedaṃ katvā lohitapaggharaṇaṃ nāma natthi, sarīrassa pana antoyeva ekasmiṃ ṭhāne lohitaṃ samosarati, āghātena pakuppamānaṃ sañcitaṃ hoti. Devadattena paviddhasilato bhijjitvā gatasakkhalikāpi tathāgatassa pādantaṃ pahari, pharasunā pahaṭo viya pādo antolohitoyeva ahosi. Jīvako pana tathāgatassa ruciyā satthakena cammaṃ chinditvā tamhā ṭhānā duṭṭhalohitaṃ nīharitvā phāsumakāsi, tenassa puññakammameva ahosi. Tenāha‘‘jīvako viyā’’tiādi.

115.Icchamāna: Desiring to wear white clothes. Therefore, he says "gihibhāve sampaṭicchitamatteyevā". The detailed explanation of the Saṅghabheda (schism in the Saṅgha) story will become clear later. Catunnaṃ kammānaṃ: Of the four acts of apalokana (formal announcement), etc. Duṭṭhacittenā: He explains the meaning that was stated with "vadhakacittenā". For here, a mind corrupted by murderous intention is called a duṭṭhacitta. Lohitaṃ uppādetī: Here, since the Tathāgata's body is unbreakable, there is no such thing as causing blood to flow by cutting the skin through the assault of another. But within the body itself, in one place, blood gathers, accumulating and becoming inflamed with hatred. Even the splinter that flew off and struck the Tathāgata's foot from the rock thrown by Devadatta, the foot was internally bruised, as if struck by an axe. But Jīvaka, according to the Tathāgata's preference, made (him) comfortable by cutting the skin with a scalpel and removing the bad blood from that place, so it was a meritorious act for him. Therefore, he says "jīvako viyā" etc.

Atha ye parinibbute tathāgate cetiyaṃ bhindanti, bodhiṃ chindanti, dhātumhi upakkamanti, tesaṃ kiṃ hotīti? Bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ hoti ānantariyasadisaṃ. Sadhātukaṃ pana thūpaṃ vā paṭimaṃ vā bādhamānaṃ bodhisākhaṃ chindituṃ vaṭṭati. Sacepi tattha nilīnā sakuṇā cetiye vaccaṃ pātenti, chindituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Paribhogacetiyato hi sarīracetiyaṃ garutaraṃ. Cetiyavatthuṃ bhinditvā gacchante bodhimūlepi chinditvā harituṃ vaṭṭati. Yā pana bodhisākhā bodhigharaṃ bādhati, taṃ geharakkhaṇatthaṃ chindituṃ na labhati. Bodhiatthañhi gehaṃ, na gehatthāya bodhi. Āsanagharepi eseva nayo. Yasmiṃ pana āsanaghare dhātu nihitā hoti, tassa rakkhaṇatthāya bodhisākhaṃ chindituṃ vaṭṭati. Bodhijagganatthaṃ ojoharaṇasākhaṃ vā pūtiṭṭhānaṃ vā chindituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva, satthu rūpakāyapaṭijaggane viya puññampi hoti.

Then what happens to those who, after the passing away of the Tathāgata, destroy a cetiya (shrine), cut down a Bodhi tree, or assault a relic? The deed is weighty, similar to ānantariya. But it is permissible to damage a stupa or image that has relics, and to cut a branch of the Bodhi tree. Even if birds nesting there drop excrement on the cetiya, it is certainly permissible to cut it. For the Cetiya of Use is more important than the Cetiya of the Body. It is permissible to cut down and carry away even at the root of the Bodhi tree, going after breaking down the cetiya object. But a branch of the Bodhi tree that obstructs the Bodhi-house may not be cut down to protect the house. For the house is for the sake of the Bodhi tree, not the Bodhi tree for the sake of the house. The same method applies in the case of the assembly hall. But if a relic is placed in the assembly hall, it is permissible to cut down the branch of the Bodhi tree to protect it. It is certainly permissible to cut down a branch that takes away nourishment or a place of decay for the sake of tending the Bodhi tree. Like tending to the Buddha's physical body, it is also meritorious.

Mātughātakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Mātughātakādi Story is Finished.

Ubhatobyañjanakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Ubhatobyañjanaka Story

116.Ubhatobyañjanamassa atthīti ubhatobyañjanakoti iminā asamānādhikaraṇavisayo bāhiratthasamāsoyaṃ, purimapade ca vibhattialopoti dasseti.Byañjananti cettha itthinimittaṃ purisanimittañca adhippetaṃ. Atha ubhatobyañjanakassa ekameva indriyaṃ, udāhu dveti? Ekameva ‘‘yassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa purisindriyaṃ uppajjatīti? No. Yassa vā pana purisindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjatīti? No’’ti (yama. 3.indriyayamaka.188) ekasmiṃ santāne indriyadvayassa paṭisiddhattā, tañca kho itthiubhatobyañjanakassa itthindriyaṃ, purisaubhatobyañjanakassa purisindriyaṃ. Yadi evaṃ dutiyabyañjanakassa abhāvo āpajjati. Indriyañhi byañjanakāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, tañca tassa natthīti? Vuccate – na tassa indriyaṃ dutiyabyañjanakāraṇaṃ. Kasmā? Sadā abhāvato. Itthiubhatobyañjanakassa hi yadā itthiyā rāgacittaṃ uppajjati, tadā purisabyañjanaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, itthibyañjanaṃ paṭicchannaṃ guḷhaṃ hoti, tathā itarassa itaraṃ. Yadi ca tesaṃ indriyaṃ dutiyabyañjanakāraṇaṃ bhaveyya, sadāpi byañjanadvayaṃ tiṭṭheyya, na pana tiṭṭhati, tasmā veditabbametaṃ ‘‘na tassa taṃ byañjanakāraṇaṃ, kammasahāyaṃ pana rāgacittamevettha kāraṇa’’nti.

116.Ubhato byañjanamassa atthīti ubhatobyañjanako: By this, he shows that this is an external-object compound with unequal case-relations, and that there is elision of the case suffix in the first term. Here, byañjana means both the female characteristic and the male characteristic. Now, does the ubhatobyañjanaka have one sense faculty or two? Only one, because in one continuum of existence, the two sense faculties are prohibited (yama. 3.indriyayamaka.188): "Does the female faculty arise for one for whom the male faculty arises? No. Or does the female faculty arise for one for whom the male faculty arises? No." And that is the female faculty for the female ubhatobyañjanaka, and the male faculty for the male ubhatobyañjanaka. If so, it follows that there is an absence of a second characteristic. For the sense faculty is said to be the cause of the characteristic, and that does not exist for him? It is said: the sense faculty is not the cause of the second characteristic for him. Why? Because it is always absent. For when a lustful thought arises for the female ubhatobyañjanaka, the male characteristic becomes apparent, and the female characteristic becomes covered and hidden. Similarly, for the other, the other. And if the sense faculty were the cause of the second characteristic for them, both characteristics would always remain, but they do not remain. Therefore, this should be understood: "That is not the cause of that characteristic for him, but the lustful thought itself is the assisting cause here."

kurundiyaṃvutto, so ca ayutto. Pavattiyaṃyeva hi itthiliṅgādīni samuṭṭhahanti, na paṭisandhiyaṃ. Paṭisandhiyaṃ pana indriyameva samuṭṭhāti, na liṅgādīni. Na ca indriyameva liṅganti sakkā vattuṃ indriyaliṅgānaṃ bhinnasabhāvattā. Vuttañhetaṃaṭṭhasāliniyaṃ(dha. sa. aṭṭha. 632) –

kurundiyaṃ It is said, and that is not fitting. For female signs, etc., arise only in continuity (pavattiyaṃ), not in rebirth-linking (paṭisandhiyaṃ). But at rebirth-linking, only the sense faculty arises, not the signs, etc. And it is not possible to say that the sense faculty itself is the sign, because the sense faculty and the sign have different natures. This was said in the Aṭṭhasālinī (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 632) -

‘‘Itthattaṃ itthibhāvoti ubhayaṃ ekatthaṃ, itthisabhāvoti attho. Ayaṃ kammajo paṭisandhisamuṭṭhito. Itthiliṅgādi pana itthindriyaṃ paṭicca pavatte samuṭṭhitaṃ. Yathā bīje sati bījaṃ paṭicca bījapaccayā rukkho vaḍḍhitvā sākhāviṭapasampanno hutvā ākāsaṃ pūretvā tiṭṭhati, evameva itthibhāvasaṅkhāte itthindriye sati itthiliṅgādīni honti. Bījaṃ viya hi itthindriyaṃ, bījaṃ paṭicca vaḍḍhitvā ākāsaṃ pūretvā ṭhitarukkho viya itthindriyaṃ paṭicca itthiliṅgādīni pavatte samuṭṭhahanti. Tattha itthindriyaṃ na cakkhuviññeyyaṃ, manoviññeyyameva. Itthiliṅgādīni cakkhuviññeyyānipi manoviññeyyānipī’’ti.

"‘Itthattaṃ itthibhāvoti’ both are one, meaning the state of being a woman. This (itthaṃ) is karma-born, arising from rebirth-consciousness. But the feminine characteristics, beginning with the female sex, arise dependent on the female faculty. Just as when there is a seed, dependent on the seed and due to the seed-condition, a tree grows, becoming full of branches and leaves, filling the space, so too, when there is a female faculty, known as the state of being a woman, the feminine characteristics, beginning with the female sex, arise dependent on it. The female faculty is like a seed; the feminine characteristics, beginning with the female sex, arise dependent on the female faculty, like a tree that has grown, filling the space. Here, the female faculty is not knowable by the eye, only by the mind. The feminine characteristics, beginning with the female sex, are knowable by both the eye and the mind."

‘‘tattha vicāraṇakkamo vitthārato aṭṭhasāliniyā dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāya veditabbo’’ti.

"Here, the detailed method of investigation should be understood from the Aṭṭhasālinī, the commentary to the Dhammasaṅgaṇi."

Ubhatobyañjanakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the story of one with both sets of sexual organs is complete.

Anupajjhāyakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of those Without a Preceptor, etc.

117.Sikkhāpadaṃapaññattaṃ hotīti idheva paññattaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Upajjhaṃ aggāhāpetvāti ‘‘upajjhāyo me, bhante, hohī’’ti evaṃ upajjhaṃ aggāhāpetvā. Kammavācāya pana upajjhāyakittanaṃ kataṃyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññathā ‘‘puggalaṃ na parāmasatī’’ti vuttakammavipattisambhavato kammaṃ kuppeyya, teneva ‘‘upajjhāyaṃ akittetvā’’ti avatvā ‘‘upajjhaṃ aggāhāpetvā’’icceva vuttaṃ. Yathā ca aparipuṇṇapattacīvarassa upasampādanakāle kammavācāya ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti asantavatthuṃ kittetvā kammavācāya katāyapi upasampadā ruhati, evaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito āyasmato dhammarakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti asantaṃ puggalaṃ kittetvā kevalaṃ santapadanīhārena kammavācāya katāya upasampadā ruhatiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha‘‘kammaṃ pana na kuppatī’’ti. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, anupajjhāyako upasampādetabbo, yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti ettakameva vatvā ‘‘so ca puggalo anupasampanno’’ti avuttattā kammavipattilakkhaṇassa ca asambhavato‘‘taṃ na gahetabba’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pañcavaggakaraṇañce, bhikkhave, kammaṃ paṇḍakapañcamo kammaṃ kareyya, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya’’ntiādivacanato (mahāva. 390) paṇḍakādīnampi ubhatobyañjanakapariyantānaṃ gaṇapūrakabhāveyeva kammaṃ kuppati, na aññathāti āha‘‘ubhatobyañjanakupajjhāyapariyosānesupi eseva nayo’’ti.

117. The training rule was not formulated means it is said in reference to the training rule formulated right here. Without requesting a preceptor means without requesting a preceptor in this way: "Bhante, be my preceptor." However, it should be understood that the declaration of the preceptor has indeed been done through the formal act (kammavācā). Otherwise, since there would be the possibility of failure of the act due to "not specifying the individual," the act would be invalid. Therefore, instead of saying "without declaring the preceptor," it is said only "without requesting a preceptor." Just as at the time of ordination of one whose bowl and robes are incomplete, even if the ordination performed by declaring something non-existent in the formal act, saying "whose bowl and robes are complete," is valid, so too, it should be understood that the ordination performed by declaring a non-existent person in the formal act, saying "this Buddharakkhita is seeking ordination from the venerable Dhammarakkhita," is valid simply by removing the untrue word. Therefore, he said, "But the act is not invalidated." Because only this much was said: "Monks, one without a preceptor should not be ordained; whoever ordains, there is an offense of wrong-doing (dukkaṭa)," and because it was not said "and that person is not ordained," and because the characteristic of failure of the act is not possible, it is said "That is not to be accepted." Because of the statement beginning "If, monks, a group of five performs an act, and one of the five is a eunuch, the act is invalid and should not be done" (mahāva. 390), the act is invalidated only when eunuchs and those with both sets of sexual organs up to the end are part of the quorum, not otherwise, so he says "This same method applies even at the end with a preceptor who is a hermaphrodite."

Anupajjhāyakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the story of those without a preceptor, etc., is complete.

Apattakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of those with Offences, etc.

118.Aññe vā bhikkhū dātukāmā hontīti sambandho.Anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapātanti aggahitaaggaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ.Sāmaṇerabhāgasamako āmisabhāgoti ettha kiñcāpi sāmaṇerānaṃ āmisabhāgassa samakameva diyyamānattā visuṃ sāmaṇerabhāgo nāma natthi, heṭṭhā gacchantaṃ pana bhattaṃ kadāci mandaṃ bhaveyya, tasmā upari aggahetvā sāmaṇerapāḷiyāva gahetvā dātabboti adhippāyo. Niyatapabbajjasseva cāyaṃ bhāgo dīyati. Teneva‘‘apakkaṃ patta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.

118. The connection is that other monks want to give. Unmarked alms-food means alms-food whose top has not been taken. A portion of material equal to the novice's share here, although there is no separate novice's share because the novices are given exactly the same share of material, the intention is that when the food going down is sometimes slow, it should be given by taking from the novice's row without taking from the top. And this share is given only to one who has formally entered the order. Therefore, "An unripe dish," etc., is said.

Apattakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the story of those with offenses, etc., is complete.

Hatthacchinnādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of those with Severed Hands, etc.

119.Ajapadaketi ajapadasaṇṭhāne padese.Brahmujugattoti brahmā viya ujugatto.Avaseso sattoti iminā lakkhaṇena rahitasatto. Etena ṭhapetvā mahāpurisaṃ cakkavattiñca itare sattā khujjapakkhikāti dasseti. Yebhuyyena hi sattā khandhe kaṭiyaṃ jāṇūsūti tīsu ṭhānesu namanti. Te kaṭiyaṃ namantā pacchato namanti, itaresu dvīsu ṭhānesu namantā purato namanti. Dīghasarīrā pana ekena passena vaṅkā honti, eke mukhaṃ unnāmetvā nakkhattāni gaṇayantā viya caranti, eke appamaṃsalohitā sūlasadisā honti, eke purato pabbhārā honti, pavedhamānā gacchanti.Parivaṭumoti samantato vaṭṭalo.

119. Ajapadake means in a place shaped like a goat's foot. Brahmujugatto means one whose body is straight like Brahma. The remaining beings means beings lacking this characteristic. By this, he shows that except for a great man and a wheel-turning monarch, other beings are bent over. For the most part, beings bend in three places: at the hips, waist, and knees. Those who bend at the hips bend backward; those who bend at the other two places bend forward. Those with long bodies are crooked on one side; some walk as if looking up and counting the stars; some have little flesh and blood, like stakes; some are bent forward, walking shaking. Parivaṭumo means round on all sides.

Aṭṭhisirācammasarīroti aṭṭhisirācammamattasarīro.Kappasīsoti dvidhābhūtasīso.Kekaroti tiriyaṃ passanto.‘‘Udakatārakānāma udakapubbuḷa’’ntigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Akkhitārakāti akkhibhaṇḍakā.Nippakhumakkhīti akkhidalalomehi virahitaakkhiko. Pakhuma-saddo hi loke akkhidalalomesu niruḷho.Paṭaṅgamaṇḍūkonāma mahāmukhamaṇḍūko.Eḷamukhoti niccapaggharaṇakalālamukho.Sabbañcetanti ‘‘kacchugatto vā’’tiādiṃ sandhāya vadati.Vātaṇḍikoti aṇḍakesu vuddhirogena samannāgato.Vikaṭoti tiriyaṃ gamanapādehi samannāgato, yassa ca caṅkamato jāṇukā bahi gacchanti.Paṇhoti pacchato parivattapādehi samannāgato, yassa caṅkamato jāṇukā anto pavisanti.

Aṭṭhisirācammasarīro means one whose body is only bones, sinews, and skin. Kappasīso means one whose head is split in two. Kekaro means one who looks sideways. "Udakatārakā means a water bubble," is said in the Gaṇṭhipada. Akkhitārakā means the eyeballs. Nippakhumakkhī means one whose eyes are without eyelashes. For in the world, the word pakhuma is established as meaning eyelashes. Paṭaṅgamaṇḍūko means a frog with a large mouth. Eḷamukho means one whose mouth constantly drips saliva. Sabbañceta means he speaks referring to "one with a scabby body," etc. Vātaṇḍiko means one afflicted with a disease of growth in the testicles. Vikaṭo means one with splayed feet, whose knees go outward when walking. Paṇho means one with feet turned backward, whose knees go inward when walking.

‘‘majjhe saṅkuṭitapādattā’’ti.Agge saṅkuṭitapādattāti kuṇḍapādatāya kāraṇanidassanaṃ. Kuṇḍapādasseva gamanasabhāvaṃ vibhāveti‘‘piṭṭhipādaggena caṅkamanto’’ti.Mammananti khalitavacanaṃ. Yo ekameva akkharaṃ catupañcakkhattuṃ vadati, tassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.

"Because the feet are contracted in the middle." Because the feet are contracted at the tips is a demonstration of the reason for being club-footed. He explains the manner of walking of a club-footed person: "Walking on the back of the foot." Mammana means faltering speech. This is a term for one who repeats the same letter four or five times.

Hatthacchinnādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the story of those with severed hands, etc., is complete.

Alajjīnissayavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of Those Dependent on the Shameless

120.Nissayapaṭisaṃyuttavatthūsu bhikkhūhi samāno sīlādiguṇabhāgo assāti bhikkhusabhāgo, tassa bhāvobhikkhusabhāgatā. Dve tīṇi divasāni vasitvā gantukāmena anissitenavasitabbanti ettha ‘‘yāva bhikkhusabhāgataṃ jānāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ vināpi anissitena vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo. Bhikkhusabhāgataṃ pana jānanto ‘‘sve gamissāmi, kiṃ me nissayenā’’ti aruṇaṃ uṭṭhapetuṃ na labhati. ‘‘Purāruṇā uṭṭhahitvāva gamissāmī’’ti ābhogena sayantassa sace aruṇo uggacchati, vaṭṭati.‘‘Sattāhaṃ vasissāmī’’ti ālayaṃ karontena pana nissayo gahetabboti ‘‘sattāhamattaṃ vasissāmi, kiṃ bhikkhusabhāgatājānanenā’’ti jānane dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā vasituṃ na labhati, bhikkhusabhāgataṃ upaparikkhitvā nissayo gahetabboti attho.

120. Among the items connected with dependence, the fact that there is a similar share of virtuous qualities, beginning with morality, as the monks is a community of monks; the state of that is being a community of monks. Anissitena vasitabbaṃ vasitvā dve tīṇi divasāni gantukāmena here means that one who is without dependence is allowed to live without even an intention of "I will know the community of monks." But one who knows the community of monks is not allowed to make the dawn break with the thought, "I will go tomorrow; what is the use of dependence for me?" If dawn breaks for one who is lying down with the intention of "I will get up and leave before dawn," it is allowed. But one who makes an attachment with "I will live for a week" should take dependence means one is not allowed to live by putting aside the burden of knowing, thinking, "I will live only for a week; what is the use of knowing the community of monks?" The meaning is that after examining the community of monks, dependence should be taken.

Gamikādinissayavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of Dependence for Travelers, etc.

121.Antarāmagge vissamanto vā…pe… anāpattīti asati nissayadāyake anāpatti.Tassa nissāyāti pāḷianurūpato vuttaṃ, taṃ nissāyāti attho.Sace pana āsāḷhīmāse…pe… tattha gantabbanti ettha sace so vassūpanāyikāya āsannāya gantukāmo suṇāti ‘‘asuko mahāthero āgamissatī’’ti, tañce āgameti, vaṭṭati. Āgamentasseva ce vassūpanāyikadivaso hoti, hotu, gantabbaṃ tattha, yattha nissayadāyakaṃ labhati. Keci pana ‘‘sace so gacchanto jīvitantarāyaṃ brahmacariyantarāyaṃ vā passati, tattheva vasitabba’’nti vadanti.

121. There is no offense when resting along the way…pe… means there is no offense when there is no one to give dependence. Tassa nissāyā is said in accordance with the Pali, meaning depending on that. If, however, in the month of Āsāḷhī…pe… one should go there means if, when he wants to go near the beginning of the rains, he hears, "Such and such a great elder will come," and if he waits for him to come, it is allowed. Even if the day of beginning the rains comes while he is waiting, let it be; one should go there, where one can obtain someone to give dependence. But some say, "If, while going, he sees danger to life or danger to the holy life, he should live right there."

Gottena anussāvanānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Anussāvana and Approval by Clan Name

122.‘‘Itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato’’ti nāmakittanassa anussāvanāya āgatattā‘‘nāhaṃ ussahāmi therassa nāmaṃ gahetu’’nti vuttaṃ, ‘‘āyasmato pippalissa upasampadāpekkho’’ti evaṃ nāmaṃ gahetuṃ na ussahāmīti attho. ‘‘Gottenapi anussāvetu’’nti vacanato yena vohārena voharati, tena vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ. ‘‘Konāmo te upajjhāyo’’ti puṭṭhenapi gottameva nāmaṃ katvā vattabbanti siddhaṃ hoti, tasmā catubbidhesu nāmesu yena kenaci nāmena anussāvanā kātabbāti vadanti. Ekassa bahūni nāmāni honti, tattha ekaṃ nāmaṃ ñattiyā, ekaṃ anussāvanāya kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, atthato byañjanato ca abhinnāhi anussāvanāhi bhavitabbanti. Kiñcāpi ‘‘itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato’’ti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘āyasmato’’ti padaṃ pacchā vuttaṃ, kammavācāpāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito āyasmato dhammarakkhitassā’’ti paṭhamaṃ likhitanti taṃ uppaṭipāṭiyā vuttanti na paccetabbaṃ. Pāḷiyañhi ‘‘itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato’’ti atthamattaṃ dassitaṃ, tasmā pāḷiyaṃ avuttopi ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito āyasmato dhammarakkhitassā’’ti kammavācāpāḷiyaṃ payogo dassito. ‘‘Na me diṭṭho ito pubbe iccāyasmā sāriputto’’ti ca ‘‘āyasmā sāriputto atthakusalo’’ti ca paṭhamaṃ ‘‘āyasmā’’ti payogassa dassanatoti vadanti. Katthaci ‘‘āyasmato buddharakkhitattherassā’’ti vatvā katthaci kevalaṃ ‘‘buddharakkhitassā’’ti sāveti, sāvanaṃ hāpetīti na vuccati nāmassa ahāpitattāti eke. Sace katthaci ‘‘āyasmato buddharakkhitassā’’ti vatvā katthaci ‘‘buddharaakhatassāyasmato’’ti sāveti, pāṭhānurūpattā khettameva otiṇṇantipi eke. Byañjanabhedappasaṅgato anussāvanānaṃ taṃ na vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Sace pana sabbaṭṭhānepi eteneva pakārena vadati, vaṭṭati.

122. Because the purpose of coming for the recitation of the name is to say "The venerable one of such and such a name to such and such a name," "I am not able to take the elder's name" is said, meaning "I am not able to take the name 'seeking ordination from the venerable Pippali' like that." From the statement "Let him announce by clan name also," it is established that it is acceptable by whatever designation he is known. It is established that when asked "What is your preceptor's name?" one should state the clan name as the name. Therefore, they say that among the four kinds of names, the announcement should be made by any name whatsoever. One person has many names; there, it is not allowed to use one name for the proposal and one for the announcement. The announcements must be distinct in meaning and wording. Although in the Pali "The venerable one of such and such a name to such and such a name," the word "venerable" is said last, one should not assume that it is said in the reverse order because in the formal act Pali, "This Buddharakkhita is of the venerable Dhammarakkhita" is written first. For in the Pali, only the meaning of "The venerable one of such and such a name to such and such a name" is shown; therefore, although not said in the Pali, the application in the formal act Pali "This Buddharakkhita is of the venerable Dhammarakkhita" is shown. They say that it is because of the showing of the use of "venerable" first in "I have not seen the venerable Sāriputta before" and "the venerable Sāriputta is skilled in meaning." Somewhere, after saying "of the venerable elder Buddharakkhita," he announces only "of Buddharakkhita" somewhere, it is not said that he is reducing the announcement because the name has not been reduced, say some. If somewhere he says "of the venerable Buddharakkhita" and somewhere he announces "of Buddharakkhitassa, the venerable one," some say that it is simply applied to the field because it conforms to the reading. They say that that is not allowed for the announcements because of the possibility of difference in wording. But if he speaks in this manner in all places, it is allowed.

Dveupasampadāpekkhādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of Two Seeking Ordination, etc.

123.Ekānussāvaneti ettha ekato anussāvanaṃ etesantiekānussāvanāti asamānādhikaraṇavisayo bāhiratthasamāsoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha‘‘dve ekatoanussāvane’’ti. Tatthaekatoti ekakkhaṇeti attho, vibhattialopena cāyaṃ niddeso.Purimanayeneva ekatoanussāvane kātunti ‘‘ekena ekassa, aññena itarassā’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayena dvīhi vā tīhi vā ācariyehi ekena vā ekatoanussāvane kātuṃ.

123. Ekānussāvane here, since the announcement is done to them together, ekānussāvanā should be seen as a bahiratthasamāsa with an unequal subject. Therefore, he said "Two are announced together." There, ekato means at one moment; this designation is by the elision of the विभक्ति. To do the announcement together in the same way as before means to do the announcement together by two or three preceptors or by one, in the way previously stated beginning with "to one by one, to the other by the other."

Upasampadāvidhikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Ordination Procedure

126.Vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyatīti upajjhāti iminā upajjhāyasaddasamānattho upajjhāsaddopīti dasseti.

126. Upajjhā means one who reflects on what is allowable and not allowable by this, he shows that the word upajjhā is synonymous with the word upajjhāya.

Cattāronissayādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Four Supports, etc.

130.Sambhogeti dhammasambhoge āmisasambhoge ca.Anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāseti ettha ca ayamadhippāyo – yasmā ayaṃ osāraṇakammassa katattā pakatattaṭṭhāne ṭhito, tasmā na ukkhittakena saddhiṃ sambhogādipaccayā pācittiyaṃ, nāpi alajjinā saddhiṃ paribhogapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ alajjīlakkhaṇānupapattito. Yo hi ucchurasakasaṭānaṃ sattāhakālikayāvajīvikattā vaṭṭati vikāle ucchu khāditunti saññaṃ uppādetvā taṃ khāditvā tappaccayā pācittiyaṃ na passati ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti tathāsaññitāya, yo vā pana āpattimāpannabhāvaṃ paṭijānitvā ‘‘na paṭikaromī’’ti abhinivisati, ayaṃ –

130. Sambhoge means in the enjoyment of Dhamma and in the enjoyment of material things. There is no offense in sharing, in living together here, this is the intention: since he is standing in the established place because the act of expulsion has been done, therefore, there is no pācittiya offense due to sharing, etc., with one who has been suspended, nor a dukkaṭa offense due to using things in common with one who is shameless, because the characteristic of being shameless does not apply. For he who, having generated the perception that it is allowable to eat sugarcane at the wrong time because it is allowable as a seven-day allowable or a lifelong allowable of ucchurasakasaṭa, and having eaten it, does not see a pācittiya offense because of the perception "it is allowable," or he who, having acknowledged that he has committed an offense, insists "I will not atone for it," this one—

‘‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjati, āpattiṃ parigūhati;

"Intentionally commits an offense, conceals an offense;
Goes to wrong destinations, such a person is called shameless." (pari. 359) —

Vuttalakkhaṇe apatanato alajjī nāma na hoti. Tasmā yathā pubbe yāva ukkhepanīyakammaṃ kataṃ, tāva tena saddhiṃ sambhoge saṃvāse ca anāpatti, evamidhāpīti sabbathā anāpattiṭṭhāneyeva anāpatti vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Na hi bhagavā alajjinā saddhiṃ sambhogapaccayā āpattisambhave sati ‘‘anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāse’’ti vadati. Tato yamettha kenaci ‘‘anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāse’’ti iminā pācittiyena anāpatti vuttā, ‘‘alajjīparibhogapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ pana āpajjatiyevā’’ti vatvā bahudhā papañcitaṃ, na taṃ sārato paccetabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.

—is not called shameless because of not falling into the stated characteristic. Therefore, just as before, until the act of expulsion was done, there was no offense in sharing and living together with him, so too here, it should be understood that the absence of offense is stated in a place of absence of offense in every way. For the Blessed One would not say "there is no offense in sharing, in living together" when there is the possibility of an offense due to sharing with one who is shameless. Therefore, that which has been greatly elaborated here by someone, saying "absence of offense is stated by this pācittiya in sharing, in living together, but he incurs a dukkaṭa offense due to using things in common with one who is shameless," should not be accepted as essential. The rest here is simply straightforward.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ

Thus ends the Mahākhandhaka commentary in the Sāratthadīpanī, the Vinaya commentary, the Samantapāsādikā.

Mahākhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Mahākhandhaka Commentary is complete.

2. Uposathakkhandhakaṃ

2. Uposatha Khandhaka

Sannipātānujānanādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of Allowing Assemblies, etc.

132.Uposathakkhandhake taranti plavanti ettha bālātititthaṃ. Itoti imasmiṃ sāsane laddhito.Taṃ kathentīti ‘‘imasmiṃ nāma divase muhutte vā idaṃ kattabba’’ntiādinā kathenti.

132. In the Uposatha Khandhaka, bālātaranti plavanti ettha means titthaṃ. Ito means obtained in this dispensation. Taṃ kathentī means they tell with "on this day or at this moment, this should be done," etc.

134.‘‘Suṇātu me bhante’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃmātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) vitthārato āgatamevāti na idha vitthārayissāma, atthikehi pana tatoyeva gahetabbaṃ.

134. That which should be said in "Suṇātu me bhante," etc., has already come in detail in the Mātikā Aṭṭhakathā (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā), so we will not explain it in detail here, but it should be taken from there by those who desire it.

135.Āpajjitvā vā vuṭṭhitoti ettha ārocitāpi āpatti asantī nāma hotīti veditabbaṃ. Tenevamātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘yassa pana evaṃ anāpannā vā āpatti āpajjitvā ca pana vuṭṭhitā vā desitā vā ārocitā vā, tassa sā āpatti asantī nāma hotī’’ti. Musāvādo nāma vacībhedapaccayā hotīti āha‘‘na musāvādalakkhaṇenā’’ti.Bhagavato pana vacanenāti sampajānamusāvāde kiṃ hoti? ‘‘Dukkaṭaṃ hotī’’ti iminā vacanena.Vacīdvāre akiriyasamuṭṭhānā āpatti hotīti yasmā yassa bhikkhuno adhammikāya paṭiññāya tuṇhībhūtassa nisinnassa manodvāre āpatti nāma natthi, yasmā pana āvi kātabbaṃ na āvi akāsi, tenassa vacīdvāre akiriyasamuṭṭhānā āpatti hoti.

135. Āpajjitvā vā vuṭṭhito: Here, it should be understood that even an offense that has been reported is considered non-existent. Therefore, it is said in the Mātikā Aṭṭhakathā (Kaṅkhā. Aṭṭha. Nidānavaṇṇanā): "For whomsoever, an offense that is not committed, or having committed an offense, has recovered from it, or has declared it, or has reported it, for him that offense is considered non-existent." He says "na musāvādalakkhaṇenā" because a falsehood occurs due to the intention to deceive. Bhagavato pana vacanenā: What happens in the case of a deliberate lie? It is answered by the statement, "There is a dukkaṭa offense." Vacīdvāre akiriyasamuṭṭhānā āpatti hotī: Because for a bhikkhu who remains silent, sitting with an unlawful declaration, there is no offense through the mind-door. However, since he did not reveal what should be revealed, therefore, he incurs an offense arising from inaction through the speech-door.

Vācāti vācāya, ya-kāralopenāyaṃ niddeso. Kenaci manujena vācāya anālapantoti yojetabbaṃ.Giraṃ no ca pare bhaṇeyyāti ‘‘ime sossantī’’ti parapuggale sandhāya saddampi na nicchāreyya.Āpajjeyya vācasikanti vācato samuṭṭhitaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjeyya.

Vācā: By speech; this is an indication with the omission of the ya-sound. It should be construed as, "not conversing with any person by speech." Giraṃ no ca pare bhaṇeyyā: He should not utter even a sound, thinking, "These will hear it," referring to another person. Āpajjeyya vācasikaṃ: He would incur an offense arising from speech.

Antarāyakaroti vippaṭisāravatthutāya pāmojjādisambhavaṃ nivāretvā paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamāya antarāyakaro.Tassa bhikkhuno phāsu hotīti avippaṭisāramūlakānaṃ pāmojjādīnaṃ vasena tassa bhikkhuno sukhā paṭipadā sampajjatīti attho.

Antarāyakaro: Being a cause of remorse, preventing the arising of joy and so on, it is an obstacle to the attainment of the first jhāna and other attainments. Tassa bhikkhuno phāsu hotī: Through joy and so on, which have their root in the absence of remorse, the bhikkhu's practice becomes easy, this is the meaning.

Sannipātānujānanādikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The exposition of the talk on permission for assemblies, etc., is finished.

Sīmānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
The Exposition of the Talk on Boundary Permission

138.Itaropīti suddhapaṃsupabbatādiṃ sandhāya vadati.Hatthippamāṇo nāma pabbatoheṭṭhimakoṭiyā aḍḍhaṭṭhamaratanubbedho.Tasmāti yasmā ekena na vaṭṭati, tasmā.Dvattiṃsapalaguḷapiṇḍappamāṇatāthūlatāya gahetabbā, na tulagaṇanāya.Antosāramissakānanti antosārarukkhehi missakānaṃ.Sūcidaṇḍakappamāṇoti sīhaḷadīpe lekhanadaṇḍappamāṇoti vadanti, so ca kaniṭṭhaṅguliparimāṇoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Etanti navamūlasākhāniggamanaṃ.Parabhāge kittetuṃ vaṭṭatīti bahi nikkhamitvā ṭhitesu aṭṭhasu maggesu ekissā disāya ekaṃ, aparāya ekanti evaṃ catūsu ṭhānesu kittetuṃ vaṭṭati.

138. Itaropī: He speaks referring to a pure heap of dust, a mountain, etc. Hatthippamāṇo nāma pabbato: A mountain the size of an elephant, eight and a half ratanas in thickness at the lower edge. Tasmā: Because it is not enough with one. Dvattiṃsapalaguḷapiṇḍappamāṇatā: The size of thirty-two palaguḷa lumps should be taken in terms of bulk, not by counting. Antosāramissakānaṃ: Mixed with heartwood trees. Sūcidaṇḍakappamāṇo: In Sri Lanka, they say it is the size of a writing stylus, and that should be understood as the size of the smallest finger joint. Etaṃ: This, the emergence of new root branches. Parabhāge kittetuṃ vaṭṭatī: It is permissible to mark in four places, one in each direction on eight paths that are situated after going outside.

Yattha katthaci uttarantiyā bhikkhuniyā antaravāsako temiyatīti sikkhākaraṇīyaṃ āgatalakkhaṇena timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādetvā antaravāsakaṃ anukkhipitvā titthena vā atitthena vā uttarantiyā bhikkhuniyā ekadvaṅgulamattampi antaravāsako temiyati. Bhikkhuniyā eva gahaṇañcettha bhikkhunīvibhaṅge bhikkhuniyā vasena nadīlakkhaṇassa pāḷiyaṃ āgatattā teneva nayena dassanatthaṃ kataṃ.Sīmaṃ bandhantānaṃ nimittaṃ hotīti ayaṃ vuttalakkhaṇā nadī samuddaṃ vā pavisatu taḷākaṃ vā, pabhavato paṭṭhāya nimittaṃ hoti.Ajjhottharitvā āvaraṇaṃ pavattatiyevāti āvaraṇaṃ ajjhottharitvā sandatiyeva.Appavattamānāti asandamānudakā. Āvaraṇañhi patvā nadiyā yattake padese udakaṃ asandamānaṃ santiṭṭhati, tattha nadīnimittaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Upari sandamānaṭṭhāneyeva vaṭṭati, asandamānaṭṭhāne pana udakanimittaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Ṭhitameva hi udakanimitte vaṭṭati, na sandamānaṃ. Tenevāha‘‘pavattanaṭṭhāne nadīnimittaṃ, appavattanaṭṭhāne udakanimittaṃkātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti.Nadiṃ bhinditvāti mātikāmukhadvārena nadīkūlaṃ bhinditvā.Ukkhepimanti kūpato viya ukkhipitvā gahetabbaṃ.

Yattha katthaci uttarantiyā bhikkhuniyā antaravāsako temiyatī: According to the characteristic that comes in the sikkhākaraṇīya, even if a bhikkhunī, covering the three maṇḍalas and not raising her lower garment, gets her lower garment wet to the extent of one or two finger-breadths while crossing (the river) with or without a ferry, (it is a boundary). Here, the consideration of a bhikkhunī is done to show the characteristic of a river according to the way it comes in the bhikkhunīvibhaṅga with respect to a bhikkhunī. Sīmaṃ bandhantānaṃ nimittaṃ hotī: This river of the described characteristics, whether it enters the sea or a pond, is a boundary marker from its source onwards. Ajjhottharitvā āvaraṇaṃ pavattatiyevā: It flows exceeding the barrier. Appavattamānā: Not flowing water. Where the water of a river, having reached a barrier, remains without flowing, it is not permissible to make a boundary marker there. It is only permissible where it flows above; however, in a place where it does not flow, it is permissible to make a water marker. Indeed, only standing water is suitable as a water marker, not flowing water. Therefore, he said, "pavattanaṭṭhāne nadīnimittaṃ, appavattanaṭṭhāne udakanimittaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī." Nadiṃ bhinditvā: Breaking the bank of the river through the mouth of the dike. Ukkhepimaṃ: It should be taken by lifting, as from a well.

Siṅghāṭakasaṇṭhānāti tikoṇaracchāsaṇṭhānā.Mudiṅgasaṇṭhānāti mudiṅgabherī viya majjhe vitthatā ubhosu koṭīsu saṅkoṭitā hoti.Upacāraṃ ṭhapetvāti pacchā sīmaṃ bandhantānaṃ sīmāya okāsaṃ ṭhapetvā.Antonimittagatehi panāti ekassa gāmassa upaḍḍhaṃ anto kattukāmatāya sati sabbesaṃ āgamane payojanaṃ natthīti katvā vuttaṃ.Āgantabbanti ca sāmīcivasena vuttaṃ, nāyaṃ niyamo ‘‘āgantabbamevā’’ti. Tenevāha‘‘āgamanampi anāgamanampi vaṭṭatī’’ti. Abaddhāya hi sīmāya nānāgāmakhettānaṃ nānāsīmasabhāvattā tesaṃ anāgamanepi vaggakammaṃ na hoti, tasmā anāgamanampi vaṭṭati. Baddhāya pana sīmāya ekasīmabhāvato puna aññasmiṃ kamme kariyamāne anto sīmagatehi āgantabbamevāti āha‘‘avippavāsasīmā…pe… āgantabba’’nti. Nimittakittanakāle asodhitāyapi sīmāya nevatthi doso nimittakittanassa apalokanādīsu aññatarābhāvato.

Siṅghāṭakasaṇṭhānā: Shaped like a triangular intersection. Mudiṅgasaṇṭhānā: Shaped like a mudiṅga drum, wide in the middle and narrowed at both ends. Upacāraṃ ṭhapetvā: Leaving space for the boundary when establishing the boundary later. Antonimittagatehi panā: It was said because there is no need for everyone to come if the intention is to include half of one village inside (the boundary). Āgantabbaṃ: It is said by way of propriety; this is not a rule that "it must be come." Therefore, he said, "āgamanampi anāgamanampi vaṭṭatī." Because in an unestablished boundary, the fields of different villages have different boundaries, a vaggakamma is not done even if they do not come. Therefore, not coming is also permissible. However, in an established boundary, because of having one boundary, when another action is being done again, it must be come by those within the boundary. Therefore, he said, "avippavāsasīmā…pe… āgantabba." Even in an unpurified boundary at the time of marking the boundaries, there is no fault because of the absence of any of the overlookings, etc., of marking the boundaries.

pabbajjā-gahaṇaṃ.Sukhakaraṇatthanti sabbesaṃ sannipātanaparissamaṃ pahāya appatarehi sukhakaraṇatthaṃ.Ekavīsati bhikkhū gaṇhātīti vīsativaggakaraṇīyaparamattā saṅghakammassa kammārahena saddhiṃ ekavīsati bhikkhū gaṇhāti. Idañca nisinnānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhimantato hi yattha ekavīsati bhikkhū nisīdituṃ sakkonti, tattake padese sīmaṃ bandhituṃ vaṭṭati.Na sakkhissantīti avippavāsasīmāya baddhabhāvaṃ asallakkhetvā ‘‘samānasaṃvāsakameva samūhanissāmā’’ti vāyamantā na sakkhissanti. Baddhāya hi avippavāsasīmāya taṃ asamūhanitvā ‘‘samānasaṃvāsakasīmaṃ samūhanissāmā’’ti katāyapi kammavācāya asamūhatāva hoti sīmā. Paṭhamañhi avippavāsaṃ samūhanitvā pacchā sīmā samūhanitabbā. Ekaratanappamāṇā suviññeyyatarā hotīti katvā vuttaṃ‘‘ekaratanappamāṇā vaṭṭatī’’ti. Ekaṅgulamattāpi sīmantarikā vaṭṭatiyeva. Tattakenapi hi sīmā asambhinnāva hoti.

pabbajjā-gahaṇaṃ. Sukhakaraṇatthaṃ: For the sake of easily doing (the action) by avoiding the exertion of assembling everyone. Ekavīsati bhikkhū gaṇhātī: Because the saṅghakamma requires a minimum of twenty, it takes twenty-one bhikkhus together with the one who is competent to do the action. And this is said with regard to those who are seated. Indeed, it is permissible to establish a boundary in a place where twenty-one bhikkhus can sit at the very least. Na sakkhissantī: They will not be able, trying to (establish the boundary) thinking, "It is only a samānasaṃvāsaka (boundary) that we will remove," without considering the established nature of the avippavāsasīma. Indeed, even if a kammavācā is done saying, "We will remove the samānasaṃvāsakasīma," without removing the established avippavāsasīma, the boundary remains unremoved. Firstly, the avippavāsa must be removed, and then the boundary must be removed. It was said, "ekaratanappamāṇā vaṭṭatī," because a boundary of one ratana in size is easier to recognize. Even a boundary demarcation of one inch is permissible. Indeed, even with that much, the boundary remains undivided.

Avasesanimittānīti mahāsīmāya bāhirapasse nimittāni. Khaṇḍasīmato paṭṭhāya bandhanaṃ āciṇṇaṃ, āciṇṇakaraṇeneva ca sammoho na hotīti āha‘‘khaṇḍasīmatova paṭṭhāya bandhitabbā’’ti.Kuṭigeheti kuṭighare, bhūmighareti attho.Udukkhalanti khuddakāvāṭaṃ.Nimittaṃ na kātabbanti taṃ rājiṃ vā udukkhalaṃ vā nimittaṃ na kātabbaṃ.

Avasesanimittānī: The remaining boundary markers on the outer side of the great boundary. The establishment of the boundary is usually done starting from the khaṇḍasīma, and because confusion does not occur by doing what is usual, he said, "khaṇḍasīmatova paṭṭhāya bandhitabbā." Kuṭigehe: In a hut-house, meaning an earth house. Udukkhalaṃ: A small window. Nimittaṃ na kātabbaṃ: That line or window should not be made a boundary marker.

Heṭṭhāna otaratīti bhittito oraṃ nimittāni ṭhapetvā kittitattā heṭṭhā ākāsappadesaṃ na otarati.Heṭṭhāpi otaratīti sace heṭṭhā antobhittiyaṃ ekavīsatiyā bhikkhūnaṃ okāso hoti, otarati. Otaramānā ca uparisīmappamāṇena na otarati, samantā bhittippamāṇena otarati.Otaraṇānotaraṇaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbanti sace heṭṭhā ekavīsatiyā bhikkhūnaṃ okāso hoti, otarati. No ce, na otaratīti adhippāyo.Sabbo pāsādo sīmaṭṭho hotīti uparimatalena saddhiṃ ekābaddhabhittiko vā hotu mā vā, sabbopi pāsādo sīmaṭṭhova hoti.

Heṭṭhā na otaratī: Because the boundary markers were established and marked leaving space (oraṃ) from the wall, it does not descend to the open space below. Heṭṭhāpi otaratī: If there is space for twenty-one bhikkhus on the inner wall below, it descends. And when descending, it does not descend according to the size of the upper boundary, it descends according to the size of the wall all around. Otaraṇānotaraṇaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ: Whether it descends or not should be understood in the same way as said. If there is space for twenty-one bhikkhus below, it descends; if not, it does not descend, this is the idea. Sabbo pāsādo sīmaṭṭho hotī: Whether it has a single connected wall with the upper level or not, the entire building is within the boundary.

Tālamūlakapabbateti tālamūlasadise pabbate. So ca heṭṭhā mahanto hutvā anupubbena tanuko hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Paṇavasaṇṭhānomajjhe tanuko hoti mūle agge ca vitthato.Heṭṭhā vā majjhe vāti mudiṅgasaṇṭhānassa heṭṭhā paṇavasaṇṭhānassa majjhe.Ākāsapabbhāranti bhittiyā aparikkhittapabbhāraṃ.Antoleṇaṃ hotīti pabbatassa anto leṇaṃ hoti.Sīmāmāḷaketi khaṇḍasīmāmāḷake.Mahāsīmaṃ sodhetvā vā kammaṃ kātabbanti mahāsīmagatā bhikkhū hatthapāsaṃ vā ānetabbā, sīmato vā bahi kātabbāti adhippāyo.Gaṇṭhipadesupana ‘‘mahāsīmagatehi bhikkhūhi taṃ sākhaṃ vā pārohaṃ vā anāmasitvā ṭhātabbanti adhippāyo’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.Purimanayepīti khaṇḍasīmāya uṭṭhahitvā mahāsīmāya oṇatarukkhepi.Ukkhipāpetvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti khaṇḍasīmāya anto ṭhitattā rukkhassa tattha ṭhito hatthapāsaṃyeva ānetabboti ukkhipāpetvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭati.

Tālamūlakapabbate: On a mountain similar to the root of a palm tree. And it should be seen that it is large at the bottom and gradually becomes thinner. Paṇavasaṇṭhāno: It is thin in the middle and wide at the base and at the tip. Heṭṭhā vā majjhe vā: At the bottom of the mudiṅgasaṇṭhāna or in the middle of the paṇavasaṇṭhāna. Ākāsapabbhāraṃ: A projection from the wall that is not enclosed by a wall. Antoleṇaṃ hotī: There is a cave inside the mountain. Sīmāmāḷake: In a khaṇḍasīmāmāḷaka. Mahāsīmaṃ sodhetvā vā kammaṃ kātabbaṃ: Either the bhikkhus within the great boundary must be brought within arm's reach or be made to go outside the boundary, this is the idea. However, in the Gaṇṭhipadesu, it is said, "The idea is that the bhikkhus within the great boundary should stand without touching that branch or shoot," that should not be taken. Purimanayepī: Even in a tree leaning into the great boundary after arising from the khaṇḍasīma. Ukkhipāpetvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭatī: Because the tree is situated inside the khaṇḍasīma, it should only be brought within arm's reach while standing there; it is not permissible to do it by having it thrown (outside the khaṇḍasīma).

140.Pārayatīti ajjhottharati.Pārāti sīmāpekkho itthiliṅganiddeso.Assāti bhaveyya. Idhādhippetanāvāya pamāṇaṃ dassento āha‘‘yā sabbantimena paricchedena…pe… tayo jane vahatī’’ti. Iminā ca vuttappamāṇato khuddakā nāvā vijjamānāpi idha asantapakkhaṃ bhajatīti dīpeti. Avassaṃ labbhaneyyā dhuvanāvāva hotīti sambandho. Rukkhaṃ chinditvā katoti pāṭhaseso.Paratīre sammukhaṭṭhāneti orimatīre sabbapariyantanimittassa sammukhaṭṭhāne.Sabbanimittānaṃ anto ṭhite bhikkhū hatthapāsagate katvāti ettha sace ekaṃ gāmakhettaṃ hoti, ubhosu tīresu sabbanimittānaṃ anto ṭhite bhikkhū hatthapāsagate katvā sammannitabbā. Nānāgāmakkhettaṃ ce, samānasaṃvāsakasīmābandhanakāle anāgantumpi vaṭṭati. Avippavāsasīmāsammutiyaṃ pana āgantabbameva. Yasmā ubhosu tīresu nimittakittanamattena dīpako saṅgahito nāma na hoti, tasmā dīpakepi nimittāni visuṃ kittetabbānevāti āha‘‘dīpakassaorimante ca pārimante ca nimittaṃ kittetabba’’nti.Dīpakasikharanti dīpakamatthakaṃ.Pabbatasaṇṭhānāti dīpakassa ekato adhikatarattā vuttaṃ.

140. Pārayatī: Crosses over. Pārā: The feminine gender indication with respect to the boundary. Assā: May be. Showing the size of the boat intended here, he says, "yā sabbantimena paricchedena…pe… tayo jane vahatī." And by this, it indicates that even if smaller boats than the size mentioned exist, they belong to the side of non-existence here. The connection is that a stable boat that can definitely be obtained is needed. "Having cut a tree and made it," is the remaining part of the reading. Paratīre sammukhaṭṭhāne: On the opposite bank, in a place facing all the surrounding boundary markers. Sabbanimittānaṃ anto ṭhite bhikkhū hatthapāsagate katvā: Here, if there is one village field, the bhikkhus situated inside all the boundary markers on both banks should be made within arm's reach and then the agreement should be done. If it is a field of different villages, it is permissible not to come at the time of establishing a samānasaṃvāsaka boundary. However, in the agreement of an avippavāsasīma, they must come. Because with the marking of the boundary markers on both banks, the island is not included, therefore, the boundary markers should be marked separately even for the island, he says, "dīpakassa orimante ca pārimante ca nimittaṃ kittetabba." Dīpakasikharaṃ: The peak of the island. Pabbatasaṇṭhānā: It is said because one side of the island is larger.

Sīmānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The exposition of the talk on boundary permission is finished.

Uposathāgārādikathāvaṇṇanā
The Talk on the Uposatha Hall, etc.

142.Vatthuvasena vuttanti ‘‘mayañcamhā asammatāya bhūmiyā nisinnā pātimokkhaṃ assumhā’’ti vatthumhi pātimokkhasavanassa āgatattā vuttaṃ.Uposathappamukhaṃnāma uposathāgārassa sammukhaṭṭhānaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘paṭhamaṃ nimittā kittetabbā’’ti ettakameva vatvā sīmāsammutiyaṃ viya ‘‘pabbatanimittaṃ pāsāṇanimitta’’ntiādinā visesetvā nimittānaṃ adassitattā‘‘khuddakāni vā…pe… yāni kānici nimittānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kittetuṃ vaṭṭatīti iminā sambandho.

142. Vatthuvasena vuttaṃ: It is said because the recitation of the Pātimokkha occurs in the situation, "We were seated on unauthorized ground and recited the Pātimokkha." Uposathappamukhaṃ: Namely, the place facing the uposatha hall. In the text, having said only this much, "Firstly, the boundary markers should be marked," because it did not show the boundary markers specifically with "a mountain marker, a stone marker," etc., as in the boundary agreement, it was said, "khuddakāni vā…pe… yāni kānici nimittānī." The connection is with "it is permissible to mark."

Avippavāsasīmānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
The Talk on Permission for a Non-Departing Boundary

144.Assāti bhikkhunisaṅghassa.Dvepi sīmāyoti paṭhamaṃ vuttā avippavāsasīmā samānasaṃvāsakasīmā ca.Na kammavācaṃ vaggaṃ karontīti kammavācaṃ na bhindanti, kammaṃ na kopentīti adhippāyo.Etthāti ‘‘ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcā’’ti ettha.Gāmañca gāmūpacārañca na ottharatīti ‘‘ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcā’’ti vuttattā.Sīmāsaṅkhyameva gacchatīti avippavāsasīmāsaṅkhaṃ gacchati.Ekampi kulaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ vāti abhinavakatagehesu sabbapaṭhamaṃ ekampi kulaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ atthi.Agataṃ vāti porāṇakagāme aññesu gehāni chaḍḍetvā gatesu ekampi kulaṃ agataṃ atthi.

144. Assā: To the order of bhikkhunīs. Dvepi sīmāyo: Both boundaries, the avippavāsasīma and the samānasaṃvāsakasīma, which were mentioned earlier. Na kammavācaṃ vaggaṃ karontī: They do not break the kammavācā; the idea is that they do not ruin the action. Ettha: In "excluding the village and the vicinity of the village." Gāmañca gāmūpacārañca na ottharatī: Because it was said, "excluding the village and the vicinity of the village." Sīmāsaṅkhyameva gacchatī: It goes to the number of the avippavāsasīma. Ekampi kulaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ vā: Even if one family has entered the newly built houses first of all. Agataṃ vā: Or, in an old village, even if one family has not come, having abandoned the other houses and gone.

Avippavāsasīmā na samūhantabbāti mahāsīmaṃ sandhāya vadati.Nirāsaṅkaṭṭhānesu ṭhatvāti cetiyaṅgaṇādīnaṃ khaṇḍasīmāya anokāsattā vuttaṃ. Khaṇḍasīmañhi bandhantā tādisaṃ ṭhānaṃ pahāya aññasmiṃ vivitte okāse bandhanti.Appeva nāma samūhanituṃ sakkhissantīti avippavāsasīmaṃyeva samūhanituṃ sakkhissanti, na khaṇḍasīmaṃ.Paṭibandhituṃ pana na sakkhissantevāti khaṇḍasīmāya aññātattā na sakkhissanti.Na samūhanitabbāti khaṇḍasīmaṃ ajānantehi na samūhanitabbā. Uposathassa visuṃ gahitattā avasesakammavasena samānasaṃvāsatā veditabbā.

Avippavāsasīmā na samūhantabbā: He speaks referring to the great boundary. Nirāsaṅkaṭṭhānesu ṭhatvā: It was said because there is no space for the khaṇḍasīma in the cetiyaṅgaṇa, etc. Indeed, those establishing the khaṇḍasīma establish it in another secluded place, leaving such a place. Appeva nāma samūhanituṃ sakkhissantī: They might be able to remove the avippavāsasīma, but not the khaṇḍasīma. Paṭibandhituṃ pana na sakkhissantevā: Because the khaṇḍasīma is unknown, they will not be able to hinder it. Na samūhanitabbā: It should not be removed by those who do not know the khaṇḍasīma. Because the uposatha is taken separately, common dwelling should be understood by way of the remaining actions.

Gāmasīmādikathāvaṇṇanā
The Talk on the Village Boundary, etc.

147.Aparicchinnāyāti baddhasīmāvasena akataparicchedāya.Yena kenaci khaṇitvā akatoti antamaso tiracchānenapi khaṇitvā akato.Tassa antohatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā ṭhito kammaṃ kopetīti iminā bahiparicchedato yattha katthaci ṭhito kammaṃ na kopetīti dīpeti. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃmātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) ‘‘paricchedabbhantare hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā ṭhitopi paricchedato bahi aññaṃ tattakaṃyeva paricchedaṃ anatikkamitvā ṭhitopi kammaṃ kopeti, idaṃ sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu sanniṭṭhāna’’nti, tattha ‘‘aññaṃ tattakaṃyeva paricchedaṃ anatikkamitvā ṭhitopi kammaṃ kopetī’’ti idaṃ neva pāḷiyaṃ, na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ upalabbhati. Yadi cetaṃ dvinnaṃ saṅghānaṃ visuṃ uposathādikammakaraṇādhikāre vuttattā udakukkhepato bahi aññaṃ udakukkhepaṃ anatikkamitvā uposathādikaraṇatthaṃ ṭhito saṅgho sīmāsambhedasambhavato kammaṃ kopetīti iminā adhippāyena vuttaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati yujjeyya. Tenevamātikāṭṭhakathāya līnatthappakāsaniyaṃvuttaṃ ‘‘aññaṃ tattakaṃyeva paricchedanti dutiyaṃ udakukkhepaṃ anatikkantopi kopeti. Kasmā? Attano udakukkhepasīmāya paresaṃ udakukkhepasīmāya ajjhotthaṭattā sīmāsambhedo hoti, tasmā kopetī’’ti. ‘‘Idaṃ sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu sanniṭṭhāna’’nti ca iminā adhippāyena vuttanti gahetabbaṃ sabbāsupi aṭṭhakathāsu sīmāsambhedassa anicchitattā. Teneva hi ‘‘attano ca aññesañca udakukkhepaparicchedassa antarā añño udakukkhepo sīmantarikatthāya ṭhapetabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Aññe panettha aññathāpi papañcenti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.

147. Aparicchinnāya: (it means) not demarcated due to the setting of a boundary. Yena kenaci khaṇitvā akato: (it means) not made by digging by anyone, even by an animal. Tassa antohatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā ṭhito kammaṃ kopeti: By this, it indicates that standing anywhere outside the boundary does not invalidate the act. However, what is said in the Mātikā Aṭṭhakathā (Kaṅkhā. Aṭṭha. Nidānavaṇṇanā), "Even if one stands leaving the hatthapāsa within the boundary, or standing outside the boundary not exceeding another similar boundary, invalidates the act; this is the conclusion in all commentaries," regarding "standing outside the boundary not exceeding another similar boundary," this is not found in either the Pali or the commentary. If this were said with the intention that, because it is stated regarding the authority to perform separate Uposatha, etc., for two Sanghas, a Sangha standing outside an udakukkhepa (water-casting boundary), not exceeding another udakukkhepa, for the purpose of performing Uposatha, etc., invalidates the act due to the possibility of boundary confusion, then it would be reasonable. Therefore, in the Mātikā Aṭṭhakathāya Līnatthappakāsaniyaṃ it is said, "Not exceeding another similar boundary means even not exceeding a second udakukkhepa, invalidates. Why? Because by overlapping one's own udakukkhepa boundary with another's udakukkhepa boundary, there is boundary confusion; therefore, it invalidates." And "This is the conclusion in all commentaries" should be understood as said with this intention, since boundary confusion is not desired in any of the commentaries. Therefore, it is said, "Between one's own and others' udakukkhepa boundary, another udakukkhepa should be placed for the purpose of boundary separation." Others here explain it differently, but that should not be accepted.

Sabbattha saṅgho nisīdatīti hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā nisīdati.Udakukkhepasīmākammaṃ natthīti yasmā sabbopi nadīpadeso bhikkhūhi ajjhotthaṭo, tasmā samantato nadiyā abhāvā udakukkhepe payojanaṃ natthi. Udakukkhepappamāṇā sīmantarikā suviññeyyatarā hoti, sīmāsambhedasaṅkā na ca siyāti sāmīcidassanatthaṃ‘‘añño udakukkhepo sīmantarikatthāya ṭhapetabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yattakena pana sīmāsambhedo na hoti, tattakaṃ ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Tenevāhu porāṇā ‘‘yattakena sīmāsaṅkaro na hoti, tattakampi ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti.Ūnakaṃ pana na vaṭṭatīti idampi udakukkhepasīmāya parisavasena vaḍḍhanato sīmāsambhedasaṅkā siyāti taṃnivāraṇatthameva vuttaṃ.

Sabbattha saṅgho nisīdatī: (it means) the Sangha sits without leaving the hatthapāsa. Udakukkhepasīmākammaṃ natthī: (it means) since the entire area of the river is overlapped by the bhikkhus, therefore, due to the absence of the river all around, there is no need for udakukkhepa. The boundary interval of the udakukkhepa is more easily known, and there would be no fear of boundary confusion, to show this suitability, it is said, "Añño udakukkhepo sīmantarikatthāya ṭhapetabbo" (another udakukkhepa should be placed for the purpose of boundary separation). However, it is indeed appropriate to place as much as there is no boundary confusion. Therefore, the ancients said, "It is appropriate to place even as much as there is no boundary confusion." Ūnakaṃ pana na vaṭṭatī: (it means) this too is said only to prevent the possibility of boundary confusion, because by increasing the udakukkhepa boundary's surrounding area, there might be fear of boundary confusion.

Gacchantiyāpana nāvāya kātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti ettha udakukkhepamanatikkamitvā parivattamānāya kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.Sīmaṃ vā sodhetvāti etthasīmasodhanaṃnāma gāmasīmādīsu ṭhitānaṃ hatthapāsānayanādi.‘‘Nadiṃ vināsetvā taḷākaṃ karontī’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāveti‘‘heṭṭhā pāḷi baddhā’’ti, heṭṭhānadiṃ āvaritvā pāḷi baddhāti attho.Chaḍḍitamodakanti taḷākarakkhaṇatthaṃ ekamantena chaḍḍitamudakaṃ.Deve avassanteti dubbuṭṭhikāle vassānepi deve avassante.Uppatitvāti uttaritvā.Gāmanigamasīmaṃ ottharitvā pavattatīti vuttappakāre vassakāle cattāro māse abbocchinnā pavattati.Vihārasīmanti baddhasīmaṃ sandhāya vadati.

Gacchantiyā pana nāvāya kātuṃ na vaṭṭatī: (it means) here, it should be understood that it is appropriate to do it while revolving without exceeding the udakukkhepa. Sīmaṃ vā sodhetvā: (it means) here, sīmasodhanaṃ (boundary cleansing) means removing the hatthapāsa, etc., of those standing in the village boundary, etc. "Nadiṃ vināsetvā taḷākaṃ karontī": the meaning is clarified by what was said, "heṭṭhā pāḷi baddhā": (it means) having blocked the lower river, a dam is built. Chaḍḍitamodaka: (means) water discarded to one side for the purpose of protecting the pond. Deve avassante: (means) in times of drought, even when the deva (rain) is not descending. Uppatitvā: (means) having risen up. Gāmanigamasīmaṃ ottharitvā pavattatī: (it means) it flows uninterrupted for four months during the rainy season in the manner described. Vihārasīma: (refers to) a boundary that has been established.

Agamanapatheti yattha tadaheva gantvā paccāgantuṃ na sakkā hoti, tādise padese araññasīmāsaṅkhameva gacchatīti sattabbhantarasīmaṃ sandhāya vadati.Tesanti macchabandhānaṃ.Gamanapariyantassa oratoti gamanapariyantassa orimabhāge dīpakaṃ pabbatañca sandhāya vuttaṃ, na samuddappadesaṃ.

Agamanapathe: (it means) in a place where it is not possible to go and return on the same day, in such a place, it goes only to the forest boundary, referring to a boundary of seven abbhantara (inner divisions). Tesa: (means) of the fishermen. Gamanapariyantassa orato: (it means) referring to the island and the mountain on the near side of the destination, not the sea area.

148.Saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapāti iminā aññamaññassa āsannataṃ dīpeti.Baddhā hotīti pacchimadisābhāge sīmaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Tassā padesanti yattha ṭhatvā bhikkhūhi kammaṃ kātuṃ sakkā hoti, tādisaṃ padesaṃ. Yattha pana ṭhitehi kammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā hoti, tādisaṃ padesaṃ antokaritvā bandhantā sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindanti nāma.Dvinnaṃ sīmānaṃ nimittaṃ hotīti nimittassa sīmato bāhirattā sīmāsambhedo na hotīti vuttaṃ.Sīmāsaṅkaraṃ karotīti vaḍḍhitvā sīmappadesaṃ paviṭṭhe dvinnaṃ sīmānaṃ gataṭṭhānassa duviññeyyattā vuttaṃ, na pana tattha kammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ. Na hi sīmā tattakena asīmā hoti, dve pana sīmā pacchā vaḍḍhitena rukkhena ajjhotthaṭattā ekābaddhā honti, tasmā ekattha ṭhatvā kammaṃ karontehi itaraṃ sodhetvā kātabbaṃ.

148. Saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapā: (it means) by this, it indicates the closeness to each other. Baddhā hotī: (it means) referring to the boundary in the western direction. Tassā padesaṃ: (it means) such a place where it is possible for the bhikkhus to perform the act. However, while enclosing such a place where it is not possible to perform the act, they are said to confuse the boundary with the boundary. Dvinnaṃ sīmānaṃ nimittaṃ hotī: (it means) since the marker is outside the boundary, it is said that there is no boundary confusion. Sīmāsaṅkaraṃ karotī: (it means) it is said because when it has grown and entered the boundary area, the location of the boundary is difficult to know, not to show that it is not appropriate to perform the act there. Indeed, the boundary does not become non-boundary by that much, but the two boundaries become one because they are overlapped by the tree that has grown later; therefore, those performing the act in one place should cleanse the other and do it.

Gāmasīmādikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of Village Boundary, etc., is Finished.

Uposathabhedādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Uposatha Division, etc.

149.Adhammena vaggaṃ uposathakammanti ettha yattha cattāro vasanti, tattha pātimokkhuddeso anuññāto. Yattha dve vā tayo vā vasanti, tattha pārisuddhiuposatho. Idha pana tathā akatvā catunnaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne pārisuddhiuposathassa katattā tiṇṇaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne ca pātimokkhassa uddiṭṭhattā ‘‘adhammenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā sabbeva na sannipatiṃsu, chandapārisuddhi ca saṅghamajjhaṃyeva āgacchati, na gaṇamajjhaṃ, tasmā ‘‘vagga’’nti vuttaṃ.

149. Adhammena vaggaṃ uposathakammaṃ: (it means) here, where four reside, the recital of the Pātimokkha is allowed. Where two or three reside, there is the Pārisuddhi Uposatha. Here, however, because the Pārisuddhi Uposatha is done in a place where four reside without doing it that way, and the Pātimokkha is recited in a place where three reside, it is said "adhammena" (unlawfully). Since all did not assemble, and the chanda (proxy) and Pārisuddhi (declaration of purity) come only to the midst of the Sangha, not to the midst of the group, therefore it is said "vaggaṃ" (separately).

Pātimokkhuddesakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Pātimokkha Recital

150.Evametaṃ dhārayāmīti ‘‘sutā kho panāyasmantehī’’ti ettha ‘‘evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidānaṃ, sutā kho panāyasmantehi cattāro pārājikā dhammā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tenevamātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) ‘‘tatthāyasmante pucchāmi kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi…pe… tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti vatvā ‘uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidāna’ntiādinā nayena avasese sutena sāvite uddiṭṭho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.Sutenāti sutapadena.Savarabhayanti vanacarakabhayaṃ. Tenāha‘‘aṭavimanussabhaya’’nti. ‘‘Avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabba’’nti vacanato nidānuddese aniṭṭhite sutena sāvetabbaṃ nāma natthīti āha‘‘dutiyādīsu uddesesū’’ti. Uddiṭṭhauddesāpekkhañhi avasesaggahaṇaṃ, tasmā nidāne uddiṭṭhe pārājikuddesādīsu yasmiṃ vippakate antarāyo uppajjati, tena saddhiṃ avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabbaṃ.

150. Evametaṃ dhārayāmī: (it means) here, in "sutā kho panāyasmantehī" (have you, venerable ones, heard), after saying "evametaṃ dhārayāmī" (thus I remember this), it should be said, "uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidānaṃ, sutā kho panāyasmantehi cattāro pārājikā dhammā" (the preamble has been recited, have you, venerable ones, heard the four pārājika rules). Therefore, in the Mātikā Aṭṭhakathā (Kaṅkhā. Aṭṭha. Nidānavaṇṇanā) it is said, "There I ask the venerable ones, are you purified? I ask a second time... therefore, you are silent, having said 'evametaṃ dhārayāmī,' in the manner beginning with 'uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidāna,' it is recited with the rest of what has been heard, it is recited." Sutenā: (means) by the word "suta" (heard). Savarabhaya: (means) fear of the forest ranger. Therefore, he said "aṭavimanussabhaya" (fear of forest and humans). Because it is said "avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabbaṃ" (the remainder should be announced by what has been heard), there is nothing to be announced by what has been heard when the nidānuddesa (preamble recital) is not finished, thus he says "dutiyādīsu uddesesū" (in the second and other recitals). Indeed, the ग्रहण (grahaṇa - taking) of the remainder is in relation to the uddiṭṭha (recited) uddesa (section); therefore, when the nidāna (preamble) has been recited, if an interruption arises in the pārājikuddesa, etc., the remainder should be announced by what has been heard, along with that.

Tīhipividhīhīti osāraṇakathanasarabhaññehi. Ettha ca atthaṃ bhaṇitukāmatāya suttassa osāraṇāosāraṇaṃnāma. Tasseva atthappakāsanākathanaṃnāma. Suttassa tadatthassa vā sarena bhaṇanaṃsarabhaññaṃnāma.Sajjhāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvāti ‘‘sajjhāyaṃ karomī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā.Osāretvā pana kathentenāti paṭhamaṃ ussāretvā pacchā atthaṃ kathentena.Manussānaṃ pana ‘‘bhaṇāhī’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti ettha uccatare nisinnenapi manussānaṃ bhaṇāhīti visesetvāyeva vattuṃ vaṭṭati, avisesetvā pana na vaṭṭati.Sajjhāyaṃ karontenāti yattha katthaci nisīditvā sajjhāyaṃ karontena.Theroti yo koci attanā vuḍḍhataro.Ekaṃ āpucchitvāti ekaṃ vuḍḍhataraṃ āpucchitvā.Aparo āgacchatīti aparo tatopi vuḍḍhataro āgacchati.

Tīhipi vidhīhī: (means) by the osāraṇakathana and sarabhañña. Here, osāraṇaṃ (means) the osāraṇā of the sutta (discourse) due to the desire to speak the meaning. Kathanaṃ (means) the explanation of that same meaning. Sarabhaññaṃ (means) reciting the sutta or its meaning with a tone. Sajjhāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā: (means) having generated the thought "I will do sajjhāya" (recitation). Osāretvā pana kathentena: (means) by one who first raises it and then speaks the meaning. Manussānaṃ pana "bhaṇāhī"ti vattuṃ vaṭṭatī: (it means) here, even one sitting higher up should indeed say "bhaṇāhī" (speak) specifically to the humans, but should not say it non-specifically. Sajjhāyaṃ karontena: (means) by one doing sajjhāya while sitting anywhere. Thero: (means) anyone older than oneself. Ekaṃ āpucchitvā: (means) having asked one who is older. Aparo āgacchatī: (means) another who is even older than that comes.

Pātimokkhuddesakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Pātimokkha Recital is Finished.

Pātimokkhuddesakaajjhesanādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Requesting of the Pātimokkha Reciter, etc.

155.Codanāvatthunāma ekaṃ nagaraṃ.Saṅghauposathādibhedena navavidhanti saṅghe uposatho gaṇe uposatho puggale uposathoti evaṃ kārakavasena tayo, suttuddeso pārisuddhiuposatho adhiṭṭhānuposathoti evaṃ kattabbākāravasena tayo, cātuddasiko pannarasiko sāmaggīuposathoti evaṃ divasavasena tayoti navavidhaṃ.Catubbidhaṃ uposathakammanti adhammena vaggaṃ uposathakammaṃ, adhammena samaggaṃ uposathakammaṃ, dhammena vaggaṃ uposathakammaṃ, dhammena samaggaṃ uposathakammanti evaṃ catubbidhampi uposathakammaṃ.Duvidhaṃ pātimokkhanti bhikkhupātimokkhaṃ bhikkhunīpātimokkhanti duvidhaṃ pātimokkhaṃ.Navavidhaṃ pātimokkhuddesanti bhikkhūnaṃ pañca uddesā, bhikkhunīnaṃ ṭhapetvā aniyatuddesaṃ avasesā cattāroti navavidhaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ.

155. Codanāvatthu: (means) one town. Saṅghauposathādibhedena navavidhaṃ: (means) Uposatha in the Sangha, Uposatha in the group, Uposatha in the individual; thus, three by way of the doer, recital of the Sutta, Pārisuddhi Uposatha, Adhiṭṭhāna Uposatha; thus, three by way of what should be done, cātuddasiko (fourteenth), pannarasiko (fifteenth), sāmaggīuposatha (harmony Uposatha); thus, nine kinds by way of the day. Catubbidhaṃ uposathakammaṃ: (means) Uposatha done unlawfully and separately, Uposatha done unlawfully and together, Uposatha done lawfully and separately, Uposatha done lawfully and together; thus, four kinds of Uposatha. Duvidhaṃ pātimokkhaṃ: (means) Pātimokkha for bhikkhus, Pātimokkha for bhikkhunīs; thus, two kinds of Pātimokkha. Navavidhaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ: (means) five recitals for bhikkhus, and for bhikkhunīs, excluding the aniyatuddesa (the uncertain offences recital), the remaining four; thus, nine kinds of Pātimokkha recital.

Pakkhagaṇanādiuggahaṇānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Counting Fortnights, etc., Acceptance and Permission

158-161.Samannāharathāti sallakkhetha.Pariyesitabbānīti bhikkhācārena pariyesitabbāni.

158-161. Samannāharathā: (means) consider. Pariyesitabbānī: (means) should be sought by means of alms-round.

Disaṃgamikādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Disāṃgamikā (going to a distant place), etc.

163.Utuvasseyevāti hemantagimhesuyeva.

163. Utuvasseyevā: (means) only in the winter and summer.

Pārisuddhidānakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Giving Pārisuddhi (Declaration of Purity)

164.Yena kenaci aṅgapaccaṅgena viññāpetīti manasā cintetvā hatthappayogādinā yena kenaci viññāpeti.Saṅgho nappahotīti dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ antarā hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhātuṃ nappahoti.Itarā pana biḷālasaṅkhalikapārisuddhi nāmāti ettha keci vadanti ‘‘biḷālasaṅkhalikā baddhāva hoti antogehe eva sampayojanattā, yathā sā na katthaci gacchati, tathā sāpi na gacchatīti adhippāyo. Itarathā visesanaṃ niratthakaṃ hotī’’ti. Apare pana ‘‘yathā bahūhi manussehi ekassa biḷālassa attano attano saṅkhalikā gīvāya ābaddhā biḷāle gacchante gacchanti ābaddhattā, na aññasmiṃ biḷāle gacchante gacchanti anābaddhattā, evamevassa bhikkhussa bahūhi saṅkhalikasadisā chandapārisuddhi dinnā, sā tasmiṃ bhikkhusmiṃ gacchante gacchati tasmiṃ saṅkhalikā viya ābaddhattā, na aññasmiṃ anābaddhattā’’ti vadanti. Sabbampetaṃ na sārato paccetabbaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha sāro – yathā saṅkhalikāya paṭhamavalayaṃ dutiyaṃyeva valayaṃ pāpuṇāti, na tatiyaṃ, evamayampi pārisuddhidāyakena yassa dinnā, tato aññattha na gacchatīti saṅkhalikasadisattā ‘‘biḷālasaṅkhalikā’’ti vuttā. Biḷālasaṅkhalikagahaṇañcettha yāsaṃ kāsañci saṅkhalikānaṃ upalakkhaṇamattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

164. Yena kenaci aṅgapaccaṅgena viññāpetī: (means) makes it known by any bodily gesture, having thought in the mind and by using the hand, etc. Saṅgho nappahotī: (means) the Sangha is not able to stand in order, without leaving the hatthapāsa between every two. Itarā pana biḷālasaṅkhalikapārisuddhi nāmā: (means) here, some say, "The biḷālasaṅkhalikā (cat chain) is always bound, because it is only useful inside the house, just as it does not go anywhere, so too is the intention that it does not go. Otherwise, the specification would be meaningless." Others say, "Just as with a cat, many people have their own chain tied to the cat's neck, and as the cat goes, they go because they are tied, but they do not go as another cat goes because they are not tied, so too to this bhikkhu, many chandapārisuddhi resembling chains are given; as that bhikkhu goes, it goes in that bhikkhu because it is tied like a chain, but not in another because it is not tied." All of this should not be accepted as essential. Here, this is the essence: just as the first link of a chain reaches only the second link, not the third, so too this Pārisuddhi does not go anywhere else from where it was given by the giver of Pārisuddhi; therefore, because it is similar to a chain, it is said "biḷālasaṅkhalikā". And the taking of biḷālasaṅkhalikā here should be seen as merely indicative of some chains."

Chandadānakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Giving Chanda (Proxy)

165.‘‘Santi saṅghassa karaṇīyānī’’ti vattabbe vacanavipallāsena ‘‘karaṇīya’’nti vuttaṃ. Tassa sammutidānakiccaṃ natthi. ‘‘Hatthapāsaṃ ānetabboyevā’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.

165. "Santi saṅghassa karaṇīyānī" (there are things to be done by the Sangha), the word is said with a reversal, "karaṇīya" (to be done). There is no need for his giving of consent. "Hatthapāsaṃ ānetabboyevā" (the hatthapāsa should indeed be brought) is said in the Gaṇṭhipadasu (textual commentary).

Saṅghuposathādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Saṅghuposatha, etc.

168.Saṅghasannipātato paṭhamaṃ kātabbaṃpubbakaraṇanti vuttaṃ, pubbakaraṇato pacchā kātabbampi uposathakammato paṭhamaṃ kātabbattāpubbakiccanti vuttaṃ. Ubhayampi cetaṃ uposathakammato paṭhamaṃ kattabbattā katthacipubbakiccamicceva voharīyati ‘‘kiṃ saṅghassa pubbakicca’’ntiādīsu viya.

168. Pubbakaraṇa (preliminary act) is said to be what should be done before the assembly of the Sangha; and pubbakicca (preliminary duty) is said to be what should be done after the preliminary act but before the Uposatha, because it should be done before the Uposatha. Both of these, because they should be done before the Uposatha, are sometimes referred to only as pubbakicca, as in "kiṃ saṅghassa pubbakicca" (what is the preliminary duty of the Sangha), etc.

Uposathoti tīsu uposathadivasesu aññataradivaso. Tasmiñhi sati idaṃ saṅghassa uposathakammaṃ pattakallaṃ nāma hoti, nāsati. Yathāha ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, anuposathe uposatho kātabbo’’ti (mahāva. 183).Yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattāti yattakā bhikkhū tassa uposathakammassa pattā yuttā anurūpā sabbantimena paricchedena cattāro bhikkhū pakatattā, te ca kho hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā ekasīmāyaṃ ṭhitā.Sabhāgāpattiyo ca na vijjantīti ettha yaṃ sabbo saṅgho vikālabhojanādinā sabhāgavatthunā lahukāpattiṃ āpajjati, evarūpā‘‘vatthusabhāgā’’ti vuccanti. Etāsu hi avijjamānāsu visabhāgāsu vijjamānāsupipattakallaṃhotiyeva.

Uposatho: (means) one of the three Uposatha days. Indeed, when that is present, this Uposatha act of the Sangha is said to be pattakallaṃ (fit), not when it is absent. As he said, "na ca, bhikkhave, anuposathe uposatho kātabbo" (and, monks, the Uposatha should not be done on a non-Uposatha day) (mahāva. 183). Yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattā: (means) however many bhikkhus are fit, suitable, and appropriate for that Uposatha act, with the ultimate limit being four bhikkhus, and they are standing within one boundary without leaving the hatthapāsa. Sabhāgāpattiyo ca na vijjantī: (means) here, the offence that the entire Sangha incurs through the same thing, such as eating at the wrong time, is called "vatthusabhāgā". Indeed, when these are absent, even when visabhāgā (dissimilar) offences are present, it is pattakallaṃ (fit).

Vajjanīyā ca puggalā tasmiṃ na hontīti ‘‘na, bhikkhave, sagahaṭṭhāya parisāyā’’ti (mahāva. 154) vacanato gahaṭṭho, ‘‘na, bhikkhave, bhikkhuniyā nisinnaparisāya pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabba’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 183) nayena vuttā bhikkhunī sikkhamānā sāmaṇero sāmaṇerī sikkhāpaccakkhātako antimavatthuajjhāpannako āpattiyā adassane ukkhittako āpattiyā appaṭikamme ukkhittako pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittako paṇḍako theyyasaṃvāsako titthiyapakkantako tiracchānagato mātughātako pitughātako arahantaghātako bhikkhunīdūsako saṅghabhedako lohituppādako ubhatobyañjanakoti ime vīsati cāti ekavīsati puggalā vajjanīyā nāma, te hatthapāsato bahikaraṇavasena vajjetabbā. Etesu hi tividhe ukkhittake sati uposathaṃ karonto saṅgho pācittiyaṃ āpajjati, sesesu dukkaṭaṃ. Ettha catiracchānagatoti yassa upasampadā paṭikkhittā, sova adhippeto, titthiyā gahaṭṭheneva saṅgahitā. Etepi hi vajjanīyā. Evaṃ pattakallaṃ imehi catūhi aṅgehi saṅgahitanti veditabbaṃ.

"Vajjanīyā ca puggalā tasmiṃ na hontī" means, according to the statement "Na, bhikkhave, sagahaṭṭhāya parisāyā" (mahāva. 154), a householder; and according to the method stated in "Na, bhikkhave, bhikkhuniyā nisinnaparisāya pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabba," (mahāva. 183) a bhikkhunī, a sikkhamānā, a sāmaṇera, a sāmaṇerī, one who has renounced the training (sikkhāpaccakkhātako), one who has fallen into the final matter (antimavatthuajjhāpannako), one expelled for not seeing an offense (āpattiyā adassane ukkhittako), one expelled for not atoning for an offense (āpattiyā appaṭikamme ukkhittako), one expelled for not relinquishing a wicked view (pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittako), a paṇḍaka, a theyyasaṃvāsako, one who has defected to another sect (titthiyapakkantako), a non-human being (tiracchānagato), a matricide (mātughātako), a patricide (pitughātako), one who has killed an arahant (arahantaghātako), one who has violated a bhikkhunī (bhikkhunīdūsako), one who has caused a schism in the Sangha (saṅghabhedako), one who has wounded a Buddha (lohituppādako), and one of doubtful gender (ubhatobyañjanakoti)—these twenty-one individuals are called "vajjanīyā," and they should be excluded by keeping them outside the hand's reach. If the Sangha performs the Uposatha with these three types of expelled persons present, it incurs a pācittiya offense; with the others, a dukkaṭa. Here, tiracchānagato refers only to one whose ordination is prohibited, and titthiyā are included with the householders. These too are to be excluded. Thus, it should be understood that the Uposatha is fit when it is complete with these four factors.

Ajja me uposatho pannarasotipītipi-saddena pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayeneva ‘‘ajja me uposatho’’tipi vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) pana ‘‘ajja me uposatho cātuddasoti vā pannarasoti vā vatvā adhiṭṭhāmīti vattabba’’nti vuttaṃ.

"Ajja me uposatho pannarasotipī": the particle pi indicates that, according to the method that has come in the Pali, it is also suitable to say "ajja me uposatho". However, in the Mātikāṭṭhakathā (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā), it is said that "one should say, 'Ajja me uposatho cātuddasoti vā pannarasoti vā vatvā adhiṭṭhāmīti' and then make the determination."

Saṅghuposathādikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Sangha Uposatha etc. is finished.

Āpattipaṭikammavidhikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Method of Atoning for Offenses

169.Nanu ca ‘‘na, bhikkhave, sāpattikena uposatho kātabbo, yo kareyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti evaṃ sāpattikassa uposathakaraṇe visuṃ paññattā āpatti na dissati, tasmā bhagavatā paññattaṃ ‘‘na sāpattikena uposatho kātabbo’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttanti āha‘‘yassa siyā āpatti…pe… paññattaṃ hotīti veditabba’’nti. Kiñcāpi visuṃ paññattā āpatti na dissati, atha kho ‘‘yassa siyā āpatti, so āvikareyyā’’tiādiṃ vadantena atthato paññattāyevāti adhippāyo.

169.Now, since a separate offense is not seen to be prescribed for one who is sāpattika performing the Uposatha, as in "Na, bhikkhave, sāpattikena uposatho kātabbo, yo kareyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā," why was this stated by the Blessed One: "Na sāpattikena uposatho kātabbo"? He says, "Yassa siyā āpatti…pe… paññattaṃ hotīti veditabba". Although a separate offense is not seen to be prescribed, the intention is that it is indeed prescribed in meaning by stating "Yassa siyā āpatti, so āvikareyyā."

Pārisuddhidānapaññāpanena cāti imināva ‘‘sāpattikena pārisuddhipi na dātabbā’’ti dīpitaṃ hoti. Na hi sāpattiko samāno ‘‘pārisuddhiṃ dammi, pārisuddhiṃ me hara, pārisuddhiṃ me ārocehī’’ti vattumarahati. Tasmā pārisuddhiṃ dentena paṭhamaṃ santī āpatti desetabbā ‘‘ahaṃ, āvuso, itthannāmāya āpattiyā vematiko, yadā nibbematiko bhavissāmi, tadā taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmī’’ti vatvā uposatho kātabbo. ‘‘Pātimokkhaṃ sotabba’’nti vacanato yāva nibbematiko na hoti, tāva sabhāgāpattiṃ paṭiggahetuṃ na labhati, aññesañca kammānaṃ parisuddho nāma hoti. ‘‘Puna nibbematiko hutvā desetabbaṃ na cā’’ti neva pāḷiyaṃ na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ atthi, desite pana doso natthi. ‘‘Ito vuṭṭhahitvā paṭikarissāmīti etthāpi eseva nayo’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Yathā sabbo saṅgho sabhāgāpattiṃ āpajjitvā ‘‘suṇātu me bhante, saṅgho…pe… paṭikarissatī’’ti ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā uposathaṃ kātuṃ labhati, evaṃ tīhi ‘‘suṇantu me āyasmantā, ime bhikkhū sabhāgaṃ āpattiṃ āpannā. Yadā aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ suddhaṃ anāpattikaṃ passissanti, tadā tassa santike taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissantī’’ti gaṇañattiṃ ṭhapetvā, dvīhi aññamaññaṃ ārocetvā uposathaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Ekenapi ‘‘parisuddhaṃ labhitvā paṭikarissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti ca vadanti.

"Pārisuddhidānapaññāpanena ca": By this, it is indicated that "pārisuddhi should also not be given by one who is sāpattika." Indeed, one who is sāpattika is not fit to say, "I give pārisuddhiṃ, receive my pārisuddhiṃ, announce my pārisuddhiṃ." Therefore, one giving pārisuddhiṃ should first confess any offenses, saying, "Ahaṃ, āvuso, itthannāmāya āpattiyā vematiko, yadā nibbematiko bhavissāmi, tadā taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmī," and then the Uposatha should be performed. According to the statement "Pātimokkhaṃ sotabba," one does not obtain permission to receive a sabhāga offense until one is free from doubt, and one is considered pure for other actions. "Puna nibbematiko hutvā desetabbaṃ na cā" is found neither in the Pali nor in the commentary, but there is no fault in confessing it. It is said in the Gaṇṭhipada that "Ito vuṭṭhahitvā paṭikarissāmīti etthāpi eseva nayo." Just as the entire Sangha, having committed a sabhāga offense, can make a motion (ñatti) saying, "Suṇātu me bhante, saṅgho…pe… paṭikarissati," and perform the Uposatha, so too, with three monks, after making a group motion (gaṇañatti) saying, "Suṇantu me āyasmantā, ime bhikkhū sabhāgaṃ āpattiṃ āpannā. Yadā aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ suddhaṃ anāpattikaṃ passissanti, tadā tassa santike taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissantī," and with two monks, after announcing to each other, it is suitable to perform the Uposatha. Some say that even with one monk, it is suitable to perform it after making a resolution (ābhoga) saying, "Parisuddhaṃ labhitvā paṭikarissāmī."

Āpattipaṭikammavidhikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Method of Atoning for Offenses is finished.

Liṅgādidassanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on Seeing the Signs, etc.

179.Ācārasaṇṭhānanti ācārasaṇṭhiti. Ākarīyati pakāsīyati etenātiākāro. Līnaṃ gamayati bodhetītiliṅgaṃ. Nimiyanti paricchijja ñāyanti etenātinimittaṃ. Uddisīyanti apadisīyanti etenātiuddeso. ‘‘Amhākaṃ ida’’nti aññātaṃ aviditantiaññātakaṃ. Tañca atthato parasantakaṃyevāti āha‘‘aññesaṃ santaka’’nti.

179.Ācārasaṇṭhāna means ācārasaṇṭhiti. Ākāro means that by which it is done, made clear. Liṅgaṃ means that which causes one to understand, makes known. Nimittaṃ means that by which it is measured, distinguished. Uddeso means that by which it is indicated, specified. Aññātakaṃ means unknown, unrecognised, "this is ours." And that is, in reality, belonging to another, as he says, "aññesaṃ santaka".

180.Nānāsaṃvāsakabhāvanti laddhinānāsaṃvāsakabhāvaṃ. Tassa abhibhavo nāma tesaṃ laddhivissajjāpananti āha‘‘taṃ diṭṭhiṃ na nissajjāpentīti attho’’ti.

180.Nānāsaṃvāsakabhāva means the state of having different associations due to different views. Overcoming that means causing them to abandon their views, as he says, "taṃ diṭṭhiṃ na nissajjāpentīti attho".

Nagantabbagantabbavārakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on What Should and Should Not Be Gone To

181.Uposathādhiṭṭhānatthaṃ sīmāpi nadīpi na gantabbāti garukaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ vissajjetvā lahukassa akattabbattā vuttaṃ.Āraññakenāpi bhikkhunāti ekacārikena āraññakabhikkhunā, yattha vā saṅghapahonakā bhikkhū na santi, tādise araññe vasantena.Tattha uposathaṃ katvāva gantabbanti tassa vasanaṭṭhāne saṅghuposathassa appavattanato vuttaṃ.Uposathantarāyoti attano uposathantarāyo.

181.Uposathādhiṭṭhānatthaṃ sīmāpi nadīpi na gantabbā: Because it is improper to abandon the weighty recital of the Pātimokkha to do something light, it was said that it should not be done. Āraññakenāpi bhikkhunā: Even by a forest-dwelling bhikkhu who dwells alone, in such a forest where there are no bhikkhus sufficient for a Sangha, it was said. Tattha uposathaṃ katvāva gantabba: Because the Sangha Uposatha does not take place in his dwelling place, it was said. Uposathantarāyo: An obstacle to his own Uposatha.

Vajjanīyapuggalasandassanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on Showing the Persons to Be Avoided

183.Hatthapāsupagamanamevapamāṇanti bhikkhunīādayo ṭhitā vā hontu nisinnā vā, tesaṃ hatthapāsupagamanameva āpattiyā pamāṇanti adhippāyo, tasmā ekasīmāyampi hatthapāsaṃ jahāpetvā uposathaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva.

183.Hatthapāsupagamanameva pamāṇa: Whether the bhikkhunīs, etc., are standing or sitting, the meaning is that their being within the hand's reach is the measure for the offense; therefore, even within a single boundary, it is suitable to perform the Uposatha after making them leave the hand's reach. The rest here is self-explanatory.

Uposathakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Uposatha Khandhaka is finished.

3. Vassūpanāyikakkhandhakaṃ

3. Vassūpanāyikakkhandhakaṃ

Vassūpanāyikānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on Allowing the Undertaking of the Rains

184.Vassūpanāyikakkhandhakeidha-saddo nipātamattoti okāsaparidīpanassapi asambhavato atthantarassa abodhanato vuttaṃ.Aparajjugatāya assāti iminā asamānādhikaraṇavisayo bāhiratthasamāsoyanti dasseti.Aparajjūti āsāḷhīpuṇṇamito aparaṃ dinaṃ, pāṭipadanti attho.Assāti āsāḷhīpuṇṇamiyā.

184.In the Vassūpanāyikakkhandhaka, idha-saddo nipātamatto: Because there is no possibility of indicating a place, and because it does not make known another meaning, it was said. Aparajjugatāya assā: By this, he shows that it is a bahiratthasamāsa whose subject is not in apposition. Aparajjū means the day after the Āsāḷhī Full Moon, the first day of the waning moon. Assā means the Āsāḷhī Full Moon.

Vassāne cārikāpaṭikkhepādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on Rejecting Wandering During the Rains, etc.

185.Anapekkhagamanena vā aññattha aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpanena vā āpatti veditabbāti ettha anapekkhagamanena upacārātikkame āpatti veditabbā, sāpekkhagamanena aññattha aruṇuṭṭhāpanena āpatti veditabbā.

185.Anapekkhagamanena vā aññattha aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpanena vā āpatti veditabbā: Here, it should be understood that an offense occurs by going without leave when one exceeds the boundary, and an offense occurs by causing dawn to break elsewhere when one goes with leave.

Sattāhakaraṇīyānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on Allowing What Should Be Done Within a Week

187-189.Tīṇi parihīnānīti bhikkhunīnaṃ vaccakuṭiādīnaṃ paṭikkhittattā pahīnāni.Vāreyyanti āvāhavivāhamaṅgalaṃ.Suttantoti attano paguṇasuttanto.Na palujjatīti na vinassati na antaradhāyati.

187-189.Tīṇi parihīnānī: Because the toilets, etc., for bhikkhunīs were rejected, they are abandoned. Vāreyya: A marriage or auspicious ceremony. Suttanto: One's own mastered Sutta. Na palujjatī: It does not perish, does not disappear.

Pahiteyeva anujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on Allowing Sending a Messenger

199.Bhikkhugatikoti bhikkhunissitako. So pana yasmā bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ vasati, tasmā vuttaṃ‘‘bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ vasanakapuriso’’ti. Sattāhakaraṇīyena gantvā bahiddhā aruṇuṭṭhāpanaṃratticchedo. Animantitena gantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti ettha animantitattā sattāhakiccaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā gacchantassapi vassacchedo ceva dukkaṭañca hotīti veditabbaṃ. Yathāvuttañhi ratticchedakāraṇaṃ vinā tirovihāre vasitvā āgacchissāmīti gacchatopi vassacchedaṃ vadanti.Gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti sattāhakaraṇīyena gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Evaṃ gacchantena ca antoupacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhiteneva ‘‘antosattāhe āgacchissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā gantabbaṃ. Sace ābhogaṃ akatvā upacārasīmaṃ atikkamati, chinnavassova hotīti vadanti.Bhaṇḍakanti cīvaraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Pahiṇantīti cīvaradhovanādikammena pahiṇanti.Sampāpuṇituṃna sakkoti, vaṭṭatīti ettha ‘‘ajjeva āgamissāmī’’ti sāmantavihāraṃ gantvā puna āgacchantassa antarāmagge sace aruṇuggamanaṃ hoti, vassacchedopi na hoti, ratticchedadukkaṭañca natthīti vadanti.‘‘Ācariyaṃ passissāmī’’ti pana gantuṃ labhatīti ‘‘agilānampi ācariyaṃ upajjhāyaṃ vā passissāmī’’ti sattāhakaraṇīyena gantuṃ labhati.Sace pana naṃ ācariyo ‘‘ajja mā gacchā’’ti vadati, vaṭṭatīti evaṃ sattāhakaraṇīyena gataṃ antosattāheyeva puna āgacchantaṃ sace ācariyo upajjhāyo vā ‘‘ajja mā gacchā’’ti vadati, vaṭṭati, sattāhātikkamepi anāpattīti adhippāyo, vassacchedo pana hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ sattāhassa bahiddhā vītināmitattā.

199.Bhikkhugatiko: Dependent on bhikkhus. Since he dwells together with the bhikkhus, it was said, "bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ vasanakapuriso". Going outside the boundary and causing dawn to break when going on seven-day business is called ratticchedo. Animantitena gantuṃ na vaṭṭatī: Here, it should be understood that even for one who is going after undertaking the seven-day business without being invited, there is both a break in the rains residence and a dukkaṭa. Indeed, some say that there is a break in the rains residence even for one who goes intending to stay in a hidden residence and return, without the aforementioned cause for breaking the night. Gantuṃ vaṭṭatī: It is suitable to go on seven-day business. And when going in this way, one should make a resolution (ābhoga) saying, "Antosattāhe āgacchissāmi," while standing within the boundary of the monastery. Some say that if one crosses the boundary of the monastery without making a resolution, one's rains residence is broken. Bhaṇḍaka means possessions, said in reference to robes. Pahiṇantī: They send with the work of washing robes, etc. Sampāpuṇituṃ na sakkoti, vaṭṭatī: Here, some say that if one goes to a nearby monastery saying, "Ajjeva āgamissāmi," and then, on returning, dawn breaks on the way, there is neither a break in the rains residence nor a dukkaṭa for breaking the night. "Ācariyaṃ passissāmī'ti pana gantuṃ labhatī: One is allowed to go on seven-day business to see one's teacher or preceptor even if they are not ill. Sace pana naṃ ācariyo "ajja mā gacchā"ti vadati, vaṭṭatī: If the teacher or preceptor says to one who has gone on seven-day business and is returning within the seven days, "Do not go today," it is suitable, the meaning is that there is no offense even if the seven days are exceeded, but it should be seen that the rains residence is indeed broken because the seven days have been spent outside.

Antarāye anāpattivassacchedakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Instances Where There Is No Offense or Break in the Rains Residence Due to Obstacles

201.Sace dūraṃ gato hoti, sattāhavārena aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabboti iminā vassacchedakāraṇe sati sattāhakaraṇīyena gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.

201.Sace dūraṃ gato hoti, sattāhavārena aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabbo: By this, he indicates that it is suitable to go on seven-day business when there is a cause for breaking the rains residence.

Vajādīsu vassūpagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Undertaking the Rains in Dangerous Places, etc.

203.‘‘Idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vattabbanti satthassāvihārattā ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre’’ti avatvā ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti ettakameva vattabbaṃ.Satthe pana vassaṃ upagantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti kuṭikādīnaṃ abhāve ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti vacībhedaṃ katvā upagantuṃ na vaṭṭati, ālayakaraṇamatteneva vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.Vippakiratīti visuṃ visuṃ gacchati.Tīsu ṭhānesu natthi vassacchede āpattīti tehi saddhiṃ gacchantasseva natthi āpatti, tehi viyujjitvā gamane pana āpattiyeva, pavāretuñca na labhati.

203."Idha vassaṃ upemī"ti tikkhattuṃ vattabba: Because it is a monastery with a weapon, one should say only "Idha vassaṃ upemī" three times, without saying "Imasmiṃ vihāre." Satthe pana vassaṃ upagantuṃ na vaṭṭatī: It is not suitable to undertake the rains residence after making a vocal declaration "Idha vassaṃ upemī" due to the lack of huts, etc.; it is only suitable by the mere making of a dwelling. Vippakiratī: Goes separately, individually. Tīsu ṭhānesu natthi vassacchede āpattī: There is no offense only for one who goes with them, but if one goes separated from them, there is indeed an offense, and one cannot invite the Pavāraṇā.

Vassaṃ anupagantabbaṭṭhānakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Places Where the Rains Residence Should Not Be Undertaken

204.Seyyathāpipisācillikāti ettha pisācā evapisācillikā,pisācadārakātipi vadanti.Pavisanadvāraṃ yojetvāti sakavāṭabaddhameva yojetvā.Pañcannaṃ chadanānanti tiṇapaṇṇaiṭṭhakasilāsudhāsaṅkhātānaṃ pañcannaṃ chadanānaṃ. Idañca yebhuyyena vuttanti veditabbaṃ rukkhādīsu padaracchadanāyapi kuṭikāya vassūpagamanassa vuttattā.Na, bhikkhave, asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabbanti vacībhedaṃ katvā vassūpagamanaṃ sandhāyeva paṭikkhepo, na ālayakaraṇavasena upagamanaṃ sandhāyāti vadanti. Pāḷiyaṃ pana avisesena vuttattā aṭṭhakathāyañca dutiyapārājikasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.84) ‘‘vassaṃ upagacchantena hi nālakapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannenapi pañcannaṃ chadanānaṃ aññatarena channeyeva sadvārabandhe senāsane upagantabbaṃ. Tasmā vassakāle sace senāsanaṃ labhati, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce labhati, hatthakammaṃ pariyesitvāpi kātabbaṃ. Hatthakammaṃ alabhantena sāmampi kātabbaṃ, na tveva asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabba’’nti daḷhaṃ katvā vuttattā asenāsanikassa nāvādiṃ vinā aññattha ālayo na vaṭṭatīti amhākaṃ khanti. Nāvāsatthavajesuyeva hi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, nāvāya vassaṃ upagantu’’ntiādinā sati asati vā senāsane vassūpagamanassa visuṃ anuññātattā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabba’’nti ayaṃ paṭikkhepo tattha na labbhatīti asati senāsane ālayavasenapi nāvādīsu upagamanaṃ vuttaṃ.Ṭaṅkitamañconāma dīghe mañcapāde majjhe vijjhitvā aṭaniyo pavesetvā kato mañco. Tassa idaṃ upari idaṃ heṭṭhāti natthi, parivattetvā atthatopi tādisova hoti, taṃ susāne devaṭṭhāne ca ṭhapenti, catunnaṃ pāsāṇānaṃ upari pāsāṇaṃ attharitvā kataṃ gehampi ‘‘ṭaṅkitamañco’’ti vuccati.

204.Seyyathāpi pisācillikā: Here, pisācillikā means pisācā themselves; some also say pisācadārakā (goblin children). Pavisanadvāraṃ yojetvā: After closing off the entrance door itself. Pañcannaṃ chadanānaṃ: Of the five coverings, namely, grass, leaves, bricks, stone, and plaster. And this should be understood as stated generally, since the undertaking of the rains residence in a hut with a covering of tree branches, etc., is also stated. Na, bhikkhave, asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabba: They say that the rejection is intended for undertaking the rains residence after making a vocal declaration, not for undertaking it by way of making a dwelling. However, because it is stated in the Pali without distinction, and in the commentary in the explanation of the Second Pārājika (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.84) with emphasis that "one undertaking the rains residence should, even having set out on the black fortnight, undertake it in a dwelling covered with one of the five coverings with a door that can be closed. Therefore, if one obtains a dwelling during the rains, that is skillful. If one does not obtain it, one should make an effort to make one. If one does not obtain the opportunity to make one, one should make one oneself, but the rains residence should certainly not be undertaken without a dwelling," our opinion is that a dwelling elsewhere without a boat, etc., is not suitable for one without a dwelling. Indeed, because the undertaking of the rains residence in a boat, with or without a dwelling, has been specifically allowed in "Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, nāvāya vassaṃ upagantu," this rejection "Na, bhikkhave, asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabba" cannot be applied there, and so the undertaking in a boat, etc., by way of a dwelling is stated even in the absence of a dwelling. Ṭaṅkitamañco means a bed whose long legs have holes in the middle into which pegs are inserted. It does not have a top or bottom, it is the same even when turned over, and it is placed in a cemetery or shrine; a house made by placing a stone on top of four stones is also called a "ṭaṅkitamañco."

Vassaṃ anupagantabbaṭṭhānakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Places Where the Rains Residence Should Not Be Undertaken is finished.

Adhammikakatikakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Unjust Agreements

205.Tassā lakkhaṇaṃ mahāvibhaṅge vuttanti catutthapārājikasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘yo imamhā āvāsā paṭhamaṃ pakkamissati, taṃ mayaṃ arahāti jānissāmā’’ti (pārā. 228) ettha dassitaṃ adhammikakatikavattalakkhaṇaṃ sandhāya vadati, paratopi senāsanakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ adhammikaṃ katikavattaṃ āvi bhavissatiyeva.

205.Tassā lakkhaṇaṃ mahāvibhaṅge vutta: He is referring to the characteristic of an unjust agreement shown in the explanation of the Fourth Pārājika, "Yo imamhā āvāsā paṭhamaṃ pakkamissati, taṃ mayaṃ arahāti jānissāmā" (pārā. 228), and the unjust customary practice will indeed become clear later in the explanation of the Senāsanakkhandhaka.

Paṭissavadukkaṭāpattikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Dukkaṭa Offense for Promising

207.Yasmā nānāsīmāyaṃ dvīsu āvāsesu vassaṃ vasantassa dutiye ‘‘vasāmī’’ti citte uppanne paṭhamasenāsanaggāho paṭippassambhati, puna paṭhameyeva ‘‘vasāmī’’ti citte uppanne dutiyo paṭippassambhati, tasmā‘‘tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno purimikā ca na paññāyatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭissavassa visaṃvādanapaccayā hontampi dukkaṭaṃ satiyeva paṭissave hotīti āha‘‘tassa tassa paṭissave dukkaṭa’’nti. Tenevāha‘‘tañca kho…pe… pacchā visaṃvādanapaccayā’’ti.

207. Because, when dwelling in two residences within a single boundary, if the thought "I will dwell" arises in the second, the taking of the first dwelling ceases; and again, if the thought "I will dwell" arises in the first, the second ceases. Therefore, it is said, "Bhikkhus, that bhikkhu's former (residence) is not evident." He says, "For each promise, there is a dukkata," because even if there is a dukkata offense, it occurs only if the promise is broken. Therefore, he said, "And that...due to later deceit."

Akaraṇīyoti sattāhakaraṇīyena akaraṇīyo.Sakaraṇīyoti sattāhakaraṇīyeneva sakaraṇīyo. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘sattāhakaraṇīyena akaraṇīyo sakaraṇīyo’’ti ca kasmā na vuttanti? ‘‘Akaraṇīyo’’ti vuttepi sattāhakaraṇīyena sakaraṇīyākaraṇīyatā viññāyatīti katvā na vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ parato ‘‘sattāhakaraṇīyena pakkamatī’’ti vāradvayepi ‘‘sakaraṇīyo pakkamatī’’ti ettakameva kasmā na vuttanti? Vuccate – tattha ‘‘sattāhakaraṇīyenā’’ti avatvā ‘‘sakaraṇīyo pakkamatī’’ti vutte so taṃ sattāhaṃ bahiddhā vītināmetīti na sakkā vattunti ‘‘sattāhakaraṇīyena pakkamatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evañhi vutte sattāhassa adhikatattā so taṃ sattāhaṃ bahi vītināmetīti sakkā vattuṃ.

Not to be done means not to be done with a seven-day allowable reason. To be done means to be done only with a seven-day allowable reason. If so, why wasn't it said, "Not to be done with a seven-day allowable reason, to be done"? Because even when "not to be done" is said, the state of being done or not done with a seven-day allowable reason is understood. If so, why is only "he departs with a seven-day allowable reason" said twice later, and not just "he departs to be done"? It is said—there, without saying "with a seven-day allowable reason," if it were said, "he departs to be done," it could not be said that he spends that week outside (the residence); therefore, "he departs with a seven-day allowable reason" is said. For when it is said thus, it can be said that he spends that week outside because it is more than seven days.

Ettha ca ādimhi cattāro vārā nirapekkhagamanaṃ sandhāya vuttā, tatthāpi purimā dve vārā vassaṃ anupagatassa vasena vuttā, pacchimā pana dve vārā vassaṃ upagatassa vasena, tato paraṃ dve vārā sāpekkhagamanaṃ sandhāya vuttā, tatthāpi paṭhamavāro sāpekkhassapi sattāhakaraṇīyena gantvā taṃ sattāhaṃ bahiddhā vītināmentassa vassacchedadassanatthaṃ vutto, itaro vuttanayeneva gantvā antosattāhe nivattantassa vassacchedābhāvadassanatthaṃ. ‘‘So sattāhaṃ anāgatāya pavāraṇāya sakaraṇīyo pakkamatī’’ti ayaṃ pana vāro navamito paṭṭhāya gantvā sattāhaṃ bahiddhā vītināmentassapi vassacchedābhāvadassanatthaṃ vutto. Ettha ca ‘‘akaraṇīyo pakkamatī’’ti dutiyavārassa anāgatattā navamito paṭṭhāya gacchantenapi satiyeva karaṇīye gantabbaṃ, nāsatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ime ca satta vārā bahiddhā katauposathikassa vasena āgatā, apare satta antovihāraṃ gantvā katauposathassa vasenāti evaṃ purimikāya vasena cuddasa vārā vuttā, tato paraṃ pacchimikāya vasena teyeva cuddasa vārā vuttāti evametesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Here, the first four instances are stated referring to departure without expecting anything. Among them, the first two instances are stated in relation to one who has not entered the rains-residence, while the latter two instances are in relation to one who has entered the rains-residence. After that, two instances are stated referring to departure expecting something. Among them, the first instance is stated to show the breaking of the rains-residence for even one who departs with a seven-day allowable reason, expecting something, and spends that week outside, while the other is stated to show the absence of breaking the rains-residence for one who departs in the manner stated and returns within the week. But this instance, "He departs with a seven-day allowable reason to the future pavāraṇā, expecting something," is stated to show the absence of breaking the rains-residence even for one who departs from the ninth (day onwards) and spends the week outside. Here, since the second instance, "He departs not to be done," does not occur, it should be seen that even one departing from the ninth (day onwards) should depart only when there is a reason to be done, not when there is no reason. And these seven instances come in relation to one who has performed the uposatha outside; the other seven come in relation to one who has gone inside the monastery and performed the uposatha. Thus, fourteen instances are stated in relation to the former (residence), and then the same fourteen instances are stated in relation to the latter (residence). Thus, the distinction between these should be understood.

‘‘so tadaheva akaraṇīyotiādīsū’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.Ko pana vādo dvīhatīhaṃ vasitvā antosattāhe nivattantassāti vassaṃ upagantvā dvīhatīhaṃ vasitvā sattāhakaraṇīyena gantvā antosattāhe nivattantassa ko pana vādo, kathā eva natthīti adhippāyo.Asatiyā pana vassaṃ na upetīti ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre imaṃ temāsaṃ vassaṃ upemī’’ti vacībhedaṃ katvā na upeti.

"From 'he is not to be done on that day'"—this etc. is begun. "What to say of one who, having dwelt for two or three days, returns within the week?"—what to say, what discussion is even needed, for one who, having entered the rains-residence, dwelt for two or three days, and having departed with a seven-day allowable reason, returns within the week? This is the intended meaning. "But he does not enter the rains-residence if there is no (reason)" means he does not enter after making a verbal declaration, "I will enter the rains-residence in this monastery for these three months."

Komudiyā cātumāsiniyāti pacchimakattikapuṇṇamāyaṃ. Sā hi kumudānaṃ atthitāya komudī, catunnaṃ vassikānaṃ māsānaṃ pariyosānattā ‘‘cātumāsinī’’ti vuccati. Tadā hi kumudāni supupphitāni honti, tasmā kumudānaṃ samūho, kumudāni eva vākomudā,te ettha atthīti‘‘komudī’’ti vuccati, kumudavatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesamettha uttānameva.

"Komudī Cātumāsinī" means the full-moon day of the later month of Kattika. For that (full-moon day) is called komudī because of the existence of white water lilies (kumuda), and it is called "four-monthly" (cātumāsinī) because it is the end of the four rainy-season months. At that time, the white water lilies are in full bloom. Therefore, a collection of white water lilies, or the white water lilies themselves, are called "komudā," and because they exist here, it is called "komudī," which means it is full of white water lilies. The rest here is easily understood.

Paṭissavadukkaṭāpattikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Occasion for the Dukkaṭa Offense Regarding Promises is Finished.

Vassūpanāyikakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Chapter on Entering the Rains-Residence is Finished.

4. Pavāraṇakkhandhakaṃ

4. The Chapter on Pavāraṇā

Aphāsukavihārakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of the Uncomfortable Residence

209.Pavāraṇakkhandhake ādito lāpoālāpo,vacanapaṭivacanavasena samaṃ lāposallāpo. Piṇḍāya paṭikkameyyāti gāme piṇḍāya caritvā paccāgaccheyya.Avakkārapātiṃ dhovitvā upaṭṭhāpeyyāti atirekapiṇḍapātaṃ apanetvā ṭhapanatthāya ekaṃ samuggapātiṃ dhovitvā ṭhapeyya.Samuggapātināma samuggapuṭasadisā pāti.Appahariteti aparūḷhaharite, yasmiṃ ṭhāne piṇḍapātajjhottharaṇena vinassanadhammāni tiṇāni natthi, tasminti attho. Tena nittiṇañca mahātiṇagahanañca yattha sakaṭenapi chaḍḍite piṇḍapāte tiṇāni na vinassanti, tañca ṭhānaṃ pariggahitaṃ hoti. Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadassa hi avikopanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ.Appāṇaketi nippāṇake, piṇḍapātajjhottharaṇena maritabbapāṇakarahite vā mahāudakakkhandhe. Parittodake eva hi bhattapakkhepena āluḷite sukhumapāṇakā maranti, na mahātaḷākādīsūti. Pāṇakānurakkhaṇatthañhi etaṃ vuttaṃ.Opilāpeyyāti nimujjāpeyya.

209. In the Pavāraṇā Chapter, from the beginning, lāpa means utterance, and sallāpa means conversation, equal utterance in terms of questions and answers. "He should return for alms" means he should go for alms in the village and return. "Having washed the rinsing bowl, he should set it out" means having removed the excess alms-food, he should wash and set out a bowl similar to a casket for keeping it. "Rinsing bowl" means a bowl similar to a casket-container. "On not-yet-green" means on not thickly grown green (grass), where there is no grass that is subject to destruction by the scattering of alms-food. That is the meaning. Therefore, a place without grass and a thick growth of tall grass, where the grasses do not perish even when alms-food is scattered by a cart, is considered taken. This is stated for the non-harming of the beings in the Bhūtagāma training rule. "On lifeless" means without living beings, or in a large body of water devoid of living beings that would be killed by the scattering of alms-food. For only in a small amount of water, when stirred by the throwing in of rice, do the minute living beings die, not in large ponds and so forth. This is stated for the protection of living beings. "He should submerge" means he should immerse (the bowl).

Vaccaghaṭanti ācamanakumbhī.Rittanti rittakaṃ.Tucchanti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Avisayhanti ukkhipituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ atibhārikaṃ.Hatthavikārenāti hatthasaññāya. Hatthehi ukkhipanaṃ hatthavilaṅghanaṃ. Tenāha‘‘hatthukkhepakenā’’ti. Atha vā vilaṅgheti desantaraṃ pāpeti etenāti vilaṅghako, hattho eva vilaṅghako hatthavilaṅghako, tenahatthavilaṅghakena,aññamaññaṃ saṃsibbitahatthenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dve hi janā hatthena hatthaṃ saṃsibbetvā dvīsu hatthesu ṭhapetvā uṭṭhapentā hatthavilaṅghakena uṭṭhapenti nāma.Titthiyasamādānanti titthiyehi samādātabbaṃ.

"Washing pot" means a water pot for rinsing. "Empty" means empty. "Void" is a synonym for that. "Unable to lift" means too heavy to be able to lift. "With a hand gesture" means by a hand signal. Lifting with the hands is hand elevation. Therefore, he says, "With a hand lift." Alternatively, that which moves (something) to another place is a mover (vilaṅghako); the hand itself is the mover, hand-mover (hatthavilaṅghako); therefore, "with a hand-mover" means with hands intertwined with each other. For when two people intertwine hands with hands, placing (the pot) on the two hands, and lifting it up, they lift it up with a hand-mover. "Adoption by sectarians" means something to be adopted by sectarians.

Aphāsukavihārakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Story of the Uncomfortable Residence is Finished.

Pavāraṇābhedakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of the Division of Pavāraṇā

212.Dvemā,bhikkhave, pavāraṇā cātuddasikā ca pannarasikā cāti ettha purimavassaṃvutthānaṃ pubbakattikapuṇṇamā, tesaṃyeva sace bhaṇḍanakārakehi upaddutā pavāraṇaṃ paccukkaḍḍhanti, atha kattikamāsassa kāḷapakkhacātuddaso vā pacchimakattikapuṇṇamā vā, pacchimavassaṃvutthānañca pacchimakattikapuṇṇamā eva vāti ime tayo pavāraṇadivasāti veditabbā. Idañca pakaticārittavasena vuttaṃ, tathārūpapaccaye pana sati dvinnaṃ kattikapuṇṇamānaṃ purimesu cātuddasesupi pavāraṇaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati, teneva mahāvihāre bhikkhū cātuddasiyā pavāretvā pannarasiyā kāyasāmaggiṃ denti, cetiyagirimahadassanatthampi aṭṭhamiyā gacchanti, tampi cātuddasiyaṃ pavāretukāmānaññeva hoti.

212. "These two, bhikkhus, are pavāraṇā: the fourteenth and the fifteenth"—here, the full-moon day of the earlier month of Kattika for those who have resided for the earlier rains-residence; if their pavāraṇā is disrupted by quarrelsome monks, then either the fourteenth day of the dark half of the month of Kattika or the full-moon day of the later month of Kattika, and the full-moon day of the later month of Kattika for those who have resided for the later rains-residence—these three should be understood as the days for pavāraṇā. And this is stated according to normal practice, but if there is a suitable reason, it is permissible to perform pavāraṇā on the fourteenth days before the two full-moon days of Kattika. Therefore, at the Mahāvihāra, monks, having performed pavāraṇā on the fourteenth day, give consent to communal action on the fifteenth day, and they also go to see the great festival at Cetiyagiri on the eighth day; that too is only for those wishing to perform pavāraṇā on the fourteenth day.

Pavāraṇādānānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of Giving and Allowing Pavāraṇā

213.Sace pana vuḍḍhataro hotīti sace pavāraṇadāyako bhikkhu vuḍḍhataro hoti.Tena ca bhikkhunāti pavāraṇadāyakena bhikkhunā.

213. "If he is older" means if the bhikkhu giving pavāraṇā is older. "By that bhikkhu" means by the bhikkhu giving pavāraṇā.

Anāpattipannarasakakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of Non-Offense on the Fifteenth Day

222.Pannarasakesupavāritamatteti pavāritasamanantaraṃ.Avuṭṭhitāya parisāyāti pavāretvā pacchā aññamaññaṃ kathentiyā.Ekaccāya vuṭṭhitāyāti ekaccesu yathānisinnesu ekaccesu sakasakaṭṭhānaṃ gatesu.Puna pavāritabbanti punapi sabbehi samāgantvā pavāretabbaṃ.Āgacchanti samasamā, tesaṃ santike pavāretabbanti gate anānetvā nisinnānaññeva santike pavāretabbaṃ.Sabbāya vuṭṭhitāya parisāya āgacchanti samasamā, tesaṃ santike pavāretabbanti yadi sabbe vuṭṭhahitvā gatā sannipātetuñca na sakkā, ekacce sannipātetvā pavāretuṃ vaṭṭati, ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā kattabbasaṅghakammābhāvā vaggaṃ na hoti. Uposathepi eseva nayo.

222. "As soon as he has performed pavāraṇā" means immediately after performing pavāraṇā on the fifteenth day. "Before the assembly has dispersed" means while they are conversing with each other after performing pavāraṇā. "When some have dispersed" means when some have remained seated as they were, while some have gone to their own places. "It should be performed pavāraṇā again" means it should be performed pavāraṇā again after everyone has gathered. "They arrive together; it should be performed pavāraṇā in their presence" means it should be performed pavāraṇā only in the presence of those who are seated without bringing back those who have left. "When the entire assembly has dispersed, they arrive together; it should be performed pavāraṇā in their presence" means if everyone has gotten up and left and it is not possible to gather them together, it is permissible to gather some and perform pavāraṇā; because there is no required act of the Sangha after establishing the motion, it is not a group (offense). The same method applies for the uposatha.

Pavāraṇāṭhapanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of Establishing Pavāraṇā

237.‘‘Natthi dinna’’ntiādinayappavattā dasavatthukāmicchādiṭṭhi. ‘‘Hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā’’tiādinā sassatucchedasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ gaṇhātītiantaggāhikā.

237. Wrong view (micchādiṭṭhi) is the ten-factored (wrong view) that proceeds in the manner beginning with "There is no giving." Grasping at extremes (antaggāhikā) is the view that grasps at the extreme defined by eternalism and annihilationism, beginning with "The Tathāgata exists after death, the Tathāgata does not exist after death."

Bhaṇḍanakārakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of the Quarrelsome Person

240.Catutthekate suṇantīti catutthe pannarasikuposathe kate amhākaṃ pavāraṇaṃ ṭhapessantīti suṇanti.Evampi dve cātuddasikā hontīti tatiyena saddhiṃ dve cātuddasikā honti.

240. "They hear when the fourth (has been) done" means they hear that we will postpone (ṭhapessanti) our pavāraṇā when the fourth fifteenth-day uposatha has been done. "Thus, there are two fourteenth days" means there are two fourteenth days together with the third.

Pavāraṇāsaṅgahakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Synthesis of Pavāraṇā

241.Ayaṃ pavāraṇāsaṅgaho ekassa dinnopi sabbesaṃ dinnova hotīti āha‘‘ekassapi vasena dātabbo’’ti.Āgantukā tesaṃ senāsanaṃ gahetuṃ na labhantīti sacepi saṭṭhivassabhikkhū āgacchanti, tesaṃ senāsanaṃ gahetuṃ na labhanti.Pavāretvā pana antarāpi cārikaṃ pakkamituṃ labhantīti pavāraṇāsaṅgahe kate antarā pakkamitukāmā saṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā pavāretuṃ labhanti. Sesamettha pāḷito aṭṭhakathāto ca suviññeyyameva.

241. This synthesis of pavāraṇā means that even if it is given to one, it is as if it is given to all. Therefore, he says, "It should be given on behalf of even one." "The newly arrived ones are not allowed to take their lodging" means even if bhikkhus of sixty years (seniority) arrive, they are not allowed to take their lodging. "But having performed pavāraṇā, they are allowed to depart on a journey even in between" means those wishing to depart in between after the synthesis of pavāraṇā is done are allowed to gather the Sangha and perform pavāraṇā. The rest here is very easy to understand from the Pali and the commentary.

Pavāraṇakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Chapter on Pavāraṇā is Finished.

5. Cammakkhandhakaṃ

5. The Leather Chapter

Soṇakoḷivisavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of Soṇa Koḷivisa

242.Cammakkhandhakeuṇṇapāvāraṇanti uṇṇāmayaṃ pāvāraṇaṃ.Vihārapacchāyāyanti vihārapaccante chāyāyaṃ. Vihārassa vaḍḍhamānacchāyāyantipi vadanti.

242. In the Leather Chapter, "Woolen cloak (uṇṇapāvāraṇa)" means a cloak made of wool. "In the shade behind the monastery" means in the shade at the rear of the monastery. Some say it means in the increasing shade of the monastery.

Soṇassa pabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of Soṇa's Ordination

243.Suttattho pana suttavaṇṇanātoyeva gahetabboti etthāyaṃ suttavaṇṇanā.Sītavaneti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.6.55) evaṃnāmake vane. Tasmiṃ kira paṭipāṭiyā pañca caṅkamanasatāni māpitāni, tesu thero attano sappāyaṃ caṅkamanaṃ gahetvā samaṇadhammaṃ karoti. Tassa āraddhavīriyassa hutvā caṅkamato pādatalāni bhijjiṃsu, jāṇūhi caṅkamato jāṇukānipi hatthatalānipi bhijjiṃsu, chiddāni ahesuṃ. Evaṃ āraddhavīriyo viharanto obhāsanimittamattakampi dassetuṃ nāsakkhi. Tassa vīriyena kilamitakāyassa caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pāsāṇaphalake nisinnassa yo vitakko udapādi, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘atha kho āyasmato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthaāraddhavīriyāti paripuṇṇapaggahitavīriyā.Na anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimuccatīti ‘‘sace ahaṃ ugghaṭitaññū vā vipañcitaññū vā neyyo vā, na me cittaṃ na vimucceyya, addhā pana padaparamo, yena me cittaṃ na muccatī’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā‘‘saṃvijjanti kho panā’’tiādīni cintesi. Tatthabhogāti upayogatthe paccattaṃ.

243. But the meaning of the Sutta should be taken from the Sutta Commentary. Here is the Sutta Commentary: "In Sītavana" (a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.6.55) means in a forest named thus. It is said that five hundred walking paths (caṅkamanas) were constructed there in a row, and the Elder, having chosen a walking path suitable to him, practiced the ascetic life. As he walked back and forth, striving diligently, the soles of his feet broke open, and as he walked on his knees, his knees and the palms of his hands also broke open, becoming full of holes. While dwelling thus, striving diligently, he was not able to manifest even an indication of enlightenment. To show the thought that arose in him, exhausted in body by striving, as he sat on a stone slab at the end of the walking path, "Then, for the Venerable..." etc. is stated. There, "striving diligently" means with perfectly exerted effort. "The mind is not liberated from the taints without clinging" means, having made the determination, "If I am one who understands quickly, or one who understands with explanation, or one who is to be led, my mind would not be liberated; truly, I am only one who is led by the words (alone), which is why my mind is not liberated," he reflected, "But there are..." etc. There, "enjoyments" means individually for the purpose of use.

Pāturahosīti therassa cittācāraṃ ñatvā ‘‘ayaṃ soṇo ajja sītavane padhānabhūmiyaṃ nisinno imaṃ vitakkaṃ vitakketi, gantvāssa vitakkaṃ sahoḍḍhaṃ gaṇhitvā vīṇopamakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathessāmī’’ti sītavane pāturahosi.Paññatte āsaneti padhānikabhikkhū attano vasanaṭṭhāne ovadituṃ āgatassa buddhassa bhagavato nisīdanatthaṃ yathālābhena āsanampi paññapetvāva padhānaṃ karonti, aññaṃ alabhamānā purāṇapaṇṇāni saṅgharitvā upari saṅghāṭiṃ paññapenti. Theropi āsanaṃ paññapetvāva padhānaṃ akāsi, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘paññatte āsane’’ti.

"Appeared" means, knowing the Elder's mental state, "This Soṇa, sitting today in the Sītavana at the place for striving, is contemplating this thought; I will go and grasp his thought together with its support and teach him the meditation object of the simile of the lute," he appeared in the Sītavana. "On the prepared seat" means the bhikkhus who strive, before practicing striving, always prepare a seat as they are able for the Buddha, the Blessed One, who has come to advise them in their dwelling place. Not finding anything else, they gather old leaves and spread their outer robe on top. The Elder also practiced striving after preparing a seat; referring to that, it is said, "on the prepared seat."

Taṃkiṃ maññasīti satthā ‘‘imassa bhikkhuno avasesakammaṭṭhānena attho natthi, ayaṃ gandhabbasippe cheko ciṇṇavasī, attano visaye kathiyamāne khippameva sallakkhessatī’’ti vīṇopamaṃ kathetuṃ ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññasī’’tiādimāha.Vīṇāya tantissare kusalatānāma vīṇāya vādanakusalatā, so ca tattha kusalo. Mātāpitaro hissa ‘‘amhākaṃ putto aññaṃ sippaṃ sikkhanto kāyena kilamissati, idaṃ pana āsane nisinneneva sakkā uggaṇhitu’’nti gandhabbasippameva uggaṇhāpesuṃ. Tassa –

"What do you think" means the Teacher, thinking, "This bhikkhu has no need of the remaining meditation objects; he is skilled in the art of music, experienced and trained; if it is spoken about in his own area of expertise, he will quickly understand it," said, "What do you think" etc., to tell the simile of the lute. "Skill in the sound of the lute strings" means skill in playing the lute, and he was skilled in that. For his parents had him learn only the art of music, thinking, "Our son will become exhausted in body learning another craft; but this can be learned simply by sitting on a seat." For him:

‘‘Satta sarā tayo gāmā, mucchanā ekavīsati;

"Seven notes, three scales, twenty-one modulations;
Forty-nine positions—these are the circle of notes."

Accāyatāti atiāyatā kharamucchanā.Saravatīti sarasampannā.Kammaññāti kammakkhamā kammayoggā.Atisithilāti mandamucchanā.Same guṇe patiṭṭhitāti majjhime sare ṭhapetvā mucchitā.

"Too taut" means excessively taut, with a harsh modulation. "Soundful" means full of sound. "Workable" means fit for work, suitable for work. "Too slack" means a soft modulation. "Established in an even tone" means tuned by placing in a middle note.

Accāraddhanti atigāḷhaṃ.Uddhaccāya saṃvattatīti uddhatabhāvāya saṃvattati.Atilīnanti atisithilaṃ.Kosajjāyāti kusītabhāvatthāya.Vīriyasamathaṃ adhiṭṭhāhīti vīriyasampayuttaṃ samathaṃ adhiṭṭhāhi, vīriyaṃ samathena yojehīti attho.Indriyānañca samataṃ adhiṭṭhāhīti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ samataṃ samabhāvaṃ adhiṭṭhāhi. Tattha saddhaṃ paññāya, paññañca saddhāya, vīriyaṃ samādhinā, samādhiñca vīriyena yojayatā indriyānaṃ samatā adhiṭṭhitā nāma hoti. Sati pana sabbatthikā, sā sadāpi balavatīyeva vaṭṭati. Tañca pana nesaṃ yojanāvidhānaṃvisuddhimagge(visuddhi. 1.60-62) āgatanayena veditabbaṃ.Tattha ca nimittaṃ gaṇhāhīti tasmiñca samabhāve sati yena ādāse mukhabimbeneva nimittena uppajjitabbaṃ, taṃ samathanimittaṃ vipassanānimittaṃ magganimittaṃ phalanimittañca gaṇha nibbattehīti evamassa satthā arahatte pakkhipitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathesi.

Accāraddhanti: excessively strenuous. Uddhaccāya saṃvattatīti: conduces to agitation. Atilīnanti: excessively lax. Kosajjāyāti: for the purpose of sloth. Vīriyasamathaṃ adhiṭṭhāhīti: establish serenity endowed with energy, meaning combine energy with serenity. Indriyānañca samataṃ adhiṭṭhāhīti: establish equilibrium, the state of balance, of the faculties (indriya) such as faith and so on. Here, by combining faith with wisdom, and wisdom with faith, energy with concentration, and concentration with energy, one is said to have established the equilibrium of the faculties. But mindfulness is effective everywhere; it always prevails as strong. However, the method of combining these should be understood according to the method that comes in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.60-62). Tattha ca nimittaṃ gaṇhāhīti: and in that state of balance, by which sign, like a reflection of the face in a mirror, it should arise, take up, generate that sign of serenity, sign of insight, sign of the path, and sign of the fruition. Thus, the Teacher, placing him in arahantship, spoke on the meditation subject.

Tattha ca nimittaṃ aggahesīti samathanimittañca vipassanānimittañca aggahesi.Ekoti asahāyo.Vūpakaṭṭhoti vatthukāmehi ca kilesakāmehi ca kāyena ceva cittena ca vūpakaṭṭho.Appamattoti kammaṭṭhāne satiṃ avijahanto.Ātāpīti kāyikacetasikavīriyātāpena ātāpo. Ātappati kilesehīti ātāpo, vīriyaṃ.Pahitattoti kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāya pesitatto vissaṭṭhaattabhāvo, nibbāne vā pesitacitto.Na cirassevāti kammaṭṭhānārambhato na cireneva.Aññataroti eko.Arahatanti bhagavato sāvakānaṃ arahantānaṃ abbhantaro eko mahāsāvako ahosīti attho.

Tattha ca nimittaṃ aggahesīti: and he did not grasp the sign of serenity, nor the sign of insight. Ekoti: without a companion. Vūpakaṭṭhoti: secluded from sense pleasures and defilement pleasures, both in body and mind. Appamattoti: not abandoning mindfulness in the meditation subject. Ātāpīti: ardent with the ardour of physical and mental effort. Ātāpo (ardour): because one makes an effort against defilements; effort (vīriya). Pahitattoti: having a self that is sent forth, a being that is detached because of not expecting the body and life, or with a mind directed towards Nibbāna. Na cirassevāti: not long after the start of the meditation subject. Aññataroti: one. Arahatanti: he became one of the great disciples among the arahant disciples of the Blessed One.

244.Vusitavāti vutthabrahmacariyavāso.Katakaraṇīyoti catūhi maggehi kattabbaṃ katvā ṭhito.Ohitabhāroti khandhabhāraṃ kilesabhāraṃ abhisaṅkhārabhārañca otāretvā ṭhito.Anuppattasadatthoti sadattho vuccati arahattaṃ, taṃ pattoti attho.Parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojanoti khīṇabhavabandhano.Sammadaññā vimuttoti sammā hetunā kāraṇena jānitvā vimutto.Cha ṭhānānīti cha kāraṇāni.Adhimutto hotīti paṭivijjhitvā paccakkhaṃ katvā ṭhito hoti.Nekkhammādhimuttotiādi sabbaṃ arahattavasena vuttaṃ. Arahattañhi sabbakilesehi nikkhantattānekkhammaṃ,teheva pavivittattāpaviveko,byāpajjābhāvatoabyāpajjaṃ,upādānassa khayante uppannattāupādānakkhayo,taṇhāya khayante uppannattātaṇhakkhayo,sammohābhāvatoasammohoti ca vuccati.

244.Vusitavāti: one who has lived the holy life. Katakaraṇīyoti: one who has done what was to be done by the four paths, and stands complete. Ohitabhāroti: one who has laid down the burden of the aggregates, the burden of defilements, and the burden of karmic formations, and stands relieved. Anuppattasadatthoti: sadattho (one's own welfare) is said to be arahantship; that attained, is its meaning. Parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojanoti: one whose bonds of existence are destroyed. Sammadaññā vimuttoti: liberated through perfect knowledge, due to right cause and reason. Cha ṭhānānīti: six reasons. Adhimutto hotīti: is resolved, having directly realized by perceiving. Nekkhammādhimuttoti etc., all is stated in terms of arahantship. For arahantship is called nekkhamma because of being free from all defilements, paviveka because of being secluded from them, abyāpajja because of the absence of ill will, upādānakkhayo because of arising at the destruction of clinging, taṇhakkhayo because of arising at the destruction of craving, and asammoha because of the absence of delusion.

Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakanti paṭivedharahitaṃ kevalaṃ paṭivedhapaññāya asammissaṃ saddhāmattakaṃ.Paṭicayanti punappunaṃ karaṇena vaḍḍhiṃ.Vītarāgattāti maggapaṭivedhena rāgassa vihatattāyeva nekkhammasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ paṭivijjhitvā sacchikatvā ṭhito hoti, phalasamāpattivihārena viharati, tanninnamānasoyeva hotīti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakanti: merely simple faith, devoid of penetration, unmixed with the wisdom of penetration. Paṭicayanti: growth by repeatedly doing. Vītarāgattāti: by the destruction of passion due to the path-penetration, having realized and directly experienced arahantship counted as renunciation, he abides in the enjoyment of fruition, he inclines to that alone, is its meaning. The same method applies in the remaining terms.

Lābhasakkārasilokanti catupaccayalābhañca tesaṃyeva sukatabhāvañca vaṇṇabhaṇanañca.Nikāmayamānoti icchamāno patthayamāno.Pavivekādhimuttoti ‘‘paviveke adhimutto aha’’nti evaṃ arahattaṃ byākarotīti attho.

Lābhasakkārasilokanti: material gains of the four requisites, their being well-done, and praise of their virtues. Nikāmayamānoti: wishing, desiring. Pavivekādhimuttoti: "I am resolved on seclusion," thus he declares arahantship, is the meaning.

Sīlabbataparāmāsanti sīlañca vatañca parāmasitvā gahitaggahaṇamattaṃ.Sārato paccāgacchantoti sārabhāvena jānanto.Abyāpajjādhimuttoti abyāpajjaṃ arahattaṃ byākaroti. Imināva nayena sabbavāresu attho daṭṭhabbo. Apicettha ‘‘nekkhammādhimuttoti imasmiṃyeva arahattaṃ kathitaṃ, sesesu pañcasu nibbāna’’nti eke vadanti. Apare ‘‘asammohādhimuttoti ettheva nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ, sesesu arahatta’’nti vadanti. Ayaṃ panettha sāro – ‘‘sabbesvevetesu arahattampi nibbānampi kathitamevāti.

Sīlabbataparāmāsanti: merely grasping after touching sīla and vata (precepts and vows). Sārato paccāgacchantoti: knowing as essential. Abyāpajjādhimuttoti: declares abyāpajja, arahantship. The meaning should be understood in all instances by this same method. Moreover, here, some say, "arahantship is spoken of only in 'resolved on renunciation', Nibbāna in the remaining five." Others say, "Nibbāna is spoken of only in 'resolved on non-delusion', arahantship in the remaining." But this is the essence here: "In all these, both arahantship and Nibbāna are indeed spoken of."

Bhusāti balavanto dibbarūpasadisā.Nevassa cittaṃ pariyādiyantīti etassa khīṇāsavassa cittaṃ gahetvā ṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Kilesā hi uppajjamānā cittaṃ gaṇhanti nāma.Amissīkatanti amissakataṃ. Kilesā hi ārammaṇena saddhiṃ cittaṃ missaṃ karonti, tesaṃ abhāvā amissīkataṃ.Ṭhitanti patiṭṭhitaṃ.Āneñjappattanti acalanappattaṃ.Vayañcassānupassatīti tassa cesa cittassa uppādampi vayampi passati.Bhusā vātavuṭṭhīti balavā vātakkhandho.Neva naṃ saṅkampeyyāti ekabhāgena cāletuṃ na sakkuṇeyya.Na sampakampeyyāti thūṇaṃ viya sabbabhāgato kampetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya.Na sampavedheyyāti vedhetvā pavedhetvā pātetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya.

Bhusāti: powerful, like divine forms. Nevassa cittaṃ pariyādiyantīti: they are not able to take hold of the mind of that arahant and make it stand still. For defilements, when arising, take hold of the mind, it is said. Amissīkatanti: unmixed. For defilements mix the mind with the object; in their absence, it is unmixed. Ṭhitanti: established. Āneñjappattanti: one who has attained the imperturbable. Vayañcassānupassatīti: and he sees the arising and passing away of this mind. Bhusā vātavuṭṭhīti: a strong gust of wind. Neva naṃ saṅkampeyyāti: it could not shake it even in one part. Na sampakampeyyāti: it could not shake it in every part like a pillar. Na sampavedheyyāti: it could not cause it to tremble, shake, and fall.

Nekkhammaṃ adhimuttassāti arahattaṃ paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitassa. Sesapadesupi arahattameva kathitaṃ.Upādānakkhayassa cāti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ.Asammohañca cetasoti cittassa ca asammohaṃ adhimuttassa.Disvā āyatanuppādanti āyatanānaṃ uppādañca vayañca disvā.Sammā cittaṃ vimuccatīti sammā hetunā nayena imāya vipassanāya paṭipattiyā phalasamāpattivasena cittaṃ vimuccati, nibbānārammaṇe adhimuccati. Atha vā iminā khīṇāsavassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadā kathitā. Tassa hi āyatanuppādaṃ disvā imāya vipassanāya adhigatassa ariyamaggassa ānubhāvena sabbakilesehi sammā cittaṃ vimuccati. Evaṃtassa sammā vimuttassa…pe… na vijjati. Tatthasantacittassāti nibbutacittassa. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.

Nekkhammaṃ adhimuttassāti: of one resolved on renunciation, having realized arahantship. In the remaining terms, only arahantship is spoken of. Upādānakkhayassa cāti: and of the destruction of clinging, the possessive case in the sense of use. Asammohañca cetasoti: and of the mind's non-delusion, of one who is resolved. Disvā āyatanuppādanti: having seen the arising and passing away of the sense bases. Sammā cittaṃ vimuccatīti: rightly, by reason and method, by this practice of insight, the mind is liberated in the sense of the fruition attainment, it is resolved on Nibbāna as its object. Or else, the preparatory practice of this arahant has been spoken of. For by the power of the noble path attained by this insight, having seen the arising of the sense bases, the mind is rightly liberated from all defilements. Thus, of him who is rightly liberated…pe… there is not. Here, santacittassāti: of one whose mind is stilled. The rest here is indeed of obvious meaning.

Soṇassa pabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Story of Soṇa's Going Forth is Finished.

Sabbanīlikādipaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account of Rejecting All-Blue Etc.

246.Addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇāti abhinavāriṭṭhaphalavaṇṇā. Udakena tintakākapattavaṇṇātipi vadanti.

246.Addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇāti: the colour of fresh arittha fruits. Some also say it is the colour of crow's feathers soaked in water.

Ajjhārāme upāhanapaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account of Rejecting Footwear in the Monastery

248.Abhijīvanti etenātiabhijīvanikaṃ. Kintaṃ? Sippaṃ. Tenāha‘‘yena sippenā’’tiādi.

248.Abhijīvanti etenāti: abhijīvanikaṃ: that by which one lives. What is that? A craft. Therefore, he said, "by whatever craft" etc.

Kaṭṭhapādukādipaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account of Rejecting Wooden Sandals Etc.

251.Uṇṇāhi katapādukāti uṇṇālomamayakambalehi, uṇṇālomehi eva vā katapādukā.Na, bhikkhave, gāvīnaṃ visāṇesu gahetabbantiādīsu ‘‘mokkhādhippāyena visāṇādīsu gahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.

251.Uṇṇāhi katapādukāti: sandals made of woollen blankets or merely of wool. Na, bhikkhave, gāvīnaṃ visāṇesu gahetabbantiādīsu: in these passages beginning "Monks, it is not to be taken from the horns of cows," it is said in the commentaries that "it is allowable to take from horns etc. with the intention of release."

Yānādipaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account of Rejecting Vehicles Etc.

253.Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, purisayuttaṃ hatthavaṭṭakanti ettha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, purisayuttaṃ, anujānāmi, bhikkhave, hatthavaṭṭaka’’nti evaṃ paccekavākyaparisamāpanaṃ adhippetanti āha‘‘purisayuttaṃ itthisārathi vā…pe… purisā vā, vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti.Pīṭhakasivikanti pīṭhakayānaṃ.Pāṭaṅkinti andolikāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.

253.Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, purisayuttaṃ hatthavaṭṭakanti: Here, he says "I allow, monks, a man-driven (vehicle), I allow, monks, a hand-cart," the intended meaning is the completion of each sentence separately, "whether driven by a man or a woman…pe… or men, it is allowable." Pīṭhakasivikanti: a palanquin with a seat. Pāṭaṅkinti: this is another term for a litter.

Uccāsayanamahāsayanapaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account of Rejecting High and Luxurious Beds

254.Vāḷarūpānīti āharimāni vāḷarūpāni. ‘‘Akappiyarūpākulo akappiyamañco pallaṅko’’tisārasamāsevuttaṃ.‘‘Dīghalomako mahākojavoti caturaṅgulādhikalomo kāḷakojavo. ‘‘Caturaṅgulādhikāni kira tassa lomānī’’ti vacanato caturaṅgulato heṭṭhā vaṭṭatīti vadanti.Vānacitro uṇṇāmayattharaṇoti bhitticchedādivasena vicitro uṇṇāmayattharaṇo.Ghanapupphako uṇṇāmayattharaṇoti uṇṇāmayalohitattharaṇo.Pakatitūlikāti rukkhatūlalatātūlapoṭakītūlasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ tūlānaṃ aññatarapuṇṇā tūlikā.‘‘Uddalomīti ubhatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ.Ekantalomīti ekatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇa’’ntidīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.15) vuttaṃ,sārasamāsepana ‘‘uddalomīti ekato uggatapupphaṃ. Ekantalomīti ubhato uggatapuppha’’nti vuttaṃ.‘‘Koseyyakaṭṭissamayanti koseyyakasaṭamaya’’ntiācariyadhammapālattherenavuttaṃ.Suddhakoseyyanti ratanaparisibbanarahitaṃ.Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃpanettha ‘‘ṭhapetvā tūlikaṃ sabbāneva gonakādīni ratanaparisibbitāni vaṭṭantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘ṭhapetvā tūlika’’nti etena ratanaparisibbanarahitāpi tūlikā na vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. ‘‘Ratanaparisibbitāni vaṭṭantī’’ti iminā pana yāni ratanaparisibbitāni, tāni bhūmattharaṇavasena yathānurūpaṃ mañcādīsu ca upanetuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpitanti veditabbaṃ. Ettha ca vinayapariyāyaṃ patvā garuke ṭhātabbattā idha vuttanayenevettha vinicchayo veditabbo. Suttantikadesanāyaṃ pana gahaṭṭhānampi vasena vuttattā tesaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ ‘‘ṭhapetvā tūlikaṃ…pe… vaṭṭantī’’ti vuttanti apare.

254.Vāḷarūpānīti: these that are brought are vāḷarūpa. It is said in the Sārasamāsa, "Akappiyarūpākulo akappiyamañco pallaṅko" (a couch or a bed that is unsuitable is full of unsuitable forms). "Dīghalomako mahākojavoti: a black blanket with hairs longer than four fingerbreadths. They say that since it is stated "its hairs are longer than four fingerbreadths," it is allowable below four fingerbreadths. Vānacitro uṇṇāmayattharaṇoti: a woollen spread adorned with various designs, such as wall cut-outs. Ghanapupphako uṇṇāmayattharaṇoti: a woollen spread with thick flowers. Pakatitūlikāti: a cushion stuffed with any one of the three kinds of cotton: tree cotton, creeper cotton, or pod cotton. "Uddalomīti: a woollen spread with pile on both sides. Ekantalomīti: a woollen spread with pile on one side," it is said in the Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathā (Dī. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.15), but in the Sārasamāsa it is said, "Uddalomī means with flowers raised on one side. Ekantalomī means with flowers raised on both sides." "Koseyyakaṭṭissamayanti: made of Koseyya cloth and cotton," it was said by Ācariya Dhammapālatthera. Suddhakoseyyanti: pure Koseyya cloth without ratanaparisibbana. But in the Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathā here, it is said, "except for cushions, all the gonaka cloths etc. with ratanaparisibbana are allowable." There, by "except for cushions," it indicates that even cushions without ratanaparisibbana are not allowable. But by this, "those with ratanaparisibbana are allowable," it should be understood that those with ratanaparisibbana are allowable to be used as floor coverings and appropriately on couches etc. However, since reaching the Vinaya context, it must be gravely adhered to; here, the decision must be understood in the way stated here itself. However, in the Suttanta teaching, it is stated even by way of householders; in order to include them, it is stated, "except for cushions…pe… are allowable," according to others.

Ajinacammehīti ajinamigacammehi. Tāni kira cammāni sukhumatarāni, tasmā dupaṭṭatipaṭṭāni katvā sibbanti. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘ajinapaveṇī’’ti. Uttaraṃ uparibhāgaṃ chādetītiuttaracchado,vitānaṃ, tañca lohitavitānaṃ idhādhippetanti āha‘‘uparibaddhena rattavitānenā’’ti. ‘‘Rattavitānesu ca kāsāvaṃ vaṭṭati, kusumbhādirattameva na vaṭṭatī’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Mahāupadhānanti pamāṇātikkantaṃ upadhānaṃ. Ettha ca kiñcāpidīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(dī. ni aṭṭha. 1.15) ‘‘alohitakāni dvepi vaṭṭantiyeva, tato uttari labhitvā aññesaṃ dātabbāni, dātuṃ asakkonto mañce tiriyaṃ attharitvā upari paccattharaṇaṃ datvā nipajjitumpi labhatī’’ti avisesena vuttaṃ,senāsanakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ(cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297) pana ‘‘agilānassa sīsupadhānañca pādupadhānañcāti dvayameva vaṭṭati, gilānassa bimbohanāni santharitvā upari paccattharaṇaṃ datvā nipajjitumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttattā gilānoyeva mañce tiriyaṃ attharitvā nipajjituṃ labhatīti veditabbaṃ.

Ajinacammehīti: with deer hides. It seems those hides are very fine; therefore, they sew them together making them into double layers. Therefore, it is said, "ajinapaveṇī." Uttaracchado: that which covers the upper part, uttaracchado, a canopy; and here the red canopy is intended, he says, "with a red canopy fastened above." It is said in the commentaries that "in red canopies, kāsāva is allowable, only kusumbha etc. red is not allowable." Mahāupadhānanti: a pillow exceeding the standard. And here, although it is stated without distinction in the Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathā (Dī. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.15) that "both non-red ones are indeed allowable, having obtained more than that, they should be given to others; if unable to give, it is permissible to spread it across the bed and lie down after placing a covering on top," in the Senāsanakkhandhakavaṇṇanā (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 297), it is stated that "for one who is not ill, only two are allowable: a head pillow and a foot pillow; for one who is ill, it is also allowable to lie down after spreading bimbohana and placing a covering on top"; it should be understood that only a sick person is allowed to spread it across the bed and lie down.

Uccāsayanamahāsayanapaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Account of Rejecting High and Luxurious Beds is Finished.

Gihivikatānuññātādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account of Permitting What is Sold by Laypeople Etc.

256.Abhinissāyanisīditunti apassāya nisīdituṃ.

256.Abhinissāya nisīditunti: to sit down leaning against something.

Soṇakuṭikaṇṇavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of Soṇakuṭikaṇṇa

257.Papatake pabbateti ettha ‘‘pavatte pabbate’’tipi paṭhanti, pavattanāmake pabbateti attho.Soṇo upāsakotiādīsu (udā. aṭṭha. 46) nāmena soṇo nāma, tīhi saraṇagamanehi upāsakattapaṭivedanena upāsako, koṭiagghanakassa kaṇṇapiḷandhanassa dhāraṇena ‘‘koṭikaṇṇo’’ti ca vattabbe ‘‘kuṭikaṇṇo’’ti evaṃ abhiññāto, na sukumārasoṇoti adhippāyo. Ayañhi āyasmato mahākaccānassa santike dhammaṃ sutvā sāsane abhippasanno saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhito papatake pabbate chāyūdakasampanne ṭhāne vihāraṃ kāretvā theraṃ tattha vasāpetvā catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhāti. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘āyasmato mahākaccānassa upaṭṭhāko hotī’’ti.

257.Papatake pabbateti: Here, some also read "Pavatte pabbate," meaning on the mountain named Pavatta. Among Soṇo upāsakotiādīsu (Udā. Aṭṭha. 46), his name is Soṇa, by reporting the discipleship with the three refuges, he is a lay follower (upāsaka), it should be said "Kuṭikaṇṇo," distinguished by wearing ear ornaments worth a koṭi, but he is recognized as "Kuṭikaṇṇo"; the intention is that he is not the delicate Soṇa. For this one, having heard the Dhamma in the presence of the venerable Mahākaccāna, having faith in the Dispensation, established in the refuges and precepts, after constructing a monastery on Mount Papataka, a place endowed with shade and water, and causing the Elder to dwell there, attends to him with the four requisites. Therefore, it is said "He is an attendant of the venerable Mahākaccāna."

So kālena kālaṃ therassa upaṭṭhānaṃ gacchati, thero cassa dhammaṃ deseti, tena saṃvegabahulo dhammacariyāyaṃ ussāhajāto viharati. So ekadā satthena saddhiṃ vāṇijjatthāya ujjeniṃ gacchanto antarāmagge aṭaviyaṃ satthe niviṭṭhe rattiyaṃ janasambādhabhayena ekamantaṃ apakkamma niddaṃ upagañchi. Sattho paccūsavelāyaṃ uṭṭhāya gato, na ekopi soṇaṃ pabodhesi, sabbe vissaritvā agamiṃsu. So pabhātāya rattiyā pabujjhitvā uṭṭhāya kañci apassanto satthena gatamaggaṃ gahetvā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gacchanto ekaṃ vaṭarukkhaṃ upagañchi. Tattha addasa ekaṃ mahākāyaṃ virūpadassanaṃ bībhacchaṃ purisaṃ aṭṭhito muttāni attano maṃsāni sayameva khādantaṃ, disvāna ‘‘kosi tva’’nti pucchi. Petosmi, bhanteti. Kasmā evaṃ karosīti? Attano pubbakammenāti. Kiṃ pana taṃ kammanti? Ahaṃ pubbe bhārukacchanagaravāsī kūṭavāṇijo hutvā paresaṃ santakaṃ vañcetvā khādiṃ, samaṇe ca bhikkhāya upagate ‘‘tumhākaṃ maṃsaṃ khādathā’’ti akkosiṃ, tena kammena etarahi imaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavāmīti. Taṃ sutvā soṇo ativiya saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhi.

So he would go to attend upon the Elder from time to time, and the Elder would teach him the Dhamma, which inspired him with great urgency and enthusiasm for the practice of Dhamma. Once, while traveling with a caravan to Ujjeni for trade, the caravan settled in a forest along the way. Due to fear of crowds, he went off to a secluded spot at night and fell asleep. The caravan set off at dawn and departed, without waking even a single person, they all went away, having forgotten him. When he awoke at the break of dawn, he got up, and seeing no one, he quickly followed the path taken by the caravan until he came to a banyan tree. There, he saw a man with a huge body, a hideous appearance, and repulsive features, standing and eating his own flesh that had fallen off as pus. Seeing him, he asked, "Who are you?" "I am a ghost (peta), venerable sir." "Why are you doing this?" "Because of my past deeds." "What deed is that?" "In the past, I was a deceitful merchant living in Bharukaccha who cheated others out of their possessions and devoured them. When a monk came for alms, I insulted him, saying, 'May you eat your own flesh!' As a result of that deed, I am now experiencing this suffering." Hearing this, Soṇa felt exceedingly agitated.

Tato paraṃ gacchanto mukhato paggharitakāḷalohite dve petadārake passitvā tatheva pucchi, tepissa attano kammaṃ kathesuṃ. Te kira bhārukacchanagare dārakakāle gandhavāṇijjāya jīvikaṃ kappentā attano mātari khīṇāsave nimantetvā bhojentiyā gehaṃ gantvā ‘‘amhākaṃ santakaṃ kasmā samaṇānaṃ desi, tayā dinnaṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjanakasamaṇānaṃ mukhato kāḷalohitaṃ paggharatū’’ti akkosiṃsu. Te tena kammena niraye paccitvā tassa vipākāvasesena petayoniyaṃ nibbattitvā tadā imaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavanti. Tampi sutvā soṇo ativiya saṃvegajāto ahosi.

After that, as he continued on, he saw two young ghosts (petadarake) from whose mouths black blood was flowing, and he asked them the same question. They told him about their deed. It seems that when they were children living in Bharukaccha and making a living by selling perfumes, they went to their mother’s house, where she was inviting a purified one (khīṇāsave) to offer food. They said, "Why are you giving our property to the monks? May black blood flow from the mouths of the monks who eat the food you have given!" As a result of that deed, they suffered in hell, and now, due to the remaining result of that action, they are reborn in the realm of ghosts and are experiencing this suffering. Having heard that, Soṇa became even more agitated.

‘‘atha kho soṇo upāsako…pe… pabbājetu maṃ, bhante, ayyo mahākaccāno’’ti.

"Then Soṇa the lay follower…pe… May the venerable Mahākaccāna ordain me."

yathā yathātiādipadānaṃ ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yena yena ākārena ayyo mahākaccāno dhammaṃ deseti ācikkhati paññapeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati vibhajati uttāniṃ karoti pakāseti, tena tena me upaparikkhato evaṃ hoti ‘‘yadetaṃ sikkhattayabrahmacariyaṃ ekampi divasaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāyaekantaparipuṇṇaṃ,ekadivasampi kilesamalena amalīnaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāyaekantaparisuddhaṃ, saṅkhalikhitaṃlikhitasaṅkhasadisaṃ dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāgaṃ caritabbaṃ, idaṃ na sukaraṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā agāramajjhe vasantena ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ…pe… caritu’’nti.

The concise meaning of the words "yathā yathā" and so on is this: In whatever way the venerable Mahākaccāna teaches the Dhamma, explains, establishes, sets forth, clarifies, analyzes, and makes plain, in each of those ways, as I carefully consider it, it occurs to me, "This threefold training (sikkhattaya) of the holy life (Brahmacariya), even if practiced perfectly for a single day in order to reach the final moment of consciousness (carimakacitta), is entirely complete; even if kept unblemished by the defilements of craving for a single day in order to reach the final moment of consciousness, it is entirely pure, and should be lived like a conch shell that has been polished, like a white conch shell. This is not easy for one living in a household to practice entirely completely…pe…."

‘‘icchāmahaṃ bhante’’tiādimāha. Thero pana ‘‘na tāvassa ñāṇaṃ paripākaṃ gata’’nti upadhāretvā ñāṇaparipākaṃ āgamayamāno‘‘dukkaraṃ kho’’tiādinā pabbajjāchandaṃ nivāresi. Tatthaekaseyyanti adutiyaseyyaṃ. Ettha ca seyyāsīsena ‘‘eko tiṭṭhati, eko gacchati, eko nisīdatī’’tiādinā nayena vuttaṃ catūsu iriyāpathesu kāyavivekaṃ dīpeti, na ekikā hutvā sayanamattaṃ.Ekabhattanti ‘‘ekabhattiko hoti rattūparato virato vikālabhojanā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.10, 194; ma. ni. 1.293 a. ni. 3.71) evaṃ vuttaṃ vikālabhojanā viratiṃ sandhāya vadati.Brahmacariyanti methunaviratibrahmacariyaṃ, sikkhattayānuyogasaṅkhātaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ vā.Iṅghāti codanatthe nipāto.Tatthevāti geheyeva.Buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ anuyuñjāti niccasīlauposathasīlaniyamādibhedaṃ pañcaṅgaṃ aṭṭhaṅgaṃ dasaṅgañca sīlaṃ tadanurūpañca samādhipaññābhāvanaṃ anuyuñja. Etañhi upāsakena pubbabhāge anuyuñjitabbaṃ buddhasāsanaṃ nāma. Tenāha‘‘kālayuttaṃ ekaseyyaṃ ekabhattaṃ brahmacariya’’nti.

He said, "I wish, venerable sir…" The Elder, however, discerning that his knowledge was not yet mature, and waiting for his knowledge to ripen, prevented his desire for ordination with "It is difficult…" Here, ekaseyya means sleeping alone, without a companion. In this context, it indicates physical solitude in the four postures—"one stands, one walks, one sits," and so on—and not merely sleeping alone. Ekabhatta means abstaining from evening meals, as stated: "He eats only one meal a day, abstaining from food at night, refraining from untimely eating" (dī. ni. 1.10, 194; ma. ni. 1.293 a. ni. 3.71). This refers to abstaining from untimely food. Brahmacariya refers to the Brahmacariya of abstaining from sexual intercourse, or the religious life (sāsana Brahmacariya), which encompasses the threefold training. Iṅgha is a particle used in the sense of urging. Tattheva means in the household itself. Buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ anuyuñjā means to practice the precepts of the Buddhas, which are divided into the five precepts, the eight precepts, and the ten precepts, along with the corresponding development of concentration and wisdom. This is the teaching of the Buddhas that should be practiced by a lay follower in the preliminary stage. Therefore, he said, "A solitary bed, a single meal, and the holy life are suitable at the right time."

kālayuttanti cātuddasīpañcaddasīaṭṭhamīpāṭihārikapakkhasaṅkhātena kālena yuttaṃ, yathāvuttakāle vā tuyhaṃ anuyuñjantassa yuttaṃ patirūpaṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ, na sabbakālaṃ sabbanti adhippāyo. Sabbametaṃ ñāṇassa aparipakkattā tassa kāmānaṃ duppahānatāya sammā paṭipattiyaṃ yogyaṃ kārāpetuṃ vadati, na pabbajjāchandaṃ nivāretuṃ.Pabbajjābhisaṅkhāroti pabbajituṃ ārambho ussāho.Paṭippassambhīti indriyānaṃ aparipakkattā saṃvegassa ca nātitikkhabhāvato vūpasami. Kiñcāpi paṭippassambhi, therena vuttavidhiṃ pana anutiṭṭhanto kālena kālaṃ theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā payirupāsanto dhammaṃ suṇāti. Tassa vuttanayeneva dutiyampi pabbajjāya cittaṃ uppajji, therassa ca ārocesi, dutiyampi thero paṭikkhipi. Tatiyavāre pana ñāṇassa paripakkabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘idāni naṃ pabbājetuṃ kālo’’ti thero pabbājesi, pabbajitañca taṃ tīṇi saṃvaccharāni atikkamitvā gaṇaṃ pariyesitvā upasampādesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ‘‘dutiyampi kho soṇo…pe… upasampādesī’’ti.

Kālayutta means suitable for the time, connected with the time designated by the fourteenth, fifteenth, and eighth days of the lunar cycle, and the special observance days (pāṭihārikapakkha). Or, it means suitable and appropriate for you to practice at the times mentioned, but not at all times. The intention is that not everything is possible at all times. All of this is said because his knowledge is not yet mature and his desires have not been overcome, so he is encouraging him to engage in proper practice, not to prevent his desire for ordination. Pabbajjābhisaṅkhāro means the intention and effort to become ordained. Paṭippassambhī means calmed down, because his faculties were not yet mature and his agitation was not too intense. Although he calmed down, while observing the methods stated by the Elder, he would approach the Elder from time to time to attend upon him and listen to the Dhamma. In the same way as stated, the thought of ordination arose in him a second time, and he told the Elder. The Elder rejected him a second time. On the third occasion, however, knowing that his knowledge had matured, the Elder thought, "Now is the time to ordain him," and he ordained him. After his ordination, having waited for three years and searched for a group, he conferred the higher ordination (upasampada). Referring to that, it is said, "A second time, Soṇa…pe… conferred the higher ordination."

appabhikkhukoti katipayabhikkhuko. Tadā kira bhikkhū yebhuyyena majjhimadeseyeva vasiṃsu, tasmā tattha katipayā eva ahesuṃ. Te ca ekasmiṃ gāme eko, ekasmiṃ nigame dveti evaṃ visuṃ visuṃ vasiṃsu.Kicchenāti dukkhena.Kasirenāti āyāsena.Tato tatoti tasmā tasmā gāmanigamādito. Therena hi katipaye bhikkhū ānetvā aññesu ānīyamānesu pubbe ānītā kenacideva karaṇīyena pakkamiṃsu, kañci kālaṃ āgametvā puna tesu ānīyamānesu itare pakkamiṃsu. Evaṃ punappunaṃ ānayanena sannipāto cireneva ahosi. Theropi tadā ekavihārī ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ vassānaṃ…pe… sannipātāpetvā’’ti.

Appabhikkhuko means with few monks. At that time, it seems that monks mostly resided in the middle country (majjhimadesa), so there were only a few there. And they lived separately, one in one village, two in one town. Kicchenā means with difficulty. Kasirenā means with hardship. Tato tato means from this village and that town. The Elder, having brought a few monks, and while others were being brought, those who had been brought earlier left due to some task or other. After waiting for some time, when they were being brought again, the others left. Thus, the gathering happened only after a long time by repeatedly bringing them. At that time, the Elder was also living alone. Therefore, it is said, "After three years…pe… having gathered them together."

Vassaṃvutthassāti vassaṃ upagantvā vusitavato.Ediso ca ediso cāti evarūpo ca evarūpo ca. ‘‘Evarūpāya nāma rūpakāyasampattiyā samannāgato, evarūpāya dhammakāyasampattiyā samannāgato’’tisutoyeva me so bhagavā. Na ca mayā sammukhā diṭṭhoti ettha pana puthujjanasaddhāya eva āyasmā soṇo bhagavantaṃ daṭṭhukāmo ahosi. Aparabhāge pana satthārā saddhiṃ ekagandhakuṭiyaṃ vasitvā paccūsasamayaṃ ajjhiṭṭho soḷasa aṭṭhakavaggiyāni satthu sammukhā aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasi katvā sabbaṃ cetasā samannāharitvā atthadhammapaṭisaṃvedī hutvā bhaṇanto dhammupasañhitapāmojjādimukhena samāhito sarabhaññapariyosāne vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā saṅkhāre sammasanto anupubbena arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Etadatthameva hissa bhagavatā attanā saddhiṃ ekagandhakuṭiyaṃ vāso āṇattoti vadanti.

Vassaṃvutthassa means having entered and lived through the rains retreat. Ediso ca ediso ca means such and such. "Such and such endowed with a beautiful physical form, such and such endowed with a beautiful Dhamma-body." "I have only heard of that Blessed One. I have not seen him in person." Here, venerable Soṇa desired to see the Blessed One with the faith of an ordinary person. However, later, having lived with the Teacher in the same Perfume Chamber, at dawn, requested by the Teacher, he made the sixteen sections of the Aṭṭhaka Vagga (aṭṭhakavaggiyāni) present in his mind, remembering all of it with his heart, and experiencing the meaning and the Dhamma, he recited it, his mind concentrated with joy connected to the Dhamma, and at the end of the recitation (sarabhañña), having established insight (vipassanā), contemplating the conditioned phenomena (saṅkhāra), he gradually attained arahantship. They say that it was for this purpose that the Blessed One had ordered him to live with him in the same Perfume Chamber.

Keci panāhu ‘‘na ca mayā sammukhā diṭṭhoti idaṃ rūpakāyadassanameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Āyasmā hi soṇo pabbajitvā therassa santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā ghaṭento vāyamanto anupasampannova sotāpanno hutvā upasampajjitvā ‘upāsakāpi sotāpannā honti, ahampi sotāpanno, kimettha citta’nti uparimaggatthāya vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā antovasseyeva chaḷabhiñño hutvā visuddhipavāraṇāya pavāresi. Ariyasaccadassanena bhagavato dhammakāyo diṭṭho nāma hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘yo kho, vakkali, dhammaṃ passati, so maṃ passatī’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.87). Tasmāssa dhammakāyadassanaṃ pageva siddhaṃ, pavāretvā pana rūpakāyaṃ daṭṭhukāmo ahosī’’ti.

Some, however, say: "The statement 'I have not seen him in person' refers only to seeing the physical body. Venerable Soṇa, after ordaining and taking a meditation subject (kammaṭṭhāna) from the Elder, striving and endeavoring, became a stream-enterer (sotāpanna) even before the higher ordination, and after receiving the higher ordination, thinking, 'Lay followers are also stream-enterers, and I am also a stream-enterer, what is the point of this?' he developed insight for the sake of the higher paths and became endowed with the six supernormal knowledges (chaḷabhiñño) within the rains retreat itself and concluded the rains retreat with the purification ceremony (visuddhipavāraṇā). By seeing the Noble Truths, one is said to have seen the Dhamma-body of the Blessed One. For it was said, ‘He who sees the Dhamma, Vakkali, sees me’ (saṃ. ni. 3.87). Therefore, his seeing of the Dhamma-body was already accomplished, but after the pavāraṇā, he desired to see the physical body."

Pāsādikantiādipadānaṃ attho aṭṭhakathāyameva vutto. Tatthavisūkāyikavipphanditānanti paṭipakkhabhūtānaṃ diṭṭhicittavipphanditānanti attho.Pāsādikanti (udā. aṭṭha. 10) vā dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaasītianubyañjanabyāmappabhāketumālālaṅkatāya samantapāsādikāya attano sarīrappabhāya sampattiyā rūpakāyadassanabyāvaṭassa janassa sabbabhāgato pasādāvahaṃ.Pasādanīyanti dasabalacatuvesārajjachaasādhāraṇañāṇaaṭṭhārasaāveṇikabuddhadhammappabhutiaparimāṇaguṇagaṇasamannāgatāya dhammakāyasampattiyā parikkhakajanassa pasādanīyaṃ pasīditabbayuttaṃ pasādakaṃ vā.Santindriyanti cakkhādipañcindriyalolatāvigamena vūpasantapañcindriyaṃ.Santamānasanti chaṭṭhassa manindriyassa nibbisevanabhāvūpagamanena vūpasantamānasaṃ.Uttamadamathasamathaṃ anuppattanti lokuttarapaññāvimutticetovimuttisaṅkhātaṃ uttamaṃ damathaṃ samathañca anuppatvā adhigantvā ṭhitaṃ.Dantanti suparisuddhakāyasamācāratāya hatthapādakukkuccābhāvato davādiabhāvato ca kāyena dantaṃ.Guttanti suparisuddhavacīsamācāratāya niratthakavācābhāvato ravādiabhāvato ca vācāya guttaṃ.Yatindriyanti suparisuddhamanosamācāratāya ariyiddhiyogena abyāvaṭaappaṭisaṅkhupekkhābhāvato ca manindriyavasena yatindriyaṃ.Nāganti chandādivasena agamanato, pahīnānaṃ rāgādikilesānaṃ apunāgamanato apaccāgamanato kassacipi āgussa sabbathāpi akaraṇato, punabbhavassa ca agamanatoti imehi kāraṇehi nāgaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘pāsādika’’nti iminā rūpakāyena bhagavato pamāṇabhūtataṃ dīpeti, ‘‘pasādanīya’’nti iminā dhammakāyena. ‘‘Santindriya’’ntiādinā sesehi pamāṇabhūtataṃ dīpeti, tena catuppamāṇike lokasannivāse anavasesato sattānaṃ bhagavato pamāṇabhāvo pakāsitoti veditabbo.Ekavihāreti ekagandhakuṭiyaṃ. Gandhakuṭi hi idha ‘‘vihāro’’ti adhippeto.Vatthunti vasituṃ.

The meaning of the words pāsādika and so on has already been stated in the commentary. There, visūkāyikavipphanditānanti means the opposing views and mental distortions. Pāsādika (udā. aṭṭha. 10) means causing joy in every way to the people who are occupied with seeing the physical body because of the abundance of the radiance of his body, which is entirely pleasing with the thirty-two marks of a great man (mahāpurisalakkhaṇa), the eighty minor marks, the extent of his body’s light, and adorned with a garland. Pasādanīya means causing joy to those who examine, worthy of being pleased, or causing pleasure because of the abundance of the qualities of the Dhamma-body, which is endowed with immeasurable qualities such as the ten powers, the four kinds of intrepidity, the six kinds of uncommon knowledge, and the eighteen unique qualities of a Buddha. Santindriya means with subdued senses, the five senses being calmed by the absence of greed. Santamānasa means with a calmed mind, the sixth sense, the mind, being calmed by the absence of disturbance. Uttamadamathasamathaṃ anuppatta means having attained and established the supreme taming and calming, which is the supramundane wisdom and the liberation of mind and the liberation by wisdom. Danta means tamed in body because of perfectly pure bodily conduct, the absence of worry about hands and feet, and the absence of biting, and so on. Gutta means guarded in speech because of perfectly pure verbal conduct, the absence of pointless talk, and the absence of noise, and so on. Yatindriya means restrained in the senses because of perfectly pure mental conduct, the absence of disturbance through the exercise of supernormal power (ariyiddhi), and the absence of indifference without reflection. Nāga means not going in the way of desire, because the defilements of lust, and so on, that have been abandoned do not come again, because he does not return, because he never does any harm to anyone, and because he does not go to rebirth. For these reasons, he is called Nāga. Here, pāsādika indicates that the Blessed One is the standard (pamāṇabhūta) through his physical body, and pasādanīya indicates that he is the standard through his Dhamma-body. Santindriya and the rest indicate that he is the standard through the remaining qualities. Therefore, it should be understood that in the fourfold universe, the Blessed One's state of being the standard for beings is revealed without remainder.

258.Ajjhokāse vītināmetvāti (udā. aṭṭha. 46) ajjhokāse nisajjāya vītināmetvā. ‘‘Yasmā bhagavā āyasmato soṇassa samāpattisamāpajjanena paṭisanthāraṃ karonto sāvakasādhāraṇā sabbā samāpattiyo anulomapaṭilomaṃ samāpajjanto bahudeva rattiṃ ajjhokāse nisajjāya vītināmetvā pāde pakkhāletvā vihāraṃ pāvisi, tasmā āyasmāpi soṇo bhagavato adhippāyaṃ ñatvā tadanurūpaṃ sabbā tā samāpattiyo samāpajjanto bahudeva rattiṃ ajjhokāse nisajjāya vītināmetvā pāde pakkhāletvā vihāraṃ pāvisī’’ti keci vadanti. Pavisitvā ca bhagavatā anuññāto cīvaraṃ tirokaraṇīyaṃ katvāpi bhagavato pādapasse nisajjāya vītināmesi.Ajjhesīti āṇāpesi.Paṭibhātu taṃ bhikkhu dhammo bhāsitunti bhikkhu tuyhaṃ dhammo bhāsituṃ upaṭṭhātu ñāṇamukhaṃ āgacchatu, yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ bhaṇāhīti attho.

258.Ajjhokāse vītināmetvā means spending the night in the open air by sitting. "Because the Blessed One, while honoring venerable Soṇa with the attainment of concentration, entering into all the concentrations common to disciples in direct and reverse order, spent much of the night in the open air by sitting, then washed his feet and entered the dwelling, venerable Soṇa also, knowing the Blessed One's intention, did the same, entering into all those concentrations in accordance with it, spending much of the night in the open air by sitting, then washed his feet and entered the dwelling," some say. And having entered, when permitted by the Blessed One, even after putting away his robe (cīvaraṃ tirokaraṇīyaṃ katvā), he spent the night sitting near the Blessed One's feet. Ajjhesī means ordered. Paṭibhātu taṃ bhikkhu dhammo bhāsitunti means, "Monk, may the Dhamma occur to you to speak, may the doorway to knowledge come to you, speak the Dhamma as you have heard it, as you have learned it."

Sabbāneva aṭṭhakavaggikānīti aṭṭhakavaggabhūtānikāmasuttādīni (mahāni. 1) soḷasa suttāni.Sarena abhāsīti suttussāraṇasarena abhāsi, sarabhaññavasena kathesīti attho.Sarabhaññapariyosāneti ussāraṇāvasāne.Suggahitānīti sammā uggahitāni.Sumanasikatānīti suṭṭhu manasi katāni. Ekacco uggahaṇakāle sammā uggahetvāpi pacchā sajjhāyādivasena manasikaraṇakāle byañjanāni vā micchā ropeti, padapaccābhaṭṭhaṃ vā karoti, na evamayaṃ. Iminā pana sammadeva yathuggahitaṃ manasi katāni. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sumanasikatānīti suṭṭhu manasi katānī’’ti.Sūpadhāritānīti atthatopi suṭṭhu upadhāritāni. Atthe hi suṭṭhu upadhārite sakkā pāḷi sammā ussāretuṃ.Kalyāṇiyāpi vācāya samannāgatoti sithiladhanitādīnaṃ yathāvidhānaṃ vacanena parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāya poriyā vācāya samannāgato.Vissaṭṭhāyāti vimuttāya. Etenassa vimuttavāditaṃ dasseti.Anelagalāyāti elaṃ vuccati doso, taṃ na paggharatīti anelagalā, tāya niddosāyāti attho. Atha vāanelagalāyāti anelāya ca agalāya ca, niddosāya agalitapadabyañjanāya aparihīnapadabyañjanāyāti attho. Tathā hi naṃ bhagavā ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kalyāṇavākkaraṇānaṃ yadidaṃ soṇo kuṭikaṇṇo’’ti (a. ni. 1.198, 206) etadagge ṭhapesi.Atthassa viññāpaniyāti yathādhippetaṃ atthaṃ ñāpetuṃ samatthāya.

Sabbāneva aṭṭhakavaggikānī means the sixteen suttas that constitute the Aṭṭhaka Vagga, beginning with the kāmasuttā (mahāni. 1). Sarena abhāsī means he spoke with the tone of reciting the suttas, he spoke in the style of recitation. Sarabhaññapariyosāne means at the end of the recitation. Suggahitānī means well-learned. Sumanasikatānī means well-remembered. Some, even having learned well at the time of learning, later, at the time of remembering through recitation, and so on, either misapply the consonants or make a mistake in the words. But this one is not like that. By this, it means that they were remembered exactly as they were learned. Therefore, it is said, "sumanasikatānīti suṭṭhu manasi katānī" means they were well-remembered. Sūpadhāritānī means they were well-understood in meaning as well. For when the meaning is well understood, it is possible to recite the Pali correctly. Kalyāṇiyāpi vācāya samannāgato means endowed with a beautiful voice, with a complete pronunciation of words and syllables according to the rules, and with a full voice, without being slurred. Vissaṭṭhāyā means articulate. By this, it shows that he is articulate in speech. Anelagalāyā means without mucus in the throat, elaṃ means fault, that which does not flow is anelagalā, by that it is faultless. Or, anelagalāyā means without ela and without agala, without fault and with unslurred syllables, with undiminished syllables. Thus, the Blessed One placed him in the foremost position, saying, "This is the foremost of my monks who are speakers of beautiful speech, namely, Soṇa Kuṭikaṇṇa" (a. ni. 1.198, 206). Atthassa viññāpaniyā means capable of making known the meaning as intended.

Kativassoti so kira majjhimavayassa tatiye koṭṭhāse ṭhito ākappasampanno ca paresaṃ ciratarapabbajito viya khāyati. Taṃ sandhāya bhagavā pucchīti keci, taṃ akāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ santaṃ samādhisukhaṃ anubhavituṃ yutto, ettakaṃ kālaṃ kasmā pamādaṃ āpannosīti pana anuyuñjituṃ satthā ‘‘kativassosī’’ti taṃ pucchi. Tenevāha‘‘kissa pana tvaṃ bhikkhu evaṃ ciraṃ akāsī’’ti. Tatthakissāti kiṃkāraṇā.Evaṃ ciraṃ akāsīti evaṃ cirāyi, kena kāraṇena evaṃ cirakālaṃ pabbajjaṃ anupagantvā agāramajjhe vasīti attho.Ciraṃ diṭṭho meti cirena cirakālena mayā diṭṭho.Kāmesūti vatthukāmesu kilesakāmesu ca.Ādīnavoti doso.Apicāti kāmesu ādīnave kenaci pakārena diṭṭhepi na tāvāhaṃ gharāvāsato nikkhamituṃ asakkhiṃ. Kasmā?Sambādho gharāvāso,uccāvacehi kiccakaraṇīyehi samupabyūḷho agāriyabhāvo. Tenevāha‘‘bahukicco bahukaraṇīyo’’ti.

"Kativasso" meant that he was of middle age, in the third stage, possessed of good appearance, and appeared to others as if he had been ordained for a long time. Some say that the Buddha asked him with this in mind, but that is without reason. Since he was fit to experience the bliss of concentration, the Teacher asked him, "How long have you been a monk?" to urge him, "Why have you been negligent for so long?" Therefore, he said, "kissa pana tvaṃ bhikkhu evaṃ ciraṃ akāsī" which means "But why, bhikkhu, have you done this for so long?". Here, "kissa" means for what reason. "Evaṃ ciraṃ akāsī" means for so long; what is the reason that you lived in a household for such a long time without embracing the monastic life? "Ciraṃ diṭṭho me" means seen by me after a long time. "Kāmesū" means in the objects of desire and the defilements of desire. "Ādīnavo" means the fault. "Apicā" means even when the fault in desires is seen in some way, I was not able to leave the household life. Why? "Sambādho gharāvāso," household life is crowded, filled with various tasks and duties. Therefore, he said, "bahukicco bahukaraṇīyo."

Etamatthaṃ viditvāti kāmesu yathābhūtaṃ ādīnavadassino cittaṃ cirāyitvāpi gharāvāse na pakkhandati, aññadatthu padumapalāse udakabindu viya vinivattatiyevāti etamatthaṃ sabbākārato viditvā.Imaṃ udānanti pavattiṃ nivattiñca sammadeva jānanto pavattiyaṃ taṃnimitte ca na kadācipi ramatīti idamatthadīpakaṃ imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.

"Etamatthaṃ viditvā" means knowing this matter in all respects, that the mind, seeing the fault in desires as it truly is, does not incline towards household life even after a long time, but rather turns away like a drop of water on a lotus leaf. "Imaṃ udānaṃ" means knowing perfectly well both arising and ceasing, and never delighting in arising and its causes, he uttered this Udāna, which illuminates this meaning.

disvā ādīnavaṃ loketi sabbasmimpi saṅkhāraloke ‘‘anicco dukkho vipariṇāmadhammo’’tiādīnavaṃ dosaṃ paññācakkhunā passitvā. Etena vipassanācāro kathito.Ñatvā dhammaṃ nirūpadhinti sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggattā nirupadhiṃ nibbānadhammaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñatvā, nissaraṇavivekāsaṅkhatāmatasabhāvato maggañāṇena paṭivijjhitvā. ‘‘Disvā ñatvā’’ti imesaṃ padānaṃ ‘‘ghataṃ pivitvā balaṃ hoti, sīhaṃ disvā bhayaṃ hoti, paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā hontī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.271) viya hetuatthatā daṭṭhabbā.Ariyo na ramatī pāpeti kilesehi ārakattā ariyo sappuriso aṇumattepi pāpe na ramati. Kasmā?Pāpe na ramatī sucīti suvisuddhakāyasamācārāditāya suci suddhapuggalo rājahaṃso viya uccāraṭṭhāne pāpe saṃkiliṭṭhadhamme na ramati nābhinandati. ‘‘Pāpo na ramatī suci’’ntipi pāṭho, tassattho – pāpo puggalo suciṃ anavajjaṃ vodānadhammaṃ na ramati, aññadatthu gāmasūkarādayo viya uccāraṭṭhānaṃ asuciṃ saṃkilesadhammaṃyeva ramatīti paṭipakkhato desanaṃ parivatteti.

"disvā ādīnavaṃ loke" means seeing with the eye of wisdom the fault in the entire world of conditioned phenomena, that it is "impermanent, suffering, and subject to change." This describes the practice of insight. "Ñatvā dhammaṃ nirūpadhiṃ" means knowing as it truly is the Nibbāna-dhamma, which is without condition because it is the relinquishment of all conditions, realizing it with the knowledge of the path due to its nature of liberation, seclusion, and being unconditioned, and deathless. The meaning of cause should be seen in these words "Disvā ñatvā" as in "having drunk the ghee, there is strength; having seen the lion, there is fear; and by seeing with wisdom, the āsavas are destroyed" (M. Ni. 1.271). "Ariyo na ramatī pāpe" means the Ariya, the noble person, refrains from even the slightest evil because he is far from defilements. Why? "Pāpe na ramatī sucī" means the pure person, pure due to his very pure bodily conduct, does not delight or rejoice in evil, in defiled things, like a royal swan in a place of excrement. "Pāpo na ramatī suci" is also a reading; its meaning is that the evil person does not delight in purity, in blameless, cleansing things, but rather, like village pigs and the like, delights only in impurity, in defiled things, in a place of excrement, thus reversing the teaching from the opposite perspective.

Soṇakuṭikaṇṇavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the story of Soṇakuṭikaṇṇa is finished.

259.Kāḷasīhoti kāḷamukhavānarajāti. Sesamettha pāḷito aṭṭhakathāto ca suviññeyyamevāti.

259. Kāḷasīho means a species of monkey with black faces. The rest here is easily understood from the Pāḷi and the commentary.

Cammakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of Cammakkhandhaka is finished.

6. Bhesajjakkhandhakaṃ

6. Bhesajjakkhandhakaṃ

Pañcabhesajjādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Pañcabhesajjādikathā

261.Bhesajjakkhandhakenacchādentīti ruciṃ na uppādenti.

261. In the Bhesajjakkhandhaka, "nacchādentī" means they do not produce liking.

262.Susukāti samudde bhavā ekā macchajāti. Kumbhīlātipi vadanti.Saṃsaṭṭhanti parissāvitaṃ.Telaparibhogenāti sattāhakālikaparibhogaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

262. "Susukā" means a type of fish that lives in the ocean. They also call it Kumbhīla. "Saṃsaṭṭha" means strained. "Telaparibhogenā" means it is said in reference to use permissible for seven days.

263.Piṭṭhehīti pisitehi.Ubbhidaṃnāma ūsarapaṃsumayaṃ.

263. "Piṭṭhehī" means with ground grains. "Ubbhidaṃ" means alkaline soil.

264.Chakaṇanti gomayaṃ.Pākatikacuṇṇaṃnāma apakkakasāvacuṇṇaṃ. Tena ṭhapetvā gandhacuṇṇaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti.

264. "Chakaṇa" means cow dung. "Pākatikacuṇṇaṃ" means unbaked astringent powder. They say that after applying that, any fragrant powder is acceptable.

265.Suvaṇṇagerukoti suvaṇṇatutthādi.Añjanūpapisananti añjanatthāya upapisitabbaṃ yaṃ kiñci cuṇṇajātaṃ.

265. "Suvaṇṇageruko" means orpiment, etc. "Añjanūpapisana" means any kind of powder that should be ground for use as eye salve.

268.Sāmaṃ gahetvāti ettha sappadaṭṭhassa atthāya aññena bhikkhunā gahitampi sāmaṃ gahitasaṅkhameva gacchatīti veditabbaṃ.

268. "Sāmaṃ gahetvā" means here, it should be understood that even if another bhikkhu takes it for the sake of someone bitten by a snake, it still counts as having been taken oneself.

269.Gharadinnakābādhonāma vasīkaraṇatthāya gharaṇiyā dinnabhesajjasamuṭṭhito ābādho. Tenāha‘‘vasīkaraṇapāṇakasamuṭṭhitarogo’’ti.Ghara-saddo cettha abhedena gharaṇiyā vattamāno adhippeto.‘‘Akaṭayūsenāti anabhisaṅkhatena muggayūsena.Kaṭākaṭenāti mugge pacitvā acāletvāva parissāvitena muggasūpenā’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.

269. "Gharadinnakābādho" means an illness arising from medicine given by a wife for the purpose of enchantment. Therefore, he said, "vasīkaraṇapāṇakasamuṭṭhitarogo" which means "a disease arising from an enchanted potion". Here, the word "ghara" is intended to refer to the wife without differentiation. "Akaṭayūsenā" means with unstrained mung bean soup. "Kaṭākaṭenāti mugge pacitvā acāletvāva parissāvitena muggasūpenā" means "with mung bean soup strained after cooking the mung beans without stirring," is said in the Gaṇṭhipada**.

Guḷādianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the permission of molasses etc.

272.Guḷakaraṇanti guḷakaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, ucchusālanti vuttaṃ hoti.

272. "Guḷakaraṇa" means the place where molasses is made, which means a sugarcane mill.

274.Avissatthāti sāsaṅkā.

274. "Avissatthā" means distrustful.

276.Appamattakepipavārentīti appamattakepi gahite pavārenti, ‘‘bahumhi gahite aññesaṃ nappahotī’’ti maññamānā appamattakaṃ gahetvā pavārentīti adhippāyo.Paṭisaṅkhāpi paṭikkhipantīti ‘‘divā bhojanatthāya bhavissatī’’ti sallakkhetvāpi paṭikkhipanti.

276. "Appamattakepi pavārentī" means they offer even when only a small amount is taken, the idea being that they offer, thinking "if a large amount is taken, it will not be enough for others." "Paṭisaṅkhāpi paṭikkhipantī" means they refuse even after considering "it will be for eating during the day."

279.Sambādhe dahanakammaṃ paṭikkhepābhāvo vaṭṭati.

279. In a crowded place, there is no fault in refusing cremation.

280.Ubhatopasannāti ubhayato pasannā.Māghātoti ‘‘mā ghātetha pāṇino’’ti evaṃ māghātaghositadivaso.

280. "Ubhatopasannā" means pleased in both ways. "Māghāto" means the day proclaimed as Māghāta, "Do not kill living beings."

Yāgumadhugoḷakādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Yāgumadhugoḷakādikathā

282.Madhugoḷakanti sakkarādisaṃyuttapūvaṃ.Āyuṃ detīti āyudānaṃ deti.Vaṇṇanti sarīravaṇṇaṃ.Sukhanti kāyikacetasikasukhaṃ.Balanti sarīrathāmaṃ.Paṭibhānanti yuttamuttapaṭibhānaṃ.Vātaṃ anulometīti vātaṃ anulometvā harati.Vatthiṃ sodhetīti dhamaniyo suddhaṃ karoti.Āmāvasesaṃ pācetīti sace āmāvasesakaṃ hoti, taṃ pāceti.Anuppavecchatīti deti. Vātañca byapanetīti sambandhitabbaṃ.

282. "Madhugoḷaka" means a sweet cake mixed with sugar, etc. "Āyuṃ detī" means it gives longevity. "Vaṇṇaṃ" means complexion. "Sukhaṃ" means physical and mental happiness. "Balaṃ" means physical strength. "Paṭibhānaṃ" means ready wit. "Vātaṃ anulometī" means it regulates the wind element and carries it downwards. "Vatthiṃ sodhetī" means it purifies the vessels. "Āmāvasesaṃ pācetī" means if there is any residue of indigestion, it digests it. "Anuppavecchatī" means it gives. And "vātañca byapanetīti" should be connected, meaning it also removes the wind.

283.Nanu ca ‘‘paramparabhojanena kāretabbo’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ. Paramparabhojanañhi pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena nimantitassa taṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhuñjantassa hoti, ime ca bhikkhū bhojjayāguṃ paribhuñjiṃsu, pañcasu bhojanesu aññataranti āha‘‘bhojjayāguyā hi pavāraṇā hotī’’ti. Yasmā pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ paṭikkhipantassa vuttā pavāraṇā bhojjayāguṃ paṭikkhipantassapi hotiyeva, tasmā bhojjayāgupi odanagatikāyevāti adhippāyo.

283. Now, why was it said, "it should be done with consecutive eating"? Consecutive eating occurs for someone who, having been invited to one of the five kinds of meals, sets that aside and eats another of the five kinds of meals, and these bhikkhus consumed rice-gruel, one of the five kinds of food, so he said, "bhojjayāguyā hi pavāraṇā hotī". Since the prohibition was said for someone who refuses one of the five kinds of meals, it also applies to someone who refuses rice-gruel, therefore, the idea is that rice-gruel is also in the category of rice.

284.Sukhumojaṃpakkhipiṃsūti ‘‘bhagavā paribhuñjissatī’’ti maññamānā pakkhipiṃsu.

284. "Sukhumojaṃ pakkhipiṃsū" means they added fine essence, thinking "the Blessed One will consume it."

Pāṭaligāmavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Pāṭaligāmavatthukathā

285.Pāṭaligāmoti (udā. aṭṭha. 76) evaṃnāmako magadharaṭṭhe eko gāmo. Tassa kira gāmassa māpanadivase gāmaṅgaṇaṭṭhāne dve tayo pāṭalaṅkurā pathavito ubbhijjitvā nikkhamiṃsu. Tena taṃ ‘‘pāṭaligāmo’’ tveva vohariṃsu.Tadavasarīti taṃ pāṭaligāmaṃ avasari anupāpuṇi.Pāṭaligāmikāti pāṭaligāmavāsino.Upāsakāti te kira bhagavato paṭhamadassanena keci saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhitā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘upāsakā’’ti.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti pāṭaligāme kira ajātasattuno licchavirājūnañca manussā kālena kālaṃ gantvā gehasāmike gehato nīharitvā māsampi aḍḍhamāsampi vasanti. Tena pāṭaligāmavāsino manussā niccupaddutā ‘‘etesañceva āgatakāle vasanaṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatīti ekapasse issarānaṃ bhaṇḍapaṭisāmanaṭṭhānaṃ, ekapasse vasanaṭṭhānaṃ, ekapasse āgantukānaṃ addhikamanussānaṃ, ekapasse daliddānaṃ kapaṇamanussānaṃ, ekapasse gilānānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti sabbesaṃ aññamaññaṃ aghaṭṭetvā vasanappahonakaṃ nagaramajjhe mahatiṃ sālaṃ kāresuṃ, tassa nāmaṃāvasathāgāranti. Āgantvā vasanti ettha āgantukāti āvasatho, tadeva āgāraṃāvasathāgāraṃ.

285. "Pāṭaligāmo" (Udā. Aṭṭha. 76) means a village of that name in the Magadha country. It is said that on the day of surveying that village, two or three pāṭali shoots sprouted from the earth in the village courtyard. Therefore, they called it "Pāṭaligāmo." "Tadavasarī" means he arrived at that Pāṭaligāma. "Pāṭaligāmikā" means the residents of Pāṭaligāma. "Upāsakā" means it is said that some of them were established in the refuges and precepts upon seeing the Blessed One for the first time. Therefore, it is said "Upāsakā". "Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsū" means in Pāṭaligāma, people of Ajātasattu and the Licchavi kings would go from time to time and take the householder out of his house and stay for a month or half a month. Therefore, the people of Pāṭaligāma, constantly troubled, thinking "this will be a dwelling place even at the time of their arrival," built a large hall in the middle of the city that was sufficient for everyone to live in without disturbing each other: one side for storing the belongings of the nobles, one side for living, one side for visiting travelers, one side for the poor and wretched, one side for the sick. The name of that was "āvasathāgāra". Āvasatho, those who come and dwell here are called āgantukāti (guests), that very house is "āvasathāgāraṃ."

‘‘adhivāsetu no, bhante, bhagavāāvasathāgāra’’nti.Tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.297-298; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.22) kiñcāpi taṃ divasameva pariniṭṭhitattā devavimānaṃ viya susajjitaṃ supaṭijaggitaṃ, buddhārahaṃ pana katvā na paññattaṃ. Buddhā hi nāma araññajjhāsayā araññārāmā, antogāme vaseyyuṃ vā no vā, tasmā bhagavato ruciṃ jānitvāva paññapessāmāti cintetvā te bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamiṃsu, idāni bhagavato ruciṃ jānitvā tathā paññāpetukāmā yenāvasathāgāraṃ tenupasaṅkamiṃsu.Sabbasanthariṃ āvasathāgāraṃ santharitvāti ettha santharaṇaṃ santhari, sabbo sakalo santhari etthātisabbasanthari. Atha vā santhatanti santhari, sabbaṃ santhari sabbasanthari, taṃsabbasanthariṃ. Bhāvanapuṃsakaniddesovāyaṃ, yathā sabbameva santhataṃ hoti, evaṃ santharitvāti attho. Sabbapaṭhamaṃ tāva ‘‘gomayaṃ nāma sabbamaṅgalesu vaṭṭatī’’ti sudhāparikammakatampi bhūmiṃ allagomayena opuñjāpetvā parisukkhabhāvaṃ ñatvā yathā akkantaṭṭhāne padaṃ paññāyati, evaṃ cātujjātiyagandhehi limpetvā upari nānāvaṇṇakaṭasārake santharitvā tesaṃ upari mahāpiṭṭhikakojave ādiṃ katvā hatthattharaṇādīhi nānāvaṇṇehi attharaṇehi santharitabbayuttakaṃ sabbokāsaṃ santharāpesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbasanthariṃ āvasathāgāraṃ santharitvā’’ti.

"adhivāsetu no, bhante, bhagavā āvasathāgāra"nti.Tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti (Dī. Ni. Aṭṭha. 3.297-298; Ma. Ni. Aṭṭha. 2.22) although it was completed on that very day, it was well-prepared and well-attended like a deva-mansion, but it was not prepared by deeming it fit for the Buddha. For Buddhas are forest-dwellers and enjoy forests, they may or may not dwell inside villages, therefore, thinking "we will prepare it only after knowing the Buddha's preference," they approached the Blessed One, now desiring to prepare it accordingly after knowing the Blessed One's preference, they approached the rest house. "Sabbasanthariṃ āvasathāgāraṃ santharitvā"ti here, santharaṇaṃ means santhari, sabbo means complete or whole, santhari etthāti sabbasanthari. Or, santhatanti means santhari, sabbaṃ santhari sabbasanthari, taṃ sabbasanthariṃ. This is an expression in the neuter gender, meaning just as it is all spread, so having spread it. First of all, thinking "cow dung is suitable for all auspicious occasions," even the floor that was plastered with lime was plastered with fresh cow dung, and knowing that it was almost dry, they smeared it with four kinds of perfumes so that a footprint would be visible where one stepped, then having spread out various colored woolen rugs on top, they had the entire space covered appropriately with various spreads such as large cushions, blankets, and handspreads. Therefore, it was said, "sabbasanthariṃ āvasathāgāraṃ santharitvā."

Āsanānīti majjhaṭṭhāne tāva maṅgalatthambhaṃ nissāya mahārahaṃ buddhāsanaṃ paññapetvā tattha yaṃ yaṃ mudukañca manoramañca paccattharaṇaṃ, taṃ taṃ attharitvā ubhatolohitakaṃ manuññadassanaṃ upadhānaṃ upadahitvā upari suvaṇṇarajatatārakavicittavitānaṃ bandhitvā gandhadāmapupphadāmapattādāmādīhi alaṅkaritvā samantā dvādasahatthe ṭhāne pupphajālaṃ kāretvā tiṃsahatthamattaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭasāṇiyā parikkhipāpetvā pacchimabhittiṃ nissāya bhikkhusaṅghassa pallaṅkapīṭhaapassayapīṭhamuṇḍapīṭhādīni paññapāpetvā upari setapaccattharaṇehi paccattharāpetvā sālāya pācīnapassaṃ attano nisajjāyoggaṃ kāresuṃ. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘āsanāni paññapetvā’’ti.

"Āsanānī"ti in the middle they placed a precious Buddha-seat resting on an auspicious pillar, and having spread on it whatever soft and delightful coverings there were, having placed a pleasing cushion with red ends on both sides, having hung a canopy adorned with golden and silver stars above, and having decorated it with garlands of perfumes, garlands of flowers, and strings of leaves, they had a web of flowers made in a twelve-cubit area all around, and they had an area of about thirty cubits enclosed with cloth. Leaning against the west wall, they had couches, chairs, leaning chairs, and footstools prepared for the Sangha of bhikkhus, and having spread white coverings on top, they made the eastern side of the hall suitable for their sitting. Regarding that, it was said, "āsanāni paññapetvā."

Udakamaṇikanti mahākucchikaṃ samekhalaṃ udakacāṭiṃ. Evaṃ bhagavā bhikkhusaṅgho ca yathāruciyā hatthapāde dhovissanti, mukhaṃ vikkhālessantīti tesu tesu ṭhānesu maṇivaṇṇassa udakassa pūretvā vāsatthāya nānāpupphāni ceva udakavāsacuṇṇāni ca pakkhipitvā kadalipaṇṇehi pidahitvā patiṭṭhapesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘udakamaṇikaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā’’ti.

"Udakamaṇikaṃ" means a water pot with a large belly and a stand. Thus, thinking "the Blessed One and the Sangha of bhikkhus will wash their hands and feet as they please, and rinse their mouths," they filled them with water of various colors in those places and placed various flowers and water-scented powders for washing and covered them with banana leaves. Regarding that, it was said, "udakamaṇikaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā."

Telapadīpaṃ āropetvāti rajatasuvaṇṇādimayadaṇḍāsu daṇḍadīpikāsu yonakarūpakādīnaṃ hatthe ṭhapitasuvaṇṇarajatādimayakapallikāsu ca telapadīpe jalayitvā.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti ettha pana te pāṭaligāmikaupāsakā na kevalaṃ āvasathāgārameva, atha kho sakalasmimpi gāme vīthiyo sajjāpetvā dhaje ussāpetvā gehadvāresu puṇṇaghaṭe ca kadaliādayo ca ṭhapāpetvā sakalagāmaṃ dīpamālāhi vippakiṇṇatārakaṃ viya katvā ‘‘khīrapake dārake khīraṃ pāyetha, daharakumāre lahuṃ lahuṃ bhojetvā sayāpetha, uccāsaddaṃ mā karittha, ajja ekarattiṃ satthā antogāme vasissati, buddhā nāma appasaddakāmā hontī’’ti bheriṃ carāpetvā sayaṃ daṇḍadīpikā ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsu.

"Telapadīpaṃ āropetvā"ti having lit oil lamps in lampstands made of silver, gold, etc., and in golden and silver bowls held in the hands of figures of dwarfs, etc. "Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsū"ti here, those Pāṭaligāma lay followers not only prepared the rest house, but also adorned the streets in the entire village, raised flags, placed full pots and banana trees etc. at the doors of their houses, and made the entire village like the star-scattered sky with rows of lamps, proclaiming, "Give milk to the breastfed children, feed the young children quickly and put them to bed, do not make loud noises, today the Teacher will spend the night inside the village, for Buddhas like quiet places," and taking lampstands themselves, they approached the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena yena āvasathāgāraṃ tenupasaṅkamīti ‘‘yassa dāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṃ maññatī’’ti evaṃ kira tehi kāle ārocite bhagavā lākhārasena tintarattakoviḷārapupphavaṇṇaṃ surattaṃ dupaṭṭaṃ kattariyā padumaṃ kantento viya, saṃvidhāya timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādento nivāsetvā suvaṇṇapāmaṅgena padumakalāpaṃ parikkhipanto viya, vijjulatāsassirikaṃ kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā rattakambalena gajakumbhaṃ pariyonandhanto viya, ratanasatubbedhe suvaṇṇagghike pavāḷajālaṃ khipamāno viya, mahati suvaṇṇacetiye rattakambalakañcukaṃ paṭimuñcanto viya, gacchantaṃ puṇṇacandaṃ rattavalāhakena paṭicchādayamāno viya, kañcanagirimatthake supakkalākhārasaṃ parisiñcanto viya, cittakūṭapabbatamatthakaṃ vijjulatājālena parikkhipanto viya ca sacakkavāḷasineruyugandharamahāpathaviṃ cāletvā gahitanigrodhapallavasamānavaṇṇaṃ rattavarapaṃsukūlaṃ pārupitvā vanagahanato kesarasīho viya, udayapabbatakūṭato puṇṇacando viya, bālasūriyo viya ca attanā nisinnatarusaṇḍato nikkhami.

Then the Blessed One, having dressed, taking his bowl and robe, approached the rest house together with the Saṅgha of monks—when the time was announced to him, saying, "Venerable sir, the Blessed One may now deem it the right time," the Blessed One, as if painting a red lotus with lacquer, with red dye, and with koviḷāra flowers, having arranged the triple robe and covering himself with a very red upper robe, as if encircling a cluster of lotuses with a golden net, having tied a waistband shimmering like lightning, as if covering the forehead of an elephant with a red blanket, as if casting a coral net over a golden jug placed on a jeweled platform, as if draping a red blanket over a great golden cetiya, as if covering the full moon with a red cloud, as if sprinkling well-cooked lacquer over the peak of a golden mountain, and as if encircling the peak of Mount Cittalakūṭa with a net of lightning, having shaken the great earth, along with its cakkavāḷa, Mount Sineru, and Mount Yugandhara, having draped himself in an excellent red robe made of rags, resembling newly sprouted nigrodha leaves, emerged from the forest thicket like a kesara lion, like the full moon from the peak of the Udaya Mountain, and like the young sun from the grove of trees where he was sitting.

Athassa kāyato meghamukhato vijjukalāpā viya rasmiyo nikkhamitvā suvaṇṇarasadhārāparisekapiñjarapattapupphaphalasākhāviṭape viya samantato rukkhe kariṃsu. Tāvadeva attano attano pattacīvaramādāya mahābhikkhusaṅgho bhagavantaṃ parivāresi. Te ca naṃ parivāretvā ṭhitabhikkhū evarūpā ahesuṃ appicchā santuṭṭhā pavivittā asaṃsaṭṭhā āraddhavīriyā vattāro vacanakkhamā codakā pāpagarahino sīlasampannā samādhisampannā paññāsampannā vimuttisampannā vimuttiñāṇadassanasampannā. Tehi parivārito bhagavā rattakambalaparikkhitto viya suvaṇṇakkhandho, rattapadumasaṇḍamajjhagatā viya suvaṇṇanāvā, pavāḷavedikāparikkhitto viya suvaṇṇapāsādo virocittha. Mahākassapappamukhā pana mahātherā meghavaṇṇaṃ paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ pārupitvā maṇivammavammitā viya mahānāgā parivārayiṃsu vītarāgā bhinnakilesā vijaṭitajaṭā chinnabandhanā kule vā gaṇe vā alaggā.

Then from his body, rays shot forth like flashes of lightning from a rain cloud, covering the trees all around as if they were branches, twigs, flowers, and fruits sprinkled with a stream of molten gold. Immediately, the great Saṅgha of monks, each taking his own bowl and robe, surrounded the Blessed One. And those monks standing around him were of such qualities: of few desires, content, secluded, unmingling, energetic, speakers, patient with words, advisors, blamers of evil, accomplished in virtue, accomplished in concentration, accomplished in wisdom, accomplished in liberation, and accomplished in the knowledge and vision of liberation. Surrounded by them, the Blessed One shone like a golden mountain encircled by a red blanket, like a golden boat amidst a cluster of red lotuses, like a golden palace surrounded by a coral railing. But the great elders, headed by Mahākassapa, wearing robes of rags the color of rain clouds, surrounded him like great nāgas armored in jewel armor, free from craving, with defilements broken, with tangles unraveled, with bonds cut, unattached to family or group.

Iti bhagavā sayaṃ vītarāgo vītarāgehi, vītadoso vītadosehi, vītamoho vītamohehi, nittaṇho nittaṇhehi, nikkileso nikkilesehi, sayaṃ buddho anubuddhehi parivārito pattaparivāritaṃ viya kesaraṃ, kesaraparivāritā viya kaṇṇikā, aṭṭhanāgasahassaparivārito viya chaddanto nāgarājā, navutihaṃsasahassaparivārito viya dhataraṭṭho haṃsarājā, senaṅgaparivārito viya cakkavattī, marugaṇaparivārito viya sakko devarājā, brahmagaṇaparivārito viya hāritamahābrahmā, tārāgaṇaparivuto viya puṇṇacando asamena buddhavesena aparimāṇena buddhavilāsena pāṭaligāmīnaṃ maggaṃ paṭipajji.

Thus, the Blessed One, himself free from craving, surrounded by those free from craving; himself free from aversion, surrounded by those free from aversion; himself free from delusion, surrounded by those free from delusion; himself without thirst, surrounded by those without thirst; himself without defilements, surrounded by those without defilements; himself awakened, surrounded by those awakened, like pollen surrounded by petals, like a pistil surrounded by pollen, like the Nāga king Chaddanta surrounded by eight thousand nāgas, like the Haṃsa king Dhataraṭṭha surrounded by ninety thousand geese, like a wheel-turning monarch surrounded by his army, like Sakka, the king of the gods, surrounded by the Maru host, like the great Brahmā Hārita surrounded by the Brahmā host, like the full moon surrounded by a host of stars, set out on the road to Pāṭaligāma with unmatched splendor, with immeasurable Buddhic grace.

Athassa puratthimakāyato suvaṇṇavaṇṇā ghanabuddharasmiyo uṭṭhahitvā asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ aggahesuṃ, pacchimakāyato dakkhiṇapassato vāmapassato suvaṇṇavaṇṇā ghanarasmiyo uṭṭhahitvā asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ aggahesuṃ, uparikesantato paṭṭhāya sabbakesāvattehi moragīvavaṇṇā ghanabuddharasmiyo uṭṭhahitvā gaganatale asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ aggahesuṃ, heṭṭhāpādatalehi pavāḷavaṇṇā rasmiyo uṭṭhahitvā ghanapathaviyaṃ asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ aggahesuṃ, dantato akkhīnaṃ setaṭṭhānato, nakhānañca maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānato odātā ghanabuddharasmiyo uṭṭhahitvā asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ aggahesuṃ, rattapītavaṇṇānaṃ sambhinnaṭṭhānato mañjiṭṭhavaṇṇā rasmiyo uṭṭhahitvā asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ aggahesuṃ, sabbatthakameva pabhassarā rasmiyo uṭṭhahiṃsu. Evaṃ samantā asītihatthamattaṃ ṭhānaṃ chabbaṇṇā buddharasmiyo vijjotamānā vipphandamānā vidhāvamānā kañcanadaṇḍadīpikāhi niccharitvā ākāsaṃ pakkhandamānā mahāpadīpajālā viya, cātuddīpikamahāmeghato nikkhantavijjulatā viya ca disodisaṃ pakkhandiṃsu. Yāhi sabbadisābhāgā suvaṇṇacampakapupphehi vikiriyamānā viya, suvaṇṇaghaṭato nikkhantasuvaṇṇarasadhārāhi āsiñciyamānā viya, pasāritasuvaṇṇapaṭṭaparikkhittā viya, verambhavātasamuddhatakiṃsukakaṇikārakikirātapupphacuṇṇasamokiṇṇā viya cīnapiṭṭhacuṇṇasamparirañjitā viya ca virociṃsu.

Then, from the eastern part of his body, dense rays of Buddhic light the color of gold arose and covered a distance of eighty cubits; from the western part of his body, from the right side, from the left side, dense rays of Buddhic light the color of gold arose and covered a distance of eighty cubits; starting from the top of his head, from all the swirls of hair, dense rays of Buddhic light the color of a peacock's neck arose and covered a distance of eighty cubits in the sky; from the soles of his feet, rays the color of coral arose and covered a distance of eighty cubits on the solid earth; from his teeth, from the white part of his eyes, and from the fleshless part of his nails, bright, dense rays of Buddhic light arose and covered a distance of eighty cubits; from the mixture of red and yellow colors, rays the color of madder arose and covered a distance of eighty cubits; everywhere, radiant rays arose. Thus, on all sides, to a distance of eighty cubits, six-colored Buddhic rays shone, flickered, and darted about, streaming from golden torch-staffs like great flames of lamps rushing into the sky, and like flashes of lightning emerging from a great rain cloud covering the four continents, they sped in every direction. With these, all directions seemed to be strewn with golden campaka flowers, to be sprinkled with streams of molten gold flowing from golden pitchers, to be encircled by stretched golden ribbons, and to gleam like being covered with kiṃsuka, kaṇikāra, and kirāṭa flower powder raised by the Verambha wind, and like being thoroughly smeared with Chinese flour.

Bhagavatopi asītianubyañjanabyāmappabhāparikkhepasamujjalaṃ dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ sarīraṃ abbhamahikādiupakkilesavimuttaṃ samujjalatārakapabhāsitaṃ viya gaganatalaṃ, vikasitaṃ viya padumavanaṃ, sabbapāliphullo viya yojanasatiko pāricchattako, paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitānaṃ dvattiṃsacandānaṃ dvattiṃsasūriyānaṃ dvattiṃsacakkavattīnaṃ dvattiṃsadevarājānaṃ dvattiṃsamahābrahmānaṃ siriyā siriṃ abhibhavamānaṃ viya virocittha, yathā taṃ dasahi pāramīhi dasahi upapāramīhi dasahi paramatthapāramīhīti sammadeva paripūritāhi samatiṃsāya pāramīhi alaṅkataṃ kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni dinnena dānena rakkhitena sīlena katena kalyāṇakammena ekasmiṃ attabhāve samosaritvā vipākaṃ dātuṃ okāsaṃ alabhamānena sambādhappattena viya nibbattitaṃ nāvāsahassassa bhaṇḍaṃ ekaṃ nāvaṃ āropanakālo viya, sakaṭasahassassa bhaṇḍaṃ ekaṃ sakaṭaṃ āropanakālo viya, pañcavīsatiyā gaṅgānaṃ sambhijja mukhadvāre ekato rāsībhūtakālo viya ca ahosi.

The Blessed One's body, adorned with the thirty-two marks of a great man, radiant with the brilliance of the eighty secondary marks, free from the defilements of clouds and fog, shone like the sky illuminated by bright stars, like a blossoming lotus grove, like the fully blossomed Pāricchatta tree covering a hundred yojanas, seemingly surpassing the glory of thirty-two moons, thirty-two suns, thirty-two wheel-turning monarchs, thirty-two gods, and thirty-two great Brahmās, as if it was the opportune moment for the accumulated effect of the ten pāramīs, the ten upapāramīs, and the ten paramatthapāramīs, thus adorned with the thirty perfections, completely fulfilled over four incalculable periods plus one hundred thousand kappas, by giving gifts, guarding virtue, and performing meritorious deeds, to ripen in a single lifetime, like the cargo of a thousand ships being loaded onto one ship at a bottleneck, like the cargo of a thousand carts being loaded onto one cart, and like the waters of twenty-five Ganges rivers converging at a single mouth and accumulating into a heap.

Imāya buddharasmiyā obhāsamānassapi bhagavato purato anekāni daṇḍadīpikāsahassāni ukkhipiṃsu, tathā pacchato vāmapasse dakkhiṇapasse. Jātisumanacampakavanamālikārattuppalanīluppalabakulasinduvārādipupphāni ceva nīlapītādivaṇṇasugandhagandhacuṇṇāni ca cātuddīpikamahaāmeghavissaṭṭhā salilavuṭṭhiyo viya vippakiriṃsu. Pañcaṅgikatūriyanigghosā ceva buddhadhammasaṅghaguṇapaṭisaṃyuttā thutighosā ca sabbā disā pūrayamānā mukharā viya akaṃsu. Devasupaṇṇanāgayakkhagandhabbamanussānaṃ akkhīni amatapānaṃ viya labhiṃsu. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvā padasahassehi gamanavaṇṇaṃ vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Tatridaṃ mukhamattaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.22; udā. aṭṭha. 76) –

Even as the Blessed One shone with these Buddhic rays, thousands of torch-staffs were raised in front of him, and likewise behind him, on his left side, and on his right side. And blossoms of jāti, sumana, campaka, and vanamālikā, and red and blue lotuses, bakula, sinduvāra, and other flowers, and fragrant powders of blue, yellow, and other colors were scattered like showers of water released by a great rain cloud covering the four continents. The sounds of fivefold musical instruments and the sounds of praise connected with the qualities of the Buddha, Dhamma, and Saṅgha, filling all directions, made them seem filled with clamor. The eyes of gods, supaṇṇas, nāgas, yakkhas, gandhabbas, and humans received what seemed like a drink of immortality. In this instance, it is fitting to describe the manner of his walking with a thousand verses. Here is but a brief excerpt (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.22; udā. aṭṭha. 76):

‘‘Evaṃ sabbaṅgasampanno, kampayanto vasundharaṃ;

"Thus, endowed with all perfections,
Shaking the earth,
Not harming beings,
The leader of the world proceeds.

‘‘Dakkhiṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ, uddharanto narāsabho;

"Raising first his right foot,
The foremost of men,
Proceeding with glory,
The best of bipeds shines.

‘‘Gacchato buddhaseṭṭhassa, heṭṭhāpādatalaṃ mudu;

"As the Buddha, the best, walks,
The sole of his foot below is soft,
Evenly touching the ground,
Not sullied by dust.

‘‘Ninnaṃ ṭhānaṃ unnamati, gacchante lokanāyake;

"Low places rise up,
As the leader of the world walks,
And high places become even,
Though the earth is inanimate.

‘‘Pāsāṇā sakkharā ceva, kathalā khāṇukaṇṭakā;

"Stones and gravel,
Clods, stumps, and thorns,
All obstacles disappear,
As the leader of the world walks.

‘‘Nātidūre uddharati, nāccāsanne ca nikkhipaṃ;

"He lifts it not too far,
Nor places it too near,
Proceeding without striking,
Both knees and ankles.

‘‘Nātisīghaṃ pakkamati, sampannacaraṇo muni;

"He proceeds not too quickly,
The sage with perfect gait,
Nor walks too slowly,
Composed as he goes.

‘‘Uddhaṃ adho tiriyañca, disañca vidisaṃ tathā;

"Upwards, downwards, across,
To the directions and sub-directions,
He looks not about,
But gazes only a yoke's length ahead.

‘‘Nāgavikkantacāro so, gamane sobhate jino;

"With the stride of an elephant king,
The Victor shines in his gait,
The foremost of the world walks gracefully,
Delighting the gods and humans.

‘‘Usabharājāva sobhanto, cātucārīva kesarī;

"Shining like a bull king,
Like a lion with its graceful movements,
Gladdening many beings,
He approached the foremost village" (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.22; udā. aṭṭha. 76).

Vaṇṇakālo nāma kiresa. Evaṃvidhesu kālesu bhagavato sarīravaṇṇe vā guṇavaṇṇe vā dhammakathikassa thāmoyeva pamāṇaṃ. Cuṇṇiyapadehi gāthābandhehi vā yattakaṃ sakkoti, tattakaṃ vattabbaṃ, ‘‘dukkathita’’nti vā ‘‘atitthena pakkhando’’ti vā na vattabbo. Aparimāṇavaṇṇā hi buddhā bhagavanto, tesaṃ buddhāpi anavasesato vaṇṇaṃ vattuṃ asamatthā. Sakalampi hi kappaṃ vadantā pariyosāpetuṃ na sakkonti, pageva itarā pajāti. Iminā sirivilāsena alaṅkatapaṭiyattaṃ pāṭaligāmaṃ pavisitvā bhagavā pasannacittena janena pupphagandhadhūmavāsacuṇṇādīhi pūjiyamāno āvasathāgāraṃ pāvisi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena yena āvasathāgāraṃ tenupasaṅkamī’’ti.

It is said that this is the time for description. At such times, the strength of the Dhamma speaker is the measure of the description of the Blessed One's bodily color or qualities. As much as one is able, one should speak, whether in the words of the commentary or in verse, and one should not be reproached as "badly spoken" or "scattering without satisfaction." For the Buddhas, the Blessed Ones, have immeasurable qualities, and even Buddhas are unable to describe them completely. Even speaking for an entire kappa, they would not be able to bring it to an end, let alone other beings. Entering Pāṭaligāma, adorned and prepared with this majestic splendor, and being worshiped by people with delighted minds with flowers, incense, perfumes, powders, and other offerings, the Blessed One entered the rest house. Therefore, it was said, "Then the Blessed One, having dressed, taking his bowl and robe, approached the rest house together with the Saṅgha of monks."

Pāde pakkhāletvāti yadipi bhagavato pāde rajojallaṃ na upalimpati, tesaṃ pana upāsakānaṃ kusalābhivuddhiṃ ākaṅkhanto paresaṃ diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjanatthaṃ bhagavā pāde pakkhālesi. Apica upādinnakasarīraṃ nāma sītikātabbampi hotīti tadatthampi bhagavā nahānapādadhovanāni karotiyeva.Bhagavantaṃyeva purakkhatvāti bhagavantaṃ purato katvā. Tattha bhagavā bhikkhūnañceva upāsakānañca majjhe nisinno gandhodakena nahāpetvā dukūlacumbaṭena vodakaṃ katvā jātihiṅgulakena majjitvā rattakambalapaliveṭhite pīṭhe ṭhapitā rattasuvaṇṇaghanapaṭimā viya ativiya virocittha. Ayaṃ panettha porāṇānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanamaggo –

Having washed his feet—although dust and dirt do not cling to the Blessed One's feet, desiring the increase of merit for those lay followers and to conform to the customs of others, the Blessed One washed his feet. Moreover, the body that has been taken up needs to be cooled, and for that purpose, the Blessed One indeed performs bathing and foot washing. Keeping the Blessed One in front—keeping the Blessed One in the lead. There, the Blessed One, sitting in the midst of the monks and lay followers, having been bathed with scented water, having had the water wiped off with a fine cloth, and having been anointed with jātihiṅgulaka, shone exceedingly, like a solid red-gold statue placed on a red blanket-covered seat. Here is the traditional way of describing this:

‘‘Gantvāna maṇḍalamāḷaṃ, nāgavikkantacāraṇo;

"Having gone to the circular pavilion,
With the stride of an elephant king,
Illuminating the world,
He sat on the excellent seat.

‘‘Tahiṃ nisinno naradammasārathi,

"There, sitting, the charioteer of men to be tamed,
The god beyond gods, with a hundred marks of merit,
In the center of the Buddha's seat, he shines,
Like a golden necklace on a pale blanket.

‘‘Nekkhaṃ jambonadasseva, nikkhittaṃ paṇḍukambale;

"A necklace of jambonada gold,
Placed on a pale blanket,
He shines, free from stain,
Like the verocana jewel.

‘‘Mahāsālova samphullo, merurājāvalaṅkato;

"Like a great sāla tree in full bloom,
Like Mount Meru adorned,
Like a golden stupa,
Like a lotus in its sheath.

‘‘Jalanto dīparukkhova, pabbatagge yathā sikhī;

"Like a lamp tree blazing,
Like a flame on a mountaintop,
Like the gods' Pāricchatta tree,
Fully blossoming, he shone" (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.22; udā. aṭṭha. 76).

Pāṭaligāmike upāsake āmantesīti yasmā tesu upāsakesu bahū janā sīle patiṭṭhitā, tasmā paṭhamaṃ tāva sīlavipattiyā ādīnavaṃ pakāsetvā pacchā sīlasampadāya ānisaṃsaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pañcime gahapatayo’’tiādinā dhammadesanatthaṃ āmantesi. Tatthadussīloti nissīlo (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.149; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.213; udā. aṭṭha. 76). Abhāvattho hetthadu-saddo ‘‘duppañño’’tiādīsu viya.Sīlavipannoti vipannasīlo bhinnasaṃvaro. Ettha ca ‘‘dussīlo’’ti padena puggalassa sīlābhāvo vutto. So panassa sīlābhāvo duvidho asamādānena vā samādinnassa bhedena vāti. Tesu purimo na tathā sāvajjo, yathā dutiyo sāvajjataro. Yathādhippetādīnavanimittaṃ sīlābhāvaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya dassetuṃ‘‘sīlavipanno’’ti vuttaṃ, tena ‘‘dussīlo’’ti padassa atthaṃ dasseti.Pamādādhikaraṇanti pamādakāraṇā. Idañca suttaṃ gahaṭṭhānaṃ vasena āgataṃ, pabbajitānampi pana labbhateva. Gahaṭṭho hi yena yena sippaṭṭhānena jīvikaṃ kappeti yadi kasiyā yadi vaṇijjāya yadi gorakkhena. Pāṇātipātādivasena pamatto taṃ taṃ yathākālaṃ sampādetuṃ na sakkoti, athassa kammaṃ vinassati. Māghātakāle pāṇātipātaṃ pana adinnādānādīni ca karonto daṇḍavasena mahatiṃ bhogajāniṃ nigacchati. Pabbajito dussīlo pamādakāraṇā sīlato buddhavacanato jhānato sattaariyadhanato ca jāniṃ nigacchati.

He addressed the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma—since many of those lay followers were established in virtue, he first revealed the drawbacks of the failure of virtue and then addressed them to teach the Dhamma with the words, "These five dangers, householders," to show the advantages of the accomplishment of virtue. There, immoral means without virtue (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.149; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.213; udā. aṭṭha. 76). Here, the prefix du has the sense of absence, as in "lacking wisdom" (duppañño). Devoid of virtue means one whose virtue is ruined, whose restraint is broken. Here, the word "immoral" indicates the absence of virtue in a person. This absence of virtue is twofold: either through not undertaking it or through breaking what has been undertaken. Of these, the former is not as blameworthy as the latter, which is more blameworthy. To show the absence of virtue as the cause of undesirable consequences, the expression "devoid of virtue" is used, referring to the person to whom the teaching is addressed, thereby showing the meaning of the word "immoral." Due to negligence means because of carelessness. And this sutta comes from the perspective of householders, but it can also apply to renunciants. For a householder, by whatever means of livelihood he makes a living, whether by farming, trading, or cattle-raising, if he is negligent due to offenses such as taking life, he is not able to accomplish those tasks in due time, and his work is ruined. But one who commits offenses such as taking life and stealing at the time of Māgha, incurs a great loss of wealth by way of fines. A renunciant who is immoral loses out on virtue, the Buddha's teachings, jhāna, and the seven treasures of the noble ones due to negligence.

Pāpako kittisaddoti gahaṭṭhassa ‘‘asuko asukakule jāto dussīlo pāpadhammo pariccattaidhalokaparaloko salākabhattamattampi na detī’’ti catuparisamajjhe pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchati. Pabbajitassa ‘‘asuko nāma satthusāsane pabbajitvā nāsakkhi sīlāni rakkhituṃ, na buddhavacanaṃ uggahetuṃ, vejjakammādīhi jīvati, chahi agāravehi samannāgato’’ti evaṃ pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchati.

Pāpako kittisaddo (evil report) means that for a householder, an evil report spreads among the four assemblies saying, "So-and-so, born in such-and-such family, is immoral and of evil character, has renounced this world and the next, and does not even give a ladleful of alms." For a renunciant, an evil report spreads saying, "So-and-so, having gone forth in the Teacher's dispensation, has been unable to maintain the precepts, to learn the Buddha's teachings, lives by practicing medicine and other such things, and is endowed with six kinds of disrespect."

Avisāradoti gahaṭṭho tāva ‘‘avassaṃ bahūnaṃ sannipātaṭṭhāne koci mama kammaṃ jānissati, atha maṃ niggaṇhissantī’’ti vā, ‘‘rājakulassa vā dassantī’’ti sabhayo upasaṅkamati, maṅkubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho nisīdati, visārado hutvā kathetuṃ na sakkoti. Pabbajitopi ‘‘bahū bhikkhū sannipatitā, avassaṃ koci mama kammaṃ jānissati, atha me uposathampi pavāraṇampi ṭhapetvā sāmaññato cāvetvā nikkaḍḍhissantī’’ti sabhayo upasaṅkamati, visārado hutvā kathetuṃ na sakkoti. Ekacco pana dussīlopi samāno dappito viya vadati, sopi ajjhāsayena maṅku hotiyeva vippaṭisārībhāvato.

Avisārado (lacking confidence) means that a householder approaches with fear, thinking, "Surely, someone will recognize my deeds in a large gathering, and then they will punish me," or "They will report me to the royal family." He sits down meekly, with slumped shoulders and face down, unable to speak confidently. Similarly, a renunciant approaches with fear, thinking, "Many monks are gathered, surely someone will recognize my deeds, and then they will suspend the uposatha and pavāraṇā observances for me, remove me from the monastic life, and expel me." He is unable to speak confidently. However, some immoral individuals speak as if they are arrogant; but even they are, in their heart, meek due to remorse.

Sammūḷhokālaṃ karotīti dussīlassa hi maraṇamañce nipannassa dussīlyakammānaṃ samādāya vattitaṭṭhānāni āpāthamāgacchanti. So ummīletvā attano puttadārādidassanavasena idhalokaṃ passati, nimīletvā gatinimittupaṭṭhānavasena paralokaṃ passati, tassa cattāro apāyā kammānurūpaṃ upaṭṭhahanti. Sattisatena pahariyamāno viya aggijālāya āliṅgiyamāno viya ca hoti. So ‘‘vāretha vārethā’’ti viravantova marati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sammūḷho kālaṃ karotī’’ti.

Sammūḷho kālaṃ karotī (dies confused) means that for an immoral person lying on his deathbed, the places where he engaged in immoral deeds come to mind. He opens his eyes and sees this world in the form of seeing his children and relatives; he closes his eyes and sees the next world in the form of the signs of his next existence arising. The four woeful realms present themselves to him in accordance with his deeds. He feels as if he is being struck with a hundred spears or embraced by a blaze of fire. He cries out, "Stop it! Stop it!" and dies. Therefore, it is said, "He dies confused."

Kāyassa bhedāti upādinnakakkhandhapariccāgā.Paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe. Atha vākāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassa upacchedā.Paraṃ maraṇāti cutito uddhaṃ.Apāyantiādi sabbaṃ nirayavevacanaṃ. Nirayo hi saggamokkhahetubhūtā puññasaṅkhātā ayā apetattā, sukhānaṃ vā āyassa āgamanassa abhāvā apāyo. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇantiduggati,dosabahulatāya vā duṭṭhena kammunā nibbattā gatītiduggati. Vivasā nipatanti ettha dukkaṭakārinotivinipāto,vinassantā vā ettha nipatanti saṃbhijjamānaṅgapaccaṅgātivinipāto. Natthi ettha assādasaññito ayotinirayo.

Kāyassa bhedā (at the breaking up of the body) means the abandoning of the appropriated aggregates. Paraṃ maraṇā (after death) means the taking up of new aggregates immediately thereafter. Alternatively, kāyassa bhedā means the cutting off of the life faculty. Paraṃ maraṇā means after dying. Apāyaṃ, etc., are all synonyms for niraya (hell). Niraya is apāyo because it is devoid (apeta) of good fortune (aya) that is counted as merit, which is the cause for heaven and liberation; or because there is no coming (āgamanassa abhāvā) of the enjoyment (āyassa) of happiness. Duggati means a destination (gati) that is a refuge (paṭisaraṇaṃ) for suffering (dukkha); or it is the destination (gati) produced by evil (duṭṭhena) deeds due to an abundance of defilements (dosabahulatāya). Vinipāto means that evildoers (dukkaṭakārino) fall (nipatanti) helplessly (vivasā) into it; or beings who are destroyed (vinassantā) fall (nipatanti) into it with their limbs and parts breaking apart (saṃbhijjamānaṅgapaccaṅgāti). Nirayo means that there is no enjoyment (ayo) associated with pleasure (assādasaññito).

Upapajjatīti nibbattati.

Upapajjatī (is reborn) means arises.

Ānisaṃsakathāvuttavipariyāyena veditabbā. Ayaṃ pana viseso –sīlavāti samādānavasena sīlavā.Sīlasampannoti parisuddhaṃ paripuṇṇañca katvā sīlassa sampādanena sīlasampanno.Bhogakkhandhanti bhogarāsiṃ.Sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokanti ettha sugatiggahaṇena manussagatipi saṅgayhati, saggaggahaṇena devagati eva. Tattha sundarā gatītisugati,rūpādīhi visayehi suṭṭhu aggotisaggo,so sabbopi lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhenalokoti.

Ānisaṃsakathā (the talk on benefits) should be understood in the opposite way to what has been said. However, there is this distinction: sīlavā (virtuous) means virtuous by way of undertaking the precepts. Sīlasampanno (accomplished in virtue) means accomplished in virtue by making the precepts purified and complete. Bhogakkhandhaṃ (heap of wealth) means a pile of wealth. Sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ (a good destination, a heavenly world, a world) includes the human realm by the inclusion of sugati, and the deva realm by the inclusion of sagga. There, sugati means a beautiful (sundarā) destination (gati); sagga means supremely (suṭṭhu) excellent (agga) with respect to objects such as forms; and all of that is loka because of its characteristic of breaking apart and decaying.

Pāṭaligāmike upāsake bahudeva rattiṃ dhammiyā kathāyāti aññāyapi pāḷimuttāya dhammakathāya ceva āvasathānumodanakathāya ca. Tadā hi bhagavā yasmā ajātasattunā tattha pāṭaliputtanagaraṃ māpentena aññāsu gāmanigamarājadhānīsu ye sīlācārasampannā kuṭumbikā, te ānetvā dhanadhaññāni gharavatthukhettavatthādīni ceva parihārañca dāpetvā nivesiyanti, tasmā pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā ānisaṃsadassāvitāya visesato sīlagarukāti sabbaguṇānañca sīlassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato tesaṃ paṭhamaṃ sīlānisaṃse pakāsetvā tato paraṃ ākāsagaṅgaṃ otārento viya pathavojaṃ ākaḍḍhanto viya mahājambuṃ matthake gahetvā cālento viya yojanappamāṇaṃ mahāmadhuṃ cakkayantena pīḷetvā sumadhurarasaṃ pāyamāno viya ca pāṭaligāmikānaṃ upāsakānaṃ hitasukhāvahaṃ pakiṇṇakakathaṃ kathentopi ‘‘āvāsadānaṃ nāmetaṃ gahapatayo mahantaṃ puññaṃ, tumhākaṃ āvāso mayā paribhutto, bhikkhusaṅghena paribhutto, mayā ca bhikkhusaṅghena ca paribhutte dhammaratanenapi paribhuttoyeva hoti, evaṃ tīhi ratanehi paribhutte aparimeyyova vipāko, apica āvāsadānasmiṃ dinne sabbadānaṃ dinnameva hoti, bhūmaṭṭhakapaṇṇasālāya vā sākhāmaṇḍapassa vā saṅghaṃ uddissa katassa ānisaṃso paricchindituṃ na sakkā. Āvāsadānānubhāvena hi bhave nibbattamānassapi sampīḷitagabbhavāso nāma na hoti, dvādasahattho ovarako viyassa mātukucchi asambādhova hotī’’ti evaṃ nānānayavicittaṃ bahuṃ dhammakathaṃ kathetvā –

Pāṭaligāmike upāsake bahudeva rattiṃ dhammiyā kathāya (to the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma with a Dhamma talk far into the night) includes other Dhamma talks not found in the Pali texts, as well as talks of appreciation for the rest house. At that time, King Ajātasattu, while having the city of Pāṭaliputta built there, brought families who were accomplished in virtue and good conduct from other villages, towns, and capital cities, settled them there by giving them wealth, grain, houses, land, fields, and privileges. Therefore, the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma were especially respectful of virtue, as he had shown them the benefits of virtue. Because virtue is the foundation for all good qualities, he first revealed to them the benefits of virtue. Then, as if bringing down the Ganges from the sky, as if drawing up the essence of the earth, as if taking a great jambu tree and shaking it by its top, as if pressing a great honey that is a yojana in measure with a machine and giving them its sweet taste to drink, he spoke various kinds of talk that brought welfare and happiness to the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma, saying, "This gift of a rest house, householders, is a great merit. The rest house of yours has been used by me and has been used by the Sangha of monks. By being used by me and the Sangha of monks, it is used by the Jewel of the Dhamma. Thus, by being used by the three Jewels, the result is immeasurable. Moreover, in giving the gift of a rest house, all gifts are given. The benefit of a ground-level leaf hut or a branch pavilion dedicated to the Sangha cannot be limited. Indeed, even when one is reborn in future existences because of the power of the gift of a rest house, there is no cramped dwelling in the womb; the mother's womb for him is like a twelve-cubit chamber, spacious and unconfined." In this way, he spoke much Dhamma talk that was varied in its methods and beautiful, and then—

‘‘Sītaṃ uṇhaṃ paṭihanti, tato vāḷamigāni ca;

"It wards off cold and heat,
And also wild beasts;

‘‘Tato vātātapo ghoro, sañjāto paṭihaññati;

"Reptiles and mosquitoes, and in the cold season the rains.
And the terrible wind and sun, born of it, are warded off.

‘‘Vihāradānaṃ saṅghassa, aggaṃ buddhena vaṇṇitaṃ;

"It is for shelter and for happiness, and for meditating and contemplating.
The gift of a monastery to the Sangha is praised by the Buddha as foremost;

‘‘Vihāre kāraye ramme, vāsayettha bahussute;

"Therefore, a wise person, seeing his own benefit,
Should have lovely monasteries built, and settle learned monks there.

‘‘Dadeyya ujubhūtesu, vippasannena cetasā;

"Food, drink, clothing, and lodgings for them,
He should give to those who are upright, with a clear mind.

Sandassetvātiādīni vuttatthāneva.

Sandassetvā (having shown), etc., are as explained earlier.

Abhikkantāti atikkantā dve yāmā gatā.Yassadāni tumhe kālaṃ maññathāti yassa gamanassa tumhe kālaṃ maññatha, gamanakālo tumhākaṃ, gacchathāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmā pana bhagavā te uyyojesīti? Anukampāya. Tiyāmarattiñhi nisīditvā vītināmentānaṃ tesaṃ sarīre ābādho uppajjeyya, bhikkhusaṅghopi ca mahā, tassa sayananisajjānaṃ okāsaṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, iti ubhayānukampāya uyyojesi.

Abhikkantā (far advanced) means two watches have passed and gone. Yassadāni tumhe kālaṃ maññatha (now is the time, monks, as you think fit) means "At whatever time you think is the time to depart, the time to depart is yours; depart." Why did the Blessed One dismiss them? Out of compassion. If they were to spend the entire night sitting there, illness might arise in their bodies; also, the Sangha of monks was large, and it was proper to find space for their beds and seats. Thus, out of compassion for both, he dismissed them.

Suññāgāranti pāṭiyekkaṃ suññāgāraṃ nāma tattha natthi. Te kira gahapatayo tasseva āvasathāgārassa ekapasse paṭasāṇiṃ parikkhipāpetvā kappiyamañcaṃ paññapetvā tattha kappiyapaccattharaṇāni attharitvā upari suvaṇṇarajatatārakagandhamālādidāmapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ vitānaṃ bandhitvā gandhatelapadīpaṃ āropayiṃsu ‘‘appeva nāma satthā dhammāsanato vuṭṭhāya thokaṃ vissametukāmo idha nipajjeyya, evaṃ no idaṃ āvasathāgāraṃ bhagavatā catūhi iriyāpathehi paribhuttaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya bhavissatī’’ti. Satthāpi tadeva sandhāya tattha saṅghāṭiṃ paññapetvā sīhaseyyaṃ kappesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘suññāgāraṃ pāvisī’’ti. Tattha pādadhovanaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya yāva dhammāsanā agamāsi, ettake ṭhāne gamanaṃ nipphannaṃ. Dhammāsanaṃ patvā thokaṃ aṭṭhāsi, idaṃ tattha ṭhānaṃ. Dve yāme dhammāsane nisīdi, ettake ṭhāne nisajjā nipphannā. Upāsake uyyojetvā dhammāsanato oruyha yathāvutte ṭhāne sīhaseyyaṃ kappesi. Etaṃ ṭhānaṃ bhagavatā catūhi iriyāpathehi paribhuttaṃ ahosīti.

Suññāgāraṃ (empty house): There was no truly empty house there. It is said that those householders had a screen made of matting around one side of that very rest house, and had a suitable couch prepared there, and had suitable coverings spread on it; and above, they had a canopy hung decorated with gold, silver, stars, perfumes, garlands, and so forth; and they lit an oil lamp, thinking, "Perhaps the Teacher, wanting to rest a little after rising from the Dhamma seat, might lie down here. Thus, this rest house of ours will be used by the Blessed One with the four postures for a long time, for our welfare and happiness." The Teacher, having this in mind, had his outer robe spread there and took up the lion's posture. With this in mind, it is said, "He entered the empty house." There, the act of going was completed in the area from the place for washing the feet to the Dhamma seat. Having reached the Dhamma seat, he stood for a moment; this was his standing. For two watches, he sat on the Dhamma seat; this was his sitting. Having dismissed the lay followers, he descended from the Dhamma seat and took up the lion's posture in the place mentioned earlier. This place was used by the Blessed One with the four postures.

Pāṭaligāmavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The exposition of the story of the Pāṭaligāma rest house is finished.

Sunidhavassakāravatthukathāvaṇṇanā
The Exposition of the Story of Sunidha and Vassakāra

286.Sunidhavassakārāti (dī. ni. 2.153; udā. aṭṭha. 76) sunidho ca vassakāro ca dve brāhmaṇā.Magadhamahāmattāti magadharañño mahāamaccā, magadharaṭṭhe vā mahāmattā, mahatiyā issariyamattāya samannāgatāti magadhamahāmattā.Pāṭaligāme nagaraṃ māpentīti pāṭaligāmantasaṅkhāte bhūmippadese nagaraṃ māpenti, pubbe ‘‘pāṭaligāmo’’ti laddhanāmaṃ ṭhānaṃ idāni nagaraṃ katvā māpentīti attho.Vajjīnaṃ paṭibāhāyāti licchavirājūnaṃ āyamukhapacchindanatthaṃ.Vatthūnīti gharavatthūni gharapatiṭṭhāpanaṭṭhānāni.Cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetunti rañño rājamahāmattānañca nivesanāni māpetuṃ vatthuvijjāpāṭhakānaṃ cittāni namanti. Te kira attano sippānubhāvena heṭṭhāpathaviyaṃ tiṃsahatthamatte ṭhāne ‘‘idha nāgānaṃ nivāsapariggaho, idha yakkhānaṃ, idha bhūtānaṃ nivāsapariggaho, idha pāsāṇo vā khāṇuko vā atthī’’ti jānanti, te tadā sippaṃ jappitvā tādisaṃ sārambhaṭṭhānaṃ pariharitvā anārambhe ṭhāne tāhi vatthupariggāhikāhi devatāhi saddhiṃ mantayamānā viya taṃtaṃgehāni māpenti.

286. Sunidhavassakārā (Sunidha and Vassakāra) were two brahmins (dī. ni. 2.153; udā. aṭṭha. 76). Magadhamahāmattā (chief ministers of Magadha) means the great ministers of the King of Magadha, or the great ministers in the kingdom of Magadha, endowed with great dominion and authority. Pāṭaligāme nagaraṃ māpentī (were having a city built at Pāṭaligāma) means they were having a city built in the area known as Pāṭaligāma. The meaning is that they were now making and building a city in the place that previously had the name "Pāṭaligāma." Vajjīnaṃ paṭibāhāyā (to keep back the Vajjis) means to cut off the approach of the Licchavi kings. Vatthūnī (sites) means house sites, the places for establishing houses. Cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṃ (the minds of the experts inclined toward building dwellings) means the minds of those who know the science of house sites inclined toward building dwellings for the king and the great ministers. It is said that through the power of their craft, they know in the ground below, at a distance of thirty cubits, "Here is the dwelling place of the nāgas, here is the dwelling place of the yakkhas, here is the dwelling place of the bhūtas, here is a stone or a stump." Then, having determined the craft, they avoid such a place that is full of obstructions, and in a place that is free of obstructions, they build those houses as if consulting with those deities who are associated with the sites.

Atha vā nesaṃ sarīre devatā adhimuccitvā tattha tattha nivesanāni māpetuṃ cittaṃ nāmenti. Tā catūsu koṇesu khāṇuke koṭṭetvā vatthumhi gahitamatte paṭivigacchanti. Saddhānaṃ kulānaṃ saddhā devatā tathā karonti, assaddhānaṃ kulānaṃ assaddhā devatā ca. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Saddhānañhi evaṃ hoti ‘‘idha manussā nivesanaṃ māpentā paṭhamaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nisīdāpetvā maṅgalaṃ vadāpessanti, atha mayaṃ sīlavantānaṃ dassanaṃ dhammakathaṃ pañhavissajjanaṃ anumodanañca sotuṃ labhissāma, manussādānaṃ datvā amhākaṃ pattiṃ dassantī’’ti. Assaddhā devatāpi ‘‘attano icchānurūpaṃ tesaṃ paṭipattiṃ passituṃ kathañca sotuṃ labhissāmā’’ti tathā karonti.

Alternatively, deities, being imputed in their bodies, incline their minds to build dwellings in that place. After striking a peg in the four corners, they depart as soon as the site has been taken possession of. Faithful deities act in that way for the families who are faithful, and unfaithful deities for the families who are unfaithful. What is the reason? For the faithful, it occurs to them, "When humans build a dwelling here, they will first have the Sangha of monks seated and have auspicious verses recited. Then we will be able to see virtuous ones, hear the Dhamma talk, the answering of questions, and the rejoicing, and having given a gift to humans, they will give us a share of the merit." Unfaithful deities also do likewise, thinking, "How will we be able to see and hear their practice according to our own wishes?"

Tāvatiṃsehīti yathā hi ekasmiṃ kule ekaṃ paṇḍitaṃ manussaṃ, ekasmiñca vihāre ekaṃ bahussutaṃ bhikkhuṃ upādāya ‘‘asukakule manussā paṇḍitā, asukavihāre bhikkhū bahussutā’’ti saddo abbhuggacchati, evamevaṃ sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ vissakammañca devaputtaṃ upādāya ‘‘tāvatiṃsā paṇḍitā’’ti saddo abbhuggato. Tenāha ‘‘tāvatiṃsehī’’ti.Seyyathāpītiādinā devehi tāvatiṃsehi saddhiṃ mantetvā viya sunidhavassakārā nagaraṃ māpentīti dasseti.

Tāvatiṃsehī (with the Tāvatiṃsa devas): Just as in a certain family, taking one wise person as an example, or in a certain monastery, taking one learned monk as an example, the report spreads, "In such-and-such family, the people are wise; in such-and-such monastery, the monks are learned," so too, taking Sakka, the king of the devas, and Vissakamma, the deva's son, as examples, the report has spread, "The Tāvatiṃsas are wise." Therefore, he said, "With the Tāvatiṃsa devas." Seyyathāpītiādinā (as if) shows that Sunidha and Vassakāra were having the city built as if consulting with the devas of Tāvatiṃsa.

Yāvatā ariyaṃ āyatananti yattakaṃ ariyamanussānaṃ osaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthi.Yāvatā vaṇippathoti yattakaṃ vāṇijānaṃ āhaṭabhaṇḍassa rāsivaseneva kayavikkayaṭṭhānaṃ nāma, vāṇijānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vā atthi.Idaṃ agganagaranti tesaṃ ariyāyatanavaṇippathānaṃ idaṃ nagaraṃ aggaṃ bhavissati jeṭṭhakaṃ pāmokkhaṃ.Puṭabhedananti bhaṇḍapuṭabhedanaṭṭhānaṃ, bhaṇḍaganthikānaṃ mocanaṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sakalajambudīpe aladdhabhaṇḍampi hi idheva labhissati, aññattha vikkayaṃ agacchantampi idha vikkayaṃ gacchissati, tasmā idheva puṭaṃ bhindissatīti attho. Āyanti yāni catūsu dvāresu cattāri, sabhāyaṃ ekanti evaṃ divase divase pañcasatasahassāni tattha uṭṭhahissanti, tānissa bhāvīni āyāni dasseti.Aggito vātiādīsu ca-kārattho-saddo, agginā ca udakena ca mithubhedena ca nassissatīti attho. Tassa hi eko koṭṭhāso agginā nassissati, nibbāpetumpi naṃ na sakkhissati, ekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ gaṅgā gahetvā gamissati, eko iminā akathitaṃ amussa, amunā akathitaṃ imassa vadantānaṃ pisuṇavācānaṃ vasena bhinnānaṃ manussānaṃ aññamaññabhedena vinassissati.

Yāvatā ariyaṃ āyatanaṃ (as far as the resort of noble men extends) means as far as there is a place of resort for noble humans. Yāvatā vaṇippatho (as far as trade extends) means as far as there is a place for buying and selling, like a heap of goods brought by merchants, or as far as there is a dwelling place for merchants. Idaṃ agganagaraṃ (this will be the chief city) means this city will be the chief, the foremost, the principal of those places of resort of noble ones and trade routes. Puṭabhedanaṃ (a place for the breaking of bales) means a place for breaking bales of goods, a place for opening bundles of goods. Indeed, even goods that cannot be found in the entire Jambudīpa will be found here, and even goods that do not go on sale elsewhere will go on sale here; therefore, the meaning is that bales will be broken here. He shows that those future revenues, which are four hundred thousand each at the four gates, and one hundred thousand at the assembly hall, thus five hundred thousand in total each day, will be for him. In Aggito vā (either from fire), etc., the particle "ca" has the meaning of "vā" (or), meaning it will be destroyed by fire, by water, and by division through betrayal. Indeed, one part of it will be destroyed by fire, and they will not be able to extinguish it; the Ganges will take away one part; and one part will be destroyed by the mutual division of humans who have been divided due to slanderous speech of those saying, "He did not say this, he did not say that," or "He did not say that, he did not say this," to each other.

‘‘atha kho sunidhavassakārā’’tiādi.Pubbaṇhasamayanti pubbaṇhakāle.Nivāsetvāti gāmappavesananīhārena nivāsanaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā.Pattacīvaramādāyāti pattañca cīvarañca ādiyitvā kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvā, cīvaraṃ pārupitvā pattaṃ hatthena gahetvāti attho.

‘‘Atha kho sunidhavassakārā’’tiādi (Then Sunidha and Vassakāra, etc.). Pubbaṇhasamayaṃ (in the forenoon) means in the time of the forenoon. Nivāsetvā (having dressed) means having dressed in the manner of entering a village, having tied the waistband. Pattacīvaramādāyā (taking his bowl and robe) means having taken the bowl and robe and put them on his body, having put on the robe and taken the bowl in his hand.

Sīlavantetthāti sīlavante ettha attano vasanaṭṭhāne.Saññateti kāyavācācittehi saññate.Tāsaṃ dakkhiṇamādiseti saṅghassa dinne cattāro paccaye tāsaṃ gharadevatānaṃ ādiseyyapattiṃ dadeyya.Pūjitā pūjayantīti ‘‘ime manussā amhākaṃ ñātakāpi na honti, tathāpi no pattiṃ dentīti ārakkhaṃ susaṃvihitaṃ karothā’’ti suṭṭhu ārakkhaṃ karonti.Mānitā mānayantīti kālānukālaṃ balikammakaraṇena mānitā ‘‘ete manussā amhākaṃ ñātakāpi na honti, tathāpi catumāsachamāsantare no balikammaṃ karontī’’ti mānenti uppannaparissayaṃ haranti.Tato nanti tato naṃ paṇḍitajātikaṃ manussaṃ.Orasanti ure ṭhapetvā saṃvaḍḍhitaṃ, yathā mātā orasaṃ puttaṃ anukampati, uppannaparissayaharaṇatthamevassa vāyamati, evaṃ anukampantīti attho.Bhadrāni passatīti sundarāni passati.

Sīlavantetthā means in this place of dwelling for the virtuous. Saññate means restrained in body, speech, and mind. Tāsaṃ dakkhiṇamādise means, having given the four requisites to the Sangha, one should assign the merit of that offering to those household deities. Pūjitā pūjayantī means, "These people are not even our relatives, yet they give us merit," so they provide well-arranged protection. Mānitā mānayantī means, being honored from time to time with offerings, "These people are not even our relatives, yet they make offerings to us every four or six months," so they honor them, removing any arising dangers. Tato na means from that, to that wise person. Orasa means raised holding on the breast, just as a mother has compassion for her own son, striving to remove arising dangers for him, in the same way they show compassion, this is the meaning. Bhadrāni passatī means sees auspicious things.

Anumoditvāti tehi tadā pasutapuññassa anumodanavasena tesaṃ dhammakathaṃ katvā. Sunidhavassakārāpi ‘‘yā tattha devatā āsuṃ, tāsaṃ dakkhiṇamādise’’ti bhagavato vacanaṃ sutvā devatānaṃ pattiṃ adaṃsu.Taṃ gotamadvāraṃ nāma ahosīti tassa nagarassa yena dvārena bhagavā nikkhami, taṃ gotamadvāraṃ nāma ahosi. Gaṅgāya pana uttaraṇatthaṃ anotiṇṇattā gotamatitthaṃ nāma nāhosi.Pūrāti puṇṇā.Samatittikāti tīrasamaṃ udakassa tittā bharitā.Kākapeyyāti tīre ṭhitakākehi pātuṃ sakkuṇeyyaudakā. Tīhipi padehi ubhatokūlasamaṃ paripuṇṇabhāvameva vadati.Uḷumpanti pāragamanatthāya lahuke dārudaṇḍe gahetvā kavāṭaphalake viya aññamaññasambandhe kātuṃ āṇiyo koṭṭetvā nāvāsaṅkhepena kataṃ.Kullanti veḷunaḷādike saṅgharitvā valliādīhi kalāpavasena bandhitvā kataṃ.

Anumoditvā means having made a Dhamma talk to them by way of rejoicing in the merit then produced by them. Sunidha and Vassakāra, having heard the words of the Blessed One, "Assign the merit to the deities who are there," gave the merit to the deities. Taṃ gotamadvāraṃ nāma ahosī means that gate of the city by which the Blessed One departed was named Gotamadvāra. But because it was not used for crossing the Ganges, it was not named Gotamatittha. Pūrā means full. Samatittikā means filled with water to the level of the bank. Kākapeyyā means water that crows standing on the bank could drink. By these three terms, he speaks only of the state of being completely full, level with both banks. Uḷumpa means having taken light wooden poles for the purpose of going to the other shore, and having hammered nails to connect them together like door panels, made in the manner of a boat. Kulla means having fastened together reeds and bamboo etc. and bound them in bundles with vines etc.

Etamatthaṃviditvāti etaṃ mahājanassa gaṅgudakamattassapi kevalaṃ tarituṃ asamatthataṃ, attano pana bhikkhusaṅghassa ca atigambhīravitthataṃ saṃsāramahaṇṇavaṃ taritvā ṭhitabhāvañca sabbākārato viditvā tadatthaparidīpanaṃ imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi. Udānagāthāya attho pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dassitoyeva. Tatthaudakaṭṭhānassetaṃ adhivacananti yathāvuttassa yassa kassaci udakaṭṭhānassa etaṃ aṇṇavanti adhivacanaṃ, na samuddassevāti adhippāyo.Saranti idha nadī adhippetā sarati sandatīti katvā.Gambhīraṃ vitthatanti agādhaṭṭhena gambhīraṃ, sakalalokattayabyāpitāya vitthataṃ.Visajjāti anāsajja appatvā eva pallalāni tesaṃ ataraṇato.Kullañhi jano bandhatīti kullaṃ bandhituṃ āyāsaṃ āpajjati.Vinā eva kullenāti īdisaṃ udakaṃ kullena īdisena vinā eva.Tiṇṇā medhāvino janāti ariyamaggañāṇasaṅkhātāya medhāya samannāgatattā medhāvino buddhā ca buddhasāvakā ca tiṇṇā paratīre patiṭṭhitā.

Etamatthaṃ viditvā means having known in all aspects this fact that even a mere amount of Ganges water is impossible for the general public to cross, but he and his community of monks have crossed the very deep and vast ocean of Saṃsāra, and knowing the state of having crossed, he uttered this utterance which illuminates that meaning. But the meaning of the utterance verse has been shown in the commentary itself. There, udakaṭṭhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ means this term aṇṇava is a designation for any place of water as stated, not only for the ocean, this is the meaning. Sara here the river is intended, because it flows, it moves continuously. Gambhīraṃ vitthataṃ means deep in the sense of unfathomable, vast because it pervades the entire three worlds. Visajjā means without clinging, without even reaching the puddles, because they did not cross them. Kullañhi jano bandhatī means people undertake the effort to bind a raft. Vinā eva kullenā means such water without even such a raft. Tiṇṇā medhāvino janā means the Buddhas and the Buddha's disciples, endowed with wisdom consisting of Ariya Magga ñāṇa, have crossed, established on the far shore.

Sunidhavassakāravatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sunidhavassakāravatthu is Finished.

Koṭigāme saccakathāvaṇṇanā
Saccakathāvaṇṇanā at Koṭigāma

287.Koṭigāmoti mahāpanādassa rañño pāsādakoṭiyaṃ katagāmo, patitassa pāsādassa thupikāya patiṭṭhitaṭṭhāne niviṭṭhagāmoti attho.Ariyasaccānanti ye paṭivijjhanti, tesaṃ ariyabhāvakarānaṃ saccānaṃ.Ananubodhāti abujjhanena ajānanena.Appaṭivedhāti appaṭivijjhanena.Anubodhocettha pubbabhāgiyañāṇaṃ,paṭivedhomaggañāṇena abhisamayo. Tattha yasmā anubodhapubbako paṭivedho anubodhena vinā na hoti, anubodhopi ekacco paṭivedhasambandho tadubhayābhāvahetukañca vaṭṭe saṃsaraṇaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ananubodhā…pe… tumhākañcā’’ti. Tatthasandhāvitanti paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena bhavato bhavantarupagamanena sandhāvitaṃ.Saṃsaritanti aparāparaṃ cavanupapajjanavasena saṃsaritaṃ.Mamañceva tumhākañcāti mayā ca tumhehi ca. Atha vāsandhāvitaṃ saṃsaritanti sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ mamañceva tumhākañca ahosīti evamettha attho veditabbo.

287.Koṭigāmo means a village established at the top of the palace of King Mahāpanāda, a village established in the place where the finial of the fallen palace was established, this is the meaning. Ariyasaccānaṃ means of the Ariya Sacca, which cause the state of Ariya for those who penetrate them. Ananubodhā means by not understanding, by not knowing. Appaṭivedhā means by not penetrating. Here, anubodho is preliminary knowledge, paṭivedho is the attainment of the Maggañāṇa. There, because penetration is preceded by understanding, and without understanding there is no penetration, and a certain understanding is related to penetration, and because the round of existence is due to the absence of both of these, therefore it was said, "ananubodhā…pe…tumhākañcā." There, sandhāvitaṃ means having wandered from one existence to another by way of taking rebirth. Saṃsaritaṃ means having transmigrated by way of repeatedly dying and being reborn. Mamañceva tumhākañcā means by me and by you. Or else, sandhāvitaṃ saṃsaritaṃ means the wandering, the transmigrating, was both mine and yours, thus the meaning here should be understood.

Saṃsitanti saṃsaritaṃ.Bhavanetti samūhatāti dīgharajjuyā baddhasakuṇaṃ viya rajjuhattho puriso desantaraṃ, taṇhārajjuyā baddhasattasantānaṃ abhisaṅkhāro bhavantaraṃ neti etāyāti bhavanetti, sā bhavato bhavaṃ nayanasamatthā taṇhārajju ariyamaggasatthena suṭṭhu hatā chinnā appavattikatāti bhavanetti samūhatā.

Saṃsitaṃ means saṃsaritaṃ (transmigrated). Bhavanetti samūhatā means just as a man holding the rope of a bird tied with a long rope takes it to another place, the craving rope takes the continuum of beings bound by craving to another existence, therefore it is bhavanetti, that craving rope capable of leading from existence to existence is well destroyed, cut off with the sword of Ariya Magga, no longer occurring, thus bhavanetti samūhatā.

Ambapālīvatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Ambapālīvatthukathā

288.Yānassabhūmīti yattha sakkā hoti yānaṃ āruyha yānena gantuṃ, ayaṃ yānassa bhūmi nāma.Yānā paccorohitvāti vihārassa bahidvārakoṭṭhake yānato orohitvā.

288.Yānassa bhūmī means this is the place of the vehicle where it is possible to get into a vehicle and go by vehicle. Yānā paccorohitvā means having alighted from the vehicle in the outer gatehouse of the monastery.

Licchavīvatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Licchavīvatthukathā

289.Nīlāti idaṃ sabbasaṅgāhakavacanaṃ.Nīlavaṇṇātiādi tasseva vibhāgadassanatthaṃ. Tattha na tesaṃ pakativaṇṇo nīlo, nīlavilepanavilittattā panetaṃ vuttaṃ.Nīlavatthāti paṭadukūlakoseyyādīnipi nesaṃ nīlāneva honti.Nīlālaṅkārāti nīlamaṇialaṅkārehi nīlapupphehi ca alaṅkatā. Te kira alaṅkārā suvaṇṇavicittāpi indanīlamaṇiobhāsehi ekanīlā viya khāyanti, rathāpi nesaṃ nīlamaṇikhacitā nīlavatthaparikkhittā nīladhajanīlavammikehi nīlābharaṇehi nīlaassehi yuttā, patodayaṭṭhiyopi nīlāyevāti iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.Paṭivaṭṭesīti pahari.Kissa je ambapālītije-ti ālapanaṃ, bhoti ambapāli kiṃkāraṇāti vuttaṃ hoti.Sāhāranti ettha āharanti imasmā rājapurisā balintiāhāro,tabbhuttajanapado. Tena sahitaṃ sāhāraṃ, sajanapadanti attho.Aṅguliṃ phoṭesunti aṅguliṃ cālesuṃ.Ambakāyāti mātugāmena. Upacāravacanañhetaṃ, itthīsu yadidaṃ ambakā mātugāmo jananikāti.Olokethāti passatha.Apalokethāti apavattitvā oloketha, punappunaṃ passathāti attho.Upasaṃharathāti upanetha, imaṃ licchavīparisaṃ tumhākaṃ cittena tāvatiṃsasadisaṃ upasaṃharatha upanetha allīyāpetha. Yatheva tāvatiṃsā abhirūpā pāsādikā nīlādinānāvaṇṇā, evamime licchavīrājānopīti tāvatiṃsehi samake katvā passathāti attho.

289.Nīlā means this is a collective term. Nīlavaṇṇā etc. is for the purpose of showing the distinction of that itself. There, it is not their natural color that is blue, but this is said because they are smeared with blue ointment. Nīlavatthā means even their paṭa, dukūla, koseyya etc. are only blue. Nīlālaṅkārā means adorned with blue jewel ornaments and blue flowers. It seems that even their ornaments, though adorned with gold, appear as one blue because of the radiance of sapphire jewels, and their chariots are also studded with sapphires, surrounded with blue cloths, yoked with blue horses with blue banners, blue armor, and blue ornaments, and even the goad stick is blue, in this way the meaning should be understood in all places. Paṭivaṭṭesī means struck. Kissa je ambapālī means je is an address, what is the reason, lady Ambapālī? is what was said. Sāhāraṃ means here, the district from which the royal officials bring food is āhāro, endowed with that, sāhāraṃ, meaning endowed with a district. Aṅguliṃ phoṭesuṃ means they snapped their fingers. Ambakāyā means by a woman. This is a term of respect, this which is among women, ambakā, mother, one who gives birth. Olokethā means look. Apalokethā means turn away and look, look again and again, this is the meaning. Upasaṃharathā means bring near, associate this Licchavi assembly with your mind as similar to the Tāvatiṃsa devas. Just as the Tāvatiṃsa devas are beautiful and pleasing, of various colors like blue etc., so also these Licchavi kings, make them equal to the Tāvatiṃsa devas and look, this is the meaning.

Kasmā pana bhagavā anekasatehi suttehi cakkhādīnaṃ rūpādīsu nimittaggāhaṃ paṭisedhetvā idha mahantena ussāhena nimittaggāhe niyojetīti? Hitakāmatāya tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ yathā āyasmato nandassa hitakāmatāya saggasampattidassanatthaṃ. Tatra kira ekacce bhikkhū osannavīriyā, te sampattiyā palobhento ‘‘appamādena samaṇadhammaṃ karontānaṃ evarūpā issariyasampatti sulabhā’’ti samaṇadhamme ussāhajananatthaṃ āha. Atha vā nayidaṃ nimittaggāhe niyojanaṃ, kevalaṃ pana ‘‘dibbasampattisadisā etesaṃ rājūnaṃ issariyasampattī’’ti anupubbikathāya sampattikathanaṃ viya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aniccalakkhaṇavibhāvanatthañcāpi evamāha. Na cirasseva hi sabbepime ajātasattussa vasena vināsaṃ pāpuṇissanti, atha nesaṃ rajjasirisampattiṃ disvā ṭhitabhikkhū ‘‘tathārūpāyapi nāma sirisampattiyā vināso paññāyissatī’’ti aniccalakkhaṇaṃ bhāvetvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇissantīti aniccalakkhaṇavibhāvanatthaṃ āha.

But why does the Blessed One, having forbidden taking note of signs in forms etc. by means of the eye etc. in hundreds of Suttas, here enjoin the taking of signs with great effort? Because of wishing for the welfare of those monks, just as for the sake of wishing for the welfare of the venerable Nanda, for the purpose of showing heavenly prosperity. There, it seems some monks were of diminished energy, enticing them with prosperity, he said, "Such a kind of lordly prosperity is easily obtained by those who practice the Samaṇa Dhamma with diligence," for the purpose of generating enthusiasm for the Samaṇa Dhamma. Or else, this is not an enjoining of taking note of signs, but it should be seen merely as a description of prosperity in a graduated talk, "The lordly prosperity of these kings is similar to divine prosperity." And also, he spoke thus for the purpose of distinguishing the characteristic of impermanence. For very soon all of these will meet with destruction at the hands of Ajātasattu, then the monks standing and seeing their royal glory and prosperity, "Even such glory and prosperity will be seen to be subject to destruction," cultivating the characteristic of impermanence, will attain Arahatship together with the discriminations. Thus he spoke for the purpose of distinguishing the characteristic of impermanence.

Adhivāsetūti ambapāliyā nimantitabhāvaṃ ñatvāpi kasmā nimantentīti? Asaddahanatāya ca vattasīsena ca. Sā hi dhuttā itthī animantetvāpi ‘‘nimantesi’’nti vadeyyāti tesaṃ ahosi. Dhammaṃ sutvā gamanakāle ca nimantetvā gamanaṃ nāma manussānaṃ vattameva.

Adhivāsetu means having known that Ambapālī had invited, why did he ask again? Because of disbelief and because of custom. For that deceitful woman might say "She invited" even without inviting, this was their thought. And having invited at the time of hearing the Dhamma and going, inviting before going is indeed the custom of people.

Licchavīvatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Licchavīvatthukathā is Finished.

Sīhasenāpativatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sīhasenāpativatthukathā

290.Abhiññātāti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.8.12) ñātā paññātā pākaṭā.Santhāgāreti mahājanassa santhambhanāgāre vissamanatthāya kate agāre. Sā kira santhāgārasālā nagaramajjhe ahosi, catūsu dvāresu ṭhitānaṃ paññāyati, catūhi disāhi āgatamanussā paṭhamaṃ tattha vissamitvā pacchā attano attano phāsukaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanti. Rājakulānaṃ rajjakiccasantharaṇatthaṃ kataṃ agārantipi vadantiyeva. Tattha hi nisīditvā licchavīrājāno rajjakiccaṃ santharanti karonti vicārenti.Sannisinnāti tesaṃ nisīdanatthaṃyeva paññattesu mahārahapaccattharaṇesu samussitasetacchattesu āsanesu sannisinnā.Anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantīti rājakulakiccañceva lokatthakiriyañca vicāretvā anekehi kāraṇehi buddhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanti. Paṇḍitā hi te rājāno saddhāsampannā sotāpannāpi sakadāgāminopi anāgāminopi ariyasāvakā, te sabbepi lokiyajaṭaṃ bhinditvā buddhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanti.

290.Abhiññātā means (a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.8.12) known, recognized, famous. Santhāgāre means in the assembly hall, a hall made for the purpose of relaxation for the general public. That assembly hall was in the middle of the city, it is visible to those standing at the four gates, people coming from the four directions first relax there and then go to their respective comfortable places. Some say that it was a hall made for the purpose of conducting royal affairs of the royal families. For sitting there, the Licchavi kings conduct, do, and consider royal affairs. Sannisinnā means seated on the magnificent spreads spread out only for the purpose of their sitting, under raised white parasols. Anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantī means having considered both royal affairs and actions for the welfare of the world, they speak of the Buddha's virtues by many reasons. For those wise kings were endowed with faith, some were Sotāpannas, some Sakadāgāmis, some Anāgāmis, all noble disciples, having broken the worldly tangle, they speak of the virtues of the three jewels, Buddha etc.

Tattha tividho buddhavaṇṇo nāma cariyavaṇṇo sarīravaṇṇo guṇavaṇṇoti. Tatrime rājāno cariyāya vaṇṇaṃ ārabhiṃsu – ‘‘dukkaraṃ vata kataṃ sammāsambuddhena kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni dasa pāramiyo dasa upapāramiyo dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūrentena ñātatthacariyaṃ lokatthacariyaṃ buddhatthacariyaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajantenā’’ti aḍḍhacchakkehi jātakasatehi buddhavaṇṇaṃ kathentā tusitabhavanaṃ pāpetvā ṭhapayiṃsu. Dhammassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantā panete ‘‘bhagavatā dhammo desito, nikāyato pañca nikāyā honti, piṭakato tīṇi piṭakāni, aṅgato nava aṅgāni, khandhato caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti koṭṭhāsavasena dhammaguṇaṃ kathayiṃsu. Saṅghassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantā ‘‘satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā paṭiladdhasaddhā kulaputtā bhogakkhandhañceva ñātiparivaṭṭañca pahāya setacchattauparajjasenāpatiseṭṭhibhaṇḍāgārikaṭṭhānantarādīni agaṇayitvā nikkhamma satthu varasāsane pabbajanti, setacchattaṃ pahāya pabbajitānaṃ bhaddiyamahārājamahākappinapukkusātiādirājapabbajitānaṃyeva buddhakāle asīti sahassāni ahesuṃ, anekakoṭidhanaṃ pahāya pabbajitānaṃ pana yasakulaputtasoṇaseṭṭhiputtaraṭṭhapālaputtādīnaṃ paricchedo natthi, evarūpā ca evarūpā ca kulaputtā satthu sāsane pabbajantī’’ti pabbajjāsaṅkhepavasena saṅghaguṇaṃ kathayiṃsu.

There, the three kinds of Buddha's virtues are conduct virtues, bodily virtues, and qualities virtues. There, these kings began to speak of the virtue of conduct - "Difficult indeed was done by the Sammāsambuddha, who, by fulfilling the thirty perfections, namely ten pāramīs, ten upapāramīs, and ten paramatthapāramīs, for more than a hundred thousand Kappas and four incalculable periods, brought to the highest point the conduct for the benefit of relatives, conduct for the benefit of the world, conduct for Buddhahood, and by giving up the five great renunciations," speaking of the Buddha's virtues with half-verses and hundreds of Jātakas, they made it reach the Tusita heaven and established it. Speaking of the virtues of the Dhamma, they said, "The Dhamma was taught by the Blessed One, from the Nikāya there are five Nikāyas, from the Piṭaka there are three Piṭakas, from the Aṅga there are nine Aṅgas, from the Khandha there are eighty-four thousand Dhamma Khandhas," they spoke of the virtues of the Dhamma in terms of divisions. Speaking of the virtues of the Sangha, "Having heard the teaching of the Teacher, sons of good families who have obtained faith, abandoning the accumulation of wealth and the circle of relatives, not counting things such as the white parasol, the viceroyalty, the generalship, the treasurer, the storehouse keeper etc. who go forth into the excellent dispensation of the Teacher, in the Buddha's time there were eighty thousand royal renunciates alone, such as King Bhaddiya, Mahākappina, Pukkusāti etc. who renounced the white parasol, there is no limit to those sons of good families who have renounced many millions of wealth, such as Yasa, the son of a good family, Soṇa, the son of a merchant, Raṭṭhapāla, the son etc., such and such sons of good families go forth into the Teacher's dispensation," they spoke of the qualities of the Sangha in terms of the summary of renunciations.

Sīho senāpatīti evaṃnāmako senāya adhipati. Vesāliyañhi satta sahassāni satta satāni satta ca rājāno, te sabbepi sannipatitvā sabbesaṃ manaṃ gahetvā ‘‘raṭṭhaṃ vicāretuṃ samatthaṃ ekaṃ vicinathā’’ti vicinantā sīharājakumāraṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ sakkhissatī’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā tassa rattamaṇivaṇṇakambalapariyonaddhaṃ senāpaticchattaṃ adaṃsu. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘sīho senāpatī’’ti.Nigaṇṭhasāvakoti nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa paccayadāyako upaṭṭhāko. Jambudīpatalasmiñhi tayo janā nigaṇṭhānaṃ aggupaṭṭhākā – nāḷandāyaṃ upāli gahapati, kapilapure vappo sakko, vesāliyaṃ ayaṃ sīho senāpatīti.Nisinno hotīti sesarājūnampi parisāya antare āsanāni paññāpayiṃsu, sīhassa pana majjhe ṭhāneti tasmiṃ paññatte mahārahe rājāsane nisinno hoti.Nissaṃsayanti nibbicikicchaṃ addhā ekaṃsena. Na hete yassa vā tassa vā appesakkhassa evaṃ anekasatehi kāraṇehi vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanti.

Sīho senāpatī means a commander of the army with such a name. For in Vesālī there are seven thousand seven hundred and seven kings, all of them having gathered together, having taken the opinion of all, "Choose one who is able to administer the kingdom," while choosing, having seen Prince Sīha, having made the determination that "This one will be able," they gave him the commander's parasol wrapped in a red gem-colored blanket. Referring to that, it was said "Sīho senāpatī." Nigaṇṭhasāvako means a giver of requisites and attendant of the Nigaṇṭha Nāṭaputta. For in Jambudīpa there are three people who are chief attendants of the Nigaṇṭhas - Upāli Gahapati in Nāḷandā, Vappa Sakka in Kapilavatthu, and this Sīha Senāpati in Vesālī. Nisinno hotī means they arranged seats even in the midst of the assembly of the remaining kings, but Sīha has a place in the middle, so he is seated on the magnificent royal seat arranged in that place. Nissaṃsayaṃ means without doubt, certainly, without a doubt. For they do not speak of the virtues of just anyone or someone of little accomplishment with hundreds of reasons in this way.

Yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkamīti nigaṇṭho kira nāṭaputto ‘‘sacāyaṃ sīho kassacideva samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇaṃ kathentassa sutvā samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamissati, mayhaṃ parihāni bhavissatī’’ti cintetvā paṭhamataraṃyeva sīhaṃ senāpatiṃ etadavoca ‘‘senāpati imasmiṃ loke ‘ahaṃ buddho ahaṃ buddho’ti bahū vadanti, sace tvaṃ kañci dassanāya upasaṅkamitukāmo ahosi, maṃ puccheyyāsi, ahaṃ te yuttaṭṭhānaññeva pesessāmi, ayuttaṭṭhānato nivāressāmī’’ti. So taṃ kathaṃ anussaritvā ‘‘sace maṃ pesessati, gamissāmi. No ce, na gamissāmī’’ti cintetvā yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkami.

Yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkamīti: It is said that Nigaṇṭha Nāṭaputta, thinking, "If Siha hears someone praising the ascetic Gotama and approaches the ascetic Gotama to see him, I will suffer a loss," said this to Siha the general beforehand: "General, in this world, many say, 'I am a Buddha, I am a Buddha.' If you wish to visit anyone, you should ask me; I will send you to a suitable place and prevent you from going to an unsuitable place." Remembering that conversation, and thinking, "If he sends me, I will go; if not, I will not go," he approached Nigaṇṭha Nāṭaputta.

‘‘kiṃ pana tva’’ntiādimāha. Evaṃ vadanto carantaṃ goṇaṃ tuṇḍe paharanto viya jalamānaṃ padīpaṃ nibbāpento viya bhattabharitaṃ pattaṃ nikujjanto viya ca sīhassa uppannaṃ pītiṃ vināsesi.Gamikābhisaṅkhāroti hatthiyānādīnaṃ yojāpanagandhamālādiggahaṇavasena pavatto payogo.So paṭippassambhīti so vūpasanto.

‘‘Kiṃ pana tva’’ntiādi: He destroyed the joy that had arisen in Siha, like striking a moving ox on the snout, extinguishing a burning lamp, or overturning a bowl filled with food. Gamikābhisaṅkhāro: The preparation involved in arranging elephant carts, etc., by means of applying scents and garlands. So paṭippassambhīti: He was calmed.

Dutiyampi khoti dutiyavārampi. Imasmiñca vāre buddhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantā tusitabhavanato paṭṭhāya yāva mahābodhipallaṅkā dasabalassa heṭṭhā pādatalehi upari kesaggehi paricchinditvā dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaasītianubyañjanabyāmappabhāvasena sarīravaṇṇaṃ kathayiṃsu. Dhammassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantā ‘‘ekapadepi ekabyañjanepi avakkhalitaṃ nāma natthī’’ti sukathitavaseneva dhammaguṇaṃ kathayiṃsu. Saṅghassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantā ‘‘evarūpaṃ yasasirivibhavaṃ pahāya satthu sāsane pabbajitā na kosajjapakatikā honti, terasasu pana dhutaguṇesu paripūrakārino hutvā sattasu anupassanāsu kammaṃ karonti, aṭṭhatiṃsa ārammaṇavibhattiyo vaḷañjentī’’ti paṭipadāvasena saṅghaguṇe kathayiṃsu.

Dutiyampi kho: A second time. On this occasion, when speaking of the Buddha's virtues, they described the physical appearance of the Ten-Powered One, circumscribing it from Tusita heaven up to the Great Bodhi tree, from the soles of his feet to the tips of his hairs, with the thirty-two marks of a great man, the eighty minor marks, and the radiance of a fathom's extent. When speaking of the Dhamma's virtues, they spoke of the quality of the Dhamma as being well-proclaimed, saying, "There is not even a single word or syllable that is flawed." When speaking of the Saṅgha's virtues, they spoke of the Saṅgha's qualities in terms of practice, saying, "Those who have gone forth into the Teacher's dispensation, abandoning such fame, glory, and wealth, are not of a lazy nature, but are perfecters in the thirteen ascetic qualities, and they work in the seven contemplations, employing the thirty-eight object-distinctions."

kiñhi me karissantīti kiṃ nāma mayhaṃ nigaṇṭhā karissanti.Apalokitā vā anapalokitā vāti āpucchitā vā anāpucchitā vā. Na hi me te āpucchitā yānavāhanasampattiissariyayasavisesaṃ dassanti, nāpi anāpucchitā māressanti, aphalaṃ etesaṃ āpucchananti adhippāyo.

kiñhi me karissantīti: What indeed will the Nigaṇṭhas do to me? Apalokitā vā anapalokitā vā: Whether asked or unasked. "They will not show me the wealth of vehicles or the glory and special power if asked, nor will they kill me if unasked; their asking is fruitless," was his intention.

Divā divassāti divassa divā majjhanhike atikkantamatte.Vesāliyā niyyāsīti yathā hi gimhakāle deve vuṭṭhe udakaṃ sandamānaṃ nadiṃ otaritvā thokameva gantvā tiṭṭhati nappavattati, evaṃ sīhassa paṭhamadivase ‘‘dasabalaṃ passissāmī’’ti uppannāya pītiyā nigaṇṭhena paṭibāhitakālo, yathā dutiyadivase deve vuṭṭhe udakaṃ sandamānaṃ nadiṃ otaritvā thokaṃ gantvā vālikāpuñjaṃ paharitvā appavattaṃ hoti, evaṃ sīhassa dutiyadivase ‘‘dasabalaṃ passissāmī’’ti uppannāya pītiyā nigaṇṭhena paṭibāhitakālo, yathā tatiyadivase deve vuṭṭhe udakaṃ sandamānaṃ nadiṃ otaritvā purāṇapaṇṇasukkhadaṇḍakanaḷakacavarādīni parikaḍḍhantaṃ vālikāpuñjaṃ bhinditvā samuddaninnameva hoti, evaṃ sīho tatiyadivase tiṇṇaṃ vatthūnaṃ guṇakathaṃ sutvā uppanne pītipāmojje ‘‘aphalā nigaṇṭhā, nipphalā nigaṇṭhā, kiṃ me ime karissanti, gamissāmahaṃ satthu santika’’nti gamanaṃ abhinīharitvā vesāliyā niyyāsi. Niyyanto ca ‘‘cirassāhaṃ dasabalassa santikaṃ gantukāmo jāto, na kho pana me yuttaṃ aññātakavesena gantu’’nti ‘‘ye keci dasabalassa santikaṃ gantukāmo, sabbe nikkhamantū’’ti ghosanaṃ kāretvā pañca rathasatāni yojāpetvā uttamarathe ṭhito tehi ceva pañcahi rathasatehi mahatiyā ca parisāya parivuto gandhapupphacuṇṇavāsādīni gāhāpetvā niyyāsi.

Divā divassā: Day by day, at midday when it had passed. Vesāliyā niyyāsī: Just as in the summer season, when the gods have rained, the flowing water enters a river and, going only a little way, stands and does not proceed, so was the time when the joy that arose in Siha on the first day, thinking, "I will see the Ten-Powered One," was turned back by the Nigaṇṭha; just as on the second day, when the gods have rained, the flowing water enters a river and, going a little way, strikes a pile of sand and does not proceed, so was the time when the joy that arose in Siha on the second day, thinking, "I will see the Ten-Powered One," was turned back by the Nigaṇṭha; just as on the third day, when the gods have rained, the flowing water enters a river, dragging away old leaves, dry sticks, reeds, and rubbish, breaking through the pile of sand, and becomes inclined towards the sea, so on the third day, having heard the account of the virtues of the three jewels, with the joy and delight that arose, Siha, resolving to go, thinking, "The Nigaṇṭhas are fruitless, the Nigaṇṭhas are useless, what will they do to me? I will go to the Teacher's presence," departed from Vesālī. And as he departed, thinking, "It has been a long time since I desired to go to the Ten-Powered One's presence, but it is not proper for me to go in unknown attire," he had a proclamation made, "Whoever wishes to go to the Ten-Powered One's presence, let them all come forth!" and having arranged five hundred chariots, standing in the foremost chariot, surrounded by those five hundred chariots and a large assembly, having taken perfumes, flowers, powders, fragrances, etc., he set out.

Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti ārāmaṃ pavisanto dūratova asītianubyañjanabyāmappabhādvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni chabbaṇṇā ghanabuddharasmiyo disvā ‘‘evarūpaṃ nāma purisaṃ evaṃ āsanne vasantaṃ ettakaṃ kālaṃ nāddasaṃ, vañcito vatamhi, alābhā vata me’’ti cintetvā mahānidhiṃ disvā daliddapuriso viya sañjātapītipāmojjo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.Dhammassa cānudhammaṃ byākarontīti bhotā gotamena vuttakāraṇassa anukāraṇaṃ kathenti. Kāraṇavacano hetthadhamma-saddo ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 720) viya.Kāraṇanti cettha tathāpavattassa saddassa attho adhippeto tassa pavattihetubhāvato. Atthappayutto hi saddappayogo.Anukāraṇanti ca so evaṃ parehi tathā vuccamāno.Sahadhammiko vādānuvādoti parehi vuttakāraṇena sakāraṇo hutvā tumhākaṃ vādo vā tato paraṃ tassa anuvādo vā koci appamattakopi viññūhi garahitabbaṃ ṭhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ na āgacchati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kiṃ sabbākārenapi tava vāde gārayhakāraṇaṃ natthīti.Anabbhakkhātukāmāti na abhūtena vattukāmā.

Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī: Entering the monastery, seeing from afar the eighty minor marks, the radiance of a fathom's extent, and the thirty-two marks of a great man, the six-colored, dense Buddha-rays, and thinking, "I have not seen such a man living so near for so long; indeed, I have been deceived; indeed, it is a loss for me," with joy and delight arising like a poor man seeing a great treasure, he approached the Blessed One. Dhammassa cānudhammaṃ byākarontī: They explain the subsequent cause of what was said by the venerable Gotama. Here, the word dhamma has the meaning of cause, like in ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 720). Kāraṇaṃ here means the meaning of the word that occurs in that way, because it is the cause of its occurrence. For the application of a word is connected to its meaning. Anukāraṇaṃ means that it is similarly stated by others. Sahadhammiko vādānuvādo: Being reasoned with the cause stated by others, neither your argument nor the subsequent reiteration of it incurs any blame or cause for criticism from the wise. This is what is said: Is there no cause for censure in your argument in any way? Anabbhakkhātukāmā: Not wishing to speak what is untrue.

291-292.Atthi sīha pariyāyotiādīnaṃ attho verañjakaṇḍe āgatanayeneva veditabbo.Paramena assāsenāti catumaggacatuphalasaṅkhātena uttamaassāsena.Assāsāya dhammaṃ desetīti assāsanatthāya santhambhanatthāya dhammaṃ deseti. Iti bhagavā aṭṭhahaṅgehi sīhasenāpatissa dhammaṃ deseti.

291-292.The meaning of Atthi sīha pariyāyo etc., should be understood in the same way as it comes in the Verañjakaṇḍa. Paramena assāsenā: With supreme reassurance, reckoned as the four paths and four fruits. Assāsāya dhammaṃ desetī: He teaches the Dhamma for the purpose of reassurance, for the purpose of encouragement. Thus, the Blessed One teaches the Dhamma to Siha the general with eight factors.

293.Anuviccakāranti anuviditvā cintetvā tulayitvā kātabbaṃ karohīti vutta hoti.Sādhu hotīti sundaro hoti. Tumhādisasmiñhi maṃ disvā maṃ saraṇaṃ gacchante nigaṇṭhaṃ disvā nigaṇṭhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchante ‘‘kiṃ ayaṃ sīho diṭṭhadiṭṭhameva saraṇaṃ gacchatī’’ti garahā uppajjati, tasmā anuviccakāro tumhādisānaṃ sādhūti dasseti.Paṭākaṃ parihareyyunti te kira evarūpaṃ sāvakaṃ labhitvā ‘‘asuko nāma rājā vā rājamahāmatto vā seṭṭhi vā amhākaṃ saraṇaṃ gato sāvako jāto’’ti paṭākaṃ ukkhipitvā nagare ghosentā āhiṇḍanti. Kasmā? ‘‘Evaṃ no mahantabhāvo āvi bhavissatī’’ti ca, sace panassa ‘‘kimahaṃ ete saraṇaṃ gato’’ti vippaṭisāro uppajjeyya, tampi so ‘‘etesaṃ me saraṇagatabhāvaṃ bahū jānanti, dukkaraṃ dāni paṭinivattitu’’nti vinodetvā na paṭikkamissatīti ca. Tenāha ‘‘paṭākaṃ parihareyyu’’nti.Opānabhūtanti paṭiyattaudapāno viya ṭhitaṃ.Kulanti tava nivesanaṃ.Dātabbaṃ maññeyyāsīti pubbepi dasapi vīsatipi saṭṭhipi jane āgate disvā natthīti avatvā desi, idāni maṃ saraṇaṃ gatakāraṇamatteneva mā imesaṃ deyyadhammaṃ upacchindittha, sampattānañhi dātabbamevāti ovadati.Sutaṃ me taṃ bhanteti kuto sutaṃ? Nigaṇṭhānaṃ santikā. Te kira kulagharesu evaṃ pakāsenti ‘‘mayaṃ yassa kassaci sampattassa dātabbanti vadāma, samaṇo pana gotamo ‘mayhameva dānaṃ dātabbaṃ…pe… na aññesaṃ sāvakānaṃ dinnaṃ mahapphala’nti evaṃ vadatī’’ti. Taṃ sandhāya ayaṃ ‘‘sutaṃ me ta’’ntiādimāha.

293.Anuviccakāra: It is said, having investigated, thought about, and weighed it, do what should be done. Sādhu hotī: It is good. For if people see someone like you, having seen me, going for refuge to me, and having seen a Nigaṇṭha, going for refuge to a Nigaṇṭha, blame arises, saying, "Does this Siha go for refuge to whomever he sees?" Therefore, he shows that investigation is good for those like you. Paṭākaṃ parihareyyu: It seems that having obtained such a disciple, they raise a flag and wander around announcing in the city, "So-and-so, the king, royal minister, or wealthy man, has gone for refuge to us and become a disciple." Why? "In this way, our greatness will become evident," and if regret arises in him, thinking, "Why have I gone for refuge to these?" then he will dispel it, thinking, "Many know of my having gone for refuge to them; it is difficult now to turn back," and he will not turn back. Therefore, he said, "They would carry a flag." Opānabhūta: Standing like a well that is prepared. Kula: Your house. Dātabbaṃ maññeyyāsī: Even before, seeing ten, twenty, or sixty people who had come, you did not say that there was nothing to give; now, merely because you have gone for refuge to me, do not cut off the giving of offerings to these; for offerings should indeed be given to those who have arrived, he advises. Sutaṃ me taṃ bhante: From where did you hear that? From the Nigaṇṭhas' presence. They proclaim in families, "We say that offerings should be given to anyone who has arrived, but the ascetic Gotama says, 'Offerings should be given only to me…pe… an offering given to other disciples is not of great fruit.'" Referring to that, he said, "I have heard that," etc.

294.Pavattamaṃsanti pakatiyā pavattaṃ kappiyamaṃsaṃ, mūlaṃ gahetvā antarāpaṇe pariyesāhīti adhippāyo.Sambahulā nigaṇṭhāti pañcasatamattā nigaṇṭhā.Thūlaṃ pasunti thūlaṃ mahāsarīraṃ gokaṇṇamahiṃsasūkarasaṅkhātaṃ pasuṃ.Uddissakatanti attānaṃ uddisitvā kataṃ, māritanti attho.Paṭiccakammanti etthakamma-saddo kammasādhano atītakālikoti āha‘‘attānaṃ paṭicca kata’’nti. Nimittakammassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ ‘‘paṭicca kammaṃ phusatī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.4.75) viya.Nimittakammassāti nimittabhāvena laddhabbakammassa, na karaṇakārāpanavasena.Paṭiccakammaṃ ettha atthīti maṃsaṃ paṭiccakammaṃ yathā ‘‘buddhaṃ etassa atthīti buddho’’ti. Atha vā paṭicca kammaṃ phusatīti pāṭhaseso daṭṭhabbo, svāyaṃ etaṃ maṃsaṃ paṭicca taṃ pāṇavadhakakammaṃ phusatīti attho. Tañhi akusalaṃ upaḍḍhaṃ dāyakassa, upaḍḍhaṃ paṭiggāhakassa hotīti nesaṃ laddhi.Upakaṇṇaketi kaṇṇamūle.Alanti paṭikkhepavacanaṃ, hotu kiṃ imināti attho.Na ca pana teti ete āyasmantā dīgharattaṃ avaṇṇakāmā hutvā avaṇṇaṃ bhāsantāpi abbhācikkhantā na jiridanti, abbhakkhānassa antaṃ na gacchantīti attho. Atha vā lajjanatthe idaṃjiridantīti padaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, na lajjantīti attho.

294.Pavattamaṃsa: Meat that is naturally available, permissible meat, the meaning is that it is bought by obtaining the root in the market. Sambahulā nigaṇṭhā: About five hundred Nigaṇṭhas. Thūlaṃ pasu: A large, big-bodied animal, reckoned as cattle, buffaloes, pigs. Uddissakata: Done having designated oneself, meaning killed. Paṭiccakamma: Here, the word kamma is an instrument of action, past tense, therefore he says ‘‘attānaṃ paṭicca kata’’. This is a term for a causative action, like in ‘‘paṭicca kammaṃ phusatī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.4.75). Nimittakammassā: For the action to be obtained by way of a cause, not by way of doing or having done. Paṭiccakammaṃ ettha atthī: The meat is a causative action, just as "Buddha is one who has the Buddha." Or the rest of the text should be seen as "paṭicca kammaṃ phusatīti," the meaning is that by means of this meat, one experiences that action of killing a living being. For that unwholesome action is half for the giver and half for the receiver, according to their doctrine. Upakaṇṇake: At the root of the ear. Ala: A word of rejection, meaning, let it be, what is the use of this? Na ca pana te: These venerable ones, desiring dispraise for a long time, even speaking dispraise and accusing, do not grow old, meaning they do not reach the end of accusation. Or, the word jiridantī should be seen in the sense of shame, meaning they are not ashamed.

Sīhasenāpativatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Story of Siha the General is Finished.

Kappiyabhūmianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account of the Permissible Ground

295.Abhilāpamattanti desanāmattaṃ.Āmisakhādanatthāyāti tattha tattha chaḍḍitassa āmisassa khādanatthāya.Anuppageyevāti pātoyeva.Oravasaddanti mahāsaddaṃ.Taṃ pana avatvāpītiandhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanayena avatvāpi.Pi-saddena tathā vacanampi anujānāti.Aṭṭhakathāsu vuttanayenāti sesaaṭṭhakathāsu vuttanayena. ‘‘Kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’ti vā, ‘kappiyakuṭī’ti vā vutte sādhāraṇalakkhaṇa’’nti sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu vuttaussāvanantikākuṭikaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ.Cayanti adhiṭṭhānaṃ.Yato paṭṭhāyāti yato iṭṭhakato silato mattikāpiṇḍato vā paṭṭhāya.Paṭhamiṭṭhakādīnaṃ heṭṭhā na vaṭṭantīti bhittiyā paṭhamiṭṭhakādīnaṃ heṭṭhā bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpiyamānā iṭṭhakādayo bhūmigatikattā ‘‘kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’’ti vatvā patiṭṭhāpetuṃ na vaṭṭanti. Yadi evaṃ bhūmiyaṃ nikhaṇitvā patiṭṭhāpiyamānā thambhā kasmā tathā vatvā patiṭṭhāpetuṃ vaṭṭantīti āha‘‘thambhā pana…pe… vaṭṭantī’’ti.Saṅghasantakamevāti vāsatthāya kataṃ saṅghikasenāsanaṃ sandhāya vadati.Bhikkhusantakanti vāsatthāya eva kataṃ bhikkhussa puggalikasenāsanaṃ.Mukhasannidhīti iminā antovutthadukkaṭameva dīpitaṃ.

295.Abhilāpamatta: Merely an expression. Āmisakhādanatthāyā: For the purpose of eating the bait that has been thrown here and there. Anuppageyevā: Early in the morning. Oravasadda: A loud noise. Taṃ pana avatvāpī: Even without saying that, in the manner stated in the Andhakaṭṭhakathā. The particle Pi- also approves of saying it in that way. Aṭṭhakathāsu vuttanayenā: In the manner stated in the remaining commentaries. ‘‘Kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’ti vā, ‘kappiyakuṭī’ti vā vutte sādhāraṇalakkhaṇa’’nti The general characteristic is the characteristic of making a hut with the announcement stated in all the commentaries. Caya: Determination. Yato paṭṭhāyā: From where, beginning from the brick, stone, or lump of clay. Paṭhamiṭṭhakādīnaṃ heṭṭhā na vaṭṭantī: The bricks, etc., that are being established in the ground beneath the first brick, etc., of the wall, because they are in contact with the ground, are not fit to be established after saying ‘‘kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’’. If so, why are the pillars that are being established after being dug into the ground fit to be established after saying that? He says ‘‘thambhā pana…pe… vaṭṭantī’’. Saṅghasantakamevā: He speaks referring to a monastic dwelling belonging to the Saṅgha, made for dwelling. Bhikkhusantaka: A monastic dwelling belonging to an individual bhikkhu, made for dwelling. Mukhasannidhī: By this, only the dukkata offense committed inside is indicated.

Kappiyabhūmianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Account of the Permissible Ground is Finished.

Keṇiyajaṭilavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Account of the Layman Keṇiya

300.Yenaāpaṇaṃ tadavasarītiādīsuāpaṇanti ekassa nigamassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tasmiṃ kira nigame vīsati āpaṇamukhasahassāni vibhattāni ahesuṃ. Iti so āpaṇānaṃ ussannattā ‘‘āpaṇa’’ntveva saṅkhaṃ gato. Tassa pana nigamassa avidūre nadītīre ghanacchāyo ramaṇīyabhūmibhāgo mahāvanasaṇḍo, tasmiṃ bhagavā viharati.Keṇiyoti tassa nāmaṃ.Jaṭiloti āharimajaṭādharo tāpaso. So kira brāhmaṇamahāsālo, dhanarakkhaṇatthāya pana tāpasapabbajjaṃ samādāya rañño paṇṇākāraṃ datvā bhūmibhāgaṃ gahetvā tattha assamaṃ kāretvā pañcahi sakaṭasatehi vaṇijjaṃ payojetvā kulasahassassa nissayo hutvā vasati. Assamepi cassa eko tālarukkho divase divase ekaṃ sovaṇṇamayaṃ phalaṃ muñcatīti vadanti. So divā kāsāvāni dhāreti, jaṭā ca bandhati, rattiṃ kāmasampattiṃ anubhavati.

300.Yenaāpaṇaṃ tadavasarī etc. Āpaṇa: This is a term for a single market town. It is said that in that market town, twenty thousand market entrances were divided. Thus, because of the abundance of markets, it went by the name "Āpaṇa." Not far from that market town, on the bank of a river, was a dense, shady, beautiful area, a great forest grove; there, the Blessed One was dwelling. Keṇiyo: That was his name. Jaṭilo: An ascetic who wore matted hair that he had brought. It is said that he was a great brahmin householder, but having adopted the ascetic life for the sake of protecting wealth, giving tribute to the king, taking a piece of land, having a hermitage built there, engaging in trade with five hundred carts, and relying on a thousand families, he lived. It is said that even in his hermitage, a single palmyra tree dropped a golden fruit every day. He wears robes during the day and ties up his matted hair, but at night he enjoys sensual pleasures.

Pavattāroti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.285; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.427; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.192) pavattayitāro, pāvacanavasena vattāroti attho.Yesanti yesaṃ santakaṃ.Mantapadanti mantasadde bahikatvā raho bhāsitabbaṭṭhena mantā eva taṃtaṃatthapaṭipattihetutāya padanti mantapadaṃ, vedavacanaṃ.Gītanti aṭṭhakādīhi dasahi porāṇabrāhmaṇehi udāttānudāttādisarasampattivasena sajjhāyitaṃ.Pavuttanti pāvacanavasena aññesaṃ vuttaṃ, vācitanti attho.Samihitanti samupabyūḷhaṃ rāsikataṃ, iruvedayajuvedasāmavedādivasena tatthāpi paccekaṃ mantabrāhmaṇādivasena sajjhāyanavācakādivasena ca piṇḍaṃ katvā ṭhapitanti attho.Tadanugāyantīti etarahi brāhmaṇā taṃ tehi pubbe gītaṃ anugāyanti anusajjhāyanti.Tadanubhāsantīti taṃ anubhāsanti, idaṃ purimasseva vevacanaṃ.Bhāsitamanubhāsantīti tehi bhāsitaṃ sajjhāyitaṃ anusajjhāyanti.Vācitamanuvācentīti tehi aññesaṃ vācitaṃ anuvācenti.Seyyathidanti te katameti attho.Aṭṭhakotiādīni tesaṃ nāmāni. Te kira dibbacakkhuparibhaṇḍena yathākammūpagañāṇena sattānaṃ kammassakatādiṃ pubbenivāsañāṇena atītakappe brāhmaṇānaṃ mantajjhenavidhiñca oloketvā parūpaghātaṃ akatvā kassapasammāsambuddhassa bhagavato vaṭṭasannissitena vacanena saha saṃsanditvā mante ganthesuṃ. Aparāpare pana okkākarājakālādīsu uppannabrāhmaṇā pāṇātipātādīni pakkhipitvā tayo vede bhinditvā buddhavacanena saddhiṃ viruddhe akaṃsu. Rattibhojanaṃ ratti, tato uparatātirattūparatā. Atikkante majjhanhike yāva sūriyatthaṅgamanā bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ nāma, tato viratattāviratā vikālabhojanā. Paṭiyādāpetvāti sappimadhusakkarādīhi ceva maricehi ca susaṅkhataṃ pānaṃ paṭiyādāpetvā.

Pavattāroti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.285; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.427; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.192) means those who cause to proceed, those who speak in terms of the Teaching.Yesanti means that which belongs to whom.Mantapadanti means mantapada, because, excluding the sounds of mantras, they are words (pada) that are spoken in secret (mantā), being the cause for the practice of specific meanings, it refers to the Vedic texts.Gītanti means that which is recited with the attainment of intonation, such as udātta and anudātta, by the ten ancient Brahmins beginning with Aṭṭhaka.Pavuttanti means that which is spoken, recited, to others in terms of the Teaching.Samihitanti means that which is collected together, piled up; meaning, that which is compiled and established as a collection in the form of Iruveda, Yajuveda, Sāmaveda, and even within those, individually in the form of mantra and brāhmaṇa, etc., for recitation and reading.Tadanugāyantīti means that nowadays, Brahmins sing along with, recite along with, that which was previously sung by them.Tadanubhāsantīti means they repeat that; this is a synonym of the previous.Bhāsitamanubhāsantīti means they recite along with that which was spoken, recited, by them.Vācitamanuvācentīti means they cause others to recite along with that which was recited to others by them.Seyyathidanti means what are they.Aṭṭhakoti etc., are their names. It is said that they, with the divine eye, with the knowledge of beings approaching according to their actions, and with the knowledge of past existences, having observed the method of reciting mantras of the Brahmins in past aeons, without harming others, compiled the mantras in texts, comparing them with the words based on the dispensation of Kassapa, the perfectly enlightened Buddha. However, other Brahmins who arose in the times of King Okkāka, etc., having inserted things like killing living beings, having divided the three Vedas, made them contradictory to the word of the Buddha. Rattibhojanaṃ ratti, tato uparatāti rattūparatā means night is ratti, and abstaining from that is rattūparatā. Eating after midday until sunset is called vikālabhojana, and abstaining from that is viratā vikālabhojanā. Paṭiyādāpetvāti means having prepared a drink well-prepared with ghee, honey, sugar, and pepper, etc.

‘‘Mahā kho keṇiya bhikkhusaṅgho’’ti kasmā bhagavā punappunaṃ paṭikkhipi? Titthiyānaṃ paṭikkhepapasannatāya. Titthiyā hi ‘‘aho vatāyaṃ appiccho, yo nimantiyamānopi na sādiyatī’’ti upanimantiyamānassa paṭikkhepe pasīdantīti keci, akāraṇañcetaṃ. Natthi buddhānaṃ paccayahetu evarūpaṃ kohaññaṃ, ayaṃ pana aḍḍhatelasāni bhikkhusatāni disvā ettakānaṃyeva bhikkhaṃ paṭiyādessati, sveva selo brāhmaṇo tīhi purisasatehi saddhiṃ pabbajissati, ayuttaṃ kho pana navake aññato pesetvā imeheva saddhiṃ gantuṃ, ime vā aññato pesetvā navakehi saddhiṃ gantuṃ. Athāpi sabbeva gahetvā gamissāmi, bhikkhāhāro nappahossati. Tato bhikkhūsu piṇḍāya carantesu manussā ujjhāyissanti ‘‘cirassampi keṇiyo samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ nimantetvā yāpanamattaṃ dātuṃ nāsakkhī’’ti, sayañca vippaṭisārī bhavissati. Paṭikkhepe pana kate ‘‘samaṇo gotamo punappunaṃ ‘tvañca brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno’ti brāhmaṇānaṃ nāmaṃ gaṇhātī’’ti cintetvā brāhmaṇepi nimantetukāmo bhavissati, tato brāhmaṇe pāṭiyekkaṃ nimantessati, te tena nimantitā bhikkhū hutvā bhuñjissanti, evamassa saddhā anurakkhitā bhavissatīti punappunaṃ paṭikkhipi.Kiñcāpi kho bho gotamāti iminā idaṃ dīpeti ‘‘bho gotama, kiṃ jātaṃ, yadi ahaṃ brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno, adhivāsetu bhavaṃ gotamo, ahaṃ brāhmaṇānampi dātuṃ sakkomi tumhākampī’’ti.Ṭhapetvā dhaññaphalarasanti ettha taṇḍuladhovanodakampi dhaññarasoyevāti vadanti.Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ucchurasanti ettha nikkasaṭo ucchuraso sattāhakālikoti veditabbaṃ.

‘‘Mahā kho keṇiya bhikkhusaṅgho’’ti why did the Blessed One repeatedly refuse? Because of the acceptance of refuting the sectarians. Some say that the sectarians are pleased by the refusal of one being invited, thinking, "Oh, this one is of few desires, who does not accept even when being invited," but this is without reason. There is no such deceit among the Buddhas for the sake of a gift. But seeing hundreds of monks, he will prepare alms only for so many monks, and tomorrow Selā the Brahmin will renounce with three hundred men, it is not appropriate to send the new ones elsewhere and go with these alone, or to send these elsewhere and go with the new ones. Or even if I take all of them, the alms-food will not be sufficient. Then, while the monks are wandering for alms, people will criticize, "Even after inviting the ascetic Gotama for so long, Keṇiya could not manage to give enough to sustain them," and he himself will feel remorse. But if refused, thinking, "The ascetic Gotama repeatedly mentions the names of the Brahmins, saying 'and you are pleased with the Brahmins'," he will want to invite the Brahmins as well, then he will invite the Brahmins individually, and those Brahmins, being invited by him, will become monks and eat. Thus, his faith will be protected. Therefore, he refused repeatedly. Kiñcāpi kho bho gotamāti with this, he indicates, "Bho Gotama, what is the matter? Even if I am pleased with the Brahmins, may the venerable Gotama accept, I am able to give to the Brahmins as well as to you." Ṭhapetvā dhaññaphalarasanti here, some say that even the water used to wash rice is considered grain juice.Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ucchurasanti here, the sugarcane juice that is not strained should be understood as allowable for seven days.

Imāhigāthāhīti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.400) imāhi keṇiyassa cittānukūlāhi gāthāhi. Tattha aggiparicariyaṃ vinā brāhmaṇānaṃ yaññābhāvato‘‘aggihuttamukhā yaññā’’ti vuttaṃ, aggihuttaseṭṭhā aggijuhanappadhānāti attho. Brāhmaṇā hi ‘‘aggimukhā devā’’ti aggijuhanapubbakaṃ yaññaṃ vidahanti. Vede sajjhāyantehi paṭhamaṃ sajjhāyitabbato sāvittī ‘‘chandaso mukha’’nti vuttā, sāvittī vedassa pubbaṅgamāti attho taṃpubbakattā vedasavanassa. Manussānaṃ seṭṭhabhāvato rājā ‘‘mukha’’nti vutto. Ogāhantīnaṃ nadīnaṃ ādhārabhāvato gantabbaṭṭhānabhāvena paṭisaraṇato ca sāgaro ‘‘mukha’’nti vutto. Candasamāyogena ‘‘ajja kattikā, ajja rohiṇī’’ti saññāyanato nakkhattāni abhibhavitvā ālokakaraṇato nakkhattehi ativisesasommabhāvato ca ‘‘nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ cando’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dīpasikhā aggijālā asanivicakka’’nti evamādīnaṃ tapantānaṃ vijjulatānaṃ aggattā ādicco ‘‘tapataṃ mukha’’nti vutto. Dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ pana aggattā visesena tasmiṃ samaye buddhappamukhaṃ saṅghaṃ sandhāya ‘‘puññaṃ ākaṅkhamānānaṃ, saṅgho ve yajataṃ mukha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tena saṅgho puññassa āyamukhaṃ aggadakkhiṇeyyabhāvenāti dasseti.

Imāhi gāthāhīti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.400) means with these verses that are pleasing to the mind of Keṇiya. There, because there is no sacrifice for the Brahmins without the tending of the fire, ‘‘aggihuttamukhā yaññā’’ti is said, meaning the best of sacrifices are those that prioritize offering to the fire. For Brahmins perform sacrifices preceded by offering to the fire, thinking "fire is the mouth of the gods". Because it is to be recited first by those who recite the Vedas, the Sāvitrī is said to be "the mouth of the Vedas", meaning the Sāvitrī is the forerunner of the Vedas, because the study of the Vedas is preceded by it. Because the king is the best of men, he is called "the mouth". Because the ocean is the support of the rivers that enter it, it is called "the mouth", due to being a place to go and a refuge. Because constellations are designated by association with the moon, such as "today is kattikā, today is rohiṇī," and because the moon surpasses the constellations and brings light, and due to the special, pleasing nature compared to the constellations, it is said that "the moon is the mouth of the constellations." Because the sun is the foremost of those that shine, such as "the flame of a lamp, a flash of lightning, the wheel of thunder," it is said that "the sun is the mouth of those that shine." However, because of being the foremost of those worthy of offerings, especially at that time, referring to the Sangha headed by the Buddha, it is said that "for those who desire merit, the Sangha indeed is the mouth of those who sacrifice." Thus, it shows that the Sangha is the source of merit because of being the foremost worthy of offerings.

Keṇiyajaṭilavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Keṇiya Jaṭila Story is finished.

Rojamallavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Rojā Malla Story

301.Rojavatthumhivihāroti gandhakuṭiṃ sandhāya āhaṃsu.Ataramānoti aturanto, saṇikaṃ padappamāṇaṭṭhāne padaṃ nikkhipanto vattaṃ katvā susammaṭṭhaṃ muttādalasinduvārasantharasadisaṃ vālikaṃ avināsentoti attho.Āḷindanti pamukhaṃ.Ukkāsitvāti ukkāsitasaddaṃ katvā.Aggaḷanti kavāṭaṃ.Ākoṭehīti agganakhena īsakaṃ kuñcikachiddasamīpe koṭehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dvāraṃ kira atiupari amanussā, atiheṭṭhā tiracchānajātikā koṭenti, tathā akoṭetvā majjhe chiddasamīpe manussā koṭenti, idaṃ dvārakoṭakavattanti dīpentā vadanti.Vivaribhagavā dvāranti na bhagavā uṭṭhāya dvāraṃ vivari, vivaratūti pana hatthaṃ pasāresi. Tato ‘‘bhagavā tumhehi anekāsu kappakoṭīsu dānaṃ dadamānehi na sahatthā dvāravivaraṇakammaṃ kata’’nti sayameva dvāraṃ vivaṭaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā bhagavato manena vivaṭaṃ, tasmā ‘‘vivari bhagavā dvāra’’nti vuttaṃ.

301.In the Rojā story, vihāroti they spoke referring to the perfumed chamber.Ataramānoti not hurrying, placing the foot gently, measuring the space of a footstep, being careful not to disturb the well-smoothed sand that is like a slab of pearl-shells and sinduvāra flowers.Āḷindanti the front part.Ukkāsitvāti having made a sound of clearing the throat.Aggaḷanti the door panel.Ākoṭehīti means strike lightly near the keyhole with the tip of the fingernail. It is said that because non-humans strike too high on the door and animals strike too low, humans strike in the middle near the hole. They say this to indicate that this is the custom of striking the door. Vivari bhagavā dvāranti the Blessed One did not get up and open the door, but rather extended his hand so that it would open. Then, the door opened by itself, because "the Blessed One has not done the work of opening the door with his own hand, even while giving gifts in countless hundreds of thousands of aeons." However, because it was opened by the Blessed One's mind, therefore it is said that "the Blessed One opened the door."

Rojamallavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Rojā Malla Story is finished.

Vuḍḍhapabbajitavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Story of the Elderly Ascetic

303.Ātumāvatthumhiaññataro vuḍḍhapabbajitoti subhaddo nāma aññataro bhikkhu vuḍḍhakāle pabbajitattā ‘‘vuḍḍhapabbajito’’ti vutto.Dve dārakāti sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitā dve puttā.Nāḷiyāvāpakenāti nāḷiyā ceva thavikāya ca.Saṃhariṃsūti yasmā manussā te dārake mañjubhāṇine paṭibhānavante disvā kāretukāmāpi akāretukāmāpi kārentiyeva, katakāle ca ‘‘kiṃ gaṇhissatha tātā’’ti pucchanti. Te vadanti ‘‘na amhākaṃ aññena kenaci attho, pitā pana no bhagavato āgatakāle yāgudānaṃ kātukāmo’’ti. Taṃ sutvā manussā aparigaṇetvāva yaṃ te sakkonti harituṃ, sabbaṃ denti. Yampi na sakkonti, manussehi pesenti. Tasmā te dārakā bahuṃ loṇampi telampi sappimpi taṇḍulampi khādanīyampi saṃhariṃsu.

303.In the Ātuma story, aññataro vuḍḍhapabbajitoti another monk named Subhadda, because he ordained in old age, was called "the elderly ascetic".Dve dārakāti two sons standing in the position of novices.Nāḷiyāvāpakenāti with a nāḷi measure and a bag.Saṃhariṃsūti because people, seeing those boys as eloquent and clever, would definitely make them do things, whether they wanted them to or not, and when they had done something, they would ask, "What will you take, lads?" They would say, "We don't need anything else, but our father wants to give gruel when the Blessed One arrives." Hearing that, people would give everything they could carry, without counting. And what they could not carry, they would send with other people. Therefore, those boys collected much salt, oil, ghee, rice, and edibles.

Ātumāyaṃ viharatīti ātumaṃ nissāya viharati.Bhusāgāreti bhusamaye agārake. Tattha kira mahantaṃ palālapuñjaṃ abbhantarato palālaṃ nikkaḍḍhitvā sālāsadisaṃ pabbajitānaṃ vasanayoggaṭṭhānasadisaṃ kataṃ, tadā bhagavā tattha vasi. Atha bhagavati ātumaṃ āgantvā bhusāgārakaṃ paviṭṭhe subhaddo sāyanhasamayaṃ gāmadvāraṃ gantvā manusse āmantesi ‘‘upāsakā nāhaṃ tumhākaṃ santikā aññaṃ kiñci paccāsīsāmi, mayhaṃ dārakehi ānītatelādīniyeva saṅghassa pahonti, hatthakammamattaṃ me dethā’’ti. Kiṃ, bhante, karomāti? ‘‘Idañcidañca gaṇhathā’’ti sabbūpakaraṇāni gāhetvā vihāre uddhanāni kāretvā ekaṃ kāḷakaṃ kāsāvaṃ nivāsetvā tādisameva pārupitvā ‘‘idaṃ karotha, idaṃ karothā’’ti sabbarattiṃ vicārento satasahassaṃ vissajjetvā bhojjayāguñca madhugoḷakañca paṭiyādāpesi.Bhojjayāgunāma paṭhamaṃ bhuñjitvā pātabbayāgu, tattha sappimadhuphāṇitamacchamaṃsapupphaphalarasādi yaṃkiñci khādanīyaṃ nāma, sabbaṃ pavisati, kīḷitukāmānaṃ sīsamakkhanayoggā hoti sugandhagandhā.

Ātumāyaṃ viharatīti he was staying relying on Ātuma.Bhusāgāreti in a dwelling made of chaff. There, it is said, a large heap of straw was made into a place suitable for ascetics to live, like a hall, by pulling out the straw from the inside. At that time, the Blessed One stayed there. Then, when the Blessed One came to Ātuma and entered the dwelling made of chaff, Subhadda went to the village gate in the evening and addressed the people, "Lay followers, I do not expect anything else from you. The oil, etc., brought by my boys is enough for the Sangha. Just give me your labor." "What shall we do, venerable sir?" "Take this and that," he said, having them take all the implements, having them build elevated platforms in the monastery, having them dress in a dark brown robe and wear a similar one, and thinking about it all night while saying "do this, do that," he spent a hundred thousand and had rice-gruel and honey-cakes prepared. Bhojjayāgunāma is the morning gruel that is drunk after eating first. All kinds of edibles such as ghee, honey, molasses, fish, meat, flowers, and fruit juices are added to it, and it is fragrant, suitable for anointing the head of those who want to play.

‘‘atha kho so vuḍḍhapabbajito tassā rattiyā accayena bahutaraṃ yāguṃ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato upanāmesī’’ti.Jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchantītiādi vuttanayameva.Kutāyanti kuto ayaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.

‘‘atha kho so vuḍḍhapabbajito tassā rattiyā accayena bahutaraṃ yāguṃ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato upanāmesī’’ti.Jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchantītiādi is the same as previously stated.Kutāyanti from where is this. The rest here is easy to understand.

304.Dasabhāgaṃ datvāti dasamabhāgaṃ datvā. Tenevāha‘‘dasa koṭṭhāse katvā eko koṭṭhāso bhūmisāmikānaṃ dātabbo’’ti.

304.Dasabhāgaṃ datvāti having given a tenth part. Therefore, he said ‘‘dasa koṭṭhāse katvā eko koṭṭhāso bhūmisāmikānaṃ dātabbo’’ti.

Vuḍḍhapabbajitavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Story of the Elderly Ascetic is finished.

Catumahāpadesakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Four Great Authorities

305.Parimaddantāti upaparikkhantā. Pattuṇṇadese sañjātavatthaṃpattuṇṇaṃ. Koseyyavisesoti hi abhidhānakose vuttaṃ. Cīnadese somāradese ca sañjātavatthānicīnasomārapaṭāni. Pattuṇṇādīni tīṇi koseyyassa anulomāni pāṇakehi katasuttamayattā.Iddhimayikaṃehibhikkhūnaṃ puññiddhiyā nibbattacīvaraṃ. Taṃ khomādīnaṃ aññataraṃ hotīti tesaṃyeva anulomaṃ. Devatāhi dinnacīvaraṃdevadattiyaṃ. Taṃ kapparukkhe nibbattaṃ jālinīdevakaññāya anuruddhattherassa dinnavatthasadisaṃ. Tampi khomādīnaññeva anulomaṃ hoti tesu aññatarabhāvato.Dve paṭā desanāmeneva vuttāti tesaṃ sarūpadassanaparametaṃ, nāññaṃ nivattanaparaṃ pattuṇṇapaṭassapi desanāmeneva vuttattā.Tumbāti bhājanāni.Phalatumboti lābuādi.Udakatumboti udakukkhipanakakuṭako.Kilañjacchattanti veḷuvilīvehi vāyitvā katachattaṃ.Sambhinnarasanti sammissitarasaṃ.Pānakaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ hotīti ambapānādipānakaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ hoti, taṃ vikālepi kappati asambhinnarasattā.Tena tadahupaṭiggahitena saddhinti tena sattāhakālikena tadahupaṭiggahitena saddhiṃ. Sesamettha suviññeyyameva.

305.Parimaddantāti examining. Pattuṇṇaṃ means cloth made in the Pattuṇṇa country. For in the lexicon it is said to be a special kind of silk. Cīnasomārapaṭāni means cloths made in China and Somāra. The three, pattuṇṇa, etc., are in accordance with silk because they are made of thread made by insects. Iddhimayikaṃ means a robe created by the power of merit of the ehi-bhikkhus. It is one of the khoma, etc., so it is in accordance with those. Devadattiyaṃ means a robe given by a deity. It is like the cloth produced from the wish-fulfilling tree and given to Anuruddha Thera by the divine maiden Jālinī. That too is in accordance with the khoma, etc., because it is one of those. Dve paṭā desanāmeneva vuttāti this is only for the purpose of showing their form, not for prohibiting anything else, because even the pattuṇṇa cloth is mentioned by name. Tumbāti means bowls. Phalatumboti means a gourd, etc. Udakatumboti means a small pot for scooping water.Kilañjacchattanti means an umbrella woven with bamboo or reeds.Sambhinnarasanti means mixed juice.Pānakaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ hotīti means receiving a drink such as mango juice, etc.; that is allowable even at the wrong time because it is not a mixed juice.Tena tadahupaṭiggahitena saddhinti with that seven-day allowable, with that which was received on that day. The rest here is very easy to understand.

Catumahāpadesakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Four Great Authorities is finished.

Bhesajjakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Bhesajja Khandhaka is finished.

7. Kathinakkhandhakaṃ

7. Kathina Khandhaka

Kathinānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Allowing of the Kathina

306.Kathinakkhandhakesīsavasenāti padhānaṅgavasena.‘‘Kathinanti pañcānisaṃse antokaraṇasamatthatāya thiranti attho’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.‘‘So nesaṃ bhavissatī’’ti yujjatīti ‘‘so tumhāka’’nti avatvā ‘‘nesa’’nti vacanaṃ yujjati.Ye atthatakathināti na kevalaṃ tumhākameva, ye aññepi atthatakathinā, tesampi bhavissatīti attho.Anāmantetvā caraṇanti cārittasikkhāpade vuttanayena anāpucchitvā kulesu caraṇaṃ.Matakacīvaranti matassa santakaṃ cīvaraṃ.Tatruppādena ābhatanti vihārasantakena khettavatthuādinā ānītaṃ.

306.In the Kathina Khandhaka, sīsavasenāti means by way of the main component.‘‘Kathina nti pañcānisaṃse antokaraṇasamatthatāya thiranti attho’’tiis said in the Gaṇṭhipada "Kathina means firm because it is capable of internal action and has five benefits".‘‘So nesaṃ bhavissatī’’ti yujjatīti it is appropriate that "so tumhāka"nti is not said, but "nesa"nti is said.Ye atthatakathināti the meaning is, it will be so not only for you, but also for others who are zealous in the meaning.Anāmantetvā caraṇanti wandering in families without asking permission, in the manner stated in the training rule regarding conduct.Matakacīvaranti a robe belonging to a dead person.Tatruppādena ābhatanti brought with the income of the monastery, such as fields and property.

Paṭhamapavāraṇāya pavāritāti idaṃ vassacchedaṃ akatvā vassaṃvutthabhāvasandassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ antarāyena appavāritānampi vutthavassānaṃ kathinatthārasambhavato. Teneva ‘‘appavāritā vā’’ti avatvā ‘‘chinnavassā vā pacchimikāya upagatā vā na labhantī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ.Aññasmiṃ vihāre vutthavassāpi na labhantīti nānāsīmāya aññasmiṃ vihāre vutthavassā imasmiṃ vihāre kathinatthāraṃ na labhantīti attho.Khalimakkhitasāṭakoti ahatavatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Dānakammavācāti kathinadussadānakammavācā.Akātuṃ na labbhatīti iminā anādariyena akarontassa dukkaṭanti dīpeti.Kammavācā pana ekāyeva vaṭṭatīti kathinatthārasāṭakassa dānakāle vuttā ekāyeva kammavācā vaṭṭati. Puna tassa aññasmiṃ vatthe diyyamāne kammavācāya dātabbakiccaṃ natthi, apalokanameva alanti adhippāyo.

Paṭhamapavāraṇāya pavāritā (having completed the first Pavāraṇā) is said to indicate that they have spent the rainy season without breaking it. This is to show that even those who have spent the rainy season but were unable to perform Pavāraṇā due to some obstacle, still qualify for the Kathina spreading. Therefore, instead of saying "appavāritā vā (or not having performed Pavāraṇā)," it is said only that "chinnavassā vā pacchimikāya upagatā vā na labhantī (those who have broken the rains or have approached the last day do not receive)," meaning that those who broke their vassa or observed it incorrectly, or approach the last day of the allowable period, do not receive [the benefits of the Kathina]. Aññasmiṃ vihāre vutthavassāpi na labhantī (even those who have spent the rainy season in another monastery do not receive): those who have spent the rainy season in another monastery within a different boundary (sīmā) do not receive the Kathina spreading in this monastery. Khalimakkhitasāṭako (a robe smeared with sediment) refers to new cloth. Dānakammavācā (the formal declaration of giving): the formal declaration for giving the Kathina cloth. Akātuṃ na labbhatī (it is not proper to not do) indicates that one incurs a dukkata offense by not doing it out of disrespect. Kammavācā pana ekāyeva vaṭṭatī (only one formal declaration suffices): the single formal declaration recited during the giving of the Kathina spreading cloth suffices. There is no need to give another formal declaration when that same cloth is given for another purpose; a mere announcement is enough.

308.Mahābhūmikanti mahāvisayaṃ, catuvīsatiākāravantatāya mahāvitthārikanti vuttaṃ hoti.Pañcakanti pañcakhaṇḍaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi.Paṭhamacimilikāti kathinavatthato aññā attano pakaticimilikā.‘‘Kucchicimilikaṃ katvā sibbitamattenāti thirajiṇṇānaṃ cimilikānaṃ ekato katvā sibbanassetaṃ adhivacana’’ntigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Mahāpaccariyaṃ kurundiyañca‘‘vuttavacananidassanaṃ byañjane eva bhedo, atthe natthīti dassanatthaṃ kata’’nti vadanti.Piṭṭhianuvātāropanamattenāti dīghato anuvātassa āropanamattena.Kucchianuvātāropanamattenāti puthulato anuvātassa āropanamattena.Sāruppaṃ hotīti samaṇasāruppaṃ hoti.Rattinissaggiyenāti rattiatikkantena.

308.Mahābhūmika (extensive) means having a large scope, greatly expanded due to possessing twenty-four characteristics. Pañcaka (five-fold) means having five sections. The same method applies to the remaining instances. Paṭhamacimilikā (the first hem) is the individual's original hem, different from the Kathina cloth. ‘‘Kucchicimilikaṃ katvā sibbitamattenā (simply sewing after making a belly hem) is a term for sewing together old, worn-out hems,’’ as stated in the Ganthipada.Mahāpaccariyaṃ kurundiyañca (Mahāpaccariya and Kurundi) are said to be "given as examples of wording, the difference being only in the expression, not in the meaning." Piṭṭhianuvātāropanamattenā (merely attaching the back border) means merely attaching the border along the length. Kucchianuvātāropanamattenā (merely attaching the belly border) means merely attaching the border along the width. Sāruppaṃ hotī (it is appropriate) means it is appropriate for a samaṇa. Rattinissaggiyenā (due to night exceeding) means due to the night having passed.

Kathinānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Kathina Allowance is Concluded.

Ādāyasattakādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Ādāyasattaka, Etc.

311.Ayanti āsāvacchediko kathinuddhāro.Idha na vuttoti pāḷiyaṃ mātikāpadabhājane savanantikānantaraṃ na vutto.Tatthāti tasmiṃ sīmātikkantike kathinuddhāre. ‘‘Sīmātikkantiko nāma cīvarakālasīmātikkantiko’’tikenacivuttaṃ. ‘‘Bahisīmāyaṃ cīvarakālasamayassa atikkantattā sīmātikkantiko’’ti ayaṃ amhākaṃ khanti. Sahubbhāre ‘‘so katacīvaro’’ti pāṭho dissati, evañca sati cīvarapalibodho paṭhamaṃ chijjatīti viññāyati, idha pana parivārapāḷiyañca ‘‘dve palibodhā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ chijjantī’’ti (pari. 415) vacanato taṃ na sameti, tasmā vīmaṃsitabbamettha kāraṇaṃ.

311.Aya (this) means the Kathina removal that cuts off expectations. Idha na vutto (is not mentioned here) means that it is not mentioned immediately after savanantikā in the section on matrix terms in the Pāḷi. Tatthā (there) means in that Kathina removal that exceeds the boundary. "Sīmātikkantiko nāma cīvarakālasīmātikkantiko (Exceeding the boundary means exceeding the boundary of the time for making robes)" is stated by some. "Bahisīmāyaṃ cīvarakālasamayassa atikkantattā sīmātikkantiko (Because the time for making robes has passed outside the boundary, it exceeds the boundary)" is what we prefer. In the Sahubbhāra, the reading "so katacīvaro (he has made the robe)" is seen, and in that case, it is understood that the robe preoccupation is cut off first. However, here in the Parivāra Pāḷi, it says, "dve palibodhā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ chijjantī (two preoccupations are cut off without precedence or sequence)" (pari. 415), so it does not agree with that. Therefore, the reason should be examined in this matter.

312.‘‘Samādāyavāro ādāyavārasadiso, upasaggamattamettha viseso’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘sabbaṃ attano parikkhāraṃ anavasesetvā pakkamanto ‘samādāya pakkamatī’ti vuccatī’’ti vadanti. Puna samādāyavārepi teyeva dassitāti sambandho. Vippakatacīvare pakkamanantikassa kathinuddhārassa asambhavato‘‘yathāsambhava’’nti vuttaṃ. Pakkamanantiko hi kathinuddhāro niṭṭhitacīvarasseva vasena vutto ‘‘bhikkhu atthatakathino katacīvaraṃ ādāya pakkamatī’’ti vuttattā, tasmā so vippakatacīvaro na sambhavatīti chaḷeva ubbhārā tattha dassitā.

312.‘‘Samādāyavāro ādāyavārasadiso, upasaggamattamettha viseso (The carrying-away case is similar to the taking-away case; the difference here is merely the prefix),’’ is stated in the Ganthipada. Some, however, say, ‘‘sabbaṃ attano parikkhāraṃ anavasesetvā pakkamanto ‘samādāya pakkamatī’ti vuccatī (one who departs without leaving behind any of his requisites is called ‘departing by taking up completely’)." Again, the connection is that the same ones are shown in the carrying-away case. Because Kathina removal upon departing with an unfinished robe is impossible, ‘‘yathāsambhava’’ (as possible) is stated. For Kathina removal upon departing is stated only in the case of a finished robe, as it is said, "bhikkhu atthatakathino katacīvaraṃ ādāya pakkamatī (a bhikkhu who has spread the Kathina departs taking the finished robe)." Therefore, that is not possible with an unfinished robe, so only six removals are shown there.

anadhiṭṭhita-padena visesetvā pavattaṃ, atthato paṭhamattikena sameti.Anadhiṭṭhitenāti ca ‘‘paccessaṃ na paccessa’’nti evaṃ anadhiṭṭhitena, aniyamitenāti attho. Tatiyattikānantaraṃ catutthattikaṃ sambhavantaṃ antosīmāyaṃ ‘‘paccessa’’nti vacanavisesena sambhavati. Tathā ca yojiyamānaṃ itarehi savanantikādīhi aviruddhaṃ hotīti catutthattikaṃ ahutvā chakkaṃ jātanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ tīṇi tikāni ekaṃ chakkañcāti paṭhamaṃ pannarasakaṃ veditabbaṃ.

anadhiṭṭhita-padena visesetvā pavattaṃ, atthato paṭhamattikena sameti (proceeding by specifying with the word anadhiṭṭhita, it agrees in meaning with the first triplet). Anadhiṭṭhitenāti ca ‘‘paccessaṃ na paccessa’’nti evaṃ anadhiṭṭhitena, aniyamitenāti attho (And by anadhiṭṭhitena it means anadhiṭṭhita as in "he gives permission, he does not give permission," meaning not fixed). After the third triplet, the fourth triplet, which is possible, is possible within the boundary due to the specific phrase "paccessa (he gives permission)." And when applying it in that way, it is not contradictory to the others, such as savanantikā, so it should be understood that a hexad arises instead of a fourth triplet. Thus, the first set of fifteen should be understood as three triplets and one hexad.

316-320.Tato idameva pannarasakaṃ upasaggavisesena dutiyaṃ samādāyapannarasakaṃ nāma kataṃ. Puna ‘‘vippakatacīvaraṃ ādāyā’’ti tatiyaṃ pannarasakaṃ, ‘‘samādāyā’’ti catutthaṃ pannarasakaṃ dassitanti evaṃ cattāri pannarasakāni veditabbāni. Tattha paṭhamadutiyesu pannarasakesu sabbena sabbaṃ akatacīvaraṃ adhippetaṃ, itaresu dvīsu vippakatanti veditabbaṃ. Tato paraṃ ‘‘cīvarāsāya pakkamatī’’tiādinā nayena niṭṭhānasanniṭṭhānanāsanaāsāvacchedikavasena eko vāroti idamekaṃ catukkaṃ jātaṃ, tasmā pubbe vuttāni tikāni āsāvacchedikāni tīṇi ca tikānīti etaṃ anāsāyadvādasakanti veditabbaṃ. Tadanantare āsāyadvādasake kiñcāpi paṭhamaṃ dvādasakaṃ labbhati, tathāpi taṃ nibbisesanti tamekaṃ dvādasakaṃ avuttasiddhaṃ katvā visesato dassetuṃ ādito paṭṭhāya ‘‘antosīmāyaṃ paccessa’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ dutiyacatukke ‘‘so bahisīmagato suṇātī’’tiādivacanassa tatiyacatukke savanantikādīnañca okāsakaraṇatthanti veditabbaṃ. Idaṃ pana dvādasakaṃ anāsāyavasenapi labbhamānaṃ iminā avuttasiddhaṃ katvā na dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Evamettha dve dvādasakāni uddharitabbāni. Karaṇīyadvādasakepi yathādassitaṃ anāsāyadvādasakaṃ avuttasiddhaṃ āsāyadvādasakañcāti dve dvādasakāni uddharitabbāni.

316-320.Then that same set of fifteen is made the second set of fifteen, named the carrying-away set of fifteen, by means of a specific prefix. Again, the third set of fifteen, "vippakatacīvaraṃ ādāyā (taking away an unfinished robe)," and the fourth set of fifteen, "samādāyā (completely taking away)," are shown, so these four sets of fifteen should be understood. There, it should be understood that in the first two sets of fifteen, an entirely unfinished robe is intended, and in the other two, an unfinished one. After that, in the manner beginning with "cīvarāsāya pakkamatī (he departs with expectation of a robe)," one case arises in terms of completion, non-completion, destruction, and cutting off expectation. Therefore, this single tetrad, along with the three triplets mentioned earlier that relate to cutting off expectations, should be understood as the set of twelve without expectations. In the set of twelve with expectations after that, although a first set of twelve is obtained, it is undifferentiated, so making that single set of twelve implicitly understood, "antosīmāyaṃ paccessa (within the boundary he gives permission)" is stated from the beginning in order to specifically show the distinction. That should be understood as making room for the statement "so bahisīmagato suṇātī (he being outside the boundary hears)" in the second tetrad and for savanantikā, etc., in the third tetrad. However, this set of twelve, although obtainable also in terms of non-expectation, is not shown, having been made implicitly understood. Thus, two sets of twelve should be extracted here. In the case of the set of twelve to be done, two sets of twelve should be extracted: the set of twelve without expectation as shown and the set of twelve with expectation.

321-322.Yasmā disaṃgamikanavake ‘‘disaṃgamiko pakkamatī’’ti vacaneneva ‘‘na paccessa’’nti idaṃ avuttasiddhameva, tasmā taṃ na vuttaṃ. Ettāvatā ca āvāsapalibodhābhāvo dassito.Cīvarapaṭivīsaṃ apavilāyamānoti iminā cīvarapalibodhasamaṅgitamassa dasseti. Tatthacīvarapaṭivīsanti attano pattabbacīvarabhāgaṃ.Apavilāyamānoti ākaṅkhamāno. Tassa cīvaralābhe sati vassaṃvutthāvāse niṭṭhānasanniṭṭhānanāsanantikānaṃ vasena ekaṃ tikaṃ, tesaṃyeva vasena antarāmagge ekaṃ, gataṭṭhāne ekanti tiṇṇaṃ tikānaṃ vasena ekaṃ navakaṃ veditabbaṃ.

321-322.Since in the set of nine for one going in a direction, "disaṃgamiko pakkamatī (one going in a direction departs)" implicitly includes "na paccessa (he does not give permission)," it is not stated. And with this much, the absence of dwelling preoccupation is shown. Cīvarapaṭivīsaṃ apavilāyamāno (longing for a share of robes) shows his association with robe preoccupation. There, cīvarapaṭivīsa (share of robes) means one's share of robes to be obtained. Apavilāyamāno (longing) means desiring. In the case of his obtaining robes, one should understand one set of three in terms of completion, non-completion, and destruction in the monastery where the rainy season was spent, one in the intermediate path in terms of those same, and one in the place reached, for a total of one set of nine based on three sets of three.

324.Tato paraṃ niṭṭhānasanniṭṭhānanāsanantikasīmātikkantikasaubbhārānaṃ vasena phāsuvihārapañcakaṃ vuttaṃ. Sesamettha pāḷito aṭṭhakathāto ca suviññeyyameva.

324.After that, the set of five for comfortable dwelling is stated in terms of completion, non-completion, destruction, proximity, exceeding the boundary, and collection. The rest here is easily understood from the Pāḷi and commentary.

Ādāyasattakādikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Ādāyasattaka, Etc., is Concluded.

Kathinakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Kathina Section is Concluded.

8. Cīvarakkhandhakaṃ

8. The Robe Section

Jīvakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Jīvaka Story

329-330.Cīvarakkhandhakekammavipākanti kammajarogaṃ.Saṃyamassāti ānisaṃsassa, upayogatthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.

329-330.In the Robe Section, kammavipāka (karmic result) means a disease caused by karma. Saṃyamassā (of restraint) means of the benefit; this is a possessive word used in the sense of use.

Pajjotarājavatthukathādivaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Pajojota King Story, Etc.

334-336.Vicchikassa jātoti tassa kira mātuyā utusamaye sayanagatāya vicchiko nābhippadesaṃ āruḷho, sā tassa samphassena gabbhaṃ gaṇhi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘vicchikassa jāto’’ti.Ussannadosoti sañcitapittādidoso.

334-336.Vicchikassa jāto (born of a scorpion): it is said that when his mother was lying down during her menstrual period, a scorpion climbed onto the region of her navel, and she conceived by its touch. With reference to that, it is said, "born of a scorpion." Ussannadoso (having aggravated humors) means having accumulated humors of bile, etc.

Varayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Requesting Favors Story

337.Itarītarenāti itarena itarena.Itara-saddo pana aniyamavacano dvikkhattuṃ vuccamāno yaṃkiñci-saddehi samānattho hotīti vuttaṃ‘‘appagghenapi mahagghenapi yena kenacī’’ti.Mahāpiṭṭhiyakojavanti hatthipiṭṭhīsu attharitabbatāya mahāpiṭṭhiyanti laddhasamaññaṃ caturaṅgulapupphaṃ kojavaṃ.

337.Itarītarenā (with this and that) means with this and that other thing. It is said that the word itara, which means unspecified, is synonymous with the word "yaṃkiñci (whatever)" when said twice, as in ‘‘appagghenapi mahagghenapi yena kenacī’’ (with a cheap one, with an expensive one, with whatever).Mahāpiṭṭhiyakojava (large-back Kojava) means a Kojava with four-finger flowers that has acquired the name "large-back" because it is spread on the backs of elephants.

Kambalānujānanādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Allowance of Blankets, Etc.

340.Upacāreti susānassa āsanne padese.Chaḍḍetvā gatāti kiñci avatvāyeva chaḍḍetvā gatā.So eva sāmīti akatāya katikāya yena gahitaṃ, sova sāmī.

340.Upacāre (in the vicinity) means in a place near the charnel ground. Chaḍḍetvā gatā (they left it, throwing it away) means they left it, throwing it away without saying anything at all. So eva sāmī (he is the owner) means that whoever took it without any agreement is the owner.

Cīvarapaṭiggāhakasammutiādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Appointment of a Robe Receiver, Etc.

342-343.Dhuravihāraṭṭhāneti vihāradvārassa sammukhaṭṭhāne.Vihāramajjheyeva sammannitabbanti sabbesaṃ jānanatthāya vihāramajjheyeva nisinnehi sammannitabbaṃ.Tulābhūtoti tulāsadiso.Vaṇṇāvaṇṇaṃ katvāti sabbakoṭṭhāse agghato samake katvā. Tenevāha‘‘same paṭivīse ṭhapetvā’’ti.Idanti sāmaṇerānaṃ upaḍḍhapaṭivīsassa dānaṃ.Phātikammanti sammuñjanībandhanādihatthakammaṃ.Ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontīti mahāsaddaṃ karonti.Samapaṭivīso dātabboti karissāmāti yācantānaṃ paṭiññāmattenapi samakoṭṭhāso dātabbo.

342-343.Dhuravihāraṭṭhāne (in the place at the gateway of the monastery) means in the place facing the gateway of the monastery. Vihāramajjheyeva sammannitabba (it should be appointed in the middle of the monastery) means it should be appointed by those sitting in the middle of the monastery, for the sake of everyone's knowledge. Tulābhūto (being like a scale) means like a scale. Vaṇṇāvaṇṇaṃ katvā (having made it graded) means having made all the shares equal in value. Therefore, he said, ‘‘same paṭivīse ṭhapetvā’’ (having placed equal shares).Ida (this) means giving half shares to the novices. Phātikamma (handicraft) means manual work such as binding brooms. Ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī (they make an uproar) means they make a great noise. Samapaṭivīso dātabbo (an equal share should be given) means that an equal share should be given merely upon promising to those who request, saying, "I will do it."

Cīvararajanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Robe Dyeing

344.Rajanakumbhiyā majjhe ṭhapetvāti antorajanakumbhiyā majjhe ṭhapetvā evaṃ vaṭṭādhārake antorajanakumbhiyā pakkhitte majjhe udakaṃ tiṭṭhati, vaṭṭādhārakato bahi samantā antokumbhiyaṃ rajanacchalli.Rajanaṃ pakkhipitunti rajanacchalliṃ pakkhipituṃ.

344.Rajanakumbhiyā majjhe ṭhapetvā (having placed it in the middle of the dye pot) means having placed it in the middle of the inner dye pot, in this way: when the round base is placed inside the inner dye pot, the water remains in the middle, and the dye shavings are on all sides of the inner pot, outside the round base. Rajanaṃ pakkhipitu (to put in the dye) means to put in the dye shavings.

Ticīvarānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Allowance of Three Robes

346.Uddhaste aruṇeti uggate aruṇasīse.Nandimukhiyāti tuṭṭhamukhiyā.

346.Uddhaste aruṇe (when the red [sun] has risen) means when the red head [of the sun] has risen. Nandimukhiyā (with a joyful face) means with a delighted face.

Atirekacīvarādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Additional Robes, Etc.

348.Acchupeyyanti patiṭṭhapeyyaṃ.Hatavatthakānanti kālātītavatthānaṃ.Uddharitvā allīyāpanakhaṇḍanti dubbalaṭṭhānaṃ apanetvā allīyāpanavatthakhaṇḍaṃ.

348.Acchupeyya (he should place) means he should establish. Hatavatthakāna (of out-of-date cloths) means of cloths that are past the allowable time. Uddharitvā allīyāpanakhaṇḍa (removing the attaching piece) means removing the weak place and [adding] an attaching piece of cloth.

Visākhāvatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Visākhā Story

349-351.Visākhāvatthumhikallakāyāti akilantakāyā pītisomanassehi phuṭasarīrā.Gatīti ñāṇagati ñāṇādhigamo.Abhisamparāyoti ñāṇābhisamparāyo ñāṇasahito peccabhāvo.

349-351.In the Visākhā story, kallakāyā (having a healthy body) means having an unwearied body, a body pervaded with joy and gladness. Gatī (destiny) means knowledge destiny, the attainment of knowledge. Abhisamparāyo (future existence) means knowledge future existence, future existence accompanied by knowledge.

Taṃbhagavā byākarissatīti ‘‘so bhikkhu sotāpanno sakadāgāmī’’tiādinā tassa taṃ ñāṇagatiṃ, tato paraṃ ‘‘niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvā dukkhassantaṃ karissatī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 5.1004) ñāṇābhisamparāyañca āvi karissati.Sovaggikanti saggasaṃvattanikaṃ. Sokaṃ nudati vinodetītisokanudaṃ.

Taṃbhagavā byākarissatī (the Blessed One will declare that) means that the Blessed One will reveal that knowledge destiny of his with "so bhikkhu sotāpanno sakadāgāmī (that bhikkhu is a sotāpanna, a sakadāgāmī)," etc., and after that, He will reveal the knowledge future existence with "niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvā dukkhassantaṃ karissatī (assured, destined for enlightenment, having come to this world only once more, he will make an end of suffering)," etc. (saṃ. ni. 5.1004). Sovaggika (leading to heaven) means conducive to heaven. Sokaṃ nudati vinodetītisokanudaṃ (it drives away and removes sorrow, therefore, it is sorrow-removing).

Nisīdanādianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Allowance of a Sitting Cloth, Etc.

353.Dukkhaṃsupatīti nānāvidhasupinaṃ passanto dukkhaṃ supati.Dukkhaṃ paṭibujjhatīti paṭibujjhantopi uttasitvā salomahaṃso dukkhaṃ paṭibujjhati.

353.Dukkhaṃsupatī (he sleeps uncomfortably) means he sleeps uncomfortably, seeing various kinds of dreams. Dukkhaṃ paṭibujjhatī (he awakens uncomfortably) means even when awakening, he awakens uncomfortably, startled, with bristling hairs.

Pacchimavikappanupagacīvarādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Rejected Robe Not Subject to Subsequent Disposal, Etc.

359-362.Aṭṭhapadakacchannena pattamukhaṃ sibbitunti aṭṭhapadaphalakākārena pattamukhe tattha tattha gabbhaṃ dassetvā sibbituṃ.Aggaḷaguttiyeva pamāṇanti imehi catūhi nikkhepakāraṇehi ṭhapentenapi aggaḷaguttivihāreyeva ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.

359-362.Aṭṭhapadakacchannena pattamukhaṃ sibbitu (to sew the face of the bowl with an eight-sectioned cover) means to sew the face of the bowl with an eight-sectioned design, showing pockets here and there. Aggaḷaguttiyeva pamāṇa (the limit is only a lock-bar storehouse) means that even when storing with these four reasons for storing, it is only proper to store it in a lock-bar storehouse.

Saṅghikacīvaruppādakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Production of Saṅghika Robes

363.Pañca māseti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ.Vaḍḍhiṃ payojetvā ṭhapitaupanikkhepatoti vassāvāsikatthāya veyyāvaccakarehi vaḍḍhiṃ payojetvā ṭhapitaupanikkhepato.Tatruppādatoti nāḷikeraārāmāditatruppādato. ‘‘Vassāvāsikalābhavasena vā matakacīvaravasena vā tatruppādavasena vā aññena vā kenaci ākārena saṅghaṃ uddissa uppannacīvaraṃ, sabbaṃ tasseva atthatakathinassa pañca māse, anatthatakathinassa ekaṃ cīvaramāsaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti avisesato vatvāpi puna vassāvāsikalābhavasena uppanne labbhamānavisesaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘yaṃ pana ida’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthaidhāti abhilāpamattametaṃ. ‘‘Vassaṃvutthasaṅghassa demā’’ti vuttepi soyeva nayo.Anatthatakathinassapi pañca māse pāpuṇātīti vassāvāsikalābhavasena uppannattā anatthatakathinassapi vutthavassassa pañca māse pāpuṇāti.Kenacipana ‘‘idha-saddena niyamitattā’’ti kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ akāraṇaṃ. Tathā hi idha-saddena aniyametvāpi ‘‘vassaṃvutthasaṅghassa demā’’ti vā ‘‘vassāvāsikaṃ demā’’ti vā antohemante vassāvāsikalābhavasena dinnaṃ cīvaraṃ anatthatakathinassapi vutthavassassa pañca māse pāpuṇāti, teneva parato aṭṭhasu mātikāsu ‘‘vassaṃvutthasaṅghassa detī’’ti imassa mātikāpadassa vinicchaye (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379) ‘‘cīvaramāsato paṭṭhāya yāva hemantassa pacchimo divaso, tāva vassāvāsikaṃ demāti vutte kathinaṃ atthataṃ vā hotu anatthataṃ vā, atītavassaṃvutthānameva pāpuṇātī’’ti vuttaṃ.Tato paranti pañcamāsato paraṃ, gimhānassa paṭhamadivasato paṭṭhāyāti attho.

363. Pañca māse means the use of the accusative case in the sense of continuous connection. Vaḍḍhiṃ payojetvā ṭhapitaupanikkhepato means from the deposit kept by those doing service for the sake of the rains-residence, after applying interest. Tatruppādato means from what arises there, such as in a coconut grove. "A cloth that has arisen, intending it for the Saṅgha, in any way whatsoever, whether due to gains for rains-residence, or due to a cloth for the dead, or due to what arises there, or in any other way, all of it accrues to the one who has the Kathina laid out for five months, and to the one who does not have the Kathina laid out, for one cloth-month," even after stating this non-specifically, to show the specialty that can be obtained when it arises due to gains for rains-residence, ‘‘yaṃ pana ida’’ etc., was begun. There, idhā is merely a word. The same method applies even if it is said, "Let us give to the Saṅgha that has resided for the rains." Anatthatakathinassapi pañca māse pāpuṇātī means because it arose due to gains for rains-residence, it accrues to even the one who does not have the Kathina laid out, for five months for the one who has resided for the rains. But the reason that Kenaci stated, "because it is restricted by the word 'idha'," is not a reason. For even without restricting it with the word 'idha', a cloth given in the interior or the hemanta due to gains for rains-residence, saying "Let us give to the Saṅgha that has resided for the rains," or "Let us give for rains-residence," accrues to the one who has resided for the rains even if the Kathina is not laid out; therefore, in the eight matrices later, in the decision of this matrix-term, "he gives to the Saṅgha that has resided for the rains" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379), it is said, "From the cloth-month onward until the last day of the hemanta, when it is said, 'I give for rains-residence,' whether the Kathina is laid out or not, it accrues only to those who have resided for the past rains." Tato para means after the five months, beginning from the first day of the hot season.

‘‘Kasmā? Piṭṭhisamaye uppannattā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘udāhu anāgatavasse’’ti imassānantaraṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gimhānassa paṭhamadivasato paṭṭhāya uppannameva hi piṭṭhisamaye uppannattā ‘‘kiṃ atītavasse idaṃ vassāvāsika’’ntiādinā pucchitabbaṃ, teneva paratopi vakkhati ‘‘gimhānaṃ paṭhamadivasato paṭṭhāya vutte pana mātikā āropetabbā ‘atītavassāvāsassa pañca māsā atikkantā, anāgato cātumāsaccayena bhavissati, kataravassāvāsassa desī’ti. Sace ‘atītavassaṃvutthānaṃ dammī’ti vadati, taṃantovassaṃvutthānameva pāpuṇātī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379). Potthakesu pana ‘‘anatthatakathinassapi pañca māse pāpuṇātī’’ti imassānantaraṃ ‘‘kasmā? Piṭṭhisamaye uppannattā’’ti idaṃ likhanti, taṃ na yujjati. Na hi piṭṭhisamaye uppannaṃ sandhāya ‘‘anatthatakathinassapi pañca māse pāpuṇātī’’ti vuttaṃ, na ca piṭṭhisamaye uppannaṃ vutthavassasseva pāpuṇāti, sammukhībhūtānaṃ sabbesaṃ pāpuṇāti, teneva parato vakkhati ‘‘asukavihāre vassaṃvutthasaṅghassāti vadati, tatra vassaṃvutthānameva yāva kathinassubbhārā pāpuṇāti. Sace pana gimhānaṃ paṭhamadivasato paṭṭhāya evaṃ vadati, tatra sammukhībhūtānaṃ sabbesaṃ pāpuṇāti. Kasmā? Piṭṭhisamaye uppannattā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379).

"Why? Because it arose at the back-time" should be seen immediately after "or in a future rains?" For only what arises beginning from the first day of the hot season should be asked, "Is this for rains-residence in the past rains?" etc., because it arose at the back-time; therefore, later also he will say, "However, from the first day of the hot season onward, the matrix should be applied, 'The five months of the past rains-residence have passed, and the future will be after four months, for which rains-residence is he intending?' If he says, 'I will give to those who resided for the past rains,' it accrues only to those who resided within the rains" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379). However, in books, they write "Why? Because it arose at the back-time" immediately after "it accrues to even the one who does not have the Kathina laid out for five months," that is not appropriate. For "it accrues to even the one who does not have the Kathina laid out for five months" was not stated referring to what arose at the back-time, nor does what arose at the back-time accrue only to the one who has resided for the rains, it accrues to all who are present; therefore, later he will say, "If he says, 'To the Saṅgha that has resided for the rains in such-and-such a monastery,' it accrues only to those who have resided there until the uplifting of the Kathina. But if he says so beginning from the first day of the hot season, it accrues to all who are present. Why? Because it arose at the back-time" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379).

Ṭhitikā pana na tiṭṭhatīti ettha aṭṭhitāya ṭhitikāya puna aññasmiṃ cīvare uppanne sace eko bhikkhu āgacchati, majjhe chinditvā dvīhipi gahetabbaṃ. Ṭhitāya pana ṭhitikāya puna aññasmiṃ cīvare uppanne sace navakataro āgacchati, ṭhitikā heṭṭhā gacchati. Sace vuḍḍhataro āgacchati, ṭhitikā uddhamārohati. Atha añño natthi, puna attano pāpetvā gahetabbaṃ.Duggahitāni hontīti ettha saṅghikāneva hontīti adhippāyo.Gahitameva nāmāti ‘‘imassa idaṃ patta’’nti kiñcāpi na viditaṃ, te pana bhāgā atthato tesaṃ pattāyevāti adhippāyo.Itovāti therānaṃ dātabbatoyeva.

Ṭhitikā pana na tiṭṭhatīti here, if another cloth arises again for the fixed allocation that is not fixed, and if a certain bhikkhu comes, it should be taken by both after cutting in the middle. But if another cloth arises again for the fixed allocation that is fixed, and if a newer one comes, the fixed allocation goes downward. If an elder comes, the fixed allocation goes upward. But if there is no other, it should be taken after obtaining it again for oneself. Duggahitāni hontīti here, the meaning is that they are only Saṅghika. Gahitameva nāmāti even though it is not known "this alms bowl is for this one," the meaning is that those portions are indeed for their alms bowls in reality. Itovā means it should be given to the elders themselves.

Saṅghikacīvaruppādakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Account of the Arising of Saṅghika Cloths is Finished.

Upanandasakyaputtavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account Based on Upananda Sakyaputta

364.Sattāhavārenaaruṇameva uṭṭhāpetīti etaṃ vacanamattameva ekasmiṃ vihāre sattāhakiccābhāvato.Idanti ekādhippāyadānaṃ.Nānālābhehītiādīsu nānā visuṃ visuṃ lābho etesūti nānālābhā, dve vihārā, tehinānālābhehi. Nānā visuṃ visuṃ pākārādīhi paricchinno upacāro etesanti nānūpacārā, tehinānūpacārehi. Ekasīmavihārehīti ekūpacārasīmāyaṃ dvīhi vihārehi.

364. Sattāhavārena aruṇameva uṭṭhāpetī this is only a statement, because there is no seven-day duty in a certain monastery. Ida means a gift with a single intention. In Nānālābhehī etc., nānā means separate, separate gains, these are nānālābhā, two monasteries, with these nānālābhehi. Nānā means separate, separate enclosures bounded by walls, these are nānūpacārā, with these nānūpacārehi. Ekasīmavihārehī means with two monasteries in a single enclosure boundary.

Gilānavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account Based on the Sick

365.Palipannoti nimuggo, makkhitoti attho.Uccāretvāti ukkhipitvā.Samānācariyakoti ettha sacepi ekassa ācariyassa eko antevāsiko hoti, eko saddhivihāriko, etepi aññamaññaṃ samānācariyakā evāti vadanti.

365. Palipanno means submerged, defiled. Uccāretvā means having lifted up. Samānācariyako here, even if a certain disciple or a certain co-resident has one teacher, they say that these too are indeed co-teachers of each other.

366.Bhesajjaṃ yojetuṃ asamattho hotīti vejjena ‘‘idañcidañca bhesajjaṃ gahetvā iminā yojetvā dātabba’’nti vutte tathā kātuṃ asamatthoti attho.Nīhātunti nīharituṃ, chaḍḍetunti attho.

366. Bhesajjaṃ yojetuṃ asamattho hotī means, the meaning is that he is unable to do so when the physician says, "Having taken such-and-such medicine, it should be combined with this and given." Nīhātu means to take out, the meaning is to discard.

Matasantakakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account Based on the Property of the Dead

367-369.Bhikkhussa kālakateti etthakālakata-saddo bhāvasādhanoti āha‘‘kālakiriyāyā’’ti.Tattha tattha saṅghassāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vihāre saṅghassa.

367-369. Bhikkhussa kālakate here, kālakata is a term denoting state, thus he says ‘‘kālakiriyāyā’’. Tattha tattha saṅghassā means to the Saṅgha in that particular monastery.

Saṅghe bhinne cīvaruppādakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account of the Arising of Cloths when the Saṅgha is Divided

376.Yattha pana dakkhiṇodakaṃ pamāṇanti bhikkhū yasmiṃ raṭṭhe dakkhiṇodakapaaggahaṇamattenapi deyyadhammassa sāmino hontīti adhippāyo.Parasamuddeti jambudīpe.

376. Yattha pana dakkhiṇodakaṃ pamāṇa means, the meaning is that in whatever country the bhikkhus become owners of the gift-worthy item merely by accepting the water of dedication. Parasamudde means in Jambudīpa.

378.Matakacīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhātīti ettha maggaṃ gacchanto tassa kālakiriyaṃ sutvā avihāraṭṭhāne ce dvādasaratanabbhantare aññesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ abhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘idaṃ cīvaraṃ mayhaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti adhiṭṭhāti, svādhiṭṭhitaṃ.

378. Matakacīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhātī here, hearing of his death while going on the path, knowing the absence of other bhikkhus within twelve cubits of a non-monastery place, he resolves, "This cloth accrues to me," it is self-resolved.

Aṭṭhacīvaramātikākathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Eight Cloth-Matrices

379.Puggalādhiṭṭhānanayenavuttanti ‘‘sīmāyadāna’’ntiādinā vattabbe ‘‘sīmāya detī’’tiādi puggalādhiṭṭhānanayena vuttaṃ.Parikkhepārahaṭṭhānena paricchinnāti iminā aparikkhittassa vihārassa dhuvasannipātaṭṭhānādito paṭhamaleḍḍupātassa anto upacārasīmāti dasseti. Idāni dutiyaleḍḍupātassa antopi upacārasīmāyevāti dassetuṃ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Dhuvasannipātaṭṭhānampi pariyantagatameva gahetabbaṃ. Bhikkhunīnaṃ ārāmappavesanasenāsanāpucchanādi parivāsamānattārocanavassacchedanissayasenāsanaggāhādi vidhānanti idaṃ sabbaṃ imissāyeva upacārasīmāya vasena veditabbaṃ. Lābhatthāya ṭhapitasīmālābhasīmā. Samānasaṃvāsaavippavāsasīmāsu dinnassa idaṃ nānattaṃ – ‘‘avippavāsasīmāya dammī’’ti dinnaṃ gāmaṭṭhānaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Kasmā? ‘‘Ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcā’’ti vuttattā. ‘‘Samānasaṃvāsakasīmāya dammī’’ti dinnaṃ pana gāme ṭhitānampi pāpuṇātīti.

379. Puggalādhiṭṭhānanayena vutta means what should be stated as "sīmāyadāna" etc., is stated in the manner of individual designation as "he gives to the boundary" etc. Parikkhepārahaṭṭhānena paricchinnā with this he shows that the enclosure boundary of a monastery that is not enclosed is from the fixed assembly place to within the first clod-throw. Now, to show that the interior of the second clod-throw too is indeed the enclosure boundary, ‘‘apicā’’ etc., was begun. The fixed assembly place too should be taken as limited. The procedure for the bhikkhunīs—the entering into the ārāma, questioning about lodging, etc., the giving of parivāsa, the declaration of mānatta, the cutting of the rains, the taking of dependence, the taking of lodging, etc.—all this should be understood according to this very enclosure boundary. A boundary established for the sake of gain is lābhasīmā. This is the difference in what is given in the boundaries of common dwelling and non-separation—what is given saying "I give to the non-separation boundary" does not accrue to the village site. Why? Because it is said, "Having excluded the village and the village-enclosure." But what is given saying "I give to the common dwelling boundary" accrues to even those staying in the village.

Buddhādhivutthoti buddhena bhagavatā adhivuttho.Ekasminti ekasmiṃ vihāre.Pākavaṭṭanti dānavaṭṭaṃ.Vattatīti pavattati.Paṃsukūlikānampi vaṭṭatīti ‘‘tuyhaṃ demā’’ti avatvā ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ dema, therānaṃ demā’’ti vuttattā paṃsukūlikānaṃ vaṭṭati.Vicāritamevāti upāhanatthavikādīnamatthāya vicāritameva.

Buddhādhivuttho means dwelt in by the Buddha, the Blessed One. Ekasmi means in a certain monastery. Pākavaṭṭa means gift-circle. Vattatī means it proceeds. Paṃsukūlikānampi vaṭṭatī means because it was said, "Let us give to the bhikkhus, let us give to the elders," without saying "I give to you," it proceeds to the rag-robe wearers. Vicāritamevā means it should be allocated only for the sake of sandals, etc.

Upaḍḍhaṃ dātabbanti yaṃ ubhatosaṅghassa dinnaṃ, tato upaḍḍhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ, upaḍḍhaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sacepi eko bhikkhu hoti ekā vā bhikkhunī, antamaso anupasampannassapi upaḍḍhameva dātabbaṃ.‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ca bhikkhunīnañca tuyhañcā’’ti vutte pana puggalo visuṃ na labhatīti idaṃ aṭṭhakathāpamāṇeneva gahetabbaṃ. Na hettha visesakāraṇaṃ upalabbhati. Tathā hi ‘‘ubhatosaṅghassa ca tuyhañca dammī’’ti vutte sāmaññavisesavacanehi saṅgahitattā yathā puggalo visuṃ labhati, evamidhāpi ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassa ca tuyhañcā’’ti sāmaññavisesavacanasabbhāvato bhavitabbameva visuṃ puggalapaṭivīsenāti viññāyati, tasmā aṭṭhakathāvacanamevettha pamāṇaṃ.Pāpuṇanaṭṭhānato ekameva labhatīti attano vassaggena pattaṭṭhānato ekameva koṭṭhāsaṃ labhati. Tattha kāraṇamāha‘‘kasmā? Bhikkhusaṅghaggahaṇena gahitattā’’ti, bhikkhusaṅghaggahaṇeneva puggalassapi gahitattāti adhippāyo.Bhikkhusaṅghassa harāti vuttepi haritabbanti īdisaṃ gihiveyyāvaccaṃ na hotīti katvā vuttaṃ.

Upaḍḍhaṃ dātabba means half of what is given to both Saṅghas should be given to the bhikkhus, and half to the bhikkhunīs. Even if there is one bhikkhu or one bhikkhunī, at least even to a non-ordained one, only half should be given. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ca bhikkhunīnañca tuyhañcā’’ti vutte pana puggalo visuṃ na labhatī this should be taken only according to the authority of the commentary. For a specific reason is not found here. For just as when it is said "I give to both Saṅghas and to you," the individual obtains separately because it is included by general and specific terms, so too here it is understood that there must indeed be a separate individual share due to the existence of general and specific terms "to the Saṅgha of bhikkhus and to you," therefore the commentary statement alone is the authority here. Pāpuṇanaṭṭhānato ekameva labhatī means he obtains only one share from the place of obtaining due to his rains-group. There, he states the reason ‘‘kasmā? Bhikkhusaṅghaggahaṇena gahitattā’’, the meaning is because even the individual is included by the inclusion of the Saṅgha of bhikkhus. Bhikkhusaṅghassa harāti vuttepi haritabba means it was stated because there is no such lay service.

Lakkhaṇaññū vadantīti idaṃ sanniṭṭhānavacanaṃ, aṭṭhakathāsu anāgatattā pana evaṃ vuttaṃ.Bahiupacārasīmāyaṃ…pe… sabbesaṃ pāpuṇātīti yattha katthaci vutthavassānaṃ sabbesaṃ pāpuṇātīti adhippāyo. Tenevamātikāṭṭhakathāyampi (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. akālacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘sace pana bahiupacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhito ‘vassaṃvutthasaṅghassā’ti vadati, yattha katthaci vutthavassānaṃ sabbesaṃ sampattānaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti vuttaṃ.Gaṇṭhipadesupana ‘‘vassāvāsassa ananurūpe padese ṭhatvā vuttattā vassaṃvutthānaṃ avutthānañca sabbesaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Na hi ‘‘vassaṃvutthasaṅghassa dammī’’ti vutte avutthavassānaṃ pāpuṇāti.Evaṃ vadatīti ‘‘vassaṃvutthasaṅghassa dammī’’ti vadati.Uddesaṃ gahetuṃ āgatoti tassa santike uddesaṃ agahitapubbassapi uddesaṃ gaṇhissāmīti āgatakālato paṭṭhāya antevāsikabhāvūpagamanato vuttaṃ. Sesamettha suviññeyyameva.

Lakkhaṇaññū vadantī this is a conclusive statement, however, it was stated thus because it is not found in the commentaries. Bahiupacārasīmāyaṃ…pe… sabbesaṃ pāpuṇātī means it accrues to all who have resided for the rains wherever they may be. Therefore, in the mātikāṭṭhakathāya too (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. akālacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), it is said, "But if, standing outside the enclosure boundary, he says, 'To the Saṅgha that has resided for the rains,' it accrues to all who have arrived, who have resided for the rains wherever they may be." However, in the Gaṇṭhipadesu, it is said, "Because he spoke standing in a place unsuitable for rains-residence, it accrues to all, both those who have resided for the rains and those who have not," that should not be taken. For what is given saying "I give to the Saṅgha that has resided for the rains" does not accrue to those who have not resided for the rains. Evaṃ vadatī means he says, "I give to the Saṅgha that has resided for the rains." Uddesaṃ gahetuṃ āgato means it was stated from the time of coming with the assumption of discipleship, because he has come to take the uddesa near him even though he has never taken the uddesa before. The rest here is indeed easily understood.

Aṭṭhacīvaramātikākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Eight Cloth-Matrices is Finished.

Cīvarakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Cloth-Section is Finished.

9. Campeyyakkhandhakaṃ

9. Campeyyakkhandhakaṃ

Kassapagottabhikkhuvatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account Based on the Bhikkhu of Kassapagotta

380.Campeyyakkhandhakecampāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tassa hi nagarassa ārāmapokkharaṇīādīsu tesu tesu ṭhānesu campakarukkhāva ussannā ahesuṃ, tasmā ‘‘campā’’ti saṅkhaṃ agamāsi.Gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīreti tassa campānagarassa avidūre gaggarāya nāma rājamahesiyā khaṇitattā ‘‘gaggarā’’ti laddhavohārā pokkharaṇī atthi, tassā tīre samantato nīlādipañcavaṇṇakusumapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ mahantaṃ campakavanaṃ, tasmiṃ bhagavā kusumagandhasugandhe campakavane viharati. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīre’’ti vuttaṃ.Tantibaddhotitantivuccati byāpāro, tattha baddho pasuto ussukkaṃ āpannoti attho, tasmiṃ āvāse akataṃ senāsanaṃ karoti, jiṇṇaṃ paṭisaṅkharoti, kate issaro hotīti adhippāyo. Tenāha‘‘tasmiṃ āvāse kattabbattā tantipaṭibaddho’’ti, kattabbakamme ussāhamāpannoti attho.

380. In Campeyyakkhandhaka, campāya means in a city named thus. For in that city, campaka trees had grown extensively in those particular places such as in the ārāma, in the ponds, etc., therefore it went to the designation "campā." Gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīre means not far from that city of Campā, there is a pond named "gaggarā" because it was dug by a queen consort named Gaggarā, on its bank there is a large campaka forest adorned all around with blue and other five-colored flowers, in that flower-fragrant campaka forest the Blessed One dwells. Referring to that, it is said "on the bank of the pond of Gaggarā." Tantibaddho here, tanti means occupation, bound there means devoted, having become eager, the meaning is that in that dwelling he does not do the lodging that is not done, he repairs the dilapidated, he is the master of what is done. Thus he said ‘‘tasmiṃ āvāse kattabbattā tantipaṭibaddho’’, the meaning is devoted to what should be done.

Ñattivipannakammādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account Based on the Defective Motion, etc.

385-387.Paṭikkosantesūti nivārentesu.Hāpanaṃ vā aññathā karaṇaṃ vā natthīti ñattikammassa ekāya eva ñattiyā kattabbattā tato hāpanaṃ na sambhavati, anussāvanāya abhāvato pacchā ñattiṭhapanavasena dvīhi ñattīhi karaṇavasena ca aññathā karaṇaṃ natthi.

385-387. Paṭikkosantesū means when they were preventing. Hāpanaṃ vā aññathā karaṇaṃ vā natthī means because the motion-kamma must be done with a single motion, removal is not possible from that, and there is no other way of doing it by means of establishing the motion later due to the absence of announcement, and by doing it with two motions.

Catuvaggakaraṇādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account Based on the Doing with a Group of Four, etc.

389.Ukkhepanīyakammakatokammanānāsaṃvāsako,ukkhittānuvattakoladdhinānāsaṃvāsako.

389. One who has had an expulsion-kamma done to him is kammanānāsaṃvāsako, one who follows the expelled is laddhinānāsaṃvāsako.

Dvenissāraṇādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account Based on the Two Removals, etc.

395.Appattonissāraṇanti etthanissāraṇakammaṃnāma kuladūsakānaññeva anuññātaṃ, ayañca ‘‘bālo hoti abyatto’’tiādinā niddiṭṭho kuladūsako na hoti, tasmā ‘‘appatto’’ti vutto. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sunissārito hotīti? Bālaabyattatādiyuttassapi kammakkhandhake ‘‘ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho pabbājanīyakammaṃ kareyyā’’ti (cūḷava. 27) vuttattā. Tenevāha‘‘tañcesa…pe… tasmā sunissārito hotī’’ti. Tatthatanti pabbājanīyakammaṃ.Esoti ‘‘bālo’’tiādinā niddiṭṭho.Āveṇikena lakkhaṇenāti pabbājanīyakammassa āveṇikabhūtena kuladūsakabhāvalakkhaṇena.

395.Appatto nissāraṇanti: Here, nissāraṇakamma (act of expulsion) is permitted only for those who corrupt families (kuladūsaka), and this monk, identified by "he is foolish and inept" etc., is not a kuladūsaka; therefore, he is called "appatto" (not subject to). If so, how can he be considered well-expelled? Because even if someone is foolish and inept, the Sangha can perform the pabbājanīyakamma (act of banishment) if they wish, as stated in the Kammakkhandhaka (Cūḷava. 27). Therefore, he said, "tañcesa…pe… tasmā sunissārito hotī"ti. Here, taṃ refers to the pabbājanīyakamma. Eso refers to the one identified as "foolish" etc. Āveṇikena lakkhaṇenāti: By the characteristic unique to the pabbājanīyakamma, which is the characteristic of corrupting families (kuladūsakabhāvalakkhaṇa).

Tañce saṅgho nissāreti, sunissāritoti ettha adhippetassa pabbājanīyakammassa vasena atthaṃ dassetvā idāni yadi ‘‘tañce saṅgho nissāretī’’ti tajjanīyādikammavasena nissāraṇā adhippetā, tadā nissāraṇaṃ sampattoyeva tajjanīyādivasena sunissāritoti byatirekamukhena atthaṃ dassetuṃ puna‘‘tañce saṅgho nissāretī’’ti ulliṅgetvā attho kathito. Natthi etassa apadānaṃ avakhaṇḍanaṃ āpattipariyantotianapadāno. Ekekenapi aṅgena nissāraṇā anuññātāti kammakkhandhake anuññātā. Sesamettha pāḷito aṭṭhakathāto ca suviññeyyameva.

Tañce saṅgho nissāreti, sunissāritoti: Having explained the meaning based on the intended pabbājanīyakamma, now, if the expulsion is intended in terms of tajjanīya (censure) etc., then he is indeed subject to expulsion, and he is well-expelled in terms of tajjanīya etc. To explain the meaning in terms of contrast, the meaning is stated again by highlighting "tañce saṅgho nissāretī". Anapadāno: There is no accusation, no fault-finding, no limit of offense for him. Ekekenapi aṅgena nissāraṇā anuññātāti: Expulsion is permitted by any single factor as permitted in the Kammakkhandhaka. The rest here is easily understood from the Pali text and the commentary.

Dvenissāraṇādikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Dvenissāraṇādikathā is finished.

Campeyyakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Campeyyakkhandhaka is finished.

10. Kosambakakkhandhakaṃ

10. Kosambakakkhandhakaṃ

Kosambakavivādakathāvaṇṇanā
Kosambakavivādakathāvaṇṇanā

451.Kosambakakkhandhakesace hoti, desessāmīti subbacatāya sikkhākāmatāya ca āpattiṃ passi.Natthi āpattīti anāpattipakkhopi ettha sambhavatīti adhippāyenāha. Sā panāpatti eva. Tenāha‘‘so tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi ahosī’’ti.

451.In the Kosambakakkhandhaka, sace hoti, desessāmīti: He saw an offense due to his intention to practice and his desire for training. Natthi āpattīti: He said this with the intention that the side of no offense (anāpattipakkha) is also possible here. However, that offense is indeed an offense. Therefore, he said, "so tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi ahosī"ti.

453-454.Sambhamaatthavasenāti turitatthavasena.‘‘Akāraṇe tumhehi so bhikkhu ukkhitto’’ti vadeyyāti yasmā pubbe vinayadharassa vacanena ‘‘sace āpatti hoti, desessāmī’’ti anena paṭiññātaṃ, idānipi tasseva vacanena ‘‘asañcicca assatiyā katattā natthettha āpattī’’ti anāpattisaññī, tasmā ‘‘akāraṇe tumhehi so bhikkhu ukkhitto’’ti ukkhepake bhikkhū yadi vadeyyāti adhippāyo.Ukkhittānuvattake vā ‘‘tumhe āpattiṃ āpannā’’ti vadeyyāti yasmā vatthujānanacittenāyaṃ sacittakā āpatti, ayañca udakāvasese udakāvasesasaññī, tasmā sāpattikasseva ‘‘tumhe chandāgatiṃ gacchathā’’ti adhippāyena ‘‘tumhe āpattiṃ āpannā’’ti ukkhittānuvattake vadeyya.

453-454.Sambhamaatthavasenāti: Due to the urgency of the matter. "Akāraṇe tumhehi so bhikkhu ukkhitto"ti vadeyyāti: Because previously, he had promised according to the Vinayadhara’s (master of discipline) words, "sace āpatti hoti, desessāmī" (if there is an offense, I will confess it), and now, even by those same words, he considers it a non-offense, saying, "asañcicca assatiyā katattā natthettha āpattī" (there is no offense here, as it was done unintentionally and due to lack of mindfulness), therefore, the intention is that he would say to the monks who suspended him, "akāraṇe tumhehi so bhikkhu ukkhitto" (you have suspended that monk for no reason). Ukkhittānuvattake vā ‘‘tumhe āpattiṃ āpannā’’ti vadeyyāti: Because this offense is sacittakā āpatti (an offense committed consciously) due to knowing the object, and he is aware of the remaining water in the udakāvasesa (water remaining after use), therefore, he would say to those who follow the suspended monk, with the intention of "tumhe chandāgatiṃ gacchatha" (you are going to bias due to desire), "tumhe āpattiṃ āpannā" (you have committed an offense).

455-456.Kammaṃ kopetīti ‘‘nānāsaṃvāsakacatuttho ce, bhikkhave, kammaṃ kareyya, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya’’ntiādivacanato (mahāva. 389) sace saṅgho taṃ gaṇapūrakaṃ katvā kammaṃ kareyya, ayaṃ tattha nisinnopi taṃ kammaṃ kopetīti adhippāyo.Upacāraṃ muñcitvāti etthaupacāronāma aññamaññaṃ hatthena pāpuṇanaṭṭhānaṃ.

455-456.Kammaṃ kopetīti: The intention is that if the Sangha, having made a quorum, performs the kamma, this monk, even sitting there, would ruin that kamma, according to the statement "nānāsaṃvāsakacatuttho ce, bhikkhave, kammaṃ kareyya, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya"ntiādi (Mahāva. 389). Upacāraṃ muñcitvāti: Here, upacāro means the place where they can reach each other with their hands.

457.Bhaṇḍanajātātiādīsu kalahassa pubbabhāgo bhaṇḍanaṃ nāma, taṃ jātaṃ etesantibhaṇḍanajātā,hatthaparāmāsādivasena matthakaṃ patto kalaho jāto etesantikalahajātā,viruddhavādabhūtaṃ vādaṃ āpannātivivādāpannā. Mukhasattīhīti vācāsattīhi.Vitudantāti vijjhantā.Bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti ‘‘idha, bhante, kosambiyaṃ bhikkhū bhaṇḍanajātā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca, tañca kho neva piyakamyatāya, na bhedādhippāyena, atha kho atthakāmatāya hitakāmatāya. Sāmaggīkārako kiresa bhikkhu, tasmāssa etadahosi ‘‘yathā ime bhikkhū vivādaṃ āraddhā, na sakkā mayā, nāpi aññena bhikkhunā samagge kātuṃ, appeva nāma sadevake loke aggapuggalo bhagavā sayaṃ vā gantvā attano vā santikaṃ pakkosāpetvā etesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ khantimettāpaṭisaṃyuttaṃ sāraṇīyadhammadesanaṃ kathetvā sāmaggiṃ kareyyā’’ti atthakāmatāya hitakāmatāya gantvā avoca.Tasmā evamāhāti atthakāmattā evamāha, na bhagavato vacanaṃ anādiyanto. Ye pana tadā satthu vacanaṃ na gaṇhiṃsu, te kiñci avatvā tuṇhībhūtā maṅkubhūtā aṭṭhaṃsu, tasmā ubhayesampi satthari agāravapaṭipatti nāhosi.

457.Bhaṇḍanajātātiādīsu: Among these, bhaṇḍanaṃ (quarreling) is the preliminary part of a quarrel, and they are born of that, so bhaṇḍanajātā; they have reached the peak due to hand-touching etc., so kalahajātā; they have fallen into a dispute that is a contradictory argument, so vivādāpannā. Mukhasattīhīti: With the power of speech. Vitudantāti: Piercing. Bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti: He said the words, "idha, bhante, kosambiyaṃ bhikkhū bhaṇḍanajātā"tiādi (here, venerable sir, in Kosambi, the monks are born of quarreling), but that was not for the sake of pleasing, nor with the intention of creating division, but rather for the sake of benefit and welfare. It seems that this monk was a peacemaker, so it occurred to him, "as these monks have started a dispute, I cannot reconcile them, nor can any other monk. Perhaps the Blessed One, the foremost person in the world with its devas, might either go himself or have them summoned to his presence, and by giving them a Dhamma talk connected with loving-kindness, conducive to harmony, reconcile these monks." Therefore, he went and spoke with the intention of benefit and welfare. Tasmā evamāhāti: Because of his intention for benefit, he spoke thus, not disregarding the words of the Blessed One. However, those who did not heed the Teacher’s words at that time remained silent, dejected, and stood there; therefore, there was no respect shown to the Teacher by either side.

Kosambakavivādakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Kosambakavivādakathā is finished.

Dīghāvuvatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Dīghāvuvatthukathāvaṇṇanā

458.Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesītiādīsubhūtapubbanti idaṃ bhagavā pathavīgataṃ nidhiṃ uddharitvā purato rāsiṃ karonto viya bhavapaṭicchannaṃ purāvutthaṃ dassento āha.Aḍḍhoti issaro. Yo koci attano santakena vibhavena aḍḍho hoti, ayaṃ pana na kevalaṃ aḍḍhoyeva, mahaddhano mahatā aparimāṇasaṅkhena dhanena samannāgatoti āha‘‘mahaddhano’’ti. Bhuñjitabbato paribhuñjitabbato visesato kāmā bhogā nāma, tasmā pañcakāmaguṇavasena mahantā uḷārā bhogā assātimahābhogo. Mahantaṃ senābalañceva thāmabalañca etassātimahabbalo. Mahanto hatthiassādivāhano etassātimahāvāhano. Mahantaṃ vijitaṃ raṭṭhaṃ etassātimahāvijito. Paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgārotikosovuccati bhaṇḍāgārasāragabbho,koṭṭhaṃvuccati dhaññassa āṭhapanaṭṭhānaṃ, koṭṭhabhūtaṃ agāraṃkoṭṭhāgāraṃ,nidahitvā ṭhapitena dhanena paripuṇṇakoso dhaññānañca paripuṇṇakoṭṭhāgāroti attho.

458.Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesītiādīsu: Among these, bhūtapubbanti: The Blessed One speaks this, revealing a past event concealed by existence, as if unearthing a buried treasure from the earth and piling it in front. Aḍḍhoti: Wealthy. Anyone who is wealthy with their own possessions is considered aḍḍho, but this person is not only aḍḍho but also mahaddhano (of great wealth), possessing a great, immeasurable amount of wealth, so he says, "mahaddhano"ti. Because what is to be enjoyed or used is called bhogā (possessions), therefore, he possesses great, magnificent possessions in terms of the five strands of sense pleasures, so mahābhogo. He has a large army force and strength, so mahabbalo. He has a great conveyance of elephants, horses, etc., so mahāvāhano. He has conquered a vast territory, so mahāvijito. Paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāroti: Koso (treasury) refers to the essential inner chamber of the storehouse, koṭṭhaṃ (granary) refers to the place for storing grain, and the house that is a granary is koṭṭhāgāraṃ, meaning that the treasury is full of stored wealth and the granaries are full of grains.

paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro. Caturaṅginiṃ senanti hatthiassarathapattisaṅkhātehi catūhi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ senaṃ.Sannayhitvāti cammapaṭimuñcanādīhi sannāhaṃ kāretvā.Abbhuyyāsīti abhiuyyāsi, abhimukho hutvā nikkhamīti attho.Ekasaṅghātampīti ekappahārampi.Dhovananti dhovanudakaṃ.Parinetvāti nīharitvā. ‘‘Anatthado’’ti vattabbe da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘anatthato’’ti vuttanti āha‘‘atha vā’’tiādi.

paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro. Caturaṅginiṃ senanti: An army complete with four divisions consisting of elephants, horses, chariots, and infantry. Sannayhitvāti: Having equipped by arranging leather armor etc. Abbhuyyāsīti: He marched out, meaning he went forth, facing the enemy. Ekasaṅghātampīti: Even a single strike. Dhovananti: Washing water. Parinetvāti: Having carried away. He says ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi, stating "anatthato" (for harm) by changing the "da" to "ta" when it should have been "anatthado" (harmful).

464.Vaggabhāvena vā puthu nānā saddo assātiputhusaddo. Samajanoti bhaṇḍane samajjhāsayo jano.Tatthāti tasmiṃ janakāye.Ahaṃ bāloti na maññitthāti bālalakkhaṇe ṭhitopi ‘‘ahaṃ bālo’’ti na maññi.Bhiyyo cāti attano bālabhāvassa ajānanato bhiyyo ca bhaṇḍanassa upariphoṭo viya saṅghabhedassa attano kāraṇabhāvampi uppajjamānaṃ na maññittha nāññāsi.

464.Puthusaddo: a different sound because of being in a group or separate. Samajanoti: People who have the same thought of quarreling. Tatthāti: In that group of people. Ahaṃ bāloti na maññitthāti: Even standing in the characteristic of foolishness, he did not think "I am foolish." Bhiyyo cāti: And because of not knowing his own foolishness, he did not think or know that even the division of the Sangha, like an additional blister on top of the quarrel, was arising as a cause due to himself.

vācāgocarā. Mukhāyāmanti vivadanavasena mukhaṃ āyāmetvā bhāṇino.Na taṃ jānantīti taṃ kalahaṃ na jānanti. Kalahaṃ karonto ca taṃ na jānanto nāma natthi. Yathā pana na jānanti, taṃ dassetuṃ āha‘‘evaṃ sādīnavo aya’’nti, ayaṃ kalaho nāma attano paresañca atthahāpanato anatthuppādanato diṭṭheva dhamme samparāye ca sādīnavo sadosoti attho.Taṃ na jānantīti taṃ kalahaṃ na jānanti. Kathaṃ na jānantīti āha‘‘evaṃ sādīnavo aya’’nti, ‘‘evaṃ sādīnavo ayaṃ kalaho’’ti evaṃ taṃ kalahaṃ na jānantīti attho.

vācāgocarā. Mukhāyāmanti: Those who expand their mouths by way of arguing. Na taṃ jānantīti: They do not know that quarrel. And there is no one who makes a quarrel and does not know it. However, to show how they do not know, he says "evaṃ sādīnavo aya"nti, meaning this quarrel is sādīnavo (faulty) because it is destructive of one's own and others’ benefit, productive of harm, in this very life and in the future. Taṃ na jānantīti: They do not know that quarrel. How do they not know? He says "evaṃ sādīnavo aya"nti, meaning they do not know that quarrel in this way, that "evaṃ sādīnavo ayaṃ kalaho" (this quarrel is faulty in this way).

Akkocchi mantiādīsuakkocchīti akkosi.Avadhīti pahari.Ajinīti kūṭasakkhiotāraṇena vā vādapaṭivādena vā karaṇuttariyakaraṇena vā ajesi.Ahāsīti mama santakaṃ pattādīsu kiñcideva avahari.Ye ca tanti ye keci devā vā manussā vā gahaṭṭhā vā pabbajitā vā taṃ ‘‘akkocchi ma’’ntiādivatthukaṃ kodhaṃ sakaṭadhuraṃ viya naddhinā pūtimacchādīni viya ca kusādīhi punappunaṃ veṭhentāupanayhantiupanāhavasena anubandhanti, tesaṃ sakiṃ uppannaṃ veraṃ na sammatīti attho.

Akkocchi mantiādīsu: Among these, akkocchīti: He insulted me. Avadhīti: He struck me. Ajinīti: He defeated me either by bringing in false witnesses, by counter-argument, or by doing something beyond what is proper. Ahāsīti: He took away something that belonged to me, even a little bit, such as a bowl etc. Ye ca tanti: Whichever devas or humans, laypersons or renunciants, upanayhanti: repeatedly envelop that anger based on the subject of "akkocchi ma" (he insulted me) etc., in the manner of upanāha (resentment), like wrapping a cart axle with twine or covering rotten fish with kusa grass; their enmity, once arisen, does not subside.

Ye ca taṃ nupanayhantīti assatiyā amanasikāravasena vā kammapaccavekkhaṇādivasena vā ye taṃ akkosādivatthukaṃ kodhaṃ ‘‘tayāpi koci niddoso purimabhave akkuṭṭho bhavissati, pahaṭo bhavissati, kūṭasakkhiṃ otāretvā jito bhavissati, kassaci te pasayha kiñci acchinnaṃ bhavissati, tasmā niddoso hutvāpi akkosādīni pāpuṇāsī’’ti evaṃ na upanayhanti, tesu pamādena uppannampi veraṃ iminā anupanayhanena nirindhano viya jātavedo upasammati.

Ye ca taṃ nupanayhantīti: And those who do not harbor that anger based on the subject of insult etc., either due to lack of mindfulness and lack of attention, or due to reflection on kamma etc., thinking, "someone will have insulted, struck, or defeated you by bringing in false witnesses in a previous existence, or someone will have forcibly taken something from you; therefore, even being innocent, you are experiencing insults etc." Even the enmity that arises in them due to carelessness subsides with this non-harboring, like a fire without fuel.

Na hi verena verānīti yathā hi kheḷasiṅghāṇikādiasucimakkhitaṃ ṭhānaṃ teheva asucīhi dhovanto suddhaṃ niggandhaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, atha kho taṃ ṭhānaṃ bhiyyoso mattāya asuddhatarañca duggandhatarañca hoti, evameva akkosantaṃ paccakkosanto paharantaṃ paṭipaharanto verena veraṃ vūpasametuṃ na sakkoti, atha kho bhiyyo verameva karoti. Iti verāni nāma verena kismiñcipi kāle na sammanti, atha kho vaḍḍhantiyeva.Averena ca sammantīti yathā pana tāni kheḷādīni asucīni vippasannena udakena dhoviyamānāni nassanti, taṃ ṭhānaṃ suddhaṃ hoti niggandhaṃ, evameva averena khantimettodakena yonisomanasikārena paṭisaṅkhānena paccavekkhaṇena verāni vūpasammanti paṭippassambhanti abhāvaṃ gacchanti.Esa dhammo sanantanoti esa averena verūpasamanasaṅkhāto porāṇako dhammo sabbesaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhakhīṇāsavānaṃ gatamaggo.

Na hi verena verānīti: Just as one cannot purify a place smeared with filth such as phlegm and mucus by washing it with the same filth, but rather that place becomes even more impure and foul-smelling, so too, one cannot pacify enmity with enmity by retaliating against one who insults or strikes, but rather it only creates more enmity. Thus, enmities are never pacified by enmity at any time, but rather they only increase. Averena ca sammantīti: Just as those unclean substances of phlegm etc., when washed with clear water, disappear, and that place becomes clean and odorless, so too, enmities subside, are allayed, and cease to exist through non-enmity, with the water of forbearance and loving-kindness, with wise attention, with reflection and contemplation. Esa dhammo sanantanoti: This ancient Dhamma, consisting of the pacification of enmity through non-enmity, is the path traversed by all Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, and arahants.

Na jānantīti aniccasaññaṃ na paccupaṭṭhāpentīti adhippāyo.Tato sammanti medhagāti tato tasmā kāraṇā medhagā kalahā sammanti vūpasamaṃ gacchanti. Kathaṃ te sammantīti āha‘‘evañhī’’tiādi. Tatthaevañhi te jānantāti te paṇḍitā ‘‘mayaṃ maccusamīpaṃ gacchāmā’’ti evaṃ jānantā yonisomanasikāraṃ uppādetvā medhagānaṃ kalahānaṃ vūpasamāya paṭipajjanti, atha nesaṃ tāya paṭipattiyā te medhagā sammantīti adhippāyo.

Na jānantīti: They do not establish the perception of impermanence, is the meaning. Tato sammanti medhagāti: Therefore, for that reason, medhagā (quarrels) subside, come to a cessation. How do they subside? He says "evañhī"tiādi. Among these, evañhi te jānantāti: Those wise ones, knowing that "mayaṃ maccusamīpaṃ gacchāma" (we are going near to death), generate wise attention and practice for the cessation of quarrels; therefore, those quarrels subside due to that practice of theirs, is the meaning.

Tesampi hoti saṅgatīti ye mātāpitūnaṃ aṭṭhīni chindanti, pāṇe haranti, gavādīni ca pasayha gaṇhanti, evaṃ raṭṭhaṃ vilumpamānānaṃ tesampi saṅgati hoti, kimaṅgaṃ pana tumhākaṃ na siyāti adhippāyo.

Tesampi hoti saṅgatīti: Even for those who cut the bones of their parents, take life, and forcibly seize cattle etc., those who plunder the country, even for them there is association, so what need to say about you. The intention is will it not be there for you?

Vaṇṇāvaṇṇadīpanatthaṃ vuttāti ‘‘bālasahāyatāya ime bhikkhū kalahapasutā, paṇḍitasahāyānaṃ pana idaṃ na siyā’’ti paṇḍitasahāyassa bālasahāyassa ca vaṇṇāvaṇṇadīpanatthaṃ vuttā.Nipakanti nepakkapaññāya samannāgataṃ.Sādhuvihāri dhīranti bhaddakavihāriṃ paṇḍitaṃ.Pākaṭaparissaye ca paṭicchannaparissaye ca abhibhavitvāti sīhabyagghādayo pākaṭaparissaye ca rāgabhayadosabhayādayo paṭicchannaparissaye cāti sabbeva parissaye abhibhavitvā.

Vaṇṇāvaṇṇadīpanatthaṃ vuttāti: It is said for the purpose of showing the praise and dispraise of a wise companion and a foolish companion, thinking that "these monks are addicted to quarrels due to foolish companionship, but this would not be the case for those with wise companions." Nipakanti: Endowed with discerning wisdom. Sādhuvihāri dhīranti: One who lives virtuously, wise. Pākaṭaparissaye ca paṭicchannaparissaye ca abhibhavitvāti: Having overcome all dangers, both pākaṭaparissaye (obvious dangers) such as lions and tigers, and paṭicchannaparissaye (hidden dangers) such as dangers arising from attachment, fear, and aversion.

Ekakācariṃsūti ‘‘idaṃ rajjaṃ nāma mahantaṃ pamādaṭṭhānaṃ, kiṃ amhākaṃ rajjena kāritenā’’ti raṭṭhaṃ pahāya tato mahāaraññaṃ pavisitvā tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā catūsu iriyāpathesu ekakā cariṃsūti attho.

Ekakā cariṃsūti: Thinking, "this kingdom is a great place of negligence, what is the use of a kingdom to us?", they abandoned the kingdom, entered the great forest, took the ascetic life, and lived alone in all four postures. The meaning is they were wondering alone.

Ekassa caritaṃ seyyoti pabbajitassa pabbajitakālato paṭṭhāya ekībhāvābhiratassa ekakasseva caritaṃ seyyoti attho.Natthi bāle sahāyatāti cūḷasīlaṃ majjhimasīlaṃ mahāsīlaṃ dasa kathāvatthūni terasa dhutaguṇā vipassanāñāṇaṃ cattāro maggā cattāri phalāni tisso vijjā cha abhiññā amatamahānibbānanti ayaṃ sahāyatā nāma, sā bālaṃ nissāya adhigantuṃ na sakkāti natthi bāle sahāyatā. Mātaṅgo araññemātaṅgaraññeti saralopena sandhi. ‘‘Mātaṅgarañño’’tipi pāṭho, araññako mātaṅgo viyāti attho.Mātaṅga-saddeneva hatthibhāvassa vuttattā nāgavacanaṃ tassa mahattavibhāvanatthanti āha‘‘nāgoti mahantādhivacanameta’’nti. Mahantapariyāyo hināga-saddo hoti ‘‘etaṃ nāgassa nāgena, īsādantassa hatthino’’tiādīsu (udā. 35).

Ekassa caritaṃ seyyoti: The life of one who has gone forth, who delights in solitude from the time of going forth, the life of the solitary one is better. Natthi bāle sahāyatāti: Cūḷasīla (minor morality), majjhimasīla (intermediate morality), mahāsīla (major morality), the ten bases for discussion, the thirteen ascetic qualities, vipassanāñāṇa (insight knowledge), the four paths, the four fruits, the three knowledges, the six supernormal knowledges, deathlessness, great Nibbana—this is called companionship, and it cannot be attained relying on a fool, so there is no companionship in a fool. Mātaṅgo araññe mātaṅgaraññeti: Sandhi (linking) with elision of the "sara." "Mātaṅgarañño"tipi is also a reading, meaning like Mātaṅga living in the forest. Nāgoti mahantādhivacanametanti: Because the state of being an elephant has already been stated by the word Mātaṅga, the word "nāga" is for highlighting its greatness, he says. The word nāga is indeed a synonym for great, as in "etaṃ nāgassa nāgena, īsādantassa hatthino"tiādīsu (Udā. 35).

Dīghāvuvatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Dīghāvuvatthukathā is finished.

Bālakaloṇakagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
Bālakaloṇakagamanakathāvaṇṇanā

465.Bālakaloṇakāragāmoti upāligahapatissa evaṃnāmako bhogagāmo.Tenupasaṅkamīti dhammasenāpatimahāmoggallānattheresu vā asītimahāsāvakesu vā antamaso dhammabhaṇḍāgārikaṃ ānandattherampi kañci anāmantetvā sayameva pattacīvaramādāya anīkanissaṭo hatthī viya yūthanissaṭo kāḷasīho viya vātacchinno valāhako viya ca ekakova upasaṅkami. Kasmā upasaṅkami? Gaṇe kirassa ādīnavaṃ disvā ekavihāriṃ bhikkhuṃ passitukāmatā udapādi, tasmā sītādipīḷito uṇhādiṃ patthayamāno viya upasaṅkami. Atha vā bhagavatā so ādīnavo pageva pariññāto, na tena satthā nibbinno, tasmiṃ pana antovasse keci buddhaveneyyā nāhesuṃ, tena aññattha gamanaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ damanupāyoti pālileyyakaṃ uddissa gacchanto ekavihāriṃ āyasmantaṃ bhaguṃ sampahaṃsetuṃ tattha gato. Evaṃ gate ca satthari pañcasatā bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āhaṃsu ‘‘āvuso ānanda satthā ekakova gato, mayaṃ anubandhissāmā’’ti. ‘‘Āvuso, yadā bhagavā sāmaṃ senāsanaṃ saṃsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya anāmantetvā upaṭṭhāke anapaloketvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ adutiyo gacchati, tadā ekacārikaṃ carituṃ bhagavato ajjhāsayo, sāvakena nāma satthu ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ paṭipajjitabbaṃ, tasmā na imesu divasesu bhagavā anugantabbo’’ti nivāresi, sayampi nānugañchi.Dhammiyā kathāyāti ekībhāve ānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttāya dhammakathāya.

465. Bālakaloṇakāragāmo: Bālakaloṇakāra was the name of a sustenance village of the householder Upāli. Tenupasaṅkamī: Without informing any of the elders, such as the General of the Dhamma, Mahāmoggallāna Thera, or any of the eighty great disciples, or even Ānanda Thera, the treasurer of the Dhamma, he himself took his bowl and robe and approached, like an elephant detached from the herd, like a black lion separated from the pride, and like a cloud severed by the wind. Why did he approach? It seems he saw the disadvantage in the community and a desire arose in him to see a solitary monk; therefore, he approached, like one afflicted by cold seeking warmth. Or rather, the Buddha had already perceived that disadvantage, but the Teacher was not disgusted by it; however, during that rainy season, there were no trainees of the Buddha among them. Therefore, going elsewhere was a means of taming those monks, and intending to gladden the solitary Āyasmā Bhagu, he went there. When the Teacher had gone thus, five hundred monks said to Āyasmā Ānanda, "Friend Ānanda, the Teacher has gone alone; we will follow him." "Friends, when the Blessed One himself puts away his sleeping place, takes his bowl and robe, and goes without informing his attendants or taking leave of the Sangha of monks, then the Blessed One intends to wander alone; a disciple should behave in accordance with the Teacher's intention. Therefore, the Blessed One should not be followed in these days," he prevented them, and he himself did not follow. Dhammiyā kathāyā: With a Dhamma talk connected with the benefits of unity.

Bālakaloṇakagamanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Account of Going to Bālakaloṇakāra is Finished.

Pācīnavaṃsadāyagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Account of Going to Pācīnavaṃsadāya

466.Yena pācīnavaṃsadāyoti tattha kasmā upasaṅkami? Yathā nāma jighacchitassa bhojane, pipāsitassa pānīye, sītena phuṭṭhassa uṇhe, uṇhena phuṭṭhassa sīte, dukkhitassa sukhe abhiruci uppajjati, evameva bhagavato kosambake bhikkhū aññamaññaṃ vivādāpanne asamaggavāsaṃ vasante, samaggavāsaṃ vasante āvajjentassa ime tayo kulaputtā āpāthamāgamiṃsu, atha nesaṃ paggaṇhitukāmo upasaṅkami ‘‘evāyaṃ paṭipattianukkamena kosambakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vinayanūpāyo hotī’’ti.Viharantīti sāmaggirasaṃ anubhavamānā viharanti.

466. Yena pācīnavaṃsadāyo: Why did he approach there? Just as appetite arises in a hungry person for food, in a thirsty person for drink, in one touched by cold for warmth, in one touched by heat for coolness, in one suffering for happiness, so too, when the Blessed One, considering the monks in Kosambī who were embroiled in disputes with each other and living in disharmony and thinking "if they were living harmoniously," these three sons of good family came into his view. Then, wishing to favor them, he approached, thinking, "This way, in due course, will be a means of disciplining the monks of Kosambī." Viharantī: They lived experiencing the flavor of concord.

Dāyapāloti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.325) araññapālo. So araññaṃ yathā icchiticchitappadesena manussā pavisitvā tattha pupphaṃ vā phalaṃ vā niyyāsaṃ vā dabbasambhāraṃ vā na haranti, evaṃ vatiyā parikkhittassa araññassa yojite dvāre nisīditvā araññaṃ rakkhati, tasmā ‘‘dāyapālo’’ti vutto.Attakāmarūpā viharantīti attano hitaṃ kāmayamānasabhāvā hutvā viharanti. Yo hi imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvāpi vejjakammadūtakammapahiṇagamanādīnaṃ vasena ekavīsatianesanāhi jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ na attakāmarūpo nāma. Yo pana imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvā ekavīsatianesanaṃ pahāya catupārisuddhisīle patiṭṭhāya buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā sappāyadhutaṅgaṃ adhiṭṭhāya aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu cittaruciyaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gāmantaṃ pahāya araññaṃ pavisitvā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā vipassanāya kammaṃ kurumāno vicarati, ayaṃ attakāmo nāma. Tepi tayo kulaputtā evarūpā ahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘attakāmarūpā viharantī’’ti.

Dāyapālo: (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.325) A forest guardian. He guards the forest by sitting at the gate erected for the forest surrounded by a fence, so that people do not enter the forest and take away flowers, fruits, sap, or goods and materials as they wish, in any area they wish; therefore, he is called "dāyapālo." Attakāmarūpā viharantī: They lived having the nature of desiring their own good. For one who, even having gone forth in this Dispensation, makes a living by means of twenty-one wrong means of livelihood, such as medical practice, messengers, and errands, is not called "one who desires his own good." But one who, having gone forth in this Dispensation, having abandoned the twenty-one wrong means of livelihood, being established in the fourfold purity of moral conduct, having learned the word of the Buddha, having undertaken suitable dhutaṅga practices, having taken a meditation subject pleasing to the mind among the thirty-eight objects, having left the village border and entered the forest, having developed attainments, wanders doing the work of insight, is called "one who desires his own good." Those three sons of good family were like that. Therefore, it was said, "attakāmarūpā viharantī."

Mā tesaṃ aphāsumakāsīti tesaṃ aphāsukaṃ mā akāsīti bhagavantaṃ vāresi. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi ‘‘ime kulaputtā samaggā viharanti, ekaccassa ca gataṭṭhāne bhaṇḍanakalahavivādā vattanti, tikhiṇasiṅgo caṇḍagoṇo viya ovijjhanto vicarati, athekamaggena dvinnaṃ gamanaṃ na hoti, kadāci ayampi evaṃ karonto imesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ samaggavāsaṃ bhindeyya, pāsādiko ca panesa suvaṇṇavaṇṇo rasagiddho maññe, gatakālato paṭṭhāya paṇītadāyakānaṃ attano upaṭṭhākānaṃ vaṇṇakathanādīhi imesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ appamādavihāraṃ bhindeyya, vasanaṭṭhānāni cāpi etesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ nibaddhāni paricchinnāni tissova paṇṇasālā tayo caṅkamā tīṇi divāṭṭhānāni tīṇi mañcapīṭhāni, ayaṃ pana samaṇo mahākāyo vuḍḍhataro maññe bhavissati, so akāle ime kulaputte senāsanā vuṭṭhapessati, evaṃ sabbathāpi etesaṃ aphāsu bhavissatī’’ti. Taṃ anicchanto ‘‘mā tesaṃ aphāsumakāsī’’ti bhagavantaṃ vāreti.

Mā tesaṃ aphāsumakāsī: He prevented the Blessed One, saying, "Do not cause discomfort to them." It seems it occurred to him, "These sons of good family live harmoniously, and there is no other renunciant here; this forest guardian speaks as if with a renunciant; who might this be?" Standing up from his daytime resting place, standing at the gate, looking at the road, he saw the Blessed One. As soon as he saw him, the Blessed One emitted a radiance from his body; the byāmappabhā, adorned with the eighty minor marks, shone like a stretched-out golden cloth. The Elder, preventing him, said this statement beginning with "Māvuso, dāyapālā," thinking, "This forest guardian, extending his hand to take a venomous snake with raised hood by the neck, does not know that he is speaking with the foremost person in the world, but speaks as if with an ordinary monk."

Kiṃ panesa jānanto vāresi ajānantoti? Ajānanto. Sammāsambuddho hi nāma yadā anekabhikkhusahassaparivāro byāmappabhāya asītianubyañjanehi dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇasiriyā ca buddhānubhāvaṃ dassento vicarati, tadā ‘‘ko eso’’ti apucchitvāva jānitabbo hoti. Tadā pana bhagavā ‘‘māssu koci mama buddhānubhāvaṃ aññāsī’’ti tathārūpena iddhābhisaṅkhārena sabbampi taṃ buddhānubhāvaṃ cīvaragabbhena viya paṭicchādetvā valāhakagabbhena paṭicchanno puṇṇacando viya sayameva pattacīvaramādāya aññātakavesena agamāsi. Iti taṃ ajānantova dāyapālo vāresi.

Did he prevent him knowing or not knowing? Not knowing. For when a Fully Enlightened Buddha wanders, surrounded by a retinue of many thousands of monks, displaying the Buddha's power with a fathom-long radiance, with the glory of the thirty-two marks of a great man and the eighty minor marks, he should be known without even asking, "Who is this?" But then the Blessed One, thinking, "Lest anyone recognize my Buddha's power," concealing all that Buddha's power with such a powerful act of will as if with the folds of his robe, like the full moon hidden by a mass of clouds, himself took his bowl and robe and went in an unknown guise. Thus, not knowing, the forest guardian prevented him.

Etadavocāti thero kira ‘‘mā samaṇā’’ti dāyapālassa kathaṃ sutvā cintesi ‘‘mayaṃ tayo janā idha viharāma, añño pabbajito nāma natthi, ayañca dāyapālo pabbajitena viya saddhiṃ katheti, ko nu kho bhavissatī’’ti divāṭṭhānato uṭṭhāya dvāre ṭhatvā maggaṃ olokento bhagavantaṃ addasa. Bhagavāpi therassa saha dassaneneva sarīrobhāsaṃ muñci, asītianubyañjanavirājitā byāmappabhā pasāritasuvaṇṇapaṭo viya virocittha. Thero ‘‘ayaṃ dāyapālo phaṇakataāsīvisaṃ gīvāya gahetuṃ hatthaṃ pasārento viya loke aggapuggalena saddhiṃ kathentova na jānāti, aññatarabhikkhunā viya saddhiṃ kathetī’’ti nivārento etaṃ ‘‘māvuso, dāyapālā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.

Etadavocā: It seems the Elder, having heard the forest guardian's words "Mā samaṇā," thought, "We three live here, and there is no other renunciant; and this forest guardian speaks as if with a renunciant; who might this be?" Standing up from his daytime dwelling, standing at the gate, looking at the road, he saw the Blessed One. As soon as he saw him, the Blessed One emitted a radiance from his body; the byāmappabhā, adorned with the eighty minor marks, shone like a stretched-out golden cloth. The Elder, preventing him, said this statement beginning with "Māvuso, dāyapālā," thinking, "This forest guardian, extending his hand to take a venomous snake with raised hood by the neck, does not know that he is speaking with the foremost person in the world, but speaks as if with an ordinary monk."

Tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā bhagavato paccuggamanaṃ akatvāva upasaṅkami? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi ‘‘mayaṃ tayo janā samaggavāsaṃ vasāma, sacāhaṃ ekakova paccuggamanaṃ karissāmi, samaggavāso nāma na bhavissati, piyamitte gahetvāva paccuggamanaṃ karissāmi. Yathā ca bhagavā mayhaṃ piyo, evaṃ sahāyānampi me piyo’’ti tehi saddhiṃ paccuggamanaṃ kātukāmo sayaṃ akatvā upasaṅkami. Keci pana ‘‘tesaṃ therānaṃ paṇṇasāladvāre caṅkamanakoṭiyā bhagavato āgamanamaggo hoti, tasmā thero tesaṃ saññaṃ dadamānova gato’’ti vadanti.Abhikkamathāti ito āgacchatha.Pāde pakkhālesīti vikasitapadumasannibhehi jālahatthehi maṇivaṇṇaṃ udakaṃ gahetvā suvaṇṇavaṇṇesu piṭṭhipādesu udakaṃ āsiñcitvā pādena pādaṃ ghaṃsento pakkhālesi. Buddhānaṃ kāye rajojallaṃ nāma na upalimpati, kasmā pakkhālesīti? Sarīrassa utuggahaṇatthaṃ tesañca cittasampahaṃsanatthaṃ. Amhehi abhihaṭena udakena bhagavā pāde pakkhālesi, paribhogaṃ akāsīti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ balavasomanassavasena cittaṃ pīṇitaṃ hoti, tasmā pakkhālesi.

Tenupasaṅkamī: Why did he approach without going out to meet the Blessed One? It seems it occurred to him, "We three live in harmony; if I alone go out to meet him, there will be no harmony; I will go out to meet him taking my dear friends. Just as the Blessed One is dear to me, so too he is dear to my companions." Wishing to go out to meet him with them, he approached without doing it himself. Some say, "The Elder's path of approach to the Blessed One is at the door of the leaf hut and at the end of the cloister, therefore, the Elder went giving a sign to them." Abhikkamatha: Come here. Pāde pakkhālesī: With lotus-like, blossoming webbed hands, taking water the color of jewels, he poured water on his golden-colored feet and washed them, rubbing foot against foot. Dirt and grime do not adhere to the bodies of Buddhas. Why did he wash them? To exalt the body and to gladden their minds. The minds of those monks were pleased with a strong sense of joy, thinking, "The Blessed One washed his feet with water brought by us," therefore, he washed them.

Āyasmantaṃ anuruddhaṃ bhagavā etadavocāti so kira tesaṃ vuḍḍhataro, tassa saṅgahe kate sesānaṃ katova hotīti theraññeva etaṃ ‘‘kacci vo anuruddhā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.Anuruddhāti vā ekasesanayena vuttaṃ virūpekasesassapi icchitabbattā, evañca katvā bahuvacananiddeso ca samatthito hoti.Kaccīti pucchanatthe nipāto.Voti sāmivacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kacci anuruddhā tumhākaṃ khamanīyaṃ, iriyāpatho vo khamati, kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci vo jīvitaṃ yāpeti ghaṭiyati, kacci piṇḍakena na kilamatha, kacci tumhākaṃ sulabhapiṇḍaṃ, sampatte vo disvā manussā uḷuṅkayāguṃ vā kaṭacchubhikkhaṃ vā dātabbaṃ maññantīti bhikkhācāravattaṃ pucchati. Kasmā? Yasmā paccayena akilamantena sakkā samaṇadhammo kātuṃ, vattameva vā etaṃ pabbajitānaṃ.

Āyasmantaṃ anuruddhaṃ bhagavā etadavocā: It seems he was the eldest of them; if he were treated with kindness, it would be as if the others were treated with kindness, so the Teacher addressed this statement beginning with "Kacci vo anuruddhā" to the Elder alone. Anuruddhā: Or it was said by way of ekasesa, since virūpekasesa is also desirable; and thus the plural designation is justified. Kacci: Is a particle in the sense of a question. Vo: Is a word of possession. This is what was said: "Anuruddha, is it tolerable for you? Is your physical posture comfortable? Is it supportable? Does your life continue and proceed? Are you not weary with alms? Is alms easy for you? Do people think when they see you arrive that they should give gruel made with uḷuṅka or a ladleful of alms?" He asks about the monastic practice of alms-seeking. Why? Because the life of a recluse can be lived only by one who is not troubled by requisites, or indeed, this is the practice of renunciants.

‘‘kacci pana vo anuruddhā samaggā’’tiādimāha. Tatthakhīrodakībhūtāti yathā khīrañca udakañca aññamaññaṃ saṃsandati, visuṃ na hoti, ekattaṃ viya upeti, kacci evaṃ sāmaggivasena ekattupagatacittuppādā viharathāti pucchati.Piyacakkhūhīti mettacittaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetvā olokanato piyabhāvadīpakāni cakkhūni piyacakkhūni nāma, ‘‘kacci tathārūpehi cakkhūhi aññamaññaṃ passantā viharathā’’ti pucchati.Tagghāti ekaṃsatthe nipāto, ekaṃsena mayaṃ bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti.Yathā kathaṃ panāti etthayathāti nipātamattaṃ,kathanti kāraṇapucchā, kathaṃ pana tumhe evaṃ viharatha, kena kāraṇena viharatha, taṃ me kāraṇaṃ brūhīti vuttaṃ hoti.

‘‘Kacci pana vo anuruddhā samaggā’’tiādi māha: Herein, khīrodakībhūtā: Just as milk and water mix together, do not remain separate, and seem to become one, he asks, "Do you live thus with minds that have attained oneness due to harmony?" Piyacakkhūhī: Eyes that express affection, because of looking with a mind of loving-kindness, are called piyacakkhūni; he asks, "Do you live looking at each other with such eyes?" Tagghā: Is a particle in the sense of certainty; it means, "Certainly, Venerable Sir," was said. Yathā kathaṃ panā: Herein, yathā is merely a particle; kathaṃ is an inquiry into the cause; it means, "How do you live thus? For what reason do you live? Tell me that reason."

Mettaṃkāyakammanti mettacittavasena pavattaṃ kāyakammaṃ.Āvi ceva raho cāti sammukhā ceva parammukhā ca. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Tattha sammukhā kāyavacīkammāni sahavāse labbhanti, itarāni vippavāse, manokammaṃ sabbattha labbhati. Yañhi saheva vasantesu ekena mañcapīṭhaṃ vā dārubhaṇḍaṃ vā mattikābhaṇḍaṃ vā bahi dunnikkhittaṃ hoti, taṃ disvā ‘‘kenidaṃ vaḷañjita’’nti avaññaṃ akatvā attanā dunnikkhittaṃ viya gahetvā paṭisāmentassa paṭijaggitabbayuttaṃ vā pana ṭhānaṃ paṭijaggantassa sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma hoti. Ekasmiṃ pakkante tena dunnikkhittaṃ senāsanaparikkhāraṃ tatheva nikkhipantassa paṭijaggitabbayuttaṃ vā pana ṭhānaṃ paṭijaggantassa parammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma hoti. Sahavasantassa pana therehi saddhiṃ madhuraṃ sammodanīyakathaṃ paṭisanthārakathaṃ sāraṇīyakathaṃ dhammakathaṃ sarabhaññaṃ sākacchaṃ pañhapucchanaṃ pañhavissajjananti evamādikaraṇe sammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma hoti. Theresu pana pakkantesu ‘‘mayhaṃ piyasahāyo nandiyatthero kimilatthero evaṃ sīlasampanno evaṃ ācārasampanno’’tiādiguṇakathane parammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma hoti. ‘‘Mayhaṃ piyamitto nandiyatthero kimilatthero avero hotu abyāpajjo sukhī’’ti evaṃ samannāharato pana sammukhāpi parammukhāpi mettaṃ manokammaṃ hotiyeva.

Mettaṃkāyakammaṃ: Bodily action that proceeds from a mind of loving-kindness. Āvi ceva raho cā: Both in presence and in absence. The same method applies to the others as well. Herein, bodily and verbal actions in presence are obtained in cohabitation, the others in separation, but mental action is obtained everywhere. For if, while living together, a couch, wooden ware, or earthenware of one is left out of place, the action of one who, seeing it, without despising it by saying, "Who has thrown this away?" takes it and puts it back as if it had been left out of place by himself, or the action of one who cares for a place that should be cared for, is called bodily action of loving-kindness in presence. The action of one who, when one has gone away, leaves a piece of monastic equipment left out of place by him just as it is, or cares for a place that should be cared for, is called bodily action of loving-kindness in absence. But for one living together, sweet words of greeting, words of friendliness, words that evoke mindfulness, words of Dhamma, recitation in a lovely voice, discussion, asking questions, answering questions, and so on, with the Elders is called verbal action of loving-kindness in presence. But when the Elders have gone away, speaking of the virtues such as "My dear friend Nandiya Thera, Kimila Thera, is thus accomplished in virtue, is thus accomplished in conduct" is called verbal action of loving-kindness in absence. But for one who reflects thus, "May my dear friend Nandiya Thera, Kimila Thera, be without enmity, be without ill-will, be happy," mental action of loving-kindness occurs both in presence and in absence.

Nānā hi kho no bhante kāyāti ayañhi kāyo piṭṭhaṃ viya mattikā viya ca omadditvā ekato kātuṃ na sakkā.Ekañca pana maññe cittanti cittaṃ pana no attano viya aññamaññassa hitabhāvena avirodhabhāvena bhedābhāvena samaggabhāvena ekamevāti dasseti. Kathaṃ panete sakaṃ cittaṃ nikkhipitvā itaresaṃ cittavasena vattiṃsūti? Ekassa patte malaṃ uṭṭhahati, ekassa cīvaraṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ hoti, ekassa paribhaṇḍakammaṃ hoti. Tattha yassa patte malaṃ uṭṭhitaṃ, tena ‘‘mamāvuso patte malaṃ uṭṭhitaṃ, pacituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vutte itare ‘‘mayhaṃ cīvaraṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ dhovitabbaṃ, mayhaṃ paribhaṇḍaṃ kātabba’’nti avatvā araññaṃ pavisitvā dārūni āharitvā bhinditvā pattakaṭāhe bahalatanumattikāhi lepaṃ katvā pattaṃ pacitvā tato paraṃ cīvaraṃ vā dhovanti, paribhaṇḍaṃ vā karonti. ‘‘Mamāvuso cīvaraṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ, dhovituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti ‘‘mama paṇṇasālā uklāpā, paribhaṇḍaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti paṭhamataraṃ ārocitepi eseva nayo.

Nānā hi kho no bhante kāyā: For this body cannot be compressed and made one, like clay or mud. Ekañca pana maññe cittaṃ: But the mind, it seems, is one for us, because of being beneficial to each other, because of non-opposition, because of non-difference, because of harmony, as if it were one's own. How then did these behave according to the minds of others, setting aside their own minds? Impurity arises in one's bowl, one's robe becomes soiled, and one has to repair one's belongings. Therein, when one whose bowl has become impure says, "Friends, impurity has arisen in my bowl; it should be baked," the others, without saying, "My robe is soiled; it should be washed, I have to repair my belongings," enter the forest, bring wood, split it, apply clay thickly and thinly to the bowl in a bowl-baking pot, bake the bowl, and then wash the robe or repair their belongings. The same method applies even if one first says, "Friends, my robe is soiled; it should be washed," or "My leaf hut is dilapidated; it should be repaired."

‘‘kacci pana vo anuruddhā’’tiādimāha. Tatthavoti nipātamattaṃ, paccattavacanaṃ vā, kacci tumheti attho.Amhākanti amhesu tīsu janesu.Piṇḍāya paṭikkamatīti gāme piṇḍāya caritvā paccāgacchati.Avakkārapātinti atirekapiṇḍapātaṃ apanetvā ṭhapanatthāya ekaṃ samuggapātiṃ dhovitvā ṭhapeti.Yo pacchāti te kira therā na ekatova bhikkhācāraṃ pavisanti. Phalasamāpattiratā hete pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā vattapaṭipattiṃ pūretvā senāsanaṃ pavisitvā kālaparicchedaṃ katvā phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdanti. Tesu yo paṭhamataraṃ nisinno attano kālaparicchedavasena paṭhamataraṃ uṭṭhāti, so piṇḍāya caritvā paṭinivatto bhattakiccaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā jānāti ‘‘dve bhikkhū pacchato, ahaṃ paṭhamataraṃ āgato’’ti. Atha pattaṃ pidahitvā āsanapaññāpanādīni katvā yadi patte paṭivīsamattameva hoti, nisīditvā bhuñjati, yadi atirekaṃ hoti, avakkārapātiyaṃ pakkhipitvā pātiṃ pidhāya bhuñjati, katabhattakicco pattaṃ dhovitvā vodakaṃ katvā thavikāya osāpetvā pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisati.

“Kacci pana vo anuruddhā” etc., was said. There, vo is merely a particle, or a word in the possessive case, meaning: “Are you…?”. Amhākaṃ means in us, the three people. Piṇḍāya paṭikkamati means, having wandered for alms in the village, he returns. Avakkārapāti means, having washed and kept a receptacle bowl for setting aside the excess alms-food. Yo pacchā means, it seems those elders do not enter for alms together. They are delighting in the fruition attainment. They do the attending to the body early in the morning, fulfil the customary practices, enter their dwelling, set a time limit, and sit down having applied the fruition attainment. Of those, he who sat down earlier, according to his set time, gets up earlier. He wanders for alms and, returning, comes to the refectory and knows, “Two monks are coming later, I have come earlier.” Then, having covered his bowl and prepared the seat etc., if there is only enough in the bowl for mere sustenance, he sits and eats. If there is excess, he puts it in the receptacle bowl, covers the bowl, and eats. Having finished the meal, he washes the bowl, makes rinsing water, puts it in the bag, and, taking his bowl and robe, enters his dwelling.

Dutiyopi āgantvāva jānāti ‘‘eko paṭhamaṃ āgato, eko pacchato’’ti. So sace patte bhattaṃ pamāṇameva hoti, bhuñjati. Sace mandaṃ, avakkārapātito gahetvā bhuñjati. Sace atirekaṃ hoti, avakkārapātiyaṃ pakkhipitvā pamāṇameva bhuñjitvā purimatthero viya vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisati. Tatiyopi āgantvāva jānāti ‘‘dve paṭhamaṃ āgatā, ahaṃ pacchimo’’ti. Sopi dutiyatthero viya bhuñjitvā katabhattakicco pattaṃ dhovitvā vodakaṃ katvā thavikāya osāpetvā āsanāni ukkhipitvā paṭisāmeti, pānīyaghaṭe vā paribhojanīyaghaṭe vā avasesaudakaṃ chaḍḍetvā ghaṭe nikujjitvā avakkārapātiyaṃ sace avasesabhattaṃ hoti, taṃ vuttanayena jahitvā pātiṃ dhovitvā paṭisāmeti, bhattaggaṃ sammajjati, so kacavaraṃ chaḍḍetvā sammajjaniṃ ukkhipitvā upacikāhi muttaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā pattacīvaramādāya vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisati. Idaṃ therānaṃ bahivihāre araññe bhattakiccakaraṇaṭṭhāne bhojanasālāya vattaṃ. Idaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yo pacchā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.

The second one also comes and knows, “One came earlier, one is coming later.” If there is only enough food in the bowl, he eats. If there is too little, he takes from the receptacle bowl and eats. If there is excess, he puts it in the receptacle bowl, eats just enough, and enters his dwelling like the first elder. The third one also comes and knows, “Two came earlier, I am the last.” He too, having eaten like the second elder and finished the meal, washes the bowl, makes rinsing water, puts it in the bag, removes the seats and puts them away, throws away the remaining water in the water pot or the drinking water pot, turns the pot upside down, and if there is leftover food in the receptacle bowl, he discards it according to the method mentioned earlier, washes the bowl and puts it away, sweeps the refectory, throws away the rubbish, picks up the broom, and places it in the designated spot under the eaves, and, taking his bowl and robe, enters his dwelling. This is the practice in the outer monastery, in the forest, in the refectory, in the place for doing the meal duties. With this in mind, “Yo pacchā” etc., was said.

Yopassatītiādi pana nesaṃ antovihāre vattanti veditabbaṃ. Tatthavaccaghaṭanti ācamanakumbhiṃ.Rittanti rittakaṃ.Tucchanti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Avisayhanti ukkhipituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ atibhāriyaṃ.Hatthavikārenāti hatthasaññāya. Te kira pānīyaghaṭādīsu yaṃkiñci tucchakaṃ gahetvā pokkharaṇiṃ gantvā anto ca bahi ca dhovitvā udakaṃ parissāvetvā tīre ṭhapetvā aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ hatthavikārena āmantenti, odissa vā anodissa vā saddaṃ na karonti. Kasmā odissa na karonti? Tañhi bhikkhuṃ saddo bādheyyāti. Kasmā anodissa na karonti? Anodissa sadde dinne ‘‘ahaṃ pure, ahaṃ pure’’ti dvepi nikkhameyyuṃ. Tato dvīhi kattabbakamme tatiyassa kammacchedo bhaveyya. Saṃyatapadasaddo pana hutvā aparassa bhikkhuno divāṭṭhānasantikaṃ gantvā tena diṭṭhabhāvaṃ ñatvā hatthasaññaṃ karoti, tāya saññāya itaro āgacchati, tato dve janā hatthena hatthaṃ saṃsibbantā dvīsu hatthesu ṭhapetvā uṭṭhāpenti. Taṃ sandhāyāha‘‘hatthavikārena dutiyaṃ āmantetvā hatthavilaṅghakena upaṭṭhāpemā’’ti.

Yo passati etc., should be understood as their practice in the inner monastery. There, vaccaghaṭa means a water pot for rinsing. Ritta means empty. Tuccha is a synonym for that. Avisayha means unable to lift, too heavy. Hatthavikārena means by a gesture of the hand. It seems that, having taken any empty water pot etc., they go to the pond, wash it inside and out, strain the water, place it on the bank, and invite another monk with a gesture of the hand. They do not make a sound by specifying or not specifying. Why do they not specify? Because the sound might disturb that monk. Why do they not do it non-specifically? If a non-specific sound is made, two might come out saying, “I’m first, I’m first.” Then, the third person’s opportunity to do what should be done by two would be cut off. But, having become one whose words are restrained, having gone to the dwelling place of the other monk during the day and knowing that he has been seen, he makes a gesture with his hand. By that gesture, the other one comes. Then, the two people, joining hand to hand, placing it on their two hands, lift it up. Referring to that, he said, “hatthavikārena dutiyaṃ āmantetvā hatthavilaṅghakena upaṭṭhāpemā”. ("Having invited the second one with a gesture of the hand, we lift it up with interlaced hands.")

Pañcāhikaṃ kho panāti cātuddase pannarase aṭṭhamiyanti idaṃ tāva pakatidhammassavanameva, taṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā pañcame pañcame divase dve therā nātivikāle nahāyitvā anuruddhattherassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanti. Tattha tayopi nisīditvā tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ aññamaññaṃ pañhaṃ pucchanti, aññamaññaṃ vissajjenti. Tesaṃ evaṃ karontānaṃyeva aruṇaṃ uggacchati. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettāvatā therena bhagavatā appamādalakkhaṇaṃ pucchitena pamādaṭṭhānesuyeva appamādalakkhaṇaṃ vissajjitaṃ hoti. Aññesañhi bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhācārapavisanakālo nikkhamanakālo nivāsanaparivattanaṃ cīvarapārupanaṃ antogāme piṇḍāya caraṇaṃ dhammakathanaṃ anumodanaṃ antogāmato nikkhamitvā bhattakiccakaraṇaṃ pattadhovanaṃ pattaosāpanaṃ pattacīvarapaṭisāmananti papañcakaraṇaṭṭhānāni etāni. Tasmā thero ‘‘amhākaṃ ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ muñcitvā vissaṭṭhakathāpavattanena kammaṭṭhāne pamajjanaṭṭhānāni, tatthāpi mayaṃ, bhante, kammaṭṭhānaviruddhaṃ na paṭipajjāmā’’ti aññesaṃ pamādaṭṭhānesuyeva sikhāppattaṃ attano appamādalakkhaṇaṃ vissajjesi. Imināva etāni ṭhānāni muñcitvā aññattha vihārasamāpattīnaṃ avaḷañjanavasena pamādakālo nāma amhākaṃ natthīti dīpeti.

Pañcāhikaṃ kho pana means on the fourteenth, fifteenth, and eighth days. This is merely the natural Dhamma hearing. Having made it unbroken, on every fifth day, two elders, not too late, bathe and go to Anuruddha Thera's dwelling place. There, the three of them, sitting down, ask each other questions and answer each other in one of the three Piṭakas. While they are doing this, dawn arises. This was said with that in mind. To this extent, when the characteristic of diligence was asked by the Blessed One, the characteristic of diligence was answered in the very places of negligence. For other monks, the time of entering for alms, the time of leaving, changing robes, putting on robes, wandering for alms in the village, Dhamma talk, approval, leaving the village, doing the meal duties, washing the bowl, putting the bowl away, and putting away the bowl and robe, these are places for proliferation. Therefore, the Elder, "Having relinquished this much place, with the occurrence of scattered talk, these are places of negligence in the meditation subject, even there, venerable sir, we do not practice contrary to the meditation subject," thus, in the very places of negligence of others, he answered his own characteristic of diligence, which was at its peak. By this very thing, he indicates that, having relinquished these places, there is no time of negligence for us in the sense of involving the attainments of dwelling elsewhere.

Pācīnavaṃsadāyagamanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Account of Going to Pācīnavaṃsa is finished.

Pālileyyakagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Account of Going to Pāḷileyyaka

467.Dhammiyākathāyāti samaggavāse ānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttāya dhammakathāya.Anupubbena(udā. aṭṭha. 35)cārikaṃ caramānoti anukkamena gāmanigamapaṭipāṭiyā cārikaṃ caramāno.Yena pālileyyakaṃ tadavasarīti ekakova yena pālileyyakagāmo, taṃ avasari. Pālileyyakagāmavāsinopi paccuggantvā bhagavato dānaṃ datvā pālileyyakagāmassa avidūre rakkhitavanasaṇḍo nāma atthi, tattha bhagavato paṇṇasālaṃ katvā ‘‘ettha bhagavā vasatū’’ti yācitvā vāsayiṃsu.Bhaddasāloti pana tattheko manāpo laṭṭhiko sālarukkho. Bhagavā taṃ gāmaṃ upanissāya vanasaṇḍe paṇṇasālāya samīpe tasmiṃ rukkhamūle vihāsi. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘pālileyyake viharati rakkhitavanasaṇḍe bhaddasālamūle’’ti.

467.Dhammiyā kathāya means with a Dhamma talk connected with the advantages of living in harmony. Anupubbena cārikaṃ caramāno (e.g., aṭṭha. 35) means wandering on tour in sequence, in the order of villages and towns. Yena pālileyyakaṃ tadavasari means he alone went to that Pāḷileyyaka village. The inhabitants of Pāḷileyyaka village also went to welcome the Blessed One, gave alms, and near Pāḷileyyaka village there is a grove named Rakkhitavana. Having built a leaf hut for the Blessed One there, they requested, "May the Blessed One dwell here," and had him dwell there. Bhaddasālo is a certain pleasant laṭṭhi Sāla tree there. The Blessed One, depending on that village, dwelt in the vicinity of the leaf hut in the grove, at the foot of that tree. Therefore, it was said, "He dwells in Pāḷileyyaka, in the Rakkhitavana grove, at the foot of the Bhaddasāla tree."

Atha kho bhagavato rahogatassātiādi bhagavato vivekasukhapaccavekkhaṇadassanaṃ.Ākiṇṇo na phāsu vihāsinti sambādhappatto ākiṇṇo vihāsiṃ. Kiṃ pana bhagavato sambādho atthi saṃsaggo vāti? Natthi. Na hi koci bhagavantaṃ anicchāya upasaṅkamituṃ sakkoti. Durāsadā hi buddhā bhagavanto sabbattha ca anupalittā, hitesitāya pana sattesu anukampaṃ upādāya ‘‘mutto mocessāmī’’ti paṭiññānurūpaṃ caturoghanittharaṇatthaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ parisānaṃ attano santikaṃ kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamanaṃ adhivāseti, sayañca mahākaruṇāsamussāhito kālaññū hutvā tattha upasaṅkamīti idaṃ sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇaṃ. Nāyamidha ākiṇṇavihāro adhippeto, idha pana tehi kalahakārakehi kosambakabhikkhūhi saddhiṃ ekavihāre vāsaṃ vihāsi, tadā vinetabbābhāvato ākiṇṇavihāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ kho pubbe ākiṇṇo na phāsu vihāsi’’nti. Tenevāha‘‘tehi kosambakehi bhikkhūhi bhaṇḍanakārakehī’’tiādi.

Atha kho bhagavato rahogatassa etc., is the showing of the Blessed One's reflection on the happiness of seclusion. Ākiṇṇo na phāsu vihāsi means he dwelt being crowded and uncomfortable. But does the Blessed One have crowding or association? No. For no one can approach the Blessed One against his will. For Buddhas, the Blessed Ones, are difficult to approach and unattached everywhere, but out of compassion for beings, undertaking the intention "having been freed, I will free," he allows the eight assemblies to approach him at the right time for the sake of crossing the four floods, in accordance with his promise, and himself, aroused by great compassion, being one who knows the right time, approaches there. This is the practice of all Buddhas. Crowded dwelling is not intended here, but here, he dwelt living in the same monastery with those quarrelsome Kosambaka monks. Then, because there was no one to discipline, having made a crowded dwelling, it was said, "Formerly, I dwelt being crowded and not comfortable." Therefore, he said, "tehi kosambakehi bhikkhūhi bhaṇḍanakārakehī" etc.

Daharapotakehīti daharehi hatthipotakehi, ye bhiṅkātipi vuccanti.Tehīti hatthiādīhi.Kaddamodakānīti kaddamamissāni udakāni.Ogāhāti ettha ‘‘ogāha’’ntipi pāḷi.Assāti hatthināgassa.Upanighaṃsantiyoti ghaṭṭentiyo. Upanighaṃsiyamānopi attano uḷārabhāvena na kujjhati, tena tā ghaṃsantiyeva.Vūpakaṭṭhoti vūpakaṭṭho dūrībhūto.

Daharapotakehī means by young elephant calves, who are also called bhiṅkā. Tehī means by the elephants etc. Kaddamodakānī means water mixed with mud. Ogāhā here, the reading is "ogāha" also. Assā means of the elephant king. Upanighaṃsantiyo means rubbing against. Even when being rubbed against, he does not get angry due to his noble nature, therefore they keep rubbing. Vūpakaṭṭho means withdrawn, remote.

Yūthāti hatthighaṭāya.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti so kira hatthināgo yūthavāse ukkaṇṭhito taṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ paviṭṭho. Tattha bhagavantaṃ disvā ghaṭasahassena nibbāpitasantāpo viya nibbuto hutvā pasannacitto bhagavato santike aṭṭhāsi, tato paṭṭhāya vattasīse ṭhatvā bhaddasālassa paṇṇasālāya ca samantato appaharitaṃ katvā sākhābhaṅgena sammajjati, bhagavato mukhadhovanaṃ deti, nahānodakaṃ āharati, dantakaṭṭhaṃ deti, araññato madhurāni phalāphalāni āharitvā satthu upaneti. Satthā tāni paribhuñjati. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘soṇḍāya bhagavato pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetī’’tiādi. So kira soṇḍāya dārūni āharitvā aññamaññaṃ ghaṃsitvā aggiṃ uṭṭhāpetvā dārūni jālāpetvā tattha pāsāṇakhaṇḍāni tāpetvā tāni daṇḍakehi vaṭṭetvā soṇḍiyaṃ khipitvā udakassa tattabhāvaṃ ñatvā bhagavato santikaṃ upagantvā tiṭṭhati. Bhagavā ‘‘hatthināgo mama nahānaṃ icchatī’’ti tattha gantvā nahānakiccaṃ karoti. Pānīyepi eseva nayo. Tasmiṃ pana sītale jāte upasaṅkamati. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ‘‘soṇḍāya bhagavato pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetī’’ti.

Yūthā means from the herd of elephants. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī means it seems that elephant king, being disgusted with living in a herd, entered that grove. Having seen the Blessed One there, as if his fatigue had been extinguished by a thousand pots, having become peaceful, with a pleased mind, he stood near the Blessed One. Then, starting from that, standing at the head of his duties, he sweeps all around the Bhaddasāla tree and the leaf hut, making it not green, he gives face-washing water to the Blessed One, brings bathing water, gives a toothpick, and brings sweet fruits from the forest and offers them to the Teacher. The Teacher uses those. Therefore, it was said "soṇḍāya bhagavato pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetī" etc. It seems he brings wood with his trunk, rubs them together, starts a fire, heats stones there, rotates them with sticks, throws them into the water with his trunk, and knowing the hotness of the water, he goes to the Blessed One and stands. The Blessed One, thinking "the elephant king wants my bath," goes there and does the bathing duty. The same method applies to drinking water. But when it becomes cool, he approaches. With that in mind, it was said "soṇḍāya bhagavato pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetī" etc.

Attano ca pavivekaṃ viditvāti kehici anākiṇṇabhāvaladdhaṃ kāyavivekaṃ jānitvā. Itare pana vivekā bhagavato sabbakālaṃ vijjantiyeva.Imaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti imaṃ attano hatthināgassa ca vivekābhiratiyā samānajjhāsayabhāvadīpanaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.

Attano ca pavivekaṃ viditvā means knowing the bodily seclusion gained by not being crowded by anyone. But the other seclusions are present for the Blessed One at all times. Imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi means he uttered this udāna, revealing his own and the elephant king's similarity of disposition in delighting in seclusion.

etaṃ īsādantassarathaīsāsadisadantassa hatthināgassacittaṃ nāgenabuddhanāgassacittena sametisaṃsandati. Kathaṃ sameti ce?Yadeko ramatī vane,yasmā buddhanāgo ‘‘ahaṃ kho pubbe ākiṇṇo vihāsi’’nti purimaṃ ākiṇṇavihāraṃ jigucchitvā vivekaṃ upabrūhayamāno idāni yathāekoadutiyovanearaññeramatiabhiramati, evaṃ ayampi hatthināgo pubbe attano hatthiādīhi ākiṇṇavihāraṃ jigucchitvā idāniekoasahāyo vane ekavihāraṃramatiabhinandati, tasmāssacittaṃ nāgena sameti,tassa cittena sametīti katvā ekībhāvaratiyā ekasadisaṃ hotīti attho.

etaṃ īsādantassa of the elephant king with tusks like the pole of a chariot, cittaṃ nāgena with the mind of the Buddha-elephant, cittena sameti converges. How does it converge? Yadeko ramatī vane, because the Buddha-elephant, after disliking his previous crowded dwelling, thinking "formerly, I dwelt being crowded," now just as eko one, adutiyo without a second, vane in the forest, ramati delights, so too this elephant king, having disliked his previous crowded dwelling with his elephants etc., now eko unaccompanied, vane in the forest, ramati delights in solitary dwelling. Therefore cittaṃ nāgena sameti, his mind converges with the mind of the elephant, thus having the sense of unity in solitude, it becomes similar.

Pālileyyakagamanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Account of Going to Pāḷileyyaka is finished.

Aṭṭhārasavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Account of the Eighteen Grounds

473.Yo paṭibāheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassāti ettha yo senāsanārahassa senāsanaṃ paṭibāhati, tasseva āpatti. Kalahakārakādīnaṃ panettha ‘‘okāso natthī’’tiādikaṃ saṅghassa katikaṃ ārocetvā na paññapentassa ‘‘ahaṃ vuḍḍho’’ti pasayha attanāva attano paññapetvā gaṇhantaṃ ‘‘yuttiyā gaṇhathā’’ti vatvā vārentassa ca natthi āpatti. ‘‘Bhaṇḍanakārakaṃ nikkaḍḍhatīti vacanato kuladūsakassa pabbājanīyakammānuññāya ca idha kalahavūpasamanatthaṃ āgatānaṃ kosambakānampi ‘yathāvuḍḍha’nti avatvā ‘vivitte asati vivittaṃ katvāpi dātabba’nti vuttattā vivittaṃ katvā dentaṃ paṭibāhantasseva āpattī’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.

473.Yo paṭibāheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā there, he who rejects lodging for one who is worthy of lodging, only he incurs an offense. But for those who are quarrelsome etc., having announced to the Saṅgha the agreement, "there is no opportunity," etc., and not assigning it, or oneself forcefully assigning and taking it thinking "I am senior," or preventing someone saying "take it according to justice," there is no offense. "Because it is said 'he expels the quarrelsome one' and for the permission of expulsion for one who corrupts families, even for the Kosambakas who have come here for the sake of pacifying the quarrel, without saying 'according to seniority,' but because it is said 'when there is a secluded place, it should be given even after making it secluded,' the offense is only for the one who rejects giving it after making it secluded," it is said in the Gaṇṭhipada.

Upālisaṅghasāmaggīpucchāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of Upāli's Inquiry about the Saṅgha's Harmony

476.Namūlā mūlaṃ gantvāti mūlato mūlaṃ agantvā.Atthato apagatāti sāmaggisaṅkhātaatthato apagatā.

476.Na mūlā mūlaṃ gantvā means not going from root to root. Atthato apagatā means departed from the meaning known as harmony.

477.Yena naṃ paccatthikā vadeyyuṃ, taṃ na hi hotīti sambandho.Anapagatanti kāraṇato anapetaṃ, sakāraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.

477.The connection is: "That which adversaries would say about him, that does not exist." Anapagata means not departed from the cause, it is said as having a cause.

Usūyāyāti iminā dosāgatigamanassa saṅgahitattā‘‘agatigamanenā’’ti avasesaagatigamanaṃ dassitanti veditabbaṃ.Aṭṭhahi dūtaṅgehīti ‘‘sotā ca hoti sāvetā ca uggahetā ca dhāretā ca viññāpetā ca kusalo ca sahitāsahitadassano ca akalahakārako cā’’ti evaṃ vuttehi aṭṭhahi dūtaṅgehi. Sesamettha pāḷito aṭṭhakathāto ca suviññeyyameva.

Usūyāyā by this, because going to wrong destinations due to anger is included, "agatigamanenā" it should be understood that the remaining going to wrong destinations is shown. Aṭṭhahi dūtaṅgehī means by the eight qualities of a messenger that were said as "he is a hearer, and a proclaimer, and a learner, and a bearer, and an informer, and skilled, and a seer of what is helpful and unhelpful, and a non-quarrelsome one." The rest here is easily understood from the Pāḷi and the commentary.

Kosambakakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Chapter on the Kosambakas is finished.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ

Thus in the Sāratthadīpanī, the subcommentary to the Vinaya commentary, Samantapāsādikā,

Mahāvaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Mahāvagga is finished.

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Homage to the Blessed One, the Arahant, the Perfectly Self-awakened One

Cūḷavagga-ṭīkā

Cūḷavagga-ṭīkā

1. Kammakkhandhakaṃ

1. The Chapter on Acts

Tajjanīyakammakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Account of the Tajjanīyakamma Act

1.Cūḷavaggassa paṭhame kammakkhandhake tāva ‘‘yaṭṭhiṃ pavesaya, kunte pavesayā’’tiādīsu viya sahacaraṇañāyena ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’tiādīsu viya nissitesu nissayavohāravasena vā paṇḍukalohitakanissitā paṇḍukalohitakasaddena vuttāti āha‘‘tesaṃ nissitakāpi paṇḍukalohitakātveva paññāyantī’’ti.Paṭivadathāti paṭivacanaṃ detha.

1.In the first section of the Cūḷavagga on the aggregates of offenses, just as in "bring the stick, bring the spear," and just as in "the benches make a creaking sound," by way of association, or by way of dependent usage among things that are dependent, it is said that things dependent on paṇḍu and lohitaka are spoken of by the word paṇḍukalohitaka, hence he said, "even those dependent on them appear as paṇḍukalohitaka." Paṭivadathā means give a reply.

Adhammakammadvādasakakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Twelve Cases of Unlawful Acts

4.Tīhiaṅgehi samannāgatanti paccekaṃ samuditehi vā tīhi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ. Na hi tiṇṇaṃ eva aṅgānaṃ samodhānena adhammakammaṃ hoti, ekenapi hotiyeva. ‘‘Appaṭiññāya kataṃ hotīti lajjiṃ sandhāya vutta’’ntigaṇṭhipadesukathitaṃ.

4.Samannāgata with three factors means endowed with three factors, either individually or collectively. For an unlawful act does not occur only by the combination of three factors; it can occur with even one. It is said in the Gaṇṭhipada that "’done without acknowledgment’ is said with reference to the shamefaced monk."

Nanu ca ‘‘adesanāgāminiyā āpattiyā kataṃ hotī’’ti idaṃ parato ‘‘tīhi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgatassa bhikkhuno ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho tajjanīyakammaṃ kareyya, adhisīle sīlavipanno hotī’’ti iminā virujjhati. Adesanāgāminiṃ āpanno hi ‘‘adhisīle sīlavipanno’’ti vuccatīti? Tattha keci vadanti ‘‘tajjanīyakammassa hi visesena bhaṇḍanakārakattaṃ aṅga’nti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ pāḷiyā āgatanidānena sameti, tasmā sabbatikesupi bhaṇḍanaṃ āropetvā bhaṇḍanapaccayā āpannāpattivasena idaṃ kammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Tasmā ‘adhisīle sīlavipanno’ti etthāpi pubbabhāge vā parabhāge vā codanāsāraṇādikāle bhaṇḍanapaccayā āpannāpattivaseneva kātabbaṃ, na kevalaṃ saṅghādisesapaccayā kātabba’’nti. Apare pana vadanti ‘‘adesanāgāminiyāti idaṃ pārājikāpattiṃyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ, na saṅghādisesaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘adesanāgāminiyāti pārājikāpattiyā vā saṅghādisesāpattiyā vā’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅghādisesāpattiyā vāti atthuddhāravasena vuttaṃ, ‘adhisīle sīlavipanno’ti ca idaṃ saṅghādisesaṃyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pārājikaṃ. Tasmā pārājikāpattipaccayā na tajjanīyakammaṃ kātabbaṃ payojanābhāvā, saṅghādisesapaccayā kātabbanti ayamattho siddho hoti. Sukkapakkhe ‘desanāgāminiyā āpattiyā kataṃ hotī’ti iminā virujjhatīti ce? Na ekena pariyāyena saṅghādisesassapi desanāgāminīvohārasambhavato’’ti, taṃ yuttaṃ viya dissati.

But doesn't this, "it is done through an offense that does not lead to confession," contradict what follows: "Monks, if a monk is endowed with three factors, the Saṅgha, if it wishes, may impose a Tajjanīyakamma (censure) on him, he has fallen away from virtue in higher morality"? For one who has committed an offense that does not lead to confession is called "fallen away from virtue in higher morality," isn't he? Here, some say, "In the commentary, it is said that being a quarrelsome person is specifically a factor for Tajjanīyakamma; this aligns with the cause that comes in the Pali. Therefore, in all triplets (of offenses), quarreling should be attributed, and this act should be done based on offenses arising from quarreling. Therefore, even in 'fallen away from virtue in higher morality,' it should be done based on offenses arising from quarreling, either in the preliminary or subsequent stages, during times of accusation, investigation, etc., not only based on Saṅghādisesa offenses." Others, however, say, "’Does not lead to confession’ is said with reference to Pārājika offenses, not Saṅghādisesa. In the commentary, however, it is said, 'does not lead to confession' means either a Pārājika offense or a Saṅghādisesa offense. There, 'with a Saṅghādisesa offense' is said by way of extracting the meaning, and 'fallen away from virtue in higher morality' is said with reference to Saṅghādisesa alone, not Pārājika. Therefore, Tajjanīyakamma should not be done because of a Pārājika offense, due to lack of purpose; it should be done because of a Saṅghādisesa offense—this meaning is established. If it contradicts the bright side, 'done through an offense that leads to confession'? No, because the term 'leads to confession' can apply to Saṅghādisesa in one sense," this seems reasonable.

Nappaṭippassambhetabbaaṭṭhārasakakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Eighteen Cases of Not Being Able to Withdraw

8.Lomaṃ pātentītiādi sammāvattanāya pariyāyavacanaṃ.

8.Lomaṃ pātentī etc. is a synonym for proper conduct.

Niyassakammakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Niyassakamma

11.Niyassakamme‘‘nissāya te vatthabbanti garunissayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na itara’’ntikenacilikhitaṃ.Gaṇṭhipadepana ‘‘niyassakammaṃ yasmā bālavasena karīyati, tasmā nissāya vatthabbanti nissayaṃ gāhāpetabbo’’ti vuttaṃ, vīmaṃsitvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbaṃ.Apissūti etthasuiti nipātamattaṃ, bhikkhū api niccabyāvaṭā hontīti vuttaṃ hoti.

11.In Niyassakamma (dependence procedure), "you should live in dependence" is said with reference to a heavy dependence (garunissaya), not another," so someone wrote. In the Gaṇṭhipada, however, it is said, "Since Niyassakamma is done because of foolishness, therefore, he should be made to accept dependence, saying, 'you should live in dependence'," having considered this, the more reasonable should be taken. Apissū: here, su is merely a particle, it is said that the monks are always busy.

Pabbājanīyakammakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Pabbājanīyakamma

29.Pabbājanīyakammetena hi, bhikkhave, saṅgho pabbājanīyakammaṃ paṭippassambhetūti idaṃ tesu vibbhamantesupi pakkamantesupi sammāvattanteyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ.

29.In Pabbājanīyakamma (exile procedure), "Then, monks, let the Saṅgha withdraw the Pabbājanīyakamma" is said with reference to properly behaving only while they are wandering and departing.

Paṭisāraṇīyakammakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Paṭisāraṇīyakamma

33.Sudhammavatthusmiṃmacchikāsaṇḍeti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tattha kira (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.72 cittagahapativatthu) citto gahapati pañcavaggiyānaṃ abbhantaraṃ mahānāmattheraṃ piṇḍāya caramānaṃ disvā tassa iriyāpathe pasīditvā pattaṃ ādāya gehaṃ pavesetvā bhojetvā bhattakiccāvasāne dhammakathaṃ suṇanto sotāpattiphalaṃ patvā acalasaddho hutvā ambāṭakavanaṃ nāma attano uyyānaṃ saṅghārāmaṃ kātukāmo therassa hatthe udakaṃ pātetvā niyyātesi. Tasmiṃ khaṇe ‘‘patiṭṭhitaṃ buddhasāsana’’nti udakapariyantaṃ katvā mahāpathavī kampi, mahāseṭṭhi uyyāne mahāvihāraṃ kāresi. Tatthāyaṃ sudhammo bhikkhu āvāsiko ahosi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ‘‘āyasmā sudhammo macchikāsaṇḍe cittassa gahapatino āvāsiko hotī’’tiādi. Tatthadhuvabhattikoti niccabhattiko.

33.In the Sudhamma incident, Macchikāsaṇḍa is the name of a city. There, it seems, (Dhammapada Commentary 1.72, Story of Citta the Householder) Citta the householder, seeing the elder Mahānāma, one of the group of five, wandering for alms, pleased with his deportment, took his bowl, brought him into his house, and after feeding him, listening to a Dhamma talk at the end of the meal, attained the fruit of Stream-entry, became unwavering in faith, and desiring to make his Ambāṭakavana garden into a Saṅghārāma, poured water into the elder's hand and dedicated it. At that moment, having made the boundary of the water, saying, "The Buddha's dispensation is established," the great earth quaked, and the great merchant had a great monastery built in the garden. There, this Sudhamma monk was a resident. With reference to this, it is said "The venerable Sudhamma was a resident of Citta the householder in Macchikāsaṇḍa" etc. There, dhuvabhattiko means having a permanent meal.

‘‘tena kho pana samayena sambahulā therā’’tiādi. Citto gahapati tesaṃ āgamanaṃ sutvā addhayojanamattaṃ paccuggantvā te ādāya attano vihāraṃ pavesetvā āgantukavattaṃ katvā ‘‘bhante, thokaṃ dhammakathaṃ sotukāmomhī’’ti dhammasenāpatiṃ yāci. Atha naṃ thero ‘‘upāsaka, addhānenāmhā kilantarūpā, apica thokaṃ suṇāhī’’ti tassa dhammakathaṃ kathesi. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisinnaṃ kho cittaṃ gahapatiṃ āyasmā sāriputto dhammiyā kathāya sandassesī’’tiādi. So therassa dhammakathaṃ suṇantova anāgāmiphalaṃ pāpuṇi.

"Then, at that time, many elders" etc. Citta the householder, hearing of their arrival, went out to meet them for about half a yojana, brought them to his monastery, performed the duties of a guest, and requested the general of the Dhamma, saying, "Venerable sirs, we wish to hear a little Dhamma talk." Then the elder said to him, "Lay follower, we are tired from the journey, but listen a little," and he gave him a Dhamma talk. Therefore, it is said "The venerable Sāriputta instructed Citta the householder, who was sitting to one side, with a Dhamma talk" etc. Listening to the elder's Dhamma talk, he attained the fruit of Non-returner.

41.Nāsakkhi cittaṃ gahapatiṃ khamāpetunti so tattha gantvā ‘‘gahapati, mayhameva so doso, khamāhi me’’ti vatvāpi ‘‘nāhaṃ khamāmī’’ti tena paṭikkhitto maṅkubhūto taṃ khamāpetuṃ nāsakkhi. Punadeva satthu santikaṃ paccāgamāsi. Satthā ‘‘nāssa upāsako khamissatī’’ti jānantopi ‘‘mānathaddho esa tiṃsayojanaṃ gantvāva paccāgacchatū’’ti khamanupāyaṃ anācikkhitvāva uyyojesi. Athassa puna āgatakāle nihatamānassa anudūtaṃ datvā ‘‘gaccha, iminā saddhiṃ gantvā upāsakaṃ khamāpehī’’ti vatvā ‘‘samaṇena nāma ‘mayhaṃ vihāro, mayhaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ, mayhaṃ upāsako, mayhaṃ upāsikā’ti mānaṃ vā issaṃ vā kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Evaṃ karontassa hi icchāmānādayo kilesā vaḍḍhantī’’ti ovadanto –

41.Nāsakkhi cittaṃ gahapatiṃ khamāpetu: he went there, saying, "Householder, the fault is mine, forgive me," but even after being rejected by him, saying, "I do not forgive," being crestfallen, he was unable to get him to forgive him. Again, he returned to the Teacher. The Teacher, knowing that his lay follower would not forgive him, sent him away without showing a method of forgiveness, thinking, "Let this conceited one go thirty yojanas and then return." Then, when he came again, humbled, giving an envoy, he said, "Go, go with him and get the lay follower to forgive you," and advising, "A renunciate should not have conceit or envy, thinking, 'This is my monastery, this is my dwelling place, this is my lay follower, this is my female lay follower.' For when one does so, desires and pride, etc., increase" –

‘‘Asantaṃ bhāvanamiccheyya, purekkhārañca bhikkhusu;

"He wishes for a non-existent respect, and precedence among monks;
And lordship in monasteries, and worship from other families.

‘‘Mameva kata maññantu, gihī pabbajitā ubho;

"Let both householders and renunciates think that this was done by me alone;
Let them be obedient to me alone in any tasks, great or small;
Such is the intention of a fool, desire and pride increase." (Dhammapada 73-74) –

Dhammapadeimā gāthā abhāsi.

He spoke these verses in the Dhammapada.

Sudhammattheropi imaṃ ovādaṃ sutvā satthāraṃ vanditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā tena anudūtena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ gantvā upāsakassa cakkhupathe āpattiṃ paṭikaritvā upāsakaṃ khamāpesi. So upāsakena ‘‘khamāmahaṃ bhante, sace mayhaṃ doso atthi, khamatha me’’ti paṭikhamāpito satthārā dinnaovāde ṭhatvā katipāheneva saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.

The elder Sudhamma too, hearing this advice, venerated the Teacher, rose from his seat, circumambulated him, and going with that envoy monk, having atoned for the offense in the lay follower's sight, got the lay follower to forgive him. He, being forgiven by the lay follower, saying, "I forgive you, venerable sir, if there is any fault in me, forgive me," standing in the advice given by the Teacher, attained Arahatship with the discriminations in just a few days.

Āpattiyā adassane ukkhepanīyakammakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Ukkhepanīyakamma for Non-Confession of an Offense

50.Tassā adassaneyeva kammaṃ kātabbanti tassā adassaneyeva ukkhepanīyakammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Tajjanīyādikammaṃ pana āpattiṃ āropetvā tassā adassane appaṭikamme vā bhaṇḍanakārakādiaṅgehi kātabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.

50.Tassā adassaneyeva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ: Ukkhepanīyakamma should be done for the non-seeing (of the offense) itself. Tajjanīya etc. should be done having imputed the offense and because of the factors of being quarrelsome etc., either for non-seeing (of the offense) or for non-expiation. The rest here is self-explanatory.

Kammakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Aggregates of Offenses is finished.

2. Pārivāsikakkhandhakaṃ

2. Pārivāsikakkhandhakaṃ (Section on Probation)

Pārivāsikavattakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Practice of a Probationer

75.Pārivāsikakkhandhakenavakataraṃ pārivāsikanti attano navakataraṃ pārivāsikaṃ. Pārivāsikassa hi attano navakataraṃ pārivāsikaṃ ṭhapetvā aññe mūlāyapaṭikassanārahamānattārahamānattacārikaabbhānārahāpi pakatattaṭṭhāneyeva tiṭṭhanti. Tenāha‘‘antamaso mūlāyapaakassanārahādīnampī’’ti. Pāde ghaṃsenti etenātipādaghaṃsanaṃ,sakkharakathalādi. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tisso pādaghaṃsaniyo sakkharaṃ kathalaṃ samuddapheṇaka’’nti (cūḷava. 269) hi vuttaṃ.Saddhivihārikādīnampi sādiyantassāti saddhivihārikānampi abhivādanādiṃ sādiyantassa. ‘‘Mā maṃ gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchathā’’ti vutte anāpucchāpi gāmaṃ pavisituṃ vaṭṭati.Yo yo vuḍḍhoti pārivāsikesu bhikkhūsu yo yo vuḍḍho.Navakatarassa sāditunti pārivāsikanavakatarassa abhivādanādiṃ sādituṃ.

75.In the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka (Section on Probation), navakataraṃ pārivāsikaṃ means a probationer newer than himself. For, having established a probationer newer than himself, other monks who are worthy of Mūlāya-paṭikassanā (drawing back to the root offense), worthy of Mānattā (penance), worthy of Cārika (wandering), and not worthy of Abbhāna (reinstatement), remain in their original positions. Therefore, he said "even those worthy of Mūlāya-paṭikassanā etc., at the very least." Pāde ghaṃsenti etenāti pādaghaṃsanaṃ, means gravel, potsherd, etc. For it was said, "I allow, monks, three things for rubbing the feet: gravel, potsherd, and sea-foam" (Cūḷava. 269). Saddhivihārikādīnampi sādiyantassā: means while approving of the salutation, etc., of his pupils, etc. Having said "do not ask me before entering the village," it is permissible to enter the village even without asking. Yo yo vuḍḍho means whichever monks are older among the probationers. Navakatarassa sādituṃ means to approve of the salutation, etc., of the newer probationer.

Tatthevāti saṅghanavakaṭṭhāneyeva.Attano pāḷiyā pavāretabbanti attano vassaggena pattapāḷiyā pavāretabbaṃ, na pana sabbesu pavāritesūti attho.Yadi pana na gaṇhāti na vissajjetīti yadi purimadivase attano na gaṇhāti gahetvā ca na vissajjeti.Catussālabhattanti bhojanasālāyaṃ paṭipāṭiyā diyyamānabhattaṃ.Hatthapāse ṭhitenāti dāyakassa hatthapāse ṭhitena.

Tatthevā means in that very place of the Saṅgha. Attano pāḷiyā pavāretabba means he should invite objections with the Pali according to his seniority, but not when everyone has invited objections, this is the meaning. Yadi pana na gaṇhāti na vissajjetī means if on the previous day he does not accept it himself or having accepted it, does not dismiss it. Catussālabhatta means food given in order in the refectory. Hatthapāse ṭhitenā means by one standing near the donor.

76.Añño sāmaṇero na gahetabboti upajjhāyena hutvā añño sāmaṇero na gahetabbo.Upajjhaṃ datvā gahitasāmaṇerāpīti pakatattakāle upajjhaṃ datvā gahitasāmaṇerāpi. Laddhasammutikena āṇattopi garudhammehi aññehi vā ovadituṃ labhatīti āha‘‘paṭibalassa vā bhikkhussa bhāro kātabbo’’ti. Āgatā bhikkhuniyo vattabbāti sambandho.Savacanīyanti sadosaṃ.Jeṭṭhakaṭṭhānaṃ na kātabbanti padhānaṭṭhānaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Kiṃ tanti āha‘‘pātimokkhuddesakena vā’’tiādi.

76.Añño sāmaṇero na функцийtabbo means another novice should not be taken while being an preceptor. Upajjhaṃ datvā gahitasāmaṇerāpī: even novices who were taken having given a preceptor during their normal status. He can advise with the minor offenses or other duties to one who has received consent and has been authorized, therefore he said "or the burden should be placed on a capable monk." Āgatā bhikkhuniyo ตอบกลับāti sambandho (the arriving nuns should be told), is the connection. Savacanīya means with fault. Jeṭṭhakaṭṭhānaṃ na kātabba means the chief position should not be done. What is that? He said "either by the one who recites the Pātimokkha" etc.

rajohatabhūmi,rajokiṇṇabhūmīti attho.Paccayanti vassāvāsikalābhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Ekapasse ṭhatvāti pāḷiṃ vihāya bhikkhūnaṃ pacchato ṭhatvā.Senāsanaṃ na labhatīti seyyāpariyantabhāgitāya vassaggena gaṇhituṃ na labhati.Assāti bhaveyya. ‘‘Āgantukena ārocetabbaṃ, āgantukassa ārocetabba’’nti avisesena vuttattā sace dve pārivāsikā gataṭṭhāne aññamaññaṃ passanti, ubhohipi aññamaññassa ārocetabbaṃ. Yathā bahi disvā ārocitassa bhikkhuno vihāraṃ āgate puna ārocanakiccaṃ natthi, evaṃ aññaṃ vihāraṃ gatenapi tattha pubbe ārocitassa puna ārocanakiccaṃ natthīti vadanti.

rajohatabhūmi, means a dusty ground. Paccaya means said with reference to requisites for dwelling during the rains. Ekapasse ṭhatvā means standing behind the monks, leaving out the Pali. Senāsanaṃ na labhatī means he is not able to take a dwelling place according to his seniority for the purpose of sharing the bed and so on. Assā: means it could be. "It should be announced to the newcomer, it should be announced to the newcomer," since it is said without distinction, if two probationers see each other in a place they have gone, both should announce it to each other. Just as there is no need to announce again to a monk who has come to the monastery after having been informed outside, so too those say that there is no need to announce again to one who has gone to another monastery after having been informed there before.

81.Avisesenāti pārivāsikassa ukkhittakassa ca avisesena.Obaddhanti palibuddhaṃ.

81.Avisesenā means without distinction for both the probationer and the suspended monk. Obaddha means bound.

83.Sahavāsoti vuttappakāre channe pakatattena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ sayanameva adhippetaṃ, na sesairiyāpathakappanaṃ. Sesamettha suviññeyyameva.

83.Sahavāso means that the sleeping together with a monk of normal status in the six ways described above is intended, not the other aspects of deportment. The rest here is very easy to understand.

Pārivāsikakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Pārivāsikakkhandhaka Commentary is finished.

3. Samuccayakkhandhakaṃ

3. Samuccayakkhandhakaṃ (Section on Accumulation)

Sukkavissaṭṭhikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Sukkavissaṭṭhi (Emission of Semen)

97.Samuccayakkhandhakevuttanayena vattaṃ samādātabbanti pārivāsikakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena dvīhi padehi ekena vā samādātabbaṃ.Vediyāmīti cittena sampaṭicchitvā sukhaṃ anubhavāmi, na tappaccayā ahaṃ dukkhitoti adhippāyo.Vuttanayeneva saṅghamajjhe nikkhipitabbanti pārivāsikakkhandhake vuttanayena ‘‘mānattaṃ nikkhipāmi, vattaṃ nikkhipāmī’’ti imehi dvīhi ekena vā nikkhipitabbaṃ.Tassa ārocetvā nikkhipitabbanti anārocanena vattabhedadukkaṭaparimocanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.Dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvāti bhikkhūnaṃ sajjhāyanasaddasavanūpacāravijahanatthaṃ vuttaṃ,mahāmaggato okkammāti maggappaṭipannabhikkhūnaṃ upacāravijahanatthaṃ,gumbena vā vatiyā vā paṭicchannaṭṭhāneti dassanūpacāravijahanatthaṃ. Anikkhittavattena antoupacāragatānaṃ sabbesampi ārocetabbattā‘‘ayaṃ nikkhittavattassa parihāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatthanikkhittavattassāti vattaṃ nikkhipitvā parivasantassāti attho. Ayaṃ panettha therassa adhippāyo – vattaṃ nikkhipitvā parivasantassa upacāragatānaṃ sabbesaṃ ārocanakiccaṃ natthi, diṭṭharūpānaṃ sutasaddānaṃ ārocetabbaṃ, adiṭṭhaasutānampi antodvādasahatthagatānaṃ ārocetabbaṃ. Idaṃ vattaṃ nikkhipitvā parivasantassa lakkhaṇanti.

97.In the Samuccayakkhandhaka (Section on Accumulation), vuttanayena vattaṃ samādātabba means the practice should be undertaken in the manner described in the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka Commentary, with two phrases or one. Vediyāmī means having mentally approved, I experience happiness, the intention is that I do not suffer because of it. Vuttanayeneva saṅghamajjhe nikkhipitabba means it should be relinquished in the middle of the Saṅgha in the manner described in the Pārivāsikakkhandhaka, with these two phrases or one, "I relinquish the penance, I relinquish the practice." Tassa ārocetvā nikkhipitabba means it is said for the sake of avoiding a penalty for violation of the practice of non-announcement. Dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā means it is said for the sake of abandoning the vicinity of the monks’ chanting sound, mahāmaggato okkammā means for the sake of abandoning the vicinity of monks following the path, gumbena vā vatiyā vā paṭicchannaṭṭhāne means for the sake of abandoning the vicinity of sight. Since it must be announced to all those who have entered the vicinity with non-relinquished practice, therefore it is said "this is the avoidance of one who has relinquished the practice." There, nikkhittavattassā means of one who lives having relinquished the practice. Here, this is the elder's intention – for one who lives having relinquished the practice, there is no need to announce to everyone who has entered the vicinity, it must be announced to those whose forms are seen and whose sounds are heard, and it must be announced even to those whose forms are not seen and whose sounds are not heard within twelve hatthas (cubits). This is the characteristic of one who lives having relinquished the practice.

Parivāsakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of Parivāsa

102.‘‘Satiyeva antarāye antarāyikasaññī chādeti, acchannā hoti. Antarāyikassa pana anantarāyikasaññāya chādayato acchannāvā’’tipi pāṭho.Averīti hitakāmo.Uddhaste aruṇeti uṭṭhite aruṇe.Suddhassa santiketi sabhāgasaṅghādisesaṃ anāpannassa santike.Vatthunti asucimocanādivītikkamaṃ.

102. "Only mindfulness conceals when perceiving danger in what is dangerous, and is not concealed. Or, when concealing what is dangerous with the perception of what is not dangerous, it is not concealed" is also a reading.Averī means wishing well.Uddhaste aruṇe means when the sun has risen.Suddhassa santike means near one who has not incurred a shared saṅghādisesa offense.Vatthu means transgression such as emitting semen.

Sukkavissaṭṭhītivatthu ceva gottañcātisukkavissaṭṭhīti idaṃ asucimocanalakkhaṇassa vītikkamassa pakāsanato vatthu ceva hoti, sajātiyasādhāraṇavijātiyavinivattasabhāvāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā eva pakāsanato gottañca hotīti attho. Gaṃ tāyatīti hi gottaṃ.Saṅghādisesotināmañceva āpatti cātisaṅghādisesoti tena tena vītikkamena āpannassa āpattinikāyassa nāmappakāsanato nāmañceva hoti āpattisabhāgattā āpatti ca.

Sukkavissaṭṭhīti vatthu ceva gottañcāti sukkavissaṭṭhī means this is both a vatthu because it reveals a transgression characterized by emitting semen, and a gotta because it reveals the very nature of semen emission, which is common to its own kind and distinct from different kinds. Gotta means that which protects. Saṅghādisesoti nāmañceva āpatti cāti saṅghādiseso means it is both a name, because it reveals the name of the category of offenses incurred by that particular transgression, and an āpatti because it shares in the nature of an offense.

Tadanurūpaṃ kammavācaṃ katvā mānattaṃ dātabbanti –

Tadanurūpaṃ kammavācaṃ katvā mānattaṃ dātabbanti –

‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajji sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ ekāhapaṭicchannaṃ, so saṅghaṃ ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā ekāhapaṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ yāci. Saṅgho itthannāmassa bhikkhuno ekissā āpattiyā sañcetanikāya sukkavissaṭṭhiyā ekāhapaṭicchannāya ekāhaparivāsaṃ adāsi. So parivutthaparivāso. Ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajji sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ appaṭicchannaṃ, so saṅghaṃ tāsaṃ āpattīnaṃ sañcetanikānaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhīnaṃ paṭicchannāya ca appaṭicchannāya ca chārattaṃ mānattaṃ yācati. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dvinnaṃ āpattīnaṃ sañcetanikānaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhīnaṃ paṭicchannāya ca appaṭicchannāya ca chārattaṃ mānattaṃ dadeyya, esā ñatti.

"Let the Saṅgha hear me, venerable sirs. This bhikkhu named so-and-so has committed a sañcetanika sukkavissaṭṭhi offense concealed for one night. He asks the Saṅgha for one night's parivāsa for one sañcetanika sukkavissaṭṭhi offense concealed for one night. The Saṅgha has granted this bhikkhu named so-and-so one night's parivāsa for one sañcetanika sukkavissaṭṭhi offense concealed for one night. He has lived the required parivāsa. This bhikkhu named so-and-so has committed a sañcetanika sukkavissaṭṭhi offense that is unconcealed. He asks the Saṅgha for six nights of mānatta for those sañcetanika sukkavissaṭṭhi offenses, both concealed and unconcealed. If it seems appropriate to the Saṅgha, the Saṅgha should grant this bhikkhu named so-and-so six nights of mānatta for two sañcetanika sukkavissaṭṭhi offenses, both concealed and unconcealed. This is the announcement.

Suṇātu me, bhante…pe… so parivutthaparivāso. Ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajji sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ appaṭicchannaṃ, so saṅghaṃ tāsaṃ…pe… yācati. Saṅgho itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dvinnaṃ āpattīnaṃ sañcetanikānaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhīnaṃ paṭicchannāya ca appaṭicchannāya ca chārattaṃ mānattaṃ deti. Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dvinnaṃ āpattīnaṃ sañcetanikānaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhīnaṃ paṭicchannāya ca appaṭicchannāya ca chārattaṃ mānattassa dānaṃ, so tuṇhassa. Yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Let the Saṅgha hear me…pe… He has lived the required parivāsa. This bhikkhu named so-and-so has committed a sañcetanika sukkavissaṭṭhi offense that is unconcealed. He asks the Saṅgha for those…pe… The Saṅgha grants this bhikkhu named so-and-so six nights of mānatta for two sañcetanika sukkavissaṭṭhi offenses, both concealed and unconcealed. Whichever venerable sir approves of granting six nights of mānatta to this bhikkhu named so-and-so for two sañcetanika sukkavissaṭṭhi offenses, both concealed and unconcealed, let him be silent. Whichever venerable sir does not approve, let him speak.

Dutiyampi etamatthaṃ vadāmi…pe… tatiyampi etamatthaṃ vadāmi…pe…

For the second time, I say this matter…pe… For the third time, I say this matter…pe…

Dinnaṃ saṅghena itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dvinnaṃ āpattīnaṃ sañcetanikānaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhīnaṃ paṭicchannāya ca appaṭicchannāya ca chārattaṃ mānattaṃ, khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī. Evametaṃ dhārayāmīti –

The Saṅgha has granted this bhikkhu named so-and-so six nights of mānatta for two sañcetanika sukkavissaṭṭhi offenses, both concealed and unconcealed. It is approved by the Saṅgha, therefore it is silent. Thus, I hold it." –

Evaṃ kammavācaṃ katvā mānattaṃ dātabbaṃ. Ciṇṇamānattassa ca imināva nayena kammavācaṃ yojetvā abbhānaṃ kātabbaṃ.

In this way, after performing the kammavāca, mānatta should be given. For one who has observed mānatta, abbhāna should be done by applying the kammavāca in the same manner.

Aññasminti suddhantaparivāsavasena āpattivuṭṭhānato aññasmiṃ. Dasasataṃ āpattiyo rattisataṃ chādayitvāti yojetabbaṃ.

Aññasminti in another, because of the emergence from offenses by way of suddhantaparivāsa. "A hundred offenses concealed for a hundred nights" should be connected.

Parivāsakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Parivāsa Story is Finished.

Attano sīmaṃ sodhetvā vihārasīmāyāti vihāre baddhasīmameva sandhāya vuttaṃ.Vihārūpacāratopi dve leḍḍupātā atikkamitabbāti bhikkhuvihāraṃ sandhāya vadati gāmūpacārātikkameneva bhikkhunīvihārūpacārātikkamassa siddhattā.Vihārassa cāti bhikkhuvihārassa.Gāmassāti na vuttanti gāmassa upacāraṃ muñcituṃ vaṭṭatīti na vuttaṃ, tasmā gāmūpacārepi vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.

Attano sīmaṃ sodhetvā vihārasīmāyāti said referring only to the boundary established in the monastery.Vihārūpacāratopi dve leḍḍupātā atikkamitabbāti says in reference to a bhikkhu monastery, because the transgression of a bhikkhunī monastery's boundary is established simply by transgressing the village boundary. Vihārassa cāti of the bhikkhu monastery. Gāmassāti na vuttanti it was not said that it is permissible to leave the village boundary, therefore the intention is that it is permissible even within the village boundary.

Tattheva ṭhānaṃ paccāsīsantīti bhikkhūnaṃ ṭhānaṃ paccāsīsanti.Parivāsavattādīnanti parivāsanissayapaṭippassaddhiādīnaṃ.Yuttataraṃ dissatīti iminā anikkhittavattabhikkhunā viya bhikkhuniyāpi antoupacārasīmagatānaṃyeva ārocetabbaṃ, na gāme ṭhitānampi gantvā ārocetabbanti dīpeti.Tasmiṃ gāmeti yasmiṃ gāme bhikkhunupassayo hoti, tasmiṃ gāme.Bahi upacārasīmāya ṭhatvāti upacārasīmato bahi ṭhatvā.Sammannitvā dātabbāti ettha sammannitvā dinnāya sahavāsepi ratticchedo na hoti.

Tattheva ṭhānaṃ paccāsīsantīti they await the place of the bhikkhus. Parivāsavattādīnanti of the conditions for parivāsa, nissayapaṭippassaddhi, etc. Yuttataraṃ dissatīti by this, it shows that just as with a bhikkhu who has not given up his duties, a bhikkhunī should also announce only to those within the monastery's boundary, and should not go and announce even to those staying in the village. Tasmiṃ gāmeti in that village in which there is a bhikkhunī residence, in that village. Bahi upacārasīmāya ṭhatvāti having stood outside the boundary. Sammannitvā dātabbāti here, even in cohabitation with one who has been given (ordination) by agreement, there is no break in the night.

Paṭicchannaparivāsakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Story of Concealed Parivāsa

108.Visuṃ mānattaṃ caritabbanti mūlāyapaṭikassanaṃ akatvā visuṃ kammavācāya mānattaṃ gahetvā caritabbaṃ.

108.Visuṃ mānattaṃ caritabbanti having taken mānatta by a separate kammavāca without performing mūlāyapaṭikassana, it should be observed separately.

Sukkavissaṭṭhikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sukkavissaṭṭhi Story is Finished.

Agghasamodhānaparivāsakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Agghasamodhāna Parivāsa Story

134.Ekāpattimūlakanti ‘‘ekā āpatti ekāhappaṭicchannā, ekā āpatti dvīhappaṭicchannā’’tiādinā vuttanayaṃ sandhāya vadati.Āpattivaḍḍhanakanti ‘‘ekā āpatti ekāhappaṭicchannā, dve āpattiyo dvīhappaṭicchannā’’tiādinā vuttaṃ āpattivaḍḍhanakanayaṃ sandhāya.

134.Ekāpattimūlakanti says in reference to the method stated by way of "one offense concealed for one night, one offense concealed for two nights," etc. Āpattivaḍḍhanakanti in reference to the method of increasing offenses stated by way of "one offense concealed for one night, two offenses concealed for two nights," etc.

Dvebhikkhuvāraekādasakādikathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Dvebhikkhuvāraekādasakādika Story

181.Thullaccayādīhi missakanti ekavatthumhi pubbabhāge āpannathullaccayadukkaṭehi missakaṃ.Makkhadhammonāma chādetukāmatā.

181.Thullaccayādīhi missakanti mixed with thullaccaya and dukkaṭa offenses incurred in the earlier part of a single matter. Makkhadhammo is the desire to conceal.

182.Sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjati parimāṇampītiādi jātivasenekavacanaṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso vā. Sesamettha pāḷito aṭṭhakathāto ca suviññeyyameva.

182.Sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjati parimāṇampītiādi is a singular expression by way of class, or it is a neuter designation in the sense of potentiality. The rest here is indeed easily understood from the Pāḷi and the Aṭṭhakathā.

Samuccayakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Samuccayakkhandhaka is Finished.

4. Samathakkhandhakaṃ

4. The Samathakkhandhaka

Sammukhāvinayakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Sammukhāvinaya Story

187.Samathakkhandhakesaññāpetīti etthasaṃ-saddūpapadoñā-saddo tosanavisiṭṭhe avabodhane vattatīti āha‘‘paritosetvā jānāpetī’’ti.

187.In the Samathakkhandhaka, saññāpetīti here, the word saṃ is a prefix and the word ñā means distinctive understanding, therefore he says ‘‘paritosetvā jānāpetī’’ti, "having pleased, he makes known."

Sativinayādikathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Sativinayādika Story

195-200.Desanāmattamevetanti ‘‘pañcimānī’’ti etaṃ desanāmattaṃ. Sativepullappattassa khīṇāsavassa dātabbo vinayosativinayo. Amūḷhassa dātabbo vinayoamūḷhavinayo. Paṭiññātena karaṇaṃpaṭiññātakaraṇaṃ.

195-200.Desanāmattamevetanti ‘‘pañcimānī’’ti this is merely a designation. The vinaya that should be given to an Āsava-free one who has attained the fullness of mindfulness is sativinayo. The vinaya that should be given to one who is not deluded is amūḷhavinayo. Doing according to the acknowledgment is paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ.

212.Tiṇavatthārakasadisattāti taṃsadisatāya tabbohāroti dasseti yathā ‘‘esa brahmadatto’’ti.

212.Tiṇavatthārakasadisattāti he shows that the usage is because of its similarity, just as in "this is Brahmadatta."

Adhikaraṇakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Adhikaraṇa Story

216.Vivādādhikaraṇassa kiṃ mūlantiādīsuvivādamūlānīti vivādassa mūlāni.Kodhanoti kujjhanalakkhaṇena kodhena samannāgato.Upanāhīti veraappaṭinissaggalakkhaṇena upanāhena samannāgato.Agāravoti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.323; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.44) gāravavirahito.Appatissoti appatissayo anīcavutti. Ettha pana yo bhikkhu satthari dharamāne tīsu kālesu upaṭṭhānaṃ na yāti, satthari anupāhane caṅkamante saupāhano caṅkamati, nīce caṅkame caṅkamante ucce caṅkamati, heṭṭhā vasante upari vasati, satthu dassanaṭṭhāne ubho aṃse pārupati, chattaṃ dhāreti, upāhanaṃ dhāreti, nahāyati, uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā karoti, parinibbute vā pana cetiyaṃ vandituṃ na gacchati, cetiyassa paññāyanaṭṭhāne satthudassanaṭṭhāne vuttaṃ sabbaṃ karoti, aññehi ca bhikkhūhi ‘‘kasmā evaṃ karosi, na idaṃ vaṭṭati, sammāsambuddhassa nāma lajjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vutte ‘‘tuṇhī hohi, buddho buddhoti vadasi, kiṃ buddho nāmā’’ti bhaṇati, ayaṃsatthari agāravonāma.

216.In Vivādādhikaraṇassa kiṃ mūlantiādi, vivādamūlānīti are the roots of dispute. Kodhanoti endowed with anger characterized by being prone to anger. Upanāhīti endowed with resentment characterized by not relinquishing animosity. Agāravoti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.323; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.44) devoid of respect. Appatissoti appatissayo means of undignified conduct. But here, the bhikkhu who, when the Teacher is dwelling (among them), does not attend upon him in the three periods (of the day), and when the Teacher is walking without slippers, he walks with slippers, he walks on a higher level when the Teacher is walking on a lower level, he dwells above when the Teacher is dwelling below, he covers both shoulders in the place for seeing the Teacher, he holds an umbrella, he wears slippers, he bathes, or eliminates waste or urine; or, when the Teacher has passed away, he does not go to venerate the cetiya, and in the place for prostrating to the cetiya, he does everything said in the place for seeing the Teacher, and when other bhikkhus say, "Why do you do this? This is not proper. It is indeed proper to feel shame for the Sammāsambuddha," he says, "Be quiet, you say 'Buddha, Buddha,' what is Buddha?" This is called satthari agāravo, disrespectful to the Teacher.

dhamme agāravonāma. Yo pana therena bhikkhunā anajjhiṭṭho dhammaṃ deseti uddisati pañhaṃ katheti, vuḍḍhe bhikkhū ghaṭṭento gacchati tiṭṭhati nisīdati, dussapallatthikaṃ vā hatthapallatthikaṃ vā karoti, saṅghamajjhe ubho aṃse pārupati, chattupāhanaṃ dhāreti, ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassa lajjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttepi ‘‘tuṇhī hohi, saṅgho saṅghoti vadasi, kiṃ saṅgho, migasaṅgho ajasaṅgho’’tiādīni vadati, ayaṃsaṅghe agāravonāma. Ekabhikkhusmimpi hi agārave kate saṅghe katoyeva hoti. Tisso sikkhā pana apūrayamānosikkhāya na paripūrakārīnāma.

dhamme agāravo is disrespectful to the Dhamma. But that bhikkhu who, without being requested by a Thera bhikkhu, teaches the Dhamma, recites, asks questions, jostles against elder bhikkhus as he walks, stands, sits, makes a dussapallatthika or a hatthapallatthika, covers both shoulders in the midst of the Saṅgha, holds an umbrella and slippers, and even when it is said, "It is indeed proper for the Saṅgha of bhikkhus to feel shame," he says, "Be quiet, you say 'Saṅgha, Saṅgha,' what is the Saṅgha? A herd of deer? A herd of goats?" etc., this is called saṅghe agāravo, disrespectful to the Saṅgha. Indeed, even if disrespect is shown to a single bhikkhu, it is as if it is shown to the Saṅgha. But one who does not fulfill the three trainings is called sikkhāya na paripūrakārī, not a fulfiller of the training.

Ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānanti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.325; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.42; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.6.36) ekasmiṃ vihāre dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ uppannavivādo kathaṃ devamanussānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattati? Kosambakakkhandhake viya hi dvīsu bhikkhūsu vivādaṃ āpannesu tasmiṃ vihāre tesaṃ antevāsikā vivadanti, tesaṃ ovādaṃ gaṇhanto bhikkhunisaṅgho vivadati, tato tesaṃ upaṭṭhākā vivadanti, atha manussānaṃ ārakkhadevatā dve koṭṭhāsā honti. Tattha dhammavādīnaṃ ārakkhadevatā dhammavādiniyo honti, adhammavādīnaṃ adhammavādiniyo. Tato ārakkhadevatānaṃ mittā bhummadevatā bhijjanti. Evaṃ paramparāya yāva brahmalokā ṭhapetvā ariyasāvake sabbe devamanussā dve koṭṭhāsā honti. Dhammavādīhi pana adhammavādinova bahutarā honti. Tato ‘‘yaṃ bahukehi gahitaṃ, taṃ taccha’’nti dhammaṃ vissajjetvā bahutarā adhammaṃ gaṇhanti. Te adhammaṃ purakkhatvā viharantā apāyesu nibbattanti. Evaṃ ekasmiṃ vihāre dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ uppanno vivādo bahūnaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti.Ajjhattaṃ vāti attani vā attano parisāya vā.Bahiddhā vāti parasmiṃ vā parassa parisāya vā.Āyatiṃ anavassavāyāti āyatiṃ anuppādāya.

Ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānanti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.325; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.42; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.6.36) how does a dispute that has arisen between two bhikkhus in one monastery lead to harm and suffering for gods and humans? For, just as in the Kosambaka Khandhaka, when a dispute arises between two bhikkhus, their resident pupils dispute in that monastery, the community of bhikkhunīs disputes, taking their advice, then their supporters dispute, then the guardian deities of the humans become two factions. There, the guardian deities of the Dhamma-speakers are female Dhamma-speakers, and the guardian deities of the non-Dhamma-speakers are female non-Dhamma-speakers. Then the earth deities who are friends of the guardian deities are divided. In this way, in succession, all the gods and humans, except for noble disciples, become two factions up to the Brahma-world. But the non-Dhamma-speakers are more numerous than the Dhamma-speakers. Then, abandoning the Dhamma with the thought, "What is taken by the majority is true," the majority take up non-Dhamma. Living with non-Dhamma as their priority, they are reborn in the lower realms. In this way, a dispute that has arisen between two bhikkhus in one monastery is for the harm and suffering of many. Ajjhattaṃ vāti either in oneself or in one's community. Bahiddhā vāti either in another or in another's community. Āyatiṃ anavassavāyāti for the non-arising in the future.

Makkhīti paresaṃ guṇamakkhanalakkhaṇena makkhena samannāgato.Paḷāsīti yugaggāhalakkhaṇena paḷāsena samannāgato.Issukīti parasakkārādīnaṃ issāyanalakkhaṇāya issāya samannāgato.Maccharīti āvāsamacchariyādīhi samannāgato.Saṭhoti kerāṭiko.Māyāvīti katapāpapaṭicchādako.Pāpicchoti asantasambhāvanicchako dussīlo.Micchādiṭṭhīti natthikavādī ahetukavādī akiriyavādī.Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsīti sayaṃ diṭṭhameva parāmasati gaṇhāti.Ādhānaggāhīti daḷhaggāhī.Duppaṭinissaggīti na sakkā hoti gahitaṃ nissajjāpetuṃ. Ettha cakodhano hoti upanāhītiādinā puggalādhiṭṭhānanayena kodhūpanāhādayo akusaladhammā vivādamūlānīti dassitāni, tathāduṭṭhacittā vivadantītiādinā lobhadosamohā.Aduṭṭhacittā vivadantītiādinā ca alobhādayo vivādamūlānīti dassitāni.

Makkhīti endowed with makkha characterized by disparaging the good qualities of others. Paḷāsīti endowed with paḷāsa characterized by seizing the wrong end. Issukīti endowed with issā characterized by being envious of the gains, etc., of others. Maccharīti endowed with macchariya such as avarice regarding dwellings, etc. Saṭhoti a cheat. Māyāvīti a concealer of committed evil. Pāpicchoti a wrong-doer desiring the impossible. Micchādiṭṭhīti one who holds a nihilistic view, a causeless view, an inactive view. Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsīti one who grasps and clings only to what he himself has seen. Ādhānaggāhīti one who holds on firmly. Duppaṭinissaggīti it is not possible to make him relinquish what has been grasped. And here, by way of the person-oriented method, with kodhano hoti upanāhītiādi, the unwholesome states of anger, resentment, etc., are shown to be the roots of dispute, and likewise, with duṭṭhacittā vivadantītiādi, greed, hatred, and delusion, and with aduṭṭhacittā vivadantītiādi, non-greed, etc., are shown to be the roots of dispute.

217.Dubbaṇṇoti paṃsupisācako viya jhāmakhāṇuvaṇṇo.Duddassikoti vijātamātuyāpi amanāpadassano.Okoṭimakoti lakuṇḍako.Kāṇoti ekakkhikāṇo vā ubhayakkhikāṇo vā.Kuṇīti ekahatthakuṇī vā ubhayahatthakuṇī vā.Khañjoti ekapādakhañjo vā ubhayapādakhañjo vā.Pakkhahatoti hatapakkho pīṭhasappī.

217.Dubbaṇṇoti of the color of a faded stump, like a dust-demon. Duddassikoti of unpleasant appearance even to his own mother. Okoṭimakoti a hunchback. Kāṇoti blind in one eye or blind in both eyes. Kuṇīti crippled in one arm or crippled in both arms. Khañjoti lame in one leg or lame in both legs. Pakkhahatoti paralyzed, a limping cockroach.

220.Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ kusalaṃ akusalaṃ abyākatanti vivādādhikaraṇaṃ kiṃ kusalaṃ akusalaṃ udāhu abyākatanti pucchati.Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ siyā kusalantiādi vissajjanaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Vivadanti etenātivivādoti āha‘‘yena vivadanti, so cittuppādo vivādo’’ti. Kathaṃ pana so cittuppādo adhikaraṇaṃ nāmāti āha‘‘samathehi ca adhikaraṇīyatāya adhikaraṇa’’nti, samathehi sametabbatāya adhikaraṇanti attho. Vivādahetubhūtassa hi cittuppādassa vūpasamena tappabhavassa saddassapi vūpasamo hotīti cittuppādassa samathehi adhikaraṇīyatā pariyāyo sambhavati.

220.Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ kusalaṃ akusalaṃ abyākatanti he asks, is a dispute adhikaraṇa wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate? Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ siyā kusalantiādi is the answer. The same method applies to the rest as well. Vivadanti etenāti vivādoti he says ‘‘yena vivadanti so cittuppādo vivādo’’ti, "the thought that they dispute with is the dispute." But how is that thought called an adhikaraṇa? He says ‘‘samathehi ca adhikaraṇīyatāya adhikaraṇa’’nti, adhikaraṇa because it is appropriate with the appeasements. For with the cessation of the thought that is the cause of the dispute, there is a cessation of the sound arising from it, so the appropriateness of the thought with the appeasements is a possible explanation.

222.Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalaṃ siyā abyākatanti ayaṃ vikappo paññattivajjaṃyeva sandhāya vutto, na lokavajjanti dassetuṃ‘‘sandhāyabhāsitavasenā’’tiādimāha. Kasmā panettha sandhāyabhāsitavasena attho veditabboti āha‘‘yasmiṃ hī’’tiādi.Pathavīkhaṇanādiketi etthaādi-saddena bhūtagāmapātabyatādipaññattivajjaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Yo vinaye apakataññutāya vattasīsena sammuñjaniādinā pathavīkhaṇanādīni karoti, tadā tassuppannacittaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ‘‘kusalacittaṃ aṅgaṃ hotī’’ti.Aṅgaṃ hotīti ca vattasīsena karontassapi ‘‘imaṃ pathaviṃ khaṇāmī’’tiādinā vītikkamajānanavasena pavattattā taṃ kusalacittaṃ āpattādhikaraṇaṃ, kusalacittaṃ āpattiyā kāraṇaṃ hotīti attho. Na hi vītikkamaṃ ajānantassa pathavīkhaṇanādīsu āpatti sambhavati.Tasmiṃ satīti tasmiṃ kusalacitte āpattibhāvena gahite satīti adhippāyo.Tasmāti yasmā kusalacitte āpattibhāvena gahite sati ‘‘natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti na sakkā vattuṃ, tasmā.Nayidaṃ aṅgappahonakacittaṃ sandhāya vuttanti ‘‘āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalaṃ siyā abyākataṃ, natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti idaṃ āpattisamuṭṭhāpakabhāvena aṅgappahonakaṃ āpattiyā kāraṇabhūtaṃ cittaṃ sandhāya na vuttaṃ. Kiṃ pana sandhāya vuttanti āha‘‘idaṃ panā’’tiādi. Bhikkhumhi kammaṭṭhānagatacittena nipanne niddāyante vā mātugāmo ce seyyaṃ kappeti, tasmiṃ khaṇe seyyākārena vattamānarūpameva āpatti, na kusalādivasappavattaṃ cittanti āha‘‘asañcicca…pe… sahaseyyādivasena āpajjato(pari. 323 atthato samānaṃ)abyākataṃ hotī’’ti. Tasmiñhi khaṇe uṭṭhātabbe jāte anuṭṭhānato tadākārapavatto rūpakkhandhova āpatti.

222. To show that the distinction "Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalaṃ siyā abyākataṃ" (An offense-related matter might be unwholesome, might be indeterminate) is stated referring only to offenses by way of regulation (paññattivajja), not offenses against the world (lokavajja), he said "sandhāyabhāsitavasenātiādi" (in terms of being stated with reference to...). Why should the meaning here be understood in terms of being stated with reference to? He said "yasmiṃ hītiādi" (because in which...). In "pathavīkhaṇanādiketi" (such as digging the earth), the term "ādi" (etc.) includes the training rule (sikkhāpadaṃ) of injuring vegetable life, etc., offenses by way of regulation. When someone, out of ingratitude, digs the earth, etc., with a broom, etc., on service duty, regarding the mind that arises in him at that time, it is said, "kusalacittaṃ aṅgaṃ hotī" (a wholesome thought is a factor). And "aṅgaṃ hotī" (is a factor) means, even while doing it on service duty, since he engages in it knowing the transgression by saying "I am digging this earth," etc., that wholesome thought is an offense-related matter; a wholesome thought is the cause of the offense. For indeed, an offense in digging the earth, etc., is not possible for one who does not know the transgression. "Tasmiṃ satīti" (when that exists) means when that wholesome thought is taken as having the nature of an offense. "Tasmāti" (therefore), since, when a wholesome thought is taken as having the nature of an offense, it is not possible to say, "there is no offense-related matter that is wholesome," therefore. "Nayidaṃ aṅgappahonakacittaṃ sandhāya vuttanti" ("Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalaṃ siyā abyākataṃ, natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala" - this is not said referring to the thought that is a factor in bringing about an offense, the cause of the offense. But referring to what was it said? He said "idaṃ panātiādi" (but this...). If, when a bhikkhu lies down or dozes off with a mind occupied with a meditation subject, a woman arranges the bedding, at that moment, the form itself that is occurring as the bedding is the offense, not the thought occurring through wholesomeness, etc., he said, "asañcicca…pe… sahaseyyādivasena āpajjato (pari. 323 atthato samānaṃ)abyākataṃ hotī" (when one commits [an offense] unintentionally...or due to sleeping together, etc., it is indeterminate). For at that moment, the form aggregate (rūpakkhandha) occurring in that manner, due to not getting up when it should be gotten up, is the offense.

‘‘kusalacitto vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayañhettha attho – pathavīkhaṇanādīsu kusalacittakkhaṇe vītikkamādivasena pavattarūpasambhavato kusalacitto vā tathāpavattarūpasaṅkhātaṃ abyākatāpattiṃ āpajjati, tathā abyākatacitto vā abyākatarūpasaṅkhātaṃ abyākatāpattiṃ āpajjati. Pāṇātipātādiṃ akusalacitto vā akusalāpattiṃ āpajjati, rūpaṃ panettha abbohārikaṃ. Supinante ca pāṇātipātādiṃ karonto sahaseyyādivasena āpajjitabbāpattiṃ āpajjanto akusalacitto abyākatāpattiṃ āpajjatīti.

‘‘kusalacitto vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ (or with a wholesome thought...). Here, the meaning is this: since form occurring as transgression, etc., is possible at the moment of a wholesome thought in digging the earth, etc., either with a wholesome thought one incurs an indeterminate offense consisting of form that occurs in that way, or with an indeterminate thought one incurs an indeterminate offense consisting of indeterminate form. With an unwholesome thought, one incurs an unwholesome offense like killing a living being; here, form is non-conventional. And while dreaming, when one commits an offense like killing a living being, when incurring an offense to be incurred because of sleeping together, etc., with an unwholesome thought one incurs an indeterminate offense.

Kusalacittaṃāpajjeyyāti eḷakalomaṃ gahetvā kammaṭṭhānamanasikārena tiyojanaṃ atikkamantassa paññattiṃ ajānitvā padaso dhammaṃ vācentassa ca āpajjitabbāpattiyā kusalacittaṃ āpajjeyya.Na ca tattha vijjamānampi kusalacittaṃ āpattiyā aṅganti tasmiṃ vijjamānampi kusalacittaṃ āpattiyā aṅgaṃ na hoti, sayaṃ āpatti na hotīti attho.Calitappavattānanti calitānaṃ pavattānañca. Calito kāyo, pavattā vācā.Aññatarameva aṅganti kāyavācānaṃ aññatarameva āpattīti attho.Tañca rūpakkhandhapariyāpannattā abyākatanti iminā abyākatamāpattādhikaraṇaṃ, nāññanti dasseti.

Kusalacittaṃāpajjeyyāti (one might incur [an offense] with a wholesome thought) one might incur an offense to be incurred by one who, taking eḷaka wool, goes beyond three yojanas without attending to the meditation subject, or by one who recites the Dhamma word by word without knowing the regulation (paññatti). Na ca tattha vijjamānampi kusalacittaṃ āpattiyā aṅganti (nor is the wholesome thought present there a factor in the offense) and the wholesome thought present there is not a factor in the offense; it is not itself the offense, this is the meaning. Calitappavattānanti (of movement and speech): of movement and speech. The body moves, speech occurs. Aññatarameva aṅganti (either one is a factor): either movement or speech is the offense, this is the meaning. Tañca rūpakkhandhapariyāpannattā abyākatanti (and that is indeterminate because it is included in the form aggregate): with this he shows that the offense-related matter is indeterminate, not otherwise.

porāṇagaṇṭhipadesupi ‘‘puthujjano kalyāṇaputhujjano sekkho arahāti cattāro puggale dassetvā tesu arahato āpattādhikaraṇaṃ abyākatameva, tathā sekkhānaṃ, tathā kalyāṇaputhujjanassa asañcicca vītikkamakāle abyākatameva. Itarassa akusalampi hoti abyākatampi. Yasmā cassa sañcicca vītikkamakāle akusalameva hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’nti. Sabbattha evaṃ abyākatanti vipākābhāvamattaṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti likhitaṃ. Yañca āpattādhikaraṇaṃ akusalaṃ, tampi desitaṃ vuṭṭhitaṃ vā anantarāyakaraṃ. Yathā hi ariyūpavādakammaṃ akusalampi samānaṃ accayaṃ desetvā khamāpanena payogasampattipaṭibāhitattā avipākadhammataṃ āpannaṃ ahosikammaṃ hoti, evamidampi desitaṃ vuṭṭhitaṃ vā payogasampattipaṭibāhitattā avipākadhammatāya ahosikammabhāvena anantarāyakaraṃ jātaṃ. Teneva ‘‘sāpattikassa, bhikkhave, nirayaṃ vā vadāmi tiracchānayoniṃ vā’’ti sāpattikasseva apāyagāmitā vuttā.

porāṇagaṇṭhipadesupi (in the ancient commentary texts) also, "having shown four types of individuals—an ordinary person, a virtuous ordinary person, a trainee, and an arahant—for them, the offense-related matter of the arahant is only indeterminate, and likewise for trainees, likewise for a virtuous ordinary person it is only indeterminate at the time of unintentional transgression. For the other, it is both unwholesome and indeterminate. And since for him, at the time of intentional transgression, it is only unwholesome, therefore it is said, ‘there is no offense-related matter that is wholesome.’ Everywhere it is thus said referring only to the absence of result," is written. And that offense-related matter that is unwholesome is also not an immediate obstacle when confessed or when one has emerged [from it]. Just as an act of reviling the Noble Ones, though being unwholesome, becomes an act without result, having become an act that has lost its potential to produce a result by confessing the offense and seeking forgiveness and due to the attainment of the appropriate action, likewise, this too, due to the attainment of the appropriate action when confessed or when one has emerged [from it], having become an act without result, becomes not an immediate obstacle. Therefore, "Bhikkhus, I declare hell or the animal realm for one who is with offense (sāpattika)," the destination of woe is stated only for one who is with offense (sāpattika).

Adhikaraṇavūpasamanasamathakathāvaṇṇanā

228.Vivādasaṅkhāte atthe paccatthikāatthapaccatthikā.

228. Atthapaccatthikā (those who are against the matter) are adversaries (paccatthikā) regarding a matter considered a dispute (vivādasaṅkhāte atthe).

229.Sammukhāvinayasminti sammukhāvinayabhāve.

229. Sammukhāvinayasminti (in the state of presence-discipline) in the state of presence-discipline (sammukhāvinayabhāve).

230.Antarenāti kāraṇena.

230. Antarenāti (without) by reason of (kāraṇena).

231.Ubbāhikāya khīyanake pācitti na vuttā tattha chandadānassa natthitāya.

231. A pācittiya is not stated for one who is displeased with the messenger (ubbāhikāya khīyanake) because of the absence of giving consent there.

236.Tassa kho tanti etthakho tanti nipātamattaṃ.

236. Tassa kho tanti (to him, indeed) here, kho tanti (indeed) is merely an expletive.

238.‘‘Kā ca tattha tassapāpiyasikāyā’’ti potthakesu likhanti. ‘‘Kā ca tassapāpiyasikā’’ti evaṃ panettha pāṭho veditabbo.

238. ‘‘Kā ca tattha tassapāpiyasikāyā’’ti (and what there is his wicked desire?) they write in books. "Kā ca tassapāpiyasikā" (and what is his wicked desire?) thus should the reading here be understood.

242.Kiccādhikaraṇaṃ ekena samathena sammatīti ettha ‘‘kiccameva kiccādhikaraṇa’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.385-86) vacanato apalokanakammādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ vivādādhikaraṇādīni viya samathehi sametabbaṃ na hoti, kintu sammukhāvinayena sampajjati, tasmāsammatīti ettha sampajjatīti attho gahetabbo. Sesamettha suviññeyyameva.

242. Kiccādhikaraṇaṃ ekena samathena sammatīti (a business-related matter is settled by one settlement) here, because of the statement "a business itself is a business-related matter" (kiccameva kiccādhikaraṇa), this is a designation for acts of formal announcement (apalokanakamma), etc. That need not be settled by settlements like disputes, etc. (vivādādhikaraṇa), but is accomplished by presence-discipline (sammukhāvinaya), therefore, in sammatīti (is settled) the meaning should be taken as "is accomplished" (sampajjati). The rest here is indeed easily understood.

Samathakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Chapter on Settlements is Finished.

5. Khuddakavatthukkhandhakaṃ

5. The Minor Matters Chapter

Khuddakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Narrative on Minor Matters

243.Khuddakavatthukkhandhakeaṭṭhapadākārenāti aṭṭhapadaphalakākārena, jūtaphalakasadisanti vuttaṃ hoti.Mallakamūlasaṇṭhānenāti kheḷamallakamūlasaṇṭhānena.

243. In the Minor Matters Chapter (Khuddakavatthukkhandhake), aṭṭhapadākārenāti (in the shape of an eight-square board) in the shape of an eight-square board, it is said to be like a gaming board. Mallakamūlasaṇṭhānenāti (in the shape of the base of a spitoon) in the shape of the base of a spitoon.

245.Muttolambakādīnantiādi-saddena kuṇḍalādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Palambakasuttanti yaññopacitākārena olambakasuttaṃ.

245. Muttolambakādīnanti (of pearl pendants, etc.) the term ādi (etc.) includes earrings, etc. Palambakasuttanti (pendant thread) a pendant thread in the form of a sacrificial thread.

246.Cikkalenāti silesena.

246. Cikkalenāti (with gum) with glue (silesena).

248.Sādhugītanti aniccatādipaṭisaṃyuttagītaṃ.

248. Sādhugītanti (skillfully sung) a song connected with impermanence, etc.

249.Caturassena vattenāti paripuṇṇena uccāraṇavattena. Taraṅgavattādīnaṃ uccāraṇavidhānāni naṭṭhappayogāni.Bāhiralominti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, yathā tassa uṇṇapāvārassa bahiddhā lomāni dissanti, tathā dhārentassa dukkaṭanti vuttaṃ hoti.

249. Caturassena vattenāti (with a clear pronunciation) with a complete pronunciation. The methods of pronouncing wave-like pronunciations, etc., are no longer in use. Bāhiralominti (outer hairs) is a designation in the neuter gender, just as the hairs outside that woolen cloak are visible, so a dukkaṭa is incurred by one who wears it, this is said.

251.Imāni cattāri ahirājakulānīti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.67) idaṃ daṭṭhavise sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ye hi keci daṭṭhavisā, sabbe te imesaṃ catunnaṃ ahirājakulānaṃ abbhantaragatāva honti.Attaguttiyāti attano guttatthāya.Attarakkhāyāti attano rakkhaṇatthāya.Attaparittaṃkātunti attano parittāṇatthāya attaparittaṃ nāma kātuṃ anujānāmīti attho.

251. Imāni cattāri ahirājakulānīti (these four are royal snake clans) (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.67) this is said referring to specific types of bites. For whatever kinds of venomous bites there are, all of them are included within these four royal snake clans. Attaguttiyāti (for self-protection) for the sake of protecting oneself. Attarakkhāyāti (for self-preservation) for the sake of preserving oneself. Attaparittaṃkātunti (to make self-protection) I allow making something called self-protection for the sake of self-preservation, this is the meaning.

‘‘evañca pana bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha (jā. aṭṭha. 2.2.105)virūpakkhehīti virūpakkhanāgakulehi. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Sahayoge cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ, etehi saha mayhaṃ mittabhāvoti vuttaṃ hotiapādakehīti apādakasattehi. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Sabbe sattāti ito pubbe ettakena ṭhānena odissakamettaṃ kathetvā idāni anodissakamettaṃ kathetuṃ idamāraddhaṃ. Tatthasattā pāṇā bhūtāti sabbānetāni puggalavevacanāneva.Bhadrāni passantūti bhadrāni ārammaṇāni passantu.Mā kañci pāpamāgamāti kañci sattaṃ pāpakaṃ lāmakaṃ mā āgacchatu.

‘‘evañca pana bhikkhave’’tiādimāha (and in this way, bhikkhus...). There (jā. aṭṭha. 2.2.105), virūpakkhehīti (from the Virūpakkha snakes) from the Virūpakkha snake clan. The same method [applies] in the remaining cases as well. This is an instrumental word in the sense of association; it is said to mean "may I have friendship with these." apādakehīti (from footless beings) from footless beings. The same method [applies] in the remaining cases as well. Sabbe sattāti (all beings): having related specific loving-kindness (odissakamettaṃ) by this much, now, in order to relate non-specific loving-kindness (anodissakamettaṃ), this is begun. There, sattā pāṇā bhūtāti (beings, those with life, those that exist) all these are merely synonyms for "person". Bhadrāni passantūti (may they see auspicious things) may they see auspicious objects. Mā kañci pāpamāgamāti (may no evil befall anyone) may no evil, base thing come to any being.

Appamāṇo buddhoti etthabuddhoti buddhaguṇā veditabbā, te hi appamāṇā nāma. Sesadvayesupi eseva nayo,pamāṇavantānīti guṇappamāṇena yuttāni.Uṇṇanābhīti lomasanābhiko makkaṭako.Sarabūti gharagoḷikā.Katā me rakkhā kataṃ me parittanti mayā ettakassa janassa rakkhā ca parittāṇañca kataṃ.Paṭikkamantu bhūtānīti sabbepi me kataparittāṇā sattā apagacchantu, mā maṃ viheṭhayiṃsūti attho.Sohanti yassa mama etehi sabbehipi mettaṃ, so ahaṃ bhagavato namo karomi, vipassīādīnañca sattannaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ namo karomīti sambandho.

Appamāṇo buddhoti (immeasurable is the Buddha) here, buddhoti (Buddha) the qualities of the Buddha should be understood, for they are called immeasurable. The same method [applies] in the remaining two cases also, pamāṇavantānīti (possessing measure) endowed with measure of qualities. Uṇṇanābhīti (wool-navelled) a spider with a woolly navel. Sarabūti (house lizard) a house lizard. Katā me rakkhā kataṃ me parittanti (protection is made by me, preservation is made by me) protection and preservation have been made by me for this much of a group. Paṭikkamantu bhūtānīti (may beings depart) may all the beings protected by me go away, may they not harm me, this is the meaning. Sohanti (may I be well) I, for whom there is loving-kindness with all of these, pay homage to that Blessed One, and I pay homage to the seven Fully Enlightened Buddhas beginning with Vipassī, this is the connection.

Aññamhi chetabbamhīti rāgānusayaṃ sandhāya vadati.Tādisaṃ vā dukkhanti muṭṭhiādīhi dukkhaṃ uppādentassa.

Aññamhi chetabbamhīti (in another that should be cut off) he speaks referring to the underlying tendency of lust. Tādisaṃ vā dukkhanti (or such suffering) to one who produces suffering with fists, etc.

252.Jālāni parikkhipāpetvāti parissayamocanatthañceva pamādena gaḷitānaṃ ābharaṇādīnaṃ rakkhaṇatthañca jālāni karaṇḍakākārena parikkhipāpetvā.Candanagaṇṭhi āgantvā jāle laggāti eko kira rattacandanarukkho gaṅgāya uparitīre jāto gaṅgodakena dhotamūlo patitvā tattha tattha pāsāṇesu sambhijjamāno vippakiri. Tato ekā ghaṭappamāṇā ghaṭikā pāsāṇesu ghaṃsiyamānā udakaūmīhi pothiyamānā maṭṭhā hutvā anupubbena vuyhamānā sevālapariyonaddhā āgantvā tasmiṃ jāle laggi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Lekhanti likhitagahitaṃ cuṇṇaṃ.Uḍḍitvāti veḷuparamparāya uddhaṃ pāpetvā, uṭṭhāpetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Oharatūti iddhiyā otāretvā gaṇhatu.

252. Jālāni parikkhipāpetvāti (having nets spread around) having nets spread around in the shape of a basket, both for the sake of releasing dangers and for the sake of protecting ornaments, etc., that have fallen due to carelessness. Candanagaṇṭhi āgantvā jāle laggāti (a sandalwood log came and got caught in the net) it seems that a red sandalwood tree, growing on the upper bank of the Ganges, having fallen after its roots were washed away by the Ganges water, was broken into pieces in various places on the rocks and scattered. Then, a log the size of a pot, worn smooth as it was rubbed against the rocks and struck by the waves of the water, gradually being carried away, covered with algae, came and got caught in that net. This is said referring to that. Lekhanti (powder) powder taken by writing. Uḍḍitvāti (having lifted) having lifted it up by a series of bamboos, it is said to mean "having raised it." Oharatūti (let him lower) having lowered it down by psychic power, let him take it.

cha satthāro. Tattha (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.151-152; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.312)pūraṇoti tassa satthupaṭiññassa nāmaṃ.Kassapoti gottaṃ. So kira aññatarassa kulassa ekūnadāsasataṃ pūrayamāno jāto. Tenassa ‘‘pūraṇo’’ti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Maṅgaladāsattā cassa kataṃ ‘‘dukkaṭa’’nti vattā natthi, akataṃ vā ‘‘na kata’’nti. So ‘‘kimahaṃ ettha vasāmī’’ti palāyi. Athassa corā vatthāni acchindiṃsu. So paṇṇena vā tiṇena vā paṭicchādetumpi ajānanto jātarūpeneva ekaṃ gāmaṃ pāvisi. Manussā taṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo arahā appiccho, natthi iminā sadiso’’ti pūvabhattādīni gahetvā upasaṅkamanti. So ‘‘mayhaṃ sāṭakaṃ anivatthabhāvena idaṃ uppanna’’nti tato paṭṭhāya sāṭakaṃ labhitvāpi na nivāsesi, tadeva pabbajjaṃ aggahesi. Tassa santike aññepi aññepīti pañcasatā manussā pabbajiṃsu. Evamayaṃ gaṇācariyo hutvā ‘‘satthā’’ti loke pākaṭo ahosi.

cha satthāro (six teachers). There (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.151-152; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.312), pūraṇoti (Pūraṇa) is the name of that claimant to be a teacher. Kassapoti (Kassapa) is his clan. It seems he was born while filling the one hundred minus one [families] of a certain clan. Therefore, they made his name "Pūraṇa". And because of being a lucky servant, there was no one to say to him "you have done wrong" if he did wrong, or "you have not done" if he had not done. So, he fled, [thinking,] "why should I live here?" Then thieves tore his clothes. Not even knowing how to cover himself with leaves or grass, he entered a certain village naked. Seeing him, people came to him, taking cakes and rice, saying, "this ascetic is an arahant, unselfish, there is no one like him." He thought, "this has arisen for me because of not wearing a robe," and from then on, even having obtained a robe, he did not wear it, he accepted that very thing as his going forth. In his presence, other men went forth, one after another, to the number of five hundred. Thus, having become a leader of a group, he became known in the world as "the teacher."

Makkhalīti tassa nāmaṃ. Gosālāya jātattāgosāloti dutiyanāmaṃ. Taṃ kira sakaddamāya bhūmiyā telaghaṭaṃ gahetvā gacchantaṃ ‘‘tāta mā khalī’’ti sāmiko āha. So pamādena khalitvā patitvā sāmikassa bhayena palāyituṃ āraddho. Sāmiko upadhāvitvā sāṭakakaṇṇe aggahesi, so sāṭakaṃ chaḍḍetvā acelako hutvā palāyi. Sesaṃ pūraṇasadisameva.

Makkhalīti (Makkhalī) is his name. Because he was born in a cowshed, gosāloti (Gosāla) is his second name. It seems that while he was going with a pot of oil on muddy ground, his master said, "Tāta (dear one), do not slip (mā khalī)." He, due to carelessness, slipped and fell and began to flee in fear of his master. The master ran up and grabbed the hem of his robe; he threw off the robe and fled naked. The rest is just like the case of Pūraṇa.

Ajitoti tassa nāmaṃ. Kesakambalaṃ dhāretītikesakambalo. Iti nāmadvayaṃ saṃsanditvā ‘‘ajito kesakambalo’’ti vuccati. Tatthakesakambalonāma manussānaṃ kesehi katakambalo. Tato paṭikiṭṭhataraṃ vatthaṃ nāma natthi. Yathāha ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, yāni kānici tantāvutānaṃ vatthānaṃ, kesakambalo tesaṃ paṭikiṭṭho akkhāyati. Kesakambalo, bhikkhave, sīte sīto uṇhe uṇho dubbaṇṇo duggandho dukkhasamphasso’’ti (a. ni. 3.138).

Ajitoti (Ajita) is his name. He wears a garment of hair, therefore [he is called] kesakambalo (Kesakambala). Having combined the two names thus, he is called "Ajita Kesakambala." There, kesakambalo (Kesakambala) is a blanket made of human hair. There is no garment more inferior than that. As he said, "Just as, bhikkhus, of all woven garments, a hair blanket is said to be the most inferior. A hair blanket, bhikkhus, is cold in the cold, hot in the heat, ugly, foul-smelling, and has a painful touch" (a. ni. 3.138).

Pakudhoti tassa nāmaṃ.Kaccāyanoti gottaṃ. Iti nāmagottaṃ saṃsanditvā ‘‘pakudho kaccāyano’’ti vuccati. Sītūdakapaṭikkhittako esa, vaccaṃ katvāpi udakakiccaṃ na karoti, uṇhodakaṃ vā kañjiyaṃ vā labhitvā karoti, nadiṃ vā maggodakaṃ vā atikkamma ‘‘sīlaṃ me bhinna’’nti vālikathūpaṃ katvā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhāya gacchati. Evarūpanissirikaladdhiko esa.

Pakudhoti (Pakudha) is his name. Kaccāyanoti (Kaccāyana) is his clan. Having combined the name and clan thus, he is called "Pakudha Kaccāyana." He refuses cold water; even after defecating, he does not perform the water duty; or having obtained hot water or rice gruel, he does [the water duty]; or having crossed a river or road water, he makes a sand stupa [thinking,] "my virtue (sīla) is broken," and goes after establishing his virtue. He is one who has obtained such a shameless gain.

Sañcayoti tassa nāmaṃ. Belaṭṭhassa puttobelaṭṭhaputto. ‘‘Amhākaṃ gaṇṭhanakileso palibundhanakileso natthi, kilesagaṇṭhirahitā maya’’nti evaṃvāditāya laddhanāmavasenanigaṇṭho. Nāṭassa puttotināṭaputto.

Sañcayoti (Sañcaya) is his name. The son of Belaṭṭha, [he is] belaṭṭhaputto (Belaṭṭhaputta). Having obtained the name by saying "we have no knot of defilement, no encircling defilement, we are without knots of defilement," [he is called] nigaṇṭho (Nigaṇṭha). The son of Nāṭa, [he is] nāṭaputto (Nāṭaputta).

Piṇḍolabhāradvājoti (udā. aṭṭha. 36) piṇḍaṃ ulamāno pariyesamāno pabbajitotipiṇḍolo. So kira parijiṇṇabhogo brāhmaṇo hutvā mahantaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa lābhasakkāraṃ disvā piṇḍatthāya nikkhamitvā pabbajito. So mahantaṃ kapallapattaṃ ‘‘patta’’nti gahetvā carati, kapallapūraṃ yāguṃ pivati, bhattaṃ bhuñjati, pūvakhajjakañca khādati. Athassa mahagghasabhāvaṃ satthu ārocayiṃsu. Satthā tassa pattatthavikaṃ nānujāni. Thero heṭṭhāmañce pattaṃ nikujjitvā ṭhapeti. So ṭhapentopi ghaṃsentova paṇāmetvā ṭhapeti, gaṇhantopi ghaṃsentova ākaḍḍhitvā gaṇhāti. Taṃ gacchante gacchante kāle ghaṃsanena parikkhīṇaṃ nāḷikodanamattasseva gaṇhanakaṃ jātaṃ. Tato satthu ārocesuṃ. Athassa satthā pattatthavikaṃ anujāni. Thero aparena samayena indriyabhāvanaṃ bhāvento aggaphale arahatte patiṭṭhāsi. Iti so pubbe savisesaṃ piṇḍatthāya ulatītipiṇḍolo. Gottena panabhāradvājoti ubhayaṃ ekato katvā ‘‘piṇḍolabhāradvājo’’ti vuccati.

Piṇḍolabhāradvājo: (Udana Commentary 36) The word Piṇḍola means one who went forth seeking alms. It seems he was an old brahmin who, seeing the great gain and honor of the Saṅgha, went forth seeking alms. He took a large potsherd as a bowl, a "patta." He would go around drinking a pot full of gruel, eating rice, and consuming cakes and pastries. Then they reported to the Teacher about his great greed. The Teacher did not allow him a bowl stand. The Elder would place the bowl upside down under the lower platform. Even when placing it, he would scrape and push it to the side; even when picking it up, he would scrape and drag it. As time went on, by scraping, it became so worn that it could only hold an amount equal to a nāḷi of rice. Then they reported it to the Teacher. Then the Teacher allowed him a bowl stand. Later, the Elder, developing the cultivation of the senses, was established in the highest fruit of Arahantship. Thus, because he formerly sought alms in a special way, he was called Piṇḍola. Because by clan he was a Bhāradvāja, the two were combined and he was called "Piṇḍolabhāradvājo."

‘‘Atha kho āyasmā piṇḍolabhāradvājo…pe… etadavocā’’ti kasmā evamāhaṃsu? So kira (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.180 devorohaṇavatthu) seṭṭhi neva sammādiṭṭhi, na micchādiṭṭhi, majjhattadhātuko. So cintesi ‘‘mayhaṃ gehe candanaṃ bahu, kiṃ nu kho iminā karissāmī’’ti. Athassa etadahosi ‘‘imasmiṃ loke ‘mayaṃ arahanto, mayaṃ arahanto’ti vattāro bahū, ahaṃ ekaṃ arahantampi na jānāmi, gehe bhamaṃ yojetvā pattaṃ likhāpetvā sikkāya ṭhapetvā veḷuparamparāya saṭṭhihatthamatte ākāse olambāpetvā ‘sace arahā atthi, ākāsenāgantvā gaṇhātū’ti vakkhāmi. Yo taṃ gahessati, tassa saputtadāro saraṇaṃ gamissāmī’’ti. So cintitaniyāmeneva pattaṃ likhāpetvā veḷuparamparāya ussāpetvā ‘‘yo imasmiṃ loke arahā, so ākāsena āgantvā imaṃ pattaṃ gaṇhātū’’ti āha.

Why did they say, "Then the venerable Piṇḍolabhāradvājo… said this"? It seems that the merchant (Dhammapada Commentary 2.180 - The Descent of the Devas) was neither of right view nor of wrong view, but of a neutral disposition. He thought, "I have plenty of sandalwood in my house; what shall I do with it?" Then it occurred to him, "In this world, there are many who say, 'We are Arahants, we are Arahants,' but I do not know even one Arahant. I will have a bowl made of sandalwood, have it painted, hang it on a rope, and suspend it sixty cubits in the air by a bamboo scaffold, saying, 'If there is an Arahant, let him come through the air and take it.' Whoever takes it, I will go for refuge to him with my children and wife." Just as he had thought, he had a bowl made, hoisted it up by a bamboo scaffold, and said, "Whoever in this world is an Arahant, let him come through the air and take this bowl."

Tadā cha satthāro ‘‘amhākaṃ esa anucchaviko, amhākameva naṃ dehī’’ti vadiṃsu. So ‘‘ākāsenāgantvā gaṇhathā’’ti āha. Chaṭṭhe divase nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto antevāsike pesesi ‘‘gacchatha seṭṭhiṃ evaṃ vadetha ‘amhākaṃ ācariyasseva anucchaviko, mā appamattakassa kāraṇā ākāsena āgamanaṃ kari, dehi kira te patta’nti’’. Te gantvā seṭṭhiṃ tathā vadiṃsu. Seṭṭhi ‘‘ākāsenāgantvā gaṇhituṃ samatthova gaṇhātū’’ti āha. Nāṭaputto sayaṃ gantukāmo hutvā antevāsikānaṃ saññaṃ adāsi ‘‘ahaṃ ekaṃ hatthañca pādañca ukkhipitvā uppatitukāmo viya bhavissāmi, tumhe maṃ ‘ācariya kiṃ karotha, dārumayapattassa kāraṇā paṭicchannaṃ arahattaguṇaṃ mahājanassa mā dassayitthā’ti vatvā maṃ hatthesu ca pādesu ca gahetvā ākaḍḍhantā bhūmiyaṃ pāteyyāthā’’ti. So tattha gantvā seṭṭhiṃ āha ‘‘mahāseṭṭhi ayaṃ patto aññesaṃ nānucchaviko, mā te appamattakassa kāraṇā mama ākāse uppatanaṃ rucci, dehi me patta’’nti. Bhante, ākāsena uppatitvāva gaṇhathāti. Tato nāṭaputto ‘‘tena hi apetha apethā’’ti antevāsike apanetvā ‘‘ākāse uppatissāmī’’ti ekaṃ hatthañca pādañca ukkhipi. Atha naṃ antevāsikā ‘‘ācariya, kiṃ nāmetaṃ karotha, chavassa dārumayapattassa kāraṇā paṭicchannaguṇena tumhehi mahājanassa dassitena ko attho’’ti taṃ hatthapādesu gahetvā ākaḍḍhitvā bhūmiyaṃ pātesuṃ. So seṭṭhiṃ āha ‘‘mahāseṭṭhi, ime me uppatituṃ na denti, dehi me patta’’nti. Uppatitvāva gaṇhatha bhanteti. Evaṃ titthiyā cha divasāni vāyamitvāpi pattaṃ na labhiṃsuyeva.

Then six teachers said, "This is suitable for us; give it to us." He said, "Come through the air and take it." On the sixth day, Nigaṇṭha Nāṭaputta sent his disciples, saying, "Go, tell the merchant this: 'It is suitable only for our teacher; do not make him come through the air for the sake of a trifle; give him the bowl.'" They went and said this to the merchant. The merchant said, "Let him who is able to come through the air and take it, take it." Nāṭaputta, wanting to go himself, gave a signal to his disciples: "I will raise one arm and one foot as if wanting to fly up, and you should say to me, 'Teacher, what are you doing? Do not show your hidden qualities of Arahantship to the public for the sake of a wooden bowl,' and, seizing my hands and feet, pull me down to the ground." So, going there, he said to the merchant, "Great merchant, this bowl is not suitable for others; do not let my flying up in the air please you for the sake of a trifle; give me the bowl." "Venerable sir, take it after flying up in the air," he replied. Then Nāṭaputta, having dismissed his disciples, saying, "Well then, be gone, be gone," raised one arm and one foot, thinking, "I will fly up into the air." Then the disciples, seizing him by the hands and feet, pulled him down to the ground, saying, "Teacher, what is this you are doing? What is the use of your hidden qualities being shown to the public by you for the sake of a cheap wooden bowl?" He said to the merchant, "Great merchant, these do not allow me to fly up; give me the bowl." "Venerable sir, take it after flying up," he replied. Thus, even after the heretics had striven for six days, they did not obtain the bowl.

Atha sattame divase āyasmato ca moggallānassa āyasmato ca piṇḍolabhāradvājassa ‘‘rājagahe piṇḍāya carissāmā’’ti gantvā ekasmiṃ piṭṭhipāsāṇe ṭhatvā cīvaraṃ pārupanakāle dhuttakā kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ ‘‘hambho pubbe cha satthāro ‘mayaṃ arahantāmhā’ti vicariṃsu, rājagahaseṭṭhino pana ajja sattamo divaso pattaṃ ussāpetvā ṭhapayato ‘sace arahā atthi, ākāsenāgantvā gaṇhātū’ti vadantassa, ekopi ‘ahaṃ arahā’ti ākāse uppatanto natthi, ajja no loke arahantānaṃ natthibhāvo ñāto’’ti. Taṃ kathaṃ sutvā āyasmā mahāmoggallāno āyasmantaṃ piṇḍolabhāradvājaṃ āha ‘‘sutaṃ te, āvuso bhāradvāja, imesaṃ vacanaṃ, ime buddhasāsanaṃ pariggaṇhantā viya vadanti, tvañca mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo, gacchetaṃ pattaṃ ākāsena gantvā gaṇhāhī’’ti. ‘‘Āvuso moggallāna, tvaṃ ‘iddhimantānaṃ aggo’ti pākaṭo, tvaṃ etaṃ gaṇha, tayi pana aggaṇhante ahaṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti āha. Atha āyasmā mahāmoggallāno ‘‘gaṇhāvuso’’ti āha. Iti te lokassa arahantehi asuññabhāvadassanatthaṃ evamāhaṃsu.

Then, on the seventh day, the venerable Mahāmoggallāna and the venerable Piṇḍolabhāradvāja, having gone to Rājagaha thinking, "We will go for alms," while standing on a slab of stone and putting on their robes, the rogues started a conversation, "Alas, formerly six teachers went about saying, 'We are Arahants,' but today is the seventh day since the merchant of Rājagaha hoisted up the bowl, saying, 'If there is an Arahant, let him come through the air and take it,' and not even one is flying up in the air saying, 'I am an Arahant'; today the non-existence of Arahants in the world is known to us." Having heard that conversation, the venerable Mahāmoggallāna said to the venerable Piṇḍolabhāradvāja, "Have you heard, venerable Bhāradvāja, this speech of these people? They speak as if they were disparaging the Buddha's dispensation. But you are of great psychic power and great majesty; go, take that bowl after going through the air." "Venerable Moggallāna, you are known as 'foremost of those with psychic power'; you take it. If you do not take it, then I will take it," he said. Then the venerable Mahāmoggallāna said, "Take it, venerable sir." Thus, they spoke in this way in order to show the world that it is not empty of Arahants.

Tikkhattuṃ rājagahaṃ anupariyāyīti tikkhattuṃ rājagahaṃ anugantvā paribbhami. ‘‘Sattakkhattu’’ntipi vadanti. Thero kira abhiññāpādakaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā uṭṭhāya tigāvutaṃ piṭṭhipāsāṇaṃ antantena paricchindanto tūlapicu viya ākāse uṭṭhāpetvā rājagahanagarassa upari sattakkhattuṃ anupariyāyi. So tigāvutappamāṇassa nagarassa apidhānaṃ viya paññāyi. Nagaravāsino ‘‘pāsāṇo no avattharitvā gaṇhātī’’ti bhītā suppādīni matthake katvā tattha tattha nilīyiṃsu. Sattame vāre thero piṭṭhipāsāṇaṃ bhinditvā attānaṃ dasseti. Mahājano theraṃ disvā ‘‘bhante piṇḍolabhāradvāja, tava pāsāṇaṃ gāḷhaṃ katvā gaṇha, mā no sabbe nāsayī’’ti āha. Thero pāsāṇaṃ pādantena khipitvā vissajjesi. So gantvā yathāṭhāneyeva patiṭṭhāsi. Thero seṭṭhissa gehamatthake aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ disvā seṭṭhi urena nipajjitvā ‘‘otara sāmī’’ti vatvā ākāsato otiṇṇaṃ theraṃ nisīdāpetvā pattaṃ gahetvā catumadhurapuṇṇaṃ katvā therassa adāsi. Thero pattaṃ gahetvā vihārābhimukho pāyāsi. Athassa ye araññagatā pāṭihāriyaṃ nāddasaṃsu, te sannipatitvā ‘‘bhante, amhākampi pāṭihāriyaṃ dassehī’’ti theraṃ anubandhiṃsu. So tesaṃ tesaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ dassento vihāraṃ agamāsi. Satthā taṃ anubandhitvā unnādentassa mahājanassa saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘ānanda, kasseso saddo’’ti pucchi. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘assosi kho bhagavā…pe… kiṃ nu kho so, ānanda, uccāsaddo mahāsaddo’’ti.

He circled around Rājagaha three times: he went around and circled Rājagaha three times. Some say "seven times." It seems the Elder, having attained jhāna that is the basis for the supernormal knowledges, arose and, enclosing the three-gavuta slab of stone on all sides, lifted it up into the air like a cotton fluff and circled above the city of Rājagaha seven times. It appeared like a lid for the city, which was three gavutas in extent. The city dwellers, frightened that "the stone will fall on us and crush us," took pots and so on on their heads and hid here and there. On the seventh round, the Elder split the slab of stone and showed himself. Seeing the Elder, the great multitude said, "Venerable Piṇḍolabhāradvāja, take the stone, making it firm; do not destroy us all." The Elder threw away the stone by kicking it with his foot. It went and stood in the same place as before. The Elder stood on the roof of the merchant's house. Seeing him, the merchant lay down with his chest on the ground, saying, "Descend, master," and, having seated the Elder who had descended from the sky, he took the bowl, filled it with the four sweets, and gave it to the Elder. Having taken the bowl, the Elder set out towards the monastery. Then those who were living in the forest who had not seen the miracle gathered together and followed the Elder, saying, "Venerable sir, show us a miracle too." Showing each of them a miracle, he went to the monastery. Having heard the sound of the great multitude following and raising shouts, the Teacher asked, "Ānanda, what is that sound?" Therefore it was said, "The Blessed One heard… What, Ānanda, is that loud noise, that great noise?"

Vikubbaniddhiyā pāṭihāriyaṃ paṭikkhittanti etthavikubbaniddhināma ‘‘so pakativaṇṇaṃ vijahitvā kumārakavaṇṇaṃ vā dasseti nāgavaṇṇaṃ vā, vividhampi senābyūhaṃ dassetī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.13) evamāgatā pakativaṇṇavijahanavikāravasena pavattā iddhi.Adhiṭṭhāniddhipana ‘‘pakatiyā eko bahukaṃ āvajjati sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā satasahassaṃ vā, āvajjitvā ñāṇena adhiṭṭhāti ‘bahuko homī’’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.10 dasaiddhiniddesa) evaṃ vibhajitvā dassitā adhiṭṭhānavasena nipphannā iddhi.

The miracle was rejected because of the miracle of transformation: Here, miracle of transformation is the psychic power that occurs in the mode of changing the natural color, thus: "Having abandoned the natural color, he shows the color of a young boy or the color of a nāga, or shows various arrays of troops" (Patisambhidāmagga 3.13). Miracle of resolution, however, is the psychic power accomplished in the mode of resolution, that is shown having distinguished thus: "By nature one becomes many, a hundred or a thousand or a hundred thousand, and having become [many], he resolves by knowledge, 'May I become many'" (Patisambhidāmagga 3.10 - Exposition of Ten Psychic Powers).

253-254.Na acchupiyantīti na suphassitāni honti.Rūpakākiṇṇānīti itthirūpādīhi ākiṇṇāni.Bhūmiādhāraketi valayādhārake.Dāruādhārakadaṇḍādhārakesūti ekadārunā kataādhārake bahūhi daṇḍakehi kataādhārake vāti attho, tīhi daṇḍehi kato pana na vaṭṭati.Bhūmiyaṃ pana nikkujjitvā ekameva ṭhapetabbanti ettha dve ṭhapentena upari ṭhapitapattaṃ ekena passena bhūmiyaṃ phusāpetvā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti.Ālindakamiḍḍhikādīnanti pamukhamiḍḍhikānaṃ.Parivattitvā tattheva patiṭṭhātīti ettha ‘‘parivattitvā tatiyavāre tattheva miḍḍhiyā patiṭṭhātī’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Paribhaṇḍaṃnāma gehassa bahi kuṭṭapādassa thirabhāvatthaṃ katā tanukamiḍḍhikā vuccati.Tanukamiḍḍhikāyāti khuddakamiḍḍhikāya. Miḍḍhantepi ādhārake ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ādhāraka’’nti hi vacanato miḍḍhādīsu yattha katthaci ādhārakaṃ ṭhapetvā tattha pattaṃ ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati ādhārake ṭhapanokāsassa aniyamitattāti vadanti. ‘‘Pattamāḷo nāma vaṭṭetvā pattānaṃ agamanatthaṃ vaṭṭaṃ vā caturassaṃ vā iṭṭhakādīhi parikkhipitvā kato’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.

253-254.Na acchupiyantī: they are not well-touched.Rūpakākiṇṇānī: crowded with forms of women, etc.Bhūmiādhārake: on a ring-stand.Dāruādhārakadaṇḍādhārakesū: the meaning is, on a stand made of a single piece of wood, or on a stand made of many sticks; but one made of three sticks is not allowable.Bhūmiyaṃ pana nikkujjitvā ekameva ṭhapetabbaṃ: here, some say that for one who is placing two [bowl-stands], it is allowable to place the bowl placed on top so that it touches the ground with one side.Ālindakamiḍḍhikādīnaṃ: of the front platforms, etc.Parivattitvā tattheva patiṭṭhātī: here, in the Gaṇṭhipada, it is said that "having turned around, it stands on the front platform in that very place on the third try."Paribhaṇḍaṃ: a thin platform built outside the house at the foot of the wall for the purpose of making it sturdy is called paribhaṇḍaṃ.Tanukamiḍḍhikāya: on a small platform. It is allowable to place it on a stand even on a platform. For it is said, "I allow, monks, a stand," it is allowable to place the bowl there by placing a stand wherever on a platform, etc., because the opportunity for placing a stand is unrestricted, they say. In the Gaṇṭhipada it is said: "Pattamāḷa is the name for surrounding [a place] with bricks, etc., in a circular or square shape to prevent bowls from wandering about."

255.Ghaṭikanti upari yojitaṃ aggaḷaṃ.Tāvakālikaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti sakideva gahetvā tena āmisaṃ paribhuñjitvā chaḍḍetuṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.Ghaṭikaṭāheti bhājanakapāle.Abhuṃ meti ettha bhavatītibhū,vaḍḍhi. Na bhūtiabhū,avaḍḍhi. Bhayavasena pana sā itthī ‘‘abhu’’nti āha, vināso mayhanti attho.Chavasīsassa pattanti chavasīsamayaṃ pattaṃ. Pakativikārasambandhe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, abhedepi vā bhedūpacārenāyaṃ vohāro ‘‘silāputtakassa sarīra’’ntiādīsu viya.

255.Ghaṭikaṃ: a bar attached above.Tāvakālikaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatī: the meaning is that it is allowable to take it just once and, having consumed the meat with it, to throw it away.Ghaṭikaṭāhe: in a potsherd dish.Abhuṃ me: here, bhū means to become, to grow. Na bhūti, not become, is abhū, non-growth. However, due to fear, that woman said "abhu," the meaning being, "I am ruined."Chavasīsassa pattaṃ: a bowl made of a dead man's skull. This is a possessive expression relating a natural thing to an altered thing; or this usage is by transferred meaning even in the case of non-difference, as in "the body of the stone doll" and so on.

Cabbetvāti khāditvā.Ekaṃ udakagaṇḍusaṃ gahetvāti vāmahattheneva pattaṃ ukkhipitvā mukhena gaṇḍusaṃ gahetvā.Ucchiṭṭhahatthenāti sāmisena hatthena.Ettāvatāti ekagaṇḍusagahaṇamattena.Luñcitvāti tato maṃsaṃ uddharitvā. Etesu sabbesu paṇṇattiṃ jānātu vā mā vā, āpattiyeva.

Cabbetvā: having chewed.Ekaṃ udakagaṇḍusaṃ gahetvā: having lifted up the bowl with the left hand, and having taken a mouthful of water with the mouth.Ucchiṭṭhahatthena: with a hand that has remnants of food.Ettāvatā: with just taking one mouthful.Luñcitvā: after that, having extracted the meat. In all these cases, whether he knows the regulation or not, it is an offense.

256.Kiṇṇacuṇṇenāti surākiṇṇacuṇṇena.‘‘Anuvātaṃ paribhaṇḍanti kilañjādīsu karontī’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Bidalakanti duguṇakaraṇasaṅkhātassa kiriyāvisesassa adhivacanaṃ. Kassa duguṇakaraṇaṃ? Yena kilañjādinā mahantaṃ kathinaṃ atthataṃ, tassa. Tañhi daṇḍakathinappamāṇena pariyante saṃharitvā duguṇaṃ kātabbaṃ.Paṭiggahanti aṅgulikañcukaṃ.

256.Kiṇṇacuṇṇena: with yeast flour."Anuvātaṃ paribhaṇḍaṃ karonti kilañjādīsu"ti: in the Gaṇṭhipada it is said that they make an enclosing structure in the eaves, etc.Bidalakaṃ: is a designation for a particular action, that is, doubling. Doubling of what? Of that eave, etc., by which a large mat is spread out. For that, having gathered it in at the edges to the size of a stick mat, should be doubled.Paṭiggahaṃ: a fingerstall.

257-259.Pātināma paṭiggahaṇasaṇṭhānena kato bhājanaviseso.Na sammatīti nappahoti.

257-259.Pāti: is a particular kind of vessel made in the shape of a receptacle.Na sammatī: it does not suffice.

260-262.Nīcavatthukaṃ cinitunti bahikuṭṭassa samantato nīcavatthukaṃ katvā cinituṃ.Arahaṭaghaṭiyantaṃnāma sakaṭacakkasaṇṭhānaṃ are are ghaṭikāni bandhitvā ekena dvīhi vā paribbhamiyamānaṃ yantaṃ.

260-262.Nīcavatthukaṃ cinituṃ: to build by making a low foundation around the outside wall.Arahaṭaghaṭiyantaṃ: is a machine in the shape of a cartwheel with buckets tied to the spokes, made to revolve by one or two [animals].

263.Āviddhapakkhapāsakanti kaṇṇikamaṇḍalassa samantā ṭhapitapakkhapāsakaṃ.Maṇḍaleti kaṇṇikamaṇḍale.Pakkhapāsake ṭhapetvāti samantā pakkhapāsakaphalakāni ṭhapetvā.

263.Āviddhapakkhapāsakaṃ: a side-covering placed all around the central boss.Maṇḍale: on the central boss.Pakkhapāsake ṭhapetvā: after placing side-covering planks all around.

264.‘‘Namatakaṃ santhatasadisa’’ntigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Cammakhaṇḍaparihārena paribhuñjitabbanti anadhiṭṭhahitvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ.Ettheva paviṭṭhānīti maḷorikāya eva antogadhāni. Pubbe pattasaṅgopanatthaṃ ādhārako anuññāto, idāni bhuñjanatthaṃ.

264.In the Gaṇṭhipada it is said: "Namataka is like a spread."Cammakhaṇḍaparihārena paribhuñjitabbaṃ: it should be used without resolving on it.Ettheva paviṭṭhānī: they are embedded inside the railing only. Formerly a stand was allowed for the protection of the bowl, now for the purpose of eating.

265.Nikkujjitabboti tena dinnassa deyyadhammassa appaṭiggahaṇatthaṃ pattanikkujjanakammavācāya nikkujjitabbo, na adhomukhaṭhapanena. Tenevāha‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, nikkujjitabbo’’tiādi.Alābhāyāti catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ alābhatthāya.Anatthāyāti upaddavāya avaḍḍhiyā.

265.Nikkujjitabbo: he should be overturned by the formula for overturning the bowl so as not to receive the offering given, not by placing it upside down. Therefore he said, "And in this way, monks, it should be overturned," and so on.Alābhāyā: for the non-gain of the four requisites.Anatthāyā: for misfortune, for non-growth.

266.Pasādessāmāti āyācissāma.Etadavocāti ‘‘appatirūpaṃ mayā kataṃ, bhagavā pana mahantepi aguṇe acintetvā mayhaṃ accayaṃ paṭiggaṇhissatī’’ti maññamāno etaṃ ‘‘accayo maṃ bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tattha ñāyapaṭipattiṃ aticca eti pavattatītiaccayo,aparādho.Maṃ accagamāti maṃ atikkamma abhibhavitvā pavatto. Purisena madditvā abhibhavitvā pavattitopi hi aparādho atthato purisaṃ aticca abhibhavitvā pavatto nāma hoti.Paṭiggaṇhātūti khamatu.Āyatiṃ saṃvarāyāti anāgate saṃvaraṇatthāya puna evarūpassa aparādhassa dosassa khalitassa akaraṇatthāya.Tagghāti ekaṃsena.Yathādhammaṃ paṭikarosīti yathā dhammo ṭhito, tatheva karosi, khamāpesīti vuttaṃ hoti.Taṃ te mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmāti taṃ tava aparādhaṃ mayaṃ khamāma.Vuḍḍhi hesā, āvuso vaḍḍha, ariyassa vinayeti esā, āvuso vaḍḍha, ariyassa vinaye buddhassa bhagavato sāsane vuḍḍhi nāma. Katamā? Accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaritvā āyatiṃ saṃvarāpajjanā. Desanaṃ pana puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ karonto‘‘yo accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaroti, āyatiṃ saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti āha.

266. Pasādessāmāti, we will appease—means we will request. Etadavocāti, he spoke thus—thinking, "I have done something inappropriate, but the Blessed One, without considering even a great fault, will accept my transgression," he spoke these words beginning with, "Accayo maṃ bhante (a transgression overtook me, venerable sir)." There, accayo, transgression—because it goes beyond appropriate behavior; it is a fault. Maṃ accagamāti, a transgression overtook me—means it occurred having transgressed and overwhelmed me. For even a fault that occurs having been suppressed and overwhelmed by a person is, in essence, said to have occurred having transgressed and overwhelmed that person. Paṭiggaṇhātūti, may he accept—means may he forgive. Āyatiṃ saṃvarāyāti, for restraint in the future—is for the purpose of restraint in the future, to prevent the occurrence again of such a fault, defect, or lapse. Tagghāti, indeed—certainly. Yathādhammaṃ paṭikarosīti, you are making amends in accordance with the Dhamma—means you are acting just as the Dhamma requires, you are seeking forgiveness. Taṃ te mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmāti, that transgression of yours, we accept—means we forgive that transgression of yours. Vuḍḍhi hesā, āvuso vaḍḍha, ariyassa vinayeti, this, friend Vaḍḍha, is growth in the Discipline of the Noble One—means this, friend Vaḍḍha, is called growth in the Discipline, in the teaching of the Buddha, the Blessed One. What is it? Seeing a transgression as a transgression, making amends in accordance with the Dhamma, and undertaking restraint in the future. But when giving the teaching in reference to a person, he said, ‘‘yo accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaroti, āyatiṃ saṃvaraṃ āpajjati’’ti, "whoever, seeing a transgression as a transgression, makes amends in accordance with the Dhamma, undertakes restraint in the future."

268.Bodhirājakumāravatthumhi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.324 ādayo)kokanadotikokanadaṃvuccati padumaṃ, so ca maṅgalapāsādo olokanapadumaṃ dassetvā kato, tasmā ‘‘kokanado’’ti saṅkhaṃ labhi.Yāva pacchimasopānakaḷevarāti etthapacchimasopānakaḷevaranti paṭhamasopānaphalakaṃ vuttaṃ tassa sabbapacchā dussena santhatattā. Uparimasopānaphalakato paṭṭhāya hi sopānaṃ santhataṃ.Addasā khoti olokanatthaṃyeva dvārakoṭṭhake ṭhito addasa.

268. In the story of Bodhirājakumāra (see Majjhima Nikāya Aṭṭhakathā 2.324 ff), kokanadoti—kokanadaṃ refers to a lotus, and that auspicious pavilion was made displaying an olokanapaduma (viewing lotus), therefore it obtained the name "kokanado." Yāva pacchimasopānakaḷevarāti—here, pacchimasopānakaḷevaranti means the first step, because it was covered with cloth at the very back. For the staircase was covered starting from the upper step. Addasā khoti—he saw it standing in the doorway for the purpose of viewing.

Bhagavā tuṇhī ahosīti ‘‘kissa nu kho atthāya rājakumārena ayaṃ mahāsakkāro kato’’ti āvajjento puttapatthanāya katabhāvaṃ aññāsi. So hi rājaputto aputtako. Sutañcānena ahosi ‘‘buddhānaṃ kira adhikāraṃ katvā manasā icchitaṃ labhantī’’ti. So ‘‘sacāhaṃ puttaṃ labhissāmi, sammāsambuddho imaṃ celapaṭikaṃ akkamissati. No ce labhissāmi, na akkamissatī’’ti patthanaṃ katvā santharāpesi. Atha bhagavā ‘‘nibbattissati nu kho etassa putto’’ti āvajjetvā ‘‘na nibbattissatī’’ti addasa. Pubbe kira so ekasmiṃ dīpe vasamāno samānacchandena sakuṇapotake khādi. Sacassa mātugāmo puññavā bhaveyya, puttaṃ labheyya. Ubhohi pana samānacchandehi hutvā pāpakammaṃ kataṃ, tenassa putto na nibbattissatīti aññāsi. Dusse pana akkante ‘‘buddhānaṃ adhikāraṃ katvā patthitaṃ labhantīti loke anussavo, mayā ca mahāadhikāro kato, na ca puttaṃ labhāmi, tucchaṃ idaṃ vacana’’nti micchāgahaṇaṃ gaṇheyya. Titthiyāpi ‘‘natthi samaṇānaṃ akattabbaṃ nāma, celapaṭikaṃ maddantā āhiṇḍantī’’ti ujjhāyeyyuṃ. Etarahi ca akkamantesu bahū bhikkhū paracittaviduno, te bhabbataṃ jānitvā akkamissanti, abhabbataṃ jānitvā na akkamissanti. Anāgate pana upanissayo mando bhavissati, anāgataṃ na jānissanti, tesu akkamantesu sace patthitaṃ ijjhissati, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce ijjhissati, ‘‘pubbe bhikkhusaṅghassa adhikāraṃ katvā icchiticchitaṃ labhanti, idāni na labhanti, teyeva maññe bhikkhū paṭipattipūrakā ahesuṃ, ime pana paṭipattiṃ pūretuṃ na sakkontī’’ti manussā vippaṭisārino bhavissantīti imehi tīhi kāraṇehi bhagavā akkamituṃ anicchanto tuṇhī ahosi.Pacchimaṃ janataṃ tathāgato anukampatīti idaṃ pana thero vuttesu kāraṇesu tatiyaṃ kāraṇaṃ sandhāyāha. Maṅgalaṃ icchantītimaṅgalikā.

Bhagavā tuṇhī ahosīti, the Blessed One was silent—reflecting, "For what purpose has this great honor been done by the prince?" he knew that it had been done for the sake of desiring a son. For that prince was without a son. And it had been heard by him that "having made a resolution to the Buddhas, one obtains what is desired in the mind." So he had the cloth spread out, making the wish, "If I obtain a son, the Sammāsambuddha will step on this cloth. If I do not obtain one, he will not step on it." Then the Blessed One, reflecting "Will a son be born to him?" saw that "one will not be born." It seems that previously, living on an island, he ate fledgling birds with shared desire. If his mother were virtuous, he would obtain a son. But because both had committed a bad deed with shared desire, he knew that a son would not be born to him. However, if the cloth were stepped on, he would take up a wrong view, thinking, "In the world, there is a rumor that having made a resolution to the Buddhas, one obtains what is desired, and I have made a great resolution, but I do not obtain a son; this saying is empty." And the sectarians would criticize, "There is nothing that the ascetics cannot do, they wander about trampling on cloths." And now, if they were to step on it, many monks are knowers of others' minds; knowing the potential, they will step on it, knowing the lack of potential, they will not step on it. But in the future, the supporting conditions will be weak, they will not know the future; if they step on it and the wish is fulfilled, that will be skillful. But if it is not fulfilled, people will become regretful, thinking, "In the past, having made a resolution to the community of monks, they obtained whatever they wished for, now they do not obtain it; those monks, I think, were fulfillers of practice, but these ones are not able to fulfill the practice." For these three reasons, the Blessed One, not wanting to step on it, was silent. Pacchimaṃ janataṃ tathāgato anukampatīti, the Tathāgata has compassion for the later generation—this, however, the Elder said in reference to the third reason among the reasons stated. Maṅgalaṃ icchantīti, those desiring auspiciousness—maṅgalikā.

269.Bījaninti caturassabījaniṃ.Tālavaṇṭanti tālapattādīhi kataṃ maṇḍalikabījaniṃ.

269. Bījaninti, fan—a square fan. Tālavaṇṭanti, a round fan made of palm leaves, etc.

270-275.‘‘Ekapaṇṇacchattaṃnāma tālapatta’’ntigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Kammasatenāti etthasata-saddo anekapariyāyo, anekena kammenāti attho, mahatā ussāhenāti vuttaṃ hoti.Rudhīti khuddakavaṇaṃ.

270-275. ‘‘Ekapaṇṇacchattaṃnāma tālapatta’’nti—gaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ, "‘Ekapaṇṇacchattaṃ’ means a palm leaf"—is said in the Gaṇṭhipada. Kammasatenāti—here, the word sata (hundred) has various meanings; the meaning is with various deeds, it means with great effort. Rudhīti, a small wound.

278.‘‘Akāyabandhanena sañcicca asañcicca vā gāmappavesane āpatti. Saritaṭṭhānato bandhitvā pavisitabbaṃ nivattitabbaṃ vā’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Murajavaṭṭisaṇṭhānaṃ veṭhetvā katanti bahū rajjuke ekato katvā nānāvaṇṇehi suttehi veṭhetvā murajavaṭṭisadisaṃ kataṃ. Tenevadutiyapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85 pāḷimuttakavinicchaya) vuttaṃ ‘‘bahū rajjuke ekato katvā ekena nirantaraṃ veṭhetvā kataṃ bahurajjukanti na vattabbaṃ, taṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.Muddikakāyabandhanaṃnāma caturassaṃ akatvā sajjitaṃ.Pāmaṅgadasācaturassā.Mudiṅgasaṇṭhānenāti varakasīsākārena.Pāsantoti dasāmūlaṃ.

278. ‘‘Akāyabandhanena sañcicca asañcicca vā gāmappavesane āpatti. Saritaṭṭhānato bandhitvā pavisitabbaṃ nivattitabbaṃ vā’’ti—gaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ, "By intentionally or unintentionally entering a village with an akāyabandhana, there is an offense. Having tied it at the riverbank, one should enter, or one should turn back"—is said in the Gaṇṭhipada. Murajavaṭṭisaṇṭhānaṃ veṭhetvā katanti, having wrapped and made in the shape of a murajavaṭṭi—having gathered many ropes together, and having wrapped them with threads of various colors, it is made similar to a murajavaṭṭi. Therefore, in the dutiyapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ (Pārājika Aṭṭhakathā 1.85 Pāḷimuttakavinicchaya), it is said, "Having gathered many ropes together, one should not say that what is made by wrapping continuously with one (thread) is a bahurajjuka (multi-stringed binding cord), it is permissible." What should be said there has already been said below. Muddikakāyabandhanaṃnāma, a muddikakāyabandhana—is what is fitted together without making it square. Pāmaṅgadasā—square. Mudiṅgasaṇṭhānenāti, in the shape of a varakasīsaka (water dipper). Pāsantoti, dasāmūla (ten roots).

280-282.Muṇḍavaṭṭīti mallakammakarādayo.Pamāṇaṅgulenāti vaḍḍhakīaṅgulaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sesamettha pāḷito aṭṭhakathāto ca suviññeyyameva.

280-282. Muṇḍavaṭṭīti—potters, etc. Pamāṇaṅgulenāti—is said referring to a carpenter's inch. The rest here is very easy to understand from the Pāḷi and the Aṭṭhakathā.

Khuddakavatthukkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Khuddakavatthukkhandhaka is finished.

6. Senāsanakkhandhakaṃ

6. Senāsanakkhandhaka

Vihārānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on the Permission of Vihāras

294.Senāsanakkhandhakesenāsanaṃ apaññattaṃ hotīti vihārasenāsanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Catubbidhañhi (ma. ni. aṭṭa. 1.296) senāsanaṃ vihārasenāsanaṃ mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ santhatasenāsanaṃ okāsasenāsananti. Tattha ‘‘mañcopi senāsanaṃ, pīṭhampi bhisipi bimbohanampi vihāropi aḍḍhayogopi pāsādopi hammiyampi guhāpi aṭṭopi māḷopi leṇampi veḷugumbopi rukkhamūlampi maṇḍapopi senāsanaṃ. Yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamanti, sabbametaṃ senāsana’’nti (vibha. 527) vacanato vihāro aḍḍhayogo pāsādo hammiyaṃ guhāti idaṃvihārasenāsanaṃnāma. Mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bimbohananti idaṃmañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃnāma. Cimilikā cammakhaṇḍo tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāroti idaṃsanthatasenāsanaṃnāma. Yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamantīti idaṃokāsasenāsanaṃnāma.

294. In the Senāsanakkhandhaka, senāsanaṃ apaññattaṃ hotīti—is said referring to a vihāra-senāsana. For senāsana is fourfold (see Majjhima Nikāya Aṭṭhakathā 1.296): vihāra-senāsana, mañca-pīṭha-senāsana, santhata-senāsana, and okāsa-senāsana. There, from the statement "A couch is a senāsana, a seat is a senāsana, a bhisi (cushion) is a senāsana, a bimbohana (pillow) is a senāsana, a vihāra is a senāsana, an aḍḍhayoga (lean-to) is a senāsana, a pāsāda (palace) is a senāsana, a hammiya (mansion) is a senāsana, a guhā (cave) is a senāsana, an aṭṭa (attic) is a senāsana, a māḷa (terrace) is a senāsana, a leṇa (rock shelter) is a senāsana, a veḷugumba (bamboo grove) is a senāsana, the foot of a tree is a senāsana, a maṇḍapa (pavilion) is a senāsana. Or wherever monks depart from, all of that is a senāsana" (Vibhaṅga 527), vihāra, aḍḍhayoga, pāsāda, and hammiya—this is called vihāra-senāsana. Mañca, pīṭha, bhisi, and bimbohana—this is called mañca-pīṭha-senāsana. Cimilikā (mat), cammakhaṇḍa (piece of hide), tiṇasanthāra (straw mat), and paṇṇasanthāra (leaf mat)—this is called santhata-senāsana. Yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamantīti, wherever monks depart from—this is called okāsa-senāsana.

Rukkhamūletiādīsurukkhamūlasenāsanaṃnāma yaṃkiñci sandacchāyaṃ vivittaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ.Pabbatonāma selo. Tattha hi udakasoṇḍīsu udakakiccaṃ katvā sītāya rukkhacchāyāya nisinnā nānādisāsu khāyamānāsu sītena vātena bījiyamānā samaṇadhammaṃ karonti.Kandaretikaṃvuccati udakaṃ, tena dārito udakena bhinno pabbatappadesokandaraṃ. Yaṃ ‘‘nitamba’’ntipi ‘‘nadīkuñja’’ntipi vadanti. Tattha hi rajatapaṭṭasadisā vālikā hoti, matthake maṇivitānaṃ viya vanagahanaṃ, maṇikkhandhasadisaṃ udakaṃ sandati, evarūpaṃ kandaraṃ oruyha pānīyaṃ pivitvā gattāni sītaṃ katvā vālikaṃ ussāpetvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ paññapetvā tattha nisinnā te bhikkhū samaṇadhammaṃ karonti.Giriguhānāma dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ antarā, ekasmiṃyeva vā umaṅgasadisaṃ mahāvivaraṃ.

Rukkhamūletiādīsu—among these, rukkhamūlasenāsanaṃnāma, the root-of-a-tree senāsana—is any secluded root of a tree with shady branches. Pabbatonāma, a mountain—is a rock. There, having done their water duties in the water conduits, sitting in the cool shade of the trees, being fanned by the cool breeze blowing in various directions, they practice the ascetic life. Kandareti—kaṃ means water, kandaraṃ is a part of the mountain split by water, broken by water. What they call "nitamba" (slope) or "nadīkuñja" (river grove). There, there is sand like a sheet of silver, a dense forest like a canopy of jewels at the top, water flows like a trunk of jewels, having descended into such a kandara, having drunk water and cooled their bodies, having scooped up the sand, having prepared a paṃsukūla robe, those monks, sitting there, practice the ascetic life. Giriguhānāma, a mountain cave—is the space between two mountains, or a large cavity like a tunnel in one mountain.

Ajjhokāsonāma kenaci acchanno padeso. Ākaṅkhamānā panettha cīvarakuṭiṃ katvā vasanti.Palālapuñjeti palālarāsimhi. Mahāpalālapuñjato hi palālaṃ nikkaḍḍhitvā pabbhāraleṇasadise ālaye karonti, gacchagumbādīnampi upari palālaṃ parikkhipitvā heṭṭhā nisinnā samaṇadhammaṃ karonti, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Pañca leṇānīti pañca līyanaṭṭhānāni. Nilīyanti ettha bhikkhūti leṇāni, vihārādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Supaṇṇavaṅkagehanti garuḷapakkhasaṇṭhānena katagehaṃ.

Ajjhokāsonāma, an open space—is a place not covered by anything. Those who wish, building a cīvarakuṭi (robe-hut) there, live there. Palālapuñjeti, in a heap of straw. For from a large heap of straw, having pulled out the straw, they make shelters like pabbhāraleṇas (mountain-slope shelters), and having surrounded tree clumps, etc., with straw, those sitting underneath practice the ascetic life, this is said in reference to that. Pañca leṇānīti, five leṇas—five places of shelter. Bhikkhus take shelter here, hence leṇāni, this is a designation for vihāras, etc. Supaṇṇavaṅkagehanti, a house made in the shape of a garuḷa's wing.

295.Anumodanagāthāsusītanti ajjhattadhātukkhobhavasena vā bahiddhautuvipariṇāmavasaena vā uppajjanakasītaṃ.Uṇhanti aggisantāpaṃ, tassa vanadāhādīsu vā sambhavo daṭṭhabbo.Paṭihantīti bādhati. Yathā tadubhayavasena kāyacittānaṃ bādhanaṃ na hoti, evaṃ karoti. Sītuṇhabbhāhate hi sarīre vikkhittacitto bhikkhu yoniso padahituṃ na sakkoti.Vāḷamigānīti sīhabyagghādivāḷamige. Guttasenāsanañhi pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nisinnassa te parissayā na honti.Sarīsapeti ye keci sarante gacchante dīghajātike.Makaseti nidassanamattametaṃ, ḍaṃsādīnampi eteneva saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.Sisireti sisirakālavasena sattāhavaddhalikādivasena ca uppanne sisirasamphasse.Vuṭṭhiyoti yadā tadā uppannā vassavuṭṭhiyo.

295. In the verses of approval, sītanti, cold—the cold that arises due to internal disturbance of the dhātu or external change of season. Uṇhanti, heat—extreme heat; its occurrence should be seen in forest fires, etc. Paṭihantīti, ward off—it obstructs. He acts in such a way that there is no harm to body and mind by either of those two. For a bhikkhu with a body afflicted by cold and heat, with a distracted mind, is not able to apply himself wisely. Vāḷamigānīti, wild animals—wild animals such as lions and tigers. For those dangers do not occur to one who has entered a protected senāsana and sits having closed the door. Sarīsapeti, whatever long-bodied creatures creep and crawl. Makaseti, mosquitoes—this is just an example, and the same applies to gadflies, etc. Sisireti, in the cold season—the cold touch that arises due to the cold season and due to a seven-day old rash, etc. Vuṭṭhiyoti, rains—the rains that arise from time to time.

Vātātapo ghoroti rukkhagacchādīnaṃ ummūlabhañjanādivasena pavattiyā ghoro sarajaarajādibhedo vāto ceva gimhapariḷāhasamayesu uppattiyā ghoro sūriyātapo capaṭihaññatipaṭibāhīyati.Leṇatthanti nānārammaṇato cittaṃ nivattetvā paṭisallānārāmatthaṃ.Sukhatthanti vuttaparissayābhāvena phāsuvihāratthaṃ.Jhāyitunti aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesu yattha katthaci cittaṃ upanijjhāyituṃ.Vipassitunti aniccādito saṅkhāre sammasituṃ.

Vātātapo ghoroti, fierce wind and heat—the wind that is fierce due to its occurrence in the manner of uprooting and breaking trees, etc., or the wind that is fierce with various kinds of dust, and the sun's heat that is fierce due to its arising during times of summer heat; both paṭihaññati—are warded off. Leṇatthanti, for seclusion—for the purpose of withdrawing the mind from various objects and for the joy of seclusion. Sukhatthanti, for comfort—for the purpose of comfortable dwelling due to the absence of the aforementioned dangers. Jhāyitunti, to meditate—to contemplate the mind on any of the thirty-eight objects. Vipassitunti, to see clearly—to discern the saṅkhāras from the perspective of impermanence, etc.

Vihāreti patissaye.Kārayeti kārāpeyya.Rammeti manorame nivāsasukhe.Vāsayettha bahussuteti kāretvā pana ettha vihāresu bahussute sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme nivāseyya. Te nivāsento pana tesaṃ bahussutānaṃ yathā paccayehi kilamatho na hoti, evaṃ annañca pānañca vatthasenāsanāni ca dadeyya ujubhūtesu ajjhāsayasampannesu kammaphalānaṃ ratanattayaguṇānañca saddahanena vippasannena cetasā.

Vihāreti, in a dwelling place. Kārayeti, should have built. Rammeti, delightful—pleasant to dwell in. Vāsayettha bahussuteti, should have the learned dwell here—having had vihāras built, one should have the learned, virtuous, and those with good qualities dwell in these vihāras. But while having those learned ones dwell there, one should give them food, drink, and senāsanāni in such a way that their livelihood is not difficult, with a mind that is upright, with full of good intention, and with a heart full of faith in the fruits of kamma and the qualities of the Triple Gem.

‘‘te tassā’’ti gāthamāha. Tatthateti te bahussutā.Tassāti upāsakassa.Dhammaṃ desentīti sakalavaṭṭadukkhāpanūdanaṃ saddhammaṃ desenti.Yaṃ so dhammaṃ idhaññāyāti so puggalo yaṃ saddhammaṃ imasmiṃ sāsane sammā paṭipajjanena jānitvā aggamaggādhigamena anāsavo hutvā parinibbāyati.

‘‘te tassā’’ti, he spoke the verse, "they, for him." There, teti—those learned ones. Tassāti—for the upāsaka. Dhammaṃ desentīti, teach the Dhamma—they teach the true Dhamma, which removes all the suffering of the round of existence. Yaṃ so dhammaṃ idhaññāyāti, which, having known the Dhamma here—that person, having known that true Dhamma in this Dispensation by practicing rightly, having become taintless by the attainment of the highest path, is completely liberated.

So ca sabbadado hotīti āvāsadānasmiṃ dinne sabbadānaṃ dinnameva hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Tathā hi (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.42) dve tayo gāme piṇḍāya caritvā kiñci aladdhā āgatassapi chāyūdakasampannaṃ ārāmaṃ pavisitvā nahāyitvā patissaye muhuttaṃ nipajjitvā uṭṭhāya nisinnassa kāye balaṃ āharitvā pakkhittaṃ viya hoti, bahi vicarantassa ca kāye vaṇṇadhātu vātātapehi kilamati, patissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya muhuttaṃ nipannassa visabhāgasantati vūpasammati, sabhāgasantati patiṭṭhāti, vaṇṇadhātu āharitvā pakkhittā viya hoti, bahi vicarantassa ca pāde kaṇṭako vijjhati, khāṇu paharati, sarīsapādiparissayā ceva corabhayañca uppajjati, patissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nipannassa sabbe parissayā na honti, sajjhāyantassa dhammapītisukhaṃ, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontassa upasamasukhañca uppajjati bahiddhāvikkhepābhāvato, bahi vicarantassa ca sedā muccanti, akkhīni phandanti, senāsanaṃ pavisanakkhaṇe mañcapīṭhāni na paññāyanti, muhuttaṃ nisinnassa pana akkhipasādo āharitvā pakkhitto viya hoti, dvāravātapānamañcapīṭhādīni paññāyanti, etasmiñca āvāse vasantaṃ disvā manussā catūhi paccayehi sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘so ca sabbadado hoti, yo dadāti upassaya’’nti.

So ca sabbadado hotīti, and he is the giver of all—it is said, having made the assertion that when a gift of a dwelling is given, all gifts are given. For (see Saṃyutta Nikāya Aṭṭhakathā 1.1.42) for someone who has gone around for alms in two or three villages and has come back without obtaining anything, having entered a ārāma full of shade and water, having bathed, having lain down for a moment in a lodging, having gotten up and sat down, it is as if strength has been brought to the body and placed there; and for one wandering outside, the complexion in the body is tired by the wind and sun, having entered the lodging, having closed the door, the opposing continuum ceases, the similar continuum is established, it is as if the complexion has been brought and placed there; and for one wandering outside, a thorn pierces the foot, a stump strikes, dangers from creeping creatures arise, and there is fear of thieves, having entered the lodging, having closed the door, all dangers do not occur, for one reciting, there arises the happiness of the joy of the Dhamma, and for one attending to a meditation subject, there arises the happiness of serenity, due to the absence of external distractions, and for one wandering outside, sweat is released, the eyes twitch, when entering the senāsana, couches and seats are not apparent, but for one who has sat for a moment, it is as if the clarity of the eye has been brought and placed there, doorways, windows, couches, seats, etc., become apparent, and seeing one living in this dwelling, people respectfully attend to him with the four requisites. Therefore it was said, "And he is the giver of all, who gives a dwelling."

296.Āviñchanacchiddanti yattha aṅguliṃ pavesetvā dvāraṃ ākaḍḍhantā dvārabāhaṃ phusāpenti, tassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Āviñchanarajjunti kavāṭeyeva chiddaṃ katvā tattha pavesetvā yena rajjukena kaḍḍhantā dvāraṃ phusāpenti, taṃ āviñchanarajjukaṃ. Senāsanaparibhoge akappiyacammaṃ nāma natthīti dassanatthaṃ‘‘sacepi dīpinaṅguṭṭhena katā hoti, vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti vuttaṃ.Cetiye vedikāsadisanti vātapānabāhāsu cetiye vedikāya viya paṭṭikādīhi dassetvā kataṃ.Thambhakavātapānaṃnāma tiriyaṃ dārūni adatvā ujukaṃ ṭhitehi eva veṇusalākādīhi kataṃ.

296. Āviñchanacchidda means the hole where, after inserting a finger, they pull the door, making the doorjamb touch. This is a designation for that. Āviñchanarajju means a hole made right in the door panel, and the rope by which they pull, making the door touch, that is the āviñchanarajju. To show that there is no non-allowable leather in the use of the lodging, it was said, "Even if it is made with a leopard's tail, it is allowable." Cetiye vedikāsadisa means made on the window jambs, displaying with ledges etc., like a railing of a cetiya. Thambhakavātapānaṃ means made with upright pieces of wood or bamboo slats, etc., without placing the wood horizontally.

Vihārānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Account of Allowing Monastic Dwellings is finished.

Mañcapīṭhādianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Account of Allowing Couches, Chairs, etc.

297.Poṭakitūlanti erakatiṇatūlaṃ. Poṭakigahaṇañcettha tiṇajātīnaṃ nidassanamattanti āha‘‘yesaṃ kesañci tiṇajātikāna’’nti.Pañcavidhaṃ uṇṇāditūlampi vaṭṭatīti etthāpi ‘‘bimbohane’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Tūlapūritaṃ bhisiṃ apassayituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti keci vadanti, vaṭṭatīti apare.Upadahantīti ṭhapenti.Sīsappamāṇanti yattha galavāṭakato paṭṭhāya sabbasīsaṃ upadahanti, taṃ sīsappamāṇaṃ. Tañca ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato tiriyaṃ muṭṭhiratanaṃ hotīti dassetuṃ‘‘yassa vitthārato tīsu kaṇṇesū’’tiādimāha.Majjhaṭṭhānaṃ muṭṭhiratanaṃ hotīti bimbohanassa majjhaṭṭhānaṃ tiriyato muṭṭhiratanappamāṇaṃ hoti.Masūraketi cammamayabhisiyaṃ.Phusitāni dātunti saññākaraṇatthaṃ bindūni dātuṃ.

297. Poṭakitūla means eraka grass cotton. Here, taking "poṭaki" is only indicative as a beginning for types of grass, thus he said, "Of whatever types of grass." Pañcavidhaṃ uṇṇāditūlampi vaṭṭati (The five kinds of wool cotton are also allowable): here too, "with a pillow" should be brought in and connected. Some say, "It is not allowable to lean on a cushion stuffed with cotton," others say it is allowable. Upadahantī means they place. Sīsappamāṇa means the measurement of the head, where they place the whole head starting from the neck. And to show that, from the maximum limit, it is a fist-span across, he said, "Whose breadth is at the three corners," etc. Majjhaṭṭhānaṃ muṭṭhiratanaṃ hoti (The middle position is a fist-span): The middle position of the pillow is about a fist-span across. Masūrake means on a leather cushion. Phusitāni dātu means to give dots to make a mark.

298.Na nibandhatītianibandhanīyo,na allīyatīti attho.Paṭibāhetvāti maṭṭhaṃ katvā.

298. Na nibandhati: anibandhanīyo means, it does not stick, that is, it does not adhere. Paṭibāhetvā means having made it smooth.

Iṭṭhakācayādianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Account of Allowing Bricks, Clay, etc.

300.Rukkhaṃ vijjhitvāti rukkhadāruṃ vijjhitvā.Khāṇuke ākoṭetvāti dve dve khāṇuke ākoṭetvā.Taṃ āharimaṃ bhittipādanti vuttanayena khāṇuke ākoṭetvā kataṃyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ.Bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetunti mūlena bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā bhittipādassa upatthambhanavasena ussāpetvā khāṇukehi bhittipādaṃ ussāpetvā ṭhapetunti adhippāyo.Ubhato kuṭṭaṃ nīharitvā katapadesassāti yathā antodvārasamīpe nisinnehi ujukaṃ bahi oloketuṃ na sakkā hoti, evaṃ ubhohi passehi kuṭṭaṃ nīharitvā abhimukhe bhittiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā katapadesassa.Samantā pariyāgāroti samantato āviddhapamukhaṃ.Ugghāṭanakiṭikanti daṇḍehi ukkhipitvā ṭhapanakapadarakiṭikaṃ.

300. Rukkhaṃ vijjhitvā means having pierced a tree trunk. Khāṇuke ākoṭetvā means having hammered in two pegs. Taṃ āharimaṃ bhittipāda (That brought wall-foot): this was said referring to what was made by hammering in pegs, in the way described. Bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetu means the intention is to raise the wall-foot, supporting it, after having established it on the ground by the root, having raised the wall-foot with pegs. Ubhato kuṭṭaṃ nīharitvā katapadesassā means to the place made by extending the wall on both sides so that those sitting near the inner door cannot look directly outside by facing the wall towards the front. Samantā pariyāgāro means a covered space all around. Ugghāṭanakiṭika means a catch-peg for placing and lifting up with sticks.

Anāthapiṇḍikavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Story of Anāthapiṇḍika's Incident

304.Anāthapiṇḍikaseṭṭhivatthumhi (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.242)kenacideva karaṇīyenāti vāṇijjakammaṃ adhippetaṃ. Anāthapiṇḍiko kira rājagahaseṭṭhi ca aññamaññaṃ bhaginipatikā honti. Yadā rājagahe uṭṭhānakabhaṇḍaṃ samagghaṃ hoti, tadā rājagahaseṭṭhi taṃ gahetvā sakaṭasatehi sāvatthiṃ gantvā yojanamatte ṭhito attano āgatabhāvaṃ jānāpeti. Anāthapiṇḍiko paccuggantvā tassa mahāsakkāraṃ katvā ekaṃ yānaṃ āropetvā sāvatthiṃ pavisati. So sace bhaṇḍaṃ lahukaṃ vikkīyati, vikkiṇāti. No ce, bhaginighare ṭhapetvā pakkamati. Anāthapiṇḍikopi tatheva karoti. Svāyaṃ tadāpi teneva karaṇīyena agamāsi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.

304. In the story of Anāthapiṇḍika the merchant (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.242), kenacideva karaṇīyenā (by some business) intends the work of trade. It is said that Anāthapiṇḍika and the merchant of Rājagaha were brothers-in-law. When goods for sale were plentiful in Rājagaha, the merchant of Rājagaha would take them with a hundred carts and go to Sāvatthi, staying a yojana away and making his arrival known. Anāthapiṇḍika would go out to meet him, making great offerings to him, and bring him into Sāvatthi on a vehicle. If the goods sold quickly, he would sell them. If not, he would leave them at his sister's house and depart. Anāthapiṇḍika would do the same. So on this occasion, he went for that very business. This was said referring to that.

‘‘atha kho anāthapiṇḍikassa gahapatissa etadahosī’’tiādi.

"Atha kho anāthapiṇḍikassa gahapatissa etadahosī"tiādi (Then it occurred to Anāthapiṇḍika the householder):

Buddhoti tvaṃ gahapati vadesīti tassa kira mukhato buddhasaddaṃ sutvā anāthapiṇḍiko pañcavaṇṇaṃ pītiṃ paṭilabhati, sā tassa sīse uṭṭhahitvā yāva pādapiṭṭhiyā, pādapiṭṭhiyā uṭṭhāya yāva sīsā gacchati, ubhato uṭṭhāya majjhe osarati, majjhe uṭṭhāya ubhato gacchati. So pītiyā nirantaraṃ phuṭo ‘‘buddhoti tvaṃ gahapati vadesī’’ti evaṃ tikkhattuṃ pucchi.Akālo kho, gahapati, imaṃ kālaṃ taṃ bhagavantaṃdassanāya upasaṅkamitunti ‘‘buddhā nāma durāsadā āsīvisasadisā honti, satthā ca sivathikāya samīpe vasati, na sakkā tattha imāya velāya iminā gantu’’nti maññamāno evamāha.Buddhagatāya satiyā nipajjīti aññaṃ kiñci acintetvā buddhagatāya eva satiyā nipajji. Taṃ divasaṃ kirassa bhaṇḍasakaṭesu vā upaṭṭhākesu vā cittampi nuppajji, sāyamāsampi na akāsi. Sattabhūmikaṃ pana pāsādaṃ āruyha supaññattālaṅkatavarasayane ‘‘buddho buddho’’ti sajjhāyaṃ karontova nipajjitvā niddaṃ okkami.Tikkhattuṃ vuṭṭhāsi pabhātaṃ maññamānoti paṭhamayāme tāva vītivatte uṭṭhāya buddhaṃ anussari, athassa balavappasādo udapādi, pītiāloko ahosi, sabbatamaṃ vigacchi, dīpasahassujjalanaṃ viya canduṭṭhānasūriyuṭṭhānaṃ viya ca jātaṃ. So ‘‘pamādaṃ āpannomhi, vañcitomhi, sūriyo uggato’’ti uṭṭhāya ākāsatale ṭhatvā candaṃ oloketvā ‘‘ekova yāmo gato, aññe dve atthī’’ti puna pavisitvā nipajji, etenupāyena majjhimayāmāvasānepi pacchimayāmāvasānepi tikkhattuṃ uṭṭhāsi. Pacchimayāmāvasāne pana balavapaccūseyeva uṭṭhāya ākāsatalaṃ āgantvā mahādvārābhimukho ahosi, sattabhūmikadvāraṃ sayameva vivaṭaṃ ahosi, pāsādā oruyha antaravīthiṃ paṭipajji.

Buddhoti tvaṃ gahapati vadesī (You say 'Buddha,' householder): Having heard the word "Buddha" from his mouth, Anāthapiṇḍika attained five-colored joy. That rose to his head and went down to the soles of his feet; rising from the soles of his feet, it went up to his head; rising on both sides, it descended in the middle; rising in the middle, it went to both sides. Being constantly filled with joy, he asked three times, "You say 'Buddha,' householder." Akālo kho, gahapati, imaṃ kālaṃ taṃ bhagavantaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamitu (It is not the right time, householder, to approach that Blessed One for a visit): Thinking, "Buddhas are difficult to approach, like poisonous snakes, and the Teacher lives near a charnel ground; it is not possible to go there at this time," he said this. Buddhagatāya satiyā nipajjī (He lay down with mindfulness directed to the Buddha): Without thinking of anything else, he lay down with mindfulness directed only to the Buddha. It is said that on that day, he did not even think about the goods in the carts or the attendants, nor did he take the evening meal. But having ascended to a seven-storied mansion and lying down on a splendid bed adorned with decorations, he fell asleep reciting "Buddha, Buddha." Tikkhattuṃ vuṭṭhāsi pabhātaṃ maññamāno (He got up three times, thinking it was dawn): When the first watch had passed, he got up and recollected the Buddha; then a strong faith arose in him, a light of joy appeared, all darkness disappeared, as if a thousand lamps were lit, like the rising of the moon or the rising of the sun. He got up, thinking, "I have fallen into negligence, I have been deceived, the sun has risen," and standing on the terrace, he looked at the moon and thought, "Only one watch has passed, there are two more," and he went back in and lay down. In this way, he got up three times at the end of the middle watch and at the end of the last watch. But at the end of the last watch, very early in the morning, he got up, came to the terrace, and faced the main gate; the gate of the seven-storied building opened by itself, and descending from the palace, he went along the inner lane.

305.Amanussāti adhigatavisesā devatā. Tathā hi tā seṭṭhissa bhāvinisampattiṃ paccakkhato sampassamānā ‘‘ayaṃ mahāseṭṭhi ‘buddhupaṭṭhānaṃ gamissāmī’ti nikkhanto paṭhamadassaneneva sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ aggupaṭṭhāko hutvā asadisaṃ saṅghārāmaṃ katvā cātuddisassa ariyasaṅghassa anāvaṭadvāro bhavissati, na yuttamassa dvāraṃ pidahitu’’nti cintetvā dvāraṃ vivariṃsu.Antaradhāyīti rājagahaṃ kira ākiṇṇamanussaṃ, antonagare nava koṭiyo bahinagare navāti taṃ upanissāya aṭṭhārasa manussakoṭiyo vasanti. Avelāya matamanusse bahi nīharituṃ asakkontā aṭṭālake ṭhatvā bahidvāre khipanti. Mahāseṭṭhi nagarato bahi nikkhantamattova allasarīraṃ pādena akkami, aparampi piṭṭhipādena pahari, makkhikā uppatitvā pakiriṃsu, duggandho nāsāpuṭaṃ abhihani, buddhappasādo tanuttaṃ gato. Tenassa āloko antaradhāyi andhakāro pāturahosi pītivegassa tanubhāve taṃsamuṭṭhitarūpānaṃ paridubbalabhāvato.Saddamanussāvesīti ‘‘seṭṭhissa ussāhaṃ janessāmī’’ti suvaṇṇakiṅkiṇikaṃ ghaṭṭento viya madhurassarena saddaṃ anussāvesi.

305. Amanussā (Non-humans) means deities who have attained special qualities. For, seeing directly the future prosperity of the merchant, they thought, "This great merchant, having set out thinking 'I will go to attend upon the Buddha,' will be established in the fruit of stream-entry at the first sight, will become the foremost supporter of the three jewels, will build an unparalleled monastery, and will have its doors open to the Sangha in the four directions; it is not right to close the door to him," and they opened the door. Antaradhāyī (Disappeared): It is said that Rājagaha was crowded with people; nine koṭis lived inside the city and nine koṭis outside the city; based on that, eighteen koṭis of people lived there. Unable to take the dead outside at the wrong time, they would stand on the tower and throw them outside the gate. As soon as the great merchant went outside the city, he stepped on a fresh corpse with his foot, and struck another with the back of his foot; flies rose up and scattered, a foul smell assailed his nostrils, and the joy in the Buddha diminished. Therefore, the light disappeared and darkness appeared, because of the weakness of the forms arising from the diminished force of joy. Saddamanussāvesī (Caused a sound to be heard): He caused a sound to be heard in a sweet voice, as if ringing a golden bell, thinking, "I will generate enthusiasm in the merchant."

Sataṃ kaññāsahassānīti purimapadānipi imināva sahassa-padena saddhiṃ sambandhitabbāni. Yatheva hi sataṃ kaññāsahassāni, evaṃ sataṃ sahassāni hatthī, sataṃ sahassāni assā, sataṃ sahassāni rathāti ayamettha attho, iti ekekaṃ satasahassaṃ dīpitaṃ hoti.Padavītihārassāti padaṃ vītiharati etthātipadavītihāro. So dutavilambitaṃ akatvā samagamane dvinnaṃ padānaṃ antare muṭṭhiratanamattaṃ.Kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasinti taṃ ekaṃ padavītihāraṃ soḷasa bhāge katvā tato eko koṭṭhāso puna soḷasadhā, tato eko soḷasadhāti evaṃ soḷasa vāre soḷasadhā bhinnassa eko koṭṭhāso soḷasī kalā nāma, taṃ soḷasiṃ kalaṃ etāni cattāri satasahassāni na agghanti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sataṃ hatthisahassāni sataṃ assasahassāni sataṃ rathasahassāni sataṃ kaññāsahassāni, tā ca kho āmukkamaṇikuṇḍalā sakalajambudīparājadhītarovāti imasmā ettakā lābhā vihāraṃ gacchantassa tasmiṃ soḷasikalāsaṅkhāte padese laṅghanasādhanavasena pavattacetanāva uttaritarāti. Padaṃ vā vītiharati etenātipadavītihāro,tathāpavattā kusalacetanā, tassā phalaṃ soḷasadhā katvāti ca vadanti. Idaṃ pana vihāragamanaṃ kassa vasena gahitanti? Vihāraṃ gantvā anantarāyena sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahantassa vasena gahitaṃ. ‘‘Gandhamālādīhi pūjaṃ karissāmi, cetiyaṃ vandissāmi, dhammaṃ sossāmi, dīpapūjaṃ karissāmi, saṅghaṃ nimantetvā dānaṃ dassāmi, sikkhāpadesu vā saraṇesu vā patiṭṭhahissāmī’’ti gacchatopi vasena vaṭṭatiyeva.

Sataṃ kaññāsahassānī (A hundred thousand maidens): The preceding words should also be connected with this word "thousand." Just as there are a hundred thousand maidens, so too there are a hundred thousand elephants, a hundred thousand horses, a hundred thousand chariots; this is the meaning here, thus each hundred thousand is indicated. Padavītihārassā means padaṃ vītiharati etthāti padavītihāro (where the foot oversteps, therefore, overstepping). That is, without delaying even a little, at the simultaneous arrival, the space between the two feet is about a fist-span. Kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasi (A sixteenth part is not worth): Having divided that one overstepping into sixteen parts, then one part of that again into sixteen, then one-sixteenth of that, thus one part divided sixteen times into sixteen is called a sixteenth part; these four hundred thousands are not worth that sixteenth part. This was said: a hundred thousand elephants, a hundred thousand horses, a hundred thousand chariots, a hundred thousand maidens, and those too wearing necklaces and earrings, daughters of all the kings of Jambudīpa—compared to this much gain, the consciousness that arises in the place called a sixteenth part, for the purpose of leaping, of one going to the monastery is much greater. Or padaṃ vītiharati etenāti padavītihāro (by which the foot oversteps, therefore, overstepping), the wholesome consciousness thus arisen, they also say its fruit is sixteenfold. But whose going to the monastery is taken in this case? It is taken in the case of one who, having gone to the monastery, is established in the fruit of stream-entry without obstruction. It is allowable in the case of one who goes thinking, "I will make offerings with perfumes and garlands, I will worship the cetiya, I will listen to the Dhamma, I will make a lamp offering, I will invite the Sangha and give alms, or I will be established in the precepts or the refuges."

Andhakāro antaradhāyīti so kira cintesi ‘‘ahaṃ ekakoti saññaṃ karomi, amanussā ca me anugāmino sahāyā atthi, kasmā bhāyāmī’’ti sūro ahosi. Athassa balavā buddhappasādo udapādi, tasmā andhakāro antaradhāyi. Sesavāresupi eseva nayo.Āloko pāturahosīti purimabuddhesu cirakālaparicayasambhūtassa balavato pasādassa vasena uppannāya uḷārāya buddhārammaṇāya pītiyā samuṭṭhāpito vipassanobhāsasadiso sātisayo cittapaccayautusamuṭṭhāno āloko pāturahosi. Devatāhi katotipi vadanti, purimoyevettha yuttataro.Ehi sudattāti so kira seṭṭhi gacchamānova cintesi ‘‘imasmiṃ loke bahū pūraṇakassapādayo titthiyā ‘mayaṃ buddhā, mayaṃ buddhā’ti vadanti, kathaṃ nu kho ahaṃ satthu buddhabhāvaṃ jāneyya’’nti. Athassa etadahosi ‘‘mayhaṃ guṇavasena uppannaṃ nāmaṃ mahājano jānāti, kuladattiyaṃ pana me nāmaṃ aññatra mayā na koci jānāti, sace buddho bhavissati, kuladattikanāmena maṃ ālapissatī’’ti. Satthā tassa cittaṃ ñatvā evamāha.

Andhakāro antaradhāyī (The darkness disappeared): He thought, "I will make a vow of one koṭi, and I have non-human companions who follow me, why am I afraid?" and he became brave. Then a strong joy in the Buddha arose in him; therefore, the darkness disappeared. The same method applies in the remaining instances. Āloko pāturahosī (Light appeared): Because of the strong joy that arose based on the long-standing familiarity with the previous Buddhas, the extraordinary light that arose, similar to the light of insight, was a very special light arising from mind-conditioning and seasonal change. Some say it was made by the deities, but the former is more fitting here. Ehi sudattā (Come, Sudatta): It is said that the merchant, while going, thought, "In this world, many ascetics such as Pūraṇa Kassapa say, 'We are Buddhas, we are Buddhas,' how shall I know the Buddha-nature of the Teacher?" Then it occurred to him, "The name that arose in me based on my virtue is known by the great multitude, but my family name is not known by anyone other than me; if he is a Buddha, he will address me by my family name." The Teacher, knowing his thought, said this.

Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto.Āsattiyoti rūpādīsu āsañjanaṭṭhena āsattiyo, taṇhāyo.Santinti kilesavūpasamaṃ.Pappuyyāti aggamaggena patvā. Sesamettha pāḷianusāreneva veditabbaṃ. Yañcettha anuttānamatthaṃ, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttameva.

Parinibbuto (Completely extinguished) means completely extinguished by the extinction of defilements. Āsattiyo means attachments because of clinging to forms, etc., the cravings. Santi means the pacification of defilements. Pappuyyā means having attained by the supreme path. The rest here should be understood according to the Pali itself. And what is unstated here, that is stated in the commentary.

306.Vayamevaveyyāyikanti āha‘‘veyyāyikanti vayakaraṇaṃ vuccatī’’ti.

306. Vayameva veyyāyika (indeed, veyyāyika) thus he said, "Veyyāyikaṃ is called the act of wasting away."

Anāthapiṇḍikavatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Story of Anāthapiṇḍika's Incident is finished.

Aggāsanādianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Account of Allowing Chief Seats, etc.

310-311.Dakkhiṇodakanti aggato upanīyamānaṃ dakkhiṇodakaṃ.Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesīti (jā. aṭṭha. 1.1.36 tittirajātakavaṇṇanā) tehi bhikkhūhi attano attano rucivasena aggāsanādirahānaṃ kathitakāle ‘‘na, bhikkhave, mayhaṃ sāsane aggāsanādīni patvā khattiyakulā pabbajito pamāṇaṃ, na brāhmaṇakulā, na gahapatikulā pabbajito, na vinayadharo, na suttantiko, na ābhidhammiko, na paṭhamajjhānādilābhino, na sotāpannādayo pamāṇaṃ, atha kho, bhikkhave, imasmiṃ sāsane yathāvuḍḍhaṃ abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ añjalikammaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ kattabbaṃ, aggāsanaṃ aggodakaṃ aggapiṇḍo laddhabbo, idamettha pamāṇaṃ, tasmā vuḍḍhataro bhikkhu etesaṃ anucchaviko. Idāni kho pana, bhikkhave, sāriputto mayhaṃ aggasāvako anudhammacakkappavattako mamānantarasenāsanaṃ laddhuṃ arahati. So imaṃ rattiṃ senāsanaṃ alabhanto rukkhamūle vītināmesi. Tumhe idāneva evaṃ agāravā appatissā, gacchante gacchante kāle kinti katvā viharissathā’’ti vatvā atha nesaṃ ovādadānatthāya ‘‘pubbe, bhikkhave, tiracchānagatāpi ‘na kho panetaṃ amhākaṃ patirūpaṃ, yaṃ mayaṃ aññamaññaṃ agāravā appatissā asabhāgavuttino vihareyyāma, amhesu mahallakataraṃ jānitvā tassa abhivādanādīni karissāmā’ti sādhukaṃ vīmaṃsitvā ‘ayaṃ mahallako’ti ñatvā tassa abhivādanādīni katvā devapathaṃ pūrayamānā gatā’’ti vatvā atītaṃ āharitvā dassetuṃ bhikkhū āmantesi.

310-311. Dakkhiṇodaka means dakkhiṇodaka offered first. Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesī (as in Jā. Aṭṭha. 1.1.36 Tittirajātakavaṇṇanā): When those monks were speaking about the lack of preferential seating and such according to their own preferences, (the Buddha said:) "No, monks, in my Dispensation, having attained preferential seating and such is not the measure for one gone forth from a Khattiya family, nor from a Brahmin family, nor from a householder's family, nor is being a Vinaya-holder, nor a Suttanta-holder, nor an Abhidhamma-holder, nor one who has attained the first jhāna and so on, nor a Sotāpanna and so on the measure. But, monks, in this Dispensation, respect, rising, paying homage with joined palms, and proper etiquette should be done according to seniority; preferential seating, preferential water, and preferential alms should be received. This is the measure here, therefore a more senior monk is suitable for these. Now, monks, Sāriputta, my chief disciple, the follower of the Wheel of Dhamma, deserves to obtain the seat nearest to me. Without obtaining a lodging tonight, he spent the night at the foot of a tree. Now that you are so disrespectful and without deference, how will you live in the future as time goes on?" Saying this, in order to give them advice, he addressed the monks, "In the past, monks, even animals thought, ‘It is not proper for us to live disrespectfully and without deference to each other, not sharing properly. Having recognized the eldest among us, we will show respect and so on to him,’ having carefully considered and recognized ‘This one is the eldest,’ they showed respect and so on to him, and went forth fulfilling the path of the gods," saying this, he summoned the monks to show the past.

Ye vuḍḍhamapacāyantīti jātivuḍḍho vayovuḍḍho guṇavuḍḍhoti tayo vuḍḍhā. Tesu jātisampannojātivuḍḍhonāma, vaye ṭhitovayovuḍḍhonāma, guṇasampannoguṇavuḍḍhonāma. Tesu guṇasampanno vayovuḍḍho imasmiṃ ṭhāne vuḍḍhoti adhippeto.Apacāyantīti jeṭṭhāpacāyikakammena pūjenti.Dhammassa kovidāti jeṭṭhāpacāyanadhammassa kovidā kusalā.Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve.Pāsaṃsāti pasaṃsārahā.Samparāye ca suggatīti samparetabbe imaṃ lokaṃ hitvā gantabbe paralokepi tesaṃ sugatiyeva hotīti attho. Ayaṃ panettha piṇḍattho – bhikkhave, khattiyā vā hontu brāhmaṇā vā vessā vā suddā vā gahaṭṭhā vā pabbajitā vā tiracchānagatā vā, ye keci sattā jeṭṭhāpacitikamme chekā kusalā guṇasampannānaṃ vayovuḍḍhānaṃ apacitiṃ karonti, te imasmiñca attabhāve jeṭṭhāpacitikārakāti pasaṃsaṃ vaṇṇanaṃ thomanaṃ labhanti, kāyassa ca bhedā sagge nibbattantīti.

Ye vuḍḍhamapacāyantī: There are three types of elders: elder by birth, elder by age, and elder by virtue. Among them, one endowed with birth is called jātivuḍḍho, one established in age is called vayovuḍḍho, one endowed with virtue is called guṇavuḍḍho. Among them, the virtuous one who is old in age is considered "elder" in this context. Apacāyantī means they honor with the practice of venerating elders. Dhammassa kovidā means skilled and proficient in the Dhamma of venerating elders. Diṭṭheva dhamme means in this very existence. Pāsaṃsā means worthy of praise. Samparāye ca suggatī means in the next world, when they have passed away and gone from this world, they will have a good destination. The gist here is this: Monks, whether they are Khattiyas, Brahmins, Vessas, or Suddas, householders or renunciants, or even animals, whatever beings are clever and skilled in the practice of venerating elders and show respect to those who are virtuous and old in age, they receive praise, commendation, and glorification in this very existence as venerators of elders, and upon the dissolution of the body, they are reborn in heaven.

Aggāsanādianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the discourse on the allowance of preferential seating, etc., is finished.

Āsanappaṭibāhanādikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on Rejecting Seats, etc.

313-4.Uddissakatanti gihīhi saṅghaṃ uddissa kataṃ.Gihivikatanti gihīhi kataṃ paññattaṃ, gihisantakanti vuttaṃ hoti.Atisamīpaṃ agantvāti bhikkhūnaṃ āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ agantvā.

313-4. Uddissakata means made by laypeople dedicating it to the Saṅgha. Gihivikata means made and designated by laypeople; it is said to belong to laypeople. Atisamīpaṃ agantvā means without going to a place very close to the monks.

Senāsanaggāhāpakasammutikathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on the Appointment of a Lodgings-Assigner

318.Paccayenevahi taṃ paṭijagganaṃ labhissatīti tasmiṃ senāsane mahātherā tassa paccayassa kāraṇā aññattha agantvā vasantāyeva naṃ paṭijaggissantīti attho.Ubbhaṇḍikā bhavissantīti ukkhittabhaṇḍā bhavissanti, attano attano parikkhāre gahetvā tattha tattha vicarissantīti attho.Dīghasālāti caṅkamanasālā.Maṇḍalamāḷoupaṭṭhānasālā.Anudahatīti pīḷeti.Jambudīpe panāti ariyadese bhikkhū sandhāya vuttaṃ. Te kira tathā paññāpenti.Na gocaragāmo ghaṭṭetabboti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāveti‘‘na tattha manussā vattabbā’’tiādinā.Vitakkaṃ chinditvāti ‘‘iminā nīhārena gacchantaṃ disvā nivāretvā paccaye dassantī’’ti evarūpaṃ vitakkaṃ anuppādetvā.Tesu ce ekoti tesu manussesu eko paṇḍitapuriso.Bhaṇḍapaṭicchādananti paṭicchādanakabhaṇḍaṃ, sarīrapaṭicchādanaṃ cīvaranti attho.

318. Paccayeneva hi taṃ paṭijagganaṃ labhissatī means in that lodging, the senior monks will look after it due to that requisite, staying there without going elsewhere. Ubbhaṇḍikā bhavissantī means they will be with their possessions packed, they will wander here and there taking their own requisites. Dīghasālā means a walking hall. Maṇḍalamāḷo means an assembly hall. Anudahatī means it oppresses. Jambudīpe panā is said referring to the monks in the Ariya country. It seems they designate that way. Na gocaragāmo ghaṭṭetabbo: The meaning is already stated, it explains it with "na tattha manussā встановā" and so on. Vitakkaṃ chinditvā means without generating such thoughts as "seeing him going with this method, they will prevent him and show the requisites." Tesu ce eko means one wise person among those people. Bhaṇḍapaṭicchādana means a covering cloth, a robe for covering the body.

Paṭijaggitabbānīti sammajjanādīhi paṭijaggitabbāni.Muṇḍavedikāyāti cetiyassa hammiyavedikāya.Hammiyavedikāti ca cetiyassa upari caturassavediyo vuccati.Paṭikkammāti vihārato apasakkitvā.Upanikkhepanti khettaṃ vā nāḷikerādiārāmaṃ vā kahāpaṇādīni vā ārāmikādīnaṃ niyyātetvā ‘‘ito uppannā vaḍḍhi vassāvāsikatthāya hotū’’ti dinnaṃ.Vattaṃ katvāti tasmiṃ senāsane kattabbavattaṃ katvā.

Paṭijaggitabbānī means they should be looked after with sweeping and so on. Muṇḍavedikāyā means on the bare terrace of the Cetiya. Hammiyavedikā means the square terrace above the Cetiya is called. Paṭikkammā means without retreating from the monastery. Upanikkhepa means having given a field, a grove of coconut trees, or kahāpaṇas and so on to the ārāmikas and so on, saying "may the increase arising from this be for the rains-residence." Vattaṃ katvā means having done the duties to be done in that lodging.

Puggalavaseneva kātabbanti parato vakkhamānanayena ‘‘bhikkhū cīvarena kilamanti, ettakaṃ nāma taṇḍulabhāgaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cīvaraṃ kātuṃ ruccatī’’tiādinā puggalaparāmāsavaseneva kātabbaṃ, ‘‘saṅgho cīvarena kilamatī’’tiādinā pana saṅghaparāmāsavasena na kātabbaṃ.Cīvarapaccayanti cīvarasaṅkhātaṃ paccayaṃ.Vuttantimahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Kasmā evaṃ vuttanti āha‘‘evañhi navako vuḍḍhatarassa, vuḍḍho ca navakassa gāhessatī’’ti, yasmā attanāva attano pāpetuṃ na sakkā, tasmā dvīsu sammatesu navako vuḍḍhatarassa, vuḍḍho ca navakassāti ubho aññamaññaṃ gāhessantīti adhippāyo. Sammatasenāsanaggāhāpakassa āṇattiyā aññena gāhitepi gāho ruhatiyevāti veditabbaṃ.Aṭṭhapi soḷasapi janesammannituṃ vaṭṭatīti kiṃ visuṃ visuṃ sammannituṃ vaṭṭati, udāhu ekatoti? Ekatopi vaṭṭati. Niggahakammameva hi saṅgho saṅghassa na karoti, sammutidānaṃ pana bahūnampi ekato kātuṃ vaṭṭati, teneva sattasatikakkhandhake ubbāhikasammutiyaṃ aṭṭhapi janā ekato sammatāti.

Puggalavaseneva kātabbaṃ means it should be done only with reference to individuals, according to the method to be explained later, such as "the monks are troubled by robes, such and such a portion of rice is pleasing to the monks for making robes," but it should not be done with reference to the Saṅgha, such as "the Saṅgha is troubled by robes." Cīvarapaccayaṃ means the requisite consisting of robes. Vuttaṃ means stated in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā. Why is it stated this way? He says, "evañhi navako vuḍḍhatarassa, vuḍḍho ca navakassa gāhessatī", because it is not possible for oneself to deliver it oneself, therefore, when the two have agreed, both the junior will take from the senior, and the senior from the junior. It should be understood that even if someone else takes it by the order of the appointed lodging-assigner, the taking is still valid. Aṭṭhapi soḷasapi jane sammannituṃ vaṭṭatī: Is it proper to appoint them separately, or together? It is proper to appoint them together as well. Indeed, the Saṅgha does not do punishment (niggahakamma) to the Saṅgha, but the granting of appointment can be done to many at once, therefore, in the Sattasatika Khandhaka, eight people are appointed together in the matter of expelling.

Maggoti magge katadīghasālā.Pokkharaṇīti nahāyantānaṃ pokkharaṇiyaṃ katasālā.Rukkhamūlādayo channā kavāṭabaddhāva senāsanaṃ.Vijaṭetvāti viyojetvā, visuṃ visuṃ katvāti attho.Āvāsesūti senāsanesu.Pakkhipitvāti etthapakkhipanaṃnāma tesu vasantānaṃ ito uppannavassāvāsikadānaṃ.Pavisitabbanti aññehi bhikkhūhi tasmiṃ mahālābhe pariveṇe vasitvā cetiye vattaṃ katvāva lābho gahetabboti adhippāyo.

Maggo means a long hall built on the road. Pokkharaṇī means a hall built at the pond for bathing. Rukkhamūlādayo are lodgings that are covered and have doors. Vijaṭetvā means separating, having made it separate. Āvāsesū means in the lodgings. Pakkhipitvā: Here, pakkhipanaṃ means the rains-residence gift arising from here to those living there. Pavisitabbaṃ means other monks should take the gain only after residing in that area of great benefit and performing the duties at the Cetiya.

Paccayaṃ vissajjetīti cīvarapaccayaṃ nādhivāseti.Ayampīti tena vissaṭṭhapaccayopi.Upanibandhitvā gāhetabbanti ‘‘imasmiṃ rukkhe vā maṇḍape vā vasitvā cetiye vattaṃ katvā gaṇhathā’’ti evaṃ upanibandhitvā gāhetabbaṃ. ‘‘Kattha nu kho vasissāmi, kattha vasantassa phāsu bhavissati, kattha vā paccayo bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ uppannena vitakkena caratītivitakkacāriko. Araññavihāresu parissayavijānanatthaṃ icchitabbattā‘‘pañca pañca ukkā koṭṭetabbā’’ti vuttaṃ.

Paccayaṃ vissajjetī means he does not dwell on the robe-requisite. Ayampī means even that requisite released by him. Upanibandhitvā gāhetabbaṃ means it should be taken after specifying, "Residing in this tree or pavilion and performing the duties at the Cetiya, take it." The one who wanders with thoughts arising, such as "Where will I reside, where will it be comfortable for me to reside, or where will there be requisites?" is called vitakkacāriko. Because it is desirable to know the dangers in forest monasteries, it is said "pañca pañca ukkā koṭṭetabbā."

Vattanti katikavattaṃ.Tividhampīti pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhavasena tividhampi.Sodhetvā pabbājethāti bhabbe ācārakulaputte upaparikkhitvā pabbājetha.Dasavatthukakathānāma appicchakathā santuṭṭhikathā pavivekakathā asaṃsaggakathā vīriyārambhakathā sīlakathā samādhikathā paññākathā vimuttikathā vimuttiñāṇadassanakathā.

Vattaṃ means customary duties. Tividhampī means all three kinds, in terms of learning, practice, and realization. Sodhetvā pabbājethā means having examined sons of good families who are capable and well-behaved, ordain them. Dasavatthukakathā means the talk on having few wishes, the talk on contentment, the talk on seclusion, the talk on non-association, the talk on energetic effort, the talk on virtue, the talk on concentration, the talk on wisdom, the talk on liberation, the talk on the knowledge and vision of liberation.

viggāhikaṃ. Caturārakkhaṃ ahāpentāti buddhānussati mettā asubhaṃ maraṇassatīti imaṃ caturārakkhaṃ aparihāpentā.Dantakaṭṭhakhādanavattaṃ ācikkhitabbanti etthadantakaṭṭhakhādanavattaṃyo devasikaṃ saṅghamajjhe osarati, tena sāmaṇerādīhi āharitvā bhikkhūnaṃ yathāsukhaṃ paribhuñjanatthāya dantakaṭṭhamāḷake nikkhittesu dantakaṭṭhesu divase divase ekameva dantakaṭṭhaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Yo pana devasikaṃ na osarati, padhānaghare vasitvā dhammassavane vā uposathagge vā dissati, tena pamāṇaṃ sallakkhetvā cattāri pañca dantakaṭṭhāni attano vasanaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā khāditabbāni. Tesu khīṇesu sace punapi dantakaṭṭhamāḷake bahūni hontiyeva, punapi āharitvā khāditabbāni. Yadi pana pamāṇaṃ asallakkhetvā āharati, tesu akhīṇesuyeva māḷake khīyati, tato keci therā ‘‘yehi gahitāni, te paṭiharantū’’ti vadeyyuṃ, keci ‘‘khādantu, puna sāmaṇerā āharissantī’’ti. Tasmā vivādaparihāratthaṃ pamāṇaṃ sallakkhetabbaṃ. Gahaṇe pana doso natthi, maggaṃ gacchantenapi ekaṃ vā dve vā thavikāya pakkhipitvā gantabbanti.Bhikkhācāravattaṃvattakkhandhake piṇḍacārikavatte āvi bhavissati.

viggāhikaṃ. Caturārakkhaṃ ahāpentā means without abandoning these four protections: mindfulness of the Buddha, loving-kindness, contemplation of unattractiveness, and mindfulness of death. Dantakaṭṭhakhādanavattaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ: Here, dantakaṭṭhakhādanavattaṃ: The novice and others, who descend into the midst of the Saṅgha daily, should take one toothbrush each day from the toothbrushes placed in the toothbrush stand, which they have brought for the monks to use comfortably. But one who does not descend daily, but stays in the meditation hall and is seen at the Dhamma listening or at the uposatha hall, should estimate the amount and place four or five toothbrushes in his own dwelling place to be chewed. If, when those are used up, there are still many in the toothbrush stand, they should be brought again and chewed. But if he brings without estimating the amount, and those in the stand dwindle while his are not used up, then some elders might say, "Let those who took them return them," and some might say, "Let them chew them, the novices will bring more." Therefore, to avoid disputes, the amount should be estimated. There is no fault in taking, even one going on the road can put one or two in his bag and go. Bhikkhācāravattaṃ will be clear in the section on duties, in the duty of alms-round.

Pattaṭṭhāneti vassaggena āgantukabhikkhuno pattaṭṭhāne. Tesaṃ chinnavassattā ‘‘sādiyantāpi hi te neva vassāvāsikassa sāmino’’ti vuttaṃ, paṭhamaṃyeva katikāya katattā khīyantāpi ca āvāsikā neva adātuṃ labhantīti vuttaṃ.Bhatiniviṭṭhanti bhatiṃ katvā viya niviṭṭhaṃ pariyiṭṭhaṃ.Saṅghikaṃ pana apalokanakammaṃ katvā gāhitanti tatruppādaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Paccayavasena gāhitanti dāyakānaṃ vassāvāsikapaccayavasena gāhitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, vassaṃvuttho bhikkhu vibbhamati, saṅghasseveta’’nti (mahāva. 374-375) vacanato‘‘gataṭṭhāne…pe… saṅghikaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.Manusseti dāyakamanusse.Varabhāgaṃ sāmaṇerassāti paṭhamabhāgassa gāhitattā vuttaṃ.

Pattaṭṭhāne means at the bowl stand of a visiting monk who has spent the rains. Because their rains-residence is broken, it is said, "Even if they consent, they are not the owners of the rains-residence," and because it was agreed upon in the first place, it is said that even if they are depleted, the residents cannot give it away. Bhatiniviṭṭha means invested as if having made a payment, arranged, allocated. Saṅghikaṃ pana apalokanakammaṃ katvā gāhitaṃ is said referring to that which arises there. Paccayavasena gāhitaṃ is said referring to that which is taken by way of requisites for rains-residence for the donors. Because of the saying, "Here, monks, a monk who has spent the rains is distracted, this belongs to the Saṅgha," (Mahāva. 374-375) it is said "gataṭṭhāne…pe… saṅghikaṃ hotī." Manusse means the donor people. Varabhāgaṃ sāmaṇerassā is said because the first portion was taken.

Senāsanaggāhāpakasammutikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Discourse on the Appointment of a Lodgings-Assigner is finished.

Upanandavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Upananda Story

319.Yaṃ tayā tattha senāsanaṃ gahitaṃ…pe… idha muttaṃ hotīti yaṃ tayā tattha gāmakāvāse pacchā senāsanaṃ gahitaṃ, taṃ te gaṇhanteneva idha sāvatthiyaṃ paṭhamagahitasenāsanaṃ muttaṃ hoti.Idha dānāhaṃ…pe… tatrāpi muttanti ‘‘idānāhaṃ, āvuso, imasmiṃ gāmakāvāse gahitasenāsanaṃ muñcāmī’’ti vadantena tatrāpi gāmakāvāse gahitasenāsanaṃ muttaṃ.

319. Yaṃ tayā tattha senāsanaṃ gahitaṃ…pe… idha muttaṃ hotī means the lodging that was taken by you later in that village residence, that lodging taken first in Sāvatthi is released by you taking it. Idha dānāhaṃ…pe… tatrāpi muttaṃ means by saying, "Now, friend, I release the lodging taken in this village residence," the lodging taken in that village residence is also released.

320.Dīghāsanaṃnāma mañcapīṭhavinimuttaṃ yaṃ kiñci ekato sukhaṃ nisīdituṃ pahoti. Hatthimhi nakho assātihatthinakho. ‘‘Pāsādassa nakho nāma heṭṭhimaparicchedo, so ca hatthikumbhe patiṭṭhito’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Gihivikatanīhārena labbhantīti gihivikatanīhārena paribhuñjituṃ labbhanti, tehi attharitvā dinnāneva nisīdituṃ labbhanti, na sayaṃ atthatāni attharāpitāni vā.

320. Dīghāsanaṃ means anything that is not a bed or a chair and is able to comfortably seat someone at once. Hatthimhi nakho assāti hatthinakho. It is said in the Gaṇṭhipadas "The 'nail of the palace' is the lowest enclosure, and it is established on the elephant's forehead." Gihivikatanīhārena labbhantī means they can be obtained to be used in the way designated by laypeople; they can only sit on those spread out and given by them, not on those they have spread out themselves or had spread out.

Avissajjiyavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Discourse on Things That Cannot Be Given Away

321.Arañjaroti bahuudakagaṇhanakā mahācāṭi. Jalaṃ gaṇhituṃ alantiarañjaro. ‘‘Vaṭṭacāṭi viya hutvā thokaṃ dīghamukho majjhe paricchedaṃ dassetvā kato’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Pañcanimmalalocanoti maṃsadibbadhammabuddhasamantacakkhuvasena pañcalocano.

321. Arañjaro means a large jar for holding a lot of water. That which is sufficient to hold water is arañjaro. It is said in the Gaṇṭhipadas "Made like a round jar, with a slightly long mouth, showing a division in the middle." Pañcanimmalalocano means the one with five eyes in terms of the flesh eye, the divine eye, the Dhamma eye, the Buddha eye, and the All-Seeing Eye.

Thāvarenaca thāvaraṃ garubhaṇḍena ca garubhaṇḍanti ettha pañcasu koṭṭhāsesu purimadvayaṃ thāvaraṃ, pacchimattayaṃ garubhaṇḍanti veditabbaṃ.Jānāpetvāti bhikkhusaṅghaṃ jānāpetvā.Kappiyamañcā sampaṭicchitabbāti ‘‘saṅghassa demā’’ti dinnaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘vihārassa demā’’ti vadanti, suvaṇṇarajatamayādiakappiyamañcepi sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭati.Na kevalaṃ…pe… parivattetuṃ vaṭṭantīti iminā athāvarena thāvarampi athāvarampi parivattetuṃ vaṭṭatīti dasseti. Thāvarena athāvarameva hi parivattetuṃ na vaṭṭati.Akappiyaṃ vā mahagghaṃ kappiyaṃ vāti etthaakappiyaṃnāma suvaṇṇamayamañcādi akappiyabhisibimbohanāni ca.Mahagghaṃ kappiyaṃnāma dantamayamañcādi pāvārādikappiyaattharaṇādīni ca.

Thāvarena ca thāvaraṃ garubhaṇḍena ca garubhaṇḍaṃ: Here, of the five sections, the first two should be understood as immovable, and the last three as heavy items. Jānāpetvā means having informed the Saṅgha. Kappiyamañcā sampaṭicchitabbā is said referring to that which is given saying "we give to the Saṅgha." But if they say "we give to the monastery," even immovable and unallowable couches made of gold and silver can be accepted. Na kevalaṃ…pe… parivattetuṃ vaṭṭantī: With this, he shows that immovable and movable things can be exchanged for immovable things. Indeed, only movable things should not be exchanged for immovable things. Akappiyaṃ vā mahagghaṃ kappiyaṃ vā: Here, akappiyaṃ means unallowable things like couches made of gold and so on, and unallowable items that spoil the eyes. Mahagghaṃ kappiyaṃ means allowable things of great value, like couches made of ivory and so on, and unallowable spreads like fine blankets and so on.

Pārihāriyaṃ na vaṭṭatīti attano santakaṃ viya gahetvā pariharituṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Gihivikatanīhāreneva paribhuñjitabba’’nti iminā sace ārāmikādayo paṭisāmetvā paṭidenti, paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti dasseti.‘‘Paṇṇasūcināma lekhanī’’timahāgaṇṭhipadevuttaṃ.

Pārihāriyaṃ na vaṭṭatī means it is not suitable to maintain (the dwelling) by taking it as if it were one's own property. "It should be used in the manner of being released by a householder" — by this, it indicates that if the ārāmikas (monastery attendants) or others return it after receiving it back, it is suitable to use. "Paṇṇasūci, namely, a writing instrument" — it is said in the Mahāgaṇṭhipada.

‘‘Aḍḍhabāhūti kapparato paṭṭhāya yāva aṃsakūṭa’’ntigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Aḍḍhabāhunāma vidatthicaturaṅgulantipi vadanti.Tatthajātakāti saṅghikabhūmiyaṃ jātā.Aṭṭhaṅgulasūcidaṇḍamattoti dīghato aṭṭhaṅgulamatto pariṇāhato paṇṇasūcidaṇḍamatto. Muñjapabbajānaṃyeva pāḷiyaṃ visuṃ āgatattā‘‘muñjaṃ pabbajañca ṭhapetvā’’ti vuttaṃ.Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇoti dīghato aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇo.Ghaṭṭanaphalakaṃnāma yattha ṭhapetvā rajitacīvaraṃ hatthena ghaṭṭenti.Ghaṭṭanamuggaronāma anuvātādighaṭṭanatthaṃ katoti vadanti.Ambaṇanti phalakehi pokkharaṇīsadisaṃ katapānīyabhājanaṃ.Rajanadoṇīti yattha pakkarajanaṃ ākiritvā ṭhapenti.Bhūmattharaṇaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti akappiyacammaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Paccattharaṇagatikanti iminā mañcapīṭhepi attharituṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Pāvārādipaccattharaṇampi garubhaṇḍanti eke, noti apare, vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ.Muṭṭhipaṇṇanti tālapaṇṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

"Aḍḍhabāhu means from the razor to the shoulder joint" — it is said in the Gaṇṭhipada. Aḍḍhabāhu means a span of twelve finger-widths, some say. Tatthajātakā means those that grew on land belonging to the Saṅgha. Aṭṭhaṅgulasūcidaṇḍamatto means about eight finger-widths in length and about the size of a paṇṇasūci handle in circumference. Because muñja and pabbaja are mentioned separately in the Pali, therefore it is said "excluding muñja and pabbaja." Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇo means about eight finger-widths in length. Ghaṭṭanaphalakaṃ means the board on which a dyed robe is placed and rubbed with the hand. Ghaṭṭanamuggaro means it is said to be made for the purpose of rubbing against the wind, etc. Ambaṇa means a water container made like a pond with planks. Rajanadoṇī means where dyes are poured and kept. Bhūmattharaṇaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī is said with reference to non-kappiya (allowable) hides. Paccattharaṇagatika by this, it indicates that it is also suitable to spread on beds and seats. Some say that pāvāra (blanket) and other spreads are heavy items, others say not; it should be decided after examining. Muṭṭhipaṇṇa is said with reference to palm leaves.

Description of the Allocation of New Construction

323.Kiñcideva samādapetvā kāressatīti sāmikoyeva kañci bhikkhuṃ samādapetvā kāressati.Utukāle paṭibāhituṃ na labhatīti hemantagimhesu aññe sampattabhikkhū paṭibāhituṃ na labhati.Tibhāganti tatiyabhāgaṃ.Sace saddhivihārikānaṃ dātukāmo hotīti sace so saṅghassa bhaṇḍakaṭhapanaṭṭhānaṃ vā navakānaṃ vā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ dātuṃ na icchati, attano saddhivihārikānaññeva dātukāmo hotīti attho.Etañhi saddhivihārikānaṃ dātuṃ labhatīti etaṃ tatiyabhāgaṃ upaḍḍhabhāgaṃ vā dātuṃ labhati.Akataṭṭhāneti senāsanato bahi cayādīnaṃ akataṭṭhāne.Bahikuṭṭeti kuṭṭato bahi.

323. Kiñcideva samādapetvā kāressatī means the owner himself will instruct some bhikkhu and have it done. Utukāle paṭibāhituṃ na labhatī means during the winter and summer, other bhikkhus who have arrived should not be prevented. Tibhāgaṃ means one-third. Sace saddhivihārikānaṃ dātukāmo hotī means if he does not want to give it to the place for storing the Saṅgha's belongings or to the new residents, but only wants to give it to his own saddhivihārikas (pupils). Etañhi saddhivihārikānaṃ dātuṃ labhatī means this one-third or one-half can be given. Akataṭṭhāne means in a place where a pile etc. has not been made outside the senāsana (dwelling). Bahikuṭṭe means outside the wall.

Aññatraparibhogapaṭikkhepādikathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Rejection of Use Elsewhere, Etc.

324.Cakkalikanti kambalādīhi veṭhetvā cakkasaṇṭhānena pādapuñchanayoggaṃ kataṃ.Paribhaṇḍakatā bhūmināma saṇhamattikāhi katā kāḷavaṇṇādibhūmi.Senāsanaṃmañcapīṭhādi.Tatheva vaḷañjetuṃ vaṭṭatīti aññehi āvāsikabhikkhūhi paribhuttanīhārena paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Nevāsikā pakatiyā anatthatāya bhūmiyā ṭhapenti ce, tesampi anāpattiyevā’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Dvārampītiādinā vuttadvāravātapānādayo aparikammakatāpi na apassayitabbā.Lomesūti lomesu phusantesu.

324. Cakkalikaṃ means something made suitable for wiping feet in the shape of a wheel, wrapped with blankets etc. Paribhaṇḍakatā bhūmi means a ground made with smooth clay, ground of black color etc. Senāsanaṃ means beds, seats, etc. Tatheva vaḷañjetuṃ vaṭṭatī means it is suitable to use in the manner of being used by other resident bhikkhus. "If the residents keep it on the ground naturally for no benefit, then there is no offense for them either" — it is said in the Gaṇṭhipada. With dvārampī etc., even the doors, windows, etc. that are not repaired should not be disregarded. Lomesū means when the hairs are touched.

Saṅghabhattādianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Permission of Saṅghabhatta, Etc.

325.Uddesabhattaṃnimantananti imaṃ vohāraṃ pattānīti etthaiti-saddo ādiattho, ‘‘uddesabhattaṃ nimantana’’ntiādivohāraṃ pattānīti ayamettha attho.Tampi anto katvāti āyatiṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kukkuccavinodanatthāya tampi saṅghabhattaṃ anto katvā.

325. Uddesabhattaṃ nimantananti imaṃ vohāraṃ pattānīti, here, the word iti has the meaning of "and so on," the meaning here is that the terms such as "uddesabhattaṃ nimantanaṃ" have come into usage. Tampi anto katvā means including that saṅghabhatta also, in order to dispel the bhikkhus' doubts in the future.

Uddesabhattakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of Uddesabhatta

Attano vihāradvāreti vihārassa dvārakoṭṭhakasamīpaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Bhojanasālāyāti bhattuddesaṭṭhānabhūtāya bhojanasālāya.‘‘Dinnaṃ panā’’ti vatvā yathā so dāyako deti, taṃ vidhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘saṅghato bhante’’tiādimāha.Antaraghareti antogehe.Antoupacāragatānanti ettha gāmadvāravīthicatukkesu dvādasahatthabbhantaraṃ antoupacāro nāma. Antaragharassa upacāre pana labbhamānavisesaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘gharūpacāro cetthā’’tiādimāha.Ekavaḷañjanti ekena dvārena vaḷañjitabbaṃ.Nānānivesanesūti nānākulassa nivesanesu. Lajjī pesalo agatigamanaṃ vajjetvā medhāvī ca upaparikkhitvā uddisissatīti āha‘‘pesalo lajjī medhāvī icchitabbo’’ti.Nisinnassapi niddāyantassapīti anādare sāmivacanaṃ.Ticīvaraparivāranti ettha ‘‘udakapattalābhī viya aññopi uddesabhattaṃ alabhitvā vatthādimanekappakārakaṃ labhati ce, tasseva ta’’ntigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Attano rucivasena yaṃ kiñci vatvā āharituṃ vissajjitattāvissaṭṭhadūtonāma.Yaṃ icchatīti ‘‘uddesapattaṃ dethā’’tiādīni vadanto yaṃ icchati.Pucchāsabhāgenāti pucchāsadisena.

Attano vihāradvāre means it is said with reference to near the doorway of the monastery. Bhojanasālāyā means in the dining hall that is the place for allocating food. To show how that donor gives, after saying "Dinnaṃ panā," he says "saṅghato bhante" etc. Antaraghare means inside the inner house. Antoupacāragatānaṃ here, the antoupacāra (inner vicinity) is twelve cubits from the village gate, street, or crossroads. To show the special benefit obtainable in the vicinity of the inner house, he says "gharūpacāro cetthā" etc. Ekavaḷañjaṃ means it should be turned around by one doorway. Nānānivesanesū means in the dwellings of various families. He says that a conscientious, affable, intelligent person who avoids partiality should be sought out and appointed, "pesalo lajjī medhāvī icchitabbo." Nisinnassapi niddāyantassapī is a word of disrespect. Ticīvaraparivāra here, it is said in the Gaṇṭhipada that "if someone, like one who obtains a water pot, obtains various kinds of cloth etc. without obtaining uddesabhatta, then it belongs to him." Because he is sent to bring whatever he says according to his own liking, he is called vissaṭṭhadūto. Yaṃ icchatī means whatever he wants, saying "give the uddesapatta" etc. Pucchāsabhāgenā means like a question.

‘‘Ekā kūṭaṭṭhitikā nāma hotī’’ti vatvā tameva ṭhitikaṃ vibhāvento‘‘rañño vā hī’’tiādimāha. Aññehi uddesabhattehi amissetvā visuṃyeva ṭhitikāya gahetabbattā‘‘ekacārikabhattānī’’ti vuttaṃ.Theyyāya harantīti pattahārakā haranti.Gīvā hotīti āṇāpakassa gīvā hoti.‘‘Manussānaṃ vacanaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti gacchantīti ‘‘manussānaṃ vacanaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti tena bhikkhunā vuttā gacchanti.Akatabhāgo nāmāti āgantukabhāgo nāma.‘‘Sabbo saṅgho paribhuñjatū’’tivutteti ettha ‘‘paṭhamameva ‘sabbaṃ saṅghikaṃ pattaṃ dethā’ti vatvā pacchā ‘sabbo saṅgho paribhuñjatū’ti avuttepi bhājetvāva paribhuñjitabba’’ntigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.

After saying "Ekā kūṭaṭṭhitikā nāma hotī," explaining that very ṭhitika (fixed amount), he says "rañño vā hī" etc. Because they should be taken separately for the ṭhitika, without mixing with other uddesabhattas, therefore it is said "ekacārikabhattānī." Theyyāya harantī means the patta-carriers take it by stealth. Gīvā hotī means there is a neck for the inviter. "Manussānaṃ vacanaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī"ti gacchantī means they go, being told by that bhikkhu "it is suitable to do what the people say." Akatabhāgo nāmā means it is called the share for newcomers. "Sabbo saṅgho paribhuñjatū"ti vutte here, it is said in the Gaṇṭhipada that "even if one does not say 'sabbo saṅgho paribhuñjatū' after first saying 'sabbaṃ saṅghikaṃ pattaṃ dethā', it should be divided and then used."

Nimantanabhattakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of Nimantanabhatta

saṅghikaṃ nimantanaṃnāma.Piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭatīti bhikkhāpariyāyena vuttattā vaṭṭati.Paṭipāṭiyāti laddhapaṭipāṭiyā.Vicchinditvāti ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti padaṃ avatvā. Tenevāha‘‘bhattanti avadantenā’’ti.Ālopasaṅkhepenāti ekekapiṇḍavasena. Ayañca nayo nimantaneyeva, na uddesabhatte. Tattha hi ekassa pahonakappamāṇaṃyeva bhājetabbaṃ, tasmā uddesabhatte ālopaṭṭhitikā nāma natthi.Acchatīti tiṭṭhati.‘‘Ekavāranti yāva tasmiṃ āvāse vasanti bhikkhū, sabbe labhantī’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – ekavāranti na ekadivasaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, yattakā pana bhikkhū tasmiṃ āvāse vasanti, te sabbe. Ekasmiṃ divase gahitabhikkhū aññadā aggahetvā yāva ekavāraṃ sabbe bhikkhū bhojitā honti, tāva ye jānanti, te gahetvā gantabbanti.

saṅghikaṃ nimantanaṃ means invitation for the Saṅgha. Piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭatī means it is suitable because it is said in the manner of alms-gathering. Paṭipāṭiyā means in the order received. Vicchinditvā means without saying the word "bhattaṃ gaṇhathā" (take the food). Therefore he says "bhattanti avadentenā." Ālopasaṅkhepenā means according to individual mouthfuls. And this method is only for nimantana, not for uddesabhatta. For there, only the amount sufficient for one person should be divided, therefore there is no ālopasaṅkhikā (division by mouthful) in uddesabhatta. Acchatī means remains. "Ekavāraṃti yāva tasmiṃ āvāse vasanti bhikkhū, sabbe labhantī"ti it is said in the Gaṇṭhipada. Here is the meaning intended: ekavāraṃ (one turn) is not said referring to one day, but all the bhikkhus who reside in that monastery. Those bhikkhus who have taken it on one day should not take it another day until all the bhikkhus have been fed once, then those who know should take it and go.

Salākabhattakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of Salākabhatta

Upanibandhitvāti likhitvā.Niggahena datvāti anicchantampi niggahena sampaṭicchāpetvā.Ekagehavasenāti ekāya gharapāḷiyā vasena.Uddisitvāti ‘‘tuyhañca tuyhañca pāpuṇātī’’ti vatvā. Dūrattā niggahetvāpi vārena gāhetabbagāmovāragāmo. Vihāravāre niyuttāvihāravārikā,vārena vihārarakkhaṇakā.Aññathattanti pasādaññathattaṃ.Phātikammameva bhavantīti vihārarakkhaṇatthāya saṅghena dātabbaatirekalābhā honti.Saṅghanavakena laddhakāleti divase divase ekekassa pāpitāni dve tīṇi ekacārikabhattāni teneva niyāmena attano pāpuṇanaṭṭhāne saṅghanavakena laddhakāle.Yassa kassaci sammukhībhūtassa pāpetvāti ettha ‘‘yebhuyyena ce bhikkhū bahisīmagatā honti, sammukhībhūtassa yassa kassaci pāpetabbaṃ sabhāgattā ekena laddhaṃ sabbesaṃ hoti, tasmimpi asati attano pāpetvā dātabba’’ntigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Rasasalākanti ucchurasasalākaṃ.

Upanibandhitvā means having written. Niggahena datvā means having made them accept even if they do not want to, by force. Ekagehavasenā means by means of one row of houses. Uddisitvā means saying "it will reach you and you." A village that is far away and should be forced to take turns is vāragāmo (turn-village). Those appointed in the monastery by turns are vihāravārikā, those who guard the monastery by turns. Aññathattaṃ means a change in liking. Phātikammameva bhavantī means they are extra gains that should be given by the Saṅgha for the purpose of guarding the monastery. Saṅghanavakena laddhakāle means when, according to that same rule, the two or three ekacārikabhattas (individual-portion meals) that are distributed daily reach him at his turn, by the saṅghanavaka (Saṅgha novice). Yassa kassaci sammukhībhūtassa pāpetvā here, it is said in the Gaṇṭhipada that "if most of the bhikkhus have gone outside the boundary, it should be delivered to whomever is present, because what is obtained by one is for all due to their shared ownership; even if that is not possible, it should be delivered after delivering to oneself." Rasasalāka means a sugarcane juice ticket.

visuddhimagge(visuddhi. 1.26) vuttattā ‘‘evaṃ gāhite sāditabbaṃ, evaṃ na sāditabba’’nti visesetvā avuttattā ca bhesajjādisalākāyo cettha kiñcāpi piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭanti, salākavasena gāhitattā pana na sāditabbāti ettha adhippāyo vīmaṃsitabbo. Yadi hi bhesajjādisalākā salākavasena gāhitā na sāditabbā siyā, saṅghato nirāmisasalākā vaṭṭatiyevāti na vadeyya, ‘‘atirekalābho saṅghabhattaṃ uddesabhatta’’ntiādivacanato (mahāva. 128) ‘‘atirekalābhaṃ paṭikkhipāmī’’ti salākavasena gāhetabbaṃ bhattameva paṭikkhittaṃ, na bhesajjaṃ. Saṅghabhattādīni hi cuddasa bhattāniyeva tena na sāditabbānīti vuttāni, khandhakabhāṇakānaṃ vā matena idha evaṃ vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Aggato dātabbabhikkhāaggabhikkhā. Laddhā vā aladdhā vāti labhitvā vā alabhitvā vā. Nibaddhāya aggabhikkhāya appamattikāya eva sambhavato labhitvāpi punadivase gaṇhituṃ vuttaṃ.Aggabhikkhāmattanti hi etthamatta-saddo bahubhāvaṃ nivatteti.

Because it is said in the Visuddhimagga(visuddhi. 1.26) and because it is not specified by saying "it should be savored when taken in this way, it should not be savored when taken in this way," here, even though the tickets for medicine etc. are suitable even for piṇḍapātikas (alms-goers), the intention here should be examined that it should not be savored because it is taken by means of a ticket. For if tickets for medicine etc. taken by means of tickets should not be savored, he would not say that a ticket for non-meat from the Saṅgha is suitable, because from the saying "atirekalābho saṅghabhattaṃ uddesabhatta" etc. (mahāva. 128), only the food that should be taken by means of tickets is rejected, not medicine. For only the fourteen foods, namely Saṅghabhatta etc., are said by him to be not savorable, it should be taken as said thus according to the opinion of the khandhaka reciters. The alms to be given first is aggabhikkhā. Laddhā vā aladdhā vā means having obtained or not having obtained. Because it is possible for little negligence with regard to the regular aggabhikkhā, it is said to be taken again on the next day even after obtaining it. For here, the word matta in Aggabhikkhāmatta prevents abundance.

‘‘vihāre apāpitaṃ panā’’tiādi.Tatra āsanasālāyāti tasmiṃ gāme āsanasālāya.Vihāraṃ ānetvā gāhetabbanti tathā vatvā tasmiṃ divase dinnabhattaṃ vihārameva ānetvā ṭhitikāya gāhetabbaṃ.Tatthāti tasmiṃ disābhāge.Taṃ gahetvāti taṃ vāragāmasalākaṃ attanā gahetvā.Tenāti yo attano pattaṃ vāragāmasalākaṃ disaṃgamikassa adāsi, tena.Anatikkanteyeva tasmiṃ tassa salākā gāhetabbāti yasmā upacārasīmaṭṭhasseva salākā pāpuṇāti, tasmā tasmiṃ disaṃgamike upacārasīmaṃ anatikkanteyeva tassa disaṃgamikassa pattasalākā attano pāpetvā gahetabbā.

"vihāre apāpitaṃ panā" etc. Tatra āsanasālāyā means in the rest house in that village. Vihāraṃ ānetvā gāhetabbaṃ saying so, the food given on that day should be brought to the monastery and taken according to the rule. Tatthā means in that direction. Taṃ gahetvā means having taken that vāragāma ticket himself. Tenā means by the one who gave his patta-ticket for the vāragāma to the one going in the direction. Anatikkanteyeva tasmiṃ tassa salākā gāhetabbā because the ticket reaches only the one who is within the boundary of the vicinity, therefore, the patta-ticket of that direction-goer should be delivered and taken by himself before that direction-goer goes beyond the boundary of the vicinity.

Anāgatadivaseti ettha kathaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ āgatānāgatabhāvo viññāyatīti ce? Yasmā tato tato āgatā bhikkhū tasmiṃ gāme āsanasālāya sannipatanti, tasmā tesaṃ āgatānāgatabhāvo sakkā viññātuṃ.Amhākaṃ gocaragāmeti salākabhattadāyakānaṃ gāme.Bhuñjituṃ āgacchantīti ‘‘mahāthero ekakova vihāre ohīno avassaṃ sabbasalākā attano pāpetvā ṭhito’’ti maññamānā āgacchanti.

Anāgatadivase here, if asked how the arrival or non-arrival of those bhikkhus is known, since the bhikkhus who have arrived from here and there gather in the rest house in that village, therefore it is possible to know their arrival or non-arrival. Amhākaṃ gocaragāme means in the village of those who give salākabhatta. Bhuñjituṃ āgacchantī means thinking "the elder monk alone remains in the monastery, he must have delivered all the tickets to himself and remained."

Pakkhikabhattādikathāvaṇṇanā
Description of Pakkhikabhatta, Etc.

pakkhikaṃ. Abhilakkhitesūti etthaabhīti upasaggamattaṃ, lakkhaṇīyesu icceva attho, uposathasamādānadhammassavanapūjāsakkārādikaraṇatthaṃ lakkhitabbesu sallakkhetabbesu upalakkhetabbesūti vuttaṃ hoti.Sve pakkhoti ‘‘ajja pakkhikaṃ na gāhetabba’’nti pakkhikassa aniyamattā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sve amhākaṃ ghare lūkhabhattaṃ bhavissatī’’ti potthakesu likhanti, ‘‘pakkhabhattaṃ bhavissatī’’ti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ. Uposathe dātabbaṃ bhattaṃuposathikaṃ. Nibandhāpitanti ‘‘asukavihārassā’’ti niyamitaṃ.Gāhetvā bhuñjitabbanti tasmiṃ senāsane vasantehi ṭhitikāya gāhetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ.Taṇḍulādīnipesenti…pe… vaṭṭatīti abhihaṭabhikkhattā vaṭṭati.Tathā paṭiggahitattāti bhikkhānāmena paṭiggahitattā.Pattaṃ pūretvā thaketvā dinnanti ‘‘guḷakabhattaṃ demā’’ti dinnaṃ.Guḷapiṇḍepi…pe… dātabboti etthaguḷapiṇḍaṃtālapakkappamāṇanti veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha suviññeyyamevāti.

pakkhikaṃ. Abhilakkhitesū here, abhī is just a prefix, the meaning is just lakkhaṇīyesu (those to be marked), it means those that should be marked, considered, and noticed for the purpose of observing the uposatha, undertaking the dhamma, listening to the dhamma, making offerings and reverence, etc. Sve pakkho means it is said because of the uncertainty of pakkhika "pakkhika should not be taken today." They write "lūkhabhattaṃ bhavissati" in the books "lūkhabhattaṃ bhavissati (coarse food will be)" should be the reading instead of "pakkhabhattaṃ bhavissati (pakkhika food will be)." The food to be given on the uposatha day is uposathikaṃ. Nibandhāpitaṃ means specified "for such-and-such monastery." Gāhetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ means it should be taken and eaten according to the rule by those residing in that dwelling. Taṇḍulādīnipesenti…pe… vaṭṭatī means it is suitable because it is invited alms. Tathā paṭiggahitattā means because it is accepted by the name of alms. Pattaṃ pūretvā thaketvā dinnaṃ means it is given saying "let us give guḷakabhattaṃ (jaggery rice)." Guḷapiṇḍepi…pe… dātabbo here, guḷapiṇḍaṃ should be understood as the size of a palm fruit. The rest here is easily understood.

Senāsanakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Senāsanakkhandhaka is finished.

7. Saṅghabhedakakkhandhakaṃ

7. Saṅghabhedakakkhandhakaṃ (The Chapter on Schism in the Sangha)

Chasakyapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Story of the Six Sakyan Ascetics

330.Saṅghabhedakakkhandhakeanupiyāyantiādīsu ‘‘anupiyā nāmā’’ti vattabbe ākārassa rassattaṃ anunāsikassa ca āgamaṃ katvā‘‘anupiyaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ.Mallānanti mallarājūnaṃ.Na heṭṭhā pāsādā orohatīti uparipāsādato heṭṭhimatalaṃ na orohati, ‘‘heṭṭhāpāsāda’’ntipi paṭhanti. Anuruddho vā pabbājeyyāti yojetabbaṃ.Gharāvāsatthanti gharāvāsassa anucchavikaṃ kammaṃ.Udakaṃ abhinetabbanti udakaṃ āharitabbaṃ.Ninnetabbanti ābhatamudakaṃ puna nīharitabbaṃ.Niddhāpetabbanti antarantarā uṭṭhitatiṇāni uddharitvā apanetabbaṃ.Lavāpetabbanti paripakkakāle lavāpetabbaṃ.Ubbāhāpetabbanti khalamaṇḍalaṃ harāpetabbaṃ.Ujuṃ kārāpetabbanti puñjaṃ kārāpetabbaṃ.Palālāni uddharāpetabbānīti palālāni apanetabbāni.Bhusikā uddharāpetabbāti gunnaṃ khuraggehi sañchinnā bhusasaṅkhātā nāḷadaṇḍā apanetabbā.Opunāpetabbanti vātamukhe opunāpetvā palālaṃ apanetabbaṃ.Atiharāpetabbanti antokoṭṭhāgāraṃ upanetabbaṃ.Na kammāti na kammāni.Gharāvāsatthenāti upayogatthe karaṇavacanaṃ.Upajānāhīti ca upasaggamattoupa-saddo. Tenāha‘‘gharāvāsatthaṃ jānāhī’’ti.Jānāhīti cettha paṭipajjāti attho veditabbo.Akāmakāti anicchamānā.

330. In the Saṅghabhedakakkhandhaka, regarding anupiyāya, when it should be said ‘‘anupiyā nāmā’’, the shortening of the ā sound and the addition of the nasal consonant is done, thus ‘‘anupiyaṃ nāmā’’ is said. Mallāna means of the Malla kings. Na heṭṭhā pāsādā orohatī means he does not descend from the upper story to the lower story of the palace; some read it as ‘‘heṭṭhāpāsāda’’. "Anuruddho vā pabbājeyya" should be construed. Gharāvāsattha means work unsuitable for household life. Udakaṃ abhinetabbaṃ means water should be brought. Ninnetabbaṃ means the brought water should be drained out again. Niddhāpetabbaṃ means the grass that has grown in between should be pulled out and removed. Lavāpetabbaṃ means it should be harvested at the time of ripening. Ubbāhāpetabbaṃ means the threshing floor should be transported away. Ujuṃ kārāpetabbaṃ means it should be made into a pile. Palālāni uddharāpetabbāni means the straw should be removed. Bhusikā uddharāpetabbā means the stalks of grain cut by the hoof tips of cows, called bhusa, should be removed. Opunāpetabbaṃ means after winnowing in the wind, the straw should be removed. Atiharāpetabbaṃ means it should be brought into the inner storehouse. Na kammā means not works. Gharāvāsatthena is an instrumental case in the sense of purpose. Upajānāhī is just the prefix upa. Therefore, he said, ‘‘gharāvāsatthaṃ jānāhī’’. Here, Jānāhī should be understood in the sense of practice. Akāmakā means unwilling.

331-332.Yaṃ na nivattoti yasmā na nivatto.Suññāgāragatoti (udā. aṭṭha. 20) ‘‘ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañca avasesaṃ arañña’’nti (pārā.92) vuttaṃ araññaṃ rukkhamūlañca ṭhapetvā aññaṃ pabbatakandarādi pabbajitasāruppaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ janasambādhābhāvato idha ‘‘suññāgāra’’nti adhippetaṃ. Atha vā jhānakaṇṭakānaṃ saddānaṃ abhāvato vivittaṃ yaṃ kiñci agārampi ‘‘suññāgāra’’nti veditabbaṃ. Taṃ suññāgāraṃ upagato.Abhikkhaṇanti bahulaṃ.Udānaṃ udānesīti so hi āyasmā araññe divāvihāraṃ upagatopi rattivāsūpagatopi yebhuyyena phalasamāpattisukhena nirodhasamāpattisukhena ca vītināmesi, tasmā taṃ sukhaṃ sandhāya pubbe attanā anubhūtaṃ sabhayaṃ sapariḷāhaṃ rajjasukhaṃ jigucchitvā ‘‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’’nti somanassasahitañāṇasamuṭṭhānaṃ pītisamuggāraṃ samuggirati.Te bhikkhū bhagavantaṃ etadavocunti te sambahulā bhikkhū ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitā tassa anuggaṇhanādhippāyena bhagavantaṃ etadavocuṃ, na ujjhānavasena.Nissaṃsayanti asandehena, ekantenāti attho. Te kira bhikkhū puthujjanā tassa āyasmato vivekasukhaṃ sandhāya udānaṃ ajānantā evamāhaṃsu.Samanussarantoti ukkaṇṭhanavasena anussaranto.

331-332.Yaṃ na nivatto means because he did not turn back. Suññāgāragato means (e.g., attha. 20) "leaving aside the village and the vicinity of the village, the rest is the forest" (pārā.92); leaving aside the forest and the foot of a tree, any dwelling place suitable for a recluse, such as a mountain cave, which lacks human congregation, is intended here as ‘‘suññāgāra’’. Or else, any secluded dwelling, due to the absence of sounds that are thorns to jhāna, should be known as ‘‘suññāgāra’’. Having approached that empty house. Abhikkhaṇaṃ means frequently. Udānaṃ udānesī means that the venerable one, whether he had gone to the forest for the day's dwelling or had approached it for the night's lodging, mostly spent his time with the bliss of fruition attainment and the bliss of cessation attainment. Therefore, with reference to that bliss, having despised the royal happiness previously experienced by himself, which was fearful and full of burning, he uttered a joyful expression accompanied by knowledge, a surge of joy, exclaiming "Aho sukhaṃ aho sukhaṃ!" Te bhikkhū bhagavantaṃ etadavocuṃ means those numerous monks, standing in a state of belittling, spoke thus to the Blessed One with the intention of disparaging him, not in the manner of complaining. Nissaṃsayaṃ means without doubt, certainly. Those monks, it seems, being ordinary people, not knowing the venerable one's utterance with reference to the bliss of solitude, spoke thus. Samanussaranto means recollecting in a way of longing.

Aññataranti nāmagottena apākaṭaṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ.Āmantesīti āṇāpesi te bhikkhū saññāpetukāmo.Evanti vacanasampaṭiggahe, sādhūti attho.Evaṃ bhanteti ettha panaevaṃ-saddo paṭiññāyaṃ. ‘‘Abhikkhaṇaṃ ‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’nti imaṃ udānaṃ udānesī’’ti yathā te bhikkhū vadanti, taṃ evaṃ tathevāti attano udānaṃ paṭijānāti.‘‘Kiṃ pana tvaṃ bhaddiyā’’ti kasmā bhagavā pucchati, kiṃ tassa cittaṃ na jānātīti? No na jānāti, teneva pana tamatthaṃ vadāpetvā te bhikkhū saññāpetuṃ pucchati. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchanti, jānantāpi na pucchantī’’tiādi (pārā. 16, 194).Atthavasanti kāraṇaṃ.

Aññataraṃ means a certain bhikkhu, not known by name and clan. Āmantesī means he addressed, wishing to make those monks understand. Evaṃ means in acceptance of the word, it means "good." Evaṃ bhante here, however, the word evaṃ is in affirmation. "Abhikkhaṇaṃ ‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’nti imaṃ udānaṃ udānesī," just as those monks say, he acknowledges his own utterance that it is so, it is indeed thus. ‘‘Kiṃ pana tvaṃ bhaddiyā’’ why does the Blessed One ask, does he not know his mind? No, he does not not know, but he asks in order to make him speak about that matter and to make those monks understand. For it has been said, "Tathāgatas ask even though they know, and they do not ask even though they know," etc. (pārā. 16, 194). Atthavasaṃ means reason.

Antopi antepureti itthāgārassa sañcaraṇaṭṭhānabhūte rājagehassa abbhantare, yattha rājā nahānabhojanasayanādiṃ kappeti.Rakkhā susaṃvihitāti ārakkhādikatapurisehi gutti suṭṭhu samantato vihitā.Bahipi antepureti aṭṭakaraṇaṭṭhānādike antepurato bahibhūte rājagehe.Evaṃ rakkhito gopito santoti evaṃ rājageharājadhānīrajjadesesu anto bahi ca anekesu ṭhānesu anekasatehi susaṃvihitarakkhāvaraṇaguttiyā mameva nibbhayatthaṃ phāsuvihāratthaṃ rakkhito gopito samāno.Bhītotiādīni padāni aññamaññavevacanāni. Atha vābhītoti pararājūhi bhāyamāno.Ubbiggoti sakarajjepi pakatikkhobhato uppajjanakabhayubbegena ubbiggo calito.Ussaṅkīti ‘‘raññā nāma sabbakālaṃ avissatthena bhavitabba’’nti vacanato sabbattha avissāsanavasena tesaṃ tesaṃ kiccakaraṇīyānaṃ accayato uppajjanakaparisaṅkāya ca uddhamuddhaṃ saṅkamāno.Utrāsīti ‘‘santikāvacarehipi ajānantasseva me kadāci anattho bhaveyyā’’ti uppannena sarīrakampampi uppādanasamatthena tāsena utrāsi. ‘‘Utrasto’’tipi paṭhanti.Viharāmīti evaṃbhūto hutvā viharāmi.

Antopi antepure means inside the royal residence, in the inner chambers which are places for the movement of women, where the king arranges for bathing, eating, sleeping, etc. Rakkhā susaṃvihitā means protection is well arranged on all sides by guards and other attendants. Bahipi antepure means in the royal residence outside the inner chambers, in places such as the court of justice. Evaṃ rakkhito gopito santo means being thus, in this way, protected and guarded in many places inside and outside the royal residence, the capital city, and the kingdom, by hundreds of well-arranged protective coverings and guards, for my own safety and comfortable living. The words bhīto etc. are synonyms for each other. Alternatively, bhīto means fearing enemy kings. Ubbiggo means agitated and disturbed even in his own kingdom by the fear and agitation arising from disturbances of the natural elements. Ussaṅkī means constantly suspecting everywhere due to distrust, because it is said, "a king should always be distrustful," and from the apprehension arising from the failure of this or that task. Utrāsī means terrified by the fear that has arisen, capable of producing even bodily trembling, thinking "even those near me might cause harm to me without my knowing." Some read "Utrasto." Viharāmī means having been such, I lived.

Etarahīti idāni pabbajitakālato paṭṭhāya.Ekoti asahāyo. Tena vivekaṭṭhakāyataṃ dasseti.Abhītotiādīnaṃ padānaṃ vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Bhayādinimittassa pariggahassa taṃnimittassa ca kilesagahanassa abhāvenevassa abhītāditāti etena cittavivekaṃ dasseti.Appossukkoti sarīraguttiyaṃ nirussukko.Pannalomoti lomahaṃsuppādakassa chambhitattassa abhāvena anuggatalomo. Padadvayenapi serivihāraṃ dasseti.Paradattavuttoti parehi dinnena cīvarādinā vattamāno. Etena sabbaso saṅgābhāvadīpanamukhena anavasesabhayahetuvirahaṃ dasseti.Migabhūtena cetasāti vissatthavihāritāya migassa viya jātena cittena. Migo hi amanussapathe araññe vasamāno vissattho tiṭṭhati nisīdati nipajjati yenakāmañca pakkamati appaṭihatacāro, evaṃ ahampi viharāmīti dasseti. Vuttañhetaṃ paccekasambuddhena –

Etarahī means now, from the time of renunciation onwards. Eko means without a companion. With that he shows bodily seclusion. The meanings of the words abhīto etc. should be understood in the opposite way as stated. By the absence of the cause of fear etc. and the absence of the mass of defilements which is the cause of that, he is fearless etc.; with this he shows mental seclusion. Appossukko means without concern for bodily protection. Pannalomo means with hairs subsided due to the absence of dreadfulness that causes horripilation. With both phrases he shows living freely. Paradattavutto means maintaining himself with robes etc. given by others. With this, by way of indicating the complete absence of attachment, he shows the absence of all causes for fear. Migabhūtena cetasā means with a mind that has become like that of a deer, due to living confidently. For a deer, living in the wilderness, in a place not frequented by humans, stands, sits, and lies down confidently, and goes wherever it pleases, with unimpeded movement; thus, I also live, he shows. This was said by a Paccekasambuddha—

‘‘Migo araññamhi yathā abaddho;

‘‘As a deer in the forest, unconfined,
Goes where it wishes for its pasture,
The wise man, looking to his freedom,
Should wander alone, like a rhinoceros.’’ (su. ni. 39; apa. thera 1.1.95);

Imaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhante, atthavasanti bhagavā yadidaṃ mama etarahi paramaṃ vivekasukhaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ, idameva kāraṇaṃ sampassamāno ‘‘aho sukhaṃ, aho sukha’’nti udānemi.Etamatthanti etaṃ bhaddiyattherassa puthujjanavisayātītaṃ vivekasukhasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ sabbākārato viditvā.Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ sahetukabhayasokavigamānubhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.

Imaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhante, atthavasaṃ means, O Blessed One, because I perceive this very reason, this supreme bliss of solitude, the bliss of fruition attainment, I exclaim ‘‘aho sukhaṃ, aho sukhaṃ’’. Etamatthaṃ means having known in every way this matter of the bliss of solitude, which is beyond the sphere of ordinary people, belonging to Bhaddiya Thera. Imaṃ udānaṃ means he uttered this utterance which reveals the effect of the going away of the cause of fear and sorrow.

Yassantarato na santi kopāti yassa ariyapuggalassa antarato abbhantare attano citte cittakālussiyakaraṇato cittappakopā rāgādayo āghātavatthuādikāraṇabhedato anekabhedā dosakopā eva vā na santi, maggena pahīnattā na vijjanti. Ayañhiantara-saddo kiñcāpi ‘‘mañca tvañca kimantara’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.228) kāraṇe dissati, ‘‘antaraṭṭhake himapātasamaye’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 346) vemajjhe, ‘‘antarā ca jetavanaṃ antarā ca sāvatthi’’ntiādīsu (udā. 13, 44) vivare, ‘‘bhayamantarato jāta’’ntiādīsu (itivu. 88; mahāni. 5) citte, idhāpi citte eva daṭṭhabbo. Tenevāha‘‘yassa citte kopā na santī’’ti.

Yassantarato na santi kopā means for which noble individual, in the interior, in his own mind, due to causing mental impurity, mental agitation, such as greed etc., or due to various kinds of causes like the objects of aversion, or even just aversion anger, does not exist, because it has been abandoned by the path, it is not found. Indeed, although this word antara is seen in the sense of cause in instances such as ‘‘mañca tvañca kimantara’’ (saṃ. ni. 1.228), in the sense of middle in instances such as ‘‘antaraṭṭhake himapātasamaye’’ (mahāva. 346), in the sense of interval in instances such as ‘‘antarā ca jetavanaṃ antarā ca sāvatthi’’ (udā. 13, 44), in the sense of mind in instances such as ‘‘bhayamantarato jāta’’ (itivu. 88; mahāni. 5), here also it should be seen in the sense of mind. Therefore he said ‘‘yassa citte kopā na santī’’.

Abhava-saddassavibhava-saddena atthuddhāre kāraṇamāha‘‘vibhavoti ca abhavoti ca atthato eka’’nti.Iti-saddo pakāravacanoti āha‘‘iti anekappakārā bhavābhavatā’’ti.Vītivattoti atikkanto. Ettha ca ‘‘yassā’’ti idaṃ yo vītivattoti vibhattivipariṇāmavasena yojetabbaṃ.Taṃ vigatabhayanti taṃ evarūpaṃ yathāvuttaguṇasamannāgataṃ khīṇāsavaṃ cittakopābhāvato itibhavābhavasamatikkamanato ca bhayahetuvigamena vigatabhayaṃ. Vivekasukhena aggaphalasukhena casukhiṃ,vigatabhayattā evaasokaṃ. Devā nānubhavanti dassanāyāti adhigatamagge ṭhapetvā sabbepi upapattidevā vāyamantāpi cittacāradassanavasena dassanāya daṭṭhuṃ nānubhavanti na abhisambhuṇanti na sakkonti, pageva manussā. Sekkhāpi hi puthujjanā viya arahato cittappavattiṃ na jānanti.Tassa dassanaṃ devānampi dullabhanti etthāpi cittacāradassanavasena tassa dassanaṃ devānampi dullabhaṃ alabbhanīyaṃ, devehipi taṃ dassanaṃ na sakkā pāpuṇitunti evamattho gahetabbo. Abhāvattho hetthadu-saddo ‘‘duppañño’’tiādīsu viya.

Regarding the cause in extracting the meaning of the word abhava with the word vibhava, he says ‘‘vibhavoti ca abhavoti ca atthato ekaṃ’’. The word iti is a word of manner, therefore he says ‘‘iti anekappakārā bhavābhavatā’’. Vītivatto means surpassed. And here, ‘‘yassā’’ this should be construed with the change of inflection to "yo vītivatto". Taṃ vigatabhayaṃ means that one of such a kind, endowed with the qualities as stated, whose taints are destroyed, is without fear due to the removal of the cause of fear from the absence of mental agitation and from the surpassing of thusness and becoming; sukhiṃ due to the bliss of solitude and the supreme bliss of fruition; asokaṃ precisely because of being without fear. Devā nānubhavanti dassanāyā means even all the gods of existence, having set aside the attained path, do not experience, do not fully comprehend, are not able to see the manner of the mind's activity even while striving; what to say of humans? Even learners do not know the mind's activity of an arahat like ordinary people. Tassa dassanaṃ devānampi dullabhaṃ here also, in the sense of seeing the mind's activity, the sight of him is difficult, unattainable even for the gods, it is not possible for the gods to attain that sight; thus, the meaning should be taken. Here the du prefix is in the sense of absence, as in ‘‘duppañño’’ etc.

333.Bhattābhihāroti abhiharitabbabhattaṃ. Tassa pana pamāṇaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pañca ca thālipākasatānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha eko thālipāko dasannaṃ purisānaṃ bhattaṃ gaṇhāti.Lābhasakkārasilokenāti etthalābhonāma catupaccayalābho.Sakkāroti tesaṃyeva sukatānaṃ susaṅkhatānaṃ lābho.Silokoti vaṇṇaghoso.Manomayaṃ kāyanti jhānamanena nibbattaṃ brahmakāyaṃ.Upapannoti upagato.Attabhāvappaṭilābhoti sarīrapaṭilābho.Dve vā tīṇi vā māgadhakāni gāmakhettānīti etthamāgadhakaṃ gāmakhettaṃatthi khuddakaṃ, atthi majjhimaṃ, atthi mahantaṃ.Khuddakaṃ gāmakhettaṃito cattālīsa usabhāni, etto cattālīsa usabhānīti gāvutaṃ hoti.Majjhimaṃito gāvutaṃ, etto gāvutanti aḍḍhayojanaṃ hoti.Mahantaṃito diyaḍḍhagāvutaṃ, etto diyaḍḍhagāvutanti tigāvutaṃ hoti. Tesu khuddakena gāmakhettena tīṇi, khuddakena ca majjhimena ca dve gāmakhettāni tassa attabhāvo. Tigāvutañhissa sarīraṃ.Pariharissāmīti paṭijaggissāmi gopayissāmi.Rakkhassetanti rakkhassu etaṃ.

333.Bhattābhihāro means food to be offered. In order to show the measure of that, ‘‘pañca ca thālipākasatānī’’ is said. There, one thālipāka takes the food for ten men. Lābhasakkārasilokenā here lābho means the gain of the four requisites. Sakkāro means the gain of those same things that have been well done and well prepared. Siloko means the sound of praise. Manomayaṃ kāyaṃ means the Brahma body produced by the mind of jhāna. Upapanno means approached. Attabhāvappaṭilābho means the gain of a body. Dve vā tīṇi vā māgadhakāni gāmakhettānī here māgadhakaṃ gāmakhettaṃ there is a small one, there is a medium one, there is a large one. Khuddakaṃ gāmakhettaṃ forty usabhas from here, forty usabhas from there, thus it is one gāvuta. Majjhimaṃ one gāvuta from here, one gāvuta from there, thus it is one and a half yojanas. Mahantaṃ one and a half gāvutas from here, one and a half gāvutas from there, thus it is three gāvutas. Among those, three small gāmakhettas, or two gāmakhettas, one small and one medium, is his body. Indeed, his body is three gāvutas. Pariharissāmī means I will take care of, I will protect. Rakkhassetaṃ means protect this.

Pañcasatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Discourse on the Five Teachers

334.Satthāroti gaṇasatthāro.Nāssassāti na etassa bhaveyya.Tanti taṃ satthāraṃ.Tenāti amanāpena.Samudācareyyāmāti katheyyāma.Sammannatīti amhākaṃ sammānaṃ karoti. Tenāha‘‘sammānetī’’ti,sammannatīti vā parehi sammānīyatīti attho.

334.Satthāro means teachers of a group. Nāssassā means it would not be to him. Taṃ means that teacher. Tenā means with the unpleasant. Samudācareyyāmā means we would speak. Sammannati means he honors us. Therefore he said ‘‘sammānetī’’, or sammannati means he is honored by others.

335.Nāsāya pittaṃ bhindeyyunti acchapittaṃ vā macchapittaṃ vā nāsāpuṭe pakkhipeyyuṃ.Parābhavāyāti avaḍḍhiyā vināsāya.Assatarīti vaḷavāya kucchismiṃ gadrabhassajātā, taṃ assena saddhiṃ sampayojenti, sā gabbhaṃ gaṇhitvā kāle sampatte vijāyituṃ na sakkoti, pādehi bhūmiṃ paharantī tiṭṭhati, athassā cattāro pāde catūsu khāṇukesu bandhitvā kucchiṃ phāletvā potakaṃ nīharanti, sā tattheva marati. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘attavadhāya gabbhaṃ gaṇhātī’’ti.

335.Nāsāya pittaṃ bhindeyyuṃ means they would pour fresh bile or fish bile into the nostrils. Parābhavāyā means for decline, for destruction. Assatarī means born of a donkey in the womb of a mare; they mate her with a horse, and she conceives, but when the time comes, she is unable to give birth; she stands striking the ground with her feet; then her four feet are tied to four posts, her belly is cut open and the foal is taken out, and she dies there. Therefore it is said ‘‘attavadhāya gabbhaṃ gaṇhātī’’.

339.Potthanikanti churikaṃ, yaṃ kharantipi vuccati.

339.Potthanikaṃ means a knife, which is also called a khura.

Nāḷāgiripesanakathāvaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Discourse on the Subduing of Nāḷāgiri

342.Mā kuñjara nāgamāsadoti bho, kuñjara, buddhanāgaṃ vadhakacittena mā upagaccha.Dukkhanti dukkhakāraṇattā dukkhaṃ. Kathaṃ taṃ dukkhanti āha‘‘na hi nāgahatassā’’tiādi. Nāgahatassa sugatipaṭikkhepena buddhanāgassa ghāto duggatidukkhakāraṇanti dasseti.Itoti ito jātito.Yatoti yasmā.Ito paraṃ yatoti ito paraṃ gacchantassāti vā attho.Madoti mānamado.Pamādoti pamattabhāvo.Paṭikuṭitoti saṅkuṭito.Alakkhikoti ahiriko.Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma.

342.Mā kuñjara nāgamāsado means O elephant, do not approach the Buddha-Nāga with the intention of killing. Dukkhaṃ means suffering because it is the cause of suffering. How is that suffering? He says ‘‘na hi nāgahatassā’’ etc. He shows that the killing of the Buddha-Nāga, by way of rejecting a good destination, is the cause of suffering in a bad destination. Ito means from this birth. Yato means from which. Ito paraṃ yato means for one going beyond this, or that is the meaning. Mado means the pride of conceit. Pamādo means negligence. Paṭikuṭito means contracted. Alakkhiko means without shame. Yatra hi nāmā means which name.

Pañcavatthuyācanakathāvaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Discourse on the Five Requests

343.Tikabhojananti tīhi bhuñjitabbabhojanaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ ekato paṭiggahetvā bhuñjituṃ paññapessāmīti attho.Kokālikotiādīni catunnaṃ devadattapakkhiyānaṃ gaṇapāmokkhānaṃ nāmāni.Āyukappanti ekaṃ mahākappaṃ asītibhāgaṃ katvā tato ekabhāgamattaṃ kālaṃ antarakappasaññitaṃ kālaṃ.

343.Tikabhojanaṃ means a meal to be eaten in threes, the meaning is that I will arrange to accept and eat together in groups of three. Kokāliko etc. are the names of the chief monks of the four who were on Devadatta's side. Āyukappaṃ means dividing one great kappa into eighty parts, then a period equal to one part is called an antarakappa.

Āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ etadavocāti (udā. aṭṭha. 48) devadatto sabbaṃ saṅghabhedassa pubbabhāgaṃ nipphādetvā ‘‘ekaṃseneva ajja āveṇikaṃ uposathaṃ saṅghakammañca karissāmī’’ti cintetvā etaṃ‘‘ajjatagge’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tatthaaññatreva bhagavatāti vinā eva bhagavantaṃ, taṃ satthāraṃ akatvāti attho.Aññatra bhikkhusaṅghā uposathaṃ karissāmi saṅghakammāni cāti bhagavato ovādakārakaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ vinā maṃ anuvattantehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ āveṇikaṃ uposathaṃ saṅghakammāni ca karissāmi.Ajjatagge, bhante, devadatto saṅghaṃ bhindissatīti bhedakārakānaṃ sabbesaṃ devadattena sajjitattā ‘‘ekaṃseneva devadatto ajja saṅghaṃ bhindissatī’’ti maññamāno evamāha.Bhindissatīti dvidhā karissati.

‘Āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ etadavocā’ti (udā. aṭṭha. 48): Devadatta, having accomplished all the preliminary actions for schism in the Sangha, thinking, "Today I will definitely perform the uposatha and Sangha actions independently," spoke these words, beginning with ‘ajjatagge’ ("from today"). Here, ‘aññatreva bhagavatā’ti means apart from the Blessed One, without making him the Teacher. ‘Aññatra bhikkhusaṅghā uposathaṃ karissāmi saṅghakammāni cā’ti: Apart from the community of monks who follow the Blessed One's advice, I will perform the uposatha and Sangha actions independently with the monks who follow me. ‘Ajjatagge, bhante, devadatto saṅghaṃ bhindissatī’ti: Thinking that Devadatta would definitely cause schism in the Sangha today, since all those who cause division were ready with Devadatta, he spoke thus. ‘Bhindissatī’ti: He will divide into two.

Etamatthaṃviditvāti etaṃ avīcimahānirayuppattisaṃvattaniyaṃ kappaṭṭhiyaṃ atekicchaṃ devadattena nibbattiyamānaṃ saṅghabhedakammaṃ sabbākārato viditvā.Imaṃ udānanti kusalākusalesu yathākkamaṃ sappurisāsappurisānaṃ sukarā paṭipatti, na pana nesaṃ akusalakusalesūti idamatthavibhāvanaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.

‘Etamatthaṃ viditvā’ti: Having fully known in every way this action of causing schism in the Sangha, brought about by Devadatta, which leads to the great hell of Avīci, is fixed for a kappa, and is incurable. ‘Imaṃ udāna’nti: He uttered this udāna, clarifying the meaning that, in relation to wholesome and unwholesome deeds, the practice is easy for good people and bad people, respectively, but not the reverse.

sukaraṃ sādhunā sādhūti attano paresañca hitaṃ sādhetītisādhu,sammāpaṭipanno. Tena sādhunā sāriputtādinā sāvakena paccekasambuddhena sammāsambuddhena aññena vā lokiyasādhunā sādhu sundaraṃ bhaddakaṃ attano paresañca hitasukhāvahaṃ sukaraṃ sukhena kātuṃ sakkā.Sādhu pāpena dukkaranti tadeva pana vuttalakkhaṇaṃ sādhu pāpena devadattādinā pāpapuggalena dukkaraṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, na so taṃ kātuṃ sakkotīti attho.Pāpaṃ pāpena sukaranti pāpaṃ asundaraṃ attano paresañca anatthāvahaṃ pāpena yathāvuttapāpapuggalena sukaraṃ sukhena kātuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ.Pāpamariyehi dukkaranti ariyehi pana buddhādīhi taṃ pāpaṃ dukkaraṃ durabhisambhavaṃ. Setughātoyeva hi tesaṃ tatthāti dīpeti.

‘sukaraṃ sādhunā sādhū’ti: One who accomplishes the good of oneself and others is sādhu, well-practiced. By that sādhu, a disciple such as Sāriputta, a Paccekabuddha, a Sammāsambuddha, or any other noble being, the sādhu is beautiful, auspicious, and brings happiness to oneself and others; it is easy, able to be done with ease. ‘Sādhu pāpena dukkara’nti: But that same sādhu, with the characteristics mentioned, is difficult for an evil person like Devadatta to do; he is not able to do it. ‘Pāpaṃ pāpena sukara’nti: Evil, which is unwholesome and brings harm to oneself and others, is easy for an evil person, as described above; he can do it easily. ‘Pāpam теркәлүсез dukkara’nti: But that evil is difficult for the noble ones, such as the Buddhas; it is hard to overcome. Indeed, it is like destroying a dam for them, thus he shows.

Saṅghabhedakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Schism of the Sangha

345.Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto ādesanāpāṭihāriyānusāsaniyātiādīsu parassa cittaṃ ñatvā kathanaṃādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ,sāvakānañca buddhānañca satataṃ dhammadesanaṃanusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṃ,iddhividhaṃiddhipāṭihāriyaṃ. Tattha iddhipāṭihāriyena saddhiṃ anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṃ mahāmoggallānattherassa āciṇṇaṃ, ādesanāpāṭihāriyena saddhiṃ anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṃ dhammasenāpatissa. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āyasmā sāriputto ādesanāpāṭihāriyānusāsaniyā bhikkhū dhammiyā kathāya ovadī’’tiādi. Tadā hi dvīsu aggasāvakesu dhammasenāpati tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cittacāraṃ ñatvā dhammaṃ desesi, mahāmoggallānatthero vikubbanaṃ dassetvā dhammaṃ desesi, pāḷiyañcettha dvinnampi therānaṃ desanāya dhammacakkhupaṭilābhova dassito. Dīghabhāṇakā pana evaṃ vadanti ‘‘bhagavatā pesitesu dvīsu aggasāvakesu dhammasenāpati tesaṃ cittacāraṃ ñatvā dhammaṃ desesi, therassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā pañcasatāpi bhikkhū sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ mahāmoggallānatthero vikubbanaṃ dassetvā dhammaṃ desesi, taṃ sutvā sabbe arahattaphale patiṭṭhahiṃsū’’ti.Devadattaṃ uṭṭhāpesīti jaṇṇukena hadayamajjhe paharitvā uṭṭhāpesi.

345. ‘Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto ādesanāpāṭihāriyānusāsaniyā’tiādīsu: Among these, knowing the minds of others and speaking is the ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ (miracle of mind-reading); constantly teaching the Dhamma to disciples and Buddhas is the anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṃ (miracle of instruction); and the power of psychic abilities is the iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ (miracle of psychic power). Among these, the anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṃ along with the iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ was habitual for Mahāmoggallānatthera, and the anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṃ along with the ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ was habitual for Dhammasenāpati. Therefore, it was said, "Āyasmā Sāriputta advised the monks with the dhammiya kathā (Dhamma talk) through the ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ and anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṃ," etc. At that time, of the two chief disciples, Dhammasenāpati, knowing the mental conduct of those monks, taught the Dhamma, and Mahāmoggallānatthera, showing his power of transformation, taught the Dhamma. In the Pali, the attainment of the Dhamma eye through the teaching of both elders is shown. But the Dīghabhāṇakas say thus: "Of the two chief disciples sent by the Blessed One, Dhammasenāpati, knowing the mental conduct of those monks, taught the Dhamma, and having heard the Dhamma teaching of the elder, even five hundred monks were established in the fruit of sotāpatti. Then, Mahāmoggallānatthera, showing his power of transformation to them, taught the Dhamma, and having heard it, all were established in the fruit of arahatta." ‘Devadattaṃ uṭṭhāpesī’ti: He struck him in the middle of the heart with his knee and made him get up.

346.Sarasīti saro.Suvikkhālitanti suṭṭhu vikkhālitaṃ, suvisodhitaṃ katvāti attho.Saṃkhāditvāti suṭṭhu khāditvā.Mahiṃ vikubbatoti mahiṃ dantehi vilikhantassa. Nadīsu bhisaṃ ghasānassāti yojetabbaṃ.Nadīti cettha mahāsaro adhippeto.Jaggatoti hatthiyūthaṃ pālentassa.Bhiṅkovāti hatthipotako viya.Mamānukubbanti maṃ anukaronto.

346.‘Sarasī’ti: A pond. ‘Suvikkhālita’nti: Well washed, meaning having thoroughly purified. ‘Saṃkhāditvā’ti: Having thoroughly eaten. ‘Mahiṃ vikubbato’ti: While scratching the earth with his teeth. It should be construed as swallowing lotus roots in the rivers. ‘Nadī’ti: Here, a great lake is intended. ‘Jaggato’ti: While protecting the herd of elephants. ‘Bhiṅkovā’ti: Like a baby elephant. ‘Mamānukubba’nti: Imitating me.

347.Dūteyyanti dūtakammaṃ.Gantumarahatīti dūteyyasaṅkhātaṃ sāsanaṃ harituṃ dhāretvā harituṃ arahati.Sotāti yaṃ assa sāsanaṃ denti, tassa sotā.Sāvetāti taṃ uggaṇhitvā ‘‘idaṃ nāma tumhehi vutta’’nti paṭisāvetā.Uggahetāti suuggahitaṃ katvā uggahetā.Dhāretāti sudhāritaṃ katvā dhāretā.Viññātāti attanā tassa atthaṃ jānitā.Viññāpetāti paraṃ vijānāpetā.Sahitāsahitassāti ‘‘idaṃ sahitaṃ, idaṃ asahita’’nti evaṃ sahitāsahitassakusaloupagatānupagatesu cheko sāsanaṃ ārocento sahitāsahitaṃ sallakkhetvā āroceti.Na byathatīti na vedhati na chambhati.Uggavādininti pharusavacanena samannāgataṃ.Pucchitoti paṭiññatthāya pucchito.

347. ‘Dūteyya’nti: The work of a messenger. ‘Gantumarahatī’ti: Is worthy to carry the message counted as the work of a messenger, to hold and carry the teaching. ‘Sotā’ti: The one who hears, to whom the message is given. ‘Sāvetā’ti: Having learned it, he announces it back, "This is what you said." ‘Uggahetā’ti: Having thoroughly learned it, he retains it. ‘Dhāretā’ti: Having well remembered it, he keeps it in mind. ‘Viññātā’ti: Having understood its meaning by himself. ‘Viññāpetā’ti: He makes others understand. ‘Sahitāsahitassā’ti: "This is consistent, this is inconsistent," thus, in regard to what is consistent and inconsistent, he is ‘kusalo’ (skilled). Being clever in what is suitable and unsuitable, while declaring the message, he discerns and declares what is consistent and inconsistent. ‘Na byathatī’ti: He does not tremble, he is not agitated. ‘Uggavādini’nti: Endowed with harsh speech. ‘Pucchito’ti: Questioned for affirmation.

348.Aṭṭhahi, bhikkhave, asaddhammehītiādīsuasaddhammehīti (itivu. aṭṭha. 89) asataṃ dhammehi, asantehi vā asobhanehi vā dhammehi.Abhibhūtoti ajjhotthaṭo.Pariyādinnacittoti khepitacitto lābhādihetukena icchācārena mānamadādinā ca khayaṃ pāpitakusalacitto. Atha vāpariyādinnacittoti parito ādinnacitto, vuttappakārena akusalakoṭṭhāsena yathā kusalacittassa uppattivāro na hoti, evaṃ samantato gahitacittasantānoti attho. Apāye nibbattanārahatāyaāpāyiko. Tatthapi avīcisaṅkhāte mahāniraye uppajjatītinerayiko. Ekaṃ antarakappaṃ paripuṇṇameva katvā tattha tiṭṭhatītikappaṭṭho. Atekicchoti buddhehipi anivattanīyattā avīcinibbattiyā tikicchābhāvato atekiccho, atikicchanīyoti attho.Lābhenāti lābhena hetubhūtena. Atha vā lābhahetukena mānādinā. Lābhañhi nissāya idhekacce puggalā pāpicchā icchāpakatā icchācāre ṭhatvā ‘‘lābhaṃ nibbattessāmā’’ti anekavihitaṃ anesanaṃ appatirūpaṃ āpajjitvā ito cutā apāyesu nibbattanti. Apare yathālābhaṃ labhitvā taṃnimittaṃ mānātimānamadamacchariyādivasena pamādaṃ āpajjitvā ito cutā apāyesu nibbattanti, ayañca tādiso. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘lābhena, bhikkhave, abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto devadatto āpāyiko’’tiādi.Asakkārenāti hīḷetvā paribhavitvā parehi attani pavattitena asakkārena, asakkārahetukena vā mānādinā. Asantaguṇasambhāvanādhippāyena pavattā pāpā icchā etassāti pāpiccho, tassa bhāvopāpicchatā,tāya. ‘‘Ahaṃ buddho bhavissāmi, bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pariharissāmī’’ti hi tassa icchā uppannā. Kokālikādayo pāpā lāmakā mittā etassāti pāpamitto, tassa bhāvopāpamittatā,tāya.

348. ‘Aṭṭhahi, bhikkhave, asaddhammehī’tiādīsu: Among these, ‘asaddhammehī’ti (itivu. aṭṭha. 89) by the qualities of the untrue, or by qualities that are non-existent or unseemly. ‘Abhibhūto’ti: Overwhelmed. ‘Pariyādinnacitto’ti: With a depleted mind, with his wholesome mind brought to ruin by desire-driven conduct due to gain, and by pride, arrogance, etc. Or else, ‘pariyādinnacitto’ti: One whose mind is completely taken over; with the stream of consciousness entirely seized by the portion of unwholesome qualities described above, so that there is no chance for the arising of wholesome consciousness. Because he is worthy of being reborn in the lower realms, he is ‘āpāyiko’. Even there, because he will be born in the great hell called Avīci, he is ‘nerayiko’. Because he will remain there for a full antarakappa, he is ‘kappaṭṭho’. Because there is no cure for the Avīci rebirth due to its irreversibility even by the Buddhas, he is ‘atekiccho’, meaning incurable or beyond treatment. ‘Lābhenā’ti: Because gain is the cause. Or else, by pride, etc., caused by gain. For some individuals here, relying on gain, being of evil desires and given to desire-driven conduct, and standing in desire-driven conduct, fall into various kinds of unsuitable searching, thinking, "We will produce gain," and having passed away from here, they are reborn in the lower realms. Others, having obtained gain as it comes, fall into negligence due to pride, arrogance, conceit, miserliness, etc., and having passed away from here, they are reborn in the lower realms, and this one is like that. Therefore, it was said, "Devadatta, monks, overwhelmed by gain, with a depleted mind, is headed for the lower realms," etc. ‘Asakkārenā’ti: By the disrespect practiced by others on himself after despising and insulting him, or by pride, etc., caused by disrespect. The desire that arises with the intention of esteeming qualities that do not exist is evil; he is one with evil desires. His state is ‘pāpicchatā,’ (evil desire) by that. For the desire arose in him, "I will become a Buddha, I will lead the Sangha." Evil, wretched friends are his friends; he is one with evil friends. His state is ‘pāpamittatā,’ (evil friendship) by that.

349.Abhibhuyyāti abhibhavitvā madditvā.

349. ‘Abhibhuyyā’ti: Having overcome, having crushed.

350.Tīhi, bhikkhave, asaddhammehītiādi vuttanayameva.Oramattakena visesādhigamena antarā vosānaṃ āpādīti ettha pana ayamattho.Oramattakenāti appamattakena jhānābhiññāmattena.Visesādhigamenāti uttarimanussadhammādhigamena.Antarāti vemajjhe.Vosānaṃ āpādīti akatakiccova samāno ‘‘katakiccomhī’’ti maññamāno samaṇadhammato vigamaṃ āpajji. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – jhānābhiññāhi uttarikaraṇīye adhigantabbe maggaphale anadhigate satiyeva taṃ anadhigantvā samaṇadhammato vigamaṃ āpajjīti. Iti bhagavā iminā suttena visesato puthujjanabhāve ādīnavaṃ pakāseti ‘‘bhāriyo puthujjanabhāvo, yatra hi nāma jhānābhiññāpariyosānā sampattiyo nibbattetvāpi anekānatthāvahaṃ nānāvidhadukkhahetuasantaguṇasambhāvanaṃ asappurisasaṃsaggaṃ ālasiyānuyogañca avijahanto avīcisaṃvattanikaṃ kappaṭṭhiyaṃ atekicchaṃ kibbisaṃ pasavatī’’ti.

350. ‘Tīhi, bhikkhave, asaddhammehī’tiādi: (The meaning is) just as said before. But here, in ‘oramattakena visesādhigamena antarā vosānaṃ āpādī’ti, this is the meaning. ‘Oramattakenā’ti: By a slight attainment, merely with jhāna and abhiññā. ‘Visesādhigamenā’ti: By the attainment of superior human qualities. ‘Antarā’ti: In between. ‘Vosānaṃ āpādī’ti: While still with duties unfulfilled, thinking, "I have fulfilled my duties," he fell away from the life of a samaṇa. This is what was said: Before attaining the path and fruit that should be attained by jhāna and abhiññā, he fell away from the life of a samaṇa without attaining them. Thus, with this sutta, the Blessed One especially revealed the danger in the state of a worldling: "The state of a worldling is burdensome, where even after producing attainments ending in jhāna and abhiññā, he begets demerit that leads to Avīci, is fixed for a kappa, and is incurable, not abandoning the esteeming of qualities that do not exist, association with bad people, and indulgence in laziness, which brings about many kinds of suffering."

ti paṭisedhe nipāto.Jātūti ekaṃsena.Kocīti sabbasaṅgāhakavacanaṃ.Lokasminti sattaloke. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – imasmiṃ sattaloke koci puggalo ekaṃsena pāpiccho mā hotūti.Tadamināpi jānātha, pāpicchānaṃ yathā gatīti pāpicchānaṃ puggalānaṃ yathāgati yādisī nibbatti yādiso abhisamparāyoti imināpi kāraṇena jānāthāti devadattaṃ nidassento evamāha.

‘mā’ti: A particle of prohibition. ‘Jātū’ti: Definitely. ‘Kocī’ti: A word encompassing all. ‘Lokasmi’nti: In the world of beings. This is what was said: May no person in this world of beings definitely be of evil desires. ‘Tadamināpi jānātha, pāpicchānaṃ yathā gatī’ti: Know by this reason as well, what the destination of those of evil desires is, what kind of rebirth, what kind of future existence—thus, showing Devadatta as an example, he spoke thus.

Paṇḍitoti samaññātoti pariyattibāhusaccena paṇḍitoti ñāto.Bhāvitattoti sammatoti jhānābhiññāhi bhāvitacittoti sambhāvito. Tathā hi so ‘‘mahiddhiko godhiputto, mahānubhāvo godhiputto’’ti dhammasenāpatināpi pasaṃsito ahosi.Jalaṃva yasasā aṭṭhā, devadattoti vissutoti attano kittiyā parivārena ca jalanto viya obhāsanto viya ṭhito devadattoti evaṃ vissuto pākaṭo ahosi. ‘‘Me suta’’ntipi pāṭho, mayā sutaṃ sutamattaṃ, katipāheneva atathābhūtattā tassa taṃ paṇḍiccādisavanamattamevāti attho.

‘Paṇḍitoti samaññāto’ti: Known as a wise man by his extensive learning of the scriptures. ‘Bhāvitattoti sammato’ti: Considered to have developed his mind by jhāna and abhiññā. For indeed, he was praised even by Dhammasenāpati, "Godhiputta is very powerful, Godhiputta is very influential." ‘Jalaṃva yasasā aṭṭhā, devadattoti vissuto’ti: Like one burning or shining with his fame and retinue, he stood, and thus Devadatta was renowned and well-known. "Me suta" is also a reading; I have heard, it is just hearsay, because of its untruthfulness after a few days, his hearing of wisdom, etc., was merely hearsay.

Sopamādaṃ anuciṇṇo, āsajja naṃ tathāgatanti so evaṃbhūto devadatto ‘‘buddhopi sākiyaputto, ahampi sākiyaputto, buddhopi samaṇo, ahampi samaṇo, buddhopi iddhimā, ahampi iddhimā, buddhopi dibbacakkhuko, dibbasotacetopariyañāṇalābhī, buddhopi atītānāgatapaccuppanne dhamme jānāti, ahampi te jānāmī’’ti attano pamāṇaṃ ajānitvā sammāsambuddhaṃ attanā samasamaṭṭhapanena pamādaṃ āpajjanto ‘‘idānāhaṃ buddho bhavissāmi, bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pariharissāmī’’ti abhimārapayojanādinā tathāgataṃ āsajja āsādetvā viheṭhetvā. ‘‘Pamādamanujiṇṇo’’tipi paṭhanti. Tassattho – pamādaṃ vuttanayena pamajjanto pamādaṃ nissāya bhagavatā saddhiṃ yugaggāhacittuppādena saheva jhānābhiññāhi anujiṇṇo parihīnoti.Avīcinirayaṃ patto, catudvāraṃ bhayānakanti jālānaṃ tattha uppannasattānaṃ vā nirantaratāya ‘‘avīcī’’ti laddhanāmaṃ catūsu passesu catumahādvārayogena catudvāraṃ atibhayānakaṃ mahānirayaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena patto. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –

‘So pamādaṃ anuciṇṇo, āsajja naṃ tathāgata’nti: So, Devadatta of such a nature, not knowing his own measure, thinking, "The Buddha is also a Sakyan son, and I am also a Sakyan son; the Buddha is also a samaṇa, and I am also a samaṇa; the Buddha also has psychic powers, and I also have psychic powers; the Buddha also has the divine eye, and he is a possessor of the divine ear and the knowledge of reading minds; the Buddha also knows past, future, and present things, and I also know them," falling into negligence by placing the Sammāsambuddha on the same level as himself, having approached and harassed the Tathāgata through aims of domination, etc. "Pamādamanujiṇṇo" is also read. Its meaning is: Neglecting due to negligence in the way mentioned, he declined from jhāna and abhiññā along with the arising of thoughts of rivalry with the Blessed One. ‘Avīcinirayaṃ patto, catudvāraṃ bhayānaka’nti: He reached the great hell of Avīci, which is named "Avīci" because of the uninterrupted nature of the flames there or of the beings born there, which has four doors due to the connection with the four great doors in the four directions, and which is very frightening, through the taking of rebirth. Thus, it was said:

‘‘Catukkaṇṇo catudvāro, vibhatto bhāgaso mito;

"Four-cornered, four-doored, divided into portions, measured;

‘‘Tassa ayomayā bhūmi, jalitā tejasā yutā;

Encircled by a wall of iron, covered over with iron.

Aduṭṭhassāti aduṭṭhacittassa.Dubbheti dusseyya.Tameva pāpaṃ phusatīti tameva aduṭṭhadubbhiṃ pāpapuggalaṃ pāpaṃ nihīnaṃ pāpaphalaṃ phusati pāpuṇāti abhibhavati.Bhesmāti vipulabhāvena gambhīrabhāvena ca bhiṃsāpano, bhiṃsāpento viya vipulagambhīroti attho.Vādenāti dosena.Upahiṃsatīti bādhati āsādeti.Vādo tamhi na rūhatīti tasmiṃ tathāgate parena āropiyamāno doso na ruhati na tiṭṭhati, visakumbho viya samuddassa na tassa vikāraṃ janetīti attho.

‘Aduṭṭhassā’ti: To one whose mind is not corrupted. ‘Dubbhe’ti: Would harm. ‘Tameva pāpaṃ phusatī’ti: That evil, low, evil result touches, reaches, and overwhelms that evil person who would harm one who is not corrupted. ‘Bhesmā’ti: Frightening because of its vastness and depth, meaning vast and deep as if frightening. ‘Vādenā’ti: By fault. ‘Upahiṃsatī’ti: Harms, assails. ‘Vādo tamhi na rūhatī’ti: The fault imputed by another does not grow or stand in that Tathāgata; like poison in the ocean, it does not produce any change in him, this is the meaning.

‘‘tādisaṃ mitta’’nti osānagāthamāha. Tassattho –yassasammā paṭipannassamaggānugopaṭipattimaggaṃ anugato sammā paṭipanno appicchatādiguṇasamannāgamena sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassakhayaṃpariyosānaṃ pāpuṇeyya, tādisaṃ buddhaṃ buddhasāvakaṃ vāpaṇḍitosappañño attanomittaṃ kubbethatena mettiṃ kareyya,tañca sevethatameva payirupāseyyāti.

‘tādisaṃ mitta’nti: He spoke the concluding verse. Its meaning is: yassa (whoever), practicing well, maggānugo (a follower of the path), one who has followed the path of practice, well-practiced, with qualities such as fewness of desires, might attain the khayaṃ (destruction), end, of all the suffering of the round (of rebirths), the paṇḍito (wise) one should make such a Buddha or Buddha's disciple his mittaṃ (friend), he should befriend him, and tañca sevetha (and associate with him), he should attend upon him.

Itivuttakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(itivu. aṭṭha. 89) tāva –

‘Itivuttakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ’(itivu. aṭṭha. 89) tāva –

‘‘Devadatte hi avīcimahānirayaṃ paviṭṭhe devadattapakkhikā aññatitthiyā ‘samaṇena gotamena abhisapito devadatto pathaviṃ paviṭṭho’ti abbhācikkhiṃsu. Taṃ sutvā sāsane anabhippasannā manussā ‘siyā nu kho etadevaṃ, yathā ime bhaṇantī’ti āsaṅkaṃ uppādesuṃ. Taṃ pavattiṃ bhikkhū bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Atha kho bhagavā ‘na, bhikkhave, tathāgatā kassaci abhisapaṃ denti, tasmā na devadatto mayā abhisapito, attano kammeneva nirayaṃ paviṭṭho’ti vatvā tesaṃ micchāgāhaṃ paṭisedhento imāya aṭṭhuppattiyā idaṃ suttaṃ abhāsī’’ti –

"When Devadatta had entered the great hell of Avīci, the adherents of Devadatta, the other sectarians, accused, ‘Devadatta has entered the earth, having been cursed by the samaṇa Gotama.’ Having heard that, people who were not devoted to the Dispensation raised doubts, ‘Could it be just as these people say?’ The monks reported that occurrence to the Blessed One. Then the Blessed One, saying, ‘Monks, the Tathāgatas do not give a curse to anyone; therefore, Devadatta was not cursed by me, he entered hell by his own kamma,’ while refuting their false grasping, spoke this sutta with this occasion for its arising—"

āsaṃsāti cettha avassambhāvinī atthasiddhi adhippetā. Avassambhāviniñhi atthasiddhimapekkhitvā anāgatampi bhūtaṃ viya voharanti, tañca saddalakkhaṇānusārena veditabbaṃ.

‘āsaṃsā’ti: Here, the certain success of an aim is intended. For having expected the certain success of an aim, they speak of the future as if it were the past, and that should be understood according to the characteristics of words.

Saṅghabhedakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Schism of the Sangha is finished.

Upālipañhakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Questions of Upāli

351.Upālipañhe yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dassitameva. Tatthaanunayantoti anujānāpento, bhedassa anurūpaṃ vā bodhento, yathā bhedo hoti, evaṃ bhinditabbe bhikkhū viññāpentoti attho. Tenāha‘‘na tumhāka’’ntiādi.

351. In the Upāli's Questions, what should be stated has already been shown in the commentary. There, anunayanto means persuading, or explaining in accordance with the division, that is, making the bhikkhus understand that they should be divided in such a way that division occurs. Therefore, he said, "It is not yours," etc.

352.Aṭṭhārasabhedakaravatthumhi dasa akusalakammapathā saṃkiliṭṭhadhammatāya vodānadhammapaapakkhattā ‘‘adhammo’’ti dassitā, tathā upādānādayo, bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ ekantānavajjabhāvato natthi adhammabhāvo, bhagavatā pana desitākārena hāpetvā vaḍḍhetvā vā kathanaṃ yathādhammaṃ akathananti katvā adhammabhāvoti dassento āha‘‘tayo satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādi.Niyyānikanti sapāṭihīraṃ appaṭihataṃ hutvā pavattatīti attho.Tathevāti iminā ‘‘evaṃ amhāka’’ntiādinā vuttamatthaṃ ākaḍḍhati.Kātabbaṃ kammaṃ dhammo nāmāti yathādhammaṃ karaṇatodhammonāma, itaraṃ vuttavipariyāyatoadhammonāma.

352. In the eighteen grounds for causing division, the ten unwholesome courses of action are shown as "not the Dhamma" because of their defiled nature, being on the side of defiled things, and being opposed to pure things. Likewise, clinging, etc., are not not-Dhamma because of the exclusively blameless nature of the factors of enlightenment. However, showing that speaking by diminishing or increasing from the way the Blessed One taught is not speaking according to the Dhamma, he said, "The three foundations of mindfulness," etc. Niyyānika means it proceeds miraculously and unimpeded. Tathevā ("Just so") draws in the meaning stated with "evaṃ amhāka" ("Thus it is for us"), etc. Kātabbaṃ kammaṃ dhammo nāmā means that acting according to the Dhamma is called Dhamma, and the other is called not-Dhamma from the opposite of what was stated.

Rāgavinayo…pe… ayaṃ vinayo nāmāti rāgādīnaṃ vinayanato saṃvaraṇato pajahanato paṭisaṅkhānato cavinayonāma, vuttavipariyāyena itaroavinayo. Vatthusampattiādivasena sabbesaṃ vinayakammānaṃ akuppatāti āha‘‘vatthusampatti…pe… ayaṃ vinayo nāmā’’ti. Tappaṭipakkhatoavinayoveditabbo. Tenāha‘‘vatthuvipattī’’tiādi. Yāsaṃ āpannassa pabbajjā sāvasesā, tā āpattiyosāvasesā.

Rāgavinayo…pe… ayaṃ vinayo nāmā means that vinaya is so-called because of restraining, preventing, abandoning, and reflecting on greed, etc., and the other is avinaya by the opposite of what was stated. Because all the acts of the Vinaya are unshakeable due to the completeness of the basis, etc., he says, "vatthusampatti…pe… ayaṃ vinayo nāmā" ("Completeness of the basis...this is called Vinaya"). Avinaya should be understood as the opposite of that. Therefore, he said, "vatthuvipattī" ("failure of the basis"), etc. Those offenses for which expulsion remains are sāvasesā (remaining).

354.Āpāyikotiādigāthāsu (itivu. aṭṭha. 18) saṅghassa bhedasaṅkhāte vagge ratotivaggarato. Adhammikatāya adhamme bhedakaravatthumhi saṅghabhedasaṅkhāte eva ca adhamme ṭhitotiadhammaṭṭho. Yogakkhemā padhaṃsatīti hitato parihāyati, catūhipi yogehi anupaddutattāyogakkhemaṃnāma arahattaṃ nibbānañca, tato panassa dhaṃsane vattabbameva natthi. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññato saṅghataṭṭhenasaṅghaṃ,tato eva ekakammādividhānayogenasamaggaṃsahitaṃbhinditvāpubbe vuttalakkhaṇena saṅghabhedena bhinditvā.Kappanti antarakappasaṅkhātaṃ āyukappaṃ.Nirayamhīti avīcimahānirayamhi.

354. In the verses beginning with Āpāyiko (Iti. 18), vaggarato means delighting in a group, in the division known as the Sangha's division. Adhammaṭṭho means standing in the not-Dhamma, in the ground for division, and also in the not-Dhamma known as the Sangha's division, due to being unrighteous. Yogakkhemā padhaṃsatī means declines from welfare. Yogakkhemaṃ is the arahantship and Nibbāna, which is unharmed by the four yogas; there is nothing to be said about decline from that. Saṅghaṃ means the Sangha, standing in unity of view and virtue. Samaggaṃ means united, together by means of the arrangement of single actions, etc. bhinditvā means having divided by the Sangha's division with the characteristic stated before. Kappa means an aeon, counted as an intermediate aeon. Nirayamhī means in Avīci, the great hell.

Sukhā saṅghassa sāmaggīti (itivu. aṭṭa. 19) sukhassa paccayabhāvato sāmaggī ‘‘sukhā’’ti vuttā yathā ‘‘sukho buddhānamuppādo’’ti (dha. pa. 194).Samaggānañcanuggahoti samaggānaṃ sāmaggianumodanena anuggaṇhanaṃ sāmaggianurūpaṃ vā, yathā te sāmaggiṃ na vijahanti, tathā gahaṇaṃ ṭhapanaṃ anubalappadānanti attho.Samaggaṃ katvānāti bhinnaṃ saṅghaṃ saṅgharājippattaṃ vā samaggaṃ sahitaṃ katvā.Kappanti āyukappameva.Saggamhi modatīti kāmāvacaradevaloke aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi abhibhavitvā dibbasukhaṃ anubhavanto icchitanibbattiyā ca modati pamodati laḷati kīḷati.

Sukhā saṅghassa sāmaggī (Iti. 19) means that concord is called "sukha" ("happiness") because it is the cause of happiness, just as "sukho buddhānamuppādo" ("Happy is the arising of Buddhas"). Samaggānañcanuggaho means favoring those in concord with agreement in concord, or in accordance with concord, taking hold and establishing them so that they do not abandon concord, giving them supporting strength. Samaggaṃ katvānā means having made the divided Sangha, or that which has attained the state of a heap of the Sangha, united, together. Kappa means an aeon of life. Saggamhi modatī means rejoicing in the world of sense-sphere devas, surpassing other devas in ten ways, experiencing divine bliss, and rejoicing, delighting, playing, and sporting with desired attainments.

355.Siyā nu kho, bhante, saṅghabhedakotiādi pāḷianusāreneva veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Pañcahi, upāli, ākārehi saṅgho bhijjati kammena uddesena voharanto anussāvanena salākaggāhenā’’ti evaṃparivāre(pari. 458) āgatampi saṅghabhedalakkhaṇaṃ idha vuttena kiṃ nānākaraṇanti dassetuṃ‘‘parivāre panā’’tiādimāha. Ettha ca sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghe asannipatite visuṃ parisaṃ gahetvā katavohārānussāvanasalākaggāhassa kammaṃ vā karontassa uddesaṃ vā uddisantassa bhedo ca hoti ānantariyakammañca. Samaggasaññāya pana ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti saññāya vā karontassa bhedova hoti, na ānantariyakammaṃ. Tato ūnaparisāya karontassa neva saṅghabhedo na ānantariyaṃ. Sabbantimena hi paricchedena navannaṃ janānaṃ yo saṅghaṃ bhindati, tassa ānantariyakammaṃ hoti, anuvattakānaṃ adhammavādīnaṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ kammaṃ, dhammavādino anavajjā. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.

355. Siyā nu kho, bhante, saṅghabhedako ("Could there be, Bhante, a Sangha-divider"), etc., should be understood according to the Pāli. To show that the characteristic of Sangha division that comes in the Parivāra (Pari. 458) as "In five ways, Upāli, the Sangha is divided: by action, by recitation, by declaring, by announcement, and by taking lots," is not different from what has been said here, he said "parivāre panā," etc. And here, if in a Sangha within a boundary marker that is not assembled, one makes an action, recites, or takes lots by taking a separate assembly, a division occurs, and also an immediately effective action. But if he makes it with the perception of concord, or with the perception that "it is proper," there is only division, not an immediately effective action. Therefore, if he does it with an incomplete assembly, there is neither Sangha division nor an immediately effective action. Indeed, with the very last determination, for the nine people who divide the Sangha, there is an immediately effective action; for those who follow, who speak what is not-Dhamma, there is a greatly blameworthy action; those who speak the Dhamma are blameless. The rest here is quite clear.

Upālipañhakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of Upāli's Questions is Finished.

Saṅghabhedakakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sanghabhedakakkhandhaka is Finished.

8. Vattakkhandhakaṃ

8. Vattakkhandhaka

Āgantukavattakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Duties for Newcomer Monks

356-357.Vattakkhandhakeuparipiṭṭhitoti piṭṭhisaṅghāṭassa uparibhāgato, dvārabāhassa uparipadesatoti attho.Vissajjetabbanti sukkhāpanatthaṃ ātape vissajjitabbaṃ.Abhivādāpetabboti tassa vasse pucchite yadi daharo hoti, sayameva vandissati, tadā imināva vandāpito nāma hoti.Nilloketabboti oloketabbo.Yathābhāganti pubbe paññattaṃ padesabhāgaṃ anatikkamitvā.Santānakanti uṇṇanābhisuttaṃ.Ullokāti gehassa uparibhāgato paṭṭhāya, paṭhamaṃ uparibhāgo sammajjitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.

356-357. In the Vattakkhandhaka, uparipiṭṭhito means from the upper part of the back-cloak, from above the side of the doorpost. Vissajjetabbanti it should be released to the sun for the purpose of drying. Abhivādāpetabbo means if his years are asked and he is young, he will worship himself, then he is said to be worshiped by this one. Nilloketabbo means it should be looked at. Yathābhāga means without transgressing the previously designated portion. Santānaka means the silk of the spider. Ullokā means starting from above the dwelling, first the upper part should be swept.

Āvāsikavattakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Duties for Resident Monks

359.Mahāāvāseti mahāvihārasadise mahāāvāse.

359. Mahāāvāse means in a large dwelling similar to a Mahāvihāra.

Anumodanavattakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Duties Regarding Anumodanā

362.Pañcame nisinneti anumodanatthāya nisinne.Upanisinnakathānāma bahūsu sannipatitesu parikathākathanaṃ.

362. Pañcame nisinne means sitting for anumodanā. Upanisinnakathā is the telling of stories when many have assembled.

Bhattaggavattakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Duties Regarding the Refectory

364.Manussānaṃ parivisanaṭṭhānanti yattha manussā saputtadārā āvasitvā denti.Hatthadhovanaudakaṃ sandhāyāti bhuttāvissa bhojanāvasāne hatthadhovanaudakaṃ sandhāya. Tenevāha‘‘antarā pipāsitena pana…pe… hatthā na dhovitabbā’’ti. Potthakesu pana ‘‘pānīyaṃ pivitvā hatthā na dhovitabbā’’ti likhanti, ‘‘hatthā dhovitabbā’’ti pāṭhena bhavitabbanti amhākaṃ khanti. Aññathā ‘‘na tāva udakanti idaṃ hatthadhovanaudakaṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti vatvā ‘‘antarā pipāsitena panā’’tiādinā vuttaviseso na upalabbhati. Atha mataṃ‘‘na tāva therena udakaṃ paṭiggahetabbanti idaṃ kiṃ pānīyapaṭiggahaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, udāhu hatthadhovanaudakaggahaṇaṃ sandhāyāti āsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ ‘idaṃ hatthadhovanaudakaṃ sandhāya vutta’ntiādi kathita’’nti, tañca na, tattha āsaṅkāya eva asambhavato. Na hi bhagavā ‘‘yāva aññe na bhuttāvino honti, tāva pānīyaṃ na pātabba’’nti vakkhatīti sakkā viññātuṃ. Yadi cetaṃ pānīyapaṭiggahaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, ‘‘na tāva therena udakaṃ paṭiggahetabba’’nti udakasaddappayogo ca na kattabbo siyā, aṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘idaṃ hatthadhovanaudakaṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti vatvā tena nivattitabbamatthaṃ dassentena ‘‘antarā pipāsitena pana gale vilaggāmisena vā pānīyaṃ pivitabba’’nti ettakameva vattabbaṃ, ‘‘pānīyaṃ pivitvā hatthā na dhovitabbā’’ti evaṃ pana na vattabbanti.Dhure nisinnā hontīti dvārasamīpe nisinnā honti.

364. Manussānaṃ parivisanaṭṭhānanti where people live with their children and wives and give. Hatthadhovanaudakaṃ sandhāyā means concerning the water for washing hands at the end of the meal, after eating. Therefore, he said ‘‘antarā pipāsitena pana…pe… hatthā na dhovitabbā’’ ("But one who is thirsty in between...hands should not be washed"). But in books they write "pānīyaṃ pivitvā hatthā na dhovitabbā" ("having drunk water, hands should not be washed"), we think the reading should be "hatthā dhovitabbā" ("hands should be washed"). Otherwise, if it is said that "na tāva udakanti" ("not yet water") was said concerning the water for washing hands, the stated distinction with "antarā pipāsitena panā" ("but one who is thirsty in between") would not be found. Now, the opinion that "na tāva therena udakaṃ paṭiggahetabba" ("water should not yet be received by the elder") was said concerning the receiving of drinking water or concerning the receiving of water for washing hands to remove the doubt, "this was said concerning the water for washing hands," that is not so, since there is no possibility of doubt there. Indeed, it can be known that the Blessed One would not say, "yāva aññe na bhuttāvino honti, tāva pānīyaṃ na pātabba" ("water should not be drunk until others have finished eating"). And if this was said concerning the receiving of drinking water, the use of the word "udakaṃ" ("water") should not be done, and in the commentary, having said "idaṃ hatthadhovanaudakaṃ sandhāya vutta" ("this was said concerning the water for washing hands"), and showing the meaning that should be removed by that, it should only be said "antarā pipāsitena pana gale vilaggāmisena vā pānīyaṃ pivitabba" ("but one who is thirsty in between, or with food stuck in the throat, water should be drunk"), it should not be said "pānīyaṃ pivitvā hatthā na dhovitabbā" ("having drunk water, hands should not be washed"). Dhure nisinnā hontī means they sit near the door.

Piṇḍacārikavattakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Duties Regarding Alms Round

366.Parāmasatīti gaṇhāti.Ṭhapeti vāti ‘‘tiṭṭhatha, bhante’’ti vadantī ṭhapeti nāma.

366. Parāmasatī means she takes. Ṭhapeti vā means saying "tiṭṭhatha, bhante" ("Venerable sir, please wait"), she makes him wait.

Āraññikavattakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Duties Regarding Forest Dwellers

367.Kenajja, bhante, yuttanti kena nakkhattena ajja cando yuttoti evaṃ vadantena nakkhattaṃ pucchitaṃ hoti.

367. Kenajja, bhante, yutta ("With which, venerable sir, is it joined today?") means by saying thus, he asks the constellation by which the moon is joined today.

Senāsanavattakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Duties Regarding Lodgings

369-370.Aṅgaṇeti abbhokāse.Na vuḍḍhaṃ anāpucchāti ettha tassa ovarake tadupacāre ca āpucchitabbanti vadanti.Bhojanasālādīsupi evameva paṭipajjitabbanti bhojanasālādīsupi uddesadānādi āpucchitvāva kātabbanti attho.

369-370. Aṅgaṇe means in the open air. Na vuḍḍhaṃ anāpucchā ("Without asking an elder") means here they say that he should ask in his own enclosure and its vicinity. Bhojanasālādīsupi evameva paṭipajjitabba means that in the dining hall, etc., giving of designation, etc., should be done only after asking.

Vaccakuṭivattakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Duties Regarding the Toilet

373-374.Idaṃativivaṭanti idaṃ ṭhānaṃ gumbādīhi appaṭicchannattā ativiya pakāsanaṃ.Nibaddhagamanatthāyāti attano nibaddhagamanatthāya.Puggalikaṭṭhānaṃ vāti attano vihāraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sesamettha suviññeyyameva.

373-374. Idaṃ ativivaṭa means this place is too exposed because it is not covered by bushes, etc. Nibaddhagamanatthāyā means for his regular going. Puggalikaṭṭhānaṃ vā means said concerning his own monastery. The rest here is very easy to understand.

cuddasa mahāvattānināma, ito aññāni pana kadāci tajjanīyakammakatādikāleyeva caritabbāniasīti khandhakavattānīti veditabbāni.Gaṇṭhipadesupana ‘‘imāniyeva cuddasa mahāvattāni aggahitaggahaṇena gahiyamānāni asīti khandhakavattāānī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.

The fourteen great duties are known. But the eighty khandhaka duties, other than these, should be practiced only at the time of censure action, etc. In the Gaṇṭhipada, however, it is said that "these very fourteen great duties, being grasped by grasping an ungrasped object, are the eighty khandhaka duties," that should not be taken.

Vattakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Vattakkhandhaka is Finished.

9. Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhakaṃ

9. Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhaka

Pātimokkhuddesayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Request for the Pātimokkha Recitation

383.Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhaketadahūti (udā. aṭṭha. 45) tasmiṃ ahani tasmiṃ divase.Uposatheti ettha upavasanti etthātiuposatho, upavasantīti sīlena vā anasanena vā upetā hutvā vasantīti attho. Ayañhiuposatha-saddo ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ uposathaṃ upavasāmī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.71; 10.46) sīle āgato. ‘‘Uposatho vā pavāraṇā vā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 155) pātimokkhuddesādivinayakamme. ‘‘Gopālakūposatho nigaṇṭhūposatho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.71) upavāse. ‘‘Uposatho nāma nāgarājā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.246; ma. ni. 3.258) paññattiyaṃ. ‘‘Ajjuposatho pannaraso’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 168) divase. Idhāpi divaseyeva daṭṭhabbo. Tasmātadahuposatheti tasmiṃ uposathadivasabhūte ahanīti attho.Nisinno hotīti mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivuto ovādapātimokkhaṃ uddisituṃ upāsikāya ratanapāsāde nisinno hoti. Nisajja pana bhikkhūnaṃ cittāni olokento ekaṃ dussīlapuggalaṃ disvā ‘‘sacāhaṃ imasmiṃ puggale idha nisinneyeva pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmi, sattadhāvassa muddhā phalissatī’’ti tasmiṃ anukampāya tuṇhīyeva ahosi.

383. In the Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhaka, tadahū (UdA. 45) means on that day, on that date. Uposathe means here, upavasanti etthāti uposatho, upavasantī means abiding having approached with virtue or fasting. Indeed, this word uposatha comes in the meaning of virtue in "aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ uposathaṃ upavasāmī" (A.N. 3.71; 10.46). It comes in the meaning of the Vinaya act of Pātimokkha recitation, etc., in "Uposatho vā pavāraṇā vā" (MahaVa. 155). It comes in the meaning of fasting in "Gopālakūposatho nigaṇṭhūposatho" (A.N. 3.71). It comes in the meaning of designation in "Uposatho nāma nāgarājā" (D.N. 2.246; M.N. 3.258). It comes in the meaning of date in "Ajjuposatho pannaraso" (MahaVa. 168). Here too it should be seen as date. Therefore, tadahuposathe means on that day which is the date of the Uposatha. Nisinno hotī means surrounded by a great Sangha of bhikkhus, he sat in the Ratanapāsāda of the female lay follower to recite the Ovādapātimokkha. But sitting and looking at the minds of the bhikkhus, seeing one immoral person, thinking, "If I recite the Pātimokkha while this person is sitting here, his head will split into seven pieces," he was silent out of compassion for him.

Abhikkantāti atikkantā parikkhīṇā.Uddhaste aruṇeti uggate aruṇasīse.Nandimukhiyāti tuṭṭhimukhiyā.Uddhastaṃ aruṇanti aruṇuggamanaṃ patvāpi ‘‘uddisatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkha’’nti thero bhagavantaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ yāci tasmiṃ kāle ‘‘na, bhikkhave, anuposathe uposatho kātabbo’’ti (mahāva. 183) sikkhāpadassa apaññattattā.Aparisuddhā, ānanda, parisāti tikkhattuṃ therena pātimokkhuddesassa yācitattā anuddesassa kāraṇaṃ kathento ‘‘asukapuggalo aparisuddho’’ti avatvā ‘‘aparisuddhā, ānanda, parisā’’ti āha. Kasmā pana bhagavā tiyāmarattiṃ tathā vītināmesi? Tato paṭṭhāya ovādapātimokkhaṃ anuddisitukāmo tassa vatthuṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ.

Abhikkantā means gone, exhausted. Uddhaste aruṇe means when the head of the dawn had risen. Nandimukhiyā means with a face of joy. Uddhastaṃ aruṇa means even after reaching the rising of the dawn, the Elder requested the Blessed One to recite the Pātimokkha to the bhikkhus, because at that time the rule "na, bhikkhave, anuposathe uposatho kātabbo" ("bhikkhus, an Uposatha should not be done on a non-Uposatha day") (MahaVa. 183) had not been established. Aparisuddhā, ānanda, parisā ("Impure is the assembly, Ānanda") means saying the reason for not reciting, since the Elder had requested the Pātimokkha recitation three times, he said "aparisuddhā, ānanda, parisā" without saying "asukapuggalo aparisuddho" ("such and such a person is impure"). But why did the Blessed One spend the three watches of the night like that? From then on, wanting to not recite the Ovādapātimokkha, to make that thing apparent.

Addasāti kathaṃ addasa. Attano cetopariyañāṇena tassaṃ parisati bhikkhūnaṃ cittāni parijānanto tassa purisassa dussīlyacittaṃ passi. Yasmā pana citte diṭṭhe taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo diṭṭho nāma hoti, tasmā‘‘addasā kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno taṃ puggalaṃ dussīla’’nti vuttaṃ. Yatheva hi anāgate sattasu divasesu pavattaṃ paresaṃ cittaṃ cetopariyañāṇalābhī pajānāti, evaṃ atītepīti.Dussīlanti nissīlaṃ, sīlavirahitanti attho.Pāpadhammanti dussīlattā eva hīnajjhāsayatāya lāmakasabhāvaṃ.Asucinti aparisuddhehi kāyakammādīhi samannāgatattā na suciṃ.Saṅkassarasamācāranti kiñcideva asāruppaṃ disvā ‘‘idaṃ iminā kataṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ paresaṃ āsaṅkanīyatāya saṅkāya saritabbasamācāraṃ. Atha vā kenacideva karaṇīyena mantayante bhikkhū disvā ‘‘kacci nu kho ime mayā katakammaṃ jānitvā mantentī’’ti attanoyeva saṅkāya saritabbasamācāraṃ. Lajjitabbatāya paṭicchādetabbassa karaṇato paṭicchannaṃ kammantaṃ etassātipaṭicchannakammantaṃ. Kucchitasamaṇavesadhāritāya na samaṇantiassamaṇaṃ. Salākaggahaṇādīsu ‘‘kittakā samaṇā’’ti gaṇanāya ‘‘ahampi samaṇomhī’’ti micchāpaṭiññāyasamaṇapaṭiññaṃ. Aseṭṭhacāritāyaabrahmacāriṃ. Aññe brahmacārino sunivatthe supārute kusumbhakapaṭadhare gāmanigamādīsu piṇḍāya caritvā jīvikaṃ kappente disvā abrahmacārī samāno sayampi tādisena ākārena paṭipajjanto uposathādīsu ca sandissanto ‘‘ahampi brahmacārī’’ti paṭiññaṃ dento viya hotītibrahmacāripaṭiññaṃ. Pūtinā kammena sīlavipattiyā anto anupaviṭṭhattāantopūtiṃ. Chahi dvārehi rāgādikilesāvassavena tintattāavassutaṃ. Sañjātarāgādikacavarattā sīlavantehi chaḍḍetabbattā cakasambujātaṃ. Majjhe bhikkhusaṅghassa nisinnanti saṅghapariyāpanno viya bhikkhusaṅghassa anto nisinnaṃ.

Addasāti how did he see? With his own power of knowing others' minds, while discerning the thoughts of the bhikkhus in that assembly, he saw the immoral thought of that man. However, since seeing the thought is equivalent to seeing the person possessing that thought, therefore it is said, "The venerable Mahāmoggallāna saw that immoral person." Just as one who has attained the knowledge of others' minds knows the thoughts of others that will occur in seven days, so too does he know those of the past. Dussīlati immoral, devoid of morality, is the meaning. Pāpadhammanti being immoral, having a base nature due to a low disposition. Asucinti being impure because he is endowed with impure bodily actions and so on, he is not pure. Saṅkassarasamācāranti seeing some impropriety, thinking, "This will have been done by this person," thus his conduct is such that others suspect him. Or, seeing bhikkhus deliberating on some matter to be done, thinking, "Surely these monks are deliberating, knowing a deed done by me," thus his conduct is such that he suspects himself. Because he does what should be concealed due to shame, paṭicchannakammantaṃ means one whose actions are concealed. Because he wears the garb of a contemptible ascetic, he is not a samaṇa, thus assamaṇaṃ. In the taking of lots and so on, in the counting of "how many ascetics?", he falsely claims, "I am an ascetic," thus samaṇapaṭiññaṃ. Because his conduct is not excellent, he is abrahmacāriṃ. Seeing other celibates well-clothed, well-covered, wearing robes dyed with kusumba, going for alms in villages and towns and making a living, being non-celibate himself, he also behaves in a similar manner, appearing at the uposatha and claiming, "I am a celibate," thus it is as if he is making a claim of brahmacāripaṭiññaṃ. Because he has entered within, due to the foul deed of moral failure, he is antopūtiṃ. Because he is wetted by the outflow of defilements such as lust through the six doors, he is avassutaṃ. Because he is a pile of rubbish due to accumulated lust and so on, and because he should be discarded by the virtuous, he is kasambujātaṃ. Majjhe bhikkhusaṅghassa nisinnanti sitting in the midst of the Sangha of bhikkhus, as if included in the Sangha.

Diṭṭhosīti ‘‘ayaṃ na pakatatto’’ti bhagavatā diṭṭho asi. Yasmā ca evaṃ diṭṭho, tasmā natthi te tava bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ ekakammādisaṃvāso. Yasmā pana so saṃvāso tava natthi, tasmā uṭṭhehi āvusoti evamettha padayojanā veditabbā.Tatiyampi kho so puggalo tuṇhī ahosīti anekavāraṃ vatvāpi ‘‘thero sayameva nibbinno oramissati, idāni imesaṃ paṭipattiṃ jānissāmī’’ti vā adhippāyena tuṇhī ahosi.Bāhāyaṃ gahetvāti ‘‘bhagavatā mayā ca yāthāvato diṭṭho, yāvatatiyaṃ ‘uṭṭhehī’ti ca vutto na uṭṭhāti, idānissa nikkaḍḍhanakālo, mā saṅghassa uposathantarāyo ahosī’’ti bāhāyaṃ aggahesi.Bahi dvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhāmetvāti dvārakoṭṭhakā dvārasālato nikkhāmetvā,bahīti pana nikkhāmitaṭṭhānadassanaṃ. Atha vābahidvārakoṭṭhakāti bahidvārakoṭṭhakatopi nikkhāmetvā, na antodvārakoṭṭhakato eva. Ubhayathāpi vihārato bahikatvāti attho.Sūcighaṭikaṃ datvāti aggaḷasūciñca uparighaṭikañca ādahitvā, suṭṭhu kavāṭaṃ thaketvāti attho.Yāva bāhāgahaṇāpi nāmāti ‘‘aparisuddhā, ānanda, parisā’’ti vacanaṃ sutvā eva hi tena pakkamitabbaṃ siyā, evaṃ apakkamitvā yāva bāhāgahaṇāpi nāma so moghapuriso āgamissati, acchariyamidanti dasseti. Idañca garahaṇacchariyamevāti veditabbaṃ.

Diṭṭhosīti "You have been seen by the Blessed One as not genuine." And because you have been seen thus, therefore there is no communal living with the bhikkhus for you, such as undertaking the same kamma. And since that communal living is not for you, therefore, get up, friend, thus the arrangement of the words here should be understood. Tatiyampi kho so puggalo tuṇhī ahosīti even after saying it many times, he remained silent, either with the intention that "the Elder himself will be disgusted and stop," or "now I will know their practice." Bāhāyaṃ gahetvāti "He has been seen as he is by the Blessed One and by me, and having been told to 'get up' even for the third time, he does not get up, now is the time to drag him out, lest there be an obstacle to the Sangha's uposatha," thus he seized him by the arm. Bahi dvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhāmetvāti having taken him out from the gatehouse, from the gate hall, bahīti indeed, shows the place where he was taken out. Alternatively, bahidvārakoṭṭhakāti having taken him out even from the outer gatehouse, not just from the inner gatehouse. In either way, it means having made him leave from the monastery. Sūcighaṭikaṃ datvāti having inserted the bolt pin and the upper latch, it means having properly secured the door. Yāva bāhāgahaṇāpi nāmāti having heard the words "the assembly is impure, Ānanda," he should have left, but showing that "without leaving in that way, that foolish man will come even as far as being seized by the arm, this is amazing," it should be understood that this is only censure and astonishment.

Mahāsamudde aṭṭhacchariyakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Eight Wonders of the Great Ocean

384.Aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, mahāsamuddeti (udā. aṭṭha. 45) ko anusandhi? Yvāyaṃ aparisuddhāya parisāya pātimokkhassa anuddeso, so imasmiṃ dhammavinaye acchariyo abbhuto dhammoti taṃ aparehi sattahi acchariyaabbhutadhammehi saddhiṃ vibhajitvā dassetukāmo paṭhamaṃ tāva tesaṃ upamābhāvena mahāsamudde acchariyaabbhutadhamme dassento satthā‘‘aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, mahāsamudde’’tiādimāha.Asurāti devā viya na suranti na īsanti na virocantīti asurā. Surā nāma devā, tesaṃ paṭipakkhāti vāasurā,vepacittipahārādādayo. Tesaṃ bhavanaṃ sinerussa heṭṭhābhāge, te tattha pavisantā nikkhamantā sinerupāde maṇḍapādīni nimminitvā kīḷantāva abhiramanti. Sā tattha tesaṃ abhirati ime guṇe disvāti āha‘‘ye disvā disvā asurā mahāsamudde abhiramantī’’ti. Tatthaabhiramantīti ratiṃ vindanti, anukkaṇṭhamānā vasantīti attho.

384.Aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, mahāsamuddeti (Udāna. 45) what is the connection? The Blessed One, wishing to explain, along with the other seven wonderful and marvelous qualities, that the non-recitation of the Pātimokkha to an impure assembly is a wonderful and marvelous thing in this Dhamma-Vinaya, first showing the wonderful and marvelous qualities in the great ocean by way of comparison, said "Bhikkhus, there are these eight qualities in the great ocean," and so on. Asurāti like gods, they do not delight, do not rule, do not shine, therefore they are asuras. Or, suras means gods, and they are the opposite of them, thus asurā, such as Vepacitti, Pahārāda and so on. Their abode is in the lower part of Mount Sineru, and they delight and rejoice there, entering and leaving, building platforms and so on at the foot of Mount Sineru. He said "seeing which, the asuras rejoice in the great ocean," showing that their delight there is due to seeing these qualities. There, abhiramantīti they find delight, they live without discontent, is the meaning.

Anupubbaninnotiādīni sabbāni anupaṭipāṭiyā ninnabhāvasseva vevacanāni.Na āyatakeneva papātoti nacchinnataṭamahāsobbho viya ādito eva papāto. So hi tīradesato paṭṭhāya ekaṅguladvaṅgulavidatthiratanayaṭṭhiusabhaaḍḍhagāvutagāvutaaḍḍhayojanayojanādivasena gambhīro hutvā gacchanto gacchanto sinerupādamūle caturāsītiyojanasahassagambhīro hutvā ṭhitoti dasseti.

Anupubbaninnoti and so on, all are synonyms for gradually sloping. Na āyatakeneva papātoti it is not a precipice from the beginning like a great abyss with a broken bank. For it shows that starting from the shore area, becoming deep by one finger, two fingers, a span, a cubit, an usabha, half a gāvuta, a gāvuta, half a yojana, a yojana and so on, it stands at the base of Mount Sineru, being eighty-four thousand yojanas deep.

Ṭhitadhammoti ṭhitasabhāvo avaṭṭhitasabhāvo.Kuṇapenāti yena kenaci hatthiassādikaḷevarena.Vāhetīti hatthena gahetvā viya vīcippahāreneva thale khipati.Gaṅgā yamunāti anotattadahassa dakkhiṇamukhato nikkhantanadī pañcadhārā hutvā pavattaṭṭhāne gaṅgātiādinā pañcadhā saṅkhaṃ gatā. Tatthanadī ninnagātiādikaṃ gottaṃ,gaṅgā yamunātiādikaṃ nāmaṃ.Savantiyoti yā kāci savamānā sandamānā gacchantiyo mahānadiyo vā kunnadiyo vā.Appentīti allīyanti osaranti.Dhārāti vuṭṭhidhārā.Pūrattanti puṇṇabhāvo. Mahāsamuddassa hi ayaṃ dhammatā – ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle devo mando jāto, jālakkhipādīni ādāya macchakacchape gaṇhissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle atimahantā vuṭṭhi, labhissāma nu kho piṭṭhipasāraṇaṭṭhāna’’nti vā na sakkā vattuṃ. Paṭhamakappikakālato paṭṭhāya hi tīraṃ bhassitvā sinerumekhalaṃ āhacca udakaṃ ṭhitaṃ, tato ekaṅgulamattampi udakaṃ neva heṭṭhā otarati, na uddhaṃ uttarati.Ekarasoti asambhinnaraso.

Ṭhitadhammoti having a stable nature, having an unchangeable nature. Kuṇapenāti by any corpse of an elephant, horse, and so on. Vāhetīti as if having taken it with the hand, it throws it onto the shore by the force of the waves. Gaṅgā yamunāti the river that flows out from the southern mouth of Lake Anotatta, having become five streams at the place where it flows, has gone to the designation of five rivers, beginning with the Ganges and so on. There, nadī ninnagāti and so on is the clan, gaṅgā yamunāti and so on is the name. Savantiyoti whatever great rivers or small rivers are flowing, streaming, and moving. Appentīti they adhere, they descend. Dhārāti rain showers. Pūrattanti the state of being full. For this is the nature of the great ocean – it is not possible to say "at this time the god has become weak, I will take nets and so on and catch fish and turtles," or "at this time there is very heavy rain, will we be able to get a place to stretch our backs?" For from the time of the first cosmic eon, the water, having eroded the shore and struck the range of Mount Sineru, has remained, then not even a finger's breadth of water goes down, nor does it rise up. Ekarasoti having a uniform taste.

Muttāti khuddakamahantavaṭṭadīghādibhedā anekavidhamuttā.Maṇīti rattanīlādibhedo anekavidho maṇi.Veḷuriyoti vaṃsavaṇṇasirīsapupphavaṇṇādisaṇṭhānato anekavidho.Saṅkhoti dakkhiṇāvaṭṭakatumbakucchidhamanasaṅkhādibhedo anekavidho.Silāti setakāḷamuggavaṇṇādibhedā anekavidhā.Pavāḷampikhuddakamahantarattaghanarattādibhedaṃ anekavidhaṃ.Lohitakopadumarāgādibhedo anekavidho.Masāragallaṃkabaramaṇi. Cittaphalikantipi vadanti.Mahataṃ bhūtānanti mahantānaṃ sattānaṃ.Timi timiṅgalo timitimiṅgaloti tisso macchajātiyo. Timiṃ gilanasamatthotimiṅgalo,timiñca timiṅgalañca gilanasamattho timitimiṅgaloti vadanti.Nāgāti ūmipiṭṭhivāsinopi vimānaṭṭhakanāgāpi.

Muttāti various kinds of pearls with different shapes like small, large, round, long and so on. Maṇīti various kinds of jewels with different colors like ruby, sapphire and so on. Veḷuriyoti various kinds due to shapes like the color of bamboo, the color of sirisa flowers and so on. Saṅkhoti various kinds due to shapes like right-spiraling, pot-bellied, and heart-shaped conches. Silāti various kinds due to colors like white, black, coral color and so on. Pavāḷampi various kinds of coral with different shapes like small, large, red, dense red and so on. Lohitako various kinds of rubies like padumarāga and so on. Masāragallaṃ is a variegated jewel. Some say it is cittaphalika. Mahataṃ bhūtānanti of great beings. Timi timiṅgalo timitimiṅgaloti these are three kinds of fish. Timiṃ means capable of swallowing, timiṅgalo, and they say timiñca timiṅgalañca means timitimiṅgala is capable of swallowing. Nāgāti both those who live on the surface of the waves and the nāgas who have abodes in celestial mansions.

Imasmiṃ dhammavinaye aṭṭhacchariyakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Eight Wonders in this Dhamma-Vinaya

385.Evamevakhoti kiñcāpi satthā imasmiṃ dhammavinaye soḷasapi bāttiṃsapi tato bhiyyopi acchariyabbhutadhamme vibhajitvā dassetuṃ sakkoti, upamābhāvena pana gahitānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ anurūpavasena aṭṭheva te upametabbadhamme vibhajitvā dassanto‘‘evameva kho, bhikkhave, imasmiṃ dhammavinaye aṭṭha acchariyā abbhutā dhammā’’ti āha. Tatthaanupubbasikkhāyatisso sikkhā gahitā,anupubbakiriyāyaterasa dhutadhammā,anupubbapaṭipadāyasatta anupassanā aṭṭhārasa mahāvipassanā aṭṭhatiṃsa ārammaṇavibhattiyo sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā ca gahitā.Na āyatakeneva aññāpaṭivedhoti maṇḍūkassa uppatitvā gamanaṃ viya āditova sīlapūraṇādīni akatvā arahattapaṭivedho nāma natthi, paṭipāṭiyā pana sīlasamādhipaññāyo pūretvāva arahattappattīti attho.

385.Evamevakhoti although the Teacher is able to distinguish and show sixteen or thirty-two or even more wonderful and marvelous qualities in this Dhamma-Vinaya, but showing only eight qualities to be compared in accordance with the eight qualities taken by way of comparison, he said "In the same way, bhikkhus, there are eight wonderful and marvelous qualities in this Dhamma-Vinaya." There, anupubbasikkhāya the three trainings are taken, anupubbakiriyāya the thirteen dhuta practices, anupubbapaṭipadāya the seven contemplations, the eighteen great insights, the thirty-eight object-distinctions, and the thirty-seven qualities conducive to enlightenment are taken. Na āyatakeneva aññāpaṭivedhoti like a frog jumping and going, there is no attainment of Arahatship from the beginning without doing the fulfillment of morality and so on, but only after fulfilling morality, concentration, and wisdom in due order is there the attainment of Arahatship, is the meaning.

Mamasāvakāti sotāpannādike ariyapuggale sandhāya vadati.Na saṃvasatīti uposathakammādivasena saṃvāsaṃ na karoti.Ukkhipatīti apaneti.Ārakāvāti dūre eva.Tathāgatappavediteti tathāgatena bhagavatā sāvakesu desite akkhāte pakāsite.Na tena nibbānadhātuyā ūnattaṃ vā pūrattaṃ vāti asaṅkhyeyyepi mahākappe buddhesu anuppajjantesu ekasattopi parinibbātuṃ na sakkoti, tadāpi ‘‘tucchā nibbānadhātū’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ, buddhakāle pana ekekasmiṃ samāgame asaṅkhyeyyāpi sattā amataṃ ārādhenti, tadāpi na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘pūrā nibbānadhātū’’ti.Vimuttirasoti kilesehi vimuccanaraso. Sabbā hi sāsanasampatti yāvadeva anupādāya āsavehi cittassa vimuttīti attho.

Mamasāvakāti he speaks referring to noble individuals such as Stream-enterers. Na saṃvasatīti he does not associate by way of uposatha actions and so on. Ukkhipatīti he removes. Ārakāvāti from afar. Tathāgatappavediteti in that which is taught, declared, and revealed by the Tathāgata, the Blessed One, to the disciples. Na tena nibbānadhātuyā ūnattaṃ vā pūrattaṃ vāti even if Buddhas do not arise for countless great cosmic ages, not even one being is able to attain final Nibbāna, even then it is not possible to say "the element of Nibbāna is empty," but during the time of a Buddha, even countless beings attain the Deathless in each gathering, even then it is not possible to say "the element of Nibbāna is full." Vimuttirasoti the taste of liberation from defilements. Indeed, all the wealth of the Dispensation is for the sake of the liberation of the mind from the influxes without grasping, is the meaning.

Ratanānīti ratijananaṭṭhena ratanāni. Satipaṭṭhānādayo hi bhāviyamānā pubbabhāgepi anekavidhaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ nibbattenti, pageva aparabhāge. Vuttañhetaṃ –

Ratanānīti jewels because of generating delight. For the Foundations of Mindfulness and so on, when developed, produce various kinds of joy and gladness even in the preliminary stage, what to speak of the later stage. This has been said:

‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ;

"Whenever he rightly discerns the rise and fall of the aggregates,
He obtains joy and gladness; that is the Deathless, for those who understand." (Dhammapada 374);

Lokiyaratananimittaṃ pana pītipāmojjaṃ na tassa kalabhāgampi agghati. Apica –

But the joy and gladness caused by worldly jewels is not worth even a fraction of that. Moreover –

Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ;

"Made with skill, of great value, incomparable, rarely seen,
Used by beings of high merit, it is called a jewel." (Dīgha Nikāya Commentary 2.33);

‘‘tatrimāni ratanāni, seyyathidaṃ – cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādi.

‘‘tatrimāni ratanāni, seyyathidaṃ – cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādi.

satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Ārammaṇassa pana kāyādivasena catubbidhattā vuttaṃ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti. Tathā hi kāyavedanācittadhammesu subhasukhaniccaattasaññānaṃ pahānato asubhadukkhāniccānattabhāvaggahaṇato ca nesaṃ kāyānupassanādibhāvo vibhatto.

satipaṭṭhānaṃ. However, because of the fourfold nature of the object as body and so on, it is said "four foundations of mindfulness." For thus, their state as contemplation of the body and so on is distinguished due to the abandonment of perceptions of beauty, pleasure, permanence, and self in the body, feelings, mind, and mental objects, and due to the grasping of the aspects of ugliness, suffering, impermanence, and non-self.

sammappadhānaṃ,puggalassa vā sammadeva padhānabhāvakaraṇatosammappadhānaṃ,vīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tampi anuppannuppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ anuppādanapahānavasena anuppannuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ uppādanaṭhāpanavasena ca catukiccasādhakattā vuttaṃ‘‘cattāro sammappadhānā’’ti.

sammappadhānaṃ, because of the act of rightly exerting oneself in the case of a person, sammappadhānaṃ, this is a designation for effort. And since that also accomplishes four functions by way of non-arising and abandoning of unarisen and arisen unwholesome qualities, and by way of arising and establishing of unarisen and arisen wholesome qualities, it is said "four right exertions."

iddhi,samijjhati nipphajjatīti attho. Ijjhanti tāya vā sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontītiiddhi. Paṭhamena atthena iddhi eva pādoiddhipādo,iddhikoṭṭhāsoti attho. Dutiyena atthena iddhiyā pādo patiṭṭhā adhigamupāyotiiddhipādo. Tena hi uparūparivisesasaṅkhātaṃ iddhiṃ pajjanti pāpuṇanti. Svāyaṃ iddhipādo yasmā chandādike cattāro adhipatidhamme dhure jeṭṭhake katvā nibbattīyati, tasmā vuttaṃ‘‘cattāro iddhipādo’’ti.

iddhi, it means it succeeds, it is accomplished. Or, beings are prosperous, grown, and have attained excellence by it, thus iddhi. In the first sense, iddhi itself is the foot, thus iddhipādo, it means the basis for spiritual power. In the second sense, iddhi is the foot, the foundation, the means of attainment, thus iddhipādo. For by that, they attain spiritual power that is ever more and more distinguished. Since this spiritual power is produced by making the four dominant qualities, namely desire and so on, the chief and foremost, therefore it is said "four bases of spiritual power."

Pañcindriyānīti saddhādīni pañca indriyāni. Tattha assaddhiyaṃ abhibhavitvā adhimokkhalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretītisaddhā indriyaṃ. Kosajjaṃ abhibhavitvā paggahalakkhaṇe, pamādaṃ abhibhavitvā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇe, vikkhepaṃ abhibhavitvā avikkhepalakkhaṇe, aññāṇaṃ abhibhavitvā dassanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretītipaññā indriyaṃ.

Pañcindriyānīti the five faculties beginning with faith. There, because it causes the state of dominance by overcoming faithlessness with the characteristic of conviction, thus saddhā indriyaṃ. Because it causes the state of dominance by overcoming laziness with the characteristic of exertion, by overcoming negligence with the characteristic of mindfulness, by overcoming distraction with the characteristic of non-distraction, by overcoming ignorance with the characteristic of seeing, thus paññā indriyaṃ.

balāniveditabbāni.

balāni should be understood.

Satta bojjhaṅgāti bodhiyā, bodhissa vā aṅgātibojjhaṅgā. Yā hi esā dhammasāmaggī, yāya lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe uppajjamānāya līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanakāmasukhattakilamathānuyogaucchedasassatābhinivesādīnaṃ anekesaṃ upaddavānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāya satidhammavicayavīriyapītipassaddhisamādhiupekkhāsaṅkhātāya dhammasāmaggiyā ariyasāvako bujjhati kilesaniddāya uṭṭhahati, cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati, nibbānameva vā sacchikarotīti‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati, tassā dhammasāmaggisaṅkhātāya bodhiyā aṅgātibojjhaṅgājhānaṅgamaggaṅgādayo viya. Yopesa vuttappakārāya dhammasāmaggiyā bujjhatīti katvā ariyasāvako‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati, tassa bodhissa vā aṅgātipibojjhaṅgāsenaṅgarathaṅgādayo viya. Tenāhu porāṇā ‘‘bujjhanakassa puggalassa aṅgāti bojjhaṅgā’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.182; vibha. aṭṭha. 466; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.25), ‘‘bodhāya saṃvattantīti bojjhaṅgā’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 2.17) nayenapi bojjhaṅgaṭṭho veditabbo.

Satta bojjhaṅgā means the bojjhaṅgas are limbs (aṅga) of awakening (bodhi) or for awakening (bodhissa). This harmonious collection of qualities, arising at the moment of the supramundane path, opposes numerous adversities such as sloth and agitation, attachment to foundations, inciting desires, indulgence in comfort, self-mortification, and clinging to annihilation and permanence. Through this harmony of qualities, known as mindfulness, investigation of phenomena, energy, joy, tranquility, concentration, and equanimity, the noble disciple awakens, rises from the sleep of defilements, comprehends the four noble truths, or realizes Nibbāna. Therefore, it is called "bodhi". The limbs of that awakening, which is the harmonious collection of qualities, are called bojjhaṅgā, like the limbs of jhāna and the limbs of the path. Or, because the noble disciple awakens through the aforesaid harmonious collection of qualities, he is called "bodhi", and the limbs of that awakening are also called bojjhaṅgā, like the limbs of an army or a chariot. Therefore, the ancients said, "The limbs of the person who awakens are the bojjhaṅgā," and the meaning of bojjhaṅga should also be understood in the sense of "they lead to awakening" (bodhāya saṃvattantīti bojjhaṅgā), etc.

Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhehi kilesehi ārakattā ariyabhāvakarattā ariyaphalapaṭilābhakarattā caariyo. Sammādiṭṭhiādīni aṭṭhaṅgāni assa atthi, aṭṭhaṅgāniyeva vāaṭṭhaṅgiko. Mārento kilese gacchati, nibbānatthikehi vā maggīyati, sayaṃ vā nibbānaṃ maggatītimaggoti evametesaṃ satipaṭṭhānādīnaṃ atthavibhāgo veditabbo.

Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo means ariyo because it is distant from the defilements that are the faults of the path, because it creates a noble state, and because it brings about the attainment of noble fruition. He has eight limbs, namely right view, etc., or it has exactly eight limbs, hence aṭṭhaṅgiko. It goes, killing defilements, or it is sought by those who desire Nibbāna, or it itself seeks Nibbāna, hence maggo. Thus, the explanation of the meaning of these satipaṭṭhānas etc., should be understood.

Sotāpannoti maggasaṅkhātaṃ sotaṃ āpajjitvā pāpuṇitvā ṭhito, sotāpattiphalaṭṭhoti attho.Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannoti sotāpattiphalassa attapaccakkhakaraṇatthāya paṭipajjamāno paṭhamamaggaṭṭho, yo aṭṭhamakotipi vuccati.Sakadāgāmīti sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena āgamanasīlo dutiyaphalaṭṭho.Anāgāmīti paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena kāmalokaṃ anāgamanasīlo tatiyaphalaṭṭho. Yo pana saddhānusārī dhammānusārī ekabījīti evamādiko ariyapuggalavibhāgo, so tesaṃyeva bhedoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

Sotāpanno means one who has entered and attained the stream (sota) which is the path, that is, one who is standing in the fruition of stream-entry. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno means one who is practicing for the realization of the fruition of stream-entry, the one on the first path, who is also called the eighth individual. Sakadāgāmī means one who is accustomed to coming to this world only once more in terms of rebirth, the one in the second fruition. Anāgāmī means one who is not accustomed to coming to the world of senses in terms of rebirth, the one in the third fruition. But the division of noble individuals such as the saddhānusārī, the dhammānusārī, the ekabījī, etc., is a distinction within these. The rest is as has been said before.

Etamatthaṃ viditvāti etaṃ attano dhammavinaye matakuṇapasadisena dussīlapuggalena saddhiṃ saṃvāsābhāvasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ viditvā.Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ asaṃvāsārahasaṃvāsārahabhāvānaṃ kāraṇaparidīpanaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.

Etamatthaṃ viditvā means having understood this matter, namely the absence of association with an immoral person who is like a rotten corpse in his Dispensation.Imaṃ udānanti means he uttered this utterance (udāna) which is a declaration of the reasons for association and non-association with the worthy and the unworthy.

channamativassatīti āpattiṃ āpajjitvā paṭicchādento aññaṃ navaṃ āpattiṃ

channamativassatī means one who, having committed an offense, conceals it, incurs another new offense.

Vivaṭaṃ nātivassatīti āpattiṃ āpanno taṃ appaṭicchādetvā vivaranto sabrahmacārīnaṃ pakāsento yathādhammaṃ yathāvinayaṃ paṭikaronto desento vuṭṭhahanto aññaṃ navaṃ āpattiṃ nāpajjati, tenassa taṃ vivaṭaṃ puna āpattivassaṃ kilesavassaṃ na vassati. Yasmā ca etadeva, tasmāchannaṃchāditaṃ āpattiṃ vivaretha.Evaṃ taṃ nātivassatīti evaṃ sante taṃ āpattiṃ āpajjanapuggalānaṃ attabhāvaṃ ativijjhitvā kilesavassanena na vassati na temeti, evaṃ so kilesehi anavassuto parisuddhasīlo samāhito hutvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā sammasanto anukkamena nibbānaṃ pāpuṇātīti adhippāyo.

Vivaṭaṃ nātivassatī means one who, having committed an offense, does not conceal it but reveals it, making it known to his fellows in the holy life, dealing with it according to the Dhamma and the Vinaya, confessing it and rising from it, does not incur another new offense; therefore, that openness of his does not rain down again a rain of offenses, a rain of defilements. And because it is just this, therefore you should reveal the offense that is channaṃ (concealed). Evaṃ taṃ nātivassatī means, when this is so, it does not rain upon and drench the existence of those individuals who commit that offense with a rain of defilements; thus, being un-rained upon by defilements, being of purified morality and concentrated, having established insight and rightly contemplating, he gradually attains Nibbāna, is the meaning.

Imasmiṃ dhammavinaye aṭṭhacchariyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Herein ends the exposition of the Eight Wonderful Events in this Dhamma-Vinaya.

Pātimokkhasavanārahakathāvaṇṇanā
Exposition on the Topic of Those Fit to Hear the Pātimokkha

386.Atha bhagavā cintesi ‘‘idāni bhikkhusaṅghe abbudo jāto, aparisuddhā puggalā uposathaṃ āgacchanti, na ca tathāgato aparisuddhāya parisāya uposathaṃ uddisati, anuddisante ca bhikkhusaṅghassa uposatho pacchijjati, yannūnāhaṃ ito paṭṭhāya bhikkhūnaññeva pātimokkhuddesaṃ anujāneyya’’nti, evaṃ pana cintetvā bhikkhūnaññeva pātimokkhuddesaṃ anujāni. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘atha kho bhagavā…pe… pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyāthā’’ti. Tatthanadānāhanti na idāni ahaṃ. Uposathaṃ na karissāmi, pātimokkhaṃ na uddisissāmīti paccekaṃna-kārena sambandho. Duvidhaṃ pātimokkhaṃ āṇāpātimokkhaṃ ovādapātimokkhanti. Tesu ‘‘suṇātu me bhante’’tiādikaṃāṇāpātimokkhaṃ,taṃ sāvakāva uddisanti, na buddhā, yaṃ anvaddhamāsaṃ uddisīyati. ‘‘Khantī paramaṃ…pe… sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ…pe… anupavādo anupaghāto…pe… etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183-185) imā pana tisso gāthāovādapātimokkhaṃnāma, taṃ buddhāva uddisanti, na sāvakā. Channampi vassānaṃ accayena uddisanti. Dīghāyukabuddhānañhi dharamānakāle ayameva pātimokkhuddeso, appāyukabuddhānaṃ pana paṭhamabodhiyaṃyeva, tato paraṃ itaro, tañca kho bhikkhū eva uddisanti, na buddhā. Tasmā amhākampi bhagavā vīsativassamattaṃ imaṃ ovādapātimokkhaṃ uddisitvā imaṃ antarāyaṃ disvā tato paraṃ na uddisi.

386.Then the Blessed One thought, "Now a boil has arisen in the Saṅgha of bhikkhus; impure individuals come to the Uposatha, and the Tathāgata does not recite the Uposatha to an impure assembly, and if he does not recite it, the Uposatha of the Saṅgha of bhikkhus is interrupted. Suppose I were to henceforth allow the recitation of the Pātimokkha only to the bhikkhus," and having thus thought, he allowed the recitation of the Pātimokkha only to the bhikkhus. Therefore, it was said, "Then the Blessed One…pe…should recite the Pātimokkha." There, nadānāha means not now I. I will not do the Uposatha, I will not recite the Pātimokkha, is the connection with each na-particle. The Pātimokkha is of two kinds: the Command Pātimokkha (āṇāpātimokkhaṃ) and the Admonition Pātimokkha (ovādapātimokkhaṃ). Among these, the Command Pātimokkha is that beginning with "May the venerable ones hear me," which only disciples recite, not Buddhas, and which is recited every half-month. But these three verses, "Patience is the highest…pe…not doing any evil…pe…not insulting, not harming…pe…this is the teaching of the Buddhas," are called the Admonition Pātimokkha, which only Buddhas recite, not disciples. They recite it after the lapse of six years. For the long-lived Buddhas, this is the Pātimokkha recitation during their lifetime, but for the short-lived Buddhas, it is only at the first enlightenment, and thereafter the other, and that is indeed recited by the bhikkhus, not the Buddhas. Therefore, even our Blessed One, having recited this Admonition Pātimokkha for about twenty years, saw this obstruction and thereafter did not recite it.

Aṭṭhānanti akāraṇaṃ.Anavakāsoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Kāraṇañhi tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti vuccati, evaṃ ‘‘avakāso’’tipi vuccati.Yanti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ.Na ca, bhikkhave, sāpattikena pātimokkhaṃ sotabbantiādi padatthato suviññeyyaṃ. Vinicchayato panettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya vuttameva. Tatthapure vā pacchā vāti ñattito pubbe vā pacchā vā.

Aṭṭhāna means without reason. Anavakāso means a synonym of that. For a cause stands (tiṭṭhati), the result is here, because of its dependent functioning, it is called "ṭhāna," thus it is also called "avakāso." Ya is a reference to the action. Na ca, bhikkhave, sāpattikena pātimokkhaṃ sotabba is easily understood from the meaning of the words. Here, in terms of the decision, what should be said has already been said in the commentary. There, pure vā pacchā vā means before or after the announcement.

Dhammikādhammikapātimokkhaṭṭhapanakathāvaṇṇanā
Exposition on the Topic of Establishing the Lawful and Unlawful Pātimokkha

387.Katañca akatañca ubhayaṃ gahetvāti yassa ekantena katāpi atthi, akatāpi atthi, tassa tadubhayaṃ gahetvā.

387.Katañca akatañca ubhayaṃ gahetvā means taking both that which is done and that which is not done of the one who has indeed done some and not done some.

Dhammikapātimokkhaṭṭhapanakathāvaṇṇanā
Exposition on the Topic of Establishing the Lawful Pātimokkha

389.Parisāvuṭṭhātīti yasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ pātimokkhaṃ ṭhapitaṃ, taṃ vatthuṃ avinicchinitvā kenaci antarāyena vuṭṭhāti.

389.Parisā vuṭṭhātī means the assembly rises in the matter in which the Pātimokkha was established, without deciding that matter due to some obstruction.

393.Paccādiyatīti pati ādiyati, ‘‘akataṃ kamma’’ntiādinā puna ārabhatīti attho.

393.Paccādiyatī means he undertakes it again, begins again with "the action is not done," etc., is the meaning.

Attādānaaṅgakathāvaṇṇanā
Exposition on the Topic of Taking On Oneself

398.Paraṃ codetuṃ attanā ādātabbaṃ gahetabbaṃ adhikaraṇaṃattādānaṃ. Tenāha‘‘sāsanaṃ sodhetukāmo’’tiādi.Vassārattoti vassakālo.

398.The charge (adhikaraṇa) to be taken on, to be grasped, by oneself in order to accuse another is attādānaṃ. Therefore, he said, "Desiring to purify the Dispensation," etc. Vassāratto means the rainy season.

Codakena paccavekkhitabbadhammakathāvaṇṇanā
Exposition on the Dhamma to be Reviewed by the Accuser

399.Paṭimāsitunti parāmasituṃ.Palibodhe chinditvā…pe… adhigataṃ mettacittanti iminā appanāppattaṃ mettābhāvanaṃ dasseti. Tenevāha‘‘vikkhambhanavasena vihatāghāta’’nti.

399.Paṭimāsituṃ means to touch, to consider. Palibodhe chinditvā…pe… adhigataṃ mettacittaṃ shows the development of loving-kindness that has attained appanā (absorption). Therefore, he said, "With affliction dispelled by way of suppression."

Codakena upaṭṭhāpetabbadhammakathāvaṇṇanā
Exposition on the Dhamma to be Established by the Accuser

400.No dosantaroti ettha cittapariyāyoantara-saddoti āha‘‘na duṭṭhacitto hutvā’’ti.

400.No dosantaro There, the synonym of mind is the word antara, he said "not being of corrupted mind."

Codakacuditakapaṭisaṃyuttakathāvaṇṇanā
Exposition on the Topics Connected with the Accuser and the Accused

401.Karuṇanti appanāppattaṃ karuṇajjhānaṃ.Karuṇāpubbabhāganti parikammupacāravasappavattaṃ karuṇaṃ.Mettañca mettāpubbabhāgañcāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sesamettha suviññeyyamevāti.

401.Karuṇaṃ means the karuṇājhāna (compassion-jhāna) that has attained appanā (absorption). Karuṇāpubbabhāgaṃ means the compassion occurring at the level of preliminary work and access. Mettañca mettāpubbabhāgañcā means here too, this is the method. The rest here is easily understood.

Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The exposition of the Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanakkhandhaka is finished.

10. Bhikkhunikkhandhakaṃ

10. Bhikkhunikkhandhaka

Mahāpajāpatigotamīvatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Exposition on the Story of Mahāpajāpati Gotamī

402.Bhikkhunikkhandhakesakkesu viharatīti paṭhamagamanena gantvā viharati.Mahāpajāpati gotamīti etthagotamīti gottaṃ. Nāmakaraṇadivase panassā laddhasakkārā brāhmaṇā lakkhaṇasampattiṃ disvā ‘‘sace ayaṃ dhītaraṃ labhissati, cakkavattirañño mahesī bhavissati. Sace puttaṃ labhissati, cakkavattirājā bhavissatīti ubhayathāpi mahatīyevassā pajā bhavissatī’’ti byākariṃsu, tasmā puttapajāya ceva dhītupajāya ca mahantatāya ‘‘mahāpajāpatī’’ti nāmaṃ akaṃsu, idha pana gottena saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā ‘‘mahāpajāpati gotamī’’ti vuttaṃ.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti bhagavā kapilapuraṃ gantvā paṭhamameva nandaṃ pabbājesi, sattame divase rāhulakumāraṃ.Cumbaṭakakalahepana ubhayanagaravāsikesu yuddhatthāya nikkhantesu satthā gantvā te rājāno saññāpetvāattadaṇḍasuttaṃ(su. ni. 941 ādayo) kathesi. Rājāno pasīditvā aḍḍhateyyasate aḍḍhateyyasate dārake adaṃsu. Tāni pañca kumārasatāni satthu santike pabbajiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ pajāpatiyo sāsanaṃ pesetvā anabhiratiṃ uppādayiṃsu. Satthā tesaṃ anabhiratiyā uppannabhāvaṃ ñatvā te pañcasate daharabhikkhū kuṇāladahaṃ netvā attano kuṇālakāle nisinnapubbe pāsāṇatale nisīditvākuṇālajātakakathāya (jā. 2.21.kuṇālajātaka) tesaṃ anabhiratiṃ vinodetvā sabbepi te sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpesi, puna mahāvanaṃ ānetvā arahattaphale. Tesaṃ cittajānanatthaṃ punapi pajāpatiyo sāsanaṃ pahiṇiṃsu. Te ‘‘abhabbā mayaṃ gharāvāsassā’’ti paṭisāsanaṃ pahiṇiṃsu. Tā ‘‘na dāni amhākaṃ paragharaṃ gantuṃ yuttaṃ, mahāpajāpatiyā santikaṃ gantvā pabbajjaṃ anujānāpetvā pabbajissāmā’’ti pañcasatāpi mahāpajāpatiṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘ayye, amhākaṃ pabbajjaṃ anujānāpethā’’ti āhaṃsu. Mahāpajāpati ca tā itthiyo gahetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, setacchattassa heṭṭhā rañño parinibbutakāle upasaṅkamītipi vadantiyeva.Pakkāmīti puna kapilapurameva pāvisi.

402.In the Bhikkhunikkhandhaka, sakkesu viharatī means he lives among the Sakyans, having gone there on his first journey. Mahāpajāpati gotamī There, gotamī is the clan name. On the day of naming, the brahmins who had received honors, seeing her auspicious marks, predicted, "If she obtains a daughter, she will become the chief queen of a wheel-turning monarch. If she obtains a son, he will become a wheel-turning king; thus, in both ways, she will have a great progeny." Therefore, because of the greatness of her progeny, both sons and daughters, they gave her the name "Mahāpajāpatī." Here, however, it is said "Mahāpajāpati gotamī," having combined it with the clan name. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī means the Blessed One went to Kapilavatthu and ordained Nanda first, and Rāhula-kumāra on the seventh day. In the Cumbaṭakakalahe, when the inhabitants of both cities went out for battle, the Teacher went and reconciled those kings and spoke the Attadaṇḍasutta. The kings, being pleased, gave half a thousand (250) boys each. Those five hundred boys went forth in the presence of the Teacher. Then their wives sent messages to them, causing discontent. The Teacher, knowing that discontent had arisen in them, took those five hundred young bhikkhus to Kuṇāladaha and, sitting on the stone slab where he had sat in his Kuṇāla-birth, dispelled their discontent with the Kuṇālajātaka, and established all of them in the fruition of stream-entry, and then bringing them to Mahāvana, in the fruition of arahantship. Again, the wives sent messages to test their minds. They sent back a message saying, "We are incapable of household life." They thought, "Now it is not proper for us to go to another's house; we will go to Mahāpajāpati and, having obtained permission to go forth, we will go forth." All five hundred went to Mahāpajāpati and said, "Ayye, obtain permission for us to go forth." Mahāpajāpati, taking those women, approached the Blessed One; they say she approached under the white umbrella at the time of the king's passing away. Pakkāmī means she entered Kapilavatthu again.

Yathābhirantaṃviharitvāti bodhaneyyasattānaṃ upanissayaṃ olokento yathājjhāsayena viharitvā.Cārikaṃ pakkāmīti mahājanasaṅgahaṃ karonto uttamāya buddhasiriyā anopamena buddhavilāsena aturitacārikaṃ pakkāmi.Sambahulāhi sākiyānīhi saddhinti antonivesanasmiṃyeva dasabalaṃ uddissa pabbajjāvesaṃ gahetvā tāpi pañcasatā sākiyāniyo pabbajjāvesaṃyeva gāhāpetvā sabbāhipi tāhi sambahulāhi sākiyānīhi saddhiṃ.Pakkāmīti gamanaṃ abhinīhari. Gamanābhinīharaṇakāle panassā ‘‘sukumārā rājitthiyo padasā gantuṃ na sakkhissantī’’ti sākiyakoliyarājāno suvaṇṇasivikāyo upaṭṭhāpayiṃsu, tā pana ‘‘yāne āruyha gacchantīhi satthari agāravo kato hotī’’ti ekapaṇṇāsayojanikaṃ maggaṃ padasāva paṭipajjiṃsu. Rājānopi purato ca pacchato ca ārakkhaṃ saṃvidahāpetvā taṇḍulasappitelādīnaṃ sakaṭāni pūretvā ‘‘gatagataṭṭhāne āhāraṃ paṭiyādethā’’ti purise pesayiṃsu.Sūnehi pādehīti tāsañhi sukhumālattā pādesu eko phoṭo uṭṭheti, eko bhijjati, ubho pādā kaṭakaṭṭhisamparikiṇṇā viya hutvā uddhumātā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sūnehi pādehī’’ti.Bahidvārakoṭṭhaketi dvārakoṭṭhakassa bahi. Kasmā panevaṃ ṭhitāti? Evaṃ kirassā ahosi ‘‘ahaṃ tathāgatena anuññātā sayameva pabbajjāvesaṃ aggahesiṃ, evaṃ gahitabhāvo ca pana me sakalajambudīpe pākaṭo jāto, sace satthā pabbajjaṃ anujānissati, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. Sace nānujānissati, mahatī garahā bhavissatī’’ti vihāraṃ pavisituṃ asakkontī rodamānā aṭṭhāsi.Kiṃ nu tvaṃ gotamīti kiṃ nu rājakulānaṃ vipatti uppannā, kena nu tvaṃ kāraṇena evaṃ vivaṇṇabhāvaṃ pattā sūnehi pādehi…pe… ṭhitāti.

Yathābhirantaṃ viharitvā means living as he pleased, looking at the underlying conditions of beings fit to be awakened. Cārikaṃ pakkāmī means he set out on tour, doing a great service to the people, with the supreme splendor of a Buddha, with unparalleled Buddha-grace, on an unhurried tour. Sambahulāhi sākiyānīhi saddhiṃ means having taken the garb of a renunciate, aiming at ordination for the Ten-Powered One within the inner enclosure itself, and having made those five hundred Sakyan women also take only the garb of renunciates, together with all those many Sakyan women. Pakkāmī means she set out on the journey. It seems that at the time of setting out on the journey, the Sakyan and Koliyan kings, thinking "the delicate royal women will not be able to walk on foot," provided golden palanquins, but they, thinking "by going in vehicles, disrespect would be shown to the Teacher," traveled the one hundred and fifty-nine yojanas on foot. The kings also, having arranged for protection in front and behind, and having filled carts with rice, ghee, oil, etc., sent men, saying, "Prepare food at each place they reach." Sūnehi pādehī means because of their delicacy, one blister arose on their feet, one burst, both feet became swollen as if covered with sharp thorns. Therefore, it was said, "with swollen feet." Bahidvārakoṭṭhake means outside the gatehouse. Why did she stand there thus? It seems this occurred to her, "I myself took the garb of a renunciate with the permission of the Tathāgata, and this fact of my having taken it has become known throughout Jambudīpa; if the Teacher permits ordination, this will be good. If he does not permit it, there will be great censure," being unable to enter the monastery, she stood weeping. Kiṃ nu tvaṃ gotamī means what calamity has befallen the royal family, for what reason have you become so discolored, with swollen feet…pe…standing?

Aññenapi pariyāyenāti aññenapi kāraṇena.Āpādikāti saṃvaḍḍhikā, tumhākaṃ hatthapādesu hatthapādakiccaṃ asādhentesu hatthe ca pāde ca vaḍḍhetvā paṭijaggikāti attho.Posikāti divasassa dve tayo vāre nahāpetvā bhojetvā pāyetvā tumhe posesi.Thaññaṃ pāyesīti nandakumāro kira bodhisattato katipāheneva daharataro. Tasmiṃ jāte mahāpajāpati attano puttaṃ dhātīnaṃ datvā sayaṃ bodhisattassa dhātikiccaṃ sādhayamānā attano thaññaṃ pāyesi. Taṃ sandhāya thero evamāha.Sādhu bhanteti ‘‘bahukārā’’tiādīhi tassā guṇaṃ kathetvā puna pabbajjaṃ yācanto evamāha.

Aññenapi pariyāyenāti: "In another way," means by another reason. Āpādikāti: "Nurtured," means grew, having nurtured and taken care of you by enlarging your hands and feet when your hands and feet were not able to perform the functions of hands and feet. Posikāti: "Brought you up," means she brought you up by bathing, feeding, and giving you to drink two or three times a day. Thaññaṃ pāyesīti: "Gave you breastmilk," it seems that Nandakumāra was a few days younger than the Bodhisatta. When he was born, Mahāpajāpati gave her own son to wet nurses, and herself attending to the Bodhisatta as a wet nurse, she gave her own breast milk. With that in mind, the Elder said thus. Sādhu bhanteti: "Good, venerable sir," saying thus, after praising her virtues with "bahukārā," etc., he spoke thus, again requesting ordination.

Mahāpajāpatigotamīvatthukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the story of Mahāpajāpati Gotamī is finished.

Aṭṭhagarudhammakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Eight Garudhamma (Weighty Principles)

403.Satthāpi ‘‘itthiyo nāma parittasaddhā, ekāyācitamatteyeva pabbajjāya anuññātāya na mama sāsanaṃ garuṃ katvā gaṇhissantī’’ti tikkhattuṃ paṭikkhipitvā idāni garuṃ katvā gāhāpetukāmatāya‘‘sace, ānanda, mahāpajāpati gotamī aṭṭha garudhamme paṭiggaṇhāti, sāvassā hotu upasampadā’’tiādimāha. Tatthasāvassāti sā eva assā pabbajjāpi upasampadāpi hotu.

403. The Teacher, thinking, "Women are of little faith; if allowed to be ordained merely upon one request, they will not respect my dispensation," having refused three times, now wishing to make them accept it with respect, said "If, Ānanda, Mahāpajāpati Gotamī accepts the eight Garudhamma, let that be her ordination." Here, sāvassāti, "Let that be her ordination," means let that itself be her going forth and her higher ordination.

Tadahupasampannassāti taṃ divasampi upasampannassa.Abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ añjalikammaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ kātabbanti mānātimānaṃ akatvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena abhivādanaṃ, āsanā uṭṭhāya paccuggamanavasena paccuṭṭhānaṃ, dasanakhe samodhānetvā añjalikammaṃ, āsanapaññāpanabījanādikaṃ anucchavikakammasaṅkhātaṃ sāmīcikammañca kattabbaṃ.Abhikkhuke āvāseti yattha vasantiyā anantarāyena ovādatthāya upasaṅkamanārahe ṭhāne ovādadāyako ācariyo natthi, ayaṃ abhikkhuko āvāso nāma, evarūpe āvāse vassaṃ na upagantabbaṃ.Anvaddhamāsanti anuposathikaṃ.Ovādūpasaṅkamananti ovādatthāya upasaṅkamanaṃ.Diṭṭhenāti cakkhunā diṭṭhena.Sutenāti sotena sutena.Parisaṅkāyāti diṭṭhasutavasena parisaṅkitena.Garudhammanti garukaṃ saṅghādisesāpattiṃ.Pakkhamānattanti anūnāni pannarasa divasāni mānattaṃ.Chasu dhammesūti vikālabhojanacchaṭṭhesu sikkhāpadesu.Sikkhitasikkhāyāti ekasikkhampi akhaṇḍaṃ katvā pūritasikkhāya.

Tadahupasampannassāti: "To one ordained on that day," Abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ añjalikammaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ kātabbanti: "Reverence, rising up, añjali gesture, and proper conduct are to be done," means without arrogance or conceit, reverence with the five-point prostration, rising up from the seat in welcome, the añjali gesture bringing together the ten fingernails, and proper conduct consisting of suitable actions such as arranging a seat and providing grains, etc., are to be done. Abhikkhuke āvāseti: "In a residence without monks," means in a place where, living, there is no teacher who can give advice without obstruction and is worthy to be approached for guidance, this is called a residence without monks; one should not spend the rains in such a residence. Anvaddhamāsanti: "Every half-month," means not missing the Uposatha. Ovādūpasaṅkamananti: "Approaching for advice," means approaching for the sake of advice. Diṭṭhenāti: "By what is seen," means by what is seen with the eye. Sutenāti: "By what is heard," means by what is heard with the ear. Parisaṅkāyāti: "By suspicion," means by what is suspected based on what is seen and heard. Garudhammanti: "Weighty offense," means a grave Saṅghādisesa offense. Pakkhamānattanti: "Half-month penance," means penance for no less than fifteen days. Chasu dhammesūti: "In the six conditions," means in the six training rules beginning with eating at the wrong time. Sikkhitasikkhāyati: "By one trained in the trainings," means by one who has completed the training, having observed even one training without breaking it.

Na akkositabbo na paribhāsitabboti dasannaṃ akkosavatthūnaṃ aññatarena akkosavatthunā na akkositabbo, bhayupadaṃsanāya kāyaci paribhāsāya na paribhāsitabbo.Ovaṭo bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūsu vacanapathoti ovādānusāsanidhammakathāsaṅkhāto vacanapatho bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūsu ovaṭo pihito, na bhikkhuniyā koci bhikkhu ovaditabbo vā anusāsitabbo vā, ‘‘bhante porāṇakattherā idañcidañca vattaṃ pūrayiṃsū’’ti evaṃ pana paveṇivasena kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.Anovaṭo bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīsūti bhikkhūnaṃ pana bhikkhunīsu vacanapatho anivārito, yathāruciyā ovadantu anusāsantu dhammakathaṃ kathentūti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panesā garudhammakathā mahāvibhaṅge vuttanayeneva veditabbā.

Na akkositabbo na paribhāsitabboti: "Should not be insulted or reviled," means should not be insulted with any of the ten grounds for insult, should not be reviled with any bodily gesture for the purpose of intimidation. Ovaṭo bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūsu vacanapathoti: "The way of speaking of bhikkhunīs to bhikkhus is closed," means the way of speaking consisting of advice, instruction, and Dhamma talks is closed to bhikkhunīs in relation to bhikkhus; no bhikkhunī should advise or instruct any bhikkhu, but it is permissible to speak in the traditional way, saying, "Venerable sirs, the ancient elders fulfilled this and that duty." Anovaṭo bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīsūti: "The way of speaking of bhikkhus to bhikkhunīs is not closed," means the way of speaking of bhikkhus to bhikkhunīs is not restricted; let them advise, instruct, and give Dhamma talks as they please; this is the summary here, but in detail, this explanation of the Garudhamma should be understood in the same way as stated in the Mahāvibhaṅga.

‘‘seyyathāpi, bhante’’tiādikaṃ udānaṃ udānesi. Tatthadaharoti taruṇo.Yuvāti yobbaññabhāve ṭhito.Maṇḍanakajātikoti alaṅkārasabhāvo. Tattha koci taruṇopi yuvā na hoti yathā atitaruṇo. Koci yuvāpi maṇḍanakajātiko na hoti yathā upasantasabhāvo ālasiyabyasanādīhi vā abhibhūto, idha pana daharo ceva yuvā ca maṇḍanakajātiko ca adhippeto, tasmā evamāha. Uppalādīni lokasammatattā vuttāni. Ito paraṃ yaṃ yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dassitameva.

‘‘seyyathāpi, bhante’’tiādikaṃ: "Just as, venerable sir," etc., he uttered this exclamation. Here, daharoti: "Young," means youthful. Yuvāti: "Youth," means standing in the state of youth. Maṇḍanakajātikoti: "Of a decorative nature," means having a nature for ornamentation. Here, someone who is young may not be a youth, such as one who is too young. Someone who is a youth may not be of a decorative nature, such as one who is of a subdued nature or overcome by laziness, addiction, etc.; here, however, one who is both young, a youth, and of a decorative nature is intended, therefore he said thus. Lotuses and the like are mentioned because they are commonly accepted in the world. From here on, whatever is to be said has already been shown in the commentary.

mātugāmassa pabbajitattāti idaṃ pañcavassasatato uddhaṃ aṭṭhatvā pañcasuyeva vassasatesu saddhammaṭṭhitiyā kāraṇanidassanaṃ.Paṭisambhidāpabhedappattakhīṇāsavavaseneva vuttanti ettha ‘‘paṭisambhidāpattakhīṇāsavaggahaṇena jhānānipi gahitāneva honti. Na hi nijjhānakānaṃ sabbappakārasampatti ijjhatī’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavavasena vassasahassantiādinā ca yaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ khandhakabhāṇakānaṃ matena vuttanti veditabbaṃ.Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.161) pana evaṃ vuttaṃ –

mātugāmassa pabbajitattāti: "Because of the going forth of womenfolk," this is a demonstration of the reason for the stability of the Good Dhamma for only five hundred years, not enduring beyond five centuries. Paṭisambhidāpabhedappattakhīṇāsavavaseneva vuttanti: "Said only in terms of arahants who have attained the distinctions of analytical knowledges," here, it is said in the Gaṇṭhipada: "By including arahants who have attained the analytical knowledges, the jhānas are also included. For the complete attainment of those who are focused on jhāna is not hindered." And what was said by Sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavavasena vassasahassantiādinā: "For a thousand years in terms of dry-insight arahants," etc., should be understood as said according to the opinion of the Khandhaka reciters. However, in the Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathā (Dī. Ni. Aṭṭha. 3.161), it is said thus –

‘‘Paṭisambhidāpattehi vassasahassaṃ aṭṭhāsi, chaḷabhiññehi vassasahassaṃ, tevijjehi vassasahassaṃ, sukkhavipassakehi vassasahassaṃ, pātimokkhena vassasahassaṃ aṭṭhāsī’’ti.

"With those attaining the analytical knowledges, it lasted for a thousand years; with those with the six supernormal knowledges, a thousand years; with those with the three knowledges, a thousand years; with dry-insight practitioners, a thousand years; with the Pātimokkha, it lasted for a thousand years."

Aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathāyampi(a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.130) –

In the Aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathā (A. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.1.130) also –

‘‘Buddhānañhi parinibbānato vassasahassameva paṭisambhidā nibbattetuṃ sakkonti, tato paraṃ cha abhiññā, tato tāpi nibbattetuṃ asakkontā tisso vijjā nibbattenti, gacchante gacchante kāle tāpi nibbattetuṃ asakkontā sukkhavipassakā honti. Eteneva upāyena anāgāmino sakadāgāmino sotāpannā’’ti –

"Indeed, after the Buddhas' Parinibbāna, they are able to produce the analytical knowledges for only a thousand years; after that, the six supernormal knowledges; then, being unable to produce even those, they produce the three knowledges; as time goes on, being unable to produce even those, they become dry-insight practitioners. In this very way, non-returners, once-returners, and stream-enterers…" –

Vuttaṃ.

It was said.

Saṃyuttanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃpana (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.156) –

In the Saṃyuttanikāyaṭṭhakathā (Saṃ. Ni. Aṭṭha. 2.3.156), however –

‘‘Paṭhamabodhiyañhi bhikkhū paṭisambhidāpattā ahesuṃ. Atha kāle gacchante paṭisambhidā pāpuṇituṃ na sakkhiṃsu, chaḷabhiññā ahesuṃ, tato cha abhiññā pattuṃ asakkontā tisso vijjā pāpuṇiṃsu. Idāni kāle gacchante tisso vijjā pāpuṇituṃ asakkontā āsavakkhayamattaṃ pāpuṇissanti, tampi asakkontā anāgāmiphalaṃ, tampi asakkontā sakadāgāmiphalaṃ, tampi asakkontā sotāpattiphalaṃ, gacchante kāle sotāpattiphalampi pattuṃ na sakkhissantī’’ti –

"Indeed, in the first enlightenment, the monks were attainers of the analytical knowledges. Then, as time went on, they were not able to attain the analytical knowledges, they became those with the six supernormal knowledges; then, being unable to attain the six supernormal knowledges, they attained the three knowledges. Now, as time goes on, being unable to attain the three knowledges, they will attain only the destruction of the āsavas; being unable to do even that, the fruit of non-returning; being unable to do even that, the fruit of once-returning; being unable to do even that, the fruit of stream-entry; as time goes on, they will not be able to attain even the fruit of stream-entry" –

Vuttaṃ.

It was said.

Yasmā cetaṃ sabbaṃ aññamaññapaṭiviruddhaṃ, tasmā tesaṃ tesaṃ bhāṇakānaṃ matameva ācariyena tattha tattha dassitanti gahetabbaṃ. Aññathā hi ācariyasseva pubbāparavirodhappasaṅgo siyāti.

Since all this is mutually contradictory, it should be taken that the Teacher has shown the opinion of those respective reciters in each case. Otherwise, there would be a contradiction in the Teacher's own statements.

Tāniyevāti tāniyeva pañca vassasahassāni. Pariyattimūlakaṃ sāsananti āha‘‘na hi pariyattiyā asati paṭivedho atthī’’tiādi. Pariyattiyā hi antarahitāya paṭipatti antaradhāyati, paṭipattiyā antarahitāya adhigamo antaradhāyati. Kiṃkāraṇā? Ayañhi pariyatti paṭipattiyā paccayo hoti, paṭipatti adhigamassa, iti paṭipattitopi pariyattiyeva pamāṇaṃ. Tattha paṭivedho ca paṭipatti ca hotipi na hotipi. Ekasmiñhi kāle paṭivedhakarā bhikkhū bahū honti, ‘‘esa bhikkhu puthujjano’’ti aṅguliṃ pasāretvā dassetabbo hoti, imasmiṃyeva dīpe ekavāraṃ puthujjanabhikkhu nāma nāhosi. Paṭipattipūrakāpi kadāci bahū honti, kadāci appā, iti paṭivedho ca paṭipatti ca hotipi na hotipi. Sāsanaṭṭhitiyā pana pariyattiyeva pamāṇaṃ. Paṇḍito hi tepiṭakaṃ sutvā dvepi pūreti. Yathā amhākaṃ bodhisatto āḷārassa santike pañcābhiññā satta ca samāpattiyo nibbattetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā parikammaṃ pucchi, so ‘‘na jānāmī’’ti āha, tato udakassa santikaṃ gantvā adhigatavisesaṃ saṃsanditvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanassa parikammaṃ pucchi, so ācikkhi, tassa vacanasamanantarameva mahāsatto taṃ sampādesi, evameva paññavā bhikkhu pariyattiṃ sutvā dvepi pūreti, tasmā pariyattiyā ṭhitāya sāsanaṃ ṭhitaṃ hoti. Yathāpi mahato taḷākassa pāḷiyā thirāya udakaṃ na ṭhassatīti na vattabbaṃ, udake sati padumādīni pupphāni na pupphissantīti na vattabbaṃ, evameva mahātaḷākassa thirapāḷisadise tepiṭake buddhavacane sati mahātaḷāke udakasadisā paṭipattipūrakā kulaputtā natthīti na vattabbaṃ, tesu sati mahātaḷāke padumādīni pupphāni viya sotāpannādayo ariyapuggalā natthīti na vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ ekantato pariyattiyeva pamāṇaṃ.

Tāniyevāti: "Those very," means those very five thousand years. He said that the dispensation is rooted in learning, ‘‘na hi pariyattiyā asati paṭivedho atthī’’tiādi: "For without learning, there is no penetration," etc. For when learning disappears, practice disappears; when practice disappears, attainment disappears. Why? Because this learning is a condition for practice, and practice is a condition for attainment; thus, learning is the measure even of practice. Here, both penetration and practice may or may not exist. For at one time, there are many monks who realize penetration, to the point that one would have to point a finger and say, "That monk is a worldling"; at one time, in this very island, there were no monks called worldlings. And those who fulfill the practice are sometimes many, sometimes few; thus, both penetration and practice may or may not exist. But for the stability of the dispensation, learning alone is the measure. For a wise person, having heard the Tipiṭaka, fulfills both. Just as our Bodhisatta, having developed the five supernormal knowledges and the seven attainments in the presence of Āḷāra, asked about the preliminary practice for the attainment of neither perception nor non-perception, he said, "I do not know"; then, having gone to Udaka's presence and conferred about the attained distinction, he asked about the preliminary practice for the attainment of neither perception nor non-perception, and he explained it; immediately after his words, the great being attained it; in the same way, a wise monk, having heard the learning, fulfills both; therefore, when the learning is established, the dispensation is established. Just as one should not say that if the embankment of a great lake is firm, the water will not stand, or that if there is water, lotuses and other flowers will not bloom, in the same way, one should not say that with the Tipiṭaka, which is like the firm embankment of a great lake, and the Buddha's word, there are no sons of good family who fulfill the practice, which is like the water in the great lake, or that if there are such, there are no noble individuals such as stream-enterers, which are like lotuses and other flowers in the great lake. Thus, learning alone is definitely the measure.

Pariyattiyā antarahitāyāti etthapariyattīti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.130) tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ sāṭṭhakathā pāḷi. Yāva sā tiṭṭhati, tāva pariyatti paripuṇṇā nāma hoti. Gacchante gacchante kāle kaliyugarājāno adhammikā honti, tesu adhammikesu tesampi amaccādayo adhammikā honti, tato raṭṭhajanapadavāsinoti tesaṃ adhammikatāya na devo sammā vassati, tato sassāni na sampajjanti, tesu asampajjantesu paccayadāyakā bhikkhusaṅghassa paccaye dātuṃ na sakkonti, bhikkhū paccayehi kilamantā antevāsike saṅgahetuṃ na sakkonti. Gacchante gacchante kāle pariyatti parihāyati, atthavasena dhāretuṃ na sakkonti, pāḷivaseneva dhārenti. Tato kāle gacchante pāḷimpi sakalaṃ dhāretuṃ na sakkonti, paṭhamaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ parihāyati, parihāyamānaṃ matthakato paṭṭhāya parihāyati. Paṭhamameva hi mahāpakaraṇaṃ parihāyati, tasmiṃ parihīne yamakaṃ, kathāvatthu, puggalapaññatti, dhātukathā, vibhaṅgo, dhammasaṅgahoti.

Pariyattiyā antarahitāyāti: "When the learning has disappeared," here, pariyattīti: "Learning" (A. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.1.130) means the Tipiṭaka, the Buddha's word, the Pāḷi with its commentary. As long as that remains, it is called complete learning. As time goes on, the kings of the degenerate age become unrighteous; when they are unrighteous, their ministers and others are also unrighteous; then the inhabitants of the country and the countryside, because of their unrighteousness, the deva does not rain properly, then the crops do not prosper; when they do not prosper, the supporters are not able to give requisites to the Saṅgha of monks, the monks, being weary with requisites, are not able to take care of the novices. As time goes on, the learning declines, they are not able to retain it in terms of meaning, they retain it only in terms of the Pāḷi. Then, as time goes on, they are not able to retain the entire Pāḷi, first the Abhidhamma Piṭaka declines, declining from the top downwards. For first the Mahāpakaraṇa declines, when that has declined, the Yamaka, Kathāvatthu, Puggalapaññatti, Dhātukathā, Vibhaṅga, Dhammasaṅgaha.

Evaṃ abhidhammapiṭake parihīne matthakato paṭṭhāya suttantapiṭakaṃ parihāyati. Paṭhamañhi aṅguttaranikāyo parihāyati, tasmimpi paṭhamaṃ ekādasakanipāto…pe… tato ekakanipātoti. Evaṃ aṅguttaranikāye parihīne matthakato paṭṭhāya saṃyuttanikāyo parihāyati. Paṭhamañhi mahāvaggo parihāyati, tato saḷāyatanavaggo, khandhakavaggo, nidānavaggo, sagāthāvaggoti. Evaṃ saṃyuttanikāye parihīne matthakato paṭṭhāya majjhimanikāyo parihāyati. Paṭhamañhi uparipaṇṇāsako parihāyati, tato majjhimapaṇṇāsako, tato mūlapaṇṇāsakoti. Evaṃ majjhimanikāye parihīne matthakato paṭṭhāya dīghanikāyo parihāyati. Paṭhamañhi pāthikavaggo parihāyati, tato mahāvaggo, tato sīlakkhandhavaggoti. Evaṃ dīghanikāye parihīne suttantapiṭakaṃ parihīnaṃ nāma hoti. Vinayapiṭakena saddhiṃ jātakameva dhārenti. Vinayapiṭakañhi lajjino dhārenti, lābhakāmā pana ‘‘suttante kathitepi sallakkhentā natthī’’ti jātakameva dhārenti. Gacchante kāle jātakampi dhāretuṃ na sakkonti. Atha nesaṃ paṭhamaṃ vessantarajātakaṃ parihāyati, tato paṭilomakkamena puṇṇakajātakaṃ, mahānāradajātakanti pariyosāne apaṇṇakajātakaṃ parihāyati, vinayapiṭakameva dhārenti.

When the Abhidhamma Piṭaka has thus declined, the Suttanta Piṭaka declines from the top downwards. For first the Aṅguttara Nikāya declines, and in that too, first the Ekādasakanipāta…pe… then the Ekakanipāta. When the Aṅguttara Nikāya has thus declined, the Saṃyutta Nikāya declines from the top downwards. For first the Mahāvagga declines, then the Saḷāyatanavagga, Khandhakavagga, Nidānavagga, Sagāthāvagga. When the Saṃyutta Nikāya has thus declined, the Majjhima Nikāya declines from the top downwards. For first the Uparipaṇṇāsaka declines, then the Majjhimapaṇṇāsaka, then the Mūlapaṇṇāsaka. When the Majjhima Nikāya has thus declined, the Dīgha Nikāya declines from the top downwards. For first the Pāthikavagga declines, then the Mahāvagga, then the Sīlakkhandhavagga. When the Dīgha Nikāya has thus declined, the Suttanta Piṭaka is said to have declined. They retain only the Jātaka together with the Vinaya Piṭaka. For the Vinaya Piṭaka is retained by those who are conscientious, but those who desire gain retain only the Jātaka, thinking, "Even if the Suttanta is spoken, there is no one who takes note." As time goes on, they are not able to retain even the Jātaka. Then for them, first the Vessantara Jātaka declines, then in reverse order, the Puṇṇaka Jātaka, the Mahānārada Jātaka, and finally the Apaṇṇaka Jātaka declines, and they retain only the Vinaya Piṭaka.

Gacchante kāle tampi matthakato paṭṭhāya parihāyati. Paṭhamañhi parivāro parihāyati, tato khandhako, bhikkhunīvibhaṅgo, mahāvibhaṅgoti anukkamena uposathakkhandhakamattameva dhārenti. Tadāpi pariyatti anantarahitāva hoti. Yāva pana manussesu catuppadikagāthāpi pavattati, tāva pariyatti anantarahitāva hoti. Yadā saddho pasanno rājā hatthikkhandhe suvaṇṇacaṅkoṭakamhi sahassatthavikaṃ ṭhapāpetvā ‘‘buddhehi kathitaṃ catuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ jānanto imaṃ sahassaṃ gaṇhatū’’ti nagare bheriṃ carāpetvā gaṇhanakaṃ alabhitvā ‘‘ekavāraṃ carāpite nāmaṃ suṇantāpi honti asuṇantāpī’’ti yāvatatiyaṃ carāpetvā gaṇhanakaṃ alabhitvā rājapurisā sahassatthavikaṃ puna rājakulaṃ pavesenti, tadā pariyatti antarahitā nāma hoti.

As time goes on, even that declines from the top downwards. For first the Parivāra declines, then the Khandhaka, the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga, the Mahāvibhaṅga, and successively they retain only the Uposathakkhandhaka. Even then, the learning has not yet disappeared. As long as even a quatrain circulates among humans, the learning has not yet disappeared. When a faithful and pleased king, having placed a thousand-piece gold coin in a golden casket on the neck of an elephant, has a drum beaten in the city, saying, "Let whoever knows a quatrain spoken by the Buddhas take this thousand," and having not found anyone to take it, thinking, "There are those who hear the announcement even once, and those who do not hear it," having the drum beaten for the third time and not finding anyone to take it, the king's men return the thousand-piece gold coin to the royal palace, then the learning is said to have disappeared.

Ciraṃ pavattissatīti pariyattiyā antarahitāyapi liṅgamattaṃ addhānaṃ pavattissati. Kathaṃ? Gacchante gacchante hi kāle cīvaraggahaṇaṃ pattaggahaṇaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ ālokitavilokitaṃ na pāsādikaṃ hoti, nigaṇṭhasamaṇā viya alābupattaṃ bhikkhū pattaṃ aggabāhāya parikkhipitvā ādāya vicaranti, ettāvatāpi liṅgaṃ anantarahitameva hoti. Gacchante pana kāle aggabāhato otāretvā hatthena vā sikkāya vā olambetvā vicaranti, cīvarampi rajanasāruppaṃ akatvā oṭṭhaṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ katvā rajanti. Gacchante kāle rajanampi na hoti, dasacchindanaṃ ovaṭṭikāvijjhanaṃ kappamattañca katvā vaḷañjanti, puna ovaṭṭikaṃ vijjhitvā kappaṃ na karonti. Tato ubhayampi akatvā dasā chetvā paribbājakā viya caranti. Gacchante kāle ‘‘ko iminā amhākaṃ attho’’ti khuddakaṃ kāsāvakhaṇḍaṃ hatthe vā gīvāyaṃ vā bandhanti, kesesu vā allīyāpenti, dārabharaṇaṃ karontā kasitvā vapitvā jīvikaṃ kappetvā vicaranti, tadā dakkhiṇaṃ dento jano saṅghaṃ uddissa etesampi deti. Idaṃ sandhāya bhagavatā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhavissanti kho panānanda, anāgatamaddhānaṃ gotrabhuno kāsāvakaṇṭhā dussīlā pāpadhammā, tesu dussīlesu saṅghaṃ uddissa dānaṃ dassanti, tadāpāhaṃ, ānanda, saṅghagataṃ dakkhiṇaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ appameyyaṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.380). Tato gacchante kāle nānāvidhāni kammāni karontā ‘‘papañco esa, kiṃ iminā amhāka’’nti kāsāvakhaṇḍaṃ chinditvā araññe khipanti, tasmiṃ kāle liṅgaṃ antarahitaṃ nāma hoti. Kassapadasabalassa kira kālato paṭṭhāya yonakānaṃ setavatthāni pārupitvā caraṇacārittaṃ jātaṃ. Evaṃ pariyattiyā antarahitāyapi liṅgamattaṃ ciraṃ pavattissatīti veditabbaṃ.

It will long endure: Even when the Teaching disappears, the mere semblance will continue for a long time. How? As time goes on, the way robes are taken, bowls are taken, how the body is stretched and drawn back, how one looks forward and backward will not be pleasing. Like Jain ascetics, monks will carry alms bowls tucked under their armpits and wander about. Even with just this, the semblance will not have disappeared. As time goes on, they will lower the bowl from the armpit and carry it hanging from their hand or a strap. They will not dye the robes properly, but will dye them the color of owl’s droppings. As time goes on, there will be no dyeing at all; they will cut them into ten pieces, pierce them with awls, make them just the size of a tile, and patch them. Then they will pierce them again with awls, but not patch them. After that, they will do neither, but will cut off strips and wander about like ascetics. As time goes on, thinking, "What use is this to us?" they will tie a small piece of reddish cloth on their hand or around their neck, or attach it to their hair. Supporting their families, they will plow and sow, making a living, and when people give offerings, they will give to these too, intending it for the Sangha. With this in mind, the Blessed One said, "In the future, Ānanda, there will be those who are born into the lineage, wearing reddish-brown robes around their necks, immoral and of evil character. People will give offerings to these immoral ones, intending it for the Sangha. Then, Ānanda, I say that the offering given to the Sangha is immeasurable and incalculable" (M.N. 3.380). As time goes on, doing various kinds of work, thinking, "This is an obstacle, what use is this to us?" they will cut off the piece of reddish cloth and throw it into the forest. At that time, the semblance will have disappeared. It is said that from the time of Kassapa, the ten-powered one, the custom arose for the Yavanas to wear white clothes and follow their own conduct and practices. Thus, it should be understood that even when the Teaching has disappeared, the mere semblance will long endure.

Aṭṭhagarudhammakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Eight Important Rules is finished.

Bhikkhunīupasampannānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Allowing of the Bhikkhunī Ordination

404-405.Yadaggenāti yaṃ divasaṃ ādiṃ katvā.Tadevāti tasmiññeva divase.Anuññattiyāti anuññāya.Ekāhaṃ, bhante ānanda, bhagavantaṃ varaṃ yācāmīti ‘‘evameva kho ahaṃ, bhante ānanda, ime aṭṭha garudhamme paṭiggaṇhāmi yāvajīvaṃ anatikkamanīye’’ti paṭijānitvā idāni kasmā varaṃ yācatīti ce? Parūpavādavivajjanatthaṃ. Evañhi keci vadeyyuṃ ‘‘mahāpajāpatiyā paṭhamaṃ sampaṭicchitattā bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnañca yathāvuḍḍhaṃ abhivādanaṃ nāhosi, sā ce varaṃ yāceyya, bhagavā anujāneyyā’’ti.

404-405. From what day: From the day used as the starting point. On that very day: On that same day. By the allowance: By the permission. "Venerable Ānanda, I ask the Blessed One for a boon": If she has already acknowledged, "Venerable Ānanda, I accept these eight important rules, never to be transgressed as long as I live," why does she now ask for a boon? It is to avoid criticism from others. For some might say, "Because Mahāpajāpatī accepted them first, there was no greeting of monks and nuns according to seniority. If she were to ask for a boon, the Blessed One would allow it."

406.Sarāgāyāti sarāgabhāvāya kāmarāgabhavarāgaparibrūhanāya.Saññogāyāti vaṭṭe saṃyojanatthāya.Ācayāyāti vaṭṭassa vaḍḍhanatthāya.Mahicchatāyāti mahicchabhāvāya.Asantuṭṭhiyāti asantuṭṭhibhāvāya.Saṅgaṇikāyāti kilesasaṅgaṇagaṇasaṅgaṇavihārāya.Kosajjāyāti kusītabhāvāya.Dubbharatāyāti dupposatāya.Virāgāyāti sakalavaṭṭato virajjanatthāya.Visaññogāyāti kāmarāgādīhi visaṃyujjanatthāya.Apacayāyāti sabbassapi vaṭṭassa apacayatthāya, nibbānāyāti attho.Appicchatāyāti paccayappicchatādivasena sabbaso icchāpagamāya.Santuṭṭhiyāti dvādasavidhasantuṭṭhibhāvāya.Pavivekāyāti pavivittabhāvāya kāyavivekāditadaṅgavivekādivivekasiddhiyā.Vīriyārambhāyāti kāyikassa ceva cetasikassa ca vīriyassa paggaṇhanatthāya.Subharatāyāti sukhaposanatthāya. Evaṃ yo pariyattidhammo uggahaṇadhāraṇaparipucchāmanasikāravasena yoniso paṭipajjantassa sarāgādibhāvaparivajjanassa kāraṇaṃ hutvā virāgādibhāvāya saṃvattati, ekaṃsatoeso dhammo, eso vinayosammadeva apāyādīsu apatanavasena dhāraṇato kilesānaṃ vinayanato, satthu sammāsambuddhassa ovādānusiṭṭhibhāvatoetaṃ satthusāsanantidhāreyyāsijāneyyāsi, avabujjheyyāsīti attho. Imasmiṃ sutte paṭhamavārena vaṭṭaṃ, dutiyavārena vivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

406. For lust: For the state of lust, for the increase of sensual desire and desire for existence. For entanglement: For entanglement in the round of rebirths. For accumulation: For the growth of the round of rebirths. For great ambition: For the state of great ambition. For discontent: For the state of discontent. For gregariousness: For dwelling in association with defilements and groups. For sloth: For the state of laziness. For difficulty in being supported: For difficulty in being nourished. For dispassion: For detachment from the entire round of rebirths. For disentanglement: For disentanglement from sensual desires and so on. For the decrease: For the decrease of the entire round of rebirths, meaning for Nibbāna. For wanting little: For the complete abandoning of desire by way of wanting little in terms of requisites, and so on. For contentment: For the state of twelvefold contentment. For seclusion: For the state of seclusion, for the attainment of seclusion of body, and seclusion that is a factor of that. For energetic effort: For the exertion of both physical and mental energy. For ease of support: For ease of nourishment. Thus, the Teaching that, when properly practiced by way of learning, retaining, questioning, and reflecting, becomes a cause for avoiding states of lust and so on and leads to states of dispassion and so on, is certainly this Dhamma, this Discipline, truly so because it sustains one from falling into the lower realms and disciplines defilements; because it is the advice and instruction of the Teacher, the Perfectly Enlightened Buddha, this is the Teacher’s Dispensation, you should remember, know, and understand. In this sutta, the round of rebirths is spoken of in the first instance, and detachment from the round of rebirths in the second.

409-410.Vimānetvāti aparajjhitvā.Kammappattāyopīti kammārahāpi.Āpattigāminiyopīti āpattiāpannāyopi.Vuttanayeneva kāretabbataṃ āpajjantīti tathākaraṇassa paṭikkhittattā dukkaṭena kāretabbataṃ āpajjanti.

409-410. Without transgressing: Without offending. Even one who is liable to an offense: Even one who is deserving of an offense. Even one who has incurred an offense: Even one who has committed an offense. Incurring the obligation to be dealt with in the manner stated: Because doing so has been rejected, they incur the obligation to be dealt with by means of a dukkaṭa offense.

413-5.Dve tisso bhikkhuniyoti dvīhi tīhi bhikkhunīhi.Na ārocentīti pātimokkhuddesakassa na ārocenti.Na paccāharantīti bhikkhunīnaṃ na paccāharanti.Visesakanti vattabhaṅgaṃ.

413-5. Two or three bhikkhunīs: By two or three bhikkhunīs. Do not announce: They do not announce to the one who recites the Pāṭimokkha. Do not bring back: They do not bring back to the bhikkhunīs. A special fastener: A broken fastener of a robe.

420.Tena ca bhikkhu nimantetabboti sāmīcidassanametaṃ, na pana animantiyā āpatti.

420. And that bhikkhu should be invited: This is a matter of courtesy, but there is no offense for not inviting him.

425.Tayo nissayeti senāsananissayaṃ apanetvā apare tayo nissaye. Rukkhamūlasenāsanañhi sā na labhati.

425. Three supports: Removing the dwelling-place support, the other three supports. For she does not obtain a dwelling-place at the root of a tree.

428.Anuvādaṃ paṭṭhapentīti issariyaṃ pavattenti.

428. Setting up an accusation: They wield authority.

430.Bhikkhudūtena upasampādentīti bhikkhuyeva dūto bhikkhudūto, tena bhikkhudūtena, bhikkhudūtaṃ katvā upasampādentīti attho.

430. Ordaining through a bhikkhu-messenger: A bhikkhu is the messenger, a bhikkhu-messenger; by that bhikkhu-messenger, making a bhikkhu the messenger, meaning they ordain.

431.Na sammatīti nappahoti.Navakammanti navakammaṃ katvā ‘‘ettakāni vassāni vasatū’’ti apaloketvā saṅghikabhūmidānaṃ.

431. Is not competent: Is not capable. New work: Making new construction, after seeking approval, "Let him or her dwell here for so many years," donating land to the Sangha.

432.Sannisinnagabbhāti patiṭṭhitagabbhā.

432. With an established pregnancy: With a confirmed pregnancy.

434.Pabbajjampi na labhatīti titthāyatanasaṅkantāya abhabbabhāvūpagamanato na labhati.Idaṃ odissa anuññātaṃ vaṭṭatīti ekato vā ubhato vā avassave satipi odissa anuññātattā vaṭṭati. Sesamettha pāḷito aṭṭhakathāto ca suviññeyyamevāti.

434. Also does not obtain ordination: Because she has crossed over to another sect, she is unfit and does not obtain it. It is allowable, having been permitted in reference to this: Even with excretion or non-excretion from one or both places, it is allowable because it was permitted in reference to this. The rest here is easily understood from the Pāli and the Commentary.

Bhikkhunīupasampannānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Allowing of the Bhikkhunī Ordination is finished.

Bhikkhunikkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Bhikkhunī Khandhaka Commentary is finished.

11. Pañcasatikakkhandhakaṃ

11. The Chapter of the Five Hundred

Saṅgītinidānakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Introductory Story to the Recitation

437.Pañcasatikakkhandhakepāvāya kusināranti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.231) pāvānagare piṇḍāya caritvā kusināraṃ gamissāmīti addhānamaggappaṭipanno.Mandāravapupphaṃ gahetvāti mahācāṭippamāṇaṃ pupphaṃ āgantukadaṇḍake ṭhapetvā chattaṃ viya gahetvā.Addasaṃ khoti āgacchantaṃ dūratova addasaṃ. Disvā ca pana ‘‘pucchissāmi naṃ bhagavato pavatti’’nti cittaṃ uppādetvā ‘‘sace kho pana nisinnakova pucchissāmi, satthari agāravo kato bhavissatī’’ti uṭṭhahitvā ṭhitaṭṭhānato apakkamma chaddanto nāgarājā maṇicammaṃ viya dasabaladattiyaṃ meghavaṇṇapaṃsukūlacīvaraṃ pārupitvā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasmiṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā satthari katena gāravena ājīvakassa abhimukho hutvā ‘‘apāvuso amhākaṃ satthāraṃ jānāsī’’ti āha. Kiṃ pana satthu parinibbānaṃ jānanto pucchi ajānantoti? Āvajjanappaṭibaddhaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ jānanaṃ. Anāvajjitattā panesa ajānanto pucchīti eke. Thero samāpattibahulo rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānaleṇamaṇḍapādīsu niccaṃ samāpattiphaleneva yāpeti. Kulasantakampi gāmaṃ pavisitvā dvāre samāpajjitvā samāpattito vuṭṭhitova bhikkhaṃ gaṇhāti. Thero kira ‘‘iminā me pacchimena attabhāvena mahājanānuggahaṃ karissāmi, ye mayhaṃ bhikkhaṃ vā denti, gandhamālādīhi vā sakkāraṃ karonti, tesaṃ taṃ mahapphalaṃ hotū’’ti evaṃ karoti. Tasmā samāpattibahulatāya na jāni. Iti ajānantova pucchīti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Na hettha ajānanakāraṇaṃ atthi. Abhilakkhitaṃ satthu parinibbānaṃ ahosi dasasahassilokadhātukampanādīhi nimittehi. Therassa pana parisāya kehici bhikkhūhi bhagavā diṭṭhapubbo, kehici na diṭṭhapubbo. Tattha yehi diṭṭhapubbo, tepi passitukāmāva. Yehipi adiṭṭhapubbo, tepi passitukāmāva. Tattha yehi na diṭṭhapubbo, te abhidassanakāmatāya gantvā ‘‘kuhiṃ bhagavā’’ti pucchantā ‘‘parinibbuto’’ti sutvā sandhāretuṃ na sakkhissanti. Cīvaraṃ chaḍḍetvā ekavatthā vā dunnivatthā vā urāni paṭipisantā parodissanti. Tattha manussā ‘‘mahākassapena saddhiṃ āgatapaṃsukūlikā sayampi itthiyo viya parodanti, te kiṃ amhe samassāsentī’’ti mayhaṃ dosaṃ dassanti. Idaṃ pana suññaṃ mahāraññaṃ, idha yathā tathā rodantesu doso natthi. Purimataraṃ sutvā nāma sokopi tanuko hotīti bhikkhūnaṃ satuppādalābhatthaṃ jānantova pucchi.

437. In the Pañcasatikakkhandhaka, from Pāvā to Kusinārā (D.N. Commentary 2.231): Having gone for alms in the city of Pāvā, he set out on the road, intending to go to Kusinārā. Taking a mandārava flower: Taking a flower the size of a large bowl, placing it on a traveling staff, holding it like an umbrella. I saw: I saw him coming from afar. Having seen him, thinking, "I will ask him about the Teacher's condition," and then, "If I ask him while sitting, it will be disrespectful to the Teacher," he got up, moved away from where he was standing, and, like the six-tusked Nāga king with his jeweled hide, having wrapped himself in a cloud-colored robe taken from a dust heap, placing his radiant joined palms on his head with the reverence he had for the Teacher, he faced the Ājīvaka and said, "Friend, do you know our Teacher?" But did he ask knowing of the Teacher's passing away, or not knowing? The knowledge of the arahants is connected to directing their minds. Some say that because he had not directed his mind, he asked without knowing. The Elder was devoted to meditative attainments, constantly spending the night, the day, the cave, and the pavilion in the bliss of attainment. Even when entering his ancestral village, he would enter into attainment at the gate and take alms only after rising from the attainment. It is said that the Elder thought, "In this, my last existence, I will do a favor to the multitude of people. May it be of great fruit to those who give me alms or honor me with perfumes, garlands, and so on." Therefore, he did so out of his devotion to meditative attainment. Thus, they say that he asked without knowing, but that should not be accepted. For there is no reason here for not knowing. The Teacher's passing away was clearly marked by signs such as the ten-thousandfold world system trembling. However, some bhikkhus in the Elder's company had seen the Blessed One before, and some had not. Those who had seen him before also wanted to see him. Those who had not seen him before also wanted to see him. Those who had not seen him before, going to see him out of a desire to see, would not be able to bear it upon hearing, "He has passed away." They would throw aside their robes, or poorly dressed, strike their breasts and weep. People would criticize me, saying, "The dust-heap wearers who have come with Mahākassapa themselves weep like women; how will they console us?" But this great forest is empty; there is no fault in weeping as they please here. Hearing of it earlier, the sorrow will be lessened, so for the sake of the bhikkhus' acquisition of mindfulness, he asked knowing full well.

Ajja sattāhaparinibbutoti ajja divasato paṭilomato sattame ahani parinibbuto.Tato me idanti tato samaṇassa gotamassa parinibbutaṭṭhānato.Avītarāgāti puthujjanā ceva sotāpannasakadāgāmino ca. Tesañhi domanassaṃ appahīnaṃ, tasmā tepi bāhā paggayha kandanti, ubho hatthe sīse ṭhapetvā rodanti.Chinnapātaṃ papatantīti chinnānaṃ pāto viya chinnapāto, taṃ chinnapātaṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakaniddesoyaṃ, majjhe chinnā viya hutvā yato vā tato vā patantīti attho.Āvaṭṭantīti abhimukhabhāvena vaṭṭanti. Yattha patitā, tato katipayaratanaṭṭhānaṃ vaṭṭanavaseneva gantvā puna yathāpatitameva ṭhānaṃ vaṭṭanavasena āgacchanti.Vivaṭṭantīti yattha patitā, tato nivaṭṭanti, patitaṭṭhānato parabhāgaṃ vaṭṭamānā gacchantīti attho. Apica purato vaṭṭanaṃāvaṭṭanaṃ,passato pacchato ca vaṭṭanaṃvivaṭṭanaṃ. Tasmā dve pāde pasāretvā sakiṃ purato sakiṃ pacchato sakiṃ vāmato sakiṃ dakkhiṇato samparivaṭṭamānāpi āvaṭṭanti vivaṭṭantīti vuccanti.Vītarāgāti pahīnadomanassā iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu nibbikāratāya silāthambhasadisā anāgāmikhīṇāsavā. Kāmañhi domanasse asatipi ekacco rāgo hotiyeva, rāge pana asati domanassassa asambhavoyeva. Tadekaṭṭhabhāvato hi rāgappahānena pahīnadomanassā vuttā, na khīṇāsavā eva.

Passed away seven days ago: Counting backward from today, he passed away on the seventh day. From there to me: From the place of the passing away of the ascetic Gotama. Not devoid of lust: Both ordinary people and stream-enterers and once-returners. For their sorrow is not yet abandoned; therefore, they too weep, raising their arms, striking their heads with both hands. Falling as if cut down: Like the falling of those who are cut down; the falling of those who are cut down; this is a neuter noun, meaning falling from one place or another as if cut in the middle. Revolving: They revolve facing forward. Having fallen somewhere, they go to a place a few ratanas away by means of revolving, and then come back to the same place where they fell by means of revolving. Turning around: They turn away from where they fell, meaning they go turning around to another place from the place where they fell. Moreover, revolving forward is revolving, and revolving from the back to the front is turning around. Therefore, spreading out their two feet, revolving once forward, once backward, once to the left, and once to the right, they are said to be revolving and turning around. Devoid of lust: Those who have abandoned sorrow, unshaken by pleasant and unpleasant things, like a stone pillar, non-returners and arahants. For even if there is no sorrow, there is still some lust. But when there is no lust, there is no possibility of sorrow. Therefore, because of their unified nature, they are said to have abandoned sorrow by the abandonment of lust, not just the arahants.

Sabbeheva piyehītiādīsu piyāyitabbatopiyehimanavaḍḍhanatomanāpehimātāpitābhātābhaginīādikehi.Nānābhāvoti jātiyā nānābhāvo, jātianurūpagamanena visuṃ bhāvo, asambaddhabhāvoti attho.Vinābhāvoti maraṇena vinābhāvo, cutiyā tenattabhāvena apunapavattanato vippayogoti attho.Aññathābhāvoti bhavena aññathābhāvo, bhavantaraggahaṇena ‘‘kāmāvacarasatto rūpāvacaro hotī’’tiādinā tatthāpi ‘‘manusso devo hotī’’tiādinā ca purimākārato aññākāratāti attho.Tanti tasmā.Kutettha labbhāti kuto kuhiṃ kasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne ettha etasmiṃ khandhappavatte yaṃ taṃ jātaṃ…pe… mā palujjīti laddhuṃ sakkā, na sakkā eva tādisassa kāraṇassa abhāvato. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo, tasmā dasa pāramiyo pūretvāpi sambodhiṃ patvāpi dhammacakkaṃ pavattetvāpi yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ dassetvāpi devorohaṇaṃ katvāpi yaṃ taṃ jātaṃ bhūtaṃ saṅkhataṃ palokadhammaṃ, tañca tathāgatassapi sarīraṃ mā palujjīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati, rodantenapi kandantenapi na sakkā taṃ kāraṇaṃ laddhunti.

With all dear ones and so on, dear ones because they should be loved, pleasant ones because they increase the mind, such as mothers, fathers, brothers, and sisters. Separation: Separation by way of birth, separation according to birth, separation unrelated. Departure: Departure by way of death, separation by way of passing away, separation that does not return to that state. Otherness: Otherness by way of existence, by taking another existence, "A being in the realm of desire becomes a being in the realm of form," and so on, and even there, "A human becomes a deva," and so on, meaning another state from the previous state. That: Therefore. Where can that be found: From where, where, in what place, is it possible to obtain in this arising of aggregates that which is born…pe…may it not decay; it is not possible, because of the absence of such a cause. This is said: Since there is separation from all dear and pleasant ones, therefore, even having fulfilled the ten perfections, even having attained enlightenment, even having set in motion the Wheel of the Dhamma, even having performed the Twin Miracle, even having descended from the heaven of the devas, it is not possible to find the place where the body of even the Tathāgata, which is born, come into being, conditioned, and subject to destruction, may not decay, and it is not possible to obtain that cause even by weeping and wailing.

Tena kho panāvuso, samayena subhaddo nāma vuḍḍhapabbajitotiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃnidānavaṇṇanāyaṃ(sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) vuttanayameva.

At that time, friend, there was an elderly ascetic named Subhadda and so on, what should be said about that is the same as what was said in the Explanation of the Introduction (Sārattha. Ṭī. 1. First Great Recitation).

Saṅgītinidānakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Introductory Story to the Recitation is finished.

Khuddānukhuddakasikkhāpadakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Minor and Subordinate Rules

441.Samūhaneyyāti ākaṅkhamāno samūhanatu, yadi icchati, samūhaneyyāti attho. Kasmā pana ‘‘samūhanathā’’ti ekaṃseneva avatvā ‘‘ākaṅkhamāno samūhaneyyā’’ti vikappavacaneneva bhagavā ṭhapesīti? Mahākassapassa ñāṇabalassa diṭṭhattā. Passati hi bhagavā ‘‘samūhanathāti vuttepi saṅgītikāle kassapo na samūhanissatī’’ti, tasmā vikappeneva ṭhapesi. Yadi asamūhananaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, tadeva ca icchitaṃ, atha kasmā bhagavā ‘‘ākaṅkhamāno samūhanatū’’ti avocāti? Tathārūpapuggalajjhāsayavasena. Santi hi keci khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni samādāya vattituṃ anicchantā, tesaṃ tathā avuccamāne bhagavati vighāto uppajjeyya, taṃ tesaṃ bhavissati dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya. Tathā pana vutte tesaṃ vighāto na uppajjeyya, amhākamevāyaṃ doso, yato amhesuyeva keci samūhananaṃ na icchantīti. Keci ‘‘sakalassa pana sāsanassa saṅghāyattabhāvakaraṇatthaṃ tathā vutta’’nti vadanti. Yaṃ kiñci satthārā sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ samaṇā sakyaputtiyā sirasā sampaṭicchitvā jīvitaṃ viya rakkhanti. Tathā hi te ‘‘khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho samūhanatū’’ti vuttepi na samūhaniṃsu. Aññadatthu purato viya tassa accayepi rakkhiṃsuyevāti satthu sāsanassa saṅghassa ca mahantabhāvadassanatthampi tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi āyasmā ānando aññepi vā bhikkhū ‘‘katamaṃ pana, bhante, khuddakaṃ, katamaṃ anukhuddaka’’nti na pucchiṃsu samūhanajjhāsayasseva abhāvato, teneva ekasikkhāpadampi apariccajitvā sabbesaṃ anuggahetabbabhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘cattāri pārājikāni ṭhapetvā avasesāni khuddānukhuddakānī’’tiādimāhaṃsu. Evañhi vadantehi ‘‘khuddānukhuddakā ime nāmā’’ti avinicchitattā sabbesaṃ anuggahetabbabhāvo dassito hoti.

441. Samūhaneyyā means: if he wishes, let him abolish it; the meaning is, if he desires, it is something that can be abolished. But why did the Blessed One establish it with a conditional statement, "if he wishes, let him abolish," instead of saying definitively, "abolish"? Because he foresaw the power of Mahākassapa's wisdom. The Blessed One saw that even if it were said, "Abolish it," Kassapa would not abolish it at the time of the council. Therefore, he established it conditionally. If non-abolition was foreseen and desired, then why did the Blessed One say, "If he wishes, let him abolish it?" Because of the inclination of such individuals. There are some who do not wish to abide by the minor and lesser precepts. If it were not said thus by the Blessed One, conflict would arise for them, and that would lead to their long-term harm and suffering. But when it is said thus, conflict would not arise for them, thinking, "This is our own fault, since some among us do not wish for abolition." Some say, "It was said thus to make the entire dispensation dependent on the Sangha." Whatever precept has been laid down by the Teacher, the Sakyan monks receive it with their heads and protect it as if it were their life. Thus, even when it was said, "If the Sangha wishes, let it abolish the minor and lesser precepts," they did not abolish them. Rather, they protected it even after his passing, as if it were before them. It should be seen that it was said thus also to show the greatness of the Teacher's dispensation and the Sangha. Thus, Venerable Ānanda and other monks did not ask, "What, Lord, is minor? What is lesser?" due to the very absence of an inclination to abolish. Therefore, to show that even a single precept should not be abandoned and that all should be treated with consideration, they said, "Except for the four Pārājikas, the remaining ones are minor and lesser," and so on. For by saying thus, since it is not determined "these are the minor and lesser ones," the fact that all should be treated with consideration is shown.

442.Athakho āyasmā mahākassapo saṅghaṃ ñāpesīti ettha pana keci vadanti ‘‘bhante nāgasena, katamaṃ khuddakaṃ, katamaṃ anukhuddakanti milindaraññā pucchite ‘dukkaṭaṃ mahārāja, khuddakaṃ, dubbhāsitaṃ anukhuddaka’nti (mi. pa. 4.2.1) vuttattā nāgasenatthero khuddānukhuddakaṃ jāni, mahākassapatthero pana taṃ ajānanto ‘suṇātu me āvuso’tiādinā kammavācaṃ sāvesī’’ti, na taṃ evaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Nāgasenatthero hi paresaṃ vādapathopacchedanatthaṃ saṅgītikāle dhammasaṅgāhakamahātherehi gahitakoṭṭhāsesu antimakoṭṭhāsameva gahetvā milindarājānaṃ saññāpesi, mahākassapatthero pana ekasikkhāpadampi asamūhanitukāmatāya tathā kammavācaṃ sāvesi.

442. In Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo saṅghaṃ ñāpesī ti, some say: "Venerable Nāgasena, when King Milinda asked, 'What is minor? What is lesser?' and it was said, 'Dukkaṭa is minor, Your Majesty, dubbhāsita is lesser' (Miln 4.2.1), Venerable Nāgasena knew the minor and lesser, but Venerable Mahākassapa, not knowing it, announced the Kammavāca beginning with 'Suṇātu me āvuso'." This should not be taken thus. Venerable Nāgasena, in order to cut off the path of argument for others, took only the final portion among the portions taken by the great elders who compiled the Dhamma at the time of the council and made King Milinda understand. Venerable Mahākassapa, however, announced the Kammavāca thus, wishing not to abolish even a single precept.

gihigatānīti gihipaṭisaṃyuttānīti vadanti. Gihīsu gatāni, tehi ñātānigihigatānīti evaṃ panettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Dhūmakālo etassātidhūmakālikaṃcitakadhūmavūpasamato paraṃ appavattanato.Appaññattantiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.136; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.7.23) navaṃ adhammikaṃ katikavattaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ vā bandhantāappaññattaṃ paññapentināma purāṇasanthatavatthusmiṃ sāvatthiyaṃ bhikkhū viya. Uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ sāsanaṃ dīpentāpaññattaṃ samucchindantināma vassasataparinibbute bhagavati vesālikā vajjiputtakā viya. Khuddānukhuddakā pana āpattiyo sañcicca vītikkamantāyathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya na vattantināma assajipunabbasukā viya. Navaṃ pana katikavattaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ vā abandhantā, dhammato vinayato sāsanaṃ dīpentā, khuddānukhuddakampi ca sikkhāpadaṃ asamūhanantāappaññattaṃ na paññapenti, paññattaṃ na samucchindanti, yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya vattantināma āyasmā upaseno viya āyasmā yaso kākaṇḍakaputto viya ca.

Gihigatānī means associated with lay people, they say. Gone among lay people, known by them, gihigatānī: thus, the meaning should be seen here. Dhūmakālikaṃ: because the time of smoke is for this, ceasing after the smoke of the pyre has subsided, since it no longer occurs after that. In Appaññattaṃ etc. (DA. 2.136; AA. 3.7.23), those who establish a new, unrighteous customary practice or a training rule appaññattaṃ paññapenti are said to establish what has not been prescribed, like the monks in Sāvatthī regarding the old spread-out cloth item. Those who illuminate the distorted Dhamma, the misinterpretations of the Vinaya, and the (incorrect) dispensation, paññattaṃ samucchindanti are said to abolish what has been prescribed, like the Vajjiputtakas of Vesālī one hundred years after the Blessed One's Parinibbāna. But those who intentionally transgress the minor and lesser offenses yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya na vattanti are said not to conduct themselves in accordance with the precepts as prescribed, like Assaji and Punabbasu. But those who do not establish a new customary practice or a training rule, who illuminate the Dhamma, the Vinaya, and the dispensation, and who do not abolish even the minor and lesser precepts, appaññattaṃ na paññapenti, paññattaṃ na samucchindanti, yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya vattanti are said not to prescribe what has not been prescribed, not to abolish what has been prescribed, and to conduct themselves in accordance with the precepts as prescribed, like Venerable Upasena and Venerable Yasa Kākaṇḍakaputta.

443.Bhagavatā oḷārike nimitte kayiramāneti vesāliṃ nissāya cāpāle cetiye viharantena bhagavatā –

443. Bhagavatā oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne: When the Blessed One, dwelling at the Cāpāla Shrine in dependence on Vesālī, was making a manifest indication:

‘‘Ramaṇīyā, ānanda, vesālī, ramaṇīyaṃ udenacetiyaṃ, ramaṇīyaṃ gotamakacetiyaṃ, ramaṇīyaṃ sattambacetiyaṃ, ramaṇīyaṃ bahuputtacetiyaṃ, ramaṇīyaṃ sārandadacetiyaṃ, ramaṇīyaṃ cāpālacetiyaṃ. Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṃ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṃ vā. Tathāgatassa kho pana, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṃ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṃ vā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.166) –

"Vesālī is delightful, Ānanda; the Udena Shrine is delightful; the Gotamaka Shrine is delightful; the Sattamba Shrine is delightful; the Bahuputta Shrine is delightful; the Sārandada Shrine is delightful; the Cāpāla Shrine is delightful. Ānanda, if anyone has developed, cultivated, practiced, accumulated, established, pursued, and well begun the four bases of spiritual power, he could, if he wished, remain for a kappa or for the remainder of a kappa. Ānanda, the four bases of spiritual power have been developed, cultivated, practiced, accumulated, established, pursued, and well begun by the Tathāgata; if he wished, Ānanda, the Tathāgata could remain for a kappa or for the remainder of a kappa" (DN 2.166) –

Evaṃ oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne.

Thus, when a manifest indication was being made.

Mārena pariyuṭṭhitacittoti mārena ajjhotthaṭacitto. Māro hi yassa sabbena sabbaṃ dvādasa vipallāsā appahīnā, tassa cittaṃ pariyuṭṭhāti. Therassa ca cattāro vipallāsā appahīnā, tenassa māro cittaṃ pariyuṭṭhāsi. So pana cittapariyuṭṭhānaṃ karonto kiṃ karotīti? Bheravaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ vā dasseti, saddārammaṇaṃ vā sāveti, tato sattā taṃ disvā vā sutvā vā satiṃ vissajjetvā vivaṭamukhā honti, tesaṃ mukhena hatthaṃ pavesetvā hadayaṃ maddati, tato visaññāva hutvā tiṭṭhanti. Therassa panesa mukhena hatthaṃ pavesetuṃ kiṃ sakkhissati, bheravārammaṇaṃ pana dassesi, taṃ disvā thero nimittobhāsaṃ na paṭivijjhi.

Mārena pariyuṭṭhitacitto: whose mind was completely overcome by Māra. For Māra completely overcomes the mind of one in whom the twelve perversions have not been abandoned in every way. And the elder had not abandoned four perversions, so Māra overcame his mind. What does he do when overcoming the mind? He shows a terrifying visual object or causes a terrifying sound object to be heard. Then beings, seeing or hearing that, abandon mindfulness and open their mouths wide. Māra inserts his hand into their mouths and crushes their hearts, and then they stand there unconscious. What can he do about inserting his hand into the elder’s mouth? However, he showed a terrifying object, and seeing that, the elder did not recognize the reflected image.

Khuddānukhuddakasikkhāpadakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Minor and Lesser Training Rules is Finished.

Brahmadaṇḍakathāvaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Brahmadaṇḍa

445.Ujjavanikāyāti paṭisotagāminiyā.Rajoharaṇanti rajopuñchanī.Na kulavaṃ gamentīti niratthakavināsanaṃ na gamenti. Kucchito lavokulavo,anayavināsoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Dhammavinayasaṅgītiyā’’ti vattabbe saṅgītiyā vinayappadhānattā‘‘vinayasaṅgītiyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vinayappadhānā saṅgītivinayasaṅgīti. Sesamettha suviññeyyamevāti.

445. Ujjavanikāyā: To the one going against the stream. Rajoharaṇa: Dusting cloth. Na kulavaṃ gamentī: They do not cause meaningless destruction. A bad harvest kulavo, which means destruction of morals. Where it should have said “Dhammavinayasaṅgītiyā”, it says ‘‘vinayasaṅgītiyā’’ because of the prominence of the Vinaya in the council. The council in which the Vinaya is prominent is vinayasaṅgīti. The rest here is indeed easily understood.

Pañcasatikakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Pañcasatikakkhandhaka is Finished.

12. Sattasatikakkhandhakaṃ

12. Sattasatikakkhandhaka

Dasavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Ten Topics

446.Sattasatikakkhandhakenikkhittamaṇisuvaṇṇāti rūpiyasikkhāpadeneva paṭikkhittamaṇisuvaṇṇā. Tattha maṇiggahaṇena sabbaṃ dukkaṭavatthu, suvaṇṇaggahaṇena sabbaṃ pācittiyavatthu gahitaṃ hoti.Bhikkhaggenāti bhikkhugaṇanāya.

446. In the Sattasatikakkhandhaka, nikkhittamaṇisuvaṇṇā means those who have rejected gold and silver coins with the rule against silver. There, by taking maṇi (jewels), all objects involving dukkaṭa are taken; by taking suvaṇṇa (gold), all objects involving pācittiya are taken. Bhikkhaggena: By the reckoning of monks.

447.Upakkilesāti virocituṃ adatvā upakkiliṭṭhabhāvakaraṇena upakkilesā.Mahikāti himaṃ. Dhūmo ca rajo cadhūmarajo. Ettha purimā tayo asampattaupakkilesā, rāhu pana sampattaupakkilesavasena kathitoti veditabbo.Samaṇabrāhmaṇā na tapanti na bhāsanti na virocantīti guṇapatāpena na tapanti guṇobhāsena na bhāsanti guṇavirocanena na virocanti.Surāmerayapānā appaṭiviratāti pañcavidhāya surāya catubbidhassa ca merayassa pānato aviratā.

447. Upakkilesā means defilements because they cause a state of being defiled by not giving permission to shine. Mahikā means frost. Dhūmo ca rajo ca dhūmarajo means smoke and dust. Here, it should be understood that the first three are defilements of non-attainment, but Rāhu is spoken of as a defilement of attainment. Samaṇabrāhmaṇā na tapanti na bhāsanti na virocantī means ascetics and brahmins do not shine with the heat of virtues, do not speak with the light of virtues, and do not glow with the radiance of virtues. Surāmerayapānā appaṭiviratā means not abstaining from drinking five kinds of surā (intoxicating drinks) and four kinds of meraya (fermented drinks).

Avijjānivuṭāti avijjāya nivāritā pihitā.Piyarūpābhinandinoti piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ abhinandamānā tussamānā.Sādiyantīti gaṇhanti.Aviddasūti andhabālā.Sarajāti sakilesarajā.Magāti migasadisā. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ visaye bhave vā netīti netti, taṇhāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tāya saha vattantītisanettikā.

Avijjānivuṭā: Covered and obstructed by ignorance. Piyarūpābhinandino: Delighting in and enjoying what is dear and attractive. Sādiyantī: They accept. Aviddasū: Blind fools. Sarajā: With the dust of defilements. Magā: Like deer. That which leads or guides in this or that object or existence is netti; this is a term for craving. Those who conduct themselves together with that are sanettikā.

448.Taṃ parisaṃ etadavocāti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.362) tassa kira evaṃ ahosi ‘‘kulaputtā pabbajantā puttadārañceva jātarūparajatañca pahāyeva pabbajanti, na ca sakkā yaṃ pahāya pabbajitā taṃ etehi gāhetu’’nti nayaggāhe ṭhatvā etaṃ‘‘mā ayyā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.Ekaṃsenetanti etaṃ pañcakāmaguṇakappanaṃ ‘‘assamaṇadhammo asakyaputtiyadhammo’’ti ekaṃsena dhāreyyāsi.

448. Taṃ parisaṃ etadavocā (SN. 3.4.362): It occurred to him, "Noble sons go forth, abandoning children, spouses, and gold and silver. It is not proper for these ones to take what they have gone forth abandoning." Standing firm in this guidance, he spoke this statement, ‘‘mā ayyā’’, and so on. Ekaṃsenetaṃ: This imagination of the five strands of sense pleasure should be held decisively as "not the ascetic’s Dhamma, not the Sakyan son's Dhamma."

Tiṇanti senāsanacchadanatiṇaṃ.Pariyesitabbanti tiṇacchadane vā iṭṭhakacchadane vā gehe palujjante yehi taṃ kāritaṃ, tesaṃ santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘tumhehi kāritaṃ senāsanaṃ ovassati, na sakkā tattha vasitu’’nti ācikkhitabbaṃ. Manussā sakkontā karissanti, asakkontā ‘‘tumhe vaḍḍhakī gahetvā kārāpetha, mayaṃ te saññāpessāmā’’ti vakkhanti. Evaṃ vutte kāretvā tesaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ, manussā vaḍḍhakīnaṃ dātabbaṃ dassanti. Sace āvāsasāmikā natthi, aññesampi bhikkhācāravattena ārocetvā kāretuṃ vaṭṭati. Imaṃ sandhāya ‘‘pariyesitabba’’nti vuttaṃ.

Tiṇaṃ: Thatching grass for the lodging. Pariyesitabbaṃ: When the grass roof or brick roof of the dwelling is falling apart, it should be told to those by whom it was made, "The dwelling you made is leaking. It is not possible to live there." If people are able, they will do it; if they are not able, they will say, "You take a carpenter and have it done. We will pay them." When it is said thus, they should have it done and inform them, and the people will give what should be given to the carpenters. If there are no owners of the monastery, it is proper to have it done after announcing it to others by means of the alms-seeking practice. Referring to this, it is said "pariyesitabbaṃ."

Dārūti senāsane gopānasiādīsu palujjamānesu tadatthāya dāru pariyesitabbaṃ.Sakaṭanti gihivikaṭaṃ vā tāvakālikaṃ vā katvā sakaṭaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ. Na kevalañca sakaṭameva, aññampi vāsipharasukudālādiupakaraṇaṃ evaṃ pariyesituṃ vaṭṭati.Purisoti hatthakammavasena puriso pariyesitabbo. Yaṃ kañci hi purisaṃ ‘‘hatthakammaṃ āvuso dassasī’’ti vatvā ‘‘dassāmi bhante’’ti vutte ‘‘imasmiṃ idañcidañca karohī’’ti yaṃ icchati, taṃ kāretuṃ vaṭṭati.Na tvevāhaṃ gāmaṇi kenaci pariyāyenāti jātarūparajataṃ panāhaṃ kenacipi kāraṇena pariyesitabbanti na vadāmi.

Dārū: When wood in the dwelling, such as rafters, etc., are falling apart, wood should be sought for that purpose. Sakaṭaṃ: A cart should be sought by making a cart that is broken for lay people or a temporary one. And not only the cart, but also other equipment like axes, adzes, and shovels, it is proper to seek in this way. Puriso: A man should be sought by means of manual labor. For it is proper to have whatever one wishes done by saying to any man, "Will you show manual labor, friend?" and when he says, "I will show it, venerable sir," saying, "Do this and that in this." Na tvevāhaṃ gāmaṇi kenaci pariyāyenā: But I do not say that gold and silver should be sought by any means.

449.Pāpakaṃ katanti asundaraṃ kataṃ.

449. Pāpakaṃ kataṃ: Done badly.

450.Ahogaṅgoti tassa pabbatassa nāmaṃ.

450. Ahogaṅgo: The name of that mountain.

451.Paṭikacceva gaccheyyanti yattha taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasametuṃ bhikkhū sannipatanti, tattha paṭhamameva gaccheyyaṃ.Sambhāvesunti pāpuṇiṃsu.

451. Paṭikacceva gaccheyyaṃ: I should go first to where the monks gather to settle that dispute. Sambhāvesuṃ: They attained.

452.Aloṇakaṃ bhavissatīti aloṇakaṃ bhattaṃ vā byañjanaṃ vā bhavissati.Āsutāti sabbasambhārasajjitā. ‘‘Asuttā’’ti vā pāṭho.

452. Aloṇakaṃ bhavissati: It will be unsalted rice or curry. Āsutā: Prepared with all the requisites. Or the reading is "Asuttā."

453.Ujjaviṃsūti nāvaṃ āruyha paṭisotena gacchiṃsu.Pācīnakāti pācīnadesavāsino.

453. Ujjaviṃsū: They boarded the boat and went against the stream. Pācīnakā: Residents of the eastern country.

454.Nanu tvaṃ āvuso vuḍḍho vīsativassosīti nanu tvaṃ āvuso vīsativasso, na nissayapaṭibaddho, kasmā taṃ thero paṇāmetīti dīpenti.Garunissayaṃ gaṇhāmāti kiñcāpi mayaṃ mahallakā, etaṃ pana theraṃ garuṃ katvā vasissāmāti adhippāyo.

454. Nanu tvaṃ āvuso vuḍḍho vīsativassosī: Surely, friend, you are twenty years old, not dependent on a preceptor. Why does the elder expel you? This is showing the meaning. Garunissayaṃ gaṇhāmā: Although we are old, we intend to live respecting this elder.

455.Mettāya rūpāvacarasamādhimattabhāvato‘‘kullakavihārenā’’ti vuttaṃ, khuddakena vihārenāti attho, khuddakatā cassa agambhīrabhāvatoti āha‘‘uttānavihārenā’’ti.Suññatāvihārenāti suññatāmukhena adhigataphalasamāpattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

455. ‘‘Kullakavihārenā’’: Because of the mere presence of the rūpāvacara samādhi of loving-kindness, which means a small monastery. And the reason for its smallness is its lack of profundity, so he said ‘‘uttānavihārenā’’. Suññatāvihārenā: Said in reference to the attainment of fruition attained through the door of emptiness.

457.Suttavibhaṅgeti padabhājanīye.Tena saddhinti purepaṭiggahitaloṇena saddhiṃ.Na hi ettha yāvajīvikaṃ tadahupaṭiggahitanti ‘‘kappati siṅgiloṇakappo’’ti ettha vuttasiṅgiloṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tañhi pure paṭiggahetvā siṅgena parihaṭaṃ na tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ.Yāvakālikameva tadahupaṭiggahitanti siṅgiloṇena missetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ aloṇāmisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Uposathasaṃyutteti uposathapaṭisaṃyutte, uposathakkhandhaketi vuttaṃ hoti. Atisaraṇaṃ atisāro, atikkamo. Vinayassa atisārovinayātisāro. Taṃ pamāṇaṃ karontassāti dasāya saddhiṃ nisīdane yaṃ pamāṇaṃ vuttaṃ, dasāya vinā taṃ pamāṇaṃ karontassa. Sesamettha suviññeyyameva.

457. Suttavibhaṅge: In the Padabhājanīya. Tena saddhiṃ: Together with the salt received earlier. Na hi ettha yāvajīvikaṃ tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ: This is said in reference to the stored salt mentioned in "the storing of salt in a horn is allowable." For that was received earlier and carried in a horn; it was not received on that day. Yāvakālikameva tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ: This is said in reference to unsalted meat that should be eaten mixed with stored salt. Uposathasaṃyutte: Connected with the Uposatha, which means the Uposathakkhandhaka. Atisaraṇaṃ means atisāro (excess), atikkamo (transgression). Vinayassa atisāro is vinayātisāro, transgression of the Vinaya. Taṃ pamāṇaṃ karontassa: For one who makes that measure when sitting with ten, the measure that was stated, making that measure without ten. The rest here is indeed easily understood.

Sattasatikakkhandhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Sattasatikakkhandhaka is Finished.

Dvivaggasaṅgahāti cūḷavaggamahāvaggasaṅkhātehi dvīhi vaggehi saṅgahitā.Dvāvīsatipabhedanāti mahāvagge dasa, cūḷavagge dvādasāti evaṃ dvāvīsatippabhedā.Sāsaneti satthusāsane. Ye khandhakā vuttāti yojetabbaṃ.

Dvivaggasaṅgahā: Gathered by two divisions called Cūḷavagga and Mahāvagga. Dvāvīsatipabhedanā: Twenty-two divisions, thus: ten in the Mahāvagga and twelve in the Cūḷavagga. Sāsane: In the Teacher’s dispensation. The Khandhakas that were spoken should be connected.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ

Thus ends the Cūḷavaggavaṇṇanā in the Sāratthadīpanī, a sub-commentary to the Vinaya Aṭṭhakathā, the Samantapāsādikā.

Cūḷavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

  • *

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Parivāra-ṭīkā

Parivāra-ṭīkā

Soḷasamahāvāro

The Sixteenth Great Chapter

Paññattivāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Chapter on Proclamations

Visuddhaparivārassāti sabbaso parisuddhakhīṇāsavaparivārassa.Dhammakkhandhasarīrassāti sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttivimuttiñāṇadassanasaṅkhātadhammakkhandhasarīrassa sāsaneti sambandho.Tassāti ‘‘parivāro’’ti yo saṅgahaṃ āruḷho, tassa.Pubbāgataṃ nayanti pubbe āgataṃ vinicchayaṃ.

Visuddhaparivārassāti: Of the Order of disciples who are altogether purified, whose āsavas are destroyed. Dhammakkhandhasarīrassāti: Relating to the Dispensation that is the body of aggregates of qualities, reckoned as virtue, concentration, wisdom, deliverance, and knowledge and vision of deliverance. Tassāti: Of that which has ascended to inclusion as "the Order". Pubbāgataṃ nayanti: A judgment that has come previously.

1.Pakatatthapaṭiniddeso ta-saddoti tassa ‘‘bhagavatā’’tiādīhi padehi samānādhikaraṇabhāvena vuttatthassa yāya vinayapaññattiyā bhagavā pakato adhikato supākaṭo ca, taṃ vinayapaññattiṃ saddhiṃ yācanāya atthabhāvena dassento‘‘yo so…pe… vinayapaññattiṃ paññapesī’’ti āha. Tatthavinayapaññattinti vinayabhūtaṃ paññattiṃ.

1.The demonstrative pronoun 'ta' in the pointing out of the meaning already stated indicates that the Blessed One is made manifest, made the subject, and is well-known by the words "by the Blessed One," etc., in the state of having the same meaning; showing, with respect to that Vinaya proclamation by which the Blessed One is made manifest, made the subject, and is well-known, the state of being the meaning along with the request, he said: "whichever... Vinaya proclamation he proclaimed." Therein, vinayapaññattinti: a proclamation that is Vinaya.

‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tatthapubbenivāsādīhīti pubbenivāsāsavakkhayañāṇehi.Paṭivedhapaññāyāti ariyamaggapaññāya.Desanāpaññāya passatāti desetabbadhammānaṃ desetabbappakāraṃ bodhaneyyapuggalānañca āsayānusayacaritādhimuttiādibhedaṃ dhammaṃ desanāpaññāya yāthāvato passatā.Arahatāti arīnaṃ, arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnañca arahattā arahatā.Sammāsambuddhenāti sammā sāmañca saccānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddhena. Atha vā antarāyikadhammejānatā,niyyānikadhammepassatā,kilesārīnaṃ hatattāarahatā,sammā sāmaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattāsammāsambuddhenāti evaṃ catuvesārajjavasenapettha yojanā veditabbā.

He said beginning with "moreover." Therein, pubbenivāsādīhīti: By knowledge of previous existences and the destruction of the āsavas. Paṭivedhapaññāyāti: By the wisdom of the Noble Path. Desanāpaññāya passatāti: Seeing as it actually is, by means of the wisdom of exposition, the dhamma to be expounded, the way in which it should be expounded, and the differences in inclinations, latent tendencies, character, and inclinations, etc., of those persons who are to be enlightened. Arahatāti: By the Arhat, because he has slain the enemies (arīnaṃ), the spokes (arānañca), and because he is worthy (arahattā) of requisites, etc. Sammāsambuddhenāti: By the Sammāsambuddha, because he is rightly (sammā) and by himself (sāmañca) awakened (buddhattā) to the truths (saccānaṃ). Or alternatively, it should be understood that this connection can be made in terms of the four kinds of confidence: knowing those things that are obstructions, seeing those things that lead to deliverance, being an Arhat because he has slain the enemies of defilements, being a Sammāsambuddha because he is rightly and by himself awakened to all dhammas.

jānatā,yathākammūpage sattepassatā,savāsanaāsavānaṃ chinnattāarahatā,abhiññeyyādibhede dhamme abhiññeyyādito aviparītāvabodhatosammāsambuddhena. Atha vā tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇatāyajānatā,kāyakammādivasena tiṇṇampi kammānaṃ ñāṇānuparivattito sammā kāritāyapassatā,davādīnaṃ abhāvasādhikāya pahānasampadāyaarahatā,chandādīnaṃ ahānihetubhūtāya akkhayapaṭibhānasādhikāya sabbaññutāyasammāsambuddhenāti evaṃ dasabalaaṭṭhārasāveṇikabuddhadhammavasenapi yojanā kātabbā.

Knowing, seeing beings who are subject to their actions, being an Arhat because the āsavas together with their tendencies are cut off, being a Sammāsambuddha because of his unerring awareness of dhammas in their distinction as those to be fully known, etc., from the perspective of those to be fully known, etc. Or alternatively, knowing because of his unobstructed knowledge in the three times, seeing because he has caused the three kinds of action to be rightly performed with knowledge following after, in terms of bodily action, etc., being an Arhat because of the accomplishment of abandonment that establishes the absence of troubles, etc., being a Sammāsambuddha because of his omniscience that establishes indestructible eloquence as the cause of the non-decay of desire, etc. In this way, the connection should be made even in terms of the ten powers and the eighteen unique qualities of a Buddha.

2.Pucchāvissajjaneti pucchāya vissajjane.Etthāti etasmiṃ pucchāvissajjane.Majjhimadeseyeva paññattīti tasmiṃyeva dese yathāvuttavatthuvītikkame āpattisambhavato.Vinītakathāti vinītavatthukathā, ayameva vā pāṭho.

2.Pucchāvissajjaneti: In answering the question. Etthāti: In this answering of the question. Majjhimadeseyeva paññattīti: The proclamation is in that very country because of the arising of an offense in the transgression of the matter as stated. Vinītakathāti: A talk on a matter that has been judged; or this itself is the reading.

Kāyena pana āpattiṃ āpajjatīti pubbabhāge sevanacittaṃ aṅgaṃ katvā kāyadvārasaṅkhātaviññattiṃ janayitvā pavattacittuppādasaṅkhātaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati. Kiñcāpi hi cittena samuṭṭhāpitā viññatti, tathāpi cittena adhippetassa atthassa kāyaviññattiyā sādhitattā ‘‘kāyadvārena āpattiṃ āpajjatī’’ti vuccati.Imamatthaṃ sandhāyāti āpannāya āpattiyā anāpattibhāvāpādanassa asakkuṇeyyatāsaṅkhātamatthaṃ sandhāya, na bhaṇḍanādivūpasamaṃ.

Kāyena pana āpattiṃ āpajjatīti: In the preliminary stage, having made the intention to enjoy the object an element, and having generated an intimation reckoned as the door of the body, he incurs an offense reckoned as the arising of a mind-moment that is the process. Although the intimation is brought about by the mind, it is said that "he incurs an offense through the door of the body" because the meaning intended by the mind is accomplished by the bodily intimation. Imamatthaṃ sandhāyāti: With reference to this meaning reckoned as the impossibility of producing a state of non-offense from an offense incurred, not to the calming of quarrels, etc.

3.Porāṇakehi mahātherehīti sīhaḷadīpavāsīhi mahātherehi.Ṭhapitāti potthakasaṅgahārohanakāle ṭhapitā. Catutthasaṅgītisadisā hi potthakārohasaṅgīti. Ubhatovibhaṅge dvattiṃsa vārā suviññeyyāva.

3.Porāṇakehi mahātherehīti: By the great elders who were residents of Sri Lanka. Ṭhapitāti: Established at the time of the arranging of the books. Indeed, the arranging of books is like the Fourth Council. The thirty-two chapters in the Ubhatovibhaṅga are easily understood.

Samuṭṭhānasīsavaṇṇanā

Explanation of the Summary of Origination

257.Samuṭṭhānakathāya pana karuṇāsītalabhāvena candasadisattā‘‘buddhacande’’ti vuttaṃ, kilesatimirapahānato‘‘buddhādicce’’ti vuttaṃ.Piṭake tīṇi desayīti yasmā te desayanti, tasmā aṅgirasopi piṭakāni tīṇi desayi. Tāni katamānīti āha‘‘suttanta’’ntiādi.Mahāguṇanti mahānisaṃsaṃ.Evaṃ nīyati saddhammo, vinayo yadi tiṭṭhatīti yadi vinayapariyatti anantarahitā tiṭṭhati pavattati, evaṃ sati paṭipattipaṭivedhasaddhammo nīyati pavattati. Vinayapariyatti pana kathaṃ tiṭṭhatīti āha‘‘ubhatocā’’tiādi. Parivārena ganthitā tiṭṭhantīti yojetabbaṃ.Tasseva parivārassāti tasmiṃyeva parivāre.

257.But in the talk on origination, because of its moon-like quality due to its coolness of compassion, it is said to be "the Buddha-moon", and because of its dispelling the darkness of defilements, it is said to be "the Buddha-sun." Piṭake tīṇi desayīti: Because they teach those three, therefore Aṅgirasa taught the three Piṭakas. He asks, "Which are those?" ‘‘suttanta’’ntiādi. Mahāguṇanti: Of great benefit. Evaṃ nīyati saddhammo, vinayo yadi tiṭṭhatīti: If the Vinaya-scripture stands and continues without interruption, in that case the Dhamma of practice and realization is led on and continues. He asks, "But how does the Vinaya-scripture stand?" ‘‘ubhatocā’’tiādi. It should be connected: "It stands, held together by the Parivāra." Tasseva parivārassāti: In that very Parivāra.

Niyatakatanti kataniyataṃ, niyamitanti attho.Aññehi saddhinti sesasikkhāpadehi saddhiṃ.Asambhinnasamuṭṭhānānīti asaṅkarasamuṭṭhānāni.

Niyatakatanti: Whose determination is fixed; the meaning is "determined". Aññehi saddhinti: Together with the remaining training rules. Asambhinnasamuṭṭhānānīti: Originations that are not mixed up.

Tasmā sikkheti yasmā vinaye sati saddhammo tiṭṭhati, vinayo ca parivārena ganthito tiṭṭhati, parivāre ca samuṭṭhānādīni dissanti, tasmā sikkheyya parivāraṃ, uggaṇheyyāti attho.

Tasmā sikkheti: Because when the Vinaya exists, the Good Dhamma stands, and the Vinaya stands held together by the Parivāra, and in the Parivāra origination, etc., are seen, therefore one should train in the Parivāra, one should learn it; this is the meaning.

Ādimhi tāva purimanayeti ‘‘channaṃ āpattisamuṭṭhānānaṃ katihi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhātīti ekena samuṭṭhānena samuṭṭhāti, kāyato ca cittato ca samuṭṭhātī’’tiādinā (pari. 187) paññattivāre sakiṃ āgatanayaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.

Ādimhi tāva purimanayeti: This was said with reference to the method that came once previously in the chapter on proclamations, beginning with "Of the six originations of offenses, by how many originations does it originate? It originates by one origination, and it originates from the body and from the mind." (pari. 187)

258.Nānubandhe pavattininti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī vuṭṭhāpitaṃ pavattiniṃ dve vassāni nānubandheyyā’’ti (pāci. 1111) vuttasikkhāpadaṃ.

258.Nānubandhe pavattininti: The training rule stated as "whichever bhikkhunī should not attend upon an ordained female mendicant for two years..." (pāci. 1111).

270.Akatanti aññehi amissīkataṃ, niyatasamuṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti.

270.Akatanti: Not mixed up with others; it is said to be of fixed origination.

Antarapeyyālaṃ

Intermediate Sections

Katipucchāvāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Chapter on Questions of "How Many?"

271.Veraṃmaṇatīti rāgādiveraṃ maṇati vināseti.Etāyāti viratiyā.Niyyānanti maggaṃ.Kāyapāgabbiyanti kāyapāgabbiyavasena pavattaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ.

271.Veraṃmaṇatīti: Destroys (maṇati) the enmity of lust, etc. Etāyāti: By this abstaining. Niyyānanti: The path. Kāyapāgabbiyanti: Bodily misconduct occurring because of bodily impudence.

274.Sāraṇīyāti saritabbayuttā anussaraṇārahā addhāne atikkantepi na sammussitabbā. Mijjati siniyhati etāyāti mettā, mittabhāvo. Mettā etassa atthītimettaṃkāyakammaṃ, taṃ pana yasmā mettāsahagatacittasamuṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ‘‘mettacittena kataṃ kāyakamma’’nti.Āvīti pakāsaṃ. Pakāsabhāvo cettha yaṃ uddissa taṃ kāyakammaṃ karīyati, tassa sammukhabhāvatoti āha‘‘sammukhā’’ti.Rahoti apakāsaṃ. Apakāsatā ca yaṃ uddissa taṃ kammaṃ karīyati, tassa apaccakkhabhāvatoti āha‘‘parammukhā’’ti.Ubhayehīti navakehi therehi ca. Piyaṃ piyāyitabbaṃ karotītipiyakaraṇo. Garuṃ garuṭṭhāniyaṃ karotītigarukaraṇo. Saṅgahāyāti saṅgahavatthuvisesabhāvato sabrahmacārīnaṃ saṅgahaṇatthāya.Avivādāyāti saṅgahavatthubhāvato eva na vivādāya. Sati ca avivādahetubhūtasaṅgahakatte tesaṃ vasena sabrahmacārīnaṃ samaggabhāvo bhedābhāvo siddhoyevāti āha‘‘samaggabhāvāyā’’tiādi.

274.Sāraṇīyāti: Worth remembering, worthy of recollection, not to be forgotten even when the road has been traversed. Mettā because it gladdens (mijjati) and loves (siniyhati) by means of it; friendship. Mettaṃkāyakammaṃ because there is mettā for him, that is, bodily action of mettā; but because that arises from a mind associated with mettā, therefore it is said: "bodily action done with a mind of mettā." Āvīti: Openly. Openness here is the state of being face to face of him towards whom that bodily action is done; therefore he said ‘‘sammukhā’’ti. Rahoti: Secretly. And secretness is the state of not being in the presence of him towards whom that action is done; therefore he said ‘‘parammukhā’’ti. Ubhayehīti: By both the new and old Theras. Piyakaraṇo because he makes what is dear, to be made dear. Garukaraṇo because he makes what is worthy of respect, to be respected. Saṅgahāyāti: For the purpose of including fellow-brahmacarīs because of being a special factor of inclusion. Avivādāyāti: Because of being a factor of inclusion, it is just not for quarreling. And when there is an act of inclusion that is the cause of non-dispute, it is indeed established that there is unity and absence of division among the fellow-brahmacarīs by means of that; therefore he said ‘‘samaggabhāvāyā’’tiādi.

Paggayha vacananti kevalaṃ ‘‘devo’’ti avatvā ‘‘devatthero’’ti guṇehi thirabhāvajotanaṃ paggaṇhitvā uccaṃ katvā vacanaṃ. Mamattabodhanavacanaṃmamāyanavacanaṃ. Ekantatirokkhassa manokammassa sammukhatā nāma viññattisamuṭṭhāpanavaseneva hoti, tañca kho loke kāyakammanti pākaṭaṃ paññātaṃ hatthavikārādiṃ anāmasitvāyeva dassento‘‘nayanāni ummīletvā’’tiādimāha. Kāmañcettha mettāsinehasiniddhānaṃ nayanānaṃ ummīlanā pasannena mukhena olokanañca mettaṃ kāyakammameva, yassa pana cittassa vasena nayanānaṃ mettāsinehasiniddhatā mukhassa ca pasannatā, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ‘‘mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāmā’’ti.

Paggayha vacananti: Elevating and making high the word, showing steadfastness by qualities, by not saying merely "a deva," but saying "a deva-thera." A word that makes known "mine" is mamāyanavacanaṃ. The state of being face to face of a mental action that is entirely hidden occurs only by means of the arising of an intimation; and that is indeed known and evident in the world as bodily action, showing it even without touching upon a change of the hand, etc.; therefore he said ‘‘nayanāni ummīletvā’’tiādi. Although here the opening of the eyes of those eyes that are full of mettā and affection, and looking with a serene face is itself bodily action of mettā, with reference to that mind by means of which there is loving kindness and affection of the eyes and serenity of the face, it is said ‘‘mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāmā’’ti.

Imāni (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.141; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.492; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.6.11) ca mettakāyakammādīni pāḷiyaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vasena āgatāni gihīsupi labbhantiyeva. Bhikkhūnañhi mettacittena ācariyupajjhāyavattādiābhisamācārikadhammapūraṇaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Sabbañca anavajjakāyakammaṃ ābhisamācārikakammantogadhamevāti veditabbaṃ. Gihīnaṃ cetiyavandanatthāya bodhivandanatthāya saṅghanimantanatthāya gamanaṃ, gāmaṃ vā piṇḍāya paviṭṭhe bhikkhū disvā paccuggamanaṃ, pattapaṭiggahaṇaṃ, āsanapaññāpanaṃ, anugamananti evamādikaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Bhikkhūnaṃ mettacittena ācārapaññattisikkhāpana kammaṭṭhānakathana dhammadesanā paripucchana aṭṭhakathākathanavasena pavattiyamānaṃ tepiṭakampi buddhavacanaṃ mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Gihīnaṃ ‘‘cetiyavandanatthāya gacchāma, bodhivandanatthāya gacchāma, dhammassavanaṃ karissāma, dīpamālāpupphapūjaṃ karissāma, tīṇi sucaritāni samādāya vattissāma, salākabhattādīni dassāma, vassāvāsikaṃ dassāma, ajja saṅghassa cattāro paccaye dassāma, saṅghaṃ nimantetvā khādanīyādīni saṃvidahatha, āsanāni paññapetha, pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetha, saṅghaṃ paccuggantvā ānetha, paññattāsane nisīdāpetha, chandajātā ussāhajātā veyyāvaccaṃ karothā’’tiādikathanakāle mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Bhikkhūnaṃ pātova uṭṭhāya sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇavattādīni ca katvā vivittāsane nisīditvā ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre bhikkhū sukhī hontu averā abyāpajjā’’ti cintanaṃ mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma. Gihīnaṃ ‘‘ayyā sukhī hontu averā abyāpajjā’’ti cintanaṃ mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma.

These bodily actions of mettā, etc. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.141; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.492; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.6.11) that occur in the Pāḷi with reference to bhikkhus, are indeed obtainable even for laypeople. For bhikkhus, the fulfilling of the observances towards their teachers and preceptors, etc., and the practices in accordance with good conduct, with a mind of mettā, is called bodily action of mettā. And all faultless bodily action should be known as included within the conduct in accordance with good behavior. For laypeople, going for the purpose of venerating a cetiya, for the purpose of venerating the Bodhi tree, for the purpose of inviting the Saṅgha; seeing bhikkhus who have entered a village for alms, going out to meet them, receiving their bowls, offering seats, and following after them is called bodily action of mettā. For bhikkhus, that which is occurring with a mind of mettā as instruction in the rules of conduct, telling about a meditation subject, teaching the Dhamma, questioning, telling a commentary, that entire collection of the Buddha's word of the three Piṭakas is called verbal action of mettā. For laypeople, at the time of saying "we will go for the purpose of venerating a cetiya, we will go for the purpose of venerating the Bodhi tree, we will listen to the Dhamma, we will make offerings of lamps and flowers, we will live taking up the three kinds of good conduct, we will give ticket-food, etc., we will give the rains-residence, today we will give the four requisites to the Saṅgha, invite the Saṅgha and prepare food, set out seats, offer drinking water, go out to meet the Saṅgha and bring them, seat them on prepared seats, those who are desirous and keen should do the work," etc., it is called verbal action of mettā. For bhikkhus, in the early morning, having risen up, and having done the attending to the body and the cetiya-compound observances, etc., and having sat down in a secluded seat, thinking "may the bhikkhus in this monastery be happy, without enmity, without affliction" is called mental action of mettā. For laypeople, thinking "may the noble ones be happy, without enmity, without affliction" is called mental action of mettā.

Lābhāti cīvarādayo laddhapaccayā.Dhammikāti kuhanādibhedaṃ micchājīvaṃ vajjetvā dhammena samena bhikkhācariyavattena uppannā.Antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampīti pacchimakoṭiyā patte pariyāpannaṃ pattassa antogataṃ dvattikaṭacchubhikkhāmattampi. Deyyaṃ dakkhiṇeyyañca appaṭivibhattaṃ katvā bhuñjatītiappaṭivibhattabhogī. Ettha hi dve paṭivibhattāni nāma āmisapaṭivibhattaṃ puggalapaṭivibhattañca. Tattha ‘‘ettakaṃ dassāmi, ettakaṃ na dassāmī’’ti evaṃ cittena vibhajanaṃāmisapaṭivibhattaṃnāma. ‘‘Asukassa dassāmi, asukassa na dassāmī’’ti evaṃ cittena vibhajanaṃ panapuggalapaṭivibhattaṃnāma. Tadubhayampi akatvā yo appaṭivibhattaṃ bhuñjati, ayaṃappaṭivibhattabhogīnāma. Tenāha‘‘neva āmisaṃ paṭivibhajitvā bhuñjatī’’tiādi.Adātumpītipi-saddena dātumpi vaṭṭatīti dasseti. Dānañhi nāma na kassaci nivāritaṃ, tena dussīlassapi atthikassa sati sambhave dātabbaṃ, tañca kho karuṇāyanavasena, na vattapūraṇavasena. Sāraṇīyadhammapūrakassa appaṭivibhattabhogitāya‘‘sabbesaṃ dātabbamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Gilānādīnaṃ pana odissakaṃ katvā dānaṃ appaṭivibhāgapakkhikaṃ ‘‘asukassa na dassāmī’’ti paṭikkhepassa abhāvato. Byatirekappadhāno hi paṭivibhāgo. Tenāha‘‘gilānagilānupaṭṭhāka…pe… viceyya dātumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti.

Lābhāti: Requisites obtained, such as robes. Dhammikāti: Produced by means of Dhamma, by fairness, by the alms-mendicant life, avoiding wrong livelihood in its distinction as hypocrisy, etc. Antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampīti: Even as little as what is contained in the bowl in the final portion, what is contained within the bowl, just two or three spoonfuls of alms. Deyyaṃ dakkhiṇeyyañca appaṭivibhattaṃ katvā bhuñjatīti: He eats making what should be given and what is worthy of offerings undivided. Here there are two kinds of division, division of material things and division of persons. Therein, dividing with the thought, "I will give this much, I will not give this much" is called division of material things. But dividing with the thought, "I will give to this one, I will not give to that one" is called division of persons. He who eats without doing either of those is called one who eats without dividing. Therefore, he said ‘‘neva āmisaṃ paṭivibhajitvā bhuñjatī’’tiādi. Adātumpīti: The particle pi shows that it is also proper to give. Giving is indeed not prevented for anyone; therefore, when there is possibility, one should give even to an indigent person who is immoral; and that should be by way of compassion, not by way of fulfilling a duty. Because of being a fulfiller of dhammas that should be remembered, and one who eats without dividing, it is said ‘‘sabbesaṃ dātabbamevā’’ti: It is indeed proper to give to all. But giving making an allocation for the sick, etc., is on the side of not dividing because of the absence of rejection of "I will not give to this one." For division is primarily distinctive. Therefore, he said ‘‘gilānagilānupaṭṭhāka…pe… viceyya dātumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti.

Sādhāraṇabhogīti ettha sādhāraṇabhogino idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ – yaṃ yaṃ paṇītaṃ labhati, taṃ taṃ neva lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanamukhena gihīnaṃ deti attano ājīvasuddhiṃ rakkhamāno, na attanāva paribhuñjati ‘‘mayhaṃ asādhāraṇabhogitā mā hotū’’ti. Taṃ paṭiggaṇhanto ca ‘‘saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotū’’ti gahetvā ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ saṅghasantakaṃ viya passati. Iminā ca tassa lābhassa tīsupi kālesu sādhāraṇato ṭhapanaṃ dassitaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ paṭiggaṇhanto ca saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotū’’ti iminā paṭiggahaṇakālo dassito, ‘‘gahetvā…pe… passatī’’ti iminā paṭiggahitakālo. Tadubhayaṃ pana tādisena pubbabhāgena vinā na hotīti atthasiddho purimakālo. Tayidampi paṭiggahaṇato pubbevassa hoti ‘‘saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotūti paṭiggahessāmī’’ti, paṭiggaṇhantassa hoti ‘‘saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotūti paṭiggaṇhāmī’’ti, paṭiggahetvā hoti ‘‘saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotūti paṭiggahitaṃ mayā’’ti evaṃ tilakkhaṇasampannaṃ katvā laddhalābhaṃ osānalakkhaṇaṃ avikopetvā paribhuñjanto sādhāraṇabhogī appaṭivibhattabhogī ca hoti.

Sādhāraṇabhogīti: Here, this is the characteristic of one who shares in common: whatever excellent thing he obtains, he gives that to the laypeople, not in order to surpass the gain by means of the gain, maintaining the purity of his livelihood, not consuming it only for himself, with the thought "may there not be a state of not sharing in common for me." And while receiving that, he should take it saying, "may it be in common with the Saṅgha," and having struck the gong, he sees it as belonging to the Saṅgha, to be consumed. And by this, the establishing of that gain as common in the three times is shown. By "and while receiving that, may it be in common with the Saṅgha," the time of receiving is shown; by "having taken... he sees," the time of having received it is shown. But both of those do not occur without such a preliminary stage; therefore the previous time is established by implication. And also before the receiving, he has, "I will receive saying, 'may it be in common with the Saṅgha'," while receiving, he has, "I receive saying, 'may it be in common with the Saṅgha'," having received, he has, "it was received by me saying, 'may it be in common with the Saṅgha'," thus consuming the gain obtained, making it endowed with three characteristics, not destroying the concluding characteristic, he is one who shares in common and one who eats without dividing.

Imaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.141; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.492; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.6.11) pana sāraṇīyadhammaṃ ko pūreti, ko na pūreti? Dussīlo tāva na pūreti. Na hi tassa santakaṃ sīlavanto gaṇhanti. Parisuddhasīlo pana vattaṃ akhaṇḍento pūreti. Tatridaṃ vattaṃ – yo odissakaṃ katvā mātu vā pitu vā ācariyupajjhāyādīnaṃ vā deti, so dātabbaṃ detu, sāraṇīyadhammo panassa na hoti, palibodhajagganaṃ nāma hoti. Sāraṇīyadhammo hi muttapalibodhasseva vaṭṭati. Tena pana odissakaṃ dentena gilānagilānupaṭṭhākaāgantukagamikānañceva navapabbajitassa ca saṅghāṭipattaggahaṇaṃ ajānantassa dātabbaṃ. Etesaṃ datvā avasesaṃ therāsanato paṭṭhāya thokaṃ thokaṃ adatvā yo yattakaṃ gaṇhāti, tassa tattakaṃ dātabbaṃ. Avasiṭṭhe asati puna piṇḍāya caritvā therāsanato paṭṭhāya yaṃ yaṃ paṇītaṃ, taṃ taṃ datvā sesaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ.

Now, who fulfills this sāranīyadhamma, and who does not? A person of poor virtue certainly does not fulfill it, for virtuous people do not accept what belongs to such a person. However, one with pure virtue fulfills it, without breaking the practice. Herein lies the practice: One who allocates (something) and gives it to mother, father, or preceptor-teacher, etc., let him give what is to be given, but for him, it is not sāranīyadhamma; it becomes known as encumbrance-arousing. For sāranīyadhamma is suitable only for one free of encumbrance. However, a person who gives by allocation should give to the sick, those attending to the sick, newcomers, travelers, and to a newly ordained monk who does not know how to receive a robe or bowl. Having given to these, whatever remains, without giving it little by little starting from the seat of the elders, whoever takes as much as he takes, that much should be given to him. If nothing remains, then after going for alms again, whatever is excellent, starting from the seat of the elders, having given that, one may partake of the remainder.

Ayaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammo sāraṇīyadhammapūraṇavidhimhi susikkhitāya parisāya supūro hoti. Susikkhitāya hi parisāya yo aññato labhati, so na gaṇhāti. Aññato alabhantopi pamāṇayuttameva gaṇhāti, na atirekaṃ. Ayañca pana sāraṇīyadhammo evaṃ punappunaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā laddhaṃ laddhaṃ dentassapi dvādasahi vassehi pūrati, na tato oraṃ. Sace hi dvādasamepi vasse sāraṇīyadhammapūrako piṇḍapātapūraṃ pattaṃ āsanasālāyaṃ ṭhapetvā nahāyituṃ gacchati, saṅghatthero ca ‘‘kasseso patto’’ti vatvā ‘‘sāraṇīyadhammapūrakassā’’ti vutte ‘‘āharatha na’’nti sabbaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ vicāretvā bhuñjitvāva rittapattaṃ ṭhapeti. Atha so bhikkhu rittapattaṃ disvā ‘‘mayhaṃ anavasesetvāva paribhuñjiṃsū’’ti domanassaṃ uppādeti, sāraṇīyadhammo bhijjati, puna dvādasa vassāni pūretabbo hoti. Titthiyaparivāsasadiso hesa, sakiṃ khaṇḍe jāte puna pūretabbova. Yo pana ‘‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṃ vata me, yassa me pattagataṃ anāpucchāva sabrahmacārino paribhuñjantī’’ti somanassaṃ janeti, tassa puṇṇo nāma hoti.

However, this sāranīyadhamma is fully fulfilled by an assembly well-trained in the method of fulfilling the sāranīyadhamma. For in an assembly well-trained, one who obtains from elsewhere does not accept it. Even one who does not obtain from elsewhere accepts only what is appropriate, not excessively. And this sāranīyadhamma, even for one who repeatedly goes for alms in this way and gives whatever he obtains, is fulfilled in twelve years, not less than that. If, even in the twelfth year, the one who fulfills the sāranīyadhamma, having placed a bowl full of alms food in the assembly hall, goes to bathe, and the elder monk says, "Whose bowl is this?" and when it is said, "It belongs to the one who fulfills the sāranīyadhamma," (the elder) says, "Bring it here," and having examined all the alms food, eats it and then places the empty bowl (back). Then that bhikkhu, seeing the empty bowl, generates displeasure, thinking, "They partook of it without leaving anything for me," the sāranīyadhamma is broken, and it must be fulfilled again for twelve years. This is similar to the probationary period for non-Buddhists; once a break occurs, it must be fulfilled again. But for one who generates joy, thinking, "It is a gain for me, a great gain for me, that my fellow monks partake of what is in my bowl without asking," then it is said to be fulfilled.

Evaṃ pūritasāraṇīyadhammassa pana neva issā, na macchariyaṃ hoti, manussānaṃ piyo hoti sulabhapaccayo, pattagatamassa diyyamānampi na khīyati, bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ labhati, bhaye vā chātake vā sampatte devatā ussukkaṃ āpajjanti.

For one whose sāranīyadhamma is thus fulfilled, there is neither envy nor stinginess; he is dear to people, and his requisites are easily obtained. Even if what is in his bowl is being given away, it does not diminish. In the place of shareable goods, he obtains the best goods. When fear or hunger arises, the deities become zealous.

pattagataṃ na khīyatīti ettha vatthu.

Regarding pattagataṃ na khīyati (what is in the bowl does not diminish), there is a story.

bhājanīyaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ pāpuṇātīti ettha vatthu.

Regarding bhājanīyaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ pāpuṇāti (he obtains the best goods in the place of shareable goods), there is a story.

Caṇḍālatissabhayena pana bhātaragāmavāsino nāgattheriyā anārocetvāva palāyiṃsu. Therī paccūsasamaye ‘‘ati viya appanigghoso gāmo, upadhāretha tāvā’’ti daharabhikkhuniyo āha. Tā gantvā sabbesaṃ gatabhāvaṃ ñatvā āgamma theriyā ārocesuṃ. Sā sutvā ‘‘mā tumhe tesaṃ gatabhāvaṃ cintayittha, attano uddesaparipucchāyonisomanasikāresuyeva yogaṃ karothā’’ti vatvā bhikkhācāravelāyaṃ pārupitvā attadvādasamā gāmadvāre nigrodhamūle aṭṭhāsi. Rukkhe adhivatthā devatā dvādasannampi bhikkhunīnaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ datvā ‘‘ayye aññattha mā gacchatha, niccaṃ idheva ethā’’ti āha. Theriyā pana kaniṭṭhabhātā nāgatthero nāma atthi, so ‘‘mahantaṃ bhayaṃ, na sakkā yāpetuṃ, paratīraṃ gamissāmī’’ti attadvādasamo attano vasanaṭṭhānā nikkhanto ‘‘theriṃ disvā gamissāmī’’ti bhātaragāmaṃ āgato. Therī ‘‘therā āgatā’’ti sutvā tesaṃ santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘kiṃ ayyā’’ti pucchi. So taṃ pavattiṃ ācikkhi. Sā ‘‘ajja ekadivasaṃ vihāre vasitvā sveva gamissathā’’ti āha. Therā vihāraṃ āgamaṃsu.

Fearing Caṇḍālatissa, the residents of Bhātaragāma fled without informing the Theri. At dawn, the Theri said to the young bhikkhunis, "The village is unusually quiet; investigate." They went and, having learned that everyone had left, returned and informed the Theri. Hearing this, she said, "Do not dwell on their departure; apply yourselves only to recitation, inquiry, and wise attention." Then, at the time for seeking alms, having robed, as the twelfth, she stood at the village gate at the foot of a banyan tree. The deity dwelling in the tree, having given alms food to all twelve bhikkhunis, said, "Venerables, do not go elsewhere; come here regularly." Now, the younger brother of the Theri was named Nāgatthera; thinking, "There is great danger; it is not possible to live here; I will go to the other shore," as the twelfth, having left his dwelling place, he came to Bhātaragāma, thinking, "I will go after seeing the Theri." The Theri, hearing "The Theras have come," went to them and asked, "What is it, Venerables?" He told her the situation. She said, "Stay in the monastery for one day today, and leave tomorrow." The Theras came to the monastery.

devatā ussukkaṃ āpajjantīti ettha vatthu. Tatra hi therī sāraṇīyadhammapūrikā ahosi.

Regarding devatā ussukkaṃ āpajjanti (the deities become zealous), there is a story. There, the Theri was a fulfiller of sāranīyadhamma.

akhaṇḍāni,taṃ pana nesaṃ khaṇḍaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘yassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha upasampannasīlānaṃ uddesakkamena ādiantā veditabbā. Tenāha‘‘sattasū’’tiādi. Anupasampannasīlānaṃ pana samādānakkamenapi ādiantā labbhanti.Pariyante chinnasāṭako viyāti vatthante dasante vā chinnavatthaṃ viya. Visadisudāharaṇañcetaṃ ‘‘akhaṇḍānī’’ti imassa adhikatattā. Evaṃ sesānipi udāharaṇāni.Khaṇḍanti khaṇḍavantaṃ, khaṇḍitaṃ vā.Chiddantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Visabhāgavaṇṇena gāvī viyāti sambandho. Visabhāgavaṇṇena upaḍḍhaṃ tatiyabhāgaṃ vā sambhinnavaṇṇaṃsabalaṃ,visabhāgavaṇṇeheva pana bindūhi antarantarā vimissaṃkammāsaṃ. Ayaṃ imesaṃ viseso.

Akhaṇḍāni (unbroken); however, to show a break in them, "yassā (whose)" etc., was said. There, for those with the sīla of full ordination, the beginning and end should be understood in terms of the order of recitation. Therefore, he said, "sattasū (in the seven)" etc. However, for those without the sīla of full ordination, the beginning and end can also be obtained in terms of the order of undertaking. Pariyante chinnasāṭako viyā (like a torn cloth at the end) means like a torn cloth, shown at the end of a story or while pointing something out. And this is a dissimilar example, because of the excess in this "akhaṇḍānī (unbroken)." The remaining examples (should be understood) in the same way. Khaṇḍa (broken) means having a break, or broken. In chidda (split) etc. also, this is the way. Visabhāgavaṇṇena gāvī viyā (like a cow with a different color) is the connection. Visabhāgavaṇṇena (with a different color), half or a third part, or mixed color is sabala (spotted), however, vimissaṃ (interspersed) with dots with different colors in between is kammāsaṃ (mottled). This is the difference between them.

Bhujissabhāvakaraṇatoti taṇhādāsabyato mocetvā bhujissabhāvakaraṇato. Sīlassa ca taṇhādāsabyato mocanaṃ vivaṭṭūpanissayabhāvāpādanaṃ, tenassa vivaṭṭūpanissayatā dassitā. ‘‘Bhujissabhāvakaraṇato’’ti ca iminā bhujissakarānibhujissānīti uttarapadalopenāyaṃ niddesoti dasseti. Yasmā ca taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo serī sayaṃvasī bhujisso nāma hoti, tasmāpi bhujissāni. Suparisuddhabhāvena pāsaṃsattāviññupasatthāni. Aviññūnaṃ pasaṃsāya appamāṇabhāvato viññūgahaṇaṃ kataṃ.Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattāti ‘‘imināhaṃ sīlena devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’’ti taṇhāparāmāsena ‘‘imināhaṃ sīlena devo hutvā tattha nicco dhuvo sassato bhavissāmī’’ti diṭṭhiparāmāsena ca aparāmaṭṭhattā. Atha vā ‘‘ayaṃ te sīlesu dāso’’ti catūsu vipattīsu yaṃ vā taṃ vā vipattiṃ dassetvā ‘‘imaṃ nāma tvaṃ āpannapubbo’’ti kenaci parāmaṭṭhuṃ anuddhaṃsetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattāaparāmaṭṭhānīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Sīlaṃ nāma avippaṭisārādipārampariyena yāvadeva samādhisampādanatthanti āha‘‘samādhisaṃvattanikānī’’ti. Samādhisaṃvattanappayojanānisamādhisaṃvattanikāni.

Bhujissabhāvakaraṇato (because of making free) means because of freeing from the servitude of taṇhā and making free. And the freeing of sīla from the servitude of taṇhā is the producing of the state of being a condition for the abandoning (of suffering), therefore, its state of being a condition for abandoning has been shown. And by this, "bhujissabhāvakaraṇato (because of making free)," he shows that this designation is with the elision of the latter word (in a compound) bhujissāni (things that make free) from bhujissakarāni (making free). And since a person endowed with that (sīla) is called serī (independent), sayaṃvasī (self-controlled), bhujisso (free), therefore (they are) also bhujissāni (making free). Because of being praised by those of very pure nature, viññupasatthāni (praised by the wise). Because of the immeasurable nature of the praise of the unwise, the taking of the wise was done. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattā (because of not being touched by craving and wrong view) means because of not being touched by the craving of "by this sīla, I will become a deva or a particular deva," and by the wrong view of "by this sīla, having become a deva, I will be permanent, lasting, and eternal there." Or alternatively, "this one is a slave to your sīla," showing one or another of the four misfortunes, "you formerly fell into this," because of not being able to refute when touched by someone, aparāmaṭṭhānī (untouchable); thus, the meaning should be seen here. Sīla is for the sake of accomplishing samādhi, through the sequence of freedom from remorse etc.; therefore, he says "samādhisaṃvattanikānī (conducive to samādhi)." Samādhisaṃvattanappayojanāni (having the purpose of conducing to samādhi) are samādhisaṃvattanikāni (conducive to samādhi).

sīlasāmaññagato. Tenāha‘‘samānabhāvūpagatasīlo’’ti, sīlasampattiyā samānabhāvaṃ upagatasīlo sabhāgavuttikoti attho. Sotāpannādīnañhi sīlaṃ samuddantarepi devalokepi vasantānaṃ aññesaṃ sotāpannādīnaṃ sīlena samānameva hoti, natthi maggasīle nānattaṃ. Kāmañhi puthujjanānampi catupārisuddhisīle nānattaṃ na siyā, taṃ pana na ekantikanti idha nādhippetaṃ, maggasīlaṃ pana ekantikaṃ niyatabhāvatoti tameva sandhāya‘‘yāni tāni sīlānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.

sīlasāmaññagato (gone to the same kind of sīla). Therefore, he says "samānabhāvūpagatasīlo (one whose sīla has gone to the same state)," the meaning is, one whose sīla has gone to the same state by way of sīla-accomplishment, having the same mode of life. For the sīla of stream-enterers etc. is the same as the sīla of other stream-enterers etc. dwelling in the ocean or in the deva-world; there is no difference in the sīla of the path. Admittedly, there might be no difference in the fourfold purified sīla even for ordinary people, but that is not definitive, therefore it is not intended here. However, the sīla of the path is definitive and of a fixed nature, therefore, referring only to that, "yāni tāni sīlānī (whatever those sīlas are)" etc. was said.

Yāyanti yā ayaṃ mayhañceva tumhākañca paccakkhabhūtā.Diṭṭhīti maggasammādiṭṭhi.Niddosāti niddhutadosā, samucchinnarāgādipāpadhammāti attho.Niyyātīti vaṭṭadukkhato nissarati nigacchati. Sayaṃ niyantīyeva hi taṃmaggasamaṅgīpuggalaṃ vaṭṭadukkhato niyyāpetīti vuccati. Yā satthu anusiṭṭhi, taṃ karotītitakkaro,tassa, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjanakassāti attho.Diṭṭhisāmaññagatoti saccasampaṭivedhena samānadiṭṭhibhāvaṃ upagato.

Yāya (by which) means by which that, which is evident to both me and you. Diṭṭhī (view) means the path's sammādiṭṭhi (right view). Niddosā (faultless) means having removed faults, having eradicated evil qualities such as rāga (lust) etc.; that is the meaning. Niyyātī (leads out) means exits, goes out from the suffering of the round (of rebirths). For it is said (that the view) itself, leading, leads the person endowed with that path out from the suffering of the round (of rebirths). One who does the instruction of the Teacher, is takkaro (doing that); the meaning is, of one who practices according to the instruction. Diṭṭhisāmaññagato (gone to the same kind of view) means one who has gone to the state of having the same view through understanding the truth.

Katipucchāvāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Section on Questions and Answers is Finished.

Chaāpattisamuṭṭhānavārakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on the Discourse on the Origins of Offenses

276.Paṭhamena āpattisamuṭṭhānenātiādi sabbaṃ uddesaniddesādivasena pavattapāḷiṃ anusāreneva sakkā viññātuṃ.

276.Paṭhamena āpattisamuṭṭhānenā (by the first origin of offenses) etc., all can be understood according to the established Pali (text) by way of enumeration and definition etc.

Samathabhedaṃ

Summary of Samatha

Adhikaraṇapariyāyavārakathāvaṇṇanā

293.Lobhopubbaṅgamotiādīsu pana lobhahetu vivadanato ‘‘lobho pubbaṅgamo’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi.Ṭhānānīti kāraṇāni. Tiṭṭhanti etthātiṭhānaṃ. Ke tiṭṭhanti? Vivādādhikaraṇādayo. Vasanti etthātivatthu. Bhavanti etthātibhūmi. Kusalākusalābyākatacittasamaṅgino vivadanato‘‘nava hetū’’ti vuttaṃ.Dvādasa mūlānīti ‘‘kodhano hoti upanāhī’’tiādīni dvādasa mūlāni.

293.But in Lobho pubbaṅgamo (greed is the forerunner) etc., because of arguing due to greed, it was said, "greed is the forerunner." Likewise in the rest also. Ṭhānānī (grounds) means causes. Tiṭṭhanti etthāti (they stand in this), ṭhānaṃ (ground). Who stands in this? Disputes, legal questions etc. Vasanti etthāti (they dwell in this), vatthu (basis). Bhavanti etthāti (they arise in this), bhūmi (place). Because of those associated with kusala (wholesome), akusala (unwholesome), and abyākata (undeclared) cittas (mind-states) disputing, "nava hetū (nine causes)" was said. Dvādasa mūlānī (twelve roots) means the twelve roots, "is angry, bears grudges" etc.

294-295.Imāneva dvādasa kāyavācāhi saddhiṃ‘‘cuddasa mūlānī’’ti vuttāni.Satta āpattikkhandhā ṭhānānīti ettha āpattiṃ āpajjitvā paṭicchādentassa yā āpatti, tassā pubbe āpannā āpattiyo ṭhānānīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti vacanato āpattādhikaraṇe akusalābyākatavasena cha hetū vuttā. Kusalacittaṃ pana aṅgaṃ hoti, na hetu.

294-295.These same twelve, together with body and speech, are said as "cuddasa mūlānī (fourteen roots)." In Satta āpattikkhandhā ṭhānānī (the seven aggregates of offenses are grounds), here, for one who commits an offense and conceals it, the offenses previously committed by him are to be understood as grounds. Because of the statement "there is no legal question of offenses that is kusala (wholesome)," six causes have been said as akusala (unwholesome) and abyākata (undeclared) in a legal question of offenses. However, a kusala (wholesome) citta (mind-state) is a part, not a cause.

296.Cattāri kammāni ṭhānānīti ettha ‘‘evaṃ kattabba’’nti itikattabbatādassanavasena pavattapāḷikammaṃnāma, yathāṭhitapāḷivasena karontānaṃ kiriyākiccādhikaraṇaṃnāma. Ñattiñattidutiyañatticatutthakammāni ñattito jāyanti, apalokanakammaṃ apalokanatovāti āha‘‘ñattito vā apalokanato vā’’ti. Kiccādhikaraṇaṃ ekena samathenasammati,sampajjatīti attho. Tehi sametabbattā ‘‘vivādādhikaraṇassa sādhāraṇā’’ti vuttaṃ.

296.In Cattāri kammāni ṭhānānī (the four acts are grounds) here, the established Pali (text) in terms of showing what should be done, in the manner "it should be done thus," is called kamma (act), the action of those doing according to the established Pali (text) is called kiccādhikaraṇaṃ (matter of business). The ñattidutiyakamma (motion), ñattidutiyakamma (motion with a second), and ñatticatutthakamma (motion with a fourth) arise from the ñatti (motion), and the apalokanakamma (act of approval) from the apalokanato (act of approval); therefore, he says "ñattito vā apalokanato vā (from the motion or from the act of approval)." The matter of business is sammati (agreed upon) by one samatha (means of settling disputes), the meaning is, is completed. Because it is to be completed by those, it was said "common to disputes."

Tabbhāgiyavārakathāvaṇṇanā

298.Vivādādhikaraṇassa tabbhāgiyāti vivādādhikaraṇassa vūpasamato tappakkhikā.

298.Vivādādhikaraṇassa tabbhāgiyā (related to disputes) means on the side of, in the matter of settling disputes.

Samathā samathassa sādhāraṇavārakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on the Discourse on Samatha Common to Samatha

299.Ekaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ sabbe samathā ekato hutvā sametuṃ sakkonti na sakkontīti pucchanto‘‘samathā samathassa sādhāraṇā, samathāsamathassa asādhāraṇā’’ti āha. Yebhuyyasikāya samanaṃ sammukhāvinayaṃ vinā na hotīti āha‘‘yebhuyyasikā sammukhāvinayassa sādhāraṇā’’ti. Sativinayādīhi samanassa yebhuyyasikāya kiccaṃ natthīti āha‘‘sativinayassa…pe… asādhāraṇā’’ti. Evaṃ sesesupi. Tabbhāgiyavārepi eseva nayo.

299.Asking whether one legal question can be settled by all the samathas (means of settling disputes) becoming one or not, he says "samathā samathassa sādhāraṇā, samathā samathassa asādhāraṇā (samatha is common to samatha, samatha is not common to samatha)." Because settlement by yebhuyyasikā (majority vote) does not occur without sammukhāvinayaṃ (procedure in the presence of), he says "yebhuyyasikā sammukhāvinayassa sādhāraṇā (majority vote is common to the procedure in the presence of)." Because there is no business for yebhuyyasikā (majority vote) in settlement by sativinaya (declaration of innocence) etc., he says "sativinayassa…pe… asādhāraṇā (for declaration of innocence… it is not common)." Likewise in the rest also. This is the way in the section on related matters also.

Vinayavārakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on the Discourse on Vinaya

302.Sabbesampi samathānaṃ vinayapariyāyo labbhatīti‘‘vinayo sammukhāvinayo’’tiādinā vinayavāro uddhaṭo.Siyā na sammukhāvinayoti ettha sammukhāvinayaṃ ṭhapetvā sativinayādayo sesasamathā adhippetā. Esa nayo sesesupi.

302.Because the vinayapariyāyo (mode of discipline) can be obtained by all the samathas (means of settling disputes), the vinayavāro (section on discipline) was extracted with "vinayo sammukhāvinayo (discipline is the procedure in the presence of)" etc. In Siyā na sammukhāvinayo (there may not be procedure in the presence of), here, setting aside sammukhāvinayaṃ (procedure in the presence of), the remaining samathas (means of settling disputes) such as sativinaya (declaration of innocence) etc. are intended. This is the way in the rest also.

Kusalavārakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on the Discourse on Kusala

303.Saṅghassa sammukhā paṭiññāte taṃ paṭijānanaṃ saṅghasammukhatā nāma. Tassa paṭijānanacittaṃ sandhāya‘‘sammukhāvinayo kusalo’’tiādi vuttanti vadanti.Natthi sammukhāvinayo akusaloti dhammavinayapuggalasammukhatāhi tivaṅgiko sammukhāvinayo etehi vinā natthi. Tattha kusalacittehi karaṇakāle kusalo, arahantehi karaṇakāle abyākato. Etesaṃ saṅghasammukhatādīnaṃ akusalapaṭipakkhattā akusalassa sambhavo natthi, tasmā ‘‘natthi sammukhāvinayo akusalo’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yebhuyyasikā adhammavādīhi vūpasamanakāle, dhammavādīnampi adhammavādimhi salākaggāhāpake jāte akusalā. Sativinayo anarahato sañcicca sativinayadāne akusalo. Amūḷhavinayo anummattakassa dāne, paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ mūḷhassa ajānato paṭiññāya karaṇe, tassapāpiyasikā suddhassa karaṇe, tiṇavatthārakaṃ mahākalahe sañcicca karaṇe ca akusalaṃ. Sabbattha arahato vaseneva abyākata’’nti sabbametaṃgaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.

303.In the case of something acknowledged in the presence of the Saṅgha, that acknowledgement is called Saṅghasammukhatā (presence of the Saṅgha). Saying "sammukhāvinayo kusalo (procedure in the presence of is wholesome)" etc. in reference to the citta (mind-state) of that acknowledgement, so they say. Natthi sammukhāvinayo akusalo (there is no procedure in the presence of that is unwholesome), the threefold sammukhāvinayo (procedure in the presence of) (consisting of) dhammavinayapuggalasammukhatā (presence of the Dhamma, the Vinaya, and the individual) does not exist without these. There, it is kusala (wholesome) at the time of doing with kusala (wholesome) cittas (mind-states), and abyākata (undeclared) at the time of doing by arahants. Because these Saṅghasammukhatādīnaṃ (presence of the Saṅgha etc.) are opposed to the akusala (unwholesome), there is no possibility of the akusala (unwholesome); therefore, it was said "natthi sammukhāvinayo akusalo (there is no procedure in the presence of that is unwholesome)." "The yebhuyyasikā (majority vote) is akusala (unwholesome) at the time of settling (a dispute) with those who speak against the Dhamma, and when those who speak for the Dhamma take ballots against those who speak against the Dhamma. The sativinayo (declaration of innocence) is akusala (unwholesome) when intentionally giving the declaration of innocence by one who is not an arahant. The amūḷhavinayo (declaration of past insanity) is akusala (unwholesome) in giving to one who is insane; the paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ (acknowledgement of the offense) is akusala (unwholesome) in the case of one who is deluded acknowledging without knowing; the tassapāpiyasikā (further punishment) is akusala (unwholesome) in the case of one who is pure; and the tiṇavatthārakaṃ (covering over with grass) is akusala (unwholesome) in the case of intentionally doing in a great quarrel. Everywhere, it is abyākata (undeclared) only in the case of an arahant," all of this was said in the Gaṇṭhipadas.

Samathavāravissajjanāvārakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on the Discourse on the Samathavāravissajjanā

304-305.Yattha yebhuyyasikā labbhati, tattha sammukhāvinayo labbhatītiādi pucchā.Yasmiṃsamaye sammukhāvinayena cātiādi tassā vissajjanaṃ, yasmiṃ samaye sammukhāvinayena ca yebhuyyasikāya ca adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasammati, tasmiṃ samaye yattha yebhuyyasikā labbhati, tattha sammukhāvinayo labbhatīti evaṃ sabbattha sambandho.Yattha paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ labbhati, tattha sammukhāvinayo labbhatīti ettha ekaṃ vā dve vā bahū vā bhikkhū ‘‘imaṃ nāma āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti pucchite sati ‘‘āmā’’ti paṭijānane dvepi paṭiññātakaraṇasammukhāvinayā labbhanti. Tattha ‘‘saṅghasammukhatā dhammavinayapuggalasammukhatā’’ti evaṃ vuttasammukhāvinaye saṅghassa purato paṭiññātaṃ ce, saṅghasammukhatā. Tattheva desitaṃ ce, dhammavinayasammukhatāyopi laddhā honti. Atha vivadantā aññamaññaṃ paṭijānanti ce, puggalasammukhatā. Tasseva santike desitaṃ ce, dhammavinayasammukhatāyopi laddhā honti. Ekasseva vā ekassa santike āpattidesanakāle ‘‘passasi, passāmī’’ti vutte tattha dhammavinayapuggalasammukhatāsaññito sammukhāvinayo ca paṭiññātakaraṇañca laddhaṃ hoti.

304-305.Where the majority opinion is obtained, there the presence-Vinaya is obtained—such is the question. At whatever time, both the presence-Vinaya...—such is the answer to that. At whatever time, through both the presence-Vinaya and the majority opinion, a dispute is settled, at that time, where the majority opinion is obtained, there the presence-Vinaya is obtained; thus, the connection should be made everywhere. Where the acknowledgement-procedure is obtained, there the presence-Vinaya is obtained—here, if one, two, or many monks, when asked, "You have committed such and such an offense," acknowledge, saying "Yes," then both the acknowledgement-procedure and the presence-Vinaya are obtained. There, in the presence-Vinaya stated as "presence of the Sangha, presence of the Dhamma, presence of the Vinaya, presence of the individual," if it is acknowledged in front of the Sangha, there is presence of the Sangha. If it is confessed there, there is also attainment of presence of the Dhamma and Vinaya. But if, while disputing, they acknowledge to each other, there is presence of the individual. If it is confessed in his presence, there is also attainment of presence of the Dhamma and Vinaya. Or, at the time of confessing an offense to a single individual, when it is said, "Do you see?", "I see," there, the presence-Vinaya, known as presence of the Dhamma, Vinaya, and individual, and the acknowledgement-procedure are obtained.

Saṃsaṭṭhavārakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Intermingled-Section

306.Adhikaraṇānaṃ vūpasamovasamathonāma, tasmā adhikaraṇena vinā samathā natthīti āha‘‘mā hevantissa vacanīyo…pe… vinibbhujitvā nānākaraṇaṃ paññāpetu’’nti.

306.The settling of disputes is itself called appeasement (samatha); therefore, he says that there is no appeasement without a dispute: "He should not be told 'go away'... to declare a separate act after thorough investigation."

Samathādhikaraṇavārakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Appeasement-Dispute-Section

309-310.Samathā samathehi sammantītiādi pucchā.Siyā samathā samathehi sammantītiādi vissajjanaṃ. Tatthasamathā samathehi sammantīti etthasammantīti sampajjanti, adhikaraṇā vā pana sammanti vūpasamaṃ gacchanti, tasmāyebhuyyasikā sammukhāvinayena sammatīti ettha sammukhāvinayena saddhiṃ yebhuyyasikā sampajjati, na sativinayādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ tassā anupakārattāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.

309-310.Do appeasements accord with appeasements?—such is the question. Appeasements might accord with appeasements—such is the answer. There, in appeasements accord with appeasements, accord (sammanti) means "they are completed," or disputes are appeased, they go to settlement. Therefore, in the majority opinion accords with the presence-Vinaya, here the meaning should be understood that the majority opinion is completed in conjunction with the presence-Vinaya, not in conjunction with mindfulness-Vinaya etc., because they are not helpful to it.

311.‘‘Sammukhāvinayo vivādādhikaraṇena sammatī’’ti pāṭho. ‘‘Sammukhāvinayo na kenaci sammatī’’ti hi avasāne vuttattā sammukhāvinayo sayaṃ samathena vā adhikaraṇena vā sametabbo na hoti.

311."The presence-Vinaya accords with a dispute-dispute" is the reading. Since it is said in the end, "The presence-Vinaya does not accord with anything," the presence-Vinaya should not be brought into accord by itself or by a dispute.

313.Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ…pe… kiccādhikaraṇena sammatīti ettha ‘‘suṇātu me bhante …pe… paṭhamaṃ salākaṃ nikkhipāmī’’ti evaṃ vivādādhikaraṇaṃ kiccādhikaraṇena sammatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

313.A dispute-dispute... accords with a duty-dispute—here, the meaning should be understood that a dispute-dispute accords with a duty-dispute, as in, "Venerable sir, may the Sangha listen to me... I will cast the first ballot."

Samuṭṭhāpanavārakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Arising-Section

314.Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ na katamaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ samuṭṭhāpetīti ‘‘nāyaṃ dhammo’’ti vuttamatteneva kiñci adhikaraṇaṃ na samuṭṭhāpetīti attho.

314.A dispute-dispute does not give rise to which dispute?—the meaning is that it does not give rise to any dispute merely by saying "This is not the Dhamma."

Bhajativārakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Resorting-Section

318-9.Katamaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ pariyāpannanti katamādhikaraṇapariyāpannaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho.Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ vivādādhikaraṇaṃ bhajatīti paṭhamuppannavivādaṃ pacchā uppanno bhajati.Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ dve samathe bhajatīti ‘‘maṃ vūpasametuṃ samatthā tumhe’’ti vadantaṃ viya bhajati.Dvīhi samathehi saṅgahitanti ‘‘mayaṃ taṃ vūpasamessāmā’’ti vadantehi viya dvīhi samathehi saṅgahitaṃ.

318-9.Which dispute is fully included?—which dispute is included in which dispute; or this is the reading itself. A dispute-dispute resorts to a dispute-dispute—a dispute that arises later resorts to a dispute that arose earlier. A dispute-dispute resorts to two appeasements—it resorts as if saying, "You are capable of settling me." Consolidated by two appeasements—consolidated by two appeasements, as if saying, "We will settle you."

Khandhakapucchāvāro

The Chapter of Questions in the Khandhaka

Pucchāvissajjanāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Question and Answer

320.Nidānenaca niddesena ca saddhinti etthanidānenāti sikkhāpadapaññattidesasaṅkhātena nidānena.Niddesenāti puggalādiniddesena. Ubhayenapi tassa tassa sikkhāpadassa vatthu dassitaṃ, tasmā vatthunā saddhiṃ khandhakaṃ pucchissāmīti ayamettha attho.Tatthāti tasmiṃ upasampadakkhandhake.Uttamāni padāni vuttānīti ‘‘na, bhikkhave, ūnavīsativasso puggalo upasampādetabbo’’tiādinā (mahāva. 99, 124) nayena uttamapadāni vuttāni.Cammasaṃyutteti cammakkhandhake.

320.Together with the cause and together with the specification—here, with the cause means with the cause consisting of the place of the enactment of the training rule. With the specification means with the specification of the individual etc. The substance of that particular training rule is shown by both; therefore, the meaning here is that I will ask about the Khandhaka together with the substance. There means in that Ordination Khandhaka. The excellent terms have been stated means excellent terms have been stated in the manner of "Monks, a person under twenty years should not be ordained" (mahāva. 99, 124). In the Leather-connected means in the Leather Khandhaka.

Ekuttarikanayo

The Numerical Method

Ekakavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the One-Section

321.Mūlavisuddhiyāantarāpattīti antarāpattiṃ āpajjitvā mūlāyapaṭikassanaṃ katvā ṭhitena āpannā.‘‘Agghavisuddhiyā antarāpattīti sambahulā āpattiyo āpajjitvā tāsu sabbacirapaṭicchannavasena agghasamodhānaṃ gahetvā vasantena āpannāpattī’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Saussāheneva cittenāti ‘‘punapi āpajjissāmī’’ti saussāheneva cittena. Bhikkhunīnaṃ aṭṭhavatthukāya vasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenevāha‘‘aṭṭhame vatthusmiṃ bhikkhuniyā pārājikameva hotī’’ti.‘‘Dhammikassa paṭissavassa asaccāpane’’ti vuttattā adhammikapaṭissavassa visaṃvāde dukkaṭaṃ na hoti. ‘‘Tumhe vibbhamathā’’ti hi vutte suddhacitto ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā sace na vibbhamati, anāpatti. Evaṃ sabbattha.Pañcadasasu dhammesūti ‘‘kālena vakkhāmi, no akālenā’’tiādinā vuttapañcadasadhammesu. Āpattiṃ āpajjituṃ bhabbatāyabhabbāpattikā.

321.An offense in between by one with purity of root—[this refers to] one who, having committed an offense in between, retreated to the original position and committed [another] offense. "An offense in between by one with purity of cost—the offenses committed by one who, having committed many offenses, and having taken account of the cost based on all that were long concealed, dwells [there]"—thus it is stated in the Guide to the Canons (gaṇṭhipadesu). With an eager mind means with a mind eager [to think] "I will commit [it] again." This is stated in terms of the eight grounds for bhikkhunis. Therefore he said, "In the eighth ground, there is immediately a Pārājika for a bhikkhuni." "Falsifying a promise that is according to the Dhamma (Dhammikassa paṭissavassa asaccāpane)" having been stated, there is no dukkata offense in deceiving a promise that is not according to the Dhamma. Indeed, if someone says, "You will be agitated," and with a pure mind, [another] promises "Good," if he does not become agitated, there is no offense. Thus [it should be understood] everywhere. In the fifteen things means in the fifteen things stated as "I will speak at the right time, not at the wrong time," etc. Liable to commit an offense (bhabbāpattikā) because of being capable of committing an offense.

Ekakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the One-Section is finished.

Dukavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Two-Section

322.Dukesunidahaneti ātape aticiraṃ ṭhapetvā nidahane. Vatthusabhāgaṃ desentodesento āpajjati,āpannaṃ āpattiṃ na desessāmīti dhuraṃ nikkhipantona desento āpajjati. Romajanapade jātaṃromakaṃ. Pakkālakanti yavakkhāraṃ. Anuññātaloṇattā loṇānipi dukesu vuttāni.

322.In the Twos, putting away (nidahane) means putting away after keeping [it] in the sun for a very long time. While describing an object of the same class, he commits an offense while describing; abandoning the burden [thinking] "I will not confess the offense I have committed," he commits an offense while not confessing. Romaka means born in the Romaka country. Pakkālaka means barley ash. Because salt is allowed, salts are also stated in the Twos.

Dukavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Two-Section is finished.

Tikavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Three-Section

323.Tikesuvacīsampayuttaṃ kāyakiriyaṃ katvāti kāyena nipaccakāraṃ katvā.Mukhālambarakaraṇādibhedoti mukhabherivādanādippabhedo. Yassa sikkhāpadassa vītikkame kāyasamuṭṭhānā āpattiyo, taṃ kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadaṃ.Upaghātetīti vināseti.Na ādātabbanti ‘‘imasmā vihārā parampi mā nikkhama, vinayadharānaṃ vā santikaṃ āgaccha vinicchayaṃ dātu’’nti vutte tassa vacanaṃ na gahetabbanti attho.

323.In the Threes, having done a bodily action connected with speech means having done an intentional act with the body. Difference such as making a mouth-support means varieties such as playing a mouth-drum etc. The training rule, the transgression of which gives rise to offenses originating from the body, is a training rule enacted at the body-door. Destroys (upaghātetī) means destroys entirely. Should not be accepted means when it is said, "Do not go out beyond this monastery, or come to the presence of those who uphold the Vinaya, to give a judgment," the meaning is that his words should not be accepted.

Akusalāni ceva mūlāni cāti akosallasambhūtaṭṭhena ekantākusalabhāvato akusalāni, attanā sampayuttadhammānaṃ suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanato mūlāni, na akusalabhāvasādhanato. Na hi mūlato akusalānaṃ akusalabhāvo, kusalādīnaṃ vā kusalādibhāvo. Tathā ca sati momūhacittadvayamohassa akusalabhāvo na siyā.

Unwholesome (akusalāni) and roots (mūlāni) means unwholesome because of being entirely unwholesome in the sense of originating from unskillfulness, and roots because of establishing a good foundation for the phenomena associated with oneself, not because of establishing unwholesomeness. Indeed, unwholesomeness does not belong to the unwholesome from the root, or wholesomeness etc. to the wholesome etc. If that were the case, the unwholesome state of the pair of deluded consciousnesses that are delusion would not exist.

Duṭṭhu caritānīti paccayato sampayuttadhammato pavattiākārato ca na suṭṭhu asammāpavattitāni.Virūpānīti bībhacchāni sampati āyatiñca aniṭṭharūpattā.Suṭṭhu caritānītiādīsu vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Dvepi cete tikā paṇṇattiyā vā kammapathehi vā kathetabbā. Paṇṇattiyā tāva kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa vītikkamo kāyaduccaritaṃ, avītikkamo kāyasucaritaṃ. Vacīdvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa vītikkamo vacīduccaritaṃ, avītikkamo vacīsucaritaṃ. Ubhayattha paññattasikkhāpadassa vītikkamo manoduccaritaṃ manodvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa abhāvato. Tayidaṃ dvāradvaye akiriyasamuṭṭhānāya āpattiyā vasena veditabbaṃ. Yathāvuttāya āpattiyā avītikkamova manosucaritaṃ. Ayaṃpaṇṇattikathā.

Badly conducted (duṭṭhu caritānī) means not well, not properly conducted due to the condition, the phenomena associated with it, and the manner of occurrence. Ugly (virūpānī) means disgusting because of being an undesirable sight both now and in the future. The meaning in well conducted (suṭṭhu caritānī) etc. should be understood in the reverse way of what was stated. Both of these Threes should be discussed with the enactment or with the paths of action. Firstly, with the enactment, transgression of a training rule enacted at the body-door is bodily misconduct, and non-transgression is bodily good conduct. Transgression of a training rule enacted at the speech-door is verbal misconduct, and non-transgression is verbal good conduct. In both cases, transgression of a training rule enacted is mental misconduct, since there is no training rule enacted at the mind-door. This should be understood in the two doors through the offense originating from non-action. Non-transgression of the offense stated above is itself mental good conduct. This is the enactment-talk (paṇṇattikathā).

Pāṇātipātādayo pana tisso cetanā kāyadvāre vacīdvārepi uppannā kāyaduccaritaṃ dvārantare uppannassapi kammassa sanāmāpariccāgato yebhuyyavuttiyā tabbahulavuttiyā ca. Tenāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā –

But the three intentions beginning with the taking of life, even when they arise at the body-door or speech-door, are bodily misconduct or verbal misconduct due to not abandoning the name of the action even when it has arisen at another door, and due to prevalence and frequent occurrence. Therefore, the Aṭṭhakathā teachers said:

‘‘Dvāre caranti kammāni, na dvārā dvāracārino;

"Actions occur at the doors, not the doors occurring at the doors;
Therefore, actions at the doors are distinguished from each other." (dha. sa. aṭṭha. kāmāvacarakusala dvārakathā, kāyakammadvāra);

kammapathakathā.

the path of action talk (kammapathakathā).

Tikavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Three-Section is finished.

Catukkavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Four-Section

324.Catukkesuanariyavohārāti anariyānaṃ lāmakānaṃ vohārā saṃvohārā abhilāpavācā.Ariyavohārāti ariyānaṃ sappurisānaṃ vohārā.Diṭṭhavāditāti ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ mayā’’ti evaṃvāditā. Ettha ca taṃtaṃsamuṭṭhāpakacetanāvasena attho veditabbo.

324.In the Fours, un-Aryan expressions (anariyavohārā) means the expressions, conversations, words of address of low, un-Aryan people. Aryan expressions (ariyavohārā) means the expressions of good, Aryan people. Assertion of having seen (diṭṭhavāditā) means asserting "I have seen." Here, the meaning should be understood according to the intention that gives rise to each [of these].

‘‘paṭhamaṃ uppannavasenā’’ti.Purimaṃ purisaliṅgaṃ pajahatīti yathāvuttenatthena pubbaṅgamabhāvato purimasaṅkhātaṃ purisaliṅgaṃ jahati.Sataṃ tiṃsañca sikkhāpadānīti tiṃsādhikāni sataṃ sikkhāpadāni.

"Due to what first arose." He abandons the former male characteristic means he abandons the male characteristic, known as former, due to having the state of preceding, in the sense as stated. One hundred and thirty training rules means one hundred training rules plus thirty.

Bhikkhussa ca bhikkhuniyā ca catūsu pārājikesūti sādhāraṇesuyeva catūsu pārājikesu.Paṭhamo pañhoti ‘‘atthi vatthunānattatā, no āpattinānattatā’’ti ayaṃ pañho. ‘‘Atthi āpattisabhāgatā, no vatthusabhāgatā’’ti ayaṃ idha dutiyo nāma.

In the four Pārājikas common to both bhikkhu and bhikkhuni means only in the four Pārājikas that are common. The first question means the question, "Is there a difference in the substance, or is there no difference in the offense?" The question, "Is there similarity in the offense, or is there no similarity in the substance?" is called the second question here.

Anāpattivassacchedassāti natthi etasmiṃ vassacchede āpattīti anāpattivassacchedo, tassa, anāpattikassa vassacchedassāti attho.Mantābhāsāti matiyā upaparikkhitvā bhāsanato asamphappalāpavācā idha ‘‘mantābhāsā’’ti vuttā.

Of the break in the rainy season with no offense (anāpattivassacchedassā) means the break in the rainy season in which there is no offense is a break in the rainy season with no offense, that is, of the break in the rainy season in which there is no offense. Mantābhāsā means here, words that are not senseless babble because of examining with wisdom, are called "mantābhāsā."

Navamabhikkhunitopaṭṭhāya upajjhāyāpi abhivādanārahā no paccuṭṭhānārahāti yasmā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, bhattagge aṭṭhannaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ yathāvuḍḍhaṃ avasesānaṃ yathāgatika’’nti vadantena bhagavatā bhattagge ādito paṭṭhāya aṭṭhannaṃyeva bhikkhunīnaṃ yathāvuḍḍhaṃ anuññātaṃ, avasesānaṃ āgatapaṭipāṭiyā, tasmā navamabhikkhunito paṭṭhāya sace upajjhāyāpi bhikkhunī pacchā āgacchati, na paccuṭṭhānārahā, yathānisinnāhiyeva sīsaṃ ukkhipitvā abhivādetabbattā abhivādanārahā. Ādito nisinnāsu pana aṭṭhasu yā abbhantarimā aññā vuḍḍhatarā āgacchati, sā attano navakataraṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā nisīdituṃ labhati. Tasmā sā tāhi aṭṭhahi bhikkhunīhi paccuṭṭhānārahā. Yā pana aṭṭhahipi navakatarā, sā sacepi saṭṭhivassā hoti, āgatapaṭipāṭiyāva nisīdituṃ labhati.

Starting from the ninth bhikkhuni, even the preceptor is worthy of salutation but not worthy of standing up for means since the Blessed One, saying, "I allow, monks, in the refectory, for eight bhikkhunis according to seniority, and for the rest according to arrival," allowed according to seniority only for the eight bhikkhunis starting from the beginning in the refectory, and for the rest according to the order of arrival, therefore, starting from the ninth bhikkhuni, even if a bhikkhuni who is a preceptor arrives later, she is not worthy of standing up for, she is only worthy of salutation by raising her head while sitting. But among the eight who are seated from the beginning, if another older one arrives from inside, she is able to make her younger one stand up and sit down. Therefore, she is worthy of standing up for by those eight bhikkhunis. But the one who is younger than even the eight, even if she is sixty years old, is able to sit down only according to the order of arrival.

Idha na kappantīti vadantoti paccantimajanapadesu ṭhatvā ‘‘idha na kappantī’’ti vadanto vinayātisāradukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Kappiyañhi ‘‘na kappatī’’ti vadanto paññattaṃ samucchindati nāma.Idha kappantītiādīsupi eseva nayo.

Saying 'it is not allowable here' means one who, staying in remote border areas, says "It is not allowable here," commits a dukkata offense for transgressing the Vinaya. Indeed, one who says "It is not allowable" for what is allowable, is said to be cutting off the enactment. This is the same method in 'it is allowable here' etc.

Catukkavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Four-Section is finished.

Pañcakavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Five-Section

325.Pañcakesu ‘‘nimantito sabhatto samāno santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā’’ti (pāci. 294-297) vacanato akappiyanimantanaṃ sādiyantasseva anāmantacāro na vaṭṭatīti‘‘piṇḍapātikassa kappantī’’ti vuttaṃ.Gaṇabhojanādīsupi eseva nayo.Adhiṭṭhahitvā bhojananti ‘‘gilānasamayo’’tiādinā ābhogaṃ katvā bhojanaṃ.Avikappanāti ‘‘mayhaṃ bhattapaccāsaṃ itthannāmassa dammī’’ti evaṃ avikappanā.

325.In the Fives, it is said, "When invited, being one who shares the meal, without informing a monk who is present" (pāci. 294-297), the "it is allowable for one who goes for alms (piṇḍapātikassa kappantī)" is stated because wandering without invitation is not proper for one who approves of an unallowable invitation. This is the same method in group meals etc. Having determined to eat (adhiṭṭhahitvā bhojana) means eating after making a preparation with "it is the time for the sick," etc. Non-allocation (avikappanā) means non-allocation such as, "I will give my meal-expectation to so-and-so."

Ayasato vā garahato vāti ettha parammukhā aguṇavacanaṃayaso. Sammukhāgarahā. Viyasatītibyasanaṃ,hitasukhaṃ khipati viddhaṃsetīti attho. Ñātīnaṃ byasanaṃñātibyasanaṃ,corarogabhayādīhi ñātivināsoti attho. Bhogānaṃ byasanaṃbhogabyasanaṃ,rājacorādivasena bhogavināsoti attho. Rogo eva byasanaṃrogabyasanaṃ. Rogo hi ārogyaṃ byasati vināsetīti byasanaṃ. Sīlassa byasanaṃsīlabyasanaṃ,dussīlyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhiṃ vināsayamānā uppannā diṭṭhiyeva byasanaṃdiṭṭhibyasanaṃ. Ñātisampadāti ñātīnaṃ sampadā pāripūri bahubhāvo.Bhogasampadāyapi eseva nayo. Ārogyassa sampadāārogyasampadā. Pāripūri dīgharattaṃ arogatā.Sīladiṭṭhisampadāsupi eseva nayo.

Disrepute or scorn—here, disrepute (ayaso) is an expression of worthlessness that is not face-to-face. Scorn (garahā) is face-to-face. Destroys, therefore misfortune (byasanaṃ), means it throws away and destroys welfare and happiness. Misfortune of relatives (ñātibyasanaṃ), means the destruction of relatives by thieves, diseases, dangers, etc. Misfortune of wealth (bhogabyasanaṃ), means the destruction of wealth due to kings, thieves, etc. Disease is itself a misfortune (rogabyasanaṃ). Indeed, disease destroys and demolishes health, therefore it is misfortune. Misfortune of virtue (sīlabyasanaṃ), this is a name for immorality. The view that arises destroying right view is itself a misfortune (diṭṭhibyasanaṃ). Accomplishment of relatives (ñātisampadā) means the accomplishment, fullness, abundance of relatives. The same method applies to accomplishment of wealth (bhogassampadāya). Accomplishment of health (ārogyasampadā) means fullness, long-lasting health. The same method applies to accomplishment of virtue and view (sīladiṭṭhisampadā).

Vattaṃ paricchindīti tasmiṃ divase kātabbavattaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.Aṭṭha kappe anussarītiādinā tasmiṃ khaṇe jhānaṃ nibbattetvā pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ nibbattesīti dīpeti.Ñattiyā kammappatto hutvāti ñattiyā ṭhapitāya anussāvanakammappatto hutvāti attho.

Vattaṃ paricchindīti means he completed the duties that were to be done on that day. Aṭṭha kappe anussarīti, etc., indicates that at that moment, having developed jhāna, he developed pubbenivāsañāṇa (knowledge of previous existences). Ñattiyā kammappatto hutvāti means having been subject to the formal act of proclamation (ñatti) that has been established.

Mandattā momūhattāti neva samādānaṃ jānāti, na ānisaṃsaṃ, attano pana mandattā momūhattā aññāṇeneva āraññiko hoti.Pāpiccho icchāpakatoti ‘‘araññe me viharantassa ‘ayaṃ āraññiko’ti catuppaccayasakkāraṃ karissanti, ‘ayaṃ bhikkhu lajjī pavivitto’tiādīhi ca guṇehi sambhāvessantī’’ti evaṃ pāpikāya icchāya ṭhatvā tāya eva icchāya abhibhūto hutvā āraññiko hotīti attho. Tenāha‘‘araññavāsena paccayalābhaṃ patthayamāno’’ti. Ummādavasena araññaṃ pavisitvā viharantoummādā cittakkhepā āraññikonāma hoti.Vaṇṇitanti idaṃ āraññikaṅgaṃ nāma buddhehi buddhasāvakehi ca vaṇṇitaṃ pasatthanti āraññiko hoti.

Mandattā momūhattāti means he knows neither the undertaking (samādāna) nor its benefits (ānisaṃsa); however, due to his own dullness and delusion, he becomes a forest-dweller merely out of ignorance. Pāpiccho icchāpakatoti means, "While I am living in the forest, they will make offerings of the four requisites to me, thinking, 'This is a forest-dweller,' and they will esteem me with qualities such as, 'This bhikkhu is conscientious and secluded,'" and thus, standing with such evil desire, being overwhelmed by that very desire, he becomes a forest-dweller. Therefore, he said, "araññavāsena paccayalābhaṃ patthayamāno" (desiring gain of requisites through forest-dwelling). One who enters and dwells in the forest due to madness is called ummādā cittakkhepā āraññiko (a forest-dweller due to madness and mental distraction). Vaṇṇitaṃti means this forest-dwelling practice (āraññikaṅga), named as such, is praised and commended by the Buddhas and disciples of the Buddhas, hence he is a forest-dweller.

Pañcakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the five-fold division is complete.

Chakkavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the six-fold division

326.Chakkesuchabbassaparamatā dhāretabbanti padabhājanaṃ dassitaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva.

326. In the sixes (Chakkesu), chabbassaparamatā dhāretabbāti (the highest limit of six rains-retreats should be maintained) the word analysis has been shown. The rest is straightforward.

Chakkavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the six-fold division is complete.

Sattakavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the seven-fold division

327.Sattakesuchakke vuttāniyeva sattakavasena yojetabbānīti chakke vuttacuddasaparamāni dvidhā katvā dvinnaṃ sattakānaṃ vasena yojetabbāni.

327. In the sevens (Sattakesu), chakke vuttāniyeva sattakavasena yojetabbānīti (what was said in the sixes should be connected in terms of sevens) the fourteen paramas (highest) said in the sixes, having divided them in two, should be connected in terms of the two sevens.

Āpattiṃ jānātīti āpattiṃyeva ‘‘āpattī’’ti jānāti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Ābhicetasikānanti ettha (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.66)abhicetoti pākatikakāmāvacaracittehi sundaratāya paṭipakkhato visuddhattā ca abhikkantaṃ visuddhacittaṃ vuccati, upacārajjhānacittassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Abhicetasi jātāniābhicetasikāni,abhicetosannissitānīti vāābhicetasikāni. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānanti diṭṭhadhamme sukhavihārānaṃ.Diṭṭhadhammoti paccakkho attabhāvo vuccati, tattha sukhavihārabhūtānanti attho. Rūpāvacarajjhānānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tāni hi appetvā nisinnā jhāyino imasmiññeva attabhāve asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ nekkhammasukhaṃ vindanti, tasmā ‘‘diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānī’’ti vuccanti.Nikāmalābhīti nikāmena lābhī, attano icchāvasena lābhī, icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjituṃ samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti.Akicchalābhīti sukheneva paccanīkadhamme vikkhambhetvā samāpajjituṃ samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti.Akasiralābhīti akasirānaṃ lābhī vipulānaṃ, yathāparicchedeneva vuṭṭhātuṃ samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ekacco hi lābhīyeva hoti, na pana sakkoti icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjituṃ. Ekacco sakkoti tathā samāpajjituṃ, pāripanthike pana kicchena vikkhambheti. Ekacco tathā ca samāpajjati, pāripanthike ca akiccheneva vikkhambheti, na sakkoti kālamānanāḷikayantaṃ viya yathāparicchedeyeva vuṭṭhātuṃ.

Āpattiṃ jānātīti (he knows an offense) means he knows an offense as just "an offense." The same method applies to the remaining words. Ābhicetasikānanti (of the mind that is free from desire) here (abhiceto) (Ma. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.66) means the mind that is free from desire is called "abhikkantaṃ visuddhacittaṃ" (outstanding pure mind) because it is very beautiful and opposite to natural sense-sphere thoughts, and because of its purity. This is a designation for the citta of access jhāna. Ābhicetasikāni (of the mind that is free from desire) means ābhicetasikāni, born from or dependent on the mind that is free from desire. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānanti (of pleasant dwellings in this very life) means of pleasant dwellings in this very life. Diṭṭhadhammo (this very life) means the immediate existence, and there, it means those that are pleasant dwellings. This is a designation for rūpāvacara jhāna. For, those who sit having abandoned hindrances, meditators, in this very existence, experience the unblemished bliss of renunciation; therefore, they are called "diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānī." Nikāmalābhīti (obtains at will) means one who obtains at will, one who obtains according to his own desire, it is said that he is able to attain samāpatti at the moment he desires. Akicchalābhīti (obtains without trouble) means it is said that he is able to attain samāpatti easily, having warded off opposing states. Akasiralābhīti (obtains without difficulty) means one who obtains without difficulty, one who obtains extensively, it is said that he is able to arise exactly as determined. For one person is simply an obtainer, but he is not able to attain samāpatti at the moment he desires. Another person is able to attain samāpatti in that way, but he wards off obstacles with difficulty. Another person both attains samāpatti in that way, and wards off obstacles without difficulty, but he is not able to arise exactly as determined, like a water clock (kālamānanāḷikayantaṃ).

Āsavānaṃ khayāti arahattamaggena sabbakilesānaṃ khayā.Anāsavanti āsavavirahitaṃ.Cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttinti etthaceto-vacanena arahattaphalasampayutto samādhi,paññā-vacanena taṃsampayuttā ca paññā vuttā. Tattha ca samādhi rāgato vimuttattā cetovimutti, paññā avijjāya vimuttattā paññāvimuttīti veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘yo hissa, bhikkhave, samādhi, tadassa samādhindriyaṃ (saṃ. ni. 5.520). Yā hissa, bhikkhave, paññā, tadassa paññindriyaṃ (saṃ. ni. 5.516). Iti kho, bhikkhave, rāgavirāgā cetovimutti avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttī’’ti (a. ni. 2.32). Apicettha samathaphalaṃ cetovimutti, vipassanāphalaṃ paññāvimuttīti veditabbāti.Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve.Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti attanāyeva paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā, aparappaccayena ñatvāti attho. Sutamayañāṇādinā viya parappaccayataṃ nayaggāhañca muñcitvā paratoghosānugatabhāvanādhigamabhūtāya attanoyeva paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā, na sayambhūñāṇabhūtāyāti adhippāyo.Upasampajja viharatīti pāpuṇitvā sampādetvā viharati.

Āsavānaṃ khayāti (by the destruction of the āsavas) means by the destruction of all defilements by the path of arahantship. Anāsavaṃti (without āsavas) means devoid of āsavas. Cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttinti (liberation of mind, liberation by wisdom) here, by the word ceto (mind), the concentration associated with the fruition of arahantship is meant, and by the word paññā (wisdom), the wisdom associated with it is meant. And there, concentration is liberation of mind because it is liberated from greed, wisdom is liberation by wisdom because it is liberated from ignorance. For this was said by the Blessed One, "Whatever concentration he has, that is his faculty of concentration (samādhindriyaṃ) (Saṃ. Ni. 5.520). Whatever wisdom he has, that is his faculty of wisdom (paññindriyaṃ) (Saṃ. Ni. 5.516). Thus, bhikkhus, liberation of mind is through the fading away of passion, liberation by wisdom is through the fading away of ignorance" (A. Ni. 2.32). Moreover, here, liberation of mind should be understood as the fruit of serenity (samatha), and liberation by wisdom should be understood as the fruit of insight (vipassanā). Diṭṭheva dhamme (in this very life) means in this very existence. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti (having directly known by himself with higher knowledge) means having directly experienced by his own wisdom, having known without reliance on others. Having abandoned reliance on others and grasping at inferences, as with knowledge based on listening, etc., having directly experienced by his own wisdom, which is the attainment of development that follows the voice of another, the intention is not by means of self-originated knowledge. Upasampajja viharatīti (having attained, he dwells) means having attained, having accomplished, he dwells.

Sattakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the seven-fold division is complete.

Aṭṭhakavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the eight-fold division

328.Aṭṭhakesuaṭṭhānisaṃse sampassamānenāti –

328. In the eights (Aṭṭhakesu), aṭṭhānisaṃse sampassamānenāti (seeing the eight advantages) –

‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āpattiṃ āpanno hoti, so tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi hoti, aññe bhikkhū tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhino honti, te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū taṃ bhikkhuṃ evaṃ jānanti ‘ayaṃ kho āyasmā bahussuto āgatāgamo dhammadharo vinayadharo mātikādharo paṇḍito byatto medhāvī lajjī kukkuccako sikkhākāmo, sace mayaṃ imaṃ bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā adassane ukkhipissāma, na mayaṃ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṃ uposathaṃ karissāma, vinā iminā bhikkhunā uposathaṃ karissāma, bhavissati saṅghassa tatonidānaṃ bhaṇḍanaṃ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṃ saṅghanānākaraṇa’nti, bhedagarukehi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi na so bhikkhu āpattiyā adassane ukkhipitabbo’’ti (mahāva. 453) –

"Here, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu has committed an offense, and he has the view that it is not an offense, while other bhikkhus have the view that it is an offense. If, bhikkhus, those bhikkhus know that bhikkhu thus: 'This venerable one is very learned, versed in tradition, a bearer of the Dhamma, a bearer of the Vinaya, a bearer of the Mātikā, wise, competent, intelligent, conscientious, scrupulous, and desirous of training. If we were to suspend this bhikkhu for not seeing an offense, we would not hold the Uposatha with this bhikkhu, we would hold the Uposatha without this bhikkhu, and there will be, because of that, quarreling, contention, strife, dispute, division in the Saṅgha, a state of being at odds, a state of separation, a state of disunity in the Saṅgha,' then, bhikkhus, that bhikkhu should not be suspended for not seeing an offense by bhikkhus who take division seriously" (Mahāva. 453) –

Ādinā vuttaaṭṭhānisaṃse sampassamānena. Tena hi saddhiṃ uposathādiakaraṇaṃ ādīnavo bhedāya saṃvattanato, karaṇaṃ ānisaṃso sāmaggiyā saṃvattanato. Tasmā ete aṭṭhānisaṃse sampassamānena na so bhikkhu ukkhipitabboti attho.

By seeing the eight advantages stated in the beginning. For not doing the Uposatha etc. with him is a disadvantage because it leads to division, while doing it is an advantage because it leads to harmony. Therefore, by seeing these eight advantages, that bhikkhu should not be suspended, is the meaning.

aṭṭhānisaṃse sampassamānenāti –

aṭṭhānisaṃse sampassamānenāti (seeing the eight advantages) –

‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āpattiṃ āpanno hoti, so tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi hoti, aññe bhikkhū tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhino honti, so ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu te bhikkhū evaṃ jānāti ‘ime kho āyasmanto bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā paṇḍitā byattā medhāvino lajjino kukkuccakā sikkhākāmā, nālaṃ mamaṃ vā kāraṇā aññesaṃ vā kāraṇā chandā dosā mohā bhayā agatiṃ gantuṃ, sace maṃ ime bhikkhū āpattiyā adassane ukkhipissanti, na mayā saddhiṃ uposathaṃ karissanti, vinā mayā uposathaṃ karissanti, bhavissati saṅghassa tatonidānaṃ bhaṇḍanaṃ kalaho viggaho vivādo saṅghabhedo saṅgharāji saṅghavavatthānaṃ saṅghanānākaraṇa’nti, bhedagarukena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā paresampi saddhāya sā āpatti desetabbā’’ti (mahāva. 453) –

"Here, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu has committed an offense, and he has the view that it is not an offense, while other bhikkhus have the view that it is an offense. If, bhikkhus, that bhikkhu knows those bhikkhus thus: 'These venerable ones are very learned, versed in tradition, bearers of the Dhamma, bearers of the Vinaya, bearers of the Mātikā, wise, competent, intelligent, conscientious, scrupulous, and desirous of training; they are not capable of going to a wrong destination due to desire, hatred, delusion, or fear, for my sake or for the sake of others. If these bhikkhus suspend me for not seeing an offense, they will not hold the Uposatha with me, they will hold the Uposatha without me, and there will be, because of that, quarreling, contention, strife, dispute, division in the Saṅgha, a state of being at odds, a state of separation, a state of disunity in the Saṅgha,' then, bhikkhus, that bhikkhu, who takes division seriously, should confess that offense to others as well" (Mahāva. 453) –

Ādinā vuttaaṭṭhānisaṃse sampassamānenāti attho.

The meaning is by seeing the eight advantages stated in the beginning.

Pāḷiyaṃ āgatehi sattahīti ‘‘pubbevassa hoti ‘musā bhaṇissa’nti, bhaṇantassa hoti ‘musā bhaṇāmī’ti, bhaṇitassa hoti ‘musā mayā bhaṇita’nti vinidhāya diṭṭhiṃ, vinidhāya khantiṃ, vinidhāya ruciṃ, vinidhāya bhāva’’nti (pārā. 220) evamāgatehi sattahi.

Pāḷiyaṃ āgatehi sattahīti (by the seven that come in the Pāḷi) "beforehand he has the thought, 'I will speak a lie'; while speaking, he has the thought, 'I am speaking a lie'; having spoken, he has the thought, 'I have spoken a lie,' setting aside conviction, setting aside forbearance, setting aside inclination, setting aside regard" (Pārā. 220), by the seven that come in this way.

Abrahmacariyāti aseṭṭhacariyato.Rattiṃ na bhuñjeyya vikālabhojananti uposathaṃ upavuttho rattibhojanañca divāvikālabhojanañca na bhuñjeyya.Mañce chamāyaṃva sayetha santhateti kappiyamañce vā sudhādiparikammakatāya bhūmiyaṃ vā tiṇapaṇṇapalālādīni santharitvā kate santhate vā sayethāti attho.Etañhi aṭṭhaṅgīkamāhuposathanti etaṃ pāṇātipātādīni asamācarantena upavutthauposathaṃ aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgatattā ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgika’’nti vadanti.

Abrahmacariyāti (non-celibacy) means from unexcelled conduct. Rattiṃ na bhuñjeyya vikālabhojanaṃti (should not eat at night, unseasonable food) having observed the Uposatha, he should not eat night food or unseasonable food in the day. Mañce chamāyaṃva sayetha santhate (he should lie on a couch or on the ground spread out) means he should lie on a permissible couch or on the ground prepared with plaster etc., or on a spread made by spreading grass, leaves, or straw. Etañhi aṭṭhaṅgīkamāhuposathaṃti (this is called the Uposatha with eight factors) they call this Uposatha observed by one not engaging in killing etc., "aṭṭhaṅgika" (having eight factors) because it is endowed with eight factors.

aṭṭha anatirittānāma.Sappiādi aṭṭhame aruṇuggamane nissaggiyaṃ hoti.Aṭṭhakavasena yojetvā veditabbānīti purimāni aṭṭha ekaṃ aṭṭhakaṃ, tato ekaṃ apanetvā sesesupi ekekaṃ pakkhipitvāti evamādinā nayena aññānipi aṭṭhakāni kātabbānīti attho.

aṭṭha anatirittā (eight that are not extra) are the names. Sappi (ghee) etc., in the eighth, at the rising of the dawn, it becomes forfeitable. Aṭṭhakavasena yojetvā veditabbānīti (should be understood by connecting in terms of eights) means the former eight are one eight, then, having removed one, and also having added one to the remainder, thus in this way other eights should be made, is the meaning.

Aṭṭhakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the eight-fold division is complete.

Explanation of the nine-fold division

329.Navakesuāghātavatthūnīti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.340; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.9.29) āghātakāraṇāni.Āghātapaṭivinayānīti āghātassa paṭivinayakāraṇāni.Taṃ kutettha labbhāti ‘‘taṃ anatthacaraṇaṃ mā ahosī’’ti etasmiṃ puggale kuto labbhā kena kāraṇena sakkā laddhuṃ. ‘‘Paro nāma parassa attano cittaruciyā anatthaṃ karotī’’ti evaṃ cintetvā āghātaṃ paṭivinodeti. Atha vā sacāhaṃ paṭikkopaṃ kareyyaṃ, taṃ kopakaraṇaṃ ettha puggale kuto labbhā, kena kāraṇena laddhabbaṃ niratthakabhāvatoti attho. Kammassakā hi sattā, te kassa ruciyā dukkhitā sukhitā vā bhavanti, tasmā kevalaṃ tasmiṃ mayhaṃ kujjhanamattamevāti adhippāyo. Atha vā taṃ kopakaraṇaṃ ettha puggale kuto labbhā paramatthato kujjhitabbassa kujjhanakassa ca abhāvato. Saṅkhāramattañhetaṃ yadidaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ yaṃ ‘‘satto’’ti vuccati, te ca saṅkhārā ittarakālā khaṇikā, kassa ko kujjhatīti attho. ‘‘Kuto lābhā’’tipi pāṭho, sacāhaṃ ettha kopaṃ kareyyaṃ, tasmiṃ me kopakaraṇe kuto lābhā, lābhā nāma ke siyuṃ aññatra anatthuppattitoti attho. Imasmiñca atthetanti nipātamattameva hoti.

329. In the nines (Navakesu), āghātavatthūnīti (grounds for resentment) (Dī. Ni. Aṭṭha. 3.340; A. Ni. Aṭṭha. 3.9.29) are the causes of resentment. Āghātapaṭivinayānīti (means of removing resentment) are the causes for removing resentment. Taṃ kutettha labbhāti (how could that be obtained here?) from where can it be obtained, by what cause can it be possibly obtained, in this person so that "that doing of harm may not be." Having thought "another, by his own inclination of mind, does harm to another," he removes resentment. Or, if I were to retaliate, how could that cause of anger be obtained in this person, by what cause could it be obtained, because it is meaningless. For beings are owners of their actions, they become miserable or happy by whose inclination? Therefore, the intention is that merely my being angry at him is all that there is. Or, how could that cause of anger be obtained in this person from the ultimate point of view, because of the absence of one who should be angered and one who is angry. This five aggregates, which is called "a being," is merely a concept, and those concepts are short-lived, momentary; at whom does who get angry? "Kuto lābhā" (from where is gain?) is also a reading; if I were to become angry here, from where is gain in that cause of anger for me? What would be the gains other than the arising of harm? In this meaning, taṃ is merely an expletive.

Taṇhaṃ paṭiccāti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.103; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.9.23) dve taṇhā esanataṇhā esitataṇhā ca. Yāya taṇhāya ajapathasaṅkupathādīni paṭipajjitvā bhoge esati gavesati, ayaṃesanataṇhānāma. Yā tesu esitesu gavesitesu paṭiladdhesu taṇhā, ayaṃesitataṇhānāma. Idha esitataṇhā daṭṭhabbā.Pariyesanāti rūpādiārammaṇapariyesanā. Sā hi esanataṇhāya sati hoti.Lābhoti rūpādiārammaṇappaṭilābho. So hi pariyesanāya sati hoti.Vinicchayopana ñāṇataṇhādiṭṭhivitakkavasena catubbidho. Tattha ‘‘sukhavinicchayaṃ jaññā, sukhavinicchayaṃ ñatvā ajjhattaṃ sukhamanuyuñjeyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.323) ayaṃñāṇavinicchayo. ‘‘Vinicchayoti dve vinicchayā taṇhāvinicchayo ca diṭṭhivinicchayo cā’’ti (mahāni. 102) evaṃ āgatāni aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritānitaṇhāvinicchayo. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyodiṭṭhivinicchayo. ‘‘Chando kho, devānaminda, vitakkanidāno’’ti (dī. ni. 2.358) imasmiṃ pana sutte idhavinicchayoti vuttovitakkoyeva āgato. Lābhaṃ labhitvā hi iṭṭhāniṭṭhaṃ sundarāsundarañca vitakkena vinicchināti ‘‘ettakaṃ me rūpārammaṇatthāya bhavissati, ettakaṃ saddārammaṇatthāya, ettakaṃ mayhaṃ bhavissati, ettakaṃ parassa, ettakaṃ paribhuñjissāmi, ettakaṃ nidahissāmī’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo’’ti.

Taṇhaṃ paṭiccāti (conditioned by craving) (Dī. Ni. Aṭṭha. 2.103; A. Ni. Aṭṭha. 3.9.23) there are two kinds of craving: esanataṇhā (craving for seeking) and esitataṇhā (craving for what is sought). By whatever craving, having undertaken difficult and wrong paths etc., one seeks and searches for pleasures, this is called esanataṇhā. Whatever craving is in those sought and searched for pleasures that have been obtained, this is called esitataṇhā. Here, esitataṇhā should be seen. Pariyesanāti (search) is the search for objects such as forms. For that happens when there is craving for seeking. Lābho (gain) is the obtaining of objects such as forms. For that happens when there is search. Vinicchayo (decision), however, is fourfold: in terms of ñāṇataṇhā (craving for knowledge), diṭṭhi (views), and vitakka (thinking). There, "one should know a decision for happiness, having known a decision for happiness, one should devote oneself to inner happiness" (Ma. Ni. 3.323), this is ñāṇavinicchayo (decision by knowledge). "Decision (vinicchayo) is of two kinds: decision by craving and decision by views" (Mahāni. 102), the eight hundred kinds of thought agitated by craving that come in this way are taṇhāvinicchayo (decision by craving). The sixty-two views are diṭṭhivinicchayo (decision by views). "Desire, lord of gods, is the cause of thinking" (Dī. Ni. 2.358), but in this sutta, the vinicchayo (decision) that is stated here is just the vitakko (thought) that has come. For, having obtained gain, one decides what is desirable and undesirable, beautiful and ugly, by means of thinking, "This much will be for the sake of form objects for me, this much for sound objects, this much will be for me, this much for another, this much I will enjoy, this much I will store up." Therefore, it was said "lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo" (conditioned by gain is decision).

Chandarāgoti evaṃ akusalavitakkena vitakkite vatthusmiṃ dubbalarāgo ca balavarāgo ca uppajjati.Ajjhosānanti ‘‘ahaṃ, mama’’nti balavasanniṭṭhānaṃ.Pariggahoti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena pariggahakaraṇaṃ.Macchariyanti parehi sādhāraṇabhāvassa asahanatā. Tenevassa porāṇā evaṃ vacanatthaṃ vadanti ‘‘idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayheva hotu, mā aññassa acchariyaṃ hotūti pavattattā macchariyanti vuccatī’’ti.Ārakkhoti dvārapidahanamañjūsāgopanādivasena suṭṭhu rakkhaṇaṃ. Adhi karotītiadhikaraṇaṃ,kāraṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ.Ārakkhādhikaraṇanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, ārakkhahetūti attho. Daṇḍādānādīsu paranisedhanatthaṃ daṇḍassa ādānaṃdaṇḍādānaṃ. Ekatodhārādino satthassa ādānaṃsatthādānaṃ. Kalahoti kāyakalahopi vācākalahopi. Purimo purimo virodhoviggaho,pacchimo pacchimovivādo. Tuvaṃ tuvanti agāravavasena‘‘tuvaṃ tuva’’nti vacanaṃ.

Chandarāgo (desire and lust) means, in the thing thought about by such unwholesome thinking, both weak lust and strong lust arise. Ajjhosānaṃ (obsession) means the strong determination, "I, mine." Pariggaho (grasping) is the act of grasping in terms of craving and views. Macchariyaṃ (miserliness) is the inability to bear others having a common share. Therefore, the ancients say that its etymological meaning is thus: "Because it proceeds with 'let this wonderful thing be mine alone, let not another have a wonderful thing,' it is called macchariyaṃ (miserliness)." Ārakkho (guarding) is the proper guarding by means of door-keepers, burning (with fire), storing in boxes etc. Adhi karotīti adhikaraṇaṃ (occasion), this is a name for cause. Ārakkhādhikaraṇaṃ (occasion for guarding) is neuter gender by way of verbal noun, it means because of guarding. Daṇḍādānaṃ (taking up sticks) is the taking up of sticks for the purpose of preventing others in daṇḍādāna (punishment) etc.. Satthādānaṃ (taking up weapons) is the taking up of weapons from one's own side. Kalaho (quarreling) is quarreling of body or quarreling of speech. The earlier opposition is viggaho (strife), the later is vivādo (dispute). Saying "tuvaṃ tuvaṃ" (you, you) is speaking without respect.

Adhiṭṭhitakālatopaṭṭhāya na vikappetabbānīti vikappentena adhiṭṭhānato pubbe vā

"From the time of resolution, it should not be altered" means, if someone alters it, the dukkaṭa offense is incurred as stated before the resolution.*

Dukkaṭavasena vuttānīti ‘‘vaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vaggasaññī ovadatī’’tiādinā (pāci. 150) nayena adhammakamme dve navakāni dukkaṭavasena vuttāni.

Stated as dukkaṭa means, in an unlawful act, two groups of nine offenses are stated as dukkaṭa in the manner beginning with "He advises a group, perceiving it as a group of nuns" (pāci. 150).

Navakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

End of the Navaka explanation.

Dasakavāravaṇṇanā
Dasaka Explanation

330.Dasakesunatthi dinnantiādivasena veditabbāti ‘‘natthi dinnaṃ, natthi yiṭṭhaṃ, natthi hutaṃ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko, natthi ayaṃ loko, natthi paro loko, natthi mātā, natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā, ye imañca lokaṃ parañca lokaṃ sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.94, 225; 3.91, 116; saṃ. ni. 3.210) evamāgataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Sassato lokotiādivasenāti ‘‘sassato lokoti vā, asassato lokoti vā, antavā lokoti vā, anantavā lokoti vā, taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti vā, aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīranti vā, hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti vā, na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti vā, hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti vā, neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti vā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.269) evamāgataṃ saṅgaṇhāti.

330.Should be understood as beginning with 'There is no giving' means it is stated referring to what comes such as, "There is no gift, no sacrifice, no offering, no fruit or result of good and bad actions, there is no this world, there is no other world, there is no mother, there is no father, there are no beings born spontaneously, there are no ascetics and brahmins in the world who are rightly gone, rightly practicing, who having realized this world and the next by themselves with direct knowledge, make it known." (ma. ni. 2.94, 225; 3.91, 116; saṃ. ni. 3.210). Beginning with 'The world is eternal' means it includes what comes such as, "The world is eternal," or "The world is not eternal," or "The world is finite," or "The world is infinite," or "The life is the body," or "The life is one thing, the body another," or "The Tathāgata exists after death," or "The Tathāgata does not exist after death," or "The Tathāgata both exists and does not exist after death," or "The Tathāgata neither exists nor does not exist after death" (ma. ni. 1.269).

Micchādiṭṭhiādayo micchāvimuttipariyosānāti ‘‘micchādiṭṭhi micchāsaṅkappo micchāvācā micchākammanto micchāājīvo micchāvāyāmo micchāsati micchāsamādhi micchāñāṇaṃ micchāvimuttī’’ti (vibha. 970) evamāgataṃ sandhāya vadati. Tatthamicchāñāṇanti pāpakiriyāsu upāyacintāvasena pāpakaṃ katvā ‘‘sukataṃ mayā’’ti paccavekkhaṇākārena ca uppanno moho.Micchāvimuttīti avimuttasseva sato vimuttisaññitā.Samathakkhandhake niddiṭṭhāti ‘‘oramattakaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ hoti, na ca gatigataṃ, na ca saritasārita’’ntiādinā (cūḷava. 204) niddiṭṭhā. Samathakkhandhake vuttehi samannāgato hotīti sambandho. Māturakkhitādayodasa itthiyo. Dhanakkītādayodasa bhariyāyo.

Beginning with wrong view and ending with wrong liberation means it speaks referring to what comes such as, "Wrong view, wrong thought, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, wrong concentration, wrong knowledge, wrong liberation" (vibha. 970). Herein, wrong knowledge is the delusion that arises in the manner of contemplating means in evil deeds, doing evil, and reflecting, "I have done well." Wrong liberation is the assumption of liberation by one who is not liberated. Stated in the Samatha Section means stated in the manner beginning with "There is a minor dispute, and it is neither gone to a conclusion nor adjudicated" (cūḷava. 204). The connection is that he is endowed with what is stated in the Samatha Section. Ten women, beginning with mother-protected. Ten wives, beginning with those bought with wealth.

Dasakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

End of the Dasaka explanation.

Ekādasakavāravaṇṇanā
Ekādasaka Explanation

331.Ekādasakesuna vodāyantīti na pakāsanti.Suyuttayānasadisāya katāyāti icchiticchitakāle sukhena pavattetabbattā yuttayānaṃ viya katāya.Yathā patiṭṭhā hotīti sampattīnaṃ yathā patiṭṭhā hoti.Anu anu pavattitāyāti bhāvanābahulīkārehi anu anu pavattitāya.

331.In the Ekādasakas, do not proclaim means they do not reveal. Made like a well-harnessed vehicle means made like a harnessed vehicle, because it should be easily set in motion at any desired time. As there is establishment means as there is establishment of attainments. Continuously cultivated means continuously cultivated by frequent practice of meditation.

Sukhaṃ supatītiādīsu (a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.11.15; visuddhi 1.258) yathā sesajanā samparivattamānā kākacchamānā dukkhaṃ supanti, evaṃ asupitvā sukhaṃ supati, niddaṃ okkantopi samāpattiṃ samāpanno viya hoti.Sukhaṃ paṭibujjhatīti yathā aññe nitthunantā vijambhantā samparivattantā dukkhaṃ paṭibujjhanti, evaṃ appaṭibujjhitvā vikasamānamiva padumaṃ sukhaṃ nibbikāraṃ paṭibujjhati. Anubhūtapubbavasena devatūpasaṃhāravasena cassa bhaddakameva supinaṃ hoti, na pāpakanti āha‘‘pāpakameva na passatī’’tiādi. Dhātukkhobhahetukampi cassa bahulaṃ bhaddakameva siyā yebhuyyena cittajarūpānuguṇatāya utuāhārajarūpānaṃ. Tatthapāpakameva na passatīti yathā aññe attānaṃ corehi samparivāritaṃ viya, vāḷehi upaddutaṃ viya, papāte patantaṃ viya ca passanti, evaṃ pāpakameva supinaṃ na passati.Bhadrakaṃ pana vuḍḍhikāraṇabhūtaṃ passatīti cetiyaṃ vandanto viya, pūjaṃ karonto viya, dhammaṃ suṇanto viya ca hoti.

Sleeps happily etc. (a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.11.15; visuddhi 1.258) means unlike other people who sleep miserably, tossing and turning and making noises, he sleeps happily without sleeping in such a way, and even when sleep overcomes him, it is as if he has attained samāpatti. Awakens happily means unlike others who awaken miserably, yawning, stretching, and tossing about, he awakens happily without stirring, like a blossoming lotus. He has good dreams due to previous experience and due to the divine visitation; therefore, it is said, "Does not see anything evil" etc. Even if it is caused by disturbance of the elements, mostly it would be good, because the utu and food-produced matter is in accordance with the mind-produced matter. Therein, does not see anything evil means unlike others who see themselves surrounded by thieves, afflicted by wild beasts, or falling into a precipice, he does not see any evil dream. But sees what is auspicious, the cause of increase means he is as if venerating a shrine, making offerings, or listening to the Dhamma.

Manussānaṃ piyo hotīti ure āmukkamuttāhāro viya, sīse piḷandhamālā viya ca manussānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo.Amanussānaṃ piyo hotīti yatheva ca manussānaṃ piyo, evaṃ amanussānampi piyo hoti visākhatthero viya.Nāssa aggi vā visaṃ vā satthaṃ vā kamatīti mettāvihārissa kāye uttarāya upāsikāya viya aggi vā, saṃyuttabhāṇakacūḷasīvattherasseva visaṃ vā, saṃkiccasāmaṇerasseva satthaṃ vā na kamati na pavisati, nāssa kāyaṃ vikopetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhenuvatthumpi cettha kathayanti, ekā kira dhenu vacchakassa khīradhāraṃ muñcamānā aṭṭhāsi. Eko luddako ‘‘taṃ vijjhissāmī’’ti hatthena samparivattetvā dīghadaṇḍakaṃ sattiṃ muñci. Sā tassā sarīraṃ āhacca tālapaṇṇaṃ viya vivaṭṭamānā gatā, neva upacārabalena na appanābalena, kevalaṃ pana vacchake balavahitacittatāya. Evaṃ mahānubhāvā mettā.Khippaṃ samādhiyatīti kenaci paripanthena parihīnajjhānassa byāpādassa dūrasamanussaritabhāvato khippameva samādhiyati.Mukhavaṇṇo vippasīdatīti bandhanā pamuttatālapakkaṃ viya cassa vippasannavaṇṇaṃ mukhaṃ hoti.Asammūḷho kālaṃkarotīti mettāvihārino sammohamaraṇaṃ nāma natthi, asammūḷhova niddaṃ okkamanto viya kālaṃ karoti.

Is dear to humans means he is dear and pleasing to humans, like a pearl necklace worn on the chest or a garland worn on the head. Is dear to non-humans means just as he is dear to humans, so also he is dear to non-humans, like Visākha Thera. Neither fire, nor poison, nor weapon affects him means neither fire, like for Uttarā Upāsikā in the body of one abiding in loving-kindness, nor poison, like for Cūḷasīva Thera, the reciter of the Saṃyutta Nikāya, nor a weapon, like for Saṃkicca Sāmaṇera, affects or penetrates his body, does not harm his body; this is what is said. Here, they also tell the story of a cow: it seems one cow was standing, releasing a stream of milk for its calf. A hunter, thinking, "I will shoot it," took aim with his hand and released a long-shafted spear. It struck her body and went away, turning like a palm leaf, not by the power of approximation, nor by the power of absorption, but solely because of the strong loving thought for the calf. Thus, great is the power of loving-kindness. Quickly attains concentration means because of the remote memory of ill-will, the jhāna which was diminished by some obstacle is quickly attained. The complexion of his face clears up means his face has a clear complexion, like a ripe palm fruit released from its stem. Dies unconfused means for one abiding in loving-kindness, there is no such thing as a confused death; he dies unconfused, as if falling into sleep.

Ekādasakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

End of the Ekādasaka explanation.

Ekuttarikanayavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

End of the Ekuttarika Method explanation.

Uposathādipucchāvissajjanāvaṇṇanā

Explanation of Questions and Answers on the Uposatha, etc.

332.‘‘Saṅghaṃ, bhante, pavāremītiādi pavāraṇākathā nāmā’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.

332.“'I invite the Saṅgha, venerable sir,' etc., is called the pavāraṇā talk” is said in the Guide to Difficult Words.

Atthavasapakaraṇavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on Meaning

334.Paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanāyameva vuttanti ‘‘saṅghasuṭṭhutāyā’’tiādīnaṃ atthavaṇṇanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Dasakkhattuṃ yojanāya padasataṃ vuttanti ekamūlakanaye dasakkhattuṃ yojanāya katāya saṅkhalikanaye vuttapadehi saddhiṃ padasataṃ vuttanti evamattho gahetabbo. Aññathā ekamūlake eva naye na sakkā padasataṃ laddhuṃ. Ekamūlakanayehi purimapacchimapadāni ekato katvā ekekasmiṃ vāre nava nava padāni vuttānīti dasakkhattuṃ yojanāya navuti padāniyeva labbhanti. Tasmā tāni navuti padāni saṅkhalikanaye baddhacakkavasena yojite dasa padāni labbhantīti tehi saddhiṃ padasatanti sakkā vattuṃ. Ito aññathā pana ubhosupi nayesu visuṃ visuṃ atthasataṃ dhammasatañca yathā labbhati, tathā paṭhamapārājikasaṃvaṇṇanāyameva amhehi dassitaṃ, taṃ tattha vuttanayeneva gahetabbaṃ. Purimapacchimapadāni ekattena gahetvā ‘‘padasata’’nti vuttattā‘‘tattha pacchimassa pacchimassa padassa vasena atthasataṃ, purimassa purimassa vasena dhammasata’’nti vuttaṃ. Tasmiṃ padasate ‘‘saṅghasuṭṭhū’’tiādinā vuttapurimapadānaṃ vasena dhammasataṃ, ‘‘saṅghaphāsū’’tiādinā vuttapacchimapadānaṃ vasena atthasatanti adhippāyo.

334.Stated in the explanation of the first Pārājika itself means it is stated referring to the explanation of the meaning of "for the welfare of the Saṅgha," etc. A hundred words stated by applying ten times means it should be understood that a hundred words were stated together with the words stated in the saṅkhalika method, which was made by applying ten times in the ekamūlaka method. Otherwise, it is not possible to obtain a hundred words in the ekamūlaka method alone. In the ekamūlaka method, by combining the first and last words, nine new words were stated in each instance, so only ninety words can be obtained by applying ten times. Therefore, it is possible to say that with those ninety words, ten words are obtained when applied in the saṅkhalika method in a circular fashion, so there are a hundred words together with them. However, we have shown in the explanation of the first pārājika itself how a hundred meanings and a hundred Dhamma are obtained separately in both methods in a different way; that should be taken in the manner stated there. Because "a hundred words" is said by taking the first and last words as one, "there are a hundred meanings based on the last word of the last, and a hundred Dhamma based on the first word of the first" is said. The intention is that in that hundred words, there are a hundred Dhamma based on the first words stated beginning with "for the welfare of the Saṅgha," and a hundred meanings based on the last words stated beginning with "for the comfort of the Saṅgha."

Mahāvaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

End of the Mahāvagga explanation.

Paṭhamagāthāsaṅgaṇikaṃ

First Verse Compilation

Sattanagaresu paññattasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Training Rules Enacted in the Seven Cities

335.Aḍḍhuḍḍhasatānīti tīṇi satāni paññāsañca sikkhāpadāni.Viggahanti manussaviggahaṃ.Atirekanti dasāhaparamaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ.Kāḷakanti ‘‘suddhakāḷakāna’’nti vuttakāḷakaṃ.Bhūtanti bhūtārocanaṃ.Paramparabhattanti paramparabhojanaṃ.Bhikkhunīsu ca akkosoti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuṃ akkoseyya vā paribhāseyya vā’’ti (pāci. 1029) vuttasikkhāpadaṃ.Antaravāsakanti aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvarapaṭiggaṇhanaṃ.Rūpiyanti rūpiyasaṃvohāraṃ.Suttanti ‘‘sāmaṃ suttaṃ viññāpetvā tantavāyehī’’ti (pārā. 637) vuttasikkhāpadaṃ.Ujjhāpanaketi ujjhāpanake khiyyanake pācittiyaṃ.Pācitapiṇḍanti bhikkhunīparipācitaṃ.Cīvaraṃ datvāti ‘‘samaggena saṅghena cīvaraṃ datvā’’ti (pāci. 485) vuttasikkhāpadaṃ.Vosāsantīti ‘‘bhikkhū paneva kulesu nimantitā bhuñjanti, tatra cesā bhikkhunī’’ti (pāci. 558) vuttapāṭidesanīyaṃ.Giragganti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī naccaṃ vā gītaṃ vā’’ti (pāci. 834) vuttasikkhāpadaṃ.Cariyāti ‘‘antovassaṃ cārikaṃ careyyā’’ti (pāci. 970) ca, ‘‘vassaṃvutthā cārikaṃ na pakkameyyā’’ti (pāci. 974) ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.Chandadānenāti pārivāsikena chandadānena.

335.One and a half hundred means three hundred and fifty training rules. Conflict means human conflict. Excess means an extra robe that is allowed up to ten days. Kāḷaka means the kāḷaka that is stated as "purely black." Informed means informing about spirits. Successive meals means successive meals. Abuse among the nuns means the training rule stated as "Whatever nun should abuse or revile a monk" (pāci. 1029). Undergarment means accepting a robe from a non-relative nun. Silver means dealing with silver. Thread means the training rule stated as "Having ordered thread herself, she has it woven by a weaver" (pārā. 637). Criticizing means a Pācittiya for criticizing and complaining. Cooked food means cooked by nuns. Having given a robe means the training rule stated as "Having given a robe by the unanimous Saṅgha" (pāci. 485). Announces her needs means the Pāṭidesanīya stated as "If monks have been invited to families and are eating there, and if this nun" (pāci. 558). Giragga means the training rule stated as "Whatever nun should dance or sing" (pāci. 834). Wandering means the pair of training rules stated as "She should wander on tour within the rains" (pāci. 970) and "Having spent the rains, she should not depart on tour" (pāci. 974). By giving consent means by giving consent by a probationary monk.

Pārājikāni cattārīti bhikkhunīnaṃ cattāri pārājikāni.Kuṭīti kuṭikārasikkhāpadaṃ.Kosiyanti kosiyamissakasikkhāpadaṃ.Seyyāti anupasampannena sahaseyyasikkhāpadaṃ.Khaṇaneti pathavīkhaṇanaṃ.Gaccha devateti bhūtagāmasikkhāpadaṃ.Siñcanti sappāṇakaudakasiñcanaṃ.Mahāvihāroti mahallakavihāro.Aññanti aññavādakaṃ.Dvāranti yāva dvārakosā.Sahadhammoti sahadhammikaṃ vuccamāno.Payopānanti surusurukārakaṃ.Eḷakalomānīti eḷakalomadhovāpanaṃ.Pattoti ūnapañcabandhanapatto.Ovādoti bhikkhunupassayaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ovādo.Bhesajjanti taduttaribhesajjaviññāpanaṃ.Sūcīti aṭṭhimayādisūcigharaṃ.Āraññikoti ‘‘yāni kho pana tāni āraññakāni senāsanānī’’tiādinā (pāci. 570) vuttapāṭidesanīyaṃ.Ovādoti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī ovādāya vā saṃvāsāya vā na gaccheyyā’’ti (pāci. 1055) vuttasikkhāpadaṃ.

Four Pārājikas means the four Pārājikas of the nuns. Kuṭī means the kuṭī construction training rule. Kosiya means the kosiyamissaka training rule. Bed means the training rule of sleeping together with one who is not fully ordained. Digging means digging the earth. Go spirit means the training rule about the plant life. Sprinkles means sprinkling water with living creatures. Mahāvihāra means the large monastery. Another means another opinion. Door means up to the door socket. Same Doctrine means being spoken to as having the same doctrine. Drinkable gruel means that which makes a surusuru sound. Goat hairs means the washing of goat hairs. Bowl means a bowl with less than five mendings. Admonition means going to a nuns' residence for admonition. Medicine means requesting further medicine. Needle means a needle case made of bone, etc. Forest dweller means the Pāṭidesanīya stated as "Whatever forest dwelling dwelling places there are" etc. (pāci. 570). Admonition means the training rule stated as "Whatever nun should not go for admonition or association" (pāci. 1055).

Pārājikāni cattārītiādinā chasu nagaresu paññattaṃ ekato sampiṇḍitvā sāvatthiyā paññattaṃ visuṃ gaṇetvā sabbāneva sikkhāpadāni dvīhi rāsīhi saṅgaṇhāti.

Beginning with Four Pārājikas, all the training rules enacted in the six cities are gathered together into one place, and those enacted in Sāvatthī are counted separately, thus collecting all the training rules into two groups.

Sattanagaresu paññattasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

End of the Explanation of the Training Rules Enacted in the Seven Cities.

Catuvipattivaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Four Kinds of Failure

336.Ekatiṃsa garukānāma ubhato aṭṭha pārājikā, bhikkhūnaṃ terasa, bhikkhunīnaṃ dasa saṅghādisesā.Aṭṭhettha anavasesāti etesu yathāvuttagarukesu sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇavasena aṭṭha pārājikā anavasesā nāma.

336.Thirty-one grave offenses means the eight Pārājikas for both, the thirteen Saṅghādisesas for the monks, and the ten Saṅghādisesas for the nuns. Eight here without remainder means among these grave offenses as stated, the eight Pārājikas, common and uncommon, are without remainder.

Asādhāraṇādivaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Uncommon, etc.

338.‘‘Dhovanañca paṭiggaho’’ti gāthā aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ. Tatthadhovanañca paṭiggahoti aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaradhovāpanaṃ cīvarapaṭiggahaṇañca.Koseyya…pe… dve lomāti eḷakalomavagge ādito satta sikkhāpadāni vuttāni.Vassikāti vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadaṃ.Āraññakena cāti sāsaṅkasikkhāpadaṃ vuttaṃ.Paṇītanti paṇītabhojanaviññatti.Ūnanti ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadaṃ.Nisīdane ca yā sikkhā, vassikā yā ca sāṭikāti nisīdanavassikasāṭikānaṃ pamāṇātikkamo.

338."Washing and accepting" is a verse of the Aṭṭhakathā teachers. Therein, washing and accepting means washing robes and accepting robes by a non-relative nun. Koseyya…pe… two hairs means the first seven training rules stated in the Goat Hair section. Vassikā means the vassikasāṭika training rule. And with the forest dweller means the training rule with apprehension is stated. Choice means requesting choice food. Less means the training rule about one less than twenty years old. And the training about the sitting cloth, whatever the vassikā cloth means exceeding the measure of the sitting cloth and the vassikasāṭika cloth.

‘‘vibhattiyo’’ti vuttāni.Tevīsati saṅghādisesāti bhikkhunīnaṃ āgatāni dasa, bhikkhūnaṃ terasāti tevīsati.Dvecattālīsa nissaggiyātiādīsupi eseva nayo.Dvīhi…pe… kiccaṃ ekena sammatīti dvīhi vivādādhikaraṇaṃ, catūhi anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ, tīhi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ, ekena kiccādhikaraṇaṃ sammatīti attho.

"Distinctions" are stated. Twenty-three Saṅghādisesas means twenty-three, the ten that come for the nuns and the thirteen for the monks. The same method applies in Forty-two Nissaṅgiyas, etc. By two…pe…a matter by one consent means a dispute is settled by two, an accusation by four, an offense by three, and a formal act by one consent; this is the meaning.

339.Niraṅkatoti saṅghamhā apasārito.

339.Expelled means expelled from the Saṅgha.

Adhikaraṇabhedavaṇṇanā

340.Yasmā adhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭento samathappattameva ukkoṭeti, tasmā‘‘vivādādhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭento kati samathe ukkoṭetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.

340.Since one who subverts a legal question subverts only what has reached settlement, therefore "One who subverts a dispute, how many settlements does he subvert?" etc., is stated.

341.Pāḷimuttakavinicchayenevāti vinayalakkhaṇaṃ vinā kevalaṃ dhammadesanāmattavasenevāti attho.Yenāpi vinicchayenāti pāḷimuttakavinicchayameva sandhāya vuttaṃ.Khandhakato ca parivārato ca suttenāti khandhakaparivārato ānītasuttena.Nijjhāpentīti paññāpenti.

341.Only by a decision apart from the Pāḷi means the meaning is only by way of a discourse on the Dhamma, without the characteristics of the Vinaya. By whatever decision means it is stated referring only to the decision apart from the Pāḷi. By a Sutta brought from the Khandhaka and the Parivāra means by a Sutta brought from the Khandhaka and the Parivāra. They decide means they determine.

342.Kiccaṃ nissāya uppajjanakakiccānanti pubbe kataukkhepanīyādikiccaṃ nissāya uppajjanakakiccānaṃ. Kīdisānaṃ? Yāvatatiyasamanubhāsanādīnaṃ.

342.Of matters arising dependent on a matter means of matters arising dependent on a previously done act of suspension, etc. Of what kind? Of those such as the third admonition.

343.Taṃ hīti taṃ vivādādhikaraṇaṃ.

343.Taṃ hīti: "That indeed" means that dispute or legal issue.

344.Adhikaraṇesu yena adhikaraṇena sammanti, taṃ dassetuṃ vuttanti yadā adhikaraṇehi sammanti, tadā kiccādhikaraṇeneva sammanti, na aññehi adhikaraṇehīti dassanatthaṃ vuttanti adhippāyo.

344.Adhikaraṇesu yena adhikaraṇena sammanti, taṃ dassetuṃ vuttanti: "It is said to show by which adhikaraṇa they agree among the adhikaraṇas;" the intention is that when they agree on adhikaraṇas, they agree only by means of the kiccādhikaraṇa, not by other adhikaraṇas.

353.‘‘Sattannaṃ samathānaṃ katame chattiṃsa samuṭṭhānā’’ti pucchitvāpi ‘‘kammassa kiriyā karaṇa’’ntiādinā sammukhāvinayassa samuṭṭhānāni avibhajitvāva sativinayādīnaṃ channaññeva cha samuṭṭhānāni vibhattāni, taṃ kasmāti āha‘‘kiñcāpi sattannaṃ samathāna’’ntiādi. Sativinayādīnaṃ viya saṅghasammukhatādīnaṃ kiccayatā nāma natthīti āha‘‘kammasaṅgahābhāvenā’’ti.

353.After asking, "Of the seven samathas, what are the thirty-six samuṭṭhānas?", without distinguishing the samuṭṭhānas of sammukhāvinaya with "the action of the deed, the means," etc., only the six samuṭṭhānas of the remaining six, starting with sativinaya, are distinguished. Why is that? He says, ‘‘kiñcāpi sattannaṃ samathāna’’ntiādi: "Although [there are] seven samathas," etc. He says, ‘‘kammasaṅgahābhāvenā’’ti: "Due to the absence of inclusion in kamma," meaning that saṅghasammukhatā and the others do not have the characteristic of being a duty like sativinaya and the others.

Dutiyagāthāsaṅgaṇikavaṇṇanā

Explanation of the Second Verse Collection

359.Mantaggahaṇanti aññamaññaṃ saṃsandanaṃ. Anu anu sandhānaṃ anusandhitanti bhāvasādhanoanusandhitasaddoti āha‘‘anusandhitanti kathānusandhī’’ti.

359.Mantaggahaṇanti: Mantaggahaṇa means mutual discussion. Anu anu sandhānaṃ anusandhitanti: He says ‘‘anusandhitanti kathānusandhī’’ti: "Anusandhi means connection of speech," indicating that anusandhita is a word formed in the sense of state.

Saṅgāmadvayavaṇṇanā

Explanation of the Two Saṅgāmas

365.Ṭhānanisajjavattādinissitāti ‘‘evaṃ ṭhātabbaṃ, evaṃ nisīditabba’’nti evamādikā.Saññājananatthanti cuditakacodakānaṃ saññuppādanatthaṃ.Anuyogavattaṃ kathāpetvāti ‘‘kiṃ anuyogavattaṃ jānāsī’’ti pucchitvā teneva kathāpetvā.

365.Ṭhānanisajjavattādinissitāti: "Based on conduct related to standing, sitting," etc., means things like, "One should stand like this, one should sit like this."Saññājananatthanti: "Saññājananattha" for the purpose of generating perception in the accuser and the accused.Anuyogavattaṃ kathāpetvāti: "Anuyogavattaṃ kathāpetvā" means after asking, "Do you know the anuyogavatta?", having them speak about it themselves.

375.Nīlādivaṇṇāvaṇṇavasenāti nīlādivaṇṇavasena ārogyatthādiavaṇṇavasena ca.

375.Nīlādivaṇṇāvaṇṇavasenāti: "Nīlādivaṇṇāvaṇṇavasenā" means by way of the virtues of blue color etc., and by way of the vices in terms of health etc.

Kathinabhedavaṇṇanā

Explanation of the Division of Kathina

404.Purejātapaccaye panesa uddiṭṭhadhammesu ekadhammampi na labhatīti esa udakāharaṇādipayogo attano purejātapaccayabhāve pubbakaraṇavasena uddiṭṭhesu dhovanādidhammesu ekadhammampi na labhati attano purejātassa pubbakaraṇasaṅgahitassa dhammassa natthitāya.

404.Purejātapaccaye panesa uddiṭṭhadhammesu ekadhammampi na labhatīti: "Purejātapaccaye panesa uddiṭṭhadhammesu ekadhammampi na labhatī" means this effort of fetching water etc., in its state of being a purejātapaccaya, does not obtain even a single quality among the qualities mentioned in the manner of prior action, such as washing etc., because of the non-existence of the quality of its purejāta included in the prior action.

412.Rūpādīsu dhammesūti vaṇṇagandhādīsu suddhaṭṭhakadhammesu.

412.Rūpādīsu dhammesūti: "Rūpādīsu dhammesū" means in pure eightfold qualities like color, smell etc.

416.Purimā dveti imasmiṃ adhikāre paṭhamaṃ vuttā antarubbhārasahubbhārā, na pakkamanantikādayo dve uddhārā.

416.Purimā dveti: "Purimā dve" means the two uddhāras mentioned first in this section, antarubbhāra and sahubbhāra, not the two pakkamanantikā etc.

Upālipañcakavaṇṇanā

Explanation of the Upāli Quintet

420-421.Omaddakārakoti omadditvā abhibhavitvā kārako.Upatthambho na dātabboti sāmaggivināsāya anubalaṃ na dātabbaṃ.Diṭṭhāvikammampi katvāti ‘‘na metaṃ khamatī’’ti diṭṭhiṃ āvi katvāpi.

420-421.Omaddakārakoti: "Omaddakārako" means one who does [something] having oppressed and subdued.Upatthambho na dātabboti: "Upatthambho na dātabbo" means support should not be given for the destruction of harmony.Diṭṭhāvikammampi katvāti: "Diṭṭhāvikammampi katvā" means even after making one's view known with "This is not pleasing to me."

Vohāravaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Vohāra Section

424.Kāyappayogena āpajjitabbākāyappayogā. Vacīpayogena āpajjitabbāvacīpayogā. Navasu ṭhānesūti osāraṇādīsu navasu ṭhānesu.Dvīsu ṭhānesūti ñattidutiyañatticatutthakammesu.Tasmāti yasmā mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayena ubhatovibhaṅgā asaṅgahitā, tasmā. Yaṃ kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ gahetabbanti sambandho.

424.Kāyappayogena āpajjitabbā kāyappayogā: Kāyappayogā are [offenses] to be incurred by bodily action. Vacīpayogena āpajjitabbā vacīpayogā: Vacīpayogā are [offenses] to be incurred by verbal action. Navasu ṭhānesūti: "Navasu ṭhānesū" in the nine instances beginning with expulsion. Dvīsu ṭhānesūti: "Dvīsu ṭhānesū" in motions with one or three announcements. Tasmāti: "Tasmā" because the two vibhaṅgas are not included in the manner stated in the Great Commentary. Yaṃ kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ gahetabbanti sambandho: The connection is that what is said in the Kurundī should be taken.

Diṭṭhāvikammavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Diṭṭhāvikamma Section

425.‘‘Catūhi pañcahī’’ti vacanato dvīhi vā tīhi vā ekato desetuṃ vaṭṭati, tato paraṃ na vaṭṭati.Māḷakasīmāyāti khaṇḍasīmāya.Avippavāsasīmāyāti mahāsīmāya.

425.‘‘Catūhi pañcahī’’ti vacanato dvīhi vā tīhi vā ekato desetuṃ vaṭṭati, tato paraṃ na vaṭṭati: Because of the saying "by four or five," it is permissible to teach to two or three together, but not more than that.Māḷakasīmāyāti: "Māḷakasīmāyā" means in a limited boundary.Avippavāsasīmāyāti: "Avippavāsasīmāyā" means in a great boundary.

Musāvādavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Musāvāda Section

444.Pariyāyena jānantassa vuttamusāvādoti yassa kassaci jānantassa pariyāyena vuttamusāvādoti attho.

444.Pariyāyena jānantassa vuttamusāvādoti: "Pariyāyena jānantassa vuttamusāvādo" means for someone who knows something, a lie is spoken indirectly.

446.Anuyogo na dātabboti tena vuttaṃ anādiyitvā tuṇhī bhavitabbanti attho.

446.Anuyogo na dātabboti: "Anuyogo na dātabbo" means one should remain silent, not paying attention to what was said.

Bhikkhunovādavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Bhikkhunovāda Section

454.Ekūnavīsatibhedāyāti maggapaccavekkhaṇādivasena ekūnavīsatibhedāya.

454.Ekūnavīsatibhedāyāti: "Ekūnavīsatibhedāyā" means with nineteen distinctions by way of reviewing the path, etc.

Adhikaraṇavūpasamavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Adhikaraṇavūpasama Section

458.Pañcahi kāraṇehīti idaṃ atthanipphādanakāni tesaṃ pubbabhāgāni ca kāraṇabhāvasāmaññena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ, na pana sabbesaṃ pañcannaṃ samānayogakkhemattā.Anussāvanenāti bhedassa anurūpasāvanena. Yathā bhedo hoti, evaṃ bhinditabbānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ attano vacanassa sāvanena viññāpanenāti attho. Tenāha‘‘nanu tumhe’’tiādi.Kaṇṇamūle vacībhedaṃ katvāti etena pākaṭaṃ katvā bhedakaravatthudīpanaṃ voharaṇaṃ. Tattha attanā vinicchitamattaṃ rahassavasena viññāpanaṃ anussāvananti dasseti.Kammameva uddeso vā pamāṇanti tehi saṅghabhedasiddhito pamāṇaṃ, itare pana tesaṃ sambhārabhūtā. Tenāha‘‘vohārā’’tiādi.Tatthāti voharaṇe.

458.Pañcahi kāraṇehīti: "Pañcahi kāraṇehī" this is said having taken together, due to the generality of being a cause, those things that accomplish the aim and their preliminary parts, but not because all five have equal safety in application. Anussāvanenāti: "Anussāvanena" means with an announcement suitable for division. The meaning is: with an announcement, an informing of one's own words to the monks who are to be divided in such a way that division occurs. Therefore, he said ‘‘nanu tumhe’’tiādi: "Surely you," etc. Kaṇṇamūle vacībhedaṃ katvāti: "Kaṇṇamūle vacībhedaṃ katvā" by this, the declaration of the object of division is a communication making [it] manifest. There, it shows that announcing only what has been decided by oneself in a secret manner is anussāvana.Kammameva uddeso vā pamāṇanti: "Kammameva uddeso vā pamāṇa" because with that division of the Saṅgha is accomplished, it is a standard; the others, however, are the requisites for that. Therefore, he said ‘‘vohārā’’tiādi: "Vohārā," etc. Tatthāti: "Tatthā" in communication.

Kathinatthāravaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Kathinatthāra Section

467.Antarā vuttakāraṇenāti ‘‘tañhi vandantassa mañcapādādīsupi nalāṭaṃ paṭihaññeyyā’’tiādinā vuttakāraṇena.

467.Antarā vuttakāraṇenāti: "Antarā vuttakāraṇena" means with the reason stated in "for when bowing, the forehead might strike against the legs of the bed," etc.

Samuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā

Explanation of the Samuṭṭhāna

470.Pubbevuttamevāti sahaseyyādipaṇṇattivajjaṃ.Itaranti sacittakaṃ.Bhiṃsāpanādīni katvāti bhiṃsāpanādinā āpattiṃ āpajjitvāti adhippāyo.

470.Pubbe vuttamevāti: "Pubbe vuttamevā" means the offenses established by rule, such as sharing a bed.Itaranti: "Itara" means that which is with consciousness.Bhiṃsāpanādīni katvāti: "Bhiṃsāpanādīni katvā" the meaning is having incurred an offense through frightening etc.

Aparadutiyagāthāsaṅgaṇikaṃ

Second Collection of Subsequent Verses

Kāyikādiāpattivaṇṇanā
Explanation of Offenses by Bodily Action, etc.

474.Vinaye garukāvinayagarukā. Kiñcāpi idaṃ dvīsu gāthāsu āgataṃ, aññehi pana missetvā vuttabhāvato nānākaraṇaṃ paccetabbaṃ.

474.Vinaye garukā vinayagarukā: "Vinayagarukā" are weighty in the Vinaya. Although this comes in two verses, it should be recognized as distinct because it is stated having been mixed with others.

Desanāgāminiyādivaṇṇanā
Explanation of Desanāgāminiya, etc.

475.Dve saṃvāsakabhūmiyoti etthabhūmīti avatthā. Aṅgahīnatā kāraṇavekallavasenapi veditabbāti āha‘‘apicetthā’’tiādi.Esa nayoti ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādinā vuttanayo.Vanappatiṃ chindantassa pārājikanti adinnādāne vanappatikathāya āgataṃ parasantakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Vissaṭṭhichaḍḍaneti sukkavissaṭṭhiyā mocane.Dukkaṭā katāti dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.Paṭhamasikkhāpadamhiyevāti bhikkhunovādakavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpadeyeva. Āmakadhaññaṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjantiyā pubbapayoge dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ.

475.Dve saṃvāsakabhūmiyoti: "Dve saṃvāsakabhūmiyo" here, bhūmīti bhūmi means state. He says ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādi: "Moreover, here," etc., indicating that deficiency in a factor should be understood even in terms of the absence of a cause.Esa nayoti: "Esa nayo" means the method stated in "Moreover, here," etc.Vanappatiṃ chindantassa pārājikanti: "Vanappatiṃ chindantassa pārājika" regarding theft, it is said referring to what belongs to another in the discussion of trees.Vissaṭṭhichaḍḍaneti: "Vissaṭṭhichaḍḍane" means in the ejection of seminal emission.Dukkaṭā katāti: "Dukkaṭā katā" means dukkaṭa is said.Paṭhamasikkhāpadamhiyevāti: "Paṭhamasikkhāpadamhiyevā" means in the first sikkhāpada of the Bhikkhunovāda Section itself. For one eating after causing unprepared grain to be known, there is a dukkaṭa in the prior effort, a pācittiya in the swallowing.

Pācittiyavaṇṇanā
Explanation of Pācittiya

476.Abbhuṇhasīloti abhinavasīlo.

476.Abbhuṇhasīloti: "Abbhuṇhasīlo" means one of new virtue.

478.Asuttakanti suttavirahitaṃ, suttato apanītaṃ natthīti attho.

478.Asuttakanti: "Asuttaka" means without a sutta, removed from the sutta, it does not exist, is the meaning.

Sedamocanagāthā

Verse for Shedding Sweat

Avippavāsādipañhavaṇṇanā
Explanation of Avippavāsa, etc.

479.Sedamocanagāthāsutahinti tasmiṃ puggale. ‘‘Akappiyasambhogo nāma methunadhammādī’’tigaṇṭhipadesuvuttaṃ.Esā pañhā kusalehi cintitāti liṅgavipallāsavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ, eso pañho kusalehi cintitoti attho.

479.Sedamocanagāthāsu tahinti: "Tahi" in the Sweat-Shedding Verses means in that person. ‘‘Akappiyasambhogo nāma methunadhammādī’’ti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ: "‘Unsuitable association’ means sexual intercourse, etc.," is said in the Gaṇṭhipada.Esā pañhā kusalehi cintitāti: "Esā pañhā kusalehi cintitā" this is said in terms of gender reversal, meaning this question is considered by the skilled.

Dasāti avandiye dasa.Ekādasāti paṇḍakādayo ekādasa.Ubbhakkhake na vadāmīti iminā mukhe methunadhammābhāvaṃ dīpeti.Adhonābhiṃ vivajjiyāti iminā vaccamaggapassāvamaggesu.

Dasāti: "Dasā" means ten who should not be venerated. Ekādasāti: "Ekādasā" means eleven, beginning with the eunuch. Ubbhakkhake na vadāmīti: "Ubbhakkhake na vadāmī" by this, it indicates the absence of sexual activity in the mouth. Adhonābhiṃ vivajjiyāti: "Adhonābhiṃ vivajjiyā" by this, in the excretion passage and urine passage.

Gāmantarapariyāpannaṃ nadīpāraṃ okkantabhikkhuniṃ sandhāyāti ettha nadī bhikkhuniyā gāmapariyāpannā, paratīraṃ gāmantarapariyāpannaṃ. Tattha paratīre paṭhamaleḍḍupātappamāṇo gāmūpacāro nadīpariyantena paricchinno, tasmā paratīre ratanamattampi araññaṃ natthi, paratīrañca tiṇādīhi paṭicchannattā dassanūpacāravirahitaṃ karoti. Tattha attano gāme āpatti natthi, paratīre pana paṭhamaleḍḍupātasaṅkhāte gāmūpacāreyeva pādaṃ ṭhapeti. Antareabhidhammevuttanayena araññabhūtaṃ sakagāmaṃ atikkamati nāma, tasmā gaṇamhā ohīyanā nāma hotīti veditabbaṃ.

Gāmantarapariyāpannaṃ nadīpāraṃ okkantabhikkhuniṃ sandhāyāti: "Gāmantarapariyāpannaṃ nadīpāraṃ okkantabhikkhuniṃ sandhāyā" here, the river is within the village boundary for the bhikkhunī, and the far bank is within the village boundary of another village. There, the village boundary on the far bank, measured by the first clod-throw, is defined by the edge of the river, therefore there is not even a ratana’s-length of wilderness on the far bank, and the far bank deprives of a view due to being covered with grass, etc. There, there is no offense in her own village, but on the far bank she places her foot within the village boundary counted as the first clod-throw. In between, she is said to cross her own village which is wilderness-like, in the manner stated in the Abhidhamma, therefore it should be understood that there is said to be a falling away from the group.

Bhikkhūnaṃ santike ekatoupasampannānāma mahāpajāpatipamukhā pañcasatasākiniyo bhikkhuniyo. Mahāpajāpatipi hi ānandattherena dinnaovādassa paṭiggahitattā bhikkhūnaṃ santike upasampannā nāma.

Bhikkhūnaṃ santike ekatoupasampannā nāma mahāpajāpatipamukhā pañcasatasākiniyo bhikkhuniyo: "Bhikkhūnaṃ santike ekatoupasampannā" means bhikkhunīs, five hundred sākiṇīs headed by Mahāpajāpatī. For Mahāpajāpatī, having accepted the advice given by Ānanda Thera, is said to be ordained in the presence of monks.

Pārājikādipañhavaṇṇanā
Explanation of Pārājika, etc.

480.Saha dussena methunavītikkamassa sakkuṇeyyatāya‘‘dussakuṭiādīni sandhāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.Liṅgaparivattaṃ sandhāya vuttāti ‘‘liṅgaparivatte sati paṭiggahaṇassa vijahanato sāmaṃ gahetvā bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti liṅgaparivattanaṃ sandhāya vuttā.

480.Saha dussena methunavītikkamassa sakkuṇeyyatāya ‘‘dussakuṭiādīni sandhāyā’’ti vuttaṃ: "‘‘dussakuṭiādīni sandhāyā’’" is said because sexual transgression is possible even with a cloth, hut, etc. Liṅgaparivattaṃ sandhāya vuttāti: "Liṅgaparivattaṃ sandhāya vuttā" is said referring to gender transformation, [meaning] "when there is a change of gender, it is not permissible to take and eat oneself, since the acceptance is relinquished."

481.Suppatiṭṭhitanigrodhasadisanti yojanadviyojanādiparamaṃ mahānigrodhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

481.Suppatiṭṭhitanigrodhasadisanti: "Suppatiṭṭhitanigrodhasadisa" is said referring to a great nigrodha tree, at most two yojanas in length.

Sedamocanagāthāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Sweat-Shedding Verses is Finished.

Pañcavaggo

The Fifth Section

Kammavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Kamma Section

483.Kammavagge ummattakassa bhikkhuno ummattakasammuti ummattake yācitvā gate asammukhāpi dātuṃ vaṭṭati, tattha nisinnepi na kuppati niyamābhāvato. Asammukhā kate pana dosābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘asammukhākataṃ sukataṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Dūtena upasampadā pana sammukhā kātuṃ na sakkā kammavācānānattasambhavato. Pattanikkujjanādayo hatthapāsato apanītamattepi kātuṃ vaṭṭanti.Saṅghasammukhatātiādīsu yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā, te āgatā honti, chandārahānaṃ chando āhaṭo hoti, sammukhībhūtā na paṭikkosanti, ayaṃsaṅghasammukhatā. Yena dhammena yena vinayena yena satthusāsanena saṅgho kammaṃ karoti, ayaṃdhammasammukhatā. Tatthadhammoti bhūtaṃ vatthu.Vinayoti codanā ceva sāraṇā ca.Satthusāsanaṃnāma ñattisampadā ceva anussāvanasampadā ca. Yassa saṅgho kammaṃ karoti, tassa sammukhabhāvopuggalasammukhatā. Kattikamāsassa pavāraṇamāsattā‘‘ṭhapetvā kattikamāsa’’nti vuttaṃ.Paccukkaḍḍhitvā ṭhapitadivaso cāti kāḷapakkhe cātuddasiṃ vā pannarasiṃ vā sandhāya vuttaṃ.Dve ca puṇṇamāsiyoti paṭhamapacchimavassūpagatānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ.

483.Kammavagge ummattakassa bhikkhuno ummattakasammuti ummattake yācitvā gate asammukhāpi dātuṃ vaṭṭati, tattha nisinnepi na kuppati niyamābhāvato: In the Kamma Section, it is permissible to give the agreement of an insane monk even in the absence of [the monk], when [he] has gone after being asked regarding the insane, and it is not invalid even if [the monks] are sitting there, because there is no restriction. ‘‘asammukhākataṃ sukataṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ: "‘‘asammukhākataṃ sukataṃ hotī’’" is said to show the absence of fault when it is done in absence. Dūtena upasampadā pana sammukhā kātuṃ na sakkā kammavācānānattasambhavato: However, ordination by a messenger cannot be done in person, because there is the possibility of diversity in the kammavācā. Pattanikkujjanādayo hatthapāsato apanītamattepi kātuṃ vaṭṭanti: Things like overturning the bowl are permissible to do even if [the monk] has only moved away from being within arm's reach. Saṅghasammukhatātiādīsu yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā, te āgatā honti, chandārahānaṃ chando āhaṭo hoti, sammukhībhūtā na paṭikkosanti, ayaṃ saṅghasammukhatā: "Saṅghasammukhatā," etc., means as many monks as are qualified for the action are present, the consent of those deserving consent is brought, those present do not object; this is saṅghasammukhatā. Yena dhammena yena vinayena yena satthusāsanena saṅgho kammaṃ karoti, ayaṃ dhammasammukhatā: This is dhammasammukhatā, [meaning] with whatever dhamma, whatever vinaya, whatever teaching of the Teacher, the Saṅgha does the kamma. Tattha dhammoti bhūtaṃ vatthu: There, dhammo means the real object. Vinayoti codanā ceva sāraṇā ca: Vinayo means both accusation and reminding. Satthusāsanaṃ nāma ñattisampadā ceva anussāvanasampadā ca: Satthusāsanaṃ means both the accomplishment of the motion and the accomplishment of the announcement. Yassa saṅgho kammaṃ karoti, tassa sammukhabhāvo puggalasammukhatā: The presence of the person for whom the Saṅgha does the kamma is puggalasammukhatā. Kattikamāsassa pavāraṇamāsattā ‘‘ṭhapetvā kattikamāsa’’nti vuttaṃ: "‘‘ṭhapetvā kattikamāsa’’" is said because the month of Kattika is the month for pavāraṇā. Paccukkaḍḍhitvā ṭhapitadivaso cāti: "Paccukkaḍḍhitvā ṭhapitadivaso cā" is said referring to the fourteenth or fifteenth of the dark fortnight. Dve ca puṇṇamāsiyoti: "Dve ca puṇṇamāsiyo" is said in terms of those who enter the rains in the first and last [periods].

485.Ṭhānakaraṇāni sithilāni katvā uccāretabbaṃ akkharaṃsithilaṃ,tāniyeva dhanitāni asithilāni katvā uccāretabbaṃ akkharaṃdhanitaṃ. Dvimattakālaṃdīghaṃ,ekamattakālaṃrassaṃ. Dasadhā byañjanabuddhiyā pabhedoti evaṃ sithilādivasena byañjanabuddhiyā akkharuppādakacittassa dasappakārena pabhedo. Sabbāni hi akkharāni cittasamuṭṭhānāni yathādhippetatthabyañjanato byañjanāni ca. Saṃyogo paro etasmāti saṃyogaparo, na saṃyogaparoasaṃyogaparo.Āyasmato buddharakkhitatherassa yassa na khamatīti etthata-kārana-kārasahitākāro asaṃyogaparo.Karaṇānīti kaṇṭhādīni.

485.Ṭhānakaraṇāni sithilāni katvā uccāretabbaṃ akkharaṃ sithilaṃ, tāniyeva dhanitāni asithilāni katvā uccāretabbaṃ akkharaṃ dhanitaṃ: An syllable that should be pronounced making the place and instrument loose is sithila (lax); a syllable that should be pronounced making those same [qualities] firm and not loose is dhanita (firm). Dvimattakālaṃ dīghaṃ, ekamattakālaṃ rassaṃ: Two mātrās of time is long, one mātrā of time is short. Dasadhā byañjanabuddhiyā pabhedo: "Dasadhā byañjanabuddhiyā pabhedo" thus, there are ten kinds of distinctions in the understanding of consonants, of the mind that produces syllables, in terms of laxity, etc. For all syllables are produced by the mind; from the sense intended, they are consonants. Saṃyogo paro etasmāti saṃyogaparo, na saṃyogaparo asaṃyogaparo: That which is followed by a conjunction is saṃyogaparo, that which is not followed by a conjunction is asaṃyogaparo. Āyasmato buddharakkhitatherassa yassa na khamatīti ettha ta-kāra na-kārasahitākāro asaṃyogaparo: "Āyasmato buddharakkhitatherassa yassa na khamatī" here, the a-sound together with the ta-sound and the na-sound is asaṃyogaparo. Karaṇānīti kaṇṭhādīni: Karaṇānī means the throat, etc.

488.Anukkhittā pārājikaṃ anāpannā ca pakatattāti āha‘‘pakatattā anukkhittā’’tiādi. Tatthaanissāritāti purimapadasseva vevacanaṃ.Parisuddhasīlāti pārājikaṃ anāpannā.Na tesaṃ chando vā pārisuddhi vā etīti tīsu dvīsu vā nisinnesu ekassa vā dvinnaṃ vā chandapārisuddhi āhaṭāpi anāhaṭāva hotīti adhippāyo.

488.Anukkhittā pārājikaṃ anāpannā ca pakatattāti āha ‘‘pakatattā anukkhittā’’tiādi: "‘‘pakatattā anukkhittā’’" etc., [meaning] because they are normal, they have not been expelled, have not incurred a pārājika. Tattha anissāritāti purimapadasseva vevacanaṃ: There, anissāritā is a synonym for the previous term. Parisuddhasīlāti pārājikaṃ anāpannā: "Parisuddhasīlā" means not having incurred a pārājika. Na tesaṃ chando vā pārisuddhi vā etīti: "Na tesaṃ chando vā pārisuddhi vā etī" the intention is that even if the consent or declaration of purity of one or two is brought when three or two are sitting [together], it is as if it has not been brought.

Apalokanakammakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Apalokanakamma Discourse

495-496.Kāyasambhogasāmaggīti sahaseyyapaṭiggahaṇādi.So ratoti subhe rato. Suṭṭhu oratoti vāsorato. Nivātavuttīti nīcavutti.Paṭisaṅkhāti paṭisaṅkhāya ñāṇena upaparikkhitvā. Yaṃ taṃ avandiyakammaṃ anuññātanti sambandho.Imassa apalokanakammassa ṭhānaṃ hotīti evampi apalokanakammaṃ pavattatīti attho. Kammameva lakkhaṇantikammalakkhaṇaṃ. Osāraṇanissāraṇabhaṇḍukammādayo viya kammañca hutvā aññañca nāmaṃ na labhati, kammameva hutvā upalakkhīyatīti ‘‘kammalakkhaṇa’’nti vuccati.Etampi kammalakkhaṇamevāti vuttakammalakkhaṇaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘acchinnacīvarajiṇṇacīvaranaṭṭhacīvarāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.Iṇapalibodhampīti iṇameva palibodho iṇapalibodho, tampi dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace tādisaṃ bhikkhuṃ iṇāyikā palibundhanti, tatruppādatopi tassa iṇaṃ sodhetuṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.

495-496.Kāyasambhogasāmaggīti: "Kāyasambhogasāmaggī" means harmony in sharing physical things, such as sharing a bed, etc.So ratoti: "So rato" means delighting in goodness. Suṭṭhu oratoti vā sorato: Or because he descends well, sorato. Nivātavuttīti: "Nivātavuttī" means humble conduct. Paṭisaṅkhāti: "Paṭisaṅkhā" means having investigated with reflective knowledge. Yaṃ taṃ avandiyakammaṃ anuññātanti sambandho: The connection is that that avandiyakamma is permitted. Imassa apalokanakammassa ṭhānaṃ hotīti: "Imassa apalokanakammassa ṭhānaṃ hotī" means even this apalokanakamma occurs. Kammameva lakkhaṇanti kammalakkhaṇaṃ: "Kammalakkhaṇaṃ" means having kamma as its characteristic. Osāraṇanissāraṇabhaṇḍukammādayo viya kammañca hutvā aññañca nāmaṃ na labhati, kammameva hutvā upalakkhīyatīti ‘‘kammalakkhaṇa’’nti vuccati: Like expulsion, dismissal, bhaṇḍukamma, etc., it does not obtain another name besides being a kamma; because it is identified only by being a kamma, it is called "having kamma as its characteristic." Etampi kammalakkhaṇamevāti: "Etampi kammalakkhaṇamevā" saying "acchinnacīvarajiṇṇacīvaranaṭṭhacīvarāna," etc., is said to show that it is having kamma as its characteristic. Iṇapalibodhampīti: "Iṇapalibodhampī" means debt itself is an encumbrance, that too is permissible to give. Sace tādisaṃ bhikkhuṃ iṇāyikā palibundhanti, tatruppādatopi tassa iṇaṃ sodhetuṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo: The intention is that if creditors harass such a monk, it is permissible to pay off his debt even if he is harmed by it.

Chattaṃ vā vedikaṃ vāti etthavedikāti cetiyassa upari caturassacayo vuccati.Chattanti tato uddhaṃ valayāni dassetvā kato aggacayo vuccati.Cetiyassa upanikkhepatoti cetiye navakammattāya upanikkhittato, cetiyasantakatoti vuttaṃ hoti.Aññā katikā kātabbāti purimakatikāya asaṅgahitattā vuttaṃ.Tehīti yesaṃ puggalikaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhanti, tehi.Dasabhāganti dasamabhāgaṃ.Tatthāti tasmiṃ vihāre.Mūleti pubbe.‘‘Ito paṭṭhāya bhājetvā khādantū’’ti vacaneneva yathāsukhaṃ paribhogo paṭikkhitto hotīti āha‘‘purimakatikā paṭippassambhatī’’ti.

Chattaṃ vā vedikaṃ vāti, here, vedikā means a square structure above a Cetiya. Chattanti means the top part made by showing tiers above that. Cetiyassa upanikkhepatoti means having been placed near the Cetiya for the purpose of renovating it; thus, it is said to belong to the Cetiya. Aññā katikā kātabbāti is said because it is not included in the previous agreement. Tehīti means by those in whose personal place it stands. Dasabhāganti means one-tenth part. Tatthāti means in that monastery. Mūleti means previously. With the statement ‘‘Ito paṭṭhāya bhājetvā khādantū’’, the unrestricted use is prohibited, so he says ‘‘purimakatikā paṭippassambhatī’’ti.

Anuvicaritvā*ti pacchato pacchato gantvā.Apaccāsīsantenā*ti tesaṃ santikā

Anuvicaritvāti means having gone behind and behind. Apaccāsīsantenāti means from their presence.

Mūlabhāganti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāveti‘‘dasabhāgamatta’’nti.Akatāvāsaṃ vā katvāti tato uppannaāyena katvā.Jaggitakāle ca na vāretabbāti jaggitānaṃ pupphaphalabharitakāle na vāretabbā.Jagganakāleti jaggituṃ āraddhakāle.Ñattikammaṭṭhānabhedeti ñattikammassa ṭhānabhede.

Mūlabhāganti clarifies the meaning that was said, ‘‘dasabhāgamatta’’nti. Akatāvāsaṃ vā katvāti means having made it with the income arising from that. Jaggitakāle ca na vāretabbāti means they should not be prevented at the time when the flowers and fruits are fully borne. Jagganakāleti means at the time of starting to nurture. Ñattikammaṭṭhānabhedeti means in the difference of the place of the ñattikamma.

Kammavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Kammavagga is finished.

Apaññatte paññattavaggavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Apaññatte Paññattavagga

500.Satta āpattikkhandhā paññattaṃ nāmāti sambandho. Kakusandhakoṇāgamanakassapā eva satta āpattikkhandhe paññapesuṃ, vipassīādayo pana ovādapātimokkhaṃ uddisiṃsu, na sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesunti āha‘‘kakusandhañca…pe… antarā kenaci apaññatte sikkhāpade’’ti. Sesamettha suviññeyyameva.

500. There is a connection: the seven āpattikkhandhas are called paññatta. Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana and Kassapa, indeed, promulgated the seven āpattikkhandhas, but Vipassī and others recited only the Ovādapātimokkha, they did not promulgate the Sikkhāpada, so he says ‘‘kakusandhañca…pe… antarā kenaci apaññatte sikkhāpade’’. The rest here is easy to understand.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ

Thus ends the Sāratthadīpanī, a sub-commentary to the Vinaya Aṭṭhakathā, in the Samantapāsādikā.

Parivāraṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā samattā.

The commentary on the Parivāra Aṭṭhakathā is completed.

Nigamanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Nigamanakathā

Vibhattadesananti ubhatovibhaṅgakhandhakaparivārehi vibhattadesanaṃ vinayapiṭakanti yojetabbaṃ.Tassāti tassa vinayassa.

Vibhattadesananti should be construed as the Vinayapiṭaka, which is a teaching divided by the Ubhatovibhaṅga, Khandhaka, and Parivāra. Tassāti means of that Vinaya.

Tatridantiādi paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayameva.

Tatridantiādi is in accordance with the method stated in the explanation of the first Pārājika.

Satthumahābodhivibhūsitoti satthunā paribhuttamahābodhivibhūsito maṇḍito, tassa mahāvihārassa dakkhiṇabhāge uttamaṃ yaṃ padhānagharanti sambandho. Tatthapadhānagharanti taṃnāmakaṃ pariveṇaṃ.Sucicārittasīlena, bhikkhusaṅghena sevitanti idampi padhānagharavisesanaṃ.

Satthumahābodhivibhūsitoti means adorned with the Mahābodhi used by the Teacher; the connection is that the best padhānaghara is in the southern part of that Mahāvihāra. Here, padhānagharanti means a pariveṇa with that name. Sucicārittasīlena, bhikkhusaṅghena sevitanti, this too is a বিশেষণ of padhānaghara.

Tatthāti tasmiṃ padhānaghare.Cārupākārasañcitanti manāpena pākārena parikkhittaṃ.Sītacchāyatarūpetanti ghananicitapattasañchannasākhāpasākhatāya sītacchāyehi rukkhehi upetaṃ. Vikasitakamalakuvalayapuṇḍarīkasogandhikādipupphasañchannamadhurasītaludakapuṇṇatāya sampannā salilāsayā assātisampannasalilāsayo. Uddisitvāti buddhasiriṃ nāma theraṃ nissāya, tassa ajjhesanaṃ nissāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Iddhāti atthavinicchayādīhi iddhā phītā paripuṇṇā.

Tatthāti means in that padhānaghara. Cārupākārasañcitanti means surrounded by a lovely enclosure. Sītacchāyatarūpetanti means endowed with cool-shaded trees, due to the dense covering of branches and twigs with closely packed leaves. Sampannā salilāsayā means having ponds full of sweet and cool water, rich with blossoming lotuses, water lilies, white lotuses, fragrant flowers such as jasmine, etc. Uddisitvāti means relying on the Thera named Buddhasiri, that is, relying on his request. Iddhāti means prosperous and complete with things such as the decision of meanings.

Sirinivāsassāti siriyā nivāsaṭṭhānabhūtassa.Jayasaṃvacchareti jayappattasaṃvacchare.Ayanti theraṃ buddhasiriṃ uddissa yā vinayavaṇṇanā āraddhā, ayaṃ.Dhammūpasaṃhitāti kusalasannissitā. Idāni sadevakassa lokassa accantasukhādhigamāya attano puññaṃ pariṇāmento‘‘ciraṭṭhitattha dhammassā’’tiādimāha. Tatthasamācitanti upacitaṃ.Sabbassa ānubhāvenāti sabbassa tassa puññassa tejena.Sabbepi pāṇinoti kāmāvacarādibhedā sabbe sattā.Saddhammarasasevinoti yathārahaṃ bodhittayādhigamavasena saddhammarasasevino bhavantu. Sesamettha suviññeyyameva.

Sirinivāsassāti means of the place which is the abode of glory. Jayasaṃvacchareti means in the year of victory. Ayanti, this Vinaya commentary that was started, addressing the Thera Buddhasiri. Dhammūpasaṃhitāti means associated with merit. Now, dedicating his merit for the attainment of ultimate happiness by the world including the deities, he says ‘‘ciraṭṭhitattha dhammassā’’tiādi. Here, samācitanti means accumulated. Sabbassa ānubhāvenāti means by the power of all that merit. Sabbepi pāṇinoti means all beings, of the distinction of Kāmaloka, etc. Saddhammarasasevinoti means may they be enjoyers of the taste of the true Dhamma, through the attainment of the three Bodhis, as appropriate. The rest here is easy to understand.

Nigamanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Nigamanakathā is finished.

Nigamanakathā
Nigamanakathā

Ettāvatā ca –

To this extent –

Vinaye pāṭavatthāya, sāsanassa ca vuḍḍhiyā;

The commentary that was started for the reading of the Vinaya,
And for the growth of the Sāsana;
That commentary on the Vinaya Aṭṭhakathā.

Sāratthadīpanīnāma, sabbaso pariniṭṭhitā;

Named Sāratthadīpanī, is completely finished in every way,
With thirty thousand measures in terms of verses.

parakkamabāhunā;

parakkamabāhunā;
By him who desires the establishment of the Good Dhamma, who causes the Sāsana to shine.

Teneva kārite ramme, pāsādasatamaṇḍite;

In the lovely mansion made by him,
Adorned with hundreds of palaces,
Crowded with various groups of trees,
In the abode delighting in meditation.

jetavaneimaṃ;

In Jetavana, this commentary,
Endowed with meaning and expression, I made a good decision.

Yaṃ siddhaṃ iminā puññaṃ, yaṃ caññaṃ pasutaṃ mayā;

Whatever merit is accomplished by this,
And whatever else is accumulated by me;
By this meritorious action,
In the second arising of self.

Tāvatiṃse pamodento, sīlācāraguṇe rato;

Rejoicing in Tāvatiṃsa,
Delighting in the virtues of sīla and ācāra,
Unaligned to the five strands of sense pleasure,
Having attained the first fruition.

Antime attabhāvamhi, metteyyaṃ munipuṅgavaṃ;

In the final existence of self,
May I see Metteyya, the best of sages,
The foremost person in the world, the protector,
Delighting in the welfare of all beings.

Disvāna tassa dhīrassa, sutvā saddhammadesanaṃ;

Having seen that wise one,
Having heard the teaching of the Good Dhamma,
Having attained the highest fruition,
May I illuminate the Jina’s Sāsana.

Sadā rakkhantu rājāno, dhammeneva imaṃ pajaṃ;

May the kings always protect this people with Dhamma;
May they be intent on meritorious deeds,
May they illuminate the Jina’s Sāsana.

Ime ca pāṇino sabbe, sabbadā nirupaddavā;

And may all these beings,
Always be free from harm;
Always with beautiful thoughts,
May they attain the deathless state.

Sāratthadīpanī nāma vinayaṭīkā niṭṭhitā.

The Vinaya Ṭīkā named Sāratthadīpanī is finished.